iiiiii ,:i;. iliis ill Hi !![>""• ssm WM Botanical Abstracts A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of botany in its broadest sense. VOLUME VII FEBRUARY, 1921-APRIL, 1921 PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC. A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies interested in plants. BALTIMORE, U. S. A. WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY 1921 )(6 nsLt Copyright, 1921 Williams & Wilkins Company Baltimore, U. S. A. THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED AND THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL {Tht Members of the Executive Committee for 1921 are indicated by asterisks) American Association for tlie Advancement of Science, Section G. R. A. Harper, Columbia University, New York City. B. E. Livingston, Jolins Hopkins Uni- versity, Baltimore, Maryland. Botanical Society of America, General Section. H. A. Gleason, New York Botanical Garden, New York City. *B. M. Davis, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Botanical Society of America, Physiologi- cal Section. Otis F. Curtis, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. *B. M. Duggar (Chairman of the Board), Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. Botanical Society of America, Systematic Section. Marshall A. Howe, New York Botani- cal Garden, New York City. J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical Garden, New York City. Botanical Society of America, Mycological Section. C. H. Kauffman, University of Michi- gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Bruce Fink, Miami University, Oxford, Ohio. American Society of Naturalists. H. H. Bartlett, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. *J. A. Harris, Station for Experimental Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, L. I., New York. Ecological Society of America. H. L. Shantz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. *Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory, Paleontological Society of America. Arthur Hollick, 61 Wall Street, New Brighton, New York. E. W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. American Society of Agronomy. C. B. Hutchinson, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. C. A. Mooers, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, Tennessee. Society for Horticultural Science. V. R. Gardner, University of Missouri, Columbia, Missouri. E. J. Kraus, University of Wisconsin, Madison, W^isconsin. American Phytopathological Society. L. R. Jones, University of Wisconsin, Madison, W^isconsin. *DoNALD Reddick, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Society of American Foresters. Raphael Zon, U. S. Forest Service, Wash- ington, D. C. J. S. Illick, Pennsylvania Department of Forestry, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. American Conference of Pharmaceutical Faculties. Heber W. Youngken, Philadelphia Col- lege of Pharmacy and Science, Phila- delphia, Pennsylvania. Henry Kraemer. Canadian Society of Technical Agricultur- ists. W. P. Thompson, University of Sas- katchewan, Saskatoon, Saskatchewan. B. T. Dickson, Macdonald College, Macdonald College, Quebec. Royal Society of Canada. No elections. Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona. At large. W. A. Orton, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C 111 BOARD OF EDITORS AND ASSISTANT EDITORS FOR VOLUME VII Editor-in-Chief, Burton E. Livingston The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore Associate, Lon A. Hawkins U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. EDITORS FOR SECTIONS Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, Mart R. Burr, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. Bibliography, Biography, and History. Neil E. Stevens, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant Editor, Alfred GuNDERSEN, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. — Assistant Editor, Geo. S. Bryan, Uni- versity of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. CowLES, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. — Assistant Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael ZoN, U. S. Forest Service, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, J. V. Hofmann, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Experi- ment Station, Stabler, Washington. Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University, Princeton, New Jersey. — Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly, Pennsyl- vania State College, State College, Penn- sylvania. Horticulture. J. H. Gourley, West Virginia University, Morgantown, West Virgmia. — Assistant Editor, H. E. Knowlton, West Virginia University, Morgan town, West Virginia. Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E. Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Mary- land.— Assistant Editor, Sam F. Tre- LEASE, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Morphology, Anatomy, and Histology of Vascular Plants. E. W. Sinnott, Con- necticut Agricultural College, Storrs, Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E. N Transeau, Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio. Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexander W. Evans, Yale University, New Haven, Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria, and Myxomycetes. H. M. FiTZPATRicK, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.— Assistant Editor, Carlos E. Chardon, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W. Berry, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agri- cultural College, East Lansing, Michi- gan.— Assistant Editor, C. W. Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East Lansing, Michigan. Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. Heber W. Youngken, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and Science, Phila- delphia, Pennsylvania. — Assistant Edi- tor, E. N. Gathercoal, 701 South Wood Street, Chicago, Illinois. Physiology. B. M. Dugqar, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W. Dodge, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island. Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editorj F. M. Schertz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Greenman, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, E. B. Payson, Missouri Botanical Gar- den, St. Louis, Missouri. BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1921 J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York H. O. BucKMAN R. Hosmer W. H. Chandler L. Knudson A. J. Eames E. G. Montgomery R. A. Emerson D. Reddick H. M. Fitzpatrick L. W. Sharp K. M.Wiegand R. S. Harris, Secretary iv CONTENTS The Societies Represented and the Members of the Board of Control Page iii The Board of Editors and Assistant Editors for Volume VII Page iv Sections: Agronomy Entries 1-63, 566-684, 1528-1588 Bibliography, Biography, and History Entries 64-76, 685-710, 158&-1606 Botanical Education Entries 77-99, 711-718, 1607-1610 Cytology Entries 719-739, 1611-1617 Forestry and Forest Botany Entries 100-156, 740-838, 1618-1667 Genetics Entries 157-249, 839-943, 1668-1854 Horticulture: Fruits and General Horticulture Entries 250-291, 944-1009, 1885-1945 Floriculture and Ornamental Horticulture Entries 292-311, 1010-1025, 1855-1884 Vegetable Culture Entries 312-313, 1026-1035, 1946-1953 Horticultural Products Entries 314-315, 1036-1047, 1954-1956 Morphology, Anatomy, and Histology of Vascular Plants Entries 31&-337, 1048-1077, 1957-1967 Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes Entries 338-354, 1078-1096, 1968-1977 Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria, and Myxomycetes: Fungi Entries 355-370, 1978-1991 Lichens Entries 371-372, 1992-1995 Bacteria Entries 373-377, 1996-2001 Myxomycetes Entries 2002-2004 Paleobotany and Evolutionary History Entries 378-395, 1097-1124, 2005-2016 Pathology : Plant Disease Survey (Reports of Disease Occurrence and Severity) Entries 1125- 1138, 2017-2020 The Pathogene (Biology, Infection Phenomena, Dispersal) Entries 1139-1149, 2021-2028 The Host (Resistance, Susceptibility, Morbid Anatomy, and Physiology) Entries 1150-1167, 2029-2031 Descriptive Plant Pathology Entries 1168-1213, 2032-2049 Eradication and Control Entries 1214-1255, 2050-2061 Regulatory Measures Entries 1256-1259 Miscellaneous (Methods, Cognate Researches, etc.). .Entries 1260-1275, 2062-2074 Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy Entries 1276-1289, 2075-2111 Physiology : General Entries 396-400, 2112 Protoplasm, Motility Entries 1290-1291, 2113-2114 Diffusion, Permeability, Adsorption Entries 1292-1296, 2115-2117 Water Relations Entries 1297-1298, 2118-2119 Mineral Nutrients Entries 401-406, 1299, 2120-2126 Photosynthesis Entries 1300-1301, 2127-2131 Metabolism (General) Entries 407-419, 1302-1328, 2132-2141 Metabolism (Nitrogen Relations) Entries 1329-1336, 2142-2145 Metabolism (Enzymes, Fermentation) Entries 420-421, 1337-1351, 214&-2153 Metabolism (Respiration) Entries 1352-1354 Organism as a Whole Entries 422-426, 1355-1358, 2154-2156 Growth, Development, Reproduction Entries 427-430, 1359-1363, 2157-2162 Movements of Growth and Turgor Changes Entries 431, 1364-1366, 2163-2166 Germination, Renewal of Activity Entries 432-433, 1367-1368 V VI CONTENTS Temperature Relations Entries 434-435, 1369-1370, 2167 Radiant Energy Relations Entries 436-437, 1371-1373, 2168-2171 Toxic Agents Entries 438-440, 1374-1378, 2172-2174 Physiology of Disease Entries 441-442, 1379 Miscellaneous Entries 443-446, 1380-1385, 2175-2176 Soil Science: General Entries 1386-1397, 2177-2180 Soil Acidity Entries 447-450, 1398-1401 Influence of Biological Agents Entries 451-456, 1402-1407, 2181-2184 Fertility Studies Entries 457-467, 2185-2189 Fertilization Entries 1408-1413 Fertilizer Resources Entries 1414-1420 Moisture Relations Entries 468-472 Peat Entries 473^76 Miscellaneous Entries 477-480 Taxonomy of Vascular Plants: General Entries 481-496 Spermatophytes Entries 503-551, 1421-1498, 2190-2259 Pteridophytes Entries 497-502 Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications Entries 552-565, 1499-1527, 2260-2271 Index to Authors' Names appearing in Volume VII Pa^e 335 ERRATA Volume VII Entry 29. For Gerome read Gerome. Entry 72. For Morris, J. C. read Morris, Daniel. Entry 169. For Brierly, W. G. read Brierley, W. G. Entry 263. For Gunliffe read Cunliffe. Entry 357. For Brierly, W. B. read Brierley, W. B. Entry 358. For Brierly, William B. read Brierley, William B. Entry 783. For Flury, Philip read Flury, Philipp. Entry 783. For Gebierte read Gebiete. Entry 784. For Gebierte read Gebiete. Entry 785. For Bikar read Bihar. ■ Entry 1564. For Mendes, F. C. Correa read Correa Mendes, F, C. Cover page, Vol. 7, No. 2. For Schantz read Shantz. N^ Vol. VII FEBRUARY, 1921 ENTRIES 1-565 No. 1 Botanical Abstracts A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of botany in its broadest sense PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC. A democratically constituted organization, with members representing manj' societies interested in plants. THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED AND THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL (The Executite Committee for t9t0 are indicated ly aateriakt) American Association for the Advancement of Science, Section G. •B. E. Livingston, Johns Hopkins Uni- versity, Baltimore, Maryland. A. F. Blakeslee, Station for Experimental Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long Island, New York. Botanical Society of America, General Section. B. M. Davis, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. •R. A. Harper, Columbia University, New York City. Botanical Society of America, Physiology Section. B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. W. J. V. OsTERHOUT, Harvard University, Cambridge, Massachusetts. Botanical Society of America, Systematic Section. J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical Garden, Bronx Park, New York City. A. S. Hitchcock, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. American Society of Naturalists. J. A. Harris, Station for Experimental Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long Island, New York. E. M. East, Harvard University, Bussey Institution, Forest Hills, Boston, Massachusetts. Ecological Society of America. Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory, Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona. •Geo. H. Nichols, Yale University, New Haven, Connecticut. At large. W. A.Orton.U.S. try, Washington Paleontological Society of America. E. W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. F. H. K.vowlton, U. S. National Museum, Wa.shington, D. C. American Society of Agronomy. C. A- MooERS, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, Tennessee. E. Cr. Montgomery, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Socieh' for Horticultural Science. *E. J. Kr.\us, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. W. A. McCuE, Delaware Agricultural Experiment Station, Newark, Dela- ware. American Phytopathological Society. *DoNALD Reddick {Chairman of the Board), Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. C. L. Shear, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus- try, Washington, D. C. Society of American Foresters. J. S. Illick, State Forest Academy, Mount Alto, Pennsylvania. Barrington Moore, American Museum of Natural History, New York City. American Conference of Pharmaceutical Faculties. Henry Kraemer, University of Michi- gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. WoRTLEY F. RxJDD, Mcdical College, Rich- mond, Virginia. Royal Society of Canada. No elections. Bureau of Plant Indus- , D. C. WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY BALTIMORE, U. S. A. Entered as Becond-claes matter, November 9, 1918, at the post ofiBce at Baltimore, Maryland, under the Act of March 3, 1879 Copyright 1921, Williame & Wilkins Company Price, net postpaid, per volume $3.00 United States, Mexico, Cuba Canada Other countries r$3.00 s: < S3.12 i $3.25 CONTENTS Agronomy 1-63 Bibliography, Biography and History 64-76 Botanical Education 77-99 Forest Botany and Forestry 100-156 Genetics 157-249 Horticulture 250-315 Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants 316-337 Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes 338-354 Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes 355-377 Paleobotany and Evolutionary History 378-395 Physiology . 396- 446 Soil Science 447-480 Taxonomy of Vascular Plants 481-551 Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications 552-565 BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1920 AND ASSISTANT EDITORS Editor-in-Chief, Burton E. Livingston The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore Associate, Lon A. Hawkins U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. EDITORS FOR SECTIONS Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus- try, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, Mart R. Bdrr, XJ. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, DC. Bibliography, Biography and History. Lincoln W. Riddle, Harvard University, Cambridge, Massa- chusetts. Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant Editor, Alfred Gdndersen, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. — Assistant Editor, Geo. S. Brtan, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. Cowles, The ' University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. — Assistant Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael Zon. U. S. Forest Service, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, J. V. HoPMANN, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Ex- periment Station, Stabler, Washington. Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University, Princeton, New Jersey. — Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly, Pennsylvania State College, State College, Penn- sylvania. Horticulture. J. H. Gourlet, West Virginia Univer- sity, Morgantown, West Virginia. — Assistant Editor, H. E. Knowlton, West Virginia University, Morgan- town, West Virginia. Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E. Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University, Balti- more, Maryland. Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants. E. W. Sinnott, Connecticut Agricultural College, Storrs, Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E._N. Tranbbad. Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio. Morphology ana Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexandeb W. Evans. Yale University. New Haven. Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes. H. M. Fitzpatrick. Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W, Berry, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agricultural Col- lege, East Lansing, Michigan. — Assistant Editor, C. W. Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East Lans- ing, Michigan. Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. Heber W. YouNGKEN, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and Science ,Philadelphia,Pennsylvania.— Assistant Editor, E. N. Gathercoal, University of Illinois, Urbana, Illinois. Physiology. B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W. Dodge, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island. Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, F. M. ScBERTZ, U.S.Bureauof Plant Industry, Wash- ington, D. C. Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Greenman, Mis- souri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, E. B. Payson, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1920 J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York H. O. BucKMAN L. Knudson W. H. Chandler E. G. Montgomery A.J. Eames D. Reddick R. A. Emerson L. W. Sharp H. M. FrrzPATRiCK K. M. Wiegand R. Hosmer BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of botany in its broadest sense. . IRUAW UNDER THE DIRECTION OF NEW VOR?: THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.BOTANJC'^.- Burton E. Livingston, Editor-in-Chief The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland Vol. VII FEBRUARY, 1921 No. 1 ENTRIES 1-565 AGRONOMY C. V. Piper, Editor Mary R. Burr, Assistant Editor \. Anonymous. Planteavlen i 1919. [Plant production in 1919.] Tidsskr. Landoko- nomi (Kjobenhavn) 1920:' 2S4-298. 1920.— During the last two years of the world war and the first year following the war, the shortage of grass seed and red clover seed was acute, resulting in a greatly decreased acreage of grass and clover during 1919. The opinion is ventured that the decrease is temporarj^, since heavy importation of seed was received from the United States during the spring of 1920. As compared with pre-war planting, the 1919 acreage of wheat was decreased; rye was about the same; barley was increased slightly; sugar beets were increased about 20 per cent; potatoes about 35 per cent; and the area planted to vege- tables was considerably increased. The harvest of 1919 is described; it is stated to have averaged about 107 per cent of normal. — Albert A. Hansen. 2. Anonymous. Cultivation of main crop potatoes. Jour Dept. Agric. Ireland 20: 217- 227. 1920. 3. Anonymous. Field experiments, 1919. Jour. Dept. Agric. Ireland 20: 167-174. 1920. — Summarizes results of variety tests made in Ireland with barley, mangels, oats, pota- toes, turnips, and wheat. — Donald Folsom. 4. Anonymous. Notes. Nature 105:80-81. 1920.— Note on organization of British Empire Sugar Research Association to further the development of the industry. — 0. A. Stevens. 5. Anonymous. American books on agriculture. [Rev. of : Gehrs, John H. Productive agriculture, xii + 426 p. Macmillan & Co.: London, 1917.] Nature 104: 495-496. 1920.— A textbook for "school children of the upper classes who propose to take up farming as the business of their lives." — O. A. Stevens. 6. Anonymous. Sulphur as a fertilizer for wheat. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 462. 1920. — Results of 4 years' trials at Cowra gave negative results. — L. R. Waldron. 7. Anonymous. Applied plant morphology. [Rev. of: Barber, C. A. Studies in Indian »- sugar canes. Mem. Dept. Agric. India Bot. Ser. 10: 39-153. 1919.] Nature 104: 578. 1920. ^ — A study of the underground branching of the plant of wild and cultivated forms of sugar : — cane and an attempt to correlate morphological characters with economic values. This is referred to as the fourth paper on the Indian sugar canes. — 0. A. Stevens. ^ 1 " . '^ BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. vn, NO. 1 2 AGRONOMY Box. Absts., Vol. VII, • 8. Anonymous. (Reichs ausschuss fur Ole und Fette.) Zur Frage des Anbaues und der Akklimatissation der Soja in Deutschland. [Concerning the cultivation and the acclima- tization of the soy bean in Germany.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18:3&-38. 1920. — The bureau of fats and oils in its search for new fats and oils since the war made a thorough study of the advisabilty of introducing the soy bean on a large scale, but has reached the conclusion that regardless of its longer vegetative period, it does not approach in yield the common dwarf bean (Phaseolus nanus). Late ripening crops of the soy bean developed very little or no seed at all. There is little hope that further experimentation in cultivating and breeding will result in producing a soy bean ripening early enough and producing large enough yields to make its planting in the most favorable parts of Germany a success. — J. Roeser. 9. Anonymous. Cane experiment in St. Croix. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 180, 181, 196. 1920. — A review of the work done with sugar cane at the Slob Experimental Station during 1919-20, as reported by Eduard Gedde, manager. Results of experiments show that it is advantageous to plant canes equal distances apart in both directions. Cane planting experiments with cuttings obtained from plant, first, and second ratoon canes, gave results in favour of those taken from first ratoons, since these gave 4 tons more per acre than those from plant canes and llf tons more than those from second ratoons. Carefully conducted comparative experiments with planting cane in flat and banked plats gave results in favor of the former from the points of view of yield and of cultivation costs. — J. S. Dash. 10. Anonymous. Agriculture and industries in the Turks and Caicos Islands. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 3. 1920. — This is a review of G. W. Smith's 1918 report as Commis- sioner for the Turks and Caicos Islands. Mention is made of the introduction into the colony of seeds of both Sea Island and Upland strains of cotton which were brought by set- tlers from the United States who were granted lands there by the British Government after the American War of Independence. Never cultivated, plants from these seeds were allowed to grow at will in waste places near the settlements "Where amid cactus shrub they pursued for over a century a struggle for existence, evolving eventually a type of cotton plant that for hardiness, freedom from disease and heavy cropping qualities, under almost unbelievable conditions of sterility and neglect, cannot, it is believed, be surpassed anywhere." — J. S. Dash. 11. Anonymous. Seedling canes experimented with in Antigua in 1919. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 7. 1920. — In this review of a report on sugar cane presented to the Agricul- tural and Commercial Society by A. E. Collens, it is stated that the White Transparent is the variety most cultivated. As plant cane, its calculated yield for 1919 was 15.45 tons of cane per acre; and as ratoons, 12.06 tons. The calculated sucrose content was 2.11 pounds, and 1.99 pounds per gallon of juice, respectively. In the experiments, B. 6308 came first as plant cane with an average of 23.4 tons of cane per acre and 2.08 pounds sucrose per gallon. The best ratooning cane was found to be B. 10650. — J. S. Dash. 12. Atkinson, Esmond. Weeds and their identification. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 168-171. 1 pi. 1920. — This article deals with perennial Sow Thistle (Sonchus arvensis). The plant and its habits are described. It has been in New Zealand for many years. It need not be considered serious in pastures, as sheep eat it readily. In cultivated land the weed may be eradicated by the use of a smothering crop, such as oats and tares, or Wearora vetchling; or the land may be put into grass for a couple of years. — N. J. Giddings. 13. Breakwell, E. Improvement of sweet sorghimis. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:549-551. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 168. 14. Breakwell, E. Popular description of grasses. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 507-512. 2 fig. 1920. — Deals with the introduced Chloris grasses and describes in some detail the agronomic relations of Rhodes grass (Chloris gayana). The annual C. virgata is not considered of much economic importance. — L. R. Waldron. No. 1, February, 1921] AGRONOMY 3 15. Brown, Ernest B. Relative yields from broken and entire kernels of seed corn. Jour. Amer. See. Agron. 12: 196-197. 1920.— A lower percentage of the broken seed germi- nated, and the seedlings were weaker than those produced by whole kernels. In weight of ear and yield per plant the broken seed produced consistently less than did the entire seed. The broken seed produced 7.6 bushels less per acre than did the entire seed.— F. M. Schertz. 16. Bruce, J. L. Rotation of crops. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20:94-96. 1920.— A 6-year rotation for dairj- farms is suggested. This included 3 years in grass; 1 year in roots; 1 year in flax, barley, beans, potatoes, linseed, etc.; and 1 year in oats and tares.— iV. J. Giddings. 17. C, C. The roast beef of old England. [Rev. of: Mackenzie, R. J. J. Cattle and the future of beef production in England. With a preface and chapter by F. H. R. Marshall. xi^-168 p. University Press. Cambridge, 1919)]. Nature 105:62-63. 1920.— Author considers a supply of prime beef necessary to a sound system of agriculture. The increase of plow-land at expense of grass-land during the war is now in process of reversal, and this may proceed at an increasing rate unless there is evidence of greater profit in crops other than grass. — 0. A. Stevens. 18. Calvino, Mario. Estudio sobre el cultivo de la soya en Cuba. (A study regarding the cultivation of the soy bean in Cuba.) Rev. Agric. Com. y Trab. [Cuba] 3: 124-131. 9 fig. 1920.— Trials of 13 varieties of soy beans {Soja max L.) are described with reference to germi- nation, time of emergence, length of growing season, yield and nutritive value.— i^*. M. Blodgett. 19. Cockayne, L. An economic investigation of the montane tussock— grassland of New Zealand. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 82-94. // fi^. 1920.— Several depleted areas which have been protected by rabbit-proof fences are showing great improvement. A reasonable amount of pasturing apparently does not interfere with the regeneration. Valuable forage grasses spread from the tussocks, and many seedling plants soon develop. The plants found in these areas are listed. — ^V. /. Giddings. 20. CoLWELL, W. R. Under irrigation with bore water. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 476-477. 2 fig. 1920. — Excellent returns were obtained from Sudan grass at the Coon- amble Experiment Farm with the assistance of irrigation from bore water.— L. R. Waldron. 21. Downing, R. G. Sugar-beet growing in Victoria. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:463-465. 1920.— Summary of results showing profits made by farmers and how sugar- beet production is related to other phases of crop production.— L. R. Waldron. 22. Faber, Harald. Foreword by Sir Robert Greig. Forage crops in Denmark. ix + 100 p. Longmans, Green and Co. : London, 1920.— This volume, written in English, describes the progress that has been made in recent years in the improvement and culture of forage crops and the development of the trade in guaranteed seeds in Denmark. The book is of unusual interest to all engaged in the development and utilization of improved crops and in the betterment of the seed trade. One-half of the work is devoted to root crops. Fol- lowing the investigations of Fjord published in 1890, which showed that the dry matter in roots was equal in feeding value to grain for cows and swine, the acreage of root crops in Denmark has been increased sevenfold; namely, from 95,000 acres in 1888 to 678,000 acres in 1919. Before this time breeding of improved root crops had made considerable progress, the iniative being due both to progressive farmers and to enterprising seed firms, who later formed the "Society for the Production of Home-Grown Seed." The success achieved in developing and establishing improved strains of root crops has been remarkable, and since 1894 has been assisted by the government. The methods employed are described in detail.— The improvement of grasses in Denmark began with the work of P. Nielsen in 1869. He introduced the system of testing grasses in small duplicate plats instead of in large fields, 4 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, and in 1896 became the first director of the state experimental farm at Tystofte. With this work began the systematic testing of grass seeds of different strains and from various coun- tries, and the development of special seed farms was a subsequent outgrowth of this move- ment. Later a system was introduced of making comparative trials of lots of grass and clover seed submitted by growers and dealers. This has stimulated the selection of special high-yielding strains, especially of grasses and of white clover, of which the Mors strain is best. In the trials, samples of orchard grass (cocksfoot), Italian rye-grass, meadow fescue, tall oat-grass, timothy, red clover, white clover, and bird's-foot trefoil were tested. So far as reported, the native Danish strains were in every case the best. — The last chapter is devoted to the development of trade in guaranteed seeds. This again was initiated by farmers and seedsmen, but later its control was taken over by the government. The success of the whole movement is indicated not only by the much increased acreage of high-yielding forage crops, but also by the fact that Denmark now exports much seed, while formerly it was a large importer. — C. V. Piper. 23. Federal Horticultural Board, U. S. Dept. Agric. [Restrictive legislation and notices of quarantines in U. S. A.] Service and Regulatory Announcements 68: 52-111. 1920. 24. Fisher, M. L. The dormant period of timothy seed after harvesting. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918: 276-279. 1920. — Reports in 2 tables results of timothy seed germination. After 25 days the germinating percentage of seeds from individual heads averaged 98.2 per cent while in mass selections it was 88 per cent. Three or 4 weeks after harvesting, timothy seed has reached its maximum germinating power. — F. A. Anderson. 25. FuRBY, E. Wheat experiments for hay. Yanco experiment farm, 1919. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 467-471. 1920. — Several standard varieties of wheat were used. Early sowing gave best results. — L. R. Waldron. 26. Gasser, G. W. Report of the work at Rampart station. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp' Sta. 1917: 34-57. PI. S-4- 1919. — Reports on the behavior of alfalfa {Medicago falcata and M. sativa), bird vetch (Vicia cracca), field peas, chick pea (Cicer arietinum), clover {Trifo- Uum pratense and T. lupinaster), winter and spring wheat, winter and spring rye, barley, oats, buckwheat, hemp, millet, flax, and potatoes. Nearly all the winter wheat was killed by freezing, but rye was not. Spring rye matured too late. Barley, oats, and most varie- ties of spring wheat matured well. This station is devoted chiefly to grain breeding, and a large proportion of the varieties grown originated here. Two fruits — the first grown in the interior of Alaska — were produced on a Siberian Crab tree. Strawberries of varieties bred at Sitka have survived several winters and have fruited abundantly. Reports are also given on garden vegetables and annual flowering plants. — J. P. Anderson. 27. Georgeson, C. C. Reports from seed and plant distribution. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917: 86-90. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 269. 28. Georgeson, C. C. Summary of the work at the several stations. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917: 5-33. 2 pi. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 270. 29. G^rome, J. Essais de culture de Pommes de terre avec des tubercules appauvris ou anormaux (1919). [An experiment.in growing potatoes from depauperate or abnormal tubers.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 677-681. 1919.— Results of this experiment in the vicinity of Paris with 9 varieties are given in tabular form. "Early rose" proved most satisfactory, and "Up to date" and "Prime bretonne" gave encouraging results. — E. B. Payson. 30. Hamblin, C. O. To infect lucerne seed with nodule organism. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:466. 1920. — Recommends using soil from an old lucerne (alfalfa) field, allowing the soil to dry well in the shade. The author states that the bacteria from artificial (laboratory) cultures are weaker than those produced under natural conditions. — L. R. Waldron. No. 1, February, 1921] AGRONOMY 31. Hanly, Joseph. Some notes on crop rotations. Jour. Dept. Agric. Ireland 20: 184- 189. 1920. — Discusses crop rotation in regard to its historical development, its advantages, and the types practiced in Ireland. — Donald Folsom. 32. Harlan, Harry V. Smooth-awned barleys. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12:205-208. 1920. — A report on the introduction of smooth-awned barley and the progress that has been made. It is predicted that a high-yielding smooth-awned barley will be developed. — F. M. Schertz. 33. Harshberger, Johx W. Text-book of pastoral and agricultural botany for the study of the injurious and useful plants of coimtry and farm, ix + 294 p., 1 pL, 120 fig. P. Blakis- ton's Sons and Co. : Philadelphia, 1920. — This book is based on a course in botany given to veterinary students in the University of Pennsylvania. Nine chapters are devoted to pois- oning by plants, one to feeds and feeding, three to grasses, three to legimies, one to weeds, and one to agricultural seeds. — C. V. Piper. 34. Maidex, J. H. Chats about the prickly pear. No. 5. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:557-562. 1920. — Mainly extracts from well-known bulletins by two American authors, Hare and Griffiths, on value and methods relative to Opuntia spp. as feed for live stock. — L. R. Waldron. 35. Maughan, Howard J. Factors affecting the depth of planting various crops. (Abstract.) Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 20fr-207. 1918. 36. McCauley, C. Sudan grass in western districts. At Cowra experiment farm. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 473-475. 1920.— Detailed financial statement is given of results from 20 acres of this grass, showing it to have been very profitable. An analysis of Sudan- grass silage is given. — L. R. Waldron. 37. MooMAW, Leroy. Report for the Dickinson substation for 1919. North Dakota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 138. 24 p., 6 fig. 1920.— Weather data relative to temperature, precip- itation, wind velocity, and length of growing season are presented, as well as annual and average yields of different varieties of various crops. In an excessively dry season following two dry seasons Russian thistle {Salsola kali iragiis)pToduced 5.7 tons per acre of air-dry material (hay). — L. R. Waldron. 38. Moore, C. C. Technic of potato starch manufacture. 22-23; 31: 8, 9, 20, 22-23. 1920. Potato Mag. 2'^: 10, 11, 20, 39. MoREiLLOx, M. Influence de I'ombrage sur la valeur des gazons dans les pSturages boises. [The influence of shade upon the value of the grasses in wooded pastures.] Jour. Forest. Suisse 70: 131-142. 1919. — A discussion of Swiss alpine meadows at altitudes from 1100 to 1650 meters. As a result of the shade of trees in these alpine pastures, there is not only a reduction in the percentage of good forage plants but also in the quantity of fodder harvested. Under spruce the loss in dry fodder is 88 per cent by weight and under larch at the same station from 30 to 45 per cent of that in open ground. The shade is also injurious to the qualitative value of the fodder. In Zurich and Grisons the following figures were obtained. Weights represent kilograms per are; i.e., zij acre PABCF.I.T.E PBOTEIN FAT SOLUBLE SUBSTANCES, NON- NITBOGENOU8 TOTAL Open 4.55 3.67 1.43 1.05 15.24 10.55 21 22 Shaded 15 27 6 AGRONOMY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, In a pasture with spruce trees 20 meters apart the forage will lose 60 per cent in weight and 30 per cent in quality; its end value is therefore but 20 per cent of the end value of forage grown in full sunlight. In conclusion, specific recommendations are presented for improving the management and administration of Swiss alpine pastures.— C. /. Kraebel. 40. Murray, J. Alan. The classification of cattle foods. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919:383. 1920. 41. Oldershaw, a. W. The value of lupines in the cultivation of poor light land. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919: 380-381. 1920. 42. Pitt, J. M. Farmers' experiment plots. 1919-20. Central Coast. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 539-547. 1920. — Experiments included variety trials, fertilizer trials, and size of seed piece, depth and rate of planting. — L. R. Waldron. 43. Porter, W. R. Thirteenth and fourteenth annual report of the state demonstration farms 1918 and 1919. North Dakota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 135. 84 p., 1 fig. 1920.— Detailed results are given from 22 farms, including cost of production; a summary of results for 10 years is presented for 9 of the farms. Wheat has yielded 16.9 bushels per acre for 14 years, which is 54 per cent higher than the state average for the same period. — L. R. Waldron. 44. Pratt, Hiram E. Report of work at Kodiak live stock and breeding station. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917: 72-81. 1919. — Reports on field and forage crops grown at the station. Twelve varieties of potato were tested. The following native plants were used for silage, beach rye (Elymus mollis), beach sedge {Car ex cryptocarpa) , bluetop {Calama- grostis langsdorffi) , and fireweed {Epilobium angustifolium) . These do not stand continual cutting well, but the yield is maintained if cutting is done only in alternate years. Native bluetop is the chief hay grass; but coarse bluegrass (Poa glumaris), Kentucky bluegrass {Poa pratensis), and wild barley (Hordeum horeale) occur mixed with bluetop, and make good hay. Analyses of Calamagrostis langsdorffi,, Carex cryptocarpa, and Elymus mollis are given and compared with such standard grasses as Poa pratensis, Agrostis alba, and Phleum pratense. — J. P. Anderson. 45. Pridham, J. T. The selection of promising wheat plants. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 548. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 234. 46. Ramsay, A. A. Sorghum as a possible source of industrial alcohol. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:479-484. 1920. — Experiments were conducted at Hawkesbury Agricultural College with different varieties of sorghum. Results are given in detail of the field data, percentage of juice expressed, its analysis, amount of alcohol produced, and composition of megass. It was found for most varieties that the market value of the alcohol obtained would not pay for the cost of cutting and transporting the cane to the factory. Even with the best variety the margin was only about Is. per ton. Production of alcohol in this manner can not be considered a feasible undertaking. — L. R. Waldron. 47. Reed, George M. Varietal resistance and susceptibility of oats to powdery mildew, crown rust, and smuts. Missouri Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 37. 3-41. 1920. 48. Roberts, George, and A. E. Ewan. I. Report on soil experiment fields. II. Maintenance of fertility. Kentucky Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 228:89-131. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 463. 49. Round, Lester A. Experiments with potato silage. Potato Mag. 3^:6-7, 29-31. 2 fig. 1920. No. 1, February, 1921] AGRONOMY 7 50. Shepherd, A. N. Summer green fodder trials. Murrumbridgee irrigation area, 1919- 1920. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 554-556. 1920. — General cultural notes for sorghum and maize grown for summer green fodder, and the yields obtained at the various places of experimentation. The heaviest yield was 25.5 tons per acre with Sorghum saccharatum following lucerne. — L. R. Waldron. 51. Snodgrass, M. D. Report of the work at Fairbanks station. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917: 57-72. PI. 5-7. 1919. — Ninety-five acres were cropped with small grain and five acres with root crops. Nearly all the winter grain was killed by freezing. Owing to drought in May and first half of June, spring grains yielded only half as much as usual. This drought also caused uneven germination and consequent uneven ripening. Three varieties of spring wheat, 2 of oats, and 2 of barley were grown under field conditions, and larger numbers were grown in small plots or in head-to-row tests. A spring wheat originally received from Irkutsk, Siberia, in 1914, and known as H. G., is considered the best wheat for the region. Grown under different rotations and exposures, it showed considerable differences in yield. Japanese buckwheat was successfully grown. Reports are given on the behavior of field peas, alfalfa, and clover. Red clover winter kills, but grew 24-30 inches high by September 7 from spring seeding. Grains are grown for hay. Calamagrostis langsdorffi. produces the native hay. The potato is the chief money crop of the region. Results of the tests at the station are given. Some potato blight and a verj^ little scab were present. Petrowski turnip is another important crop of this region, and seed is grown and distributed by the station. Notes are given on garden vegetables and on flowers; also on strawberries, red raspberries, and native berries. Twenty-five requests for seed were filled. — J. P. Anderson. 52. Snodgrass, M. D. Cooperative work. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917:84-86. 1919. — Gives report of cooperative work among the farmers of the Matanuska valley and the Anchorage-Knik region in southern Alaska. — J. P. Anderson. 53. SoMERViLLE, W. [Presidential address.] Grass. Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919: 364-379. 1920. — From the experiments which have been carried out, the following conclusions may be drawn: "(1) That the quality of a pasture is not primarily dependent on its botanical composition, though, as a rule, the presence of white clover, and other Leguminosae is indicative of high feeding value. (2) That poor pastures, especially on clay soil, can be rapidly and profitably improved by the use of phosphates, especially basic slag. (3) That, as a rule, phosphates alone are suflBcient to effect and maintain the improve- ment, and that, of supplementary substances, potash and lime are occasionally worthy of attention. (4) That the improvement of poor pasture is very dependent on the presence of Leguminosae, and especially of white clover. (5) That renovating with the seed of wild white clover may, in the absence of natural Leguminosae, be a necessary preliminary or con- current operation. (6) That cake can rarely be used at a profit, and that, as an agent in improving poor pasture, it occupies an unsatisfactory position. (7) That nitrogen, whether in the form of artificial manure, or as cake residues, when added to phosphates for pasture, is always unnecessary and frequently detrimental. (8) That, in the case of hay on per- manent grass land, equal weights of produce may have very different feeding values. (9) That few forms of agricultural expenditure are more certain in their results than the judicious use of manures on grass land, and that the meat and milk producing capacity of the country can be largely and rapidly increased, with great pecuniary gain to the farmer, and still greater economic advantage to the nation." — C. L. Wilson. 54. Syme, J. E. The grain wheats for central western districts. Farmers' experiment plots, 1909-1919, summarized. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:533-538. 1920.— "Federa- tion," "Marshall No. 3." "Cranberra" and "Hard Federation" did best.— L. R. Waldron. 55. Syme, J. E. In a dry season at Parkes. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 477-478. 1920. — Discusses Sudan grass and considers it valuable. — L. R. Waldron. 8 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 56. Truax, H. E. United States grades for potatoes. Potato Mag. 3i: 15. 1920. 57. Watts, George. Cotton growing in the British Empire. Nature 104: 694^696. 1920. — British mills are said to be adapted to use of American long-staple cottons and unable to use the shorter staples of India and other countries. Definite organization of a research institution is needed. The following suggestions were made: To establish in Manchester a college of cotton where experts and planters can be trained; to promote intensive study of races of all species of Gossypium, with careful records of all plantings; to establish branch colleges in the more important centers of cultivation to complete training for local condi- tions; to replace cultivation by natives on a small scale with plantations directed by trained people. Success of American cotton is attributed to the fact that the work was undertaken by intelligent farmers who evolved new and superior stocks and who did not have to contend with vested interests of native cultivators. — 0. A. Stevens. 58. Wenholz, H. Papago: A new variety of sweet corn. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:552-553. 1 fig. 1920. — Seed was secured from Arizona. The variety is said to be remarkable because of the resistance of its pollen to dry heat. It is very late, of fair quality, and promising for Australian conditions. — L. R. Waldron. 59. Wenholz, H. Sweet corn. Variety trial, 1919-1920. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:585-589. 1920. — Fourteen varieties were tested, the seed coming from America. They averaged in yield 487 dozen ears per acre. The best yielding was Mammoth White Cory with 850 dozen ears, weighing 5.5 tons. Varieties are described and recommendations made. — L. R. Waldron. 60. Wenholz, H. Soil improvement for maize. I. Manures and fertilizers. Agric- Gaz. New South Wales 31: 495-501. 1920. — A report of results secured from the application of commercial fertilizers, especially phosphorus, upon maize for grain and fodder in various districts of the province. Trials were made upon farmers' experiment plats. Usually the application of the phosphorus in the shape of superphosphate showed a profit. — L. R. Waldron. 61. Wenholz, H. Pop-corn variety trial, 1919-1920. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 562. 1920. — An average yield of 40 bushels per acre is recorded. — L. R. Waldron. 62. Wheeler, H. J. Delayed application of fertilizer. Potato Mag. 21^:5, 38. 1 fig. 1920. — Late application of fertilizer increased yield of potatoes in Wisconsin over that of unfertilized fields. — Donald Folsom. 63. ZiELSTORPP, W. Einsaiierungsversuch im Deutschen Futterturm mit anschliessen- dem Fxitterungsversuch. (Ensiling experiment in German silo with connected feeding experi- ment.) Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Gesell. 35:563-565. 1920.— A comprehensive series of experiments have been planned to determine the value of different methods of ensiling. The German farmer is chiefly interested in the ensiling of grass and clover in order to save this feed when weather conditions render it impossible to make hay. One experiment made under such conditions is described. Timothy that had already become quite old because the weather did not permit of cutting was ensiled. Feeding experiments with the ensilage produced showed that 100 kgm. of the ensilage had the same feeding value for milk cows as 170 kgm. of mangels. — A. J. Pieters. BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY Neil E. Stevens, Editor 64. Anonymous. Dansk Landbolovgivning efter 1849. [Danish farm laws since 1849.] Tidsskr. Landokonomi (Kjobenhavn) 1920': 265-283. 1920.— A discussion of the agricul- tural laws passed by the Danish legislature since 1849. Particular attention is paid to the good and bad effects which these laws have had upon the farmers. — Albert A. Hansen. No. 1, February, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 9 65. Anonymous. The New Zealand science congress, 1919. Nature 104: 516-518. 1920. A review of some papers, including presidential address of L. Cockayne, being an historical account of the institute. Notes that 654 papers on botany have been published in the first 50 volumes of transactions of the institute. — O. A. Stevens. 66. Anonymous. Publications of the staff, scholars and students of The New York Botanical Garden during the year 1919. Jour. New York Bot, Gard. 21: 65-72. 1920. 67. C, N. R. Scientific biography. [Rev. of: Bower, F. O. Joseph Dalton Hooker. 63 p. Macmillan and Co.: London, 1919.] Nature 104:562. 1920.— "Scholarly but not interesting." — 0. A. Stevens. 68. Eberhard, Julius. Die Technik der Naturverjungung sinst und jetzt. Ein forst- geschichtliche Studie. [The technique of natural reproduction formerly and now.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 161-183, 204-226. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 116. 69. Freeman, W. G. The centenary of the Royal Botanic Garden, Trinidad. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 36-37. 1920. — Sections of a paper originally contributed to the Trini- dad Guardian, are reproduced. The Garden shares with those of Calcutta and Sydney the distinction of being the only ones in the British Colonial Empire which have reached 100 years or more of unbroken activity. Some account is given of the progress of the Garden under different Curators. — J. S. Dash. 70. Gleason, H. a. Organization of the American iris society. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21: 39-40. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 302. 71. Luisier, a. 0 P. Fernando Theissen, S. J. Broteria, Ser. Bot., 18: 73-78. 1920. — Father Theissen was killed early in September, 1919, by falling over a precipice while col- lecting alone near P'eldkirch, Vorarlberg. He was born in Krefeld, Rhenish Prussia, July 27, 1877. A member of the Society of Jesus, he taught first in Brazil, later in several parts of central Europe. Father Theissen was a mycologist, contributing to many journals, especially the Annales Mycologici. Thiessenula Sydow and Theissenia Maublanc, were named in his honor. — A bibliography of 51 titles and notice of a posthumous work on the lichens of Vorarlberg is appended. — E. B. Chamberlain. 72. Morris, J. C. [Presidential address.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919: 316-331. 1920. — A review of recent British work in pure and applied botany, such as agronomy, pathol- ogy, and genetics. The application of pure botany to questions of economic importance is presented in the development of more valuable varieties of wheat, cotton, sugar cane, and rubber, and in improving the quality of the production of cacao, flax, and other crops. A reference is made to the prominent place which ecological studies will take in the future of botany. Recent work in tropical botany receives especial emphasis. The article is in gen- eral a summing-up of the great influence of botany upon the welfare of the human race. — A necrological review is presented.— C. L. Wilson. 73. P(rain), D. James William Helenus Trail. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 378-388. 1919.— See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 955. 74. Small, J. K. Of grottoes and ancient dunes. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21: 25-38, 45-54. PL 2U-2U- 1920. 75. Th^riot, I. Vandalisme et solidarite scientifique, [Ruthlessness and scientific brotherhood.] Rec. Publ. Soc. Havraise Etudes Diverses 87: 131-135. 1920.— An account of the partial destruction and loss of the moss collections and drawings of Jules Cardot of Charleville. Quotations from Cardot's letters give an account of the state of his col- lection upon return to Charleville. The action of English and American bryologists in raising funds for the purchase of Cardot's remaining herbarium on behalf of the Museum of Paris is described. [Cf. Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2407.]—^. B. Chamberlain. 76. W., A. S. Robert Etheridge. Nature 104: 700-701. 1920.— Brief biography. Direc- tor of Australian Museum since 1895. Noted for work in palaeontology. — O. A. Stevens. 10 BOTANICAL EDUCATION [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, BOTANICAL EDUCATION C. Stuart Gager, Editor Alfred Gundersen, Assistant Editor 77. Anonymous. Awbury Arboretum. Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Rec. 9: 23-24. 1920. — Digest of article in Bull. Geog. Soc. Philadelphia (July, 1919). Awbury Arboretum com- prises over 30 acres at Washington Lane Station, near Philadelphia. It has been endowed by Caroline E. Pope and other members of the Pope family as an arboretum and refuge for migratory birds. — C. S. Gager. 78. Anonymous. Botanical guides. [Rev. of: Cook, M. T. Applied economic botany: based upon actual agricultural and gardening projects, xviii + 261 p. J. B. Lippincott Co. : Philadelphia and London, 1919. (Farm Life Text Series.) See also Bot. Absts. 3, Entries 491.] Nature 105: 34-35. 1920. — Title is misleading; book as a whole is disappointing. — 0. A. Stevens. 79. Anonymous. Botanical guides. [Rev. of: (1) Sulman, A. E. Some familiar wild flowers, ii + 65 p. (2) Australian wild flowers, ii + 67 p. Angus and Robertson: Syd- ney (no dates). (3) Sulman, Florence. A popular guide to the wild flowers of New South Wales. Vol. 2, xxi + 2^9 p., 71 pi. Same publisher, 1919.] Nature 105: 35. 1920. SO. Anonymous. Museums and the state. Nature 105 : 68-70. 1920. — Communications from 5 persons in response to article of March 11. — 0. A. Stevens. 81. Anonymous. The state and the national museums. Nature 105:29-31. 1920. — A survey of British museums and plans for their futures. Separate museums have arisen in response to conditions rather than by a broad and general plan. Coordination is needed to enable each to fill a distinct and useful place. — 0. A. Stevens. 82. Anonymous. The value of Botanic Gardens. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 193, 194. 1920. — It is pointed out that the value of these institutions "for the advancement and diffusion of a knowledge and love of plants" has only recently been appreciated to any extent; and in small communities it has not yet been realised. The writer considers that a botanic garden contributes to the well-being of the people from the social, educational, and scientific points of view. — J. S. Dash. 83. Anonymous. Prospectus of courses offered by the Brooklyn Botanic Garden, 1920. Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Rec. 9: 1-18. 1920. 84. Anonymous. Education and research chiefly in relation to sugar and rice. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 167, 182. 1920. — In the course of a visit to Havana and New Orleans, the Scientific Assistant to the Imperial Department of Agriculture for the West Indies, W. R. DuNLOP, made a number of observations, of which an account is here given. A descrip- tion is given of the various sugar and rice experimental stations visited, and also certain of educational institutions devoted to agriculture. — J. S. Dash. 85. Anonymous. Fern study. Nat. Study Rev. 16: 235-257. 1920. — A very elementary presentation of the principal facts about the structure, growth, and life-history of ferns, with simple key and descriptions. — W. L. Eikenberry. 86. BoYNTON, K. R. Vocational education in gardening for disabled and convalescent soldiers and sailors. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21 : 87-94. 1920. 87. Brown, J. G. A new economic botany. [Rev. of: Cook, Mel T. Applied economic botany, xviii + 261 p. J. B. Lippincott Co.: Philadelphia and London, 1919.] Plant World 22: 309-311. 1919. No. 1, February, 1921] BOTANICAL EDUCATION 11 88. CowELL, Arthur Westcott. Awbury Arboretum Address, Bull. Geog. Soc. Philadelphia 17: 98-102. July, 1919. — Gives brief outline of planting plans, which include a rose garden and a rhododendron vale. "The system of naming is that which will be found of greatest advantage to average people and students and nursery men, and the names adopted by the Committee upon Standardized Plant Names have been used. These are the terms found in most botanies and in the Cyclopedia of Horticulture." — C. S. Gager. 89. Engler, a. Bericht iiber den Botanischen Garten und das Botanische Museum zu Berlin-Dahlem. vom 1. April 1918 bis zum 31. Marz 1919. [Report on the Botanical Gar- den and Botanical Museum at Berlin.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 331-344. 1919. 90. Engler, A. Bericht uber den Botanischen Garten und das Botanische Museum zu Berlin-Dahlem. vom 1. April 1919 bis zum 31. Marz 1920. [Report on the Botanical Garden and Botanical Museum at Berlin.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 455-466. 1920. 91. G[ager], C. S. Prospects for a new national botanic garden. Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Rec. 9: 20-22. Jan., 1920. 92. Garrett, A. 0. The influence of biological investigations upon the other sciences. Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 68-77. 1918. 93. Harshberger, John W. Text-book of pastoral and agricultural botany for the study of the injurious and useful plants of country and farm, ix + 294 P-, 1 pl-, 120 fig. P. Blakis- ton's Sons & Co. : Philadelphia, 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 33. 94. Karraker, P. E. Notes on the conference on elementary soil teaching, held at Lex- ington, Kentucky, June, 1920. Soil Sci. 10: 247. 1920.— The elementary work on soils should be a course of 5 semester hours credit given in the sophomore year. The minimum pre- requisites should be one year of general inorganic chemistry, one term of general geology, and high school or college physics. At least three-fifths of the time should be spent in lec- ture or recitation, and a standard textbook should be used. — W. J. Robbins. 95. Lankester, E. Ray. Museums and the state. Nature 105:100-101. 1920.— Favors separation of botany, zoology, etc. in distinct museums. The main purpose of a museum is the acquisition, preservation, and study of specimens of scientific value. Public exhibition is a secondary but important function. Materials for exhibition should be lim- ited in amount but selected and displayed to the best possible advantage. The author would like to see the system used at the American Museum of Natural History in New York introduced (in British museums) but thinks it still gives too much space to public exhibition. Part of article and two others under same title (pp. 101-102) by J. Stanley Gardiner and W. M. Tattersall relate more particularly to organization and management. — 0. A. Stevens. 96. Mangham, Sydney. Method and substance of science teaching: The neglect of bio- logical subjects in education. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919:336. 1920. 97. Snyder, Ray P. The school garden as a means of education. Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Rec. 9:91-100. July, 1920. 98. Victorian. Popular Science. Nature 104: 630. 1920. The author agrees with review entitled Scientific Biography [See: Bower on Hooker. Nature 104: 562. 1920.)]. He thinks real workers should give some time to popular articles, perhaps one lecture a year which could be published at a popular price. — 0. A. Stevens. 99. Wentz, John B. An outline of an undergradixate course in grain grading. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12: 198-204. 1920.— An outline of the course as presented at Maryland State College. It includes grading of corn, wheat, and oats; laboratory practice; and appa- ratus used.— i^. M. Schertz. 12 FORESTRY ]Bot. Absts., Vol. VII, FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY Raphael Zon, Editor J. V. HoFMANN, Assistant Editor 100. Anonymous. AUgemeine Bedingungen fiir die Verpachtung forststaatlicher Jagden in Preussen. [Leasing of hunting rights on Prussian State Forests.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 100-105. 1920. — In general, hunting is managed by the State forest authorities, but in a few cases is leased to private individuals. The conditions and forms governing such leasing are given. — W. N. Sparkawk. 101. Anonymous. Facts about depletion of our forests. Amer. Forest. 26:433-435. 1920. 102. Anonymous. Forestry in France. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 141-142. 1920. — A description is given of the French method of silvicultural management of a practically normal beech forest of 26,000 acres having a negligible admixture of oak in the State forest in the neighborhood of Lyons-la-F6ret in the Department Eure. The present method of regulation' is based on the uniform compartment system with natural regeneration. — C. F. Korstian. 103. Anonymous. Industrial research in forest products. Amer. Forest. 26:401-407. 7 fig. 1920. — A brief of the work of -the Forest Products Laboratory, Madison, Wisconsin. — Chas. H. Otis. 104. Anonymous. Kurze tJbersicht fiber die wichtigsten Kennzeichen der verschiedenen Larchenarten. [A brief review of the most important characteristics of the various Larch species.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18:46-51. 1920. — This brief review con- tains a key for the cones of the 19 species and varieties in the Larch family, a key for the needles and twigs, and a brief description of each species or variety. — /. Roeser. 105. Anonymous. Progress of the purchase of Eastern national forests. Amer. Forest 26:454-460. 2 maps, 4- fig- 1920. [From report prepared by the National Forest Reserva- tion Commission.] 106. Anonymous. The utilization of sand wastes. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 138- 139. 1920. — A brief review is given of the experience of France in the fixation and econotnic utilization of barren areas of shifting sand in the Landes through the planting of cluster pine {Pinus pinaster), and a plea is made for the adoption of similar measures in Australia. — C. F. Korstian. 107. Anonymous. Die Verhandlungen der Preussischen Landesversammlung iiber den Staatshaushaltsplan der Forstverwaltung. [Action in the Prussian legislature on the Forest Service budget.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 106-114. 1920.— By the Versailles treaty there was a definite loss to Prussia of 581,513 hectares of forest with an income of 23,459,000 marks, besides a possible loss of 346,862 hectares and income of 24,519,858 marks in the plebiscite areas, and 34,958 hectares and 2,208,000 marks in the districts of Aachen and Trier. Although wood prices have risen along with all other prices, the Forest Service must try to keep them down within reason. It is proposed to cut one-third more wood than usual to supplj^ fuel needs, especially of the bakers; but in many places increased production of fuelwood will have to be made at the expense of construction timber or mine timbers. Receipts from tur- pentining brought in a considerable revenue, but can be counted on only so long as the indus- try is needed to supply domestic requirements and is profitable. A demand has arisen for more agricultural land, with the tendency to demand clearing of parts of the State forests. There is also considerable deforestation of private forests, so that a law is under consid- eration giving the government authority to regulate such clearing and requiring that all forests of more than 15 hectares be subject to State supervision. The question of salaries No. 1, February, 1921] FORESTRY 13 and allowances is very pressing, as illustrated by the allowance granted Oberforster for maintenance of teams — 3000 marks in 1917 and 6000 marks in 1918, while the actual cost of keeping a team is now 9000 marks per year. In connection with the salary question it was stated that between October 1, 1918, and October 1, 1919, forest vandals killed 13 forest oflScers and wounded 3 others. — W. N. Sparhawk. 108. Anonymous. Vorschriften uber das Wirtschaftsland (Dienstiandereien) der Forst- dienststellen in Preussen. [Regulations regarding farm land connected with Forest Service positions in Prussia.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 69-73. 1920. — Most forest officers are granted a small area of garden, meadow, or pasture, in order to enable them to keep teams, raise at least part of their own food, especially in outlying districts, and also to make them reason- ably independent of the local population. They are supposed not to raise anything to sell. Rules are given concerning the granting of such land, its cultivation, fencing, etc. — W. N. Sparhawk. 109. Barbey, a. Congres de la Societe forestiere de Franche-Comte et Belfort. Jour. Forest. Suisse 71 : 50-54. 1920. — The first post-war meeting of this French forestry society was devoted to an examination of the forest of Haguenau, Alsace. Comprising 13,699 hec- tares, this forest is fifth in rank of French domanial forests and is conjointly owned by the state and by the village of Haguenau. Originally put under systematic management by the French in 1845, it was radically changed during German control (1874-1919) through the application of German systems employing artificial reforestation. Details of German mal- administration from the French viewpoint are described. The effort of the French foresters in resuming control will be to bring the forest again under the regime of natural reproduc- tion according to the best traditions of forestry in France. — C. J. Kraebel. 110. Barbey, A. Un parasite des pousses du chene. [A parasite of oak shoots.] Jour. Forest. Suisse 70: 129-131. Sept.-Oct., 1919. — Stenolechia gemmdla L., also known as Poecilia nivea Han. — C. J. Kraebel. 111. Beath, O. a. Poisonous Plants. Proc. Soc. Promotion Agric. Sci. 39: 39-47. 1919. See Bot. Ansts. 6, Entry 475. 112. Bell, T. R. Administration report of the forest circles in the Bombay Presidency (including Sind) for 1918-19. ISS p. Bombay, 1920.— The usual annual report on forest operations in the province. From 66.6 per cent to 94.3 per cent of the total forest areas is open to grazing. The opening of some of the areas closed to grazing, owing to fodder famine, caused considerable damage to coppice growth. During the year the gross revenue increased 17 lakhs (lakh = 100,000 Rs.) over the preceding year and by 30 lakhs over the average of the preceding 5 years. The past year the net revenue equalled 46.3 per cent of the gross revenue. Caesalpinia brevifolia, the pods of which contain 50 per cent tannin and having a tannin value superior to Divi-divi {Caesalpinia coriaria), has been recommended for experimental cultivation in dry regions. Later it is expected to try this species out on a commercial scale in the successful regions. A private company is planning to test the possibilities of the manufacture of bamboo paper pulp on a commercial basis for a period of 2 years. In timber seasoning experiments good results were obtained by alternate water and air treat- ment of certain species, and definite recommendations as to methods have been made. On the subject of organization, the following statements are made: "There is no doubt that the divisions existing are too large in extent for management by a single Divisional Forest Officer and their area will have to be reduced in the near future. Regeneration work has never been satisfactory owing to want of staff for supervising — also for execution. And under the new proposed system of clear-cutting about to be introduced in revised working plans, even requirements for silvicultural operations recognized up to the present will be insufficient. Everything, the whole future of the for st, will depend upon adequate, highly trained super- vision. For effectiveness, it will have to be European too; the forest life and strenuous, physical exertion entailed make that an absolute sine qua non for successful issue. The ordi- 14 FORESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, nary, intensively-worked division should certainly not exceed 200 square miles in area, whereas they are now well over 400. The sooner this is recognized, the better." Appended to the report are a number of tables of statistics on forest and administrative subjects. — E. R. Hodson. 113. Bernbeck. Das Wachstum im Winde. [Growth and wind.[ Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42 : 27-40, 59-69, 93-100. 1920. — The author discusses the adaptation of vegetation to wind and the effects of wind on vegetation, with especial reference to forest growth. Adaptation is to enable the plant to withstand the physical impact of wind, or to prevent excessive evap- oration from the plant tissues, or both. Wind firmness is not an inherent characteristic of any given species, although the tendency toward windfirmness may be inherited; thus a fir grown in the open may be much more wind-firm than an oak grown in a dense stand pro- tected from wind. Under the right conditions any tree can develop a wind-firm form. This fact can be utilized in silvicultural management, so as to minimize loss from windfall. (35,000,000 cubic metres of timber, principally coniferous, was blown down in Germany dur- ing the last century.) Wind climate often governs the geographical distribution of trees. For instance, conifers are most liable to injury during the winter months; so sites exposed to continuous winter storms (if fertile enough to allow tall tree growth) are usually occupied by hardwoods, while mountain slopes and plateaus where heavy early summer winds prevail are occupied by conifers. Wind affects the growth and form of trees not only indirectly, by its influence on such site-factors as soil moisture, transpiration, temperature, and expos- ure of foliage to the light, but also directly, by its physical effect on the plant tissues. Inter- nal stresses and friction between the fibres result in eccentric growth, and also help to stunt the tree by interrupting sap-flow and by affecting cell structure and turgescence. Inves- tigations made at Bonn showed clearly that the stunting effect of wind increases rapidly with wind velocity. — W. N. Sparhawk. 114. Bernberk. Die Wasserversorgung der Pflanzen im Winde. [The supply and main- tenance of water in plants during wind.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 121-141. 1920. — The physiological action of the mechanical strength of winds in relation to trans- piration is manifested in an increase in the amount of moisture given off. The rate of this increase is, in general, governed by the conditions of firmness or stability and inflexibility as opposed to the attacking force of the wind. The following are three ways in which the mechanical action of the wind leads to an increase in water loss: (1) The intercellular gas renews itself in spite of reaction of the stomata, whereby an increase in intercellular trans- piration is involved. (2) An excess of pressure in water conducting tissue is occasioned by torsion, pressure, etc. This forces water out of the lumen and membranes of cells subject to the higher pressure into cells under lower pressure, into the intercellular spaces, or through the epidermis into the free atmosphere. This internal pressure in very strong winds can become so great that the cell walls are burst. (3) The water permeability of the outer epidermal wall and the periderm is decreased by deformations. — The quantity of transpiration is strongly influenced by the humidity of the air. Death through excessive water losses and poor conduction reaches its maximum with the lowest relative humidity. Young tender organs are not as unprotected against wind, transpiration, and frost as may be supposed. The younger and the richer the tender-walled cells are in plasma, the more resistant are they to wind pressure. The period of greatest susceptibility is immediately after the period of greatest vegetative activity. The spiral grain in trees much exposed is due to the mechanical action of the wind. The best protection against the mechanical action of wind, ^s illustrated by the palms and grasses, consists in a flexibility, which allows the plant to bend before the wind. — J. Roeser. 115. Burns, George P. Eccentric growth and the formation of redwood in the main stem of conifers. Vermont Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 219. 10 p., 4 pi, 10 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 318. No. 1, February, 1921] FORESTRY 15 116. Eberhard, Julius. Die Technik der Naturverjiingung. einst und jetzt. Eine forstgeschichtliche Studie. [The technique of natural reproduction formerly and now.] Forst- wiss. Centralbl. 42:161-183, 204-226. 1920.— The author describes the development of silvicultural systems, beginning with the primitive irregular selection cutting. Hundes- HAGEx developed the shelterwood system (Dunkelschlagbetrieb) with preliminary seed cuttings, with later cuttings to give light for the seedlings, and with final removal cuttings after the young growth is well established and able to thrive in the open. Natural repro- duction was relied on almost entirely, being considered cheaper and more satisfactory than artificial restocking. After Hundeshagen, silviculturists gradually abandoned the idea of natural restocking, and adopted clear cutting with planting. Gayer and H. Mayer de- scribed methods similar to those of Hundeshagen, except that they provided for less frequent but much heavier early fellings, which resulted in less satisfactory reproduction and in more loss from windfall. Borggreve's method was more like Hundeshagen's, but delayed the later cuttings longer. Gayer described a group selection cutting (Femelschlagbetrieb) in some respects similar to the shelterwood system, but much less satisfactory. Engler advised a combination of group selection and shelterwood, especially for mixed stands con- taining tolerant and less tolerant species. Gayer also developed a strip shelterwood sys- tem, resulting in a stand with regular age-gradations in parallel strips. Wagner's selection strip or selection border cutting (Blendersaumschlag) provides for reproduction of tolerant species under the stand by making thinnings or selection cuttings, then for clearing strips so that the intolerant species can reproduce. Mayr described a system which he consid- ered applicable to most of the irregular forests of the world, especially those containing many species, including the forests of the tropics. He provided for reproducing a tolerant under- story at about the middle of the rotation, followed by occasional thinnings of the over-story to prevent natural losses, and fairly heavy seed cuttings at the end of the rotation, just before or just after the seed falls. The old stand is then to be removed in one or two fellings, within 5 or 6 years. Kubelka, in his selection-strip system (Femelstreifenbetrieb) gets reproduction by opening holes in alternate strips, and gradually enlarging them. Kalitsch's Barenthorn system and the author's wedge shelterwood system (formerly called Abrucksaumschlag, more recently Schirmkeilschlag) are very similar in providing for very frequent — annual if possible — cuttings through the stand, which do not break the canopy. The last method is particularly distinguished by the form of removal cuttings, which are developed in wedge form, beginning in the middle of the stand, so that logging will not injure established repro- duction. In the author's opinion, the present German silvicultural practice (which has also been carried to Russia by foresters trained in German schools) is far behind that at the begin- ning of the 19th century. The prevailing forest form has changed during the last 200 years from a straight selection forest to extensive pure even-aged forests produced artificially. It is now returning gradually to a modified selection form, very much more intensively culti- vated than formerly, with mixed stands and natural reproduction. — W. N. Sparhawk. 117. Endres. [Rev. of: Redslob, Kurt, and Heinrich Horns chu. Das neue Thiir- ingen. Heft 5, Aufgaben der Thiiringer Forstwirtschaft. [Problems of Thuringian forestry.] Erfurt, 1919.] Forstwiss. Centralbl 42: 194-195. 1920.— The new State of Thuringia (Thur- ingen) comprises the former states: Saxe-Weimar, Saxe-Meiningen, Saxe-Altenburg, Saxe- Gotha, Schwarzburg-Sondershausen, Schwarzburg-Rudolstadt, Reuss (both). It has 403,000 hectares of forest, divided into: crown forest, 13 per cent; state forest, 37 per cent; communal forest, 13.9 per cent; institutional forest, 1.3 per cent; cooperative forest, 4.5 per cent; pri- vate forest, 30.3 per cent. It is proposed that large private holdings, under management of technically trained foresters, be subject to state supervision, and that smaller tracts be acquired by the public (state or communes). Endres does not believe that this proposal will appeal to the peasants. He considers too optimistic the hopes of the author for great increase of returns through chemical utilization of forest by-products. Noteworthy is the proposed organization of forest research, with about six main branches, all manned exclu- sively by trained foresters. These are to have parallel units set aside in the field, for prac- 16 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VII, tical trial of the results of research. It is also proposed to establish chairs of forestry at the University of Jena, for training of forest officers, and to found a forest and game museum. — W. N. Sparhawk. 118. Fabricius, L. [Rev. of: Munch, E. Naturwissenschaftliche Grundlagen der Kiefernharznutzung. (Biological basis of resin production from Scotch pine.) Julius Springer: Berlin, 1919.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42:157-159. 1920.— The German turpentine industry, which only began in 1915, has in four years developed into an important industry; and the improved methods devised as the result of intensive research have increased pro- duction very greatly over the cruder methods formerly used in Austria and even over the French and American methods. Strict application of all that has been learned will result in a yield of resin four times as great as that obtained by the methods used in 1915. Munch's book covers the ground very thoroughly, both from scientific and practical points of view. — W. N. Sparhawk. 119. Fabricius, L. Waldbau-Lehrgang im Gebiet des Langenbrander Schirmkellschlages. [Silvicultural excursion in the home of the Langenbrand wedge-shelterwood cutting.] Forst- wiss. Centralbl. 42 : 233-237. 1920. — The author describes the silvicultural system used by De. Eberhard in the Langenbrand forest (Wurttemberg). This consists of a preparatory stage, in which the stand is prepared for reproduction by repeated moderate thinnings, and a stage of removal cuttings beginning about 5 years after reproduction is established. The preparatory cuttings are intended primarily to get rid of raw humus, which may also be removed by hand either over the whole area or in seed-spots. These cuttings also make room for reproduction, especially of tolerant species, to start. The removal cuttings are rather light, and repeated every year if practicable. They begin in the interior of the stand and progress outward, beginning with small openings, which are gradually enlarged into a wedge shape with the point toward the wind. The shape of opening is not definite, but may be varied to suit local conditions. Damage from storms and logging is reduced to a minimum, and natural reproduction is very successful. Of the whole area, 92 per cent has been repro- duced naturally. The principal characteristic which distinguishes this from certain other methods is the shape and arrangement of the cuttings so as to eliminate damage from logging and from winds. — W. N. Sparhawk. 120. Farrington, H. A. Annual progress report on forest administration in the presi- dency of Bengal for 1918-19. 51 p. Calcutta, 1920. — The usual annual report dealing with forest operations in the province. It is reported that 16 per cent of the reserved forests and 3 per cent of the protected forests were open to grazing, and that the entire area of the unclassed forest is always open for this purpose. Unrestricted grazing and lack of fire pro- tection caused the Muli bamboo to fail in re-establishing itself properly after seeding. Wher- ever cattle have access (practically on all areas within a mile of the forest boundary) seedling regeneration of most kinds of trees is destroyed. It is necessary to fence planted areas to protect them from damage by cattle grazing. In the unfenced hills natural regeneration is entirely destroyed by cattle. Above 5,500 feet in altitude natural reproduction in coppice fellings is not successful and must be supplemented by planting. At lower elevations the coppice system produces excellent results. Burned areas in coppice cuttings give success with a large number of species, including seedlings of Mallata, Toon, and other species. Experiments were undertaken with growing blue gum {Eucalyptus globulus) for fuel purposes. At the close of the year there were 50 forest villages, totaling an area of 7508 acres. The surplus at the close of the year was 1,121,760 Rs. Twenty-one form tables and a map of the province are appended. In chapter seven is given a review of forest administration in Bengal for the preceding 5-year period. — E. R. Hodson. 121. Federal Horticultural Board, U. S. Dept. Agric. [Restrictive legislation and notices of quarantines in U. S. A.] Service and Regulatory Announcements 68: 52-111. 1920. No. 1, February. 1921] FORESTRY 17 122. Garr, H. D., and George E. E'we. Hemlock bark (Tsuga canadensis) for pharma- ceutical purposes. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9:567-573. S fig. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 819. 123. Ginzberger, A. Zwei neue Standorte der gefeldert-rindigen Buche, Fagus silvatica var. quercoides Pers., in Mittel Italien und Slavonien. [Two new site-localities of the grooved- barked beech, Fagus silvatica, var. quercoides Pers., in central Italy and in Slavonia.] Natur- •wiss. Zei schr. Forst-u. Landw. 18:39-41. 1920. 124. Hay, R. Dalrymple. Progress of forestry under independent management in New South Wales. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 151-156. 1920. — A record of established progress in forest management by the Forestry Commission of New South Wales following a needed reform is given under these topics: classification, demarkation and organization, fire protec- tion, utilization and regeneration of hardwood forests, publicity work, forest grazing, fores- try statistics, forestry education, coniferous plantations, research, and forest revenue. — C. F. Korstian. 125. Henry, Augustine. The afiforestation of water catchment areas. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919: 337. 1920. 126. Hirst, E. C. State forest fire protection. Amer. Forest. 26: 408-409. 1920. 127. HoDSON, E. R. Some present day problems in forestry. Utah Acad. Sci. 1: 45-54. 1918. — Paper presented to the Academy in April, 1911. 128. Hohenadl, W. Die Hebung der Alpwirtschaft. [Promotion of the alpine dairy business.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42:41-59. 1920. — The author contrasts the development of the dairy industry in Allgau with that in Upper Bavaria. The difference is to a consider- able extent traceable to the difference in character of ownership of the mountain pastures as well as of the mountain forests. This industry is in very close contact with the forest industry, and foresters are especially favorably situated for taking the lead in promoting better methods and more conservative, and at the same time, more intensive utilization. — W. N. Sparhawk. 129. HuTCHiNS, D. E. Insignis-pine disease. Jour. Agric. New Zealand 16: 37. 1918. — See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1273. 130. JuDD, C. S. The kauri pine. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 17: 167-169. PI. 1. 1920. — This is reported as being the most promising and widely useful tree for planting in the Hawaiian Islands for the purpose of producing lumber. This species, Agathis australis shows a rapid growth in the Islands, "averaging a growth of 1 inch in diameter every 4| years." It was introduced into Hawaii about forty years ago. — Stanley Coulter. 131. Korstian, C. F. Value of scientific research in forestry. Utah Acad. Sci. 1: 186- 194. 1918. 132. Leiningen-Westerburg, (Graf zu). Rauchschaden und einschlagige bodenkund- liche Fragen. [Smoke injury and related matters of soil science.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 18-93. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 459. 133. Mackay, H. Forestry in Victoria. Australian Forest. Jour. 3:147-150, 179-182. 1920. — The second and third installments of a continued article. The silviculture of eucalyp- tus forest- is briefly treated. The following methods of cutting are advocated as the simplest and best forms of management for adaptation in Australia: (1) clear cutting; (2) modified selection; (3) for young forest, coppice with standards, or a modification of the shelterwood compartment system; (4) simple coppice, or the clear cutting of pole timber. A rotation of 20 to 30 years for a box and ironbark forest will produce pole timber from 6 to 9 inches in diameter, with some 12-inch timber. The progress made in plantation work and in gifts of trees for shelterbelts to small settlers is noted. — C. F. Korstian. 18 FOKESTKY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 134. Maxwell, Hu. The uses of wood. Wood for musical instruments. Amer. Forest. 26:532-539. 16 fig. 1920. 135. MoEEiLLON, M. Dommages causes aux forSts du canton de Vaud par le foehn des 4 et 5 Janvier 1919. [Damage to the forests of Vaud (Switzerland) by the foehn of January 4 and 5, 1919.] Jour. Forest. Suisse 71 : 41-44. 1920.— A brief presentation of reasons why this wind should have caused local wind-throw although the foehns of other years have never been known to do so. — C. J. Kraebel. 136. MoEEiLLON, M. Influence de I'cmbrage sur la valeur des gazons dans les paturages boises. [The influence of shade upon the value of grasses in wooded pastures.] Jour. Forest. Suisse 70: 131-142. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 39. 137. NiKLAS, H. Die Bedeutung der Geologie fdr die Land- und Forstwirtschaftliche Bodenkunde. [The significance of the science of geology with relation to agricultural and forest soil science.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u, Landw. 18: 22-35. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 478. 138. NiKLAS, H. tJbersicht uber Bayens Bodenverhaltnisse. [Summary of Bavarian soil conditions.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 123-135. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 461. 139. Pack, Chas. L. Fire protection and more public forest land. Amer. Forest. 26: 526-528. 1920. 140. PiETSCH, Albert. Wie erklart sich das lange Hangenbleiben der Blatter an einigen phanerogamen Holzgewachsen im Herbste 1919? [What is the explanation for the late reten- tion of the foliage of several phanerogamous woody plants in the fall of 1919?] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 150-155. 1920.— A combination of adverse conditions— a late spring, a cool summer, a wet October, and an early November frost — was responsible for the rather extraordinary retention of the foliage in the pear {Pirus communis), red thorn (Cra- taegus monogyna), the garden rose, blackberry (Rubus caesius), and peach {Prunus persica) in the fall of 1919. The explanation lies in the meteorological conditions through the year. — J. RoQser. 141. Prantner, E. F. The forests of a new republic. Amer. Forest. 26: 522-525. 9 fi^.y 1 map. 1920. — A brief discussion of forest conditions in Czechoslovakia. — Chas. H. Otis. 142. Recknagel, A. B. New York's forests and their future. Amer. Forest. 26: 518-521. 4fig.,l table. 1920. 143. Roth, Filibert. Another word on "light burning." Amer. Forest. 26:548, 572. 1920. 144. Rubner, K. Forstliche Standortsgewachse im westlichen Moranengebiet Bayerns. [Vegetation as forest site indicators in Bavaria.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 135-144. 1920.— The author discusses Cajander's theory that forest sites can be classed into a very few types based on key plants, such as Oxalis, Vaccinium myrtillus, and Calluna, regardless of eleva- tion, soil conditions, latitude, or other factors, and that the growth of the same species within one type wherever located is about the same, but is very different in different types. Rubner does not believe that such general classification, even with the subtypes Cajander proposed, can be made to apply to a large region, but believes that each locality will have certain plants that indicate the character of the different sites, which may or may not be common to other localities. He illustrates this by discussing the vegetation under the forests in the districts of Betzigau, Ottobeuren, Sachsenried, and Denklingen, which is the optimum spruce region in Bavaria and possibly in all Germany, with yields far above the average for Quality I sites. Indicator plants show particularly the humus conditions; i.e., whether the soils are mild, with normal decomposition of humus, or whether they are becoming acid with raw humus. No. 1, February, 1921] FORESTKY 19 I Such plants may be guide-plants, practically always found on a particular kind of soil; acces- sory indicators, frequently present but often missing; and regional indicators, found only in certain regions. Plants indicative of mild soils are Oxalis acetosella, Asperula odorata, Im- paliens noli-me-tangere, Galium rolundifolium, Elymus europaeus, Milium effusum, Brachtj- podium silvaticum, Carex silvatica, Catharinea undulata, Mnium undulatum, Hypnum spp. Indicators of beginning or continuing raw humus formation are: Vaccinium myrtillus, Fes- tuca silvatica, Lycopodium annotinum, Polytrichum formosum, Dicranum scoparium. This matter deserves much more attention from forest investigators, since it has a very direct bearing upon silvicultural practice, especially in connection with natural reproduction and with methods of thinning.— W. N. Sparhawk. . 145. RuBNER, K. Holzpreise in Suddeutschland in fruherer Zeit. [Wood prices in South Germany in former times.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42:226-233. 1920.— The author discusses prices of wood (chiefly firewood) in various localities, going as far back as 1630 in some instances. Especially noteworthy is a rapid increase in prices about the middle of the nineteenth century, which was attributed by some to increased population, rise of wood- using industries, and decreased wood production, and by others to an era of speculation. Just as relief came then through the development of railroads and the rise of a world trade in wood, so can relief from present abnormal wood prices, which are also due to a considerable degree to speculation coupled with inadequate supplies, come only with the resumption of imports from Russia or other exporting countries.— PF. N. Sparhawk. 146. ScHEiDTER, Franz. Schlagruhe und Russelkafer. [Suspension of cuttings and weevil damage.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42:144-150. 1920.— The author discusses the life history of the weevil, and shows that it can not be eliminated from a forest by temporarily suspending cuttings, as has been proposed. Contrary to general belief, the beetle flies for long distances during the mating period, and may attack newly planted trees far away from any cutting area. Suggested control measures include cleaning up cuttings, with grubbing out of stumps as soon as possible after logging; smearing of individual trees, where practic- able, with bands of glue or tar; and the construction of traps by blazing fresh stumps just above the ground and covering the blazes with loose bark, from beneath which the beetles can be scooped up daily or more often. — W. N. Sparhawk. 147. ScHMAUss, A. Uber Sturmgefahrdungen. [Concerning storm damage.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 189-194. 1920.— Prevailing winds in central Europe being from the southwest or west, trees are ordinarily adapted to resists winds from those directions, and are likely to be wind-thrown only by winds from other quarters. Storms from the east or northeast would be most destructive, but they are exceedingly rare. Those from the southwest— of which the fohn winds are most common— are seldom strong enough to do great damage, so that only the fairly strong winds— 20 meters per second and over— from the northwest need be considered in forest management. The origin and behavior of these winds is discussed in some detail. It is concluded that the best direction for succession of cuttings is from north- east to southwest, since this will favor reproduction and at the same time will allow a mini- mum of damage from northwest winds. — W. N. Sparhawk. 148. ScHREiNER. Blitzschaden an einer liegenden Eiche. [The work of lightning on a fallen oak.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 42-43. 1920.— The author records a phenomenon which he has not encountered in any of his previous practice. The oak stem in question was 7.4 meters long and 0.46 m. in diameter, DIB. The tree had died and fallen and the rotten butt had been removed, while the remaining section on the ground was sound. One-half of the stem was free of limbs. The woody fibers were straight; no twisted grain was in evidence. The stem lay in the midst of a thin stand of beech about 30 meters high. Lightning struck directly on the fallen stem, and ran the full length of it, making a three quarters revolution. Since it could not have followed the grain, it is thought the curvature of the stroke was due to the attraction from the damp portion of the stem lying against the soil. The soil is derived from sandstone. — J. Roeser. 20 FORESTRY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 149. S(chupfer). Englands Waldpolitik vor und nach dem Kriege. [England's forest policy before and after the war.] [Chiefly a discussion of an article by Ivar Tragardh in Svenska Dagbladet, 1919, No. 344.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42:150-156. 1920.— England's power depends on her fleet, which requires coal; the latter cannot be obtained without a supply of mine timbers. These had hitherto been obtained cheaply from France and Scandinavia, but just prior to the war increasing prices had made people begin to think of the home forests, which were mostly hardwoods except for small areas of conifers in Scotland. Early in the eighteenth century it had been decided to plant 100,000 acres with oak for ship timbers, and by 1823 half of this area was planted. Then the coming of steel ships put an end to this project. With the outbreak of the World W^r, there was great difficulty in getting sufficient timber; half of England's forests were cut down, and the rest would have been cut down if the material could have been got out easily. Of the monthly consumption of 100,000 tons of mine timber, England supplied 40,000 tons and France the rest. From 1916 to 1918 about 17,000,000 tons of timber were cut, or more than 20 years' normal cut. The report of the Forestry Subcommittee of the Ministry of Reconstruction is outlined. The measures recom- mended were adopted in the law of September 1, 1919, which created a Forest Commission with broad powers and an appropriation of £3,500,000. The reviewer suggests that estimates of costs and of returns may be somewhat optimistic, and that allowance was not made for a possible future drop in prices as home production increases, but points out that there are other advantages, such as insuring an emergency supply as well as making productive large areas of waste land, whose value cannot be estimated. — W. N. Sparhawk. 150. ScnusTER, Matjhaus. Die wirtschaftliche Hegung urid Ausnutzung der bayeris- chen Hohen Rhon. [The economic development and use of the Bavarian High Rhon.] Natur- wiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 1-10. 1920. — The Bavarian High Rhon Mt. region is noted for its large areas of unused meadowland, which because of soil and location are unfit for agricultural use. During the war, and for a considerable time previous, this territory had been practically neglected. It is known that as late as the end of the eighteenth century, the region was one of considerable economic importance; this was due chiefly to the efforts of the abbots of Fulda, who developed the limited mineral resources and the numerous springs around Briickenau, and also made use of the large, uncultivated meadows in the mountains as pastures for horses and cattle. At present, the whole region is dead and awaits a resurrec- tion. Its agricultural value is low; it has no great advantage over other areas in its mineral resources. The extensive mountain meadows, however, can and must be utilized for cattle grazing, in order to assist in the economic restoration of industrial Germany. — J. Roeser. 151. Taylor, T. W. Kurrajong as a fodder tree. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 186-188. 1920. — The cultivation of kurrajong {Sterculia diver sijolia) for fodder purposes is advocated. This species is one of the best fodder trees as a stand-by in times of drought, as well as a tree that is very ornamental and useful for shade purposes on the open plains. — C. F. Korsiian. 152. TuBEUF, Karl Freiherr von. Uber die Zweckmassigkeit der Zusammenlegung Kleinparzellierten Waldbesitzes. [Concerning the necessity of consolidating small parcelled-off forest holdings.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 155-162. Fig. 1-3. 1920.— The author describes three examples of forest areas, subdivided into small holdings with dis- tinct division lines, which he found on the foothills of the Alps; namely, at Fiissen, at Kohl- grub, and at Brannenburg. In the case of the first two, where long strips of forest, each pri- vately owned, are separated by strips of meadowland; the forest is injurious to the growth of grass in the meadows; the open meadows leave the forest open to severe damage by windfall, etc. ; and there is no system or definite plan of utilization of the forest product. In the last- mentioned case, a steep mountain side of approximately 155 ha is parcelled into 60 separate holdings, these being in narrow strips parallel to the slope and separated by wide lanes, 10-30 meters wide. Some of the strips themselves are but 8 meters wide. The consolidation of the holdings on the tract under one management will mean uniform management and harvesting No. 1, February, 1921] FORESTRY 21 of product and closer utilization of the soil, since all of the lanes but one will be allowed to regenerate. The revenue derived would be pro-rated according to the area held by each member of the association or ownership, and the yield would be increased five or six times. Statistics show that the average yield from small holdings is 2 cubic meters of wood per year per ha, while on state forests, it amounts to 4^Q cubic meters. In North Germany, the formation of forest associations by direct state aid is desirable to secure reforestation on the large plains; in South Germany it is desirable in order to prevent the damage resulting from parcelling of woodlands into small tracts; and in the mountains in order to introduce uniform and efficient methods of logging. The demands of the time call for utmost utilization of the soil.—/. Roeser. 153. WiLBRAND. Eichenhochwald. [Oak high forest.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 183- 189. 1920. — Oak is one of the most valuable and necessary woods, and is in great demand, especially in large sizes. It should always be grown to produce large-sized material, and the smaller sizes wanted can be obtained as by-products, from thinnings. For short rotations spruce, pine, and beech are more profitable. Oak grows slowly, and needs plenty of light. It should always be grown in pure stand (during the first part of the rotation) ; and best results follow clear cutting of small areas, with planting, and cultivation of garden crops for two years between the rows. After the stems have made their height-growth and the crowns have begun to form, thinnings should commence, and should follow every 4 or 5 years, so as to keep the crowns of the reserves always free and prevent dying off of even the lower branches. This will prevent dead knots. Beech can be under-planted when the boles have reached their full height, after the crowns have started to spread. This method will result in the maximum possible clear bole, in regularly spaced annual rings, which is an advantage for many purposes, and in reasonably fast growth. — W. N. Spar hawk. 154. Zeller, S. IM. Hvmiidity in relation to moisture imbibition by wood and to spore germination on wood. Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 7:51-74. PI. 1, 5 Jig. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 400. 155. ZiMMER, W. J. The need of softwood introduction. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 184-185. 1920. — A brief discussion of the demand for softwoods, and an argument for more extensive planting of pines. In a list of trees reported to be growing in the State Nursery at Macedon, Victoria, many of which measure up to 108 feet in height and a stem girth of more than 9 feet, ten North American conifers are noted. — C. F. Korstian. 156. ZoN, Raphael. Forests and human progress. Geog. Rev. 10: 139-166. 1920.— The author recognizes three stages in the development of man's relation to the earth's forested areas from prehistoric times until the present. These stages are designated: (1) Civilization dominated by forests, (2) civilization overcoming the forests, and (3) civilizati n dominating forests. While forming a natural sequence, it is pointed out that the stages made unequal progress in different parts of the earth. For illustration. Central Africa and South America are now in the first stage; a considerable part of North America and Asia are in the second; but in Europe and parts of the United States the third stage is reached. The first stage deals with prehistoric and early historic man. It is traced through indirect means, as the migra- tion of races, the configuration of ancient forests, and from folk lore, myth, and the vestiges of primitive religions. The second stage denotes man's progress in the production and use of tools of an advanced and eflficient type, and shows an increasing pressure for tillable land. This stage lies for the most part within the historic period, although place names in certain parts of Europe are excellent indirect evidence of the progress of early clearings and forest settlements. The third stage shows civilization triumphant over its ancient enemy, and brings the story down to modern times. It deals with current movements and the immediate past. — E. R. Hodson. 22 GENETICS [BoT. Absts.. Vol. VII, GENETICS G. H. Shull, Editor . J. P. Kelly, Assistant Editor 157. Anonymous. [Rev. of: (1) Harrison, J. W. Heslop. A preliminary study of the effects of administering ethyl alcohol to the lepidopterous insect, Selenia bilunaria, with par- ticular reference to the offspring.- Jour. Genetics 9: 39-52. Dec, 1919. (2) Duerden, J. E. Methods of degeneration in the ostrich. Jour. Genetics 9:131-193. PI. 5-6, 8 fig. Jan., 1920.] Nature 104:609. 1920. 158. Anonymous. Vagledning pa forsSksfSlten 1920 vid Svalof och filialerna. [Guide to the experimental fields of Svalof and its branch experimental stations, for the year 1920.] 1.45 X 200 mm., 52 p., 1 map. Landskrona, 1920.— Pamphlet intended as a manual for visitors. During this year 14,059 plots (of which 94 are mass-cultures) have been laid out.— -K". F. Ossian Dahlgren. 159. Bach, Siegfried. Zweierlei Weisslinge bei Mais. [Two kinds of albinos in maize.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzlicht. 7:238-241. June, 1920.— From open-pollinated ears of maize, the author reports the occurrence of two types of albinistic seedlings. One ear produced 170 green and 4 pure white seedlings, the latter dying within a month's time. The other ear produced 160 green and 5 partially green (striped) plants which died in two months. The low proportion of albinistic seedlings is due to random open-pollination with a small amount of natural self-pollination. Author assumes that chlorophyll content in maize is dependent upon at least two pairs of factors, XX and Y Y; and that the parent ears noted above had the genotypic formulae XX Yy and XyYY respectively.—^. W. Lindstrom. 160. Baumann, E. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Rapspflanze und zur Ziichtung des Rapses. [Contributions to a knowledge of the rape plant and to the breeding of rape.] Zeitschr. Pflanzen- zlicht. 6: 139-184. 2 figs. Dec, 1918.— A program for improving the rape plant was fol- lowed through a period of nine seasons (1909-1917), together with a study of the inheritance of certain characters influencing the performance of the plant under a variety of weather con- ditions. Of the qualities concerned in making for a larger gross yield, and greater desira- bility of product, the adaptation of different varieties to climate, particularly with reference to the time of resumption of growth in spring and the latest occurrence of spring frost, was found to be of much practical importance. Of primary interest, also, were found the capacity of varieties to resist insect attack, and to occupy gaps in the stand by the development of branches. A detailed study of external morphology showed that the taller the plant, the greater was the number of internodes, and the higher the insertion of the latter on the axis. The increase in length of lateral branches of the first order from tip toward base begins as a straight line function, but toward the end is lessened considerably. A similar relation obtains in the case of branches of the first and higher orders. Generally, in plants having a long axial stem, the prunary and secondary branches are shorter, and the inflorescence more crowded.- Plants of the higher continuity states, possess in a larger measure the qualities making for increased productivity, as the different morphological elements tending toward greater yield are more numerous and better differentiated. Adaptation to a particular cli- mate is largely contingent on the capacity to form a vigorous healthy growth in fall, and to develop shoots rapidly in spring, through which damage by late frosts and insects is resisted. An excessively vigorous growth, on the other hand, may bring about a spindling condition, encourage decay, and render the crop more subject to late spring frosts. In all cases, varie- ties and races requiring the longer periods for maturing gave the greater yields. The per- formance of species or genera making for adaptability to climate is an expression of the irritability of its cells to thermal stimuli. The importance of physiological data derived from breeding experiments to the ecology and the distribution of plants is emphasized.— C/iar/es Drechsler. No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 23 161. Becker, J. BeitrSge zur Ziichtung der Kohlgewachse. [Contribution to the breeding of the Brassicas.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7:91-99. Dec, 1919. — Discusses the necessity of seed selection. Outlines a method whereby the four best plants are selected from a good variety. These four plants are over-wintered and planted together the following year. Pods from each plant are harvested separately, and each pod is handled as a unit. Seeds of each are sown the following spring, and each individual seedling is grown in a pot and trans- planted to the field. Undesirable lines and plants are eliminated after taking careful data on plant characters, production, and food value. The ten best plants are selected, and the following year the four best are again grown in an isolation plot. A second selection of plants is made in the fall and carefully over-wintered. These produce seed for the main crop. A single Brassica plant produces 2100 to 15,000 seeds — sometimes as high as 36,000. — The writer favors the use of plants for seed production which themselves have produced well-developed heads. States that different sorts should be 400 to 500 meters apart in the field to prevent cross-pollination. — H. K. Hayes. 162. Becker, J. Serologische Untersuchungen auf dem Gebiete von Pflanzenbau und Pflanzenzucht. [Serological investigations in the realms of plant culture and plant breeding.] Landwirtsch. Jahrb. 53:245-276. 1919.— By the use of serums prepared by injecting plant extracts into animals it is possible to distinguish between seeds which are so nearly alike that by examination it is difficult to classify them; for example, seeds of Brassica napus and B. rapa. It is also believed that it will be possible to determine genetical differences, by this means, where no morphological differences can be made out, in closely related individuals. — D. F. Jones. 163. Blakeslee, a. F. Unlike reaction of different individuals to fragrance in Verbena flowers. Science 48:298-299. Sept. 20, 1918.— On the basis of susceptibility to the fra- grance of two varieties of Verbena, A and B, 48 persons could be classified into two groups. The one group, of 32 persons, was susceptible to fragrance in variety A but not to any in B; for the other group or 16 persons the reverse was true. — Edgar Altenburg. 164. Blaringhem, L. Couleur et sexe des fleurs. [Color and sex of flowers.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 83:892-893. June, 1920.— Many horticultural varieties of Sweet William, Dianthus barbatus, are hybrids, and sometimes show hybrid origin by a mosaic splitting, which appears only on a few shoots and only on old plants. One remarkable plant showed, during two seasons, color changes in the petals which ran parallel with the sexual development of each flower. D. barbatus is hermaphroditic and protandrous. During 5-8 days while an- thers are shedding petals are white. Within subsequent 24-48 hours stigmas become func- tional, and petals turn bright red. This abrupt change should furnish a convenient index in a study of the inheritance of those physiological conditions which are associated with the sexes. — Merle C. Coulter. 165. Blaringhem, L. Heredite et nature de la pelorie de Digitalis purpurea L. [Heredity and nature of the peloria of Digitalis purpurea L.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 171: 252-254. July, 1920. 166. Blaringhem, L. Variations de la sexualite chez les composees. [Variations in sexu- ality in the Compositae.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 83 : 1060-1062. July, 1920.— Author recalls supposition of Hildebrand and van Uexkull-Gtllenband to effect that common composites are in state of evolution away from hermaphroditism. This opinion was based on existence of florets in intermediate conditions. Author says his observations on Cen- taureas of jacea group do not support such an hypothesis. Plants from four stations gave evidences of having resulted from hybridization of C. jacea and C. nigra. In the sterile (peripheral) flowers there was pollen sterility and variation in degree of ciliation of a cer- tain part of the achene; and there were appendages, such as free stamens or deformed styles. ~J. P. Kelly. 24 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 167. Bower, F. O., J. Graham Kerr, and W. E. Agar. Lectures on sex and heredity delivered in Glasgov/, 1917-1918. 16mo vi+llQ p., 49 fig. Macmillan Co.: London, 1919. — Distinctly popular; profusely illustrated. Introduction: Terms defined (prefers "syngamy" to fertilization); nature and function of sex discussed; its features contrasted with asexual reproduction. (1) Origin of sex in plants: Origin and differentiation of sex illustrated by Ulothrix, Ectocarpus spp., Fucus spp.; likens primitive isogamous plants to plant proletariat, producing numerous offspring with little physiological capital, so that each individual when produced must depend chiefly on its own efforts. Heterogamous forms, with well-nourished eggs, are capitalists whose progeny start life with an inheritance. Parallel evolution in several lines indicates that advantage is with latter; sex process in fern and angiosperm is described. (2) Effect of fixed position on sexuality of plants : detailed discussion of fertilization mechanism in fe ns, pollination and pollen-tube growth in angiosperms; advantages of "nursing habit" in latter for their embryos. (3) Reproductive process in animals: some general principles;, differentiation of sex illustrated by Copromonas, Stylorynchus, Plasmodium; in Copromonas, discusses auto-intoxication which comes after generations of a sexual reproduction, and how unfavorable conditions favor the sex act ; sketches embryology in higher animals, early differ- entiation of gonads, continuity of germ-plasm, inheritance of acquired characters. (4) Modi- fications of reproductive process as adaptations to life on land : adaptations by various frogs and toads, representing "attempts to get rid of the free aquatic existence during the early stages of the life-history;" gross embrj^ology of chick; monotremes, marsupials, higher mam- mals; transplantation of ovaries; transmission of disease from mother to offspring. (5) Hered- ity: Physical basis of heredity, using Cyclops as example; Darwin's pangenesis, Galton's and Weism Ann's views; isolation of germ-plasm in Cyclops; inheritance of acquired characters; Mendel's law, with Andalusian fowl as example; dominance illustrated by red X white Antirrhinum [?]. (6) Heredity in man: Mendelian inheritance of brachydactyly; Galton and Pearson laws applied to inheritance of stature, insanity, special ability, assertiveness, popularity; dangers from multiplication of unfit, and differential birth-rates favoring non- intellectuals. — Merle C. Coulter. 168. Breakwell, E. Improvement of sweet sorghums. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:549-551. 1920. — Summary of methods for securing improved strains. — L. R. Waldron. 169. Brierly, W. G. Report of the division of horticulture. Minnesota Sta. Rept. 1919: 49-54. 1919. — Outlines the work on inheritance of fruit characters, on sterility in fruits, on breeding for hardiness, and on breeding and selection of vegetables. — H. K. Hayes. 170. Burns, W. Some aspects of plant genetics. Agric. Jour. India 15: 250-281. 1920. 171. Carroll, Mitchel. An extra dyad and an extra tetrad in the spermatogenesis of Camnula pellucida (Orthoptera) ; nximerical variations in the chromosome complex within the individual. Jour. Morph. 34: 375-455. H pi. Sept. 20, 1920. — Ten specimens of Cam- nula pellucida, an orthopteran of the family Acrididae, were used in this investigation. Of these, five were seemingly unique in their cytological phenomena. Conjugation during maturation of a homologous pair of supernumerary chromosomes and the occurrence of "indisputable instances" of definite numerical variations within the individual in germinal chromosome complexes in non-pathological tissue are the main things considered in the paper. — The normal constituents of the complex are constant in number, and the aberrant condition is due to the presence of a varying number of supernumeraries in different cells within an individual. This variation is not constant for the gonad, but is constant for the cyst, and probably constant for the follicle until after the first spermatocyte mitosis. — The supernumeraries are all homologous in size, form, and behavior, and are apparently geneti- cally related. Within one individual the extra element may be absent in some complexes, unpaired in some, paired in others, and present in triplicate in still others. If unpaired, it divides in only one division, usually the second. It is a matter of chance as to whether or not it goes with the accessory chromosomes. If the supernumerary is paired it behaves as any ordinary chromosome. If present in triplicate, two of the elements synapse and behave No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 25 like an ordinary chromosome, while the other behaves in the manner described for the un- paired condition. Three cases of nondisjunction were observed. In two instances it was a matter of the non-disjunction of the dyads of the supernumerary tetrad in the first matura- tion division. The third is a "case of either maturational equational non-disjunction or a peculiar type of reductional non-disjunction of the chromatids of the extra tetrad." — The occurrence and behavior of the supernumeraries without non-disjunction make it possible to have six kinds of spermatozoa; and should non-disjunction take place, two extra classes are possible. Since non-disjunction occurs, it must duplicate a whole or a part of one of the elements of a normal complex. It is obvious that the behavior of the supernumeraries must influence the Mendelian ratios in any system of allelomorphs which may be carried by them, since certain loci may exist in a double, treble, quadruple, or quintuple condition. These various valences may be present in different germ cells of the same individual. — Mary T. Harman. 172. Castle, W. E. Whitman and Riddle on orthogenetic evolution in pigeons. Amer. Nat. 54: 188-192. Mar.-Apr., 1920. — A critical but appreciative review of this monumental work. Whitman believed his experiments to prove that Mendelism was relatively limited in its application, but Castle shows that the results may be interpreted in conformity with present Mendelian theory. — L. J. Cole. 173. CoRRENS, C. Pathologie und Vererbung bei Pfianzen und einige Schliisse daraus fiir die vergleichende Pathologie. [Pathology and inheritance in plants and a conclusion derived therefrom for comparative pathology.] Mediz. Klinik. 16:354-359. April, 1920. 174. CoRRENS, C. Eine gegliickte Verschiebung des Geschlechtsverhaltnisses. Botan- ische Versuche zur Frage nach der Entstehung des Geschlechts. [A successful modification of the sex-ratio. Botanical researches on the question of the origin of sex.] Natur u. Technik 2:65-71. 2 fig. 1920. 175. Coulter, M. C. [Rev. of: Castle, W. E. Piebald rats and the theory of genes. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S.] 5: 126-130. 1 fig. April, 1919.] [See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 235.] Bot. Gaz. 70:326. Oct., 1920. 176. Crozier, W. J. The intensity of assertive pairing in Chromodoris. Amer. Nat. 54: 182-184. 2 fi^. 1920. — This article is an additional note concerning a report published by Crozier in Journal of Ex-perimental Zoology in 1918 [See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 1472] in which he shows that in the pairing of Chromodoris there is a "considerable degree of assortive con- jugation with respect to size." In that report regression lines showing mean lengths of mates pairing with individuals of a given length class were based on "artificial" measure- ments; that is, the soft bodies were somewhat flattened and accordingly lengthened by the process by which they were measured. In this report the relationship between the "artifi- cial" and normal measurements of 74 individuals is established, and the regression plots are revised in terms of the normal lengths. "The apparent intensity of homogamy in Chro- modoris is but little affected, if anything perhaps slightly improved, by the reduction of the original figures to the natural scale." — Sylvia L. Parker. 177. Davenport, C. B. Heredity of twin births. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 17:75-77. 1920. — The incidence of twin births in the general population is about 1 per cent, but in cer- tain families it rises to as high as 15 per cent, indicating that the tendency to twin produc- tion is an hereditary trait. Only biovular twinning is considered in the present communi- cation, and only such matings are selected for analysis as have produced at least two pairs of twins. In such cases the immediate relatives — parents, brothers, and sisters, — are found to produce twins from four to eight times as frequently as does the population at large. This is about equally true for relatives on the father's side and on the mother's side, which shows that the male exerts an influence on biovular twin production commensurate with that of the female. In explanation of the nature of this influence of the male, it is pointed out that 26 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, while there is evidence that double ovulation is relatively common, the probability that viable twins will be produced is dependent upon the chance that both ova will be fertilized and that both will be free from lethal factors. These prerequisites are dependent as much upon the sperm as upon the egg and it is known that fecundity and the presence or absence of lethal factors are hereditary traits. — C. H. Danforth. 178. Davis, Bradley M. [Rev. of Gager, C. Stuart. Heredity and evolut'on in plants. U X 20 cm., xi + 265 p., IIS fig. P. Blakiston's Son & Co.: Philadelphia, 1920.] Science 52: 410. Oct, 29, 1920. [See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1672.] 179. Dembowski, Jan. Das Kontinuitatsprinzip und seine Bedeutung in der Biologie. [The principle of continuity and its significance in biology.] Vortr. u. Aufsatze ii. Entwick- lungsmech. Org. 21. 132 p. 1919. 180. Dexter, John S. Albino vertebrates. Science 52: 130-131. Aug. 6, 1920.— The author makes note of a pure albino grackle (Quiscalus quisctda aeneus), two albino speci- mens of Richardson's spermophile (Citellus richardsoni) , and a very light brown albinistic crow. — Sewall Wright. 181. [Diener, Richard.] The law of hybridizing discovered by Richard Diener. 20 X 26 cm., 15 p., 8 fig. Richard Diener, Kentfield, California. [1920.] — Author claims to have made the following discoveries: (1) AVhen parents are alike in size, the size of about 12 per cent of the offspring in the Fi will be exactly double that of either parent, while the remain- ing 88 per cent will range in size between the size of the individual parents and their sum. (2) When parents differ markedly in size, the offspring will be smaller than either parent if the smaller parent is the mother, and very little larger than the larger parent if the latter is the mother. (3) The pollen-bearing parent is always the dominating factor in changes of form and color. (4) In attempting to derive new colors always use a white flower as .the pollen parent "to break up the colors." (5) Among fowls, if two individuals are mated and the female offspring are mated back to the male parent, about one-third of the offspring of this second cross will be double the size of the animals originally mated. Basis of these generalizations are not specifically set forth. — G. H. Shull. 182. Dreyer, Th. F. A suggested mechanism for the inheritance of acquired characters. South African Jour. Sci. 15:272-277. 1917. — Author attempts to show that observed facts supporting Weismann's theory are meager — that acceptance of theory by younger genera- tion is partly a matter of sentiment. The character and properties of chromatin, lymph, and linin are reviewed. The linin being divided equally at cell division is considered as hereditary material on a par with the chromatin. A metabolic-products theory of heredity assumes the egg yolk to be specific for species, and assumes that it is a linin compound formed from radicals of the various tissues of the body. Reactions occur in different portions, so that it is not homogeneous; segmentation can thus split off different combinations of radicals which are built up into different tissues. Environmental factors may cause some of these radicals in the tissues to change so that the new yolk formed from the tissue radicals will contain new radicals from the altered tissues. Thus acquired characters could be repro- duced in the next generation in the absence of the causative stimulus. — /. L. Collins. 183. DuERDEN, J. E. Parallel mutations in the ostrich. Science 52: 165-168. Aug. 20, 1920. — Ostriches are degenerate in some respects, but highly specialized in others. The North African Ostrich {Struthio camelus) and the South African {S. australis) differ in well- marked characters, at least one of which (feathering of head) is believed to be a simple Mende- lian character. In other respects they are similar, and the author believes parallel evolution- ary changes are in progress in them. The similarity in this respect is attributed to parallel mutations in germ -plasms of common origin. The suggestion is made that while the majority of factors are static, some may be increasing in potency while others are dwindling. — L. J. Cole. No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 27 184. Dunn, L. C. Independent genes in mice. Genetics 5:344-361. May, 1920. — Author tests for linkage of certain color factors in mice and finds that the following relation- ships exist: Pink-eye and piebald spotting are independent; pink-eye and non-agouti are independent; black-eyed white spotting and piebald spotting are independent; black-eyed white spotting and agouti are independent; black-eyed white spotting and pink-eye are independent; piebald spotting and non-agouti, give indications of slight linkage, 46.23 ±1.2 per cent, "of doubtful significance."— Thus four independent groups of genes are established for mice with a possibility of a fifth. Two other groups are considered as possibilities from the data of other investigators. — C. C. Little. 185. Dunn, L. C. Linkage in mice and rats. Genetics 5: 325-343. May, 1920. — Reviews established cases of linkage in mice and rats; albinism, pink-eye and red-eye in rats; albinism and pink-eye in mice. — On basis of extensive experiments, cross-overs of 14.5 per cent between genes for albinism and pink-eye in mice. Crossing over occurs in both sexes, in males 13.65 =b 3.81 per cent and in females 15.91 ± 0.466 per cent. This difference between sexes is 3.81 times its probable error. In rats linkage between albinism and red-eye results in 1.8 =h 0.54 per cent cross-overs; albinism — pink-eye cross-over = 21.1 ± 2.92 per cent. Red-eye — pink-eye crossovers = 18.3 ± 0.38 per cent. Linear order of genes is indicated. Males in latter cross show 15.56 ± 0.538 per cent cross-overs, females, 20.46 ± 0.525 per cent. This difference is 6.51 times its probable error. These sex distinctions are probably due to sexual differences not yet discovered, in either structure or functioning of chromatin. — C. C. Little. 186. Ebstein, E. Zur Frage des Vorkommens von Kretinen und Albinos in Lerbach im Harz. [On the occurrence of cretins and albinos in Lerbach in the Harz.] Die Naturwissen- schaften 6:562-565. 1918. — In Die Harzreise, Heine notes presence in Lerbach of cretins {dumme Kropfleute) and albinos {weisze Mohren). The consequent ill-repute of Lerbach has clung to it until present times. From medical literature and correspondence author finds that cretins existed in Lerbach at the time of Heine's excursion in the Harz (1824), but that none have been known since 1830. Later lay references to cretinism are shown to be essen- tially repetitions of Heine's statement without examination of facts. Author finds that at least two albinos lived in Lerbach in 1824, and that nine cases in three families exist at pres- ent time. Attention is called to erroneous confusion of cretinism and albinism as manifes- tations of same condition, and distinctions are drawn between cretinism and simple dwarf and goitrous cases. Diminution in cretinism is ascribed to failure of extreme cases to repro- duce, and industrial development of Lerbach district leading to improvement in social and hygienic conditions, and introduction of fresh blood lines. Probable sources of Heine's information are discussed, and a geological description of Lerbach district is included. — R. E. Clausen. 187. Eddy, W. H., H. Lake and A. B. Lyman. Report of committee examining Minne- sota State Fruit-breeding Farm. Minnesota Hortic. 48: 36, 37. 1920. — Gives a brief resum6 of the most important work carried on at the farm. — H. K. Hayes. 188. Elderton, Ethel M. Life-history albums. Biometrika 12 : 373-374. Nov., 1919. — This is a brief discussion of the relative merits of Galton's and Taylor's family history albums, both from the point of view of the people throughout the country who may be induced to fill out the records, and of the statistical workers who will use the completed records in solving problems in heredity and eugenics. The Personal and Family History Register, compiled by Dr. Taylor places, author thinks, more emphasis than is justifiable on environ- ment as a factor in improving the race, and gives too much space to information about direct ancestors, leaving none for collaterals, while cousins are as closely related to one another as grandparents to grandchildren, and data about them would be much more accurate and easily obtained. Author feels that both Dr. Taylor's Register and Galton's Life History Album are too bulky and that the concise "Records of Family Faculties" issued by Galton in 1884 would very well meet the needs of the statistical worker and should be reissued.— Sylvia L. Parker. 28 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 189. FiscHEL, Alfred. Ursachen tierischer Farbkleidung. [Causes of animal coat color.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. Org. 46:202-209. 1920. 190. Fischer, H. Pflanzenmetamorphose und Abstammungslehre. [Plant metamorphosis and evolution.] Die Naturwissenschaften 8: 268-271. 1920. — General discussion of evolution of plant organs and structures, with examples of problems and interpretations of plant meta- morphosis. Series may be constructed which show orthogenetic trend, but this is not result of inheritance of acquired characters. Causes of orthogenesis are unknown, but can be only partially environmental. Evolution is not always in direction of utility, but may lead to extinction of some Hues of descent. Changes resulting from alteration of living conditions are only certainly known as consequence of domestication, and they have no utility in preser- vation of species. — R. E. Clausen. 191. Fisher, R. A. The correlation between relatives on the supposition of Mendelian inheritance. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh 52: 399-433. J^fig. 1919. — Derivation of formulae for correlation between direct and collateral relatives for characters determined by Mende- lian factors, making allowance for different degrees of dominance, for assortative mating, for multiple allelomorphism, and for coupling. By means of fraternal correlation influ- ence of dominance is distinguished from environmental causes of variability. Best available figures for human measurements show little or no indication of non-genetic causes. Marital correlation is probably genetic, not somatic. Hypothesis of cumulative Mendelian factors fits facts very accurately. — John Rice Miner. 192. Freeman, Geo. F. A progress report on cotton breeding at the Sultanic Agricultural Society. Sultanic Agric. Soc. Bull. 3. 16 p. 1920. — After discussing factors to be considered in breeding work with cotton, a,uthor outlines plan followed by him in Egypt, dealing with selection of mother plants, handling of pedigree-plant plots and increase plots, study of vegetative characters, flowering curves, yield and lint characters. — T. H. Kearney. 193. Gallaud, M. Une lignee de Giroflees a anomalies multiples et hereditaires. [A line of wall flowers with multiple hereditary anomalies.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 171: 47-49. July, 1920. 194. Gassul, R. Nachtrag zu meiner Mitteilung iiber "Eine durch Generationen pra- valierende symmetrische Fingerkontraktur." [Supplement to my contribution on a symmet- rical contraction of the fingers prevailing through generations.] Deutsch. Med. Wochenschr. 44: 1450. 1918.— The original paper (Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 377) had neglected to indicate the relationships of members of the family in which a form of congenital finger contractions was reported. It is now possible to present a chart of the family tree from which it appears that the peculiarity may behave as a (dominant) Mendelian trait. — C. H. Danforth. 195. GooDALE, H. D. Practical results from studies on egg production. Massachusetts Sta. Bull. 191:97-104. 1 fig. 1919. — Paper is divided into three sections: I. Inbreeding. II. Is the influence of the male or of the female the more important? III. The exclusion of parasites. — I. A small number of data are presented which show that both inbreeding and outbreeding may either succeed or fail. The criterion of judgment on inbreeding must be the results in each individual case. — II. Author states that "the view that high fecundity does not descend from mother to daughter but does descend from mother to son, or from father to both sons and daughters is now generally accepted." Reports that "an experiment was made in which the male from a low line (breed not stated) was mated with several high pro- ducers belonging to a high line and at the same time to several low producers." "The off- spring of the high producers averaged 49.2 winter eggs against an average of the mothers and their sisters of 52.5 eggs. Nearly all were high producers. On the other hand, the offspring of the poor layers averaged only 11.6 winter eggs. In this experiment high production clearly descended from mothers to daughters In still another experiment a male belong- ing to a low line was mated to a female belonging to another low line. Most of the offspring No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 29 were high producers These experiments show that we are dealing with a situation that is complicated in many ways." III. Author points out necessity of control of all para- sites in studying the inheritance of fecundity and describes "the quarantine method" of rearing chicks. — W. A. Lippincott. 196. GooDALE, H. D. Is the inheritance of egg production an insoluble problem? Jour. Amer. Assoc. Instr. and Invest. Poultry Hush. 5:73, 74. 1919. — Author points out that while improved egg production through selection is a demonstrated fact, the laws of the inheritance of egg production have not been established. The latter present a complex prob- lem because egg production is a complex character made up of several subsidiary characters, the inheritance of each of which must be determined in advance. Five groups of difficulties in the way of solving the problem of the inheritance of egg production are suggested in the expressed hope that means of meeting them may be devised. These center around (1) the purity of stock, it being unlikely that stock pure for any of the hereditary factors concerned in egg production is in existence; (2) the need for larger numbers than may usually be secured from a single pair; (3) the character is expressed in one sex only, making it necessary to judge the genetic composition of males by their daughters; (4) the character is very sensitive to environmental diflferences which are difficult to avoid; and (5) the presence of insidious but unrecognized disease in the experimental flock, and the problems of disease resistance. — W. A. Lippincott. 197. GowEN, John W. Studies in milk secretion, V. On the variations and correlations of milk secretion with age. Genetics 5: 111-188. 9 fig. Mar., 1920.— A thorough biometric analysis of milk production in a single herd of Jersey cattle, involving 1741 eight-month lactation records. The mean and standard deviation are given for each age, together with the other constants necessarj' for fitting each distribution with the approximate skew curve. It is pointed out that there is a sufficiently close approach to the normal curve to justify use of the latter in many cases. Milk yield is found to rise to a maximum at 7.2 years, slowly falling thereafter, the whole curve being fitted best by a logarithmic function. The varia- bility at different ages rises and falls in a somewhat similar curve which is fitted with a cubic parabola. The correlation between the yields at any two ages is found to average +0.54, there being little difference between the value for successive lactations and lactations more widely separated in time. The correlations between the yield in one lactation and the total in various combinations of lactations were also found, that between the first and four following, for example, being +0.65, and that between the first four and the fifth being +0.69. Regres- sion formulae are given for calculating the most probable yield in a given year or group of years on the basis of a single lactation. The use of these formulae in culling a herd is discussed. — Sewall Wright. 198. GowEN, John W. Studies in milk secretion. VI. On the variations and correla- tions of butter-fat percentage with age in Jersey cattle. Genetics 5 : 249-324. 8 fi^. May, 1920. — The material for the study is taken from 1713 eight-months records of pure-bred Jersey cows, made in one herd under uniform conditions and management. Correlation coefficients and observed and theoretical means indicate the highest percentage butter-fat with the first lactation period, and a slight decline in percentage butter-fat with each addi- tional lactation period. The standard deviation and the coefficient of variation for the butter-fat percentage for different ages — or succeeding lactation periods — remained approxi- mately the same. The percentage fat for any one lactation period of a cow is an accurate indication of the butter-fat percentage to be expected in future lactation periods. — The dif- ference for the correlation coefficients for one lactation's butter-fat percentage with that of another lactation, and for one lactation's butter-fat percentage with the butter-fat percent- age over four lactation periods, gives a means of measuring the effect of environmental changes on the butter-fat percentage. It was found that the internal mechanism of the cow, which is probably hereditary, exercises six times the effect, in controlling butter-fat percentages, that the environmental changes have. The factors that control the butter-fat percentages have the same relative strength throughout the life of the cow to the exclusion of any group of factors acting for short periods. — R. R. Graves. 30 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 199. Grier, N. M. Variation and distribution of leaves in Sassafras. Biometrika 12: 372-373. Nov., 1919. — Three kinds of leaves are found on Sassafras trees — three-lobed, two-lobed, and single-lobed. Single-lobed leaves constitute about two-thirds of the foliage and are found at the ends of the branches. Two- and three-lobed leaves are found in shaded positions on the tree and can be produced on terminal branches by shading. — Karl Sax. 200. Grosser, Otto. Die Lehre vom spezifischen Eiweiss und die Morphologic, mit besonderer Anwendung auf Vererbungsfragen und den Bau der Plazenta. [The doctrine of specific proteins and morphology, with special application to questions of heredity and the structure of the placenta.] Anat. Anzeiger 53 : 49-57. May, 1920. — Not alone chemical struc- ture but also living structure is significant in determining morphology. Expression "organ- forming substances" might well be replaced by "organ-forming germinal regions" (His, 1874). Inheritance may be assumed to depend on specificity of proteins. Single molecule is not to be regarded as anlage of organ, but only in interrelation with other molecules. Pla- centa excludes specific proteins of mother until they have been digested, whereby their speci- ficity is lost. Mother is thus prevented from exercising larger influence in heredity. — A. Franklin Shull. 201. Hagedoorn, a. L., en A. C. Hagedoorn-van Vorstheuvel la Brand. Het overgeerfde moment bij bacterieele ziekten. [The inherited factor in bacterial infection.] Nederlandsch Tijdschr. voor Geneeskunde 63: 179-182. 1919. — Experimenting with mice for the study of inheritance of body-weight, authors crossed a small Japanese mouse with a strain of great white mice. These experiments had resulted in a great collection of Fi and F2 animals (some thousands), as also of back-crosses between Fi's and white or Japanese mice. In the spring of 1919 an epidemic disease broke out and made great ravages among the mice colonies. In the blood of 5 animals a specific Staphylococcus could be observed. All pure Japanese animals (60) died; white mice, inhabiting the same cages, survived. A great difference in susceptibility for this Staphylococcus-disease could be observed. In the other cages, this susceptibility was shown to be a Mendelian character and a recessive. The Fi-animals survived; from the Fz-animals 91 survived and 34 died (expected 93.75:31.25); back-crosses of Fi's with Japanese mice gave 32 dead animals and 25 immunes; out of back- crosses between Fi's and white mice only one of 51 animals died. These numerical relations make sure that the immunity against the Staphylococcus-inieciion is a dominant Mendelian factor according to the monohybrid scheme, susceptibility being the recessive. The first case of a simple inheritance of disease-resistance. — M. J. Sirks. 202. Haldane, J. B. S. Note on a case of linkage in Paratettix. Jour. Genetics 10: 47-51. July, 1920. — Naboxjrs (Jour. Genetics 3: and 7:) showed that the various color pat- terns in the grouse-locust, Paratettix texanus, are due to a series of Mendelian factors which are multiple allelomorphs or else very intensely linked, plus a factor 0 which is allelomorphic to its absence. A re-examination of his data has demonstrated that in males the factor 0 actually shows a crossover value of about 24 per cent with any of the other factors, and in females a crossover value of about 46 per cent. The factor 0 thus exhibits a fairly marked linkage with all the others in males, and a very slight linkage in females. Slight differences in the crossover values appear between 0 and certain of the other pairs. If the so-called multiple allelomorphs are really closely linked factors, then their presence in the heterozy- gous condition may increase the linkage, since heterozygous factors have been shown to cause such increases in Drosophila. The type of linkage in Paratettix seems to be intermediate between the type found in Drosophila and Bombyx where no crossing over occurs in the diga- metic sex, and the type in plants and mammals where linkage is equal in the two sexes. — H. H. Plough. 203. Haralson, C. Minnesota State Fruitbreeding Farm in 1919. Minnesota Hortic. 48: 34, 35. 1920. — Reports briefly on progress in testing new varieties. — H. K. Hayes. No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 31 204. Harris, J. Arthur. Practical universality of field heterogeneity as a factor influenc- ing plot yields. Jour. Agric. Res. 19:279-314. 10 fig. July 1, 1920.— Analysis is made of actual yields of plot tests reported by investigators for various root, hay, grain, and fruit crops. All fields were found to be heterogeneous, though they had been carefully selected for yield tests because of apparent uniformity. Soil heterogeneity is shown to have a real physical and chemical basis. — Author concludes that it is practically impossible to secure fields suitable for a direct comparison of yields. This fact emphasizes need of greater care in agronomic technique and of more extensive use of statistical method in analysis of the data from plot trials. — See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 480. — C. M. Woodworth. 205. Hartley, C. P. Better seed corn. U. S. Dept. Agric. Farmers' Bull. 1175. 14 P-, 9 fi^. 1920. — It is stated that low yields due to poor seed can be prevented by selecting seed corn (maize) in the field in the fall, and instructions are given for gathering, storing, grading, and testing the selected ears. Four experiments are summarized briefly as follows: (1) Varie- ties that produce most in some states are among the poorest in others. (2) Seed ears from the highest yielding rows of ear-to-row breeding plats have repeatedly produced better than ears taken from poorer rows. (3) Well-preserved seed was found to produce higher yields than seed injured by exposure, although both kinds germinated equally well. The difference between the two kinds is accentuated when they are grown in fertile soil. (4) Diseased ears or apparently healthy ears from diseased stalks give lower yields than disease-free ears from normal stalks. — /. H. Kempton. 206. Heal, John. Hippeastrum (Amaryllis). Gard. Chron. 68:60. July 31, 1920.— Recounts the unsatisfactory results of crossing Hippeastrum pardinum with other Hip- peastrums. Credits H. Leopoldii with more influence than any other Hippeastrum in pro- duction of best forms. — J. Marion Shull. 207. Heilbrunx, L. V. Studies in artificial parthenogenesis. III. Cortical change and the initiation of maturation in the egg of Cumingia. Biol. Bull. 38: 317-339. May, 1920. — When the egg of Cumingia is shed into sea-water, the first maturation spindle has formed, but no polar bodies are thrown off unless the egg is fertilized or treated with the proper reagents. The immature unfertilized egg is surrounded by a stiff vitelline membrane which tightly encloses the fluid cytoplasm and effectively prevents the throwing off of polar bodies; it is only when the egg is released from this restraint that maturation can proceed. Such a release from restraint can be accomplished in three ways: by membrane elevation, by mem- brane swelling, and by rupture of the membrane. Substances which themselves have low surface tension produce a lowered surface tension of the membrane, and this results in its elevation from the egg surface. Acids, alkalis, and certain salt solutions cause the vitelline membrane to swell. The membrane may be removed from the egg by shaking, or it may be caused to rupture by immersion in dilute sea-water. Maturation in Cumingia is not depend- ent upon an increase in oxidation. Cortical change in Cumingia produces no increase in permeabilit}'^ either to dissolved substances or to water. — Bertram G. Smith. 208. Heinricher, E. £in Versuch Samen, allenfalls Pfltanzen, aus der Kreuzung einer Laubholzmistel mit der Tannenmistel zu gewinnen. [An attempt to secure seeds, perhaps plants, from the cross between the mistletoe of deciduous trees with that of the Coniferae.] Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell. 37:392-398. Dec, 1919. 209. Henning, Hans. Mnemelehre oder Tierpsychologie? [The mneme theory or ani- mal psychology?] Biol. Zentralbl. 39: 187-192. April, 1919.— Controversial article in which rather incidentally author denies identity of "individual memory" and heredity.— A. Franklin Shull. 210. Hooper, J. J. Inheritance of Jersey colors. Jour. Dairy Sci. 2:290-292. 1919.— This paper deals with the inheritance of self vs. broken color (white spotting), tongue color and switch color, in Jersey cattle. The data are largely taken from the American Jersey herd books. Broken color mated to broken color was found to give 194 broken color to 15 self 32 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, color; broken-colored bull to self-colored cow gave 179 broken color to 257 self color; and self colored bulls and cows gave 425 self color to 75 broken color. Citations of the progeny of certain bulls are given. — Mating white-tongue parents gave 71 per cent white-tongued. Mating parents of white switch gave 91 per cent white switch. — The suggestion is made, based on the fact that roan had disappeared from the Station herd, that the old roan Jersey is due to a dominant factor. — John W. Gowen. 211. HosKiNG, A. Hybrid Calceolarias, Card. Chron. 68:47, 61. 2 fig. July 24, 31, 1920. — A list of hybrid Calceolarias with brief descriptions and statement of parentage. — J. Marion Shull. 212. Jaramillo, p. J., and F. J. Chittenden. On double stocks. Jour. Roy. Hortic. Soc. 44: 74^82. 2 pi. 1919. — Correlation shown between double flowering and vigor of plant at time of pricking out, and confirming the observations of Miss Saunders to that effect. — J. Marion Shull. 213. Kathariner, L. Die Entwicklungsgeschichte der digenetischen Trematoden und die Kontinuitat des Keimplasmas. [The ontogeny of the digenetic trematodes and the con- tinuity of the germ-plasm.] Zool. Anzeig. 51 : 220-223. Aug., 1920. 214. Kiessling, L. tJber eine Mutation in einer reinen Linie von Hordeum distichiim L, [On a mutation in a pure line of Hordeum distichum L.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 19: 145-159. June, 1918. — In the ninth generation of a pure line of Hordeum distichum L. a mutation occurred which is strikingly different from the parent form in many morphological and physiological characters. In appearance the mutant is somewhat larger than the unmu- tated plants and is lighter green in color, due to a reduction in chlorophyll. When the mutant was crossed with the parent form, all differences were inherited as if due to a single point- mutation. The author entertains the hypothesis that the mutation is concerned primarily with a reduction in chlorophyll, and that the morphological variations are merely expressions of the plant's readjustment to the decreased chlorophyll content. — W. H. Eyster. 215. Kronacher, C. Die deutsche Schweinezucht und Haltung nach dem Kriege. [German swine breeding and maintenance after the war.] Flugschr. Deutsch. Ges. Ziich- tungskunde 41: 1-47. 1918. — The author emphasizes the importance to Germany of com- plete independence from foreign countries in regard to food supply and the consequent importance of raising the swine population to its prewar level. The problem is primarily one of feeding rather than of breeding, and the first consideration is the basing of German swine husbandry wholly on home-grown feeds. As regards breeding, most stress should be placed on constitutional vigor, the extreme development of early maturity, and ease of fattening having proved deleterious in this respect. — Sewall Wright. 216. Kronacher, C. AUgemeine Tierzucht. Ein Lehr- und Handbuch fxir Studierende und Ziichter. Vierte Abteilung (Abschnitt VI des Gesamtwerkes) : Die Ziichtung. [General animal breeding. A text and handbook for students and breeders. 4th part (Section VI of the complete work): Breeding. 8 vo. 357 p. Paul Parey: Berlin, 1919.— The first chapter, 210 pages, deals comprehensively with selection, including discussion of systems of mating, — cross-breeding, pure-breeding, inbreeding, etc., — considerations in the judgment of pedigree, performance, and conformation, discussion of fancy points, technical methods of judging, special considerations in judging breeding stock, etc. — The second chapter, 137 pages, deals with the physiology of reproduction in the domestic animals. — Sewall Wright. 217. Leake, H. Martin. Report on the maintenance and improvement of the quality of Egyptian cotton and the increase of its yield. Ministry Agriculture Egypt. Cairo. 38 p. 1920.— Author was invited by Egyptian Ministry of Agriculture to make "recommendations with a view to the maintenance and improvement of the qualit}' of Egyptian cotton and the increase of its yield." His report deals with such matters as relation of commercial supply No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 33 and demand for particular types of cotton, to work of breeder and grower; impurity of com- mercial varieties in Egypt due to crossing and seed mixture; and relation of yield and quality to physical environment. He outlines a program of economic, botanical, and agricultural investigations looking to improvement of crop with especial emphasis upon breeding and increase of pure lines to replace present mixed commercial stocks. He discusses complica- tions caused by uncontrolled introduction of new varieties. — T. H. Kearney. 218. L^CAiLLON, A. Sur la reproduction et le developpement des bivoltins accidentels et de la premiere generation qui en derive, chez le Bombyx du M(irier. [On the production and development of accidental bivoltins and the first generation derived from them in the silkworm (Bombyx mori). Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 168: 366-368. 1919. 219. LiPPiNCOTT, W. A. Pedigreeing poultry. Kansas Agric. Exp. Sta. Giro. 67. 16 p., 10 fig. 1918.— Methods of pedigreeing poultry, including methods of marking breeders and offspring, trapnests, methods of pedigree hatching, chick and mating indexes, marking of eggs, flock breeding records, pedigree blanks and egg records are given. — H. D. Goodale. 220. Little, C. C. Alternative explanations for exceptional color classes in doves and canaries. Amer. Nat. 54: 162-175. Mar.-Apr., 1920. — The author reviews the explanation based on partial sex-linkage and non-disjunction previously offered to account for the appear- ance of exceptional color classes in doves and canaries, and concludes that neither is adequate. He then advances the theory that these occasional cases may be the results of mutative changes of the recessive factors to their dominant allelomorphs. His view has no more proof in existing data than the others, but has the advantage of avoiding the immediate expectation of color classes which have not been reported. [His suggestion, however, that female doves and canaries may be homozygous for dominant sex-linked factors is contrary to all present experience.] — L. J. Cole. 221. Lloyd-Joxes, O., and F. A. Hays. The influence of excessive sexual activity of male rabbits. I. On the properties of the seminal discharge. Jour. Exp. Zool. 25:463-497. 1918. — The plan of the experiment as stated by the authors was "to have the male accom- plish, in as rapid succession as possible, a certain number of preliminary 'services' and then to mate him once to the breeding female from which the litter was desired. The 'end serv- ices' from which litters were secured for the progeny studies were the fifth, tenth, fifteenth and twentieth, and about an equal number of first-service litters M'ere obtained as controls. When semen studies were made, however, it was aimed to recover specimens from the first and from every fifth service thereafter; thus, in a series of twenty services, five specimens of semen would ideally be recovered for study. This ideal set of specimens from a twenty- service series was seldom obtained, however." — It was' shown that excessive sexual service causes decrease in amount of ejaculated semen, decrease in number of sperm cells per cubic millimeter, decrease in the proportion of sperm that show progressive motion, decrease in their duration of motion, decrease in percentage of fertile matings, and decrease in number of young per litter. — H. L. Ibsen. 222. LiTNDBORG, H. Arv och miljo. Befolkningspolitiska synpunkter. [Inheritance and environment. Race-political views.] Det nya Sverige [Stockholm], 14: 3-12. 1920. — Author holds that great crossing of races degenerates constitution and increases degradation. Cross- ing of races takes place in a much greater degree among the lower and poorer part of the population than among the middle classes. Author has proved by his own investigations that the lowest classes — those which are in social respect the most degenerated of the popu- lation— consist to a greater extent of individuals with other race-qualities, such as darker hair and eyes, than the great bulk of the population. The middle class has a more homo- geneous composition than the poorer ones. The biological sciences are nowadays promoting a new social evolution, by which the most important matters are life values and not wealth or other material advantages. Great and richly equipped eugenical scientific institutions must be established in all civilized countries. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren. BOTANICAX ABSTRACTS, VOL. VII, NO. 1 34 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 223. Mac-Auliffe, A. Marie et Leon. Influence du milieu parisien sur la race. [Influence of Parisian environment on the race.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 171 : 527-529. Sept., 1920. 224. MiLEwsKi, A. W. tJber Torniers experimentelle Untersuchungen, iiber das Ent- stehen pathologischer Verbildungen bei Tieren, sowie weiteres iiber experimentelles Erzielen von monstrosen Goldfischarten, [On Tornier's investigations on the origin of pathological malformations in animals as well as further consideration of the experimental attaining of monstrous goldfish species.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. Org. 44: 472-498. 1918. 225. MiLLiKBN, C. S. Some facts about citrus bud selection. California Citrograph 5:222. May, 1920. — A popular article emphasizing "bud selection" as essential for the most profitable production of citrus fruits. — Howard B. Frost. 226. Nachtsheim, Hans. Crossing-over-Theorie oder Reduplikations-hypothese? [The crossing-over theory or the reduplication hypothesis?] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 22: 127-141. 4 fig. Jan., 1920. — A critical review of Trow's modification of the Bateson- PuNNETT hypothesis of reduplication as an explanation of coupling and repulsion (linkage) (Trow, A. H., Jour. Genetics 5: 1916). Although the more recent papers were not available to the author, it is concluded that the crossing-over hypothesis, as worked out in the studies on Drosophila, offers a better explanation of the phenomena. — H. H. Plough. 227. Namyslowski, B. Etat actuel des recherches sur les phenomenes de la sexualite des Mucorinees. [The state of researches on sextiality in the Mucorineae.] Rev. G4n. Bot. 32:193-215. 9 fig. 1920. 228. Ness, H. [misprinted as N. Hess]. Experiences in plant hybridization. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16:52-60. (1919) 1920.— Author calls attention to fact that much which has been written concerning plant hybridization has been largely repetition of phenomena in stock examples. — Importance of plant hybridization was early appreciated by floricul- turists, and from them we have many forms of begonia, canna, gladioli, etc. Their work resulted from an attempt to supply a demand and few records have been kept; thus the scientific value of the work has been greatly lessened.— The uncertainty of positive results makes hybridization work by the individual a somewhat uncertain financial proposition, and thus is best done by a publicly supported institution.— Author has worked with two genera, Rubus and Quercus, that with Rubus being an Adams Fund project. Has made many crosses among which were May's dewberry (R. villosus) also called Austin, by the Early Harvest blackberry (R. argutus). In the first generation the May's was almost completely dominant, and a good population was obtained. From the reciprocal crosses he failed to obtain any progeny, neither was he successful when Early Harvest was the mother and the pollen was secured from other sources. In these experiments several attempts were made with crosses of difi"erent varieties and species of Rubus but without success until he used seedlings of the raspberry, R. rubisetus, as the maternal parent; and the influence of this parent was manifest in subsequent generations. He notes: "The most remarkable part of these phenomena appears to me to be that fertility appeared only in the most robust group of those of the Fz generation in which the raspberry was dominant; and that having once occurred, it became invariably hereditary just as though sterility was merely a passing crisis."— His work with Quercus shows that "the various individuals of a species vary widely in their affinity for foreign pollen To be successful in hybridization it is neces- sary to search out by trial individuals having the proper afiinity for the pollen to be applied. For this purpose seedlings would naturally be preferred to plants produced vegetatively."— C. E. Myers. 229. Onslow, H. The inheritance of wing colour in Lepidoptera. III. Melanism in Boarmia consortaria (var. consobrinaria, BKH.). Jour. Genetics 9:339-346. 1 pi. Mar., 1920.— Melanism of consobrinaria, crossed with the grayish speckled type, is dominant. In No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 35 four species of Geometrids, Tephrosia consonaria and T. extersaria, Boarmia abieiaria and B. consorlaria, a melanic variety has appeared in south England remote from the industrial regions of the North. That melanism is common in industrial and urban districts is explained by the correlation of a greater hardiness with melanism. Natural selection, acting more dras- tically in the manufacturing areas "where the woods and vegetation upon which the larvae feed have been largely destroyed and elsewhere contaminated with a chemical deposit," weeds out individuals of the feebler type form, but permits melanic mutants to develop. Melanics of B. consorlaria as well as of T. consonaria (var. nigra) seem to the author to be "earlier, stronger and larger than the type forms. Moreover, there is often a slight excess of melanics in most crosses."— The author calls attention to a curious inverse relationship between sex and the melanism of consobrinaria which he regards as fortuitous, though it occurs in a single inbred strain and the numbers, in at least one family, are of considerable size. This relationship appears in reciprocal crosses between the heterozygous dominant (melanic) X recessive (type): Heterozygous (melanic) 9 X recessive (type) cf gives approximately: 9 9 7 heterozygous: 9 recessive (?&9 " :7 Recessive (type) 9 X heterozygous (melanic) cT gives: — 9 9 9 heterozygous : 7 recessive cTd" 7 " : 9 Nearly half of the recorded matings between heterozygote and recessive (6 out of 14) fall into this too symmetrical scheme [that suggests an unorthodox sex-linkage or a sex-linked lethal factor destroying 25 per cent of every brood]. The numbers are small except in the fol- lowing case: recessive (type) 9 X heterozygous melanic cT, giving 64 melanic 9 9 , 49 melanic d^cf ; 49 type 9 9,60 type cf cf .— /. H. Gerould. 230. Fetch, T. Variation in coconuts. Trop. Agric. Ceylon 54: 1. 1 pi. 1920. 231. Fhipps, William H. The law of hybridizing. Florists' Exch. 50:814. Oct. 16, 1920.— A criticism of Weston, T. A., Rev. of [Diener, R.], The law of hybridizing, etc. [See Bot. Absts. 7, Entries 181, 248.]— G. H. Shull. . 232. Powell, George T. Thirty years' experience in the application of bud selection in the fruit industry. California Citrograph 5:344, 364r-366. 4 fig- Sept., 1920.— A paper read at a meeting of California nurserymen. Over 30 years ago, the writer publicly advocated propagation from superior orchard trees. Discussion largely relates to the apple. Writer has several thousand apple trees, "practically all" propagated from carefully selected bearing trees; the apparent results are excellent, though comparative tests are not reported. The opinion is expressed that selection for resistance to cold and to disease is important. — Howard B. Frost. 233. Pridham, J. T. Natural crossing in wheat. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 457- 461. 2 fig. 1920.— Quotations from various authors are given, as to relative abundance of natural crosses. The author cites a few instances of natural crosses coming under his own observation and mentions one commercial variety, Marshall No. 3, an Australian wheat which originated as a natural cross. — L. R. Waldron. 234. Pridham, J. T. The selection of promising wheat plants. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:548. 1920.— Suggestions to farmers for selecting plants from fields suitable for future increase. — L. R. Waldron. 235. Rei CHERT, E. T. A biochemic basis for the study of problems of taxonomy, heredity, evolution, etc., with special reference to the starches and tissues of parent-stocks and hybrid stocks and the starches and hemoglobins of varieties, species and genera. Carnegie Inst. Wash- ington Publ. 270. Part l,xi + 376 p. , 34 pL, 820 fig. Part 2, vii + 377-834- 1919.— This memoir. 36 GENETICS BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, in two large volumes, is designated as complementary alid supplementary to the author's (and Brown's) well-known earlier crystallographic studies of the hemoglobins, and to his work on the stereochemistry of protoplasmic processes and products as displayed through the differentiation and specificity of starches (Nos. 116 and 173, respectively, of the Carnegie Institution of Washington) . Like its predecessors the present study is regarded as exploratory in character. The main thesis of the three sets of studies is that "in different organisms corresponding complex organic substances that constitute the supreme structural compo- nents of protoplasm and the major synthetic products of protoplasmic activity are not in any case absolutely identical in chemical constitution, and that each such substance may exist in countless modifications, each modification being characteristic of the form of proto- plasm, the organ, the individual, the sex, the species, and the genus." — Since the molecule of such a protein as serum-albumin may have as many as 1000 million stereo-isomers, the incon- ceivable number of possible constitutional differences in the corresponding proteins of differ- ent individuals is obvious. The author believes that the collective evidence available today indicates that every individual is a chemical entity that differs in characteristic particulars from every other, and that differences in chemical constitution and composition can account for all the differences which serve to characterize genera, species, and individuals. Being an inert, non-living synthetic product of metabolic activity which beavs no resemblance to the protoplasm that gives rise to it, starch may be used as an indicator in determining whether the products of synthesis are correspondingly modified with the stereochemical pecu- liarities of the protoplasm by which they are produced. Rei chert finds that such is the case. Moreover, since such differences are diagnostic, they constitute "a strictly scientific basis for the classification of plants." The present research treats mainly of the properties of parent- stocks and hybrid-stocks, and correspondingly, of heredity. The author thinks that the importance of hybridization in the genesis of species has been greatly underrated. He ex- presses the object of his research as follows: "In both of the preceding researches satisfactory evidence was recorded to justify the conclusion that complex organic substances exist in different stereo-isomeric forms in different organisms, and that the differences are specific in relation to genera, species, and varieties, and in general in striking accord with the accepted data of the systematist. Naturally it seemed to be a matter of the greatest fundamental importance to determine to what recognizable degrees these physico-chemical properties are transmitted from seed and pollen parents in altered or unaltered form in the hybrid; if it is possible to predict the heritability of this or that property: whether or not new physico- chen^iical properties appear in the hybrid; and if the phenomena of physico-chemical inherit- ance are not only cons stent with, but also in explanation of, the data of the systematist and with the experience of the plant breeder." In connection with a discussion of the criteria of hybrids and mutants he translates a lecture of Fockb (1881) rarely found in libraries, which summarizes under five propositions a great amount of data pertaining to hybrids and their offspring. Reichert regards Mendelism as of value merely in explaining certain phenomena of inheritance and but one of several types of mechanisms of heredity. He uses the term "unit-character" and "unit-character phase" repeatedly but apparently not in the accepted Mendelian sense, for he says: "The term character is used throughout this research in a con- ventional sense to signify any property that serves to characterize any part or property of starch or plant. Inasmuch as each such property is a unit of comparison, each may appro- priately and advantageously be referred to as a unit-character." What he finds regarding starch characters in hybrids when compared with those of parents may be summarized in his own words: "If starch characters are heritable they should, in order to meet theoretic require- ments, exhibit peculiarities of inheritance corresponding to those observed in gross and microscopic anatomic plant characters. This deduction will be found to have ample justi- fication in the results of this research. Herein it will be found that the starches of the hybrids frequently exhibit in histologic, polariscopic, and physico-chemic properties some degree of intermediateness between the parents, usually nearer one or the other. In any given hybrid certain of the propert'es may be exactly or practically exactly intermediate and other properties may be identical with the corresponding properties of one or the other parent. In many instances one or more of the characters of the hybrid, such as the relative No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 37 number and the types of compound grains, the degree of fissuration, the regularity or irregu- larity of the forms of the grains, the chara.cters of the hilum, the distinctness and size of the lamellae, the polariscopic properties, the temperature or gelatinization, the aniline reactions and the qualitative and quantitative reactions with the various chemical reagents, were developed or manifested in degrees beyond the parental extremes. Moreover, peculiarities of various kinds were observed at times in the hybrid that were not apparent in either parent." — In general he concludes that "the results of the hemoglobin and starch researches are mutually confirmatory in support of the existence of stereo-isomeric forms of complex organic substances that are specifically modified in relation to varieties, species, subgenera, and genera, and that these specificities indicate corresponding peculiarities of the protoplasm in which the substances are formed." — In Chapter VI of Volume 1, the author discusses the applications of the results of his researches under the following headings: specificity of stereo-isomerides in relation to genera, species, etc. ; protoplasm a complex stereo-isomeric system; the germ-plasm a stereochemic system; protoplasmic stereochemic system applied to the explanation of the mechanism of variation, sports, fluctuations, etc. ; protoplasmic stereochemic system applied to the genesis of species.— Part 2 (a separate volume), "Special, general and comparative laboratory data of the properties of the starches and of the tissues of parent-stocks and hybrid stocks," consists of the laboratory records prepared by two of the author's assistants. Dr. Elizabeth E. Clark, and Miss Martha Bunting. — M. F. Guyer. 2.36. RosE.VBERG, O. Weitere Untersuchungen iiber die Chromosomenverhaltnisse in Ctepis. [Further studies on the chromosome relations in Crepis.] Svensk. Bot. Tidskr. .'4: 319-325. 5 fig. 1920. — In Crepis Rente riana there are quite normal grains with only two (normally three) chromosomes to be found. This depends on abnormalities in the reduc- tion division. Of Crepis Reuteriana (2x = 6) a gigas mutation with 12 somatic chromosomes is found, each of the three chromosome types being represented by four chromosomes. A great deal of polyploidy is now known in the genus. Crepis biennis and others have 42 somatic chromosomes. These species may be interpreted as 14-ploid, possessing only the same 3 typos of chromosomes as we find in Crepis virens, but repeated 14 times.— X. V. Ossian Dahlgren. 237. RuNNSTROM, J. Bsfruktningens och fosterutvecklingens problems. [The problems of fertilization and embryology.] Vetenskap o. Bildniiig 30. 2S2 p., 109 fig. A Bonnier: Stockholm, 1920. — Contains a treatise on the origin and evolution of the cell-idea. Aims to give a comprehension of the physiology of cell-division and fertilization, illustrating chief problems of the mechanics of evolution by some examples. Last chapter treats of endo- crine secretion of sex-glands, etc. Some results are new, being taken from the author's own still unfinished studies on the mechanics of evolution as exemplified in sea-urchin eggs. Working with sea-w^ater free from K or Ca, may produce a symmetrical system perpendicular to the normal one. Author also demonstrates some experiments to eliminate the echinid rudiment which is to be found at the left side of the larva. In spite of the extirpation of this rudiment, certain symmetrical changes take place in the alimentary canal. A new mouth and a new oesophagus may be developed. The latter is often produced in a manner different from that of the normal metamorphosis. Changes of the rectum diiTering from normal development are also found. In some cases three quite atypical organs have been discovered: (1) A ciliated organ, that produces an excretion, in connection with the anus. (2) An outgrowth from the body, produced by cylindrical epithelium with capacity of secre- tion and liable to be regenerated. (3) A pocket-like formation with ciliated cells. The author considers that genes exist in sea-urchin eggs, the effects of which are normally sup- pressed by the great development of the echinid rudiment. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren. 238. Ruzicka, Vladislav. Restitution und Vererbung. Experimenteller, kritischer und synthetischer Beitrag zur Frage des Determinationsproblems. [Restitution and heredity. Experimental critical and synthetic contribution to the problem of determination.] Vortr. u. Aufsatze u. EntAvicklungsmech. Org. 23 : 69 p. 1919. 38 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 239. ScHRADER, Franz. Sex determination in the white-fly (Trialeurodes vaporariorum). Jour. Morph. 34: 267-305. 4 V^- Sept. 20, 1920. — Other workers had discovered that virgin females of this white-fly produce only males in America, but only females in England. Author shows that ,number of chromosomes in American race is 22 except in pseudo-vitelline or mycetoma cells, where number is 30 or more. In female, maturation includes two divi- sions, and mature egg contains eleven chromosomes. If egg is unfertilized, it produces male with eleven chromosomes. In spermatogenesis reduction division is completely suppressed and spermatozoa have haploid number of chromosomes. Whether egg is fertilized or not is in some way controlled in female. — Author suggests parthenogenetic production of females (as in England) may be due to reunion of polar nucleus with egg nucleus, or to doubling of number of chromosomes at some stage. If fertilized eggs of English race produce both sexes, explanation may be that entrance of spermatozoon causes reduction of chromosomes in egg (a process omitted or neutralized in parthenogenetic egg), but some of spermatozoa do not function any further, leaving egg to develop with haploid number and produce male. — English race is supposed to have originated from American, perhaps by mutation. Occur- rence of some males in England may be result of importation from America. — A. Franklin Shull. 240. Shamel, a. D., L. B. Scott, C. S. Pomeroy, and C. L. Dyer. Citrus-fruit improve- ment: a study of bud variation in the Eureka lemon. U. S. Dept. Agric. Bull. 813. 88 p. 18 tables, 22 fig. June, 1920. — The methods employed in this investigation have been, in general, like those used in the three previously reported studies of orange and grapefruit varieties (see Bot. Absts. 2, Entries 707, 708, 709). Selected plots in Eureka lemon orchards including 252 trees altogether, have furnished detailed records of yield, grade, etc., while cooperative arrangements have given individual records for about 14,000 trees. Extensive statistical data, covering about 6 years (1911-1917) are presented. — Eight strains of Eureka lemon are described, all of which "have been traced to individual fruit or limb variations in trees growing under normal conditions," and have been experimentally propagated by budding. These strains differ in many characters, such as habit of growth, size and shape of leaves, productiveness, shape of fruit, thickness of rind, and season of production. The Eureka strain, which is that most typical of the variety as usually grown, is the only type desir- able for commercial lemon production. Trees of certain other types, such as the Shade- tree strain, are numerous in some orchards, evidently because of the former practice of using as budwood the vigorous non-bearing shoots, which are especially numerous with these strains. — The authors advise that all buds for propagation be taken from shoots bearing normal fruits, and that these bud sticks be cut only from superior performance-record trees; also, that orchard trees of inferior strains be top-worked or replaced. — Howard B. Frost. 241. Shamel, A. D., L. B. Scott, C. S. Pomeroy, and C. L. Dyer. Citrus-fruit improve- ment: a study of bud variation in the Lisbon lemon. U. S. Dept. Agric. Bull. 815. 70 p., IS tables, 14 fi^. June, 1920. — The work with the Lisbon lemon closely paralleled that with the Eureka lemon (see Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 240) in methods, general results, and conclusions. Detailed records were secured for 128 trees in selected plots, and cooperative records for about 13,000 trees. Five definite strains are described in detail; others have been observed but not thoroughly studied. Of these five strains, the Lisbon strain, representing "the established ideal for the Lisbon variety," is the most productive. The Open strain, though less hardy and productive, has an advantage in its tendency to produce fruit throughout the year, resembling the Eureka strain of the Eureka variety in this respect. In some orchards the Open strain predominates, and in others the Lisbon strain. The other strains are mark- edly inferior. — Howard B. Frost. 242. Stark, Mary B. A benign tumor that is hereditary in Drosophila. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S.] 5: 573-580. 5 fig. Dec, 1919.— A new benign tumor appeared in a stock of Drosophila. By inbreeding, a strain true to the tumor character was established. One gene for the tumor is situated in the third chromosome close to dichaete. Extraction of the No. 1, February, 1921J GENETICS 39 tumor character in only five per cent of the flies shows other genes also involved. These are under investigation. 780 larvae show from one to three tumors situated in 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 or 14th segments. Metastases may or may not be present. Tumor may also be in head or may replace wing or other appendages. Tumor cells are rounded or polygonal and contain pigment. Pigment increases with age. Cells giving rise to tumor are originally hypodermal. Tumor in adult fly is permeated with black pigment. When tumor develops in abdomen, no shortening of life in fly results. Tumor was inoculated in 40 larvae; only 2 survived; both grew tumor and were sterile females. — C. C. Little. 243. Tackholm, G. On the cytology of the genus Rosa. A preliminary note. Svensk. Bot. Tidskr. 14: 300-311. 3 Jig. 1920.— Very brief summary of author's chief results. About 300 bushes, representing approximately 230 different forms, are investigated. The funda- mental haploid chromosome number in Rosa is 7. There are two very different groups of species: (1) the very polymorphous conmo-section (in the widest sense), and (2) all other sections. The latter group have only gemini (7, 14, or 21) in the diakinesis; the former pos- sess both paired chromosomes and single ones. The following table gives the observed numbers: TYPE BIVAlENTS SINGLES SOMATIC Z-PLOIDT 1 7 — 14 Diploid 2 14 — 28 Tetraploid 3 21 — 42 Hexaploid 4 7 7 21 Triploid 6 7 14 28 Tetra[)loid 6 7 21 35 Pentaploid 7 7 28 42 Hexaploid 8 14 7 35 Pentaploid 9 14 14 42 Hexaploid 10 Variable Variable 32-36 Anorthoploid The roses of types l-3^have only sexual reproduction. Some of this species have varieties with different chromosome numbers (haploid number 7 and 14; 14 and 21). Triploid roses (type 4) may be hybrids between types 1 and 2. Type 8 may be interpreted as the result of a cross between types 2 and 3. The reduction division in the anthers is quite in accord- ance with the Drosem-hybrid scheme of Rosenberg. The immense number of forms belong- ing to the section Caninae (in the widest sense) are distributed in the types 5-7. The reduction divisions of the Caninae in the anthers and the ovules are carried out in a quite different manner. In the pollen mother cells, the gemini first come to the equatorial plate. Later the univalent chromosomes which are scattered irregularly on the spindle are also arranged in the same plate surrounding the gemini. The partners of the bivalents first pass to the poles. The singles lag a little, divide, and then the halves pass to the poles. The bivalent and univalent chromosomes consequently have different anaphase stages. Not all the halves of the singles may be included in the daughter nuclei. By the second division the de- scendants of the bivalents are regularly distributed and included, without or with a few of the other chromosomes in the four ordinary microspores. There even arise a great num- ber of small microspores from each mother cell, containing only descendants from the uni- valent chromosomes. Some of the microspores — probably those containing descendants of the bivalents— develop into pollen grains, are able to germinate, and must be supposed to be capable of fertilization (hybrids between roses in the section Caninae are known). In the embryo-sac mother cells we have ordinarily the two equatorial plates — the bivalents next to the chalaza, the singles next to the micropyle. In the anaphase the partners of the gemini are separated; but in about four-fifths of the studied cases, all the singles pass undivided to the micropylar pole. In the second division all the chromosomes are divided. Consequently, the tetrad has two large nuclei and two smaller ones, with only 7 chromosomes. The former 40 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, are also included in the greater cells. Eggs which have taken their origin from the larger megaspores are capable of fertilization, as proved by the chromosome sets in hybrids between plants of the section Caninae and normally sexual roses. In spite of the sexual potency of the Caninae their propagation is almost exclusively apomictical. This fact explains the con- stancy of the mentioned chromosome sets. Type 10 must be supposed to be originated by fertilization. — "All species and forms investigated, belonging to the section Caninae — i.e., the majority of the examined roses, originated in Europe, North Africa and West Asia — are very ancient hybrids representing the Fi generation, which, ever since its origin thousands of years ago, has been maintained owing to apomictical reproduction." The anorthoploids rep- resent Fa or any later generation of crosses. The apomictical reproduction was probably induced by these ancient crosses. To explain all the chromosome sets in the Caninae, the existence of octoploid and decaploid sexual forms is assumed. The enormous polymorphy in the Caninae is to be ascribed to hybridism. Also vegetative mutations produced in apomic- tical stocks have no doubt contributed to the polymorphy. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren. 244. Thomson, Godfrey H. On the degree of perfection of hierarchical order among correlation coefficients. Biometrika 12: 355-366. 2 fig. Nov., 1919. — Derivation of Hart- Spearman criterion for degree of hierarchical order (degree in which correlations of anj' two mental tests with others are in same sequence of magnitude) neglects important term. With correlated dice throws, where true correlations are known a priori, criterion exaggerates perfection of hierarchy. — John Rice Miner. 245. Vandel, M. a. Sur la reproduction des Planaires at sur la signification de la fecondation chez ces animaux. [On the reproduction of some Planarians and on the signifi- cance of fecundation in these animals.] Compt. E,end. Acad. Sci. 171: 125-128. July, 1920. 246. Weatherw.\x, Paul. A misconception as to the structure of the ear of maize. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 359-362. 6 fig. Aug., 1920.— An attempt to refute the evidence published bj' Collins which indicated that the ear of maize may have developed through the twisting of yoked pairs of spikelets. The author contends from an examination of the cobs of several mature ears that dropping of rows of seeds is due to the discontinuance of a row of paired spikelets and not to the loss of the pedicelled spikelets from yoked pairs, as suggested by Collins. In conclusion it is stated that there is no in(Mcation that short rows represent long rows partially aborted, but that the abortion of spikelets or of rows in the ear seems to be much more constant as a characteristic of theories than of real ears. Figures four and six apparently have been transposed. — J. H. Kemplon. 247. W[eston, T. a.] [Rev. of: [Diener, Richard]. The law of hybridizing discovered by Richard Diener. SO .r 27 cm., 15 p., 8 fig. Richard Diener: Kentfield, California, [1920.] ] Florists' Exch. 50: 554. Sept. 11, 1920.— See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entries 181, 231, 248. 248. W[eston, T. A]. The law of hybridizing. Florists' Exch. 50: 981. Nov. 6, 1920.— Reply to William H. Phipps's criticism of the author's review of [Diener, R.] The law of hybridizing discovered by Richard Diener. See Bot. Absts. 7, Entries 181, 231, 247. — G. H. Shull. 249. WoLL, F. W., AND Paul L. Dougherty. Advanced registry testing of dairy cows. California Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 218. 15 p. 1920. — Presents arguments for the advanced- registry testing of pure-bred cows, cites records made in California, and gives instructions on how to initiate such a test in California. — John W. Gowen. No. 1, February, 1921] HORTICULTURE 41 HORTICULTURE J. H. GouRLEY, Editor FRUITS AND GENERAL HORTICULTURE 250. Allen, W. J., and W. C. Gay Brereton. Orchard notes, July. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 523-525. 1920. — A discussion of pruning of the apple and pear and its relation to the production of fruit buds. — L. R. Waldron. 251. Allen, W. J., and W. C. Gay Brereton. Thompson's Improved and Navalencia oranges. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 519. 1920. 252. Anonymous. American books on agriculture. [Rev. of : Gould, H. P. Peach grow- ing. (Rural Science Series.) xxi + 426 p., 32 pi. Macmillan Co.: New York, 1918.] Nature 104:49&-497. 1920. 253. Anonymous. American-grown fruit stocks. Nation. Nurseryman 28^:215. 1 fig. 1920. — A brief history and description of the growing of fruit stocks in America is given. Practically all the apple seedlings in the United States are raised in the Kaw Valley, Kansas. Efforts to grow them on a large scale in other places have not met with marked success. — J. H. Gourley. 254. Anonymous. A pear tree trained in an unusual way. Nation. Nurseryman 28': 180. 1 fi^. 1920. — A description is given of a pear tree trained in the form of a table. It is grow- ing on the grounds of Bobbink and Atkins Nurseries, Rutherford, New Jersey. — J. H. Gourley. 255. Anonymous. La multiplicacion de las plantas. [The propagation of plants.] [Rev. of Calvino, Mario. Tratado sobre la multiplicacion de la? plantas. 264 p. 244 photographs. Graphical Arts Press: Habana, 1920.] Rev. Agric. Com. y Trab. [Cuba] 3: 149-151. 1 fi^. 1920.— The table of contents of the book is included in the review.— F. M. Blodgett. 256. Anonymous. Problems of the fruit grower. [Rev. of: Bedford, Duke of, and Spencer Pickering. Science and fruit growing: being an account of the results obtained at the Woburn experimental farm since its foundations in 1894. xxii + 351 p. Macmillan and Co.: London, 1919.] Nature 104: 558-559. 1920. 257. Anonymous. Tests with unfruitful plxmi trees. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 9. 1920. — Pruning, ring-barking, and root-pruning gave no results. Interpollination was effective. — N. J. Giddings. 258. Anonymous. The avocado in Trinidad. Agric. News [Barbados] 19:46. 1920.— A review of a paper on the subject by W. G. Freeman in the Bulletin of the Department oj Agriculture, Trinidad, in which the history, process of selection, etc., are discussed. A paper by R. O. Williams on budding the avocado is also reviewed. — J. S. Dash. 259. Brainerd, Ezra, and A. K. Peitersen. Blackberries of New England.— Their classification. Vermont Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 217. 84 p., 36 pi. 1920. 260. Campbell, J. A. Natural cool-air fruit storage. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 166-167. 1920.— The methods in use in the United States are briefly outlined. It is feared that the same methods could not be used in New Zealand. — A^. J. Giddings. ^ 261. Campbell, J. A. The fruit industry in North America. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 24^27. 1920.— One of a series of articles. This deals with cooperation and standardiza- tion as practiced in the fruit regions of the United States and Canada. — N. J. Giddings. 42 HORTICULTURE Bot. Absts., Vol. VII, 262. Campbell, J. A. The fruit industry of North America. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 110-113. 1 fig. 1920. — The eastern and western sections of the United States are com- pared as to methods of apple culture and orchard practice. The possible relation of seedling stock to tree growth is also discussed. — A'^. J. Giddings. 263. GuNLiFFE, R. S. The propagation of some tropical fruits. Agric. News [Barbados] 19:52-53, 150-151. 1920.— The first part of the article deals principally with the avocado pear. Varieties of this fruit are discussed, and detailed information is given as to methods of budding and grafting, including seed-grafting. In the latter part of the article, the mango is dealt with in the same manner. — J. S. Dash. 264. Darrow, William H. Government inspection of fruit shipments. Rept. Vermont State Hortic. Soc. 17: 21-34. 1919.— This is an account of the w^ork of the Federal Govern- ment, through the Bureau of Markets, to assist the fruit growers all over the country in marketing their crops. — George P. Burns. 265. Button, W. C. Dusting and spraying experiments of 1918 and 1919. Michigan Agric. Exp. Sta. Special Bull. 102. 50 p., 20 fig. 1920. 266. EsAM, G. Fruit cool storage. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 10-18. 1920.— Sev- eral varieties of apple and of pear were tested to determine best time for picking, best method of picking and handling, effects of delay between picking and storing, and possible advantage of wrapping. Fruits which had reached the stage denoted by a change of ground color kept best in storage. Fruits which were well advanced and showed good color deteriorated too quickly when removed. The importance of care in handling w^as shown in various tests. Delay in placing the fruit in storage greatly reduced its keeping quality. Wrapping was found to give better fruit, but this is to be tested further. — N. J. Giddings. 267. Galloway, Beverly T. Some promising new pear stocks. Amer. Nurseryman 322:34-35. 1920. 268. Gasser, G. W. Report of the work at Rampart Station. Rept. Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917: 34-57. PI. 3, 4. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 26. 269. Georgeson, C. C. Reports from seed and plant distribution. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. Rept. 1917:86-90. 1919.— Gives extracts from letters received from residents of Alaska giving their experience with the seeds and plants distributed by the Alaska stations. — J. P. Anderson. 270. Georgeson, C. C. Summary of the work at the several stations. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917:5-33. 2 -pi. 1919.— After a review of weather conditions the author sum- marizes the work carried on at the Sitka, Rampart, Fairbanks, Kodiak, and Matamuska stations, and gives notes on cooperative work. The Sitka station is devoted to horticulture. Notes are given on potatoes, including the growing of plants from seed balls. Notes are also given on other vegetables, such as cabbage, cauliflower, broccoli, Brussels sprouts, kale, kohl rabi, turnips, radishes, beets, carrots, onions, peas, broad beans, snap beans, asparagus, rhubarb, lettuce, celery, garden cress, parsley, and herbs. Beets, onions, snap beans, asparagus, and most herbs are not adapted to the climate, but the others mentioned above do well. In the orchard some apples blossomed, but owing to an unfavorable season no fruit matured. Gooseberries and currants did not fruit as well as usual. Raspberiies {Rubus strigosiis) produced fruit despite an unfavorable season. Strawberry-breeding work was carried on, and 1333 seedlings set out the previous season received numbers. A large amount of nursery stock was distributed to settlers. Reports are made on the behavior of 30 species of shrubs and of several shade trees. Thirty-five species of hardy perennial plants are reported favorably and 27 unfavorably. Of annual flowering plants 24 species are reported favorably and 13 unfavorably. All annual sand perennials listed are well-known sorts. Roses are also being tested in the trial grounds. Work at the other stations is given in more detail bv the assistants in charge of each. — J. P. Anderson. No. 1, February, 1921] HORTICULTURE 43 271. Goodwin, W. T., and W. C. Hyde. Cooperative fruit variety testing. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 178-180. 1920.— The variety orchards are 7 years old and include about 75 varieties of apple, 24 varieties of pear, and several varieties of apricot, plum, and cherry. Tree growth and fruitfulness are the chief factors considered. — A'^. J. Giddings. 272. Gould, H. P. Fruit trees stocks used in propagation. Amer. Nurseryman 32=: 42-44. 1920. 273. Gould, W. M. Production of nursery stock. Rept. Vermont State Hortic. Soc. 17: 12-20. 1919. — The problems confronting the grower of nursery stock, including both fruit-producing trees and plants for ornamental use, are discussed, chiefly from the stand- point of production. — George P. Burns. 274. Halligan, C. P. Increasing the production of the bearing apple orchard. Michigan Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 43. 18 p., 6 fig. 1920. 275. IIolde.v, Bertha A. Ways of using surplus fruits. Rept. Vermont State Hortic. Soc. 17:43-46. 1919. 270. Howard, W. L. Brown rot of apricots and its prevention. Better Fruit 15': 7. 1920. 277. Lewis, C. I., F. R. Brown, and A. F. Barss. Observations on the evaporation of prunes. Better Fruit 15^:5, 29-31. 1920. — A reprint from Oregon Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 145 (1917). 278. Magness, J. R. Investigations in the ripening and storage of Bartlett pears. Jour. Agric. Res. 19:473-500. 8 fig. 1920. — Fruits grown in Pacific-coast regions and picked at intervals from early summer until after the commercial picking season, were analyzed within a few days after picking and after being in storage Ij to 35 months at temperatures of 70', 40^, and 30° F. The total sugar in freshlj' picked fruit showed a uniform increase as the season advanced, the less rapid increase in reducing sugars during the latter part being counterbalanced by a greater accumulation of sucrose. Pears ripening at 70° contained the highest percentage of sugar, those ripening at 40° the lowest, and those held at 30° for 6 to 14 weeks an intermediate amount. The acid content decreased with an advance of the season in pears fom California, but increased in fruit from Oregon and Washington. Little change in acidity was found during storage of fruit that had been well matured at picking time; but an increase in acidity generally occurred during storage at 70° of fruit picked before maturity, while a decrease was often found after ripening at 40° and especially after being held at 30° F. There was a progressive reduction in the alcohol-insoluble, acid-hydrolyzable reducing materials as the season advanced, not only in the fruit as picked, but also in the same fruit after ripening in storage. The percentage of solids, lowest at about the opening of the season, tends to increase with the accumulation of sugar in late-picked lots. Although late-picked fruit tends to become yellow more quickly than early-picked lots, it remains free from scald and in firm, prime eating condition for a much longer period after becoming ripe. — The application of the results as applied to commercial handling are briefly discussed. — A. J. Heinicke. 279. Morris, R. T. Grafting with the aid of paraffin. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21: 157-159. pi. 250 1920. — A brief outline is presented, and the claim is niade that the graft- ing season can be extended over a period of 5 months. — H. A. Glea^on. 280. MuRRiLL, W. A. Trees girdled by meadow mice. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21 : 94-97. 1920. — The habits of meadow mice and the destruction to plants caused by them are discussed. — H. A. Gleason. 44 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 281. Ramsey, H. J., and S. J. Dennis. Operating air-cooled apple storage houses. Better Fruit 153 : 10, 32-34. 1920.— A verbatim excerpt from U. S. Dept. Agr. Farmers' Bull. 852 (1917). 282. RicALTON, Jas. The cocoa-nut palm. Amer. Forest. 26:529-531. 3 fig. 1920— A popular description of Cocos nucifera and its products. — Chas. H. Otis. 283. Roberts, George, and A. E. Ewan. I. Report on soil experiment fields. II. Maintenance of fertility. Kentucky Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 228: 89-131. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 463. 284. Russell, E. J. Farming in the New Era. [Rev. of (1) Harris, T. S. The sugar beet in America, xviii + 3^2 p., 32 pi. 1919. (2) Fletcher, S. W. Strawberry growing. xxii + 325 -p., 24 pi. Macmillan and Co.: London, 1917.] Nature 104: 593-594. 1920. 285. Sears, F. C. Personal experiences in fruit growing. Rept. Vermont State Hortic. Soc. 17: 8-12. 1919. — The author discusses nine important factors in the producing, grading, and marketing of apples. — George P. Burns. 286. Stark, Lloyd C. French fruit stocks. Nation. Nurseryman 28': 193. 1920. — A French syndicate has been organized which apparently controls a large part of the nursery stock grown in France. As a result the prices have increased to a prohibitive figure, despite the fact that there is a big crop this year of everything except plum, and this is more plentiful than last year. The respective prices per thousand for last year and this year are quoted for plums as $39 and $250, while this same stock formerly sold for $7. In France pear stock can be purchased for $19 per thousnd, whereas the price quoted for export is $70; in France quince stock, $17, for export $50. This situation is condemned, and it is stated that no stock will be purchased at these prices. — J. H. Gourley. 287. SuEMATSTj, Naoji, and Kikuji Kuwatsuka. Studies on the varietal resistance of the peach to artificial inoculations with Gloeosporium laeticolor Berk. Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan V: 1-12. 1920. 288. Taylor, C. R. The auction method of distributing perishable food products. Rept. Vermont State Hort. Soc. 17:35-43. 1919. — The author describes the auction system, and shows that in cases of large production with a standardized commodity concentrated at one place it is the most efficient method of disposing of the product. — George P. Burns. 289. Thornber, H. Cover crops, tillage, and commercial fertilizers. Better Fruit 15^: 5, 20-22. Aug., 1920. — Experiments conducted for eight years in the Bitter Root Valley, Mon- tana, with clover and peas as cover crops resulted in a substantial increase of the nitrogen content of the soil. Clover was sown in May and plowed under in the fall of the following year. Peas were also sown in May, but were plowed in the same fall. The first soil analysis was made after the experiment had been in progress for eight years. The nitrogen content of the first two feet of soil of clean cultivated plots was 1514 pounds per acre, while the plot sown to a cover crop of clover contained 3019 pounds per acre. Another plot sown to clover but cut each year, the hay being removed, showed a total nitrogen content of 2167 pounds. The plot on which peas were used as a cover crop had 2375 pounds of nitrogen per acre. The yield of fruit (apples) was highest on the clover plot on which the clover had been plowed under, and lowest on the clean cultivated plot. The writer believes that growing a leguminous cover crop is by far the best and most reasonable way of supplying the soil with humus and nitrogen. — A. E. Murneek. 290. Watson, John. Aphis-resistant apple stocks. Nation. Nurseryman 28^: 213-214. 1920. — The nurserymen of America must come to appreciate to a greater extent the impor- tance of securing nursery stock which will be resistant to aphis injury. The influence of the stock upon the scion as well as the influence of the scion on the stock is recognized. For No. 1, February, 1921] HORTICULTURE 45 instance, apple grafts of Bechtel's Crab and of Transcendant will compel a far better root system in two years than scions of Baldwin or Yellow Transparent on seedlings of exactly the same grade.— Of all aphis-resistant stocks the Northern Spy is the best. It is largely used in England, South Africa, Australia, and New Zealand. The suggestion is made that the time will probably come when California will use nothing else. In Australia, where woolly aphis is a prolific pest, the nurserymen have developed more than 25 varieties of resistant stocks, but Northern Spy furnishes fully 95 per cent of the apple stock used. — Methods for propagation of the stock are given, which are much like those used for Paradise and Doucin stocks. — /. H. Gourley. 291. Whitten, J. C. Transplanting deciduous fruit trees. Better Fruit 15^: 19-20. Sept., 1920. — Reprinted from Monthly Bulletin of the Dept. of Agr., State of California, vol. 9, No. 3, March, 1920. FLORICULTURE AND ORNAMENTAL HORTICULTURE 292. Anonymous. Awbury Arboretum. Brooklyn Bot. Card. Rec. 9:23-24. Jan., 1920.— See Bot. Abstracts 7, Entry 77. 293. Anonymous. Koelreuteria paniculata. Nation. Nurseryman 28*: 198. 1920. — A description of the tree is given, with conditions for growth, and a recommendation is made to extend its planting for lawns. — /. H. Gourley. 294. Anonymous. Oxydendrum arboreum. Nation. Nurseryman 28*: 196. 1920.— A description of the sour-wood tree. — /. H. Gourley. 295. Anonymous. Propectus of courses offered by the Brooklyn Botanic Garden, 1920. Brooklyn Bot. Card. Record 9: 1-18. Jan., 1920. 296. Anonymous. Sweet pea flowering in the West Indies. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 105. 1920.— All efforts of horticulturists in the West Indies to cultivate the American and European sweet peas { Lathy r us odoratus) have resulted in failure to produce flowers in spite of the vigorous vegetative growth made by the plant. Dr. S. C. Harland at last succeeded in obtaining a single flowering spike after 3 months' growth, from a pink variety of the Spencer type procured from the United States Department of Agriculture. The flowers were very small and without scent. — J. S. Dash. 297. Anonymous. The climbing Polygonum. Nation. Nurseryman 28^:200. 1920.— Notes are given regarding P. Baldschuanicum and P. Auberti.—J. H. Gourley. 298. Brewster, A. A. Flowers of Haemodorum, blood root. Australian Nat. 4: 152. 1920. 299. Brixton, N. L. About Paulownia trees. Jour. New York Bot. Card. 21: 72-73. 1920. — Young Paulownia trees commonly grow 8-12 feet in a season and produce leaves as much as 30 inches in diameter. After 3 years they grow more slowly and become eventually 60 feet high or more. — H. A. Gleason. 300. Clarkson, Edward Hale. The story of a fern garden. II. Amer. Fern. Jour. 10:82-87. 1920. 301. Cowell, Arthur Westcott. Awbury Arboretum Address. Bull. Geog. Soc. Philadelphia 17: 98-102. July 1919.— See Bot. Abstracts 7, Entr. 302. Gleason, H. A. Organization of The American Iris Society. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21: 39-40. 1920.— The society was organized on Jan. 29, 1920, to promote the cultiva- tion and further development of Iris in America. — H. A. Gleason. 46 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 303. Howe, M. A. The 1920 dahlia border. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21: 138. 1920. 304. Memmler, Hans. Paphiopedilum Rothschildianum und die Kultur der iibrigen mehrbliitigen Frauenschuharten. [Paphiopedilum Rothschildianum and the culture of the other several-flowered ladyslippers.[ Orchis 14: 17-21. 1920. — Short descriptions are given of P. Rothschildianum, its numerous hybrids, and closely related species. Cultural directions are included. — E. B. Payson. 305. MiETHE, E. Cjrpripedium insigne Wall, und einige seiner Varietaten. [Cypripedium insigne Wall, and some of its varieties. [ Orchis 14: 4-7. 1920. 306. Nash, G. V. Hardy woody paints in The New York Botanical Garden. Jour. New York. Bot. Gard. 18:65-68, 86-90, 111-115, 137-140, 167-170, 189-192, 203-207, 217-224, 246- 250, 259-263. IDEM. 19: 11-15, 58-62, 86-91, 108-111, 139-142, 167-171, 192-196, 222-225, 293-296, 315-318. 1918; 20: 11-14, 41-45, 67-70, 87-90, 107-111, 128-132, 144-148, 164-167, 221-225, 232-235. 1919; 21:56-60, 74-77, 119-124. 1920.— A complete enumeration of the hardy woody pants cultivated in the botanical garden, with their location on the grounds and their natural distribution. — H. A. Gleason. 307. Sands, W. N. Some tropical variegated-leaved plants. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 154-155, 171. 1920. — The following are mentioned as the plants chiefly grown for the color effects of their foliage: varieties of Dracaena, Acalypha, Codiaeum (Croton), Caladium, Graptophyllum, Coleus, Dicffenhachia, Agave, Aloe, Begonia, Maranta, and Tradescantia, together with Pandanus Veitchii, Panax Victoriae, Ficus elastica var., Furcroea cubensis, Aralia Guilfoylei, Sanchezia nobilis, Cissus discolor, Hibiscus rosa-sinensis, var. Cooperi, Phyllanthus nivosus. Several of these are discussed in detail, information being given as to the appearance of the leaves, the causes of variations, and the inheritance of the phenomena. Several plants which are not well known in the West Indies but which are under cultivation at the John Innes Horticultural Institution, Surrey, England, are also dealt with. — J. S. Dash. 308. ScHLECHTER, R. Die Verbreitung und das Auftreten der Orchideen in Europa nebst Winken uber ihre Kulture. [The distribution and occurrence of orchids in Europe together with hints as to their culture.[ Orchis 13: 19-25, 35-40. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 541. 309. Snodgrass, M. D. Report of the work at Fairbanks Station. Rep. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917:57-72. PL 5-7. 1919. 310. Waugh, F. a. How to improve home grounds. Rept. Vermont State Hortic. Soc. 17:62. 1919. 311. WoLTER, P. Die Anzucht der Odontoglossum aus Samen. [The raising of Odonto- glossum from seed.] Orchis. 13: 12-13. 1919. — Odontoglossum seeds were sown in glasses on sterilized Sphagnum and Polypodium to which a mixed culture of root fungi had been added. More than a thousand seedlings were obtained which in the third year are beginning to bloom. — E. B. Payson. VEGETABLE CULTURE 312. Anonymous. Onion growing in Grenada. Agric. News [Barbados] 18: 374-375. 1919. — Experiments show that onions can be profitably grown. Two crops per annum may be obtained. The yield per acre, as calculated from the experiments, was 3.38 tons of market- able onions. — /. S. Dash. 313. Anonymous. The storage of onion seed in the Tropics. Agric. News [Barbados] 18:375. 1919. — Experiments carried out in Grenada have shown that onion seed can be successfully kept for at least nine months when placed in air-tight containers in the presence of calcium chloride. — /. S. Dash. No. 1, February, 1921] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 47 HORTICULTURE-PRODUCTS 314. Fabre, J. -Henri. Precedes modernes de vinification en Algeria et dans les pays chands. [Modern methods of wine mailing for Algeria and the warm regions.] 2 ed. 184 V- J. -Henri Fabre : Maison-Carre, 1920. 315. Jones, J. Cacao production in Dominica. Agric. News [Barbados] 19:91. 1920. — Attention is drawn to the fact that owing to the losses of trees during the hurricanes of 1915 and 1916 (in the latter over 10,000 trees were lost on the estates and even more from the peasants plots) and to the large amount of cacao smuggled to the neighboring foreign islands where the product was in great demand, the figures of export given by the Customs Depart- ment are hardly an index of the production. These figures are: 1917, 3169 cwt. ; 1918, 4239 cwt.; and 1919, 3214 cwt. for the months of January to November. The writer remarks that while the trees which survived the hurricane have returned to pre-hurricane production, little or no effort has been made to replace the trees destroyed. — J. S. Dash. MORPHOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HISTOLOGY OF VASCULAR PLANTS E. W. SiNNOTT, Editor 316. Andrews, E. F. Habits and habitats of the North American Resurrection Fern. Torreya 20: 91-96. 1920. 317. Anonymous. Applied plant morphology. [Rev. of : Barber, C. A. Studies in Indian sugar canes. Mem. Dept. Agric. India Bot. Ser. 10: 39-153. June, 1919]. Nature 104: 578. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 7. 318. Burns, George P. Eccentric growth and the formation of redwood in the main stem of conifers. Vermont Agric. E.\p. Sta. Bull. 219: 1-10. PL 4, 10 fig. 1920.— This bulletin is a discussion of the relative importance of compression and gravity as factors in the pro- duction of redwood in conifers, based on experimental work in the greenhouse and in the open on spruce and white pine. The author concludes that compression does not stimulate the cambium to rapid division to produce redwood. The pressure of mechanical forces did cause, in the white pine, a differentiation into summer wood and spring wood, but no redwood for- mation. The conclusion is, therefore, that the production of redwood is a morphogenic response of the tree to the stimulus of gravity. — B. F. Lutman. 319. Chemin, E. Observations anatomiques et biologiques sur le genre "Lathraea." [Anatomical and biological observations on the genus "Lathraea."] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X, 2: 125-272. 1 pi., 88 fig. 1920. — A contribution to knowledge of parasitic plants. After reciting the generic and specific characters in Lathraea, recognizing the five species listed in Index Kewensis, the author presents observations on the two French species L. clandestina and L. squamaria, dealing with root, with development, penetration and feeding of haus- torium, with leaves present as scales bearing glands (which, according to the author's hypo- thesis, function as excretory organs), and with germination. The author supposes that origi- nally an accidental and partial parasitism caused adaptation to dark places, and that this led to complete disappearance of chlorophyll and to obligate parasitism. — /. P. Kelly. 320. Church, Margaret B. Root contraction. Plant World 22: 337-340. 1 fig. 1919. 321. Gluck, H. Blatt-und blutenmorphologische Studien. [Studies in the morphology of leaf and flower.] 284 p., 7 pi., 284 fig- Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1919. — A broad morpho- logical survey' of stipular structures in general, of intervaginal papillae and of the leaf sheath, with a resulting interpretation of the morphological nature of bracts and floral envelopes. The venation of these latter organs plays an important part in any study of their nature, and considerable emphasis is therefore placed upon it and upon the ontogenetic development of the structures investigated. — E. W. Sinnott. 48 MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 322. GoEBEL, K. Die entfaltungsbewegungen der Pflanzen und deren teleologische Deutung. [The growth movements of plants and their teleological meaning.] 17 X 26 cm., vii + 4S3 p., 239 fig. Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1920. — This volume is in the nature of a supple- ment to the author's "Organographie" and is concerned -with plant movements in general,, both those which are strictly movements of growth and development and those which are part of the functional activity of organs. Among the subjects discussed are: the movements of jointed organs; the nutation of shoots; the unfolding of leaves and their orientation; developmental torsions and asymmetry; resupination in flowers; successional development; irritability in floral organs; the behaviour of sensitive plants and the "sleep" movements of plants. The author seeks an interpretation of all these movements from the point of view of their usefullness to the plant, and concludes that the common conception of these phe- nomena as adaptations is erroneous. He denies that teleology in any sense, either that of purposeful acquirement or that of Darwinian adaptation through natural selection, has been concerned with their origin, but believes that they have arisen fortuitously and when useful have been seized and preserved by the organisms. — E .W. Sinnott. 323. Hamilton, A. A. Abnormal branching in a palm. Australian Nat. 4: 156-157. 1920. 324. HoLDEN, H. S. Observations on the anatomy of teratological seedlings. III. On the anatomy of some atypical seedlings of Impatiens Roylei, Walp. Ann. Botany 34: 321-344. 106 fig. 1920. — The anatomy of the normal seedlings of Impatiens Roylei and the modifica- tions which it has undergone in a number of abnormal seedlings are fully described. The atypical seedlings are of two main kinds, the first being undoubtedly syncotylous, and the second showing no macroscopic evidence of syncotyly. The members of the first group can be arranged in a graded series in which the syncotyly becomes more and more intimate. Its effects are (1) the suppression of the two lateral bundles of the normal cotyledon and of the root pole on the symphysis side, (2) the reduction and ultimate disappearance of the first epicotyledonary leaf, and (3) in extreme cases the modification of the leaves at the third node. The seedlings of the second group which show no macroscopic evidence of syncotyly may be either truly syncotylous or heterocotylous, and the evidence in favor of both interpre- tations is mentioned. — W. P. Thompson. 325. Jaccard, p. Inversion de I'excentricite des branches produite experimentalement. [The experimental inversion of the eccentricity of branches.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32: 273-281. $ pi, 1 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 431. 326. Lecomte, Henri. Sur les principaux caracteres de structure des Bois. [The prin- cipal characters in wood structure.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris 26: 166-171. 1920. — A study of the dicotyledonous woods of Indo-China has been made in order to assist in the identifica- tion of specimens from that region. The structures of secretory tissues, vessels, woody paren- chyma and medullary rays are reviewed, and their peculiarities in various genera indicated. — E. B. Payson. 327. Lenoir, M. Evolution du tissu vasculaire chez quelques plantules de dicotyledones. {Development of vascular tissue in certain dicotyledonous seedlings.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X. 2: 1-123. 91 fig. 1920. — Author deals with very young fibro-vascular bundles at their passage from root, where arrangement of xylem and phloem is alternate, to stem and coty- ledon, where collateral disposition is found. He presents and criticises two theories on subject: (1) that which claims the splitting radially into two of the primary xylem masses of root ("redoublement"), and the turning through 180° ("torsion") of each half in passing up to become inner part of collateral bundle of stem or cotyledon; and (2) the theory of successive stages, which states that conducting apparatus of plant shows an ontogenetic series of stages — centric, excentric, alternate, intermediate, and collateral — and that there is not a real identity of root bundle and cotyledonary bundle. Author sets forth obser- vations on species of Veronica, Lamium, and other genera, and concludes that no true radial No. 1, February, 1921] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 49 splitting occurs; that in all there is more or less of an inversion of the fibro-vascular bundle upon itself; that no absolute identity of cotyledonary and radicular bundles exists, but that always there are additions of recent tissues in higher parts. Passage from alternate to col- lateral arrangement follows two methods. A gradual differentiation of vessels occurs along certain lines, curved in cross-section, connecting the xylem and phloenf poles. Considered longitudinally a progressive displacement of vessels combined with appearance of new ele- ments in appropriate directions takes place. — /. P. Kelly. 328. MiLBRAED, J. Paraphyadanthe Mildbr. nov. gen. Flacourt. Ein interessanter Fall von "Rhizanthie" aus Kamerun. [Paraphyadanthe Mildbr., a new genus of Flacourtiaceae. An interesting case of "rhizanthy" from Kamerun,] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7:399-405. Fig. A-0. 1920. 329. Nicolas, G. Biologie florale de quelques ombelliferes Nord-Africanes. [Floral biology of some North African umbellifers.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32: 230-234. 1920.— Andro- monoecism, or the presence of staminate and hermaphrodite flowers on the same plant, is very rare in the plant kingdom as a whole, but is comparatively common in the Umbelliferae. LoEW found this condition in more than forty out of sixty-six European species. Some species are staminate, hermaphrodite, and andromonoecious in dififerent geographic regions. To the list of sixteen species stated by Loew to be exclusively hermaphroditic in Europe, four North African species are added: Ptychotis ammoides Koch., Daucus aureus Desf., Torilis neglecta Roemer & Schultes, and T. nodosa Gaertn. The andromonoecious condi- tion holds in Scandix Pecten-Veneris L., Hippomarathrum pterochlaenum Bossier, Ferula communis L., F. sulcata Desf., and Daucus setifolius Desf. In these forms the hermaphroditic flowers always occupy the summits of the primary and secondary axes, while the more numer- ous staminate flowers are either mixed with them or are grouped alone on the secondary and tertiary axes. — L. W. Sharp. 330. Prankerd, T. L. On some new types of statocyte occurring in vascular plants. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919: 335. 1920. 331. Rydberg, p. a. [Rev. of: Henry, Augustine, and Margaret G. Flood. The Douglas Fir. Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. Sec. B. 35:67-92. PI. 12-14. 1920.] Torreya 20: 102-104. 1920. 332. Salisbury, E. J. Monocotyledonous features of the Ranunculaceae with special reference to the floral structure. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919:336. 1920. 333. Small, James. The origin and development of the Compositae. xii + SS4 p. Wil- liam Wesley and Son: London, 1919.— A reprint of the author's series of papers under the same title which have appeared during the last two years in the New Phytologist. (See Bot. Absts. 2: 72, 73, 74, 75; 3: 1142; 5: 720, 721.) 334. Soueges, Ren^:. Embryogenie des Oenotheracees. Developpement de I'embryon chez 1' Oenothera biennis L. [The embryogeny of the Oenotheraceae. The development of the embryo of Oenothera biennis.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:946-949. 11 fig. 1920.— The 4-celled stage resembles that of most angiosperms. The upper 2 cells give rise to the cotyledons and the hypocotyl. The middle cell develops very early into the hypo- physis, and the lower to the few-celled suspensor. — C. H. Farr. 335. Thompson, John McLean. The morphology of the stele of Platyzoma microphyllum. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919:332-333. 1920. 336. Vuillemin, P. L'amphigonelle et la phylogenie des amentales. [The "amphigonelle" and the phylogeny of the Amentales.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X, 1: 139-200. 1919.— Author is adverse to use of word flower for precise scientific writing; amphigonelle is his term for type of 50 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES [Bot. Absts., Vol. VII, reproductive apparatus widespread in lower groups of Dicotyledons, especially in Amentales. He distinguishes three stages of evolution of reproductive apparatus or "gonelle:" (1) Am- phigonelle, which represents lowest degree of differentiation among Dicotyledons, and is characterized by diffuseness, for axis is polycentric — i.e., with many centers of growth; (2) Acrogonelle with*a concentration of parts making a monocentric axis; and (3) Anthogonelle, which is set off from preceding by development of corolla. The last corresponds best with pop- ular conception of flower. Bound up with above ideas is author's theory of stem evolution — that there are two principal stages, the stage of the stipe with its Jrondomes and stage of the caulome with its phyllomes. The amphigonelle is considered stipular in character, as shown in polycentric axis; its receptacle is broken up into gonoclines, each of which builds a part of the gonelle called gonelette. The amphigonelle is one of the characteristics of Amentales; and the catkin, capitulum, or glomerulus are amphigonelles rather than flowers or inflores- cences. Amentales afford opportunity to study modifications of amphigonelle and its transi- tion to acrogonelle. Author devotes most of work to morphological analysis of class Amen- tales, applying above and other details of his conceptions. — In a second (smaller) portion he presents his ideas of the phylogeny of class, in which he includes the following orders: Jug- landales, Salicales, Casuarinales, Cupuliferae, Myricales, Piperales, and Chloranthales. — James P. Kelly. 337. Winkler, Hans. Verbreitung und Ursache der Parthenogenesis im Pflanzen— und Tierreiclie. [The occurrence and causes of parthenogenesis throughout the animal and plant kingdoms.] vi + 231 p. Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1920. MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES Alexander W. Evans, Editor 338. Anonymous. Sphagna. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 23 : 205-210. 1918. — The species of Sphagnum listed number 33 and represent the specimens offered for exchange by the Club during 1917. Several of the species include named varieties and forms. Critical notes by J. A. W[heldon] are interspersed throughout. — A. W. Evans. 339. Anonymous. True mosses. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 23:210-214. 1918. — Under the "true mosses" only the Acrocarpi are included. The species listed num- ber 65, and critical notes are furnished by R. N. M[eldrum], W. E. N[icholson], and J. A. W[heldon]. — A. W. Evans. . 340. Anonymous. Pleurocarpi. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 23 : 214-217. 1918. — The pleurocarpous mosses listed number 33, and the critical notes included are by H. N. D[ixon], W. I[ngham], and J. A. W[heldon]. — A. W. Evans. 341. Anonymous. Hepatics. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 23:217-219. 1918. ^The species listed include 5 Ricciae, 33 Jungermanniales, and 1 Anthoceros. Lepidozia intermedia Schiffn. is recognized as a valid species, although Schiffner had proposed it pro- visionally. The critical notes are by H. H. K[night] and S. M. M[acvicar]. — A. W. Evans. 342. Anonymous. Synopsis of the European Sphagna [Corrections and additions]. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 23:219-221. 1918.— The data here given are supple- mentary to J. A. Wheldon's work, published under the above title. The "additions" relate to varieties and forms of 19 species of Sphagnum, all supposedly new to the British Isles. Two of these are varieties of S. franconiae Warnst., a species not included in earlier lists of British Sphagna. — A. W. Evans. 343. Anonymous. Sphagna. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 24: 229-234. 1919. — The species of Sphagnum listed number 26 and include numerous varieties and forms. As in the previous Annual Report many of the specimens cited are accompanied by critical remarks, signed "J. A. W[heldon]." — A. W. Evans. No. 1, Febuuary, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES 51 344. Ano.xymous. True mosses. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 24: 234-241. 1919 —The acrocarpous mosses listed number 9G and include 6 species from continental Europe and 1 each from New Zealand and Canada, the remaining species being all repre- sented by British specimens. Critical notes by H. N. D[ixon], H. H. K[night], W. E. N[iCH0LS0i\], P. G. M. R[hodes], and W. I[ngham] accompany the citations, one of the most important of these notes relating to Dicranum Bonjeani var. alaium Barnes.— A. W. Evans . 345. Anonyjious. Pleurocarpi. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 24: 241-243. 1919.— Except for 1 species from Switzerland the 35 pleurocarpous mosses listed are all from the British Isles. Hypnum fluitans var. atlanticum Ren. and //. uncinatum var. plumulosum Schp. are discussed at some length by J. A. W[heldon], and shorter notes by the same writer and by W. I[ngham] are included. — A. W. Evans. 346. Anonymous. Hepatics. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 24: 244-247. 1919.— The 6(5 species listed include 5 from Tasmania, 3 from continental Europe and 1 from Africa, the remainder being represented by British specimens. Notes by P. G. M. R[iiodes], H. H. K[night], and S. M. M[acvicar] accompany the citations, the note by the last having reference to the recently described Herberta Hntchinsiae (Gottsche) Evans.— A. W. Evans. 347. Anonymous. Sphagna. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 25: 257 259. 1920.— The Sphagna distributed during 1919 numbered 25 species, several of which were represented by numerous varieties and forms. One specimen came from Canada, the others from the British Isles. A few short critical notes by J. A. W[heldon] are included in the report. — A. W. Evans. 348. Anonymous. True mosses. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 25:259-264. 1920.— Both the Acrocarpi and the Pleurocarpi are here included under the "true mosses," 97 species in all being listed. Of the specimens cited 14 came from Scandinavia, 7 from other parts of continental Europe, 4 from Canada and the remainder from the British Isles. The notes accompanying the citations of specimens are by H. N. D[ixon], D. A. J[ones], H. H. K[night], W. E. N[icholson], W. I[ngham], and J. A. W[heldon].— .4. W. Evans. 349. Anonymous. Hepatics. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 25: 264-266. 1920.— Of the 46 species listed 10 came from continental Europe, the others from Great Britain. All except 3 are Jungermanniales. H. H. K[xight] and D. A. J[ones] have con- tributed a few critical remarks. — A. W. Evans. 350. Brotherus, V. F. Contributions a la fiore bryologique de I'Ecuador. [Contribu- tions to the moss flora of Ecuador.] Rev. Bryologique 47: 1-16. 1920.— The present report is based on a collection of mosses made in 1909 and 1910 by the late Abbe Allioni in the provinces of Oriente and Azuay, Ecuador. The majority of the specimens came from Oriente, a region heretofore unknown bryologically. In the first part of the report (which is to be continued) 95 species belonging to 19 families are listed with definite data regarding stations. The families most largely represented are the Neckeraceae with 25 species, the Dicranaceae and the Pottiaceae with 12 each. The following species, 20 in all, are described as new: Barbula ecuadoriensis , B. hijalinobasis , B. linguaecupes, Breulelia Allionii, B. brachyphylla, B. reclinata, Bryum Allionii, Campylopus tener, Fissidens Allionii, F. altolim- batus, Grimmia Allionii, Hyophila grossidens, Molendoa subobtusifolia, Pilopogon macro- carpus, Pilotrichella Allionii, Pleurochaete ecuadoriensis, Porothamnium gracile, Syrrhopo- don macrophyllus, S. subrigidus, and S. subscaber. The following represent new combinations : Campylopus liliputanus (C. Miill.) Broth. {Pilopogon liliputanus C. Mtill.) and Porotricho- dendron superbum (Tayl.) Broth. {Leskea superba Ta.j\.).—A. W. Evans. 351. LuisiER, A. Les mousses de Madere. [Mosses of Madeira.] Broteria, Ser. Bot. 18:79_97_ 1920.— This is the eighth article of a series previously noticed, which discusses completely the mosses of Madeira. The present installment covers the two families Sema- 52 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, tophyllaceae and Brachytheciaceae. Besides the usual data upon collections and local dis- tribution, the author gives detailed notes upon the species or varieties listed below, all of which are of restricted occurrence or little known. These species are: H omalothecium seri- ceum (L.) B. & S. var. Mandoni (Mitt.) R. & C, Brachythecium CardotiWint., Oxyrrhynchium orotavense R. & C, Rhynchostegiella Bourgeana (Mitt.) Broth., Rh. surrecta (Mitt.) Broth., and Rhynchostegium Winteri Card. [See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 156.] — E. B. Chamberlain. 352. Pearson, Wm. Hy. Apolozia Pendletonii Pearson, n. sp. Bryologist 23:50-52. PI. 2. 1920. — This new hepatic is related to Jungermannia cordifolia Hook. It was collected at Sisson, California. — E. B. Chamberlain. 353. Wheldon, J. A. Recent new Sphagnum records. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 24: 247-252. 1919. — The specimens cited represent new county records for Great Britain. Thirty-four species of Sphagnum are listed, including numerous varieties and forms, some of which are here reported for the first time from the British Isles. — A. W. Evans. 354. Williams, R. S. Grimmia (Guembelia) brevirostris, sp. nov. Bryologist 23: 52-53. PI. 3. 1920. — A detailed description of a new species of moss from Plumas County, California. — E. B. Chamberlain. MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, LICHENS, BACTERIA AND MYXOMYCETES H. M. FiTZPATRiCK, Editor FUNGI 355. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Blanc, Georges and Gabriel Brun. [A further case of black-grain mycetoma (Madura Foot) in Tunisia.] Bull. Soc. Path. Exotique. Dec. 10, 1919.] Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23: 43-44. 1920. — Reports the seventh case found in Tunisia of Madura Foot. This is a mycetoma. The cause was found to be a fungus closely related to Madurella tozeuri Nicolle and Pinoy but differing in several characters and named accordingly M. tabarkae. — E. A. Bessey. 356. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Smith, Theobald. Mycosis of the bovine foetal membranes due to a mould of the genus Mucor. Jour. Exp. Med. 31: 115. 1920.] Jour. Comp. Path, and Therap. 33 : 60-64. 1920. — A description of infection of foetal membranes of cattle due to a species of Mucor closely related to M. rhizopodiformis. On inoculation into rabbits, it caused their death. — E. A. Bessey. 357. Anonymous. The species concept among fungi. [Rev. of: Brierly, W. B. — Trans. British Mycol. Soc. 4. Sept., 1919.] Nature 104: 708. 1920.— The author protests against specific descriptions based on growths as found in nature, especially for species on cultivated plants. The only exact method is by quantitative data derived from cultural treatment under standardized physico-chemical conditions. — 0. A. Stevens. 358. Brierly, William B. The fungal species. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Sci. 1919:340-341. 1920. 359. Castellani, Aldo. The etiology of thrush. Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23: 17-22. 1 pi. 1920.— The author claims that instead of the one fungus, Oidium albicans Robin, many fungi in the genera Monilia, Oidium, Hemispora, Willia, Endomyces, and Saccharomyces may cause this disease. The generic differences are given. The clinical varie- ties of thrush are described, with the causal organism for each. — E. A. Bessey. No. 1, Februaky, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. 53 360. Castellani, Aldo. Milroy lectures on the higher fungi in relation to human pathol- ogy. (Lecture I.) Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23: 101-110. Fig. 1-9. 1920.— A brief sur- vey is given of the discovery of fungi pathogenic to man. The general classification of fungi is given and in particular that of the families containing such pathogenes. Notes are given on physiology and on the use of sets of fungi for biochemical analysis. — E. A. Bessey. 361. Castellani, Aldo. Milroy lectures on the higher fungi in relation to human pathol- ogy. (Lecture n.) Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23: 117-125. 10 fig. 1920.— The author discusses thrush, broncho-mycoses, tonsillo-mycoses, certain mycoses of the nervous system and organs of special sense, and certain mycoses of the urogenital system. A key is given to the physiological determination of the pathogenic Monilia species, showing their reaction to various carbohydrates, gelatin, litmus milk, etc. — E. A. Bessey. 362. Castellani, Aldo. Milroy lectures on the higher fungi in relation to human pathol- ogy. (Lecture III.) Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23 : 133-138. 2 pi, 6 fig. 1920.— The sub- jects treated are trichomycoses and dermatomycoses. The former affect only the hairs and may be caused by species of Aspergillus, Penicillium and Nocardia. The true dermatomy- coses are very numerous and caused by a great variety of fungi, which are described in some detail. — E. A. Bessey. 363. Chalmers, Albert J., and Norman Macdonald. Bronchomoniliasis in the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan and Egypt. Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23: 1-7. 1 pi. 1920.— The article discusses several types of bronchomycosis and the causal fungi. The latter were grown in culture and identified by the aid of cultural as well as morphological characteristics. The species concerned were Monilia krusei, M. pinoyi, and M. pseudoguillermondi. A discus- sion is given of the nomenclatorial history of the name Monilia. — E. A. Bessey. 364. Chiovenda, E. Nuova localita italiana per il Myriostoma coliliforme (Dichs.) Corda. [New station for Myriostoma coliliforme in Italy.] Nuova Gior. Bot. Ital., Nucva Ser. 27: 7-11. 1920. — Myriostoma coliliforme was collected in Ossola (Piemootz) for the first time. The fungus was found growing in close association with the roots of Polygonum persicaria, forming with the latter an endotrophic relationship. Only once before, in 1902, has this fungus been observed in Italy. — Ernst Artschwager. 365. Garrett, A. O. Some unique rusts. Utah Acad. Sci. 1:132-136. 1918. — Paper presented to the Academy, April, 1915. — Review of recent work on life-history studies. — D. Reddick. 366. Hemmi, Takewo. Kurze Mitteilung iiber drei Falle von Anthraknose auf Pfianzen. [Short report on three cases of anthracnose of plants.] Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan 1^: 13-21. 1 pi, 5 fig. 1920. 367. KuNKEL, L. O. Further data on the orange rusts of Rubus. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 501-512. PI D (colored) and 92-94. 1920.— Collections were made of the long-cycled rust, Gymnoconia inter stitialis, and the short-cycled rust occurring on Rubus spp. about Wash- ington, D. C. A study of these specimens has shown that the rust on the black raspberry is always long cycled while the rust on the blackberry and dewberry is always short cycled. Spores of the two rusts were germinated on water and Beyerinck agar at temperatures from 5° to 30°C. Spores taken from blackberry leaves always produced promycelia, while those from black raspberry leaves produced long germ tubes. Additional morphological differ- ences in the two rusts were observed. The spores of the short-cycled rust are small, angular, and in mass cadmium orange, while the spores of Gymnoconia are larger, more regular, and in mass xanthine yellow. The author considers that a genetic relationship exists between the two rusts, since spores of the long-cycled species at times produce promycelia bearing sporidia. The occurrence of a suppressed short cycle in Grjmnoconid leads him to believe that long- cycled rusts are the more primitive. — \V. H. Burkholder. 54 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 368. Namyslowski, B. Etat actuel des recherches sur les phenomlnes de la sexuality des Mucorinees. [The status of researches on sexuality in the Mucorineae.] Rev. G6n. Bet. 32: 193-215. 9 fig. 1920. — A summarj' of the results of experimental researches on reproduc- tion and hybridization in this group of fungi. A bibliography of 34 titles is appended. — L. W. Sharp. 369. Rick, J. Contributio ad monographiam Agaricacearum brasiliensium. [Contribu- tion toward a monograph of Brazilian agarics.] Broteria (Ser. Bot.) 18:48-63. 1920. — This list contains 106 species and a few varieties, without citation of authorities except for new species, apparently all from the province of Rio Grande do Sul. In case of species already described, only a line or two of notes appear. In case of new species the descriptions are more complete. Of these the author says: "In this contribution many species are described whose identity with European species is quite probable, but not certain. I have therefore given a full description and a new name. At the same time I have indicated the old species with which the new is perchance identical." New species are proposed in Lepiota, Hypho- loma, Armillaria, Tricholoma, Collybia, Pluteolus, Eccilia, Clitopilus, Claudopus, Inocybe, Nauconia, Galera, Tubaria, Pilosace, Psilocybe, and Hygrophorus. [See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 20i.]—E. B. Chamberlain. 370. Thaxter, Roland. New Dimorphomyceteae. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci. 55: 211-282. 1920. — The author discusses in general the unisexual forms of the Laboul- beniales and in particular the distinction between the genera Dimeromyces and Dimorpho- myces. Polyandromyces is described as a new genus with one species and a variety as the known representatives. Eleven new species of Dimeromyces and fifty-one new species of Dimorphomyces are described. — E. B. Payson. LICHENS 371. MoREAU, F. (M. ET MME.) Recherches sur les lichens de la famille des Pelti- geracees. [Researches on lichens of the family Peltigeraceae.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X, 1: 29-138. 13 pi., 23 fig. 1919. — Authors are especially interested in reproduction of fungus of the lichen and in morphological influence of one symbiont on other. Their presentation is in three parts: (1) the fungus, (2) the alga, and (3) the alga-fungus complex. Authors empha- size mycelium as constituting colorless part of lichen. Underground or substratal mycelium is typical and generally neglected by students; authors call attention to occasional fusions among underground hyphae and to evidence for method of formation of septa. Typical mycelium appears also in the gonidial layer. Each cell is here described as having a single nucleus and metachromatic granules. In considering medullary region and pseudoparenchy- matous region (plectenchyma), character of walls is emphasized. Authors refer to two kinds of reproductive bodies set free by Peltigeraceae; viz., spermatids and ascospores. They note that status of spermatids is uncertain. They found spermatids only in genus Nephro- mium, but did not make out fate of spermatids after being set free. Their studies showed that ascospore formation proceeds in absence of spermatids, and they deny to latter gametic functions. Ascospores an uncertain means of maintaining species, since a proper alga must be met when spore germinates. Soredia are certain to lead to new lichens. A consideration is next presented of beliefs of Stahl and Bachmann, of FuNFSTtTCK, and of Dangeard con- cerning occurrence of sexual phenomena at formation of apothecia in fungi, and hypothesis of Dangeard is favored. — Authors point^ out that the kind of alga (gonidia) whether of Cyanophyceae or Chlorophyceae, determines sub-generic groups in each of three genera of Peltigeraceae. Chlorophyceous Peltigeraceae may enclose Cyanophyceae in cephalodia. The authors point out necessity of pure culture methods in study of lichen algae. — Mutual relationships of alga and fungus studied in following exceptional formations which begin with algae in unusual positions: (a) tubercles resembling very large soredia on lower sur- face of thallus (displaced gonidia cause neighboring hyphae to assume special character); (b) soredial aberrations; (c) foliar ramifications of thallus, and (d) cephalodia formation due to action on hyphae of foreign alga. — Desirable further lines of study are mapped out at close. — James P. Kelly. No. 1, February, 1921] PALEOBOTANY 55 372. Riddle, L. W. Two publications on tropical American lichens. [Rev. of: (1) de Lesdain, Bouly. Lichens de Mexique (Etats de Puebla et du Michoacan) recueillis par le Frere Arsene Brouard. Brochure. PI. 1-31. 1914. (2) Wainio, Edvard. Additamenta ad Lichenographiam Antillarum illustrandam. Ann. Acad. Sci. Fennicae Ser. A. 6: pt. 7. 1915.] Bryologist 23: 60-61. 1920. — The reviewer calls attention to these two publications, which contains many descriptions of new species, since neither seems likely to have a wide distribution. That upon Mexican lichens is a wholly independent publication; the other publication, reviewer states, is received in America only at the Smithsonian Institution. — E. B. Chamberlain. BACTERIA 373. Bokura, Umenojo. A new bacterial disease of Gypsy-moth caterpillars. Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan P: 34-55. 1920. 374. Cauda, A. Gruppi vegetal! fissatori di azoto libero. [Plant groups that fix free nitrogen.] Nuovo Gior. Bot. Ital. 26: 169-178. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 846. 375. Gentxer, G. Eine Bakteriose der Gerste. [A bacteriosis of barley.) Centralbl. Bakt. 502 : 428-441. 1920. [From Absts. Bact. 4: 292. 1920.] 376. Paillot, a. Sur le polymorphisme des Bacteries. [The polymorphism of bacteria.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 905-906. 2 fig. 1920. — Two bacilli which cause disease in caterpillars are described. When in the caterpillar they present various forms. It is sug- gested that polymorphism may in some cases be due to the effect of the tissues or liquids of the living host.— C. N. and W. K. Farr. 377. Peterson, W. H., and E. B. Fred. The fermentation of glucose, galactose, and mannose by Lactobacillus pentoaceticus. n. sp. Jour. Biol. Chem. 42: 273-287. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1338. PALEOBOTANY AND EVOLUTIONARY HISTORY E. W. Berry, Editor 378. Adami, J. G. Medical contributions to the study of evolution. 8vo, 272 p. Mac- millan and Co. : London, 1920. Price, $7.25. 379. Anonymous. Gymnospermic history. [Rev. of: Seward, A. C. Fossil Plants: A text-book for students of botany and geology. Vol. 4, Ginkgoales, Coniferales, Gnetales. xvi + 543 p. University Press: Cambridge, 1919.] Nature 105:97-93. 1920. It is disap- pointing but perhaps not surprising that the work closes with this group. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2517.)— 0. A. Stevens. 380. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Wieland, G. R. Classification of Cycadophyta. Araer. Jour. Sci. 47: 391-406. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1620.)] Nature 104: 509-510. 1920. 381. [B., F. O.] The origin of plant life on land. [Rev. of: Church, A. H. Thalassio- phyta and the subaerial transmigration. Bot. Mem. No. 3. 95 p. Oxford Univ. Press: Lon- don, 1919.] Nature 104: 624. 1920. — A real contribution full of originality and of interesting though bluff criticisms. The cautious philosopher would probably prefer greater elasticity of the thesis. Omits reference to the important discoveries of Lower Devonian fossils in the Rhynie-Chert and to question of transference of the tetral division in the course of descent to a fresh position in the life cycle. — 0. A. Stevens. 56 PALEOBOTANY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 382. Berry, Edward W. Fossil plants from the late Cretaceous of Tennessee. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6: 333-334. 1920.— The Gulf Coastal Plain presents a comparatively complete paleobotanical record from the Cretaceous to the present. The two large gaps have been the late Upper Cretaceous and the Miocene. In 1919, in western Tennessee, Dr. Bruce Wade discovered abundant material in clay lenses of the Ripley formation — the latest Cretaceous of the region. Remains of 124 species (86 new) have been identified. The species are referred to 62 genera (30 extiijct), 38 families, and 25 orders; 5 ferns, 6 gymnosperms, 7 monocotyledons, and 105 dicotyledons are included. "A complete account .... will be published by the U. S. Geological Survey." — Howard B. Frost. 383. Berry, Edward W. Fossil plants. [Rev. of: Seward, A. C. Fossil plants. Vol. IV. Cambridge Univ. Press: Cambridge, 1919.] Plant World 22: 341-342. 1919. "On the whole it seems to the reviewer that Professor Seward has performed a difficult task about as well as could be expected, and despite their obvious shortcomings, which have been freely criticised, these four volumes are a mine of information for the student interested in the floras of the past." — {Author's summary.) 384. Berry, Edward W. New specific name. Torreya 20: 101. 1920. — Inga oligocaen- ica Berry (Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. 103: 32. 1918.) from the Oligocene of the Canal Zone is antedated by Inga oligocaenica Engelhardt (1898), from the Oligocene of Bohemia. The name Inga culebrana is accordingly proposed.- — J. C. Nelson. 385. Berry, E. W. The ancestors of the sequoias. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2:207-208. 1920. — A reprint of an article which appeared in a recent number of Natural History. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 793.]—^. W. Berry. 386. Berry, E. W. The teaching of paleobotany. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. 31:389-392. 1920. — Outlines the content of a universitj^ course in paleobotany. — E. W. Berry. 387. Berry, E. W. The age of the Dakota flora. Amer. Jour. Sci. 50: 387-390. 1920.— Discusses the age of the flora found in the Dakota sandstone of the western United States and shows that it cannot be Lower Cretaceous in age. The thesis is maintained that the Dakota sandstone is intimately associated with the Upper Cretaceous marine transgression of the Benton and is probably Turonian in age. — E. W. Berry. 388. Carpentier, A. Contribution a I'etude des fructifications du Culm de Mouzeil (Loire-Inferieure). [Contribution to the study of the fructifications from the Culm of Mou- zeil.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32:337-350. 2 pi., 5 figs. 1920. — The basin of the Basse-Loire con- sists of two SE-NW synclines, known respectively by the names of Ancenis and Teill6-Mou- zeil. Fossil plants of this region were described by Brongniart, but the fructifications of the Pteridospermae were made known chiefly by. Grand 'Eury and Bureau. The author has studied further the imprints of fructifications found here. — On the whole the Culm flora is less rich in genera and species than the Westphalian flora of the coal basin of Valenciennes. Among the most common impressions are those of Sphenopteris Dubuissoni, S. elegans, and S. dissectiim (Brongt.). The Neuropterideae are rare: the genus Neuropteris is repre- sented only by a few fragments of A'', antecedens and N. Schlehani. The Lepidodendreae, including Lepidodendron lycopodioides, Lepidophloios laricinus, and Ulodendron, are fairly common. — Descriptions are given of the following seeds, with or without cupules: Lageno- spermum tenuifolium Nathorst g., {E. Bureau sp.), associated with Neuropteris antecedens Stur and a Sphenopteris ; L. crassum n. sp., associated with Sphenopteris Dubuissoni Brongt.; L. inflatum n. sp., possibly representing the escaped seeds of the cupule known as L. cras- sum; L. aff. nitidulum (Heer) Nathorst, associated with Sphenopteris dissectum and one other species; L. sp.; Carpolithus L. (cf. Rhabdocarpus turbinatus) E. Bureau sp.; C. sp. Three types of microsporangia are described: Telangium sp., associated with Sphenopteris Dubuis- soni; Pterispermotheca n. gen.; Cf. Diplotheca (D. stellata Kidston). Two uncertain impres- sions, one of them known as Guilielmites, are also mentioned. — L. W. Sharp. No. 1, February, 1921] PALEOBOTANY 57 3S9. Chaney, Ralph W. The flora of the Eagle Creek formation. Cont. Walker Mus. 2^: 115-182. PI. 5-2.2. 1920. — The paucity of described fossil floras from the Pacific coast region renders this an important contribution. The Eagle Creek flora, as described in this contribution, comprises 72 species, of which 38 are described as new and referred to the genera Equisetum (?), Picea (?), Pinus, Cyperacites, SabalUes, Smilax, Phyllites, Populus, Myrica, Hicoria, Juglans, Alnus, Betula, Conjhis, Castanea (?), Fagus (?), Quercus, Ulmus, Liriodendron, Magnolia, Laurophyllum, Liquidarnbar, Crataegus, Prunus, Cercis, Legumino- sites, Acer, Tilia, Nyssa, Fraxinus (?), and Carpolithus. These all appear to be well founded except the Liriodendron. The local sections where the fossils were found along the present Columbia River gorge, the composition, physical environment, ecology and correlation of the flora are fully and satisfactorily discussed.— The Eagle Creek formation is entirely volcanic in origin and stream laid. It is considered, on the basis of the intermediate character of the flora between known upper Eocene and Miocene floras, to be of Oligocene age. The flora, which is largely dicotyledonous, shows a striking resemblance to the mixed hardwood flora of the eastern United States— this resemblance extending to even the relative representation of the families, the only departures being a shortage of Salicaceae and Rosaceae and an excess of Fagaceae and Hamamelidaceae. Oaks are the most abundant forms, both individually and specifically. Maples and elms are also prominent elements. The flora is considered to represent two principal distinct ecological types; namely, xerophytes that are thought to have grown on the water poor ridges and uplands, and the contemporaneous mesophytes of the well-watered valley bottom and sides.— £^. W. Berry. .390. De La Vaulx, R., and P. Marty, avec introduction de Ph. Glangeaud. Nou- velles recherches sur la f.ore fossile des environs de Varennes (Puy-de-Dome). [New researches on the fossil flora of the vicinity of Varennes.] Rev. G6n. Bot. 32: 282-300, 327- 336, 351-368. 3 pi., 2 fig. 1920.— A study of the fossil flora of three fossiliferous beds in one of the volcanic regions of France, based on a critical examination of the material described, by BotTLAY (Flore Pliocene du Mont-Dore, Paris 1872) and on new collections. The paper is prefaced by a brief account of the stratigraphy of the region by Ph. Glangeaud, who agrees with Boulay in assigning the beds in question to the upper Miocene or lower Pliocene. The list of fossil trees, shrubs, and herbs now reported from this locality comprises 47 forms rep- resenting 23 families; 37 of them have been specifically determined. The following 14 are newly discovered by the authors: Ginkgo biloha Kaempf., Sparganium sp. CeUis Japeti Ung., Lauris nobilis L., Carya minor Sap. et Mar., Paeonia motiton Sims., Myriophyllitis sp., Cercis slUquastrum L., Raphiolepis indica Lindl., Bumelia Rieufi Marty, Fraxinus oregona Nutt., Ilex decidua Walt., Ilex balearica Desf., and Rosa Glangeaudi Marty. A list of about 50 species of diatoms is also included.— After a discussion of the palaeontological and geologi- cal evidence the authors conclude that the fossil flora of Varennes was buried during the Mio-Pliocene in the sediments of a lake into which volcanic ashes were thrown. This flora was continental, montane, and temperate, less than one-tenth of the species being sub-tropical. The mean temperature in this region during the Mio-Pliocene was probably from 12° to 14°C. Since that time some of the elements of the flora have migrated 5 geographical degrees southward. — Bibliography of 67 titles. — L. W. Sharp. 391. Galipps, V. Recherches sur la resistance des microzymas a Paction du temps et sur leur survivance dans I'ambre. [The longevity of microzymas and its survival in amber.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:850-858. 1920.— A microscopic examination of amber after dissolving in ether reveals the presence of microzymas and of ovoid and rod-shaped bacilli.— C. A^ and W. K. Farr. 392. Lull, R. S. Organic evolution. 8vo, 729 p. The Macmillan Co. : New York, 1920. Price, $3.25. 393. MacFarland, J. M. The causes and course of organic evolution. 8vo, 875 p. The Macmillan Co. : New York, 1920. Price, H.OO. 58 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 394. Metcalf, Matnard M. Upon an important method of studying problems of relation- ship and of geographical distribution. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6: 432-433. 1920.— A family of "frogs," the Leptodactylidae, occurs in tropical and south-temperate America, and elsewhere only in Australia and Tasmania. This fact has been explained as a result of former land connection or as a result of convergent or parallel evolution. In both conti- nents, however, the Leptodactylidea have parasites of the genus Zelleriella, "and the Austral- ian Zelleriellas so closely resemble the American forms that it is difficult to separate them specifically." Since it is extremely improbable that both host and parasite have evolved so similarly on distant continents, the hypothesis of former land connection is held to be definitely confirmed. This procedure of considering together the distribution of host and parasite is strongly recommended, as promising definite solution of various problems of phylogeny, migration, etc., with both animals and plants. — Howard B. Frost. 395. T., E. N. Botany at the British Association. Nature 104: 520-521. 1920. PHYSIOLOGY B. M. DuGGAR, Editor Carroll W. Dodge, Assistant Editor GENERAL 396. LiNHART, G. A. A new and simplified method for the statistical interpretation of biometrical data. Univ. California Publ. Agric. Sci. 4: 159-181. 12 fig. 1920.— Describes graphic methods for determining the values of k and h in the fundamental equation, y = ke-'^'^' (1) When X = 0, y will equal k. Therefore k may be defined as the probability of error zero and as the largest number of measurements of a given set having the same numerical value. Substitution of yo for k gives 1. = e-'^'^' (2) Vo By use of logarithms this may be transformed into the linear equation, log (2.303 log- J = 2 logx + 2 log A (3) log (log -) =2 1ogx + 2 log ;i- 0,3623 (4) Let X = 2 log /i - 0.3623, then log (log ^\ =2\ogx +K (5) This will be recognized as the equation to a straight line having a slope of 2 and intercept K, when log ( log — ) is plotted as ordinate and log x as abscissa. The vajue of K being thus easily determined the value of h, the index of precision, may be calculated from K + 2logh- 0.3623 and is ^ K + 0.3623 f.. h = (10) 2 ^6) or No. 1, February, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 59 The value of hx corresponding to the integral value 0.5 {vide probability integral table) is 0.4769. Then _ iv +0.3623 X = 0.4769 (10) 2 (7) which gives the probable error of a single observation. The probable error of the mean is equal to the probable error of one observation divided by the square root of the total number of observations, X 0.4769 , . _ ^±M^ X(i — = — r^- (10) 2 (8) Vn Vn In the case of skew frequency distributions the above equations do not strictly apply because of a preponderance of either positive or negative errors. For such cases the equation, ^ = e-^<'-?J. (9) y is proposed. Here m represents the numerical value of any measurement and mo the value of the geometric mean. This may be transformed into the equation, log - = 2.303 h^ (log — Y (10) or log ^" = xflog ^Y ... (11) y \ mo/ Numerous examples of the use of the equations are given, in which the values obtained are compared with those computed by other methods. — H. S. Reed. DIFFUSION, PERMEABILITY 397. Priestley, J. H. Root pressure. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919:337. 1920. WATER RELATIONS 398. Harris, F. S. The effect of soil moisture on the morphology of certain plants. [Abstract.] Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 65. 1918. 399. Livingston, Burton E., and Riichiro Koketsu. The water-supplying power of the soil as related to the wilting of plants. Soil Sci. 9:469-485. 1920.— Plants of Coleus blumei and Triticum sativum grown in 12 mixtures of varying amounts of glass sand, clay loam, and humus, were allowed to wilt until permanent wilting was evident. Dry, unglazed porcelain cones ("soil points") were then thrust into the soil and the amount of water which they absorbed in a given length of time ("water-supplying" power of soil) was determined by removing and weighing. This amount for a 2 hour period was from 0.04-0.11 g. The average value was the same for both plants and practically the same for all 12 soils. — W. J. Robbins. 400. Zeller, S. M. Humidity in relation to moisture imbibition by wood and to spore germination on wood. Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 7: 51-74. 1 pi, 5 jig. 1920.— The rnoisture contents of wood at various atmospheric humidities are presented, the temperature being held at 25°C. Graphs are given to illustrate the relation between water content and humidity, for sap and heart-wood of both longleaf and shortleaf pine. By testing at various humidities the moisture content of any one species of wood, it was possible to approximate the fiber- saturation point. The moisture-humidity curves of highly resinous samples illustrate the 60 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, water-proofing effect of resin — especially above 50 per cent humidity. The germination curve for spores of Lenzites saepiaria illustrates the fact that spore germination is greatly accel- erated when the atmospheric humidity is high enough to maintain fiber saturation of the wood. — A humidor for maintaining constant humidity and temperature is described. It is provided with a dew-point apparatus for the determination of humidity, and a weighing device by means of which the samples can be weighed without opening the humidity chamber. —S. M. Zeller. MINERAL NUTRIENTS 401. BoTTOMLEY, W. B. The growth of Lemna plants in mineral solutions and in their natural medium. Ann. Botany 34:345-352. 1920. — Lemna major and Lemna yninor cannot grow normally in Knop's or Detmer's solution, but the addition of certain organic substances to these solutions permits rapid and healthy growth. These organic substances essential to the metabolism of the plants are to be found in the w^ater of the ponds in which the plants normally grow, and maintain the plants in health, although lack of sufficient quantities of nitrates and phosphates under these conditions acts as a limiting factor, retarding their rate of multiplication. — G. M. Armstrong. 402. DuGGAR, B. jNL Hydrogen ion concentration and the composifcion of nutrient solutions in relation to the grov/th of seed plants. Ann. Missouri Bot. Card. 7: 1-50. 7 fig. 1920. - For several years the author has been examining the effect of the reaction of the medium on growth in certain physiologically balanced nutrient solutions and has secured many data concerning the extent of change of the Ph value of the solution in which the plants have grown, as well as concerning growth relations with the variations in active acidity. Thus in this report of experimental work particular reference is not made to the proportions of the different salts involved in the nutrient solutions except as they may influence the active acidity. For this report four solutions were used, as follows: Solution A was a slight modi- fication of Shive's solution, having the following partial volume-molecular proportions — KH2PO4, 0.0180; Ca(N03)2, 0.0052; MgS04, 0.0150; and "soluble ferric phosphate," 0.0044 gm. per liter. Solution B was an extreme modification of the Crone solution, having the following proportions of salts— KNO.,, 0.00495; CaS04, 0.000726; MgSO,, 0.000526; and "sol- uble iron phosphate," 0.125 gm. per liter; this is a four-salt solution having a higher pro- portion of iron than the usual nutrient solution. Solution C was the Livingston and Tot- tingham solution, modified by the addition of "soluble ferric phosphate" as in Solution A— KNO,, 0.0216; CaCHzPOJj, 0.0026; and MgSO,, 0.0150. It is assumed that the osmotic value of solutions A and C is approximately that of Shive's solution — 1.75 atmospheres — while that of Solution B is much less. — The culture methods employed were essentially those described before. Seedlings of corn, field peas, and vv^heat were used. For the determination of active acidity the standard solutions and indicators suggested by Clark and Lubs were emploj'ed. The total green weight with the remains of the seed, or cotyledons, cut away was used as an index to growth. In this way the health and growth of the plant is most favorably expressed. — The experiments were conducted under a considerable range of environ- mental conditions. "Under the most favorable conditions, the three solutions mentioned above, without other modifications, may all yield excellent growth. Plants grown in Solu- tion B are invariably a deeper green, presenting a finer appearance and the average of the growth quantities is higher for wheat and corn than in either of the other two solutions. In the unmodified Solutions A and C, the green weight of peas averages higher than in the unmodified Solution B." Solutions A and C contain a monobasic phosphate and should have a Ph value of about 4.5. Experience shows that Solution B varies in active acidity from Ph 5.4 to Ph 7.1; although it is frequently 6.6 to 7.1. "Culture solutions prepared with monobasic phosphates may, however, exhibit a hydrogen-ion concentration which is too high for .... best growth under certain conditions, and especially is this true in the case of wheat." Solutions made with monobasic potassium or calcium phosphate, unless previously purified, may yield a Ph which is distinctly toxic. Correction to Ph 4.8 to 5.2 by means of NaOH or by use, in part, of a dibasic salt generally yields better growth. Under No. 1, February, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 61 conditions resulting in a high transpiration rate more alkaline solutions give better results. "Wheat, corn, and peas are sensitive in the order named to high hydrogen ion concentra- tion."— "Usually the addition to Solution B of small amounts of dibasic potassium phosphate, of solid calcium carbonate, and of aluminum hydroxide has given increased yields, often considerably above that of the unmodified solution." — The results indicate in general that there is no "best" solution for the growth of any of the plants used for this work. When the "Ph of the solution is considerably less than neutrality there is generally a tendency for this to be shifted toward the neutral point," depending upon the composition of the solution and upon the plant. — S. M. Zeller. 403. Greaves, J. E. The antagonistic action of calcium and iron salts toward other salts as measured by ammonification and nitrification. Soil Sci. 10: 77-102. 20 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 451. 404. JoHxsTo.x, Earl S. Nutrient requirement of the potato plant. Plant World 22: 329-336. 4 fig- 1919. — Difficulty was experienced in securing uniform potato plants for the experiments. Cuttings from potato vines, and sprouts removed from tubers at an early stage of development were not satisfactory. Somewhat older sprouts which had well devel- oped roots at time of separation were used. The nutrient solutions employed were made up to one atmosphere osmotic pressure with monobasic potassium phosphate, calcium nitrate, and magnesium sulphate. Roots showed a tendency to rot in the culture solution. The best growth was obtained in a three-salt solution in which the larger amount of the osmotic pressure was due to calcium nitrate. — Chan. A. Shull. 405. MoLLiARD, M. Influence d'une dose reduite de potassium sur les caracteres physio- logiques du Sterigmatocystis nigra. [The influence of an insufficient supply of potassium on the physiological characteristics of Sterigmatocystis nigra.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:949-951. 1920. — This is a comparison of cultures of Sterigmatocystis nigra containing potassium in an amount which insures optimum development and those which have the amount reduced. Full nutrient solutions contained 0.95 g. of KH2PO4 to 1000 cc. of water, the potassium-low solution contained 0.0119 g. It is found that in potassium-starved cul- ture the increase in dry weight is much slower; the sugar consumed in 20 days is equal to that consumed in full nutrient solution in two and two-thirds days. The sugar consumed instead of giving rise to CO2 gives rise to oxalic apid. There is an absence of conidia and black pigment and the rapid formation of a yellow pigment. A liquid is also produced which is soluble in the solutions and stains blue with iodine. — C. H. Farr. 406. Parker, F. W., and E. Truog. The relation between the calcium and the nitrogen content of plants and the function of calcium. Soil Sci. 10: 49-56. 1 fi^. 1920. — A tabulation of data on the ash content and nitrogen content of crop plants shows a close correlation between the calcium content and nitrogen content. Potassium, phosphorus, and magnesium show no such relation. The important agricultural plants can be divided into those having a low calcium-nitrogen ratio and low lime requirement, and those having a high calcium- nitrogen ratio and a higher lime requirement. The calcium neutralizes the plant acids formed in protein metabolism. — W . J . Rohhins. METABOLISM (GENERAL) 407. Allen, E. R. On carbohydrate consumption by Azotobacter chroococcum. Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 7: 75-79. 1 fig. 1920. — With a knowledge of some of the defects of pres- ent experimental methods for the study of the physiology of Azotohacter, three improve- ments are suggested for cultures. They are (1) renewal of the energy source in order to in- crease growth and to produce more marked changes in the amounts of metabolic products; "(2) simultaneous determination of nitrogen and of residual carbohydrates at short inter- vals" so as to obtain "a more complete picture of the growth processes of Azotohacter f and (3) "operations to facilitate experimental manipulation and possibly obtain even better 62 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, results from mechanical agitation." One experiment lacking in the second improvement is reported. "The results show that the rate of carbohydrate consumption in Azotobacter cultures does not proceed in a manner similar to the rate of increase in cell numbers pre- dicted by Duclaux Indeed, the curves resemble the antipode of the Duclaux curve." The fact that the organism utilizes renewals of carbohydrates seems to contradict the idea that there is an accumulation of metabolic products which are toxic to growth. The production of such substances in very short intervals in cultures as slow-growing and as dilute as those used in this experiment seems unlikely. — S. M. Zeller. 408. Anonymous. The red coloring matter of plant galls. [Rev. of: M. Niekenstein. Trans. Chem. Soc. 115: 1328-1332. 1919.] Nature 104:707. 1920.— Investigation of galls on British oak trees caused by Dryophanta divisa resulted in isolation of a red pigment to which the name of "dryophantin" was given. This was concluded to be a diglucoside of purpuro- gallin (the first to be found in nature) and of pathological origin. The author is of the opinion that the other so-called anthocyans obtained from plant galls are not properly anthocyans, but are related to "dryophantin," and he proposes to classify these under the name "gallo- rubrones." The reviewer considers the evidence insufficient clearly to establish the absence of anthocyan pigments. — 0. A. Stevens. 409. Anontmotjs. Scientific study of the sugar group. [Rev. of : Armstrong, E. Frank- land. The simple carbohydrates and the glucosides. 3d ed. x + 239 p. Longmans, Green and Co.: London, 1919.] Nature 104:526-527. 1920.— The chief import of the review is brought out in the quotation which follows, to the effect that the book ' 'is something more than a new and revised issue; it is to all intents and purposes a new book Students of the sugar group will have access to a thoroughly satisfactory book." — 0. A. Stevens. 410. BiBERFELD, JoHANNES. Ergcbnissc der experimentelien Toxikologie. Teil II. Organische Substanzen. A. Alkaloide. [Experimental toxicology. Part II. Organic sub- stances. A. Alkaloids.] Ergeb. der Physiol. 17: 1-362. 1919. 411. CosTANTiN, J. Physiologie de I'anthocyane et chimie de la chlorophylle. [Physi- ology of anthocyan and chemistry of chlorophyll.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X. 1 : xxxviii-lii. 1919. — The author discusses the present status of the knowledge of anthocyan and chloro- phyll. He refers to Combes' work in 1913 in which a treatment of a yellow flavone pigment derived from Vitis with nascent hydrogen gave a substance said to have been anthocyan. The author states that the reverse process of oxidation of anthocyan gave yellow flavone. The work of Willstatter confirmed Combes' conclusions. Such work linked up with the problems concerning glucosides and Combes' experiments with absorption of these in plants is referred to. The author calls attention to the belief of some that anthocyan results from an oxidation. This hypothesis is supported by the discovery that oxydase distribution paral- lels anthocyan distribution. Palladin made anthocyan one of his respiration pigments. Wheldalb's attempt to explain anthocyan production in Antirrhinum on a genetic basis is "curieuse" to the author, but he deems it preferable to Bateson's assumption of deter- minants. Nicolas in 1919 suggested a study of green and purple plants of the same species in an attempt to re-solve contradictions in oxidation and reducing theories of anthocyan for- mation. Nicolas found greater acidity in the red-leaved varieties and the formation of these organic acids locked up some oxygen, reducing therefore the respiratory quotient. The using up of oxygen therefore is not directly a result of anthocyan production. Chlorophyll is thought now to have the formula: (C20H39OOC) [C3,H29N4Mg] (COOH) (COOCH3). Treatment with alcohol will produce a substitution of C2H5 for phytol group C2oH39 and give Willstatter's crystallizable chlorophyll. — James P. Kelly. 412. Dangeard, p. a. La structure de la cellule vegetale et son metabolisme. [The structure of the plant cell and its metabolism.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 709-714. 1920. No. 1, February, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 63 413. Free, E. E. Sugar metabolism in cacti. [Rev. of : Spoehr, H. A. The carbohydrate economy of cacti, Carnegie Inst. Washington, Publ. 287. 1919.] Plant World 22:308-309. 1919. 414. Gatin, C. L., and M. Molliard. Utilisation comparee de divers constituants de la membrane par le Xylaria Hypoxylon L. [The comparative utilization of various constituents of the cell wall by Xylaria Hypoxylon L.] Rev. G6n. Bot. 32: 216-225. 1920.— A study of the digestive action of a wood-destroying fungus (Xylaria Hypoxylon) on isolated constituents of the cell wall in aseptic cultures. The constituents under investigation were added to a mineral nutrient solution made up as follows: tap water, 100 cc; potassium nitrate, 0.2 g.; ammonium phosphate, 0.05 g. ; magnesium sulphate, 0.05 g. Glucose and starch were also used for comparison. Of all the substances tried, pectin was the most readily utilized by Xylaria; 1.633 g. were used in building up 0.693 g. dry weight of mycelium. Then followed in order xylose and glucose, mannogalactan of the carob, arabinose (about half as well used as pectin), starch, and xylane. Good growth was also obtained on corrozo and the mucilage of flax, whereas cherry gum was only slightly used, and gelose not at all. A further experi- ment showed lignin to be very readily utilized. — L. W. Sharp. 415. Hammarsten, Harold. Quantitative Versuche iiber Cannizzaro's Reaktion bei der Kondensation der Acetaldehyde mit wassrigen Alkalien. [Quantitative experiments on Can- nizzaro's reaction in the condensation of acetaldehyde by aqueous alkaline solution.] Ann. Chem. [Liebig] 420: 262-275. 1920.— Acetaldehyde was subjected to N /2 KOH, N /3 Ba(0H)2, or buffer salt mixtures for periods ranging from 1 to 240 hours and at temperatures of 0°, 18°, and 50°C. At Ph 6.8 and 50° the aldehyde underwent Cannizzaro's reaction (simultaneous oxidation and reduction) to the extent of 2 per cent in 3 hours, with no formation of wax. The reaction extended to 3.8 per cent in 3 hours, with no wax formation, at Ph 9.6. At Ph 10.7 the Cannizzaro reaction extended to 5.8 per cent of the aldehyde in 18.5 hours, with a yield of 10 to 20 per cent of wax. The Cannizzaro reaction is quite insignificant, relative to the velocity of the aldol condensation; for the latter proceeds so rapidly that only very little acid or alcohol can be formed. The limited extent of the Cannizzaro reaction at 50° is ascribed to condensation of acetaldehyde to acetaldol, the latter decomposing to crotonic aldehyde. — W. E. Tottingham. 416. Legroux, ReniS, and Joseph Mesnard. Vitamines pour la culture des bacteries. [Vitamines in the culture of bacteria.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 901-904. 1920.— It is found that certain globules are necessary for the growth and development of the bacilli of Pfeiffer (influenza). — C. H. and W. K. Farr. 417. MuLLER, Erich. Die Dehydroxydation der Aldehyde. Mechanismus ihrer Oxyda- tion. [The dehydroxydation of aldehydes. Mechanism of their oxidation.] Ann. Chem. [Liebig] 420:241-263. 1920. — Dehydroxydation is electrochemical or chemical oxidation of formaldehyde, acetaldehyde, and benzaldehyde in alkaline solution, with the production of gaseous hydrogen and an acid. Formaldehyde yields hydrogen by the action of certain metals which also accelerate the Cannizzaro reaction (simultaneous oxidation and reduction). The results of experiments with CuO, CU2O and AgaO as catalysts are given. The mechan- ism of dehydroxydation in the case of ^cetaldehj'de is supposed to proceed in two alternate ways, with the oxyaldehyde as a primary product, as follows: (1) Acetaldehy de-water + electrical charge = oxyacetaldehyde + hydrogen ion. And (2) Oxyacetaldehyde + electri- cal charge = acetic acid + hydrogen ion. (The H-ion apparently functions in the reduc- tion of aldehyde to alcohol.) Or (3) Oxycetaldehyde -f electrical charge + acetic acid -|- molecular hydrogen. — If reaction (3) is more rapid than (2) dehydroxydation occurs, and . hydrogen appears. — W: E. Tottingham. 418. Strand, E. [Rev. of: Lipschutz, A. Pflanze und Tier. [Plant and animal.] J^p.ySfig. Theodor Thomas: Leipzig.] Arch. Naturgesch., Abt. A, 83, Heft 4:209. 1919.— The author discusses the origin of the living substance of the plant and the formation of the living substance of the human body out of food. — C. E. Allen. 64 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 419. TocHiNAi, YosHiHiKO. Studies on the food relations of Fusarium lini. Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan 1^:22-33. 1920. — The following substances were tested as sources of carbon: nine carbohydrates — viz., glucose, levulose, galactose, sucrose, maltose, lactose soluble starch, inulin, and arabin — in 2 per cent solutions; six organic acids — viz., malic, succinic, maleic, fumaric, racemic, and citric — in 1 and 0.1 percent solutions; and glycerine, mannite, vanillin, thymol, and a-napthol in 2 per cent solutions. The chemicals were added in the above indicated quantities to a standard nutritive solution prepared as follows, NH.NOs, 1 g. ; KH2PO4, 0.50 g. ; Mg SO4, 0.25 g. ; and redistilled water 1000 g. As sources of nitrogen, ammonium sulfate, sodium nitrate, potassium nitrate, peptone, and urea in 2 per cent solutions, and acetamide, succinamide, dicyandiamide, and asparagine in 1 per cent solutions were tested. Each chemical was added to a standard nutritive solution of the fol- lowing composition : KH2PO4, 0.50 g. ; MgS04, (crystal) 0.25 g. ; cane sugar, 20 g. ; and redistilled water 1000 cc. Results were checked at the end of two weeks growth. The carbohy- drates tested gave the following dry weights in grams of mycelia: inulin 0.299; glucose 0.274; arabin 0.147; maltose 0.151; soluble starch 0.125; levulose 0.084; galactose 0.072; sucrose 0.044; and lactose 0.039. Organic acids as sources of carbon were unfavorable to the fungus, which could develop only in low percentages, such as 0.1 per cent. As indicated by the growth made, the organic acids may be arranged as follows in descending order: succinic, malic, citric, fumaric, maleic, and racemic. In the nutritive solution containing racemic acid the d-tartaric was more readily assimilated than the 1-tartaric acid, as determined by the change in optical activity. Mannite was a favorable source of carbon, 0.24 g. (dry weight) of mycelium being produced, while glycerine gave but 0.024 g. The phenol derivatives prevented growth. Organic nitrogen compounds are far better sources of nitrogen than inorganic compounds, the dry weights of mycelium in grams being as fol- lows: peptone 0.448; urea 0.251; sodium nitrate 0.198; ammonium phosphate 0.194; ammo- nium sulphate 0.038; and potassium nitrate 0.012. The amides are generally good sources of nitrogen for this fungus, the following dry weights in grams of mycelia being obtained: asparagine 0.288; acetamide 0.173; dicyandiamide 0.516; and succinamide 0.143. — L. M. Massey. METABOLISM (ENZYMES, FERMENTATION) 420. Andersox, J. A., E. B. Fred, and W. H. Peterson. The relation between the num- ber of bacteria and acid production in the fermentation of xylose. Jour. Infect. Diseases 27: 281-292. 1920. — The rate of growth of Lactobacillus pentoaceticus was compared with its rate of acid production in the fermentation of xylose. Both the plate and the direct counting method of Breed were used for the counting of the bacteria. The volatile (acetic) and the nonvolatile (lactic) acids were determined. It was found that the acid production is most rapid during the period of maximum growth of the organisms, and a decline in the rate of growth is accompanied by a decrease in acid production. The bacterial numbers reach a maximum within 48 hours after inoculation, while the maximum acidity is found only after several days. In the presence of calcium carbonate, the bacteria multiply more rapidly and reach a higher number, accompanied by a more nearly complete fermentation. — Selman A. Waksman. 421. Sherman, H. C, I. D. Garard, and V. K. La Mer. A further study of the process of purifying pancreatic amylase. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 1900-1907. 19_~0. ORGANISM AS A WHOLE 422. Anonymous. The tenacity of prickly pear seedlings. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:571. 1920.— Prickly pear, Opimtia sps. seedlings without water remained alive for 12 months in an office. — L. R. Waldron. 423. Chemin, E. Observations anatomiques et biologiques sur le genre "Lathraea." [Anatomical and biological observations on the genus "Lathraea."] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X. 2: 125-272. / pL, 88 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 319. No. 1, February, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 65 424. LoTKA, Alfred J. Analytical note on certain rhythmical relations in organic systems. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6: 410-415. 1920. — A discussion of mathematical laws of some types of periodic phenomena. Certain applications of the laws of chemical dynamics indicate the occurrence of damped (transitory) oscillations, and only such were expected "in the absence of geometrical, structural causes." The author finds, however, that in certain cases his method indicates undamped oscillations. Consider a system in evolution, where species of matter (organic or inorganic) having the masses Xi, X2 . . . Xn are character- ized by certain parameters Q and physically conditioned by other parameters P. "For a very broad class of cases, . . . the course of events in such a system will be represented by a system of differential equations of the form -^ = FiniXr, X, • • • The author here considers especially a simple case, that of the quantitative relations between a plant species and an animal species feeding upon it. Undamped oscillations in the abun- dance of the species are shown to result. — Howard B. Frost. 425. MoREAU, F. (M. and Mme.) Recherches sur les lichens de la famiUe des Pelti- geracees. [Researches on lichens of the family Peltigeraceae.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bof. X. 1: 29- 138. IS pi, 23 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 371. 426. PiETSCH, Albert. Wie erklart sich daslange Hangenbleiben der Blatter an einigen phanerogamen Holzgewachsen im Herbste 1919? [What is the explanation for the late reten- tion of the foliage of several phanerogamous woody plants in the fall of 1919?] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 150-155. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 140. GROWTH, DEVELOPMENT, REPRODUCTION 427. Bernbeck. Das Wachstum im Winde. [Growth and wind.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 27-40, 59-69, 93-100. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 113. 428. Burns, George P. Eccentric growth and the formation of redwood in the main stem of conifers. Vermont Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 219. 10 pp., 4 pi, 10 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 318. 429. Harvey, E. N. An experiment on regulation in plants. Amer. Nat. 54:362-367. 1 fi^. 1920. — An analysis of factors retarding lateral outgrowths of plants. The author recalls the already known facts that growing stem tip or apical bud has inhibitory influences on lower latent buds and that active root inhibits growth of others above it. He reports an experiment to support the idea that regulatory influence of one part over another in plants is not due to transport of materials. The author thinks that it is dependent on living proto- plasts in the organism whose selective permeability leads to an electrical polarity that deter- mines the biological polarity of the organism. — J. P. Kelly. 430. Reed, H, S. The dynamics of a fluctuating growth rate. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6: 397-410. 5 fig. 1920.— This is a study of the growth rate of a selected lot of shoots on young apricot trees, with reference not only to the type of growth, but also to the intraseasonal periodicity of growth. The growth rate exhibited its greatest velocity in the early part of the growing season and declined as the season advanced, exhibiting three intra- seasonal cycles of growth. The growth during each cycle is expressed by the formula of autocatylysis, log — ^— = K (t - ti) BOTANICAL ABBTBACTB, VOL. VII, NO. 1 66 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VII, The growth rate for the entire season conforms to that of a chemical reaction consisting of two unimolecular reactions, one of which alternately accelerates and retards the other, X = 210 [1 - e- 095(1-1)] +19.1 L-.osst cos ^ t1 If growth be assumed to be proportional to the amount of active catalyst present, a method is available for studying the dynamics of the growth process. — H. S. Reed. MOVEMENTS OF GROWTH AND TURGOR CHANGES 431. Jaccard, p. Inversion de I'excentricite des branches produite experimentalement. [The experimental inversion of the eccentricity of branches.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32:273-281. 2 jpl., 1 fig. 1920. — Many authors have considered the eccentric growth of the lateral branches of trees to be the result of the polarizing action of a geotropic excitation having its seat in the terminal portion, and have therefore called the wood of the larger side "geotropic wood." If growing branches are tied in the form of a circle with the upper face on the inside, thus reversing the usual tension-compression relation of the upper and lower faces, a reversal of the eccentricity occurs. The eccentricity is therefore due to the mechanical action of weight (tension and compression) on the growing tissues, and not to a geotropic excitation. This conclusion is supported by the behavior of plants kept for some months on a large clinostat. Here also the eccentricity is reversed; because of a slight centrifugal force (1/20 gravity) developed by the clinostat, the upper face of the branch is more strongly compressed during one half of the rotation than is the lower face during the other half. The same stimulus, such as longitudinal compression, accelerates wood formation in some species and retards it in others. Conifers and dicotyledons differ in this respect. The increase in the thickness of the wood on one side compensates for a decrease on the other; eccentricity involves no abso- lute increase in the mass of woody tissue in a given length of the branch. — L. W. Sharp. GERMINATION, RENEWAL OF ACTIVITY 432. Anonymous. Notes and comments. Australian Nat. 4: 160. 1920. — A seed ger- minating in one year instead of the usual two. — T. C. Frye. 433. Lesage, p. Contributions a I'etude de la germination des spores de mousses. [Germination of moss spores.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 166: 744-747. 1918. — The author shows that the spores of certain mosses are capable of germination after being dried for periods of from 3 to 7 years. In the case of Funaria hygrometrica, which proved an espe- cially good species for experimental purposes, he found that the optimum temperature for germination was between 21 and 22°C.; that darkness retarded the germination; and that spores sown in distilled water germinated better if the vessels of distillation were glass rather than copper. — A. W. Evans. TEMPERATURE RELATIONS 434. CoviLLE, Frederick V. The influence of cold in stimulating the growth of plants. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6: 434-435. 1920. — The attainment of winter dormancy by trees and shrubs is not dependent upon exposure to cold. Experiments with controlled temperatures further indicate that a period of chilling is necessary for normal resumption of growth in the spring; in plants kept warm throughout the winter, the spring growth is delayed and abnormal. Exposure to cold results in transformation of stored starch to sugar, with the consequent development of high osmotic pressures. — Howard B. Frost. 435. Matisse, G. Action de la chaleur et du froid sur I'activite des etres vivants. [Action of heat and cold upon the activity of living organisms.] u + 556 p., 175 fig. Emile Larose; Paris, 1919. — According to the author he has attempted in this work to correlate the viewpoint No. 1, February, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 67 of the physical sciences with that of physiology. He assumes that the organism is not the sum of the functions of its organs, and that it is important to study the reactions of the organism complete. His experiments are intended to be in this direction. While drawing something from botanical material in the historical discussion, the experiments are based largely on animal forms. — B. M. Duggar. RADIANT ENERGY RELATIONS 436. Aston, B. C. Radio-active fertilizers and plant growth. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 172-173. 1920. See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 457. 437. Blackman, V. H, Radioactivity and normal physiological function. Ann. Botany 34: 299-302. 1920. — The writer presents a brief resume of H. Zwaardemaker's researches dealing with the radio-activity of certain substances in relation to physiological function. Though the results here obtained are primarily of fundamental importance to animal physi- ology, their probable application to plant physiology is indicated. — R. W. Webb. TOXIC AGENTS 438. Bertrand, Gabriel. Action de la chloropicrine sur les plantes superieures. [The effect of chloropicrine on the higher plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:858-860. 1920. — Concentrations of chloropicrine of 200 g. or less per cubic meter were tried on trees and shrubs. This concentration was reduced progressively in an attempt to find the minimal effect. Twelve to twenty grams gave the same effect as is found in autumnal coloration and abscission. Two to three grams gave an effect similar to frost or anesthetfcs. * Astill smaller amount caused the leaves to fall off without change of color or alteration in turgescence. It was found that young leaves were less sensitive than herbaceous. It is suggested that chloro- picrine might be found valuable in ridding plants of their leaf parasites. — C. H. and W. K. Farr. 439. Bertrand, Gabriel. Des conditions qui peuvent modifier I'activite de la chloro- picrine vis-a-vis des plantes superieures. [The conditions which frequently modify the effect of chloropicrine upon the higher plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 952-954. 1920. — In this study leafy shoots of eight species of trees were used. Concentrations were tried between from 1 to 200 g. per cubic meter for periods of from 10 to 60 minutes. The effect is about the same, providing the product of time and concentration is the same. Humidity does not seem to alter the effect, nor is temperature a very important factor. — C. H. Farr. 440. Medes, Grace and J. F. McClendon. The effect of anesthetics on living cells. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6:243-246. 1920.— Certain anesthetics were applied to animal cells (Cassiopea) in sea water and to plant cells (Elodea) in a solution of NaHCOa in distilled water. The effects differed with the organism and the anesthetic employed, and with the particular cell activity or property considered. In the case of Elodea, four anes- thetics— alcohol, ether, chloroform, and chloretone— all increased respiration and permea- bility, but decreased photosynthesis; while they sometimes increased and sometimes decreased protoplasmic rotation. — Howard B. Frost. PHYSIOLOGY OF DISEASE 441. Jodidi, S. L. a mosaic disease of cabbage as revealed by its nitrogen constituents. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42 : 1883-1893. 1920. — This disease is characterized by denitrifica- tion taking place in the affected tissues. The nitrates are, in part, reduced to ammonia, whichk'is lost; and, in part, to nitrites. The latter reacts on the ammonia group of various organic compounds and brings about the elimination of elementary nitrogen. — /. M. Brannon. 68 SOIL SCIENCE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 442. JoDiDi, S. L., S. C. MouLTON, and K. S. Markley. The mosaic disease of spinach as characterized by its nitrogen constituents. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 1061-1070. 1920. — The author jfinds that the lower nitrogen content of the diseased tissues may safely be con- sidered as one of the striking characteristics of the mosaic disease of spinach. The leaves of the normal plants have higher nitric-nitrogen content than the blighted spinach. The difference in nitrate content of healthy and blighted root is slight. The higher ammonia content and presence of nitrites may be said, also, to be characteristic of spinach blight. The diseased plants were found capable of building up proteins. The leaves of the diseased plants have a smaller proportion of acid amide, basic, and non-basic nitrogen, but a larger proportion of peptide and protein nitrogen than the corresponding normal tissues. It is because of these findings — together with the difference in total nitrate, nitrite, and ammoniacal nitrogen content already reported — that we logically and forcibly come to the conclusion that the pathological condition is brought about by the process of denitrification which takes place in the spinach tissues. — J. M. Brannon. MISCELLANEOUS 443. Galippe, V. Recherches sur la resistance des microzymas I. I'action du temps et sur leur survivance dans I'ambre. [The longevity of microzymas and its survival in amber.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 856-858. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 391. 444. Hamblin, C. O. To infect lucerne seed with nodule organisms. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 466. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 30. 445. T., E. N, Botany at the British Association. Nature 104: 520-521. 1920. 446. Thompson, Leonard R. Advantages of solid paraffin for sealing anaerobic fluid cultures. Jour. Infect. Diseases 27 : 240-244. 1920. — A method is described for sealing tubes with solid paraffin. A greater percentage of positive growths with stock anaerobic cultures has been obtained than with parallel tubes sealed with liquid paraffin. — Selman A. Waksman. SOIL SCIENCE J. J. Skinner, Editor F. M. ScHERTZ, Assistant Editor ACID SOILS 447. Hartwell, Burt L., and F. R. Pember. The effect of dicalcium silicate on an acid soil. Soil Sci. 10:57-60. 1920. — Pot experiments on an acid soil show that the beneficial effect of "dicalcium silicate" on the growth of lettuce is due to its neutralizing effect. "Dical- cium silicate" and "hydrated silica" do not appear to be of benefit because of their silicon content. — W. J. Rabbins. 448. Martin, W. H. The relation of sulfur to soil acidity and to the control of potato scab. Soil Sci. 9:393-409. 1920. ■ 449. MiRASOL, Jose Jison. Aluminum as a factor in soil acidity. Soil Sci. 10: 153-217. 12 pi. 1920. — Experiments were performed to determine the effect of aluminum salts alone or in combination with calcium carbonate or with acid phosphate on the growth of sweet clover in sand; the effect of limestone and acid phosphate on the acidity and productivity of soil ; the effect of the removal of some aluminum from the soil on the growth of sweet clover and whether iron and manganese are factors in the acidity of the soils investigated. Alumi- num salts were highly toxic to sweet clover when applied in amounts chemically equivalent to the acidity of the soil and fatal in amounts five times the acidity of the soil. Calcium carbonate or acid phosphate decreased or eliminated the toxicity of aluminum salts. Alu- minum hydroxide was not toxic. Both limestone and acid phosphate reduced the acidity of No. 1, February, 1921] SOIL SCIENCE 69 t"he soil and increased the crop yield. The reduction in acidity is due to the formation of insol- uble aluminum salts. Leaching soil with potassium nitrate until the leachings are neutral removes as much as 59 per cent of the aluminum, reduces the acidity 99 per cent, and improves the growth of sweet clover. Iron and manganese are apparently not important factors in the soils studied. — W. J. Robbins. 450. Shedd, O. M. a proposed method for the estimation of total calcium in soils and the significance of this element to soil fertility. Soil Sci. 10: 1-14. 1920. — A rapid and accurate method for the determination of total calcium in soils is described. The total calcium content of some Kentucky soils is so low that their deficiency in this substance is important, as well as is the deficiency in phosphorus and nitrogen. Cultivation causes a loss in calcium. The best soil types contain the most calcium; the poorest, the least. A ton of limestone or rock phosphate per acre may add more calcium than is already present. — W. J. Robbins. INFLUENCE OF BIOLOGICAL AGENTS 451. Greaves, J. E. The antagonistic action of calcium and iron salts toward other salts as measured by ammonification and nitrification. Soil Sci. 10: 77-102. W fig. 1920. — A determination was made of the ammonification and nitrification of dried blood in soil in tumblers to which salts in fractions of gram molecules were added. True antagonism as measured by ammonification was found between calcium sulphate, and sodium carbonate, sodium nitrate, sodium sulfate, calcium chloride, magnesium chloride, and magnesium sul- phate. The same is true of nitrification with the exception of sodium sulphate and calcium chloride and calcium sulfate. With some exceptions, the sulphate, chloride, carbonate, and nitrate of iron were found to antagonize the salts of sodium, calcium, and magnesium. Iron carbonate reduced the toxicity of magnesium sulphate to ammonification 75 per cent, artd iron nitrate increased the nitrification in the presence of magnesium chloride 420 per cent. The quantity of iron required for maximum effect varies with the iron compound and the specific alkali. — W. J. Robbins. 452. Greaves, J. E. The influence of arsenic upon the biological transformation of nitrogen in soils. (Abstract.) Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 128-129. 1918.— Complete paper published in Biochem. Bull. 3: 2-16. 1913. 453. Peterson, E. G., and E. Mohr. Nitrogen fixation by bacteria in Utah soils. (Abstract.) Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 97-98. 1918. 454. Neller, J. R. The oxidizing power of soil from limed and unlimed plots and its rela- tion to other factors. Soil Sci. 10: 29-39. Fig. 1, pi. 1. 1920.— The carbon dioxide evolution, and nitrate and ammonia production, from added organic matter were determined for soil samples from plots which have been cultivated for more than ten years under limed and unlimed conditions. Nitrate accumulation and bacterial numbers were higher on the limed than unlimed soil, but the ammonia accumulation was about the same. The average crop yield for the past ten years varies closely with the present oxidizing power. — W. J. Robbins. 455. Robbins, William J., and A. B. Massey. The effect of certain environmental conditions on the rate of destruction of vanillin by a soil bacterium. Soil Sci. 10: 237-246. 1 fi^. 1920. — Studies in solution cultures containing nutrient salts show that the destruction of vanillin by a soil bacterium is favored by aeration and inhibited by slight concentrations of hydrochloric acid. In mixtures of sodium nitrate, potassium sulfate, and calcium acid phosphate, the destruction of vanillin is most rapid in the cultures high in phosphate and least rapid in cultures high in sulfate. The number of species capable of destroying vanillin is limited. — W. J. Robbins. 456. Singh, Thakur Mahadeo. The effect of gypsum on bacterial activities in soils. Soil Sci. 9:437-468. 1920.— Determinations were made of the effect of calcium sulphate, calcium carbonate, or combinations of the two on the ammonification of dried blood, nitri- 70 SOIL SCIENCE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, fication of ammonium sulfate, fixation of nitrogen, fixation of nitrogen by B. radicicola, and yield of plants. Ammonification was decreased by gypsum and by mixtures of lime and gyp- sum. Nitrification was decreased by calcium sulphate but increased by calcium carbonate and gypsum together. Nitrogen fixation was stimulated by 100 pounds per acre of gypsum, but larger amounts had less stimulative effect. The yield and potassium content of red clover was increased by 1000 pounds of gypsum per acre, but other leguminous crops or wheat were not affected. Gypsum increased the soil acidity and, in some cases, the amount of soluble potassium. — W. J. Robbins. FERTILITY STUDIES 457. Aston, B. C. Radio-active fertilizers and plant growth. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 172-173. 1920. — A brief review of work in England and America. — A^. /. Giddings. 458. Harris, F. S. Effect of soil alkali on plant growth. (Abstract.) Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 131-132. 1918. 459. Leiningen-Westerburg (Graf zu.) Rauchschaden und einschlagige boden- kundliche Fragen. [Smoke injury and related matters of soil science.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 18-93. 1920. — There is a close relation between soil composition and quality, and the damage which may result to vegetation from various fumes and dusts. Smoke damage to plants is usually indirect, as the effect of the fumes is on the soil and humus. Lime is espe- cially necessary in soils exposed to acid fumes, and should be added in the cheapest waj possible where soils are poor in lime; otherwise the acids will remove all the lime present. This applies both to open and to forest lands. It has been computed that in the vicinity of Stolberg (Rhine province) approximately 800 grams of sulphuric and hydrochloric acids are deposited annually per square meter of soil. Lime also combines with poisonous zinc, copper, iron, and mercury salts and renders them harmless to plants, but has little or no effect on arsenic compounds. Some of these compounds in small quantities stimulate plant growth, but in large quantities hinder or destroy it. Dust from lime, cement, or magnesite ovens, etc., may act as a fertilizer, or if in too great volume and not occasionally harrowed into the soil may form a crust which will injure vegetation. Soot does not in itself injure plants, but does so indirectly by sticking on the foliage and adsorbing poisonous gases from the air. In case of many substances, such as calcium, magnesium, chlorine, fluorine and sul- phur compounds, which are already present in soil not exposed to smoke, it is difficult to deter- mine the amount of injury due to fumes, since chemical analysis of the plants will not show the origin of the poisons they may contain. — W. N. Sparhawk. 460. McCooL, M. M., and C. E. Millar. The formation of soluble substances in soils taken from widely separated regions. Soil Sci. 10: 219-235. 1 fig. 1920.— Samples of air- dry soils were leached with distilled water until the freezing-point depression of the soil was zero. The soil was then incubated at 25 °C., and the freezing-point lowerings were deter- mined after 5, 10, 30, and 60 days. Sub-soils and new soils formed soluble salts very slowly. New soils are less active than somewhat older soils, and aged soils are almost inert. Soils from acid regions were not more soluble than those which had weathered more. The formation of soluble material increased with grinding and with treatment with sodium nitrate. — W. J. Robbins. 461. NiKLAS, H. Ubersicht uber Bayerns Bodenverhaltnisse. [Summary of Bavarian soil conditions.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 123-135. 1920.— The author discusses the con- struction of a general soil map for Bavaria, based on the prevailing crops grown. Complete soil surveys are lacking. Soils may be classified according to climatic conditions, geological origin, or to texture. For practical purposes the latter classification is the best, both for agriculture and for forestry. The 434 districts of Bavaria are classified in 7 soil groups as follows: (1) very heavy; (2) heavy; (3) medium; (4) heavy and light; (5) light and medium; (6) light, and (7) meadow soils due to climatic conditions regardless of texture. — (1) This group comprises 13 per cent of the total area of Bavaria, and grows principally wheat and No. 1, February, 1921] ' SOIL SCIENCE 71 grass; (2) 12 per cent, and grows wheat and barley; (3) 14 per cent, growing barley, (4) and (5) 17 per cent; (6) 31 per cent, and (7) 13 per cent. The lighter soils grow principally rye and oats. The value of such a map is discussed. — W. N. Sparhawk. 462. Parker, F. W., and E. Truog. The relation between the calcium and the nitrogen content of plants and the function of calcium. Soil Sci. 10: 49-56. Fig. 1. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 406. 463. Roberts, George, and A. E. Ewan. I. Report on soil experiment fields. II. Maintenance of fertility. Kentucky Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 228:89-131. 1920.— Results are reported from eight experiments fields on as many different soil areas of the state, ranging over periods of four to nine years. The requirements for phosphorus, potassium, nitrogen, and limestone were determined, and a comparison was made of acid phosphate and rock phosphate on limed and unlimed soil. The rotation employed in most cases is corn, soy beans, wheat, and clover. None of the treatments give any material increase in crops on the Lexington field, representing the highly phosphatic soils of the Central Blue Grass region. On all the soils represented by the other fields, limestone and phosphates give very large increases. The returns from potassium salts in connection with phosphates or in connection with phosphates and limestone give little or no increase in yields. Nitrate of soda gives prac- tically no increase for corn, but gives small or medium increases for wheat and tobacco. In the comparison of acid phosphate and rock phosphate at the average annual rate of 200 pounds per acre of 16 per cent acid phosphate and 400 pounds per acre of 32 per cent rock phosphate, the rock phosphate has generally given the larger increases on unlimed ground, while the acid phosphate has generally given the larger increases on limed ground. — George Roberts. 464. Robinson, C. S. The determination of carbon dioxide in water-soluble carbonates. Soil Sci. 10: 41-47. Fig. 1. 19'20. — A description is given of precautions used and modifi- cations in the apparatus made in determining the carbon dioxide content of limestones, marls, and soils by Van Slyke's titrometric and gasometric methods. — W. J. Bobbins. 465. Schollenberger, C. H. Organic phosphorus content of Ohio soils. Soil Sci. 10: 127-141. Fig. 1. 1920. — The relation of the organic phosphorus content of twelve soils in relation to other soil constituents is reported. Virgin soil samples are richer in total phos- phorus than cultivated soils of the same type, and the organic phosphorus contents stand in the same order as the contents of total phosphorus. From average data one-third of the phosphorus in the surface and one-fifth in the subsurface is organic. Organic phosphorus is probably not of a high order of availability. — W. J. Bobbins. 466. Thornber, H. Cover crops, tillage and commercial fertilizers. Better Fruit 15^: 5, 20-22. Aug., 1920. 467. Thorne, Charles E. Carriers of nitrogen in fertilizers. Soil Sci. 9: 487-494. 1920. — Field experiments since 1894-5 with cereals and clover or potatoes and clover rotations fertilized w'ith sodium nitrate," linseed meal, dried blood, ammonium sulfate, and tankage show in 40 comparisons with but 2 exceptions that sodium nitrate has produced the largest yield. The same is true of a tobacco-wheat-clover rotation except on limed land, where the yields from the ammonium sulphate slightly exceed those from sodium nitrate — W. J. Bobbins. MOISTURE RELATIONS 468. Cunningham, Brysson. Rainfall and drainage. [Rev. of: Craster, J. E. E. Esti- mating river flow from rainfall records (Engineering. Jan. 2, 1920). Nature 105: 42. 1920.] — Craster finds the proportion of run-off to rainfall varies in both England and America from 33 to 67 per cent. That not less than 1 mm. (0.04 inch) of rainfall is required to wet vegeta- tion and surface of ploughed land; this being lost by evaporation after every rain. Percola- tion may be estimated roughly at not less than 10 per cent. Mentions also data on transpiration. — 0. A. Stevens. 72 SOIL SCIENCE ' [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 469. Gardner, Willard. A capillary transmission constant and methods of determining it experimentally. Soil Sci. 10: 103-126. Fig. 1-8 B. 1920. — A capillary-transmission-con- stant similar to the specific conductivity of metals and the specific thermal conductivity of heat conductors is defined, and methods for its measurement are described. Using this con- stant, a calculation is made which shows that in a certain soil 12 inches of water may be available from a 12 foot water-table in 30 days. — W. J. Robbins. 470. Karraker, p. E. The effect of the initial moisture in a soil on moisture movement. Soil Sci. 10: 143-152. 1920. — Soils were placed in vertical tubes with their lower ends in water, and the penetration of water was determined. The rate of water movement was about as great in air or oven dry soils as in soils containing up to about 6 per cent initial moisture. In saturated sand the movement was 1.56 times that in air-dry sand. — W. J. Robbins. 471. Livingston, Burton E., and Riichiro Koketsu. The water-supplying power of the soil as related to the wilting of plants. Soil Sci. 9: 469-485. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 399. 472. WoLKOFF, M. I. Effect of various soluble salts and lime on evaporation. Capillary rise and distribution of water in some agricultural soils. Soil Sci. 9: 409-436. 4 fig- 1920. — Soluble salts added to soil materially decreased the evaporation of soil moisture. The eflSciency of a salt in decreasing evaporation was shown to depend upon the osmotic concen- tration of salts in the surface inch of soil. The soils from which the least water evaporated showed the greatest osmotic concentration in the first inch. There was practically no diffusion of the salts downward against the rise of capillary water. In two agricultural soils used, sodium chloride decreased the capillary rise of water. Calcium oxide in drab clay and potassium phosphate in brown silt loam accelerated water rise. In these soils the addition of the salts increased the water content in the first 8 inches, as compared with untreat'.d soil. The crust formed on the surface of the soil by some of the salts did not retard evapora- tion. With untreated soils, the texture of the soil influences the extent of evaporation. Soils having a greater amount of fine material show greater loss of water by evaporation. — Dorothy Wilson. PEAT 473. Alwat, F. J. Chemical requirements of peat soils in the light of European experience. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13:327-341. 1920.— European peat soils are placed in two classes, those with (1) low lime requirement, and (2) high lime requirement. — G. B. Rigg. 474. Levin, E. The use of peat as a fertilizer in Michigan. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13: 319-327. 1920.— Fertilizer prepared by composting peat and manure gave good results on uplands. — G. B. Rigg. 475. Ptjchner, H. Hysteresis of aqueous solutions of peat soil. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13: 351. 1920. — An aqueous extraction of peat soil contained gels of silicic acid, ferric hydroxide, and alumina. On ignition the extract yielded alumina, ferric oxide, manganese oxides, lime, magnesia, sulphate, phosphate, and silicate. — G. B. Rigg. 476. RosT, C. O. Pyrites and its toxic oxidation products in peat soils. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13: 303-306. 1920.— Iron sulphide is widely distributed in peat soils. It appears mostly as pyrite, which is insoluble in water. In air it is oxidized to ferrous sulphate and sulphuric acid, both of which are soluble and toxic to plants. — G. B. Rigg. MISCELLANEOUS 477. L'inhart, G. A. A new and simplified method for the statistical interpretation of biometrical data. Univ. California Publ. Agric. Sci. 4: 159-181. 12 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 396. No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 73 478. NiKLAS, H. Die Bedeutung der Geologie fiir die land- und Forstwirtschaftliche Bodenkunde. [The significance of the science of geology with relation to agricultural and forest soil science.] Naturvviss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18:22-35. 1920. — After consider- ing all cultural conditions of the soil in 434 agricultural precincts, Niklas divid* s the soils in seven classes, based on heavy, intermediate, and light soils, and variety of products pro- duced. The prepared chart showed a marked coincidence with the geological charts, although these were not considered in preparing the soil chart. In so far as forestry is concerned, a soil study is still more imperative, because of the longer period of time in which mistakes must be realized. It will be necessary to make a study of the chemical and physical proper- ties of the various soils of each geological formation, and to relate this study to one of the principal tree species. The employment of agriculturists and foresters in the various geologi- cal bureaus, whose duties would be to prepare the geological charts for practical use, is recom- mended.— J. Roeser. 479. Niklas, H. Eine landwirtschaftliche Bodeniibersichtskarte von Bayern. [An agri- cultural soil survey chart for Bavaria.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 62-65. 1920. — As a temporary guide for constructing a soil chart for Bavaria, for forestry and agriculture, the author has made use of the official cultivation statistics, which have been kept for the past 20 years He contends that the knowledge of the soil gained through long years by agricul- turists and foresters shows itself in the choice of cultural species growing on the ground. The author essentially repeats his observations of an earlier article. (See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 478), appearing in the previous issue of this paper. — J. Roeser. 480. Schuster, Matth.^us. Wie soil der Land- und Forstwirt Geologische Karten lesen? [How shall the agriculturist and forester read geological charts?] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 10-22. / fig. 1920. — The principal reason why agriculturists and foresters have not reconciled themselves to geological charts is that they cannot familiarize themselves with the manner of representation used. The modern charts often contain a mass of colors and symbols, which are apt to confuse the user. The Bavarian charts have been prepared to meet both the scientific and practical demand, and are easily legible without detailed expla- nations. The author gives a detailed description of the method of preparation and the methods of interpreting these charts; and by means of a short field trip over the terrain rep- resented on a model chart, shows the relation existing between rock and soil and the cultural use of the soil, and also explains the methods employed by the geologist to show the relations. — J. Roeser. TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS J. M. Greenman, Editor E. B. Patson, Assistant Editor GENERAL 481. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Blatter, Ethelbert. Flora Arabica. Part 1. Rec. Bot. Surv. India 3, No. 1.] Nature J04: 609. 1920.— Includes list of thirty-eight families (Ben- tham and Hooker arrangement) including vernacular names and uses, also discussion of botanical regions. — 0. A. Stevens. 482. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Gamble, J. S. Flora of the Presidency of Madras. Part 3. P. 391-577. Legiiminosae—Caesalpiniodeae to Caprifoliaceae. Aldard and Son, and West Newman, Ltd.: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 36. 1920. 483. Benoist, R. Plantes recoltees par M. E. Wagner en Republique Argentine. [Plants collected by M. E. Wagner in the Argentine.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 655-661. 1919. — Detailed notes concerning some 20 species collected in the province of Santiago include information as to habitat, economic importance, common name, etc. — E. B. Payson. 74 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 484. Blatter, E., and F. Hallberg. The flora of the Indian desert, (Jodhpur and Jaesalmer). Jour. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. 26: 218-246; 525-551; 811-818. 89 -pi. 1918-19.— A systematic enumeration with extensive notes and citation of specimens. The following new forms are described : Farsetia macrantha, Cleome brachycarpa Vahl var. glauca, Gynandrop- sis pentaphylla DC. var. nana, Melhania magnifolia, Zizyphus truncata, Psoralea odorata, TephrOsia incana Grah. var. horizontalis, T. muUiflora, T. petrosa, Rhynchosia rhombifolia, R. arenaria, Angoeissus rotundifolia, Trianthema pentandra Linn. var. rubra, var. flava, Pulicaria rajputanae, Glossocardia setosa, Convolvulus densiflorus, C. gracilis, Aerua pseudo- tomentosa. The seventy-eight photographic illustrations of desert scenes and vegetation accompanying this paper are excellent. — E. D. Merrill. 485. BoLzoN, P. Ricerche botaniche nel bacino della Dora Baltea. [Botanical researches in the basin of the Dora Baltea.] Nuovo Giorn. Bot. Ital. 25: 309-376. 1918.— The author presents a detailed enumeration of an extensive collection of plants recently made in the valley of the Dora Baltea in northern Italy. — /. M. Greenman. 486. Brown, William H., and Elmer D. Merrill. Philippine palms and palm products. Forestry Bur. Philippine Islands Bull. 18. 129 p., U pi. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 533. 487. Farwell, Oliver A. Notes on the Michigan Flora, II. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21 : 345-371. 1919. — Reference is made to several species whose range is known to cross Michigan and which should, therefore, be sought in the state. Among these may be men- tioned: Phegopteris Rober liana (Hoffm.) A. Br., Asplenium viride Huds., Calamagrostis hyperborea Lange, Woodsia glabella R. Br. and Calamagrostis Pickeringii var. laciistris (Kearney) Hitch. The author claims that the application of the principles of priority in nomenclature produces the following changes : Elodea canadensis Mx. for philotria canadensis (Mx.) Britton, Digitaria Heist, for Syntherisma Walt., Ginania Bub. for Holcus Authors, Reboulea Kunth. for Eatonia Authors, Trichoon Roth, for Phragmites Trin., Trichophyllum Ehrh. for Eleocharis R. Br., Iria castanea (Mx.) n. comb, for Fimbristylis castanea (Michx.) Vahl., Eriophorum for Scirpus in part, and Phaeocephalum Ehrh. for Rijnchospora Vahl. Changes in family names, in whole or part, are recommended as follows: Scheuchzeriaceae becomes Juncaginaceae, Alismaceae becomes Alismoidaceae, Potamogetonaceae becomes Fluvialaceae, Valisneriaceae becomes Hydrocharidaceae, Gramineae becomes Graminaceae, Polygonaceae becomes Persicariaceae, Chenopodiaceae becomes Blitaceae, Leguminosae be- comes Leguminaceae, Rhamnaceae becomes Ziziphaceae, Tiliaceae becomes Tiliataceae, Ona- graceae becomes Cornicidataceae, Umbelliferae becomes Umbellataceae, Fagaceae becomes Castanaceae, Scrophulariaceae becomes Ringentaceae, and Compositae becomes Compositaceae. — H. T. Darlington. 488. Hemsley, W. Botting, and others. Flora of Aldabra: with notes on the flora of neighboring islands. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 108-153. 1919. — A description of the Alda- bra atoll in the Indian Ocean is followed by paragraphs concerning the climate, history of botanical investigation, and relation of its flora to that of some other small islands of the Western Indian Ocean. There is given a systematic enumeration of the vascular plants of Aldabra with the citation of exsiccatae. — E. B. Payson. 489. Jeanpert, Ed. Enumeration des plantes de Macedoine. [Enumeration of plants of Macedonia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 662-668. 1919.— This series of papers listing the plants of Macedonia is here concluded. — E. B. Payson. 490. Lecomte, Henri. Sur les principatix caracteres de structure des bois. [Concerning the principal characters of wood structure.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 26: 166-171. 1920. —See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 326. 491. McAtee, W. L. Specific, subspecific, and varietal categories of insects and the naming of them. Entomol. News 31: 46-55, 61-65, 1920. — The author does not regard inter- gradation a sufficient reason for "lumping" closely related species which exhibit it. Men- No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 75 tions plant families Rubiaceae and Caprifoliaceae among examples of groups separated by no absolutely trenchant character. Considers recognition of geographical subspecies a useful feature even though they may intergrade completely where their ranges meet. Discusses also color phases and formation of names. Names should be chosen which are least liable to prove inappropriate, avoiding too free use of those derived from personal or geographical names. — 0. A. Stevens. 492. MiYOSHi, Manabu. tJber der Erhaltung einer neuen wildwachsenden hangenden Varietat des Kastanienbaumes als Naturdenkmal. [Concerning a new wild chestnut with weeping branches and its preservation as a natural monument.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 33: 185- 188. / photo. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 452. 493. Rock, Joseph F. One government forest. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 16: 39-40. 3 pi. February, 1919. — A description of Reserve lands at Kulani, Hawaii. The forest is mainly a tree-fern forest made up of the two common types Cibotium Chamissoi and Cihotium Menziesii. Apart from these, representatives of the genus Metrosideros are the most com- mon. Dispersed through the region is also a beautiful native fan palm with large orbicular fruits described by the writer as a new species under the name of Pritchardia Beccariana. — Stanley Coulter. 494. ScHONLAND, S. Phanerogamic flora of the divisions of Uitenhage and Port Elizabeth. JMem. Bot. Surv. South Africa [Pretoria] 1: 1-118. 1919. — The present work consists of an annotated list of the flowering plants of the territorial divisions mentioned in the title. Valuable information is recorded on the topography, climate, rainfall, plant formations, etc. The total number of species listed is 2416, of which 2312 are indigenous and 104 are non-native species. — J. M. Greenman. 495. TuRRiLL, W. B. Contributions to the flora of Macedonia: H. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 105-108. 1919. — A list of species of flowering plants collected by J. M. Russell in Central Greek Macedonia in 1918. — E. B. Payson. 496. TuRRiLL, W. B. Botanical results of Swedish South American and Antarctic expedi- tions. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919:268-279. 1919. PTERIDOPHYTES 497. Brause, G. Bearbeitung der von C. Ledermann von der Sepik- (Kaiserin-Augusta-) Fluss-Expedition 1912 bis 1913 und von anderen Sammlern aus dem Papuagebiete friiher mitge- brachten Pteridophyten, nebst Uebersicht iiber alle bis jetzt aus dem Papuagebiet bekannt gewordenen Arten derselben. [Revision of the Pteridophytes collected by Ledermann on the Sepik River Expedition, those brought out by earlier collectors in Papuasia, and a summary of all known species of this group from the Papuasian region.] Under the general heading: C. Lauterbach, Beitrage zur Flora von Papuasien VII, no. 62. Bot. Jahrb. 56: 30-250. 1920.— This is a very extended treatment of the Pteridophytes of Papuasia, with references and notes on distribution, structure, classification, and nomenclature. The following new varie- ties, species and combinations are proposed: Trichomanes papuanum, T. concinnum Mett. var. emarginata, T. subtilissimum, T. Ledermanni, T. maluense, T. Englerianum, T. meifo- lium Bory var. linearis and var. contracta, Hyjnenophyllum Ledermanni and var. nutans, H. Herterianum, H. Rosenstockii, H. sabinifolium Bak. var. irregularis and var. imbricata, Dicksonia Ledermanni, D. Hieronymi, Cyathea Rosenstockii, C. procera, C. cincinnata, C. subspathidata, C. sepikensis, C. Ledermanni and var. dilatata, C. Hunsteiniana and var. acuminata, Hemitelia Ledermanni, Alsophila recuryata, A. marginata, A. Rosenstockii, A. Hunsteiniana, A. rubiginosa, A. Dielsii, A. gregaria, A. dryopteroidea, A. tenuis, A. brunnea, A. olivacea, A. Ledermanni, A. scandens, Dryopteris Hunsteiniana, D. diaphana, D. calcarata (Bl.) O. Ktze. var. ciliata {Aspidium ciliatum Wall.), D. subnigra, D. coriacea and var. elata, D. ensipinna and var. acuminata, D. glaucescens, D. alta, D. pallescens, D. 76 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, fulgens, D. Icdermanni, D. notabilis, D. Metteniana Hieron. var. novoguineensis , D. subdigi- tata, D. urophylla (Wall.) C. Chr. var. cuspidata {Menisciuni cuspidatum Bl.), D. stellato- pilosa, D. mutabilis, D. micans, D. dimorpha, D. sepikensis, D. hispida, D. transversaria {Ne- phrodium transversarium Brack.), D. mollis (Jacq.) Hieron. var. amboinensis {Aspidium am- boinense Willd.), D. superba, D. muricata and var. marginata and var. obscura, D. austera, D. oblonga, D. farinosa, D. Ridleyana {Goniopferis rigida Ridley), D. hastato-pinnata, Aspid- ium Ledermanni, Leptochilus novoguineensis, Humata Ledermanni, Davallia Ledermavni, Lindsaya marginata and var. falcata, L. Rosensiockii, L. Boryana {Davallia Boryana Pr.), L. Ledermanni, L. sepikensis, L. obscura, Athyrium Ledermanni Hieron., Diplazium pseudo- shepherdioides Hieron., D. Nymani Hieron., D. Naumanni Hieron., D. Schlechteri Hieron., D. Schultzei Hieron., D. Schraderi Hieron., D. scotinum Ros. var. contracta Hieron., Asple- nium nidus L. var. ficifolia {Aspl. ficifolium Goldm.), A. comosum Christ var. subcrispa Hieron. and var. furcata Hieron., A. Lauterbachii Christ var. elongata Hieron., A. acro- carpum Hieron. (Diplazium acfocarpum Ros.), A. caudatum Forst. var. Ledermanniana Hieron., A. Ledermanni, Hieron. and var. lobulata Hieron., Blechnum saxatile, B. Leder- manni, B. deorsolqbatum, B. Hieronymi, D. decorum and var. dilatata, B. pendulum, B. papuanum, B. Fraseri (A. Cun.) Luers. var. novoguineensis, Coniogramme macrophylla (Bl.) Hieron. var. undulata Hieron., Hypolepis punctata (Thbg.) Mett. var. obscura, Vit- taria rubens Hieron., V. Ledermanni Hieron., V. Nymani Hieron., V. semipellucida Hieron., V. latissima Hieron., V. exigua Hieron., Antrophyum Ledermanni Hieron., Drymoglossum Schlechteri Hieron. & Brause, Polypodium trichopodum F. v. Muell. var. serrato-lobatum, P. ornatissimum Ros. var. dichotomum, P. glanduloso-pilosum, P. sepikense, P. politum, P. eximium, P. flagelliforme, P. ctenoideum, P. celebicum, Bl. var. aurita, P. dichotomum, P. truncata-sagittatum, P. redimiens, P. balteiforme, P. ochrophyllum, P. ferreum, P. cyathi- sorum, P. egregium, P. ingens, P. alloiosorum, P. polysorum, P. ulotheca, Cyclophorus Leder- manni, Dryostachyum novoguineense Brause var. lanceolata, Gleichenia dolosa (Copel.) C. Chr. var. virescens Hieron., G. linearis (Burm.) Clarke var. subferruginea Hieron., G. novoguineen- sis, Schizaea papuana, Angiopteris evanidostriata Hieron., A. Lauterbachii Hieron., A. Dahlii Hieron., A. undulaio-striata Hieron., A. crinita Christ var. sepikensis Hieron., A. Hellwigii Hieron., Selaginella Ledermanni Hieron., S. Kerstingii Hieron. var. brevimucronata Hieron., S. Thurnwaldiana Hieron., S. Schatteburgiana Hieron., S. Biirgersiana Hieron., S. Behrmanniana Hieron., (S. Roesickeana Hieron., S. Stolleana Hieron., S. gracilis Moore var. subbiflora Hieron., S. Bamleri Hieron., S. Schraderiana Hieron., and S. sepikensis Hieron. Papuasia is one of the richest regions in the world in ferns. The geographical fern region of Papuasia extends to the neighboring islands in all directions, and the limits are given. A table is given of the number of species in each genus common to Papuasia and each of the surrounding groups of islands as well as countries more distant. Trichomanes is espec- ially well developed. Dryopteris is also highly developed with 112 species. Polypodium is the largest genus with 168 species. Aspidium and Polystichum are poorly represented. The Pterideae are little developed. Azolla, Marsilea, Salvinia, and Pihilaria have as yet not been found. Botrychium is not known, though Ophioglossum is moderately represented. Selaginella is represented by 58 species. — K. M. Wiegand. 498. Brause, G. tJber die von C. R. W. K. van Alderwerelt van Rosenburgh neu auf gestellte Gattung Thysanobotrya. [On van Alderwerelt van Rosenburgh's new genus Thysano- botrya.] Hedwigia 61: 401. 1920.— Gepp described a new fern from Dutch New Guinea as Polybotrya arfakensis. Van Rosenburgh separated this under a new generic name as Thysanobotrya arfakensis Gepp) v.A.v.R. The present author finds that the original description and figures correspond to Alsophila biformis Ros. He considers Alsophila the proper genus for this plant and sees no reason for the creation of a separate genus Thysano- botrya.— K. M, Wiegand. 499. Hierontmus, G. tJber Cheilanthopsis Hieron., eine neue Farngattung. [Cheilan- thopsis, a new genus of ferns.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 406-409. 1920. — The genus dif- fers from Cheilanthes in its dorsiventral spores; from Hypolepis, to which it is closely related in its ascending rhizome and fascicled leaves. Although based on Cheilanthes straminea Brause, no transfer of that species to the new genus is made. — H. A. Gleason. No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 77 500. Holm, Theo. Internal glandular hairs in Dryopteris. Rhodora 22: 89-90. 2 fig. 1920.— See liot. Absts. 6, Entry 1183. 501. House, Homer D. The Genus Aetopteron, Ehrhart. Amer. Fern Jour, 10:88-89. 1920. — The author revives the name of Aetopteron of Ehrhart to replace Polystichum and makes the following new combinations: Aetopteron aculeatum {Polystichum aculeatum L.), A. acrostichoides (Nephrodium acrostichoides Michx.), A. Braunii (Aspidium Braunii Spenner), A. Lemmoni {Polystichum Lemmoni Unden\^), A. lonchites {Polypodium lonchites L.), A. munilum {Aspidium munitum Kaulf.), A. scopulinum {Ascidium aculeatum var. scopu- linum D. C. Eaton). — F. C. Anderson. 502. Weatherby, C. A. Varieties of Pityrogramma triangularis. Rhodora 22: 113-120. 1920. — The author recognizes three geographic varieties in addition to the typical P. tri- angularis. The separation is based on the presence or absence of glands on the lamina and stipe, and on the character of these glands when present. A key to the varieties and the bibliography of each is given. — James P. Poole. SPERMATOPHYTES 503. Anonymous. Decades Kewenses. Decades XCII & XCIII. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919:221-231. 1919. — The following species are described as new: Aconitum funiculare Stapf, Indigofera Barberi Gamble, Erythrina mysorensis Gamble, Smithia Venkobarowii Gamble, Desmodiiim wynaadense Bedd., Vigna Bourneae Gamble, Rosa Saundersiae Rolfe, Bruguiera Hainesii C. G. Rogers, Sonerila pulneyensis Gamble, Memecylon flavescens Gamble, M. Lawsonii Gamble, M. Lushingtonii Gamble, M. madgolense Gamble, M. sispa- rense Gamble, Pimpinella pulneyensis Gamble, Schefflera Bourdillonii Gamble, 5. bengalen- sis Gamble, Linociera Parkinsonii Hutchinson, Sarcococca vagans Stapf, Chrysopogon seti- folius Stapf.— E. Mead Wilcox. 504. Anonymous. Decades Kewenses. Decas XCIV. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 403- 407. 1919.— The following species are described as new: Calathodes oxycarpa Sprague, Osbeckia travancorica Bedd., Oldenlandia Bourdillonii Gamble, 0. eualata Gamble, 0. Rama- rowii Gamble, 0. villosostipulata Gamble, 0. wynaadensis Gamble, Ophiorrhiza Barberi Gamble, 0. codyensis, 0. pykarensis Gamble. — E. Mead Wilcox. 505. Anonymous. Diagnoses Africanae: LXXII. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 263-267. 1919_ — The following species are described as new: Kalanchoe densiflora Rolfe, Anisophyllaea tomentosa Rolfe, Scyphosyce pandurata Hutchinson, Kniphofia Snowdeni C. H. Wright, Erio- caulon recurvifolium C. H. Wright, Brachiaria nana Stapf, Panicum uvulatum Stapf, P. epacridifolum Stapf, P. bambusiusculum Stapf, Rutenbergia Usagarae H. N. Dixon. — E. Mead Wilcox. 506. Blatter, E., and F. Hallberg. A revision of the Indian species of Rotala and Ammannia. Part II. Jour. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. 26:210-217. 1918.— Completed from the preceding volume, the second part covering six species of Ammannia; no new names appear. — E. D. Merrill. 507. Briquet, J. Decades plantarum novarum vel minus cognitarum. [Decades of new or little-known plants.] Annuaire Conservatoire et Jard. Bot. Geneve 20: 342-427. 1919.— This is the twenty-sixth of a series and includes the families from Celastraceae to Valeri- anaceae. The new names are: Maytenus pilcomayensis (Paraguay, Rojas 401), M. Hassleri (Paraguay, Hassler, 1342), M. Mathewsii (Peru, Mathews), M. Pavonii (Peru, Pavon 53), M. evonymoides var. Minarum (Brazil, Glaziou 12538, 13665) and var. pycnodonta (Paraguay, Hassler, 7358), M. retusa {Celastrus retusus Poir.), M. durifolia (Peru, Pavon 564), M. Jame- sonii (Ecuador, Jameson 222), M. vexata {M. myrsinoides Urb. not Reissek), M. Trianae {M. buxifolius Tr. & PI. not Griesb.), M. Schottii {M. repanda Reiss. not Turcz.), M. Lorentzii 78 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, (Argentina, Lorentz 1198), M. paraguariensis (Paraguay) var. genuina (Hassler 2564) and var. grandifolia (Rojas 508), M. Fendleri (Venezuela, Fendler 215), M. ebenifolia var. Poeppigii Brazil, Poeppig 3008) and var. Ulei (Brazil, Ule 6084), M. macrocarpa {M. multiflorn Loesen., not Reissek), M. longipes (Colombia, Smith 454), M. laurina (Brazil, Spruce 2284), M. Sprucei (Brazil, Spruce 3970), M. tarapotensis (Peru, Spruce 4329), M. controversa (Brazil, Glaziou 13666), M. Blanchetii (Brazil, Blanchet 3780), Columellia Matheivsii (Peru, Mathews), Clethera Broadwayana (Trinidad, Broadway 2594), C. Schlechtendalii (Mexico, Schiede & Deppe), C. Galeottiana (Mexico, Galeotti 1820), C. confusa (Mexico, Pringle 2425). C. guad- alajarensis (Mexico, Pringle 2502), C. Smithii (Columbia, Smith 2422), C. angustinensis (Venezuela, Funk 163), Callisthene durifolia (Brazil, Claussen), C. Clausseniana (Brazil, Claussen), C. robusta Briq. & Glaz. (Brazil, Glaziou 20679), C. Glazioui (Brazil, Glaziou 20681), C. mucronata (Brazil, Glaziou 20680), C. Hassleri (Paraguay, Hassler 10638), Qualea obtusata (Brazil, Spruce 3341), Vochisia alternifolia Briq. & Galz. (Brazil, Sello), Vochisia Haenkeana var. genuina (Peru, Haenke), var. Sprucei (Spruce 4078) and var. microphylla (Mathews 1650), V. grandis var. Douvillei (Brazil, Douville), V. stenophylla (Brazil, Glaziou 13807), Hypericum connatum var. obscurum (Brazil, Czermak. & Reineck 590), var. para- guariense (Bolivia, Fiebrig. 2361) and var. Fiebrigii (Bolivia, Fiebrig 2361 p. p.), H. cordiforme var. genuinum (Brazil, Guillemin315), var. Hilairei (var. /3 St. Hil.) and var. Glazioui (Brazil, Glaziou 14534), H. Stolzii (Nyassa, Stolz 2223), Hydrangea Schlimii (Columbia, Schlim 1139), H. platyphylla (Colombia, Linden 894), H. Trianae (Columbia, Triana), H. Goudotii (Colombia, Goudot), H. durifolia (Colombia, Funck & Schlim 1393), H. Oerstedii {H. peru- viana Hemsl. not Moric.) H. Preslii (Sarcostyles peruviana Presl not H. peruviana Moric), H. ecuadorensis (Ecudaor, Spruce 5058), H. umbellata (Cornidia umbellata Ruiz. & Pav.), H. Sprucei (Colombia, Spruce 4328), H. mathewsii (Peru, Mathews), H. tarapotensis (Peru, Spruce 4349), Escallonia illinita var. pubicalicina (Argentina, Bade), var. angustifrons (Chile, Bertero 984), var. eu-illinita (E. illinita Presl), E. pycnantha (Chile, Bridges), E. modesta (Chile, Bridges), Hex Merrillii (Philippines, Merrill 881), Eucryphia lucida {Carpo- dontos lucida Labill.), Sollya fusiformis {Billardiera fusiformis Labill.), Turpinia hetero- phylla (Staphylea heterophylla Ruiz. & Pav.), Sorindeia Goudotii (Madagascar, Goudot), Valeriana Bornmuelleri (Brazil, Bornmiiller 198). A correction to page 80 is, Loeflingia Vaucheri Briq. is L. micrantha var. Vaucheri Briq. — A. S. Hitchcock. 508. Camus, Aim:6e. Especes et varietes nouvelles de Graminees de I'Asie Orientale. [New species and varieties of Gramineae from eastern Asia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25:669-672. 1919. — The following varieties, subspecies, and species are described as new: Pollinia phaeotrix Hack. var. genuina, Pollinia phaeotrix Hack. var. aurea, P. phaeotrix Hack. var. tonkinensis, Miscanthus nudipes Hack, subsp. yunnanensis, M. japonicus Anders, var. formosanus, Cymbopogon Martini Stapf var. annamensis, Themeda arguens Hack. var. cochinchinensis, T. ciliata Hack. var. breviaristata, Isachne Eberhardtii, Panicum sarmento- sum Roxb. var. mekongense, Leptochloa filiformis R. & S. var. subuniflora G. & A. Camus, Dendrocalamus sericeus Munro var. latifolius G. & A. Camus, and Arundinaria ciliata. — E. B. Payson. 509. Camus, Aim^e. Note sur le Vetiveria zizanioides Stapf (Graminees). [Note on Vetiveria zizanioides Stapf (Gramineae).] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 673-674. 1919.— A key is given to the four recognized varieties of Vetiveria zizanioides with notes on distribu- tion and citation of specimens. V. zizanioides Stapf var. tonkinensis is described as new to science. — E. B. Payson. 510. C[orbishley], a. G. Nectaropetalum zuluense. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919:449- 450. 10 fig. 1919. — The plant previously known as Erythroxylon zuluense Schonl. is found to be a true species of Nectaropetalum, and so becomes N. zuluense (Schonl.) Corbishley. — E. Mead Wilcox. 511. Coulter, J. M. Cactaceae. [Rev. of: Britton, N. L., and J. N. Rose. The Cactaceae. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 248. 236 p., 36 pi., 302 fig. 1919.— (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1824:)] Bot. Gaz. 68: 391. 1919. No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 79 512. Davidson, Anstruther. [Without title.] Bull. Southern California Acad. Sci. 19: 10-12. 1920. — Linanthus saxiphilus, Draba saxosa and Hutchinsia calif ornica are de- scribed as new. There are also notes on certain species of Lwpinus and Linanthus. — Roxana Stinchfield Ferris. 513. Eberhardt, Ph. Sur une variete indochinoise du Quisqualis indica (Combretacees). [On an Indo-Chinese variety of Quisqualis indica (Combretaceae).] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 675-676. 1919.— A variety, Quisqualis indica L. var. annamensis, is described as new to science.— -E. B. Payson. 514. Ehinger, M. Odontoglossum Rossii Lindl. Orchis 13 : 33-35. 1919.— Notes on this species and some of its varieties are given with an illustration of the species.— iS. B. PaTjson. 515. Engler, A. Sterculiaceae africanae. VL [Sterculiaceae of Africa. VI.] Bof Jahrb. 55: 350-380. 1919.— A contribution under the general heading "Beitrage zur Flora von Afrika. XLVII. herausgegeben von A. Engler.," continued from Bet. Jahrb. 45: 339. Three genera, Melhania, Hermannia, and Cola are treated, the main portion of the paper being an extended elaboration of the genus Hermannia. Since K. Schumann's monograph of the African Sterculiaceae in 1900 the explorations in the Transvaal and other portions of South Africa have contributed a vast amount of material. Especially rich in this genus have been the collections of Dinter in Dutch-Southwest-Africa, Range and Schafer in Namaqualand, and Schlechter in the Transvaal and Namaqualand. In 1907 Engler described eleven species. In the present paper, begun in 1918, about forty species are described as new, three of which are proposed by Diels and four by Schlechter. Engler has retained most of Schumann's subgenera as sections but Schumann's subdivision of Euhermannia he could not retain; rather Harvey's groups in this subdivision were found to be more natural though they are here increased to seven. The section Acicarpus has been much elaborated beyond the treatment of Harvey. The systematic subdivisions of Her- mannia have natural geographic ranges. Engler's sections are as follows: (1) Mahrenia, north and east Africa, (2) Euhermannia, center of development southwestern Cape Colony, (3) Scaphiostemon, Damaraland, (4) Acicarpus, Abyssinia to the Transvaal and Namaqua- land, and (5) Mahernia, mainly South Africa. The general distribution of the genus shows it to be very old and long established in its present range. That it dates back to a time when the continents probably had a different configuration than at present is indicated by the occurrence of one endemic species in South Australia and three in Texas and Mexico. Fifty-five species of Hermannia are treated in the paper. The following species, varieties, and combinations are new: Section Mahrenia; H. Uhligii Engl. Massai Steppes. Section Euhermannia; H. glabripetala, Engl, Little Namaqualand; H. cinerascens Engl., Little Nama- qualand; H. Juttae Dinter & Engl., Great Namaqualand; H. melissifolia Engl., S. W. Africa; H. prismatocarpoides Engl., East Cape Colony; H. patellicalyx Engl., Great Namaqualand; H. arida Diels, Southwest Cape Colony; H. memhranifiora Schltr., Southwest Cape Colony; H. myrioclada Diels, Southwest Cape Colony; H. suhsquamulata Engl., Southwest Cape Colony; H. Bachmannii Engl., Southwest Cape Colony; H. minutiflora Engl, Little Nama- qualand to Damaraland; H. macra Schltr., Little Namaqualand; H. longiramosa Engl., North Hereroland. Section Scaphiostemon; H. tenuipes Engl., southwest Africa. Section Aciocarpus; H. longicornuta Engl., Great Namaqualand; H. spinulosa Engl., Great Nama- qualand; H. deserticola Engl., Great Namaqualand; H. intricata Engl., Great Namaqualand; H. aspericaulis Dint. & Engl., Little Namaqualand; H. modestus (Ehrenb.) Planch, var. elatiorK. Schum. subvar. virgatissima Engl., Damaraland; subvar. brevicornis Engl., Trans- vaal; subvar. macropetala Engl., Transvaal, Damaraland and Hereroland; subvar. mediipetala Engl., Damaraland; var. tstimebensis Engl., Hereroland; H. Stuhlmannii Engl, East Africa; H. pseudo-Mildbraedii Dint. & Engl., Damaraland; H. sideritifolia Engl., Transvaal; H. Seitziana Engl., Great Namaqualand; H. glandulosissima Engl., Damaraland; H. teitensis Engl., Kilimanjaro; H. tomentosus (Turcz.) Schinz Msc. var. brevifolia Engl., Damaraland; H. Seineri Engl., north Hereroland, and var. latifolia Engl. Section Mahernia; H. sparsipilosa Engl., Transvaal; H. pulchella L. var. picta n. comb., Great Namaqualand; H. bicolor Dint. 80 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, & Engl., Damaraland; H. Wilsmii Engl., Natal; H. hantamensis Engl., Little Namaqualand; H. coccocarpoides Engl., Transvaal; H. collina Schltr., Little Namaqualand; H. Meyeri Engl., Little Namaqualand; H. leucantha Schltr., Little Namaqualand; H. Vetteri Engl., North Hereroland; H. linnaeopsis Dint. & Engel., Damaraland; H. chloroleuca Diels, north- west Cape Colony; H. Medleyi Engl., Natal; H. Dieterlenii Engl., Highland of southeast Africa; H. Thodei Engl., Highland of southeast Africa. Besides the new species and varie- ties of Hermannia, there are a few others as follows: Melhania Dinteri Engl., North Herero- land; M. ferrugineoides Engl., North Hereroland; Cola subglaucescens Engl., South Kamerun; C. edeensis Engl. & Krause, South Kamerun; and C. Tessmannii Engl. & Krause., forest province of Guinea. — K. M. Wiegand. 516. Engler, a. Guttiferae africanae. III. [Guttiferae of Africa. III.] Bot. Jahrb. 55: 381-396. 1919. — A contribution under the general heading "Beitrage zur Flora von Afrika. XLVII, herausgegeben von A. Engler," continued from Bot. Jahrb. 45: 339. The tropical African genus Psorospermum Spach is greatly in need of revision. In Oliver's "Flora of Tropical Africa" only four species were described. Besides these, Schweinfurth described one, and Engler three, and C. H. Wright one. In the present paper thirteen new species and two new varieties are proposed as follows: P. Baumannii, Togo, and var. Afzelianum, Sierra Leone; P. Baumii, Kunene-Kubango-Land; P. aurantiacum, Kamerun; P. Staudtii, Kamerun; P. parviflorum, Kamerun; P. Kerstingii, Togo; P. laxiflorum, Togo; P. densipunctatum, Kamerun; P, Mechowii, Angola; P. adamauense, Soudan Park-steppe Province; P. Ledermannii, Soudan Park-steppe Province, and var. Doeringii, Togo; P. glaucum, Soudan Park-steppe Province; P. suffruticosum, Soudan Park-steppe Province. Other new species described are as follows: Haronga scandens, Kamerun; Garcinia Living- stonii T. And. var. pallidinervia, Kondeland; G. Stolzii, north Nyassaland; G. ifl)angensis, Soudan Park-steppe Prov.; G. Chevalieri, French Guinea; G. viridiflava, Kamerun; G. benien- sis, Lower Prov. of Cent. Africa; G. mbulwe, North Nyssaland; G. arbuscula, Kamerun; G. quadrangula, Kamerun; G. tibatensis, Soudan Park-steppe Prov.; G. tenuipes, Kamerun; G. tschapensis, Soudan Park-steppe Prov. ; G. Danckelmanniana, Soudan Park-Steppe Prov. ; G. ndongensis, Kamerun; G. nitidula, Kamerun; G. Buchneri, Angola; Pentadesma Ker- stingii, Soudan Park-steppe Province, and Guinea forest Province. — K. M. Wiegand. 517. Engler, A. Violaceae africanae. IV. Zur Kenntnis der afrikanischen Hybanthus- Arten. [Violaceae of Africa. IV. Toward a knowledge of the African species of Hybanthus.] Bot. Jahrb. 55: 397-400. 1919. — A contribution under the general heading "Beitrage zur Plora von Afrika, XLVII." A key to the African species is given, and nine species are listed. The new species, combinations, and varieties are: H. enneaspermus (L) F. v. Muell. var. serratus, Transvaal; H. densifolius, southwest Africa; H. Hildcbrondtii, North Somaliland; H. hirtus {Jonidium hirtum KlotzSch); H. hirtus var. Klotzschii, Mozambique, Zanzibar; H. hirtus var. glabrescens, Somaliland, Zanzibar, Mozambique, Katanga; H. Fritzscheanus, Huilla; H. caffer {Jonidium caff rum Sond.); H. caffer var. angustifolius ; H. nyassensis {Jonidium nyassense Engl.); H. capensis {Jonidium capense Roem. & Schult.); H. thymifolius {Jonidium thymifolium Presl). — K. M. Wiegand. 518. FtJCHS, Alfred. Orchis Traunsteineri Saut. Erster Tell. Ber. Naturw. Vereins Schwaben u. Neuburg 42: 3-174. 47 fig. 1919. — The author gives a full account of Orchis Traunsteineri, a member of the Dactylorchis group occurring in Central Europe. He divides this species, as ordinarily understood, into two species, the true 0. Traunsteineri of Sauter and 0. pseudo-Traunsteineri, which he describes as new. Under the second species he dis- tinquishes and describes in detail the following new subspecies: bavaricus, suevicus, gabre- tanus, gennachiensis , Hoeppneri, eifliacus and Koningweenianus . To these subspecies he ascribes a hybrid origin, regarding them as more or less complex crosses between O. Traun- steineri and certain other members of the Dactylorchis group, such as O. incarnatus L. and O. latifolius L. The subspecies suevicus, for example, he expresses by the formula, {Orchis incarnatus + latifolius) + Orchis Traunsteineri; some of his other formulas are even more complicated. In the course of his discussions h'e describes the following new races: 0. incar- m No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 81 natus race trminsteinerifolius and O. maculalus race falcatm. The illustrations depict details of floral structure and especially variations in the form and lobing of the lip. In connec- tion with the various plants described the author calls attention to the distinctive features of their habitats and lists the species, both bryophytes and spermatophytes, which are asso- ciated with them. — A. W. Evans. 519. GuiLLAUMiN, A. Contribution a la Flore de la Nouvelle-Caledonia. [Contribution to the Flora of New Caledonia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25:645-652. 1919.— Species are listed with the citation of specimens made by various collectors. Tapeinosperma Pen- nelii is described as a species new to science. — E. B. Payson. 520. Haines, H. H. Indian species of Carissa. Indian Forester 45: 375-388. PI. 17-20, 7 fig. 1919. — Five species of Carissa are known in India, and a botanical description is given of each, with a key for their identification. — E. N. Munns. 521. Hall, Cuthbert. On a new species or form of Eucalyptus. Proc. Linnean Soc. New South Wales 43:747-749. PI. 75. 1918.— Eucalyptus Marsdeni, forma vel sp. nov. is described in regard to its seedling, juvenile, and mature leaves; inflorescence; fruit; bark (unusual for a Eucalypt, to be classed with the stringy-barks, yet laminated with a sort of ochreous deposit on the outer surface of each layer, branch bark smooth and greyish, a half bark); timber, which is light brown, straight grained, has few gum-veins and works well, resembling E. viminalis in physical characters. The only known tree has been cut. The oil from leaves and terminal branches is thick and viscous, and its characteristics are discussed in detail. — Eloise Gerry. 522. Hansen, W. Die Bestimmungen der echten Graser nach ausseren Merkmalen. [The determination of the true grasses according to their external characters.] Illustrierte Landw. Zeitg. 39: 266. 1919.— For the identification of the grasses the writer presents a plan based primarily on the form of the inflorescence. — John W. Roberts. 523. Hassler, E. Bromeliacearum paraguariensium conspectus. [A conspectus of the Bromeliaceae of Paraguay.] Annuaire Conservatoire et Jard. Bot. Geneve 20: 268-341. 2 fi^. 1919.— There is a short introduction, a technical description of the genera and species, and an index. Full notes with synonymy and bilbiography are given. The genera are Bromelia, Acanthostachys, Ananas, Aechmea, Billbergia, Deuterocohnia, Dyckia, Vriesea, Tillandsia. The new names are: Aechmea polystachia var. myriophylla {A. myriophylla Morr.), A. (subg. Platyaechmea) plalyphylla (Santo Thomas, Sierra de Amambay, Hassler 11283 leg. Rojas), A. ampullacea var. typica (Yaguarazapd, Fiebrig 5431) and var. longifolia (Yhii, Hassler 9691), Billbergia magnifica var. acutisepala (Esperanza, Hassler 10726), Deuterocohnia paraguarien- sis (Cerro Margarita, Hassler 11098), Dyckia ferox f. australia (D. ferox Mez), f. vulgaris (Cerro-hu, Hassler 1447 et al), subsp. hamosa {D. hamosaMez), D. commixta (Tobaty, Chod. & Vischer 97), D. microcalyx var. inermis (Villa Rica, Hassler 8787), var. micrantha (Alto Parand, Fiebrig 5941), D. distachya (Fiebrig 5648), f. induta (Fiebrig 5824), D. tobatiensis (Tobaty, Hassler 2099), D. Hassleri f. gracilis (Hassler 1120), var. arenosa (Cerro Cord, Hassler 10500), var. subinermis (Hassler 10500a), subsp. basispina (Esperanza, Hassler 10884), var. montana (Cerro Cord, Hassler 9789), D. vestita (Centurion, Fiebrig 5311), D. Nissionum var. breviflora (San Ignacio, Hassler 142), D. insignis (Centurion, Fiebrig 4615), var. ma- crantha (Centurion, Fiebrig 5310a), var. obtusiflora (Centurion, Fiebrig 5310), Vriesea glu- tinosa var. viridis (Santo Tomas, Hassler 3768), Tillandsia stricta var. paraguariensis (Hass- ler 3286 p.p.), T. streptocarpa var. filifolia (Balansa 615), T. decomposita var. minor (Hassler 3683), T. confxisa (Lake Ypacaray, Hassler 3101), var. saxatilis (Hassler 3416), T. arhiza var. rupestris {T. rupestris Mez), T. bandensis var. intermedia (Santa Elisa, Hassler 2778), T. tricholepis var. argentea (Hassler 8517).— A. S. Hitchcock. 524. HowARTH, W. O. Festuca rubra near Cardiff: a taxonomic morphological, and ana- tomical study of three sub-varieties of Festuca rubra L., subsp. eu-rubra Hack., var. genuina Hack., growing near Cardiff, S. Wales. New Phytol. 18: 263-286. U fig- 1919.— A detailed 82 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, study of the subvarieties grandiflora (Hack.), tenuifolia (new), and a third probably corre- sponding to Hackel's glaucescens. The new subvariety is xerophytic and generally associ- ated with halophytic conditions; fairly densely caespitose; rhizomes short and more or less curved and ascending from the base; leaves slender and dark glaucous green, with a "bloom;" panicle more compact than in grandiflora: internodes rough; spikelets fewer, but the individual glumes large and as numerous as in grandiflora, with shorter awns. — I. F. Lewis. 525. JoRGENSEN, E. Ajuga pyramidalis X reptans. Bergens Mus. Aarb. (Naturh. Raekke) 1917-1918. 4 p. 1918. — At Nygaard Park in Bergen, specimens of Ajuga reptans, rare in Norway, were found with the common A. pyramidalis. Their hybrid was also found. The species and hybrid are described. — A. Gundersen. 526. JoRGENSEN, E. Die Euphrasia-Arten Norwegens. [Euphrasia species of Norway.] Bergens Mus. Aarb. (Naturh. Raekke) 1916-1917: 5-337. 11 maps, 14 tables, 54 fi^., bibliog- raphy. 1919. — Detailed discussion of characters and distribution of Norwegian species. These differ in degree, not in definite characters, representing an almost inextricable jumble answering the Mendelian splitting up of hybrids. Numerous new forms are described; one new species, E. hyperborea. In the usual sense of species there are only two, E. .salis- burgensis, and all other forms taken together. Summary given in English. — A. Gundersen. 527. KoiDztJMi, Geniti. Contributiones ad Floram Asiae Orientalis. [Contributions to the flora of eastern Asia.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 33: 217-223. 1919.— The author describes as new, Lactuca grandicolla, Senecio muninensis, Pyrus Yoshinoi, Salix paludicola, S. Hidewoi, S. tsukoshiana, Cirsium Yoshizawae, Campanula microdonta, with notes on other Japanese plants, and gives as a new combination, Zanthoxylon inerme (Rehd. & Wils.) Koidz. — Roxana Stinchfield Ferris. 528. Lazaro e Ibiza, B. Revision critica de las especies peninsulares del genera Viola. (A critical revision of the peninsular species of the genus Viola.] Revista R. Acad. Cien. Exactas, Fisicas y Nat. [Madrid] 17: 249-280, 391-421. 5 pi. 1919.— The species are divided into 3 groups and 8 sections. The following new species and varieties are described: Viola longifolia, V. palustris var. genuina, V. odorata var. genuina, V . hirta var. genuina, V. biflora var. uniflora, V . canina var. genimia, V. sylvestris var. genuina, V. rupestris var. genuina, V. cornuta var. genuina, V. lactea var. genuina, V. parvula var. genuina, and V. lutea var. genuina.— L. L. Harter. 529. MiETHE, E. Cattleya superba Schomb. Orchis 13 : 10-12. 1919. — This species is here redescribed and illustrated. — E. B. Payson. 530. Pellegrin, FRANgois. Note sur le Banda rouge et sur un Ombega du Gabon. [Con- cerning the red Banda and an Ombega of Gabon.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 653-654. 1919. — Sindora Klaineana Pierre is described as new to science. It is known locally as the red Banda. Ombega is the vernacular term applied to Entandrophragma rufa Chevalier. — E. B. Payson. 531. PoNzo, Antonio. Sul genere Acacia. [The genus Acacia.] Nuovo Gior. Bot. Ital. 25: 271-307. 1918. — A historical review of the position and limitation of the genus, a critical consideration of the essential and secondary taxonomic characters, and a regrouping and description of the species. The following subdivisions are recognized: (1) Phyllodinae with 29 species, (2) Botryocephalae with 4 species, (3) Pulchellae with one species, and (4) Gumi- ferae with 10 species. — Ernst Artschwager. 532. Prain, D., AND I. H. Burkill. "Dioscorea sativa." Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 339-375. 1919.— After an exhaustive enquiry into the aggregate that Linnaeus included under the name Dioscorea sativa, it is shown that that name is one which can not be used. — E. Mead Wilcox. No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 83 533. R., J. K. [Rev. of: Standard Cyclopedia of Horticulture. Vol. VI. S-Z with Supple- ment p. S04S-S639, fig. 3516-4056. Edited by L. H. Bailey. 1917.] Jour. Botany 57: 198-200. 1919. 534. ScHELLENBERG, G. Connaraceae africanae. III. [Connaraceae of Africa. III.] Bot. Jahrb. 55:436-456. 1919. — The paper is made up of the descriptions of new species, and the designation of new combinations found necessary in the preparation of a mono- graph of the famil}' soon to appear in "Das Pfianzenrcich." The new species are: Cnesiis liberica, Liberia; C. Dinklagei, Liberia; C. cinnabar ina, Kamerun; C. longiflora, Lagos; C. leucantha Gilg, Kamerun; C. calantha, Kamerun; C. gabunensis, Gabun; C. Zenkeri, Kamerun; C macrophylla Gilg, Kamerun; Manotes Tessmannii, Gagun; M. Zenkeri Gilg, Nigeria, Kamerun, etc.; M. rosea, Gabun and Kamerun; M. rubiginosa, Angola; M. Soyauxii, Loango; Paxia calophylla Gilg. Kamerun; P. Zenkeri, Kamerun; P. cinnabarina, Kamerun; P. lancea, Kamerun; Byrsocarpus Ledermannii, Kamerun; B. tomentosus, Dutch East Africa, Rodesia, etc.; B. papillosus, Kamerun; Santaloides urophyllum, Kamerun; Jolly- dora glandulosa, Kamerun. New combinations are as follows: Cnestis Mannii {Connarus Mannii Baker); C. pseudoracemosa {Connarus pseudoracemosus Gilg); Roureopsis Thonneri {Rourea Thonneri De Wild.); Spiropetalum Reynoldsii {Connarus Reynoldsii Stapf); Santa- loides gudjuanum {Rourea gudjuana Gilg); S. splendidnm {Rourea splendida Gilg); S. baman- yense {Rourea bamanganense De Wild.). Notes are given on Paxia my riantha (Baill.) Pierre, Byrsocarpus orientalis Baill., B. Poggeanus (Gilg) Schellenb., and B. maximus Bak. — K. M. Wiegand. 535. ScHELLENBERG. G. Ucber die Connaraceen-Gattung Jaundea Gilg. [On the genus Jaundea Gilg of the family Connaraceae.] Bot. Jahrb. 55: 457-463. 1919.— Gilg described in 1895 a genus Jaundea based on a plant which he named J. Zenkeri collected by Zenker near the station Jaunde in Kamerun. The new genus was included in Natur. Pflanzenfam. where in one place it was spelled Yaundea, an unjustifiable spelling of the word. Gilg admitted later that he was deceived by the young inflorescence and the position of the anthers in the Zenker material, and that his name should be a syrtbnym of Rourea pseudo- baccata. Later Schellenberg in his inaugural dissertation made Jaundea a section of Byrsocarpus; but he now recognizes it as a genus containing the original plant of Gilg, but having different characters and limits. As thus understood it contains a portion of the species originally ascribed by Schellenberg to Jaundea as a section of Byrsocarpus. The unimportance of certain biological characters from a taxonomic point of view is discussed, as for instance the appearance of the flowers with or after the leaves. The nervation of the leaf and the type of inflorescence are important in separating Jaundea and Byrsocarpus. A diagnosis of the genus is given and the characters which separate it from Byrsocarpus are tabulated. The species and forms included are as follows: Jaundea Baumannii {Rourea Baumannii Gilg); J. congolana; J. Leskrauwaetii {Rourea Leskrauwaetii De Wild.); J. monti- cola {Rourea motiticola Gilg); J. Oddoni {Rourea Oddoni De Wild.); /. pseudobaccata {Rourea pseudobaccata Gilg); /. pubescens {Connarus pubescens Baker); J. pubescens iorma, glabrala. — K. M. Wiegand. 536. Schlechter, R. Die Gattung Cochlioda Ldl. [The Genus Cochlioda Ldl.] Orchis 13: 3-10. 1919.— (Concluded.) An extensive generic description is followed by a key to the five recognized species of Cochlioda. Specific descriptions, synonomy, and the citation of specimens are included. Symphyglossum is described as a genus new to science, and to it are assigned the following species: S. sanguineum {Mesospinidium sanguineum Rchb. f.) and S. strictum {Cochlioda stricta Cosn.). — E. B. Payson. 537. Schlechter, R. Noch eimnal iiber Epidendrum pentotis Rchb. f. und Epidendrum Beyrodtianum Schltr. [Again concerning Epidendrum pentotis Rchb. f. and Epidendrum Beyrodtianum Schltr.] Orchis 13: 27-29. 1919.— The difference between these two similar species is reiterated, and drawings are presented to show the floral structure of E. pentotis Rchb. i.—E. B. Payson. 84 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII^ 538. ScHLECHTER, R. Onciditim X BurgeflSanum Schltr., eine interessante neue Kreu- zung. [Onciditim X Burgeffianum Schltr., an interesting new hybrid.] Orchis 13:29-30. 1919. — This hybrid has for its parents Oncidium Marshallianum Ldl. and 0. varicosum Ldl. — E. B. Payson. 539. ScHLECHTER, R. Vandanthe Tatzeri Schltr. n. hybr. Orchis 13:52-53. 1919.— A hybrid between Vanda tricolor Ldl. and Euanthe Sanderiana (Rchb. f.) Schltr. is described and illustrated. — E. B. Payson. 540. ScHLECHTER, R. Ein seltenes Grammatophyllum. [A rare Gramma tophyllum.] Orchis 13 : 54-55. 1919. — Grammatophyllum papuanum J. J. Smith is described and illustrated. — E. B. Payson. 541. ScHLECHTER, R. Die Gattung Brassavola R. Br. [The Genus Brassavola R. Br.] Orchis 13 : 40-46, 58-62, 71-79. 1919. — The genus Brassavola is described, and an outline of its taxonomic history given with notes as to its geographical distribution. The sections Eubrassavola, Prionoglossum, Conchoglossum and Cuneilabium are proposed and under each section are listed their species with descriptions and synonomy. The following new species are described and new combinations made: B. multiflora, B. nodosa Lindl. var. rhopalor- rhachis {B. rhopalorrhachis Rchb. f.), B. scaposa. — E. B. Payson. 542. Sedgwick, L. J. The Cyperaceae of the Bombay Presidency, Part II. Jour. Bom- bay Nat. Hist. Soc. 26: 192-209. 1918. — A general systematic consideration with keys and descriptions of the genera and species, covering the genera Courtoisia, Fimhristylis, Steno- phyllus, Eleocharis, Scirpus, Eriophorum, Fuirena, Lipocarpha, Remirea, Rhyncospora, Hypolytrum, Scleria, Carex. The first part was published in the preceding volume. No new names appear. — E. D. Merrill. 543. Sedgwick, L. J. Reduction of Euphorbia Rothiana Sprengel, of the Indian floras. Jour. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. 26: 599-600. 1919. — The above Indian species, as hitherto interpreted, is referred in part to Euphorbia laeta Roth and in part to E. oreophila Miq. — E. D. Merrill. 544. Sedgwick, L. J. On the species of Zizyphus in the Bombay Presidency. Indian Forester 45: 67-74. 1919. — Critical notes on seven species of Zizyphus occurring in India are given, with characteristics for field identification and distribution. Two forms of Z. Oenoplia Mill, are distinguished as forma robusta and forma mollis. Z. Xylopyrus Willd. var. glaber- rima is tentatively proposed as a new variety. The suggestion is made that Z. Xylopyrus Willd. var. micocarpa may be a hybrid between Z. Jujuba and Z. Xylopyrus. — E. N. Munns, 545. Shreve, Forrest. Monograph of the Cactaceae. [Rev. of: Britton, N. L., and J. N. Rose. The Cactaceae; descriptions and illustrations of plants of the cactus family. Vol. I. Carnegie Inst. [Washington] Publ. 248. 1919.] Plant World 22: 270-271. 1919. 546. Sprague, T. A. Dolichandrone and Markhamia. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919:302- 314. 1919. — These bignoniaceous genera are contrasted, and under each genus are listed the species attributed to it. Detailed synonomy together with distributional and ecological notes is included for the various species. The following new combinations and new variety occur: Dolichandrone atrovirens (Bignonia atrovirens Heyne), D. alba (Spathodea alba Sim.), Markhamia stipulata Seem. var. Kerrii, M. obtusifolia (Dolichandrone obtusifolia Baker). — E. Mead Wilcox. 547. Staff, O. Gunnera manicata and brasiliensis. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 376-378. 1919. — Gunnera brasiliensis Schindler is considered synonymous with G. manicata Lindl. — E. Mead Wilcox. No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 85 548. Staff, Otto. Gramineae. Flora of Tropical Africa 9<: 577-768. 1920.— This part continues the Paniceae as far as Setaria. The new genera, species and varieties in this part are as follows: Paspaliditun (new genus) geminatum {Panicum geminatum Forsk.), P. deser to- rum (Pantcum desertorum A. Rich.), Urochloa bifalcigera (Panicum bifalcigerum Stapf), U. trichopus (Panicum trichopus Hochst.), U. pullulans (Panicum geminatum Schweinf. not Forsk.), U. pullulans var. (?) mosambicensis (Panicum mosambicense Hack.), U. brachyura (Panicum brachyurum Hack.), U. bolbodes (Helopus bolbodes Steud.), U. echinolaenoides , U. Helopus (Panicum Helopus Trin.), U. javanica (Panicum javanicum Poir.), U. rudis, U. setigera (Panicum setigerum Retz.), U. insculpta (Panicum insculptum Steud.), U. rep- tans [P. reptans L.). Echinochloa obtusiflora, E. Holubii (Panicum Holubii St&Tpf.), E. hap- loclada (Panicum haplocladum Stapf), E. jubata, Acroceras (new genus) oryzoides (Panicum oryzoides Sw.), A. macrum, A. amplectens, A. basicladum, Commelinidium (new genus) may- umbense (Panicum mayumbense Franch.), C. gabunense (Panicum gabunense Hack.), C. ner- vosum, Panicum flacciflorum, P. transvenulosum, P. spongiosum, P. ianthum, P. juncifo- lium, P. carinifolium, P. fulgens, P. nervatum (Isachne nervata Franch.), P. pubiglume, P. plagianthum, P. sublaetum (P. laetum Stapf, not Kunth), P. viciniflorum, P. filicaule, P. Hanningtonii, P. phragmitoides, P. poaeoides, P. graniflorum, P. vagiflorum, P. poecilan- thum, P. aphanoneurum, P. Rowlandii, P. genuflexum, P. paucinode, P. manicatum, P. sociale, P. novemnerve, P. arcurameum, P. subflabellatum, P. longijubatum, P. pectinellum, P. cal- vum, P. subobliquum, P. caudiglume [not Hack. 1901], P. microthyrsum, Entolasia (new genus) imbricata, E. olivacea, Hemigjminia (new genus) Arnottiana (Panicum Arnottianum Nees), Cyrtococcum (new genus) setigerum (Panicum setigerum Beauv.), Sacciolepis ciliocincta, (Panicum ciliocinctum Pilg.), S. cingularis, S. nana, S. Chevalieri, S. brevifolia, S. huillensis (Pancium huillense Rendle), S. spiciformis (Panicum spiciforme Hochst.), S. interrupta (Panicum interruptum Willd.), S. cymbiandra, S. scirpioides, S. glaucescens, S. typhura (Panicum typhurum Stapf), S. incurva, S. transbarbata, S. auriculata. S. angusta (Panicum angustum Trin.), S. leptorrhachis, S. seslerioides (Panicum seslerioides Rendle), S. catumben- sis (Panicum catumbense Rendle), S. albida. — A. S. Hitchcock. 549. Stuckert, T. Contributions a la connaissance de la flora Argentine. [Contribu- tions to the knowledge of the flora of Argentina.] Annuaire Conservatorre et Jard. Bot. Geneve 20 : 428-464. 1919.— This consists of two parts. The first part is. III. Enumeration des Valerianacees de V Argentine by Stuckert and Briquet. The new names by Briquet are, Valeriana sarscphylla (Stuckert 7622a), V. effusav&r. genuina (Stuckert 1037 and others), var. Fiebrigii (Bolivia, Fiebrig 2196), V. approximata (Tucuman, Stuckert 22022), V. Gil- liesii (Betckea Gilliesii Hook. & Arn.), V. glomerulosa (Tucuman, Stuckert 7637), V. Stuck- ertii (Stuckert 2749 and others). The second part is, IV. Catalogue des Oxalidacees de I' Ar- gentine by Stuckert. Oxalis andicola var. Wallichiana (0. andicola var. calyce glabriusculo Hook.) is a new variety. There is an annotated list with bibliography of 82 species of Oxalis and 3 species of Hypseocharis. — A. S. Hitchcock. 550. Tatzer, a. Vanda X Mariannae, eine Kreuzung zwischen Vanda tricolor Lindl. und Vanda Denisoniana Rchb. f. [Vanda X Mariannae, a hybrid between Vanda tricolor Lindl. and Vanda Denisoniana Rchb. f.] Orchis 13:50-51. 1919.— This hybrid is here de- scribed and illustrated. — E. B. Payson. 551. TuRRiLL, W. B. A revision of the genus Mendoncia. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 407-424. 1919.— This Central and South American genus is contrasted with related genera of the Acanthaceae by means of a dichotomous key. Twenty-five species are recognized, and under each is given an extended Latin diagnosis with citation of exsiccatae. A key to the species is also provided. The following species and varieties are described as new and the following new combinations made: Mendoncia Spraguei, M. Tonduzii, M. coccinea Veil. var. sparatteria (M. Velloziana Nees var. sparatteria Nees), M. coccinea var. elliptica, M. gracilis, M. orbicularis, M. retusa. — E. B. Payson. 86 UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS [BoT. Absts., Vol. Vll, MISCELLANEOUS, UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS Burton E. Livingston, Editor 552. Anonymous. Microscoptical optics. [From a paper by A. E. Conradt at a dis- cussion on the microscope at the Royal Society on Jan. 14.] Nature 104: 548-550. 1920. 553. Anonymous. Peat fiber and the textile industry. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13 : 350. 1920. 554. Anonymous. [Rev. of : Alcock, W. Broughton. Canvas destroying fungi. Journ. Roy. Army Med. Corps 32«. Dec, 1919.] Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23:41. 1920.— Researches in Malta and Italy show that the rotting of canvas is due to various fungi, but chiefly to species of Macrosporium and Stemphylium. — E. A. Bessey. 555. Barnard, J. E. Construction and use of miscroscopes. Nature 104:546-548. 1920. — Opening paper of a discussion on the microscope at the Royal Society on Jan. 14. Most microscopes are unstable. An object on the stage will not maintain its centration if the instrument is put into the horizontal. Imperfections in mechanical stages are gen- eral. Resolution, not magnification, is the primary function of an objective. No indica- tion that numerical aperture will be further increased, but advances in illumination, espe- cially by use of ultra-violet or perhaps still shorter radiations, may be hoped for. (See also Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 3033.)— 0. A. Stevens. 556. Brown, A. M. Faults found in butter. Their definitions, causes and some sug- gested remedies for same. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:490-494, 591-595. 1920. — Author discusses relation of certain bad characters found in butter to bacteria and fungi causing them. — L. R. Waldron. 557. Deelen, H. Peat fiber spinning. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13 : 452. 1920. — German patent 316,511 covers the preparation from peat of fibers suitable for use with wool, cotton, or jute. — G. B. Rigg. 558. DuGGAR, B. M. Some factors in research. Plant World 22:277-289. 1919.— A paper contributed to a symposium on the general topic "Our present duty as botanists," in Baltimore, 1918. Various factors are discussed, such as the establishment of research posi- tions in connection with industrial enterprises, extension of opportunities to use special apparatus during vacation periods, conferences of groups of investigators interested in related problems, fostering post-doctorate and sabbatical-leave research, co-operation in publication and other activities, etc. It closes with a plea for better preparation, particularly in chemis- try, for botanical research. — Charles A. Shull. 559. Fischer, Herman. Der Nahrstoffgehalt unserer Gewasser und seine Ausniitzung fiir die Urproduktion. [The nutrient content of our waters and its use as an original productive factor.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 66-83. 1920. — Agriculture has received too little study in the past when compared with its relative economic importance. The author discusses previous studies in this field, and dwells particularly on the relation of nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potassium as found in fresh and salt waters to aquatic life, vegetative and piscatorial. Nitrogen and P2O5 are similar in salt and fresh water. In rivers, lakes, and other small natural bodies, the quantity of nutrients, especially of P3O5 is greatly influenced by the character of the soil surface, quantity of precipitation, etc. The humus coloring of water is a direct indication of the P2O6 content; and in general, all waters of limestone formations contain little, those over sandstone plentiful P2O5. Although further experimentation is necessary, it is believed that increased P2O0 content in natural waters can be used in securing greater fish production; also, as the floor decreases in nitrog- enous compounds, an increase in nitrogen is necessary to keep up production. The rela- No. 1, February, 1921] UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS 87 tion of potassium in natural waters varies inversely as that of P2O5. Lime plays an impor- tant role indirectly in increasing the content of the other three nutrients, by replacing them in chemical reactions and releasing them for use as solutes. The article contains 2 tables giving analyses of waters, both basic and acidic, of inland lakes and tributaries. — J. Roeser. 560. MacInnes, L. T., and H. H. Randell. Dairy produce factory premises and manu- facturing processes. The application of scientific methods to their examination. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 5G3-566. 9 fig. 1920.— In this fourth and last installment under this title the authors make an agar plate examination of dairy produce, its containers, and the environment in a modern and finely constructed dairy plant. Results are in striking contrast to those found in other plants in which less attention had been paid to sanitary conditions. In a plant such as this, pasteurization results are not discounted by insanitation. — L. R. Waldron. 561. MacInnes, L. T., and H. H. Randell. Dairy produce factory premises and manu- facturing processes. The application of scientific methods to their examination. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 485-489. 7 fig. 1920.— This article gives in some detail the results of bacterial and fungal counts, qualitative and quantitative, of samples taken at different stages of manufacture of dairy products, of their containers, and of the general environment found in one factory. The conclusion to be drawn is that lack of scientific sanitary manage- ment and control is responsible for much financial loss and probable injury to health. — L. R. Waldron. 562. Rader, F. E. Report of the work at Matanuska station. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917:81-84. 1 pi. 1919.— Reports on preliminary work, including the clearing of the land. — /. P. Anderson. 563. Saunders, Charles Francis. Useful wild plants of the United States and Canada. £75 p., 16 pi., 7Jt fig. Robert M. McBride & Co. : New York, 1920.— A popular treatise deal- ing with native plants, especially those useful for food, but also considering those that are used for beverages, for soap substitutes, and for medicine, besides mentioning certain poison- ous plants. The book is written in an attractive style, and the information it contains is selected with care. — C. F. Piper. 564. Stoll, Frank. [Rev. of: Pellett, Frank C. American honey plants. 297 p., 155 fig. American Bee Journal, Hamilton, 111. 1920.] Torreya 20:104. 1920.— The book describes as valuable because of nectar or pollen production some 900 species, arranged alpha- betically by common names, with Latin names accompanying the vernacular. The book is timely on account of the present sugar shortage. — J. C. Nelson. 565. Wallis, T. E. Analytical microscopy. Pharm. Jour. 104:247-249, 349-351, 395- 397, 541-542, 578-579; Idem. 105: 159-160, 283-284. 1920. INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS The purpose of Botanical Abstracts is to supply complete citations and analytical abstracts of all papers dealing with botanical subjects, wherever published, just as soon as possible after they appear. Every effort is made to present complete and correct citations with abstracts of original work, of all papers and reviews, appearing after January 1, 1919. As an adequate index of progress. Botanical Abstracts is of use to the intelligent grower, field agent and inspector, extension worker, teacher and investigator. The international scope of the work should appeal especially to those workers who have restricted library facili- ties. It is hoped that the classification by subjects will prove to be a great aid even to those having access to large libraries, while the topical index should serve a most useful purpose to every one interested in plants. The service of Botanical Abstracts is planned for botanists and all workers with plants, throughout the world. The services of all the botanical workers who are connected with Botan- ical Abstracts in any way, are given without any compensation except the satisfaction of par- ticipation in such a great cooperation toward the advancement of science. It is hoped that all students of plants will feel that Botanical Abstracts is their journal. Although the physical exigencies of the enterprise have made it practically necessary that the actual work of prepar- ing the issues be largely done within a relatively short distance from the place of publication, yet this does not imply that the cooperation is not needed of residents of other countries than the United States and Canada. JMany collaborators and abstractors reside in other countries, but the aim has not been to distribute the actual work throughout the world; rather has it seemed best to distribute the work so as to give prompt and efficient service, without reference to the particular countries in which the workers reside. It is physically necessary that the burden of the work and the finding of funds for clerical assistance, etc., should rest largely on North American workers, but the field covered is international and the results are available to all. The Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts, Incorporated, has charge of publication. The board is a democratic organization made up of members elected from many societies, as is shown on the first cover page. Each society elects, in its own way, two representa- tives, each for a period of four years. One new member is elected each biennium (beginning January 1, 1921) to replace the representative who retires. In the list on the first cover page, the member first named in each group is to serve till January 1, 1923; the second member in each group is to serve till January 1, 1921. Members are not eligible for immediate reelection. The Executive Committee of the Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts consists of five members, elected annually by the Board. It has charge of ad interim affairs not involving matters of general policy. Its membership is shown by the asterisks in the list on the first cover page. The chairman of the Committee for 1920 is Donald Reddick, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. The Board of Editors of Botanical Abstracts consists of an Editor-in-Chief and Editors for Sections, as shown on the second cover page. The Editors are elected annually by the Foard of Control. Assistant Editors are appointed by the Editors. Editors for Sections, with the aid of Assistant Editors for Sections, are responsible for editing the material of their respective sections as this is supplied by the Bibliography Committee (from the Collaborators and other Abstractors), and also for citations and abstracts of non-periodical literature. They also supply abbreviated titles for the author index of each volume and subject-index entries (for the occasional subject indexes) pertaining to their respective sections. The Editor- in-Chief, with the help of the Associate Editor-in-Chief and with the approval of the Board of Editors, is responsible for the general make-up of the issues, for the final compilations of the author and subject indexes, and for such other details as are left to him by the Editors for Sections. The Bibliography Committee of Botanical Abstracts, the membership of which is shown on the second cover page, is appointed annually by the Executive Committee of the Board of Control. The Bibliography Committee is charged with the responsibility of arranging for the prompt citing and abstracting of serial botanical literature. In performing this function, the Committee assigns to individual Collaborators the complete responsibility for furnishing the INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, Continued abstracts of all botanical papers in a specified serial publication, or in a limited number of serials. The Committee is further charged with the duty of maintaining an accurate record, through a S3'^stem of reports furnished currently by the Collaborators, of the state of abstract- ing for each serial publication. This record enables the Committee to detect and correct delinquencies in the work of abstracting and to keep the work up to date. The number of assigned serials will eventually exceed 2000, for each of which a record of the state of ab- stracting will be maintained in the office of the Bibliography Committee. Readers are earnestly requested to aid the Bibliography Committee by bringing to its attention any serial publi- cations that are not being properly represented in Botanical Abstracts. The chairman of the Committee for 1920 is J. R. Schramm, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Collaborators of Botanical Abstracts. A large number of botanical workers in all parts of the world have volunteered to assume complete responsibilitj' for securing citations and abstracts from one or more serial publications as assigned to them by the Bibliography Committee. This corps of voluntar}^ workers (called Collaborators) really constitute the basis of the service rendered by Botanical Abstracts. Through their work it is made certain that all serial publications ar§ promptly entered. A list of the names of Collaborators is published in each volume of Botanical Abstracts. It is desirable that a considerable reserve list of collaborators be maintained, in order to allow for necessary changes, and addi- tional collaborators are therefore earnestly solicited. Abstractors for Botanical Abstracts. Collaborators frequently prepare abstracts them- selves, and are thus Abstractors, but they also arrange for others to prepare them. Every abstract is signed by the Abstractor who prepared it, but entries by citation alone are not signed. The Collaborators are responsible for these citations. A list of Abstractors is pub- lished for each volume of Botanical Abstracts. It includes many names of voluntary contributors to the enterprise, besides those of the Collaborators. The Printing and Circulation of Botanical Abstracts is in the hands of the Publishers, according to the terms of a definite contract between them and the Board of Control. All other matters are directly in the hands of the Board of Control. Correspondence concerning subscriptions should be addressed to the Publishers or their agents; other matters should be referred to the Chairman of the Board of Control, to the Chairman of the Bibliography Com- mittee, or to the Editor-in-Chief. Readers of Botanical. Abstracts are earnestly requested to make careful note of any errors that occur in the journal, with their corrections, and to send these notes to the Editor- in-Chief. If all will cooperate in this it will be possible to supply a page of corrigenda with each volume. These notes should be on sheets about 22 X 28 cm. (S^ X H inches). Botanical Abstracts is published monthly. Each volume contains about 300 pages. No claims are nllowedfor copies lost in the mails unless such claims are received within 30 days (90 days for places oUtside of the United States and Canada) of the date of issue. Price per volume, net, postpaid: .13.00, United States and dependencies; .?3.12, Canada; $3.25, other countries. Subscriptions are in order for Volumes VII and VIII. Back vol- umes. Volumes III to VI, inclusive, can be supplied. Volumes I and II are out of print. Subscriptions are received at the following addresses, for the respective countries: United States of North America and dependencies ; Mexico; Cuba: Williams & Wilkins Company, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore. Argentina and Uruguay: Beutelspacher y Cia., Sarmiento 815, Buenos Aires. Australia: Stirling & Co., 317 Collins St., Melbourne. Belgium: Henri Lamertin, 58 Rue Coudenberg, Bruxelles. The British Empire, except Australia and Canada: The Cambridge University Press, C. F. Clay, Manager, Fetter Lane, London, E. C. British subscribers are requested to make checks and money orders payable to Mr. C. F. Clay, Manager, at the London address. Canada: Wm. Dawson & Sons, Ltd., 87 Queen Street, East Toronto. Denmark: H. Hagerup's Boghandel, Gothersgade 30, Kjobenhavn. France: Emile Bougault, 48 Rue des Ecoles, Paris. Germany: R. Friedlander & Sohn, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin N. W., 6. Holland: Scheltema & Holkema, Rokin 74-74, Amsterdam. Italy: Ulrico Hoepli, Milano. Japan and Korea: Maruzen Company, Ltd. (Maruzen-Kabushiki-Kaisha), 11-16 Nihonbashi Tori-Sanchome, Tokyo; Fukuoka, Osaka, Kyoto, and Sendai, Japan. Spain: Ruiz Hermanos, Plaza de Santa Ana 13, Madrid. Switzerland: Georg & Cie., Freistrasse 10, Bfile. Vol. VII MARCH, 1921 No. 2 ENTRIES 566-1527 BOTANICAL Abstracts \ monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of botany in its broadest sRnse PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC. A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies interested in plants. THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED AND THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL (The Executive Committee for 19SJ are indicated by asterisks) American Association for the Advancement of Science, Section G. -R. A. Harpkr, Columbia University, New York City. B. E. Livingston. Botanical Society of America, General Section. H. A. Glkason, New York Botanical Garden, New York City. *B. M. Davis. Botanical Society of America, Physiology Section. Otis F. Cuhtis, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. *B. M. DuGOAR, Chairman of the Board. Botanical Society of America, Systematic Section. Marshall .\. Howk, New York Botani- cal Garden, New York City. J. A. Barnhart. Botanical Society of America, Mycological Section. C. H. Kauffman, University of Michi- gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. BntrcR Fink, Miami University, Oxford, Ohio. American Society of Naturalists. H. H. Bartlett, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. *J. A. Harris. Ecological Society of America. H. L. ScHANTZ, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. * Forrest Shreve. Paleontological Society of America. Arthur Hallick, 61 Wall Street, New Brighten, New York. E. W. Berry. American Society of Agronomy. ('. H. Hutchison, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. C. A. MOOERS. Society for Horticultural Science. V. R. Gard.n'kk, University of Missouri, Columbu.s, Missouri. E. J. Kraus. American Phytopathological Society. L. R. JovES. University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. * Donald Reddick. Society of American Foresters. Rmmiakl Zox, U. S. Forest Service, Wash- ington, D. C. J. S. Illick, Pennsylvania Department of Forestry, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. American Conference of Pharmaceutical Faculties. Heuer W. Youn(;kk.v, Philadelphia Col- lege of Pharmacy and Science, Phila- delphia, Pennsylvania. Henry Kraemer. Canadian Society of Technical Agricultur- ists. W. P. Thompson, University of Sas- katchewan, Saskatoon, Saskatchewan. B. T. DicKsov, Macdonald College, Macdonald College, Quebec. Royal Society of Canada. No elections. At large. W. A. Orton. WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY BALTIMORE, TJ. S. A. Entered ae Becond-claES matter, November 9, 1918, at the post office at Baltimore, Maryland, under the Act of March 3, 1879 Copyright 1921, Williams & Wilkins Company $3.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba "a countries Price, net postpaid, per volume ("$3.00, United < S3. 12, Canad£ { $3.25, Other c CONTENTS Agronomy , 566- 684 Bibliography, Biography and History 685- 710 Botanical Education 711- 718 Cytology .^ 719- 739 Forest Botany and Forestry .' 740- 838 Genetics 839- 943 Horticulture 944-1047 Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants 1048-1077 Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes 1078-1096 Paleobotany and Evolutionary History 1097-1124 Pathology 1125-1275 Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy 1276-1289 Physiology 1290-1385 Soil Science 1386-1420 Taxonomy of Vascular Plants 1421-1498 Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications 1499-1527 BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1920 AND ASSISTANT EDITORS Editor-in-Chief, Burton E. Livingston . The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore Associate, Lon A. Hawkins U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. EDITORS FOR SECTIONS Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus- try, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, Mart R. Burr, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D.C Bibliography, Biography and History. NeilE. Stevens, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant Editor, Alfred Gundersen, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin.— Assistant Editor, Geo. S. Bryan, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin, Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. Cowles, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois.— Assistant Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. Forest Botanv and Forestry. Raphael Zon. U. S. Forest Service, Washington, D. C— Assistant Editor, J. V. HOFMANN, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Ex- periment Station, Stabler, Washington. Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University, Princeton, New Jersey. — Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly, Pennsylvania State College, State College, Penn- sylvania. Horticulture. J. H. Gourlet, West Virgmia Univer- sity, Morgantown, West Virginia. — Assistant Editor, H. E. Knowlton, West Virginia University, Morgan- town, West Virginia. Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E. Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University. Balti- more, Maryland. — Assistant Editor, Sam F. Tre- lease, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants. E. W. Sinnott, Connecticut Agricultural College, Storrs, Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E.N. Tbanseau. Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio. Morphology ana Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexandbb W. Evans. Yale University. New Haven. Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes. H. M. Fitzpatrick. Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. — Assistant Editor, Carlos E. Chardon, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W. Berry, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agricultural Col- lege, East Lansing, Michigan. — Assistant Editor, C. W. Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East LanB- ing, Michigan. Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. H ebeb W . Youngken, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and Science.Philadelphia.Pennsylvania.— Assistant Editor, E. N. Gathebcoal, 701 South Wood St., Chicago^' Illinois. _ _ ^ Physiology. B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden, .■ St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W. Dodge, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island. Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant EditorJ F. M. Schertz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Wash'^ ington, D. C. Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Greenman, Mis-^ souri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.—^ Assistant Editor, E. B. Patson, Missouri BotanicalJ Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1920 J. R. ScHBAMM, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York H. O. BucKMAN L. Knudson W. H. Chandler E. G. Montgombbt A. J. Eames D. Reddick R. A. Emerson L. W. Sharp H. M. Fitzpatrick K. M.Wjeqand R. HOSMFB JUST PUBLISHED DICTIONARY OF BOTANICAL EQUIVALENTS FRENCH-ENGLISH GERMAN-ENGLISH BY ERNST ARTSCHWAGER, Ph.D. Instructor in Plant Physiology at Cornell University AND EDWINA M. SMILEY, M.A. Instructor in Plant Pathology A practical hand-book, intended for the graduate student'and investigator. Of special use to readers of foreign botanical literature, who feel the need of an accurate translation of technical terms not commonly found in our dictionaries. Only terms of French and German derivation are included. Terms cf Latin 'or Greek origin have been introduced only when their meaning was not clear. Whenever possible, the special meaning of each term has been explained if no equivalent in the other language exists. The list of plant names includes important economic plants, farm weeds, and the Latin equivalents for the larger plant groups. Interleaved with blank pages to make it [possible for owners of the volume to record any terms and names not given, ORDER FROM WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY Publishers of Scientific Journals and Books BALTIMORE, U. S. A. ORDER FORM Williams & Wilkins Company Baltimore, Maryland, U. S. A. FleaFC send copy(ies) of Dictionary of Hotanical Equivalents. Remittance for $2.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $2.15, Carada; $2.25, other countries, is enclosed to cover, (or) Remittance will be made on receipt of your statement, (or) Remittance will be made about 1921. Name (Please state whether Dr., Prof., Librarian, Director, etc.) Address. LaMotte Standards GUARANTEED Section 1. — Standardized Indicator dyes. Covering a wide range of H-ion con- centration. Supplied in dry form and in sterile stock solutions. Each indicator is standardized in strict accordance with the specifications of Clark & Lubs. f Jr. Bact., Vol. II, Nos. 1, 2, 3, 1917.) Common Name Color Change Ph Value Thymol Blue (acid range) red-yellow 1.2-2.8 ilethyl Orange red-vellow 2.9-4.0 Bromphenol Blue yellow-blue 3.0-4.6 Resorcin Blue pink-blue 4.0-7.2 Methyl Red red-yellow 4.4-€.0 Bromcresol Purple yellow-purple fi.2-6.8 Litmus (special) red-blue 5.5-8.9 Bromthvmol Blue vellow-blue 6.0-7.6 Phenol-Red yellow-red 6.8-8.4 Cresol Red yellow-red 7.2-8.8 Thvmol Blue (alkaline range) vellow-blue 8.0-9.6 Cresol-phthalein colorless-red 8.2-9.8 Pheiiol-phthalein colorless-red 8.4-9.2 Section 2-B. — Specially prepared and standardized Buffer salts and solutions. Buffer mixtures may be obtained in series covering any particular range of H-ion concentration from Ph 1.0 to 10.0. Standardized Buffer Solutions (M/5) Potassium Phosphate Potassium Phthalate Sodium Hydroxide (COj free) Potassium Chloride Hydrochloric .\oid Di-Sodium Phosphate, 2HjO A large number of general synthetic and purified compounds are manufactured by us and information concerning them may be obtained by addressing LA MOTTE CHEMICAL PRODUCTS CO. "Standardis Department" 13 W. Saratoga St. Baltimore, Md. GENETICS A Periodical Record of Investigations Bearing on Heredity and Investigation ISSUED BIMONTHLY EDITORIAL BOARD Gkoroe H. Shvll, Managing Editor Princeton University WiLLi.^M E. C.\STLK Edwin G. CoNKLiN Ch.vrles B. D.wenport Bradley M. Davis Harvard University Princeton University Carnegie Institution of Washington University of Michigan Edward M. E.\ST Rollins A. Emerson Herbert S. Jennings Harvard University Cornell University Johns Hopkins University Thomas H. Mobgan Ratmond Pearl Columbia University Johns Hopkins University Prices, net postpaid: Current Volume, Volume VI, $6.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; S6.25, Canada; S6.50, other countries The Back Volumes are available. Price, net postpaid, Volumes I-V, inclusive: S35.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $36.25, Canada; S37.50, other countries Order from Williams and Wilkiiis Company ri'BLISHEKS OF SCIENTIFIC JOl'KNAI^ AND BOOKS Baltimore, Maryland, U. S. A, SOIL SCIENCE ESTABLIBHCD BT RUTGERS COLLEGE JACOB G. LIPMAN, Editor-in-Chief CARL R. WOODWARD, AssiarANT Editob IN CONSULTATION WITH OB. ». i. ALWAT DB. H. f. CONN DB. C. B. LIPMAN PBOF. Q. BOBBI DB. C. BAHTHEL DB. H. VON FEILITZEN DR. P. l6hNI8 DR. E. J. RCBBELL DR. M. W. BEIJERINCK DR E B FRED ^^- "'^ '- '•^O'* "B. O, 8CHBEINEB PROF. A. W. BLAIR -„' ' o„eto-SMITH "'*• =• ''• M1T8CHERLICH DR. A. A. F. DE 8I0MOND DR. P. E. BROWN uni^' J oiuiiQ PROF. C. A. MOOBBa PROF. CHAS. E. THORNB DIRECTOR H. B. CHBIBTEN8EN ^^- ^- ^- HARTWELL pB. THEO. BEMT DB. N. TULAIKOFF Soil Science is devoted to the broader outlook of the entire field of soil fertility. Articles dealing with the more important facts, observations, deductions and problems of soil biology, soil chemistry, and soil physics are published. Papers devoted to plant physiology, agronomy, bacteriology, or geology, are accepted for publication if they contribute directly to the knowledge of soil fertility. The study of the mineral and organic constituents of soils, soil gases, soil water as a sol- vent of soil material, soil colloids, the transformation of commercial plant foods in soils, questions that deal with the fundamental facts of soil fertility and productivity, are given due consideration. The phenomena concerning soil micro-organisms, such as bacteria, molds, protozoa, and algae, receive careful attention. SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FOR SOIL SCIENCE Issued Monthly. Two Volumes (500 pages to a volume) a Year. Current Volumes, Volumes XI and XII: JIO.OO. United States, Mexico, Cuba; $10..50, Canada; $11.00, other countries Back Volumes, I to XI, inclusive: $.'50.00, United .States, Mexico, Cuba; $.52. .50, Canada; $.55.00, other countries. Prices are net, postpaid. WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore, Md., U. 8. A. Please enter a subscription for Soil Science. Kindly begin subscription with the current volume, and forward numbers as issued. Remittance for $10 O0.($10.50, Canada; $11.00. other countries) is enclosed to cover two volumes. Name . . . Address. "21 Abstracts of Bacteriology ''°'"'"' " Compriting complete revieto* and abstracts of American and foreign work in Bacteriology, Mycology and Protozoology in their relation to the arte and sciences Under the editorial direction of the SociBTY OF American Bacterioloqists Editor A. PARKER KITCHENS Published Monthly. One volume a year at present. About 500 pages to a volume Price, net postpaid: $5.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $5.25, Canada; $5.50, other countries Subscriptions are received for the volume only. Single copies are not sold Back Volumes, Vols. I-IV, incl. Price, not postpaid: $24.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $25.00, Canada; $26.00, other countries Subscription Order for the Abstracts of Bacteriology WiLLIAtia & WiLKINB CoMPANT Mount Rotal and GunJOBO Avenues, — — '"•• Baltiuork, Md., U. S. a. Vg I enclose { jg ^ liinieS^^^^^ \ ''"" •"O80"Pt'°" *<» ^^^ present volume of Abbtbacts or Bactbbioloqt. (Please state whether Dr., Prof., etc.) We Name. Address . 90 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 576. Anonymous. A seleccao da semente no arroz. [Selection of seed rice.] Bol. Agric. Nova Goa [Portuguese East India] 1 : 19-22. 1919. — General directions for selecting seed rice; also notes on seed treatment with hot water, copper solutions, or a mixture of ashes and water. — John A. Stevenson. 577. B., W. W. Tropical control of Australian rainfall. [Rev. of: Quatle, E. T., in bul- letin No. 15 of the Commonwealth Bureau of Meteorology.] Nature 105: 152-153. 1920. 578. Anonymous. History of the Danish crop guarantee. Seed World 7^^ : 19-20. 1920. 579. Anonymous. Danish methods of seed production. Seed World 7^: 20-21. 1920. 580. Anonymous. El algodon. [Cotton.] Bol. Camara Agric. Nacion. Leon [Mexico] 7: 451-457. 1920. — A popular discussion of cotton culture in Mexico. — John A. Stevenson. 581. Anonymous. Selection of canes for planting. Australian Sugar Jour. 12:382- 1920. — A system of growing sugar cane for seed purposes has been started at the Kairi Experiment Station, on the Atherton Tableland. This has been done in an endeavor to preserve the high quality and heavy tonnage of the Badila sugar cane, the Rose Bamboo, Meera, and other of the older varieties of cane. — C. Rumhold. 582. Atkinson, A., and E. W. Joseph. Sixth annual report of the Montana Grain Inspec- tion Laboratory. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 135. 22 j)., 7 fig. 1920.— The bulletin gives the results of the seed testing and seed inspection work for the year ending June 30, lU^.—H. E. Morris. 583. Atkinson, Alfred, J. B. Nelson, C. N. Arnett, W. E. Joseph, and O. Tretsven. Growing and feeding sunflowers in Montana. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 131 : 3-39. 4 fig. 1919. — The bulletin presents, in the first, part a brief discussion and history of the cul- tivated sunflower (Helianthus annuus) and gives the results of tests on yields and methods of growing and feeding sunflowers, as applied to Montana. The second part of the bulletin, pages 13-29, discusses the use of sunflowers as a silage crop. — H. E. Morris. 584. Atkinson, E. H. Weeds and their identification. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 299-301. PI. I. 1920. — Lantana camara L. is described. It has been present in New Zea- land for twenty-five years, but still seems to be confined to one rather small section. The fruit is reported to have made children sick, but it is not believed to be injurious to live stock. — A'. J. Giddings. 585. Baird, W. p. Corn experiments at the Judith Basin substation. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 132:3-24. 9 fig. 1919.— The bulletin reports experiments in growing corn in rotation and by different tillage methods. No varieties have been found that can be depended on to mature a grain crop, but a good quality of fodder corn is produced. Yields of corn were larger than those of alfalfa, brome grass, or red clover. Yields of oats, spring wheat, and barley have in all cases been higher after corn, and have averaged about the same yields as when these crops were grown on summer-fallowed land. — H. E. Morris. 586. Barber, C. H. The growth of the sugar cane. On tillering. Internat. Sugar Journal 22:495-498. 1920.— Tillering, the inherent branching capacity of the cane, differs a good deal according to the variety and especially the group of cane grown. There are a number of factors which limit the power of a cane variety to produce its full yield. The external influences are light available, moisture in the soil, character of the soil, and amount of manure applied. As a general rule in cultivated canes, thickness and tillering-power are inversely related. The inherent character of the groups, of course, must not be neglected. — E. Koch. No. 2, March, 1921] AGRONOMY 91 587. Barber, C. A. Millets for fodder on sugar estates, I. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22 : 613- 616. 1 pi. 1920. — A description and short history of sorghum (Andropogon Sorghum) is given. Some of the characteristics and methods of cultivation in India are described. — C. Rumbold. 588. Barber, C. A. Agricultural notes on extending the milling season. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22: 611-612. 1920. — The author describes the methods used for lengthening the sugar-cane milling season. The use of nitrogenous fertilizers, of ratoons, and of splitting up old stools into two or three parts and replanting the pieces are discussed. Much has been done by the suitable selection of early and late varieties. — C. Rumbold. 589. Barber, C. H. The growth of the sugar cane. X. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22: 548- 551. 2 pi., 4 fig- 1920. — This article concludes and summarizes a series of ten preceding papers on the growth of the sugar cane. Other interpretations are made of the large series of measurements of the canes. With examples and diagrams, it is shown how conditions prevailing during the growing season leave their marks on the size and form of the cane and its appendages. — E. Koch. 590. Barfusz, J. Von der emte, sortierung und aufbewahrung der winterkartofifeln. [Harvesting, sorting and storing winter potatoes.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 516-517. 1920. — Directions for harvesting, sorting, and storing potatoes under different conditions. — A. J. Pieters. 591. Barthe, A. E. La higuerilla. [The castor bean.] Agric. Mexicano y Hogar 36: 118-120, 124-129, 148-150. 1920. 592. Bartlett, H. Farmers' experiment plats. Potato experiments, 1919-20. New England district. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:692-694. 1920.— Variety trials of potatoes are given and results from mineral fertilizers. Application of superphosphate was economically eflScient. — L. R. Waldron. 593. Bisbt, G. R., and A. G. Tolaas. The use of Bordeaux mixture for spraying potatoes. Minnesota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 192: 1-31. 4 fig. 19-20.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1219. 594. BoviNG, P. A. Valuation of farm crops. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 120- 121, 136-137. 1920. 595. BoviNG, P. A. Sunflowers for ensilage. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 196. 1920. 596. Brexchley, Wixifred E. Weeds of farm land. 15 X 22 cm., 239 p., 41 fig. Long- mans, Green and Co. : London, 1920. — A discussion of the weed problem and the habits of weeds rather than a manual of the individual species. Of the thirteen chapters those on Vitality of Weed Seeds, Association with Soils, Association with Crops, Uses of Weeds, and Popular Names are of especial interest, and contain many original data from the Rothamsted Experimental Station. The volume is well, though not profusely, illustrated with line drawings. About 175 citations to literature, mostly European, are given in footnotes. — C. V. Piper. 597. Brown, Edgar. What farmers should expect from seedsmen. Seed World 8'' : 26. 1920. — In this article it is pointed out that the seedsman holds a more directly responsible relation to agriculture than any other merchant, because the farmer is fundamentally dependent upon the seed merchant for his crop seed. — M. T. Munn. 598. Burgess, J. L. Fanners interest in good seed. Seed World 7^: 27. 1920. 599. Cardon, P. v., W. O. Whitcomb, and W. F. Day. Seventh annual report of the Montana Grain Inspection Laboratory. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 136. 32 p., 3 fi^. 1920. — The bulletin discusses methods of collecting, shipping, and grading grain samples. 92 ' AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, Inspection fees and Montana grades for wheat, oats, and barley are given, as well as a com- plete copy of the Montana State Grain Inspection Law. A preliminary statement of inves- tigational work, detailed reports of seeds tested, and a financial statement of the laboratory are included. — H. E. Morris. 600. Cockayne, L. An economic investigation of the montane tussock-grassland of New Zealand. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 337-345. 7 jig. 1920.— A comparison is made of the flora on a heavily-grazed and an adjoining lightly-grazed pasture at an elevation of about 2000 feet. Coriaria sarmentosa var. and Celmisia spectabilis are found particularly abundant in the lightly-grazed tract. Coriaria sarmentosa has been reported as poisonous to sheep, but in this instance they were apparently uninjured by it. The Celmisia is reported as unpalatable. — N. J. Giddings. 601. Cockayne, L. An economic investigation of the montane tussock-grassland of New Zealand. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 209-217. 8 fig. 1920.— This gives the results of an experiment to determine the relative palatibility for sheep of the native plants occurring in one of the reserves. The plants are listed and relative palatibility noted. — A^. /. Giddings. 602. Cook, O. F. Commercial parasitism in the cotton industry. Nature 105:548-549. 1920. — System of marketing does not offer sufficient inducement for production of better grades of cotton. Investigations in the United States show that best and most uniform fiber can be maintained only in communities which grow a single variety. More attention is needed to determine quality in the field. — 0. A. Stevens. 603. Crile, Austin D. Extirpacion del zacate Johnson. [Eradication of Johnson grass.] Agric. Mexicano y Hogar 36: 153-156. 1920. 604. DoBLAS, Jos£ Herrera. Henificacion de forrajes. [Haymaking.] Bol. Asoc. Agric. Espana 11:348-354. 1919.— The author considers methods of storing hay, for the most part by baling, together with costs and probable returns. — John A. Stevenson. 605. Dominguez, Zeferino. La semilla. [Seed.] Bol. Camara Agric. Nacion. Leon [Mexico] 7: 449-451. 1 fig. 1920.— The author considers the proper care of seed-corn under Mexican conditions. — John A. Stevenson. 606. Downing, R. G. Flax growing in Victoria. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 636. 1920. 607. Dymond, J. R. Color characteristics of red clover seed. Seed World 7^ : 23. 1920.— In Canada in 1916 in samples of red clover seed, the purple-colored seeds were slightly more prevalent and in practically every case weighed more per thousand seeds than the yellow- colored seeds. Germination tests showed that the yellow seeds gave a higher percentage of germination and contained more hard seeds than the purple. The green or immature seeds gave the lowest percentage of germination, but contained a surprisingly high proportion of hard or impermeable seeds. The brown seeds are shown to be low in vitality and to contain the smallest percentage of hard seeds. — M. T. Munn. 608. Elorduy, Samuel Torres. Cultivo de la remolacha azucarera. [Sugar beet cul- tivation.] Bol. Camara Agric. Nacion. Leon [Mexico] 7:493-495. 1920. 609. FiNDLAY. Hugh. The handbook for practical farmers. 558 p., 258 fi^. D. Appleton & Company: New York and London, 1920.— This book, edited by Prof. Hugh Findlay of Columbia University, consists in the main, of contributions from men who are actively en- gaged in the promotion of the subjects they discuss. Of the 558 pages, some 45 are devoted to soil management and drainage, 94 to a discussion of the chief field crops, 82 to the orchard, small fruits, and vegetables, 182 to animal husbandry, 42 to farm weeds and pests (not dis- eases), 96 to farm engineering, economics, and miscellaneous subjects; and the book concludes No. 2, March, 19211 AGRONOMY 93 with 20 pages giving weights, measures, and various useful rules. Under each topic the fundamental facts are given, but space prohibits considerable elaboration of the many sub- jects touched upon. The book contains much useful general information. The contributing authors and their subjects are: A. G. McCall (Maryland Exp. Sta.), Soil Management, Manures and Fertilizers; R. G. Weggans (Coll. Agric, Cornell Univ.), Corn, Wheat, Oats, Barley, Rye, and Rotations; F. W. Oldexburgh (Marj'land State Coll. Agric), Hay, Legumes, Forage, and Soiling Crops; J. R. Faix (Univ. Georgia), The Culture of Cotton; W. W. Gar- ner (U. S. Dept. Agric), Culture of Tobacco; A. G. Smith (Virginia Polytech. Inst.), Cul- ture of the Sweet Potato; C. W. Ward (Michigan Agric. Coll.), Fertilizers for the White Potato; William C. SA>fCTUARY (New York State School Agric), Poultry; Johx McXutt, (Massachusetts Agric. Coll.), Dairj' Cattle; M. W. Harper (Cornell Univ.), Horse; James R. Dice (New York State School Agric), Hogs; R. W. Duck (Syracuse Univ.), Sheep; H. F. Baldwin (Washington, D. C), Milk Production; R. P. Prichard (New York State Coll. Forestry-), Care of the Farm Wood Lot; C. Craig, and A. LaMotte (DuPont Powder Works), The Use of Explosives on the Farm; Edgar W. Coolet (International Harvester Co.), The Care of Tools on the Farm; J. H. Hewett (New York State School of Agric), Some of the Common Diseases of Animals and Remedies; E. F. Phillips (U. S. Dept. Agric), Bee-Keep- ing on the Farm; W. T. L. Taliaferro (Maryland Agric Coll.), Construction and Arrange- ment of Farm Buildings; A. P. Yerkes (Maryland Agric. Coll.), Farm Engines and Their Care; E. O. Fippin (Cornell Univ.), Drainage on the Farm; James B. Morman (Federal Farm Loan Banks), Benefits of the Federal Farm Loan System; H. T. Scovil (Univ. Illinois), Farm Records; and H. F. Miller (Gould's Manufacturing Co.), Running Water for House and Outbuildings. — C. V. Piper. 610. Gonzalez, J. Instrucciones para el cultivo y tratamiento del tabaco. [Cultivation and treatment of tobacco.] luformacion Agric. [Madrid] 10: 290-293. 1920. 611. Graber, L. F. Wisconsin's Grimm alfalfa experience. Seed World 8^ : 25-26. 1920. 612. Guthrie, F. B. ,and G. W. Norris. Notes on wheats entered for the Royal Agricul- tural Society's show. Easter, 1920. Agric Gaz. New South Wales 31:627-635. 1920.— Weights per bushel, results of milling tests, and other notes are given on about 25 varieties of wheat entered; also details of the awards. — L. R. Waldron. 613. Hall, Thos. D. Glucose and starch from maize. South African Jour. Indust. 3: 597-605. 1920. 614. Henri CKSEN, H. C. The selection of seed corn in Porto Rico. Porto Rico Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 18: 1-22. 6 fig. 1920. — The importance of selecting seed corn is emphasized. Structure of a com kernel and the variations in size, shape, and color of kernels of the prin- cipal varieties are discussed. Points to be considered in selecting desirable ears are given, together with two proposed score cards for use in Porto Rico. The ear-to-row method of maintaining selections is outlined. In conclusion a satisfactory method of preserving seed corn in Porto Rico is given. — John A. Stevenson. 615. Hensel, M. W. Sweet sorghum variety demonstrations, 1919. North Carolina Agric. Ext. Ser. Circ. 102:3-14. 1920. — Result of tests with 9 varieties of saccharine sor- ghums in 5 localities within North Carolina, to determine variety best suited for making syrup. — F. A. Wolf. 616. Hoffman, Paul. Flachsbau und Hausweberei, ein Mittel gegen Landflucht and Leutenot. [Flax culture and home weaving, a means against land desertion and popular want.] Mittheil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 395-398. 1920. 617. Ingrason, P. A. La alfilaria. [Alfilaria.] Rev. Agric [IVlexico] 5: 228-233. 1919. — Description of the plants, seeding, cultivation, harvesting, and feeding value of Erodium cicutarium and related species, said to be of very great value as forage crops in arid regions. — John A. Stevenson. 94 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 618. JuRiTZ, Chas. F. The prickly pear (Opuntia). Possibilities of its utilization. South African Jour. Indust. 31:687-693. Idem. 32:803-814. 1920.— The possibility is dis- cussed of utilizing the prickly pear as a useful fodder plant for stock and as an article of human diet. It is also considered as a source of potash fertilizer, of sugar and vinegar, of industrial alcohol, of oxalic acid, of oil, of a mucilaginous glaze, of sizing for textile fab- rics, of fiber for paper making, of a dye or coloring matter, and as a basis for soap manu- facture. From a practical standpoint not more than 7 or 8 of these seem to be deserving of serious attention. — E. M. Doidge. 619. Kalt, Bertram. Der Begriff "Originalsaatgut" und seine Anwendung bei der Ziichtungsanerkennung. [The conception of "original seed" and its application to recognized sorts.] Fiihlings Landw. Zeitung 68: 460-471. 1919. — A discussion of the inspection and con- trol of pure seed production with a view to insuring the genuineness, purity, and quality of the designated seed. An explanation of what the term "original seed" shall stand for, and the use and meaning of such terms as "improved" and "pedigreed" as applied to particular strains of seeds, and the organization and means through which such inspection and certifi- cation may be carried out. — A. T. Wiancko. 620. Keeble, Frederick. Intensive cultivation. Sci. Monthly 11:445-451. 1920. — Extracts from an address at the Cardiff Meeting of the British A. A. S. — Skilled onion growers average 5 tons to the acre. A chrysanthemum grower who turned his facilities from these to onions averaged 17 tons. The average yield of potatoes is a little over 6 tons. The army gardeners of France produced 14 tons to the acre. Consequently it may be accepted as a fact that intensive cultivation would double crops. — L. Pace. 621. Kelly, H. J. Agriculture at Nyngan. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 685-687. 1920. — Experiments have shown that wheat as a grain crop at Nyngan, 250 miles northwest of Sydney, is unsafe, but that wheat for hay, and certain other fodder crops can be grown after fallow, if light seeding is practiced. — L. R. Waldron. 622. Killer, J. Die Knollenwachstumsintensitat, einer bisher wenig beachteter Faktor in der Beurteilung der Kartoffelsorten. [The rate of tuber development, a heretofore little noticed factor in judging the value of varieties of potatoes.] Fuhlings Landw. Zeitung 68: 426-430. 1919. — Varieties of potatoes of similar time of maturity differ materially in the rate of growth at different periods. Some varieties make their most rapid growth early in the season, some in midseason, and some late in the season. These observations lead to impor- tant considerations regarding the utilization of plant-food in the soil, the influence of weather conditions at different times in the season, effect of disease attacks, and relation to marketing, and place the whole matter of potato culture in a different light than heretofore. With a knowledge of the peculiarities of varieties in these respects, it is possible to regulate plant- food supplies in the soil so as to be available when most needed, and to select varieties that in their growth intensity at different periods fit in with the different weather conditions usually prevailing at certain times in the particular locality. — A. T. Wiancho. 623. Kiesselbach, T. A., and Ratcliff, J. A. Freezing injury of seed corn. Nebraska Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 16. 96 p. 22 fig. 1920.— The authors discuss various theories advanced to explain the death of tissues by freezing. — Microscopic studies failed to dis- close any rupturing of tissues or other cytological disturbances in corn embryos killed by freezing. It is believed that freezing of a corn embryo produces a physical or chemical change, aside from the withdrawing of water, in the protoplasmic and nuclear material of the cell, so that death ensues. The change in color of the embryo as a result of freezing would seem to indicate that a chemical change had taken place. — Control and field experiments indicate that death from freezing is directly related to the moisture content of the kernel and also to the duration of the exposure to cold. Seed corn maturing in a natural way becomes cold resistant progressively as its moisture content diminishes. Seed corn mortality increases progressively as the duration of the killing temperature is extended. — Extensive No. 2, March, 1921] AGRONOMY 95 tabular data are given, showing the correlation between degrees and duration of cold, ice formation inside the kernel, moisture content of the kernel, embryo discoloration, and loss of vitality. — Cultural practices relative to the selection and preservation of seed corn are discussed, and experimental data are presented in support of the conclusions. — T. A. Kiesselbach. 624. Koch, Pieter. Cotton culture. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1:615- 622. 1920. 325. Lee, S. C. Electrical treatment of seed. Agric. Gaz. Canada 7:248-249. 1920.— Further investigations on electricall}^ treated seed as compared with untreated seed on the trial grounds of the Manitoba Agricultural College, are briefly reported. A plot of Marquis wheat sown with electrically heated seed yielded 3| bushels more grain and 533 pounds more straw than the check. The plot showed a ranker growth and ripened more slowly. Rust affected both plots equally. — 0. W. Dynes. 626. Lemmerman, D. Untersuchungen iiber verschiedene Diingungsfragen. [Investi- gations concerning various fertilizing problems.] Arbeiten der Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 297. 198 p. 1919. — The author reports various experiments, most of which were carried on at the Society's experimental fields in Dahlem, near Berlin. The following investigations are reported: The effect of fertilizing with nitrogen, phosphoric acid, potash, and lime, with and without stable manure on yields and on the fertilizer balance in the soil, 23 p.; Green manure studies, 25 p. ; On the influence of organic substances on the nitrogen in fertilizers and in soils, 5 p. ; Investigations with nitrogenous fertilizers, 48 p. ; with phosphate, 17 p. ; with potash, 8 p.; with lime, 9 p. There are also included meteorological tables and many pages of tabulated data. — A. J. Pieters. 627. Liehr, O. Der Mohn, sein Anbau und seine Verwertung. [The culture and uses of poppy.] Fiihlings Landw. Zeitung. 68: 191-198. 1919. — A popular discussion of the culture and uses of poppy for the production of seed and its products. The yield, composition, quality, and uses of poppy oil and the by-product, poppy cake, are shown and discussed in detail. — A. T. Wiancko. 628. Loft, Selm ar. Determining dry matter in root crops. Seed World 7" : 21-22. 1920. — The author gives the testing methods used by Danish seed growers to secure the desired results. Dry-matter determinations are described in detail, giving the methods of drawing samples, washing, and sawing the roots, and the treatment of the final samples. — M. T. Munn. 629. Meek, B. C, and R. N. Makin. Farmers' experiment plots. Potato experiments, 1919-20. Central western district and south coast. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 621- 625. 1920. — Yields are given of different varieties of potatoes with and without fertilizers. Fertilizers generally gave very favorable results. — L. R. Waldron. 630. Meek, B. C, and H. Bartlett. Farmers' experiment plots. Maize experiments 1919-20. Central-western and north-west districts. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 703- 706. 1920. — Conditions generally were adverse, and the results were not of particular value. Irrigated plats yielded as high as 68 bushels per acre. — L. R. Waldron. 631. Mitscherlich, E. A. Ein Beitrag zur Standweite verschiedener Kulturpflanzen. [A contribution regarding the spacing of various crops.] Fiihlings Landw. Zeitung 68: 121-129. 1919. — Results of experiments with various thicknesses of planting potatoes, mustard, bush- beans, and hemp. The largest yields were secured from stands of plants per hectare as follows: potatoes, 33,333; mustard, 10,300,000; bushbeans, 800,000; hemp, 267,000. In the case of mustard, it is stated that broadcast seeding at a somewhat thicker rate might be expected to give still larger yields. — A. T. Wiancko. 96 AGRONOMY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 632. Morgan, G. W., and A. E. Seamans. Dry farming in the plains area of Montana. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ 89:1-22. 1920. — The circular discusses the leading crops for the great plains — wheat, oats, barley, corn, and flax — mentioning uses and the varie- ties best adapted. Corn is a reliable source of fodder. Native grasses, brome grass, and alfalfa are recommended for permanent pastures, while alfalfa, brome grass, sweet clover, and small grains all make good hay; and in some sections sorghums, millets, and Sudan grass have been successfully grown. — H. E. Morris. 633. MuNDY, H. G. The cultivation of rice. Rhodesia Agric. Jour. 17:321-324. 2 fig. 1920. 634. MuNDY, H. G. The cultivation of rice in southern Rhodesia. Rhodesia Agric. Jour. 17:243-246. 1920. 635. MuNN, M. T. The New York seed law and seed testing. New York Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] Bull. 476. 28 p. 1920. Chiefly a discussion of the provisions of a recently-enacted seed law, which requires that agricultural seeds offered for sale in the state of New York shall be labeled, so as to show their purity and viability. — F. C. Stewart. 636. Newton, V/. Soil treatment for the Nechako Valley. Agric. Jour. [British Colum- bia] 5: 202-203. 1920. 637. Newton, W. The quality in potatoes. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 152. 1920. 638. Oswald, H. Untersuchungen iiber die Einwirkung des Grundwasserstands auf die Bewurzelung von Wiesenpflanzen auf Moorboden. [Investigations concerning the effect of ground water level upon the root development of meadow plants on moor soils.] Fuhlings Landw. Zeitung. 68: 321-340, 370-386. 1919.— The studies were conducted on two types of moor soil, lowland moor and highland moor. The ground water level was maintained at different heights in different pots, and a mixture of clover and grass seeds was sown. Details are given of the yields and root development of the clovers and various grasses in the pots. The root development was determined at the end of the 5th year, when it was found that in low moor soil practically half the roots were those of sword grass; this grass together with meadow fescue and orchard grass made up 81 to 98 per cent of the total root content in the various pots. The great bulk of grass roots was found in the upper 10 cm. of soil. Sword grass, orchard grass, and meadow fescue were found to have the deepest root systems; these penetrated to the water table in the deepest soil. For particulars of the proportion of roots of the different grasses and the depth to which they penetrated with water tables at varying levels, the reader is referred to the original. The article is accompanied by a long bibliography. — A. T. Wiancko. 639. Petersen, Fe DERI CO. Los trigos seleccionadas de la hacienda Amalucan. [Selected wheats at hacienda Amalucan.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5: 112-118. 4 fig. 1919. — The results of tests of 3 selected wheat varieties, Flor, Maravilla I, and Maravilla II in comparison with unselected varieties are given. The tests were carried out on 36 farms, the selected varie- ties giving greatly increased yields as well as proving more resistant to drouth and rust {Puccinia spp.). Tests were also made on different soil types and with different cultivation methods. — John A. Stevenson. 640. Pitt, J. M. Broom millet on the Manning. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 637- 644. 6 fig. 1920. — Cultural and other notes are given for this crop, Holcus Sorghum L. — L. R. Waldron. 641. Pole Evans, I. B. South African fiber plants. Ambari or Deccan Hemp: Hibiscus cannabinus, L. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1 : 570-580. 6 p'. 1920. No. 2. March, 1921] AGRONOMY 97 642. Popp, M., AXD R. Floss. Das Susspressfutter als Futter fur Milchvieh. [Sweet silage as feed for milk cows.] Mittheil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35:391-394. 1920.— The authors describe an experiment with a form of ensilage, the making of which is said to have been developed in Switzerland. The process is not described in detail, but the reader is referred to previous papers. In the experiments reported in this paper rowen was used from a grass meadow. One portion of the rowen was made into hay, and the other put into a silo under pressure. The feeding experiment was carried on for varying periods, using the hay and the sweet silage from the same rowen grass. Analyses showed that the fat content and the crude protein content were the same for both hay and silage. The pure protein and the digestible protein were, however, greater in the hay; while the amides increased in the silage. — The cows gave more milk from the silage than from the hay; and even after the supply of silage was exhausted, the cows that had been fed on it appeared to retain the increased milk flow. The making of sweet silage is highly recommended by the authors.— A. J. Pieters. 643. Pridham, J. T. Breeding cereals at the experiment farms. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 697-698. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 926. 644. Renson, Carlos. Cultivo de la papa. [Potato cultivation.] Bol. Camara Agric. Nacion. Leon [Mexico] 7:467-471. 1920. 645. Renson, Carlos. Cultivo de la papa. [Potato cultivation.] Jalisco Rural [Mexico] 2:147-153. 1920. 646. Revent6s, Jaume. La soja. [The soy bean.] Rev. Inst. Agric. Catalan de San Isidro. 69:65-68, 81-85. 1920.— The author gives analyses of the beans, considers their food value, uses of the oil and commercial products derived from them. — John A. Stevenson. 647. RoBisoN, W. L. Com by-products for swine. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5^:247. 1920. 648. Rumsey, H. J. Seed growing in Australia. Seed World S^: 27-28. 1920. 649. Russell, E. J. The nations food. [Rev. of: Rew, R. H. Food supplies in peace and war. vii + 183 p. Longmans, Green and Co.: London, 1920.] Nature 105:320-321. 1920. 650. Russell, E. J. British crop production. Nature 105: 176-178; 206-208. 1920.— A discussion of means of increasing production. Data of yields, cost of production, ferti- lizers, etc. — 0. A. Stevens. 651. Russell, E. J. Wheat and wheat growing. [Rev. of: Buller, A. H. R. Essays on wheat, xv + 339 p. The Macmillan Co.: New York and London, 1919.] Nature 105: 224-225. 1920. — Reviewer finds it a very interesting history of wheat in Canada.— 0. A. Stevens. 652. Sanchez, A. Algunos dates sobre el cultivo del maguey. [Notes on the cultivation of maguey.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5: 227-228. 1919.— Agave sp. 653. Sanchez, N. El cultivo de la papa. [Potato cultivation.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5: 267-269. 1919. 654. Scott, J. M. Forage crops in the South. Seed World 8i:40. 1920. 655. Sheehan, B. F. Dodder in Idaho. Seed World 8^: 26-28. 1920.— In this article the author discusses dodder as a noxious weed pest, threatening the small seed industry of Idaho. The methods of dissemination of the seed and the plant, its appearance, and methods of eradication in the field, are given, together with some notes upon the principal kinds of dodder.— M. T. Munn. 98 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 656. Sheehan, B. F. Responsibility for low-quality seeds. Seed World 7^ : 23-24. 1920. — The writer gives as reasons for the marketing of inferior seeds, mentioning as the most important, the farmers' practice of selling one another adulterated seeds, of saving screenings for seed, and of purchasing second or third-grade seed for planting. It is urged that the farmer selling seed for seeding purposes should be required to comply with the same regulations as the dealer. It is suggested that the logical method of handling seeds in interstate commerce is through the medium of national grades, which would be flexible, yet place a premium upon high grade seeds.— M. T. Munn. 657. SiFTON, H. B. Longevity of cereal, clover, and timothy seed. Seed World 7*: 26-28. 1920. 658. Stewart, F. C. Experiments on the spacing of potato plants. New York Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] Bull. 474: 1-32. 1920.— These experiments were conducted at Geneva, New York, during 5 seasons and were devoted chiefly to a comparison of 6- by 36-inch planting with 15- by 36-inch planting. Two varieties of Solanum tuberosum belonging to the Rural group were used. In different seasons, the thick planting produced from 55.4 to 79.2 per cent more tubers than the thin planting, but as the tubers were of smaller average size the difference in total weight of crop was much less; viz., 14.4 to 36.9 per cent. The average net yield (total yield minus "seed") of tubers weighing over one ounce was 34.7 bushels per acre. More than half of this difference (18.7 bushels) consisted of tubers over two ounces in weight. — F. C. Stewart. 659. Stone, A. L. Seed legislation and the farmer. Seed World 71°: 23. 1920.— The conclusion is reached that seed laws should not favor the farmer, but should be designed only to protect him from technical phases of seed trade and commerce. The practice of exempting farmers under the seed laws is not considered desirable.— M. T. Munn. 660. SuDENDORF, Th., AND G. Gahrtz. Bcitiag zur Ermittelung des Blausauergehaltes in Rangoonbohnen. [Cyanide content of lima beans.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39 : 350-353. 1920.— The cyanide content depends on the source of the beans as well as on the method of preparation. — H. G. Barbour. 661. Swingle, D. B., and Grace B. Nutting.. Legume inoculation. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 88. 8 p. 1919.— The circular discusses briefly legume inoculation and its advantages. The different methods in use are described. — H. E. Morris. 662. Thorne, C. E. The manufacture of sorghtim syrup. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5': 199. 2 pi. July, 1920. — The article comprises a brief discussion of the essen- tial points in handling cane and producing high grade syrup from the juice. — R. C. Thomas. 663. Thorne, Chas. E. The maintenance of soil fertility in Hamilton county, Ohio. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5^°: 170. 1920.— This involves a report of the benefits from fertilizers and limestone in a corn, soybean, wheat, clover rotation. A detailed com- parison of certain varieties is given. — R. C. Thomas. 664. Thorne, Chas. E. A crop rotation for a hog farm. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5^: 131. 1920. — Corn, being deficient both in protein and lime, is inadequate as a muscle and protein builder. Defective features in a corn, wheat, clover rotation are pointed out. The value of the soy bean as a feed crop, and for the production of bone, protein, and pork is discussed. Consideration is given to the relative manurial value of straw and stover. — R. C. Thomas. 665. TiCE, C. Certified potato-seed production. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 197. 1920. 666. TiCE, C. Pitt Meadows demonstration plot. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 110, 112. ,1920. No. 2, March, 1921] AGRONOMY 99 667. Ure, Ruby, and Beatrice, Larson. Single vs. double blotters in germination testing. Seed World. 7^: 17. 1920. 66S. Uyeda, Y. The proximate composition of Korean hemp and ramie. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 573-576. 1920. — The pro.ximate composition of Korean hemp and ramie are given as determined by the modifications of the analytical method proposed by Dore. — Henry Schmitz. GG9. VoGEL, Prof. Dr. Die Impffrage der Nichtleguminosen. [Inoculation of non- legumes.] Mittheil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35:529-532. 1920. — The author reviews the experiments that have been made with such substances as "U" cultures, "Nitrogen kompost," "Biostickstoff," "Azogenin," "Agranit," and others, and finds them without value. How- ever, a preparation known as "Guanol," a bacterized turf, has given good results. The same quantity of nitrogen in Guanol has produced larger yields than when used as nitrate of soda. The author states that Guanol acts through its relatively high nitrogen and potash content and its content of water soluble organic substances which stimulate soil bacteria to increased activity. — A. J. Pietcrs. 670. Waldron, C. H. Notes on the germination of Kentucky bluegrass. Seed World 76:22. 1920. 671. Warburg, Otto. Ueber die Fasern liefernden Boehmeria-Arten. [Species of Boehmeria producing fiber.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7^^:1-7. 1920. — The economic species are Boehmeria nivea (L.) Hook. Am, and B. tenacissima (Roxb.) Gaud.— //. A. Gleason. 672. Wenholz, H. Sunflowers as silage. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 721-723. 1920. — This article summarizes results secured in United States and Canada. — L. R. Waldron. 673. Wenholz, H. Cuzco maize. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:701-702. 1920.— This varietj' was not found adapted to New South Wales. The amount of fodder produced was not up to the standard, and it produced ripe seed with difficulty. Silk did not develop until 6 weeks after tassels appeared. — L. R. Waldron. 674. Whipple, O. B. Thinning as a possible substitute for seed pieces of uniform size in potato tests. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 16: 179-181. (1919)— 1920.— By thinning potatoes to a single stem, size and uniformity of size were improved. The author suggests "that varia- tions in yields resulting from planting large and small seed pieces may be purely a matter of stand.' The increased yield resulting from planting larger seed pieces may be largely due to increased number of plants per hill. Field counts showed that plots of Russet Burbank potatoes planted with 1.3-ounce seed-pieces average 2.27, 1.04-ounce seed-pieces averaged 2.22, and 1.3-ounce seed-pieces averaged 1.47 plants per hill. — H. A. Jones. 675. Whipple, O. B. Correlation between depths of eyes and degeneration among potatoes. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 16 : 181-183. (1919)— 1920.— Results of field experiments show that there is a correlation between shallowness of potato eyes and degeneracy. The writer is convinced that there is no surer way of bringing about deterioration within these varieties inclined to degeneration than by continual selection of shallow-eyed types. The Howard Elliot, a deep-eyed, high-yielding variety was selected three years for shallowness of eyes. At end of this time 90 per cent of the plants showed degenerate tendencies. — H. A. Jones. 676. Will AM an, J. J., R. M. West, and C. P. Bull. Sorghum and sorghimi sirup manu- facture. Minnesota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 187:1-55. 17 fig. 1919.— The growing of sor- ghum, preparation for the mill and the manufacture of the sirup are discussed. — A. C. Arny. 677. Williams, C. B. Report of the Division of Agronomy, North Carolina Agricultural Exp. Sta. North Carolina Agric. Exp. Sta. Ann. Rept. 42: 21-39. 1920.— Brief summary of investigational work on soil fertility and fertilizer tests, on crop rotation and on crop improve- ment by breeding and selection. — F. A. Wolf. 100 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 678. Williams, C. G. Wheat: varietal and cultural work. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5^: 195. 1920. — Wheat tests are being conducted at fourteen different points in Ohio. Among the many varieties tested, the Gladden, Trumbull, Ohio 9920, and Portage, rank high. — R. C. Thomas. 679. Williams, C. B., and R. Y. Winters. Crimson clover for North Carolina. North Carolina Agric. Ext. Serv. Ext. Circ. 98. 7 p. 1919. — A popular agronomic account deal- ing with varieties, preparation of soil, seeding, inoculation, and harvesting for hay or seed. — F. A. Wolf. 680. Williams, C. B., and R. Y. Winters. Vetch for North Carolina. North Carolina Agric. Ext. Serv. Ext. Circ. 96. 8 p. 1919. — Popular account indicating varieties adapted to the state, method for preparation of seed bed, seeding, inoculation, and value for hay or pasture. — F. A. Wolf. 681. Winters, R. Y., S. W. Hill, and P. H. Kime. Community cotton improvement in North Carolina. North Carolina Agric. Exp. Ser. Ext. Circ. 108. 30 p. 10 fig. 1920.— An account of tests with cotton conducted to determine the variety best adapted to each of the various localities, together with results of seed selection for the improvement of these varie- ties.—F. A. Wolf. 682. Winters, R. Y., G. M. Garren, and Bixton White. Improved seed wheat for North Carolina. North Carolina Ext. Agric. Serv. Ext. Circ. 106. 14 p. 1920. — Comparative tests made near Asheville and Statesville, North Carolina, over a period of three years have shown that home-grown seed is superior to northern-grown seed. Data on the value of selection for the improvement of wheat are also included. — F. A. Wolf. 683. Wittmack, L. Der wahre Wert des Schilfrohrs als Wirtschaftspfianze. [The true value of Phragmites communis as an economic plant.] Mittheil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 532-533. 1920. — The young leaves dried and cut into small pieces are readily eaten by cattle. The claim has been made that the root-stocks contain 30 per cent cane sugar, but the author shows, by quoting various analyses, that this figure is much too high, even when taken as the sugar content of the dry substances. — A. J. Pieters. 684. Zavitz, C. A. Systematic Experiments. Agric. Gaz. Canada 7: 244-246. 1920. — A brief summary is given of the 1919 results throughout Ontario in testing all classes of field crops. Comparative values of leading varieties are calculated in percentages, together with summaries of yields of straw and grain. Data on the percentage of leaf roll and mosaic in potatoes were taken. Higher yields and lower susceptibility to diseases were found in the northern-grown stock. — 0. W. Dynes. BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY Neil E. Stevens, Editor 685. Algan, H. Bibliographie. [Rev. of: Huffel, G. Economic forestiere. [Forest economy.] Tome premier, deuxieme volume, deuxieme edition. 461 p. 1920.] Bull. Trimest Soc. Forest. Franche Comte et Belfort 13 : 196-202. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 741. 686. Andrews, A. LeRoy. Ingebrigt Hagen. Bryologist 23 : 79-80. 1920.— The author condenses a biographic notice by Dr. Wille in Kgl. Norsk Vidensk. Sels. Skr., 1917, and adds a number of recollections about Dr. Hagen's views, personality, and methods of work. — E. B. Chamberlain. 687. Anonymous. Geo. Stephen West, M.A., D.Sc, F.L.S. Jour. Quekett Microsc. Club 14: 104-105. 1919.— Obituary Notice.— Lena B. Walker. No. 2, March, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY 101 658. Anonymous. Courses on the history of science. Nature 105:279. 1920. — These are just beginning to be introduced in British universities. — 0. A. Stevens. 659. Anonymous. (Note of death of A. P. Candolle, with brief statement of his work.] Nature 105: 365. 1920.— See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1437. 690. Anonymous. Prof. C. A. Timiriazeff. Nature 105: 430. 1920. — Announces the death of Timiriazeff, "the only Russian botanist who was at all a familiar figure in England." Author of several books on plant life. Noted for demonstration of effects of different rays of the visible spectrum on photosynthetic activity of the green leaf. — 0. A. Stevens. 691. [B., V. H.] Wilhehn Pfeffer. Nature 105: 302. 1920.— Brief note of life and work. — 0. A. Stevens. 692. Anonymous. Tribute to the memory of James Wilson. Sci. Monthly 11:478-479. 1920. — Records a tribute to the memory of James Wilson, former U. S. secretary of Agri- culture.— L. Pace. 693. Anonymous. Scientific and systematic pomology. [Rev. of: The Journal of Pomology, Vol. 1, No. 1 and 2. Geo. Bunyard & Co.: Maidstone, 1920.] Nature 105: 62^-630. 19'20. 694. Britten, James. Lehmann's Pugllli. Jour. Botany 58: 198-200. 1920.— This is an account of the Pugillus Plantarum by Johann Georg Christian Lehmann, 1828-1857. Ten "Pugilli" are noted: the first (1828) contained 29 species; the second (1830) included some of Douglas's Calif ornian plants; the third to sixth had no date on the title page, but were stated to have been reprinted from The Indies for 1831, 1832, 1833, and 1834; the fourth and fifth have prefaces dated 1831 and 1833; the seventh and eighth are dated 1838 and 1844; the ninth and tenth were issued independently in 1851 and 1857. The third is entirely devoted to Hepaticae. The first portion of No. 6 contains De Plantis Cycadeis praeserlim Africae Auslralis. No. 7 contains, besides Hepaticae, a history of the Hamburg Botanical Garden. The second part of the eighth is occupied by descriptions of Preiss's New Holland plants. No. 9 is entirely occupied by Potentilla. The tenth contains only hepatics. — K. M. Wiegand. 695. Britten, James. John Gilbert Baker (1834-1920). Jour. Botany 58: 233-238. 1920.— Baker was born in Yorkshire, Jan. 13, 18.34, and educated in the Friends' schools at Ackworth and York. His botanical work began while at the former school. He is pictured as a very kindly man, prone to aid the beginner, a man of keen literary sense, much interested in poetry, and a genial friend of students and workers in the Royal Gardens. His portrait appeared in Jour. Botany 1893, p. 243; Ibid., 1901, frontispiece; Ibid., 1907, p. 67.— iv. M. Wiegand. 696. Chase, ViRGiNius H. Francis Eugene M'Donald. Rhodora 22 : 145-146. 1920.— A short biographical sketch of the late Francis Eugene McDonald, born Feb. 23, 1860, died Jan. 30, 1920. An amateur botanist and collector. His home was in Peoria, Illinois, in which region most of his collecting was done. — James P. Poole. 697. DucLAUX, Emile. Pasteur: the history of a mind. English translation by Erwin F. Smith, and Florence Hedges. 23 x 15 cm., xxxii + 363 p., 22 fig., 16 pi. W. B. Saunders Co. : Philadelphia, 1920.— "This book is more than a critique of Pasteur. It is a contribution to the biological history of a swiftly changing time, a very striking period in the develop- ment of science."— E. F. S. — In an introduction of 32 pages. Smith presents a biographical sketch of DucLAUX. The translators have supplied notations to the text throughout. In addition, an annotated list of persons mentioned in the text occupies 40 pages. — Of the plates, 2 are of Duclaux and 14 of Pasteur. — D. Reddick. 698. Gunther, R. T. Tradescant's first garden catalogue, 1634. Jour. Botany 58:248. 1920.— Tie writer has in his possession one of the few copies if not the only copy in existence 102 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, of the first catalogue of Trades cant's plants. The generally-quoted edition appeared in 1656. Seven hundred and fifty species and varieties are listed in this first edition. A cata- lo5^ue of fruits occupies the last five pages. — K. M. Wiegand. 699. GuNTHER, R. T. Walter Stonehouse (1597-1655). Jour. Botany 58: 170-173. 1920. — Mr. Stonehouse, the botanist, is shown to be identical with Rev. Walter Stonehouse, of Magdalen College, Oxford, — a fact not before generally known. The identity was dis- covered through an anonymous Catalogus Plantarum Horti mei Darfeldiae Quibus, etc., and passages in John Tradescant's Musaeum Tradescantianum. Stonehouse was a Londoner, born in 1597, and later a scholar of Wadham College, Oxford, taking his B.A. degree in 1616-17, and becoming a Fellow of Magdalen College in 1617. In 1629 he became a Bach- elor of Divinity, and resigned from the college, becoming rector of Darfield. An account is given of his association with Thomas Johnson and others, and of a trip with these gentle- men to the mountains of North Wales. About 1648 he was forcibly ejected from his parish by the Parliamentary Commissioners. Stonehouse was personally acquainted with Park- inson.— K. M. Wiegand. 700. Hutt, W. M. Past history of the American pomological society. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917: 1-10. 1918. — A general paper. Attention is drawn to the fact that mem- bers of the society tested the different varieties of fruits in the United States long before the organization of agricultural colleges and experiment stations. Rules of nomenclature, which are still used as standard, were passed. — A statement regarding the financial standing of the Society is included. — E. C. Auchter. 701. Linton, Edward Francis. William Moyle Rogers (1835-1920). Jour. Botany 58: 161-164. Portrait. 1920. — Rogers was born at Helston, Cornwall, July 12, 1835, and was educated at Helston Grammar School, where he was later an assistant master. After a short residence in Dublin he went to South Africa as vice-principal of a college there. At about this time he was ordained to priesthood. In 1862 he returned home, and, after occupy- ing a series of clerical positions, became vicar of Bridgerule, Devon, in 1882, from which posi- tion he retired in 1885. A detailed account is given of Rogers's very numerous contributions on botanical subjects, especially of his papers on Rubus, on which genus he became a special- ist. These studies resulted in a Handbook of the British Rubi in 1900. During his later years he often assisted the clergy about Bornemouth, his home, until his death on May 26, 1920.— K. M. Wiegand. 702. Mattirolo, Oreste. Pietro Andrea Saccardo — Treviso 23 Aprile 1845 — Padova 12 Febraio 1920. [Commemoration of Pietro Andrea Saccardo, b. April 23, 1845 at Treviso, d. February 12, 1920, at Padua.] Atti R. Accad. Sci. Torino 55: 468-473. 1919-1920.— His chief works were: Sylloge fungorum omnium hucusque cognitorum. 22 volumes; Prevedibili funghi futiiri secondo la legge di analogia, 1896; Botanica in Italia; Cronologia delta Flora italiana; Flora Tarvisina Renovata; Enumerazione critica delle piante vascolari finora note nella pro- vincia Treviso. — Harriet M. Libby. 703. Mattirolo, Oreste. Commemorazione di Saverio Belli. [Memorial to Saverio Belli.] Atti R. Accad. Sci. Torino 55: 8-30. 1919-1920.— Saverio Belli was director of the Botanical Gardens at Turin, professor of botany at the University of Cagliari, member of the Royal Academy of Agriculture, and of many scientific societies. His chief fields of research were in taxonomy, anatomy, and physiology and are concerned mainly with the genera, Trifolium and Hieracium. His researches in systematic botany established the reality of the species of a genus or a family as the descendants of a common genealogical tree, with phylogenetic ramifications both in time and space. In anatomy, he showed that neither endoderm nor pericycle exist in Trifolium and many other plants, and that therefore the theory of the stele can not have general application. — A complete bibliography of his works is given covering the studies on Trifolium and Hieracium, taxonomy of phanerogams and cryptogams, and miscellaneous works. — Harriet M. Libby. No. 2, March, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY 103 704. Maxwell, Herbert. Sir Edmund Giles Loder, Bart. Nature 105: 301-302. 1920. — Brief account of his life and work. In botany he was especially interested in hybrid- izing rhododendrons, producing R. Loderi, a hybrid of R. Griffthianum and R. Fortunei, generally admitted to be the best hardy hybrid yet produced in the genus. — 0. A. Stevens. 705. Merrill, Elmer D. Dates of publication. Jour. Botany 58: 200. 1920. — This is a criticism of the practice among certain publishers of omitting the date of publication from the title pages. The specific case in question is F. Maxson Bailey's Comprehension Cata- logue of Queensland Plants, the date of which the author believes was March, 1913. — K. M. Wiegand. 706. Montemartini, Luigi. Pier Andrea Saccardo. Patol. Veg. 10:49-50. 1920.— On February 11, 1920, P. A. Saccardo died at Padova, at the age of 74 years, after having been professor of botany ther e for 41 years. — F. M. Blodgett. 707. Montemartini, Ltjigi. Giovanni Briosi. Ilev. Patol. Veg. 10:33-35. 1920.— Professor Giovanni Briosi was born in Ferrara, April 9, 1846, and died July 20, 1919. He was first director of the experiment station of agricultural chemistry at Palermo and Rome; in 1883 he became professor of botany in the Royal University of Pavia and also directed the Italian cryptogamic laboratory. — A list of his publications is given. — F. M. Blodgett. 708. Sinttjrel, E. La foret de Fontainebleau de 1789 a 1794. [The forest of Fontaine- bleau from 1789 to 1794.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 218-226, 255-263, 281-288. 1920.— During the first years of the French Revolution the forest of Fontainebleau, like other forests through- out France, suflfered severely from depredations by the neighboring inhabitants. Attempts by both local and national authorities, including the king, to check these availed little except for a short period of comparative calm during the first half of 1790. Non-payment of salaries of forest oflBcers resulted in a slackening of their efforts to protect the forests; and on August 15, 1792, the Legislative Assembly, in an attempt to revive their interest, passed an act providing for the payment of back salaries. It was not, however, until the estab- lishment of the first republic that really effective steps to protect the forest were taken. In the fall of 1793 the National Convention, recognizing the forest as a public asset of great value, energetically set about its preservation. Armed forces were introduced to supple- ment the efforts of the regular forest officers; a proposal to increase the food supply by allowing goat grazing was rejected; trespassers were apprehended and punished; and all but comparatively minor depredations were successfully prevented. — S. T. Dana. 709. Smith, Annie Morrill. Mary Farnham Miller. Bryologist 23 : 80. 1920.— An appreciation of Miss Miller's work on behalf of the Sullivant Moss Society. — E. B. Chamberlain. 710. S[mith], E. F. [Emile Duclaux, 1840-1904.] In Duclaux, Emil£. Pasteur: the history of a mind. English translation by Erwin F. Smith and Florence Hedges. W. B. Saunders Co. : Philadelphia, 1920. Most of the 30 pages of introduction to the book is de- voted to a biographical sketch of Duclaux with a translation of a part of the eulogy on Duclaux said to have been written by Koux and published in Annales de I'lnstitute Pas- teur, May, 1904.— 1>. Reddick. 104 BOTANICAL EDUCATION [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, BOTANICAL EDUCATION C. Stuart Gagee, Editor Alfred Gundersen, Assistant Editor 711. Anonymous. A university course in botany. [Rev. of: Church, A. H. Botanical Memoirs. No. 4. Elementary notes on structural botany. 27 p. No. 5. Elementary notes on the reproduction of angiospenns. 24 p. Oxford University Press: London, 1919.] Nature 105:162. 1920. 712. Anonymous. A college of tropical agriculture. [Rev. of : Anonymous. West Indies; report of the tropical agricultural college committee. H. M. stationery office, 1920.] Nature 105: 153-154. 1920. Outline of organization of a college of agriculture recommended to be established at Trinidad. — 0. A. Stevens. 713. Bartlett, a. W. Note on an improved method for demonstrating the absorption of oxygen in respiration. New Phytol. 19: 151-152. 1920. 714. Brierley, W. B. [Rev. of: Ellis, G. S. M. Applied botany. VIII + 248 p. Hodder and Stoughton: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 164. 1920. — Reviewer finds many errors in this exposition of "the secrets of plant life." — 0. A. Stevens. 715. Clute, Willard N. Plant names and their meanings, III. Rosaceae. (See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 716.) Amer. Botanist 26: 57-61. 1920. — As far as possible the names of the Rosaceae are traced to their origin. — S. P. Nichols. 716. Clute, Willard N. Plant names and their meanings, IV. Rosaceae II. See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 715. Amer. Botanist 26: 90-94. 1920. 717. T(ansley), a. G. Elementary lecturing with the help of schedules. [Rev. of: Church, A. H. Elementary notes on structural botany. Oxford Bot. Mem. No. 4. Oxford Univ. Press. 1919. Elementary notes on the reproduction of Angiospenns. Ibid. No. 5. 1919.] New Phytol. 19: 44-46. 1920. — It is recommended that in teaching elementary classes an accurate and full synospsis of each lecture be given to each student before the lecture is delivered. — /. F. Lewis. 718. Weatherwax, Paul. A method of teaching diffusion and osmosis in connection with biological work. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918:88-92. 1920. — The author discusses briefly the history of diffusion and osmosis and then by means of well-known experiments works out definitions. Diffusion, he says, is "the dispersal of the particles of one substance among the particles of another substance, without aid from external sources," while osmosis is "the diffusion of two fluids through a membrane that tends to be semipermeable." The student should be led to connect these processes with the structure of the cell and to realize that all the life processes of the plant that involve exchange of fluids between cell and envir- onment depend upon the selective influence of semipermeable membranes. — F. C. Anderson. No. 2, March, 1921] CYTOLOGY 105 CYTOLOGY Gilbert M. Smith, Editor Geo. S. Bryan, Assistant Editor 719. Agar, W. E. Cytology, with special reference to the metazoan nucleus. XII + 224 p. MacMillan and Co. : London, 1920. $4.00. 720. Bayliss, W. M. The properties of colloidal systems. IV. Reversible gelation in living protoplasms. Proc. Roy. Soc. London B, 91:19&-20J.. 1920. — The author describes use of intense dark ground illumination to reveal Brownian movement of minute particles in apparently clear pseudopodia of Amoeba. He describes a temporary gelation of this protoplasmic sol (cessation of Brownian movement) by suitable electrical stimulation, and discusses subject in general. Plant cells, because of walls, are not so suitable for intense dark ground illumination, but Nitella and stamen hairs of Tradescantia are fairlj^ satisfac- tory.— Paul B. Sears. 721. Don CASTER, L. An introduction to the study of cytology. 280 p., 24 pi., 31 fig. University Press: Cambridge, 1920. $8.50. 722. C, A. H. [Rev. of: Doncaster, L. An introduction to the study of cytology. 280 p., 24 pi., SI fig. University Press: Cambridge, 1920.] Jour. Bot. 58: 205-206. 1920. 723. G., J. B. British cytology. [Rev. of: Doncaster, L. An introduction to the study of cytology. XIV + 280 p., 24 pi. University Press: Cambridge, 1920.] Nature 105: 190- 191. 1920. "Not intended as a text book though it contains a wealth of facts; but its aim is to interest the senior student by pointing out the way in which cytology is related to the great fundamental problems at the root of all biological research. — 0. A. Stevens. 724. Carter, Nellie. Studies on the chloroplasts of Desmids. IV. Ann. Botany 34: 301-319. 3 pi. 1920. — In this the last of a series of four articles on the chloroplasts of the Desmidiaceae (See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 166 and 6, Entry 1191) the structure of the chloroplast of Staurastum is taken up. In sixteen of twenty-two species discussed there is a fairly massive central axial chloroplast, typically with one pyrenoid, from which a more or less definite lobe arises opposite each angle of the cell. This lobe is forked, and very often the forking is so deep that the lobe appears as two masses or plates arising from the central axis of the chloro- plast. Exceptional cases are found primarily in the larger species of the genus. Thus in S. Ophiura Lund, the chloroplast lobes are between and not opposite the arms of the cell, while in S. Arctiscon (Ehr.) Lund, there is only one projection into each arm of the cell. Owing to the greater size of the lobes and reduction of the central mass in S. sexangulare (Bulnh.) Lund, and S. anatinum Cke. & Wills, pyrenoids are not found in the central mass but in the lobes. In S. grande Bulnh. the chloroplasts are parietal, although in very young semi-cells there is a central mass. Another quite unusual arrangement is that found in S. tumidum Breb., where there are from twelve to fifteen or more chloroplasts in the form of narrow bands running through the semi-cell. — The final portion of the paper is devoted to a discussion of chloroplast division in the whole family. In the Saccodermae, division of the chloroplast starts before division of the nucleus. In the Placodermae, nuclear division is completed and the new semi-cells have begun their development before there is any indi- cation of chloroplast division. Division in this subfamily is not by constriction but by a budding of the chloroplast into the new semi-cell until the chloroplast volume is the same in the new and old semi-cells, when there is a division at the cell isthmus. At the time when the chloroplast begins to grow into the new semi-cell the pyrenoid gives off a small bud which, soon after its separation, grows in volume until it reaches the size of the original pyrenoid. — Gilbert M. Smith. 106 CYTOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 725. Farr, Wanda Kirkbride. Cell-division of the pollen-mother-cell of Cobaea scan- dens alba. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47:325-337. PI. U. 1920.— A review is given of lit- erature on cytokinesis in pollen-mother-cells with special reference to cell-plate formation and cleavage. Author reports that in Cobaea scandens alba furrowing was observed in formation of the tetrad, but that the cell-plate was not apparent during cytoplasmic division. — P. A. Mum. 726. Gates, R. R. The structure of the nucleus. [Rev. of: Agar, W. E. Cytology: with special reference to the metazoan nucleus. XII + ^H p. Macmillan and Co. : London, 1920.] Nature 105:482-483. 1920. 727. Gaudissart, P. Reseau protoplasmique et chondriosomes dans la genese des myo- fibrilles. [Protoplasmic reticulum and chondriosomes in the genesis of muscle fibers.] La Cellule 30: 29-43. 2 pi. 1915-1919. — An investigation of the roles played by (1) the reticular or alveolar protoplasmic substratum and (2) the granular elements (mitochondria) in the development of muscle fibers in the chick embryo, each element having been held to be exclusively responsible by different workers. The author concludes "that the muscle fibers arise neither exclusively from a protoplasmic reticulum, nor exclusively from mitochondria or other granular elements, but that they result from the cooperation of mitochondria with a reticular structure, different, at least at first, from the mitochondria themselves. It is the reticulum .... which, in orienting itself, furnishes the chief outline of the muscle fibers; but, on their part, the mitochondria, in fixing themselves on this reticulum, furnish certain substances which are incorporated in it and contribute to the development of the myofibrils." It is not true that "each myofibril is only a modified filamentous chondriosome" (Dtjesberg). — L. W. Sharp. 728. GuiLLiERMOND, A. Sur I'origine mitochondriale des plastides a propos d'un travail de M. Mottier. [Concerning the mitochondrial origin of plastids with regard to Mottier's work.] Ann. sci. nat. bot. X. 1:225-246. 5 pi., 10 fig. 1919. — Author considers as inexact Mottier's view based upon a study of meristematic cells in pea, that mitochondrial elements and "plastid primordia" are distinct and independent entities in cytoplasm. An a priori objection to Mottier's theory is that in animals mitochondria appear to be concerned in elaboration of products of secretion of cell, acting similarly to plastids; and, moreover, a majority of animal pigments originate in mitochondria. Author then points out that size is no reliable criterion for distinguishing mitochondria and "plastid primordia" as Mottier argues. Mitochondria vary in size, and he has observed such cytoplasmic bodies in ani- mals of similar size to those in plants that are "plastid primordia." In general, author con- siders that diverse forms of mitochondria have a common origin and, in particular, plastids have a mitochondrial origin. — J. P. Kelly. 729. GuiLLiERMOND, A. Observations vitales sur le chondriome d'une Saprolegnicacee. [Observations of chondriosomes in a living Saprolegnia.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1329-1333. 5 fig. 1920. — Granules, rods, and filaments are made visible in the living material by staining with neutral red and cresyl blue. The latter differentiates the meta- chromatic bodies from the chondriosomes. — C. H. Farr. 730. Hartmann, Max. Untersuchungen iiber die Morphologie und Physiologic des Formwechsels (Entwicklung, Fortpfianzung, Befruchtung und Vererbung) der Phytomonadinen (Volvocales). Programm der Untersuchungen und I. Mitt.: tjber die Kern- und Zellteilung von Chlorogonium elongatiun Dangeard. [Investigations on the morphology and physiology of variation in form (development, reproduction, fertilization, and heredity) of the Phytomona- dineae (Volvocales). Program of the investigation and first contribution; On the nuclear and cell division of Chlorogonium elongatimi Dangeard.] Arch. Protistenk. 39: 1-33. 3 pi., 2 fig. 1919. — After a short prospectus of a proposed series of investigations on the morphology and physiology of the Phytomonadineae, the author proceeds to a description of cell and nuclear division in Chlorogonium elongatum Dang. The first indication of cell division is No. 2, March, 1921] CYTOLOGY 107 the disappearance of the pyrenoid, while at the same time the nuclei enter the prophases of division. After the nuclear division is completed, cytokinesis takes place at right angles to the long axis of the cell. The two daughter cells grow in length, and then the nucleus of each divides again, the long axis of the spindles generally lying parallel to the recent line of cleavage. This nuclear division is followed by cell division in each of the daughter cells. Hartmann emphasizes the unusual behavior of the pyrenoid during this process, since in C. elongatum it completely disappears during division and is then formed anew in the daugh- ter cells. In other Volvocales, on the other hand, there is a division of the pyrenoid. The restmg nucleus contains 10-20 small granules that fuse to form ten larger granules which are the chromosomes. This fusion of granules is not in the nature of a reduction division. The origin of the spindle is intranuclear, and it frequently has but one pole in early stages. Nuclear history from the metaphase onward is of the usual type. — Gilbert M. Smith. 731. Herlant, M. Le cycle de la vie cellulaire. Recherches physiologiques sur la divi- sion de la cellule. (Note preliminaire.) [The cycle of cellular life. Physiological researches on the division of the cell. (Preliminary note.)] Ann. et Bull. Soc. roy. Sc. med. et nat. Bruxelles 4: 112-117. 1920. — The author has sought to determine whether the permeability of the cortical layer of the protoplasm is constant during the entire duration of the cellular cycle. He has observed that the plasma membrane of the egg of the sea urchin is, according to the stage of the cell life, sometimes permeable and sometimes impermeable to salts. The lipoid state (semipermeable) and the albuminoid state (permeable) of the plasma membrane do not co-exist, but succeed each other periodically in the course of the cellular life. The physico-chemical equilibrium of the protoplasm, and not alone that of the cortical layer, depends in part on factors destroyed by the insoluble substances in the lipoids (perme- able phase) and in part on factors destroyed by the solvents of the lipoids (semipermeable phase). These phenomena are in accordance with the emulsion theory of protoplasm. — Henri Micheels. 732. Kowalski, J. Cineses atypiqes dans les cellules adiposes de larves de Pyrrhocoris apterus L. avec quelques remarques sur le centrosome. [Atypical mitoses in the adipose cells of the larvae of Pyrrhocoris apterus L. with some remarks on the centrosome.] La Cellule 30: 83-119. 2 pi. 1915-1919. — Author describes and figures a considerable variety of abnor- mal mitotic phenomena observed in the adipose cells of the larva of Pyrrchocoris. The ab- normalities are of two main types: asymmetrical bipolar figures and multipolar figures. These result in irregular distributions of the chromatin to the daughter cells, the frequent loss of chromosomes in the cytoplasm, unequal cell division, and the formation of hypo- and hyperchromatic cells. Such aberrant behavior is apparently due to two causes — the asymmet- rical bipolar figures, to the mechanical action of the numerous large fat vacuoles; and the multipolar ones, to the disturbing action of a toxin secreted by bacteria which infect the larvae. Cells showing the abnormal phenomena do not return to the embryonic state or divide normally. — The normal resting adipose cell has large fat vacuoles, comparatively scanty cytoplasm, and from 1 to 4 nuclei. The nuclear reticulum stains very faintly. From 7 to 9 (sometimes more) chromatic nucleoli are present; the total amount of nucleolar material is about constant in all the nuclei. The chromosomes number 24.— 16 of them are rod-shaped and 8 are small and spherical. The latter are diflficult to distinguish from the nucleoli, which appear to contribute to the formation of the chromosomes. — A number of observations on normal and abnormal mitotic phenomena in these cells lead to the following conclusions regarding the centrosome and achromatic figure: The formation of the spindle accompanying the development of the chromosomes is the manifestation of a universal and fundamental condition present in all plant and animal cells dividing mitotically; namely an intense and polarized metabolic interchange between chromatin and cytoplasm, showing itself in the bipolarized arrangement of the fibers of the cytoplasmic reticulum. There are two similar opposed cones of fibers because the metaphase chromosomes are split into two equal masses with equal metabolic actions on the cytoplasm; when the chromatic masses are unequal the cones are unequal, and if for any reason they are more than two in number, the figure 108 CYTOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, has more than two poles. The spindle figure is the visible morphological expression of invis- ible currents of exchange passing between chromosomes and cytoplasm. The aster is a similar expression of a metabolic current in the opposite direction, from the cytoplasm toward the chromatic mass. The two currents meet at the poles of the cell, which are there- fore regions of relative calm. If exchanges between chromosomes and cytoplasm cause a deposition of a visible chemical substance, it accumulates at these regions; such deposits are the centrosomes. If more material is deposited than is used by the cell during division, the centrosome is a permanent organ; otherwise it is not. The centrosome is thus neither exclusively cytoplasmic nor exclusively nuclear in origin, but comes from both as a precipi- tation of substances resulting from the metabolic exchange between the two. Chemical reactions, manifesting themselves in centrifugal currents of exchange between centrosome and cytoplasm, cause the appearance of the attraction sphere. When the chromatic mass divides, a second current of exchange is set up toward the centrosome, and a second centrosome is deposited near the first; the assumption of centrosome division is not necessary to account for the two. The formation of centrosomes seems to be conditioned by the size of the spindle cone, the cone in turn being proportional to the chromatic mass under whose influence it arises. The size of the centrosome is often observed to be proportional to that of the chro- matic mass. The disposition and orientation of the chromatic masses determines the ori- entation of the spindle, and the location and size of the centrosome. — Attention is called to the relationship between centrosome and nucleolus. In some lower organisms a single "nucleolocentrosome" performs the functions of both, whereas by a division of labor two separate organs have become differentiated in most organisms. — L. W. Sharp. 733. Ladreyt, F. La Cellule complexe symbiotique. [The symbiotic cell complex.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris. 169: 665-667. 1919. — From a review of his own work and that of others, the author concludes that the cell complex consists of various elements — the cyto- plasm, nucleus, chondriosomes, etc. — which bear a symbiotic relation to one another and derive benefit from one another. — V. H. Young. 734. Meyer, Arthur. Morphologische und Physiologische Analyse der Zelle der Pflanzen und Tiere. [Morphological and physiological analysis of the cell of plants and animals.] XX + 629 p., 205 fig. Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1920. (38 marks.) 735. Rhumbler, L. Otto Biitschlis Wabentheorie. [Otto Biitschli's alveolar theory.] Naturwissenschaf ten 8 : 549-555. 1920. 736. Spek, Josef. tJber Biitschlis Erklarung der karyokinetischen Figur. [On Biit- schli's explanation of the karyokinetic figure.] Naturvvissesnchaften 8: 561-562. 1920. 737. Spek, Josef. Ueber physikalisch-chemische Erklaerungen der Veraenderungen der Kernsubstanz. [Concerning physico-chemical explanations of the changes of the nuclear substance.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. 46: 537-546. 1920. This is mainly, though not exclu- sively, a discussion of Paolo Della Valle's work entitled "La morfologia della cromatina dal punto di vista fiscico" (Arch. Zool. Ital. 6: 37-321. 1912.) The general nature of the nuclear substances, the number and size of chromosomes, susceptibility of chromosomes to stains, division of chromosomes, individuality of chromosomes, and other similar subjects are briefly considered by the author. — John H. Schaffner. 738. Van Hoof, L. La spermatogenese dans les mammiferes. III. Les spermatocytes leptotenes et amphitenes dans le Taureau. [Spermatogenesis in the mammals. III. The lep to tene and amphitene spermatocytes in the bull.] La Cellule 30: 7-25 1 pi. 1915-1919. — Author reexamines the "quaternary granulations" described by Schoenfeld (1901) in the nuclei of the spermatocytes of the bull and finds them to be merely the symmetrically arranged thickenings of the amphitene threads. In the nuclei of the spermatogonia and spermatocytes the chromatin takes the form of irregular blocks with a few thin strands. In the heterotypic prophase the leptotene threads develop at the expense of these blocks, vestiges of which may No. 2, March, 1921] FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY 109 remain visible for some time, and soon take on a more or less definite polar orientation. Lateral pairing of the threads begins at their free ends and gradually involves all parts. The granules or thickenings of the associating threads show a correspondence in position, which gives them the appearance not only of tetrads such as Schoenfeld thought to be of peculiar significance here, but also of dyads, hexads, and octads. As the threads pass into the pachy- nema stage these thickenings gradually become less conspicuous. The interpretation of Schoenfeld is attributed in large part to faulty fixation. — L. W. Sharp. 739. Yamaha, Gihei. Einige Beobachtungen uber die Zellteilung in den Archesporen und Sporenmutterzellen von Psilotum triquetrum Sw. mit besonderer Rucksicht auf die Zell- plattenbildung. [Some remarks on the cell division in the archesporial and spore mother cells of Psilotum triquetrum Sw. with special regard to the formation of the cell plate.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 34: 117-129. 20 fig. 1920.— The cells of Psilotum are specially adapted for cytologi- cal work because of the large nuclei, that are rich in chromatin. The rod-shaped elements of the cell plate are very persistent. In the heterotypic division of the archespore the so-called nucleolar substance could be traced near the daughter nuclei. The phragmoplast can be traced back to the chromosome-connecting filaments. These filaments divide longitudinally, starting at the equatorial plane. At this stage a large number of "extranucleoli" were ob- served. The daughter nuclei approach each other more or less; the cell plate becomes more conspicuous; while its granular contents, the dermatosomes, are very clear. In the meiosis no "radial fibres" were observed. The dermatosomes seem to be used up in the forma- tion of the cell plate, which precedes the simultaneous formation of the cell wall. The homeotypic division shows the same peculiarities. The shrinkage of the wall of the spore mother cell seems to cause the separation of the tetrads. — L. G. Baas-Becking. FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY Raphael Zon, Editor J. V. HoFMANN, Assistant Editor 740. Adamson, R. W. The Bartram oak. Sci. Amer. 122:301. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1564. 741. Algan, H. Bibliographie. [Rev. of: Huffel, G. Economie forestiere. (Forest economy.) Tome premier, deuxieme volume, deuxieme edition. 4^^ p. 1920.] Bull. Trimest. Soc. Forest. Franche-Comte et Belfort 13 : 196-202. 1920.— Nearly two-thirds of this impor- tant work is devoted to a discussion of the history of forest property and forest legislation from the beginning of the feudal period to the middle of the nineteenth century. Forest policy is discussed at some length, including the relation of forests to the public welfare, pub- lic control of private cuttings, public assistance to private owners, forest taxation, etc. The final part of the volume contains a wealth of statistics as to the extent, distribution, and ownership of French forests. — S. T. Dana. 742. Andrews, F. M. Some trees of Indiana. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918:261-263. 1920. 743. Anonymous. The forestry commission. Nature 105:215-216. 1920.— Outline of program for 1919-20 with personnel of consultative committees for England, Scotland, Wales, and Ireland. About 34,000 acres of afforestable land are being acquired. — 0. A. Stevens. 744. Anonymous. Forestry, tree diseases and timber. [Rev. of: (1) Boerker, R. H. D. Our national forests. A short popular account of the work of the United States forest service on the national forests. XIV+ 2S8 p. Macmillan and Co. : London and New York, 1918. (2) Stebbing, E. p. Commercial forestry in Britain: its decline and revival. VI + 186 p. John Murray: London, 1919. (3) Webster, A. D. National afforestation, 160 p. T. Fifiher Unwin: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 577-579. 1920. 110 FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 745. Anonyimous. Forestry, tree diseases and timber. [Rev. of: Da vies, J. H. A map of the world (on Mercator's projection), having special reference to forest regions and the geo- graphical distribution of timber trees. Timber map, No. 1. North America, timber map, No. 2. South America, timber map, No. 3. Europe and Africa, timber map. No. 4. Each on rollers 40 x 30 in. W. and A. K. Johnston : Edinburgh. Macmillan and Co. : London. No date.] Nature 105: 579. 1920. — Distribution of a number is incorrect, and names are erroneous or confusing. European larch does not occur, as shown, in the Pyrenees, Apen- nines, Serbia, Bulgaria, etc. Larix dahurica should be L. sihirica. L. leptolepis is repre- sented on Hokkaido where there is no larch, and in Manchuria and Korea where the finest L. dahurica grows. — 0. A. Stevens. 746. AxoNYMous. Forestry, tree diseases and timber. [Rev. of: Rankin, W. H. Man- ual of tree diseases. XX + 398 p. Macmillan and Co.: New York and London, 1918.] Nature 105: 579. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1168. 747. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Reuss. 37-jahrige Fichtenreinzuchtversuche in Osterreich. (37-year experiment in pure breeding of pine trees in Austria.) Centralbl. Gesammte Forstw. 1916:383-417. 1916.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6:194. Dec, 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1607. 748. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Urban, J. Uber die Grosse der Stecklinge. (On the size of cuttings.) Zeitscht. Zuckerindust. Bohmen 42 : 521-526. 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflan- zenzucht. 6: 195-196. Dec, 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1612. 749. Anonymous. El mezquite. [Mesquite.] Agric Mexicano y Hogar 36: 105-108. 1920. — Translated and adapted from the Scientific American. 750. Anonymous. Le pin sylvestre. [The Scotch pine.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 161- 162. 1920. — Artificial reforestation of Scotch pine can be largely or perhaps wholly avoided by the clear cutting of long narrow strips, lying at right angles to the direction of the pre- vailing winds. For example, a stand with a rotation of 60 years might be divided into six groups, arranged in two tiers and each containing ten cutting areas or strips. The first year the strip in Group 1 lying farthest from the source of the prevailing winds would be cut; the next year the similarly situated strip in Group 2; and so on. Six years would thus elapse between the cutting of adjacent strips in the same group. This should be ample to allow for natural regeneration, which could be still further assured by leaving along roads and the edges of the strips a few seed trees to hold over a second rotation. The system is flexible and can be easily adapted to different rotations and to biennial and triennial cuttings, etc. — S. T. Dana. 751. Anonymous. Resultats des experiences faites, le 9 juin 1920, dans la foret domaniale de Lamotte-Beuvron (Loir-et-Cher). [Results of experiments in the state forest of Lamotte- Beuvron.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 268-271. 1920. — Stumps can be extracted by the use of explosives at a net cost of about 1.5 francs per stump. The method can be used to advan- tage for the removal of a limited number of stumps, but is too slow and expensive for the clearing of large areas. The latter can be cleared more cheaply (net cost about 75 francs per stump), and satisfactorily by the use of caterpillar tractors, which might also apparently be used to advantage for the felling of standing timber. Holes for the planting of large trees, especially fruit trees, can be prepared by the use of explosive cartridges containing small amounts of mineral fertilizer. — S. T. Dana. 752. Anonymous. The fruiting of the Ginkgo at Kew. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1920: 47-48. 1 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1839. 753. Anonymous. Beschadigungen an Eichen durch Diaporta taleola Tul. [Injury to oak by Diaporta taleola Tul.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 69: 62-63. Frontispiece. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1932. No. 2, March, 1921] FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY 111 754. AxjBERT, C.-G. La conversion des taillis en futaie dans I'ouest de la France. [Con- version of coppice into high forest in western France.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 124-132, 153- 160, 189-194, 227-234. 1920.— The value of the high forest, long advocated by the leading French foresters as the forest par excellence, was conclusively demonstrated by the recent war, during which it was primarily the high forests under state ownership that supplied the enormous quantity and wide variety of forest products required by France and its allies. For both public and private owners the high forest is superior to coppice in the quantity, quality, and variety of its products, in its proportionately smaller cost of protection and greater production, and in its fiexibility of management, which is particularly valuable in times of economic stress. The objection that it yields too low a rate of interest has lost much of its force in these days when timber prices are so high and most other investments so insecure. Some sacrifice of annual revenue is involved during the period of conversion, but this is purely temporarj', can be minimized by proper handling, and really consists of an addition to the forest capital comparable to a savings bank investment. Cultural diffi- culties are more serious, but are due largely to the attempt to bring about the conversion through the establishment by natural reproduction of seedling stands with a regular distri- bution of age classes. — The state forests of Bourse and of Ecouves prove that, at least in the oak and beech stands of western France, the establishment of satisfactory high forests from thrifty trees of sprout origin is not only comparatively easy from a cultural point of view, but can be effected at a considerable saving of time and money. The conversion can be brought about either by allowing the stand of coppice to keep right on growing, with occa- sional thinnings to prevent its becoming too dense; or by making a "conversion cutting" which would remove the bulk of the trees, leaving several hundred carefully selected reserves to the hectare, most of which would be of the same age as the main stand. The latter method has the advantage of yielding an immediate revenue and of affording the best possible grow- ing conditions for the trees left. One area treated in this way which had to be prematurely clear cut 38 years later during the war yielded 4000 francs per hectare, exclusive of pre- vious thinnings, as against an estimated yield of 1200 francs per hectare had the conversion not been undertaken. With suitable species, vigorous trees, and good soil, the method is applicable to private as well as to public forests. When conditions are unfavorable in these respects clear cutting and planting or underplanting with silver fir is usually necessary.— Private owners, who will ordinarily make the "conversion cuttings" from five to ten years earlier than the State, will find it advantageous to leave a larger number of reserves, say 1000 per hectare in a 23-year-old stand. It is usually advisable to remove old reserves already on the ground, not only because of the revenue to be derived from them but because their subsequent growth is likely to be unsatisfactory and to interfere with the best develop- ment of the rest of the stand. In selecting reserves to be retained, the species and general vigor of the trees are more important than their origin. The object of the method is not to obtain a stand of natural seedlings in some far off future, but to effect the immediate con- version of a coppice stand into high forest with a view to securing the maximum yield of timber. — S. T. Dana. 755. Baker, E. Methods of fire protection, with special reference to fires caused by sparks from railway engines. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1:414-421. 5 fig. 1920. 756. Baleriola, Caspar. La poda de las morreras. [Mulberry pruning.] Informa- cien Agric. [Madrid] 10:218-220. 4 fig. 1920.— The method of pruning mulberry trees to secure the maximum yield of leaves for silk-worm culture is described. — John A. Stevenson. 757. Barbet, a. Chronique Suisse. [Swiss notes.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 136-138. 1920. — The economic crisis in Switzerland caused by the war still continues, with high prices for both timber and firewood and comparatively little building activity. While forest devastation has not been general, it is necessary to use every means to make the forests more productive. By more intensive management, made possible largely by decreasing the area under the supervision of each forest officer, it should be feasible to increase the annual 112 FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, production of the public forests from 2.7 to 4.4 million cubic meters, thus making the coun- try independent of wood imports aside from exotic timbers. The recently created "central forest office," with headquarters at Soleure, should prove effective in supplementing other activities to awaken public interest in and support of the practice of better forestry. — S. T. Dana. 758. Barbey, a. Wald und Schlachtfeld. [Forest and battlefield.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71: 257-261. J+ pi. 1920. — The forest was completely destroyed over large areas, and in other sections there are only dead parts of trees left. In France the estimated areas destroyed include 100,000 ha. state forest, 140,000 ha. community forest, and 275,000 ha. pri- vate forests; also 10,000 to 15,000 ha. in Elsass— a total of about 530,000 ha. (1,325,000 acres). This forest is so completely destroyed by shells and fire that no young growth is coming in. The area is being covered with weeds and shrubs among the tangles of barbed wire and shell holes. Utilization of the remaining dead timber is not feasible in many places unless char- coal industries are developed. Insect infestations are occurring and no doubt will spread rapidly. Reforestation with the species that occurred before will not be possible in some sections where the soil is badly torn up. Such areas may be restocked with broad-leaved species to build up the soil. — J. V. Hofmann. 759. B(ean), W. J. One-leaved ash (Fraxinus excelsior heterophylla). Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 390-391. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1631. 760. Bean, W. J. Garden notes on new or rare trees and shrubs. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1920: 119-124. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1843. 761. Berkhottt, a. H. Het meten der boomen in verband met hun aanwas. [The meas- urement of trees in connection with their growth.] Meded. Landbouwhoogeschool en Ver- bond. Instit. Deel 17: 109-225. 1920. — Uses the standard deviation of individual varieties and of the mean as a measure of reliability. Uses the "correlation factor" in examining rela- tionship such as that between diameter and volume, with coefficients as high as 0.98. Shows the correlation graphically in addition. In some other correlations the values are much lower. "It is indeed unfortunate that in forest mensuration use of probability computations is seldom or never made, for they are especially applicable in forestry."— Carl Hartley. 762. Bintner, J. Silver leaf disease. Stereum purpureum. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919: 241-263. PI. 8, fig. 1-8. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1936. 763. BouLGER, G. S. [Rev. of: Henry, Augustine. Forests, woods and trees in relation to hygiene, xii + 314 P-, 50 illus. Constable & Company: London, 1919.] Jour. Bot. 58: 157-158. 1920. 764. BouLGER, G. S. [Rev. of: Stone, Herbert. A guide to the identification of our more useful timbers, being a manual for the use of students of forestry. 72 p., 3 pi. Uni- versity Press: Cambridge, 1920.] Jour. Bot. 58: 230. 1920. 765. Brown, Forest B. H. The silicious skeleton of tracheids and fibers. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 407-424. 5 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1057. 766. Burns, George P. Tolerance of forest trees and its relation to forest succession. Jour. Forestry 18 : 610-615. 1920. — A general review of the literature shows a general dis- agreement as to the meaning of the term tolerance. It is used rather indiscriminately in forestry practice but has been tied up with light more often then otherwise. No clear defi- nition has been given and much confusion caused, and the question of what is meant and how it is brought about will have to be solved by forest research. — E. N. Munns. No. 2, March, 1921] FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY 113 767. Cambage, R. H. Notes on the native flora of New South Wales. Part 10. The Federal Capital Territory. Proc. Linnean Soc, New South Wales 43:673-711. PI. 71-74. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1515. 768. Cardot, E. La reconstitution forestiere. [Forest reconstruction.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 121-123. 1920.— The eflforts of the Administration of Waters and Forests, fol- lowing the Franco-Prussian war, to convert the stands of coppice in the national forests into high forest yielded comparatively small results. This was primarily caused by an exaggerated idea of the loss in annual revenue that would be necessitated by the conver- sion, bj' the attempt to use a complicated system of management by natural regeneration with regular thinnings and an even distribution of age classes, and by the many practical difficulties encountered in putting this system into effect. A series of articles starting in this issue of the Revue points out a simple, practical system of avoiding these difficulties and of effecting the conversion with purely temporary and insignificant reductions in current rev- enue. While the author apparently claims the system to be effective only in western France, it would seem to be applicable, with slight modifications, to most, if not all, of the coppice stands in the country. — S. T. Dana. 769. Cheeseman, T. F. Contributions to a fuller knowledge of the flora of New Zealand: no. 6. Trans, and Proc. New Zealand Inst. 51: 85-92. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1516. 770. Cribbs, James E. Ecology of Tilia americana. I. Comparative studies of the foliar transpiring power. Bot.Gaz. 68: 262-286. 13 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1498. 771. De Brun, H. Contre les incendies en Vaucluse. [Fire protection in Vaucluse.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 264-267. 1920.— The application of the forest fire laws of 1893, 1898, and 1902 should be extended to include the department of Vaucluse. Every effort should be made to prevent fires from starting by prohibiting smoking in the forest and by delaying the opening of the hunting season; and to control them after they have started by organizing permanent fire-fighting crews composed of local volunteers. These crews should be specially trained for their work and should be paid by the communities concerned, which should, however, be assisted by subsidies from the state and the department. — S. T. Dana. 772. De la Hamelinaye, H. Rapport du diametre a 1™ 30 au diametre de la souche. [Relation between breast high and stump diameters.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 133-135. 1920. — Measurements of a large number of stumps of oak and beech in the forests of Gers- Hautes, and Basses-Pyrenees showed that the sum of the largest and smallest stump diame- ters, measured at the surface of the ground, was approximately equal to the sum of the cir- cumferences of the same trees measured at breast height (1.30 m.). In other words, the aver- age diameter at breast height in the case of these two species was equal to 63 per cent of the mean diameter of the stump at the surface of the ground. — S. T. Dana. 773. Demorlaine, J. La sylviculture et les chars d'assaut. [Silviculture and tanks.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 235-236. 1920. — During the war the forest of Compiegne was used as a practice field for tanks, the caterpillars of which broke up the ground so as to form an excellent seed bed. As a result the heavy beech-nut crop of 1918 was followed by the estab- lishment of a remarkably dense stand of seedlings. This suggests the possibility of using tanks regularly in beech and oak forests during good seed years in order to stir up the soil and thus favor natural reproduction, at the same time giving the tanks an opportunity to practice their maneuvers under difficult conditions. Similarly, caterpillar tractors might be used to advantage from a silvicultural point of view for the hauling of logs in lumbering operations. — aS. T. Dana. 774. Detwiler, Samuel B. White pine blister rust control in 1919. Amer. Plant Pest Committee Bull. 4: 1-10. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1224. 114 FOREST BOTANY AND FOEESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 775. DoRE, W. H. The distribution of certain chemical constants of wood over its proxi- mate constituents. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12:472-476. 1920. — A study is made of the distribution of the groups contained in red wood which yield furfurol acetic acid and methoxy with the object of learning their relation to the constituent cellulose and lignin. — Henry SchmiUz. 776. DoRE, W. H. The proximate analysis of coniferous woods. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 476-479. 1920. — An improved procedure is described for the summative analysis of coniferous woods. Methods are given for the estimation of the following constituents: those lost on drying, benzene extract, alcohol extract, cellulose, lignin, soluble pentosans, mannan and galactan. — Henry Schmitz. 777. DoRE, W. H. The proximate analysis of hardwoods: Studies on Quercus agrifolia. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 984-987. 1920. — The methods previously used for the analysis of coniferous woods were investigated as to their applicability to the hardwoods. The puri- fication treatment employed for the tissues of coniferous woods was supplemented with digestion in cold water and 5 per cent sodium hydroxide solution. Lignin was determined by the gaseous hydrochloric acid method recently proposed by Konig and Becher. This modified method was found satisfactory in every respect. — Henry Schmitz. 778. Dupler, a. W. Staminate strobilus of Taxus canadensis. Bot. Gaz. 68:345-366. S pi, 22 fig. Nov., 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1898. 779. Ehrhorn, E. M. Notes on plant shipment. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 17: 4-6. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1942. 780. Engler, a. Die Vegetationsverhaltnisse des Kongoa-Gebirges und der Bambuto- Berge in Kamerun [West Africa]. [The vegetation of the Kongoa Mountains and the Bambuto Mountain in Kamerun.] Bot. Jahrb. 55 (Beiheft) : 24-32. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1505. 781. EwART, A. J. Contributions to the flora of Australia, No. 27. Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria 31 (N. S.): 367-379. PI. 18. 1919. 782. Fankhauser, F. Der Lawinenverbau Mittels Terrassen. [Preventing avalanches by terracing.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71 : 217-230. 8 pi. 1920. — Avalanches occurred quite frequently near Elm on slopes from 70° to 90°. These slopes were covered with unbroken sod which give little resistance to sliding snow. Terracing has been successful in preventing slides here and elsewhere. Terraces were first built as early as 1756. They were constructed of laid walls of rock and were only partially successful. Later walls were built of well-laid rock with widened bases. These were often loosened and torn away in the course of two or three seasons. The best construction has been found to consist of alternate layers of rock and sod, with the sod blocks projecting over the rock so that the grass will grow over the entire wall the first or second season. If the sod blocks are trimmed even with the rock wall, the wall soon crumbles and settles irregularly, because the grass does not grow over it and bind the dirt together. The walls are from 1 to 2 m. wide and about 8 m. high, with a slope of about one- fourth the thickness of the wall. The base is set deep enough to prevent undermining by rain and snow water. The terraces are made as broad as possible, in order to give the snow more level bearing surface and prevent sliding. — J. V. Hofmann. 783. Flury, Philip. Aus dem Gebierte unserer Forsteinrichtung. [From the Division of Forest Improvement.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71:137-150. 1920. — This article is a discussion of the views of Biolley and Burger on forest management and improvement as related to methods of cutting. It is pointed out that the two methods are often confused. Clear-cutting may be advisable for forest management, but it is not always the most desir- able for forest improvement. Also, forests may be successfully managed by selection cut- No. 2, March, 1921] FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY 115 ting, but not necessarily improved. Slope types of fir and spruce are best adapted to selec- tion cutting and natural reproduction, and on the bottom lands hardwood types are better suited to clear-cutting and planting. Mixed forests may be converted to pure beech forests or any desirable species by this method. Annual cuttings must be based on the average increment of different age classes and not on annual increment. An age class may produce abnormal increments for short periods, but cuttings based on this would be too heavy for the entire age class. Hater's formula is discussed in its relation to annual and age class incre- ment.— J. V. Hofmann. 734. Flury, Philipp. Aus dem Gebierte unserer Forsteinrichtung (Schluss). [Divi- sion of Forest Improvement (concluded).] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71: 179-199. 1920.— Cuttings and future yield, based on annual increment, are faulty as shown by permanent growth plots. These plots show wide fluctuation due to weather conditions. Growth was retarded in the dry years of 1904, 1906, 1908, and 1911 and greatly accelerated in the wet years of 1912-1916. Growth classes based on diameter measurement must take the smaller classes into consideration. According to the "M6thode du Controle" where the smallest diameter taken was 18 cm., stands under 40 years old would not be considered. Measurements taken in divisions of 5 cm. are as applicable as those based on 1 cm. and are much simpler. Cuttings based on 6- to 8-year intervals are too frequent, and no doubt 20-year intervals can be taken to better advantage. However, 10-year periods are advantageous in many conditions. Tabu- lations are included to show the relation of various methods of determining increment to the different methods of cutting. The author concludes that the present forest compartments are too large for the most eflBcient management. — J. V. Hofmann. 785. Ghose, Manmathanath. A neglected source of sugar in Bikar. Agric. Jour. India 15: 32-39. 3 pi. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1893. 786. Gleason, Henry Allan. Some applications of the quadrant method. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 21-33. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1499. 787. Greig-Smith, R. The germicidal activity of the Eucalyptus oils. Part 2. The action of the oils in aqueous dilutions. Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales 44: 311-347. 7 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1282. 788. GuiNAUDEAu, Ch. Souvenir de Macedoine de Salonique a la frontiere Bulgaro- Serbe au point de vue forestier et agricole. [Forest and agricultural conditions in Macedonia.] Bull Trimest. Soc. Forest. Franche-Comt6 et Belfort 13: 189-196. 2 fig. 1920.— Throughout most of Macedonia from Saloniki to the Bulgarian-Serbian frontier, trees are scarce, erosion is severe, and agricultural development is poor. Reforestation, restriction of grazing, irri- gation, and the use of modern methods of crop production are needed to develop the very decided agricultural possibilities of this region. West of Vardor, however, is an area which is more densely populated, better forested, and richer from every point of view. Here the development of transportation facilities and the practice of better forestry and better agriculture can make it one of the flourishing parts of Greece and the source of all sorts of valuable products. — S, T. Dana. 789. GuYOT, Ch. [Rev. of: Huffel, G. La foret sainte de Haguenau en Alsace. [The sacred forest of Haguenau in Alsace.] 164 p. 1920.] Rev. Eaux etForets 58: 167-175. 1920. — This work gives a detailed history of the important forests of Haguenau, the area of which (18,000 hectares) has not changed materially since the Roman occupation. The methods of forest management in use at different times are fully discussed and freely criticized. The modifications introduced by the Germans following the Franco-Prussian war are regarded as particularly unfortunate, and as having undone much of the good previously accomplished by the French, in spite of the fact that the methods developed by the latter since 1843 were too theoretical and complicated. — S. T. Dana. 116 FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 790. Hall, Thos. D. Food value of willow leaves. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1:456-457. 1920. 791. Hawley, L. F., and Calderwood, H. N., Jr. Tar still operation in hard wood dis- tillation plants. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12:684-686. 1920. 792. Henkel, J. S. Forestry in Rhodesia. Timber trees in the Umtali Park. Rhodesia Agric. Jour. 17:335-339. 2 pi. 1920. 793. Henkel, J. S. Forestry in Rhodesia. Two useful softwoods. Rhodesia Agric. Jour. 17:238-243. 1920. 794. Hess, N. Experiences in plant hybridization. Proc. Amer. See. Hortic. Sci. 16: 52-60. (1919)-1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1818. 795. HiLEY, W. E. The fungal diseases of the common larch. 8 vo., xii + 20Ji. p., 73 pi. Clarendon Press: Oxford, 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1947. 796. HuFFEL, G. Le mouvement forestier a I'etranger: station de recherches forestilres Suisse. [Developments at the Swiss forest experiment station.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 249-254. 1920.— Since 1900 the Swiss forest experiment station has been studying the influ- ence of a forest cover on stream-flow in two neighboring and comparable water-sheds, one of which was 97 per cent and the other 29 per cent forested. Actual measurements show that forest soils in good condition absorb the bulk of the precipitation, which later runs off sub- terraneously; while in soils not so protected there is an immediate surface run-off accompanied by erosion and gullying, particularly on steep, turfed slopes. This beneficial influence of the forest is due to the permeability and porosity of its soil rather than to the great hygroscopicity of the humus and moss cover, which if too abundant may actually, after becoming saturated, have the opposite effect and stimulate surface run-off. During periods of rapid snow melting both the peak of the flood and the total discharge were less from the well-forested than from the poorly forested water-shed. The run-off from the former after heavy or torrential down- pours was only a third to a half of that from the latter. After prolonged rains the influence of the forest depended on whether the soil was comparatively dry or saturated at the begin- ning of the wet spell. In any event, however, erosion is less on well-forested water-sheds, and the flood waters from them, having a lower velocity and carrying less detritus, do less damage. During periods of prolonged drought the stream from the well-forested water- shed never went dry, while that from the poorly forested one often did so for a month or two at a time. All of these differences would have been more marked if the well-forested water- shed had not had appreciably steeper slopes than the other, and if the latter had been completely deforested. — S. T. Dana. 797. HuFFEL, G. Statistique des forets de 1' Alsace-Lorraine. [Forest statistics for Alsace-Lorraine.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 185-188. 1920.— The director general of forests at Strassburg has published a 98-page volume of statistical information regarding the forests of Alsace-Lorraine. Among other things this shows that the forest area of the two provinces on April 1, 1916, was 440,594 hectares, of which 31 per cent was owned by the state, 4 per cent was undivided between the state and a commune, 46 per cent was in the hands of com- munes and public institutions, and 19 per cent was held by private owners. Since 1871 the forest area has decreased 5,673 hectares, or slightly more than 1 per cent. During the same period gross prices of timber have increased 34 per cent and of flrewood 47 per cent, but there has been a constant tendency to include smaller and smaller material in the former class. The annual yield of the forests owned by the state and of those undivided between the state and a commune is estimated at 551,422 cubic meters of large timber, including both inter- mediate and final products. During the war, however, the actual cut and other matters of administration were decidedly abnormal. — f on fungiform bodies, central nervous structures of Hymenopterous brain. From transverse sections of brain von Alten made the following measurements: Total diameter of fungiform bodies (a), height of fungiform bodies (h), total diameter of protocerebral lobes (b), and total diameter of fibrous part of optic lobes (c); b and c are relatively constant and serve as standards in brain index devised by author, a/b + a/c + h/b + h/c. Comparison of brain indices of sexes and casts of various aculeate species shows that size of fungiform bodies is correlated with degree of development of instincts. In general, solitary species stand below social, and sim- pler solitary below more complex, Size of insect as whole, or size or shape of head, does not affect index. Species of one and same genus may have rather widely diverse brain indices. Bees with ventral scopa do not stand below those with scopa on legs, but the two groups run parallel. Digger wasps apparently run parallel to solitary bees. Social wasps in every case run parallel to social bees. Among social bees, the bumble bee has much higher index than the honey bee. This is to be expected from fact that latter is far below former in structure, such as length of tongue, and in instincts; for social life is not necessarily an indi- cation of high position in scale of development. Consider termites, for example. Sex dimor- phism appears from lowest to highest species, females in general having larger brains. Among social aculeates male brain is the most weakly developed. Of female brains, that of worker is better developed only in ergatotelic honey bee, while in gynaecotelic bumble bees and wasps queen has larger brain. This is correlated with fact that queen honey bee is prac- tically a parasite for life upon worker colony while in gynaecotelic forms queen must found colony. In solitary parasite, Nomada, and still more so in social parasite, Psithyrus, male possesses the more highly developed brain. In Nomada, brain indices of both male and female are very high for parasites, while in Psithyrus, index for male corresponds to average brain index of other bumble bees. In parasitic forms, therefore, brain of female tends to retrogress, while that of male remains to show from whence species has diverged. Resem- blance of parasite to host is not to be explained by mimicry but by relationship. General subject of genogenesis, which lies at root of species problem, is considered. Males having re- duced chromosome number should be especially subject to mutation and yet, in spite of diverse environments, parasitic males have not changed and females have remained parasites. Dif- ference in feeding causes phenotypic differences of form and instinct between queens and workers. Question is raised as to how this phenotypic difference became genotypic, as in transformation of phenotypically parasitic queen of Apis or Bombus into genotypically parasitic Psithyrus. — P. W. Whiting. 853. Ballard, W. R. Notes on geranium breeding. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 1918: 62-65. 1918. — Recounts breeding work done to secure disease resistance. Because of hybrid nature of most varieties considerable segregation occurs in Fi generation: Singles X singles gave 84 singles and 6 doubles; singles X doubles gave 59 singles and 74 doubles; doubles X doubles gave 40 singles and 30 doubles. Correlation indicated between presence of nectar tubes and singleness of flower. Little success attended effort to hybridize different species; Lady Wash- ington type will combine with some of the scented-leaved types, and the zonal group will hybridize with the ivy-leaved section but not with either the show or scented-leaved groups. — J. Marion Shtill. 854. Bally, Walter. Die Godronschen Bastards zwischen Aegilops- und Tricumarten. Vererbung und Zytologie. [The Godronian hybrids between species of Aegilops and Triticum. Heredity and cytology.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 20: 177-240. 4 fi-g. Feb., 1919, 855. Barclay, J. R. Scottish pure-bred live stock. I. Aberdeen-Angus cattle. Scot. Jour. Agric. 2: 456-464. 4 pi. 1919.— A brief account of the early history of the Aberdeen- Angus cattle, of the present characteristics of the breed, and of the success attained in all parts of the world in competition with other beef breeds. — Sewall Wright. 126 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 856. Baton, H. Racial and sexual differences in the appendix vennifonnis. Anat. Rec. 19:241-249. Sept. 20, 1920. — Statistics based on surgical records distinct!}' indicate a greater frequency of appendicitis in the white race than in the negro, but the records are shown to be subject to error in favor of the white frequency. Therefore, a comparative study of structure of the appendix was undertaken to determine if there are racial and sexual differences, with special reference to "susceptibility to inflammation." One hundred appendices, recently removed, many for other causes than appendicitis, were examined as to both gross and microscopic characters. The following results were obtained: — (1) "The musculature of the white appendix .... seemed slightly stronger than that of the negro;" (2) the white appendix on the average "is shorter and wider;" (3) is "richer in crypts;" and (4) is "rich in lymphocytes and poor in vascularity," while the negro is exactly the reverse. Considered in relation to "other diseases of the lymphatic system," these findings "seem to prove that the white race is more subject to lymphocytic stasis than the negro." — As to sexual differences, it was found that the male appendix is "longer and wider than the female" and the latter is richer in fat, conforming in these respects with prevailing sex dif- ferences.— H. J. Banker. 857. Blakeslee, A. F. Sexual differentiation in the bread molds. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 16: 131. 1919. — Primitive sexual forms are hermaphroditic, both the gametes, and the plants themselves, differing in size. Interaction of two sexual races, regardless of species, is necessary for production of sexual spores or "imperfect hybridization." — Dif- ferent races display variations in sexual vigor. Some seem neutral ; hermaphrodites sometimes produce races showing hermaphroditic, female, male, or neutral tendencies. — Andrew I. Dawson. 858. Blakeslee, Albert F., John Belling, and M. E. Farnham, Chromosomal dupli- cation and Mendelian phenomena in Datura mutants. Science 52 : 388-390. Oct. 22, 1920. — The authors have begun a study of the relationship between the cytological condition and the phenomena of mutation and Mendelian inheritance. Datura Stramonium, the Jimson weed, upon which they are working, has normally 24 chromosomes in diploid and 12 in hap- loid. 12 recurrent mutants have 25 in diploid. The extra chromosome is presumably deter- mined by the duplication of a particular chromosome which has been identified as the one carrying the gene for a particular Mendelian character. Duplication may extend to all of the chromosomes producing tetraploid mutants in which the independent assortment of the chromosomes in the homologous sets is found to be the rule. — Helen Bergfried. 859. Blaringhem, L. Heredite et nature de la pelorie de Digitalis purpurea L. [Heredity and nature of the peloria of Digitalis purpurea L.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 171 : 252-254. July, 1920. Cross-fertilization of a plant with regular axial peloria, probably recessive as to flower color, with a wild purple-flowered Digitalis purpurea were made by the author. From the results of this experiment the conclusion is reached that the peloria of this species is an extreme case of regular hereditary f asciation ; when crossed with wild Digitalis purpurea the normal cluster form is dominant over the fasciation, with partial, graduated reversion in prog- eny of the second and third generations. Individual plants or flowers show partial sterility. —Edith K. Cash. 860. Blaringhem, L. Variations florales chez la Grande Marguerite (Leucanthemum vulgare, Lamarck). [Floral variations in the large daisy.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 193-195. 1919.— Author calls attention to tendency of this daisy (Chrysanthemum Leucanthemum L.) to develop vigorous colonies on recently cleared or exposed land. Time of colony formation favors variation and author reports on group of more than a thou- sand plants that grew on site of drained pond. Heights of plants ranged from 80-150 cm. while same species in suburbs of Paris ranged from 40-70 cm. In colony were 5 fasciated plants. A single ligulate floret was found metamorphosed into tubular one. Counts on 100 heads for ligule number gave modes at 25 and 33 while in case of 9-year-old culture of No. 2, March, 1921] GENETICS 127 same species at another place there was a single mode at 21 ligules. Numerous foliage varia- tions observed in the drained-pond colony and examination of achenes from ligulate flowers of 25 individuals showed that two had the well-developed crown or pappus characteristic of other species of the genus, two had less-developed pappus, while 21 had naked fruits typical of L. vulgare Lam. — James P. Kelly. 861. Blaringhem, L. Production par traumatisme d'une forme nouvelle de Mais S cary- opses multiples, Zea Mays var. polysperma. [The traumatic origin of a new form of maize with multiple fruits, Zea Mays var. polysperma.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:677-679. 1920.— Hereditary line of maize with a varying percentage of double and sometimes triple grains (caryopses) has been isolated from the author's original teratological cultures in which the main stalk of the plant had been injured. A description of this new strain, called Z. Mays var. polysperma, is given. A correlation between the double grains on the ear and a corresponding union of the spikelets on the staminate inflorescence was observed. — Iso- lated in 1907, this strain proved to be exceedingly variable in the number of plants which bore ears with double grains. After five years of selection, the author reports that he has fixed the strain to some extent. His data show approximately fifty per cent of plants with double grains in 1919. At the same time the number of double grains on the ear has increased from 5 per cent to 95 per cent.— The author calls this a typical case of a heritable, acquired character. — E. W. Lindstrom. 862. Blaringhem, L. Stabilite et fertilite de I'hybride Geum urbanum L. X G. rivale L. [Stability and fertility of the hybrid, Geum urbanum L. X G. rivale L.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1284-1286. May, 1920. 863. Bond, C. J. On certain factors concerned in the production .of eye colour in birds. Jour. Genetics 9: 69-81. Dec, 1919.— Eye colors of birds are arranged in a series. At the bottom is "bull" eye, as found in pigeons, which is due to absence of anterior pigment in iris and background of black pigment in the uvea. Next stage is pearl eye of pigeons and "daw" eye of fowls, caused by colorless granules in the iris, which destroy its translucency. In extreme cases this type of eye may be china-white as in the "wall" eye of dogs, horses and pigs. Yellow or "gravel" eyes are due to a network of branching cells crowded with small spherical yellow granules on the anterior surface of the iris. Brown and black eyes are due to brown or black pigment replacing or covering the yellow (giving triplex condition). The ruby eye is produced by yellow pigment in conjunction with the red capillaries, except in the Cayenne Lapwing, where actual reddish pigment granules are found. Some data on inherit- ance of the types are given. In general they form an epistatic series, with the simplex "bull" eye at the bottom. There are some complications due to secondary sex relations.— Leon /. Cole. 864. Bond, C. J. On the left-sided incidence of the supernumerary digit in heterodacty- lous fowls. Jour. Genetics 10:87-91. July, 1920.— Author reports that among 38 hetero- dactylous (five toes on one foot and four on the other) offspring from various crosses of four- toed and five-toed breeds of fowls, 34 had the extra digit on the left side and only four on the right side. Reports slight indication that this situation is more likely to prevail when the female parent belongs to the five-toed breed. Data of other investigators are discussed and the conclusion reached that in birds "there is a tendency during the early cleavage of the ovum which separates the organism into a right and left half, for the factor or factors which control meristic variation to pass to the left rather than to the right half of the devel- oping zygote." — W. A. Lippincott. 865. Boring, Edwin G. A priori use of the Gaussian-law. Science 52: 129-130. Aug. 6, 1920.— The author criticizes Mr. Michael's interpretation of Dr. Johnstone's results for twenty counts of bacteria in polluted shell fish. He objects to Michael's factoring of a skew distribution into a Gaussian distribution and a skewing factor on the ground that, in absence of observational proof that the frequencies at hand follow the Gaussian law, this 128 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, law is meaningless. He also objects to application of elaborate statistical methods when the number of observed cases is as small as in Johnstone's problem and he suggests that the mode and upper and lower quartiles, as determined directly from the observations, give all the information desired. — Lowell J. Reed, 866. BouviER, E.-L., and d'Emmerez de Charmodt. Mutation d'une Caridine en Ort- mannie et observations generales sur les mutations evolutives des Crevettes d'eau douce de la famille de Atyides. [Mutation of Caridina into Ortmannia and general observations on the evolutional mutations of fresh-water shrimps of the family Atyidae.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169:317-321. 1919. — Authors have previously stated that certain shrimps or prawns (family Atyidae) of the Indo-Pacific region give rise by mutations to representatives of previously known species of higher genera. Such changes are cited for the following forms : — Caridina richtersi to Ortmannia edwardsi; Ortmannia alluaudi to Atya serrata, Ortmannia henshawi Iw Atya bisulcata. The second of these is reported to have been experimentally proven by Bordaqe, the two genera having been obtained from the same clutch of eggs. The first is found experimentally by the writers to occur in a brood reared in an aquarium (8 Caridina and 1 Ortmannia edwardsi). The species which give rise to the forms unlike themselves are quite variable, but the higher forms (to which the derived forms belong) on the other hand, are remarkably stable. Authors think the results not due to hybridization since they do not find individuals with intermediate generic characters and Bordage did not get pairing between the different genera. Results are attributed to evolutional muta- tions.— A. M. Banta. 867. Brotherton, W. E., Jr. The heredity of "Rogue" types in garden peas (Pisum sativum). Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21 : 263-279. PI. 7-13. 1919.— Describes "rogue" type in garden peas, which occurs in varieties with large, wide pods and relatively broad leaves such as Gradus, Duke of Albany, Early Giant and Peter Pan. Rogues differ from type plant of variety in which they arise chiefly in reduced foliage (vetch-like), narrower pods often sickle-shaped or curvature increased, height in general greater, either due to increase in internode number or in internode length; often later-flowering, change from sub-cunei- form seed of type to dnun-shaped seeds; rogue seeds average smaller and in green state bitter as compared with sweet type seed. Sterile rogues rarely occur. Usually rogues equal or surpass in productiveness the type. Author mostly worked with rogues from Gradus vari- ety. Per cent of rogues to type in rogue-producing Gradus families was 9.6 (actual figures 5 rogues: 51 type.) Out of 150 Gradus plants selected at random, only one had rogues among progeny. Summarizes data of Bateson and Pellew and confirms their results. In addi- tion, finds in seedling stage, rogue plants are more variable in regard to ratio of length to breadth of stipules than are type plants. Hybrids (rogue X type) resemble rogue parent in this respect. Some evidence that rogues crossed with typical plants of non-rogue-throwing varieties in F2 and following generations show segregation of width of stipule. Rogues not comparable to any existing variety of pea. Observations are similar to those of White as regards rarity of cross-pollination in peas under field conditions. Cites statement of Starr that percentage of crossed Gradus plants under ordinary field conditions during one season was very high. — Orland E. White. 868. Burns, W. Some aspects of plant genetics. Agric. Jour. India 15 : 250-276. 1920. — Author's Presidential Address to the Botany Section of the Seventh Indian Science Con- gress, Nagpur, 1920. Importance of genetics in college or university curriculum is empha- sized, and some pedagogical features of the subject are discussed.— Attention is called to problems of bud variation, seedlessness in fruits, and inheritance of sex in plants, and to the intimate relation of plant genetics to cytology and taxonomy. — Limitations in plant genetics are pointed out, and the present lack of knowledge concerning causes of non-adaptive varia- tions, and of mutations is discussed. — C. M. Woodworth. 869. Clawson, Benjamin Junior. Varieties of streptococci with special reference to constancy. Jour. Infect. Diseases: 26: 93-116. 1920. — Author sought to discover relation- No. 2, March, 1921] GENETICS 129 ship between classes of streptococci, and their source, habits, pathogenicity, or other char- acteristics. More than 160 strains were isolated from various sources, pathogenic and non- pathogenic. Cultural characteristics were ascertained from growth on different media, chiefly blood agar, carbohydrates and salicin. Agglutination and complement fixation were applied. — Author concludes that no relationship of source, habitat, or pathogenicity, of the streptococci classes was established; a basis of classification is lacking.— Morphology and car- bohydrate fermentation is variable; hemolysis is fairly constant; the hemolytic group is heterogeneous; agglutination shows a high degree of uniformity.— Andrew /. Dawson. 870. Cleaver, S. M. Merino history and merino breeding. 15 X 23 cm., 48 p., SS fig. S. M. Cleaver: Delaware, Ohio, 1918.— A popular account of the history of Merino sheep breeding in America, with a discussion of the various types which have been developed and the difficulties met in trying to combine all good qualities in one type. — Sewall Wright. 871. CoRRENS, C. Eine gegliickte Verschiebung des Geschlechtsverhaltnisses. Botan- ische Versuche zur Frage nach der Entstehung des Geschlechts. [A successful modification of the sex-ratio. Botanical researches on the origin of sex.] Natur u. Technik 2:65-71. 2 fig. 1920.— Review of sex determination in animals and plants and experiments on the dioecious plant M eland rium (Lychnis) which show that the staminate plants are heterog- amous and the pistillate homogamous. Results agree with those of Strasburger and of Shull in showing excess of pistillate over staminate plants. Deficient amount of pollen applied also resulted in excess of pistillate plants but when large excess of pollen (more than 100 grains per ovule) was applied, so that competition between male- and female-determining gametes took place, there was even greater excess of pistillate plants: 44 to 56 per hundred in the first case and 32 to 68 per hundred in the second. A moderate excess of pollen of 7 grains to 1 ovule gave an intermediate ratio of 40 to 60.— The faster growth of the female- determining pollen tubes was also shown by comparing the seeds from the top half with those from the bottom half of the same capsule. The seeds resulting from the shorter growth of pollen tubes gave 68, and the seeds from the longer growth 56, per cent pistillate plants. In this plant the pollen tubes enter the ovary at a common point and are all free to fertilize the first ovules to be reached. This was tested by pollinating a white-flowered plant with a small quantity of pollen from a red-flowered plant and 24 hours later with pollen from a white-flowered plant: 71 per cent of the crossed, red-flowered plants came from seeds out of the upper third of capsule as compared to 29 per cent from the lower two thirds. Conclusion: Unequal production of heterogametes and unequal rate of growth of pollen tubes modifies sex-ratio in Melandrium. — D. F. Jones. 872. Crandall, C. S. Observations on characters of forms of Malus. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16 (1919) : 131-135. 1920.— The writer bases his observations on 44 standard horticultural varieties and 45 crab forms, and upon 495 parental combinations of them. Most botanical characters of genus are variable. "Petals, 5:" Vary from 4 to 8. Seedlings of variable parent had 10. "Carpels, 2 to 5:" Four out of 32 varieties had constantly 5 carpels; two out of 28 crabs had constantly 5 carpels; in M. Mains fl. pi.— 81 per cent of fruits varied from 5 to 9 carpels; in M. speciabilis 87 per cent had 5 to 12 carpels; in M. Arnoldiana 99 per cent and in M. atrosanguinea 96 per cent had less than 5 and one of each had 2 carpels. Of 6000 fruits from 23 crab forms, 33.95 per cent varied from 5 carpels. "Ovules, 2 per carpel:" Of 21 standard varieties, only 2 were constant, the variation averaging 8.23 per cent with a maximum of 84.63 per cent. In crabs (25 varieties and species) 12 were constant. In 4 forms, ovules were suppressed, from 1 to lb less than normal. In remainder there was an excess of ovules from 1 in Yellow Siberian Crab to 300 in M. spectabilis. "Calyx lobes persistent or deciduous:" This is a distinctive varietal and specific character. Most cultivated varieties are persistent. Of 41 crab forms, 16 were deciduous, 13, persistent, and in 12, part on each tree were deciduous and part persistent. The writer believes that the instability of this character in most crab forms indicates their hybrid origin. — In Fi of large leaf X large leaf and small leaf X small leaf (standard varieties), there is a predominance of large-leafed forms, with some small and some intermediate. When large-fruited forms were crossed with 130 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, and on small-fruited forms, as M. floribunda, M. Sargentii, M. Toringo, M. atrosanguinea, Fi seedlings resemble small-fruited parent in tree characters, though sometimes in an invig- orated form. Some groups of Fi seedlings in no way resemble parents in vegetative char- acters.— C. H. Connors. 873. Crow, J. W. Plant breeding from horticultural standpoints. Ontario Dept. Agric. Ann. Rept. Agric. and Exp. Union 41 : 50-52. 1919. — Plant breeding work in the Department of Horticulture of the Ontario Agricultural College is briefly outlined, and the need of further work is emphasized. — A. N. Wilcox. 874. Crow, J. W. Vegetable seed growing and breeding. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 1918: 88-93. 1918. — The experience in growing and breeding vegetable seeds at the Ontario Agri- cultural College, and methods used there in growing and curing celery, carrot, parsnip, beet, and onion seeds are briefly outlined. — A. N. Wilcox. 875. Dalcq, Albert. Note sur la spermatogenese de I'Drvet. [Note on the spermato- genesis of the orvet.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 83: 1302-1304. Oct., 1920. 876. Daniel, Lucien. Sur la stabilite et I'heredite des Crataegomespilus et des Pirocy- donia. [On the stability and heredity of Crataegomespilus and of Pirocydonia.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 513-515. 1919. — Daniel has grown 6 forms of chimera, or sup- posed chimera, none of which bore viable seeds. — (1) The two hawthorn-medlar chimeras of Bronvaux have been grown for over twenty years, and showed no reversions for about fifteen years. — (a) The form most like the medlar has borne twigs of hawthorn, of both chimeras, and twigs resembling medlar. These last, regrafted, gave chimeras again. — (b) The forms most like hawthorn has produced few twigs of hawthorn or of other forms. — (2) The two hawthorn- medlar chimeras of Saujon have been grown for about ten years. — (a) The form nearest the medlar produced some twigs resembling the medlar, but no twigs with spines. — (b) The form nearest the hawthorn bore some twigs of hawthorn, which, however, still showed some characteristics of the chimera. — (3) A pear-quince chimera has been grown for 7 years. It arose from the callus of a graft, is intermediate in its leaves, and can be grafted on either pear or quince. It has formed no flower-buds. — John Belling. 877. Daniel, Lucien. Obtention d'une race nouvelle d'Asphodele par Paction du climat marin. [The appearance of a new variety of Asphodelus through the action of the marine climate.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1332-1333. 1920. 878. Doncaster, L. Genetic studies in Drosophila. [Rev. of: Morgan, T. H., C. B. Bridges, and A. H. Sturtevant. Contributions to the genetics of Drosophila melanogaster. V + 388 p., 12 p. Carnegie Inst. Washington, Publ. No. 278. Washington, 1919.] Nature 105:405-406. 1920. 879. Doncaster, L. Mendelism. [Rev. of: Punnett, R. C. Mendelism. Sth ed. IS X 19 cm., XV + 219 p., 7 pi., 52 jig. Macmillan and Co.: London, 1919.] Nature 104: 655-656. 1920. — "One of the best introductory treatises on the modern study of genetics. We note with regret that the hypothesis of multiple allelomorphs is nowhere fully discussed." [See Bot. Abst. 6, Entry 714.]— O. A. Stevens. 880. Duarte d'Oliveira, Jose. Sur la transmission de la fasciation et de la dichotomic a la suite de la greffe de deux vignes portugaises. [The transmission of fasciation and dichoto- mous branching through the grafting of two Portuguese varieties of grapes.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 615-616. 1920. — Scions of a Portuguese variety of grapes, Albino de Sauza, were grafted on stock of another variety, Goncalo Pires. The latter varietj'' is char- acterized by dichotomous branching and the frequent production of fasciated branches. The former never exhibits these peculiarities. The grafts were made in March. The following June the author noted that the new growth from the scion showed the fasciations and dicho- tomous branching characteristic of the variety used as the stock and has since continued to exhibit these characteristics. — C. B. Hutchinson. No. 2, March, 1921] GENETICS 131 881. East, E. M. Population. Scientific Monthly 1920: 603-604. June, 1920.— The author discusses the question of population increase in relation to increase of food. He shows that present figures as to the world's population and food and their rates of increase are entirely in accord with the conclusion of Malthus. Discussing the increase by races, he concludes that the white race is increasing much more rapidly than either the yellow or black race. China is practically stationary as to population, India and the South Seas have a slow increase, and Japan has a high rate. The blacks are increasing only in this country, the number of negroes in Africa remaining practically stationary. On the other hand, all the white races except in France are increasing at fairly high rates. Wars, even one as great as the last, seem to have no appreciable effect on the upward march of population. — Turning to the United States, he shows that the law of diminishing returns has begun to apply to agriculture and he calls attention to the fact that future increase in agricultural production is definitely limited. To prevent the population of this country from crowding too closely on the means of subsistence he offers the following remedies : First, a restriction of immigra- tion; second, education; third, equitable readjustment in many of our economic customs; and, last, natural marriage selection — a somewhat increased birth rate in families of high civic value, and among the rank and file a restriction of birth commensurate with family resources. — Lowell J. Reed. 882. Engledow, F. L. Inheritance in barley. I. The lateral florets and the rachilla. Jour. Genetics 10: 93-108. 3 fig. Aug., 1920.— Data are offered showing Mendelian segrega- tion in F2 generations of crosses between smooth and bristly rachillae. A one-factor difference is found. The problem of the inheritance of lateral florets is discussed and data bearing on its solution presented. Several forms of lateral floret differing either in fertility or shape and size of glume afford to this author instances of multiple allelomorphism. Histological study of the developing lateral florets at different stages is needed to correlate Mendelian char- acters with histological structures. — F. P. Bussell. 883. Faber, Harold. Foreword by Sir Robert Greig. Forage crops in Denmark. ix + 100 p. Longmans, Green & Co. : London, 1920.— See Bot. Abstracts 7, Entry 22. 884. Garber, R. J., and P. J. Olson. A study of the relation of some morphological char- acters to lodging in cereals. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 11: 173-186. 1 pi, 2 fig. May, 1919.— Authors mention the perplexing problem of producing non-lodging small grains possessing high yielding capacity. In 1916 a project was organized to determine whether some simple morphological character is closely related to lodging or non-lodging. Extreme varieties for lodging in wheat, oats and barley were selected and study made of correlation between lodg- ing behavior and average size of culm, average size of vascular bundles, average area of sclerenchyma, thickness of culm wall, length of lignified cells, and thickness of lignified cell wall. None of these characters except thickness of cell wall seems closely related to lodging. Lodging in cereals is dependent on so many factors of unequal value that no one factor seems correlated closely enough with lodging to be of much value as selection index. In oats and barley the average number of vascular bundles was found to be correlated with average diame- ter of culm. — Geo. K. York. 885. Gates, R. Ruggles. Heredity and eugenics. Eugenics Rev. 11: 193-201; 12: 1-13. 1920.— Summarizes with comments and some discussion recent research as bearing on human heredity under the main subjects of physical characters, mental characters, the limits of heredity and the eugenical, social and world aspects, with a bibliography of fifty numbers.— H. J. Banker. 886. Georgesoix, C. C. Summary of the work at the several stations. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917: 5-33. PI. 1-2. 1919.— The author describes some new varieties pro- duced by crossing; and presents the results of variety and cultural tests of horticultural and farm crops; and also briefly discusses the value of various ornamental crops for Alaskan conditions. — H. K. Hayes. 132 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 887. Gersdorff, C. E. F. Germination of gladiolus seed. Flower Grower 7: 73. 1920. -A table shows the time required for germination, the percentage of germination and the percentage of conns harvested, based on 3261 seeds of various varieties and hybrids. Seeds were previously selected for plumpness. Sixty per cent of the total number of seeds germi- nated and thirty per cent yielded conns which were harvested. The time required for germi- nation varied from sixteen to eighty-five days. Most of the seeds "should have germinated in thirty-one days." — The method of raising young corms from the seed is described. — A. N. Wilcox. 888. GowEN, John W. Self-sterility and cross-sterility in the apple. Maine Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 287. 61-88 p. May, 1920. — Many varieties of apples are commonly self-sterile. Results are the same whether stigmas are pollinated from the same flower, a flower from another cluster or from another tree of the same variety. Of 12 varieties, tested, 8 were wholly self-sterile; four — Baldwin, Wealthy, Duchess and Northern Spy — were, in slight degree, self-fertile, Duchess and Northern Spy being doubtfully so. Only 42 of a compiled list of 119 varieties that had been tested are known to have set self-fertilized fruits, and only 15 of these produced fruit in quantity. Varieties do not give the same results in all regions; those self-sterile in one state may be, in some degree, self-fertile in another. In a test of cross-fertility 43 combinations were tried; 20 of these proved compatible and formed fruit. The most successful combinations were Grimes Golden X Ben Davis, Baldwin X Golden Russet and Ben Davis X Mcintosh. Of a list of 243 combinations of varieties, made up of tests in several states, 57 are recorded as not producing fruit and 186 as producing fruit. Cross compatibility of varieties can be determined only by trial. Yields of orchards of self- sterile varieties may be increased by introduction of other varieties. The number of good seeds in crossed apples is greater than in those which are selfed. — Causes of self-sterility are external and internal. The chief internal cause is the slowness of growth of the pollen tube in the selfed style as against that in the crossed style. Other internal causes are degenerate pollen and lack of proper development of ovule. — C. S. Crandall. 889. GuTER, M. F., AND E. A. Smith. Studies on cytolysins. II. Transmission of induced eye defects. Jour. Exp. Zool. 31: 171-223. 4 V^-, '^ fid- Aug. 30, 1920.— Preparation of lens from eyes of rabbits, injected into peritoneal cavity of fowls, leads to formation of spe- cific anti-body. Blood serum from fowls thus treated was injected into veins of pregnant rabbits. In a small proportion of cases, young were born with defective lenses and other eye defects. From young of one such brood five further generations with defective eyes have been propagated. Defects tend to increase rather than decrease in later generations. Defects are transmitted through males as well as females. They behave in some respects as a Mendelian recessive character. Although these six defective generations have all arisen from a single original treated female, full safeguards have been taken against possibility of having bred from a strain which chanced to carry eye defects of this sort, prior to any operative treatment. Also defective young born of an operated mother quite unrelated to the first stock are now being reared for test of heritability of the modifications in independent strain. One case is recorded in which normal appearing offspring of a treated mother gave rise to defective young. This is not in harmon}' with interpretation of transmission of induced defect as due to direct influence of defective organ upon germ-cells; i.e., inheritance of an acquired character, sensu stricio. On the other hand, parallel induction theory is not in keeping with fact that germ- cells of originally-treated mother were in no case affected, but that only those of her off- spring which were in utero at time of treatment were affected. Authors are not prepared to adopt definite theoretical interpretation. — F. B. Sumner. 890. Hammond, J. On the relative growth and development of various breeds and crosses of cattle. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10: 233-289. July, 1920.— Data from the Smithfield Club of fat stock exhibits at Islington 1893-1913 were studied to determine the average weights attained by different breeds, dressed weight of carcase, suet fat, gut fat, tongue, head, heart, tripe, hide, blood, intestine and unaccounted for. Similar data are presented for sex, age, and Fi crosses between breeds. Individual variation is noted. Correlation between weight of one part No. 2, Makch, 1921] GENETICS 133 and that of another is indicated. Effect of selection over periods 1893-1899, 1900-1906, 1907- 1913 and effect of season are discussed.— Steers are shown to weigh about 10 per cent more than heifers at the same age. About 77 per cent of steers' and 81 per cent of heifers' weight at 33 months old, is put on in the first 22 months. Steers have larger proportion of gut fat, head, hide, carcase; heifers a larger proportion of suet fat, tongue, tripe, intestine. Increasing age increases proportion of carcase, suet fat, gut fat; decreases proportion of tongue, head, heart, tripe, hide.— Cross-breeding showed no increase in weight over the heavier parent, where two heavy breeds are crossed, the Fi is usually heavier than the mean of the two parents; where a heavy and light breed is crossed the Fi is not so heavy as the mean of the parents either way the cross is made. Crossing tends to obliterate sexual differences. The general effect of cross-breeding is not, as has often been stated, to increase the rate of maturity in weight. Crosses give a slightly larger proportion of carcase, gut fat, tongue and heart than the pure breeds. The pure-breds are heavier in hide, head and blood.— The coefficient of variation of live weight ranged between 7.29 and 11.98. This coefficient decreased between 1893 and 1913. The coefficients of variation for steers 33 months old were, carcase 4.0; suet fat 20.4; gut fat 24.7; tongue 10.4; head 6.3; heart 12.5; tripe 15.8; hide 10.1; blood 17.2; intestine 21.8; unaccounted for 23.5. — John W. Gowen. 891. Hansen, W. Die Pflanzenziichterische Buchfuhrung und Bewertung der Zucht- pflanzen. [Plant-breeding book-keeping and evaluation of the parent plants.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 6: 119-138. 2 fig. Dec, 1918.— The methods followed at the plant-breeding station of Eckendorf near Bielefeld, Germany, in the collection and recording of field data on breeding-plats with field crops are described in this article. The several observations may be grouped as follows: (a) pedigree work; (b) observations on growing plants, harvest data, and plans of selection plats; (c) notes taken during selection work; (d) behavior of the characters in the various strains and families; and (e) guide to working methods, diary of work per- formed, meteorological data, and germination tests.— Numerous specimen observation and breeding forms specially arranged for recording various data on the cereal grasses, legumes, and fibers, are included. — H. M. Steece. 892. H(arland), S. C. The new theory of the origin of Sea Island cotton. Agric. News (Barbados) 19: 100-101. 1920.— "Facts suggest that Sea Island cotton originated from a nat- ural cross between a glabrous, broad-leaved West Indian native, with botanical affinities to G. brasiliense, and some variety of American Upland." Author crossed a West Indian native cotton of this type with an American Upland and obtained an Fi which was morphologically almost indistinguishable from Sea Island and had fine silky lint more than 40 mm. long. Sev- eral Fa plants also resembled Sea Island. "Actual reconstruction of Sea Island cotton by this means has not been accomplished" but West Indian native type comprises many dif- ferent strains. "Synthesis of Sea Island cotton could probably only be effected as a result of the segregation of some rare gametic combination." — T. H. Kearney. 893. Harrison, J. W. Heslop. A preliminary study of the effects of administering ethyl alcohol to the lepidopterous insect Selenia bilunaria, with particular reference to the offspring. Jour. Genetics 9: 39-52. Dec, 1919.— High mortality resulted from raising this insect, from egg to adult, in alcohol fumes. The one male and four females that survived this treatment were crossed with controls. Offspring from these crosses (100 eggs used) were "greatly superior in several respects" to the controls; namely, in regard to viability of the eggs and larvae, rate of development, pupal weight, and vigor (shown by pigmentation). In spite of the small numbers, the author feels certain that these results are real, more especially since Pearl's work with fowls seems to offer support. Pearl's hypothesis of the selective effect of the alcohol treatment is explained at length.— £^. C. MacDowell. 894. Harrison, J. W. Heslop. The inheritance of melanism in the genus Tephrosia fEctropis) with some consideration of the inconstancy of unit characters under crossing. Jour. Genetics 10: 61-86. S fig. July, 1920.— In crosses within limits of species T. crepuscu- laria, inheritance of melanism proceeds on ordinary Mendelian lines. On the contrary, in 134 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, interspecific crosses between T. crepuscularia and T. bistortata a nondescript series of inter- grades results in F2 in respect to this same character. Thus, what behaves as a single unit character in one cross shows itself highly inconstant in another, owing, author believes, to "contamination of the gametes." This difference is intunately connected with inability of chromosomes in wider crosses to play their normal parts, owing to "incompatibility." If genetic factors may thus be modified by hybridization, possibility of their modification by other agents seems not excluded. — F. B. Sumner. 895. Hartman, Carl G. The free-martin and its reciprocal: Opossum, man, dog. Sci- ence 52: 46&-471. Nov. 12, 1920.— The author describes very briefly an intersexual opossum: "externally, normal penis, empty scrotum, small malformed pouch, head rather like that of a female; internally, reproductive organs distinctly of the female type, infantile in devel- opment, consisting of vaginal canals, uteri. Fallopian tubes, and small round bodies in the situation of the ovaries." These bodies consisted of a thin albuginea, and a mass of tubules of uniform size consisting apparently of Sertoli cells only.— The history of the specimen was not known. The author, arguing from analogy, interprets it as a "reciprocal free-martin"; i.e., a sex-intergrade zygotically male, which in its ontogeny develops female characters. He points out the opportunity that exists in the crowded pregnant uterus of the opossum for anastomosis of foetal circulations, which might account for such a condition if the female of a fused pair developed sex hormones in advance of the male. Fusion of placentae has been observed in dog embryos by Evans; and Eschricht describes a case of fused placentae in a case of two-sexed human twins in which the male was similar to the opossum described above, and the female was normal. The principles involved are considered to throw much light on the entire subject of hermaphroditism in mammals. — Frank R. Lillie. 896. Hendrickson, H. C. . The selection of seed corn in Porto Rico. Porto Rico Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 18. 22 p., 7 fig. Sept. 2, 1920.— Intended as a practical guide to farmers. Contains no new methods. [See also Bot. Absts 7, Entry 614.]— .E. E. Barker. 897. Henry, A. Sports and varieties of trees : A new sport of the lime tree. Gard. Chron. 68: 180. Oct. 9, 1920.— A large secondary branch of Tilia vulgaris bore leaves which were white with rare patches of green. The white leaves yielded to alcohol less than one-twen- tieth of the chlorophyll found in normal leaves. — John Belling. 898. Herlant, Maurice. L'acide carbonique comme agent de parthenogenese experi- mentale chez I'^oursin (Paracentrotus). [Carbonic acid as an agent of experimental partheno- genesis in the sea-urchin (Paracentrotus).] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 83: 188-190. 1920.— Delage found eggs of sea-urchin, unlike those of starfish, were not activated by exposure for an hour to sea water saturated with carbon dioxide. Author obtains development in sea- urchin egg by exposing it to carbon dioxide one and one-half to two minutes, returning to sea water for 20 to 30 minutes, then putting into hypertonic solution equal time. He conceives first treatment to activate egg as whole, second to produce asters by which division is effected. — A. Franklin Shull. 899. Hovasse, R. Le nombre des chromosomes chez les tetards parthenogenetiques de grenouille. [The number of chromosomes in parthenogenetic tadpoles of the frog.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1211-1216. May, 1920. 900. Hume, A. N., M. Champlin, and M. Fowlds. The influence of length of wheat heads on resulting crops. South Dakota Agric. Sta. Bull. 187: 139-158. 1919.— Twelve hun- dred plants of Bluestem wheat were grown under nearly identical conditions. From these, two hundred and sixty were selected, having as nearly as possible the same number of stools —the reason for this selection being that stooling differences should be eliminated as a factor, if possible. The length of the central head of each plant was measured. From each of those heads twenty seeds were selected at random and were planted at uniform spaces in individual head-rows. The yield of grain from each row was recorded and correlated with the length No. 2, March, 1921] GENETICS 135 of the mother head. A slight positive correlation (r = 0.17 ± 0.04) was found. — Seed was preserved from these head-rows and was planted in similar rows the following year, and a correlation coefficient determined for yields of rows and length of the original mother heads. There was found to be no correlation in the second, third, fourth or fifth generations after the selection of the original mother heads. — These results show that the length of the cen- tral spike cannot be considered as an indicator of the relative yielding-ability of mother plants. — A. N. Wilcox. 901. Ibsen, Heman L. Tricolor inheritance. IV. The triple allelomorphic series in guinea-pigs. Genetics 4: 597-606. Nov., 1919. — Presentation of data on 19 of the 21 possible matings corroborating theory of triple allelomorphism of complete (E), partial (e*^), and no (e) extension of black or chocolate pigment. Also data are given on litter size and sex ratio for the various matings. Departures from the expected ratios are found and explanations are suggested. — P. W. Whiting. 902. Jordan, Edwin O. The differentiation of the paratyphoid enteritidis group. Jour. Infectious Diseases 26: 427-434. May, 1920. — Article is based on the results of 6 years' obser- vation. A culture, isolated from human blood, supposedly paratyphoid-B type, at first gave typical cultural reactions (especially on sugars) and agglutination. Twelve colonies regrown from the plating of the original culture displayed varying characteristics in the fer- mentation of carbohydrates, end products, agglutination, and absorption of heterologous immune serum; this is shown in several tables. Author concludes that substrains differing from the parent strain are not only possible, but most frequent; this is proven both in vivo et in vitro. — The limits of variability were not determined. — Andrew I. Dawson. 903. Kalt, B. Der Begriff "Originalsaatgut" und seine Anwendung bei der Ziichtungs- anerkennung. [The concept "Original seed" and its application in the recognition of breeding.) Fiihlings Landwirtsch. Zeit. 1919: 460-471. 1919. — Much confusion is found concerning conceptions of "Original seed." That seed which is first offered for sale as the product of a well-planned system of breeding, and which is produced by the breeder or under his super- vision is called "Original seed." Author emphasizes the need of organizations adopting uniform rules and regulations for the inspection and certification of such seed. [See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 619.]— C. M. Woodworth. 904. Kniep, H. [German rev. of: Burger, Owen F. Sexuality in Cunninghamella. Bot. Gaz. 68: 134-146. Aug., 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2097.)] Zeitschr. Bot. 12: 518-520. 1920. 905. Law, S. C. An albino bulbul. Avic. Mag. 11:111-112. July, 1920.— An albino specimen of the black Indian bulbul was found in a nest with another youngster of the usual color. According to the description and colored plate the albino was pure white and pink- eyed. — Sai-ah VH. Jones. 906. Lecaillon, A. Sur la reproduction et le developpement des bivoltins accidentels et de la premiere generation qui en derive, chez le Bombyx du Miirier. [On the production and development of accidental bivoltins and the first generation derived from them in the silkworm (Bombyx mori).] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 168: 366-368. 1919.— The author has shown previously (Compt. Rend. 165: 603 et 683, 1917), that accidental bivoltin eggs appearing in races of univoltins undergo a change of color from yellow to white, the embryos developing within ten days in place of ten months. — To study the history of accidental bivoltins further, the author selected five pairs of accidental bivoltin moths. These oviposited in the summer of 1917, the eggs hatching in the spring of 1918, simultaneously with eggs of uni- voltin parents oviposited two months earlier. — In the next generation, descendants differed with different females. — In one case, bivoltins were produced, in a second case, although eggs became white as with bivoltins, some eggs only hatched, eggs that failed to hatch becoming rose-color (arrested development). In a third case some eggs were univoltin and some 136 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, bivoltin, the latter hatching at once. Females of the fourth and fifth pair produced uni- voltins only. All bivoltin moths of 1918 produced yellow eggs which hatched in the spring of 1919. — Thus while in the typical univoltin race only one kind of egg exists, in the acci- dental bivoltins there are two kinds, summer eggs and winter eggs, the latter hibernating. — Accidental bivoltins, therefore, do not transmit wholly and immediately to all their descend- ants the aptitude to produce alternatingly summer and winter eggs, but to a certain num- ber only. J'he new character appearing in bivoltins is not, therefore, represented by a mutation in the de Vriesian sense. — Isabel McCracken. 907. Lehmann, Ernst. Neuere Oenotherenarbeiten. (Sammelreferat II). [New work with Oenothera. (Composite review).] Zeitschr. Bot. 12:61-85. U fig- 1920.— Paper is second of a series of composite reviews of the latest Oenothera literature, the first having appeared in 1917 (loc. cit., 10:517), and presents in an extended discussion amplified by original diagrams the work of Atkinson, Bartlett, Davis, Kranichfeld, Lotsy, Renner, and DE Vries (1915-1920) in so far as the investigations of these authors throw new light upon the two chief questions:— (1) Is Oe. Lamarckiana a hybrid or a pure species? (2) How do mutations appear and thus build up new species in the genus Oenothera? — The following classification of recent investigations is also included: (1) de Vries, evidence obtained from crossing, (a) The establishment of the hypothesis of heterogamy; (b) Twin hybrids. (2) Honing, anatomical evidence upon the hybrid nature of Oe. Lamarckiana. (3) Heribert- NiLSSON, the red-nerve factor and the impossibility of its existence in a homozygous con- dition. (4) Bartlett, mass-mutation in Oe pratincola. (5) Renner, sterile seed and selec- tive pollen-tube growth. (6) Lutz. Gates, Stomps et al., chromosome counts in gigas and lata forms. — Paul A. Warren. 908. Linhart, G. a. A new and simplified method for the statistical interpretation of biometrical data. Univ. California Publ. Agric. Sci. 4: 159-181. 12 fig. 1920.— Graphic method of fitting Gaussian and Galton-McAlister frequency curves. Use of latter urged when deviations are large in comparison with mean. — Raymond Pearl. 909. LiPPiNCOTT, Wm. a. Improving mongrel farm flocks through selected standard- bred cockerels. Kansas Agric. Sta. Bull. 223. 48 p., 30 fig. Jan., 1920.— Four pens, ten each, of mongrel females were mated respectively with a standard-bred White Orpington male, a standard-bred Barred Plymouth Rock male, a standard-bred South Carolina White Leghorn male, and an unselected mongrel male. Standard-bred males in most cases had high-laying pedigree. In second year, offspring from these matings were again bred in same numbers to other males of same varieties. This was repeated with second generation. Decided improvement in laying qualities was obtained through the Plymouth Rock and White Leghorn males. Through the mongrel males nearly as good results were obtained. The White Orpington males produced no improvement. Latter is explained through lack of pedigree in standard-bred males. In all cases fair uniformity in type and color was obtained by the third generation through the standard-bred males. Laying records are given for those offspring only that were selected for mating. — H. G. May. 910. Little, C. C. Note on the occurrence of a probable sex-linked lethal factor in mam- mals. Amer. Nat. 54:457-460. Sept.-Oct., 1920.— The sex ratio of a highly inbred strain of Japanese waltzing mice, all descendants of one pair of individuals, was 53.2 ± 5.7, while that for inbred non-waltzing mice was 103.1 ± 2.8, a difference in the ratios of 7.9 times the probable error. Further expected results were obtained in the number of males resulting from reciprocal crosses of waltzing by non-waltzing stock. Data obtained from back-crosses of the lethal-carrying females on Fi's of normal by waltzing and the litter size of a pure strain of waltzing mice, were also in keeping with the assumed recessive sex-linked lethal. Pre- liminary report. — Sarah VH. Jones. 911. Little, C. C. Factors influencing the growth of a transplantable tumor in mice. Jour. Exp. Zool. 31: 307-326. Oct. 5, 1920.— The tumor used in the experiments was found as a spontaneous growth in a strain of Japanese waltzing mice by Tyz?er. It had been No. 2, March, 19211 GENETICS 137 propagated by continued inoculation for 40 implant-generations, during seven years.— 675 mice were used, of two kinds, common domestic mice of European strains, and animals which had one European parent and one Fi, European X Japanese, parent. It had been found previously that the susceptibility to the transplanted tumor of the Japanese parent was completely dominant in the Fi. Genetic analysis of the genes responsible for this dif- ference in susceptibility will be published later. Author states presence of several factors necessary to produce susceptibility. Among animals of the Fi X European class there is therefore great genotypic diversity. In this paper the whole Fi X European class is treated statistically and its susceptibility compared to the pure European class. In this latter class 11.12 per cent of the observations made showed positive tumor-growth, in the Fi X European class, 17.54 per cent of the observations were positive. In this class there was found a dis- tinct difference in tolerance for tumor-growth between younger and older mice of female sex. Certain factors of the Japanese genotype must in some cases, even when separated, exert a favorable influence upon temporary growth of tumor. The Japanese strain, which was found to possess twelve to fourteen independent genes absent from European mice and favoring growth of a different tumor if present in combination was found to be remarkably pure. (The Japanese waltzer is a variety of the common Oriental domestic mouse, which is zoologically quite different from MurS mtisculus and is probably derived from Mus wagneri Ret.) — A. L. Hagedoorn. 912. Llotd-Jones, O., and J. M. Evvard. Studies on color in swine. I. The heredi- tary relationship of the black of the Hampshire and the red of the Duroc-Jersey. Iowa Agric. Sta. Res. Bull. 53: 203-208. 1919.— Authors point out that while the white of Yorkshires or Chester-Whites is completely dominant to the black of Berkshires or Poland-Chinas, a blue roan generally with a white belt results when a Hampshire (black with white belt) is crossed with a Chester-White. They also point out that while the Berkshires or Poland-Chin as crossed with red breeds (Duroc-Jerseys or Tamworths) give red animals with black patches, black animals sometimes having white belts are produced when Hampshires are crossed with Duroc-Jerseys. Evidence is also given to prove that in the last-mentioned cross black is a simple dominant. — H. L. Ibsen. 913. MacCubdt, H. M. Division, nuclear reorganization and conjugation in Arcella vul- garis. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21:111-113. 1919.— The number of daughter cells produced by a single individual is limited, and varies from none to twenty-seven. The mem- bers of a pair of ex-conjugants tend to produce the same number of daughter cells at about the same rate. In lines derived from a single individual, "depression" periods and conjuga- tion occur at intervals of from four to six weeks; while some members of a line are depressed, others undergo conjugation. Individuals may pass successfully through a period of depres- sion and enter upon a new period of division. Preparations of cells made during the time of depression show the vegetative nuclei inactive or breaking up, and "secondary" nuclei form- ing from part of the chromidial net. Preparations of conjugating individuals show remark- ably similar conditions. In many cases, the secondary nuclei have been observed to enter daughter cells, while the old vegetative nuclei remain in the old shell. If the nuclei consti- tute the germ-plasm, its continuity is interrupted at the time the old vegetative nuclei cease to divide and begin to disintegrate, and the secondary nuclei are organized from the chromidial net and pass into the daughter cells. If chromidiogamy occurs at the time of conjugation, as is maintained, nuclear continuity is still interrupted, and is only secured in the process of construction of new nuclei out of the chromidial net. There is thus a discontinuity of nuclei with a nuclear cycle of development. If the nuclei are successively similar at corresponding stages, the lines run true; if not, variations due to their dissimilarities are produced.- Bertram G. Smith. 914. Macoun, W. T., and M. B. Davis. Progress in apple breeding for the Canadian prairies. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 1919: 13-18. 1919.— The Canadian prairies are situ- ated between 49° and 53° north latitude and between 97° and 114° west longitude. Altitudes range from 700 feet to 4200 feet. Spring is early; buds swell in April. Summers are rela- 138 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, tively warm. Winter begins the last of October and winter temperatures are sometimes — 40° to — 50° or lower. The most trying times for trees are ( 1 ) Spring ; severe frosts after buds swell are frequent and kill all growth. (2) Late autumn or early winter when trees are badly frozen while foliage is still on. (3) Winter. Long-continued spells of severe cold. All these factors require closer investigation. It has been found difficult and practically impossible over most of the area to bring commercial varieties of apples to bearing age. — For the past 30 years many varieties have been tested at Experiment Stations and by individuals in Mani- toba, Saskatchewan and Alberta, but few trees have borne and, when they have, they have not lived long afterwards. Seedlings of Pyrus baccata from seeds obtained in Russia were dis- tributed to Brandon, Manitoba, and Indian Head, Saskatchewan, in 1890. These proved hardy and fruited well in 1894. Crossing in the hope of increasing size and quality while still retaining hardiness was begun in 1894. With Pyrus baccata and Pyrus prunifolia as pistillate parents and 21 varieties as pollen parents, 800 seedlings were grown from the crosses. These were distributed in 1902 to various places at altitudes from 740 to 4200 feet. At the lower elevations in southern Manitoba most of the trees proved hardy and, had the fruit been larger, would have been satisfactory; but at higher altitudes only two of the 17 best proved hardy in exposed places. These two are named Columbia and Osman. Columbia is from the cross Pyrus baccata X Broad Green, a summer Russian variety. Osman is from the cross Pyrus baccata X Osimoe, which is also a Russian variety ripening in August. In 1904 Dr. Saunders recrossed the best of the first generation crosses, using 18 varieties of apples, still with the hope of increasing size and quality and retaining hardiness. There were 407 trees obtained from these second crosses the first of which fruited in 1910. Most of the trees were grown at Ottawa and fruits have been described from 223 of them. The fruit of 171 or 76.68 per cent was under two inches in diameter, or little or no larger than fruit from Fi crosses. The fruit of 48 or 21.52 per cent was between 2 and 21 inches and three bore fruits between 2J and 2^ inches. One bore fruit 2.62 inches in diameter. Fruits of most second generation crosses have long slender stems, thin tender skin and the crisp breaking flesh characteristic of crabs. From the very few Fi generation which proved hardy under the most trying conditions, it is doubtful if any second generation seedlings will prove hardy in the high altitudes, but several have fruited at Morden, Manitoba, and it is hoped that some of them will extend the area over which apples may be grown. — Details are given of some of the second gener- ation crosses and it is shown that Pioneer (Pyrus baccata X Tetofsky) X Mcintosh gives a higher percentage of comparatively large apples and higher percentages of fruit of good quality and high color than when Ontario, Northern Spy, or Cranberry Pippin are used as pollen parents. — Results lead to the conclusion that in breeding for quality it is necessary to choose as one of the parents a variety possessing the desired character developed to the highest possible perfection. From experience to date, production of varieties hardy enough to survive the test of the Canadian prairies, by methods thus far used is regarded as doubtful. It is proposed in future work to use Pyrus baccata as the male rather than as the female parent as it is believed a large percentage of the Fi crosses will be apples of marketable size and at least a few of them may prove hardy. — C. S. Crandall. 915. Marshall, F. R. Some experiences in breeding range sheep. National Wool Grower 8: 35-37. Jan., 1918.— A description of some of the work of the Bureau of Animal Industry at Laramie, Wyoming. Comparison is made of the lambing and shearing records of Rambouillet, Lincoln-Merino crossbreds and Corriedales under range conditions. The records indicate that very fine wool is usually associated with shorter staple and lighter fleece. — G. F. Finlay. 916. McEwEN, Geo. F., and Ellis, L. Michael. The functional relation of one variable to each of a number of correlated variables determined by a method of successive approxima- tion to group averages: A contribution to statistical methods. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts Sci. 55:95-133. Dec, 1919.— The authors attempt to develop a method of multiple regression independent of any assumption as to form of regression lines. Material is grouped with respect to each independent variable, and simultaneous equations formed expressing group No. 2, March, 1921] GENETICS 139 averages of dependent variables when all but one independent variable are held constant. These equations may be solved directly, but authors prefer method of successive approxima- tion. Corrections are also obtained for variability within the group. — John Rice Miner. 917. Meunissier, A. Observations faites a Verrieres par Philippe de Vilmorin, sur le caractere "Hile noir" chez le pois. [Observations made at Verrieres by Philippe de Vilmorin on the character "black-eye" in the pea.] Jour. Genetics 10: 53-60. July, 1920. — Most peas have seeds with uncolored hilums or "eyes." Several varieties of black-eyed peas are de- scribed. Black-eye X "white-eye" gives black-eye in Fi and 3 black-eye: 1 white-eye in F2 (TscHERMAK and Vilmorin). Exceptional results sometimes obtained, such as some black- eyed progeny from crosses between two white-eyed varieties. Occurrence of plants from such crosses with both black-eyed and white-eyed seeds in same pod or on same plant. Acci- dental crossing responsible for some cases, but not when both kinds are on same plant. A cross between uncolored seed-coats X garnet (reddish brown) seed-coats, produced in about the Fs generation a few seeds with purple seed-coats (fluctuating unfixable character). Three years later this purple-seed-coat race produced black- and "white-eyed" peas on the same plants. Association of purple and "garnet" in same seed-coat gives appearance of black. Purple seed-coat color and black eye tend to be genetically associated in some peculiar man- ner. Tables showing observations given. Totals show 615 black-eyed seeds gave 407 progeny with violet seeds to 208 plants with non-violet seeds; 562 white-eyed seeds produced by the same plants from which the 615 black-eyed seeds came, gave 58 progeny with violet seeds to 504 with non-violet seeds. — Orland E. White. 918. Meunissier, A. De quelques idees sur la selection des legumes. [Some ideas on the selection of vegetables.] Rev. Hort. 91:300-303. June, 1919.— Popular discussion of pure lines, genotypes, phenotypes, and modern ideas of selection in relation to horticulture.— Orland E. White. 919. Morgan, T. H. Castration of hen-feathered Campines. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 17: 70. 1920.— The results were the same as with hen-feathered Seabrights; namely, the development of male plumage following the operation. — H. D. Goodale. 920. Morgan, T. H. The endocrine secretion of hen-feathered fowls. Endocrinology 4: 381-385. 5 fig. July-Sept., 1920.— A restatement of the author's findings that in Sea- brights, and Campines, the hen-feathered condition depends upon the presence of luteal cells both in the ovary and testes. — H. D. Goodale. • 921. Morgan, T. H. Whitman's work on the evolution of the group of pigeons. [Rev. of: Whitman, Charles Otis, 1919. Posthtmious works of, edited by Oscar Riddle. Carnegie Inst. Publ. No. 257. 3 vol.] Science 51: 73-80. Jan. 23, 1920.— Reviewer finds no real con- tradictions between the results of Whitman, or even his interpretations, and the idea of discon- tinuity or mutation. Unit characters, when their development and manifestations are inter- preted from the standpoint of chemistry, need not be so absurd as Whitman conceived them to be. Since any or all steps in ontogeny may be modified by a single factor. Whitman seems to have put undue emphasis upon ontogenetic development in his interpretation of phylogenetic relationships. — H. G. May. 922. Nevens, W. B. Breed and size of cows as factors affecting the economy of milk production. Jour. Dairy Sci. 2:99-107. 3 fig. 1919.— A ratio, based on the geometrical theorem that the surface of two solids of similar shape are to each other as the squares of the cubes of their weights, is worked out to show the relation between the maintenance require- ments of animals of different weights. Thus the maintenance requirements of a cow of known weight being available, the maintenance requirements of cows of any known weight may be calculated.— A study of the records, weights and feed consumption of the cows used in the Wisconsin cow competition indicates that the larger cows of the Holstein, Guernsey and Jersey breeds consumed less feed in proportion to size than did the smaller cows. Also the 140 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, larger cows were more economical producers than the smaller cows. The Holsteins of the heaviest class produced 29.2 pounds more milk for each 100 feed-units than did the Holsteins of the lightest class, while the largest Guernseys produced 20.5 pounds more milk than the lightest class, and the heaviest-class Jerseys produced 21 pounds more milk per 100 feed- units consumed than the lightest class. The larger animals are also shown to be more eco- nomical producers of total solids and butter-fat than the smaller animals. — The Holsteins in this contest were the most efficient producers of milk and total solids, while the Guernseys and Jerseys were the most efficient producers of butter-fat. — R. R. Graves. 923. Onslow, H. Inheritance of wing colour in Lepidoptera IV. Melanism in Boarnia abietaria. Jour. Genetics 10: 135-140. / pi. Aug., 1920. — Inheritance of melanism was previously described by author in related species, — Tephrosia consonaria and Bosnaria con- sortaria. These three species are confined to Kent and Surrey (with another melanic variety Tephrosia extensaria (luridata)). [Onslow, Jour, of Genetics, 9: 53, 339. Dec. 1919, Mar. 1920.] In melanic form has wings of female uniform velvety black, of male, slightly browner, distal streak and veins traced in deeper black, otherwise unmarked. Type strain varies in color and markings from very dark to golden brown. Females slightly darker than males. — Character of matings made: Melanic X melanic, where one parent at least was homozygous (DD X DD (DR) ; melanic X melanic where both parents were heterozygotes (DR X DR) ; melanic X type where melanic parent was homozygous (DD X RR); melanic X type where melanic parent was heterozygous (DR X RR). In each of these crosses the melanic parent behaves as a simple Mendelian dominant to type forms. In a certain brood from melanic X type, the male parent being comparatively very light, light offspring and melanics appeared in equal numbers as expected, the light offspring appearing lighter than in other strains but not so light as male parent. — Results in agreement with conclusions of Bowers ^Ent. Rec. 11: 82, 1899), and Stallman (Ent. Rec. 28: 21, 1916) in experimental breeding of melanics. — Isabel McCracken. 924. [Pearson, Karl.] Peccavimus. Biometrika 12: 259-281. Nov., 1919.— This paper cites certain errors which have crept into publications of biometrical formulae. The cor- rections are indicated. — John W. Gowen. . 925. Pennypacker, J. Y. Observations on the beach plum. A study in plant variation. Contrib. Bot. Lab. Univ. Pennsylvania 4: 231-270. PI. 66-70. 1920.— Author is impressed with marked variation in the beach plum {Prunus maritima) and suggests that this species is undergoing mutational variation along several lines due to environmental factors. Primi- tive color is supposed to have been greenish yellow or red. Through transformation of chloroplastids to chromoplastids pure yellow fruits arose along one evolutionary line. Development of purple and then blue considered another line. Reference is made to Bur- bank's hybridization work with P. maritima. Detailed description is given of nine varie- ties of the species of interest especially to taxonomists. — James P. Kelly. 926. Pridham, J. T. Breeding cereals at the experiment farms. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 697-698. 1920. — Summary is given of plant-breeding work and nursery trials at several of the experimental farms. — L. R. Waldro7i. 927. PuNNETT, R. C. The early elimination of surplus cockerels. Jour. Bd. Agric, London 25: 1319-1323. 1 fig. 1919.— Author shows how appropriate crosses of races of poultry, involving sex-linked factors which manifest themselves in the down, make it possible to distinguish the sex of the offspring at hatching. Suggests possible practical applications. — William A. Lippincott. 928. Richardson, C. W. Some notes on Fragaria. Jour. Genetics 10:39-46. 2 fig. July, 1920. The work is a continuation of that published in the same Journal 3 : No. 3, 1914, and 7: No. 3, 1918. [See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 494.] The results of certain crosses are given with regard to the inheritance of flower color, double flowering, shape of foliage, variegation in No. 2, March, 1921] GENETICS 141 foliage, fruit flavors, size of fruit, runners and sex. Pink flowers and doubleness were found ta be dominant over white flowers and singleness. Because of its heterozj'gous condition with regard to leaf shape Fragaria grandiflora is considered to be a hybrid of F. chiloensis or chinensis and virginiana. Crosses of 9 X cT or 9 have thus far given 203 9 and 173 d" or 9.—W. D. Valleau. 929, RiCHEY, Frederick D. The inequality of reciprocal corn crosses. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12:186-196. 1920.— Reciprocal crosses between varieties or strains of maize are sometimes unequal. Possible causes of such inequalities are suggested as a difference in the food materials furnished the young plants by the different maternal parents and a difference in germinal reactions with different cytoplasms. The experiments show that some type of sex-linked inheritance must at least be considered as a possible cause of inequality between reciprocal maize crosses, by the unequal transmission from No. 199 as staminate and as pistillate parent.— F. M. Scherti. '130. RiEBESELL, P. Einige zahlenkritische Bemerkungen zu den Mendelschen Regeln. [Some remarks critical of ratios in Mendelian inheritance.] Biol. Zentralbl. 38 : 329-.340. Aug., 1918.— An investigation of the criteria for goodness of fit of theoretical Mendelian ratios to be observed. On any given hypothesis as to relation of hereditary factors to exter- nal characters, number of factors may be found by mathematical process. Thus if one 3" _ n, character occurs only with presence of all factors, equation will be: ^„_^„ - ~ where to - number of factors, Ux and ni = observed frequencies of alternate characters, whence m = log n - log ni ^^^ ^ ^^ ^ ^^^^ ^^^ probability of two hypothetic ratios may be compared log 4 —log 3 in several ways: (1) by their deviation from the observed; (2) by the ratios of these devia- tions to their standard deviation; (3) by the probabilities that the theoretical ratios shall be found in a population in which the observed ratio has occurred; (4) by the ratio of the prob- ability of the observed to that of the most probable value; (5) by the probability of a deviation .ns great as or greater than that of the observed from the theoretical. For small numbers of observations no one ratio can be picked out as the only likely one. All criteria depend on assumption of Gaussian distribution, which is violated by hypothesis of linkage and other extensions of Mendelian theory. Where more than one hypothesis is admitted by criteria, ratios in F3 will often determine right hypothesis.— Jo^n Rice MiJier. 931. Salaman, R. N. The technique of cross-fertilization in potatoes. Potato Mag. 3: 8, 12, 26. 1 fig. 1920.— Brief description is made of female and male organs of potato flowers and difficulties encountered in cross-fertilizing are mentioned. Instruments and materials required in crossing are given and the various operations of selecting buds, sterilizing, emas- culating, labeling, covering, pollinating, protecting seed in field, harvesting and extracting seed, sowing seed and growing seedlings are described in detail. A simple and less certain method is also described as well as operations required in self-fertilizing. Successful fer- tilizations are never more than 5 per cent of individual blossoms treated.— Richard Wellington. 932. Salaman, R. N., and J. W. Lesley. Genetic studies in potatoes. The inheritance of an abnormal haulm type. Jour. Genetics 10: 21-38. 4 pi. July, 1920.— Two distinct types of potato stems were found and named respectively "prostrate" and "procumbent." The former differed mainly from the normal in that the stems were either deficient or entirely wanting in interfascicular secondary growth, consisting mostly of xylem, and in that upright habit of growth was absent. The latter seemed to be an intermediate between "prostrate" and "upright" varieties, as it resembled the "prostrate" in stem structure and the "upright" in growth habit. In a study of the inheritance of the "prostrate" habit, it was found to be- have as a recessive character, the ratios indicating that it differed from the "upright" in at least two and probably three factors. No correlation was found between the "prostrate" habit and other characters. — Richard Wellington. 142 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 933. Salmon, E. S. On forms of the hop (Humulus lupulus L., and H. americanus Nutt.) resistant to mildew (Sphaerotheca humuli (D. C.) Burr.). IV. Ann. Appl. Biol. 6: 293-310. 1920. — In continuation of studies previously published the author now reports three groups of hop plants immune or resistant to hop mildew (-S. humuli). Group 1 comprises several forms of a variety having yellowish-green leaves and known as the "Golden Hop." A female form is immune and a male form is susceptible to the attacks of mildew both when grown in a greenhouse and in the open. Another female form of this type is slightly susceptible to this fungus in the greenhouse only. — Group 2 comprises individual seedlings of the wild hop (H. lupulus) raised from seed obtained from Vittorio, Italy. Certain individuals proved to be immune, others highly susceptible to mildew. It is stated that the seedlings which are immune when grown in the greenhouse may, when grown in the open, show susceptibility, which as a rule is slight. The conclusion is drawn that different seedlings have distinctive physiological or constitutional characters, which are constant under the same environment and confer immunity or susceptibility upon the respective seedlings.— Group 3 comprises a male form of H. americanus which is immune to mildrew when grown in a greenhouse. Under the same conditions several American cultivated varieties proved susceptible.— TT^ W. Stockberger. 934. Skupienski, F.-X. Sur la sexualite chez les Champignons Myxomycetes. [On sexuality in the Myxomycetes.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 167: 31. July, 1918. 935. Slocum, Rob R. Selection and care of poultry breeding stock. Bur. Anim. Ind., Farmers Bull. 1116. 10 p., 6 fig. 1920.— Practical suggestions concerning management of a breeding stock. — William A. Lippincott. 936. Slonaker, James R. Some morphological changes for adaptation in the mole. Jour. Morphol. 34:335-372. 4 pi. 1920.— In adaptation to fossorial habits, the sternum, pectoral girdle and fore-limbs of the American mole, Scalops aquaticus, have been greatly enlarged and modified, thus increasing the size of the anterior part of the body. To allow the enlarged anterior part of the body to pass the posterior part when the animal turns in its burrow, the pelvic girdle has been very much reduced in diameter. The reduction in the size of the pelvis has so narrowed the pelvic outlet that it is impossible for the urogenital and alimentary tracts to pass through it and still function; this necessitates their passage outside the bony arch— a condition very unusual in mammals. The eyes are so degenerate that they are doubtless able to function only in perceiving the difference between light and darkness. To compensate for the deficiency in sight, special tactile organs have been devel- oped on the snout and on the margins of the fore-feet.— Bertram G. Smith. 937. Steinach, E. Verjiingung durch experimentelle Neubelebung der Alternden Pubertatsdriise. [Rejuvenation through experimental revitilization of the senile sex glands.] 68 p., 9 pi. Julius Springer: Berlin, 1920. 938. Thomson, J. A. Modern study of heredity. [Rev. of: Morgan, Thomas Hunt. The physical basis of heredity. 14 X 21 cm., SOO p., 117 fig. J. B. Lippincott Co. : Philadel- phia, 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 422.) Jour. Roy. Microsc. Soc. 1920: 354-357. Sept., 1920. 939. Tischler, G. Ueber die sogenannten "Erbsubstanzen" und ihre Lokalisation in der Pflanzenzelle. [On the so-called hereditary substances and their localization in the plant cell.] Biol. Zentralbl. 40: 15-28. 1920.— Resume of literature on composition and behavior of chromosomes in relation to their function as bearers of Mendelian hereditary factors. Discussion of their chemical composition, cytological behavior and their role in heredity.— E. G. Anderson. 940. van de Weyer, W. Hybrid Buddleias. Card. Chron. 68: 181. 1 fig. Oct. 9, 1920.— An account of hybrids of B. globosa with B. variabilis magnifica, and with B. Mada- gascariensis. Segregations as to foliage, color, seed characters, fertility and fragrance are briefly indicated. — J. M. Shull. No. 2, xMarch, 19211 HORTICULTURE 143 941. Whipple, O. B. Line selection work with potatoes. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 543-573. Sept., 1920. — Data are given on the performance of numerous hill selections made within the Russet Burbank, Rural New Yorker, Green Mountain, and Early Six Weeks potato varieties. The results show that selection is practically valueless in isolating high-yielding strains except during the first season. No definite correlation was found between number of tubers produced per plant and yield in pounds, but high-yielding plants were usually correlated with vigor and health. From the commercial standpoint, the results demonstrate the value of making selec- tions each season and of using vigor and health as an index of productiveness. — Richard Wellington. 942. WiSTER, John C. Notes on the history of the bearded iris. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21: 181-191. Oct., 1920.— A historical sketch of the various Iris breeders from the earliest recorded work to present time. All varieties cultivated prior to 1890 or 1900 were derived from two species, /. pallida and I. variegata. — J. Marion Shull. 943. Yasui, Kono. Genetical studies in Portulaca grandiflora. Bot. Mag. Tokyo 34: 55-65. 1 pi., 1 fig. 1920. — The author describes crosses between single and double races belonging to 7 color types. Doubleness is dominant. Yellow is due to a yellow flavone derivative, which in the presence of a reducing factor {R) yields a magenta anthocyanin. White races lack either the chromogen factor (C) alone or both (C) and (R). Yellow single by white single (CCrr X ccRR) gives magenta Fi (CcRr) and Fj by selfing of 9 magenta, 3 yellow, and 4 white. Hybrid double magentas (CcRrDd) by white singles (ccRRdd) give magenta doubles, magenta singles, white doubles, and white singles in equal numbers. By yellow single they give equal numbers of yellow and magenta (CcRrDd X CCrrdd = iCCRrDd : iCcRrDd : iCCRrdd : iCcRrdd : iCCrrDd : iCcrrDd : iCCrrdd : iCcrrdd). Double whites (CcRrDd) by pale yellow singles (CCrrdd) give equal numbers of magenta and yellow doubles and singles. Single scarlet by double white gives magenta double, which mated to single white gives equal numbers of magenta and white doubles and singles. The selfed singles from this give singles only; the selfed doubles, 3 doubles to 1 single. The singles mated to the doubles give 1 : 1 ratio. — L. L. Burlingame. HORTICULTURE J. H. GouRLEY, Editor FRUITS AND GENERAL HORTICULTURE 944. FiNDLAY, Hugh. The handbook for practical farmers. 558 p., 258 fig. D. Appleton & Company: New York and London, 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 609. 945. Alderman, W. H. The status of orchard fertilization experiments. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 16: 109-113. (1919) 1920.— Attention is drawn to the fact that the orchard fertilization work during the past 30 years in about 30 different experiment stations in this country has all been carried on in about the same general way. The information obtained up to the present time about which there is little contention narrows down to about four general headings; namely, (1) there are many apple orchards, growing under a wide range of conditions which do not respond to any fertilizer ; (2) orchards in sod are most likely to respond to fertilizers; (3) starved orchards give a ready response to fertilization; and (4) nitrogen in a readily available form seems to be the only element of plant-food that is uniformly a factor in the favorable responses— when such are secured. The author states, "We may readily see and safely say that a normal plant probably has a definite arrangement of conditions within itself, which fit into its functions of growth and fruitage or reproduction. It is when the arrangement is distributed that we get reduced vigor, feeble growth or lack of productive- ness." He suggests that either pruning, cultural methods, fertilization, or some combination of all of these may restore the normal optimum in the plant and produce the results desired. Instead of a fertilizer problem, the problem may be one of pruning or cultural practices, or a 144 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, combination of all. He suggests that we look into the inside of the tree rather than into the soil or other external factors. In other words, we should attempt to diagnose the trouble, and then make an attempt to discover a treatment for it. This means a need of men trained in physiology and chemistry, and of considerable laboratory work under more controlled conditions. It is suggested that, to start with, we should eliminate the error introduced by miscellaneous stocks and scions; and the writer suggests that buds or scions from a single parent tree should be worked upon root stocks, developed by cuttings or other asexual propa- gation from a single parent plant. It is suggested that in place of a "fertilizer project" we should have a "nutrition project," and that most of the old type of fertilizer experiments should be carried on as demonstrations by extension workers.— J?. C. Anchter. 946. Allen, W. J. Three new varieties of plums. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 744-745. 1920.— Two new local seedling varieties, Higgins' Seedling and Wilson's Seedling, are described; also Tucker's Beauty, originated by Ltjther Btjrbank, is described. The two local seedlings are of the cherry-plum tj'pe.- L. R. Waldron. 947. Allen, W. J., and R. G. Bartlett. Spring work for the banana grower. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 738-743. 1920.— Practical instructions are given covering selec- tion of suckers, thickness and depth of planting, pruning, and depth of cultivation.— L. R. Waldron. 948. Anonymous. Original description of the Turley apple. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917: 27. 1 pi. 1918.— The Turley apple, a seedling of the Winesap, was originated in 1900 in Lawrence County, Indiana, by Joe A. Burton, Mitchell, Indiana. A detailed description of the apple is given.— £^. C. Anchter. 949. Anonymous. Espaco entre coqueiros. [Space between coconuts.] Bol. Agric. Nova Goa [Portuguese East India] 1 : 17-19. 1919.— Considers the proper spacing of coconut palms for best results. — John A. Stevenson. 950. Anonymous. Formacion del olivo. [Shaping the olive tree.] Informacion Agric. [Madrid] 10: 148-149. Sfig. 1920.— Describes a method of pruning young olive trees to give the desired shape. — John A. Stevenson. 951. Anonymous. Grafting the mangosteen by inarching. Missouri Bot. Gard. Bull. 8: 61-63. 1920. 952. Anonymous. The elements of hardy fruit culture. [Rev. of: Staward, R. Prac- tical hardy fruit culture. 216 p. Swart hmore Press: London, 1920.] Nature 105: 545. 1920. 953. Anthony, R. D. Methods of interpreting results in orchard fertilizer experiments. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 113-117 (1919) 1920.— It is shown that many of our fertilizer experiments were planned and laid out before there was much published information on the subject. As a result, many errors were made in planning the experiments and in interpreting the results. Some points which should be noted and studied are the following: (a) Weighted results are often given without giving the methods of deriving these or the original values. (b) If four-year overlapping averages were used it would tend to smooth the yield curves and make it easier to compare the records of different plots, (c) the cultural treatment of the orchard is not always given, (d) A s'trip of sod in the tree rows of cultivated orchards should be noted, (e) The contour of the land is not always given, (f) Not only should checks be repeated, but often the different treatments, (g) Soil variations should be recorded, (h) Cross-feeding should be prevented or acknowledged, (i) The performance of a single ele- ment cannot always be detertained by subtracting the performance of a two-element plot from a three-element one. (j) There is a big variation in individual-tree performance. (k) We must not make too wide an application of a single fertilizer experiment even in the same country. (I) To find out how much variation there is between plots, without any fer- No. 2, March, 1921] HORTICULTURE 145 tilizer treatments, it would be well to keep yield records for two or, even better, three years on the different plots before applying the fertilizer. It is stated that the partial failure of some of the early experiments should not discourage the continuance of such a fundamental line of investigation, and that pomological research will be improved by the passing out of the old types of fertilizer experiment. — E. C. Auchter. 954. Auchter, E. C. Some influences of thinning, pollination, and fruit spur growthon the yearly performance record of fruit spurs and on the size of fruit produced. Proc. Amer. Soc. Kort. Sci. 16: 118-131. (1919) 1920.— Investigations in apple thinning, pollination, and fruit-spur growth were carried on from 1912 to 1919, inclusive, at the West Virginia Experi- ment Station. Results of the studies were as follows: (1) Apple-thinning experiments, car- ried on from 1912 to 1919, inclusive, show that neither the tree as a whole nor the individual fruit spurs are influenced by the removal of part of the crop so that the tree or spurs bloom again the following season. Fruit thinning, then, does not affect the annual bearing of apple trees.— (2) The size of the individual specimens left on the tree after thinning is greatly increased during the same year as a result of the removal by thinning of part of the crop. More marketable fruit is produced by the thinned trees and increased size of each apple in cases where the trees are bearing a good crop of fruit. This influence on size is lessened or lost altogether when trees are bearing light crops.— (3) The spurs on certain varieties of apples bloom more regularly than those of other varieties, but this does not mean that such spurs and varieties bear more regularly. A more likely explanation, with reference to fruit spurs only, of why certain varieties are annual bearers, is given in Nos. 7 and 8. — (4) Spurs which set fruit one year, generally do not blossom the next year. — (5) Spurs which blossom one year but do not set fruit, often blossom the next year. Others do not however. — (6) These results indicate for the varieties studied that the spurs, which blossom two years in succession make a greater yearly growth, have more leaves and a greater total leaf area in the year preceding the second successive blooming year. Such spurs have a greater total length and thus all indications show that they are more vigorous. Thus growth and vigor to a certain degree do not oppose, but rather encourage, fruitfulness. — (7) These results indi- cate that a variety is not an annual bearer because the same spurs bear in succession. They indicate that either a certain percentage of the total spurs on such varieties do not bloom in the heavy crop year and thus such spurs bloom and set fruit in the next year, or if all the spurs do bloom, a certain percentage of the spurs do not set and thus more readily bloom and set the next year.- (8) These results suggest that probably a larger proportion of the spurs on the biennial bearers not only bloom, but also set fruit in the crop year. Such spurs then do not readily bloom the next year. Observation shows that trees bearing heavy crops make very little spur growth during such years. We would expect then from No. 6 that very few spurs on such trees would bloom the following year. If greater spur growth was s,ecured on the annual bearing varieties, then, a greater proportion of spurs would bloom in the off year, especially the non-blooming spurs of the year before.— (9) Certain varieties which produce fruit yearly, form fruit buds terminally and laterally on one year old growths to such an extent that the production of fruit from these sources is often enough to class a variety as an annual bearer without reference to its fruit spurs. It is also possible that some varieties produce a higher percentage of fruit spurs yearly than do others, and as these gradually form fruit buds, some annual fruit may be produced. However, there are many so-called annual bearers that do not produce fruit by any of these methods and a more reasonable explanation of their annual bearing is given in Nos. 7 and 8. — (10) If the state- ments under Nos. 7 and 8 finally prove to be justified in later work, then the whole prob- lem of biennial and annual bearing appears to be affected to a degree by the sterility and pollination problem and is not one of growth and nutrition only. — (11) It may be possible to break up the biennial bearing of certain varieties of apples either by altering certain cultural, fertilizer, or pruning methods as suggested by different investigators, and after seeing what light certain pollination studies may throw on the problem, but at this time, we have no definite information to offer on this point, based upon investigational work of this station.— (12) There appears to be a good correlation between the weight of the indi- 146 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, vidual apples produced on a tree and the weight on seeds in each fruit. Since the number of good seeds and weight of seeds are correlated, this correlation would probably hold between weight of fruit and number of good seeds.— (13) Weather, including temperature, wind, sun- shine, etc., exerts a marked influence, through its effect on the length of the blooming period, light and bee activity, on the number of good seeds and the weight of seeds in indi- vidual'apples on a tree. More good seeds and a greater weight are produced in warm sunny seasons when the pistils are more receptive and the bees can work longer and more effec- tively.—(14) With the same crops per tree and the same cultural practices, thus keeping good vigorous spurs, the size of the individual apples of a tree should be larger in those seasons which have good weather at pollination time.— (15) If the crops per tree are much larger in certain seasons than others, then the fruit will not be larger, even though there are more good seeds and a greater weight of seeds. The correlation between weight of seeds and weight of individual apples will hold true, however, in each of the separate years.— £', C. Auchter. 955. Balme, Juan. El frambueso y su cultivo, [The raspberry and its culture.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5: 120-123. 1 fig. 1919.— A popular account of the cultivation of the rasp- berry in Mexico, including varieties recommended and uses of the iruit.— John A. Stevenson. 956. Beckwith, Charles S. The effect of fertilizers on blueberries. Soil Sci. 10:309- 313. PL 1. 1920.— Field experiments are reported, indicating that the use of fertilizers increases the yield of blueberries. With 170 pounds of sodium nitrate, 230 pounds of dried blood, 340 pounds of steamed bone, 340 pounds of phosphate rock, and 170 pounds of Nebraska potash per acre, the yield was tripled.— TF. J. Robbins. 957. Brierley, W. G. Comparison of fall, winter and spring pruning of apple trees in Minnesota. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 102-104 (1919) 1920.— Experiments were con- ducted in Minnesota to see what the effect would be of pruning apple trees during the dif- ferent months of the fall, winter, and early summer. The author concludes as follows: "The conclusions to be drawn from these observations are that pruning in fall or winter in Minnesota is not detrimental to tree vigor, maturity of shoots, hardiness of growth or wound healing, and that the tips of shoots pruned in the fall and winter do not die back more than the tips of shoots pruned at other times. Apparently the apple grower in Minnesota can prune at a time most convenient for him, just as the growers in the East, South and West are doing." — E. C. Auchter. 958. Chandler, W. H. Some results as to the response of fruit trees to pruning. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 16:88-101. (1919) 1920.— A progress report .is given of the pruning experiments now being carried on at the Cornell University Experiment Station. The general purpose of the experiment, as given, is to test systems of training for some of the different fruits. In addition to merely keeping fruit yields and top growth, other data are being taken, in order to find out if possible the fundamental activities that determine yield or top growth.— Attention is drawn to the fact that the response of a tree to dormant or early sum- mer pruning is an appearance of greater vigor. The leaves are larger and greener, and the twigs continue length growth later into the season. The general opinion is that this increased vigor is explained by the fact that a reduced number of growing points and a reduced cambial area make use of the reserve food supply of the tree. The author gives tables to show the pounds of dry weight, pounds of starch, and pounds of saccharose in the one-year twigs, older branches, trunk, large roots, and small roots of a seven-year-old Bis- marck apple tree. The total amount of starch in the one-year twigs was relatively small, and if all the twigs were removed, the reduction in total carbohydrates for the tree would be small. Yet if all the twigs were pruned off, a greatly increased vigor would result. Although there would be a slight increase in carbohydrate supply for the opening buds, after pruning, still, the author states, it does not seem probable that this slight increase in reserve carbohy- drate supply could account for the increase in vigor of twig growth, for this reserve, according to Price, is quickly exhausted. Price shows that practically all the starch disappears No. 2, March, 1921] HORTICULTURE 147 from the live tissue above ground in about eighteen days after the leaves open, and Chandler shows that the soluble carbohydrates decrease greatly as growth begins. He states that pruming on June 1 resulted in increased vigor, even though the reserve carbohydrate supply must have been nearly exhausted. It is shown that pruning reduces the leaf surface, and thus by reducing transpiration, the demand for water from the roots is reduced. By reduc- ing the number of growing points and the amount of cambial area, it should reduce the demand for mineral nutrients. The author states, "It would seem probable then that the increased vigor of top growth would continue until the reduced size of the tree would be balanced by a reduction in root growth due to the reduction in leaf surface. Thus pruning would be a dwarfing process. Experiments and tables are included to show that different branches on the same tree cannot be used in pruning experiments, because the one pruned branch would not have a fair chance or would not get the same amount of water, from the rootsy due to the reduced leaf area, if the other branches were unpruned. This tends to explain the ease with which one branch on a tree is suppressed as compared with the others by pruning. — The effect of pruning on nursery trees was studied as was also the effect of nitrogen on newly planted peach trees. Tables were included to show the effect of the pruning, necessary to secure an open head, on the leaf surface of the trees. — An experiment was also carried on in 1919 to test the influence of summer pruning. — E. C. Auchter. 959. Chevalier, Aug. Recherches sur les poiriers, noyers, chataigniers des parties froides de I'Indo-Chine et du Sud de la Chine. [Research on pears, walnuts, and chestnuts in the colder regions of Indo-China and southern China.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1335-1336. 1920. — The following species are reported as wild : Pirus Pashia, Pirus granulosa, Juglans sagillata, and Castanea Duclouxii. The cultivated forms are Pirus communis and P. Simonii and Juglans duclouxiana. — C. H. Farr. 960. CoLLisoN, R. C. A progress report of fertilizer experiments with fruits. New York Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] Bull. 477. 53 p. 1920.— Experiments M-ere conducted with apples in a nursery and in orchards, with cherries and pears in orchards, and with grapes in a vine- yard. In Baldwin apple orchards the results as regards growth and yield were erratic. The growth of Spy apple trees in the orchard was generally increased by fertilizers, but not con- sistently. There was no significant difference in color or size of fruit. The growth of apple trees in the nursery was increased by the application of fertilizers containing potassium and phosphorus, but nitrate of soda was without effect. The growth and yield of cherry trees was increased by the use of fertilizers, and there were indications that the supply of available nitrogen may be a factor of some importance in vineyards. The author concludes that, in positive results, the experiments up to date have been very disappointing. Evidently, the effects of other factors operative in the experiments have masked any results of a positive nature which may have been due to the fertilizers applied.— F. C. Stewart. 961. Cunningham, G. H. Mortality among stone fruit trees in Central Otago. New Zea- land Jour. Agric. 20: 359-364. 1920.— Excess of water is the cause of much injury in irrigated orchards. Stone-fruit trees are more susceptible than apples to such injury. Many orchards are set in soil which is too alkaline for fruit trees. Valsa Leucostoma, and Nectria cinnabarina were found as weakling parasites in some instances. — N. J. Giddings. 962. Bearing, Charles. The muscadine grapes — their culture and uses. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917: 52-59. 6 pi., 19 fig. 1918.— Attention is drawn to the fact that the musca- dine grapes were the first native American grapes to be brought under cultivation in this country and that the Scuppermong is the oldest named native, cultivated grape. The mus- cadine grapes are grown mainly in the southeast. After having briefly given the early history of the development of the muscadine grape industry, the author explained the investigational work with muscadine grapes of the United States Department of Agriculture.— A general field survey was first made to gather accurate information concerning the existing industry, and cultural experiments were started. These tests showed that (a) it is better to propa- 148 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, gate by cuttings than by layers; (b) nitrogenous fertilizer was beneficial, especially for young vines; (c) it is advantageous to practice regular plowing and harrowing; and (d) proper pruning is not only desirable but actually essential. — Pollination studies showed that the varieties were practically self-sterile and that male vines and bees were necessary for cross pollination. This question is now losing its importance, since the breeding work of the department has produced a new race of muscadine grape varieties which are perfect flowered and self-fertile. — Extensive experiments have been carried on to demonstrate the value of muscadine-grape by-products, and several have been originated. — The author summarizes his work as follows: "With the development of better cultural methods, greater and more varied utilization and the production through plant breeding of new and im- proved varieties, the Muscadine Grape industry seems to oflfer great promise of filling in the future a far more important role in American viticulture than it has in the past." — E. C. Auchter. 963. Dehn, W. M., and M. C. Taylor. A chemical method for the detection in fruit of a prior frozen condition. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12 : 977. 1920.— The method is based upon the fact that in the freezing of fruits the sucrose concentration is decreased, with an increase in the concentration of invert sugar. — Henry Schmitz. 964. DuNLAP, H. C. The California prune and apricot growers. Monthly Bull. California State Commission Hort. 8: 401-403. 1919. 965. Ellenwood, C. W., and Paul Thayer. Thinning of apples, peaches and plums. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5' : 136-140. 1920.— A brief discussion is given, including reasons for thinning and the time when the practice can be followed to the greatest advan- tage. General suggestions for thinning are given. — R. C. Thomas. 966. Evans, H. H. Report of district field inspector, Vernon. British Columbia 14th Ann. Rept. Dept. Agric. 1919: 24-25. 1920. 967. Evans, H. H. Soil-fertility and crop production. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4: 53. 1919. 968. Fisher, Hugo. Pflanzenwuchs und Kohlensaure. [Plant growth and carbonic acid.] Naturwissenschaften 8: 413-417. 1920.— See Bot. Absts., Entry 1301. 969. FoRTiER, S. Relation to orchard irrigation practice. Monthly Bull. California State Commission Hort. 7: 361-367. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1392. 970. Ginarte, Benjamin MuiJoz. Consideraciones sobre el cultivo de la pifia en Cuba. [Cultivation of the pineapple in Cuba.] Estac. Exp. Agron. Cuba Bol. 45: 1-43. 16 fig. 1919. — The writer discusses the cultivation of the pineapple in Cuba under the following heads: botanical classification, varieties, soils adapted to the culture, planting systems, propagation, time of planting, cultivation, fertilization, picking, packing, pests, yields and returns, and uses of the fruit. — John A. Stevenson. 971. Goj6n, Carlos. Trabajos ejecutados en la estacion agricola experimental para frutas tropicales, Cordoba. [Work of the experiment station for tropical fruits at Cordoba, Mexico.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5:109-112. 2 fig. 1919. A report of plantings made of varieties of Citrus Mangifera indica, Vitis, and other tropical fruits. — John A. Stevenson. 972. Grabham, Michael. The alligator pear. Nature 105:517-518. 1920.— Note on cultivation of Persea gratissima in Madeira, where it is now in general cultivation for orna- ment and fruit. From seed, the trees bear in seven to ten years, reaching full maturity in twenty. — 0. A. Stevens. No. 2, March, 1921] HORTICULTURE 149 973. Grant, J. A. Grading and packing fruit for market. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4:358-359. 1919. 974. Green, W. J., Paul Thayer, and J. B. Keil. Apples adapted for Ohio culture. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5'" : 270-271. 1920.— A discussion is given of the varietal characteristics and bearing habits of the Yellow Transparent which render it suitable for culture in Ohio. — R. C. Thomas. 975. Green, W. J., Paul Thayer, and J. B. Keil. Varieties of apples adapted for Ohio culture. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5«: 180-186. 1920.— This is a discussion of the relative merits of the Baldwin, Ben Davis, and Northern Spy varieties for Ohio cul- ture.— R. C. Thomas. 976. Hedrick, U. P. European grapes in eastern America. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917: 46-52. / pL, 1 fig. 1918. — A general account of the results of investigations at the New York (Geneva) experiment station with Vitis Vinifera is given. In 1911 cuttings of one hundred and one varieties of European grapes were obtained by the experiment station and cleft-grafted below ground onto several different species of Vitis. During the seven fol- lowing years, several unfavorable seasons were encountered. The grapes passed through several very severe winters and some unusually hot, dry summers. The author states, "These test seasons have proved that European grapes will endure our (New York) climate as well as the native varieties except in the matter of cold, — they must have winter protec- tion." Two methods of winter protection were used; some vines were covered with earth while others were wrapped with straw. The earth cover proved to be cheaper and more efficient. The vines are laid down and covered with a few inches of earth. Special pruning practices are necessary, due to the necessity of laying the vines down in winter, and a prac- tical system is explained. The growing of European grapes is encouraged, and a list of good table-varieties is given. The author finally suggests that much more experimental evidence and information concerning the growing of European grapes in this country is needed, and exhorts different investigators to carry on experiments in this field. — E. C. Auchter. 977. Heinicke, Arthur J. Concerning the shedding of flowers and fruits and other abscission phenomena in apples and pears. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 76-83. 1920. — Studies made of the shedding of leaves, fruit, petals, etc., showed that such abscission was due to the behavior of living cells near the base or at the node of the organ doomed to fall. In flowers and fruits, which were allowed to abscise in a humid atmosphere, a band of glisten- ing tissue appeared around the base of the pedicel one to three days before abscission occurred. This band was the rim of a plate of cells that lie between the pedicel and cluster base. Just prior to separation, the walls of two to six tiers of cells on the abscission region gave a red color when treated with hydrcholoric acid, thus indicating that lignificationhad occurred. Tests for reducing sugars showed a heavy but non-localized brick-red precipitate both before and during the abscission process. Tests for nitrates showed no localization with reference to the separation region. The same was true of iron compounds. Catalase activity was especially marked in the separation zone. — Fruits doomed to fall, especially in cool, humid weather, did not gain in size as rapidly as the others. They appeared to be more matured, showing more of the normal color, and the flesh appeared and smelled more like ripe tissue. Fruits which fell did not appear to have as high a sap concentration as shown by depression of freezing point. — Flowers or young fruit injured by cold usually fall. Flowers are often similarly influenced by nutritional conditions, as was shown by some nitrate and sugar studies. Flowers with short stems did not set so well as those having longer stems. When the fleshy portion of the fruit was removed, the stem abscissed. Flowers exposed to illuminating gas fell off, and when fruit was coated with grafting wax, abscission generally followed. It was suggested that severe root pruning in early spring might be a factor in the abscission of immature fruits. — Water forced or pulled through twigs, spurs, etc., seemed to check abscission. Nitrogen in the tissues appeared to be an important factor in delaying leaf fall. This was shown practically when certain apple trees which had received an appli- 150 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, cation of nitrate of soda held their leaves much later in the fall than similar trees which had received no nitrate. When excised spurs with fruit were immersed in water, abscission did not occur.— The author concludes as follows : "The facts here presented and those recorded in the literature are not sufficient to afford an entirely satisfactory explanation of the behavior of the cells in the abscission zone. Undoubtedly, the causes that stimulate or excite the peculiar changes in this region are associated with variations in nutrition and water supply. If the tissues above the plane in which separation may occur is abundantly supplied with water and other substances that counteract maturity or favor translocation or utilization of assimilated material, conditions apparently are not favorable for manifestation of the meris- tematic nature of cells in the potential abscission zone. In many fruits effective fertilization helps to bring about these desirable conditions, but it should be remembered that develop- ment of seeds is only one of several possible means of causing a set. Self fruitfulness may be associated with the fact that the cells at the base of the pedicels of flowers on such varieties are not as easily stimulated into abscission activity as similar cells of self-barren trees." — E. C. Auchter. 978. HiGGiNS, J. E. The litchi— Litchi chinensis. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917: 59-66. 1918. — This paper gives a general discussion concerning our present knowledge of the litchi. A brief history of its origin and present distribution is included. Its cultural and fertilizer requirements are stated, and methods of propagation are discussed. In general, the trees do best on a deep, moist, alluvial soil and respond well to heavy applications of various manures. Air-layering is generally used as a means of propagation. A few trees are now growing in California and Florida, but the bulk of the crop is produced in southern China, India, Ceylon, and other parts of the Orient. Trees of the litchi are also found in Japan, Formosa, Australia, Hawaii, Mauritius, Brazil, and the West Indies. The fresh fruit is eaten in these countries, where the trees grow, but the dried litchi nut is the product generally found in our markets. — E. C. Auchter. 979. Hoy, B. Report of district horticulturist and inspector of fruit pests, Okanagan Valley, British Columbia 14th Ann. Rept. Dept. Agric. 1919: 20-24. 1920. 980. Hunter, W. T. Report of district field inspector, southern Okanagan, Similkameen and boundary districts. British Columbia 14th Ann. Rept. Dept. Agric. 1919: 22-24. 1920. 981. HusMANN, George C. Growing currant grapes.— A promising new industry for this country. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917:66-69. 4 pL, 5 fig. 1918.— Currant grapes were grown extensively in France until the Phylloxera destroyed the vineyards. At this time the plantings were greatly increased in Greece and were very profitable until the re-establish ment of the French vineyards on Phylloxera-resistant grape stocks introduced from the United States.— The U. S. Department of Agriculture has demonstrated that these currant grapes can be profitably grown in this country. These grapes are among the earliest to ripen, and the crop can be dried and put away before the earliest rains occur in districts where other raisin varieties are too late in ripening. — Currant grapes were introduced into California in 1861. In 1901, David Fairchild introduced the Panariti variety from Greece. This proved to be greatly superior to the other varieties. When grafted on Phylloxera- resistant stock and stock suited to the soil and climate under which it is grown, it has proven extremely fruitful and profitable in California, Arizona, and southern Nevada. The author states, "It has been ascertained that to make the blossoms set and secure a full crop of fruit, the vines must be incised." This should be done while the vines are in blossom. When vines are planted eight by eight feet apart, they will yield an average of 10| tons, or conserva- tively from two to five tons, of dried currents to the acre. — E. C. Auchter. 982. Kains, M. G. Home fruits as educators of public taste. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917:94-98. 1918.— Attention is drawn to the fact that in many of our large commercial orchards, varieties of fruit, often with only fair or even poor quality, are planted. It is shown that in the older home orchards or small fruit plantations, only fruits of the highest quali- No. 2, March, 19211 HORTICULTURE 151 ties were planted. This tended to create a love of and demand for more fruit. The noted early pomologists were mostly amateurs, who loved good fruit. The statement is made that many of our fruit specialists of to-day were probably reared on farms, which had excel- lent home fruit plantations of high quality. The importance of replacing decrepit or old home orchards with fruits of the highest quality as well as the establishment of such new planta- tions on all farms is emphasized. It is suggested that such plantations will train future fruit lovers and specialists among the rising generation, and thereby home fruits will natu- rally continue, as in the past, to be educators of public taste. — E. C. Auchter. 9S3. Lyne, W. H. Horticultural quarantine in B. C. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4: 132-133. 1919. — This is an address given by Mr. Ltne at the Interstate Plant Quarantine Conference, Riverside, California in May, 1919.— J. M. Eastham. 984. Lyne, W. H. Report of chief inspector of imported fruit and nursery stock. British Columbia 14th Ann. Rept. Dept. Agric. 1919: 45-49. 1920. 985. Macoun, W. T. Apple breeding in Canada. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917: 11-27. 1 pL, 1 fig. 1918. — A great deal of the apple-breeding work in Canada has been done at the Central Exp. Farm, Ottawa, Ontario, although considerable work has been done at the Ontario Agric. Coll. Guelph, Ontario, and at the Hortic. Exp. Sta. at Vineland, Ontario. At the Central Exp. Farm an orchard of about 3000 trees grown from seed imported from Russsia, was planted in 1890. These started to fruit in 1897 and were mostly summer apples. Only a few, such as Claire, Neville, Oscar, Percival, Roslin and Rupert, were considered sufficiently promising to propagate. — In 1898, seeds were saved from a variety orchard; and seedlings, about 2000 in all, were grown. During the past 14 years, 1211 of the seedlings fruited. Three hundred and seventy-eight were considered promising enough to propagate, and 99 of the best were named. It was noted that the seedlings resembled their female parent in many particulars. A brief description of the seedlings originated from different varieties is given by the author. A descriptive table of the various seedlings is included, also a table giving the names of the named seedlings and such information as female parent, date of sowing seed, date of planting tree, date of first fruiting, etc.— A brief record of the early work of Wm. Saunders was given. In 1887 seeds of the "Berried Crab," Pyrus baccata, obtained from Russia were planted. The resulting seedlings proved very hardy. In 1894, many of the hardiest and best sorts of apples grown in Ontario were crossed on Pyrus baccata with the hope of improving the size and quality of fruit. In 1896 similar crosses were made on P. prunifolia, and in 1902 on P. Malus. Many of the best of the crosses have been recrossed, thus introducing a second portion of the characteristics of the larger apple. Many of Dr. Saunders' hybrids have proved hardier than any other varieties of apples or crab apples tested and are much larger than the original crabs. — The author states that it is important to obtain apples suitable for the prairie provinces of Canada as soon as possible. In 1910 seed from some of the hardiest Russian apples were sown. Many seedlings have been obtained, and it is hoped to secure valuable hardy sorts. — Some cross breeding has been done yearly since 1895, and, as a result, about 1000 trees are now growing. So far, not many apples that have fruited were thought worthy of propagation, but there were a few promising ones in the Mclntosh-Lawver crosses where the object was to obtain varieties which would keep better than Mcintosh. Following are those which have been named: Lawver X Mcintosh, Holz, Vermac; Mcintosh X Lawver, Mavis, Rustler. — E. C. Auchter. 986. Manaresi, Angelo. Sui danni prodotti ai fiori degli alberi fruttiferi dalle gelate primaverili in genere e da quelle in particolare dei giorni 28, 29 e 30 marzo 1918. [Damage to flowers of fruit trees by spring frosts and in particular the frosts of the 28, 29 and 30 of March 1918.] Rev. Patol. Veg. 10: 1-26. 1919.— At the time of these frosts the flowers of almonds and apricots had lost their petals, peaches were in full bloom, cherry blossoms were open- ing, and the floral buds of the plum, pear, and apple were swelling. In the almond and peach it was noted that many stigmas, styles, and ovaries turned brown and dried. The stamens were little injured. The pollen of several varieties of peaches germinated as well after as 152 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, before the frosts. The same pollen in maltose solution subjected to a temperature of — 8°C. germinated very little. A temperature of — 2.5°C. reduced the germination about half.— Notes are given on the relative amount of injury to different varieties of peaches and cherries, and tables show the same for pears and apples. The greatest injury was suffered by the almonds, and then in order of decreasing injury came peaches, pears, plums, apples, and cherries. Bibliography is appended. — F. M. Blodgett. 987. Matons, August. La poda de I'olivera. [Pruning of the olive.] Rev. Inst. Agric. Catalan de San Isidro 69: 22-24, 37-38. 1920. 988. Matthews, C. D. Report of the division of horticulture, North Carolina Agric. Exp. Sta. Ann. Rept. 42: 59-64. 1920.— A statement concerning the subject matter of inves- tigations in progress, including tests on dehorning of peach trees and hardiness of peach varieties, variety testing, breeding, and top working of pecans, cultural practices with strawberries, and variety testing, storage, and selection of sweet potatoes. — F. A. Wolf. 989. Meek, B. B. Oranges for Thanksgiving. Monthly Bull. California State Com- mission Hort. 8:367-370. 1919. 990. Moore, J. G. Scion root production by apple trees in the nursery. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16:84-88. (1919) 1920.— Studies were made at the Wisconsin experiment station concerning the possibility of producing apple trees on their own roots through using long scions in root grafting and planting such grafts deep in the nursery row. There were found to be wide differences in the ability of different varieties to produce scion roots. Although there was fluctuation from year to year in the relative percentages of trees of given varieties which produce roots, still for the most part the relative ability held fairly con- stant. A table of eighteen varieties showing the percentage of trees which rooted each year during the years 1914 to 1918, is included. It was found that with most varieties, even after three years in the nursery, the number of trees having sufficient scion roots to support them- selves was very small. A table is included which shows that a higher percentage of grafts produce strong scion roots when grown in moist soil than when grown in dry soil. Groups of trees were planted at varying depths of from two to six inches. While there were some instances in which deeper planted grafts did not produce scion roots as well as the shallower ones, still, for the most part, the increase in root production was in proportion to the depth of planting. It was suggested that this was true because there was more soil moisture sur- rounding the basal portion of the deeper planted scions. The author states that two-year-old trees did not, under ordinary nursery conditions, possess sufficient roots to sustain them- selves if the stock roots were removed. He also states, "It is clearly evident that if a large proportion of apple trees purchased by fruit growers are to possess at the time of planting scion roots sufficient to support them, it will be necessary to devise some new methods of propagation. Doubtless many of the long scion trees, which show few or no roots at planting in the orchard, develop them within two or three years after planting. However, if this is not so, then the additional care and expense in propagating trees from long scion grafts as now practised is largely wasted." — E. C. Auchter. 991. Munson, K. W. Grafting the fruit-tree. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4:49. 1919. 992. Munson, K. W. Intensive fruit-culture in Fraser Valley. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4: 104. 1919. 993. Munson, K. W. Pruning the balanced fruit-tree. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4: 14-15. 1919. 994. Pachano, Abelardo. El mildew de la vina. [Downy mildew of the grape.] Quinta Norma. Estac. Exp. Circ. 9. 22 X 15 cm., 8 p. Ambato, 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1198. No. 2, March, 1921] HORTICULTURE 153 995. Partridge, N. L. Growth and yield in apple trees. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 104-109. (1919) 1920. — Studies made at the Delaware experiment station on the growth and yield, during the previous three years of ten-year-old Jonathan, Yellow Transparent, and Stayman Winesap apples, indicated strongly that there was a very consistent relationship between the growth that the tree made and the amount of fruit produced. It was shown that if the growth was smaller in 1918 than in 1917, the yield was larger in 1918; and the reverse was also true. Thus the author states, "There is an alternate habit of growth as well as an alternate habit of bearing in these trees. However in the case of the tree with an increasing yield this is not the case." It was suggested, however, that when trees with in- creasing yields finally had sufficient fruit produced in some year to depress the growth, such trees would then fall in the biennial habit of bearing and growth. — E. C. Auchier. 996. Pierce, G. W. The almond industry. Monthly Bull. California State Commission H or t. 8:355-357. 1919. 997. PoPENOE, WiLso.v. The natural groups of mangos cultivated in Florida. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917: 70-81. 5 pi., 5 fig. 1918. — The varieties of mangos now grown in Florida have been classified by the autjjor into a natural classification. The different varie- ties which resemble one another in certain general characters have been placed in groups according to these natural resemblances. In defining the groups, consideration was given to characters of growth, foliage, inflorescence, fruiting habits, and the fruit itself. — Two main divisions of the several groups are first made; namely, (1) bark rough; leaves having commonly 18 to 24 pair of primary transverse veins; and (2) bark smooth; leaves having commonly 2G to 30 pairs of primary transverse veins. — In the first division are included the following groups: Mulgoba, Alphonse, Sandersha, Madras, and Julie groups. — In the second division is included the one group — Cambodiana. — Detailed descriptions of each group are given in the paper, and the varieties which fall in each group are enumerated. — E. C. Auchier. 998. Rice, W. H. Orchard sanitation. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 238-242. 1920.— A general discussion showing the importance of sunlight, air circulation, drainage, cultiva- tion, and general cleanliness in orchard practices. — .V. J. Ciddirtgs. 999. Roberts, R. H. Studies in biennial fruiting. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1919: 28-33. 1918. — Careful studies were made at the Wisconsin experiment station concerning the bien- nial fruiting of certain apple varieties. The effects of blossom formation, spur growths, and leaf areas during one year on the amount of bloom the following year were noted. The author's general conclusions are as follows : "While no definite solution of the off-year question is attempted, two statements bearing upon this matter can be made as a result of the investi- gations.— (1) Biennial blossoming and fruiting is not due to a constitutional habit of the tree. If it were due to a definite plant habit, successive blossoming could not have been induced by blossom removal. Investigations with other plants show that blossom-bud production is associated with the amount of plant-foods present. Qualitative tests indicate the same condition in the apple. The off year, then, evidently results from a condition of nutrition within the plant and not from a growth habit. — (2) Annual bearing by successive blossoming of individual spurs cannot be expected. When the spur produces blossoms and develops them to the point of setting fruit, it seldom blossoms again the next year. The develop- ment of blossoms to the stage at which the fruit can be said to have set together with the presence of excessive numbers of blossom spurs, seems to be the determining factor in the ability of the spur to blossom in successive seasons. If annual bearing can be produced, it must apparently be brought about by having a double system of spurs, which fruit in alter- nate seasons. How this may be accomplished fully cannot be stated further than to refer to the condition as pointed out before, that excess growth as well as very weak growth was associated with the failure to form blossom buds. The normal blossom spurs are usually one-eighth to one-half inch in length. If their growth is increased to one to two inches, they BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VII. NO. 2 154 HORTICULTURE [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, usually fail to produce blossom buds. Such a change, which must come from an influence on individual spurs, would require pruning of a rather detailed nature. The influence of cultivation and soil fertility in increasing the general growth of the tree would also have a large part to play in causing an increased growth that is associated with the failure to pro- duce an excessive number of blossoms. These factors have been shown by practice and ex- periment to have a marked corrective influence on biennial bearing. — Blossom bud formation is due to a condition within the plant. This condition is subject to modification by a num- ber of external factors. In working to obtain annual bearing, it may be necessary to modify the orchard cultivation, the amounts of fertilizer applied, the available moisture content of the soil, the pruning, or various combinations of these factors. — E. C. Auchter. 1000. Stark, Paul C. The small orchard — how to make it profitable. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917:99-106. 1918. — The author shows that the small home orchard plays an important part in the nation's food supply. He compares the food value of fruits with that of meats, etc. He points out, that as a whole the returns per acre are as large if not larger from fruits as from other crops. In summarizing, he urges (1) that people plant and grow back yard fruit gardens along with their vegetable gardens, (2) that every farm have its own home orchard for home consumption and sell the surplus on the local markets; (3) that farmers be shown how to renovate their neglected orchards so that they will be the best paying part of the farm, and that they be shown how simple it is to produce first-class fruit instead of wormy culls. — E. C. Auchter. 1001. Stewart, John P. Fertilization of apple orchards. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917:34-45. 1 pL, 1 fig. 1918. — The results of the past nine-years' experimental work in apple orchard fertilization as carried on by the Pennsylvania experiment station is given. Similar experiments were carried on in several different orchards throughout the state. Applications of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash, singly and in different combinations, were made in the various orchards. Tables showing the fruit yields and tree growths, as influ- enced b}"- the various treatments, are given. The results in the Johnston orchard, 20 years old at the start of the experiment, and in the Brown orchard, 21 years old at the start, show that nitrogen (nitrate of soda) influenced the yields more than any of the other elements. Greater returns from the nitrogen applications seemed to result when phosphorus was also added. In j'ounger orchards such as the Strode orchard, nitrogen increased the growth of the trees but did not materially increase the yield of fruit. In the Tyson orchard, potash seemed to give the best results. A plan for local orchard fertilizer tests is given. It is stated that the best time to apply the fertilizer, especially nitrogen, is in the early spring before the blos- soms open. It should be spread over the surface of the ground beneath the spread of the limbs. It is suggested that it might be well to apply part of the nitrogen before the blossoms open and part after the fruit had set. — E. C. Auchter. 1002. Thayer, Paul, J. B. Keil, and W. J. Green. Varieties of apples adapted for Ohio culture. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5': 252-255. 1920.— A discussion is given of the relative merits of the banana and ensee varieties of apples for culture in Ohio. — R. C. Thomas. 1003. Tufts, W. P. The so-called "New system of pruning." Monthly Bull. California State Commission Hortic. 8: 424-42b. 1919. — The lighter the pruning, the heavier and stockier the tree becomes. By intelligent pruning during the early life of the fruit tree, it can be brought into bearing two or three years sooner than has generally been the case in California. — Author reports upon data found in Bull. 313 of the University of California. — E. L. Overholser. 1004. Wester, P. J. Vegetative propagation of tropical fruit. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917: 82-94. 9 pi., 40 fig. 1918. — Attention is drawn to the fact that there are great oppor- tunities for improvement of the tropical fruits merely by the discovery of a practical method of propagating the various species asexually. Considerable experimental work in shield No. 2, March, 1921] HORTICULTURE 155 budding has been carried on by the writer with tropical fruits at the Lamao Experiment Station, Philippine Islands. Brief directions for the vegetative propagation of 110 tropical and semi-tropical fruits are given. — E. C. Auchter. 1005. White, E. W. Report of Assistant Horticulturist and Inspector of fruit pests, Vancouver Island and Lower Mainland districts. British Columbia 14th Ann. Rept. Dept. Agric. 1919: 15-19. 1920. 1006. White, E. W. The prospects in strawberries. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4:178-179. 1919. 1007. White, E. W. The queen of fruits. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4: 47. 1919. — A popular article on strawberry growing in British Columbia. — J. W. Eastham. 1008. Whitten, J. C. The relation of experiment station work to practical fruit growing. Monthly Bull. California State Commission Hortic. 8 : 421-423. 1919.— The detail study of the fruit tree, its structure, composition and nutrition, and the influence of heat, cold, etc., has revealed the fruit tree as a living, plastic, shapable thing, which has a very sensitive response, to the various stimuli of its environment. The revelation has completely revolutionized the old systems of pruning.—^. L. Overholser. 1009. Yeager, A. F. Horticulture. North Dakota Agric. Coll. Ext. Circ. 40:13-16. 1920.— Discusses trees, shrubs, fruits, and vegetables for the state. — L. R. Waldron. FLORICULTURE AND ORNAMENTAL HORTICULTURE 1010. Anonymous. Alpine plants for rock-gardens. [Rev. of: Farrer, R. The Eng- lish rock-garden. Vol. 1. XIV + 504 p., 52 pi. Vol. 2. VIII + 554 p., 50 pi. T. C. and E. C. Jack: London and Edinburgh, 1919.] Nature 104:664-666. 1 fig. 1920.— Reviewer finds it "a real compendium of sound information and learning, though unduly biased in certain respects" and burdened with superfluous language. — 0. A. Stevens. 1011. Anonymous. Aquarium exhibit. Missouri Bot. Card. Bull. 7:63-67. 1919. — A. list of thirty plants suitable for aquaria. — O. T. Wilson. 1012. Anonymous. Native plants suitable for the gardens of Missouri and adjoining states. Missouri Bot. Card. Bull. 8:35-46, 52-59, 63-67, 69-77, 85-94, 104-110. 1920.— Shrubs and other plants are listed as follows : plants suitable for rock gardens; hardy native plants for the water garden and native vines and climbing plants ; native trees and shrubs with conspicuous flowers ; native perennials for the hardy border ; native perennials for natural and wild gardens, and hardy native ferns and plant.s of similar culture; native shrubs for mass planting (flowers inconspicuous); native trees and shrubs with brightly colored foliage in autumn and con- spicuous fruit and bark in autumn and winter, and native evergreen trees and shrubs. — O. T. Wilson. 1013. Anonymous. Commercial mushroom cultivation. Jour. Ministry Agric. Great Britain 27: 678-680. 1920. 1014. Balfour, F. R. S. Rhododendron at Dawyck Stobo, Tweed-Dale. Rhododen- dron Soc. Notes 1 : 223-224. 1920.— The hardiness of many species is recorded.— AZ/red Rehdei-. 1015. Balfour, I. Bailey. Some large leaved Rhododendrons. Rhododendron Soc, Notes 1 : 204-222. 1920. 1016. Bean, W. J. The Fortunei group of Rhododendrons. Rhododendron Soc. Notes 1 : 187-194. 1919. 156 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1017. DoMiNGUEZ, Ignacio. El cultivo de las plantas florales ornamentales. [Cultiva- tion of ornamental plants.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5 : 208-218. 16 fig. 1919.— Outlines methods of propagating ornamentals in general.— Jo/in A. Stevenson. 1018. Hopkins, S. H. A svpeet-pea farm on V[ancouver] I[sland], Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4: 238. 1919. 1019. LoDER, Edmund Giles. List of Rhododendron species growing at Leonardslee, near Horsham, Sussex, September, 1918. Rhododendron Soc. Notes 1 : 197-200. 1919.— A list of about 200 species and a iew varieties, with introductory notes on the nomenclature of some species. — Alfred Rehder. 1020. Magor, E. J. P. Notes from Lamellan Garden, 1919. Rhododendron Soc. Notes. 1: 229-231. 1920.— The flowers of some rare species are described, and three new hybrids mentioned. — Alfred Rehder. 1021. Moore, H. Armttage. Rhododendrons at Rowallane, Co. Down. Rhododendron Soc. Notes 1 : 233-235. 1920.— Notes on rare species.— ^Z/red Rehder. 1022. Se CREST, Edmund. Protection for shade trees. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5«: 163-169. 1920.— A discussion is given of the relative merits of various types of tree guards in current use, and of the importance of tree surgery. — R. C. Thomas. 1023. Stoddard, W. B. Alaska flower and vegetable gardens. Seed World 8«: 17-18. 1920. 1024. Williams, J. C. Some notes on the raising of Rhododendron seedlings. Rhodo- dendron Soc. Notes 1 : 237-238. 1920. 1025. Williams, P. D. Notes on Chinese Rhododendrons as grown in Cornwall. Rho- dodendron Soc. Notes 1 : 239-240. 1920.— Chiefly notes on flowers of ornamental species.— Alfred Rehder. VEGETABLE CULTURE 1026. Burdett, James H. Summary of the first season's work of the national garden bureau. Seed World 7^2 : 13-15. 1920. 1027. Hood, G. W. Keeping qualities of hubbard squash. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 186-188. (1919)-1920. Hubbard squashes were kept in storage from November 1 until last of March. The temperature of the storage room fluctuated between 40-50° F. Fourteen average-sized specimens were placed in storage two succeeding years. The aver- age shrinkage, due primarily to water loss, was 23.18 per cent; the greatest monthly shrinkage was in March. — H. A. Jones. 1028. Hood, G. W. Varietal variations as seen in similar methods of training tomatoes. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 183-185 (1919)-1920.— Stone, June Pink, and Earliana varie- ties of tomatoes were handled as follows in the open field: (1) staked and pruned to one stem, (2) staked and not pruned, (3) pruned and not staked, and (4) neither staked nor pruned. All varieties produced the greatest amount of ripe fruit when the vines were neither pruned not staked. The Stone and June Pink produced the least amount of ripe fruit when the vines were both staked and pruned, while the Earliana produced the least amount of ripe fruit when pruned and not staked. In no case did the plants that were neither pruned nor staked produce the maximum amount of green fruit at the end of the season. H. A. Jones. 1029. Keil, J. B. Cellar storage of vegetables. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. S><>: 266-269. 1920.— The farm storage cellar is the type particularly in mind. The impor- tance of keeping the storage sanitary and of maintaining correct temperatures is pointed out. No. 2, iMarch, 1921] HORTICULTURE 157 Certain vegetables are classified according to the effect of freezing upon them. Proper stor- age conditions for potatoes are outlined. The importance of a spring with running water for regulating temperature and humidity is referred to. — R. C. Thomas. 1030. Keil, J. B. Home production of vegetable seeds. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5': 216-219. 1920. — This is a discussion of methods of selection, improvement, care, and storage of vegetable seeds. — R. C. Thomas. 1031. Lloyd, J. W. The need of vegetable investigations. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 171-175. (1919)-1920.— The author cites the following lines of work as being espe- cially in need of further investigation: (1) variety nomenclature, (2) structure and composition of vegetables, (3) development of varieties tolerant of particular conditions, (4) disease resist- ance and disease control, (5) manure substitutes, (6) storage, and (7) the preservation of perishable produce. — H. A. Jones. 1032. McCall, F. E. The farm and garden. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 188-190. (1919)-1920. — Results are given of cooperative farm-garden demonstrations carried on in South Dakota during the years 1916-1919, inclusive. — H. A. Jones. 1033. McMeans, a. Vegetable-seed growing on Pacific Coast. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4: 5. 1919. 1034. Rosa, J. T. Nature of hardening in vegetable plants. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 190-197. (1919)-1920.— Tomato represents the group of plants that cannot be hard- ened to any great extent, while the cabbage and lettuce represent the group which develop hardiness to a considerable degree. In hardening, cabbage becomes a lighter green and often shows some pink coloration. The amount of bloom increases; leaves become more leath- ery and stems more woody; there is a gradual increase in the percentage of dry weight; the area of the palisade cells decreases; and the freezing point of the sap is lowered. Carbohy- drate changes accompanying hardening are also significant. There is an accumulation of sugar, but this increase is much greater in plants exposed to low temperature than in those subjected to desiccation. "There is also an increase in starch and total polysaccharids in hardened cabbage plants." Practices that slow up or check the rate of growth of cabbage, lettuce, or tomatoes induce a greater degree of hardiness to cold. — H. A. Jones. 1035. WiRTHLE, F., AND E. Rheinberger. Uber Rangoonbohnen. [Lima beans.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39: 346-349. 1920.— This article deals with morphology and chemical composition of lima beans. The cyanide content of lima beans from Wiirzburg varied from 6.1 to 12.2 mgm. in 100 grams. — H. G. Barbour. HORTICULTURE, PRODUCTS 1036. Anonymous. La harina de platano. [Banana flour.] Agric. Mexicano y Hogar 36:180-181. 1920. 1037. Anonymous. La industria italiana del aceite de pepitas de uva. [The Italian grapeseedoil industry.] Informacion Agric. [Madrid] 10: 406-408. 1920.— The method of extraction is given. — John A. Stevenson. 1038. BaSo, Jose de. Conservacion de los racimos de uvea fresca. [Preservation of fresh grapes.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5:265-267. 5 fig. 1919.— The author discusses various methods of preserving and shipping fresh grapes, by using ground cork, sawdust, or other materials. — John A. Stevenson. 1039. Brierly, W. G. Cider- and vinegar-making qualities of Minnesota apples. Minne- sota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 185. 23 p., 5 fig. 1920. 158 MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1040. Campbell, C. H. Jelly. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 558-559. 1920. A method for the quantitative determination of pectin is given. Ten cc. of filtered juice is added drop by drop from a pipette, with vigorous stirring, to 180 cc. of alcohol. The solu- tion is filtered, immediately dissolved in boiling distilled water, evaporated to dryness, heated two hours at 70°C. in vacuo, weighed, burnt to ash, and reweighed. The loss in weight multiplied by ten gives the percentage of pectin in the juice. — Henry Schmitz. 1041. Krug, O., and Hans Filchner. Die Weinerte 1919 in der Pfalz. [The 1919 yield in the Palatinate.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39: 153-157. 1920. 1042. Kryz, F. Der essbare Anteil einiger westindischer Obstsorten. (Edible portion of certain West Indian fruits.) Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 38: 366-367. 1919. 1043. Kryz, F. Der Gehalt der Karobenfriichte an essbarem Anteil und Samen. [Edible portion and seed content of locust bean.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39:353-355. 1920. 1044. De Manjaries, Ramon. Aprovechamiento de orujos y alpechines de la aceituna. [Utilization of olive bagasse.] Rev. Inst. Agric. Catalan de San Isidro 69: 261-263. 1920. — The author advises the use of the waste products remaining after the oil is extracted from the olive as fertilizers or for distillation. The material is said to yield the same products as wood, the supply of which in Spain is very limited. — John A. Stevenson. 1045. ScHMiTT, R. Untersuchung von 1919-er Traubenmosten Frankens. [Musts of Franconia.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39: 198-204. 1920. 1046. Sprinkmeyer, H., and O. Gruenert. Uber Vanillinerzeugnisse. [Vanilla prod- ucts.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39: 145-148. 1920.— Methods of pre- serving aroma. — H. G. Barbour. 1047. Wellenstein and Seiler. Uber Zuckerung und Saureruckgang von Moselweinen. [Sugaring and souring of Mosel wine.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39: 1-30. 1920. MORPHOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HISTOLOGY OF VASCULAR PLANTS E. W. Sinnott, Editor 1048. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Small, James. The origin and development of the Com- positae. Reprint No. II from the New Phytologist. 334 V- Wesley & Son.] Jour. Bot- any 58: 202-204. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 333. 1049. H., W. P. [Rev. of : Church, A. H. On the interpretation of phenomena of phyllo- taxis. Oxford Botanical Memoirs, No. 6. 58 p., 18 fig. 1920.] Jour. Botany 58: 228-230. 1920. 1050. Anonymous. A university course in botany. [Rev. of: Church, A. H. Botanical Memoirs. 4. Elementary notes on structural botany. 27 p. 5. Elementary notes on the repro- duction of angiosperms. 24 p. Oxford Univ. Press: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 162. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 717. 1051. Arber, Agnes. On the leaf structure of certain Liliaceae, considered in relation to the phyllode theory. Ann. Botany 34: 447-465. 88 fig. 1920.— The phyllode theory of the monocotyledonous leaf is here applied in many selected cases from the Liliaceae, and the No. 2, March, 1921] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 159 author's interpretation of the leaf structure on the basis of that theory is given. The species studied belong for the most part to the Asphodeloideae and Allioideae. The evidence, which is given in detail for each species studied, is considered to indicate that in different cases the leaf is morphologically (1) leaf-base phyllode, (2) petiolar phyllode, (3) chiefly leaf-base with small petiolar region, and (4) chiefly petiole with small leaf-base region. — W. P. Thom-pson. 1052. Arber, Agnes. The vegetative morphology of Pistia and the Lemnaceae. Proc. Roy. Soc. London B. 91 : 96-103. 8 fig. 1920. — Engler's early work on lemnaceous homology of Pistia is confirmed and extended. Presence of row of inverted bundles in "limb" of Pistia indicates that it is a petiolar phyllode, and this finding is applied to Spirodela, in which the inverted bundles are missing. In the latter plant, buds are borne in lateral pockets formed by ligules on either side of limb or frond. In Pistia the limb is fused along its median line with the rudimentary plant axis, leaving no space for axial buds; consequently buds occur at one side in recessed pockets com.parable with those in Spirodela. — Paid B. Sears. 1053. Boodle, L. A. The mode of origin and the vascular supply of the adventitious leaves of Cyclamen. Ann. Botany 34: 431-437 6 fig. 1920. — When seedling tubers of CycZa- 7nen are decapitated, adventitious leaves develop usually from near the margin of the cut and occasionally from the cut surface itself. The development of these leaves and particularly of their vascular supply is described. The internal tissues of the leaf are always derived from the sub-epidermal tissues of the tuber; but the epidermis of the leaf may be either epidermal or subepidermal in origin, depending on whether periderm had previously been developed. The procambial strands develop rapidly from the leaf rudiment inwards, soon forming con- nections with two or three bundles of the tuber. All the cells in a transverse section of a strand are derived from a single cortical cell. No definite opinion is reached in regard to the nature of the stimulus requisite for the initiation of the leaf trace, but reference is made to Simon's conclusion that in somewhat analogous cases the stimulus depends on the distri- bution of water in the tissues.— W^. P. Thompson. 1054. Brewster, A. A. Aril of Cupania and Synoum. Australian Nat. 4: 170. 1920. 1055. Brewster, A. A. Microzamia or burrawang. Australian Nat. 4:162-164, 167, 169. PI. 3. 1920. — A popular account of the morphology of the flower, seed, and seedling.— T. C. Frije. 1056. Brown, Elizabeth Dorothy Wuist. Apogamy in Osmunda cinnamonea and O. Claytoniana. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47:339-345. 10 fig. 1920.— Only one case has pre- viously been reported of apogamy in Osmunda. Descriptions are given in this paper of one case in 0. cinnamonea, and of three in 0. Claytoniana, but none occurred in cultures of 0. regalis. — P. A. Munz. 1057. Brown, Forest B. H. The silicious skeleton of tracheids and fibers. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 407-424. 5 fig. 1920.— Secondary xylem, when it shrinks or swells, does not change in length, yet details of anatomy have not shown why one dimension of the cells con- cerned should vary independently of another. A study of the minute structure of the sec- ondary thickening of the walls in fibers and tracheids of wood and in fibers of bast, shows that there is a greater mineralization in parts of this wall than in the rest. These mineralized tracts run longitudinally and form a skeletal structure going from one end of the cell to the other. These rods imbibe little or no water and allow practically no change in length, but the matrix between them, by swelling or shrinking, permits tangential or radial change in volume. The structure of the fiber wall was found to be essentially the same in some 500 species studied, the skeleton consisting of sparingly branched rods which become reticulate in the vicinity of pits or have transverse connections. These skeleton rods seem to be silicious in many cases, although there is variation in different families, genera, or even species as to com- position. They can be demonstrated by partial combustion of a section on a slide, the por- tions along the burned margin showing small noncombustible rods. — P. A. Munz. 160 MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 1058. Brown, J. G. The cycads. [Rev. of: Chamberlain, Charles J. The living cycads. Univ. of Chicago Press: Chicago, 1919.] Plant World 22: 364-365. 1919. 1059. Browne, Isabel M. P. Phylogenetic considerations on the internodal vascular strands of Equisetum. New Phytol. 19: 11-25. 7 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1101. 1060. Btjgnon, p. Dans la tige des Graminees, certains faisceaux liberoligneux longi- tudinaux peuvent etre des faisceaux gemmaires. [In the stem of grasses, certain longitudinal fibrovascular bundles seem to arise from the "gemmaire" bundles.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris, 170: 1201-1203. 4 fig. 1920.— The longitudinal bundles are prolongations of leaf traces, but the transverse bundles at the nodes may be variously interpreted. The "gem- maire" bundles of Poa annua may take a longitudinal course like those of the leaf traces.— C. H. Farr. 1061. Drummond, Montagu. Besleria lutea Linn., a new example of water-calyx. Ann. Botany 34:551-553. 1920.— A description is given of the water-calyx of Besleria lutea, a Gesneraceous shrub native in the West Indies and South America. This is the first record of a water-calyx in the family, most of the other examples being found in the related Bignoni- aceae. The greatly inflated calyx tube is filled with a clear liquid from the early bud stage until the corolla is fully open. The liquid is probably secreted by capitate glands on the inner epidermis of the calyx.— IF. P. Thompson. 1062. Griebel, C. Die mikroskopische Untersuchung der Tee-und Tabakersatzstoffe. [Microscopy of tea and tobacco substitutes.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39:225-299. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1283. 1063. Grier, N. M. Notes on comparative regeneration in Elodea and Ceratophyllum. Amer. Botanist 26: 80-84. 1920.— Segments of Elodea canadensis must contain a localized bud- and root-forming region, which occurs about every tenth node, in order to regenerate. Each segment of Ceratophylhim demersum seems capable of budding. If more than one node is included in the segment, only certain favorably located buds develop.— S. P. Nichols. 1064. Hill, A. W. Studies in seed germination. Experiments with Cyclamen. Ann. Botany 34: 417-429. PI. 20, 15 fig. 1920.— The seedling of Cyclamen possesses a single coty- ledon and a rudimentary curved protuberance lying opposite to it. Morphological evi- dence is given to show that this rudimentary organ is really a suppressed second cotyledon. This evidence is supported by the results of experiments. It may be induced to develop by the removal of the first cotyledon, and then responds to the removal of its lamina by regener- ating a new lamina or new laminae, just as does the first cotyledon when its lamina only is removed. Plumular leaves are unable to respond in this way. The seedling of Cyclamen, therefore, through aberrant in type, is truly dicotyledonous in nature.— IF. P. Thompson. 1065. KusTER, Ernst. Botanische Betrachtungen iiber entwicklungsmechanische Be- griffe. [Botanical considerations of the principles of the mechanics of development.] Natur- wissenschaften 8: 453-457. 1920.— A discussion from the standpoint of the botanist of how far the general principles of the mechanics of development, as formulated by Roox, apply to theproblems in plant development. This issue is devoted to Roux's work and is in honor of his seventieth birthday. — Orton L. Clark. 1066. Markle, M. S. Some abnormalities in plant structure. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918:117-124. 9 fig. 1920.— The author discusses briefly, and figures: some embedded archegonia and antheridia of ferns; an embryo-sac of Lilium with cells all at one end; a "3-story" reproductive branch of Vaucheria; and a megaspore tetrad of Selaginella with wall around group instead of individual spores. — F. C. Anderson. 1067. Mattirolo, Oreste. Commemorazione di Saverio Belli. [Memorial to Saverio Belli.] Atti R. Accad. Sci. Torino 55: 8-30. 1919-1920. See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 704. No. 2, March, 1fD TAXONOMY, BRYOPHYTES 163 this conclusion the reviewer emphasizes the danger of regarding two similar plants as distinct species merclj' because they occur in widely separated regions and are absent from inter- vening areas. He shows how it is possible for a species to have a discontinuous distribution of this type and advises that each case be decided on its own merits after careful study of all available data.— A. W. Evans. 1084. Fleischer, M. [Rev. of: Timm, R. Neue wichtige Moosfunde aus dem nordwest- lichen Deutschland. (Important new discoveries of mosses in northwestern Germany.) Allg. Bot. Zeitschr. 1916: 17-27. 1916.] Hedwigia 60: (Beiblatt) 38. 1918.— The reviewer expresses the opinion that certain species of Drepanocladus and Slereodon, listed by the author, represent forms or varieties rather than true species.—^. W. Evans. 1085. Fleischer, M. [Rev. of: Kern, F. Beitrage zur Moosflora der Bayrischen Alpen. (Notes on the moss flora of the Bavarian Alps.) Jahresber. Schles. Ges. Vaterl. Kultur. 1917: 1-6. 1917.] Hedwigia 60: (Beiblatt) 127-128. 1918.— The reviewer comments on the nomenclature of a few of the mosses listed by the author.— .4. W. Evans. 1086. H[iERONYMUs], G. [Rev. of: Van den Broeck, H. Les muscinees de I'Herbier beige du Jardin botanique de I'Etat Sl Bruxelles. (Bryophytes of the Belgian herbarium of the National Botanical Garden at Brussels.) Bull. Jard. Bot. Bruxelles 4:243-303. 1914.] Hedwigia 60: (Beiblatt) 129. 1918.— The reviewer emphasizes the importance of this con- tribution to the bryophytic flora of Belgium.— il. W. Evans. 1087. Fleischer, M. Die Moosvegetation im Urwald von Bialowies. [The moss vege- tation in the primitive forest of Bialowies.] .Bot. Jahrb. 55 (Beiheft) : 113-124. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1506. 1088. Haynes, Caroline C. Illustrations of six species of Riccia, with the original descrip- ■ tions. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 279-287. PL 10-13. 1920.— Descriptions and figures are given of the following North American species of Riccia: R. Donnellii Aust., R. dictyospora M. A. Howe, 7?. Beyrichiana Hampe, R. nrvensis Aust., R. hirta Aust., R. Curtisii James.— P. .4. Mvnz. 1089. LoRCH, W. Die Torsionen der Laubmooseta. [Torsions in the setae of mosses.] Hedwigia 61 : 40-91. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1351. 1090. Pearson, W. H. Diplophyllum taxifolium in Westmoreland. Naturalist 1918: 234. 1918.— The discovery of Diplophyllum taxifolium on Hart Crag, Westmoreland, England, by L. J. Cocks, is reported. The species is new to the county of Westmoreland.— IF. H. Pearson . 1091. RiCKETT, H. W. Regeneration in Sphaerocarpos Donnellii. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: .347-357. Fig. 1-25. 1920.— Regeneration, or the production of adventitious shoots from vegetative tissue, was observed in Sphaerocarpos Donnellii either when the thallus as whole was partly dead, or when portions of it were separated partly or wholly from the rest. In gen- eral regeneration originates from a single cell, with a tendency in early stages toward a forma- tion of a two-sided apical cell. A typical thallus develops from the first cell-mass in a way analogous to the development of a mature thallus from the tube formed by a germinating spore. — P. A. Munz. 1092. RxjBNER, K. [Rev. of: Grebe, C. Studien zur Biologic und Geographie der Laub- moose. I. Biologie und Okologie der Laubmoose. (Studies on the biology and geography of mosses. I. Biology and ecology of mosses.) Hedwigia 59: 1-208. 1917.] Forstwiss. Cen- tralbl. 41 : 431-433. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 610. 1093. Theriot. I. Contribution a la flore bryologique de Madagascar. [Contribution to Madagascan mosses.] Recueil Publ. Soc. Havraise Etudes Diverses 87: 95-111. PI. 1. 2. 1920.— The paper gives a list of 66 species of mosses and 8 of hepatics, the latter without 164 PALEOBOTANY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, data. The moss list contains precise statements of locality, together with distributional or diagnostic notes upon many of the species, even the commonest. Campylopus Echernieri Besch. and Amblysteguim riparium (L.) B. & S. are reported from Madagascar for the first time, and the fruiting plant of Leucoloma albocinctum R. & C. is here first described. Funaria delicatula, Brachymenium argenteum, Bryum Perrieri, Philonotis Perrieri, and Rhacopilum Perrieri are described as new. There are likewise discussoins of Brachymenium capitulatum Mitt, and its Madagascan occurerence; of the generic characters of N anomitriopsis R. & C, and of the variability of Pogonatum subformosum Besch., a new variety being described and figured. Leucomium mahorense Besch. is reduced to a synonym of L. debile (Sull.) Mitt. — E. B. Chamberlain. 1094. Williams, R. S. Calymperaceae of North America. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 367-396. PI. 15-17. 1920.— A discussion is given of the Calymperaceae to be treated in the North American Flora and comprising the genera Syrrhopodon and Calymperes. In the former genus are described the following species: S. rigidus Hook. & Grev., S. Bernoullii C. Miill., S. floridanus Sull., S. incompletus Schwaegr., S. Berterianus (Brid.) C. Mull., S. martini- censis Broth, S. Gaudichaudii Mont., S. inflexus Mitt.,S. Husnoti Besch., S. flavescens C. Mull., S. tenuifolius (Sull.) Mitt.,*S. lycopodioides (Sw.) C. Miill., S. recurvulus Mitt., S. graminicola Williams sp. nov., S. elongatus Sull., S. texanus Su\l.,S. ligulatus Mont., 5. para- siticus (Sw.) Besch., S. filigerus (Aust.) Williams comb, nov.; in Calymperes the following are given: C. Richardi C. Miill., C. cubense Williams sp. nov., C. emersum C. Miill., C. disci- forme C. Mull., C.Donnellii Aust., C.nicaraguense Ren. &Card., C. Herifeawdi Paris & Broth., C. Nashii Williams sp. nov., C. Guildingii Hook & Grev., C. lonchophyllum Schwaegr., C. Levyanum Besch. and C.fluviatile'WiUiamssp. nov.— P. A. Mum. 1095. Williams, R. S. Sematophyllum Smallii, sp. nov. Bryologist 23:76-78. PI. 6. 1820.— Under the above name the author describes and figures a new moss from Florida.- E. B. Chamberlain. 1096. Willis, M. A. Notes on two hepatics. Ann. Rept. and Trans. Manchester Microsc. Soc. 1916: 44-45. 1918.— The author briefly describes the gametophytes of Sphaerocarpus michelii and the capsule of Anthoceros laevis. — C. E. Allen. PALEOBOTANY AND EVOLUTIONARY HISTORY E. W. Berry, Editor 1097. Anonymous. Ancestral studies of Compositae. [Rev. of: Small, J. The origin and development of the Compositae. New Phytol. Reprint No. 11. XI + SS4 p., 6 pi. Wm. Wesley and Son: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 450. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 333. 1098. Akber, E. a. N. and F. W. Lawfield. On the external morphology of the stems of Calamites, with a revision of the British species of Calamophloios and Dictyocalamites of Upper Carboniferous Age. Jour. Linn. Soc. Bot. London 44:507-530. PI. 23-25. 1920.— A treatment of the morphology of the rather rare casts or impressions of the external features of Calamite stems with a short systematic revision of the best known British members of the genera Calamophloios and Dictyocalamites, genera recently proposed by Arber for these fossils in order that they may be distinguished from the much more common pith casts. The following external features are discussed in detail: nodes, internodes, leaf scars, branch scars, and root scars. There is much difliculty in correlating specimens showing external features with those represented only by pith casts; this correlation, however, is made in several cases. — A. J. Eames. 1099. Berry, Edward W. The geological history of the sweet gum and witch hazel. Plant World 22 : 345-354. 2 fig. 1919.— The present distribution of the sweet gum and witch hazel is shown on a map. The disconnected distribution is a sure indication of ancient line- No. 2, March, 1921] PALEOBOTANY 165 age and a former occupation of areas where now they are extinct. The oldest authentic fossils of sweet gum are found in the Eocene of Greenland, Alaska, and Oregon. Records in the Oligocene are very rare, the only species having been found in Italy. The Miocene shows nine species, surprisingly like the modern sweet gum. In the Pliocene the gums were cosmopolitan in the northern hemisphere, but the succeeding glacial period killed them out in Europe, whereas they survived in North America and Asia. High mountains and seas in southern Europe prevented the escape of the gums to more genial climes in that conti- nent ; but in Asia and North America southern migration and return after the glacial period was possible. The witch hazels shows similar distribution today in America and Asia. Witch hazel occurs as fossils in Europe before the glacial epoch, but is extinct there now. — Charles A. Shull. 1100. Berry, E. W. Paleontology and pragmatism. Science 52:529-531. Dec. 3, 1920. 1101. Browne, Isabel M. P. Phylogenetic considerations on the internodal vascular strands of Equisetum New Phytol. 19:11-25. 7 fig. 1920. — The internodal strands of Equisetum are phylogenetic units that may conveniently be termed bundles, though it is not suggested that they are in any strict sense equivalent to the ordinary internodal bundles of angiosperms. The types of bundles found in axes of recent species are considered to have been derived from a single continuous xylem strand, with the metaxylem on its flanks, by the replacement of xylem with parenchymatous elements. — I. F. Lewis. 1102. Dahms, p. tJber rumanischen Bernstein. [On Roumanian Amber.] Centralbl. f. Miner. 1920: 102-118. Fig. S. 1920. — The author discusses the sparingly fossiliferous fossil gum or resin "Rumanite" from the Tertiary of Roumania. — E. W. Berry. 1103. Fisher, Hugo. Pfianzenmetamorphose und Abstammungslehre. (Plant meta- morphosis and evolution.) Naturwissenschaften 8: 268-271. 1920. — The change is noted from Goethe's concept of Morphologic and from its early descriptive literature to that of modern developmental history of plant organs, in which through experimentation the inves- tigator has obtained an insight into the causes underlying changes in plant forms. The deep- ening of the meaning of plant metamorphosis when interpreted in light of the evolution of plants is then pointed out with numerous examples. We see a development in a certain direc- tion (Orthogenesis of Eimer) but no inheritance of acquired characters is proven. The causes of such evolution are still unknown, but outer causes play only a small part. Meta- morphosis is not purposeful except, perhaps, in certain cases, such as adaptations found in changes from a water to land habitat. — Orton L. Clark. 1104. Florin, Rudolf. Einige chinesische Tertiarpflanzen. [Chinese tertiary plants.] Svensk. Bot. Tidskrift 14: 239-243. Fig. 11. 1920.— The author records the following Ter- tiary plants from near Han-nor in Mongolia: Pinus sp., Comptonia anderssonii n. sp., Car- pinus sp., and Phyllites. — E. W. Berry. 1105. Johansson, Nils. Neue Mesozoische Pflanzen aus Ando in Norwegen. [New Mesozoic plants from Ando in Norway.] Svensk. Bot. Tidskrift 14: 249-257. Fig. 2S. 1920. — From the upper Jurassic or Lower Cretaceous of Ando — the only known Mesozoic plant locality in Norway — the author records Cladophlebis, Taeniopteris, Feildenia, and three species of Sciadopitytes, of which two — S. lagerheimii and S. persulcata — are considered as new. — E. W. Berry. 1106. Krasser, F. Die Doggerflora von Sardinia. [The Dogger flora of Sardinia.] Sitzungsber. Akad. Wiss. Wien 1 (no. 129) : 3-26. 1920.— In a continuation of previous studies the author records 37 species of plants from the middle Jurassic of Sardinia. Twenty-three of these are common to the Oolite of the English Yorkshire coast region. A new William- sonialian fructification is described as Laconiella sardinica, an Araucarian seed is described as Araucarites sardinicus, and a new type of stem is described as Sardoa robitscheki. — E. W. Berry. 166 PALEOBOTANY [BoT. Absts,, Vol. VII, 1107. Kryshtofovich, A. A fossil walnut from Tsurumi in the district of Konagawa, Japan. Jour. Geol. Soc. Tokyo. 1920. 6 p., 1 pi. 1920.— The author describes a walnut close to the existing Juglans sieholdiana from the supposed Tertiary of Tsurumi, Japan.— E. W. Berry. 1108. Mayas, G. Funde neuer Pflanzenreste aus dem Kulm von Chemnitz-Borna. [New fossil plants from the Culm (Lower Carboniferous) of Chemnitz-Borna.] XX Bericht Naturw. Gesell. Chemnitz. 55-68. 1 fig., -4 pl- 1920.— The author records the following from the Lower Carboniferous of Chemnitz-Borna: Fourteen Archaeopteridae, of which Adiantites neuropteroides, Sphenopieridium beckerti, S. divaricatum, and S. latilobatum are new; thirteen Sphenoptcridae, of which Rhodea minima and R. nindeli are new; two Pecopteridae; tw^o Neuropteridae; and two ferm stems.— £'. W. Berry. 1109. Menzel, p. tJber Pflanzenreste aus Basalttuflfen des Kamerungebietes. [On plant fossils from the Basalt tuff of Kamerum.] Beitr. Geol. Erfors. Deutschen Schutz- gebiete 18: 17-32. Fig. 6, pl. 1. Geol. Landesanstalt: Berlin, 1920.— The author lists 234 species in 48 families of tropical African plants preserved in a volcanic tuff in Kamerun, one of the former German colonies in western Africa. The only species described and figured is a species of Sterculia close to the existing S. tragacantha Lindley. All of the fossils are extremely close to still-existing species of the region, and their age is not determined, but may be anything from late Tertiary to recent. The probabilities all point to the very modern age of the fossil flora.— E. W. Berry. 1110. MoHR, H. tJber Funde von Holzkohle im Loszlehm von St. Peter bei Gratz. [On the finding of Lignite in the loamy loess at St. Peter near Gratz.] Ver. Geol. R.-A. 1919: 327- 332. 1919.— The author records lignite in the loamy loess of the Pleistocene from near Gratz in Styria.— -E. W. Berry. nil. MooDiE, R. L. Thread moulds and bacteria in the Devonian. Science 51:14. Jan., 1920.— While making a study of the skeletal parts of ancient vertebrates, the attention of the writer was attracted to enlarged and distorted shapes of lacunae in the carapace of Borthriolepis and Coccosteus, and to the occurrence of thread moulds and bacteria in the lacunar spaces. The course of growth of these organisms is briefly described. The conditions as outlined by the author are regarded as those of decay of ancient times, and not of disease. He considers that agents of decay similar to those of the present time have been at work for many millions of years, at least since Devonian times.— A. H. Chivers. 1112. MooDiE, R. L. Evolution's most romantic moment. Sci. Monthly. 11:464-469. 5 fig. 1920.— The Mazon creek in northern Illinois has just cut through 40 feet of glacial deposit and into the shales and rock of the Coal Period. These red shales contain an occa- sional rounded nodule which cracks open and reveals a Paleozoic insect, fish, leaf, or one of the first animals with legs, such as our present day mud-puppies.— L. Pace. 1113. Moore, R. L. Ancient bacteria and the beginnings of disease. Sci. Monthly 11: 362-364. 1920.— Germs are among the oldest inhabitants of the earth. Walcott discov- ered bacteria in the oldest fossil-bearing rocks of North America in central Montana. They were rock builders and were found in association with algae. An analogous form is especi- ally active in the Coral reefs in the West Indies today. These ancient ones are called Micro- coccus. They were harmless. It is only after the Coal Period that infected wounds are found. The action of early parasites on the shells of ancient animals is the oldest evidence of disease.— Early man may have acquired some of his diseases from animals; for, as seen from the diseased appearance of their bones, men of the stone ages were often afflicted with the same maladies as the cave-inhabiting animals.— L. Pace. 1114. NiNDEL, F. Ein Beitrag zur Foyolia sterzeliana (Weiss) aus dem OberKulm von Chemnitz-Borna. [Notes on Fayolia sterzeliana from the upper Culm (Lower Carboniferous) of Chemnitz-Borna.] XX Bericht Naturw. Gesell. Chemnitz. 49-54. Fig. 3. 1920. No. 2, March, 1921] PALEOBOTANY 167 1115. Patton, R. T. Notes on eucaljrpt leaves occurring in the tertiary beds at Bulla. Proc. Roy. See. Victoria 31 (N. S.) : 362-363. 1919. — Fossilleaves were found in fine muclstone deposited along the banks of the stream beneath the newer basalt. They were among other leaves and lycopodinaceous casts and casts of crushed stems. The material was not sufficient for positive identification. All leaf specimens were of one general type: moderately broad, lanceolate, and slightly falcate; with marginal vein moderatelj"^ rem.ovcd from edge, slightly indented; with lateral veins diverging at an angle of 50°, and margin fading into petiole. Leaves are beyond earliest stage of eucalypt evolution and show resemblances to E. rostrata.— Eloiae Gerry. 1116. Raineri, R. Alghe fossili corallinacee della Libia. [Some fossil Corallinaceae from Libya.] Atti della Soc. Ttal. Sci. Nat. e del Museo Civico Milano. 59: 137. 1920.— The author calls attention to the abundant algal flora preserved in the Upper Cretaceous, Ceno- manian, and Turonian stages in the territories of Homs and Cussabat in northern Tripoli. The following forms are recorded from Africa for the first time: Archeolithoihamniwn turoni- cuni Rothpletz, A. aff. gosaviense Rothpletz, A. Paronai n. sp., Lithothamnium amphiroae- fonnis Rothpletz, Lithothamnium or Corollina sp. indet., Amphiroa Mottiroliana n. sp., and Arthrocardia cretacica n. sp. This is the first record of the genera Amphiroa and Arthrocardia in the Cretaceous, neither having been heretofore known in deposits earlier than the Tertiary. — R. Pampanini. 1117. Rather, F. A. Fossils and life. Sci. Monthly 11: 429-435. 1920.— Extracts from an address given at the Cardiff meeting of the British A. A. S. Form, habitat, tempo of evo- lution, the rhythm of life, and the future and man's relation to it arc discussed, using only animal fossils as illustrations. — L. Pace. 1118. Strausz, E. Ein verkieselter Kletterfarn von Chemnitz-Hilbersdorf. [A silicified climbing fern from Chemnitz-Hilbersdorf.] XX Bericht Naturw. Gesell. Chemnitz. 46. 1920. — Records a silicified Zygopteris from the Carboniferous of Chemnitz-Hilbersdorf. — E. W. Berry. 1119. Strausz, E. Eine Medullosa stellata mit Blattnarben. [A Medulla stellata with leaf scars.] XX Bericht Naturw. Gesell. Chemnitz. 47-48. 2 fig. 1920.— The author describes a stem of Medullosa stellata from the middle Rothliegende (Permian) which shows leaf scars. — E. W. Berry. 1120. Stutzer, O. Uber Torfdolomite in Kohlenfiozen. [On calcareous concretions in coal.] Braunkohle. 19: 146-147. 1920. — A summary of the old discussion by Stopes and Wat.son on the calcareous concretions "Coal balls" found in the British Coal Measures. — E. W. Berry. 1121. T(ansley), a. G. The evolution of plants. [Rev. of: Church, A. H. Thalassio- phyta and the subaerial transmigration. Oxford Bot. Mem. 3. 99 p. Oxford Univ. Press: London, 1919.] New Phytol. 19: 1-10. 1920. 1122. Thomson, J. A. The system of animate nature. 2 vol. 23 cm. H. Holt and Co. : New York, 1920. 1123. WiELAND, G. R. Recedent lake shores of the Cretaceous. Science 52:537-538. 1920. — Tufaceous concretions in the southern Black Hills and near Medicine Bow, Wyoming, are thought to mark the receding shores of Cretaceous lakes, and these concretions are thought to be indicative of algal activity. — E. W. Berry. 1124. Zalessky, M. D. Uber einen durch eine Zyanalge gebildeten marinen Sapropel silurischen Alters (Kuckersit). [A Silurian blue-green algal marine Sapropelite.] Centralbl. f . Miner. 1920 : 77-94. Fig. 10. 1920.— The author describes the new genus Gloeocapsomorpha, a supposed blue-green alga, Cyanophyceae, which forms the Silurian Sapropelite known as Kuckersite. — E. W. Berry. 168 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, PATHOLOGY G. H. Coons, Editor C. W. Bennett, Assistant Editor PLANT DISEASE SURVEY; REPORTS OF DISEASE OCCURRENCE AND SEVERITY 1125. Anontmoxjs. [Rev. of: Jar vis, E. Sugar cane diseases at Highleigh. Cairns Post.] Australian Sugar Jour. 12: 363. 1920.— Reports presence of a sugar-cane disease at Highleigh, near Gardonvale, which was due to the presence of the very free occurrence of two fungi— cane rust ( Uromyces Kuhnii) and Cercospora sacchari—th&t normally cause little or no injury. These fungi are always more or less in evidence on older leaves of half-grown cane, but this year owing to wet weather they multiplied in places to injurious degree. If these appear in March or April it is suggested that the lower leaves be stripped and burned at once, but only when the trouble may be considered as being likely to extend to and destroy young foliage. If the disease appears at the end of June or July, the risk of damage is far less, for the sunny weather checks the growth of the fungus. Such factors as proper cultivation, drainage, manuring, and the planting of varieties less susceptible to leaf dis- eases and the burning of trash after harvesting, are to be recommended.— S. Koch. 1126. Arnaud, G. Notes de Pathologie vegetale. [Phytopathological notes.] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 7 : 54^56. 1920.— Report of observations in the department of Gard, France, April, 1920. The diseases are regarded as due to a period of dry, north winds. The following diseases, which had apparently developed during a moist period preceding the dry period, were observed: Peach pocket {Exoascus deformans) on peach and almond; Cory- neum beijerinckii on walnut, peach, apricot, almond, cherry, and prune; Monilia cinerea on cherry; Taphrina bullata and Nectria ditissima on pear; Stromatinia cydoniae on cydonia; Cycloconium oleaginum on olive; and chlorosis of grape. — C. L. Shear. 1127. Arthur, J. C. Two destructive rusts ready to invade the United States. Science 51 : 246. 1920.— Two rusts which seem to have possibilities of great harm, but which have not yet invaded the United States, are mentioned. The first is Uredo arachidis, a rust of peanuts, which is widely distributed in South America and is common in the West Indies. The rust has been known to mycologists since 1884, but only recently has it attracted the attention of the cultivator. Mr. Robson reports from Montserrat that in some years the disease is a serious menace to the peanut crop of the British West Indies. This rust appears to be working its way northward, since it was reported from Porto Rico in 1913, and from Cuba in 1915. The second rust, Puccinia pitteriana, infects potatoes and tomatoes. It was found in Costa Rica in 1904 and 1916, and in Ecuador in 1918. Only one kind of spore, the teliospore, is produced in the life cyple, and this spore germinates at once. The habit of this fungus and its mode of distribution are essentially those of the hollyhock rust. The author points out that both of the above rusts may be capable of great damage if established in a region where suitable host crops are extensively grown. — .4. H. Chivers. 1128. Baudys, E. Prinos gljiva Bosne i Hercogovine. [Fungous flora of Bosnia and Herzgovinia.] Glasnik zemaljskog Muzeja u Bosni i Hercegovini 30: 317-328. (1918)-1919.— Phaneroascus quercinus n. g., n. sp. (Plectascineae) on living leaves of Quercus schneideri. Phyllosticta allii n. sp. on living leaves of A. ampeloprasum. AUernaria holcina (new?) on Holcus mollis.— Midgedium panciHi is a new host for Puccinia mulgedii. [Through abst. by Matouschek in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 30: 147. 1920.]— D. Reddick. 1129. Birmingham, W. A. A condition resembling American "peach rosette." Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 581-582. 1 fig. 1920.— Conditions appeared upon young trees, cions of which had come from America. This disease has evidently been unknown from Australia. Descriptions and suggestions for control are given.— L. R. Waldron. No. 2, March, 1921] PATHOLOGY 169 1130. Cockayne, A. H. Fire blight. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 15&-157. 1920.— Fire blight due to Bacillus amylovorus has appeared in New Zealand. Control methods are suggested, and hope of eradication is expressed. — N. J. Giddings. 1131. Cruchet. Etudes mycologiques. Les champignons parasites du "brome dresse," Bromus erectus Huds. [Fungous parasites of B. erectus.] Bull. Soc. Vandoise Sci. Nat. 51: 583-586. 1918. 1132. Drayton, F. L. The essentials of a Dominion plant disease survey. Ann. Kept. Quebec Soc. Protection of Plants 12: 31-33. 1920.— A paper pointing out the advantages to be derived from a well-organized plant-disease survey of the Dominion of Canada and the necessity for cooperation in this survey. — B. T. Dickson. 1133. DucoMET, V. Un oidium de la pomme de terre. [A powdery mildew of the potato,] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 7: 57-58. 1920.— An oidium is reported on potato (var. Czarine) in Lotet-Garonne in September. Several species have been reported on potato. It is thought this is probably Erysiphe polygoni, which was also found on weeds among the potatoes. — C. L. Shear. 1134. Eastham, J. W. Report of the Provincial Plant Pathologist. Dept. Agric. British Columbia Ann. Rept. 14:41-44. 1920.— Yellow rust of raspberries (Phragmidium imitans) caused some alarm by its unusual prevalence early in the season, but did not seem to result in much injury to the crop. Gymnoconia interstitialis has not been recorded in British Colum- bia. Walnut bacteriosis ( Pseudomonas jiiglandis) was severe on certain trees near Vancouver. Western tomato blight (cause uncertain) brought about loss in the southern Okanagan. Experimental spraying for the control of apple tree anthracnose (Neofabraea malicorticis) shows that one early application of 3-4-40 Bordeaux mixture gave good control, and in the case of the variety chosen (Baldwin) gave no extra cost in marketing, the spray material having all disappeared from the fruit during storage preceding packing. As a result of spray- ing, the fruit also kept better. — J. W. Eastham. 1135. MtJLLER, N. C. Bericht iiber die Tatigkeit der Agrikulturchemischen Kontroll- station und der Versuchsstation fiir Pflanzenkrankheiten der Landwirtschaftskammer fiir die Provinz Sachsen fur die Jahre. 1916 und 1917. Halle a. s. 60 p. 1918.— On pages 25 to 29 E. MoLz reports on diseases occurring in the province. Early blight of potato (A. solani) was wide-spread. Ftisarium culmorum in roots of asparagus was investigated. Stem rot of red clover (Gloeosporium caulivorum) occurred to the extent of 50 to 60 per cent. [Through abst. by: O. VON K[irchner1 in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 30: 22. 1920.]— D. Reddick. 1136. Pachano, Abelardo. La enfermedad de California o de Anaheim. [The California vine disease.] QuintaNormalEstac.Expt.Circ.il. 8 p. 1918.— The California vine disease has been discovered at Ambato, Ecuador. The symptoms are described, and the theories as to the cause are reviewed. — F. M. Blodgett. 1137. PtJTTEMANS, A. Sur I'Oidium du Chene au Brazil. [The powdery mildew of oak in Brazil.] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 7: 37-40. 1920.— Quercus pedunculata, which has been introduced into Brazil, has been found to be attacked by several fungi, and in 1912 the powdery mildew was first observed on it in the vicinity of San Paulo. The disease was so severe in September and October that the plants were defoliated. The weather was cold and wet.— The fungus is thought to have been introduced from Europe. In order to determine whether or not the conidia would live for a sufficient period to allow of transmitting the dis- ease from Europe to Brazil, experiments were tried, and it was found that the spores retained the power of germination for a period of from ten to twelve days; this would permit of its transporation from Madeira to Brazil. — C. L. Shear. 1138. Ramirez, Roman. Dos parasites de la remolacha. [Two beet parasites.] Rev- Agric. [Mexico] 5: 141-142. 1 fig. 1919.— An insect pest and a leaf spot due to Septoria sp. are reported on the beet (Beta vulgaris). — John A. Stevenson. 170 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, THE PATHOGENE (BIOLOGY, INFECTION PHENOMENA, DISPERSAL) 1139. BisBY, G. R. Studies of Fusarium disease of potatoes and truck crops in Minne- sota. Minnesota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 181. 58 p., 11 pi., SO fig. Mar., 1919.— Fusarium oxysporum is the cause of potato wilt. It may attack any part of the potato plant and may cause rot of the seed tuber under field conditions. In the fall it may attack plants which have previously produced a normal crop of tubers. Tubers from affected plants are less satis- factory for planting than those from healthy plants. Any measures which tend to keep the plants vigorous, particularly during the latter part of the season, lessen the danger of wilt. — Fusarium discolor sulphureum gains entrance through wounds or through the uninjured sur- face, and causes dry rot in storage potatoes. Tubers from normal potato vines are subject to this rot. None of the varieties tested were resistant to this dry rot. It may develop on unsprouted tubers even under dry conditions at temperatures below 2°C. At temperatures below 16°C. this fungus produces abundant aerial mycelium, and at 20° to 30°C. a dense pseudopionnotes. This fungus does not affect the starch grains. Wilt in potato plants is not produced, but affected tubers may produce weak sprouts or none. — Careful handling to avoid injury and cleanliness in storage houses are important measures in avoiding injury by rot. The indications are that wilt- or root-rot-producing species of Fusarium may show a selective tendency toward host plants. No single species of Fusarium is responsible for storage rots in vegetables, cucumbers, and tomatoes. Species of Fusarium were found to produce substances that inhibited the germination of spores of the same or other species. After being boiled, solutions of these substances allowed normal germination. Fusarium produced substances injurious to excised leaves of potato, coleus, and ragweed. Boiling did not destroy this property. The species of Fusarium examined could withstand drying, low temperatures, and alternate thawing and freezing. They were able to utilize a wide variety of food substances. — A. C. Amy. 1140. Clinton, G. P., and McCormick, Florence A. Artificial infection of pines with Cronartium ribicola. Amer. Plant Pest Committee Bull. 4: 12. 1920.— Same work as re- ported in Connecticut Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 214: 428-459. PI. 37-43. 1916-1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 225. 1141. Dastur, J. F. The mode of infection by smut in sugar cane. Ann. Botany 34: 391-397. Fig. 1-10. 1920.— Experiments with sugar-cane smut ( Ustilago sacchari) showed that infection takes place in susceptible "thin" varieties through the tender buds, but not through old buds unless wounded. The infecting germ tube was found to enter the host tissues through unthickened scale hairs. Infection did not occur through the cut ends of the sets. "Thick" varieties of cane were only infected through wounded tender buds.— R^ P. Fraser. 1142. Jensen, C. N. Blossom infection by smuts. Utah Acad. Sci. 1: 106-113. 1918.— Paper presented to the Academy, April, 1913. A review of the work of Brefeld on infection processes in the Ustilagineae. — D. Reddick. 1143. KuNKEL, L. O. Further data on the orange rusts of Rubus. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 501-512. PI. D {colored) and 92-94. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 367. 1144. Schweizer, Jean. Die Spezialisation von Bremia lactucae Regel. [Specialization of B. 1.] Verhandl. Schweiz. Naturf. Gesell. 99: 224. 1918.— Abst. in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 30:24. 1920. 1145. TocHiNAi, YosHiHiKo. Studics on the food relations of Fusarium lini. Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan P: 22-33. 1920.~See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 419. 1146. Treherne, R. C. Synopsis Report of the Dominion Entomological Branch in British Columbia. Dept. Agric. British Columbia Ann. Rept. 14:49-53. 1920. [Also Agric. Jour. British Columbia 5: 25-29.]— Includes observations on insect carriers of fire blight (Bacillus No. 2, March, 1921] PATHOLOGY 171 amylovorus). Empoasca mali and Lygus pratensis were shown to be carriers. "So far as early spring distribution is concerned, ants, honey-bees, click-beetles, apple aphis, and bark beetles are incriminated. Of the click-beetles, Cardiophorus fenestralus was observed commonly on the stumps of pear trees which had been cut down for blight and was seen to be feeding on blight exudate." — /. W. Eastham. 1147. TuBEUF, C. V. Riickinfection mit Peridermium pini (Cronartium asclepiadeum) von der Schlangenwurz auf die Kiefer. [Infection with Peridermium pini (Cronartium ascle- piadeum) from snake root to the pine.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 99-101. 1920. — Infection was secured on the green shoot and primary needles of 2-year old pine seed- lings with teliospores from Cynanchnm vincetoxicum in August of 1915. At the end of Sep- tember, 1919, the region beneath the lowest whorl of one of the pines was swollen and covered around with yellow bead-like pycnidial masses. The three upper internodes showed no infection. — /. Roeser. 1148. Wartenweiler, A. Zur Biologic der Gattung Plasmopara. [Biology of the genus P.] Verhandl. Schweiz. Naturf. Gesell. 99: 223-224. 1918.— Abstract in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 30: 24. 1920. 1149. WoBER, A. Die fungizide Wirkung der verschiedenen Metalle gegen Plasmopara viticola Berl. et de Toni und ihre Stellung im periodischen System der Elemente. [Fungicidal action of different metals on Plasmopara viticola.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenkrankh. 30: 51-59. 1920. THE HOST (RESISTANCE, SUSCEPTIBILITY; MORBID ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY) 1150. Anonymous. The red coloring matter of plant galls. [Rev. of: M. Nierenstein. Trans. Chem. Soc. 1919 (cxv) : 1328-1332.] Nature 104:707. 1920.— See Hot. Absts. 7, Entry 408. 1151. Bailey, C. H., and A. M. Gurjar. Respiration of cereal plants and grains. V. Notes on the respiration of wheat plants affected with stem rust. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44: 17-18. 1920. — The rate of respiration of the infected plants was materially lower than that of the sound plants. — G. B. Riggs. 1152. Bertrand, Gabriel. Action de la chloropicrine sur les plantes superieures. [The effect of chloropicrine on the higher plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:8.58-860. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 438. 1153. Boodle, L. A. The scorching of foliage by sea-winds. Jour. Ministry Agric. Great Britain 27: 479-486. 1920.— A theoretical discussion of some of the literature bearing on the subject from which the general conclusion reached is "that the scorching of foliage by sea-winds is chieflj' due to the drying action of the wind, but that salt may perhaps occa- sionally contribute towards the production of an injurious effect." — M. B. McKay. 1154. Brick, C. Die Widerstandsfahigkeit gewisser Sorten unserer Kulturpflanzen gegen Parasiten. [The resistance of certain varieties of our cultivated plants to parasites.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. 18:391-394. 1919.— Susceptibility of plants to diseases is not due to degeneration, old age, and other similar causes enumerated by practical horticulturists, but usually is the result of certain differences in morphological or anatomical structures of the host itself. The increased acid and sugar content or tannin also have a bearing upon the resistance of a variety to parasites. Some plants escape because their season of blossoming or maturimg does not coincide with the development of the parasitic organism. These state- ments are supported by citations of literature dealing with susceptibility and resistance to Tilletia iritici, Ustilago tritici, U. nuda, Puccinia glumarum, P. triticina, P. graminis, P. 172 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, dispersa, P. malvacearum, Phytophthora infestans, Plasmopara viticola, Fusicladium den- dritium, Sphaerotheca mors-uvae. Hemileia vastatrix, Chrysophlyctis endobiatica, Fusarium vasinfectum, F. tracheiphilum, F. niveum, and Heterodera radicicola. — Charles Chupp. 1155. Ehbenberg, p. Der Einflusz des Bodens und der Diingung auf Pflanzenkrank- heiten. [The effect of soil and manuring upon plant diseases.] Fuhlings Landw. Zeitung 68: 402-412. 1919. — A popular discussion touching on various soil conditions and various manurial additions to the soil that may directly or indirectly cause plant diseases. — A. T. Wiancko. 1156. Fofix, Et. La necrose du liber de la tige der pomme de terre atteinte de la maladie dite "de I'enroulement." [The necrosis of the wood of the stem of potato occurring in the disease called "leaf roll."] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 133(>-1339. 1920.— At the beginning of the necrosis there is first a pectic reaction with ruthenium red safranin, or carmin alum. Later there appears lignin and either cutin or suberin. It therefore appears that the disease is in the nature of a pectic degeneration. — C. H. Farr. 1157. Heinricher, E. Zur Kenntnis der Verhaltnisse zwischen Mistel und Birnbaumen. [Relation between mistletoe and pear.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenkrankh. 30:41-51. 1 fig. 1920. — In certain localities mistletoe occurs on pear trees very abundantly; in others it is exceed- ingly rare. An attempt is made to explain this contrast and especially the local frequency of the "pear mistletoe." It is emphasized that abundant development of the mistletoe on the main trunk of pear trees, particularly of younger trees, is most injurious. Several cases are referred to in which young bearing trees were killed through attacks by the mistletoe. In nature, however, attacks occur less frequently on young trees than on older ones. An infection of the main axis of young trees is not frequent. Mistletoe prefers tree tops. One case is related wherein a pear tree reacted most rapidly against a first infection with mistle- toe. A second infection also failed at first, but developed later with considerable vigor. This case, the author states, is of interest, since it does not seem to permit of any other expla- nation, but that the reactions against seed and viscin of mistletoe are due to antagonistic action of the pear tree. The author suggests the possibility of the development of an "anti- toxin" in the pear tree through the toxin of the mistletoe. — H. T. Giissow. 1158. JoDiDi, S. L., S. C. MouLTON, AND K. S. Markley. The mosaic disease of spinach as characterized by its nitrogen constituents. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42 : 1061-1070. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 442. 1159. JoDiDi, S. L. A mosaic disease of cabbage as revealed by its nitrogen constituents. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 1883-1893. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 441. 1160. Levine, Michael. The behavior of crown gall on the rubber tree (Ficus elastica). Proc. Soc. for Experimental Biology and Medicine 7: 157-158. 1920.— After summarizing briefly the present status of studies upholding the crown gall in its analogy to animal cancer, the author reports that "It was found that Bacterium tumefaciens inoculated into the apical internode of the branches, into the leaves or main stem of the rubber tree, Ficus elastica, stimulates the development of a neoplasm in the region of inoculation of a benign or malig- nant nature. The crown galls so formed, in this plant, are of two kinds, one in which growth is uniform and appears to be a swelling, the other is the characteristic convoluted type indi- cating a peripheral growth of isolated nodules. The crown gall in Ficus elastica after a number of months of active growth becomes hard and finally dies. This is associated with the differentiation of the tissue which converts the gall into a mass of parenchymatous cells and nodules of woody fibers. The central portion of the crown gall which generally lies near the wood cylinder disintegrates. — The invasion of the stem by the new growth does not destroy the entire conducting system of the stem, yet that portion of the stem above the gall dies as well as considerable portion of the stem below. Cultures made from pieces of the crown gall and stem above and below the gall yield only a schizomycete which in appearance is not unlike Bacterium tumefaciens and which when inoculated into the stems of young No. 2, March, 1921] PATHOLOGY 173 geraniums and rubber plants produce crown galls in the region of inoculation. It is alto- gether possible that substances of the disintegrating crown gall or products of the crown gall forming organism are carried into the circulation of the stem and are responsible for the progress of the death of the stem from the gall upward and downward. The death of the plant due to crown gall is at least suggestive of the death caused by the invading and disin- tegrating malignant growths in animal cancer." — G. H. Coons. 1161. LoscH, Hermann. Notiz zur Atiologie der Durchwachsungen bei Birnenfrxichten. [Etiology of leafy proliferation of pear fruits.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenkrankh. 30: 71-73. 2 fig. 1920. — A description of this teratological aberration, disputing Sorauer's explanation of cause as "over-nourishment" of the buds, and referring it as due to freezing of the primary normal buds. Secondary buds then develop during the time of maximum leaf production instead of at a period of low leaf formation, thus giving the leafy proliferation. — H. T. Giissow. 1162. MoNTEMARTiNi, LuiGi. Nuove osservazioni sopra I'azione eccitante del sulfate di rame sulle piante. [The stimulating action of copper sulfate on plants.] Rev. Pathol. Veg. 10: 36-40. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1375. 1163. Opitz. Fusariumbetall und Auswinterung verschiedener Winterweizensorten. [Fusariimi blight and the over-wintering of various winter wheat varieties.] Mittheil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35:488-489. 1920. — The author describes field plat experiments conducted at two different stations to determine the relation between Fwsa?-iwm-infected winter wheat and winter injury. He planted 20 varieties, using the same varieties at each station. His germination results were uniformlj^ good, running from 02 to 100 per cent. The vigor of the plants in early stages of development ranged from 79 to 09 per cent. Percentage of infection ranged from none at all to 77 per cent. It was expected that the experiments would show a relation between growth-vigor of host and severity of infection, but the results indicated no such relation. There was, however, some indication of varietal susceptibility, but the author purposely omitted the names of the varieties used, pending the time when more defi- nite facts are made known concerning susceptibilitj'^ of different wheat varieties. According to the experiments of the author there is a relation between severity of infection and over- wintering ability of the host. This relationship, however, seems manifest only when growth conditions are peculiarly favorable to the development of the invading fungus. Seed treat- ment combined with careful selection of disease-free seed is recommended as a control meas- ure. The author agrees with Hiltner in his recommendation of "uspulum" as a fungicide for prevention of the type of Fu.^arivm infection described. — H. B. Humphrey. 1164. Petersen, Federico. Los trigos seleccionados de la hacienda Amalucan. [Se- lected wheats.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5: 112-118. 4 fig- 1919. — Rust due to one or more species of Puccinia causes heavy losses to Mexican wheat growers. Three selected varieties, Flor, Maravilla I, and Maravilla II. were found to be somewhat more resistant than the types ordinarily grown. — See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 639. — John A. Stevenson. 1165. Rao, P. S. Jivanna. The cause of spike in sandal (Santaltun album). Indian Forester 46: 469-487. 1920.— The spike disease of sandal is closely related to the parasitism of the plant and may depend upon the sap density of the parent plant. On plants with a high sap density, sandal has greater difficulty in maintaining itself than on species with low sap density; and in plants with a high oil content, the plants do better than where the oil is absent. With depleted water supplies in the host plants, haustoria may be unable to develop sufficiently rapidly to make up the deficit, and the unbalanced circulation comes about. The decreased water supply is accompanied by an increased deposition of starch owing to the absence of a sufficient amount of the transporting fluid. Spike is held not to be due to para- sites on the sandal, but is regarded as an abnormal physiological reaction, and the remedy for the condition lies in the use of a strong host with high osmotic values. Lantavas and shrubs should be avoided because of their short lives and inferior quality as hosts, and the care of the host is of greater importance than the care of the parasite. — E. N. Munns. 174 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1166. Reed, George M. Varietal resistance and susceptibility of oats to powdery mildew, crown rust, and smuts. Missouri Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 37. U p. 1920. — The resist- ance of oats, Avena spp., to powdery mildew (Erysiphe graminis DC. f. avenae), crown rust (Puccinia coronata Corda), loose smut (Ustilago avenae (Pers.) Jens.), and covered smut {Ustilago levis (K & S.) Magn.) was tested by inoculation experiments. Of 98 varieties and strains belonging to 14 species, tested with powdery mildew, negative results were obtained onlj' with Avena bromoides and ^. sempervriens. Vigorous infection occurred on all cultivated species. Of 132 strains and varieties belonging to 7 species, tested with crown rust, all were found susceptible, the least infection being 42 per cent, on Avena brevis. Of 154 varieties and strains belonging to 7 species tested with loose smut in the field during 5 seasons, Ave7ia brevis, Avena sativa var. nigra, the variety Black Mesdag, and Avena strigosa gave consist- ently negative results; Burt, Earlj- Ripe, Fulghum and other varieties of Avena sterilis gave very low percentages of infection, while the Avena nv.da group proved entirely suscept'ble. One hundred and forty-six varieties and strains were tested with covered smut during four seasons, and in general they reacted to this test in the same way as they did to loose smut. — L. J. Stadler. 1167. SuEMATSu, Naoji, and Kikuji Ktjwatsuka. Studies on the varietal resistance of the peach to artificial inoculations with Gloeosporium laeticolor Berk. Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan 1': 1-12. 1920. — Experiments in which 66 varieties of peach important in Japan were inoculated proved that none are resistant. Various degrees of susceptibility were found, and two varieties, Tachibanawase and Jitsugetsuto, which ripen early and possess good qualities, proved to be especially resistant. Seven other varieties, which possess somewhat less desirable qualities, . are also especially resistant. Chinese species are generally more resistant than the Persian. No evidences of biologic forms of the fungus, nor of the phe- nomenon of "adaptation" were found.—//. M. Massey. DESCRIPTIVE PLANT PATHOLOGY 1168. Anonymous. Forestry, tree diseases and timber. [Rev. of: Rankin, W. H. Manual of tree diseases. XX + 398 p. Macmillan & Co.: New York and London, 1918.] Nature 105:579. 1920.— "The first American text book on the subject The account of Keithia thvyina, a dangerous fungus which has recently appeared in England on the valuable forest tree, Thuya gigantea, is of considerable interest." — 0. A. Stevens. 1169. Anonymous. Black scab in potatoes. Jour. Dept. Agric. Ireland 20:238-241. 3 fig. 1920. 1170. Anonymous. Potato leaf-curl. Jour. Ministry Agric. Great Britain 27:287-289. 2 fig. 1920. — A brief popular description of potato leaf-curl, including a discussion of the cause and control. — M. B. McKay. 1171. Ball, E. D., and F. A. Fenton. Potato leaf hopper and the leafburn. Potato Mag. 212:6-7. 2 fi^. 1920. 1172. Bewley, W. F. "Damping off" of tomato seedlings. Jour. Ministry Agric. Great Britain 27: 670-673. 1920. — An abridged account of an investigation to be published in full in the Annals of Applied Biology, vol. 7, No. 2, 1920. 1173. Birmingham, W. A. Crown gall of fruit trees. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 717-718. 3 fig. 1920. — A brief description of the disease is given with suggestions as to preventive measures. Destruction of the diseased tree is recommended. Grafts may be treated with bluestone paste before planting. — L. R. Waldron. 1174. Birmingham, W. A. Root rot of fruit trees due to Armillaria mellea. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:669-673. 4 fig- 1920.— The appearance of various varieties affected by the disease, methods of dissemination, effect of the disease and control measures are given. "Bluestone paste" may be applied to cut root surfaces after the necessary root pruning has been done. — L. R. Waldron. No. 2, March, 1921] PATHOLOGY 175 1175. BiSBY, G. R., AND A. G. Tola as. Potato diseases in Minnesota. Minnesota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 190. 44 P-, ^7" fifJ- 1920. — The most common potato diseases with control measures are discussed. The use of certified seed and seed plot methods are urged in order to keep up vigor. Soil management and cultural directions are given. Suggestions are also given regarding methods of handling and storing. — A. C. Amy. 1176. Brandes, E. W. Mosaic disease of corn. Jour. Agric. Res. 19:517-521. PI. 95-96. 1920. — Maize {Zea mays) is subject to the same mosaic disease as sugar cane and cer- tain wild grasses. The disease on maize has been noted particularlj' in sugar cane regions of southern United States and in Porto Rico. The symptoms are essentially like those of sugar cane mosaic. Seed production is suppressed. Aphis maydis transmits the "virus." — D. Reddick. 1177. Cobb, N. A. A newly discovered parasitic nematode (Tylenchus mahogani n. sp.) connected with a disease of the mahogany tree. Jour. Parasitology 6: 188-191. 3 fig. 1920. — Technical description of a new species of nematode parasitic in the tissues of the bark of the mahogany {Sxvietenia mahogani) in the Barbados. — E. A. Bessey. 117S. Cromwell, R. O. Fusarium blight of the soy bean and the relation of various fac- tors to infection. Nebraska Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 14: 1-43. 5 fig. 1919. — Investi- gations carried on in North Carolina and Nebraska. This disease was first reported by author in Jour. Agric. Res. 8: 421-440. The following conclusions were reached: The blight is char- acterized by a chlorosis and shedding of the leaves or leaflets, followed by the death of the plants. Soy bean blight has been observed in several localities within North Carolina on soils infected with cowpea wilt. What is probably the same disease has been recently observed by others in .\labama and possibh' in Wisconsin. Fusarium iracheiphihim (section Elegans) is the causal organism. Cultural and morphological studies which are regarded as of primary importance in distinguishing species of Fusarium show that the strain of Fusarium on soy bean is identical with the organism producing the wilt of cowpeas. Reciprocal inoculation experiments in field and greenhouse with the strains from soy beans and cowpeas show that cross-inoculations can be made. Phj-sical structure and acidity of soil under natural condi- tions are not the limiting factors in infection, but acidity under certain conditions may have some influence. Infection occurs through the roots, but nematodes appear not to increase the percentage of blight materialh^ Other organisms, such as Rhizoctonia and Sclerotium rolfsii, and other root injuries are believed to materially increase the percentage of diseased plants in the field. The Black Eyebrow variety of soy beans shows some evidence of resist- ance. The Brown variety, while not resistant, is tolerant and seems to develop remarkably well in spite of numerous fungous filaments and nematodes within the roots. Fifteen other varieties tested were severely affected. Velvet beans are not subject to infection. — T. A. Kiesselbach. 1179. Cunningham, G. H. Mortality among stone fruit trees in Central Otago. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 359-364. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 961. 1180. Darnell-Smith, G. P. "Bunchy-top" in bananas. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:583-584. 1920.— Description of internal lesions of this disease is given. Growers are advised to avoid planting any plants shov/ing such lesions and to destroy growing plants showing bunchy-top characters. The organism responsible, if any, has not been determined. Bacteria have been isolated from diseased tissues, and a Fusarium has been found. It is not known with certainty that the disease is infectious. — L. R. Waldron. 1181. Dastur, J. F. Choanephora cucurbitarium (B, and Rav.) Thaxter, on chillies (Capsicum spp.). Ann. Bot. 34: 399-403. PI. 19. 1920. — A new disease of chillies is described which caused a considerable amount of damage north of the Ganges, India, in 1917. The characters of the fungus causing the disease are given. — W. P. Fraser. 176 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1182. Dickson, B. T. Some plant diseases in the greenhouse. Ann. Rept. Quebec See. Protection of Plants 12 : 46-48. 1920. — A brief account of the most important plant pathogenes occurring in the greenhouses at Macdonald College, Quebec, Canada. Those discussed were: Uromyces carophyllinus on carnation, Puccinia anlirrhini on snapdragon, Microsphaera alni on sweet pea, Alternaria violae on violet, Cladosporium fulviim on tomato. Mosaic of tomato and a mosaic-like affection of Cineraria were also considered. — B. T. Dickson. 1183. Eastham, J. W. Notes on potato diseases. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 210. 1920. 1184. Eastham, J. W. Bitter-Pit or Baldwin Spot. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4: 292. 1919. 1185. Eastham, J. W. Guard against Apple Powdery Mildew. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4: 44. 1919. 1186. Fischer, W. Die Brennfleckenkrankheit der Bohnen. [The anthracnose of beans.] Fuhlings Landw. Zeitung. 68:241-259. 1919. — A popular review of the literature of the anthracnose of beans caused by Gloeosporium lindernuthianum, covering its nature, conditions of infection and development, and various methods of treatment. The author also discusses some experiments conducted by himself and others at Bromberg in 1915 and 1916, in which seed from apparently disease-free plants in rows in which diseased seed had been inter- spersed was selected for planting the following year to see if immune plants could be found. The result was 23 per cent infected plants as against 63 per cent infected plants in rows planted from infected plants of the year before. In 1917 and 1918 tests of selections of dis- ease-free seed from apparently disease-free plants were made on a field which had never grown beans and was located far from the previous trial grounds. There was considerable reduction in disease but still as much as 20 per cent, with an average of 8.2 per cent. This method of getting rid of the disease is not regarded as very promising. The selection of disease-free seed from immune plants in badly diseased fields seems more promising. It is suggested that crossing of different species of beans or beans with related plants may be worth trying; to support this suggestion, attention is called to the observations of several investigators who found that species differed in susceptibility to the disease. — A. T. Wiancko. 1187. Hemmi, Takewo. Kurze Mitteilung iiber drei Falle von Anthraknose auf Pflanzen. [Short report on three cases of anthracnose of plants.] Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan 1': 13-21. PI. 1, 5 fig. 1920.— Anthracnoses of Mahonia japonica (Thumb.) DC, Linum usitatissimum L., and Illicium anisahim L.. occurring in Japan, are briefly discussed. The cause of the leaf spot of Mahonia was found to be a new species of Colletotrichum, the author giving it the name Gloeosporium (Colletotrichum) japonicum. The pathogene attacking stems and cotyle- dons of flax is identical with Colletotrichum. linicolum described by Pethybridge and Laf- PERTY. The leaf spot of Illicium is caused by a new species, Gloesporium Illicii H. Symp- toms of the three diseases and technical descriptions of the two new species are given. — L. M. Massey. 1188. HiLEY, W. E. The fungal diseases of the common larch. XI + 204 p., 73 fig. Clarendon Press: Oxford, 1919. — This book opens with a description of the general anatomy of the larch, in which the author defines technical terms which he uses later. The discussion falls under 4 heads: (1) larch canker, Dasyscypha calycina; (2) Fomes annosus, and other less important heart-rotting fungi; (3) Armillaria mellea; (4) leaf and seedling diseases. Ap- proximately 150 pages are given to the discussion of Dasyscypha calycina, Fomes annosus, and Armillaria mellea. Other heart-rotting fungi — e.g., Polyporus schweinitzii, Poria vaporaria, Polyporus sulphiireus, and Trametes pini — are less important than Fomes annosus on larch. The leaf and seedling diseases are not important except under unfavorable conditions, or in nurseries where alternate hosts of the needle rusts are not excluded. The author describes the injury resulting from attack by a given fungus, the relations of host and parasite, the fungus No. 2, March, 1921] PATHOLOGY 177 itself, pure culture experiments, artificial infection, natural infection, and methods of pre- vention. The researches of Hartig and Brefeld are reviewed critically in the light of extensive recent field observations and experiments, and the author is of the opinion that Dasyscypha calycina enters its host by way of dead branches or branch stubs, Fomes annosus through dead roots, and Armillaria mellea through damaged or dead roots. The importance of small wounds may have been greatly overestimated. Hard subsoil conditions in culti- vated fields are particularly unfavorable to the first rotation of larch planted on such sites, because the tap roots, being unable to penetrate the subsoil, soon die; and Fomes annosus almost inevitably attacks these dead roots. First-rotation larch should be planted in mixed stands — e.g., with hardwoods — so that the roots of the latter may break up the subsoil, speed up aeration, and render conditions more favorable for the larch roots. Reasons for the various control methods suggested are thoroughly discussed. The author closes with a general summary of the important points brought out in the book. — Reginald H. Colley. 1189. HousER, True. Root rot of tobacco. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5: 232. 1920. — A short discussion of symptoms of the disease, influence of soil and water, character of soil in plant beds, and methods of control is given. — R. C. Thomas. 1190. Kawakama, Koichiro, and Suehiro Yoshida. Bacterial gall on Milletia plant. (Bacillus milletiae n. sp.). Bot. Mag. Tokyo 34:110-115. PL 2. 1920.— In Japan the authors found that this organism causes rough, irregular, round galls from 5 mm. to 10 cm. in diameter on the stems of Milletia floribunda. It is a motile organism about 2.1 -I- 0.6 microns, with 7 or 8 peripheral flagella; it produces no spores and is gram negative. — Leonas L. Burlingame. 1191. KiLLiAN, Karl. Ueber die Blattfleckenkrankheit der Tomate hervorgerufen durch Septoria lycopersici. [Leaf spot of tomato (Septoria lycopersici).] Zeitschr. Pfianzenkrankh. 30:1-17. 7 jig. 1920. — The following constitutes the author's summary: Spring infection with Septoria takes place exclusively through ejection of pycnospores from previous year's infected leaf. Infection may be recognized in the moist chamber after five days by browning and dropping oflf of the cotyledons. Eight days later spots appear at first on the lower leaf surface; these when dry exhibit fruiting bodies. Similarly the young stems and older stems, but not the fruits (!) are aflfected. The incubation period is directly related to weather conditions. Artificial cultures indicate that Septoria is readily grown on various nutrient materials. Vegetative development is favored by presence of sugar. Fruit bodies develop only after vegetative development is arrested. The fungus penetrates the epide mis, later the intercellular spaces, destroys the tissues of the lower-leaf surface, and finally the upper surface becomes involved. Lastly its offensive action becomes weakened. In cases of severe attack the diseased foliage should be burned in the fall and the surrounding soil dug deeply. Compost which has come into contact with diseased plant remains should be avoided. Rotation is recommended, using plants not subject to attack. — H. T. Gussow. 1192. Lo Priore, G., and G. Scala. L'arrossamento delle foglie del Sommaco. [The reddening of the leaves of sumac] Staz. Sper. Agrarie Ital. 52: 227-237. PI. 7-8. 1919. 1193. LuTMAN, B. F. Tip burn of the potato and other plants. Potato Mag. 3^: 6-7, 20, 22-24; 32 : 12, 20-21. 1 fig. 1920.— Reprint of Vermont Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 214. 1194. MoLLiARD, M. Tumeurs presentees par les racines du Chou-Rave et de la Bet- terave. [Tumors occurring on the roots of kohl-rabi and beet.] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 7 : 17-19. 1920. — Large tumor-like outgrowths were found on the roots of kohl-rabi and beets in different parts of France. In some cases they arose from the main root and in others from secondary roots. Those on kohl-rabi were at first thought to be caused by Plasmo- diophora brassicae, but a histological study failed to show any evidence of this. The tumors found on beets were very similar in structure and appearance to those on kohl-rabi. Myce- lium of a Fusarium was found on the surface of the tumor on the beet, but is not believed 178 PATHOLOGY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, to have any causal relation to the tumor. The possibility of this malformation being caused by the crown gall organism or by other parasites or insects is discussed, and it is concluded that the tumors are the result of some form of parasite not yet determined. — C L. Shear. 1195. NowELL, W. The red wing or root disease of cocoanut palm. Tropic. Agric. 54: 240-245. 1920. 1196. NowELL, W. Root disease of cacao. Jour. Jamaica Agric. Soc. 24 : 173-174. 1920. — A partial reprint from Bull. Dept. Agric. Trinidad and Tobago 18. 1920. 1197. NowELL, W. Mosaic disease of sugar-cane. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 14. 1920. — A review of Bulletin 829 of the U. S. Department of Agriculture, by E. W. Brandes, and of Bulletin 19 of the Insular Experiment Station, Rio Piedras, Porto Rico. 1198. Pachano, Abelaedo. EI mildew de la vina. [Downy mildew of the grape.] Quinta Normal Estac. Exp. Circ. 9. 8 p. Ambato, 1918. — Introductory note by Martinez states that grapes are raised in quantity only in a small part of the Province of Tungurahua, but that conditions are such that grape growing might be greatly extended. Variety tests are being conducted. The variety "White Muscatel of Alexandria" does not ripen at the "Quinta Normal," but should do well in the valley of Patata. A summary of the symptoms, cause, and control of the downy mildew caused by Plasmopara viticola is given. It is believed that it was introduced from North America eight or ten years previously. — F. M. Blodgett. 1199. Pachano, Abelardo. Dos enfermedades de las papas. [Two diseases of pota- toes.] Quinta Normal Estac. Exp. Circ. 7. 11 p. Ambato, 1918. — Discusses symptoms, cause, and control of late blight caused by Phytophthora infestans and early blight caused by Alternaria solani. In the comparatively dry climate about Ambato, the early blight is much the more serious, and spraying with bordeaux mixture gave poor results. — F. M. Blodgett. 1200. Pole, Evans, I. B. Anthracnose or zwart roest of the grape (Gloeosporium ampelo- phagum, Sacc.) South African Fruit Grower 7: 219. PI. 1-2. 1920. 1201. PuTTEMANS, A. Unc nouvelle maladie de la vigne. — L'arrachement des grappillons. [A new grape disease. — Pulling off of the grapes.] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 7: 34-36. Fig. 1. 1920. — The Isabella grape {Vitis labrusca) in Brazil has recently shown a diseased condition in which the grapes are partially torn from the rachis; they then become livid and shrivel up. Other grapes immediately surrounding the first soon become diseased and finallj' fall off; this suggests a parasitic disease spread by contact. But no parasitic organism has yet been found. In some cases one-third or even one-half of the grapes are destroyed bj'' this dis- ease. The author thinks that the trouble may be due to certain climatic conditions, espe- cially to the sudden variations in temperature, which amount to as much as 30 or 40 degrees C. in 24 hours. Heat and humidity may be able to cause so great disturbance in the activities of the plant as to produce these results. The most compact bunches are affected. The berries grow to abnormal size and crowd each other until some are torn loose by the pressure. — C. L. Shear. 1202. Ramirez, Roman. Enfermedad de los arboles de limon. [A lemon disease.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5:278-279. 1 fig. 1919. — A leaf spot due to Cladosporium sp. and Macro- sporium sp. — John A. Stevenson. 1203. SPAtJLDiNG, Perlet. Scientific research in 1919 conducted by the OflSce of Inves- tigations in Forest Pathology. Report on white pine blister rust control in 1919. Amer. Plant Pest Committee Bull. 4: 10-11. 1920. — The author reports experimental work on Cronartium ribicola by H. H. York at North Conway, New Hampshire, and L. H. Pennington at Lewis, New York viable aeciospores have been caught in traps after having been blown for a distance of 15 or 20 miles and carried upward 5000 feet. Viable urediniospores were caught up to a No, 2, March, 1921] PATHOLOGY 179 distance of 3200 feet from their source. Similar spores caught at a distance of 3400 feet failed to germinate. Viable sporidia were caught in shrubbery up to a distance of 75 feet from their source and 600 feet in an open meadow. Those caught 2400 feet away failed to germi- nate. Longevity of sporidia is less than 10 minutes with humidity at 90 and temperature of 22-25°C. In other experiments viable sporidia were caught at distance of 180 feet, and those at 300 feet did not germinate. In nine areas where the source of sporidia was localized it was proved that serious infection of pines occurred up to less than 200 feet from the currants. Surgical treatments of diseased pines have shown that where the cut was made at least one and one-half inches back from the visibly affected part, the eradication was successful. — W. H. Rankin. 1204. Stakman, Louise J. A Helminthosporium disease of wheat and rye. Minnesota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 191:24 p., 5 pi. 1920.— A disease of wheat due to a Helminthosporium causes foot rot in seedlings, and death of the seedlings often results. Secondary infections often occur on any part of the plant, including the seeds, above ground. The common wheat, durum, club, emmer, einkorn, and rye, and many other grasses were found suscep- tible. The organism is carried on the seed and is not destroyed by formaldehyde treatments. Control measures consist in using seed from uninfected fields, and in following good cropping methods.— .4. C. Amy. 1205. Taubenhaus, J. J. Diseases of greenhouse crops, x + 429 p. 82 pi. Button and Co.: New York City, 1920.— In this book "intended as a guide to practical growers, teachers, students and investigators in plant pathology," the author aims to "bring together available information on the subject and to place it at the disposal of the greenhouse men." Following a statement that the total value of forced plants and flowers, as estimated for 1909, was $24,930,000, it is pointed out that a conservative estimate, however, may place these losses (from plant disease) at about 30 per cent.— The book is divided into six parts, under the following heads: (1) The soil, healthy and "sick;" (2) Cultural considerations, in which breaking the rest period of plants is included; (3) Diseases of greenhouse vege- tables (includes also mushrooms); (4) Diseases of ornamentals; (5) Greenhouse pests, under the topics plant pests (red spiders and mites) and thrips (includes also mealy bugs, scale insects, white fly, aphids, soil insects, ants, millipeds, sow bugs, slugs, etc.); (6) Methods of control, in which are outlined methods of preparing insecticides and fungicides, methods of fumigation (with burning sulphur and cyanides) and hygienic considerations. Sections (4) and (5) make up the bulk of the book, and here the diseases are briefly discussed, and litera- ture citations made. The book terminates with a simple glossary of technical words.— G. H. Coons. • 1206. Traverso, G. B. La "lebbra" ed il "vaiolo" del Sommaco. [The "lebbra" and the "vaiolo" of the Sumac] Staz. Sper. Agrarie Ital. 52: 213-226. PI. 5 {col.) and 6. 1919. 1207. Van der Bijl, P. A. A leaf spot of the peanut or monkeynut plant caused by the fungus Septogloeum arachidis Rac. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1:528-530. Fig. 1-2. 1920.— This disease has been noticed especially along the Natal coast, and occa- sionally becomes sufficiently serious to warrant the application of a protective spray.— E. M. Doidge. 1208. Waters, R. Take-all disease in wheat. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 137-143. S fig. 1920.— The disease is extremely destructive in Australia, and has evidently been present in New Zealand for some years. The fungus (Ophiobolus graminis) is found upon typically affected plants. Fruiting bodies of the fungus have been identified. Inoculation experiments have not been conducted. Diseased plants usually occur in circular or oval patches. The plants are stunted, more or less bleached, and finally show black masses of the fungus on the underground parts. A similar dwarfing of the plants may be due to crowd- ing by weeds, but in such cases there is no bleaching. Water-logged soil, and the grass grub {Odontriae zealandica) also cause dwarfing, but the presence of the black mycelium of Ophio- 180 PATHOLOGY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, lobolus late in the season will distinguish this disease. Other susceptible hosts are Hordeum sativum, Secale cereale, Hordeum murinum, Bromus sterilis, and Agropyron repens. Control measures suggested are burning of stubble, rotation, deep tillage and heavy applications of lime. Good drainage is an important factor in control, and the land must be kept free from susceptible plants. — N. J. Giddings. 1209. Waters, R. Take-all disease in whea\ New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20:287-288. 1920. — Cultures of Ophiobolus graminis were secured from ascospores. On standard agar the mycelium was white. There was no evidence of fruiting in culture. Wheat plants from dis- infected seed grown in sterilized soil were inoculated by placing near the plant a bit of medium containing the fungus. Four inoculated plants died in from 28 to 36 days, while controls were in good condition at the end of 58 days. Re-isolations were secured from the rootlets of some of the dead plants. Several other methods of inoculation gave no infection. — A''. /. Giddings. 1210. Welten, Heinz. Pflanzenkrankheiten. [Plant diseases.] 199 p., 5 pi., 76 fig. Phil Reclam, Jr. : Leipzig, 1919. 1211. Whipple, O. B. Degeneration in potatoes. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 130. 29 p., 16 fig. Apr., 1919. — The results are given from five-years' work upon potato projects. Degeneration includes various potato ailments which are not, so far as known, traceable to the attacks of parasitic organisms, and includes spindle sprout, curly dwarf, and probably mosaic and leaf roll. Characteristic symptoms are the loss of vigor of the plant, and a cor- responding loss in yielding power. For control it is necessary to turn to seed selection and better cultural methods. In the experiments the plots were planted on the tuber-unit and tuber-line plan. Regarding spindle sprout and yellow top, probably a stage of spindle sprout, the deterioration is apparently sudden and complete, and may be brought about by improper storage of the tubers or unfavorable growing conditions.— Curly-dwarf is the most serious condition. It is a gradual deterioration; the transition from normal to curly dwarf covers a period of two, three, or more seasons. Supposed mosaic degenerates have in their behavior resembled typical curly-dwarfs and are in this paper so considered. The first indications of curly dwarf are a slight crinkling and reduction in the size of the leaf. A plant showing the above foliage symptoms would be classed as an intermediate. Experiments prove that inter- mediates of one season are, as a rule, the curly dwarfs of the next. Tubers from curly- dwarf vines if planted produce no marketable tubers. Tubers from degenerate types are, as a rule, shallow-eyed, when compound with those from normal vigorous plants, and efforts to improve the type of tubers by the selection of shallow-eyed seed tubers should be under- taken, according to the author, with extreme caution.— H. E. Morris. 1212. White, E. W. Apple-tree Anthracnose or Black Spot Canker. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4: 206-207. 1919. 1213. Wolf, F. A. Report of the Division of Plant Pathology and Bacteriology. North Carolina Agric. Exp. Sta. Ann. Rept. 42:65. 1920.— Subject matter of this report is cov- ered in bulletin on clover stem rot in: North Carolina Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 16: 15-18. S pi. 1919. [See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1669.]— F. A. Wolf. ERADICATION AND CONTROL 1214. Anonymous. La "anthracnosis" de la vid. [Anthracnose of the grape.] Infor- macion Agric. [Madrid] 10: 153. 1920.— Treatment for grape anthracnose {Gloeosporium ampelophagum) . — John A. Stevenson. 1215. Anonymous. Tumores bacterianos. [Bacterial tumors.] Informacion Agric. [Madrid] 10: 170-171. 2 fig. 1920.— The nature and control of the olive knot disease due to Bacterium savastanoi). — John A. Stevenson. No. 2, Makch, 1921] PATHOLOGY 181 1216. Anonymous. Control of silver blight. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20:374-377. 1920.— The experiments deal principally with stone fruits. The treatments include tests with a number of fertilizers, with lime, and with copper sulphate and Bordeaux mixture. The only materials which appeared to be of any possible value were the copper sulphate and the Bordeaux mixture. — A^. J. Giddings. 1217. Anonymoits. Spraying calendar for apples in North Carolina. North Carolina Agric. Ext. Service Circ. 101. 4 p. 1920.— Directions for spraying apples to prevent attacks by insects and plant diseases. — F. A. Wolf. 1218. Beck, Olga. Uber eine Methode der Saatgutuntersuchung auf Brand und iiber das Versagen der Kuperfvitriolbeize. [A method of testing wheat for smut contamination and possible omission of the blue vitriol disinfection.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18 : 83-99. 1920.— The author describes an original method for determining arithmetically the number of smut spores in any sample, and from this predicting the percentage of infection likely to result in the subsequent crop. Under certain conditions seed treatment may be safely omitted. — J. Rueser. 1219. BiSBY, G. R., AND A. G. Tola as. The use of Bordeaux mixture for spraying pota- toes. Minnesota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 192. 31 p., 4 fig- 1920.— Bordeaux mixture is a pre- ventive of late blight in potatoes. It also reduces the injury from other leaf diseases and repels certain insects. A 5-5-50 mixture has been found better than weaker ones. The indications are that spraying may result in the production of more vigorous tubers. — .4. C. Amy. 1220. Blair, R. E. The work of the Yuma reclamation project experiment farm in 1918. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 75. 77 p., 32 fig. 1920.— Preservative treatments for willow posts. 1221. Braun, Harry. Presoak method of seed treatment; a means of preventing seed injury due to chemical disinfectants and of increasing germicidal efficiency. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 363-392. PI. 69-82. 9 fig. 1920.— Full experimental data in support of conclusions previously published.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2576.— D. Reddick. 1222. Bryce, p. I. Can we improve potato storage? Ann. Rept. Quebec Soc. Protection of Plants 12: 53-59. 1920.— The article deals with statistics showing the importance of the crop in Canada, the chief storage rots, and suggestions on storing potatoes both in small and large lots. — B. T. Dickson. 1223. Coons, G. H. Safeguarding next year's wheat. Michigan Agric. Exp. Sta. Quart. Bull. 31:9-11. 1920. 1224. Detwiler, Samuel B. White pine blister rust control in 1919. Amer. Plant Pest Committee Bull. 4. 10 p. 1920.— A summary of the proceedings of the fifth annual Inter- national Blister Rust Conference held at Albany, New York, on December 8-9, 1919. As the result of four-years' field work it is now proved that white pine blister rust (Cronartium ribicola) can be controlled locally if the currant and gooseberry bushes are destroyed within 200-300 feet of the pines. It has been proved that unskilled laborers with trained supervision remove on the average 95 per cent of the bushes in the first working of an area. It has been found that Ribes does not multiply rapidly in an eradication area, and a second eradication does not seem necessary for five or ten years after the first. No new pine infections were found in 1919 on four control areas carefully examined. The labor costs per acre for eradi- cation in the New England States average between 24 and 42 cents. The number of pines that are affected in the New England States is said to be increasing rapidly. On an area of 72 square miles in New Hampshire it was estimated that one-fourth of the pines are affected. The Conference believes that it is necessary in the infected regions for white pine owners to 182 PATHOLOGY |BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, destroy currants and gooseberries within 200 feet of the pines if they are to save the pines. The rust has not been found in Western United States, and the existing quarantines are con- sidered a safeguard. The resolutions adopted urgently recommend that the destruction of the currants and gooseberries in white pine stands be adopted generally in infected regions; that pine and currant growing regions be segregated by law; that the cultivated black cur- rant be outlawed; that state and federal experimental work be continued; that scouting in the western states be continued; and that an accurate census of the white pine in the country be made by the federal government. The experimental and practical control work done on control areas in the various states is summarized by states. No blister rust was found on pines in 1919 outside the New England States, New York, Minnesota, and Wisconsin. — W. H. Rankin. 1225. Du COMET, V. De la lutte centre le Phytophtora infestans. [Combating Phyto- phtora infestans.] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 7:59-65. 1920.— The principal work car- ried on in different countries in the prevention of late blight of potato is reviewed. In the author's region — Grignon — four applications of Bordeaux mixture are sufficient in the worst seasons, and usually two suffice. — C. L. Shear. 1226. DuTTON, W. C. Dusting and spraying experiments of 1918 and 1919. Michigan Agric. Exp. Sta. Special Bull. 102. 50 p., 20 fig. 1920.— Comparative dusting and spraying ex- periments with fungicides and insecticides were carried on in 1918 and 1919 in several orchards in various parts of Michigan, the fruits being apple, cherry, plum, peach and currants. A few experiments were also made with potatoes. For apples, the scab was as well, and in some cases better, controlled by the sulphur dust than by the lime-sulphur spray. Dry lime- sulfur dissolved in water and sprayed gave poor control, as did barium tetrasulphide (B. T. S.). The latter caused russeting of the fruit in some varieties. The lime-sulphur sprays injured the leaves a little, while the sulphur dust did no harm. Of the insecticides, lead arsenate gave uniformly good results. Calcium arsenate burned the foliage somewhat and gave only fair control of coddling moth. Magnesium arsenate, on the contrary, was unsatisfactory as a control and caused serious burning. On cherries, dusting with sulphur (90 parts) and lead arsenate (10 parts) did not control, although it delayed for about two weeks the onset of leaf blight {Coccomyces hiemalis). The trees were badly defoliated by the middle of September. The trees sprayed with lime-sulphur (plus arsenate of lead) remained free from the disease until late in September, more than two months after the last spraying, when a small amount of infection occurred. In the same orchard the dusted and check trees showed serious loss from Coniothyrium, which caused cankers at the point of attachment of the fruit pedicel, causing the drying up of the fruit. The sprayed trees did not show this trouble. Other spraying and dusting experiments with cherry and plum were inconclusive because of lack of insect and fungous trouble in the unsprayed plots. For leaf curl {Exoascus deformans) of the peach the 90-10 dust mixture (sulphur and lead arsenate) applied March 7 was practically of no value. The Niagara soluble sulphur was only very slightly better. The dry-lime-sulphur dissolved and applied as a spray showed much better results than the dust treatments, but still did not give good control. Magnesium arsenate as an insecticide caused almost com- plete defoliation of the peach. Currants sprayed with bordeaux mixture remained healthy throughout the season; those dusted and those sprayed with lime-sulphur showed yellowing of the leaves and lost much foliage. Bordeaux mixture controlled the anthracnose (Pseudo- peziza ribis) successfully. The other treatments reduced the anthracnose but did not con- trol it. Of the varieties tested, the untreated bushes showed great variation in suscepti- bility to anthracnose. Prince Albert is very resistant; London Market resistant. Wilder, Perfection, Fay's Prolific, La Versailles, Cherry and Red Cross are susceptible; and Red Dutch is very susceptible. With potatoes, calcium arsenate applied as a dry dust (85 parts with 15 parts of talc as a filler) or sprayed on at the rate of 1^ lbs. in 50 gallons give equally perfect control of the Colorado potato beetle. — E. A. Bessey. 1227. Evans, N. H. Report on experiments for the control of Apple Scab. Ann. Rept. Dept. Agric. (British Columbia) 14: 25-27. 1920. No. 2, March, 1921] PATHOLOGY 183 1228. EwERT. Brauchbare Ersatzmittel fxir altbewahrte Mittel zur Abwehr von Pflanzen- krenkheiten im Obst- und Gartenbau. [Useful substitutes for well-known mixtures in the control of plant diseases in orchard and garden.] lUust. Schlesische Monatsschr. Obst-, Gemiise- und Gartenbau 1918: 96-97. 1918. 1229. GossARD, H. A. Dust spraying. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5: 147-149. 1920.— This is a report of tests during 1916-1917 comparing dusting with liquid applications and giving the respective costs. — R. C. Thomas. 1230. Hardenburg, E. V. Potato inspection in New York in 1919. Potato Mag. 2'2: 9, 38. 1920. 1231. HiLTNER, L. Ueber die Beizung des Wintergetreidesaatguts. [On the treatment of winter-wheat seed.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35:486-487. 1920.— The Agricultural Institute in Munich has worked for the development of an organization involving the em- ployment of inspectors charged with the duty of instructing farmers in the details of seed treatment and enforcing the requirements that all seed be treated. The author recommends "fusariol" as a practical fungicide for prevention of bunt (Tilletia sp.), and adds that its use results in improved stand and yield. He compares "fusariol" with formaldehyde, "uspu- lum," "fusafine," and a new fungicide, "sublimoform." The author warns against the use of copper sulphate because of injurious effect on germination. For control of barley stripe disease {Helminthosporium graminium) he recommends a 0.25 per cent solution of "uspu- lum" as the most satisfactory of fungicides employed in his experiments. In the preven- tion of Fusarium infection in rye the author obtained best results as to stand and yield when he used fusariol. Very satisfactory results were obtained also from the use of "uspulum." — H. B. Htimphrey. 1232. Howard, W. L. Brown rot of apricots and its prevention. Better Fruit 15^: 7. 1920. 1233. Hunt, E. C. Report of Assistant Horticulturist and Inspector of Fruit Pests, East and West Kootenay districts. Ann. Rept. Dept. Agric. (British Columbia) 14: 36-39. 1920. —Spraying for control of apple scab with (1) Bordeaux mixture containing excess of lime, "soluble sulphur" being used for the calyx spray, (2) lime-sulphur solution, and (3) sulphur dust. The first gave best control, and in the case of Mcintosh Red, a slightly greater yield than lime-sulphur. Sulphur dust gave very poor control, 86.95 per cent of the fruit of Mcintosh Red being scabby. — J. W. Eastham. 1234. Johnson, A. G., and J. G. Dickson. Stem rusts of grains and the barberry in Wisconsin. Wisconsin Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 304. 16 p., 6 fig. 1919.— A general statement of the relation of the common barberry to the spread of the stem rust {Puccinia graminis) of cereals and grasses. The difference between the stem rust and leaf rust is explained by photographs, and a chart shows the extent of spread of the stem rust from an infected barberry hedge. — E. M. Gilbert. 1235. Laffer, H. E. Bordeaux powders vs. home-made bordeaux mixtures. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:595. 1920.— Trials with proprietary Bordeaux powders showed them to be ineffective in controlling grape downy mildew. — L. R. Waldron. 1236. Leiby, R. W. Spraying Irish potatoes. North Carolina Agric. Ext. Serv. Circ. 103. U p. 1920.— A popular treatment of subject matter in Bull. North Carolina Dept. Agric. 40^:7-38. 10 fig. 1919.— F. A. Wolf. 1237. Letteer, C. R. The work of the San Antonio experiment farm in 1918. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 73. 38 p., 4 fig. 1920.— Effect of rotation and tillage on cotton root rot.- See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1423. 184 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1238. Macrum, C. a. Combined bordeaux oil emulsion spray. Better Fruit 14^:9, 39. 1920.— Directions are given for making a combination spray solution by the addition to each 200 gallons of 1.5 per cent Bordeaux mixture (6-6-50) of 1^ pounds glue and 12 gallons oil emulsion. — A. E. Murneek. 1239. Maheux, Georges. Spraying to increase potato production. Ann. Rept. Quebec Soc. Protection of Plants 12:43-46. 1920. — Results of potato spraying on sixty experi- mental plots in forty countries are given. The yield for 1919 was 50 per cent higher in plots sprayed four times than the check plot, and the net profit $30.00 per acre more. — B. T. Dickson. 1240. Martin, W. H. The relation of sulfur to soil acidity and to the control of potato scab. Soil Sci. 9: 393-409. 1920. — In the experiments reported, five types of soil and two varieties of potatoes were used. It was found that when sulphur was added to the soils the decrease in scab corresponded to the increase of soil acidity as measured by the hydrogen-ion concentration. The increase in acidity depended not only upon the amount of sulphur added, but upon the percentage of sulphur which was oxidized. Where the hydrogen-ion concentration of water extracts of the soil was Ph 5.8 or less before sulphur was applied, 300 to 500 pounds per acre gave approximately as good control as heavier applications. Where the initial hydrogen-ion concentration exceeded 6.0 heavier applications (600-1200 pounds) gave best control. — Dorothy Wilson. 1241. McCuBBiN, W. A. The seed potato question. Seed World 8^: 24-25. 1920. 1242. Newell, W. Citrus canker eradication in Florida. Monthly Bull. California State Commission Hort. 8: 394-395. 1919. — The rapid spread of the citrus canker disease, in Florida after 1912, when it was first observed by Dr. E. W. Berger is noted. Through the aid of the state appropriations, however, work was conducted from 1912 to 1919 which practically eradicated all signs of the disease. — E. L. Overholser. 1243. Nowell, W. Red ring disease of coco-nuts. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 222. 1920. — A method for the disposal of nematode-infested material is given. It consists in dig- ging up the palm by the roots and sawing the trunk into 3-foot lengths over the pit formed by the digging. Each length is then split longitudinally into about 6 pieces, and the whole lot of material, including leaves, sawdust, etc., is placed in the pit over some brushwood in the manner in which it is usual to place material for burning charcoal. The heap is then set on fire and left to burn slowly under a covering of earth until all has been burnt to ashes. The method is somewhat expensive, but the results obtained justify its employment. — J. S. Dash. 1244. Pethybridge, F. R. Potato spraying trials in the Cambridge Fens, 1919. Jour. Ministry Agric. Great Britain 27:282-286. 1920.— Results are given from some potato- spraying trials conducted during 1919 in which 1 and 2 per cent Bordeaux and Burgundy mixtures were used at the rates of 85 and 200 gallons per acre. In all cases some scorching of the foliage was obtained, and in a few cases it was severe. The weather was hot and dry during a part of the season, and this was said to be the cause of the scorching. The yields were less in the sprayed than in the unsprayed plots. — M. B. McKay. 1245. PiPAL, F. J. The barberry and its relation to the stem rust of wheat in Indiana. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918: 63-70. 2 fig. 1920.— The author discusses briefly the his- tory of Berberis vulgaris in its relation to wheat rust and cities 13 specific cases of rust out- break investigated during the summer of 1917. — F. C. Anderson. 1246. Regan, W. S. The destruction of Ribes by chemical means. American Plant Pest Committee Bull. 4: 12. 1920.— Dip oil, containing 25 per cent cresol, sprayed on tops or crown of bushy species kills in the majority of cases. Dilutions of dip oil with fuel oil, 36.3 degrees Beaum^, at the rate of 1 to 5 and 1 to 8 is advised for areas of skunk currant {Ribes No. 2, March, 1921] PATHOLOGY 185 cynosbati), two or three applications being necessary to kill. Spraying the foliage kills in from a half hour to a few hours. Efficiency of dip oil is little effected by rain, sunlight, absence of foliage, or season. Fuel oil alone is effective if two or three applications are made. Neither oil is poisonous to animals. Treatment is economical where pulling is difficult. Compressed-air hand sprayers were used. — W. H. Rankin. 1247. Robertson, W. H. Commercial and home-made lime-sulphur spray. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4: 375. 1919. 1248. RoDDA, T. E. Control of brown rot on peaches. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 20-23. 1920. — Brown rot did not develop to any extent on account of the dry season. Fruit was treated to prevent development of brown rot after picking. Dipping in bluestone 1-10 or 1-20 caused fruit injury, while 1-40 was apparently safe. Formalin solution 1-50 produced spots on the fruit, while 1-100 did not injure it. Lime-sulphur solution 1-15 and 1-30 did not affect fruit, but the 1-15 left too heavy a deposit on the peaches. Permanganate of potash 1-640 did not injure fruit. Applications of Bordeaux powder, sulphur dust, and a lime-sulphur dust were unsatisfactory. Fumigation with sulphur (i oz. per 100 cu. ft.) and with formalin (§ oz. per 100 cu. ft.) injured the fruit. — A'. J. Giddings. 1249. ScHAFFxiT, E. Versuche zur Bekampfung des Kartoffelkrebses im Jahr 1918/19. [Control experiments against Potato Canker (Black wart.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenkrankh. 30: 59-67. 1920. — Author states that soil disinfection experiments gave no practical results. He then discusses the results of experiments relative to resistance of potato varieties to Chryso- phlyctis endobiotica. Of the varieties tested for five years the following proved immune: (1) Early: Sechswochen (verbesserte lange), Poppehurt; (2) Medium Early: Koralle, Lech; (3) Medium Late: Danusia, Jubel, Ada; (4) Late: Agraria, Erika. A number of the varie- ties tested for a period of four years also remained without attack. — It is important to note that some varieties proved immune for one year or several years, but were slightly attacked in other years. This observation is explained as due to the use of "deteriorated" seed. Author suggests that the immunity of the varieties mentioned is not absolute, but only relative; that varieties showing immunity under normal conditions may lose this faculty as soon as the plant no longer exhibits its normal form of development and is weakened in its physio- logical functions, as a result of pathological conditions transmissible through the seed tuber. The contrasting results given by author in support of his argument seem to substantiate his findings. Hence there exists in these varieties and in their behaviour towards the causal agent of potato canker a classical example of immunity and "predisposition" (in Sorauer's sense) of plants according to their constitution in their relation to a pronounced parasite. The use of varieties of proven immunity on infected lands is recommended under proper legislative safeguards. — H. T. Giissow. 1250. ScHOENE, W. J. Twelfth report of the State Entomologist and Plant Pathologist 1918-1919. Quart. Bull. Virginia Crop Pest Commission 1^: 1-28. 1920.— Contains brief notes on the following topics: Inspection for pine blister rust; cedar rust and cedar eradica- tion; "Take-all" disease of wheat in Virginia. — F. D. Fromme. 1251. Selby, a. D., and R. C. Thomas. Bordeaux mixture an active fungicide. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5: 220. July, 1920. 1252. Shapovalov, Michael. The potato-scab control problem as it stands to-day. Potato Mag. 2'i: 8-9, 26. 3 fig. 1920. 1253. TiCE, C. Certified potato seed production. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 197. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 665. 1254. Vayssiere, P. [Rev. of: Vermorel (V) and Dantont (E.) Composition chimique des Bouillies sulfo-calciques employees centre les Insectes et les Maladies des plantes. W p. Montpellier et Villefranche, 1919. (Chemical composition of lime sulphur used in combating insects and diseases of plants.)] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 7: 86. 1920 — C. L. Shear. BOTANICAL ABBTRACrS, VOL. vn, NO. 2 186 PATHOLOGY iBoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1255. Westerdijk, Johanna. Das Spritzen der Kartoffeln in den Niederlanden. [Spraying potatoes in Holland.] Jahresb. Verein. Angew. Bet. 16: 132-138. 1918. — Spraying for potato blight (Phytophthora) is much commoner in Holland than in Germany. It is particularly necessary in the provinces near the sea. Two treatments beginning late in June are important. A third treatment often is necessary. In Friesland six treatments may be made, depending on conditions. Bordeux or Bungundy mixture is used of 1.5 per cent strength and is applied at the rate of 750 to 1000 liters per hectare. Increased yield from spraying is sufficient to pay the cost of application. — Brief discussion is given of resistant varieties. — D. Reddick. REGULATORY MEASURES 1256. Federal Horticultural Board, U. S. Dept. Agric. [Restrictive legislation and notices of quarantines in U. S. A.] Service and Regulatory Announcements 68: 52-111. 1920. — Correspondence relating to legislation in state of Texas with respect to pink boUworm of cotton shows some of the difficulties involved in enacting effective eradication provisions, especially when "states rights" are involved. The Texas and the Louisiana pink bollworm acts of 1920 are reproduced in full. — Notice of domestic federal quarantine 45 on account of g3rpsy moth and brown tail moth, with regulations. An extension of the area in which there are restrictions upon the movement of all forest and quarry products. — Notice of domestic federal quarantine 46 on account of pink bollworm of cotton with rules and regulations. This notice is also issued as an unnumbered leaflet by the U. S. Secretary of Agriculture. — Notice of quarantine 47 against Hawaiian and Porto Rican cotton, cotton seed and cotton products, with regulations. Previous quarantine restrictions are simply brought into one document. — List of current quarantine and other restrictive orders. — D. Reddick. 1257. Friedrichs, K. Zur Organisation des Koloniales Pfianzenschutzes. [Organiza- tion of plant protection for the colonies.] Tropenflanzer 21; 311-322. 1918. 1258. Lyne, W. H. Horticultural quarantine in B. C. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4: 132-133. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 983. 1259. Schoene, W. J. Partial report of inspection work during autumn of 1919 and spring of 1920. Quart. Bull. 22; Virginia Crop Pest Commission. 4 p. 1920.— Of a total of 157,030 apple trees inspected during the period covered by the report slightly more than five per cent were discarded on account of crown-gall. The percentage of defective trees from various nurseries ranged from zero to as high as forty per cent. The details of the inspection are shown in tabular form, with the nurseries from which the shipments originated grouped by states. The apple stock which was grown in Virginia nurseries averaged 2.14 per cent affected with crown-gall, while that which originated without the state averaged 5.55 per cent. — F. D. Fromtne. MISCELLANEOUS (METHODS, COGNATE RESEARCHES, ETC.) 1260. Anonymous. Exhibition of diseases of the para rubber tree. Nature 105:86-87. 1920. — An exhibit of fungous diseases of Hevea brasiliensis in Cejdon and Malaj^a prepared by J. B. Farmer and opened March 10, at the Imperial Coll. Sci. and Tech. Several diseases are of great importance to the rubber industry. Principal diseases in exhibit: (1) Brown Bast, most important so far, perhaps of bacterial origin: (2) Fomes lignosus on roots, second in importance; (3) Fomes pseudoferreus , also on roots; (4) Dry Rot ( Ustulina zonata), a wound parasite; (5) Patch Canker {Phytophthora faberi) a bark disease which is increasing; (6) Stripe Canker (Phytophthora sp.), affected 70 per cent of trees on some estates in 1915-17; (7) Pink Disease {Corticium salmonicolor) . — 0. A. Stevens. 1261. Anonymous. An Imperial Bureau of Mycology. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 30. 1920. — Reviews the report of the proceedings of the second meeting of mycological workers of India, at which a resolution was passed favouring the establishment of an Imperial Bureau No. 2, Makch, 1921] PATHOLOGY 187 of Mycology to work along similar lines to the already existing Imperial Bureau of Ento- mology, for the identification of fungi, the publication of pathological literature, the estab- lishment of a plant-pathology library, and the answering of enquiries of plant pathologists. — J . S. Dash. 1262. BoKURA, Umenojo. A new bacterial disease of gypsy-moth caterpillars. Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan V: 34-55. 1920.— [Following ab.stract is from English resume, p. 55.) As a natural enemy of the gypsy-moth caterpillar {Lymanthria Dispar L.) this disease which is wide-spread in Japan is, together with a parasitic species of Hemiptera, playing a most important role in checking the spread of the insect. Appearing when the worm has reached its fourth or fifth moulting skin, the disease, "Nankwabyo," resembles the "Nank- wabyo," a kind of "flacherie" of silk worms. It is caused by a new species of bacteria, Bacillus Disparis Hori and Bokura. The pathogene is rod-shaped, measures 1-1.3 X 0.7- 0.8 microns, with 6 to 8 peritrichiate flagella. Endospores are not formed, and it is not dis- colored by the Gram's method. Konjak-medium is not liquefied. Fermentation is readily set up in dextrose, laevulose, saccharose, maltose, and galactose. Optimum temperature is 30°-32*'C. When fed to gypsy-moth caterpillars death ensues in from 1 to 8 days. It is non-pathogenic to silkworms, Anomala rrifocuprea Motsch., Pieris rapae L., Aphis sp. on lily and Hemerophila atrilineata Butl. on mulberry. It is recommended that sterilized water in which the bouillon or soy-bean cake decoction culture of the bacteria is mixed be sprayed on plants on which the worms are feeding, or else the bodj'-fluid of the diseased caterpillars be used as spray material. — L. M. Massey. 1263. Dickson, B. T. Report of the delegates to the Canadian Branch of the American Phytopathological Society. Ann. Rept. Quebec Soc. Protection of Plants 12: 24-27. 1920. — An account of the annual meeting held on December 11 and 12, 1919, at the Ontario Agric. Coll. A short summary of each address and paper is given. — B. T. Dickson. 1264. HoRT, Edward C. The cultivation of aerobic bacteria from single cells. Jour. Hygiene 18:361-368. 1 fig. 1920. 1265. HoxiE, Frederick J. Roof construction for factories with excessive moisture. Amer. Architect 115: 181-187. 20 fig. Jan. 29, 1919.— Rotting of roof planks and sweating can be prevented in a large part by improved design and construction. Chamfering off upper corners of wide beams would prevent the usual rotting off of roof planks above the beams. Ornamental moldings at the upper edges of the beams, and sheathing should be avoided. Insulation upon the outside of a roof should prevent precipitation of water within the plank. Such an insulated roof would consist of an outer creosoted plank and an inner untreated plank separated by waterproofed material. Insulation added to old roofs which have begun to decay should retard the destruction. Other means of assistance in preventing the rot in roofs are: insulation of skylights, drains, and ventilators to prevent radiation of heat; the proper placing of heating pipes to keep the roof dry and warm, and prevent circu- lation of moist air against cool roofs. — Walter H. Snell. 1266. HuDiG, J., AND C. Meyer. De Hooghalensche ziekte een nieuwe bodemziekte on Zand — en veengronden. [The Hooghalen disease, a new soil disease on sand and peat soils.] 25 p. Den Haag: J. en H. van Langenhuysen, 1918. 1267. Jones, L. R., M. Miller, and E. Bailey. Frost necrosis of potato tubers. Wis- consin Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 46. 46 p., 1 colored pi., 12 fig. 1919.— Potatoes slightly frosted may be internally discolored when seemingly unaffected externally. Such injuries are termed "frost necrosis" and should be differentiated from other necrotic lesions, especially the non-parasitic but inheritable "net necrosis" and the parasitic types of "ring necrosis." The symptoms, which are described and figured in detail, include blotching and netted or ring discolorations of the interior tissues, and are more pronounced at the stem end than eye end of the tuber and in the vascular elements more than in the parenchyma. Experimental 188 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. Vll, chilling included trials in accurately controlled freezing chambers where the temperature could be dropped at any desired rate. There is variation in individual susceptibility of tubers; in general, frost necrosis appears following exposure to about — 10°C. for 1 hour, —5° for 2 hours, or to slightly below —3° for several hours. While the actual freezing tem- perature is near 1°C., super-cooling to —3° to —5° is necessary, the degree of this being greater with slow rate of temperature drop. The conditions of turning sweet and of freezing solid are also described. Neither variety, size, maturity, nor relative tuber turgidity seems to influence frost necrosis. Sprouts are relatively resistant, but start slowly. Therefore, it is not advisable to use frosted potatoes for seed. Frost necrosis symptoms are not inherited. — R. E. Vaughn. 1268. Lee, S. C. Electrical treatment of seed. Agric. Gaz. Canada 7: 248-249. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 625. 1269. Manaresi, Angelo. Sui danni prodotti ai fiori degli alberi fruttiferi dalle gelate primaverili in genera e da quelle in particolare dei giorni 28, 29, e 30 marzo 1918. [Damage to flowers of fruit trees by spring frosts and in particular the frosts of March 28, 29, and 30, 1918.] Rev. Patol. Veg. 10: 1-26. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 986. 1270. Moore, V. A. Principles of Microbiology. 8vo. 506 p. New York, 1918.— A treatise on bacteria, fungi, and protozoa pathogenic to domesticated animals. 1271. Neger, F. W. Die RoUe des Lichtes und Chlorophylls bei der Entstehung von Rauchschaden an griinen Pflanzen. [The role of light and of chlorophyll in the initiation of smoke injury to green plants.] Zeitschr. Forst-u. Jagdw. 48: 624-635. 1918.— Abst. in Zentbl. gesamte Landw. 1, Entry 445. 1272. Rayner, M. C. Mycorrhiza and the Ericaceae. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919:332. 1920. 1273. Smith, Erwin F. An introduction to bacterial diseases of plants. 23 X lo cm., XXX + 688 p. 453 fig. and frontispiece. W. B. Saunders Co. : Philadelphia, 1920.— "Manu- scipt of this book was completed for publication in 1915 and, in general, that year may be taken as the date of the outlook, but here and there, where it seemed most necessary, it has been revised down to the end of 1919." — The book has been made primarily for laboratory use under the guidance of a competent teacher. It is the "result of 35 years of reading and 25 years of diligent laboratory and field investigation."— Part 1 (75 p.) is a conspectus of bacterial diseases of plants under the topics: distribution, period of susceptibility, infection incubation, recovery from disease, transmission of pathogene, morphology and physiology, of parasite, action of parasite on host, host reaction, methods of control. Part 2 (56 p.) deals with technique: apparatus, culture media, isolation, inoculation, sectioning, staining, illustrating, cataloging, etc. Part 3 (341 p.) is devoted to an extended account of the diseases caused by the following organisms: Bacillus tracheiphilus, Bad. campestre, Aplanobacter stewarti, Bad. solanacearum, Aplanobacter michiganense, Bacillus carotovorus, B. phyto- phthorus, Bad. phaseoU, Bad. maculicolum, Bad. malvacearum, Bad. mori, Bacillus amylo- vorus, Bact. savastanoi, and Bact. tumefaciens . Part 4 (160 p.) deals with tumors, tumor formation, experimental teratoses. Part 5 (30 p.) contains suggestions for students about study, experimentation, interpretation, presentation, ethics, etc. — D. Reddick. 1274. WiELER, A. Rauchschaden bei Kokereien. [Smoke injury from coke ovens.] Jahresb. Vereinig. Angew. Bot. 16: 64-76. 1918.— Abstract in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 30: 22-23. 1920. 1275. Zavitz, C. a. Systematic experiments. Agric. Gaz. Canada 7: 244-246. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 684. No. 2, March, 1921] PHARMACOGNOSY 189 PHARMACEUTICAL BOTANY AND PHARMACOGNOSY Heber W. Youngken, Editor E. N. Gathercoal, Assistant Editor 1276. Angerhausen, J. Oxalsaure in Rhabarber und die Entgiftung von Rhabarber- zubereitungen. [Oxalic acid and the detoxification of rhubarb products,] Zeitschr. Unter- such. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39: 81-87. 1920. — In rhubarb malic, citric and oxalic acids occur. The latter occurs in water soluble form in the leaves about twice as abundantly as in the stalk. Compotes, marmalades, etc. to which the rhubarb leaves were added have produced poisoning, especially in children. In adults 0.6 grams of free oxalic acid is said to suffice to deprive the blood of its protecting calcium. 200 grams of rhubarb leaves may contain 1.0 gram oxalic acid. In preparing rhubarb leaves one should add to the water 0.5-1 gram of calcium carbonate for every 100 grams rhubarb. Toxic effects are thus pre- vented.— H. G. Barbour. 1277. Angerhausen, J. tJber Saft aus Rhabarberstielen. [Juice from rhubarb stalks.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39: 122-130. 1920. — A detailed chemical analysis. To de-acidify rhubarb juice, the addition of 0.25-0.35 per cent calcium carbonate is suggested which also detoxifies by removal of oxalic acid. As a preservative, 10 per cent alcohol or 0.25 per cent formic acid is suggested. — H. G. Barbour. 1278. Atkinson, E. H. Weeds and their identification. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 299-301. PI. 1. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 12. 1279. Bailey, E.M. Food products and drugs. 1919. Parti. Connecticut [New Haven] Agric Exp. Sta. Bull. 219: 209-259. 1919. — The work comprises the results of food and drug inspection for 1919, as required by State statute. — Henry Dorsey. 1280. Cockayne, L. An economic investigation of the montane tussock-grassland of New Zealand. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 337-345. Fig. 1-7. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entries 600, 601. 1281. GoRis, A., and Ch. ViscHNiAC. Caracteres et composition du Primeverose. [Char- acteristics and composition of "primeverose."] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 871-873. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1311. 1282. Greig-Smith, R. The germicidal activity of the Eucalyptus oils. Part 2. The action of the oils in aqueous dilutions. Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales 44: 311-347. Text- figs. 1-7. Tables 1-21. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 5. Entry 801.) Eucalyptus oils are irregu- lar in their action upon B. coli communis. Cineol begins to act in about one minute and a half; phenol, used as a standard of comparison, acts instantly. The curves of cineol and phenol cross in five minutes with a dilution of 1: 75 at 20°. The phenol-coefficient of cineol in 15 minutes at 20° is 3.1, in 30 minutes 3.4; in 4 hours it declines to 2.8. Aromandendral is the most active of the constituents of the oils, with a phenol-coefficient of 21.1 in 30 minutes. Piperitone is the next most active. Pinene and sesquiterpene are low (0.8 to 0.5). The rectified oils of E. cinerea and E. Smithii are more efficient than the crude oils; in the case of the former this appeared to be due to the hydrolysis of the esters and subsequent oxida- tion of alcohols to aldehydes. Treatment with alkali did not reduce the efficiency of the acid rectified oils. Addition of acetic acid to crude oil doubled its germicidal powers in the course of 3| months. (The addition of acid also increases germicidal activities in the case of phenol.) This activity is proportional in the oils of E. cinera to the starch-iodide reaction and not to acidity, but this is not true for the oils as a class. The rectified oil of E. polybractea is less efficient than the crude oil. The oil of the Braidwood variety of E. Australiana, which grows on high ridges is the best and cheapest disinfecting oil (phenol-coefficient 5.8 in 30 minutes), the second best crude oil tested was that from E. cneorifolia (4.8 to 30 minutes). — Eloise Gerry. 190 PHARMACOGNOSY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 128.'> (jRiEBEL, C. Die mikroskopische Untersuchung der Tee-und Tabakersatzstofife. [Microscopy of tea and tobacco substitutes.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39: 225-299. 9120.— The author describes 67 substitutes.—//. G. Barbour. 1284. Griebel, C. Zur Anatomie der Lupinensamen. [Lupine seeds.] Zeitschr. Unter- such. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39: 297-299. 1920. 1285. Mitchell, D. T. Poisoning of cattle by feeding on ergotized Paspalum. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1 : 422-426. 1920. — The cultivation of Paspalum on an extensive scale in Natal is of comparatively recent date, and in recent years it has been noted that in cattle which were allowed access to the Paspalum lands at a certain season, symptoms of incoordination of movement appeared. A large percentage of the Paspalum heads were found to be infected with Claviceps Paspali. From a series of experiments car- ried out at the Veterinary Research Laboratory it was noted that the initial symptoms appeared in each case on the second day after the infected heads were fed to the animals, and were characterized by muscular tremors, hypersensitiveness, increased glandular secre- tion and increases in respirations and pulse rate. These symptoms were rapidly followed by incoordination of movement, lack of tone of the leg mviscles, loss of appetite and consti- pation. Recovery was noted to commence about the fifth or sixth day. Prophylactic meas- ures consist of reaping and collection of the grass during the flowering season. — E. M. Doidge. 1286. Smith, H. G. On the essential oil of Boronia pinnata Sm. and the presence of Elemicin. Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria 32 (N. S.): 14-19. 1919. — The Boronias (Rutaceae), abundant in Australia, have flowers which are often strongly perfumed. The essential oil was distilled from Boronia pinata plants in full bloom. It was found that the principal con- stituent (about three-fourths or 70 per cent of the oil) is the trimethoxyphenol-ether, elemicin. This substance also occurs in the oil of Manila Elemi distilled from Canarium comrmme L. (Burseraceae), but this is the first time that elemicin has been detected in the oil of Aus- tralian plants. The odor of the crude oil suggests geraniol. Details of the distillation and analysis are given. — Eloise Gerry. 1287. Smith, E. Philip. Plant Dermatitis II, Jour. Botany 58: 173-176. 1920.— The symptoms and treatment of lacquer poisoning are given. It is noted that this type of poison- ing is not common in England, but is very frequent in Japan and China where the lacquer industry is considerable. Lacquer is made from the juice of Rhus vernicifera. Confectioners often suffer from vanilla dermatitis, which is probably due to oil of Cashew. The dust from certain fine woods often irritates the skin or mucus membrane of workers in these woods, as satinwood, teak, ebony, rosewood, olive-wood, box, coco-wood, and partridge-wood. The poisonous substances are apparently normal products of metabolism in the plant, and are only by accident discovered to be poisonous. The biological significance of the poison must be worked out with care to avoid hasty inferences. From the point of view of human con- tact there are two types of substances: one soluble in water (e.g. nettle), the other of oily nature (Rhus). Specially sensitive skin may be affected by almost any combination of rough hairs with exuded cell-sap. Personal idiosyncrasy plays a very important part in dermatitis. A list is given of forty-two plants known to cause dermatitis, and a bibliography of the subject is appended. — K. M. Wiegand. 1288. Simpson, Jose Agtjstin. Estudio sobre el acido cianhidrico en el "Phaseolus lunatus" (Frijol de Birmania). Discurso de recepcion como academico de numero. [Study on hydrocyanic acid in Phaseolus lunatus (Birmania bean). Address delivered on becoming a member of the academy.] An. Acad. Cien. Habana — Rev. Cien. 60: 250-283. 10 fig. 1919. — A number of varieties of beans of the species Phaseolus lunatus which are imported into Cuba in considerable quantities were studied. These are known commercially as Java, Bir- mania, Rangoon, Lima, or Burma beans. Considerable variety in color pattern is shown; one of the most poisonous varieties is described as of a rather pale yellowish color, mottled with gray or lilac spots or bands, elongated parallel to the dorsal portion of the seed. — The No. 2, March, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 191 poisonous principle of the beans is due to the glucoside "Phaseolunatina," CioHnOeN, which by hydrolysis forms among other products hydrocyanic acid. This highly toxic prin- ciple occurs in enormous quantities in uncultivated varieties of Phascolus lunatus, the amount varying from 65 to 32U milligrams in 100 grams of beans. In cultivated, improved varieties the poison is produced in hardly appreciable amounts. Histological studies were made of these beans and it was found that they could be readily distinguished from ordinary beans (Phaseolus vulgaris) by the form of certain cells of the seed coat and the absence in these of crys-oals of oxalate of lime. — Prolonged boiling never completely removes the poison but as boiling water dissolves the "Phaseolunatina" without destroying it, the decoction is as danger- ous as are the beans themselves. It is only by means of delicate chemical tests that it is possible to positively distinguish the poisonous from the improved varieties. The glucoside in question is acted upon by various elements; among these the enzymes contained in the beans in the presence of moisture, so that if the cells containing the glucoside are broken and this comes in contact with the ferments, the reaction resulting in the formation of hydrocyanic acid takes place. The hydrolysis is much more active if water is then added, resulting in a much more rapid formation of the poison. This fact is taken advantage of in determining the amount of hydrocyanic acid contained in the beans. A rapid method of quantitative analysis is described in detail. The hydrocyanic acid in the distillate is determined by the gravimetric, volumetric, or colorimetric method, the volumetric method of Liebig being especially rapid. Another method of determining the poison contained in these beans is described, this being based on the transformation of hydrocyanic acid into sulpho-cyanic acid. By this process it is possible to determine quantities as small as 0.00001 HCN. Among the varieties of beans studied only one, the "White Rangoon" was found to produce more than 40 milligrams of hydrocyanic acid in 100 grams of the product. Other types of Ran- goon and Burma beans produced only 3 to 8 milligrams of the poison. In addition to these beans, a large number of other varieties were analyzed, negative results being obtained in all, including the Lima bean in which no traces whatever of the poison were found. More than 80 analyses were made. The remainder of the paper deals with consideration of legis- lation relating to the sale for food purposes of the poison producing varieties of this bean. In France beans containing 20 grams HCN are considered fit for food. The author recom- mends that the amount of poison admissible should be less than that of the French legislation. — S. C. Bruner. 1289. Wattiez, N. Contribution a I'etude Polygonum Bistorta (L.) Localisation du tanin. Son emploi conne succedane du Krameria Triandra (Ruiz et Pavon). (Contribution to the study of Pelugonum Bistorta. Localization of tannin. Its employment as a substitute for Krameria triandra.) Ann. & Bull. Soc. Roy. Sci. Med. & Nat. Bruxelles. 4: 121-128. 1920.— In Belgium, during the war, the use of Cod Liver Oil being prohibited as a food and tonic, the iodo-tannic syrup was prescribed frequently. The want of Rhatany necessitated the search for an indigenous substitute. This has been found in the rhizome of Polygonum Bistorta which contains 15 to 18 per cent of tannin. — Henri Micheels. PHYSIOLOGY B. M. DuGGAR, Editor Carroll W. Dodge, Associate Editor PROTOPLASM, MOTILITY 1290. Herlant, M. Le cycle de la vie cellulaire. Recherches physiologique sur la divi- sion de la cellule. (Note preliminaire.) [The life cycle of the cell. Physiological investiga- tions on cell division.] Ann. et Bull. Soc. Roy. Sci. Med. et Nat. Bruxelles 4:112-117. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 731. 192 PHYSIOLOGY iBoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1291. MacDougal, D. T., and H. A. Spoehr. The components and colloidal behavior of plant protoplasm. Proc. Amer. Phil. See. 59: 150-170. 1920. — The authors give summarized statements of investigations on biocolloids previously published. Newly obtained results are given for (1) the proportions of carbohydrate and albuminous matter in a colloid of the highest hydration capacity; (2) the substances or ions of biological significance which would raise the hydration capacity of these phytocolloids to the highest limit; (3) measurement of the relative effects of some metallic bases upon a carbohydrate colloid; and (4) determina- tion of the amplitude and continuance of alternating or repeated eiJects of renewed or replaced solutions. The highest swelling of pentosan-protein mixtures is that of agar 1, gelatine 3, in hundredth normal acid; such colloids are, however, unusual in the plant. Colloids in which the carbohydrate and albuminous components each vary in forming 30-60 per cent of the total and showing high hydration capacities in the hydroxides, in glycocoll and in water, furnish an analogue of living matter of proved similarity of composition and action. Biocolloids containing more carbohydrate than albuminous matter would be most sensitive to the presence of hydrogen ions, and their growth would be markedly limited by acidity. All types of biocolloid would respond by increased hydration to the presence of amino acids, as shown by relative swellings in glycocoll and in histidine. Mixtures consisting of 40-60 per cent of the two main components are seen to give the highest swelling values in histidine yet obtained for biocolloids by treatment with any reagent. Alkaline hydroxides may cause a swelling of agar greater than in water, as in the case of experiments with amino acids. The stronger the base as indicated by its position in the electromotive series, the more it restricts hydration. The inclusion of a substance or ion in a colloidal structure results in hydration relations of a different character from those which appear when the substance in question is presented in the hydrating solution. Unequal expansion in all directions of dried sections of colloids when immersed in solutions was again observed. — Wanda Weniger. DIFFUSION, PERMEABILITY, ADSORPTION 1292. Andr^:, G. Sur I'exosmose des principes acides at sucres de I'orange. [Exosmosis of the acids and sugars of the orange.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1199-1203. 1920. — A comparison is made of the rate of diffusion of acids and sugars through the cells of intact quarters of oranges immersed in distilled water and in sugar or salt solutions respec- tively. Sugar and acid are found to leave the cells in about equal proportions, the ratio of sucrose to reducing sugars remaining approximately constant, though a considerable inversion of sucrose occurs during exosmos s. — C. H. Farr. 1293. Bradford, S. C. Adsorptive stratification in gels. Biochem. Jour. 14: 29-41. PL 2. 1920. 1294. Bradford, Samuel Clement. Adsorptive stratification of gels. IV. Biochem. Jour. 14:474-482. PI. 7-8, 1 jig. 1920. 1295. Lloyd, Dorothy Jordan. On the swelling of gelatin in hydrochloric acid and caustic soda. Biochem. Jour. 14: 147-170. 7 fig. 1920. 1296. Stiles, Walter. I. The penetration of sodium chloride into gels of agar-agar, containing silver nitrate. Biochem. Jour. 14: 58-72. 4 fis- 1920. — Agar containing silver nitrate is employed as the gel, and the progressive penetration of sodium chloride is observed by the precipitation of silver chloride. Such penetration is found, within wide limits, to be proportional to the square root of the time and is a constant for any particular gel and any particular concentration of penetrating salt. The rate of penetration depends upon (1) the initial concentration of the penetrating salt, and (2) the concentration of silver nitrate. The concentration of the gel has little influence. An empirical relation is found between pene- tration, time, and penetrating salt. — Alva R. Davis. No. 2, March, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 193 WATER RELATIONS 1297. RivETT, Maud F. The anatomy of Rhododendron ponticum, L., and of Ilex aquifo- lium, L., in reference to specific conductivity. Ann. Bot. 34: 525-550. 1920. — The series of studies on the anatomy of woods in relation to water-conducting eflBciency is here continued in connection with the evergreen holly and Rhododendron. Sections were cut at many places throughout the length of several different shoots and the following points determined: (1) total area of wood, (2) total area of cavities, (3) percentage of wood occupied by cavities, (4) average area of cavities, and (5) number of cavities per sq. mm. Curves are given to show the variation, with respect to each of these points, from base to tip of the shoots. The results obtained for these two species and for the ash and hazel in previous studies are com- pared. And the results in all four cases are correlated with those of experiments on water conductivity. All four agree in showing a general decrease in absolute conductivity from base to tip, and an increase in specific conductivity up to a certain point followed by a de- crease. The difference in specific conductivity between the two evergreens is in agreement with the difference in percentage of wood occupied by cavities. This is also true in the case of the two deciduous forms. But the specific conductivity of the deciduous forms is higher than that of the evergreens, though the percentage of wood occupied by vessels is smaller. This difficulty is explained by reference to the greater length of the vessels in the deciduous species and the difference in the nature of their perforations.— IF. P. Thompson, 1298. Steel, T. On water from the roots of the red mallee (Eucalyptus oleosa). Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales. 44: 348-352. 1919. — Water was obtained from the water-storing roots of E. oleosa by cutting lengths of roots and allowing them to drain. It was colorless, practically tasteless, and darkened with age and exposure to air. It contained 6G.60 parts per 100,000 of total solids, 24.20 of which were salts and 42.40 organic matter, chiefly tannin. Soda (NajO) and chlorine were found to be high in relation to the other ingredients. Some mallee soil analyses also showed considerable concentration of these substances. It is thought that the root water may be a reserve supply held in special vessels and used during drought. — Eloise Gerry. MINERAL NUTRIENTS 1299. MoRiTA, KoiCHi, AND BuRTON E. LIVINGSTON. Some solution cultures of wheat without potassium. Bot. Mag. Tokyo 34: 71-90. 1 fig. 1920. — Nutrient solutions without potassium produced very satisfactory growth of wheat seedlings for three weeks. About 90 different three-salt solutions were used in which the total concentration of the salts corre- sponded to about one atmosphere of osmotic pressure. All of these solutions were without potassium, and of these the ones with the lower concentrations of the di-hydrogen phosphate produced the best plants. — 0. L. Sponsler. PHOTOSYNTHESIS 1300. Briggs, G. E. Experimental researches on vegetable assimilation and respiration. XIII. The development of photosynthetic activity during germination. Proc. Roy. Soc. London B, 91 : 249-268. 1920. — Leaves were kept in an atmosphere of hydrogen, supplied with car- bon dixoide, and the oxygen removed as fast as formed^. This permits measurement of photo- synthesis and maintenance of uniform amount of chlorophyll for considerable periods. Pho- tosynthetic activity lags behind formation of chlorophyll, indicating some additional internal factor as the limiting one. This internal factor increases with age, so that with equal green- ness in two leaves, a few days difference in age causes increased activity. Willstatter's failure to confirm the findings of Irving that young, fully green leaves might show no activity is due to the fact that he used leaves considerably older. A provisional conception of pho- tosynthesis as consisting of diffusion, photochemical, and chemical stages is advanced as a means of analyzing limiting factors under various conditions. — Paul B. Sears. 194 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1301. Fisher, Hugo. Pflanzenwuchs und Kohlensaure. [Plant growth and carbonic acid.] Naturwissenschaften 8:413-417. 1920. — The fact that CO2 may be present in mini- mum quantity and thus be the limiting factor in plant growth is first pointed out. Then reference is made to the possibility that CO2 present in the air may be increased by the CO2 formed through the activity of the soil organisms. A review is given of his own and other experiments where the amount of CO2 in the air is increased with resulting increase in growth as well as flower and fruit production. A practical application on a large scale is noted where the waste gases (containing about 5 per cent CO2) produced in a certain steel mill were added to greenhouse and field cultures with favorable results. — Orton L. Clark. METABOLISM (GENERAL) 1302. Anderson, R. J. Occurrence of inosite hexaphosphoric acid in the seed of the silver maple (Acer saccharinum). Jour. Biol. Chem. 43:46&-475. 1920. — The principal organic phosphorus compound of maple seed is identical with the inosite hexaphosphoric acid which has been isolated from other plant material. Freshly powdered maple seed apparently do not contain any active phytase. — G. B. Rigg. 1303. Anonymous. Coloring matters of plants. Nature 105: 1*39-140. 1920. — A popular summary regarding nature and distribution of such pigments. — 0. A. Stevens. 1304. BoRNEMANN. Die organische Ernahrung bei hoheren griinen Pfianzen. [Organic nutrition of higher green plants.] Naturwissenschaften 8:496-497. 1920. — This corrects a statement by Czapek in an article of the above title appearing in Heft 12, 1920, of this jour- nal to the effect that the CO2 from the soil does not have an influence on plant growth. The original quotation from Molliard is given, in which he states that CO2 from soil organisms does have an appreciable effect on plant growth, which Czapek incorrectly translated. — Orton L. Clark. 1305. BoTTOMLEY, W. B. The effect of organic matter on the growth of various water plants in culture solution. Ann. Bot. 34: 353-364. 1920. — To determine the necessity of organic matter for the growth of water plants in particular, and all plants in general, plants of Lemna major collected in May were grown in 150 cc. quantities of the following solutions: (1) Detmer's solution; (2) nucleic acid from raw peat, 1 gm. to 500 cc. water; (3) autoclaved Azotobacter 1 gm. to 1000 cc. water; and (4) water extract of bacterized peat, 1 gm. to 500 cc. water. One hundred freshly collected plants averaged 24.8 mg. in weight. After 3 weeks, (1) averaged 20.4 mg. ; (2) 44.8 mg.; (3) 47.2 mg.; and (4) 46.5 mg. With (1) and (4) Lemna major collected in July, also Salvinia natans, Azolla fliculoides, and Limnobium stoloniferum showed similar results. The amount of organic substances in the medium was only 184 parts per million as compared to 5500 parts for nutrient salts; hence organic substances are not of nutrient value, but enable the plants to make full use of the nutrient salts. These results in conjunction with earlier ones indicate the necessity of a small quantity of organic substance for normal growth. — F. S. Wolpert. 1306. Carey, Cornelia Lee. A method of preparation and some properties of a starch gel. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 455-463. 1920.— A starch gel was prepared by mixing 100 grams of commercial corn starch with 150 cc. of distilled water, pouring into Petri dishes, and treating in the autoclave for thirty minutes at from 105° to 110°C. When still warm the starch was cut into strips and dried. The properties of this gel, its adsorptive powers, and its micro- scopic structure are discussed. — P. A. Munz. 1307. Czapek, Friedrich. Die organische ErnShrung bei hoheren griinen Pfianzen. [The organic nutrition of the higher green plants.] Naturwissenschaften 8: 226-231. 1920. — A review is given of data concerning various organic substances found in the soil and their absorption by the green plant. The carbon and nitrogen requirements of the higher plants, also the methods of culture used in testing the value of organic compounds, are described No. 2, March, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 195 and the diificulties pointed out. The taking up of colloidal substances by the roots is referred to. The author considers it still undecided as to whether or not the roots are able to secrete ferments acting on substances in the soil and rendering them available for absorption. Myco- rhiza and the competition of various soil organisms are also briefly discussed. Important recent French and American results are not included. — Orton L. Clark. 1308. EwART, A. .J. On the synthesis of sugars from formaldehyde, carbon dioxide and water. Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria N. S. 31: 379-387. 1919. — The polymerization of formalde- hyde to sugar by alkalies and alkaline carbonates was investigated. The main conditions for a high proportion of sugar were appropriate dilution and high temperature (100° to 110°C.). The byproducts were formates and methyl alcohol. The most rapid reaction was produced by sodium hydrate. In the presence of a neutral calcium salt, the amount of sugar conden- sation was greatly increased, less alkali was required, and less formate produced. Neutral barium and strontium salts were less effective as condensing catalytic agents. The sugar mixture is optically inactive, and contains reducing pentoses and reducing fermentable hex- oses. Carbon dioxide and water are readily polymerized to sugar by the aid of magnesium. — Eloise Gerry. 1309. Freudenberg, K. Uber Gerbstoffe 4: Peters, D. Hamameli Tannin (II). [Con- cerning tannin 4: Peters, D. Hamameli tannin (II).] Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 53: 953-961. 1920. — Evidence is presented to show that the crystoUoidal tannin obtained from Hamamelis contains a previously unknown sugar closely related to the hexoses. — Henry Schmitz. 1310. Friedmann, W. C. The carbohydrates of the pecan. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 2286-2288. 1920. 1311. GoRis, A., AXD Ch. ViscHNiAC. Caracteres ct Composition du Primeverosc. [Char- acteristics and composition of "primeverose."] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 871-873. 1919. — Two glucosides isolated from Primula officinalis Jacq. — "Prime verine," and "primula- verine," respectively — on hydrolysis by a specific enzyme — "primeverase" — yield among other products a "biose" which the author calls "primeverose." The chemical and physical char- acteristics of this substance were studied at length. It was found to have among other prop- erties the power to reduce Fehling's solution and when hydrolysis was effected by means of sulphuric acid the resulting mixture yielded osazones of glucose and xylose. The author concludes that "primeverose" is a biose built up from xylose and glucose. — V. H. Young. 1312. JuDD, Hilda M. The iodometric estimation of sugars. Biochem. Jour. 14: 255- 262. 1920. — A modification of the iodometric sugar method of Colin and Lievin, and that of Willstatter and Schudel, is devised, the basis of which is the fact that a constant weight of iodine always reacts with a given weight of sugar, and that this weight of iodine is not affected by changes in the amount of alkali present, or by the presence of other sugars in the solution. The author makes special application of the method to the estimation of sugars in fruit juices. — Alva R. Davis. 1313. Kaulfersch, F. tJber die Bestimmung von in Zellmembranen eingeschlossener Starke mit Hilfe von Kupferoxydammoniak. [Determination of the starch enclosed in cell membranes by means of copper ammonium oxide.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs- u. Genuss- mittel 39:344-346. 1920. 1314. Klason, p. tJber Lignin und Lignin Reaktionen. [Concerning lignin and ignin reactions.] Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 53:706-711. 1920. — Experiments dealing with the chemical reactions of lignin indicate that the lignin molecule contains coniferyl aldfehyde. The action of sodium sulphite on lignin is thus explained. — Henry Schmitz. 1315. LaForge, F. B. Sedoheptose, a new sugar from Sedimi spectabile. II. Jour. Biol. Chem. 42: 367-374. 1920. 196 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1316. MacLean, Ida Smedley, and Ethel Mary Thomas. The nature of yeast fat. Biochem. Jour. 14:485-493. 1920. 1317. MiLLEB, Elizabeth W. The effect of cooking on the water-soluble vitamine in carrots and navy beans. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44 : 159-173. 1920. — Cooking carrots for 30 minutes at 100°C. caused no reduction in the vitamine. Cooking navy beans at 120° for 30 minutes decreased the vitamine content 40.6 per cent. — G. B. Rigg. 1318. MocKERiDGE, FLORENCE Annie. The occurrence and nature of the plant growth promoting substances in various organic manurial composts. Biochem. Jour. 14: 432-450. 1920. — Lemna major was grown in Knop's solution to which were added small amounts of extracts from leaf mould, fresh and old manure, bacterized peat, etc. Cultures to which such extracts were added gave better growth than that of the control in Knop's solution alone. The author concludes that there are organic extractables in such materials, probably formed by bacterial action, which are beneficial to plant growth. A chemical study of such extracts showed all to contain nucleic acids and derivatives, and these are concluded to play an impor- tant role as auximones. — Alva R. Davis. 1319. MooRB, Benjamin, and T. Arthur Webster. Studies of photosynthesis in fresh- water algae. — 1. The fixation of both carbon and nitrogen from the atmosphere to form organic tissue by the green plant cell. 2. Nutrition and growth produced by high gaseous dilutions of simple organic compoimds, such as formaldehyde and methylic alcohol. 3. Nutrition and growth by means of high dilution of carbon dioxide and oxides of nitrogen without access to atmosphere. Proc. Roy. Soc. London B, 91 : 201-215. 1920. — The authors present reasons for thinking the earliest organisms could utilize both inorganic carbon and nitrogen, and that bacteria are later, specialized types. They indicate that the first synthetic agencies were inorganic colloids, utilizing shorter wave lengths of light. They also outline careful culture experiments showing that green algae, (a) if supplied with carbon dioxide, will grow and fix atmospheric nitrogen; (b) will exhibit fixation and growth much faster if supplied with nitrites or oxides of nitrogen in addition to carbon dioxide; and (c) can utilize extremely dilute solu- tions of formaldehyde and methylic alcohol as sole sources of carbon. Oxides of nitrogen are available in pure country air. — Paul B. Sears. 1320. NiERENSTAiN. M. Waage's phytochemical synthesis of phloroglucin from glucose. Nature 105: 391. 1920. — The author states that he has tried the experiment (floating leaves in sugar solutions exposed to sunlight) nearly eighty times in the last fifteen years without success. — 0. A. Stevens. 1321. Pringsheim, H. tJber das Vorkommen optischer Antipoden in der Natur. [Con- cerning the occurrence of optical antipodes in nature.] Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 53: 1372- 1374. 1920. — A critical discussion of the work of Hesz. — Henry Schmitz. 1322. Raistrick, Harold, and Anne Barbara Clark. On the mechanism of oxalic acid formation by Aspergillus niger. Biochem. Jour. 13 : 329-344. 1919. — Aspergillv^ niger was grown on synthetic media with Na, NH4, or Ca salts of organic acids as sources of car- bon, and the quantity of oxalic acid produced was estimated. The carbon sources behaved as follows in reference to growth and acid production: (1) Four-carbon dibasic acids gave good growth and good yield of oxalic acid; (2) four-carbon monobasic acids gave almost no yield and no oxalic acid; (3) three-carbon acids gave very good growth and either no yield or small yield of acid; (4) two-carbon acids, as acetic, gave good growth and yield of acid, while glycoUic and glyoxalic acids gave but fair growth and no acid; (5) the one-carbon acid, formic, gave fair yield and no oxalic acid. A theoretical scheme is suggested to represent the break- down of sugar to oxalic acid. This involves the intermediate formation of /3-5-di-keto-adipic acid which hydrolyses to acetic and oxalic, the acetic in each case oxidizing to o.xalic. — Alva R. Davis. No. 2, March, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 197 1323. Rosenheim, Otto. Note on the use of butyl alcohol as a solvent for anthocyanlns. Biochem. Jour. 14: 73-74. 1920. — The author finds butyl superior to amyl alcohol as a solvent for anthocyanin, the former removing all the anthocyanins, (mono- and rhamno-glucosides, as well as normal glucosides) while in the latter the first two groups of glucosides alone are soluble to any great extent. The method of extraction with this solvent is described. — Alva R. Davis. 1324. Rosenheim, Otto. Observations on anthocyanins. I. The anthocyanins of the young leaves of the grape vine. Biochem. Jour. 14: 178-188. 1 fig. 1920. — The red pigment of the grape was isolated in crystalline form and found to be probably identical with oenidin, the non-glucosidic component of the purple grape. The occurrence of a colorless modifica- tion of the pigment was demonstrated, present in combination possibly with a carbohydrate or other complex and is converted into anthocyanidin by strong acids. The European species, Vitis vinifera, seems the only member of the genus to produce free anthocyanidin, and the bearing of this on genetic problems is discussed. — Alva R. Davis. 1325. ScHOORL, N. Zur Titration von Zuckerarten. [Titration of sugars.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs- u. Genussmittel 39: 180-182. 1920. 1326. Simpson, Jos:fi Agustin. Estudio sobre al acido cianhidrico en el Phaseolus lunatus (Frijol de Birmania). Discurso de recepcion como academico de numero. [Hydrocyanic acid in Phaseolus lunatus (Birmania bean). Address delivered on becoming a member of the Academy.] An. Acad. Cien. Habana— Rev. Cien. 55: 250-'283. 10 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1288. 1327. Venn, Elfrida C. V. The influence of reaction on colour changes in tyrosine solu- tions. Biochem. Jour. 14: 99-102. 1 fig. 1920.— This study has to do with the effect of vary- ing degrees of acidity and alkalinity upon colors produced by one strain of bacteria upon a single amino acid. — Alva R. Davis. 1328. Whipple, Bertha K. Water-soluble B in cabbage and onion. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44: 175-187. 1920.— Not more than one-half the water-soluble B is lost in the cooking water from cabbage or from onions boiled for 30 minutes. — G. B. Rigg. ..:;■■ !\ .< METABOLISM (NITROGEN RELATIONS) '■ 1329. Ammann, p. Sur la grande richesse en matieres azotees de certains maniocs du Cambodge. [On the large amount of nitrogenous matter in certain Cassavas of Cambodge.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170 : 1333-1334. 1920.— It is found that the amount of nitrogen compounds in these varieties is 2.93 per cent to 7.43 per cent as compared with the varieties of other localities which yield only 0.74 per cent to 1.49 per cent. — C. H. Farr. 1330. Bezagtj, Maurice. Variations de la respiration des cellules de feuille avec I'fige. [Variations in the respiration of cells of the leaf with age.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 701-702. 1919. — Studies were made on the leaves of Robinia pseudacacia, Pinus silvestris, Coboea scandens, Ligusirtim vulgare, Althaea, Loroglossum hircinum, and Cercis siliquastrum. Respiration, which is very weak in the young leaf, increases to a maximum which corresponds to the period at which the leaf reaches its full development. As the leaf becomes still older, the intensity of its respiration decreases. — V. H. Young. 1331. BoTTOMiiEY, W. B. The effect of nitrogen-Sxing organisms and nucleic acid deriva- tives on plant growth. Proc. Roy. Soc. London B, 91 : 83-95. 1920.— The author has pre- viously shown that Lemna minor grows much better when an extract of bacterized peat is added to inorganic nutrients, and in this investigation he tries to determine the factors re- sponsible. Autoclaved growth masses of Azotobacter chroococcum added to Detmer's solu- tion caused greatly increased growth and dry weight of plants over those grown in unmodi- 198 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, fied Detmer's solution. The same was found true when similar material of Bacillus radici- cola was added. Similar results were obtained by use of crude nucleic acid derivatives from peat, but the pure adenine-uracil fraction was much less efficient. Neither the ash of nucleic acid derivatives nor of Azotobacter is effective in producing growth increase. — Paul B. Sears. 1332. Lampitt, Leslie Hebbert. Nitrogen metabolism in Saccharomyces cerevisiae. Biochem. Jour. 13:459-486. 3 fig. 1919.— The writer considers (1) factors which influence assimilation of nitrogen by yeast; (2) mechanism of the extraction of nitrogen from amino acids by yeast; (3) influence of available amino-acids and sugars on nitrogen assimilation; (4) apparent excretion of nitrogen by yeast. Under (1) he finds that active reproduction may result in a lowering of the nitrogen coefficient and that the final nitrogen coefficient is inde- pendent of the initial one. Under the second heading he finds the amidase described by Effront produces a non-volatile as well as a volatile acid. His third point of attack discloses that fermentative activity stimulates nitrogen assimilation, and desamination may continue after zymatic activity ceases. Excessive zymatic activity does not insure rapid N-assimilation. And fourth, during fermentation, the yeast constantly loses nitrogen to the liquid. Such nitrogen may be used again. An increase in sugar available for fermentation increases the rate of nitrogen excretion.— ^ivo R. Davis. 1333. Maze, P., Villa, and Lemoigne. Action de la cyanamide et de la dicyanodiamide sur le developpement du mais. [Action of cyanamide and dicyanodiamide on the development of maize.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169 : 804^807. 1 fig. 1919.— Experiments in France, Italy and Germany have shown that results from the use of calcium cyanamide are very variable. Certain authors have held that calcium cyanamide has a toxic effect, delaying the germination of seeds, while others hold that dicyanodiamide, a product of the polymerization of cyanamide, is the toxic agent. The effects of cyanamide and dicyanodiamide were tested with purified chemicals in culture media of definite composition. Cyanamide hinders the germination of maize at the concentration of 0.168 grams per liter both when added to solu- tions of nutrient minerals and when added to distilled water; dicyanodiamide on the other hand was found to be without effect. It was further shown that neither of the two substances under consideration s capable of serving as a source of nitrogen for maize. — V. H. Young. 1334. Maze, P., Vila, and Lemoigne. Transformation de la cyanamide en uree par les microbes du sol. [Transformation of cyanamide into urea by micro-organisms of the soil.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 921-923. 1919.— A previous note by the authors showed that pure cyanamide is very toxic to higher plants. The authors have isolated from the soil six species of bacteria among which are Bacillus prodigiosus, B. coli, and B. cloacae, which flourish in the presence of cyanamide in the proportion of 1-1000.— Cultures of these bacilli in bouillon were tested for their effect on cyanamide, and it was shown that while B. coli and one of the strains of B. cloacae do not break down cyanamide, the other species break it down with the formation of urea and in the absence of cyanamide urea was not formed. Traces of ammonia were produced in most cases of cyanamide decomposition. Further ex- periments with a miscellaneous collection of bacteria from milk, soil and dung showed that they did not break down cyanamide nor form urea except in the case of certain forms of B. cloacae and B. siibtilis. Penicillium glaucum and two species of yeasts were shown to have the power of breaking down cyanamide and forming urea. The authors conclude that cyana- mide may be transformed into urea by many soil organisms and this transformation should be rapid except in acid soils. — V. H. Young. 1335. Wann, F. B. The fixation of nitrogen by green plants. Science 51: 247. 1920.— In the experiments recorded here seven species of grass-green algae were used, all except one being isolated from soil and grown in pure culture. The cultures were made in 500 cc. flasks on approximately 150 gm. of accurately weighed mineral nutrient agar. The full nutrient solution contained 0.5 gm. NH4NO3 per liter, and in the various series this source was replaced by (NH4)2S04, Ca(N03)2, asparagin, glycocoll, urea. In all cultures nitrogen as such was present in approximately equal quantities, and each nitrogen source was set up in duplicate No. 2, March, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 199 series, with and without 1 per cent glucose. NH4N0:i, Ca(NO;02, and (NH^)2S04 were also used in the presence of inannite. At the end of from 5 to 7 months the cultures were analyzed for total nitrogen, the Gunning-Kjeldahl method being used for media free from nitrates, and the Forster modification where niti'ates were present. In the urea, glycocoU, asparagine and (NH4)2S04 series no marked increase or decrease occurred either in the presence or absence of glucose or mannite. Marked increases were found in NH^NOs and Ca(N03)2 media in the presence of glucose, the amount of fixation ranging from 6 to 10 mgm. per culture in the 1917- 1918 experiments and from 4 to 13 mgm. in the 1919 experiments. This represented an increase in total nitrogen ranging from 17 to 55 per cent. Fixation was common to all spec'es. The amount of fixation varied somewhat with the different species and seemed to be related to the intensity of growth. — A. H. Chivers. 1336. Warburg, Otto. Uber die Reduktion der Salpetersaure in griinen Zellen. [The reduction of nitric acid in green cells.] Naturwissenschaften 8:594-596. 1920. — Little is known of the conditions of reduction in higher plants as it is usually covered up by the oxi- dation processes. Warburg has succeeded, however, in increasing the rate of reduction to such an extent that the chemical nature of the process can be studied. He used in his experi- ments the alga Chlorella vulgaris Beyerinck and by growing it in dilute solutions of nitric acid was able to stimulate the reduction of nitrates to such an extent that in darkness the reduc- tion made up 55 per cent of the entire metabolism, and in light a much greater part, without injurious effect on the alga. — Orton L. Clark. METABOLISM (ENZYMES, FERMENTATION) 1337. Colin, H. L'inulase duTopinambour. [The inulase in Jerusalem artichoke.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32:247-255. 1920. — The author finds that the tubercles of Jerusalem artichoke are not an exceptionally good source of inulase. Colin finds that "helianthenine" is not a stage in the breaking down of inulin, and in this he disagrees with Green. ^J. .1/. Brannon. 1338. Colin, H. Sur I'inversion diastasique du saccharose; influence des produits de la reaction sur la Vitesse d'hydrolyse. [On the diastatic inversion of saccharose: the influence of the products of the reaction on the rate of hydrolysis.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 849-852. 1919.— The author has previously shown that diminution of the rate of reaction of invertase with increase in the amount of saccharose present is to be imputed to increased vis- cosity of the solution and that the rate of reaction is a linear function of the fluidity of the solution. In order to determine the specific effect of the end products of the inversion of sac- charose on the rate of inversion, invert sugar, levulose, and glucose were added to mixtures of saccharose and invertase and their effect on the rate of reaction was noted. It is concluded that the rate of hydrolysis of saccharose is primarily a fvmction of the fluidity of the solutions, and the retarding effect of glucose, levulose, and invert sugar on this rate is attributed to the augmentation of the viscosity of the medium. The products of the reaction exert no other effect on the rate of inversion than would some other neutral substance, glycerine for example, which increased the viscosity of the liquid in a similar fashion. — V. H. Young. 1339. Flohil, J. T. Volumetric method for the determination of diastatic capacity. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 677. 1920. 1340. Gore, H. C. Occurrence of diastase in the sweet potato in relation to the prepara- tion of sweet potato syrup. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44: 19-20. 1920. — Sweet potatoes are high in diastatic power, and it is possible to convert nearly all of their starch into soluble carbohy- drates by slowly cooking the potatoes in water. — G. B. Rigg. 1341. KoPELOFF, N. Effect of varying the amount of inoculiun and concentration on the deterioration of sugar by molds. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 455-457. 1920. — An increase in the number of mold spores inoculated into sugars (with films of varying concentration) is responsible for an increase in deterioration. The amount of deterioration also increases with a decrease in concentration of the films surrounding the sugar crystals. — Henry Schmitz. 200 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1342. KoPELOFF, N., Lillian Kopeloff, and C. J. Welcome. Formation of the gum, levan, by mold spores. I. Identification and quantitative determination. II. Mode of for- mation and influence of reaction. Jour. Biol. Chem. 43: 171-187. 1920. — Mold spores {As'per- gillus Sydowi Bainier) contain an enzyme (levanase) capable of forming the gum, levan, in sucrose solution of all concentrations up to the saturation point. — G. B. Rigg. 1343. Kopeloff, N., and H. Z. E. Perkins. The deterioration of Cuban raw sugars in storage. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 555-558. 1920. — When Cuban raw sugar is held 5.5 months under storage conditions there is a loss in polarization. The loss in polarization in each instance has generally been accompanied by a gain in reducing sugars, indicating that the loss is a true inversion due to microbiological agencies. — Henry Schmitz. 1344. Neuberg, C, and Els a Reinfurth. Uber den Chemismus der alkoholischen Garung, zugleich Bemerkungen zur gleichnamigen Mitteiltmg von E. Zerner. [The chemistry of alcoholic fermentation.] Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 53: 462-469. 1920. — A critical discus- sion of Zerner' s work. The authors, working along the same line as Zerner, obtained simi- lar results, but deduced different conclusions. — Henry Schmitz. 1345. Neuberg, C, and Elsa Reinfurth. Uber die Vergarbarkeit der Brenztrauben- saure unter den Bedingungen des Abfangverfahrens. [Concerning the fermentability of pyruvic acid with the removal of intermediate products.] Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. S3: 1039- 1052. 1920. — The author demonstrates by eleven different methods that pyruvic acid may be fermented by yeasts in the presence of sodium bisulphite, and interprets this fact as evidence in support of the acetaldehyde-pyruvic acid theory of fermentation. — Henry Schmitz. 1346. Peterson, W. H., and E. B. Fred. The production of acetaldehyde by certain pen- tose-fermenting bacteria. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44: 29-46. 1920. — In the presence of a fixative, such as calcium sulphite, acetaldehyde is formed in the fermentation of carbohydrates by Bacillus acetoethyliciim, Lactobacillus pentoaceticus and also by an undetermined organism. Aldehyde is produced from glucose and starch but the maximum yield is obtained from xylose. The production of acetaldehyde is correlated with the production of alcohol, an increase in the former results in a decrease in the latter. — G. B. Rigg. 1347. Raistrick, Harold. Studies on the cycloclastic power of bacteria. Part I. A quantitative study of the aerobic decomposition of histidine by bacteria. Biochem. Jour. 13: 447-458. Fig. 7. 1919. — Bacillus paratyphosus A, B. paratyphosus B, B. faecalis alcali- genes, and B. pyocyaneus are able to break the iminazole ring since they produce ammonia both from the side chain and from the iminazole nucleus of the histidine molecule. B. proteus vulgaris produces ammonia from the side chain nitrogen only. — Alva R. Davis. 1348. Rector, Thos. M. Lipolytic enzymes in olive oil. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 156-158. 1920. — A fat-hydrolyzing enzyme, which is totally destroyed by heating the oil at 150°C. for 15 minutes, and which retains its activity for a number of years, is contained in untreated, filtered olive oil. — Henry Schmitz. 1349. ScHOORL, N. Die Volumenanderung bei der Saccharose-Inversion. [Volume changes with saccharose inversion.] Zeitschr. Untersch. Nahrungs- u. Genussmittel 39: 113- 121. 1920. 1350. Speakman, H. B. Gas production during the acetone and butyl alcohol fermentation of starch. Jour. Biol. Chem. 43:401-411. 1920. 1351. Zerner, E. Uber den Chemismus der alkoholischen Garxmg. [The chemistry of alcoholic fermentation.] Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 53:325-334. 1920.— Evidence is pre- sented to show that when sodium sulphate is added to fermentation cultures glycerine and acetaldehyde are intermediate products and occur along with alcohol. Under normal con- ditions (without sodium sulphite) these two first-named products are not formed. — Henry Schmitz. No. 2, March, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 201 METABOLISM (RESPIRATION) 1352. Bailey, C. H., and A. M. Gurjar. Respiration of cereal plants and grains. II. Respiration of sprouted wheat. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44: &-7. 1 fig. 1920. — Respiration proceeds at a higher rate in the sprouted wheat than in normal wheat. At 12.5 to 14 per cent water content the ratios of the respiratory rate in (1) normal wheat, (2) wheat germinated 24 hours, (3) wheat germinated 48 hours was not far from the ratios of their reducing sugar content. — G. B. Rigg. 1353. Bailey, C. H., and A. M. Gurjar. Respiration of cereal plants and grains. III. Respiration of rice paddy and milled rice. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44: 9-12. Fig. 1. 1920.— The germ, or the embryo, is the seat of the most active respiration in a typical grain. — G. B. Rigg. 1354. Bailey, C. H., and A. M. Gurjar. Respiration of cereal plants and grains. IV. The respiration of frosted wheat plants. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44: 13-15. 1920. — Frozen plants respired more vigorously during the first 24 hours after thawing than did plants that had not been frozen. — G. B. Rigg. ORGANISM AS A WHOLE 1355. BuDER, Johannes. Aus der Biologie der Purpurbakterien. [The biology of the purple bacteria.] NaturAvissenschaften 8: 261-268. 2 fig. 1920.— This paper brings together some of the latest results which contribute to the biology of this unique group. It discusses, first, the different members of the group and their classification according to their sulphur content and pigmentation. Absorption curves of bacteriopurpurin as well as one of the living bacteria themselves are reproduced, together with a figure showing the characteristic gathering of the bacteria in different regions of the spectrum. This last shows an unusual response of the bacteria to ultra red rays, the physiological and ecological significance of which is discussed. The phototactic movements of the purple bacteria are also considered. — Orton L. Clark. 1356. Galippe, V. Des micro-organismes vivant dans le papier; leur resistance ^ Taction de la chaleur et k celle du temps. [The micro-organisms of paper; their resistance to the action of heat and weather.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 814-817. 1919.— Examination of ancient papers and papyrus demonstrated the presence of large numbers of micro-organisms which were secured in pure cultures. The author concludes from his studies that many bacteria are extremely resistant to the action of various unfavorable factors of their environ- ment and are capable of existing for long periods of time. — V. H. Young. 1357. JoFFE, Jacob S. The influence of soil reaction on the growth of alfalfa. Soil Sci. 10:301-307. 1 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1398. 1358. Whiting, A. L., and Roy Hansen. Cross-inoculation studies with the nodule bac- teria of lima beans, navy beans, cowpeas, and others of the cowpea group. Soil Sci. 10: 291- 300. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1406. GROWTH, DEVELOPMENT, REPRODUCTION 1359. Blackman, V. H. The significance of the efficiency index of plant growth. New Phytol. 19:97-100. 1920.— This is an answer to the paper by Kidd, West, and Briggs. It is pointed out that "the efficiency index does nevertheless give a measure of the plant's average efficiency during any particular period." — I. F. Lewis. 1360. BosE, J. C. Researches on growth of plants. Nature lOS: 615-617. 3 fig. 1920. — Brief descriptions of methods, figures of the high magnification crescograph and of some records. — 0. A. Stevens. 202 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1361. KiDD, Franklin, Cyril West, and G. E. Briggs. What is the significance of the efficiency index of plant growth? New Phytol. 19: 88-96. 2 fig. 1920.— This is a critique of the compound interest conception of plant growth advocated by V. H. Blackman and applied by Brenchley in the comparison of the efficiency of different plants. — I. F. Lewis. 1362. Heinicke, Arthur J. Concerning the shedding of flowers and fruits and other abscission phenomena in apples and pears. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 16:76-83. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 977. 1363. Mitscherlich, E. A. Zum Gesetze des Pfianzenwachstums. [Regarding the law of plant growth.] Flihlings Landw. Zeitg. 68:419-426. 1919. MOVEMENTS OF GROWTH AND TURGOR CHANGES 1364. Guttenberg, Hermann von. Der heutige Stand der Statolithentheorie des Geotropismus. [The present status of the statolith theory of geotropism.] Naturwissenschaf- ten 8: 571-577. 3 fig. 1920. — A review is given of the recent work of Zollikofer, Buder, Richter, and others which add evidence in support of Haberlandt's and Nemec's theory which has called forth so much discussion and experimental work. The arguments of the opponents of this theory (Fitting, Jost, Zielinski, F. & G. Weber, and Heilbronn) are taken up in detail. — Orto7i L. Clark. 1365. Putter, A. Das Gesetz der Reizschwelle. [The law of the threshold of stimula- tion.] Naturwissenschaften 8: 501-507. 1920.— This paper attempts to show in how far it has been possible to go into a physico-chemical analysis of the threshold of stimulation. This is given in detail for electrical and light stimuli, with a consideration of the formulae of Nernst and Hill for the first, and Putter's own formula for the latter. The difference in the effect of electrical and light stimuli is also pointed out. Light, gravity, and electrical stimuli are grouped as those which may instantly affect the plant at full strength, whereas chemical osmotic, and heat stimuli are effective only after the diffusion of the agents, and a certain time factor is requisite. It is not possible to express in any one formula a general law for the threshold of stimulation, but different equations are required, and these vary with the type of stimuli. In summarizing PtJTTER feels that the necessary conditions of the thresh- old of stimulation may be expressed as "a sensitiveness in a living system when in the system, or at a certain point in it, the concentration of certain active substances reach, in a definite time, a certain magnitude, which is constant for the different systems and different stimuli."— Orton L. Clark. 1366. Small, James. A theory of geotropism: with some experiments on the chemical re- versal of geotropic response in stem and root. New Phytol. 19: 49-63. 1 pi., 5 fig. 1920.— A statement is made of certain hypotheses previously advanced to explain the difference in electrical condition of the upper and under side of a horizontally placed root, and of geotropic response in general. Curvature is explained on the basis of five postulations. (1) The proto- plasm of the root is characterized by a condition of comparative acidity on the basis of the H-ion concentration as compared with the iso-electric point of the amphoteric colloids present. (2) The protein, or protein-lipoid, disperse phase in the root becomes therefore electropositive. (3) There is greater polarization on the upper side of any cell and therefore a higher potential in the upper region of the root. (4) An action current flows, therefore, from the upper to the lower side of the perceptive region; on account of the resistance, its maximum effect is pro- duced on the under side of the root. (5) The polarization of the lower cells is thus lowered, their permeability is increased, and the familiar bending phenomena are brought about.— Geotropic response of stems is explained on the same basis, the protoplasm however being electronegative and the flow of the action current being in the reverse direction from that in the root. — Experiments are cited to render greater probability to the theory. Roots of Vicia Faba and maize when grown in an atmosphere containing a low concentration of ammo- nia showed reversal of the usual geotropic response. Conversely, stems became positively No. 2, March, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 203 geotropic when grown in an atmosphere containing acetic acid. — From the experiments it is concluded that the stem may be considered "of an 'alkaline' nature with electronegative par- ticles in the disperse phase of the plasma membrane and that the root is of an 'acid' nature with electropositive particles." — Theoretical explanations are also given of the orientation of secondary and tertiary roots and stems. — I. F. Lewis. GERMINATION, RENEWAL OF ACTIVITY 1367. KiDD, Franklin, and Cyril West. The role of the seed-coat in relation to the germination of immature seed. Ann. Bot. 34: 439-445. 1920. — The germination of unripe mustard seeds and peas from which the seed-coats had been removed was compared with that of intact unripe seeds and with that of ripe seeds. It was found that the removal of the testa accelerated germination, terminated the dormant period and increased the per- centage of germination. It is concluded that the presence of the testa is largely responsible for the dormant period when attempts are made to germinate unripe seeds, and evidence is presented to show that the effect is due to the living testa limiting the gaseous exchange of the embryo. — W. P. Thompson. 1368. Hill, A. W. Studies in seed germination. Experiments with Cyclamen. Ann. Bot. 34: 417-429. PI. 20, 15 fig. 1920. TEMPERATURE RELATIONS 1369. KiESSELBACH, T. A., AND J. A. Ratcliff. Freezing injury of seed com. Nebraska Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 16. 96 -p., 22 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 623. 1370. Manaresi, Angelo. Sui danni prodotti ai fiori degli alberi fruttiferi dalle gelate primaverili in genere e da quelle in particolare dei giorni 28, 29 e 30 marzo 1918. [Damage to flowers of fruit trees by spring frosts and in particular the frosts of the 28, 29 and 30 of March, 1918.1 Rev. Patol. Veg. 10: 1-26. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 986. RADIANT ENERGY RELATIONS 1371. Feuer, B., and F. W. Tanner. The action of ultraviolet light on the yeast-like fungi. I. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12:740-741. 1920.— The data obtained indicate that yeast cells are not very resistant to ultraviolet light. A majority of the organisms studied were killed after an exposure to the rays of less than one minute. — Henry Schmitz. 1372. Kogel, P. R. iJber Photodynamie. [Photodynamics.] Zentralbl. Gesamte Landw. 1 : 288-292. 1920. — Review of recent work, with bibliographical citations. — D. Reddick. 1373. Laurens, H., and H. D. Hooker, Jr. The sensibility of Volvox to wave-lengths of equal energy content. Jour. Exp. Zool. 30: 345-368. 1920. — The stimulation-time and the rate of locomotion were ascertained in different regions of the spectrum all equal in energy. The maximum effect in both was found to be near wave-length 494 mm- From this region the effect decreased rapidly in both directions. These results agree closely with those obtained by Mast on Chlamydomonas and blow-fly larvae; but they are at considerable variance with those obtained on the more nearly related forms, Pandorina, Eudorina and Spondylomorum. —S. 0. Mast. TOXIC AGENTS 1374. Greig-Smith, R. The germicidal activity of the Eucalyptus oils. Part 2. The action of the oils in aqueous dilutions. Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales 44: 311-347. 7 fig. 1919. —See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1282. 204 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1375. MoNTEMARTiNi, LuiGi. Nuove osservazioni sopra I'azione eccitante del sulfate di rame suUe piante. [The stimulating action of copper sulfate on plants.] Rev. Patol. Veg. 10: 3&-40. 1920. — Tests were made by spraying one side of a plant and leaving the other un- sprayed. When half of the leaves were treated in the morning with a dilute copper sulphate solution and removed in the evening, measured, and the dry weight determined, it was found that the treated leaves had a greater dry weight per unit area. When the leaves were treated at night and removed in the morning, they had a lower dry weight per unit area. This indi- cates that the treatment stimulated the formation and translocation of organic matter. — F. M. Blodgett. 1376. Nemec, Antoine, and Francois Stranak. Contribution a I'etude de I'influence toxique des terpenes a I'egard de quelques vegetaux superieurs. [The toxic action of terpenes on higher plants.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32: 241-246. 1920. — Seedlings of Vicia Faba, Zea Mays, and Lupinus Luteus were grown on Knop's solution in cylinders of twenty liters capacity. The terpenes used were menthol, terpineal, pinene and borneal. — When etiolated seedlings of Vicia Faba were exposed to the action of the terpenes, black spots appeared on the surface of the leaves which later became more prominent. Then the stem turned gray and finally black. A "mucous" appears on the stem which has an acid reaction. The plant finally loses turgor and wilts. The ramification of the roots are checked. — Internally the blackening is localized in different regions, as in the cambium. In the root the effect of the vapors occurs first in the recently formed positions of the vascular tissue, and later the remainder is affected. Finally the root forms a tissue (calyphogene) which acts as a protecting layer against the vapors of the terpenes. — The plants experimented with show different degrees of resistance to the vapors of the terpenes. — J. M. Brannon. 1377. Perry, Margaret C, and G. D. Beal. The quantities of preservatives necessary to inhibit and prevent alcoholic fermentation and the growth of molds. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12 : 253-257. 1920. — Aspergillus Sydowi, Aspergillus niger, and Penicilliuyn expansum in the order named, effected the greatest deterioration in both molasses and sugar. There is also evidence that an increase in inoculum is responsible for an increase in inversion at a definite concentration. — Henry Schmitz. 1378. Rusk, Hester M. The effect of zinc sulphate on protoplasmic streaming. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 425-431. 3 fig. 1920. — Since metallic poisons in minimal doses stimu- late metabolic activity in plants, it was thought that ocular evidence of excitation might be observed in individual cells. Zinc sulphate was used and its effect on rate of streaming was noted in Elodea and in Chara. Acceleration was evident in both plants, Elodea being more sensitive than Chara, but with a less maximum acceleration. — P. A. Munz, PHYSIOLOGY OF DISEASE 1379. Harvey, R. B. Hydrogen-ion changes in the mosaic disease of tobacco plants and their relation to catalase. Jour. Biol. Chem. 42 : 397-400. 1920. — The H-ion concentration of juice expressed from mosaic tobacco leaves was found to be somewhat greater than that from healthy plants. Catalase activity in the mosaic leaves is decreased with increasing hydrogen-ion concentration. — G. B. Rigg. MISCELLANEOUS 1380. Bradford, Samuel Clement. On the theory of gels. II. The crystallization of gelatin. Biochem. Jour. 14: 91-93. 1920. 1381. Krogh, August. The calibration, accuracy and use of gas meters. Biochem. Jour. 14: 282-289. 2 fig. 1920. — This article refers to gas meters employed in physiological research. — A. R. Davis. No. 2, March, 1921] SOIL SCIENCE 205 1382. Krogh, August. A gas analysis apparatus accurate to 0.001 per cent, mainly de- signed for respiratory exchange work. Biochem. Jour. 14: 267-281. 4 fig- 1920. 1383. Martin, Charles James. The preparation of Sorensen's phosphate solutions when the pure salts are not available. Biochem. Jour. 14: 98. 1920. 1384. MuTSCHELLER, ARTHUR. CoUoidal adsorption. Jour. Amer. Chem. See. 42: 2142- 2160. 1920. 1S85. ScHMiT- Jensen, Hans Oluf. Estimation of carbon dioxide, oxygen and combustible gases by Krogh's method of micro-analysis. Biochem. Jour. 14: 4-24. 2 fig. 1920. — A detailed description is given of Krogh's method as modified by the author. Special emphasis is placed upon the value of the method in biological work. — Alva R. Davis. SOIL SCIENCE J. J. Skinner, Editor F. M. ScHERTZ, Assistant Editor GENERAL 1386. Alway, F. J. Agricultural value and reclamation of peat soils. Minnesota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 188: 1-136. 54 fig. Mar., 1920.— The peat soils of the state are divided into groups of high and low lime content. On the high lime peats, applications of lime are of no advantage and sufficient nitrogen becomes available as farm and garden crops need this ele- ment. The high lime peats are classed according to their need for chemical fertilizers. Low lime peats need both lime and nitrogen applications. Ascertaining the fertilizer requirements of individual tracts is always advisable. Drainage, water level control, and heavy rolling are necessary. Burning is advised only after careful consideration of the local conditions. — Extensive drainage of peat soils before reclamation operations are to be started is inad- visable. The advisability of entering on reclamation work with peat depends upon location and facilities for operation. — A. C. Amy. . 1387. Bear, Firman E. Chemical analysis of soils, Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. Monthly Bull. 58 : 227-232. 1920.— Chemical analyses of soils are valuable as a guide to the planning of permanent systems of soil improvement, as an index to the direction in which the supply of plant food is moving, as a basis for interpretation of experimental data from different soils, as a guide to the application of results obtained on experimental farms and gives definite infor- mation as to the potential fertility of a soil. — R. C. Thomas. 1388. [C, C] Soils and manures. [Rev. of: Wild, L. J. Soils and manures in New Zealand. 134 p. Whitcombe and Tombs: Auckland, Melbourne and London, 1919. Also of: Russell, E. J. A students' book on soils and manures. 2nd ed., XII + 240 p. University Press: Cambridge, 1919]. Nature 105: 130-131. 1920. 1389. Clarke, Frank Wigglesworth. The data of geochemistry. U. S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 695. 832 p. 4th edition. 1920.— The chemical constituents of the earth's crust are given together with certain general conclusions. — C. V. Piper. 1390. CoLLiNSON, R. C. A progress report of fertilizer experiments with fruits. New York Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] Bull. 477. 53 p. 1920. 1391. Findlay, Hugh. The handbook for practical farmers. 558 p., 258 fig. D.Apple- ton & Company: New York and London, 1920. See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 609. 1392. FoRTiER, S. Relation to orchard irrigation practice. Monthly Bull. California State Commission Hortic. 7 : 361-367. 1919.— Arid soils in general and orchard soils in particu- 206 SOIL SCIENCE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, lar need abundant water and organic matter. The part played by capillarity in the upward moving of water has been overestimated. It is held that gravity acts upon capillary as well as free water. The writer concludes in pointing out the relative advantages and disadvan- tages of the basin method and furrow method of irrigation of fruit trees. — E. L. Overholser. 1393. Headley, F. B. Unreliable experimental methods of determining the toxicity of alkali salts. Science 51: 140-141. Feb., 1920. — The method frequently used by investigators of adding certain percentages of salts to soils, planting them to crops, and estimating the toxicity by depression of crop growth, has led to erroneous conclusions. It has been shown that soils absorb a part at least of salts added, and that the crop growth is much more closely related to the proportion of alkali salts recoverable from the soils than to the proportion of salts that have been added. The conclusions in two papers on the subject, published by Harris, and Harris and Pittman, respectively, are criticized as unjustified, on account of the fact that the salts recoverable by analysis after the treatments were made were not taken into consideration. — A. H. Chivers. 1394. MocKERiDGE, FLORENCE Annie. The occurrence and nature of the plant growth promoting substances in various organic manurial composts. Biochem, Jour. 14: 432^50. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1318. 1395. R., E. J. A standard book on soils. [Rev. of: Hall, A. D. The soil: an intro- duction to the scientific study of the growth of crops. 3d ed. XV + 352 p. John Murray: London, 1920.] Nature 105:384, 1920. — "Its distinguishing feature is its clear recognition of the complexity of the soil problem." — 0. A. Stevens. 1396. Stead, Arthur. The agriculture and soils of the Cape Province. I. Witkop-Burg- hersdorp. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa I: 429-441, 660-670. 1920. 1397. Williams, C. B. Report of the Division of Agronomy, North Carolina Agric. Exp. Ann. Rept. 42: 21-39. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 677. SOIL ACIDITY 1398. JoFFE, Jacob S. The influence of soil reaction on the growth of alfalfa. Soil Sci. 10: 301-307. Fig. 1. 1920. — Pot experiments with alfalfa were carried out in soil to which varying quantities of sulfuric acid or calcium carbonate were added. The hydrogen-ion exponent of the soil was determined by Gillespie's method at the beginning, during, and at the end of the experiment. The germination of alfalfa seed was practically the same in soils varying from Ph. 4.5-7.0 but was greatly reduced in soils below Ph. 4.5. The yields of tops showed a gradual increase with an increase of Ph. from 3.8-7.0. The nodule production and nitrogen content of the plants increased with decreasing hydrogen-ion concentration. — W. J. Robbins. 1399. Knight, H. G. Acidity and acidimetry of soils. I. Studies of the Hopkins and Pettit method for determining soil acidity. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12 : 340. 1920. — A de- tailed account of cation and anion absorption by soil is presented. — Henry Schmitz. 1400. KmoHT, H. G. Acidity and acidimetry of soils. II. Investigation of acid soils by means of the hydrogen electrode. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12 : 457-464. 1920.— A new hydrogen electrode has been designed which has proved satisfactory for certain types of soil investigation. Various reactions and effects of acid soils are discussed. — Henry Schmitz. 1401. Knight, H. G. Acidity, and acidimetry of soils. III. — Comparison of methods for determining lime requirements of soils with hydrogen electrode. IV. — Proposed method for determination of lime requirements of soils. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 559-562. 1920. — A method is proposed for determining the power of a soil to decompose calcium carbonate No. 2, March, 1921] SOIL SCIENCE 207 which approximates the results obtained by use of the hydrogen electrode. The Hopkins and hydrogen electrode methods show the highest percentage consistency for measuring the reduction of acidity for limed soils. — Heiiry Schmitz. INFLUENCE OF BIOLOGICAL AGENTS 1402. Ames, J. W. Supply of nitrogen in the soil. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. Monthly Bull. 6": 174-178. 3 tables. — Information concerning changes of the nitrogen supply of the soil occasioned by differences in treatment, under cultivation, with fertilizers, lime and manure, is gained bj' a comparison of the nitrogen content of fertility plots on the Wooster farm. — R. C. Thomas. 1403. Ellett, W. B., and W. G. Harris. Cooperative experiments for the composting of phosphate rock and sulfur. Soil Sci. 10 : 315-325. 1920. — Using composts of soil and rock phos- phate; soil, rock phosphate and sulfur; soil, rock phosphate, sulfur and manure, inoculated and uninoculated with sulfofying microorganisms, the water soluble, ammonium-citrate- soluble and total phosphoric acid as well as the sulfuric acid, total nitrogen, nitrate and ammonia were determined. The results show that the addition of manure to a compost of soil, sulfur and rock phosphate increases the availability of the rock phosphate. All Virginia soils have some sulfofying power. The composting of sulfur, soil, rock phosphate, and manure is not recommended for the use of farmers because of the slowness of the process and mechanical difficulties. — W. J. Robbins. 1404. LiPMAN, J. G., AND J. S. JoFFE. The influence of initial reactions on the oxidation of sulfur and the formation of available phosphates. Soil Sci. 10: 327-332. 2 fig. 1920.— Varj'ing quantities of sulfuric acid were added to soil containing 15 per cent rock phosphate and 5 per cent sulfur. The hydrogen-ion exponent of the soils varied from Ph. 4.7-5.4. The soluble phosphates and hydrogen-ion concentrations were determined weekly. By the end of the 12th week the hydrogen-ion exponent had fallen to Ph. 1.4-2.0 but little further change occurred. The amount of soluble phosphate increased during the 20 weeks of the experi- ment reaching 83 to 85 per cent but no influence of the initial reaction on the formation of the soluble phosphates was noted. — W. J. Robbins. 1405. Maze, P., Vila et Lemoigne. Transformation de la cyanamide en uree par les microbes du sol. [Transformation of cyanamide into urea by micro-organisms of the soil.) Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 921-923. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1334. 1406. Whiting, A. L., .\nd Roy Hansen. Cross-inoculation studies with the nodule bacteria of lima beans, navy beans, cowpeas and others of the cowpea group. Soil Sci. 10: 291-300. 1920. — Pot experiments with leguminous plants and pure cultures of B. radicicola show that the nodule bacteria of the lima bean {Phaseolus lunalus) are distinct from those of the navy and kidney bean {Phaseolus vulgaris) but are identical with those of the cowpea. (Vigna sinejisis). — W. J. Robbins. 1407. Wright, R. C. Nitrogen economy in the soil as influenced by various crops grown under control conditions. Soil Sci. 10: 249-289. 9 fig. 1920.— Leguminous and non-legumi- nous crops were grown in containers holding about 100 lbs. of soil. Nitrogen in the plant and in the soil was determined. Under the conditions of the experiment the fallow soil showed a loss of nitrogen. Under some crops there was an absolute loss of nitrogen in excess of that recovered in the crop and this varied with the crop and soil. Legumes may show this loss as well as non-legumes. When nitrogen fixation takes place in the growth of legumes the removal of the crop above ground depletes the soil of nitrogen just as if a non- leguminous crop had been grown. — W. J. Robbins. 208 SOIL SCIENCE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, FERTILIZATION 1408. Burgess, J. L. Part I. The relative availability of acid phosphate and the native soil phosphates in the presence of pulverized limestone. Part II. Future of the agricultural lime industry. Bull. North Carolina Dept. Agric. 4P: 5-24. 1920. — The first part is a com- pilation of opinions on the influence of lime in rendering potash available. The second part is an expression of opinion that lime is to be regarded as a fertilizer element. — F. A. Wolf. 1409. HiBBARD, R. P., AND S. Gershberg. The biological method of determining the fer- tilizer requirement of a particular soil or crop. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21 : 223-224. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1419. 1410. Jordan, W. H. Soil studies : I. The influence of fertilizers upon the productiveness of several types of soil. II. The influence of fertilizers and plant grovyth upon soil solubles. New York Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] Bull. 473. 27 p. 1920.— Part I deals with a series of forcing-house experiments in which peat, stable manure, and commercial fertilizers, in vary- ing proportions, were applied to several kinds of soil in which barley was grown. Perhaps the most interesting feature of these experiments was the fact that a sandy soil of an inferior type for general cropping produced twice as much dry substance in boxes to which no fertilizer was applied as did a clay loam soil notably fertile in field culture. In Part II an account is given of experiments in which it was shown that the application of soluble compounds of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium to various kinds of soil increased the proportion of water soluble in the soil. It was also shown that a growing crop (barley) utilizes the soluble material and rapidly reduces the quantity of such material in the soil even while the plants are in an early stage of growth. — F. C. Stewart. 1411. Maze, P., Vila and Lemoigne. Action de la cyanamide et de la dicyanodiamide sur le developpement du mais. [Action of cyanamide and dicyanodiamide on the development of maize.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169:804-807. 1 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1333. 1412. Pltjmmeh, J. K., and Wolf, F. A. Borax injury to crops. North Carolina Dept. Agric. Bull. 41": 1-20. Fig. 8. 1920. — Field obser^^ations made in 1919 indicated that con- siderable damage to crops in North Carolina had resulted from the use of fertilizers containing borax. The injury manifested itself by death and stunting of plants so that the stands were not uniform, plants of the same age differed in size, and yields, in consequence, were greatly decreased. — The present investigation with corn and cotton on Cecil clay loam and cotton and tobacco on Durham sandy loam in pot cultures agrees with field observations in showing that plants are more susceptible to injury on the lighter soils. — In sandy soil, as little as one pound of anhydrous borax per acre injured tobacco and no cotton grew in any pots containing over five pounds per acre. In clay soil, both cotton and corn showed marked injury when the amounts of borax exceeded seven pounds of anhydrous borax per acre, but the plants survived in these series.— The tobacco plants which were poisoned in the third trans- planting gradually recovered and after two months were apparently normal, thus presenting a condition similar to that found in the field. — The corn plants on sandy soil, to which borax at the rate of 5 pounds per acre was applied, showed considerable injury whereas, with an application of 10 pounds per acre, they were entirely lacking in green color and soon died. — Interference with color formation by boron does not appear to be related to the assimulation of iron nor to plastid formation. — There is no reason to believe borax will remain in the soil and cause damage to crops succeeding those which have been injured by borax. Borax dis- appears from the zone occupied by roots by leaching. — F. A. Wolf. 1413. ScHREiNER, Oswald, B. E. Brown, J. J. Skinner, and M. Shapovalov. Crop injury by borax in fertilizer. U. S. Dept. Agric. Circ. 84: 3-35. 25 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1431. No. 2, March, 1921] SOIL SCIENCE 209 FERTILIZER RESOURCES 1414. Anonymous. The nitrogen problem; by-products. [Rev. of: Anonymous. Min- istry of munitions of war. Munitions inventions department. Nitrogen products committee. Final report. VI + 357 p. H. M. Stationery office: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 201-202. 1920.— See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1417. 1415. Anonymous. The manufacture of synthetic ammonia and production of nitrates. Nature 105: 312. 1920. — Note on beginning of work by the government. See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1417. (The Nitrogen problem. Nature 104: 533.)— 0. A. Stevens. 1416. Anonymous. Basic slag and its use in agriculture. Nature 105: 183-184. 1920. — A discussion organized by the Faraday Society, held Mar. 23. Slag produced by Bessemer process has a marked effect on pastures, and British agriculturists could use 300,000 to 400,000 tons a year. The open hearth process which is likely to supersede the Bessemer yields two slags, both poorer in phosphates. — 0. A. Stevens. 1417. Anonymous. The nitrogen problem. [Rev. of: Anonymous. Ministry of muni- tions of war. Munitions inventions department. Nitrogen products committee. Final report. VI + 357 p. H. M. Stationery office: London, 1919.] Nature 104: 533-535, 568-570. 1920. — Committee estimates post-war supply of fixed nitrogen potentially available is likely to show an increase of 30 to 40 per cent upon pre-war production, almost wholly due to devel- opment of synthetic processes. Demands of war set aside needs of agriculture to the great detriment of the world's food supply, causing almost universal recognition of the vital im- portance of nitrogenous fertilizers. Under favorable conditions nitrogen fixation and allied processes stand at a very considerable advantage as compared with non-synthetic methods (based on pre-war prices). The committee recommends the establishment of: (1) calcium cya- namide process to yield 60,000 tons per annum, (2) synthetic ammonia (Haber) process up to minimum of 10,000 tons of ammonia per annum, and (3) ammonia oxidation plant, in con- junction with the synthetic ammonia factory, to jdeld 10,000 tons of 95 per cent nitric acid or its equivalent in nitrates. The investigation of other fixation processes is recommended. — 0. A. Stevens. 1418. Jenkins, E. H., and E. Monroe Bailey. Fertilizer report for 1919. Connecticut (New Haven) Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 217: 53-106. 1919.— Analyses of 339 brands of fertilizers offered for sale in the state are given. — Henry Dorsey. 1419. Russell, E. J. The manufacture of artificial fertilizers. [Rev. of: Lloyd, Strauss L. Mining and manufacture of fertilizing material and their relation to soils. VI + 153 p. D. Van Nostrand Co. : New York. Crosby, Lockwood and Son, London. 1919.] Nature 105 : 4-5. 1920. — Reviewer considers the two chapters on pebble phosphate and hard-rock phos- phate fairly good. Other chapters contain much that is poorly selected or antiquated. — 0. A. Stevens. 1420. Thorne, Chas. E. Basic slag vs. acid phosphate. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. Monthly Bull. 55 : 141-147. 1920. — A comparison of the two materials as a source of phosphorus. Basic slag was found to be a useful carrier of phosphorus, but the claim made that it is superior to acid phosphate is not justified. — R. C. Thomas. 210 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS J. M. Greenman, Editor E. B. Patson, Assistant Editor SPERMATOPHYTES 142L Anonymous. Diagnoses Africanae. LXXIII. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1920: 23-29. 1920. — The following new species and varieties are described and new combinations made: Acmadenia teretifolia Phillips (Diosma teretifolia Link), A. teretifolia var. glabrata Phillips {Diosma teretifolia var. glabrata Sond.), Craterispermum caudatum Hutchinson, Senecio Snowdenii Hutchinson, Mostuea amabilis Turrill, Thunbergia prostrata Turrill, Asystasia amoena Turrill, Leucadendron uniflorum Phillips, Phyllanthus asperulatus Hutchinson, P. delagoensis Hutchinson, and Isachne angusta Stapf. — E. Mead Wilcox. 1422. Anonymous. Decades Kewenses. Decas XCV. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1920: 66-71. 1920. — The following new species are described: Stellaria Wallichiana Haines, Aspidopterys Hutchinsonii Haines, Tetrastigma alcicorne Haines, Knoxia linearis Gamble, Oldenlandia anamalayana Gamble, 0. Barberi Gamble, Jasviinium Parkeri Dunn, Psenderanthemum Dawei Turrill, P. elliplicum Turrill, and Lasiococca Comberi Haines. — E. Mead Wilcox. 1423. B., E. G. [Rev. of: .Iorgensen, E. Die Euphrasia-Arten NorwegenS. (Euphrasia species in Norway.) Bergens Museums Aarbok 1916-17; Naturvidenskabelig raekke nr. 5. SS7 p., 11 maps, 14 pi, 54 fig. John Griegs: Bergen, 1919.] Jour. Botany 58: 111-112. 1920. — The various sections of the genus are characterized, and an abbreviated form of the key is reproduced. The monograph is in German with some notes in English.— iv". M. Wiegand. 1424. Baker, Edmund G., and C. E. Salmon. Some segregates of Erodium cicutarium L'Herit. Jour. Botany 58 : 121-127. PI. 554. 1920.— Segregates of E. cicutarium fall into two groups — those confined to sand dunes or similar places along the coast, and those growing nor- mally inland. Only the coastal species are treated in this paper. A review of literature is given, followed by a key to the British species. Synonomy, careful descriptions, references to exsiccatae, and detailed notes on distribution are given for the five species treated. The following species are considered. E. glutinosum Dumort., E. dentatum Dumort., E. neglectum sp. nov., E. Lebelii Jord., and E. Ballii Jord. The plate contains illustrations of E. neglectum and E. Lebelii. — K. M. Wiegand. 1425. Benoist, Raymond. Liste de plantes recoltees en Guyane frangaise par M. Wachen- heim. [List of plants collected in French Guiana by M. Wachenheim.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 26 : 85-92. 1920. — Besides many species previously known the following are described from this collection as new to science: Ormosia cinerea and Melanoxylon speciosum. — E. B. Payson. 1426. Blake, S. F. Revision of the true mahoganies (Swietenia). Jour. Washington [D. C] Acad. Sci. 10:286-297. 2 pi., 2 fig. 1920.— The taxonomic history of the genus Swietenia, dating from the publication in 1743 of Catesby's "Natural History of Carolina," is cited, and the five known species are described, one of these being added as a new species. The most important of these commercially at the present time is probably S. macrophylla; this species has largely replaced in commerce S. Mahogani, which was much valued earlier. But much of the "mahogany" now on the market is from other genera than Sivietenia, often, indeed, from widely separated families. Five species are recognized one of which, S. cirrhata, is new to science. — Helen M. Gilkey. 1427. Britton, N. L. Two new West Indian plants. Torreya 20 : 83-84. 1920.— Two new species are described: Stenophyllus Harrisii from Jamaica and Croton Fishlockii from the Virgin Islands. — J. C. Nelson. No. 2, March, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 211 1428. Britton, N. L. The wild pimento of Jamaica. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21: 38, 39. 1920. — Amomis jamaicensis Britton & Harris, sp. nov. — H. A. Gleason. 1429. Britton, N. L., and C. F. Millspatjgh. The Bahama Flora. Roij. 8 vo., vin + 695 p. Published by the authors: New York, June 26, 1920.— The present work includes plants of the four great phyla of the vegetable kingdom, namely, Thallophyta, Brrjophyta, Pteridophyta, and Spermatophyla. The treatment of the lower groups has been contributed by prominent specialists, as follows: Miisci by Mrs. N. L. Britton; Hepaticae by Professor Alexander W. Evans; Lichens by Professor Lincoln W. Riddle; Algae by Dr. Marshall A. Howe and Mr. Frank S. Collins; Diatoms by Mr. Charles S. Boyer; Fungi by Dr. Fred J. Seaver and Dr. William A. Murrill. Ample keys are provided for both genera and species, which, except in some of the lower groups, are described in detail and accompanied by a limited bibliography and synonymy. A chapter on "Exploration and Collections" is given; also a special chapter on "Bibliography," prepared with the cooperation of Mr. John H. Barnhart, is added. The following is a list of the new genera, species, combinations, etc., of which Britton & Millspaugh are the authors unless otherwise indicated; Dichromena inaguensis Britton, Atamosco cardinalis Britton (Zephyranthes cardinalis C. H. Wright), Encyclia fucata {Epidendrum fucatum Lindl.), E. bahamensis {Epidendrum bahamense Griseb.), E. rufa {Epidendrum rufum Lindl.), E. diurna {Limodorum diurmim Jacq.), E. inaguensis Nash, E. plicala {Epidendrum plicatum Lindl.), E. acicularis {Epidendrum aciculare Batem.), Nidema gen. nov., A''. Ottonis {Epidendrum Ottonis Rchb. f.), Oncidium bahamense Nash, 0. lucayanum Nash, Peperomia spathulifolia Small, Dendropemon brevipes Britton, D. bahamensis Britton, Coccolobis Northropiae Britton, Ocotea coraicea Britton {La^irtis coriacea Sw.), Anneslia formosa {Acacia formosa Kunth), Cracca cathartica {Galega cathartica Moc. & Sesse), Dolichos insularis Britton, Erythroxylon confusum Britton {E. affine A. Rich., not St. Hil.), Polygala Wilsoni Small, Margaritaria bahamensis {Phyllanthus bahamensis Urban), Croton rosmari7ioides Millsp. {C. rosmarinifolius Griseb., not Salisb.), Curcas Curcas {Jalropha Curcas L.), Adenorima gymnonola Millsp. {Euphorbia gymnonoia Urban), Abutilon trisulcatum {Sida trisulcata Jacq.), Malache bahamensis {Pavonia bahamensis Hitchc), Zuelania Guidonia {Laetia Guidonia Sw.), Anamomis lucayana Britton, Nym- phoides aureiim Britton {Limnanthemum aureum Britton), Neobracea bahamenesis Britton {Bracea bahamenesis Britton), Jacquemontia caxjensis Britton, Gerardia bracteosa, Guettarda Nashii, G. Taylori, G. inaguensis, Borreria inaguensis Britton, B. saxicola Britton, V. Wil- sonii Britton, B. bahamensis Britton, B. savannarttm Britton, Lobelia lucayana, Eupatorium lucaijanum BTitton, Eschenbachia lyrata {Co7iyza lyrataUBK.), Neothymopsis gen. nov., iV. thymoides {Tetranthus thymoides Griseb.), A^. Brittonii {Thymopsis Brittonii Greenm.), Cir- sium Smallii Britton (C. pinetorum Small, not Greenm.), Hynmiostomum flavescens E. G. Britton, Amblystegium Sipho E. G. Britton {Hrjpnum Sipho Beauv.), Verrxicaria mamillaris Riddle, Porina Wilsonii Riddle, P. macrocarpa Riddle, P. subfirmula Riddle, Microthelia quadriloculata Riddle, Anthracothecium subglobosum Riddle, Tomasellia exumana Riddle, T. macrospora Riddle, Trypethelium eluteriae var. sub sulphur eum Riddle {Pseudopyrenula eluteriae subsp. subs^dphurea Wainio), Parathelium microcarpum Riddle, Campy lothelium decolorans Riddle, Lithothelium bahamense Riddle, Opegrapha isabellina Riddle, 0. bahamen- sis Riddle, 0. columbina Riddle, Chiodecton cruentatum Riddle, C. Bracei Riddle, lonaspis tropica Riddle, Bilimbia aurata Riddle, B. molybditis Riddle {Biatora molybditis Tuck.), Bacida medialis Riddle {Lecidia medialis Tuck.), Ocellularia subtilis Riddle {Thelotrema subtile Tuck.), Thelotrema paralbidum Riddle, Leptotrema simplex Riddle {Thelotrema sim- plex Tuck.), L. bisporum Riddle {Thelotrema bisporum Nyl.), Caloplaca galactophylla Riddle {Placodium galactophyllum Tuck.), C. aurantiaca var. isidiosella Riddle {Lecanora aurantiaca var. isidiosella Crombie), C. aurantiaca var. diffracta Riddle {Callopisma aurantiacum var. diffractum Mass.), Liagora pedicellata M. A. Howe, L. mucosa M. A. Howe, Grallatoria M. A. Howe gen. nov., G. reptans M. A. Howe, Gracilaria lacinulata M. A. Howe {Fucus lacinulatus Vahl), Laurencia nana M. A. Howe, Chondria Collinsiana M. A. Howe, Amphibia pectinata M. A. Howe {Bostrychia Vieillardi pectinata Kiitz), A. Sertularia M. A. Howe {Bostrychia Sertularia Mont.), Herposiphonia bipinnaia M. A. Howe, Dasyopsis Antillarum M. A. 212 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, Howe, D. spinuligera M. A. Howe {Dasya spinuligera Collins & Herv.), Spermothamnion speluncarum M. A. Howe {Rhodocorton speluncarum Collins & Hervey), S. gymnocarpum M. A. Howe, Haloplegma Duperreyi spinulosum M. A. Howe, Ochtodes secundiramea M. A. Howe {Hypnea?secundiramea Mont.), Fosliella M. A. Howe nom. nov., F. farinosa {Melobesia fari- nosa Lamour.), F. LejolisiiM. A. Howe {Melobesia Lejolisii Rosan.), F. Chamaedoris M. A. Howe {Lithophyllum Chamaedoris Fosl. & Howe), Hydroclathrus clathratus M. A. Howe {Encoelium clathratum (Bory) Ag.,) Padina Vickersiae Hoyt, Pseudotetraspora Antillarum M. A. Howe, Valonia ocellata M. A. Howe, Caulerpa paspaloides compressa M. A. Howe (C. paspaloides var. typica f. compressa Webb. v. Bosse), Bryobesia cylindrocarpa M. A. Howe, Codium intertextum var. cribrosum M. A. Howe, Aphanocapsa Howei Collins, Gloeo- capsa bahamensis Collins, Entophysalis violacea Collins, Phormidium pulvinatum Collins, Dimerosporium zonatum Seaver, Phtjllachora Ateleiae Seaver, P. fusicarpa, P. Galactiae Earle, and Ophiodothis bahamensis Seaver. — J. M. Greenman. 1430. CocKERELL, T. D. A. A new form of Stanleya. Torreya 20: 101, 102. 1920.— Stanleya glauca latifolia, collected at Edith, Kansas, in May, 1920, is described. This may later prove to be a distinct species. — /. C. Nelson. 1431. Cremata, Merlino. Una excursion botanica a Isla de Pinos. [A botanical excur- sion to the Isle of Pines.] Revist. Agric. y Trab. 3: 47-49. 3 fig. 1920.— A collecting trip was made to the Isle of Pines by the author and Dr. Juan T. Roig. The following new species were collected: Erythroxylon Roigii Britton & Wilson and Torrubia insularis Standley. Other rare and interesting species were collected. — F. M. Blodgett. 1432. Deane, Walter, and M. L. Fernald. A new albino rasberry. Rhodora 22: 112. 1920. — A white-fruited form of Rubus idaeus L. var. canadensis Richardson, collected on Caribou Mountain, Mason, Maine, is published by the authors as Rubis idaeus L., var. cana- densis Richardson, forma Warei. The plant was discovered by R. A. Ware and has amber- white or honey-colored fruit. — James P. Poole. 1433. De Wildeman, E. Notes sur des especes continentales africaines du genre "Baphia" Afzelius. [Notes on the continental African species of the genus Baphia Afz.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X, 1 : 201-224. 1919.— After an analytic key for the genus, the following new species are described: Baphia Bergeri, B. Claessensi, B. Dewevrei, B. Gilleti, B. Klainei, B. longepedicellata, B. odorata, B. Pierrei, B. Solheidi, B. Verschuereni. The description of one new variety of B. Klainei var. patulo-pilosa is also given.—/. P. Kelly. 1434. Engler, a., and P. Graebner. Ein neues Polygonatum. [A new Polygonatum.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 54 (398). 1920.— P. Beyrodtianum is described from Japan.— H. A. Gleason. 1435. Fawcett, William, and Alfred Barton Rendle. Flora of Jamaica containing descriptions of flowering plants known from the island. Vol. IV, Part ii. XV + 369 p., 114 text illustrations. Printed by order of the trustees of the British Museum (Natural History) London, 1920.— The present volume is continued on the same lines as volume III and includes the families Leguminosae to Callitrichaceae. The following new names, varieties and com- binations are herein published: Crotalaria sagittalis L. var. fruticosa (C. fruticosa Mill.), Indigofera suffruticosa Mill, forma obtusifolia, Sesbania Sesban {Aeschynomene Sesban L.), Aeschynomene biflora {Cassia biflora Mill.), Zornia tetraphylla {Myriadenus tetraphyllus DC), Desmodium intortum {Hedysaum intortum Mill.), D. purpureum {Hedysarum pur- pur eum Mill.), Vigna peduncularis {Phaseolus peduncularis BBK.) , V. antillana {Phaseolus antillanus Urb.), Cassai fasciata {Chamaecrista fasciata Britton), Entada gigas {Mimosa gigas L.), Albizzia Berteriana {Pithecolobium Berterianum Benth.), Zygia latifolia {Mimosa latifolia L.), Enterolobium mangense {Mimosa mangensis Jacq.), Linum jamaicense {Cath- artolinum jamaicense Small) Picraena antillana {Rhus antillana Eggers), Bur sera Hollickii {Terebinthus Hollickii Britton), Mescagnia Hiraea {Triopteris Hiraea Gaertn.), Croton No. 2, March, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 213 laurinus Sw. var. adenophyllus Cadenophyllus Spreng., Gymnanlhes Integra {G. glandulosa Pax, not Muell. Arg.), and Euphorbia nirurioides {Chamaesyce nirurioides Millsp.)- — /. M. Greenman. 1436. Fernald, M. L. Some variations of Cardamine pratensis in America. Rhodora 22: 11-14. 1920. — In North America there occur the naturalized Cardamine pratensis with pink petals; the indigenous white-flowered C. pratensis var. palustris; the pink-flowered variety angustifolia of the Arctic regions which varies from the typical C. pratensis in leaf characters as well as its range; and the pink-flowered double-flowered form C. pratensis forma plena. A discussion of these variations, their history, and their ranges, is followed by a key. The synonomy, bibliography, and distribution of each is given. — James P. Poole. 1437. Fernald, M. L. The northern variety of Ranunculus hispidus. Rhodora 22: 30-31. 1920. — At the southern border of its range this plant has erect pubescence, but north- ward the hirsute plant becomes rare and gradually gives way to a commoner variation with pubescence appressed or even almost or quite wanting. From New England and New York this plant with appressed pubescence extends westward to Iowa, and south to the mountains of North Carolina, West Virginia, Missouri, and Kansas; while the typical R. hispidus extends well into Georgia and Arkansas. The writer proposes this more northern extreme as Ranunculus hispidus Michx.var. falsus, n. var., giving the description, distribution, and a list of characteristic specimens. Many of these specimens were distributed as R. septen- trionalis, a northern species of swamps and meadows with much coarser stems and leaves and with stout and very long repent stolons developing soon after the expansion of the first flowers. — James P. Poole. 14.38. Fernald, M. L. Polygala paucifolia Willd., forma vestita, n. f. Rhodora 22:32, 1920. — The typical P. paucifolia has the leaves green and quite glabrous except for a slight ciliation and sometimes a little pilosity on the midrib. This new form which the writer proposes has the leaves densely pilose with canescent hairs, and is conspicuous when grow- ing on account of its pale foliage. The type specimen is from the northwestern base of Fall Mountain, Walpole, New Hampshire, where it was collected in 1917. — James P. Poole. 1439. Fernald. M. L. The American varieties of F*yrola chlorantha. Rhodora 22: 49-53. 1920. — The author gives descriptions and bibliographies of the typical Pyrola chlor- antha and of its varieties occurring in America, with a key and discussions as to the distin- guishing differences between them. The varieties are published as new varieties or new combinations in each case. The writer attempts no solution as to their status. — James P. Poole. 1440. Fernald, M. L. Scirpus acutus Muhl. Rhodora 22:55-56. 1920.— The writer finds that when, in 1904, Mrs. Chase proposed Scirpus occidentalis (Wats.) Chase, as one of four species which had been passing under the aggregate name S. lacustris L., she overlooked the clear description given in Bigelow's "Florula Bostoniensis" of S. acutus, a new species ascribed by Bigelow to Muhlenberg. Somewhat later Muhlenberg himself published S. acutus, contrasting it with his S. lacustris (the S. validus of Mrs. Chase's treatment). Bigelow's description and Muhlenberg's unquestionably define S. occidentalis, and the type station, "deep water at Fresh Pond," is likewise conclusive, for S. occidentalis was often collected in Fresh Pond in the days prior to its conversion into a reservoir, but the old col- lections show no material of *S. validus from the pond. The writer therefore revives the name Scirus acutus Muhl. The bibliography and the synonyms are given. — James P. Poole. 1441. Fernald, M. L. A flora of the Penobscot Bay Region. [Rev. of: Hill, Albert Frederick. The vascular flora of the Eastern Penobscot Bay Region, Maine. Proc. Port- land [Maine] Soc. Nat. Hist. 3: 199-304. 1919.] Rhodora 22: 91-96. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1810. 214 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 1442. Gagnepain, F. Barringtonia et Decaspermum nouveaiix. [New species of Bar- ringtonia and Decaspermum.] Bull. Mus. His. Nat. [Paris] 26: 72-74. 1920. — Barringtonia Eberhardtii, b. edaphocarpa, and Decaspermum cambodianum from southeastern Asia are described as new. — E. B. Payson. 1443. Gagnepain, F. Un genre nouveau de Composees, Blumeopsis. [Blumeopsis, a new genus of the Compositae.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 26: 75-76. 1920.— Blumeopsis is pro- posed as a genus new to science and to it is assigned one species, B. Jlava {Blumeaflava DC.), from southeastern Asia. — E. B. Payson. 1444. Gamble, J. S. The Indian species of Mimosa. Bull. M sc. Inf. Kew 1920: 1-6. 7 fig. 1920. — Seven species of Mimosa are recognized as occurring in British India. These species are contrasted by means of a key and figures illustrating the characteristics of the leaflets. The following species are described as new to science: M. himalayana, M. Barheri, M. Prainiana. — E. Mead Wilcox. 1445. GoDFERT, M. J. Epipactis viridiflora Reich. Jour. Botany 58:33-37. PL 553. 1920. — This is supplementary to a paper in Jour. Botany 57: 37-42. E. viridiflora var. lepto- chila Godfery is contrasted with E. latifolia All., which most continental authors consider a mere form or var ety. In the first portion of the paper, differences in vegetative organs are considered; and in the second portion differences in reproductive organs are taken up. The root systems of the two are very different. Also the leaf arrangement is different; in E. viri- diflora it is distichous, while in the other species the leaves are in a six-ranked rosette. Many differences were found in the flowers, most of which are llustrated in the plate. These differences lie in the form of the top of the ovary, the sessile or stalked acute or obtuse anther, and the projection of the pollinia. The rostellum in one species is minute and withered; in the other, large and persistant. The more conservative nature of floral variation is noted; hence the importance of the differences mentioned. The relation of structure to repro- duction in Anacamptis pyramidalis is taken as an example of the above statement, and out- lined. These differences between E. viridiflora and E. latifolia are correlated with remarkable functional changes. E. latifolia is pollinated by wasps, and the pollen is not friable, but is carried as a pollinium. Self-fertilization seems impossible. In E. viridiflora var. lepto- chila the viscid gland is reduced and inoperative, and "fertilization" by insects does not occur, or at least is rare. It is shown how the contents of the anther slide down onto the viscid surface of the stigma, producing self-fertilization. In E. viridiflora var. dunensis, the pollen is very friable even before the flower opens. E. viridiflora was originally fertilized by insects, but has lost that function. Muller believed that cross-fertilization in E. viridiflora occasion- ally occurred, due to aphids; but the author thinks this very exceptional. MtJLLBR studied the two species most minutely, and said that we have here two form cycles which differ by thoroughly essential characters, and have the same claim to be considered distinct species as any two species of a genus.— if. M. Wiegand. 1446. GuiLLAUMiN, A. Contribution a la Flore de la Nouvelle-Caledonie. [Contribution to the Flora of New Caledonia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 26: 77-84. 1920 In continua- tion of previous simila;r lists, species belonging to many families are listed, and various col- lections of them are cited with the collectors' numbers and stations at which they were taken. The following species are described as new: Utricularia canacorum Pellegrin and Litsea ripidion. — E. B. Payson. 1447. Hayata, Bunzo. Icones Plantarum Formosanarum nee non et contributiones ad fioram Formosanam. [Icones of the plants of Formosa, and materials for a flora of the island, based on a study of the collections of the botanical survey of the Government of Formosa.) Vol. IX. 155 p., 8 pi., 55 fig. Bureau of Forestry, Government of Formosa: Taihoku. March 25. 1920.— The present volume continues the results of studies on the formosan flora and includes the families Ranunculaceae to Araceae, arranged in the sequence of Bentham and Hooker. The following new species and varieties are proposed: Clematis garanbiensis, Illicium leucan- No. 2, March, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 215 thurn, I. randaiense, Kadsura Malsudai, Eurya leptophylla, E. Matsudai, Camellia theifera (Griff.) Dyer var. assamica (Masters) (Thea chinensis Hayata, in part, not Sims), Aclinidia gnaphalocarpa, Reevesia formosana, Phellodendron Wilsonii Hayata & Kanehira, Euonymus acutorhombifolia, E. batakensis, E. kuraruensis, E. Matsudai, Celastrus patentiflorus, Cas- sine Matsudai, Crotalaria akoensis, Indigofera mansuensis , I. venulosa Champ, var. glauca, Tephrosia ionophlebia, Milletia taiwaniana, Desmodium akoense, D. Shimadai, Uraria formo- sana {Desmodium formosanum Hayata), U. yaeyamensis , Glycine pescadrensis, G. subonensis, G. lomentella, Galactia lanceolata, Phaseolus heterophyllus, P. rot^mdifolius, Vigna acuminata, Dolichovigna new genus of Leguminosae, D. formosana, D. rhombifolia, Dolichos Lablab L. var. dolichocarpa, Albizzia longepedunculata. Spiraea tarokoensis, Filipendula kiraishiensis, Viburnum Matsudai, V. taihasense, V. villosifolium, Lonicera japonica Thunb. var. semper- villosa, L.rubropunclata, L. shintenensis, Uncaria formosana {Ourouparia formosana Hay &ta,), U. uraiensis, Cephalanthus glabrifolius, C. ratoensis, Dentella Matsudai, Hedyotis kuraruensis, Anolis formosana, Mussaenda albiflora, Chomelia gracilipes, C. kotoensis, C. lancifolia, Randia suishaensis, Diplospora (?) buisanensis, Ixora gracilijlora, Psychotria (?) kotoensis, P. macrophylla, Lasianthus hiiranensis, L. microstacthys, L. parvifolius, Paederia uraiensis, P. villosa, Damnacanthus Tashiroi, Rhododendron nankotaisanense, Symplocos kiraishiensis, S. Somai, S. sozanensis, Jasminum Shimadai, Osmanthus bibrac eatxis, 0. daibuensis, O. gamo- stromus, O. Matsudai, Gardneria hongkongensis , Erycibe acutifolia (E. obtusifolia Hayata, not Benth.), Ainbtdia stipilata, Lindernia stellar iifolia, L. cruciformis, Mimulus formosana, Bonnaya aristato-serrata, Torenia hokutensis, T. nantoensis, Hygrophila pogonocalyx, Strobi- lanthes lasiocalyx, S. longespicatus, S. prionophyllus, S. rankanensis, S. Tashiroi, Dicliptera uraiensis, Helicia hainanensis, Elaeagnus buisanensis, E. convexolepidota, E. daibuensis, E. erosifolia, E. grandifolia, E. longidruba, E. nokoensis, E. oiwakensis, E. paucilepidota, Phyllanthus oligospermus, P. takaoensis, Glochidion chademenosocarpum, G. hypoleucum, G. koionese, G. kusukusense, G. sphaerostigmum, G. suishaense, Antidesma acutisepalum, A. hiiranense, A. rotundisepalum, Acalypha kotoensis, A. longe-acuminata, A. Matsudai, Claoxy- Ion kotoense, Alchornea kelungensis, A. loochooensis (A. treivioides Hayata, not Muell. Arg.), Euphorbia garanbiensis , E. liukiuensis, E. Tashiroi, Zelkova formosana, Z. tarokoensis, Lithocarpus Nakaii, L. Matsudai, Dendrobitim alboviride, Bulbophyllum Somai, Eria Mat- sudai, Calanthe Takeoi, C. Matsudai, Vanilla ronoensis, Galeola Matsudai, Gastrochilus Matsudai, Orchis kiraishie^isis, Alpinia agiokucnsis, A. densespicata, A. dolichocephala, A. hokutensis, A. kusshaku£nsis, A. mediomaculata, A. suishaensis, A. tonrokuensis, Pseudo- smilax new genus of Liliaceae, P. seisuiensis, P. hogoensis, Smilax formosana, S. herbacea L. var. daibuensis, S. horridiramula, S. ovato-rotunda, S. taiheiensis, S. takaoensis, S. tenuis- sima, S. trachyclada, Heterosmilax raishaensis, Polygonatum arisanense, P. officinale All. var. formosanum, Smilacina forynosana, Paris arisanensis, Metanarthecium formosanum, Aspidistra daibuensis, A. 7nushaensis, Heloniopsis acutifolia, Arisaema quinquefoliola, and A. Matsudai. — J. M. Greenman. 1448. Henry, Augustine, and Margaret G. Flood. The Douglas firs: a botanical and silvicultural study of the various species of Pseudotsuga. Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. B, 35: 67-90. PL 12-14. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 331. 1449. Hitchcock, A. S. The genera of grasses of the United States with special reference to the economic species. U. S. Dept. Agric. Bull. 772. 807 p., 20 pi, 174 fig. Government Printing Office: Washington. 1920.— All genera of grasses are described that embrace native, introduced, or cultivated species in the United States. Under each genus reference is made to the type species and to species of economic importance, both useful and harmful plants. The economic consideration takes into account the grasses that are used for hay or pasture purposes, for cereal and sugar production, those used in broom and paper making, and the ornamental species. Throughout the paper the word "grass" is used strictly in its botani- cal sense; that is, as applying only to the plants of the family Poaceae or Gramineae. The keys to the tribes and genera are arranged in a simple, workable way; and these, together 216 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VII, with an illuminating half-natural-size photograph or sketch of a representative species under each genus, should enable the amateur botanist readily to fix in his mind the generic char- acteristics, and, indeed, the species typifying the genus. A brief of the publication of each generic name is given, and the reason is stated for choosing the species taken as a type. The arrangement of the material, in general, differs from that of previous contributions on the subject in that the tribes have been placed in a new sequence, based upon the complicity of the flower structure, the simplest or most primitive being placed first and the most highly developed being given last. According to the author's researches, the tribal arrangement as presented is the closest approximation to the natural relationship that can be shown in sequence. Accordingly, the bamboos (Bamboseae) are listed first, as certain genera embraced in this tribe are of the simplest floral structure. The following points are of special interest to agrostologists: Munroa has been placed under the tribe Chlorideae. Triodia has been re- stored ; and while the species embraced in this genus are variable in habit and in floral char- acter, the author does not deem it practicable to segregate any of them into distinct genera. Aira has been restored and Deschampsia relegated to synonomy under it. Aspris is used for three annual economically unimportant species heretofore carried under Aira. Agrostis palustris is the name given for A. alba, cultivated redtop. Agrostis capillaris replaces what has been considered a variety of cultivated redtop, A. alba vulgaris. The synonomy is com-plete for generic names based on American species. The lifelike sketches of representa- tive species by Mrs. Gill and the detailed taxonomic drawings by Assistant Agrostologist, Mrs. Agnes Chase, practically all of which are new, are exceedingly helpful in the recognition of the species typifying each genus.— Arthur W. Sampson. 1450. HoEHNE, F. C. Catalogo do Hervario e das especies cultivadas no Horto "Oswaldo Cruz" com a indicacao daquellas que existem em duplicata e poderao ser cedidas em permuta. [Catalogue of the herbarium and of the species cultivated in the Garden of "Oswaldo Cruz" with an indication of those which exist in duplicate and which may be given in exchange.] S vo., 48 p. Sno Paulo, 1919. 1451. Holm, Theo. Antennaria alpina and A. carpathica. Rhodora 22 : 138-142. 1920.— The author argues that these species should not be excluded from the flora of this continent, but that both species exist in Canada as well as in the United States. He believes that A. alpina (L.) R. Br. is polymorphic and is represented on this continent by various forms which have been separated as varieties and even as species, such as A. glabrata Greene and A. mucronata E. Nelson. Likewise, A. carpathica (Wahlenb.) R. Br. is claimed to be repre- sented on this continent by A. lanata Greene.— James P. Poole. 1452. HoLMBERG, Otto R. Einige Puccinellia-Arten und Hybriden. [Some Puccinellia species and hybrids.] Bot. Notiser [Lund] 1920:103-111. May, 1920.— Four species and six hybrids are discussed. Several new names or combinations for these are proposed.— P. A. Rydberg. 1453. Hutchinson, J. Clematopsis, a primitive genus of Clematideae. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1920: 12-22. 5 fig. 1920.— Clematopsis Bojer, previously in manuscript only or applied to species as a nomen nudum, is taken up for a group of the Clematideae from tropical Africa, South Africa, and Madagascar. Typical Clematis species have opposite leaves and sepals that are induplicate-valvate in the bud. A valvate aestivation is considered derived from an imbricate one, at least in the Ranales. In Clematopsis there is a gradation in aestivation characters from simple imbricate to a type of induplicate-valvate arrangement that approaches closely the condition in Clematis. One species of Clematopsis produces at times alternate leaves. It is held that the present genus is a primitive one in the tribe and con- nects that tribe with the Anemoneae. The following new combinations are made and new species published: Clematopsis Kirkii {Clematis Kirkii Oliv.), C. Teuczii {Clematis villosa var. Teuczii O. Ktze), C. speciosa, C. chrysocarpa {Clematis chrysocarpa Welw.), C. argentea, C. katangensis, C. Oliveri, C. Stuhlmannii {Clematis Stuhlmannii Hieron.), C. trifida {Cle- matis trifida Hook.), C. scabiosifolia {Clematis scabiosifolia DC), C. Stanleyi {Clematis No. 2, March, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 217 Stanleyi Hook.), C. oligophylla (Clematis oligophylla Hook.), C. anethifolia Bojer (Clematis anethifolia Hook.), C. pimpinellifolia Bojer (Clematis pimpinellifolia Hook.), C. villosa (Clematis villosa DC). A key is given to the 15 recognized species, and specimens are cited. — E. Mead Wilcox. 1454. Jennings, O. E. Impatiens pallida forma speciosa f . nov. Ohio Jour. Sci. 20 : 204. 1920. — A description is given of this new variety of Impatiens pallida with pale cream colored flowers. The type specimen was collected in Schenley Park, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania'. — H. D. Hooker. 1455. JuMELLE, H. Un Jatropha dioique de Madagascar. [A dioecious Jatropha from Madagascar.] Rev. Gen. Botany 32: 121-124. 1920. — A description of Jatropha mahafalensis the "betatatra" of Madagascar. This species differs from the others of the genus in being dioe- cious.— L. W. Sharp. 1456. Knowlton, C. H., and Walter Deane. Reports on the Flora of the Boston District —XXXIII. Rhodora 22: 123-127. 1920.— A continuation of the report of the Committee on Local Flora of the New England Botanical Club. Reported species and their distribution in the district about Boston, Massachusetts. — James P. Poole. 1457. Kops, Jan, F. W. van Eeden, and L. Vuyck. Flora Batava. Afbeelding en beschrijving der Nederlandsche gewassen. [Flora of Holland. Illustrations and descrip- tions of the plants of Holland.] Folio. Parts 400-401. PI. 1993-2000 [colored]. Martinus Nijhoff: 's-Gravenhage, 1920. — The present parts contain illustrations and descriptions of several vascular and non-vascular plants. The vascular plants are: Solarium triflorum Nutt. and Stipa Neesiana Trin. & Rupr. [See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2347.] — J. M. Greenman. 1458. Lacaita, C. C. Quercus aegilops. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1920: 100-105. 1920.— It still remains most probable that Q. aegilops L. is to be identified with the Vallonea oak of commerce. — E. Mead Wilcox. 1459. Lauterbach, C. Beitrage zur Flora von Papuasien VII, no. 64. Die Burseraceae Papuasiens. [The Burseraceae of Papuasia.] Bot. Jahrb. 56: 317-344. 4 fig. 1920.— The Burseraceae are represented in Papuasia by only the genera Canarium and Santiria. Few species were formerly known, but the collections of Ledermann have greatly increased the number, until now 21 species of Canarium and 12 of Santiria are known. Of the species of Canarium a few occur elsewhere, occasionally in cultivation, but mostly endemic. They are tall trees, usually inhabiting the lowlands. The limited distribution of species in both genera may be due to the short period in which the seed is viable, a condition common in most oily seeds. The seeds are distributed by animals, rarely or never 'by streams except when whole trees are swept downstream. The species of Santiria are all endemic. Three are low trees. The genus ranges through all altitudes. Keys to the genera and species are given; also notes and synonomy on the various species. The following species, varieties, and forms are pro- posed as new: Canarium moluccanum Bl. var. palla and forma porphyropyrena, C. grandi- stipulatum, C. kaniense, C. Branderhorstii, C. maluense, C. pachypodum, C. furfuraceum, C. aemulans, C. Tamborae, C. Ledermannii, C. Schlechteri, C. Julvum, C. appendiculatum, Santiria Schlechteri, S. sepikensis, S. maluensis, S. Ledermanni, S. leeaefolia, S. nubigena, S. caudata, S. triphylla, S. lamprocarpa, and S. anisandra. — K. M. Wiegand. 1460. Lauterbach, C. Beitrage zur Flora von Papuasien VII, no. 65. Die Simarubaceen Papuasiens. [The Simarubaceae of Papuasia.] Bot. Jahrb. 56:341-344. 1 fig. 1920.— This family is represented in Papuasia by five genera, each containing a single species. Only two of these are forest species, the other three being strand plants. The distribution of the strand species is aided by the water currents, as the fruits are well adapted for floating. The species are all found in other countries. The genera listed are Suriana, Samadera, Brucea, Picrasma, and Soulamea. A key to the genera is given; also notes are given on distribution and nomenclature of the species. Samadera indica Gaertn. var. papuana is described as new. — K. M. Wiegand. 218 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1461. Lauterbach, C. Beitrage zur Flora von Papuasien, VII, no. 66. Die Anacardiaceen Papxiasiens. [The Anacardiaceae of Papuasia.] Bot. Jahrb. 56:345-373. 5 jig. 1920. — Twelve genera and 46 species are listed from Papuasia, of which two genera are endemic. Three genera contain cultivated, or at least economic, species. Sixty-two per cent of the species are endemic. Most of the species inhabit the low-lands, especially in the alluvial swamps along the rivers, where they often form an important part of the woody fiira. One species, at least, is a myrmecophile. A few species reach the higher mountain summits. A key is provided to the genera and to the species under each genus. The following varieties, species, and combinations are proposed as new: Buchanania nova-hibernica, B. montana, B. macrocarpa, B. scandens, Mangifera xylocarpa, Skoliostigma defolians, Pentaspadon Moszkow- skii, Campnosperma montana, fEuroschinus Ledermannii, Rhus lenticellosa Lauterb. var. monophylla and var. pentaphylla, R. caudata, Nothopegiopsis nidificans, Semecarpus myrme- cophila, S. nubigena, S. Schlechteri, S. fulvo-villosa, and S. bracteata. The genus Skoliostigma is described as new. Synonomy and nomenclatorial references are given, as well as notes on distribution, morphology, and ecology. — K. M. Wiegand. 1462. Lewin, L. Ueber einige Pflanzen aus dem Kustengebiet von Beludschistan. [On some plants from the coastal region of Baluchistan.] Bot. Jahrb. 56 (Beibl. 123) : 31-36. 1920. — A list of 63 plants is given, collected by Messrs. Possmann and Palmer along the coast of Baluchistan, and determined by Paul Hennings and Paul Ascherson. Of these, 38 had not previously been reported from the northern and northwestern portions of that country. The native names are added where known. The narrow strip of sandy country between the mountains and the coast supports a type of semi-desert vegetation quite different from the flora farther inland. Published records of Baluchistan plants are fe'w; two based on Stock's collections are mentioned. — K. M. Wiegand. 1463. LowNEs, Albert E. Notes on Pogonia trianthophora. Rhodora 22: 53-55. 1 fig. 1920. — This rather rare orchid was first reported in the region about Asquam Lake, New Hamp- shire, in 1898, from one station. Six stations are now known, scattered over a comparatively small area, and containing between five and six thousand plants. The writer gives a few brief notes as to its manner of growth, method of fertilization, method of propagation, habit of withdrawing moisture from the tubers in time of drought, and habit, which is peculiar for our native orchids, of opening only on clear days and closing during cloudy weather and at night. — James P. Poole. 1464. Maiden, J. H. A critical revision of the genus Eucalyptus. Vol. IV, Part 9. 239-304 p., pi. 160-163. William Applegate Gullick: Sydney, 1920.— The present part contains descriptions, synonymy, notes, and illustrations of the following species : Eucalyptus Torelliana F. V. M., E. corymbosa Smith, E. intermedia R. T. Baker, E. patellaris F. v. M., E. celastroides Turcz., E. gracilis F. v. M., E. transcontinentalis Maiden, E. longicornis, F. v. M., E. oleosa F. V. M., E. Floctoniae Maiden, E. virgata Sieber, E. oreades R. T. Baker, E. ohtusiflora DC, and E. fraxinoides Deane & Maiden. Ibid. Part 10. P. 305-343. PI. 164-167. March, 1920. — This part continues th6 series with a like treatment of: E. terminalis F. v. M., E. dichromophloia F. v. M., E. pyrophora Benth., R. pyrophora Benth. var. poly car pa {E. poly- carpa F. v. M.), E. laevopinea R. T. Baker, E. ligustrina DC, E. stricta Sieber, and E. grandis (Hill) Maiden. — J. M. Greenman. 1465. Metcalf, F. P. Notes on North Dakota plants. Jour. Washington [D. C] Acad. Sci. 10: 188-198. 1920. — A list of marsh and aquatic plants of the state, including 18 species not previously reported. — Helen M. Gilkey. 1466. Moore, Spencer Le M. Alabastra Diversa. Part XXXII. Jour. Botany 58: 44-49. 1920. — (1) Plantae Congoenses novae vel rariores. This contribution consists of notes on the Compositae and Acanthaceae of the Congo. Notes are given on five species of Compositae, three of which are new: Vernonia divulgata, Aspilia congoensis, and Crasso- cephalum longirameum. Thirteen species of Acanthaceae are listed, three of which are new: No. 2, March, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 219 Hygrophila Vanderystii, Justicia fistulosa, and Rhinacanthus minimus. (2) Vaupelia A. Brand. This, a genus of Borraginaceae, was removed by Brand from the Cynoglosseae to the Lithospermeae. The close relationship of Vaupelia and Cystistemon Balf, f. was also noted by Brand. As now understood Vaupelia, ranging from Somaliland to Angola, contains six species. In the "Flora of Tropical Africa" V. macr anther a was wrongly merged in Medxisa. A seventh and new species, V. hispidissima from Angola, is added in the present paper. It is related to V. Medusa Brand. — K. M. Wiegand. 1467. MoxLEY, George L. A study in Zauschneria. Southwest Sci. Bull. 1: 13-29. PI. S-4. May 5, 1920. — The following species are considered in this paper: Z. calif ornica Presl., Z. microphylla (Gray), Z. cana Greene, Z. villosa Greene, Z. Eastwoodae Eastwood & Moxley sp. nov, Z. latifolia (Hook) Greene, Z. viscosa Moxley, Z. velutina Eastwood sp. nov., Z. tomentella Greene, Z. Garretti A. Nelson, Z. arizonica Davidson, Z. Pringlei East- wood sp. nov., Z. elegans Eastwood sp. nov., Z. crassifolia Rydberg, Z. glandulosa Moxley, Z. HalliiMoxley sp. nov., Z. pulchella Moxley sp. nov., Z. argentea A. Nelson, and Z. canes- cens Eastwood sp. nov. — P. A. Mum. 1468. Nelson, James C. [Rev. of: Hitchcock, A. S. The Genera of Grasses of the United States with special reference to the economic species. U. S. Dept. Agric. Bull. 772. 307 p., 20 pi., 174 fig. Government Printing Office: Washington, 1920.] TorreyaZO: 84-88. 1920.— In several respects this book marks an advance over our previous knowledge. A new sequence of tribes is proposed, by which the bamboos are placed first, as showing the least differentia- tion in floral structure, followed by the tribes Poatae and Panicatae. The tribes Oryzeae and Nazieae are placed with the Poatae. A new tribe, Zizanieae, is cut off from Oryzeae on the basis of the unisexual spikelets. Munroa is placed with the Chlorideae. THodia is restored. The name Aira is taken up for Deschampsia, and Aspris is substituted for Aira. Agrostis alba L. becomes A. palustris Huds., and A. alba var. vxdgaris Thurb. becomes A. capillaris L. The synonj^my is complete for all generic names based on American species. The reason for selecting the species taken as the type is stated in all cases. Each genus is tech- nically described, and all economic species mentioned. With two exceptions, all the illus- trations are new. One new species (Epicampes patens) is described, and 14 new combinations are formally made. — J. C. Nelson. 1469. Nicolas, G. Biologie fiorale de quelques ombelliferes Nor d-Afri canes. [Floral biology of some North African umbellifers.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32: 230-234. 1920.— See Bot. Abstr. 7, Entry 329. 1470. Pammel, L. H., and C. M. King. A variation in the black walnut, Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 25: 241-248. PI. 3, fig. 4S-U- 1920.— History and description, with figures of tree, bark, leaf, and fruit of a "mutant" walnut {Jugland nigra) with pyriform fruits. — H. S. Conard. 1471. Pellegrin, Francois. Utriculaires nouvelles de I'Indo-Chine (Lentibulariacees). [New Utricularias from Indo-China (Lentibulariaceae).] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 26: 180-183. 1920. — The following species are described as new to science: Utricularia delphini- oides Thorel, U. delphinioides Thorel var. minor, U. Geoffrayi, U. Lilliput, U. odorata, and U. Pierrei. — E. B. Payson. 1472. Pennell, Francis W. Scrophulariaceae of the central Rocky Mountain states. Contrib. U. S. Nation. Herb, 20: 313-381. 1920.— This paper, the first of a series, discusses the genera Verbascum, Linaria, Collinsia, Scrophularia, Chionophila, and Penstemon, as represented in the central Rocky Mountain region, including Wj'oming, Colorado, Utah, and Idaho east of the 113th meridian. It is introduced by a description of the physical features of the area and a list of localities at which specimens have been collected by Dr. Pennell. Full descriptive keys are given in genera of more than one species, and a list of specimens ex- amined is given under each species. The paper is largely taken up with a revision of the BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VII, NO. 2 220 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, genus Penstemon (commonly known as Pentstemon) in the area covered, in which 86 species are listed, with 2 additional new species at the end. Keys to the groups and species are given, and the following new names occur: Penstemon Jonesii, P. leptanthus, P. auriberbis, P. parviflorus, P. dolius Jones, P. Paysonii, P. eriantherus saliens (Rydb.) Pennell, P. ophi- anthus, P. parvus, P. magnus, P. leiophyllas, P. laevis, P. saxosorum, P. uintahensis, P. cyaneus, P. cyananthus suhglaber (Gray) Pennell, P. cyananthus longiflorus, P. scariosus, P. Garrettii, P. Caryi, P. strictus angustus, P. secundiflorus lavendulus, P. Osterhoutii, P. versicolor, P. lentus, P. coloradensis Sileri (Gray) Pennell, P. procerus pulvereus, P. aggre- gatus, P. obtusifolius, P. retrorsus Payson, P. caespitosus perbrevis, P. glabrescens, P. abie- tinus, P. Tidestromii, P. mensarum. — S. F. Blake. 1473. Piper, Charles V. A study of Allocarya. Contrib. U. S. Nation. Herb. 22:79- 113. 1920. — In this study of the genus Allocarya Greene, of the family Boraginaceae, 79 species are recognized from North America north of Mexico, of which 48 are described as new. A key to the species is given, and distributed specimens are cited freely. The species are dis- tinguished chiefly by characters drawn from the nutlets. The following are new: Allocarya hystricula, A. acanthocarpa, A. oUgochaeta, A. echinacea, A. cristata, A. Eastwoodae, A. glyp- tocarpa, A. spiculifera, A. anaglyptics, A. papillata, A. distanti flora, A. microcarpa, A. ori- cola, A. divergens, A. asperula, A. Wilcoxii, A. setulosa, A. alipitata micrantha, A. Leibergii, A. tuberculata, A. charaxata, A. amhigens, A. lonchocarpa, A. limicola, A. sigillata, A. cryo- carpa, A. gracilis, A. laxa, A. pratcnsis, A. cervina, A. ramosa, A. calycosa, A. figurata, A. vallata, A. undulata, A. minuta, A. scalpta, A. reticulata, A. areolata, A. inornata, A. media, A. divaricata, A. interrasilis , A. insc^ilpta, A. dispar, A. gramdata, A. conjuncta, A. cor- rugata, A. scalpocarpa.—S . F. Blake. 1474. PiTTiER, H. The Venezuelan mahogany, a hitherto undescribed species of the genus Swietenia. .Tour. Washington [D. C] Acad. Sci. 10: 32-34. 1920. — Though the tree has long been known economically, the Venezuelan mahogany has never before been criticall}^ studied and is now described as a new species, Swietenia Candollei. — Helen M. Gilkey. 1475. PoupioN, J. L'Inobulbon muniScum Kranzlin. Rev. Hort. [Paris] 92: 64-66. Fig. 15-16. 1920. 1476. Rehder, Alfred. New species, varieties and combinations from the herbarium and the collections of the Arnold Arboretum. Jour. Arnold Arboretum 2: 42-62. 1920. — The present article deals with Rosaceae. A classification of all the known species of Malus is given, and one new section, Chloromeles (Decne.), and new subsections are proposed. The following species, varieties, forms, and combinations based on spontaneous material are new: Aronia arbutifoliaL leiocalyx and f. macrophylla,Photinia villosa var. coreana (Decne.), y. Amelanchier grandiflora (Zabel) =A. canadensis X laevis Weigand, Malus kansuensis f. calva, M. honanensis, M. Komarovii (Sarg.), M. coronaria var. dasycalyx, M. angustifolia f. pendula, Docyniadocy- nioides (Schneid.), Pyrus ussuriensis var. hondoensis (Kikuchi & Nakai) and var. ovoidea (Rehd.), P. Calleryana var. Fauriei (Schneid.). The following new hybrids, forms and com- binations are based on garden plants: X Sorbus arnoldiana, Aronia arbidifolia va,T. pumila, Amelanchier grandiflora f. rubescens, Malus baccala f. gracilis, M. florihunda var. brevipes, M. coronaria var. dasycalyx f. Charlottae, M. ioensis f. plena, X M. robusta and var. persicifolia, X M. sublobata (Zabel), X M. purpurea (Barbier), X Chaenomeles superba (Frahm) with several forms, Pyrus Calleryana f . graciliflora and f tomentella and X P. congesta. There are also critical notes on other species of some of the genera mentioned above. (See also Bot. Absts. 4, Entries 1758, 1759.)— Alfred Rehder. 1477. Rehder,. Alfred. Tetraplasia, a new genus of Rubiaceae. Jour. Arnold Arbore- tum. 1:190-191. 1920. — Tetraplasia biflora, new genus and new species, related to Plec- tronia and Vangucria, is described; it is endemic to the Liukiu Islands. — Alfred Rehder. No. 2, March, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 221 1478. Rehder, Alfred. New species, varieties and combinations from the herbarium and the collections of the Arnold Arboretum. Jour. Arnold Arboretum 1: 191-210. 1920. — The present continuation of this paper deals with Saxifragaceae and Ranunculacae and a few Pinaceae, Taxaceae, and Liliaceac. Besides many horticultural forms the following species, varieties, and combinations are new: Juniperus squamata f. Wilsonii, Paeonia suf- fntiicosa var. spontanea, Clematis paniculaln var. dioscoreifolia (Lev. & Vaniot), Philadelphus rhombifolius from Japan, P. subcanus var. Wilsonii (Koehne), P. Delavnyi var. calvescens, P. pekinensis var. dasy calyx, P. laxus var. strigosus (Beadle), Fendlera linearis from Mexico, F. rupicola var. falcata (Thornber), Deutzia heterotricha from Japan, and D. calycosa var. macrnpetala from China. — Alfred Rehder. 1479. Rexdle, a. B. Poa omeiensis comb. nov. Jour. Botany 58: 25. 1920. — A new name made necessary by the discover^' that P. gracillima Rendle is antedated by P. gracillima Vasey. The plant in question is a Chinese species. — K. M. Wiegand. 1480. RiDDELSDELL, H. J. British Rubi, 1900-1920. Jour. Botany 58: 101-104. 1920.— This is a summary of the changes made in the interpretation of the British Rubi since the publication of Rogers' hand-book. Most of the changes are due to Rogers' work or have have been done under his guidance. About fifty forms are mentioned. — K. M. Wiegand. 1481. RiDDELSDELL, H. J. Some records, and rose records. Jour. Botany 58: 113-114. 1920. — Records of the occurrence of Callitriche, Zannichellia, Potamogeton, Eleocharis, Carex, and various species of Rosa. — K. M. Wiegand. 1482. Rock, Joseph F. The genus Plantago in Hawaii. .\mer. Jour. Botany 7: 195-210. / pi. 1920. — A critical study of PlarUago in Hawaii. The author recognizes two species, both endemic: P. princeps, with eight varieties, and P. pachyphylla, with seven varieties. P. Queleniana Gaud, is reduced to a variety of P. princeps. Two new varieties, P. princeps var. anomala and P. pachyphylla var. muscicola, are described, together with four new forms: P. pachyphylla var. mauiensis forma montis eeka, P. pachyphylla var. kauaiensis forma ro- busta, P. pachyphylla var. kauaiensis forma intermedia, and P. pachyphylla var. rotundifolia forma crassicaudex. Three species of Plantago have been introduced into Hawaii. — E. W. Sinnott. 1483. RusBY, H. H. Codes of botanical nomenclature in the United States Pharmacopoeia. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9:670-671. 1920. 1484. Salmon, C. E. Alchemilla acutidens in England. Jour. Botany 58: 112-113. 1920 1485. ScHELLEXBERG, G. Ueber einige Arten der Gattung Rourea Aubl. [Several species of the Genus Rourea Aubl.] Bot. Jahrb. 56: 21-29. 1920. — This genus has been very much misunderstood. The author in a previous contribution, in 1910, has shown that Rourea as understood by Aublet is entirely American, and excludes the African Byrso- carpus and the Asiatic Santaloides. The author's early studies, based mainly on anatomical considerations, were primarily concerned with generic and subgeneric' relationships and lim- itations. The preparation of a monograph for "Das Pflanzenreich" has brought out new in- formation with regard to species, and has led to this paper. Material named Rourea frutes- cens Aubl. by most authors has been Connarus pubescens DC, or Rourea pubescens Radlk., or in some cases R. surinamensis Miq., or even Cnestidium rufescens Planch. R. surinamensis Miq. also has been misunderstood, and has been confused with R. revoluta Planch., and R. glabra HBK. R. oblongifolia Hook. & Arn. is apparently a synonym of R. glabra HBK. Urban's R. cubensis and R. sympetala are to be referred to R. glabra. Of Baker's three varieties of R. glabra only one, var. parviflora, is really a variety of this species. Grisebach confused also R. paucifoliolata Planch, with R. glabra. R. oblongifolia Hook. & Arn. and R. glabra HBK. are synonymous. The author notes that he was previously in error in the statement that the genus Rourea is characterized by sclerenchyma cells in the leaves. Only 222 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, R. ligulata Bak. possesses these cells. Species of Connaraceae are rarely characterized by a definite anatomical character. Genera and larger groups, however, possess good anatomical characteristics, especially the genus Pseudoconnarus Radlk. Several species are noted as being little known to the author. The value of the pubescence on the calyx as a specific character as used by Baker is questioned. — K. W. Wiegand. 1486. ScHLECHTER, R. Eine weitere neue Vanda. [Another new Vanda.] Orchis 14: 2-4. 1920. — Vanda luzonica Loher. is described as new to science. — E. B. Payson. 1487. ScHLECHTER, R. Pelatanthsria insectifera Ridl. Orchis 14: 7-10. 1920.— The history of this species is discussed at length, and the three known species of the genus are redescribed. — E. B. Payson. 1488. ScHLECHTER, R. Vanda concolor Bl. Orchis 14: 21-24. 1920.— A history of this species in literature and a description of the plant are given. — E. B. Payson. 1489. ScHLECHTER, R. Die Gattung Eulophiella Rolfe. [The genus Eulophiella Rolfe.] Orchis 14: 24^30. 1920. — The known facts concerning this Madagascan genus are here col- lected, and a key is given to the three recognized species. E. Perrieri is described as new to science. — E. B. Payson. 1490. Schneider, Camillo. Notes on American willows. IX. Jour. Arnold Arboretum 2 : 1-25. 1920. — The present article deals with the section Discolores with 4 and the section Griseae with 5 species. The synonymy, nomenclature, distribution, and relationship of these 9 species and their varieties are discussed at length and the following 2 new varieties proposed : Salix Scouleriana var. crassijulis (Anderss.) and S. petiolaris var. rosmarinoides (Anderss.). (See also Bot. Absts. 3, Entries 1838, 1839; 4, Entries 1769, 1770; 5, Entry 105S.)— Alfred Rehder. 1491. Small, J. K. Cypress and population in Florida. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21: 81-86. PI. U5-U7. 1920. 1492. Smith, J. J. Plantae novae vel critecae ex Herbario at Horto Bogoriensi I. [New or critical plants from the herbarium and garden of Buitenzorg I.] Bull. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg, III, 1 : 390-410. PI. 38-56. June, 1920.— The following new species are described and figured: Phyllanthus ovatifoluis, Glochidion styliferum, Dicoelia affinis, Baccaurea crassifolia, Claoxy- lon velutinum, C alophyllum grandiflorum, Clethra elongata, Rhododendron Vanvuurenii, R. fortunans, R. lompohense, R. radians, Gaultheria celebica, Diplycosia celebensis, D. gracilipes, Vaccinium bigibbum, and V. latissimum. — /. J. Smith. 1493. SuRGis, E. Contribution a I'etude des Frankeniacees. [A study of the Frank- eniaceae.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 246-249. 1920.— This family is regarded as consisting of the following genera in addition to Frankenia: Beassonia Roxburgh, Hyperi- copsis Boissier, Niederleinia Hieronymus, and Anthobryum Philippi. To the last-named genus, which previously has consisted of a single species, is added Frankenia triandra Remy on the basis of the number of stamens. Niederleinia juniperoides Hieronymus is held to be distinct from Frankenia microphylla Cav. A variety, angustifolia, is added to Hypericopsis persica. A new species, B. compacta, is added to the genus Beassonia. — C. H. and W. K. Farr. 1494. Verdoorn, Inez C. The Order Primulines (Myrsinaceae, Primulaceae, and Plum- baginaceae), as represented in the Transvaal. South African Jour. Sci. 16: 366-735. 9 maps. 1920. An examination of all the material in the South African herbaria has established the fact that 11 species of the above order occur in the Transvaal.—^. P. Phillips. 1495. Weatherby, C. A. Habenaria psycodes, var. ecalcarata in Vermont. Rhodora 22: 31-32. 1920.— A description of a peculiar orchid collected by Dr. Anne E. Perkins in a No. 2, March, 1921] UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS 223 meadow at Berkshire, Vermont, and later determined by Professor Ames as a peloric form of Habenaria psycodes which was described, figured, and named var. ecalcarata by Miss M. M. Bryan in the Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 4: 38. 1917. The peculiarities of this form "(for it seems to be a teratological development rather than a true variety)", are an oblong-ovate, spurless petal in place of the usual three-parted, spurred and fringed lip; and the develop- ment of four anther sacs set at various angles in a rough semi-circle about its upper part, instead of the usual two nearly erect anther sacs. All of the flowers of the inflorescence wer(! alike. — James P. Poole. 1496. WiEGAND, K. M. Variations in Lactuca canadensis. Rhodora 22:9-11. 1920. — The writer has attempted a classification of the varieties and forms of Lactuca canadensis which seems to accord more with the material found in the field than does the treatment found in our various manuals. In floral and fruit characters L. canadensis is remarkably con- stant, and it is only in the leaves that great fluctuation is found. A short discussion of some of these variations is given, with a summary in the form of a key. Descriptions and bibli- ographies of the species and the forms recognized by the writer are given. — James P. Poole. 1497. WiEGAND, K. M. A new species of Spergularia. Rhodora 22: 15-16. 1920.— An account of the discovery of an apparent new species of Spergularia, which the author pro- poses as S. alata sp. nov. This species was collected at different times from 1916 to 1919 by different collectors, from the brackish soil about salt springs and salt ponds in central New York. A description is given as well as a comparison with the more closely related species. The attention of botanists is called to the plant in the hope that it may be found elsewhere. — James P. Poole. 1498. Wilson, E. H. Four new conifers from Korea. Jour. Arnold Arboretum 1: 186- 190. 1920. — Abies koreana, A. nephrolepis f. chlorocarpa and Larix dahurica var. Principis- Rupprechtii f. viridis are described as new and a full description of Thuja koraiensis Nakai given. — Alfred Rehder. MISCELLANEOUS, UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS Burton E. Livingston, Editor Sam F. Trelease, Assistant Editor 1499. Anonymous. A new kelp shredder catalogue. Pacific Fisherman 18 : 56. 1920. 1500. Anonymous. Making carbon from kelp. Pacific Fisherman 18:64. 1920. — U. S. Government experimental kelp works at Summerland, California, believes that bleaching- carbon is a very valuable kelp product. — T. C. Frye. 1501. Anonymous. [Abstract of: Williams, W. C. Observations on cases of seasonal hay fever diagnosed and treated with pollen extracts. Military Surgeon 46^: 199. 1920.] Jour. Trop. Med. & Hygiene 23: 206-207. 1920. — Report on cutaneous tests for sensitiveness to pollens from various plants. Of the 29 cases tested, 22 were sensitive to pollen from rag- weed, and 5 to that from golden rod. — E. A. Bessey. 1502. Anonymous. The organization of scientific work in India. Nature 105: 565-568. 1920. — Chiefly extracts from government of India's dispatch of June 4, 1919. — 0. A. Stevens. 1503. Anonymous. The cost of scientific publications. Nature 105:285-286. 1920. — Urges government support for publications of scientific societies. — 0. A. Stevens. 1504. Anonymous. Sympositun on the microscope. Nature 104: 545-546. 1920. — Relat- ing to technique, manufacture, and research in metallurgy. — 0. A. Stevens. 1505. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Laucks, I. F. Commercial oils: vegetable and animal. With special reference to oriental oils. VIII + 138 p. Jno. Wiley and Sons: New York. 224 UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VII, Chapman and Hall: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 132. 1920.— "Intended, not for the oil chemist, but those persons concerned in the oil industry who have no knowledge of chem- istry, or at least as applied to oils short descriptions of the principal oils and fats met with in commerce .... even the expert may peruse this part of the volume with advantage." — O. A. Stevens. 1506. Anonymous. The organization of scientific work in India. Nature 104: 653-654. 1920. 1507. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Pellett, Frank C American honey plants together with those which are of special value to the beekeeper as sources of pollen. 297 p., 155 illus. American Bee Journal, Hamilton, Illinois.] Jour. Botany 58: 156-157. 1920. 1508. Bailey, E. M. Food products and drugs, 1919.— Part II. Diabetic foods. Con- necticut [New Haven] Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 220: 261-342. 1920. — A discussion of what con- stitutes a diabetic food is given together with the analysis of 652 foods. These are analysis for water, ash, nitrogen, protein, fiber, starch, fat and other nitrogen-free extract which is had by difference. — Henry Dorsey. 1509. Beythien, a. Trinkbranntwein aus Brennspiritus. [Brandy from lamp-alcohol.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel. 39: 148-153. 1920. 1510. Coulter, J. M. The evolution of botanical research. Nature 104: 581-585. 1920. — Presidential address at St. Louis meeting of American Association for the Advancement of Science, Dec, 1919. The recent tendencies which seem to indicate future development are: (1) dealing with problems that are fundamental in connection with some important practise, (2) increasing realization that problems are synthetic, and (3) that structures are not static. There is no sharp division between pure and applied science. The investigator needs a broad training in order that he may be able to make use of the work of specialists in the various branches. Co-operation will play an important part; also experimental control in investiga- tional work. — [See also next following Entry, 1511.] — 0. A. Stevens. 1511. Coulter, J. M. The evolution of botanical research. Science 51: 1-8. Jan., 1920. — In this address certain evolutionary tendencies in the science of botany are pointed out. The phase of segregation among botanists has passed. One of the growing tendencies is to attack problems that are fundamental in connection with important practises, as, for example, the problems which underlie agriculture. Another tendency is increasing realization that botanical problems are synthetic. The morphologist, physiologist, ecologist, now realize that the facts possessed by one have a close relation to the successful work of the other. Still another tendency is the growing recognition of the fact that structures are not static. One must learn to distinguish between those structures that are relatively fixed and those that are variables. The conception of rigidity of structures is well illustrated by the early work of cytologists and that dealing with genetics. Experience has begun to enlarge the prospective of workers in these fields. It will be necessary for the successful botanists of the future to have a broader training than heretofore; to cooperate in research; to subject their work to rigid experimental control before conclusions are reached. [See also next preceding Entry, 1510.]— A. H. Chivers. 1512. DowNES, H. Herbarium pests. Jour. Botany 58: 251-252. 1920. — A short account of a solution of naphthaline in petrol as a substitute for perchloride of mercury in poisoning herbarium specimens. — K. M. Wiegand. 1513. Frye, T. C. Notes on useful and harmful mosses. Bryologist 23:71. 1920. — Brief notes upon mosses that facilitate early decay of shingled roofs; that exterminate grass in lawns; that are used for packing vegetables. — E. B. Chamberlain. 1514. Hardy, G. H., A. B. Rendle, B. D. Jackson, and C. S. Myers. The cost of scientific publications. Nature 105: 353-354. 1920.— Four separate communications. No. 2, March, 1921] UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS 225 1515. Hartridge, Hamilton. Microscopic illumination. Jour. Quekett. Microsc. Club. Ser. 2. Vol. 14: 73-88. Fig. 1-2. — The subject is discussed under the following headings, (I) theoretical aspect of microscopic illumination, (II) position of critical illumination, (III) alter- native methods of illumination, (IV) experimental comparison between different methods of illumination, (V) relative advantages of different methods, (VI) practical applications. — Leva B. Walker. 1516. Herdmax, W. a., H. H. Turner, E. B. Knobel, and W. W. Bryant. The cost of scientific publications. Nature 105:326-327. 1920. — Four separate communications. 1517. Herzog, R. O. tJber einige Fragen der Faserstoffschemie. [On a few questions in the chemistry of fibres.] Naturaissenschaften 8: Heft 34. 673-681. 1920. 1518. Holland, T. H. The organization of scientific work in India. Nature 105: 452- 453. 1920. — A reply from the {)resident of the Indian industrial commission to opinions expressed in previous numbers of Nature. Refers especially to botanical survej' and forest botany. — O. A. Stevens. 1519. Holman, R. M. Contributions of Botany to Military Efficiency. Pi-oc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918:49-55. 1920. — The author discusses some of the waj^s in which Sphagnum, Pathology and Forestry helped to solve difficult war problems. — F. C. Anderson. 1520. Hoxie, Frederick J. Arrangement of heating pipes an important factor in decay of factory roofs. Trans. Amer. Soc. Heat and Ventilating Eng. 25: 15-24. 12 fig. Jan., 1919. — Increasing the amount of heat near a roof may be resorted to instead of increasing the insu- lation to prevent the loss of heat and the consequent precipitation of moisture. The pipes are commonly placed beneath the w-indows of the sawteeth with the result that the warm moisture-laden air is circulated against the cooler windows and roof, and water thus precipi- tated upon the roof. The heating pipes should be placed near the roof to keep the planks warm and dry and prevent air circulation. — Walter H. Snell. 1521. Kellog, V. The United States national research council. Nature 105: 332-333. 1920. — Brief statement of purpose and organization. — O. A. Steveiis. 1.5-2. MuiR, F. Makiling [Luzon] as a biological station. [Rev. of: Muir, F. The Der- bidae of the Philippine Islands. Philippine Journ. Sci. D, 12:50-52. 1917.] Philippine Agric. 8: 17-18. 1919. 1523. Nicholson, W. A. Oenanthe crocata L. Jour. Botany 58: 201. 1920. — The ques- tion whether the juice becomes yellow when e.xposed to the air is discussed. — K. M. Wiegand. 1524. Rogers, Leonard. Organization of scientific work. Nature 105: 292. 1920. — An argument against centralized control. — 0. A. Stevens. 1525. Sauvageau, Camille. Utilization des algues marines. [Utilization of marine algae.] Encyclopedie scientifique. 39^ p. O. Doin: Paris, 1920. 1526. Trelease, S.\m F., and Forman T. McLean. Mount Makiling [Luzon] as a station for botanical research. Philippine Agric. 8: 6-16. Frontispiece and 5 pi. 1919. 1527. Trelease, William. Botanical achievement. Science 51:121-131. 1920. — An address by the retiring President of the Botanical Society of America, at St. Louis, Dec, 31, 1919.— A. H. Chivers. INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS The puq)ose of Botanical Abstracts is to supply complete citations and analytical abstracts of all papers dealing with botanical subjects, wherever published, just as soon as possible after they appear. Every effort is made to present complete and correct citations with abstracts of original work, of all papers and reviews, appearing alter January 1, 1919. As an adequate index of progress, Botanical Abstracts is of use to the intelligent grower, field agent and inspector, extension worker, teacher and investigator. The mternational scope of the work should appeal especially to those workers who have restricted library facili- ties. It is hoped that the classification by subjects will prove to be a great aid even to those having access to large libraries, while the topical index should serve a most useful purpose to every one interested in plants. The service of Botanical Abstracts is planned for botanists and all workers with plants, throughout the world. The services of all the botanical workers who are connected with Botan- ical Abstracts in any way, are given without any compensation except the satisfaction of par- ticipation in such a great cooperation toward the advancement of science. It is hoped that all students of plants will feel that Botanical Abstracts is their journal. Although the physical exigencies of the enterprise have made it practically necessary that the actual work of prepar- ing the issues be largely done within a relatively short distance from the place of publication, yet this does not imply that the cooperation is not needed of residents of other countries than the United States and Canada. Many collaborators and abstractors reside in other countries^ but the aim has not been to distribute the actual work throughout the world; rather has it seemed best to distribute the work so as to give prompt and eflBcient service, without reference to the particular countries in which the workers reside. It is physically necessary that the burden of the work and the finding of funds for clerical assistance, etc., should rest largely on North American workers, but the field covered is international and the results are available to all. The Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts, Incorporated, has charge of publication. The board is a democratic organization made up of members elected from many societies, as is shown on the first cover page. Each society elects, in its own way, two representa- tives, each for a period of four years. One new member is elected each biennium (beginning Januarj' 1, 1921) to replace the representative who retires. In the list on the first cover page, the member first named in each group is to serve till January 1, 1925; the second member in each group is to serve till January 1, 1923. Members are not eligible for immediate reelection. The Executive Committee of the Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts consists of five members, elected annually by the Board. It has charge of ad interim affairs not involving matters of general policy. Its membership is shown by the asterisks in the list on the first cover page. The chairman of the Committee for 1921 is B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. The Board of Editors of Botanical Abstracts consists of an Editor-in-Chief and Editors for Sections, as shown on the second cover page. The Editors are elected annually by the Board of Control. Assistant Editors are appointed by the Editors. Editors for Sections, with the aid of Assistant Editors for Sections, are responsible for editing the material of their respective sections as this is supplied by the Bibliography Committee (from the Collaborators and other Abstractors), and also for citations and abstracts of non-periodical literature. They also supply abbreviated titles for the author index of each volume and subject-index entries (for the occasional subject indexes) pertaining to their respective sections. The Editor- in-Chief, with the help of the Associate Editor-in-Chief and with the approval of the Board of Editors, is responsible for the general make-up of the issues, for the final compilations of the author and subject indexes, and for such other details as are left to him by the Editors for Sections. The Bibliography Committee of Botanical Abstracts, the membership of which is shown on the second cover page, is appointed annually by the Executive Committee of the Board of Control. The Bibliography Committee is charged with the responsibility of arranging for the prompt citing and abstracting of serial botanical literature. In performing this function, the Committee assigns to individual Collaborators the complete responsibility for furnishing the INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, Continued abstracts of all botanical papers in a specified serial publication, or in a limited number of serials. The Committee is further charged with the duty of maintaining an accurate record, through a system of reports furnished currently by the Collaborators, of the state of abstract- ing for each serial publication. This record enables the Committee to detect and correct delinquencies in the work of abstracting and to keep the work up to date. The number of assigned serials will eventually exceed 2000, for each of which a record of the state of ab- stracting will be maintained in the office of the Bibliography Committee. Readers are earnestly requested to aid the Bibliography Committee by bringing to its attention any serial publi- cations that are not being properly represented in Botanical Abstracts. The chairman of the Committee for 1921 is J. R. Schramm, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Collaborators of Botanical Absteacts. A large number of botanical workers in all parts of the world have volunteered to assume complete responsibility for securing citations and abstracts from one or more serial publications as assigned to them by the Bibliography Committee. This corps of voluntary workers (called Collaborators) really constitute the basis of the service rendered by Botanical Abstracts. Through their work it is made certain that all serial publications are promptly entered. A list of the names of Collaborators is published in each volume of Botanical Abstracts. It is desirable that a considerable reserve list of collaborators be maintained, in order to allow for necessary changes, and addi- tional collaborators are therefore earnestly solicited. Abstractors for Botanical Abstracts. Collaborators frequently prepare abstracts them- selves, and are thus Abstractors, but they also arrange for others to prepare them. Every abstract is signed by the Abstractor who prepared it, but entries by citation alone are not signed. The Collaborators are responsible for these citations. A list of Abstractors is pub- lished for each volume of Botanical Abstracts. It includes many names of voluntary contributors to the enterprise, besides those of the Collaborators. The Printing and Circulation of Botanical Abstracts is in the hands of the Publishers, according to the terms of a definite contract between them and the Board of Control. All other matters are directly in the hands of the Board of Control. Correspondence concerning subscriptions should be addressed to the Publishers or their agents; other matters should be referred to the Chairman of the Board of Control, to the Chairman of the Bibliography Com- mittee, or to the Editor-in-Chief. Readers of Botanical Abstracts are earnestly requested to make careful note of any errors that occur in the journal, with their corrections, and to send these notes to the Editor- in-Chief. If all will cooperate in this it will be possible to supply a page of corrigenda; with each volume. These notes should be on sheets about 22 X 28 cm. (8^ X H inches). Botanical Abstracts is published monthly. Each volume contains about 300 pages. No claims are allowed for copies lost in the mails unless such claims are received within 30 days (90 days for places outside of the United States and Canada) of the date of issue. Price per volume, net, postpaid: $3.00, United States and dependencies; ?3.12, Canada; $3.25, other countries. The current (1921) volumes are VII and VIII. Back volumes, Volumes III to VI, inclusive, can be supplied. Volumes I and II are out of print. Subscriptions are received at the following addresses, for the respective countries: United States of North America and dependencies; Mexico; Cuba: Williams & Wilkins Company, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore. Argentina and Uruguay: Beutelspacher y Cia., Sarmiento 815, Buenos Aires. Australia: Stirling & Co., 317 Collins St., Melbourne. Belgium: Henri Lamertin, 58 Rue Coudenberg, Bruxelles. The British Empire, except Australia and Canada: The Cambridge University Press, C. F. Clay, Manager, Fetter Lane, London, E. C. British subscribers are requested to make checks and money orders payable to Mr. C. F. Clay, Manager, at the London address. Canada: Wm. Dawson & Sons, Ltd., 87 Queen Street, East Toronto. Denmark: H. Hagerup's Boghandel, Gothersgade 30, Kjobenhavn. France: Emile Bougault, 48 Rue des Ecoles, Paris. Germany: R. Friedlander & Sohn, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin N. W., 6. Holland: Scheltema & Holkema, Rokin 74-74, Amsterdam. Italy: Ulrico Hoepli, Milano. Japan and Korea: Maruzen Company, Ltd. (Maruzen-Kabushiki-Kaisha), 11-16 Nihonbashi Tori-Sanchome, Tokyo; Fukuoka, Osaka, Kyoto, and Sendai, Japan. Spain: Ruiz Hermanos, Plaza de Santa Ana 13, Madrid. Switzerland: Opore& Cie.. Freistrasse 10, B&le. Vol. VII APRIL, 1921 No. 3 ENTRIES 1528-2271 BOTANICAL Abstracts A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of botany in its broadest sense PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC. A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies interested in plants. THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED AND THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL (The Members of the Executive Committee for 19S1 are indicated by asterisks) American Association for the Advancement of Science, Section G. R. A. Harper, Columbia University, New York City. B. E. Livingston, Johns Hopkins Uni- versity, Baltimore, Maryland. Botanical Society of America, General Section. H. A. Gleason, New York Botanical Garden, New York City. *B. M. Davis, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Botanical Society of America, Physiological Section. Otis F. Curtis, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. *B. M. DuGGAR {Chairman of the Board), Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. Botanical Society of America, Systematic Section. Marshall A. Howe, New York Botani- cal Garden, New York City. J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical Garden, New Y^ork City. Botanical Society of America, Mycological Section. C. H. Kauffman, University of Michi- gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Bruce Fink, Miami University, Oxford, Ohio. American Society of Naturalists. H. H. Bartlett, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. *J. A. Harris, Station for Experimental Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, L. I., New York. Ecological Society of America. H. L. Shantz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. * Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory, Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona. At W. A. Orton, U. S. Bureau of Paleontological Society of America. Arthur Hollick, 01 Wall Street, New Brighton, New York, E. W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. American Society of Agronomy. C. B. Hutchison, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. C. A. Mooers, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, Tennessee. Society for Horticultural Science. V. R. Gardxer, University of Missouri, Columbia, Missouri. E. J. Kraus, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. American Phytopathological Society. L. R. Jones, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. *DoNALD Reddick, Comell University, Ithaca, New York. Society of American Foresters. Raphael Zon, U. S. Forest Service.Wash- ington, D. C. J. S. Illick, Pennsylvania Department of Forestry, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. American Conference of Pharmaceutical Faculties. Heber W. Youngken, Philadelphia Col- lege of Pharmacy and Science, Phila- delphia, Pennsylvania. Henry Kraemer. Canadian Society of Technical Agricultur- ists. W. P. Thompson, University of Sas- katchewan, Saskatoon, Saskatchewan. B. T. Dickson, Macdonald College, Macdonald College, Quebec. Royal Society of Canada. No elections. large. Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY BALTIMORE, U. S. A. Entered ae Becond-class matter, November 9, 1918, at the post office at Baltimore. Maryland, under the Act ol March 3, 1879 Copyright 1921, Williams & Wilkins Company ^$3.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba Price, net postpaid, per volume: < $3.12, Canada ($3.25, Other countries CONTENTS Agronomy 227 Bibliography, Biography and History 235 Botanical Education 237 Cytology 237 Forest Botany and Forestry 238 Genetics 243 Horticulture 268 Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants 279 Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes 281 Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi*, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes 283 Paleobotany and Evolutionary History 286 Pathology 289 Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy 297 - Physiology 303 Soil Science '. 318 Taxonomy of Vascular Plants 320 Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications 331 BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1921 AND ASSISTANT EDITORS Editor-in-Chief, J, R. SCHRAMM Cornell University, Ithaca, New Ycrk EDITORS FOR SECTIONS Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus- try, Washington, D. G. — Assistant Editor, Mart R. Burr, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, DC. Bibliography, Biography and History. Neil E. Stevens, U.S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant Editor, Alfred Gundersen, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. — Assistant Editor, Geo. S. Bryan, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. Cowles, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. — Assistant Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael Zon, U. S. Forest Service, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, J. V. HoFMANN, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Ex- periment Station, Stabler, Washington. Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University, Princeton, New Jersey. — Assistant Editor, J. P. Kellt, Pennsylvania State College, State College, Pennsylvania. Horticulture. J . H. Gourlet, West Virginia Univer- sity, Morgantown, West Virginia. — Assistant Editor, H. E. Knowlton, West Virginia University, Morgan- town, West Virginia. Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E. Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University. Balti- more, Maryland.— Assistant Editor, Sam F. Tre- LEASE, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants. E. W. Sinnott, Connecticut Agricultural College, Storrs, Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E. N. Tbanbbatj, Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio. Morphology ana Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexandbb W. Evans. Yale University, New Haven. Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes. H. M. Fitzpatrick, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. — Assistant Editor, Carlos E. Chardon, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W. Berrt, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agricultural Col- lege, East Lansing, Michigan. — Assistant Editor, C. W. Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East Lans- ing, Michigan. Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. H ebeb W . YouNGKEN, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and Science ,P hiladelphia, Pennsylvania.— Assistant Editor, E. N. Gathebcoal, 701 South Wood St., Chicago, Illinois. Physiology. B. M. Dugqar, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W. Dodge, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island. Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, F. M. Schertz, U.S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Wash- ington, D. C. Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Gbeenman, Mis- souri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, E. B. Patson, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1921 J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York H. O. BUCKMAN R. HOSMEP W. H. Chandler L. Knudson A. J. Eames E. G. Montoomert R. A. Emerson D. Reddick H. M. FrrzPATBiCK L. W. Sharp E. M. WlEGAND A New Journal PHYSIOLOGICAL REVIEWS Will be published by the American Physiological Society Under the editorial direction of' W. H. HOWELL Baltimore REID HUNT Boston F. S. LEE New York J. J. R. MACLEOD Toronto LAFAYETTE B. MENDEL New Haven H. GIDEON WELLS Chicago D. R. HOOKER, Managing Editor, Baltimore One volume will be published a year and will appear quarterly in four parts Subscription ISc'cq Foreien^^^^l ^^^ volume of 500 pages, net, postpaid PURPOSES The main purpose of the Physiological Reviews is to furnish a means whereby those interested in the physiological sciences may keep in touch with contemporary research. The literature, as every worker knows, is so extensive and scattered that even the speciaHst may fail to maintain contact with the advance along different hnes of his subject. The obvious method of meeting such a situation is to provide articles from time to time in which the more recent literature is compared and summarized. The abstract journals render valuable assistance by condensing and classifying the hter- ature of individual papers, but their function does not extend to a comparative analysis of results and methods. Pubhcations such as the Ergebnisse der Physiologie, the Harvey Lectures, etc., that attempt this latter task, have been so helpful as to encourage the behef that a further enlargement of such agencies will be welcomed by all workers. It is proposed, therefore, to estabhsh a journal in which there will be pubhshed a series of short but com- prehensive articles dealing with the recent literature in Physiology, using this term in a broad sense to include Bio-chemistry, Bio-physics, Experi- mental Pharmacology and Experimental Pathology. An adequate journal of this nature should appeal strongly to: 1. Teachers in the underlying medical sciences, because it will enable them to correlate their teaching with research in their own or neighboring subjects. 2. Clinicians who in their multitudinous duties find it well nigh unpos- sible to consult original sources. In the teaching clinic and in medical practice the scientific man will wish to have available critical surveys of modern experimental research as a guide and stimulus to his work. 3. Laboratory workers who require inventories of the results of science from time to time, which may serve as stepping stones to new investi- gations. CHARACTER The Editorial Board will select subjects and assign them to authors. This procedure will insure a balanced treatment directed to topics which are of special import at the tune. The articles will contain complete bibho- graphical Usts and will be as short as the material under treatment will allow. Thus it is estimated that the first volume will contain twenty articles averaging twenty-five pages each. The character and scope of these articles may be judged by the contents of Volume I. CONTRIBUTIONS TO PHYSIOLOGICAL REVIEWS Volume I, 1921 Carl J. Wiggers J. A. E. Eyster AND W. J. Meek H. Gideon Wells Charles Sheard Donald D. Van Slyke Joseph Erlanger J. J. R. Macleod Donald R. Hooker Henry G. Barbour Gilbert Horrax P. A. Levene H. D. Dakin E. G. Martin Samuel Goldschmidt A. J. Carlson S. Walter Ranson Graham Lusk Albert P. Mathews H. C. Sherman Edward C. Schneider JANUARY The Regulation of the Puknonary Circulation The Origin and Propagation of the Cardiac Impulse The Anaphylactic Reaction Photo-Electric Currents in the Eye The Carbon Dioxide Carrier of the Blood APRIL Blood Volume and its Regulation The Sugar of the Blood ' The Circulation in the Capillaries and Veins The Heat Regulating Mechanism of the Body Contributions of War Surgery to the Physiology of the (Central) Nervous System JULY Structure and Significance of the Phosphatids Physiological Oxidations Tests for Muscular Efficiency Intestinal Absorption Gastric Secretion in Health and Disease OCTOBER The Afferent Paths for the Visceral Reflexes The Physiological Effects of Undernutrition Adsorption in Physiological Processes The Vitamines Physiological Effects of Altitude 228 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1536. Bkeakwell, E. Native and introduced grasses at Mount George, Manning River. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:399-400. 1 fig. 1920.— The author reports on trials of native and introduced grasses. Coolah grass (Panicum prolutum) was especially drought resistant. It jaelded about 8 tons dry fodder per acre. Native Australian millet {Panicum decompositum) was nearly as good as Coolah grass. Phalaris bulbosa proved the best winter grass, producing excellent feed through the cold months. — L. R. Waldron. 1537. Breakwell, E. Popular description of grasses. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 789-792. 2 fig. 1920. — Deals with 5 species of Sporobolus — S. indicus, S. diander, S. vir- ginicus, S. Lmdleyi, and *S. aciinocladus, all but S. virginicus being figured. These grasses are not economically important, either because of unpalatability or scarcity. None is cultivated. — L. R. Waldron. 1538. Burt, B. C., and Nizamuddin Haider. Cawnpore-American cotton: An account of experiments in its improvement by pure line selection and of field trials. 1913-1917. Agric. Res. Inst. Pusa, Bull. 88. 31 p., 10 pi. 1919. — Isolation of pure races was started in 1912. Plants were classified according to branching habit, hairiness of leaf, color of stamens, ginning percentage, length and fineness of lint, shape and size of boll, leaf shape, stem and foliage color. In later work the character of the root system was found to be an important factor. Attention was also given to the length of vegetative period prior to flowering, length of internodes, and tlie characteristics of secondary fruiting branches. In 1916 the number of selections had been reduced to 14, and these were divided into five groups according to the dates of maturity. Field tests were made and practical commercial valuations were secured on the ginned cotton during the seasons of 1915-1918 inclusive. The results indicate that selected strains of Cawn- pore-American Cotton will yield as much as the desi cotton commonly grown and that it will bring a much better price, under proper marketing conditions. The Cawnpore-American Cotton must be sown early, with irrigation; desi cotton is best grown under similar conditions. The methods of sowing and culture are somewhat different for Cawnpore-American than for the desi cotton. — N. J. Giddings. 1539. Calvino, Mario. Quinientas toneladas de forraje fresco por hectarea mediante la Yerbe Elefanto de Rhodesia. [Five hundred tons of fresh forage per hectare by means of the elephant grass of Rhodesia.] Rev. Agric. Com. y Trab. 3:172-183. 14 fig. 1920.— The Napier or elepliant grass {Pennisetum purpureum Schum.) was introduced into Cuba by the author' in 1918. Its history and introduction into various countries is given. It may be propagated in various ways but most easily by cuttings. Best crops were secured by cutting at intervals of about forty days. Crops of about 60 tons (metric) per hectare were secured. Analyses showing the food value and the mineral constituents are given. The analyses of the fresh grass show the water content to be 24.5-38.2 per cent. — F. M. Blodgett. 1540. Clouston, D., and F. J. Plymen. Principal fodders in the central provinces and Berar, including the small bamboo (Dendrocalamus strictus). Agric. Jour. India 15: 380-:385. 1920. — Egyptian clover (Trifolium alexandrinum) and the small bamboo (Dendrocalamus strictus) show promise for adoption on a large scale. D. strictus is especially valuable for light soils which cannot be irrigated. The yield (20 tons per acre) is large and the leaves contain four times as much protein as the common grasses while the proportion of indigestible fiber is greater in grasses. The seed may be used as feed and the mature culms serve many practical purposes. — F. M. Schertz. 1541. CocKERELL, T. D. A. Sugar-beet seed. Nature 104: 661. 1920.— Prior to 1909 all sugar-beet seed used in the U. S. A. was imported from Europe. The first attempt to grow seed in the U. S. A. was made in Montana in 1909 by Mr. Hans Mendleson, who continued his experiments on a small scale. When the supply of foreign seed was cut off by the war the industry had developed to such an extent that the United States was able to produce 5,211,000 pounds of seed in 1916 and 5,546,000 pounds in 1917. — 0. A. Stevens. No. 3, April, 1921] AGRONOMY 229 1542. CoLEBATCH, W. J. Roseworth Agricultural College harvest report 1919-1920. Jour. Dept. Agric. South Australia 23:059-671, 738-753. 1920. — A report giving yields of grain crops, and results of variety tests of oats, wheat and barley grown under different methods of cultivation and with varying amounts of fertilizers. The data, in most cases arranged in tabular form, compare yield and rainfall in 1919 with those of a series of years. — Anthony Berg. 1543. Ehrenberg, Paul. Versuch eines Beweises fiir die Anwendbarkeit der Wahr- scheinlichkeitsrechnung bei Feldversuchen (zweiter Aufsatz). [Test of the applicability of the probable error calculation in field trials.] Landw. Versuchssta. 95: 157-294. 1920.— Pre- sents data and further substantiates the value of the Gauss formula for calculating the prob- able error in determining the results of field trials. — A. T. Wiancko. 1544. FuRBY, E. B. Top-dressing lucerne with superphosphate. Field experiments at Yanco. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:699-700. 1920. — Financial net gains of about S36 and $22 per acre resulted from the use of respectively 2 cwt. and 1 cwt. of superphosphate applied in the spring (September). One cwt. of superphosphate applied in the fall showed scarcely any gain, while 2 cwt. gave a profit of about $18. Five check plots were cultivated but not manured. Two additional plots were neither cultivated nor manured. Eleven irrigations were made during the experiment. — L. R. Waldron. 1545. Gerlach. Die Entbitterung und Verwertung der Lupinen. [Removing the bitter principle and utilizing lupines.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35:619-620. 1920. — The author reviews some of the methods used to refnove the bitter principle from lupine seed. He points out that the high cost of protein in Germany at this time may warrant the expense involved in utilizing the large amounts of protein in lupine seed for cattle feed and even as human food. — A. J. Pieters. 1546. Hammond, J. W. Green forage crops and corn for fattening Iambs. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 340. 45-99. 1920. — The first two experiments were designed to compare per- manent bluegrass pasture with rape pasture or with a succession of the three annual cropS — rye, clover, and rape; to secure data on the economy of feeding corn on pasture; and to com- pare the economy of raising lambs in pasture and in dry lot. The third experiment was intended to yield further data on the problems studied in the first two and in addition to compare a combination of rape and bluegrass pastures with either of the two pastures used alone, and to compare Shropshire X Merino with Merino lambs with respect to rate and economy of gains. The fourth experiment was designed to secure data regarding the econ- omy of feeding a full feed and a half feed of corn to lambs on rape pasture and to compare Shropshire and Shropshire X Merino lambs with respect to rate, economy, and character of gains produced on rape pasture. — R. C. Thomas. 1547. Harris, E. Grading New South Wales wheats. The proposed standards. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 771-772. 1920.— The three classes are: (1) Australian Hard Red, (2) Australian Hard White, and (3) Australian White. Each class has five grades as follows: Premium Al, Premium B, and Nos. 1, 2, and 3. Respective minimum weights are: 65, 63, 60, 58, and 56 pounds per bushel; maximum moisture content ranges from 12.5 to 13.5 per cent and maximum percentage of damaged kernels from 2 to 7 per cent. Most of the Austra- lian export wheat would come under No. 1 Australian White. — L. R. Waldron. 1548. Harris, Frank S. The agronomist's part in the world's food supply. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12: 217-225. 1920.— Presidential address.— i^. M. Schertz. 1549. Heinrich, M. Aufgaben und Ziele der Samenkontrolle. [Problems and aims of seed-control.] Jahresber. Ver. Angew. Bot. 16: 116-123. 1918. 1550. Heinrich, M. Beitrage iiber die Keimung bespelzter und nackter Timothyfrxichte. [Contributions regarding the germination of unhuUed and naked timothy seeds.] Landw. 230 AGRONOMY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, Versuchssta. 93:258-276. 1919. — Germination tests of naked and covered, or beglumed, timothy seeds taken at random from the same samples showed that the former had a lower percentage germination than the latter, although the naked seeds are generally the largest and ripest. The difference seems to be due to the greater sensitiveness of naked seeds to unfavor- able seed bed conditions. The naked seeds were more liable to mold. Exposure of the germinating seeds to light lessened the rate of germination of both kinds, but the final result was not appreciably affected in either case. — A. T. Wiancko. 1551. Howe, H. E. The search for cereals. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1:553-554. 1920.— A brief account of the collecting of cereals from foreign countries for the purpose of introduc- ing new strains and varieties into North America. — Chas. H. Otis. 1552. HtTTCHESON, T. B., AND T. K. Wolfe. The effect of fertilizers on the germination of seeds. Virginia Agric. Exp. Sta. Ann. Rept. 1918-1919:33-37. 1920.— The experimental work consisted of tests in small flats on two different types of soils under greenhouse condi- tions. The injurious effect of fertilizers on germination varies with the kind of seed, the soil type, and the method of application. With few exceptions materials applied in the row in direct contact with the seed were more injurious than when applied broadcast and mixed with the soil before seeding. — F. D. Fromme. 1553. Jex, Wallace. Sugar and sugar products. South African Jour. Indust. 3 : 705-716. 1920. — The early history and development of the sugar industry in Natal is outlined, and an account given of the cultural methods and manufacturing processes employed. — E. M. Doidge. 1554. Johnson, E. C. Twenty-ninth annual report. Washington [State] Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 155. S7 p. 1920. — Contains brief summary reports of experimental work by the Divi- sion Heads, among which are the following : The value of pea straw as a roughage for lambs, for wintering pregnant ewes, and for ewes suckling lambs; forage crops for pork production; a comparison of different inoculating cultures and factors that control the infection of legumes by bacteria; seed analysis; spraying for weeds; influence of cultivation of soil on nitrogen composition of wheat; a comparison of corn, artichoke, and sunflower silage as feeds for milk production; sweet clover for pasture for dairy cows; "sour milk" silage; field crop varieties; value of a nurse crop; cultivation and rate of seeding wheat; inheritance of varietal charac- ters; crop rotations; orchard pollination; Mendel's law in blackberry and raspberry hybrids; apple rosette; orchard cover crops; renovation of prune orchards; apple storage; fruit evapora- tion and by-products; wheat smut, the rhizoctonia disease, plant disease survey; oat smut; the nitrogen supply in semi-arid soils; and soil moisture studies. — F. D. Heald. 1555. Kelly, H. J. Planting Sudan grass. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:719-720. 1 fig. 1920. — Brief notes are given on general culture, time of planting, and quantity of seed to sow. — L. R. Waldron. 1556. Kerle, W. D. Farmers' experiment plots. Potato experiments, 1919-20. Upper north coast district. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 781-788. 2 fig. 1920.— Variety and manurial experiments were conducted in conjunction with farmers. The outstanding feature of the experiments was the greatly increased yields brought about by the use of phosphorus, the maximum net increase in market value of crop from five stations averaging over $200 per acre. — L. R. Waldron. 1557. Lehkum, p. Ueber ein neues Verfahren zum Abkeimen der Kartoffeln. [A new process for removing sprouts from potatoes.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 587. 1920. — Brief note referring to work done by Schribaux (citation not given). The process consists in immersing sprouting potatoes in weak sulphuric acid. — A. J. Pieters. 1558. Lindner, P. Unser Getreide als Fettquelle und die Bedeutung der Aleuronschicht fiir das Getreidekorn. [Our cereals as a source of fats and the significance of the aleurone No. 3, April, 1921] AGRONOMY 231 layer to the seed.] Jahresbcr. Ver. Angew. Bot. 16: 29-31. 1918. — There is nine times as much fat in the aleurone layer as in the germ; consequently about a million tons of fat from the grain harvest go into the bran each year. This was formerly fed to cattle but during the war was used in bread. Although cattle digest this fat, it passes unchanged through the human alimentary tract. If, however, the cell walls of the aleurone layer are first dissolved by acid, the fat becomes digestible for man. — This fat is deposited in the aleurone layer and hulls of the grain to prevent water from penetrating to the interior. — P. J. Anderson. 1559. McKay, M. B. Uniform rules and regulations for seed potato certification in the Pacific Coast states. Monthly Bull. California State Commission Hort. 8: 288-291. 1919. 1560. Maiden, J. H. Chats about the prickly pear. No. 6. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 645-648. 1920. — Summarizes certain bulletins dealing with prickly pear as stock food in the U. S. A.—L. R. Waldron. 1561. Makix, R. N. Farmers' experiment plots. Maize experiments, 1919-20. South coast district. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:795-797. 1920. — Variety and manurial experiments were conducted in conjunction with farmers. Several varieties of maize from the U. S. A. gave promising results. — L. R. Waldron. 1562. Makix, R. N. Lucerne on the coast. The south coast. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 384-385. 1920.— In selecting a site for lucerne, the nature of the subsoil should be determined to the depth of four feet. In preparing for alfalfa care should be taken to destroy the weeds, as many lucerne failures are due to foul land. Deep plowing and too fine a tilth are inadvisable as the soil has a tendency to puddle and choke the seedlings. Sowings should be made from March to June at the rate of 12 to 16 pounds per acre. When plants have devel- oped the third pair of leaves it should be possible to control weeds and conserve moisture by harrowing without damaging the lucerne. A top dressing of 2 cwt. superphosphate once a year and harrowing after each cutting are recommended. — L. R. Waldron. 1563. Meek, B. C. Trials with peas. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 397-398. 1920. — In a test with varieties of garden peas Yorkshire Hero outyielded all others. Local seed (variety not stated) outyielded introduced seed. Superphosphate was the best fertilizer. — L. R. Waldron. 1564. Mexdes, F. C. Correa. Relatorio de alguns servigos mais importantes a cargo da direccao dos servifos agricolas e florestais. [Report of director of agricultural and forestry service.] Bol. Agric. Nova Goa [Portuguese East India] 1 : 97-109. 1919.— A report of the more important undertakings of the Department of Agriculture and Forestry of Portuguese East India for the period Jan.-Apr., 1919.— J. A. Stevenson. 1565. Munter, F. Pflanzenanalyse und Diingung. [Plant analysis and fertilizers.] Jour. Landw. 68:207-224. 1920.— The results of experiments on Lauchstedt loessal soil. Nitrogen and phosphoric acid fertilizers lowered the sulphuric acid content of barley straw, while lime and magnesia were not materially influenced by nitrogen, potassium, or phos- phoric acid fertilizers. Meteorological conditions of the single year exert so great an influ- ence on the growth of barley that the fertilizer requirement of the soil cannot be deduced with certainty from the percentage of nitrogen, potassium, and phosphoric acid. The nitro- gen content of barley straw was decreased slightly by potassium, more strongly by phos- phoric acid. A straw harvest from 1 hectare containing less than 9 kgm. nitrogen indicates a lack of nitrogen in the soil. The barley plant is not suitable for such experimentation; the proportions of nitrogen to potassium or phosphoric acid give no reliable indication as to the fertilizer status of a soil. Sugar beets are better for this purpose. The production of beet roots in a good growing year was influenced by nitrogen, under poor conditions by phosphoric acid, less by potassium. Beet leaf production depends largely on the nitrogenous fertilizers. The lime and magnesia content of the sugar beet roots was affected only moderately by the 232 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, use of fertilizer. Potassium fertilizer, however, increased, while phosphoric acid decreased, the lime and magnesia content in the tops. Nitrogen gave variable results. Less than 50 kgm. nitrogen in tops, or 100 kgm. in roots, from 1 hectare denotes lack of nitrogen. Since potassium influences production less, a definite amount taken up by the plant per hectare can- not be given. Less than 14 kgm. phosphoric acid in the roots per hectare indicates a lack of this nutrient, but for the leaves no definite figure is evident. Meteorological conditions so influence the growth of beets that the nitrogen and potassium content does not lead to defi- nite conclusions concerning fertilizer requirements of the soil. For P2O5 content the limit of 0.18 per cent in the roots and 0.40 per cent in the leaves can be set. For proof of the fer- tilizer needs of a soil 2 different plots should be laid out, one fertilized with nitrogen, the other with phosphoric acid and potassium. Conclusions may be drawn according to the following rule: The soil is lacking in potash when in the tops the percentage of potash is less than that of nitrogen. Phosphoric acid is lacking when the ratio N : P2O5 from the nitrogen plot is greater than 5. Nitrogen is lacking when from the P2OS + K2O plot the ratio is less than 100:35. The following conclusions were even more reliable: Potash is lacking when it is less than 60 per cent of the nitrogen from the nitrogen-fertilized plot, and phosphoric acid is lacking when PjOs is less than 40 per cent of the nitrogen.— C. E. Leighty. 1566. Nielsen, H. B. Potato certification in California. Monthly Bull. California State Commission Hort. 8: 285-287. 1919. 1567. Pfeipfer, T. Die Bedeutung der sogenannten Schutzstreifen bei Feldversuchen und die Wahrscheinlichkeitsrechnung. [The significance of the so-called protection strips in field trials and the probability calculation.] Fiihlings Landw. Zeitg. 68: 412-419. 1919.— A criticism of the conclusions of Schneidewind and his associates regarding the use of un- planted and untreated strips between test plots in field experiments, in which it is stated that plots with unplanted division strips show too high yields, that in consequence the effects of manurial treatments are minimized and that by keeping the fertilizer distribution within the outside drill rows of the plot there would be no noticeable effect upon neighboring plots and interspaces might better be omitted. It is shown that plants draw nourishment from the unplanted division strips, that adjoining and differently treated plots do affect each other, and that in field trials involving comparisons of different treatments division spaces should be used but that these should not be left unplanted. It is also held that the probable error calculation can be used to good advantage and should always be employed.— A. T. Wiancko. 1568. Pitt, J. M. Lucerne on the coast. The central coastal districts. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 381-384. 1920.— It is claimed that the alluvial soils bordering the rivers in this region are admirably suited to alfalfa. The Hunter River has long been famed for its enormous output of hay and seed of the Hunter River strain. Formerly, stands 12-20 years old were not uncommon, but now the profitable life averages from 4 to 7 years. This is attrib- uted to various causes, such as inferior seed, decrease of humus, sowing at wrong season, poor preparation, cutting too often and grazing too closely. Cultural instructions are given in detail. Autumn seeding at the rate of 15-20 pounds per acre has proved most satisfactory. Instructions are also given on cutting, curing, and grazing. Top dressing with 2 cwt. of superphosphate applied in the early spring and harrowed in has proved very beneficial.— L. R. Waldron. 1569. Rao, U. Vittal. Habit in sugar canes. Agric. Jour. India 15:418-424. 1920.— A report on the straightness of sugar canes as revealed by pot experiments, station records, and as influenced by suitable crossing. Straight canes are preferred by factories and by cultivators, partly because lodged canes contain less cane sugar and more glucose.—/^. M. Schertz. 1570. Reynolds, B. A. Sterilize the fencerow and reduce next year's losses. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. California 8: 595-599. 1919. No. 3, April, 1921] AGRONOMY 233" 1571. Robinson, W. L. The use of forage crops in the fattening of pigs. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 342. 169-222. 1920. — Reports on experiments conducted for the purpose of secur- ing more information regarding the influence of the various kinds of forage, of the methods of feeding, and of the character and amount of the concentrates on the economy of production. Comparisons were made of full and limited rations of concentrates with and without a nitro- genous supplement, of self and hand feeding, and of different forage crops and forage crop combinations. The work is presented with the view of enabling the farmer to determine with some degree of accuracy the methods which under given conditions will bring returns approaching the maximum from both the pigs and the land used in growing the forage. — R. C. Thomas. 1572. RowNEY, L. F. Trials of grasses and fodder plants. Glen Innes ejtperiment farm. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 799-803. 1920. — The following grasses were under trial: Andropogon intermedius (native), A. affinis (native), Bromus japonicus, Festuca arundinacea, Schedonorus Hookeriamis (native), Danthonia semiannularis (native), Dactylis glomerata, Phalaris bulbosa, Lolium perenne, Derjeuxia coarctata, Avena elatior [Arrhenatherum elatiiis], and Phleum pratense. Best results seemed to be obtained from Bromus, Phalaris, Lolium, and Avena. — Among several alfalfas (lucernes), "Montana" seemed to give best results. Alfalfa seed does not set at this station. — Satisfactory results were secured from Melilotus alba, Trifolium pratense perenne and Poterium sanguisorba. — L. R. Waldron. 1573. RuMKER, K. v., XJND R. Leidner. Die Sortenanbauversuche im Jahre 1918. [Va- riety tests in 1918.] Landw. Jahrb. 35: 327-340. 1919. — A report on variety tests with oats, barley, wheat, soy beans, bush beans, and millet. — A. J. Pieters. 1574. Saillard, Emile. La betterave a sucre pendant la guerre. [Sugar beets during the war.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1460-1461. 1920.— A study of analyses of sugar beets as affected by meteorological and other conditions in France during 20 years. The amount of sugar per acre, as shown by analyses during October of each year, increased until in 1919 it reached 17.57 per cent. The difference is held to be due to the scarcity of fertilizers, especially nitrogenous, during the war. — C. H. Farr. 1575. Schmidt, H. Anforderungen der Landwirtschaft an die Botanik. [Demands of agriculture on botany.] Jahresber. Ver. Angew. Bot. 16: 31-37. 1918. 1576. ScHNEiDEwiND, W. Parzellengroszen-Versuche. Untersuchungen iiber die Brauch- barkeit verschieden grosser und verschieden angelegter Parzellen bei Diingungsversuchen und die Wahrscheinlichkeitsrechnung. [Plot experiments. Investigations concerning the useful- ness of plots of varying size and laid out in various ways in fertilizer experiments and the calcu- lation of probabilities.] Arbeit. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 296. 6-51. 1919.— The author reports the results of five years' work, undertaken to determine the relative accuracy of results with plots varying in size from 9 and 100 square meters to 200 square meters. Of the 9 square meter plots there were two series, one with uncultivated strips 80 cm. wide surrounding each plot, the other with plots adjoining one another. The fertilizers used were sodium nitrate and calcium-ammonium nitrate. The author concludes: (1) Plots with uncultivated intervening spaces are unreliable, the jaelds being too high and the effect of the fertilizers too little noticeable. (2) The plots when adjoining, irrespective of size, gave corresponding yields. (3) When the fertilizer is so distributed as to be placed within the outer three drill rows, its effect is not apparent in the adjoining plot. (4) The differences between minimum and maximum yields was greatest in the 9 square meter plots, due largely, however, to the fact that the number of small plots was larger than that of the large plots. (5) The proba- bility calculations showed that where considerable yield differences occurred these were a true measure of the effect of the fertilizer. Where small increases are secured the results are uncertain. — A. J. Pieters. 234 AGRONOMY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 1577. Shepherd, A. N. Fanners' experiment plots. Lucerne top-dressing trials, 1919-20. Murrumbidgee irrigation areas. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 609-616. 3 fig. 1920. — Results indicate that lucerne responds profitably to increased care in culture. Profits resulted from using superphosphate as a top dressing. — L. R. Waldron. 1578. Slate, William L. Jr., and Benjamin A. Brown. Fertilizers for potatoes. Storrs [Connecticut] Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 106. 39-48. 1920.— During 4 years (1915-1918) varying amounts of potash, phosphoric acid, and ammonia have been applied to potatoes. As much as 80 pounds of potash per acre has given profitable increases in yield. Manuring the land the previous year has not reduced the need of potash. It appears that 10O-120 pounds of phos- phoric acid per acre are sufficient. Fields not recently manured need 100 pounds of ammonia per acre; this may be reduced where manure has been used recently. — Henry Dorsey. 1579. Spafford, W. J. Agricultural experiments — linseed for seed. Jour. Dept. Agric. South Australia 23 : 754-756. 1920. 1580. Spafford, W. J. Experimental farms harvest reports, Turretfield. Jour. Dept. Agric. South Australia 23 : 13-29. 1920. — A report of the 1919 harvest with statistical data comparing the grain and forage crops with the rainfall during a series of years. The results of wheat varieties in fertilizer, rotation, and cultural tests are similarly compared. — Anthony Berg. 1581. Spafford, W. J., and E. A, Bristow. Experimental farm harvest reports, Boob- orowie. Jour. Dept. Agric. South Australia 23 : 907-914, 1020-1030. 1920.— Yield report of grain crops from variety, cultural, and fertilizer experimental tests. The data in most cases are given in statistical form, comparing yields and the rainfall through a series of years. — Anthony Berg. 1582. Spafford, W. J. Agricultural experiments. — Report for year 1919-20. Jour. Dept. Agric. South Australia 23 : 593-602. 1920. — The results of experiments conducted at Ham- mond, Butler, Wilkawatt, and Yelanna, and dealing with cultivation methods relating to dry farming, including wheat variety trials, rotation, and fertilizer tests. — Anthony Berg. 1583. Spragg, Frank A. The spread of Rosen rye. Jour. Heredity 11: 42-44. 1 fig. 1920. — A brief account of the spread of Rosen rye, as shown by the number of bushels from Michigan sold to the various states for seed. — J. H. Beaumont. 1584. Taylor, E. P. Uniformity of rules and regulations of potato seed certification. Monthly Bull. California State Commission Hort. 8: 280-285. 1919. 1585. Thoms, Hermann. Uber Lupinenverwertung. [Utilization of lupines.] Jahresber. Ver. Angew. Bot. 16:33-60. 1918. 1586. Thorne, C. E. Palatable sirup from sugar beets. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5:294. 1920. 1587. Trowbridge, P. F. Report of Langdon Substation, 1914 to 1919. North Dakota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 134. 31 p., 8 fig. 1920. — The data presented were secured by E. D. Stewart, superintendent of the substation until his death. Wheat after corn and wheat after clean fallow yielded the same. The corn crop was not generally successful. — In fertilizer studies, barnyard manure alone and with minerals increased wheat yields from 2.4 to 4.6 bushels per acre over the check yield of 20.5. Green manure (field peas) used with minerals was less successful. — Yields of grain were larger upon the deeply plowed plats. — Sunflowers outyielded maize 710 pounds per acre, or 27 per cent, in air-dry material. Slender wheat- grass, Agropyron tenerum, was found valuable for alkali land. — Upon the average, for 11 years, Kubanka durum has outyielded all other varieties of wheat. Yields of varieties of oats, barley, and potatoes are given. — L. R. Waldron. No. 3, April, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 235 1588. Wellington, R. The uselessness of hill selection under conditions where rapid degeneration or "running out" is prevalent. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 16: 175-179 (1919) 1920. — Work over a series of years on hill selection of potatoes showed conclusively that the prac- tise is useless in fields where degeneracy is prevalent. Degeneracy occurred in the progeny of both high and low yielding hills. Low yielding hills often produced better than high yielding ones. In 1916, 17 out of 23 varieties gave an increased yield in favor of the low yielding hills. Transfer of degenerating strains for a year to localities farther north seems to increase the vigor of the strain. — H. A. Jones. BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, AND HISTORY Neil E. Stevens, Editor 1589. Adams, Henry. The degradation of the democratic dogma. 317 p. The Macmillan Co. : New York, 1919. — The introduction by Brooks Adams details some of the activities of John Quincy Adams in behalf of science. Among these are some of botanical interest, not- ably his project (p. 53) to preserve a forest of live-oak near Pensacola in order that the species might be studied. — Neil E. Stevens. 1590. Anonymous. Cotton growing. Nature 105:793. 1920.— A note on the "future organization" of the Empire Cotton Growing Committee of the Board of Trade, which pro- poses to support both research and the training of men in pure science, in which it hopes to secure the co-operation of all the plant-using industries. — 0. A. Stevens. 1591. Anonymous. International Catalog of Scientific Literature. M. Botany. Four- teenth annual issue. 753 p. London, 1919. — Literature received between September, 1914, and May, 1910. "The primarj^ divisions adopted correspond to the recognized branches of the science of botany." "It is considered essential that all work on fossil plants should appear in the botany scheme." The primary divisions in the schedule of classification for Botany are: general; morphology, embryology and cytology; physiology; pathology; evolu- tion; taxonomy; geographic distribution. — Author index, 259 pages; subject index, 439 pages. — D. Reddick. 1592. Anonymous. Mary Sophie Young. Bot. Soc. Amer. Misc. Publ. 76. 81-82. 1920. — An appreciation of the life and work of the late Dr. Young of the University of Texas. — J. R. Schramm. 1593. Anonymous. V/illiam Gilson Farlow. Bot. Soc. Amer. Misc. Publ. 76. 79-80. 1920. — An appreciation of the life and work of the late Professor Farlow, of Harvard Uni- versity.— J. R. Schramm. 1594. Britten, J. Some early Cape botanists and collectors. Jour. Linn. Soc. London Bot. 45: 29-51. PI. 4. 1920. — A consideration of the following botanists and collectors of Cape Colony whose work is represented in the Department of Botany of the British Museum: Justus Heurnius; Paul Hermann; Thomas Bartholinus; Henri cus Bernardus Olden- LANDius; John Starrenburgh; John Foxe; Franz Kiggelaer; Monsieur Des Marets; Franz Pehr Oldenburg; Andreas Auge; Francis Masson; Carl Pehr Thunberg; James Niven; William Paterson; Anton Pantaleon Hove; William Roxburgh; James Wiles; James Lind; James Robertson; David Nelson; Robert Brown; Banks; and Solander. A portrait of Masson is included. — A. J. Eames. 1595. Fairchild, D. The dramatic careers of two plantsmen. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. California 8:585-589. 1919.— Frank N. Meyer and Aaron Aaronsohn.— £J. L. Overholser. 1596. Harvey-Gibson, R. J. Outlines of the history of botany. S74 p. A. & C. Black, Ltd.: London, 1919. — A course of lectures for students at the University of Liverpool.— H. L. Shantz. 236 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1597. Jones, L. R. Our journal, Phytopathology. Phytopath. 9:159-164. 1919.— A record of the American Phytopathological Society to the celebration of its tenth anniversary. — J. G. Dickson. 1598. L [acaita] , C. C. [Rev. of: Sargeaunt, John. The trees, shrubs, and plants of Virgil, vii + W p. B. H. Blackwell: Oxford (1920).] Jour. Botany 58: 253-256. 1920. 1599. Laupert. Die Griindung einer Gesellschaft zur Forderung des Zuckerriibenbaues und der Zuckerindustrie in Lettland. [The establishment of an association for encouraging sugarbeet culture and the sugar industry in Lettland.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 603-605. 1920. — A report of the organization of this society presented on behalf of F. Holtz- ERMANN. — A. J. Pieters. 1600. Lyman, G. R. The advisory board of American Plant Pathologists. Phytopath. 9:202-206. 1919. 1601. Merrill, George P. Contributions to a history of American state geological and natural history surveys. U. S. Nation. Mus. Bull. 109. 550 p., 37 pi. 1920.— This work con- tains incidental references to prominent botanists who were associated with the surveys. As these are not mentioned in the index the page numbers are included here following the names: J. C. Arthur 249, E. E. Baldwin 208, W. J. Beal 226, N. L. Britton 319, W. M. Canby 539, J. M. Coulter 81, F. V. Coville 21, M. A. Curtis 370, 374, Chester Dewey 155, Amos Eaton 327, George B. Emerson 155, George L. Goodale 135, Leo Lesquereux 15, 59, 75, 82, 451, Charles Mohr 11, J. S. Newberry 35, 69, 319, 531, C. S. Rafinesque 101, 102, C. S. Sargent 539, John Torrey 329.— Neil E. Stevens. 1602. Ramsbottom, J. James William Helenus Trail. (1851-1919.) Trans. British Mycol. Soc. 6: 297-298. 1920. — Professor Trail was professor of botany at Aberdeen, Scot- land, and published numerous papers on systematic mycology. — W. B. McDougall. 1603. Roberts, Herbert F. The founders of the art of breeding. Jour. Heredity 10: 229-239, 257-270. 1 fig. 1919.— Carl Friederich von Gartner, John Goss, William Herbert, Thomas Andrew Knight, Alexander Seton, and A. F. Wiegmann, Charles Darwin, Wilhelm Olbers Focke, Duchartre, D. A. Godron, Henri Lecoq, Charles Naudin, Augustin Sageret, B. Verlot, Henri de Vilmorin, Max Wichura. [See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 90, 91.]— M. /. Dorsey. 1604. Shear, C. L. First decade of the American Phytopathological Society. Phytopath. 9: 165-170. 1919. — A sketch of the Society containing excerpts from the secretary's minutes, committee reports, and letters. — /. G. Dickson. 1605. Stevens, F. L., L. H. Pammel, and Mel T. Cook. Byron David Halsted. June 7, 1852- August 28, 1918. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7:305-317. Portrait. 1920.— A brief biography of Professor Halsted, to which is appended a list of his publications, 411 in number. — E. W. Sinnott. 1606. TiLDEN, Josephine E. Bibliography of the literature relating to the Pacific Ocean algae and to the freshwater algae of the countries bordering upon the Pacific Ocean. 58 p. (Separately printed) 1920.— A reprint in pamphlet form from Index Algarum Universalis : A universal card index of the marine, freshwater, epiphj^tic, and parasitic algae of the world. A supplement includes special bibliographies relating to fisheries, economic algae, geology, and fertilizer algae; and it is noted that the bibliographies relating to diatomaceous earth and to fossil algae are too large for reprinting. — C. E. Allen. No. 3, April, 1921] BOTANICAL EDUCATION; CYTOLOGY 237 BOTANICAL EDUCATION C. Stuart Gager, Editor Alfred Gundersen, Assistant Editor 1607. Anonymous. Toronto botanic garden. Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Rec. 9: 127. 1920. — News item of plans being developed for the establishment of a botanic garden in Toronto, Canada, by the University of Toronto in cooperation with the municipal authorities and the Provincial Government. — C. S. Gager. 160S. Bower, F. O. Botany of the living plant. 580 p., U7 fig. SIO.OO. Macmillan & Co., Ltd.: London, 1919. — Expansion of course in elementary botany in Glascow University. Elementary and fundamental held as equivalent terms. Plant presented as living, growing, self-nourishing, self adapting creature. Angiosperms 300 pages, seed, cells, tissues, leaf, root, water-relation, nutrition, etc., followed by gymnosperms and lower plants. General conclusion: Sex and heredity, alternation of generations and the land-habit. Appendix: A. Floral construction in angiosperms; B. Vegetable food-stuffs. — A. Gundersen. 1609. Clute, Willard N. Plant names and their meanings. Amer. Bot. 26: 11&-124. 1920. 1610. Gager, C. Stuart. Heredity and evolution in plants, xv + 285 p., 112 fig. P. Blakiston's Son & Co.: Philadelphia, 1920. — In text-book form. Thirteen chapters: life history of fern (2), fundamental principles, heredity, experimental study of heredity, evolu- tion, Darwinism, experimental evolution, the evolution of plants (2), geographical distri- bution, paleobotany. Bibliography. — C. S. Gager. CYTOLOGY Gilbert M. Smith, Editor Geo. S. Bryan, Assistant Editor 1611. Anonymous. Carriers of the germ plasm. Jour. Heredity 10: 422. Fig. 21. 1919. 1612. Guilliermond, A. Sur la structure de la cellule vegetale. [On the structure of the vegetable cell.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1515-1518. 1920.— Cytological methods show that all cells contain mitochondria; while studies on living cells show they are not artifacts; but these studies cannot be expected to contribute much as to their nature. The author applies term chondriosome to plastid forming bodies, while Dangeard considers vacuolar systems chondriosomes. — C. H. Farr. 1613. Hartridge, H. Economical dehydrating and clearing agents. Jour. Physiol. [London] 54i' ^: viii-ix. 1920. — Amyl alcohol used in place of absolute alcohol and clove oil following 95 per cent alcohol and followed by Canada balsam in xylol; also for passing to No. 1 petrol for embedding in paraffin. No. 1 petrol used successfully in place of xylol for paraffin imbedding and dissolving paraffin from mounted sections. — Ernest Shaw Reynolds. 1614. Li cent, E. Sur I'emploi, comme fixateur, des melanges de formol et de composes chromiques. [The use of mixtures of formalin and chromic compounds as fixatives.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1518-1521. 1920.— For the past 15 years the writer has used successfully the following formulae: (1) 1 per cent chromic acid 80 cc. ; commercial formalin 15 cc; glacial acetic acid 5 cc. (2) the same as (1) but using 2 per cent chromic acid. (3) 2 per cent chromic acid 6 cc. ; commercial formalin 30 cc. ; crystallizable acetic acid 5 cc, (4) 2 per cent chromic acid 50 cc. ; commercial formalin 30 cc. ; crystallizable acetic acid a few drops; 10 per cent potassium bichromate 10 cc. ; 10 per cent nickel acetate 10 cc. (5) Same as (4) with the addition of 10 cc. of saturated aqueous solution of mercuric chloride. Formulae 238 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VII, V 1 and 2 are used in young tissues, meristem, and ordinary adult tissue; 3 is used on resistant tissues; and 4 and 5 for mitochondria. The formalin is usually added just before using. Material may be left permanently in the fixative after adding a little water.— C. H. Farr. 1615. Mangenot, G. a propos du chondriome des Vaucheria. [The chondriome of Vaucheria.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1458-1459. 1920.— In living material gran- ules of various sizes are found among the chloroplasts, bodies that reach the size of chloro- plasts and smaller motile bodies consisting of lipoids. In addition there are round grains, of a dead appearance, mingled with short rods (the true mitochondria) that are always larger than the fat bodies. Metachromatic corpuscles may also be distinguished by intra-vital stains.— C. H. Farr. 1616. Mangenot, G. Sur revolution des chromatophores et le chondriome chez les Flori- dees. [The development of the chromatophores and chondriomes of the Florideae.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1595-1598. Fig. 1-11. 1920.— In the Lemaneaceae the rhodo- plasts are elongated, the smaller ones resembling chondrioconts, but containing the pig- ment material. These small rhodoplasts are found in the carpogonium, but after fertiliza- tion they fragment into chondrisomal structures which persist until the formation of the young carpospores, when they enlarge and the pigment reappears in the mature spore. An- other tY9& of chondriosome remains unchanged throughout the life history of the alga.— C. H. Farr. 1617. Sharp, Lester W. Somatic chromosomes in Tradescantia. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 341-354. 2 pi. 1920.— Somatic chromosomes from the root tip of Tradescantia virginiana were studied. The entire cycle of chromatin history is described in detail, beginning with the metaphase. The author is particularly concerned with the time and method of chromosome splitting and with the bearing of the observed facts on the problem of chromosome reduc- tion. During telophase the chromosomes are transformed by irregular vacuolation into alveolar-reticulate structures, and in the resting reticulum the limits of the constituent chro- mosomes may sometimes still be made out. In prophase, the chromosomes separate from one another and each gives rise to a single slender chromatic thread in v/hich the definitive split develops as a new formation. This splitting has no relation to the vacuolation during telo- phase, at which time the chromosomes must be regarded as single. Contrary to the conclu- sions of some previous Vv-orkers, therefore, splitting is a phenomenon of the prophase rather than of the telophase. No evidence has been found that chromosome splitting is a division of smaller chromatic units. Chromosome behavior during somatic telophase does not pro- vide a key to the interpretation of the reduction process.- £/. W. Sinnott. FORESTRY AND FOREST BOTANY Raphael Zon, Editor J. V. HoFMANN, Assistant Editor 1618. [Anonymous.] A. B. J. Australian hardwoods. [Rev. of: Baker, R. T. The hardwoods of Australia and their economics, xvi + 522 p., 1 pi. Technical Education Series No. 23. The Technological Museum: Sydney, 1919.] Nature 105: 802-803. 1920.— Australia has probably the largest variety of hardwoods in the world, but representing less than 500 species. Nearly half of these belong to Eucalyptus, which supplies the bulk of hardwoods for commercial purposes. Author emphasizes use of color in identification. Reviewer has compared some of the plates with specimens and finds the representation good.— 0. A. Stevens. 1619. Anonymous. Awbury Arboretum. Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Rec. 9:23-24. 1920.— Digest of article in Bull. Geog. Soc. Philadelphia (July, 1919).— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 77. No. 3, April, 1921] FORESTRY 239 1620. Anonymous. The British Empire forestry conference. Nature 105: 759-760. 1920. — •Commission organized Nov. 1919, met in London July 7-22. Proposal to organize an Imperial Forestry Bureau to act as a clearing house of information; to establish a research institute to deal with cultural problems and another for utilization problems. Conference held that an institution for training forest officers should be established.— 0. A. Stevens. 1621. Anonymous. Gymnospermic history. (Rev. of: Seward, A. C. Fossil Plants: A text-book for students of botany and geology. Vol. 4, Ginkgoales, Coniferales, Gnetales. xvi + 54S p. University Press: Cambridge, 1919.] Nature 105:97-98. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entries 379, 383. 1622. Anonymous. Oil, sugar and alcohol from an African tree. Sci. Amer. 123: 175. 1920. — 'A brief note concerning the sump tree, Balanites aegyptiae Del. — -Chas. H. Otis. 1623. Anonymous. State to grow nursery trees. Amer. Nurseryman 32^: 120. 1920. — • The Pennsylvania department of forestry plans to grow several thousand young forest trees in nurseries at various state institutions. After the trees are 3 years old they will be planted by private interests and by the department of forestry. — J. H. Gourley. 1624. Berry, E. W. The ancestors of the sequoias. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2:207-208. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 385. 1625. Bertrand, Gabriel. Des conditions qui peuvent modifier I'activite de la chloro- picrine vis-^-vis des plantes superieures. [The conditions which frequently modify the effect of chloropicrine upon the higher plants.] Compt. Rend Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 952-954. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 439. 1626. Burns, George P. Eccentric growth and the formation of redwood in the main stem of conifers. Vermont Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 219. 1-10, PL 4, 10 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 318. 1627. Chaney, Ralph W. The flora of the Eagle Creek formation. Cont. Walker Mus. 2^: 115-182. PL 5-22. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 389. 1628. CoRREA Mendes, F. C. A panheira. [Silk cotton.] Bol. Agric. Nova Goa [Portu- guese East India] 1 : 37-44. 1919. — 'Three species of trees yielding the product known as silk cotton or kapok are briefly described, Bovibax malabaricum white or red silk cotton tree, Cochlospermum gossypium yellow silk cotton tree, and Eriodendron anfractuosum ( Ceiba pen- tandra) silk cotton tree or kapok. A general discussion follows covering seed collection, nur- series, formation of plantations, collecting the cotton, its preparation for market, uses and yields. — John A. Stevenson. 1629. CoRRicA Mendes, F. C. Viveiros. [Nurseries.] Bol. Agric. Nova Goa [Portu- guese East India] 1 : 45-49. 1919. — 'A popular discussion of nurseries for forest tree seedlings, including choice of site, preparation of the soil, cultural directions, and transport of the plants when ready for final planting. — -John A. Stevenson. 1630. Coville, Frederick V. The influence of cold in stimulating the growth of plants. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S.] 6: 434-435. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 434. 1631. CowELL, Arthur Westcott. Awbury Arboretum Address. Bull. Geog. Soc. Philadelphia 17: 98-102. July, 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entries 88, 1619. 1632. Dacy, G. H. How a state may grow a timber supply. Sci. Amer. 123: 199. 3 fig. 1920.— An article dealing with a bill submitted to the state legislature of Massachusetts con- taining a practical and profitable plan for remedying the timber crisis in that state. — Chas. H. Otis. 240 FOEESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VII, 1633. Farwell, Oliver A. Notes on the Michigan Flora, II. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21: 345-371. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 487. 1634. GiBBS, Vic ART. Oaks at Aldenham. Jour. Roy. Hort. Soc. 45: 155-233. Fig. 15-26. 1919. — 'A popular article giving the characteristics and behavior of over 75 species of Quercus, including some hybrids and varieties, brought from Asia, America, and continental Europe. Nearly all the types described are growing on the grounds of the author. It was found that trees from the nursery row grew especially well when planted in leaf mould under- laid with a thick bed of forest leaves. — •/. K. Shaw. 1635. Grabham, Michael. The cluster pine. Nature 105:675-676. 1920.^ Pinus pinaster was probably introduced into Madeira about 1770, and for general purposes is the most serviceable conifer yet seen in Madeira. Seed is sown in November or December v/ith wheat, and yields stakes in 4 or 5 years and firewood in 12 or 15. The species does not sprout from the stump. Reference is made to some other conifers in Madeira. — 0. A. Stevens. 1636. Haines, H. H. Indian species of Carissa. Indian Forester 45 : 375-388. PI. 17-20. 7 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 520. 1637. Hall, Guthbert. On a new species or form of Eucalyptus. Proc. Linnean Soc. New South Wales 43: 747-749. PI. 75. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 521. 1638. Hauch, L. a. Proveniensforsog med Eg. II. [Tests of climatic varieties of oak.] Forst. Forsogsv. Danmark 5: 195-224. PI. 6. 1920.— Twelve experimental plantations have been made with oaks from Denmark, Holland, Russia, Moravia, Hungary, Slavonia, South Austria, and Hanover. These were started in 1909. The results to date show that none of the introduced varieties can be used with absolute certainty and that the oaks of Danish origin are best suited for local use. The oaks from native seed are more robust and vigorous than those of foreign origin, their manner and time of development render them less liable to attack by mildew; the non-native oaks are generally more straight than the Danish varietj^; they develop more summer shoots which are long and slender and with diminutive buds strongly infected with mildew; often they do not ripen at all and are therefore less frost hardy. Leaves of the Danish oaks develop later in the spring and discolor earlier in the fall. — ■/. A. Larsen. 1639. Heinricher, E. Ein Versuch Samen, allenfalls Pflanzen, aus der Kreuzung einer Laubholzmistel mit der Tannenmistel zu gewinnen. [An attempt to secure seeds, perhaps plants, from the cross between the mistletoe of deciduous trees with that of the Coniferae.] Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 37: 392-398. Dec, 1919. 1640. Helms, Johs., og Paul Wegge. Prikleforsog paa Silkeborg og Vemmetofte Skov- distrikter. [Transplanting tests at Silkeborg and Vemmetofte forests.] Forst. Forsogsv. Danmark 5: 225-292. PI. 41. 1920. — Experiments in grading and pruning transplant stock of Abies normandica and Picea excelsa were carried out from 1915 to 1917. The large plants of spruce resist drought better than do the medium-sized ones and these in turn better than the smallest ones. Unpruned stock always gives the largest percentage of usable plants. Dif- ferences in survival of the grades are less marked in favorable than in dry seasons. Light root pruning produces practically no difference in a favorable season, but may result in much loss of pruned stock in a dry summer and may result in poor growth. If the second season is moist the tops develop most, whereas the root growth is proportionately larger in a dry season. Vigorous tamping of the soil after transplanting is useless. The third (smallest) class of seed- lings should be discarded. Stock will stand more pruning on clay soil than on sandy soil, — • on the latter only the long straggling roots should be cut. — J. A. Larsen. 1641. Holten, a. To-aarig opbevaring af agern. [Storing acorns two years.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 5: 191-198. 1920.— A considerable quantity of acorns which had been stored in the fall of 1918 gave 40 per cent germination in 1920. The author concludes No. 3, April, 1921] FORESTRY 241 that in order to preserve the acorns two years it is necessary to use Hauch's method the first winter and to store them in dry sand the following spring and at such depth that the tem- perature will remain fairly constant. — •/. A. Larsen. 1642. Howard, A. O. The empire timber exhibition. Nature 105:691-693. 1920.— Apparently a temporary exhibit (made "at time of British Empire forestry conference")- Exhibits from: British East Africa, most important species being Juniperus procera — used for pencils; the Gold Coast, species of Khaya (African mahoganies), Odum {Chlorophora excelsa), Karkoo {Lofhira procera) ; Nigeria, various sorts; Western Australia, special mention of J.irrah (Eucalyptus diversicolor) and Karri {E. marginala); Canada, especially Douglas fir (Pseudotsuga Douglasii) , Sitka or silver spruce (Picea sitchensis) and basswood (Tilia ameri- cana) ; British Guiana, many of value which are as yet little known ; Indian Empire, especially decorative woods; United Kingdom, about seventy varieties. Several other (British) countries exhibited woods. — 0. A. Stevens. 1643. Jaccard, p. Inversion de I'excentricite des branches produite experimentalement. [The experimental inversion of the eccentricity of branches.] Rev. G6n. Bot. 32:273-281. 2 pL, 1 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 431. 1644. KoiDZTjMi, Geniti. Contributiones ad Floram Asiae Orientalis. [Contributions to the flora of Eastern Asia.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 33 : 217-223. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 527. 1645. Lecomte, Henri. Sur les principairx caracteres de structure des bois. [The prin- cipal characters in wood structure.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris 26:166-171. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 326. 1646. Leiningen-Westerburg (Graf zu). Rauchschaden und einschlagige boden- kundliche Fragen. [Smoke injury and related matters of soil science.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42 : 18-93. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 459. 1647. MiYosHi, Manabu. Uber der Erhaltung einer neuen wildwachsenden hangenden Varietat des Kastanienbaumes als Naturdenkmal. [Concerning a new wild chestnut with weeping branches and its preservation as a natural monument.] Bot. Mag. T6k3'6 33: 185- 188. 1 photo. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 452. 1648. MoREiLLON, M. Influence de I'ombrage sur la valeur des gazons dans les paturages boises. [The influence of shade upon the value of the grasses in wooded pastures.] Jour. Forest. Suisse 70: 131-142. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 39. 1649. MouLTON, R. H. Wood that is stronger than steel. Sci. Amer. 123: 204, 212. 5 fig. 1920. — How thin veneers and water-proof glue have been utilized in building a new industry. — Chas. H. Otis. 1650. Mount, H. A In the wake of the woodsman. Sci. Amer. 123: 122, 137-138. 5 fig. 1920.— Popular.- C/ias.. H. Otis. 1651. Mount, H. A. What about our forests? Sci. Amer. 123: 62, 73-74. S fig. 1920.— Popular.— C/ias. H. Otis. 1652. Mount, H. A. What is wrong with our paper supply? Sci. Amer. 122 : 674, 688. Ifig. 1920. 1653. MuRRiLL, W. A. Where chocolate comes from. Sci. Amer. 122: 626. 5 fig. 1920. — How the cacao bean, Theobroma, is grown and made into cocoa and chocolate. — Chas. H. Otis. 1654. Ness, H. [misprinted as N. Hess]. Experiences in plant hybridization. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 16: 52-60. (1919) 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 228. 242 FORESTRY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, 1655. NiKLAS, H. Die Bedeutung der Geologie fiir die land- und forstwirtschaftliche Bodenkunde. [The significance of the science of geology with relation to agricultural and forest soil science.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 22-35. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 478. 1656. NiKLAS, H. Eine landwirtschaftliche Bodeniibersichtskarte von Bayern. [An agri- cultural soil survey chart for Bavaria.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 62-65. 1920. —See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 479. 1657. OsTENFELD, C. H. Bemaerkniuger om Danske traeers og buskes Systematisk udvidelse. [Systematic distribution of trees and shrubs in Denmark.] Dansk Skovforenings Tidsskr. 5 : 164-182. PI. 5. 1920.— The Danish basswood is not generally a forest tree though it is among the earliest recognized arborescent species in the country. Three species of bass- wood occur;— i. Tilia platyphylla Scop., (T. grandifolia Ehrh.). This species ishereon the northern limit of its distribution. It entered Denmark during the warmer part of the post- glacial period and is now retrogressive both in Denmark and Sweden, ii. Tilia corclata, Mill. {T. ulmifolia Scop.; T. microphylla Vent.; T. parvifolia Ehrh.). This is hardier and more of a forest tree and of more general distribution than the former, iii. Tilia cordata X -platy- phylla. {T. intermedia D. b.; T. europea L.) A hybrid of rapid growth, vigorous but of limited distribution. It is used chiefly for shade trees and for parks.— J. A. Larsen. 1658. Rock, Joseph F. One government forest. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 16: 39-40. 5 pi. February, 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 493. 1659. Rowland, J. T. Pulp wood from Labrador. Sci. Amer. 123 : 156. 3 fig. 1920.— Descriptive of a belt of timberland on the Labrador coast some 400 miles long, which is accessible by navigable waterways to an average depth of about 30 miles. The timber con- sists chiefly of spruce {Picea nigra) and tamarack (Larix americana) from a few inches to two feet in diameter at the butt; it is suitable for pulp wood but of little or no value for any- other purpose. — -Chas. H. Otis. 1660. Sandmo, J. K. Fremtidens Traslag. [Timber trees for the future.] Tiddskr. Skogbruk 28: 154-165. PI. 3. 1920.— Observations on Pinus sylvestris, Pinus gallica, and Picea excelsa in the Pyrenees Mountains lead the author to conclude that P. excelsa is better suited for higher elevations in Norway than Pinus sylvestris, and that P. gallica should be tried out at higher elevations in Norway in an effort to find a species which will advance the natural timberline. — ■/. A. Larsen. 1661. Schuster, Matthaus. Wie soil der Land- und Forstwirt geologische Karten lesen? [How shall the agriculturist and forester read geological charts?] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 10-22. 1 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 480. 1662. Secrest, Edmund. Fire protection for forest lands. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5:281-286. 1920.— Some five or six counties of southeastern Ohio are specially adapted for forest purposes because they cannot be profitably cleared for tillage or pasture. It is estimated that 750,000 acres of this land are menaced by fire and that 300,000 acres of woodland burn over at 1-10 year intervals. Protection against fire is more essential than planting. The general code of Ohio contains no enactments designed to control the evil. Legislation in this respect is urgently needed. Suggestions are made for the protection of timber lands of Ohio against forest fires, making the township the logical unit.— i2. C. Thomas. 1663. Springer, J. F. The twentieth-century lumber-jack. Sci. Amer. 123 : 34, 48-50. 4 fig. 1920.— Describes modern methods and machines.— C/ias. H. Otis. 1664. TiEMANN, Harry D. Phenomena of drying wood. Jour. Franklin Inst. 189: 645- 648. / fig. 1920.— The description of a rcechanical device which illustrates the phenomena of normal shrinkage, the "set" or fixation, and the increase in strength and hardness of wood when it loses moisture. [See Bot. Ahs':,3. t, Entry 47(3.]— Ernest Shaw Reynolds. No. 3, April, 1921] GENETICS 243 16Go. VuiLLEMiN, P. L'amphigonelle et la phylogenie des amentales. [The "amphigonelle" and the phylogeny of the Amentales.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X, 1: 139-200. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 336. 1666. Webster, A. D. The systematic afforestation of Great Britain. Jour. Roy. Hort. See. 45:278-288. 1919.. 1667. Zeller, S. M. Humidity in relation to moisture imbibition by wood and to spore germination on wood. Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 7: 51-74. 1 pi., 5 Jig. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 400. GENETICS George H. Shull, Editor James P. Kelly, Assistant Editor 1668. Agar, W. E. The genetics of a Daphnia hybrid during parthenogenesis. Jour. Genetics 10: 303-330. 3 fig. Dec, 1920.— Attempts to get intergeneric crosses between Daph- nia and Siinocephalus failed. Reciprocal hybrids were obtained between Daphnia obtusa and D. pulex, though the percentage of successful matings between parent species was low. Few of the fertilized eggs of hj^brid or straight matings hatched. From 21 fertile ephippia from cross-matings hatched, only three young were produced, two of which gave offspring. One was lost after three generations, others were carried ten parthenogenetic generations. Hy- brid clones were characterized by (1) e.xcessive production of sexual eggs, (2) excessive pro- duction of males, (3) complete sterility of males, (4) incomplete fertility of parthenogenetic eggs (approximately half failed to develop), and (5) probably normal fertility of sexual eggs (wRen fertilized by males from parent clones). — 'As a character for study of inheritance author used ratio between body length and length of second abdominal process, and ratio between lengths of second and third abdominal processes. The former (mean) ratio for males of D. obtusa of the parent clone was 30.8, for D. pulex 6.2, and for the hybrid clone 10.1. The latter ratio for the females of D. obtusa was 2.17, for D. pulex 2.89, and for the hybrid clone 1.97. The distribution curves of the hybrids while slightly skew (due to environmental fac- tors) were steep curves and showed no tendency toward bi- or multimodality. "There is no evidence of progressive increase in diversity in successive generations, whether measured by the standard deviation or by the extreme range of variation." The conclusion is "that during the parthenogenetic reproduction of these forms, which is not accompanied by reduc- tion of chromosomes, Mendelian segregation does not take place, nor does genetic diversity between parent and offspring normally arise." — A. M. Banta. 1669. Anoxymous. A common misconception concerning human heredity. Jour. Hered- ity 10: 275. 1919. ^Environment produces greater modifications in plant life than in animal, and far greater on simpler animal tissue than on the more complex.— J. H. Beaumont. 1670. Anonymous. Disease proof potatoes. Florists' Exchange 50: 1067. Nov. 20, 1920. —Certain potato varieties, including Irish Cobbler, are immune to wart disease. No variety, however, has appeared that is resistant to late blight {Phytophthora) , although some varie- ties are more resistant than others. — -Richard Wellington. 1671. Anonymous. A factor influencing the sex-ratio. Jour. Heredity 10: 256. June, 1919. — 'Author shows from the results of Helen Dean King, Morgan, Riddle, Moenkhaus, and Papanicolau that the female has more influence in determining the sex-ratio, though a knowledge of the interactions of the germ-cells must be gained before the problem can be solved. — J. H. Beaumont. 1672. Anonymous. Heredity of cancer. Jour. Heredity 10:89. 1919.^Pointing out racial susceptibility and some family susceptibilities to cancer as argument for placing cancer on a heredity basis. — ■/. H. Beaumont. 244 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1673. Anonymous. Inheritance of continuous and discontinuous variations. Jour. Heredity 10: 191. April, 1919. — An article pointing out the conclusions of Dr. F. B. Summer in his paper entitled "Continuous variations and their inheritance in Peromyscus. III." Amer. Nat. 52: 439-454. Aug.-Sept., 1918 (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry, 943), which do not sup- port the views of Bateson and de Vries. Summer's case is parallel to that of Castle's hooded rats. — ■/. H. Beaumont. 1674. Anonymous. Some present aspects of immigration. Jour. Heredity 10: 68-70. Feb., 1919. — 'Fourth report of the committee on immigration of the American Genetic Asso- ciation. The committee finds that the new law, effective May 1, 1917, if properly enforced can become of immense benefit to our future race. The percentage of exclusions due to mental and physical disease has risen due to increased fines, imposed on transportation com- panies, and to better examination. The committee is of the opinion that a considerable restriction or temporary suspension of alien immigration would have highly desirable eugenic results. — J. H. Beaumont. 1675. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Akerman, A. Speltlike bud-sports in common wheat. Hereditas 1: 11&-127. 6 fig. 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1565.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7:320. Nov., 1920. 1676. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Allard, H. A. The Mendelian behavior of aurea character in a cross between two varieties of Nicotiana rustica. Amer. Nat. 53 : 234-238. May- June, 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 217.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:320. Nov., 1920. 1677. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Anthony, Stephen, and Harry V. Harlan. Germination of barley pollen. Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 525-536. 2 pi., 2 fig. Feb. 16, 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 2802; 5, Entries 949, 1449.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 320. Nov., 1920. 1678. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Blakeslee, Albert F., and B. T. Avery, Jr. Mutations in the jimson weed. Jour. Heredity 10: 111-120. Fig. 5-15. Mar., 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 980.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 321. Nov., 1920. 1679. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Broili. Solanum edinense Berthault, ein fiir die Landwirtschaft wertvoUer Kartoffelbastard. (Solanum edinense Berthault, a potato hybrid valuable for agriculture.) Deutsch. Landw. Presse 1920:359-361. 1920.] Zeitschr, Pflan- zenzucht. 7: 321. Nov., 1920. 1680. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Collins, G. N., and J. H. Kempton. Heritable characters of maize. I. Lineate leaves. Jour. Heredity 11:3-6. Jan., 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1737.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 321. Nov., 1920. 1681. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Collins, J. L. Chimeras in corn hybrids. Jour. Heredity 10:2-10. 7 fig. Jan., 1919 (See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 930; 3, Entry 2104.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:321-322. Nov., 1920. 1682. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Dorse y, M. J. A note on the dropping of flowers in the potato. Jour. Heredity 10: 226-228. Fig. 19. May, 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:322. Nov., 1920. 1683. Anonymous. [German rev. of: East, Edward M., and Donald F. Jones. In- breeding and outbreeding. H x 21 cm., 285 p., 46 fig. J. B. Lippincott: Philadelphia, 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 4, Entries 571, 2290, 3460; 5, Entries 1695, 1607.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:341-342. Nov.. 1920. 1684. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Emerson, R. A. Heritable characters of maize. II. Pistillate-flowered maize plants. Jour. Heredity 11:65-76. 8 fig. Feb., 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1745.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 322. Nov., 1920. No. 3, April, 1921] GENETICS 245 1685. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Ernst, A. Uber Parthenogenesis und Apogamie. (On parthenogenesis and apogamy.) Verhandl. Schweiz. Naturf. Ges. 1919: 1-20. 1919. Idem. Uber den Ursprung der apogamen Angiospermen. (On the origin of apogamous angio- sperms.) Vierteljahrsschr. Naturf orsch. Ges. Zurich 1917: 33&-348. 1917.] Zeitschr. Pflan- zenziicht. 7: 323. Nov., 1920. 1686. Anonymous. [German rev. of : Feenstra-Sluiter, C. Waarnemingen en Beschou- wingen over Bloei Bevruchtung en Zaadvorming bij Cinchona Ledgeriana Moens. (Observa- tions and considerations of flowering, fertilization and seed formation in Cinchona Ledgeriana Moens.) Mededeel. Kina-Proefsta. 6. 35 p., ^0 ^^. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 986.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 323-324. Nov., 1920. 1687. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Freeman; G. F. Linked quantitative characters in wheat crosses. Amer. Nat. 51 : 683-689. 1917.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 324. Nov., 1920. 1688. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Freeman, G. F. Producing bread making wheats for v/arm climates. Jour. Heredity 9: 211-226. May- June, 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 221.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7:324. Nov., 1920. 1689. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Hagedoorn-La Brand, A. C., and A. L. Hage- DOORN. Parthenogenesis in higher plants. Teysmannia 27: 643-656. 1 pi. 1917. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 1793.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:325. Nov., 1920. 1690. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Hayes, H. K. Natural crossing in wheat. Jour. Heredity 9: 326-330, 334. Fig. 14-15. Nov., 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 1503.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 325-326. Nov., 1920. 1691. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Heribert-Nilsson, N. Zuwachsgeschwindigkeit der Pollenschlauche und gestorte Mendelzahlen bei Oenothera Lamarckiana. (Decline in pollen-tube growth and deranged Mendelian ratios in Oenothera Lamarckiana.) Plereditas 1:41-67. 1 fig. 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1689.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:327. Nov., 1920. 1692. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Heusser, C. Over de selektie van Hevea Brasilien- sis Miill. (On selection in Hevea brasiliensis.) Arch. Rubbercult. Nederlandsch-Indie 3: 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:326. Nov., 1920. 1693. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Honing, J. A. A sterile dwarf form of Deli tobacco originated as a hybrid. Bull. Deli Proof sta. Medan 10: 24. 4 V^- 1917.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7:326. Nov., 1920. 1694. Anonymous. [German rev. of : Johnson, James. An improved strain of Wisconsin tobacco. Jour. Heredity 10:281-288. Fig. 8-10. June, 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1776.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:327. Nov., 1920. 1695. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Jones, D. F. Selection in self-fertilized lines as the basis for corn improvement. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12:77-100. 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1543.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 328. Nov., 1920. 1696. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Kempton, J. H. Heritable characters of maize. III. Brachytic culms. Jour. Heredity 11: 111-115. 4 fig. Mar., 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1787.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:328. Nov., 1920. 1697. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Koch, L. De beteekenis van de bastaardselectie bij padi en how deze wordt uitgevoerd. (The significance of hybrid selection in rice and how it is conducted.) Teysmannia 1916:502-519. 1916.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:329, Nov., 1920. 246 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1698. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Koch, L. Onderzoekingen betreffende de prak- tijkwaarde van de lijenselectie methode voor verschillende eenjarige landbouwgewassen. (Investigations concerning the practical value of the line selection method for different annual agricultural plants.) Teysmannia 29: 1-36, 95-127, 156-191, 389-423. 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1551.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 329-331. Nov., 1920. 1699. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Koch, L. Uitkomsten van eenige selectieproeven met padi. (Results with some selection experiments with rice.) Korte Ber. Selectie- en Zaadtuin Dept. Landb. Nijv. en Handel [Buitenzorg] 21. 16 p. July, 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 688.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 331. Nov., 1920. 1700. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Koch. L. Uitkomsten van onderzoekingen over enkele kenmerken en eigenschappen van het padigewas. (Results of an investigation of some characteristics of the rice plant.) Korte Ber. Selectie- en Zaadtuinen Dept. Landb. Nijv. en Handel [Buitenzorg] 7. 4 p. Nov., 1917.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:332. Nov., 1920. 1701. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Koch, L. Uitkomsten van eenige selectieproeven met padi. (Results of selection experiments with rice.) Korte Ber. Landbouwvoorlichtings- dienst Dept. Landb. Nijv. en Handel [Buitenzorg] No. 1, 1916. No. 5, Nov., 1917. No. 6, Nov., 1917. No. 8, Aug., 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflanzeiazucht. 7: 332. Nov., 1918. 1702. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Kotowski, Feliks. Zmiennose i Korrelacye w "czystej linii" pszenicy. Tr. vulgare Ostka biala dublanska. (Correlation and variability in a pure line of wheat.) Polnisch: Tygodnika Rolnivzy, Krakau, 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:333-334. Nov., 1920. 1703. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Leighty, Clyde E. Natural wheat-rye hybrids of 1918. Jour. Heredity 11:129-136. 4 fig. Mar., 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1797.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 334. Nov., 1920. 1704. Anonymous. [German rev. of : Leverenz, C. Die meistgebauten landwirtschaft- lichen Pfianzenzuchten Deutschlands mit Ausnahme der Kartoffeln. (The principal agri- cultural plant breeds of Germany, with exception of potatoes.) Landwirtschaftskammer f. d. Provinz Sachsen. 79 p. Hermann Kuhnt: Halle, 1920.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 342-343. Nov., 1920. 1705. Anonymous. Begonia breeding. [Rev. of: Moore, H. J. Mendel's law in the genus Begonia. Canadian Florist 15: 327-328. Nov. 25, 1920.] Florists' Exchange 50: 967. Nov. 6, 1920. 1706. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Nafziger, T. E. How sorghum crosses are made. Jour. Heredity 9:321-322. Nov., 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 39.)] Zeitschr. Pflan- zenzucht. 7: 336. Nov., 1920. 1707. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Nilsson-Ehle, H. tJber Resistenz gegen Hetero- dera Schachti bei gewissen Gerstensorten, ihre Vererbungsweise und Bedeutung fiir die Praxis. (On resistance to Heterodera Schachti in certain varieties of barley, its method of inheritance and signincance for agricultural practise.) Hereditas 1 : 1-34. 4 fig- 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1731.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 336. Nov., 1920. 1708. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Rasmusson, J. Mendelnde Chlorophyll-faktoren bei Allium cepa. (Mendelian chlorophyll factors in Allium cepa.) Hereditas 1:128-134. 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1739.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 337. Nov., 1920. 1709. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Salmon, E. S. On forms of the hop (Humulus lupulus L., and H. americanus, Nutt.) resistant to mildew (Sphaerotheca humuli D. C. Burr.) IV. Ann. Applied Biol. 6:293-310. 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 933.)] Card. Chron. 68:259. Nov. 27, 1920. No. 3, April, 1921] GENETICS 247 1710. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Tedin, Hans. The inheritance of flower colour in Pisum. Heredit as 1: 68-97. 1 colored pi, 2 fig. 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1776.)! Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 337-338. Nov., 1920. 1711. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Tischler, G. Ueber die sogenannten "Erbsub- stanzen" und ihre Lokalisation in der Pflanzenzelle. (On the so-called hereditary substances and their localization in the plant cell.) Biol. Zentralbl. 40: 15-28. 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 939.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 338. Nov., 1920. 1712. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Tjebbes, K., enH. N. Kooiman. Erfelijkheidson- derzoekingen by boonen. III. Albinisme. (Hybridization experiments with beans. III. Albinism.) Genetica 1 : 532-538. 1 pL, S fig. Nov., 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1135.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 338. Nov., 1920. 1713. Anonymous. [German rev. of: von Ubisch, G. Anwendung der Vererbungs- gesetze auf die Kulturpfianzen. (Application of the laws of heredity to cultivated plants.) Naturwassenschaf ten 8 : 293-300. 1920.) Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 339. Nov., 1920. 1714. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Urban, J. Die Grosse der Rvibenknauel und der Riibenertrag. (Size of the beet seed-balls and the yield of beets.) Zeitschr. Zuckerind. Cechoslovak. 44:151-155. 1920.] Zeitschr. Pflanenziicht. 7:339. Nov., 1920. 1715. Anonymous. [German rev. of: White, O. E. Inheritance studies in Pisum. IV. Interrelation of the genetic factors of Pisum. Jour. Agric. Res. 11:167-190. 1917. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 1315.)] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 340. Nov., 1920. 1716. Anonymous. [German rev. of: White, O. E. The present state of knowledge of heredity and variation in peas. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. 56: 487-588. 1917.] Zeitschr. Pflan- zenzucht. 7: 339. Nov., 1920. 1717. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Zaleski, Leopold. Wkwestj'i metod anality- ernych w selekcjii burakow pastewnych. (Contribution to the analytical method in fodder-beet breeding.) Ziemianin Poscn, 1920.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:340. Nov., 1920. 1718. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Zinn, Jacob. On variation in Tartary buckwheat, Fagopyrum tartaricum (L) Gaertn. Genetics 4: 534-586. 11 fig. Nov., 1919.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7:340. Nov., 1920. 1719. Babcock, Ernest B., and Julius L. Collins. Interspecific hybrids in Crepis. I. Crepis capillaris (L) Walh. X Crepis tectorum L. Univ. California Publ. Agric. Sci. 2: 191-204. PI.S6-S8. 1920. — 'Reciprocal crosses were made between Crepis capillaris v^hichhas three pairs of chromosomes and C. tectorum which has four pairs. The Fi's showed dominance of the tectorum cotyledon characters as well as hybrid vigor, but did not survive beyond the cotyledon stage. Cells of the root tips of the Fi seedlings contained seven chromosomes, the sum of the haploid numbers of the two species. Examination of a young Fi seedling which had reached the limit of development revealed an unusual teratological cell condition. This interruption of the functioning systems, which causes the premature death of the plant, is regarded as evidence against the hj^pothesis that C. tectorum originated by non-disjunction of one pair of the capillaris chromosomes. — C. B. Hutchison. 1720. Bannier, J. P. [Dutch rev. of: Correns, C. Die geschlechtliche Tendenz der Keimzellen gemischtgeschlechtiger Pfianzen. (Sex tendency of germ-cells in plants of mixed sex.) Zeitschr. Bot. 12 : 49-60. 2 fig. 1920.] Genetica 2: 451-452. Sept., 1920. 1721. Bannier, J. P. [Dutch rev. of: Coulter, Merle C. Inheritance of aleurone color in maize. Bot. Gaz. 69: 407-425. May, 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1477.)] Genetica 2: 452-453. Sept., 1920. 248 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1722. Bannier, J. P. [Dutch rev. of: Stout, A. B. Intersexes in Plantago lanceolata. Bot. Gaz. 68: 109-133. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1517.)] Genetica 2 : 47&-477. Sept., 1920. 1723. Baumann, E. Beitrage zu der Individual- und Immunitatsziichtung bei der Kar- toffel. [Contributions on the question of individual and immunity breeding of the potato.] Jour. Landw. 68: 145-206. 1 fig. 1920.— These investigations on two commercial varieties of potatoes show the practical possibility of increasing production of the crop by means of pure-line selection, securing in this way strains that are resistant or practically immune to several diseases. Data are given on these points: plant yield; starch content and starch yield, with correlation of these; number, size and starch content of tubers; correlation of number and size of tubers with tuber yield and starch yield; influence of weather conditions and disease on yield; food qualities and cooking values. — C. E. Leighty. 1724. Becker, J. Xenien zwischen Melonen und Gurken. [Xenia between muskmelons and cucumbers.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:362-364. Nov., 1920. 1725. Benders. [Dutch rev. of : Doter, J. J. Th. Proeve van een onderzoek omtrent het familiair en hereditair voorkomen van tuberculose volgens de wetenschappelijkgenealogische methode. (Preliminary researches about the familial and hereditary occurrence of tubercu- losis following scientific genealogical methods.) 214 p., 7 genealogical trees, and 258 quarter tables. Diss. J. B. Wolters U. M. : Groningen, 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1074.)] Ge- netica 2: 453-459. Sept., 1920. 1726. Benders. [Dutch rev. of: Slye, Maud. The relation of inbreeding to tumor production: studies in the incidence and inheritability of spontaneous tumors in mice. Jour. Cancer Res. Jan., 1920.] Genetica 2: 475. Sept., 1920, 1727. Blakeslee, A. F. A dwarf mutation in Portulaca showing vegetative reversions. Genetics 5:419-433. 1 fig. July, 1920.— One compact dwarf plant, found in a sowing of Portulaca grandiflora, was crossed with varieties of the normal form. The normal appeared completely dominant. The dwarfs showed no red in the stems (except in the seedling stage) while the corresponding normals did. Dwarfs selfed gave 2653 dwarf to 14 normal. With this exception, normal and dwarf were proved to act as a simple Mendelian pair, assuming that the dwarfs are less viable. Ten of the selfed dwarfs produced 1294 dwarfs, which were spe- cially examined, and 16 bore some normal branches with long internodes and red stems. These branches were shown to be heterozygous; while the other branches of the plants which bore them proved to be homozygous dwarf. Since these ten parents also bore 7 normals, there was a total mutation from recessive to dominant of 1.8 per cent. Mutations, like the original, from dominant to recessive, could not be visible in homozygous normals, and might readily be overlooked in heterozygotes.— Jo/m Belling. 1728. Bonnier, Gaston. Sur les changements, obtenus experlmentalement, dans les formes vegetales. [On the alterations experimentally obtained in the form of plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1356-1359. 1920. 1729. Broili. Solanum edinense Berthault, ein fiir die Landwirtschaft wertvoller Kart- offelbastard. [Solanum edinense Berthault, a potato hybrid valuable for agriculture.] Deutsch. Landw. Presse 1920: 359-361. 1920. 1730. Brozek, Arthur. Mosaikbastard. Mimulus tigrinoides Hort., hybrida var. Paulina (var. nova). [A mosaic hybrid. Mimulus tigrinoides Hort. hybrida var. Paulina (var. nova).] Lekafske Rozhledy 7: 8-12, 221-232. 1920. 1731. BRtJEL, L. [German rev. of: Roux,W. Uber die bei der Vererbung von Variationen anzunehmenden Vorgange, nebst, einer Einschaltung uber die Hauptarten des Entwicklungs- geschehens. (On the putative processes in the inheritance of variations and an interpolation on the chief kinds of developmental phenomena.) Vortr. Aufsatze u. Entwicklungsmech. Org. 68 p., 1913.] Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm. u. Vererb. 24: 291-292. Nov., 1920. No. 3, April, 1921] GENETICS 249 1732. Bryn, Halfdan. Researches into anthropological heredity. Hereditas 1: 186-212. 1920. — The studies have been conducted in "two much isolated mountain districts" of Nor- way. The paper is in two parts, the first "On the inheritance of eye colour in man." The eyes of 834 individuals were examined through a magnifying glass and two types of eye color distinguished: (1) eyes with "a single layer of black pigment in the back part of iris, appear- ing always blue or gray;" (2) eyes "which besides this pigment also contains a more or less brownish one, which eyes appear brown, green, gray, bluish-brown or blue if the brownish pigment is to be found very scantily." Under the latter type is segregated also a group of "mixed" eyes, which appears to yield at least one biotype. Individuals homozygous for "brown" eyes are "probably very rare in the population," hence the mode of inheritance was not especially studied. In general it was found that "in our population there are prob- ably three biological types with regard to eye-colour; (a) the plain blue type; (b) the plain brown type; (c) the light 'mi.xed' type. These different types interbreed in accord with the Mendelian laws of heredity, viz., blue eyes are recessive to all types of eyes with brownish pigment." — -The second part of the paper treats of "The genetic relation of index cephalicus." The two districts mentioned "differ very much with regard to the size of this index;" one "characterized as rather brachycephalic," having an index of 80.1, the other an index of 76.9, while "the average index of the entire country is about 78.0." A careful study of the collected data shows "very plainly that there are at least two types in each of the districts. One is common to both districts. It is the northern fair nucleus," with an index of about 77.5. In one district this is associated with "a dark brachycephalic type," index about 83, and in the other district it is associated with a "dark dolichocephalic type," index about 73. The author concludes that there are here "three biotypes .... with regard to index cephalicus" which interbreed in Mendelian fashion. "The brachycephalic type is dominant to both the others. The dolichocephalic type is too rare to allow any positive conclusions; it seems, however, to be dominant to the mesocephalic type and recessive to the brachy- cephalic type." — Howard J. Banker. 1733. BuRCH, D. S. Heredity and economical production of food. Jour. Heredity 11: 7-11. 2 fig. 1920.^Pointing out the lack of thought and knowledge of the principles of breeding and a discussion of the work of the Federal Department of Agriculture to encourage the application of these principles to livestock and farm crops. — J. H. Beaumont. 1734. Castle, W. E. Genetics and eugenics. 2nd ed., 15.5 X 23.5 cm., 395 -p., 7 -pi., 155 fig. Harvard Univ. Press: Cambridge, Massachusetts, 1920. — 'Second edition shows exten- sive revision with addition of much new matter mainly represented by interpolated chapters on "Genetic changes and the chromosomes," "Genetic changes in asexual reproduction, in parthenogenesis, and in self-fertilization," "Genetic changes in bisexual reproduction," and "Hybrid vigor and heterosis." The author's hooded-rat results are shown to be due to the action of modifying factors, on an unchanged fundamental gene for the hooded character; and blending inheritance, and Johannsen's pure-line principle are also given new treatment which brings the author's position on these subjects into better accord with that generally held by other geneticists. The extensive bibliography which was an excellent feature of the first edition has been brought down nearly to date of publication of the second edition, by the addition of more than 200 titles. — Geo. H. Shull. 1735. Chamberlain, Charles J. Grouping and mutation in Botrychium. Bot. Gaz. 70: 387-398. 11 fig. Nov., 1920. — B. dissectum never occurs except in association with B. obli- quum. In B. dissectum many sporangia are abortive, and many spores of apparently perfect sporangia are obviously abortive, suggesting at least partial, and probably entire, sterility. Botrychium does not reproduce vegetatively; hence B. dissectum must arise from mutating spores (2-5 per cent) of B. obliquum. Direct cultural proof is impossible, since Botrychium spores cannot be germinated artificially. — -Merle C. Coulter. 1736. Cole, Leon J. An early family history of color-blindness. Jour. Heredity 10: 372-374. Fig. 12. Nov., 1919.— The Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of 250 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, London for 1779 contain a rather complete family history of color-blindness, of interest because of its early date and because the facts as given fall in line with the interpretation of color- blindness as a sex-linked character in man.— J. H. Beaumont. 1737. Collins, G. N., and J. H. Kempton. Heritable characters of maize. I. Lineate leaves. Jour. Heredity 11:3-6. Frontispiece. Jan., 1920.— The authors point out the desirability of reporting characters of genetic value as they appear in such an economic crop as maize in order to avoid needless duplication by the workers in the field. They discuss the character "lineate" and show that it may take its place among the other chlorophyll variations of maize. [See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1680.]—/. H. Beaumont. 1738. VAN Creveld, S. [Dutch rev. of: Harris, J. Arthur, and Francis G. Benedict. A biometric study of basal metabolism in man. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 279, v -\- 266 p., 28 diagrams. Washington, D. C, 1919.] Genetica 2 : 466-468. Sept., 1920. 1739. Danforth, C. H. Resemblance and difference in twins. Jour. Heredity 10: 399- 409. Fig. 9-14. Dec, 1919. — A discussion of the answers to questionnaires received by the American Genetic Association from a number of twins. The answers to questions of the gen- eral headings: height, weight, hair and ej'e color, physical traits, physiological traits, mental traits and stronger affection, indicate that in uniovular twins identical likenesses are the rule, while in biovular twins differences of the same order as between children of different ages may be expected though striking similarities do occur in biovular twins of the same sex. The author discusses the extent of similarity in biovular twins and the reason for expecting differences in uniovular twins. — •/. H. Beaumont. 1740. Daniel, Lucien. Recherches sur la greffe des Solanum. [Studies on the graft of Solanum.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 1074-1076. Nov. 29, 1920. 1741. Davenport, Charles B. Heredity of constitutional mental disorders. Psychol. Bull. 7: 300-310. Sept., 1920.— The author reports chiefly his own investigations, but also cites the most significant findings of recent study by others.— Analyses of the pedigrees of feeble-minded individuals yield results supporting the conclusion that there is a single Mende- lian factor absent in the ordinary type of feeble-mindedness. If the germ defect results in the insufficient production of some hormone upon which the higher functions depend, the intellectual centers develop each with its own idiosyncrasies and cease development prema- turely at a lov,' level. In the most extensive pedigrees the defect has been traced for nine or more generations and it is suspected that if records were obtainable it would go back 2000 years or more. — Contrary to former assertion on the non-inheritance of Mongolian imbe- cility, recent investigations reveal neurotic conditions in both lines of ancestry.— Amaurotic idiocy is apparently confined to families of Russian Jews.— It is not yet possible to say that every case of epilepsy is inherited, but it is certain that in a majority of instances there is nervous defect on both sides of the family. The element of periodicity in epilepsy has a clear inheritable basis and the tendency to fugues is evidently a sex-linked trait, i.e., a nomadic male inherits it from his mother's close male relatives.— The method of inheritance of dementia praecox has been investigated by several authors all of whom conclude that it is a simple Mendelian recessive. On the other hand Huntington's chorea and the temperamental tendency to more or less periodic outbursts of violence seems to be a Mendelian dominant. In the manic-depressive group of psychoses the hyperkinetic tendency is inherited independently of the hypokinetic. The author formulates the hypothesis that the presence or absence of genetic factors determines an individual's reactability to exciting situations. The history of changes of mood in identical tv/ins strikingly corroborates the view.— The question of inheritance of crim.inality receives the author's negative judgment except in so far as the eti- ology is found in the inheritable traits of feeble-mindedness, feeble inhibition, or defective internal secretions.— The bearing of consanguinity upon mental disorders is confined to mat- ings in which both parents carry some recessive defect.— yl/iria??i C. Gould. No. 3, April, 1921] GENETICS . 251 1742. Davenport, C. B. Annual report of the Director of the Department of Experi- mental Evolution and of the Eugenics Record Office. Carnegie Inst. Washington Year Book 19. (1920): 107-157. 1921. — Surveying the past, author points out part played by his Staff in helping to establish relation of chromosomes to genetical facts and as to future plans he emphasizes the eugenical, and the desirability of much mammalian experimentation as likely to bear strongest on human genetics. Metz reports on gametogenesis in Asiliis and Droso- phila and finds indications in latter of process differing in male and female. A set of 3 allelo- morphic mutations of the eye in D. virilis is mentioned, of which 2 are accompanied by more or less sterility. MacDowell has completed a report showing that alcoholic grandparents diminish learning and retention ability of rats. Alcoholic parents showed similar but less marked influence on children, although latter were one generation nearer to the alcohol. Riddle studied metabolism of male and female embryos in doves and pigeons. Relatively more female than male embryos withstood diminished oxygen pressure, indicating lower metabolism in females. Age of embryo is important factor in survival. Little demon- strated presence of sex-linked lethal factors in mice causing ratio of sexes of about 1 male to 2 females. Statistical analysis of human pedigrees of hemophilia and color-blindness revealed that considerably more than half of the males showed hemophilia or color-blindness and the condition is thought to be due to lethal factors linked with normal allelomorphs of the abnor- mal genes in sex chromosome. Proof of harmful action of weak acids on sperm was also obtained. The previously known condition of heritability of cancer in mice was made much more definite by Little whose F2 numbers point to 4 independent autosomal genes determining susceptibility, all of which must be simultaneously present. Occurrence of spotted mutants in non-spotted dog breeds is also recorded by Little. Banta reported that selection for sex- intergradedness in Daphnids was successful. A report on selection for reactiveness to light was completed. Banta was also interested in supposed mutative color changes in flounders, 20 per cent of the new year's crop being pigmented on the lower side. Blakeslee continued studies on mutation and sexuality in Mucors. In Portulaca a dominant vegetative mutation affecting flower color appeared in a part of a white plant. Some cases like that of a purple flower breeding white are deemed to have been periclinal chimeras. In Datura, work on the graft-infectious disease "Quercina" has been completed. The mutant "New Species" was found to be tetraploid, i.e., with 24 chromosomes. "Globe" type of mutant seems to be due to 25 chromosomes. Harris with others has reported on vascular anatomy of variant bean seedlings; on the physiology of egg production; on properties of vegetable saps and on theory of plot tests. Banker's study of heredity in a human pedigree of better sort revealed large number of college men. Some lines showed higher percentage than others. Davenport studying twin births found that twinning is due to both father and mother. He completed anthropological studies of American population based on army data. Laughlin has completed a work on eugenical sterilization in the United States and collected data on state institutions for defectives. — James P. Kelly. 1743. Dorset, M. J. A note on the dropping of flowers in the potato. Jour. Heredity 10: 226-228. Fig. 19. 1919. — On most of the common varieties of potatoes many of the flowers absciss either before the flower opens or before fertilization can take place. In some cases the partially developed seed ball will absciss. Since pollen abortion is very common and occurs in varying percentages, though the flowers develop perfect pistils, and since abscission occurs before tuber formation or the stimulus due to fertilization, it is evident that some other physiological process is active. — •/. H. Beaumont. 1744. Ellinger, Tage. On the numerical expression of the degree of inbreeding and relationship in a pedigree. Amer. Nat. 54: 540-545. 1 fig. Nov. -Dec, 1920.— The paper gives a modification and some extensions to the system of measuring degrees of inbreed- ing and relationship published by Dr. Raymond Pearl in several articles in the American Naturalist, 1913-1917. — 'It is attempted first to bring all measurements on the same scale and for that purpose it has been necessary slightly to change the definition of the Coefficient of Relationship, and further to express both the Total Inbreeding Coefficient and the new Total 252 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, Relationship Coefficient in areas, using the actual percentage of the maximum area as meas- ure. The new Total Relationship-Inbreeding-Index finally measures — -also in areas — 'the proportion of the total inbreeding in the pedigree of an individual that is due to the relation- ship between its parents. The full system of measurements is used as an example on the pedigree of the Jersey bull King Melia Rioter 14th. — -Tage Ellinger. 1745. Emerson, R. A. Heritable characters of maize. II. Pistillate-flowered maize plants. Jour. Heredity 11:65-76. 8 fig. Feb., 1920.— Description and genetic behavior of two types of terminal inflorescence of maize to which the names "tassel seed" and "tassel ear" have been given. The two types are genetically distinct but further work must be done to determine the exact factoral and linkage relationships. [See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1684.]—/. H. Beaumont. 1746. Ernst, A. tJber Parthenogenesis und Apogamie. [On parthenogenesis and apog- amy.] Verhandl. Schweiz. Naturf. Ges. 1919: 1-20. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1685. 1747. Fairchild, David. Twins. Their importance as furnishing evidence of the lim- itations of environment. Jour. Heredity 10: 387-396. Frontispiece, fig. 1-7. 1919.— A brief philosophical discussion of the value of studies of individuals having identical germ-plasm to determine the importance and limitations of environment as affecting heredity. The author mentions certain of the factors of environment which do not affect hereditj'' but indi- cates the significance of the work undertaken by the American Genetics Association in the study of photographs and answers to questionnaires submitted by 600 twins. — J. H. Beaumont. 1748. Feenstra-Sluiter, C. Waarnemingen en Beschouwingen over Bloei Bevruchting en Zaadvorming bij Cinchona Ledgeriana Moens. [Observations and considerations of flower- ing, fertilization and seed formation in Cinchona Ledgeriana Moens.] Mededeel. Kina-Proef- sta. 6. 35 p, 20 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1686. 1749. Firbas, Heinrich. Uber die Erzeugung von Weizen-Roggenbastardierungen. [The production of wheat-rye hybrids.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 249-282. Nov., 1920. 1750. Fischer, H. Kohlensaure und Pfianzenziichtung. [Carbon dioxid and plant breeding.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 364-366. Nov., 1920. 1751. Fischer, H. Orthogenesis, Mutation, Auslese. [Orthogenesis, mutation, selec- tion.] Naturw. Wochenschr. 19:561-566. 1920. 1752. Fleischer, B. tJber myotonische Dystrophie mit Katarakt. [On myotonic dys- trophy with cataract.] Arch. Ophthalmol. 96: 1-43. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1803.] 1753. Fleischer, Bruno, und William Josenhans. Ein Beitrag zur Frage der Verer- bung der familiaren Sehnervenatrophie (Leberscher Krankheit). [Contribution to the question of the inheritance of familial atrophy of the optic nerve (Leber's disease).] Arch. Rass. Gesell- schaftsbiol. 13: 129-158. 5 pi. 1920. 1754. France, R. H. Der Parasitismus als schopferisches Prinzip. [Parasitism as a creative principle.] Centralbl. Bakt. 59: 54-64. 6 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1799. 1755. Frimmel, Fr. tJber einem Versuch der Ziichtung schwarzer Farbentone an der Gartenprimel. (On an attempt to breed black color-tone in the garden Primula.) Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7:346-356. Nov., 1920. 1756. Gates, R. R. Mutational v. recapitulatory characters. Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. Bournemouth Meeting 1919 : 340. 1920.— Characters are divided into two classes : Muta- tions which owe their origin to a nuclear change and modify every stage of the ontogeny, and recapitulatory characters which arise through the impress of environment and usually involve adaptation to new conditions. No. 3, April, 1921] GENETICS 253 These two classes of characters differ in (a) their manner of origin, (b) their relation to organic structure, and (c) their relation to phenomena such as recapitulation, adaptation, distribution, and inheritance. It is held that characters which show recapitulation could not have arisen through mutation, for that would modify every stage instead of adding certain stages as it does. The unsuccessful attempts of many zoologists to explain away the remarkable facts of recapitulation is noted. The apparent contradictions of von Baer's law of animal development is held to be due partly to the occurrence of mutations in organ- isms which already show recapitulation. — The author concludes that both types of characters are necessary to account for the phenomena of evolution. The recognition of both types involves the limitation of the cell theory and the admission of the neo-Lamarckian factor. — J. H. Kempton. 1757. G[ates], R. R. Orthogenetic evolution in pigeons. [Rev. of: Whitmax, Charles Otis. Posthumous works. Edited by Oscar Riddle (vol. 3 edited by H. A. Carr). Car- negie Inst. Washington Publ. 257. x + 194 P-, 88 pi, 36 fig.; 2U p., 39 pi, 11 fig.; xi + 161 p. 1919.] Nature 104: 566-568. 1920. 1758. Good ale, H. D. Conceraing the summer plumage of the drake. (Abstract.) Anat. Rec. 14: 92-93. 1918.— Some ducks, such as the Gray Call, Mallard, and Rouen, molt early in the summer (June). The new plumage, called summer plumage, is entirely unlike the old, since it strongly resembles that of the female. If the testes of the male are com- pletely removed, the change in color no longer occurs, although the birds molt. Further studies of the problem show that, potentially, the change in color of the intact male takes place 2 or 3 months prior to the actual change, for the potential change, at will, may be ren- dered actual by removing feathers and thus inducing a growth of new ones. The new feathers that come in late in the winter are like the old, but those pulled a little later (March) are like the summer plumage. This change coincides approximately with the beginning of manifes- tations of sexual activity. — It has also been found that about the time the summer plumage reaches its height, sexual activity diminishes or disappears. At this time the reproductive system of the male contains few or no spermatozoa. The summer plumage no sooner reaches its height than the change back to the breeding plumage begins. — 'It is apparent, therefore, that the summer plumage develops coincidently with the period of greatest activity of the testes, while the breeding plumage, so-called, develops during the quiescent period. — The histological changes in the testes are being examined. — H. D. Goodale. 1759. GowEN, John W. Conformation and its relation to milk-producing capacity in Jer- sey cattle. Jour. Dairy Sci. 3: 1-32. 1 fig. Jan., 1920. — A biometric analysis of the rela- tion between conformation and milk production in 1074 Jersey cows entered in the Registry of Merit. The data on conformation are the detailed and total scores of about 140 judges, collected by the Secretary of the Jersey Cattle Club. The average total score of these cows was 89.8 where 100 represents the ideal type. Among the elements of conformation, those pertaining to the mammary system showed most room for improvement. This same group of characteristics was also the most variable. The correlation between total score and milk yield for a year was + 0.194 =*= 0.016. Aside from total score the best indications of high yield were found to be large, tortuous, and elastic milk veins (+0.191) ; udder large and not fleshy (+0.191); rear udder well rounded out and well out and up behind (+0.171); body, wedge shape, with deep large paunch, legs proportionate to size and fine quality (+0.166); and general appearance (+0.115). Ten other elements in the score dealing with conformation of thighs, rump, fore udder, teats, head, tail, general shape of udder, size, hip bones and neck showed correlations with milk yield ranging from +0.089 to +0.050 which were probably significant. There were positive but insignificant correlations in the case of eyes, horns and muzzle and lung capacity as indicated by depth and breadth through body just back of fore legs. The only negative correlation was in the case of straight back ( — 0.070 ='=0.017). It is pointed out that other data show correlations between a seven day test and year milk yield 2| times as great as that between total score and year milk yield, proving that even a short test of actual production is much superior to any judgment based on conformation. — Sewall Wright. 254 , GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1760. Haecker, V. tJber weitere Zusammenhange auf dem Gebiete der Mendelforsch- ung. [On further correlations in the field of Mendelian investigation.] Pfliiger's Arch. Gesamte Physiol. 181 : 149-169. 1920. 1761. Hansen, W. Die Mahndorfer Pflanzenziichtung bzw. das Mahndorfer Usancen- buch. [The Mahndorf plant-breeding or the book of Mahndorf methods.] Zeitschr. Pflanzen- zucht. 7: 283-318. 5 fig. Nov., 1920. 1762. Harland, S. C. Inheritance in Dolichos lablab, L. Part I. Jour. Genetics 10: 219-226. Oct., 1920.— Two white-flowered varieties of the bonavist were crossed. The anthers open before the flowers, and bagging was therefore omitted. The character of indefi- nite growth was proved a Mendelian dominant to the bush habit. One variety had no visible anthocyan; the other had purple in the seed-coat and hairs of the stipules. Fi had purple flowers, nodes, and leaf -ribs, with black seeds. In F2 the ratio by flower-color was 9:7, as was confirmed in subsequent generations. By seed-color, the ratio in F2was 9:3:4. — John Belling. 1763. Harman, Mary T. Chromosome studies in Tettigidae. II. Chromosomes of Paratettix BB and CC and their hybrid BC. Biol. Bull. 38: 213-230. 3 pi. April, 1920.— Cytological observations on spermatogenesis in grouse locusts used by R. K. Nabours in genetical work. Chromosomes of form BB are like those of CC except that one pair ("the third pair") is hook-shaped instead of straight. Hybrid BChas one hooked and one straight chromosome in third pair. Author describes end-to-end union of chromosomes with "not . . . . the least appearance of a side-by-side pairing" in growth period. Believes lack of crossing over in Paratettix is explained by absence of parasynapsis. Suggests that in Apo- tettix where crossing over occurs parasynapsis may occur. — C. W. Metz. 1764. Hart, C. tJber die Vererbung erworbener Eigenschaften. [On the inheritance of acquired characters.] Berlin. Klin. Wochenschr. 57: 65^656. 1920. 1765. Hayes, H. K., and Harry V. Harlan. The inheritance of the length of internode in the rachis of the barley spike. U. S. Dept. Agric. Bull. 869. 26 p., 2 pi, 2 fig. Sept. 30, 1920. — 'Extensive data bearing on the inheritance of length of rachis internode in crosses between pure lines of barley is given. Four dense and six lax or semi-lax sorts were used. In Fi density is dominant or semi-dominant. In F2 the range of variability includes the modal class of both parents. In F3 homozygous strains were isolated similar to either parent. In three crosses types homozygous for intermediate densities were also obtained. The author interprets his results on the factor basis, assuming one, two, or more factors as the specific cases warrant. The significance of the constancy of internode length as an aid to barley class- ification is noted. — F. P. Bussell. 1766. Hayes, H. K., John H. Parker, and Carl Kurtzweil. Genetics of rust resist- ance in crosses of varieties of Triticum vulgare with varieties of T. durum and T. dicoccum. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 532-542. 6 pi. Sept., 1920. — 'Inheritance studies are reported on rust resistance as correlated with certain botanical and morphological characters in crosses between common wheats and resistant pure-line strains of durum and emmer. Earlier work pre- sented difiSculties of interpretation due to the presence of different biologic strains of rust. Parent strains of wheat together with F2 and F3 generation material were inoculated with a pure strain of Puccinia graminis tritici. The durum X common cross gave susceptible Fi, while emmer X common showed resistance partially dominant, therefore, reciprocal crosses behaved similarly. There was some indication of linkage between both durum and emmer head characters and resistance to rust infection. A few crossovers giving resistant com- mon-wheat types were obtained. The mode of inheritance of rust resistance is interpreted as Mendelian. — F. P. Bussell. 1767. Herlant, Maurice. Un cas d'hermaphrodisme complet et fonctionnel chez Para- centrotus lividus. [A case of complete and functional hermaphroditism in Paracentrotus No. 3, April, 1921] GENETICS 255 lividus.] Arch. Zool. Exp. Notes et Rev. 57:28-31. 1 fig. 1918.— Specimen of this sea urchin had three normal testes, one atrophied testis, and large mixed gland. Functional eggs and spermatozoa from mixed gland united in self-fertilization, and from the fertilized eggs normal plutei developed. Eggs of this hermaphrodite also united normally with sperma- tozoa of normal males, and its spermatozoa fertilized eggs of normal females. Atrophied testis contained parasite, but there was nothing to indicate that hermaphroditism depended on parasitism. — A. Franklin Shull. 1768. HiLDEN, K. Anthropologische Untersuchungen iiber die Eingeborenen des russis- chen Altai. [Anthropological investigations on the natives of the Russian Altai.] 137 p. Hel- singfors, 1920. 1769. HoGBEN, Lancelot T. Studies on synapsis II. Parallel conjugation and the pro- phase complex in Periplaneta with special reference to the premeiotic telophase. Proc. Roy. Soc. London 91: 305-329. S pi. Aug. 7, 1920.— Author studied spermatogenesis and oogene- sis in Periplaneta (cockroach); first account of the latter. Author does not observe anaphase chromosomes of the late oogonia to be split, in contrast to this condition observed by Miss DiGBY in the premeiotic anaphase chromosomes of Osmunda. There are thirty-two autosomes and two accessory chromosomes in the female, one accessory in the male. Parasynapsis occurs in both sexes; in the female the accessories and autosomes do not behave differently. He observes no twisting filaments in the zygotene stage and believes that the union of the constituent halves of this stage is sufficiently intimate to allow the possibility of crossing over but not by such means as are postulated by the chiasmatype theory. In oogenesis segre- gation of homologous chromosomes appears to take place in the first maturation division, but has no data to indicate that this occurs in spermatogenesis. — C. L. Parmenter. 1770. Hovasse, R. Le nombre des chromosomes chez les tetards parthenogenetique de grenouille. [The nimiber of chromosomes in parthenogenetic tadpoles of the frog.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1211-1216. May, 1920.— The author has determined the approxi- mate number of chromosomes in the cells of parthenogenetic tadpoles and gastrulae of Rana temporaria. In two tadpoles, aged 50 and 80 days, the number is diploid (24-27) which he interprets as being produced by regulation (Delage), a doubling of the chromosome number very early, perhaps at the beginning of segmentation. In two gastrulae, 8 days old, the num- ber varies from approximately 15 to 28 and the size of the nuclei varies accordingly from 5 to 16 microns in diameter. These numbers he interprets as due to regulation in only a part of the cells. The number of chromosomes in the cells of seven sickly tadpoles, aged 16 days and less, is haploid, and the nuclei are about half normal size. These conditions are cited as very comparable to those obtained by Dries ch in parthenogenetic sea-urchin embryos. Delage adds a note emphasizing these data as confirming his regulation theory. — C. L. Parmenter. 1771. Howe, Lucien. The relation of hereditary eye defects to genetics and eugenics. Jour. Heredity 10: 379-382. Nov., 1919.— Pointing out the attitude which the ophthalmolo- gist must take in regard to hereditary blindness and showing that sterilization or sequestra- tion of carriers of the defect is legal in some states. — /. H. Beaumont. 1772. Hume, A. N. A system for breeding corn or gregarious animals. Jour. Heredity 11: 191-192. April, 1920. — A brief description of a plan for breeding and selection which is fully outlined in South Dakota Experiment Station Bulletin 186 (Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1532). The plan consists in introducing ears from outside the breeding-plot into the even-numbered detasseled rows, which gives opportunity for testing the yielding power of such introduc- tions before permitting them to contaminate the other "blood lines." The system is especi- ally applicable to poultry where 4 or more pens are used and accurate egg-laying records are kept. — J. H. Beaumont. 1773. Jablonski, Walter. tJber Albinismus des Auges im Zusammenhang mit den Vererbungsregeln. [On albinism of the eye in connection with inheritance laws.] Deutsch. Med. Wochenschr. 46: 708-711. 1920. 256 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1774. Jelinek. Nachste Aufgaben der Pflanzenziichtung und der Sortenpriifung. [The nextproblemsof plant-breeding and variety testing.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7: 83-90. Dec, 1919. — It has been shown that a variety (of wheat) selected as pure line may show great varia- tions in yield in different years and it has been proposed to mix selected pure lines to secure varieties better than either single pure line or original "Landsorten." Increased yield due to individual reaction of variety or its components to various vegetative factors. This capacity to react differs among various lines of a variety and is hereditary. Relation of inherent reac- tion to vegetative factors may be shown graphically by Stempel type of "correlation curve." Limiting values which indicate range of correlation curve and which form limiting condi- tions of existence for variety are called "vegetation limits" of variety or line. The "renting capacity" of variety is conditioned by limiting minimum and maximum values of vegeta- tion factors, defined by harvest value and its production costs. "Renting capacity" is neces- sarily not constant. Lines with narrow vegetation limits have also narrow renting capacities but lines with broad vegetation limits may have narrow or broad renting capacity according to whether the correlation curve rises and falls quickly or gradually at either end. Limits between which vegetative factors of locality vary relatively to soil and varying weather con- dition in any year are termed "vegetation limits of the locality." Varieties with narrow correlation curve react very easily to changes of growth conditions and may be designated as irritable varieties; and conversely, plastic varieties exist. In selecting varieties for any locality care should be taken that varietal renting capacity is not narrower than vegetation limits of given region. Sufficient plasticity of any variety is important in agricultural prac- tise, especially where growth conditions vary widely. Pure lines are necessarily non-plastic. If highest type variety is to consist of selected mixture ("individually selected population") of pure lines, then parent variety must be preserved in original condition. Certain difficul- ties would attend formation of proper mixture of lines but these should not be considered insuperable. — L. R. Waldron. 1775. Johnson, Charles W. Variation of the palm weevil. Jour. Heredity 11 : 84. 1 fig. 1920. — -Palm weevils {Rhynchophorus cruentus Fabr.) were collected showing practically con- tinuous color intergradations.— J. H. Beaumont. 1776. Johnson, James. An improved strain of Wisconsin tobacco. Connecticut Havana No. 38. Jour. Heredity 10:281-288. Fig. 8-10. June, 1919.— Seed from about thirty-five self-fertilized plants of Connecticut Havana tobacco were sown in progeny rows and it became evident that three types were represented in the progeny. Two types differed from the normal and were constant in later generations. They are undoubtedly mutations. A cross between these gave an intermediate which in two years and among large numbers did not segregate, though exact data were not taken. Seed was distributed and in 1919 it has displaced other strains of tobacco. [See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1694.] — J. H. Beaumont. 1777. Jones, D. F. The effect of inbreeding and crossbreeding upon development. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. 4: 246-250. 2 fig. Aug., 1918. — Continuing inbreeding experiments of East and Hayes, author finds no further reduction in vigor after eight inbred generations. Two inbred lines, though less productive than original parents, are still quite fertile; others have run towards either pollen or ovule abortion. Crossing different inbred lines enormously increases vigor, frequently bringing gain in yield of 180 per cent. Mixtures of own and foreign pollen, applied to silks of both parents, result in selective fertilization favoring own pollen. — ■ Merle C. Coulter. 1778. Jones, D. F. Heritable characters of maize. IV. A lethal factor — 'defective seeds. Jour. Heredity 11: 161-167. 7 fig. April, 1920. — A factor, development of pericarp but incomplete development or complete suppression of embryo and endosperm, is to be distin- guished from partially developed ovules due to incompleted growth or ineffective fertilization. If genetically defective seeds appear on a self-fertilized plant they will be in approximately the ratio 3:1. Several other factors may be operating, however, so that much more work must be done to check up the inheritance of this factor.— J. H. Beaumont. No. 3, April, 1921] GENETICS 257 1779. Jones, D. F. Sterility in animals and plants. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2:117-119. 7 fig. 1920. ^Hereditary lethal factors, when received from both parents, prevent develop- ment of offspring.— C/i«s. H. Otis. 1780. Jones, D. F. Segregation of susceptibility of parasitism in maize. Amer. Jour. Bot. 5: 295-300. June, 1918. — 'Segregates from long-inbred maize show striking differences in susceptibility to corn smut and an unidentified leaf blight. Crosses with resistant strains give approximately resistant Fi and segregation again in F2. Indicates susceptibility com- monly recessive, being segregated in some lines and not in others. Supports his earlier hypothesis that increased development shown by hybrids is due to conjunctive action of large number of favorable, dominant growth factors contributed by both parents. — Merle C. Coulter. 1781. Jones, D. F., and W. O. Filley. Teas' hybrid Catalpa. Jour. Heredity 11: 16-24. 6 fig. 1920. — J. C. Teas, of Carthage, Missouri, grew seed of Catalpa Kaempferi which was growing near the two North American species C. bignonioides and C. speciosa and obtained a vigorous-growing hybrid. The parentage has been established by Dr. E. M. East and H. K. Hats who made the back-cross C. bignonioides X C. Kaempferi and obtained a similar hybrid. These hybrids are more hardy and more rapid-growing than either parent but are intermediate in most of the fruit, flower and tree characters which add, however, to its value as an ornamental. — •/. //. Beaumoyit. 1782. Jordan, David Starr. War and genetic values. Jour. Heredity 10:223-225. Ma}-, 1919.— A denunciation of the theories of Dr. McFie, Dr. Thorstein Veblen, and others, who contend that war does not affect the eugenic level of a race or nation. The writer con- tends that war does remove many of the higher intellects and combined with the corollary losses due to war is detrimental to the moral and intellectual status of the nation. His theme is: '•Restoration in quantity is a matter of time, but restoration in quality, in values, moral, mental, and physical, will be a much longer and more difficult process." — /. //. Beaumont. 1783. Kalt, B. Die Hintertuxergerste. Ein Anbau- und Ziichtungsversuch. [Hintertux barley. A cultural and breeding experiment.] Kuhn-Arch. 7 : 217-240. 1918. — Author reports observations on a barley raised from seed grain secured from station of 1500 m. altitude. Plants proved a very early-maturing form of Hordeum distichum nutans having long stem, long, open, heavy heads, long, heavy grain, little tillering (Bestockung), and high nitrogen content. Last two characteristics considered not desirable. It is now planned by breeding to increase tillering in this barley without decreasing earliness, and to lower nitrogen content. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pfianzenziicht. 7: 39-40. June, 1919.]— James P. Kelly. 1784. Kammerer, Paul. Dunkeltiere im Licht und Lichttiere im Dunkel. [Darkness animals in light and light animals in darkness.] Naturwissenschaften 8: 28-35. 5 fig. 1920. —Reviews and spiritedly defends against critics his interpretation of results of experiments published in 1912. The Austrian cave salamander, Proteus, normally has a small eye which in the adult is about double in size that of the young but the overlying thick skin contains the usual glands, sense organs, and slime cells and renders the eye difficult to find. The lens cells undergo some degeneration. Twenty-three young, born and reared in a cistern at the Vienna station, had distinct but very small eyes. In daylight the skin becomes black but the eyes are really in darkness under the skin. Only such light, e.g., that from a red incandescent bulb, as does not cause pigment development, will continue to illuminate the eye fully. Author exposed one Proteus five years to a red incandescent light and five individuals alternately to red light and daylight. The latter developed some pigment but not enough to shield the eyes from light. Figure of one of these individuals shows a prominent eye. Lens in one subjected to red light was 18 times longer and 12| times wider than in normal; lens fibers attached to ciliary body; a true cornea and iris with pupil; skin over eye thin, transparent, and lacking in glands, etc. The eye stands out like a glass ball and has the 258 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, retina well developed. "Light Proteus" see, as proved by feeding experiments with earth- worms in outer tank while Proteus was confined in an inner glass tank without water con- nection. No attempt was made to get offspring in darkness from the large-eyed Proteus, though the author scarcely doubted that positive results would have been obtained; he how- ever despaired of contributing anything new to solution of problem of inheritance of acquired characters. — Author cites many cases which he holds bear upon the effect of cave environment upon organisms and does not doubt that their modifications are hereditary effects of environ- mental influences. In reply to his critics regarding the possibility that the individuals with large eyes represented genetically different material, the author states that the 6 reared in red light alone developed the large eyes while 40 others of the same material reared in dark- ness did not do so.^4. M. Banta. 1785. Keith, A. The mathematician as an anatomist. [Rev. of: Pearson, Karl, and Julia Bell. A study of the long bones of the English skeleton. Department of applied sta- tistics. University of London, University College: Drapers Company research memoirs, Biometric series, 10. Text pt. 1, v + 2U p.; Atlas pt. 1, vii + 59 pi., + tables. 11. Text pt. 1, sec. 2, 225-539; atlas pt. 1, sec. 2, vii + pi. 60-101 + tables. University Press: Cam- bridge, 1919.] Nature 105: 767-770. 1920.— Reviewer has been collecting data from all sys- tems of the Primate body (see Nature 75: 508. 1911). His results are, in the main, in har- mony with those of Pearson. We lack data regarding possible correlation of individualities in the human gait with structural variations of the thigh bone. — 0. A. Stevens. 1786. Kelly, James P. A genetical study of flower form and flower color in Phlox Drum- mondii. Genetics 5: 189-248. 2 colored pL, 13 fig. Mar., 1920.— Reference is made to inves- tigations of Gilbert (Jour. Agric. Res. 4: 293-302. 1915) who carried three crosses through the Fz generation and assumed five factors to explain his observations.— Author finds that variety cuspidata having deeply incised petals is a simple Mendelian recessive to varieties having entire petals; that so-called variety fimbriata is a "monoheterozygote of the entire and cuspidata types" and hence is unfixable; that color in the petals of fimbriata and cuspidata types is confined to the papillated epidermal cells which do not completely cover the mesoderm.— Funnel-shaped corolla is a simple recessive to salver-shaped corolla.— Crossing of strains A and B, both of which have white flower-blades, and of strains A and J, the former having white flower-blades and the latter light pink, gave in each case a different full-colored Fi type. Fi of strains A X B proved heterozygous for P, a chromogen factor, E, an enzyme factor, and A, an activator for E, these factors being necessary for blade color. Type of blade color varies according to nature of chromogen base. Action of E and A on P produces a full-colored blade; on D, a different chromogen base, gives both stippled and unstippled blades; on R, a third chromogen base, gives a different blade color. In AB and EF series interaction of chromogen bases P and D together with E and A gives a dis- tinct full-colored type. Similarly in AJ series blade color due to factors RE A + color due to DEA gives a distinct full-colored type. In AB and EF series a bluing factor (or linked factors), which is independent of the essential blade-color factors, doubles the number of color types and modifies the reddish blade color to a bluish color. Dark-eyed and light-eyed forms differ by a single factor. In some cases this factor intensifies blade color. Cream- colored blade is a simple recessive to white blade. Author reports fourteen chromosomes in somatic cells of Phlox Drummondii. — Ernest Dorsey. 1787. Kempton, J. H. Heritable characters of maize. III. Brachytic culms. Jour. Heredity 11: 111-115. 4 fig. Mar., 1920.— The character appeared in a Chinese-Algerian hybrid "Dh 416" and consists of a shortening of the internodes on the main culm without a corresponding reduction in number or in size of other organs. The character behaves as a simple Mendelian recessive. Brachytic variations are found in "bush" peas, beans, squashes and tomatoes and are to be distinguished from dwarfing. Author cites two other cases of brachytic variation neither of which bred true; one segregated in a normal frequency curve in F2, while the other gave only a few brachytic plants. [See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1696.] — J. H. Beaumont. No. 3, April, 1921] GENETICS 259 178S. Klebahn, H. Impfversuche mit Pfropfbastarden. [Infection experiments with graft hybrids.] Flora 111-112^ 418-430. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1800. 1789. KoLTONSKi, Hermann. tJber Erblichkeit der Ovarial-, besonders der Dermoid- cysten. [On the inheritance of ovarial cysts, especially the dermoid cysts.] Zeitschr. Krebs- forsch. 17:408-416. 1920. 1790. KoTowsKi, Feliks. Zmienn6s6 i Korrelacye w "czystej linii" pszenicy. Tr. vulgare Ostka biala dublanska. [Correlation and variability in a pure line of wheat.] Polnisch: Tygodnika Rolniczy, Krakau 1919. — See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1702. 1791. KuTTNER, O. [German rev. of: Woltereck, Rich. Variation und Artbildung. Analytische und experimentelle Untersuchungen an pelagischen Daphniden und anderen Cla- doceren. Erster Teil: Morphologische, entwicklungsgeschichtliche und physiologische Variations-Analyse. (Variation and species formation. Analytical experimental studies on pelagic Daphnias and other Cladocera. Part I. Analysis of morphological, embryo logical, and physiological variation.) 145 p., 6 pi., 55 fig. Bern, 1919.] Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm. u. Vererb. 24: 179-182. Sept., 1920. 1792. Laxtghlin, Harry H. Calculating ancestral influences in man. A mathematical measure of the demonstrated facts of bisexual heredity. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U.S.] 6: 235-242. 2 charts. May, 1920.— An abstract of a more extensive discussion not yet published. "The principles set forth" in the larger paper, "make possible the mathematical formula- tion of an indefinitely great number of complex situations in reference to ancestral influ- ence," of which twenty-seven formulae have been developed. The application of eight of these to the first five ancestral generations in man have been worked out and charted. The present abstract reproduces the eight formulae with accompanying charts showing the result of their application to the first three ancestral generations of man.— The calculations are based on the assumption of 24 somatic chromosomes with sexual heterozygosity in the male and without provision for mutation, crossing over, etc., as such special phenomena are not yet measurable in man and the "present forumlae will not be upset by such corrections" when later introduced. The formulae as set forth are foundational and are stated in general terms applicable to all forms of bisexual heredity. — Howard J. Banker. 1793. Laughlin, Harry H. Population schedule for the census of 1920. Jour. Heredity 10: 208-210. 1919. — A proposed addition by eugenists and genealogists to the general enum- eration of the census which would record the name of the father and the maiden name of the mother of every person enumerated. This would permit analysis of census returns on the personal and family-history basis. The reasons and benefits for such enumerations are given as stated and unanimously adopted by the Eugenics Research Association. — ■/. //. Beaumont. 1794. Laurie, D. F. Evolution, heredity and breeding. Jour. Dept. Agric. South Aus- tralia 23 : 692-697. 1920. — The writer emphasizes the importance to workers in heredity of the investigations of biochemists. He cites Morgan's castration experiments on Seabright cocks as indicating that the Mendelian "factor" inhibiting the appearance of a character is located in the testes and due to hormonic influence. Luteal cells are present in the testes of the hen-feathered cocks. He quotes the address of Professor A. Keith at the British Asso- ciation at Bournemouth (Nature, Nov. 13, 1919) in which the predominance of certain dis- tinctive features of the three types, — European, Chinaman, and Negro — are attributed to the influence of the organs of internal secretion. "If the selective action of alpha proteins in food in regard to the activity or repression of the organs of internal secretion which are known to affect growth, and normal or abnormal developments, is ultimately proved, then Mendelians are faced with a difficult position in regard to the continuity of the germ-plasm. Nothing can be added. On the other hand, Bateson's view of the shedding of inhibiting fac- tors may not be affected, because, except in pathological or post-operative conditions, the factor would not be influenced by immediate endocrinal action." — A. F. Chidester. BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VII, KO. 3 260 " GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1795. Leake, H. Martin, and B. Ram Pershad. A preliminary note on the flower colour and associated characters of the opium poppy. Jour. Genetics 10: 1-20. 1 pi. July, 1920. — On basis of color and its distribution authors arrange Indian poppies in five groups: (1) White-eyed group, due to two factors P and R. P alone determines pink margin to petal and lacks dominance, giving light pink heterozygotes. R is intensifier of P and in absence of latter gives no visible results. Factor R possesses dominance but its results are deep or light depending on duplex or simplex condition of P. (2) Purple group, dependent on pres- ence of genes M and L and absence of P. AI shows complete dominance and develops mauve purple in margin with a deeper eye. L intensifies results of M giving magentas. (3) Dilute color group, v/here P and M are present and L absent. R is inhibited in presence of M. Marginal color is dilute and eye colored. (4) Full color group, factorially like last but with L in addition. Two of subsidiary variations within this group dependent on homo- or hetero- zygosity of P as was true also of third group. (5) While-fioxoered group, whose genetic diver- sity is mentioned. The securing of extracted whites from two pure [homozygous] colored plants points to two independent anthocyan bases. — Factor P is correlated with short vege- tative period. Groups 1 and 5 are white-seeded, while 2, 3, and 4 have colored seeds. La- ciniated petal is simple dominant to entire petal. Small, more or less sepaloid petals seemed a simple recessive. — James P. Kelly. 1796. Lehmann, Ernst. Variabilitat und Bliitenmorphologie. [Variability and floral mor- phology.] Biol. Zentralbl. 38: 1-38. Jan., 1918. — 'Author reviews literature (120 titles in list) relating to morphology and variability of flower beginning with Linnaeus who emphasized the typical, outlawed large variations, labelling them as monstrous or teratological, and ignored small variations. Goethe's plea that normal and abnormal be treated together is given prominence. De Candolle and von Mohl are cited as agreeing with Goethe. Author points out looseness of usage of terms monstrosity and deformity and approves Sten- zel's substitution of deviation, abnormality, and anomaly. In case of last two terms further analysis was made possible especially by Vochting who introduced a statistical treatment. Now a relatively infrequent case that fits into a Gaussian distribution is named, following Klebs, simply a variation just as are narrower and commoner deviations. Author surveys applications that have been made of statistical methods to flowers. Originally numerical evaluation limited to type [mode]. Cockerell, Burkill, and Ludwig were among first to use mean. De Vries did pioneer work on character of curves of distribution. Verschaf- felt first directed attention to degree of variability in floral cycles using the quartile, but later many authors used a-. Much has been done on causes of floral variation : soil conditions, light, temperature, heredity, age of plant. Lastly, correlation is treated, especially work on Crassulaceae by Klebs, on Ficaria, Paris, and Parnassia. — James P. Kelly. 1797. Leighty, Clyde E. Natural wheat-rye hybrids of 1918. Jour. Heredity 11: 129- 186. Fig. 19-22. Mar., 1920. — Hybrids between wheat and rye are rare but in 1918 nineteen instances were found at Arlington Farm and three at the Virginia Agricultural Experiment Station. It is evident from a comparative analysis of the plants that they are hybrids of wheat as the female parent and rye. The hybrids are one to five per cent fertile and some Fj generation plants are being grown. [See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1703.] — ■/. H. Beaumont. 1798. VAN DER Lek. [Dutch rev. of: Fischer, Ed. Der Speziesbegriff und die Frage der Spezies-Entstehung bei den parasitischen Pilzen. (The species concept and the question of the origin of species in the parasitic fungi.) Verhandl. Schweiz. Naturf. Ges. 98 Jahresver- sammlung.] Genetica 2 : 459-462. Sept., 1920. 1799. VAN DER Lek. [Dutch rev. of : France, R. H. Der Parasitismus als schopferisches Prinzip. (Parasitism as a creative principle.) Centralbl. Bakt. 59:54-64. 6 fig. 1920.] Genetica 2 : 462-464. Sept., 1920. 1800. VAN der Lek. [Dutch rev. of: Klebahn, H. Impfversuche mit Pfropfbastarden. (Infection experiments with graft hybrids.) Flora 11 /12: 418-430. 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2124; 4, Entry 3512.)] Genetica 2: 468-471. Sept., 1920. No. 3, April, 1921] GENETICS 261 1801. VAN DER Lek. [Dutch rev. of: Tisdale, W. H. A study of the nature and inherit- ance of wilt resistance. Jour. Agric. Res. 11 : 573-603. 3 pi., 8 fig. 1917.] Genetica 2: 478- 480. Sept., 1920. 1802. Lenz, Fritz. Oskar Hertwigs AngriSf gegen den "Darwinismus" und die Ras- senhygiene. [Oskar Hertwig's attack on Darwinism and race hygiene.] Arch. Rass.- u. Gesell- schaftsbiol. 13: 194-203. 1920. 1803. Lenz. [German rev. of: Fleischer, B. tJher myotonische Dystrophic mit K[ata- rakt. (On myotonic dystrophy with cataract.) Arch. Ophthalmol. 96: 1-43. 1918.] Arch. Rass.- u. Gesellschaftsbiol. 13:208. 1920. 1804. Lenz. [German rev. of: Schallmayer, W. Vererbung und Auslese. Grundriss der Gesellschaftsbiologie und der Lehre vom Rassedienst. (Heredity and selection. Funda- mentals of social biology and science of race improvement.) Srd ed., 8 vo, xvi + 536 p. Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 704.)] Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm. u. Vererb. 24:297-300. Nov., 1920. 1805. Lenz. [German rev. of: Siegel, P. W. Gewollte und ungewollte Schwankungen der weiblichen Fruchtbarkeit. Bedeutung des Kohabitationstermines fiir die Haufigkeit der Knabengeburten. (Intentional and unintentional variations in female fecundity. Signifi- cance of the time of intercourse for the frequency of male births.) 197 p. J. Springer: Berlin, 1917.] Arch. Rass.-u. Gesellschaftsbiol. 13:221-225. 1920. 1806. Leverenz, C. Die meistgebauten landwirtschaftlichen Pflanzenziichten Deutsch- lands mit Ausnahme der Kartoffeln. (The most frequently cultivated agricultural plant breeds of Germany, with exception of potatoes.] Landwirtschaftskammer Provinz Sachsen. 79 p. Hermann Kuhnt: Halle, 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1704. 1807. Levy, Fritz. Die Kernverhaltnisse bei parthenogenetischen Froschen. Ein Beitrag zur Physiologic und Pathologic der Zelle. [The nuclear relations in parthenogenetic frogs. A contribution to the physiology and pathology of the cell.] Sitzungsber. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1920:417-425. 1920. 1808. Little, C. C. A note on the origin of piebald spotting in dogs. Jour. Heredity 11: 12-15. 1 fig. 1920. — -Piebald spotting may be altered in extent by selection within a race showing a minute degree of spotting, but since the factor is hypostatic it will not appear in a self-colored race unless by recombination or mutation. Two cases, a spotted Scottish terrier puppy and spotted puppies in two litters of Airedale terriers, are given with their pedigrees, with an explanation of which of the parents may have been responsible in bringing in the hypostatic factor. — /. H. Beaumont. 1809. Lotsy, J. P. Over Gallus tcmminckii G. R. Gray en over de eikleur der wilde Hoenderlinneonten. [Gallus tcmminckii G. R. Gray and the egg color of the wild Linncan species of fowl.] Genetica 2: 400-404. 1 fig. Sept., 1920. 1810. LuBoscH, WiLHELM. Das Problem der ticrischen Gcnealogie. Nebst einer Eror- terung des genealogischen Zusammcnhanges der Steinheimer Schnecken. [The problem of animal genealogy. Also a statement of the genealogical relations of the Steinheim snails.] Arch. Mikrosk. Anat. 94:459-499. 1920. 1811. LtJHNiNG. Die erbliche Geschlechtsverkniipfung. [Hereditary sex-determina- tion.] Deutsch. Landw. Tierzuchtg. 22 : 77-78. 1918.— Author argues that the sex of off- spring is determined by that of the weaker of the parents as the race would become extinct if the reverse were true. He holds that in general offspring inherit their characteristics largely from the parent of the opposite sex. Inheritance of thick lower lip of the Habsburgs is dis- cussed briefly as illustration.— 5eu;aZZ Wright. 262 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 1812. MacLeod, J. The quantitative method in biology. 15 X 23 cm., v + 228 p., 27 fig. Longmans, Green & Co. : New York, 1919. — The thesis taken by the author is that all classi- fied groups, species, etc.; all variation, Mendelian or otherwise; in fact all biological phe- nomena, should be measured and reduced to constants, similar to those of the physicist. These constants will then form the basis of exact description necessary to further biological progress. — Up to the present, the great variation of biological phenomena has barred the application of this method. Preliminary study of the specimen reveals certain primordia, or simple elementary properties of characters, which are to be measured in order to find the constants mentioned above. The primordia for each subject are to be determined independ- ently by preliminary study. — The rest of the book is given over to expansion and illustra- tion of this thesis. Discussion of quantitative methods is merely a side issue, only the simplest of them being used for illustration purposes. [See also Bot. Absts. 4, Entries 758, 352S.]— John W. Gowen. 1813. Matthews, J. R. Hybridism and classification in the genus Rosa. New Phytol. 19: 153-171. July-Oct., 1920. — Classification of roses is complicated by natural hybridiza- tion, for which there is abundant opportunity. A number of Rosa species are now acknowl- edged hybrids due to their intermediateness. Others are suggested by sterility, on basis of Jeffrey's "crypthybrid" principle. Author classifies genus in 5 sections and 18 groups. Members of each group differ in only a few unit characters. For each group author uses some or all of the following unit characters, and shows that majority of combinations theoretically possible have already been recognized and usually given specific names: hairy vs. glabrous leaflets (Hh); biserrate vs. not biserrate (Bb); presence vs. absence of foliar glands (Gg); hispid vs. smooth peduncles (), known in Turkestan as "Machmil i Tetschon" and employed in the treat- ment of diarrhoea and articular disease; the unripe inflorescence of Piper longum, known as "Dari Pelpel" and used for headaches; star anise, known as "Badian Kuttaie;" Coriander fruits, which are smoked for headache; Nux Vomica seeds, known as "Gargemorit" or "Kut- schilla," emploj'ed in the treatment of backache; Myrobalans from Terminalia Chebula Eetz Combretacea?), known as "Chaliletsch asfar," which is crushed, boiled, and drunk with tea and sugar for anaemia; the unripe fruit of Myrobalani nigra var. indica, known as "Chaliletsch Kara" and used as the preceding; the seeds of a Sisymbrixim, probably Sisymhrium Sophia, natively called "Chabba" and purgativ in action; the seeds of Enlada scandens, which are eaten with sugar for backache and known to the natives as "Kurri Katar;" the galls and fruits of a Pistacia used for stomachache; Aleppo Galls, known as "Apas" and "Masi" and smoked with tobacco by the natives for headache and pain in the eyes; the blue flowers and verticil- lasters of an Echiinn, employed in heartburn and fever; Mecca Senna leaves, known as "Semeh Mekeh," which are boiled with milk as a purgative; an inferior variety of Traga- canth, called "Katira," which is crushed and soft-boiled as a probable remedy for headache; Gum Arabic, known as "Samgh i arabi," is dissolved in hot water as eye drops; an inferior grade of Hashish called "Nascha" is smoked or eaten as a narcotic; sticks of red bolus, which Dragendorff mentions as "Tillae armani" and "Gul armani," are employed in the treat- ment of diseases of the oral cavity; a fine red crystalline powder called "Schingab" is applied externally in the treatment of child rash; a globular, brownish-red structure, about 4 cm. in diameter and consisting of a mixture of fennel, the fruits of an Apium species, and Trachyspermum copticum L., is powdered and taken with milk as a sedative; a coarse brownish powder mixed with numerous whitish particles and consisting of powdered Veratrum rhizome and powdered cloves, is employed as a snuff for headache. — H. W. Youngken. 2086. CoATES, U. Aylmer. Poke root in medicine. Pharm. Jour. 105:454. 1920. — A review of the therapeutic values and medicinal uses of the fruit and root of Phytolacca decan- dra from the literature of the last century. — E. N. Gathercoal. 2087. Couch, James F., and Leigh T. Giltner. An experimental study of Echinacea therapy. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 63-84. 1920. — Various preparations of Echinacea, the "spe- cific medicine echinacea," the fluid extract, and "subculoyd inula and echinacea," were studied as remedies in several types of infections and allied diseases, both acute and chronic, in guinea pigs. The material was not effective in the case of botulism, tetanus, septicemia, rattlesnake venom, tuberculosis, and trypanosomiasis. — Definite evidence of organic effects from the echinacea itself was not obtained. — D. Reddick. 2088. Clark, A. Wayne, R. O. Smith, and Leroy Forman. Purity standards for absorb- ent cotton. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9: 958-965. 1920. — A report of the work on extrac- tion methods for impurities in absorbent cotton. Authors find themselves unable to formu- late a satisfactory method for testing for the degree of absorbency which will express the 300 PHARMACOGNOSY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, results in a scientific way. As the U. S. Pharm. IX does not contain a water extraction test, authors suggest that one be included in the forthcoming revision. The weight of the residue obtained, as per method given, should not exceed 0.25 per cent. Authors see no value in or need for an alcohol extraction, as the water and ether extractions suffice. In a comparison of the Soxhlet, U. S. Pharm., and the Aliquot methods for ether extract, practically all ether- soluble material was obtained by the first method in six hours. The U. S. Pharm. method gave about 40 per cent and the Aliquot method about 50 per cent. Suggested standard require- ments for absorbent cotton for the forthcoming revision of the U. S. Pharm. are given. — • Anton Hogstad, Jr. 2089. Eberle, E. G. World trade, production and consumption of crude botanical drugs. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9: 947. 1920. — An editorial discussion of a recent report of the U. S. Tariff Commission, in which the probable future of American drug cultivation and, in connection therewith, the world trade, production, and consumption of crude botanical drugs are considered. Author quotes various portions of the report referring to the American crude drug industry in which it is recommended that the American industry be aided and consideration given to the advisability of promoting and continuing cultivation of the indis- pensable drugs which have been successfully produced under American climate, labor, and economic conditions. — Anton Hogstad, Jr. 2090. EcKLER, Charles R. A contribution to the pharmacology of cotton root bark. Lilly Sci. Bull. 1 : 349-368. 3 pi. 1920. — Animal tests were made on several commercial samples of green and dried cotton root bark, and on the bark of thirteen different varieties of cotton. These tests were made in comparison with ergot and pituitary extract. Several different animal tests were used, including the cock's comb method, blood pressure determi- nations, and the isolated and intact uterus methods. The conclusions reached were that the physiological activity of cotton root bark was not comparable to that possessed by ergot. — Fred A. Miller. I 2091. Glover, Geo. H. Plant poisoning. Amer. Jour. Vet. Med. 15:315-316, 338. 1920. — An address delivered before the Missouri Valley Veterinary Association covering in a general way the conditions under which the poisoning of livestock takes place. — C. D. Marsh. 2092. Greenish, Henrt G. Uzara: what is it? Pharm. Jour. 105:474-475. 1920.— A new remedy useful for dysentery and diarrhoea, originally obtained from native medicine- men of the Lake district of equatorial Africa. It is the root probably of a species of the Asclepiadaceae, a shrub with long thin twigs and long narrow leaves in pairs. The root is large and woody, somewhat aromatic and very bitter. It is exhausted with 10 per cent alcohol. A number of active principles have been isolated. To one is attributed a soothing action on the intestine; one or several others act on the circulation and on the nerve-system. Intra- venous injections of small doses produce a rise in blood pressure similar to the action of adrenalin. The Biological-Agricultural Institute in Amani submitted herbarium material and root samples of a drug, used by the Kaffirs for colic, which was identified as Dicoma ano- mala of the Compositae. It is questionable whether this plant is the true source of uzara. — E. N. Gathercoal. 2093. Holmes, E. M. On the use of poke root in medicine, Pharm. Jour. 105 : 417. 1920. — That Phytolacca decandra possesses active properties there can be no doubt. Its physio- logical action and its chemical constituents seem worthy of careful investigation, especially the saponin, which may possess haemolytic activity. The drug appears to be especially valuable in resolving tumors of the breast. The fresh root, undried, is the most active, and is applied externally over the tumor and kept wet with the tincture until well-developed pustular sores are formed. Several cases of tumor and cancer of the breast as also of epithe- lioma are cited in which tumor resolution with complete cure has resulted. — E. N. Gathercoal. . 2094. HoMMEL, Philemon E. The lemon. Practical Druggist 38ii: 20-21. 1920.— An account of the history, structure, constituents and medicinal uses of the lemon. — Wm. B. Day. No. 3. April, 1921] PHARMACOGNOSY 301 2095. Jermstad, Alex. Sur la determination de la teneur de I'opium en morphine. [On the determination of the strength of opium in morphine.] Repertoire Pharm. 32:257-262. 1920.— All methods may be grouped under six headings, viz: (1) Alcohol; (2) water (Helfen- berg's); (3) lime; (4) precipitation and reduction; (5) polarimeter; (6) other methods. Method 3 is employed by the French, English, Dutch, Japanese, Spanish, and American Pharmaco- poeias. The author proposes a modification of Helfenberg's method which has the follow- ing advantages: (1) Use of equal quantities of opium and reagents; (2) methyl-red is exact and active as an indicator; (3) no acetic ether; (4) no results rendered inexact by alkalinity of water; (5) possibility of combining the determination of morphine with that of the extract of opium. — Heber W. Young'ken. 2096. Kilmer, F. B., and Ralph O. Smith. Belladonna cultivation in a practical way. Amer. Jour. Pharm. 92 : 620-630. 7 pi. 1920.— A brief summary of the results obtained in the cultivation of belladonna at the Johnson & Johnson belladonna farm, since 1900. Authors discuss climatic and soil conditions, methods of cultivation, harvesting, yield, and cultural experiments. — No successful cultivation, as far as the authors are aware, has been made on this continent by sowing seed in open ground. At least two crops of leaves can be harvested from first year plants; from second and third year plants two to four cuttings are usual. The yield of leaves and stems is greatest from second and third year plants. The yield per 1000 plants was as follows: Second year plants— herb 1177 pounds, alkaloid 0.891 pound; first year seedlings (potted plants)— herb 527 pounds, alkaloid 0.313 pound; first year seedlings (cold frame plants)— herb 534 pounds, alkaloid 0.289 pound. — Authors also submit data to the effect that the tops of belladonna, including stems, fully meet the requirements of the U. S. P.; they see no reason why belladonna herb, especially that obtained from cultivated plants, should not be admitted to the Pharmacopoeia under proper restrictions as to alkaloidal con- tent, etc. — Anton Hogstad, Jr. 2097. King, E. D., Jr. Poisonous plants of the south. Jour. Amer. Vet. Med. Assoc. 57: 302-313. 1920.— This is a list of plants with brief remarks regarding properties, and treat- ment of poisoned animals. — C. D. Marsh. 2098. MiCHELETTi. Piedmontese peppermint oil. [From La Parfumerie Moderne Oct. 1920.] Chem. & Druggist 93: 1507. 1920.— Peppermint oil distilled from Mitcham pepper- mint, cultivated about Vigone and Pancalieri and in the province of Turin, is of exceptional quality on account of the delicacy of its perfume and sweetness of its aroma. Over 25,000 kilos are produced annually. — E. N. Gathercoal. 2099. Pammel, L. H. Alsike clover poisoning. Amer. Jour. Vet. Med. 15:437-438. 1920. — A description of some cases of poisoned horses with an account of the symptoms exhibited. — C. D. Marsh. 2100. Pammel, L. H. Castor seeds poisonous. Amer. Jour. Vet. Med. 15: 171-172. 1920. — The author quotes E. White, apparently from a letter, who gives a detailed account of the poisoning of horses by castor beans, with a description of the symptoms, post-mortem find- ings, and treatment. — C. D. Marsh. 2101. Pammel, L. H. European morning-glory suspected of being poisonous. Amer. Jour. Vet. Med. 15 : 439. 1920. — This is an account of a sick horse which possibly had been poisoned by Convolvulus arvensis. — C. D. Marsh. 2102. Pammel, L. H. Is the dogwood poisonous? Amer. Jour. Vet. Med. 15: 66. 1920. — The author in reply to a query about the poisonous properties of Cornv^ asperifolia expresses his opinion that it is not toxic. — C. D. Marsh. 2103. Pammel, L. H. Ground cherry leaves supposed to be poisonous. Amer. Jour. Vet. Med. 14: 606. 1919.— In reply to a query about Physalis longifolia it is stated that the green fruit and leaves are poisonous. — C. D. Marsh. 302 PHARMACOGNOSY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 2104. Pammel, L. H. Hogs poisoned by young cockleburs. Amer. Jour. Vet. Med. 15: 385-386. 1920. — This is an account of the deaths of some hogs, presumably from eating cocklebur, with remarks on cocklebur poisoning. — C. D. Marsh. 2105. Pammel, L. H. Poisoning from silage and moulds. Amer. Jour. Vet. Med. 14: 605-606. 1919.— Attention is called to the fact that certain fungi are pathogenic and others produce toxic substances so that there is always danger in feeding moldy forage. — C. D. Marsh. 2106. Pammel, L. H. Suspicious poisonous weeds. Amer. Jour. Vet. Med. 15:384-385. 1920. — A brief account is given of Lactuca canadensis, Oxybaphus nyctagineus, and Lactuca scariola.-r-C. D. Marsh. 2107. Sheppard, Philip A. E. African aboriginal therapy. Amer. Jour. Public Health 10:227-235. 1920. 2108. Wallis, T. E. Analytical microscopy, IX. Pharm. Jour. 105: 376-378. Fig. 20-21. 1920. — Microsublimation of active principles of plants and microchemical precipitations in plant cells are discussed. — E. N. Gathercoal. 2109. VAN DER WiELEN, P. On the cultivation of Chenopodium ambrosioides anthel- minticum. [From Onze Tuinen Aug. 17, 1920.] Chem. & Druggist 93:1334. 1920.— The discovery in 1912 that the oil distilled from the seed of this plant was a most effective remedy- in ankylostomiasis (hookworm disease), has resulted in a world-wide demand. The principal source has been from cultivation near Baltimore. Recently its cultivation in Delhi and else- where in the Dutch East Indies and in Holland has proven very successful. The oil produced appears to be fully equal to American oil. — E. N. Gathercoal. 2110. WiLMOT, F. C, AND G. W. Robertson. Senecio disease. [Taken from South African Med. Rec] Jour. Amer. Med. Assoc. 75: 1524. 1920.— In 1918 sickness of obscure causation, accompanied by abdominal pain and vomiting, occurred in the George district of Cape Province, South Africa. The disease was shown to be due to meal and bread contain- ing the seeds and portions of the plants of Senecio ilicifolius and Senecio burchelli, weeds in the wheat fields of that vicinity. — Win. B. Day. 2111. Yoxjngken, H. W., AND G. A. Slothower. Rhus venenata DC. Amer. Jour. Pharm. 92: 695-701. Fig. 1-4. 1920.— A histological study of the stems and leaves of Rhus venenata with some observations on the poisonous constituent. The resin canals of the stem 'Which extend from the bast region and penetrate the medullary region, where they end blindly, are narrow-branching vessels, filled with a dark, reddish-brown substance of a resinous nature. This resinous substance did not respond to the gummy lignin tests (Youngken) as applied to the stems of the Myricaceae. It did however, upon treatment with alcoholic potash, form a nigrescent compound, a reaction characteristic of the poisonous substance causing the dermatitis produced by the poisonous species of Rhus. — In the study of the leaf non-glandu- lar, unicellular, and uniseriate hairs were noted in the dorsal region, many of which con- tained the resinous substance responding to the nigrescent reaction. Resin canals were noted in the vascular bundles but not in the mesophyll. To account for the presence of the resin in the hairs the authors are inclined to believe that it may be a direct product of the protoplasm. A series of successive extractions was made with petroleum ether, alcohol and water respectively. The poisonous principle was extracted with the petroleum ether. This extract applied to the inner forearm produced in 24 hours inflammation with violent itching and in 36 hours vesication. — Anton Hogstad, Jr. No. 3. April, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 303 PHYSIOLOGY B. M. DtJGGAH, Editor C. W. Dodge, Assistant Editor GENERAL 2112. Massart, Jean. Elements de biologie generale et de botanique. [Elements of general biology and botany.] Vol. 1, Part L 208 p., 188 fig. Maurice Lamertin: Bruxelles, 1920.— The complete work will consist of 2 volumes aggregating 640 pages, with 500 figures. Volume I, Part I, contains General Biology and Part II, Protista. Volume II will consist of Part III, Metaphyta. (Protista include protozoans and protophytes.) — General Biology, here abstracted, is divided into three chapters: (I) Life and death, (II) the cell, (III) the factors in evolution. In Chapter I are presented the ten headings considered below: (1) The forces active in organisms. Herein is revealed one of the author's characteristic vie-svpoints. The opening sentence reads, "It has taken long centuries to rid biology of the prejudice that the activity of living things is different from that of inorganic nature." Bichat's definition, "Life is the ensemble of conditions which resists death," is given as representative of the view- point of naturalists up to about 1800, organisms being considered as showing a vital force not only distinct from, but directly opposed to, such forces as heat, gravitation, and light. Artificial synthesis of complex animal and vegetable substances, energy transformations in livingthings, and other considerations lead the author to state: "No vital force exists that does not resolve itself wholly into chemical and physical forces Because most vital processes are too complex to be interpreted by us at present, is it a reason for hiding our ignorance behind the fallacious doctrine of a vital force?" Brief mention is made of the rela- tive importance of heat, molecular forces, gravitation, light, chemical energy, electricity, magnetism, X-rays, and radioactivity. (2) Biogenic elements. The unique properties of the element carbon, which so admirably qualify it to be the essential constituent of all "living molecules," are discussed. (3) The origin of life. (4) Conditions favorable to life. Here are discussed: integrity of structure, temperature, osmotic pressure, manometric pressure, oxidizable substances and oxygen, environment unfavorable to life. (5) Specificity of re- quirements. (6) Accommodation to temperature, water, osmotic pressure, nutrition, oxygen; influence on distribution. (7) Retarded activity and latent life. (8) Death. (9) The germi- nalline. (10) The loss of mortality. (11) The duration of life. — Chapter II presents a consid- eration of the cell in four sections: (1) Cell structure, cell secretions, intercellular communi- cations, cell evolution, relations between cell organs. (2) Arrangement of cells. (3) Func- tions of the cell. The last topic is discussed under three headings: (a) Molecular phenomena, intracellular pressure, turgescence and plasmolysis, osmotic pressure and growth, relation of ameboid movements to intercellular circulation and surface tension, hygroscopic movements, (b) Metabolism of the cell, cellular enzymes, production of energy, elimination of waste products, (c) Irritability. Protoplasm is considered as composed of more or less liquid colloids held in a reticulum of more or less solid colloids. Stimuli are treated in four sections : (a) The stimulus, sense organs, anaesthesia, nature of stimuli (internal or external) ; (b) conduc- tion of stimulus; (c) the reaction (tonus, interferences, response); (d) duration and intensity of reflex periods. (4) Geriesis of cells, including determination of sex. — In Chapter III, the discussion is carried out under four headings: (1) Heredity. (2) Variability, fluctuation and mutation. (3) Selection. (4) Method in phytogeny. — Throughout the discussions the mechan- ical, physical, and chemical aspects of vital phenomena are emphasized, and an abundance of illustrative material is drawn from unicellular forms and from higher plants and animals, the latter being frequently contrasted and compared. Experiments are described to illus- trate important phenomena. — Lee M. Hutchins. PROTOPLASM, MOTILITY 2113. BoLTE, Elisabeth. Uber die Wirkung von Licht und Kohlensaure auf die Beweg- lichkeit griiner und farbloser Schwarmzellen. [The effect of light and carbonic acid on the motility of green and colorless swarm cells.] Jahrb. Wiss. Bot. 59: 288-324. 1919.— An inves- 304 PHYSIOLOGY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, ligation of the tonic stimulation of various motile cells by light and carbon dioxide. The following were found to be negatively photokinetic in the sense in which Engelmann employed the term, that is, underwent light rigor when illuminated but continued for a relatively long period in darkness: 2 species of Phacus, 2 species of Chlamydomonas, and the zoospores of Ulothrix subtilissima. Chlamydomonas variabilis, Carteria ovata, Euglena gracilis, species of Trachelomonas, Volvox aureus, Pandorina Morum, Eudorina elegans, Gonium pectorale, and Lepocinclis texta were found to be positively photokinetic organisms, a category to which heretofore only the purple bacteria were known to belong. Light was found to be without influence upon the motility of Euglena hyalina, Chilomonas curvata, Menoidium incurvum, Polytoma uvella, Polytomella agilis, and Euglena proxima. Some observations indicate that dark rigor is closely related to the cessation of photosynthesis, but in certain cases, as in that of Chlamydomonas variabilis, there seems to be no relation. No instance of change from positive to negative kinesis after long and intense illumination, such as was reported by Engelmann for the purple bacteria, was observed by the author. Of 19 photokinetic organisms 17 were found to be phototactic, and of IS phototactic organisms 17 were photo- kinetic. In Volvox aureus, Euglena gracilis, Trachelomonas, Eudorina elegans, Chlamydo- monas, Pandorina Morum,, Euglena hyalina, Euglena acus, and Menoidium incurvum motility was lost in a carbonic acid-free medium. In some cases this was the result of the absence of free H-ions but in others it was apparently a specific effect of the absence of carbonic acid. — R. M. Holman. 2114. Metzner, p. Die Bewegung und Reizbarkeit der bipolar gegeisselten Spirillen. [The movement and stimulus response of spirilla with bipolar flagella.] Jahrb. Wiss. Bot. 59: 325-412. 1919. — By observation of the active organisms in the dark field by rhythmic inter- mittent illumination the author has investigated the mechanics of the movement of Spirillum volutans and Spirillum undula under normal conditions and when subjected to chemical and thermal stimulation. These organisms have a single tuft of flagella at each end, consisting of as many as 25 separate flagella united into one rather coarse cord which functions like a single flagellum. This is spiral in form and when active describes rotation figures of various forms, the anterior one a bell opening backward and the posterior one a cup-shaped figure also opening towards the rear. The rotation of this composite flagellum results presumably from the contraction, one after another, of the component flagella. The organism is pro- pelled through the water in a straight path as the result of the rotation imparted to the body of the Spirillum by the activity of the flagella. The rates of the rotation of the two flagella are about the same. In S. volutans it is about forty per second and the rotation rate of the body about thirteen per second. The most common reaction to any stimulus is a backward movement resulting from simultaneous reversal of the direction of rotation of the flagella. The center for the perception of stimulus is apparently at the base of the flagella. Transfer of stimulus from one end to the other of the organism is so rapid that normally reaction by both flagella is practically simultaneous. In case of very weak stimulation or lowered irri- tability a distinct interval may intervene between the reactions, or reaction may be restricted to the end directly stimulated. Moderate temperature increase merely accelerates flagella movement, but further warming checks it, presumably because of exhaustion of raw materials resulting from great increase of normal processes of metabolism. When photodynamically active pigments are present in the surrounding medium flagella activity is checked by light but it may be resumed if the photodynamic action is interrupted in time. Depression of tem- perature causes reversal of the movement of the flagella and continuous diffuse cooling results in rhythmically repeated reactions, as does also a weak homogeneous solution of cocaine or chloroform or any continuous stimulation. — R. M. Holman. DIFFUSION, PERMEABILITY 2115. Gtjerin, p., et Ch. Lormand. Action plasmolysante d'un certain nombre de vapeurs. [Plasmolytic action of certain gases.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1598- 1601. 1920. — Methyl alcohol is found to act more quickly than ethyl alcohol, and benzylic No. 3, April, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 305 alcohol acts more slowly. Phenols cause the liberation of hydrocyanic acid. Aldehydes also cause the liberation of hydrocyanic acid, but without plasmolj'sis in proportions of 10-20 drops to a liter. Trioxymethylene 0.2 gm. per liter, and 10 drops of 25 per cent formaldehyde, cause the liberation of HCN. Acroleine, 1 drop per liter, causes plasmolysis, and with 50 drops per liter it stops fermentation. Quinone, pyridine, HCl, and H2SO4 cause plasmolysis. — C. H. Farr. 2116. Lewis, Fraxcis J., and Gwtnethe M. Tuttle. Osmotic properties of some plant cells at low temperature. Ann. Bot. 34: 405-416. Fig. 1-5. 1920. — -The authors carried out serial determinations of osmotic pressure, electrical conductivity, and amounts of sucrose, maltose, and glucose in leaf tissues of both woody and herbaceous evergreens. They hesi- tate to record any correlation between these values and the temperature records on the results of the work on one season only, but they note the occurrence of maximum osmotic concentration either in December or in March. They found that the osmotic pressure was due chiefly to nonelectrolytes, the concentration of electrolytes changing but little throughout the season. Sugars disappear progressively from winter to summer, glucose being the last to be removed. An important fact in relation to resistance to frost-injury is revealed by super- cooling experiments. Whereas the sap extracted from leaves of Pyrola froze at about — 3°C., the leaves themselves could be cooled to — 32°C. before freezing. A significant observation is also recorded regarding the chloroplast, which was seen to become disorganized during the winter months, the chlorophyll distributing itself around the nucleus, coalescing to form plastids again in April.— F. J. Lewis. 2117. Shull, Charles A., and S. P. Shull. Absorption of moisture by gelatin in a sat- urated atmosphere. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7:318-326. 1 fig. 1920.— The authors summarize briefly the work of von Schroder on the absorption of water by gelatin from liquid water and from a saturated atmosphere. On repeating a part of his experiments they obtained very different results, finding that gelatin absorbed much more water from a saturated atmos- phere than von Schroder reported. Instead of reaching an equilibrium at a gain of 40 per cent in about a week, this absorption continued steadily until the end of the experiment (47 days), when water equal to over 170 per cent of the gelatin had been absorbed. — Equations for the curves of moisture intake are given. The authors call attention to the difficulty of maintaining a saturated atmosphere, and suggest that the difference between their results and von Schroder's is due to their greater success in this respect. — E. W . Sinnott. WATER RELATIONS 2118. BiRCH-HiRSCHFELD, LuiSE. Untersuchungen iiber die Ausbreitungsgeschwindig- keit geloster stoffe in der Pfianze. [Rate of transfer of dissolved substances in the plant.] Jahrb. Wiss. Bot. 59: 171-262. 1919. — The author has investigated in various plants the rate of conduction of solutions of lithium nitrate, ammonium carbonate, alcohol, methylene blue, eosin, and other substances in the parenchyma of the cortex and in the phloem. The downward movement of certain of these solutions in the water-conducting channels, simul- taneous with the upward movement of the transpiration stream, was also studied. The experiments were undertaken with the object of throwing new light upon the natural transfer of materials in the plant. Conduction in the phloem was found to be at approximately the same rate as in the parenchyma, and not in excess of the rate of transfer by simple diffusion. Transpiration proved to be without influence upon the rate of transfer, in the phloem, of the substances employed. Potometer measurements of the water conducted by stems from which a length of the central cylinder had been removed showed the tissues outside the cam- bium to be able to conduct only from loffir to ttj.Vuu of the water required by a normally trans- , piring branch. Lithium nitrate in solution was found to pass, though very slowly, through the thickened and cutinized endodermis of Convallaria majalis. The cuticle of the leaves of a number of plants was found to be relatively highly permeable to lithium nitrate solu- tion, as was shown by the detection of the salt in the leaf and stem at some distance from a point on the intact upper side of a leaf where a drop of the solution had been placed. When 306 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, such a solution was supplied through the cut end of a side branch of a leafy shoot, downward conduction of the salt in the main axis took place even below the leafy region of the latter. The same result was observed even when there was an abundant supply of water from below, and in the absence of any pull by transpiring leaves. It was shown that the water channels under normal conditions function independently of each other. This was particularly clear when an eosin solution entered by a side branch. In such cases the staining in the woody cylinder below the point of attachment of the branch was sharply limited to the side on which the branch was attached. The downward movement observed was at a much lower rate than that of the normal transpiration stream but reached 1 to 10 cm. an hour when a 1 per cent lithium nitrate solution was used. The time required to transport a unit quantity of the salt a given distance was from ^V to sijj of that required by living tissue. However, the author doubts whether the ability of the wood to conduct dissolved substances downward at certain times is sufficient to provide for the necessary downward transport of material in the living plant. — R. M. Holman. 2119. Pfeiffer, T., tJND A. Rippel. Uber den Einfluss von Durstperioden auf das Wachstum der Pflanzen. [Regarding the effects of periods of drouth upon the growth of plants.] Landw. Versuchssta. 96: 353-363. 1920.— Lupines, asparagus, barley, and oats were grown under 2 sets of conditions as regards moisture content of the soil. In one case the moisture content of the soil was maintained at 60 per cent of the water-holding capacity of the soil, and in the other the plants were regularly allowed to go without watering until the moisture content of the soil had fallen to about 30 per cent of its water-holding capacity, after which it was again brought up to 60 per cent. This alternate lowering and raising of the moisture supply was repeated up to harvest time. It was found that under the alternating periods of drouth, crop production was decreased as follows: Lupines 20.5 per cent, asparagus 15.5 per cent, barley 6.2 per cent, and oats 3 per cent as compared with the plants grown under a constant, full supply of soil moisture. It is evident that different kinds of plants vary in their ability to adapt themselves to varying moisture supply .^A. T. Wiancko. MINERAL NUTRIENTS 2120. De Angelis d'Ossat, G. Ancora sul calcaree le viti americane. [American grapes and lime.] Staz. Sper. Agrarie Ital. 53: 97-100. PL 2. 1920.— This is a short contribution upon the subject of adaptation of Vitis Berlandieri, V. Candida, V. rupestris, V. riparia, V. labrusca, and V. vinifera to various concentrations of calcium carbonate in the soil. The conclusion is reached that the above mentioned species can develop normally and with no symptom of chlorosis in soils the concentration of which in CaCOa is much greater than is generally considered safe in practise. The calcimetric scale of Bonnet is found to be of very little value. — A. Bonazzi. 2121. Geilman. tJber die Verbreitung des Titans in Bbden und Pflanzen. [The distri- bution of titanium in soils and plants.] Jour. Landw. 68: 107-124. 1920.^A method of deter- mining the titanium content of soils is given, and its value tested. Analyses of a number of soil samples showed that titanium is very widely distributed in soils, the content varying from a trace to 1 per cent, with most of them showing from 0.3 to 0.6 per cent. Analyses of plants showed titanium always present, the content being greatest in the green parts, and the range being from a trace to 0.27 per cent.— C. E. Leighty. 2122. Gile, p. L., and J. O. Carrero. Cause of lime-induced chlorosis and availability of iron in the soil. Jour. Agric. Ees. 20: 33-61. PI. 5-8. 1920.— A brief review of ecological studies of calciphilous and calcifugous plants, and of vegetative experiments in which chlorosis has been produced by natural or artificial calcareous soils. — -Experimental data are presented from which it is concluded that " 'lime-induced' chlorosis seems to be due simply to a depression in the availability of iron in calcareous soils." Treatment of chlorotic rice with a spray of ferrous sulphate shows that a lack of iron in the plant is at least one cause of the chlorotic appearance. There is no evidence of a general "lime effect" inducing chlorosis.— No. 3, April, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 307 Several pure, organic compounds of iron were used in pot experiments with soil but proved to be poor sources of iron for small rice plants. Bulky organic compounds such as stable manure, velvet bean plants, and tobacco stems when used in considerable quantity gave increased yields over non-fertilized pots, and it is thought that more iron becomes available from such sources.— The availability of iron is slightly greater when the soil moisture is at optimum content for growth than when the soil is too wet, but certain calcareous soils which commonly induce chlorosis in rice fail to do so when the soil is flooded.— D. Reddick. 2123. Johnston, Earl S. Nutrient requirements of the potato plant grown in sand cul- tures treated with "type I" solutions. Soil Sci. 10:389-409. 1 pi, 5 fig. 1920.- Potato sprouts separated from the seed pieces were grown in sand cultures treated with 21 different proportions of monobasic potassium phosphate, calcium nitrate, and magnesium sulphate. The partial osmotic pressure varied by equal increments of | the total osmotic pressure of 1 atm. Cultures giving the highest yields were low in magnesium sulphate, high in calcium nitrate, and medium in potassium phosphate. The lowest were low in calcium nitrate. The average water requirement was 403. No relation between high yield and low water require- ment nor low yield and high water requirement was noted.^H^. J. Robbins. 2124. Pfeiffer, T., und A. Rippel. Der Einfluss von Kalk und Magnesia auf das Wach- stum der Pflanzen. [The influence of lime and magnesia on the growth of plants.] Jour. Landw. 68 : 5-39. 1920.— Experiments were made on oats in pots with clean, washed glass-sand as substratum. Similar yields were produced when the molecular relationship of CaOiMgO fluctuated between the limits 9:1 and 1:1 in 4 different series where increasing doses of CaO and MgO were employed. The amounts of CaO and MgO taken up by the plants as found by analyses led to the same conclusions as those from plant yields. The yield decreased when CaO: MgO relationship increased from 1:1 to 1:9, interpreted as due to lack of lime neces- sary to plant growth and not direct injury from MgO. Where the limit lies at which the un- doubtedly existing antagonistic action between MgO and CaO begins to have a tangible, practical significance was not established. Some indications (not confirmed) of the possi- bility of substituting for CaO and MgO were noted. The CaO and MgO content of oat plants varies within wide limits and is in part unusually high. The general rule that in the seed MgO should be more important, and in the straw CaO, agrees with these experiments only infrequently, and by no means universally. In opposition to other observations, an increas- ing MgO content has not resulted in increased P2O5 accumulation. A certain relationship between CaO:MgO:P206 in the sense used by Loew was not confirmed. The content of the oat plant in K2O and especially in Na20. so far as determined, has a stationary value and does not decrease under the influence of added amounts of CaO and MgO. The lime-potassium law is not confirmed by the foregoing experiments.— C. E. Leighiy. 2125. Pfeiffer, T., und W. Simmermacher. Die Kalkfeindlichkeit der Lupine. [The aversion of the lupine to lime.] Landw. Versuchssta. 93: 1-47. 1919. — 'According to earlier investigations, discussed in articles published in Mitt. Landw. Inst. Bresslau 6: 1911, and 7: 1914, it seemed that while the ill effects of lime upon the lupine were evidently due to the plant's general sensitiveness to alkaline substances, there were indications that lime in itself might be harmful regardless of its combination. It was concluded, however, that other fac- tors might enter into the injury to lupines, such as reduction of phosphorus assimilation, variations in assimilation of iron, and effect upon nodule-forming bacteria. To test these points as well as to further study the effects of different lime compounds, the authors con- ducted pot experiments. The results indicate that lime as calcium carbonate is beneficial rather than harmful. The evidence regarding the effect upon nodule formation and phos- phorus and iron assimilation is inconclusive. It is concluded that further investigations along this line will be necessary. — A. T. Wiancko. 2126. Rippel, August. Beitrag zur Kenntnis des Verhaltens der Aschebestandteile und des Stickstoffs im herbstlich vergilbenden Laubblatt. [Contribution to a knowledge of the behavior of the ash substances and nitrogen in autumn leaves.) Jahresber. Ver. Angew. Bot. 308 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 16: 122-132. 1918. — 'On the basis of his experiments Rippel does not believe in the theory of the conservation to the plant of the potassium, phosphorus, and nitrogen compounds, held by some investigators as the explanation of the recession of these compounds during the yellow- ing of the leaves in the fall. He thinks the reason for the early recession (even before yellow- ing) of potassium from the leaf to the plant is to fulfill some at present unknown function and that the later recession of phosphorus and nitrogen is due to the fact that during yel- lowing of the leaf the transfer of substances from the leaf to the plant far outbalances the flow into the leaf of such substances. — Orton L. Clark. PHOTOSYNTHESIS 2127. Anonymous. Gas as a fertilizer. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1:562. 1920. — This is a brief description of German experiments on the effect of increased amounts of carbon dioxide on the growth and development of plants. — -Chas. H. Otis. 2128. IVI cLean, F. T. Field studies of the carbon dioxide absorption of coco-nut leaves. Ann. Bot. 34: 367-389. 1920. — -There is described a method of measuring the carbon dioxide absorption of field crops in situ under conditions as little modified as possible. The method is found to be satisfactorj* in studying the comparative rates of absorption of leaves from the same plant or different kinds of plants, and also the same leaves at different times of the day. Data obtained by this method show* that the middle-aged leaves of coconut absorb carbon diox- ide more rapidly than young or mature leaves. The maximum rate of absorption is in the morning, followed by a depression at mid-day, a second rise in the afternoon, and a final decline towards sunset. Detached pinnae of a coconut leaf exhibit the maximum absorption at a different time of day from that of the attached ones, but the rates of absorption are similar in both cases. Abaca leaves are found to have an absorption rate similar to coconut while those of sugar cane absorb carbon dioxide much more rapidly. — -Joanne L. Karrer. 2129. Ravenn.\, C. Sulla formazione dell'amido nelle piante verdi. [The formation of starch in green plants.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei Roma Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) V, 29': 148-150. 1920.^The author replies to an article by Polacci (Atti Istit. Bot. Univ. Pavia II, 27:29. 1917) criticising the author's previous article (Rendiconti V, 25i:649. 1916).— i^. M. Blodgett. 2130. Wright, R. C. An apparatus for determining small amounts of carbon dioxide. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 368-370. 1 fig. 1920.— The author has developed a light, compact, and sensitive apparatus for measuring the amount of carbon dioxide in the air, for special use in storage plants. Its structure and manipulation are described. — E. W. Sinnott. 2131. WuRMSER, Rene. Action sur la chlorophylle des radiations de differentes longuers d'onde. [The effect on chlorophyll of rays of different wave lengths.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:1610-1612. 1920.— Photochemical susceptibility is found to be related to wave length in approximately the proportion of the absorption constants, except in the case of minimum absorption where it decreases very rapidly. The radiation of the two principal bands of red and violet are equally active for equal energy values.— C. H. Farr. METABOLISM (GENERAL) 2132. BouRQUELOT, ET Bridel. Obtcntion biochimique du sucre de cane a partir du gen- tianose. [Sucrose from gentianose by biochemical methods.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171:11-15. 1920. 2133. CiAMiciAN, G., E C. Ravenna. Sul contegno di alcune sostanze organiche nei vegetali. Nota XII. [Upon the behavior of some organic substances in plants.] Gazz. Chim. Ital. 50: 13-46. Fig. 1-17. 1920.— This is a continuation of the work published by the authors upon the action of organic substances on the growth of young seedlings of Phaseolus. In the present contribution the plants studied were: Phaseolus, Cucurbiia, Vicia, and Lyco- No. 3, April, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 309 persicum. The compounds studied were methylamine, ethylamine, propylamine, butyl- amine, amylamine, isoamylamine, formamide, acetamide, butyric acid, isobutyric, oxalic, and succinic acids; potassium, methyl, and ethyl tartrates; sa ts of trimethylammonium; betaine, pyridine, picoline, quinoline, isoquinoline, quinaldine, cocaine, ecgonine, nor-ecgo- nine; and the methylic ether of nor-ecgonine. Caffeine, theobromine, nicotine, codeine, and morphine were also studied. A large variation in behavior towards the growing plants was observed, some being extremely toxic, others only producing etiolation and others being without action. Some of the compounds used have a stimulating effect upon the formation of chlorophyll with a resultant deeper shade of green in the leaves, and a greater production of starch. Trimethylamine, pyridine, piperidine, caffeine, theobromine, and pyrocatechine were found in the pulp of the bean plants after they had grown in solutions containing these substances.— The second part of the paper is given to the study of the transformation of the compounds in the pulp of Spinacia. Asparagine was found to be transformed into acetic aldehyde, acetic and succinic acids; lactic acid was synthesized into a compound which yielded it again on treatment with emulsin; salicylic acid behaved similarly to lactic acid, but it also gave rise to a small quantity of volatile acids. — A. Bonazzi. 2134. CiAMiciAN, G., E C. Ravenna. SuU-infiuenza di alcune sostanze organiche sullo sviluppo delle piante. Nota IV. [On the influence of some organic substances on the develop- ment of plants.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei Roma Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. eXat.) V, 291; 7-13. 1920.— This is a continuation of experiments previously reported (Rendiconti V, 26^: 4; 27': 38; 29': 13) in which kidney-bean plants in cotton in germinators were watered with solutions one to a thousand of substances being tested. Tested in this way methylamine, ethylamine, propylamine, butylamine, and amylamine showed a diminishing toxicity (except in the case of the substance first mentioned), which paralleled the increasing length of the chain of carbon atoms. Isoamylamine was more harmful than normal amylamine and produced an albinism similar to that produced by nicotine. Similarly the isobutyrate of potassium was more harmful than the normal butyrate. Foramide was deleterious while acetamide was not. Oxalic acid caused a poorer growth than succinic acid. Methyl and ethyl tartrate produced spots on the primordial foliage while potassium tartrate was harmless. Quinoline, isoquinoline, and quinaldine were all poisonous, the last most so. While cocaine proved strongly toxic, ecgonine and the methyl ether of nor-ecgonine only caused a few spots on the first leaves and nor-ecgonine was without effect. A few experiments were made with other plants which were in general only affected by the more toxic substances and showed considerable differences in behavior. That theobromine and caffeine stimulate a production of starch was confirmed. Spectroscopic examination of alcoholic extracts of certain experi- mental plants, dark in color, showed only quantitative differences.— F. M. Blodgett. 2135. Ghirlanda, Carlo. SuUe sostanze tanniche del "Morus alba." [Tannic sub- stances in Morus alba.] Atti. R. Accad. Lincei Roma Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) V, 29': 146-148. 1920.— Analyses were made after the methods of Lowenthal and Schroder of various parts of the mulberry tree. Except in the wood of the branches, considerable quantities of tannins were found in the different parts, the amount increasing in the follow- ing order: wood of the roots, cortex of the branches; cortex of the roots; foliage. The foliage contained more tannic substances in the morning than in the evening. — F. M. Blodgett. 2136. Hefs, K., xjnd W. Weltzien. Uber die Fahigkeit der Pflanze optische Antipoden aufzubauen. [The possibility of plants building up optical antipodes.] Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 53: 119-129. 1920.— Experunents attempting to cause racemization of d. coniine and d. methyl coniine gave negative results. — Henry Schmitz. 2137. Jones, Walter. The chemical constitution of adenine nucleotide and of yeast nucleic acid. Amer. Jour. Physiol. 52: 193-202. 1920. 2138. Kappen, H., und M. Zapfe. Die Aziditat der Pflanzensafte unter dem Einfluss einer Kalkdiingung. [The acidity of plant juices under the influence of liming.] Landw. 310 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, Versuchssta. 93: 135-146. 1919. — Beans and lupines were grown on a loamy sand soil without lime and with 1, 5, and 10 per cent additions of ground limestone. Harmful effects in propor- tion to the amount of liming were shown during the earlier stages of growth by yellowing of the leaves and even dying of the lower leaves in the worst cases, but these apparently harm- ful effects disappeared as the plants grew older. The hydrogen-ion concentrations of the juices of the roots and tops were determined at the time of blossoming and were found to be the same regardless of the amount of liming. The conclusion is that though plants grown on limed soil probably take up more lime, they are able to maintain the same acidity relations in their juices as on unlimed soil. It is pointed out that these determinations were made only at the time of blossoming and that there might be differences in the acidity of the plant juices at other stages of development. — A. T. Wiancko. 2139. Ltjigi, Bernardini. La nicotina nel tabacco (contributo alio studio della genesi e della funzione degli alcaloidi.) [Nicotine in tobacco (contribution to the study of the genesis and function of the alkaloids).] Atti R. Accad. Lincei Roma Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) V, 29^ : 62-66. 1920.— The amount of nicotine in different parts of tobacco plants at differ- ent ages was determined. Analysis of very young plants with minute first leaves showed nicotine when grown in light but not when grown in darkness. Plants severely pruned did not utilize the nicotine as reserve nitrogen, and germinating tobacco seeds were retarded in germination by very dilute solutions. — F. M. Blodgett. 2140. PoNSELLE, A. Determination de la reaction des milieux de culture par la mesure de la concentration en ions hydrogene. [Determination of the hydrogen-ion concentration of culture media.] Bull. Inst. Pasteur 18: 601-610. 1920. — This is a short review of the theory of acidity and of the principles underlying the methods for the determination of hydrogen-ion concentrations. A few examples of simple calculations to be used in determining Ph values and a short exposition of the technique of the colorimetric methods are given. The work of ScRENSEN, HoRWiTZ, Meyer and OsTENBERG, Clark and LxTBS, Homer, Ponselle, Bar- NETT and Chapman, and of Fennel and Fisher is reviewed. The reader is cautioned against the use of the colorimetric method in adjusting the reaction of deeply colored media, and reference is made in this connection to the electrometric methods. The contribution is in fact a guide to be used in daily bacteriological operations and not a theoretical discussion of the subject. — A. Bonazzi. 2141. Ravenna, C, e G. Bosinelli. Sul dipeptide dell'acido aspartico e suUa funzione dell'asparagina nelle piante. [Upon the aspartic acid dipeptide and the function of asparagine in the plant.] Gazz. Chim. Ital. 50: 281-288. 1920.— ^This is a continuation of the inves- tigations published in 1919. The authors find that after long boiling, solutions of asparagine gave the biuret reaction, and were precipitated by lead acetate. The precipitate filtered and deleaded with H2S gave a white amorphous powder of the following elementary composition: C, 38.78; H, 4.85; N, 11.60. Aspartic acid on the other hand yielded only ammonium aspar- tate. The authors conclude that the acid amides and not the simple amino acids are directly concerned in the building of polypeptides and the subsequent protein synthesis in plants. As PiUTTi claims asparagine to be a /3-asparagine the polypeptide obtained must be formed by the linking of the amidic group on one side with the carboxylic on the other and should be isomeric with the /3-polypeptide obtained by Fischer and Koenigs from 2-5 diketopipera- zin-3-6 diacetic acid. — -A. Bonazzi. METABOLISM (NITROGEN RELATIONS) 2142. Cauda, A. Metodo pratico per svelare negli schizomiceti I'attitudine a fissare I'azoto libero. (Nota preliminare.) [A practical method for the detection of nitrogen fixing properties in bacteria. A preliminary note.] Staz. Sper. Agrarie Ital. 53: 79-80. 1920. — The growth of unicellular algae, such as Chlorella vulgaris, Prolococcus, and Chlorococcus, upon calcium carbonate-malto-gelatine is distinctly variable and directly correlated with nitrogen content of the medium. On agar to which no nitrogen has been added these algae develop No. 3, April, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 311 no chlorophyll even when exposed to light, and will continue to grow thus on successive transfers. When nitrogen is added to these chlorophylless growths the pigment is developed and the algae become normal although kept in darkness. This property has been used by the author in the attempt to determine whether bacteria introduced into the cultures of "white" algae are capable of fixing free nitrogen. Positive results were obtained with mixed cul- tures of a colorless alga and Azotobacter chroococcum. In the dark, when on acid malto- gelatine, the alga in pure culture forms pigment, while on a neutral medium in the dark no pigment formation takes place, although transfer to the light is followed by chlorophyll for- mation. The addition of Azotobacter to "dark" cultures is also claimed to be followed by chlorophyll formation. — A. Bonazzi. 2143. Hepburx, Joseph Samuel, E. Quintard St. John, and Frank Morton Jones. The absorption of nutrients and allied phenomena in the pitchers of the Sarraceniaceae. Jour. Franklin Inst. 189: 147-184. 7 fig. 1920.— The general structure of the leaves of the various species of the Sarraceniaceae, which are all found on the American continent, are described. The nectar glands of the pitchers seem to exude d-fructose. The "wetting or narcotic prin- ciple" in the pitcher liquor of some of the species does not seem to be a saponine. Active proteolytic enzymes are present in all species of Sarracenia except S. psittacina, which was not studied in this respect. Darlingtonia, a monotypic genus, seems not to have such an enzyme. Closed pitchers are free from bacteria, but open ones soon contain proteolytic bacteria. Milk, meat broth, and some other substances cause the secretion of additional pitcher liquor. This liquid tends to return to its normal reaction to litmus in a few days after acids or alkalies are introduced. Water is absorbed by the plant from the pitchers at a slower rate than nitrogenous solutes and more rapidly than neutral phosphate in solution. The pitcher liquor increases when a phosphate buffer with a nitrogenous substance in solu- tion is introduced, and the nitrogen is absorbed. "The per cent of the introduced nitrogenous compound or phosphate absorbed usually increased with the period of absorption." The lithium ion was detected in the tissues of Sarracenia purpurea after neutral lithium citrate had been introduced into the pitchers. Decrease in nitrogen and phosphorus was the cri- terion used to determine the absorption of these elements from the pitcher liquor. — Ernest Shaw Reynolds. 2144. Strowd, W. H. The determination of nitrites and nitrates in plant tissue. Soil Sci. 10: 333-342. 1920.— The Caron method and the nitron method of Busch as well as the Kjeldahl-Gunning-Arnold method and the Kjeldahl method modified to include nitrates are unsatisfactory for determining nitrates in plant tissue. The Devarda and Schloessing methods with modifications can be used. The modifications are described. — W. J. Rabbins. 2145. Strowd, W. H. The relation of nitrates to nodule production. Soil Sci. 10: 343- 356. 1920.— The concentration of nitrates in the cell sap of the roots of soy bean is many times the concentration of nitrates in the soil. The concentration increases with arrested photosynthesis and with increase in nitrate concentration in the soil, but not proportionately. Nitrates have little effect upon the hydrogen-ion concentration of the plant juice. The amount of reducing sugar in plants decreases with increase in nitrate. The concentration of nitrate present in the plant sap when nodule production is inhibited is sufficient to prevent the growth of Rhizobium leguminosarum in the soil. — W. J. Robbins. METABOLISM (ENZYMES, FERMENTATION) 2146. Fernbach, A., et M. Schoen. Le role de I'aldehyde dans la fermentation alcoolique. [The role of acetic aldehyde in alcoholic fermentation.] Bull. Inst. Pasteur 18 : 385-406. 1920.— A review and a synthetic study of our knowledge on the subject. The work of Neubauer and Fromhertz on the breakdown of the amino acids in the animal body by the path of alanin-o-amino propionic acid-pyruvic acid-acetaldehyde-ethylic alcohol is taken as a start- ing point for the review. The work of Neuberg and Karczag, Neuberg and associates, Fernbach and Schoen, Maze, Lintner and Liebig, J. B. Dumas, Connstein, and Leudeke 312 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, has shown that the above reactions can be brought about by yeast juice and are due to a special enzyme which has been named carboxylase, since it has the power of forming CO2 from the carboxylic group. This same enzyme has been found active in various organisms, among which are various forms of Oidium and several bacterial species. The work of Neu- berg and Reinfurth showed the role of sulphites in the production of acetaldehyde by the yea^t cell, and the work of Neuberg and Kreb led to the assumption that methylglyoxal was formed as one of the steps in the action, a substance which could easily yield glycerin. Thus the classical formula of fermentation would take the form of C6H12O6 = CH3COH + CO2 + C3H5(OH)3, and in presence of sulphites the action would be symbolized by C6H12O6 + Na2S03 + H2O = C3H5(OH)3 + CH3CH(OH)O.S02Na + NaHC03. In 1919 Neuberg and HiRSCH have shown that the living yeast if allowed to act in an alkaline medium in absence of sulphites forms acetic acid in large quantities. A direct oxidation of the aldehyde can not be assumed, since the action is taking place in an atmosphere of CO2; furthermore, the ratio of acetic acid to glycerin is 1: 3. Applying the Cannizzaro reaction to the oxidation of acetal- dehyde and uniting it with the reaction of Neuberg and Reinfurth we have: 2CH3COH + H2O = CH3CH2OH + CH3COOH and 2C6H12O6 = 2C3H5(OH)3 + 2CO2 + 2CH3COH. A list of the articles cited in the review is appended.—^. Bonazzi. 2147. Fred, E. B., and W. H. Peterson. The fermentation of xylose by bacteria of the aerogenes, paratyphoid B., and typhoid groups. Jour. Infect. Diseases 27:539-549. 1920. — The medium used consisted of fresh yeast extract, containing 0.5 per cent dibasic potassium phosphate, 0.5 per cent peptone and 2 per cent xylose. After the organisms were grown for 24 hours in the Smith fermentation tube, 2 cc. of sterilized mercury were added to check the diffusion and escape of carbon dioxide. Xylose was found to be attacked by the organisms of the aerogenes-typhoid group with the production of volatile, nonvolatile, and gaseous substances, the by-products of the organisms included in this group differing quantitatively and qualitatively. The products of fermentation with B. lactis aerogenes are essentially carbon dioxide, hydrogen, and alcohol, and small amounts of a volatile acid. The products of fermentation of B. paratyphoid B. are formic, acetic, butyric, lactic, and succinic acids, ethyl alcohol, carbon dioxide, and hydrogen. The typhoid group does not attack xylose so readily as the other organisms; the chief substances formed are formic, acetic, butyric, and succinic acids, alcohol, and a trace of carbon dioxide. — Selman A. Waksman. 2148. Klocker, Alb. Recherches sur las organisms de fermentation. IV Contribution k la connaissance de la faculte assimilatrice de douze especes de levure vis-a-vis de quatre sucres. [Researches on organisms of fermentation. Contribution to the knowledge of the assimilation of four sugars by twelve species of yeasts.] Compt. Rend. Trav. Lab. Carlsberg 14^: 1-40. 1919. — Seven species of Saccharomyces, S. cerevisiae, S. Carlsbergensis, S. ellipsoideus , S. Pastorianus, S. turhidans, S. Marxianus, S. fragilis, Zygosaccharomyces Priorianus, Saccharomycodes Ludwigii, Debaryomyces globosus, Schwanniomyces occidentalis, and Schizo- saccharomyces octosporus were tested for ability to assimilate dextrose, maltose, lactose, and saccharose, using 3 different sources of nitrogen, viz., "yeast water," asparagin, and pep- tone. The index of assimilation was cell multiplication; the number of cells in a culture was determined at the time of sowing and after various periods of incubation by means of a haematimeter. The sugars were added singly to yeast water or to a synthetic nutrient solu- tion consisting of MgS04, KH2PO4, and either asparagin or peptone. Chemicals of highest purity were used but the difficulty of avoiding introduction of minute traces of nitrogen in the water, sugars, or salts used in the medium is pointed out. No statement as to the utili- zation of a sugar by a given species is complete without specifying the source of nitrogen, since both assimilation and cell multiplication vary with this. Yeast water was the most favorable source of nitrogen, but peptone served as well in many cases, while asparagin was either a favorable source or not utilized, depending on the species. A yeast may sometimes assimilate a sugar which it is incapable of fermenting. No yeast organism has yet been found capable of assimilating free atmospheric nitrogen. Dextrose and saccharose, in the presence of yeast water, are utilized by all species studied; maltose is used by all but one, Saccharomyces fragilis, which is unique in its ability to assimilate lactose. — F. Weiss. No. 3, April, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 313 2149. Knudson, Lewis. The secretion of invertase by plant roots. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 371-379. / fig. 1920.— Reducing sugars frequently appear in culture solutions containing sucrose. In a series of culture experiments with corn and Canada field peas the production of these sugars was studied. Evidence is given that their appearance is not due to the reac- tion of the culture solution; or to the secretion of invertase by the roots (since the amount of reducing sugar is not increased by incubation). The author believes that these sugars are produced in the root and excreted into the culture solution.— £^. W. Sinnott. 2150. PiEDALLU, AndbJ:, Philippe Malvezin, et Lucien Grandchamp. Sur le traite- ment de la casse bleue des vins. [The treatment of blue cassia of wines.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1129-1131. 1920. 2151. R A VENN- A, C. Sintesi di un peptide dall'acido aspartico cogli enzimi vegetali. [Syn- thesis of a peptide of aspartic acid by vegetable enzymes.] Atti K. Accad. Lincei Roma Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) V, 29' : 55-58. 1920.— A mixture of ground spinach foliage, aspara- gine, and water, with toluol as an antiseptic, was kept in an incubator 20 days. From the liquid a yellowish precipitate was thrown down with basic acetate of lead. This was puri- fied and a considerable quantity of oxalic acid separated from it leaving a substance having some properties characteristic of the dipeptid of aspartic acid. Control solutions were com- pared with this. It is held that asparagine may prove to be one of the first steps in the for- mation of proteins in plants.— F. M. Blodgett. 2152. Ravenna, C. Sintesi di un peptide dell'acido aspartico cogli enzimi vegetali. [The synthesis of an aspartic acid peptide by means of enzymes from vegetable cells.] Gazz. Chim. Ital. 50: 251-255. 1920.— See preceding entry 2151. 2153. Schoellhorn, Kurt. Sur la fermentation de quelques levures des nectars des plantes d'hiver. [Fermentation produced by certain yeasts obtained from the nectar of winter plants.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 11: 154-190. 29 fig. 1919.— A physiological study is pre- sented for 12 strains of Torula which were isolated from the nectar of various flowering plants. One of the organisms is described as a new species and assigned to a new genus, N edaromyces cruciatus SchoU. — W. H. Emig. ORGANISM AS A WHOLE 2154. Hall, Ivan C. Practical methods in the purification of obligate anaerobes. Jour. Infect. Diseases 27 : 576-590. 1920.— Attention is called to the failure of some early investiga- tors to secure unquestionably pure cultures of obligate anaerobes. A critical review of the present status of surface culture, deep culture, and microscopic methods is given. Selective enrichment of the medium and the elimination of aerobic contamination through selective heating and selective cultivation, followed by the method of isolation by deep cultivation in glucose agar, is found most practical for the purification of obligate anaerobes.— Selman A. Waksman. 2155. Pantanelli, E. Influenza della nutrizione e dell'attivita radicale sul colasso e il disseccamento prodotti dal freddo. [Influence of nutrition and root activity on the injury pro- duced by cold.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei Roma Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) V, 29': 6&-71. 1920.— Chick pea and bean plants growing in pots in fine earth or quartz sand to which had been added various nutrient salts were exposed to low temperatures and compared with check plants. The author concludes that the sufferance of each cell is directly proportional to the outgo of water during cooling. The richness in sugars and other carbohydrates, an abundant supply of phosphates, and a scarcity of autodigestive enzymes enable the plasma to hold more tenaciously to water. Acidity and an abundant phosphate supply in the soil favor recovery while alkalinity and abundance of nitrogen render plants more delicate. Tests were also made to determine the effect of different amounts of soil moisture and the effect of subjecting different parts of the plant to chilling temperatures. It is concluded 314 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, that the condition of the roots is of the greatest importance in determining whether a plant recovers or not, i.e., whether the roots are in condition to supply the water to replace that removed from the tisssues by the low temperatures. — F. M. Blodgett. 2156. Peters, R. A. Nutrition of the protozoa. The growth of Paramoecium in sterile culture medium. Jour. Physiol. [London] 53^: cviii-cix. 1920. — A medium for the success- ful cultivation of a pure culture of Paramoeciuin contained the following: NaCl, KCl, CaCl2, Na2HP04, KH2PO4, MgS04, NaHCOs, phenol red, glucose, histidine, arginine, leucine, ammo- nium lactate, and traces of FeCU, KI, and MnS04. When single amino acids are supplied, histidine, arginine, or leucine gives a much more rapid growth than tryptophane. Galac- tose and fructose, but not maltose, may be substituted for glucose. — Ernest Shaw Reynolds. GROWTH, DEVELOPMENT, REPRODUCTION 2157. Friesner, Ray C. Daily rhythms of elongation and cell division in certain roots. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 380-407. 2 pi. 1920. — Previous work on rhythm of elongation and cell division in plants is summarized. Hourly observations were made on the elongation of root tips of several species which were grown in a dark room and kept under constant temperature. Material from roots growing under these conditipns was killed every 2 or 3 hours and studied microscopically to determine rate of cell division. Elongation in all cases was found to pro- ceed in a rhythmical manner, 2 or more waves occurring during a 24-hour period. The time of occurrence of maxima and minima is dependent upon the time of initiation of metabolic activity rather than upon time of day by the clock. Cell division proceeded in a similar rhythmic fashion. The maxima and minima for elongation as compared to cell division were generally found to alternate with one another, only rarely occurring simultaneously. The author suggests that this alternation is perhaps due to the lack of sufficient energy to permit both processes to go on at the same time at their maximum rates. He believes that this reciprocal relation between elongation and cell division accounts for most of the rhythms found in these plants. — E. W. Sinnott. 2158. MuRRiLL, Wm. a. The dendrograph — an instrument that keeps tabs on tree growth. Sci. Amer. 122 : 595. 3 fig. 1920. 2159. Pfeiffer, T., und W. Simmermacher. Uber den Einfluss der Steine im Boden auf das Wachstum der Pfianzen. [The influence of stones in the soil upon the growth of plants.] Landw. Versuchssta. 93: 49-63, 277-284. 1919. — Two series of experiments to deter- mine the effect of stones in the soil upon the growth of plants are reported. In the first series oats was used as the test crop, and in the second carrots. The experiments were con- ducted in earthenware pots, equal weights (3.4 kgm.) of a loam soil being used in all cases. Gravel stones from 1 to 3 cm. in diameter were mixed with the soil in 3 series of pots in 3 dif- ferent proportions, namely 25, 50, and 75 per cent. The cultures were compared with a con- trol series containing only the 3.4 kgm. of soil. All pots were regularly watered to satura- tion with uniform nutrient solutions. — The results show practically the same top and root development in all cases with both oats and carrots, and lead to the conclusion that with equal amounts of water and nutrients, the presence of stones in the soil had no influence upon plant production. — A. T. Wiancko. 2160. Reed, H. S. Slow and rapid growth. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 327-332. 2 fig. 1920.— The growth in length of shoots from pruned and unpruned apricot trees was measured weekly during the growing season. A close correspondence was found between the growth rates in these two cases and the differential equation for growth rate previously proposed by the author [x = a{l — e~^^), where x is the size of the organism at time t, a the final size attained, and k a constant.] The rate of growth of these shoots, which is much higher in pruned than in unpruned trees, thus seems to depend upon the final length which they attain. The author suggests that growth is some sort of a catalytic process, the organism being the end product of a process in which a catalyst acts upon a substrate. — E. W. Sinnott. No. 3, April, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 315 2161. Schouteden-Wert, J. Quelques experiences de regeneration de bourgeons chez les racines de chicorees. [Regeneration of buds on the roots of chickory.] Acad. Roy. Belgi- que, Bull. CI. Sci. 1920: 152-166. 13 fig. 1920. — These experiments were made with the roots of the vegetable known as Brussels chickory, and they have demonstrated a material of the highest order for the investigation of polarity. — The nature of the work is revealed by the fol- lowing conclusions : (1) Roots of the chickory manifest a bud polarity which is strongly marked ; in any position the proximal region produces the buds. (2) This bud polarity may not sufifer inversion but nevertheless is affected by the external factors gravity and light which interv3ne in the production of buds at the opposite pole. These external factors supple- ment the internal factors and produce the same effects. — Henri Micheels. 2162. Waller, A. D. On the so-called growth of amputated parts of plants. Jour. Physiol. [London] 54i'2: xix-xx. 1920. — An adverse criticism of demonstrations made by Sir J. C. BosE of his "crescograph" by which growth of amputated tips of hyacinth leaves was claimed. The author regards these crescograph records as inconclusive, both because of possible instrumental and physical errors and because of mere turgor changes. "Growth is an irreversible change and is attended by continuous gain of length," while "turgor is a reversible change; gain or loss of water causes gain or loss of length." — Ernest Shaw Reynolds. MOVEMENTS OF GROWTH AND TURGOR CHANGES 2163. B., V. H. Movements of plants. [Rev. of: Bose, J. C. Life movements in plants. Trans. Bose Res. Inst. Calcutta 2 : 253-597 + i-xv. 1919.] Nature 105:416-417. 1920.— Reviewer finds the work not well related to that of previous investigators. — 0. A. Stevens. 2164. Bose, J. C. Life movements in plants. Trans. Bose Res. Inst. Calcutta 1 : 1-252 + i-xxiv. Fig. 1-92. 1918; 2: 253-597 + i-xv. Fig. 93-220. 1919.— The 2 volumes (continu- ously paged) constituting the Transactions of the Institute for 1918 and 1919 present the results of experimental work on the "life movements in plants" under the following major subdivisions: (1) response of plant organs, (2) growth and its responsive variations, (3) tropisms, and (4) night and day movements. The special topics investigated and the names of those assisting, where such assistance was rendered, are given below: i. — The problem of movements in plants, ii. — The "praying" palm tree (assisted by N. N. Neogi). iii. — Action of stimulus on vegetable tissues (assisted by N. N. S. Gupta), iv. — The diurnal variation of moto-excitability in Mimosa, v. — Response of petiole-pulvinus preparation of Mimosa pudica (assisted by S. C. Das), vi. — On conduction of excitation in plants, vii. — On elec- tric control of excitatory impulse, viii. — Effect of indirect stimulus on pulvinated organs (assisted by G. Das), ix. — Modifying influence of tonic condition on response (assisted by G. Das), x. — The high magnification crescograph for researches on growth (assisted by G. Das), xi. — Effect of temperature on growth (assisted by S. C. Dass). xii. — The effect of chemical agents on growth (assisted by G. Das), xiii. — Effect of variation of turgor and of tension on growth, xiv. — Effect of electric stimulus on growth (assisted by G. Das), xv. — Effect of mechanical stimulus on growth, xvi. — ^Action of light on growth (assisted by G. Das), xvii. — Effect of indirect stimulus on growth (assisted by G. Das), xviii. — Response of growing organs in state of sub-tonicity. xix. — Resumption of autonomous pulsation and of growth under stimulus, xx. Action of light and warmth on autonomous activity, xxi. — • A comparison of responses in growing and non-growing organs (assisted by G. Das), xxii. — • The balanced crescograph. xxiii. — On tropic movements, xxiv. — Tropic curvature with longitudinal transmission of effect of stimulus (assisted by G. Das), xxv. — Tropic curvature with transverse transmission of effect of stimulus (assisted by G. Das), xxv . — Mechano- tropism: twining of tendrils (assisted by G. Das), xxvii. — On galvanotropism (assisted by G. Das), xxviii. — On thermonastic phenomena (assisted by S. C. Das), xxix. — On photo- tropism. xxx. — Dia-phototropism and negative phototropism (assisted by G. Das), xxxi. — The relation between the quantity of light and the induced phototropic curvature (assisted by S. C. Das), xxxii. — The phototropic curve and its characteristics, xxxiii. — The trans- 316 PHYSIOLOGY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII, mitted effect of photic stimulation (assisted by J. Sircar), xxxiv. — On photonastic curva- tures (assisted by G. Das), xxxv. — Effect of temperature on phototropic curvature (assisted by G. Das), xxxvi. — On phototropic torsion (assisted by S. C. Das), xxxvii. — Radio- thermotropism (assisted by G. Das), xxxviii. — Response of plants to wireless stimulation (assisted by G. Das), xxxix. — Geotropism. xl. — Geo-electric response of shoot (assisted by S. C. Guha). xli. — The mechanical and electrical response of root to various stimuli, xlii. — Geo-electric response of root (assisted by S. C. Guha). xliii. — Localization of geo-perceptive layer by means of the electric probe (assisted by S. C. Guha). xliv. — On geotropic torsion (assisted by G. Das), xlv. — On thermo-geotropism. xlvi. — Diurnal movements in plants, xlvii. — Diurnal movement due to alternation of light and darkness (assisted by L. M. Muk- HERJi). xlviii. — Diurnal movement due to variation of temperature affecting growth (assisted by L. M. Mukerjee). xlix. — Daily movement in plants due to thermo-geotropism (assisted by L. M. Mukherji). 1. — The after-effect of light (assisted by S. C. Das), li. — The diurnal movement of the leaf of Mimosa. — F. S. Wolpert. 2165. Massart, J. Recherches sur les organismes inferieurs. VII. Les reflexes chez les Polyporees. [Reactions in the Polyporaceae.] Acad. Roy. Belgique Bull. CI. Sci. 1920: 82-90. 10 fig. 1920. — In the Polyporaceae one may recognize the reactions due to 3 causal stimuli as follows: (1) Light which intervenes in the production of the fruit body; (2) gravity in response to which the fungus differentiates its fruit body and orients the tubes of the hymenophore; and (3) contact which inhibits the growth of the hyphae. — Henri Micheels. 2166. RicoME, H. Sur des phenomenes de torsion comparables a I'enroulement des vrilles provoques experimentalement. [The phenomena of torsion experimentally stimulated and comparable to the curling of tendrils.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1399-1401. 1920. — Bean stems horizontally placed and fixed by two pins in the region of growth display a torsion between these pins of 180° in 24 hours. It occurs in darkness as well as light, but may be brought about by heliotropic instead of geotropic stimulation. It occurs in detached stems and also does not seem to be related to the distribution of nodes and internodes. — C. H. Farr. TEMPERATURE RELATIONS 2167. BiGELOw, W. D., AND J. R. EsTY. The thermal death point in relation to time of typical thermophilic organisms. Jour. Infect. Diseases 27: 602-617. 1920. — A method is pre- sented for determining the length of time, at different temperatures, necessary to completely destroy a definite known concentration of spores in a medium of known hydrogen-ion concen- tration. The time necessary decreases as the temperature increases and as the Ph value is increased; at a given reaction and temperature, the larger the number of spores present in the medium the longer is the time necessary to destroy them. — Selman A. Waksman. RADIANT ENERGY RELATIONS 2168. Anonymous. Putting plants on daylight rations. Sci. Amer. 122 : 624, 634. 4 fig- 1920. — There is described a recent discovery by W. W. Garner and H. A. Allard. [Effect of the relative length of day and night and other factors of the environment on growth and repro- duction in plants. Jour. Agric. Res. 18: 553-605. PI. 64-79, 35 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 22] showing that too many hours of daylight in comparison with the number of hours of darkness will prevent many kinds of plants from flowering and fruiting. — Chas. H. Otis. 2169. Massart, J. L'action de la lumiere continue sur la structure des feuilles. [The action of continuous light on the structure of leaves.] Acad. Roy. Belgique Bull. CI. Sci. 1920: 37-43. 1920. — The author repeated the experiments of Bonnier but with results contradic- tory to those of the latter. — For each species the author proceeded as follows: there were six lots of plants, entirely comparable, which were exposed respectively, (1) to continuous light; (2) to darkness; (3) to light during 12 hours and to darkness during 12 hours (one lot was .lb No. 3, April, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 317 exposed from 7 to 19 hours, and the other from 19 to 7 hours with no difference whatever between the two lots); (4) to light from 7 to 13 hours and to darkness from 13 to 7 hours; and (5) to light from 13 to 7 hours and to darkness from 7 to 13 hours. — The experiments in- cluded the following species. Hepatics: Conocephalus conicus, Lunularia cruciata, Marchan- tia polymorpha, M. emarginala, Pellia epiphylla, P. endiviaefolia. Lycopodineae: Selagi- nella helvetica. Phanerogams: Notoscordurn fragrans, Sempervivum tectorum, Aegopodium Podagraria, Lysimachia Nummularia, L. Nximmularia var. aurea, Vinca minor, Glechoma hederaceum, Ajuga reptans, A. reptans var. atropurpurea, Campanula persicifolia.— Nothing was observed which showed the least difference between the effects of continuous and dis- continuous illumination. In none was the structure or the form of the leaves developed in constant illumination similar at all to that of those produced in darkness. Illumination of 24 hours of the day, of 18 hours, of 12 hours, and of 6 hours act in general in the same manner upon the assimilatory organs. The influence of light upon the form and structure and also upon the production of chlorophyll depends therefore much more upon its intensity than upon its duration. In the majority of the experiments a light of 400 candle power at a distance of 1 meter was sufficient. — Henri Micheels. 2170. Negri, G. Su un musco cavernicolo crescente neU'oscurita assoluta. [A moss growing in absolute darkness.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei Roma Rend. (CI. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat.) V, 291; 159-162. 1920. — A moss identified as Isopterigium Muellerianum (Schor.) Lind. is described and reported to have been collected by MartinoMaccagno in the grotto of Trebi- ciano (Triest) in the Lindner cavern at a depth of 275 meters. The entrance is so narrow and crooked that light does not penetrate to this depth. Other cases of plants growing in partial or complete darkness are review^ed. — F. M. Blodgett. 2171. WiESSMANN, H. Einfluss des Lichtes auf Wachstum und Nahrstoffaufnahme beim Hafer. [Influence of light on the growth and the absorption of nutrient salts in the oats.] Landw. Jahrb. 35: 183-190. 1919.— The difference in the light received by oat plants stand- ing (1) on a roof and (2) in a court caused differences in yield and in the quantities of nutrient salts absorbed. The oats on the roof stooled better, had stronger stalks, blossomed and rip- ened earlier, and yielded more of both grain and straw than the plants in the court. The percentage of nitrogen, potash, and phosphoric acid was much greater in the plants grown in the more diffuse light, i.e., in the court, but the absolute amounts were much less.— vl. J. Pieters. TOXIC AGENTS 2172. Bertrand, Gabriel, et Mme. Rosenblatt. Action de la chloropicrine sur quel- ques fermentations bacteriennes. [The effect of chloropicrine on bacterial fermentations.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1468-1471. 1920.— This is a study of lactic acid fer- mentation, ammoniacal fermentation, and the fermentation of sorbose in relation to the presence of chloropicrine. It was found that there is a distinct toxic effect which is compar- able in some cases to that of the more powerful antiseptics. — C. H. Farr. 2173. Maquenne, et Demousst. Un cas d'action favorable du cuivre sur la vegetation. [An instance of the favorable effect of copper on vegetation.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1542-1545. 1920.— Lettuce, peas, and wheat were grown in culture solutions at low temperature and in w^eak light. Lettuce lived 33 days; wheat and peas 9 days. To other solutions copper sulphate was added to the extent of 0.02 to 0.2 mg. per liter. The presence of copper increased the length of life in all cases and the dry weight in some instances.— C. H. Farr. 2174. Medes, Grace, and J. F. McClendon. Effect of anesthetics on various cell activi- ties. Jour. Biol. Chem. 42 : 541-568. 1920.— The plant used was Elodea, and the anesthetics, alcohol, ether, chloroform, and chloretone. The cell activities tested were (1) consumption of O2, (2) liberation of CO2 as measured by Ph changes in the solutions, (3) rotation of chloro- plasts, (4) photosynthesis, (5) diffusion of chlorides from the cell. Increase or decrease in 318 SOIL SCIENCE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII. the rate of activities is in comparison with the rate in water. — Consumption of O2 increased in the following: alcohol, 1, 1.5, 3, and 6 per cent; ether, 1.5, 3, 5, and 8 per cent; chloroform, 0.05, 0.15, 0.3 per cent; and chloretone, 0.05 per cent. It decreased in 15 per cent alcohol and in 0.1 per cent chloretone. — The Ph value increased in all of the above solutions except in the 1 per cent alcohol and the 0.05 per cent chloroform, and in all cases the greatest change in Ph was in the highest concentration. — The rate of rotation of chloroplasts was increased in 1.5 and 3 per cent alcohol, and in 0.05 per cent chloroform. It was decreased in 6 per cent alcohol, 1.5 and 3 per cent ether, and in 0.05 per cent chloretone. It was completely stopped in 15 per cent alcohol, 5 and 8 per cent ether, 0.15 and 0.3 per cent chloroform, and in 0.10 per cent chloretone. — Photosynthesis was decreased in all strengths of alcohol, ether, and chloroform used, and stopped by the higher concentrations. It was unchanged in the strengths of chloretone used. — The diffusion of chlorides was unchanged in 1 per cent alco- hol, but was greatly increased in all higher concentrations and by all other solutions used. — Plasmolysis was produced by 15 per cent alcohol, 8 per cent ether, and 0.30 per cent chloro- form.— The amount of oxygen used increased through the lower concentrations of the anes- thetic, reached a maximum in the solution just failing to cause permanent injury, and then decreased in those causing irreversible changes. Such an effect indicates that in respiration at least two separate processes must be involved. — Of all the cell processes photosynthesis seems to be the most readily affected by alcohol, ether, and chloroform; but as these are all well-known solvents of chlorophyll such a result is probably to be expected. — G. B. Rigg. MISCELLANEOUS 2175. B., W. E. American agricultural research. [Rev. of: Jour. Agric. Res. 18, Nos. 7 and 8. 1920.] Nature 105: 310-311. 1920. — This review is of papers on physiological balance, seed treatment, and control of insects by parasites. — A. A. Stevens. 2176. Levine, B. S., and F. P. Veitch. Testing the mildew resistance of textile. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 139-141. 1920. — A method to test the mildew resistance of textiles is described which is simple in execution and the details of which have been standardized. — Henry Schmitz. SOIL SCIENCE J. J. Skinner, Editor F. M. ScHERTZ, Assistant Editor GENERAL 2177. Gardner, Willard. The capillary potential and its relation to soil-moisture con- stants. Soil Sci. 10: 357-359. 1 fig. 1920. — A discussion is given of Briggs' equations (U. S. Dept. Agric. Bur. Soils Bui. 45) and curves are drawn satisfying those equations. — W. J. Rabbins. 2178. Nottin, p. Sur le pouvoir absorbant de la terra vis-&-vis du manganese. [On the absorbent power of the soil for manganese.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171 : 44-47. 1920. 2179. Tamhane, V. A. Comparison of salt lands in the Deccan and in Sind. Agric. Jour. India 15:410-417. 1920. — The paper discusses the geological origin of the salt lands and compares the" regions as to the immediate cause of the salt deposits. Chemical analyses of the soils, river waters, etc., which lead to the salt deposits are given. Lathyrus sativus a.nd Phaseolus radiatus failed to grow in soil containing 0.48 per cent of soluble salts, 66 per cent of which was Na2S04. Several crops have been found to resist the effects of soluble salts in concentrations beyond 0.1 per cent. The limit of tolerance shown by some of the common crops is tabulated. Rice was found to tolerate 940 parts of soluble salts per 100,000 of water. — F. M. Schertz. No. 3, April, 1921] SOIL SCIENCE 319 2180. Weston, Robert Spurr. By-products from sewage sludge. Amer. Jour. Public Health 10: 405-409. 1920. — A discussion of the treatment of sewage from the standpoint of recovering by-products — chiefly fats and fertilizing materials. The Miles process is said to give the best study for such recovery. The claim is made "that many American sewages contain enough fats and fertilizer constituents to make the problem worth consideration." Additional experiments necessary to put the recovery on a profitable basis are suggested.— C. A. Ludwig. INFLUENCE OF BIOLOGICAL AGENTS 2181. Greaves, J. E., and E. G. Carter. Influence of moisture on the bacterial activi- ties of the soil. Soil Sci. 10: 361-386. Jt fig. 1920.— The ammonification, nitrification, and nitrogen fixation of 22 soils at varying moisture contents were determined. The soils varied from a loose sand to a tight clay, from soils with little or no organic matter to soils high in organic matter. The moisture-holding capacities varied from 31 to 78 per cent. Every soil gave a maximum ammonification at a water content of 60 per cent of the moisture-hold- ing capacity. Maximum nitrification occurred at 50-60 per cent. Nitrogen fixation in many soils showed two maxima, one at 50-60 and another at 70-80 per cent. Equations for the optimum water content for bacterial activities are given based on the formulae of Briggs for moisture equivalent, wilting coeflBcient, and hygroscopic coefficient. — W. J. Robbins. 2182. Hodgson, R. W. Conservation in the use of manure. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. California 8:512-517. 1919.— Considerable loss of manure results through aerobic decay and fermentation both in the stable and in the orchard while in piles prior to distribution; 50-75 per cent of the nitrogen is lost. Urine should not be allowed to drain away. It seems desirable to plough down manure rather deeply, 12 to 15 inches, so that it lies in the vicinity of the feeding roots and undisturbed by constant cultivation. At that depth manure is unaf- fected by atmospheric conditions and has optimum conditions for transformation into available plant food. — E. L. Overholscr. 2183. JosHi, N. V. Studies in biochemical decomposition of cow-dung and urine in soils. Agric. Jour. India 15:398-409. 1920.— Non-nitrogenous manures (such as cellulose) lower the amounts of nitrates formed from organic manures. Urine gives the greatest amount of nitrates and nitrifies at once while cow-dung does not nitrify when fresh. Storage of sheep- dung and urine in a pit is not desirable because of nitrogen losses. CO2 production and nitrification are not necessarily correlated. — F. M. Schertz. 2184. Russell, E. J. The partial sterilization of soils. Jour. Roy. Hort. Soc. 45:237- 246. 1919. — Tests of toluene, carbon bisulfide, carbolic acid, and formaldehyde as soil ster- ilizers in comparison with heating are reported, and a general discussion of soil protozoa is given. — J. K. Shaw. FERTILITY STUDIES 2185. McFadzean, G. S. Top dressing pasture lands. Jour. Dept. Agric. Victoria 18: 408-412. 4 fig. 1920.— Good results were secured by top dressing with superphosphate and bone meal in the Portland District. Clover and rye grass, the native grasses, have improved with the use of fertilizers and the pastures support a larger number of cattle. — /. /. Skinner. 2186. NoRRis, R. V. The exhaustion of Indian soils and the methods by which this may be remedied. Agric. Jour. India 15: 433-443. 1920.— Attention is called to the use of manu- rial substances which are now exported but may be used to a greater advantage at home. — F. M. Schertz. 2187. Rae, F. G. Electro-culture. Jour. Dept. Agric. Victoria 18: 385-394. 1920.— A review of experiments showing the effect of electric currents in soil on the growth of plants. The experiments cited show generally an increase. — /. /. Skinner. 320 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 2188. Williams, C. B., W. F. Pate, E. C. Blair, S. C. Clapp, and F. J. Meacham. Relative value of acid phosphate and rock phosphate on North Carolina soils. Bull. North Carolina Dept. Agric. 4P: 3-22. Fig. 13. 1920. — Relative availability is indicated by crop yields where acid phosphate or rock phosphate was used with either stable manure, lime, or the common mineral fertilizer elements. — F. A. Wolf. 2189. Wrangel, Margarete. Ein estlandisches Rohphosphat und seine Wirkung auf verschiedene Pflanzen. [An Esthonian raw phosphate and its effect upon various plants.] Landw. Versuchssta. 96: 1-44. PI. 1-3. 1920. — Comparisons of Esthonian phosphate with Thomas phosphate, appatite, phosphorite, staffelite, dicalcium and tricalcium phosphates show it to be more available than the other raw phosphates. Pot experiments conducted at Hohenheim showed that plants differ considerably in their ability to utilize raw phosphates. Mustard, buckwheat, clover, rape, and vetch showed best results. With these plants the Esthonian raw phosphate about equalled the Thomas phosphate. Rye, flax and maize showed little ability to utilize the raw phosphates. — A. T. Wiancko. TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS J. M. Grebnman, Editor E. B. Payson, Assistant Editor SPERMATOPHYTES 2190. Anonymous. Decades Kewenses. Decas XCVI. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1920: 108- 112. 1920. — The following species are described as new: Miliusa dolichantha Craib, Vatica Shingkeng Dunn, Rubus Burkillii Rolfe, Eugenia arborensis Dunn, Begonia arborensis Dunn, B. Burkillii Dunn, B. iridescens Dunn, B. scintillans Dunn, Sadiria Boweri Dunn, Arundi- nella intricata Hughes. — E. Mead Wilcox. 2191 Anonymous. Decades Kewenses. Decas XCVII. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1920: 132- 136. 1920. — The following species are described as new : Rubus chambica Rolfe, Brassaiopsis magnifica Dunn, Ophiorhiza heterostyla Dunn, Psijchotria arborensis Dunn, Agapetes mar- ginata Dunn, A. nutans Dunn, Buddleia Candida Dunn, Aeschynanthus monetaria Dunn, Rhinacanthus grandiflorus Dunn, Gomphostemma arborensis Dunn. — E. Mead Wilcox. 2192. Anonymous. New orchids: Decade XL VII. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1920: 128-132. 1920. — The following species are described as new: Eulophia Huttonii Rolfe, E. Boltonii Harv. & Rolfe, Lissochilus Rehmannii Rolfe, L. transvaalensis Rolfe, Polystachya natalensis Rolfe, Phalaenopsis latisepala Rolfe, P. Micholitzii Rolfe, Angraecum Hislopii Rolfe, A. Bolusii Rolfe, Brownleea Fannihiae Rolfe. — E. Mead Wilcox. 2193. Benoist, Raymond. Descriptions d'especes nouvelles de Phanerogames. [De- scriptions of new species of Phanerogams.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 26: 184-188. 1920. — The following species are described as new to science: Ononis zaiana, Bathysa difformis, Hypoestes longispica, H. capitata, H. multispicata, H. comosa, and H. oppositiflora. — E. B. Payson. 2194. Britton, N. L., and J. N. Rose. The Cactaceae, descriptions and illustrations of plants of the Cactus family. Vol. II. 23 x 29 cm., Jfi pi. {32 colored), 305 fig. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 248. Vol. II. Sept. 9, 1920. — The subtribes, Cereanae and Hylocereanae of the tribe Cereeae, are treated in this volume. Forty-seven genera and 276 species are recognized and are described fully with complete bibliography, type locality, distribution and list of previously published illustrations. There are 19 new genera, as follows : Arrojadoa, Binghamia, Brachycereus, Browningia, Corryocactus, Deamia, Dendrocereus, Erdisia, Espostoa, Facheiroa, Jasminocereus, Leocereus, Machaerocereus, Mediocactus, Monvillea, Neoraimondia, Stetsonia, Wilmattea, and Zehntnerella. — There are 48 new species, as follows: Acanthocereus I No. 3, April, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 321 albicaulis, A. brasiliensis , A. colombianus , A. horridus, A. occidentalis, A. subinermis; Aporocactus Conzattii; Borzicaclus Morleyanus; Cephalocereiis barbadensis, C. brasiliensis, C. Gaumeri, C. Purpusii, C. Smithianus, C. Tweedyanus, C. Zehntneri; Cereus grena- densis; Facheiroa publiflora; Harrisia aboriginum, H. Earlei, H. fragrans Small, H. Simp- sonii; Hylocereus antiguensis, H. bronxensis, H. cubensis, H. venezuelensis ; Lemaireocereus Cartwrightianus, L. Godingianus, L. humilis, L. longispinus, L. montamis; Leocereus bahien- sis; Leptocereus Maxonii, L. prostratus, L. sylvestris; Monvillea diffusa, M. marilima; Myrtil- locaclus Eichlamii; Nyctocereus oaxacensis; Pachycereus Gaumeri; Selenicereus brevispinus, S. Murrillii; Trichocereus cuzcoensis, T. pachanoi, T. peruvianus, T. Shaferi; Weberocereus panamensis ; Wilcoxia papillosa; Zehntnerella squamulosa. — There are five new names, as follows : Cephalocereus robustus, Cereus argentinensis , Erdisia Meyenii, Heliocereus elegantis- simus, and Lemaireocereus Eichlamii. — There are 92 new combinations, as follows: Aporo- cactus Martianus; Arrojadoa penicillata, A. rhodantha; Binghamia acrantha, B. melanostele; Borzicaclus acanthurus, B. aurivillus, B. decumbens, B. Humboldtii, B. icosagonus, B. plagio- stoma, B. sepium; Brachycereus Thouarsii; Browningia candelaris; Cephalocereus arrabidae, C. catingicola, C. Dybowskii, C. euphorbioides , C. fluminensis, C. Gounellei, C. leucostele, C. Moritizianus, C. pentaedrophorus, C. phaeacanthus , C. piauhyensis, C. Robinii; Cleisto- cactus anguinus, C. smaragdiflorus; Corryocoactus brachypetalus , C. brevistylus, C. melano- tricMis; Deamia testudo; Dendrocereus nudiflorus; Erdisia Philippii, E. spiniflora, E. squar- rosa; Espostoa lanata; Eulychnia iquiquensis, E. spinibarbis ; Harrisia adscendens, H. Bonplandii, H. Guelichii, H. Martinii, H. platygona, H. pomanensis , H. torluosa; Helio- cereus cinnabarinus ; Hylocereus extensus, H. guatemalensis, H. monacanthos, H. polyrhizus, H. Purpusii; Jasminocereus galapagensis ; Lemaireocereus Aragonii, L. chende, L. chichipe, L. deficiens, L. pruinosus; Leocereus Glaziovii, L. melanurus; Leptocereus Weingartianus; Machaerocereus Eruca, M. gummosus; Mediocactus coccineus, M. megalanthus; Monvillea amazonica, M. Cavendishii, M. insularis, M. phatnosperma, M. Spegazzinii; Neoraimondia macrostibas; Pachycereus lepidanthus, P. ruficeps; Selenicereus Donkelaarii, S. inermis, S. vagans, S. Wercklei; Stetsonia coryne; Trichocereus Bridgesii, T. candicans, T. chiloensis, T. coquimbanus, T. fascicularis, T. huascha, T. lamprochlorus , T. pasacana, T. Schickendantzii, T. strigosus, T. thelegonoides, T. thelegonus, T. Terscheckii; and Wilmattea mimitiflora. — In volume I, 8 genera and 302 species were recognized. There were: one new genus, Tacinga; 42 new species, Nopalea Gaumeri; Opuntia aequatorialis , 0. bahamana, O. bahiensis, 0. bella, 0. Boldinghii, 0, borinquensis, 0. brunnescens, O. burrageana, 0. campestris, 0. caribaea, O. depauperata, 0. discolor, 0. distans, 0. Dobbieana, 0. guatemalensis, 0. Hickenii, 0. ignota, O. juniperina, 0. Macateei, O. militaris, O. mortolensis, 0. palmadora, 0. pascoensis, 0. Pen- nellii, 0. Pittieri, O. Russellii, 0. Shaferi, 0. Skottsbergii, 0. Soederstromiana, 0. Soehrensii, O. viridiflora, 0. Wentiana, 0. Wilcoxii; Pereskia colombiana, P. Conzattii, P. Moorei, P. Zehntneri; Pterocactus Fischeri, P. Hickenii, P. pumilus; Tacinga funalis; one new name, Opuntia pestifer; three new combinations, Grusonia Bradtiana, Maihuenia patagonica, and Pterocactus tuberosiis. [See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1824.] — J. N. Rose. 2195. Dammer, U. Chelyocarpus Dammernov. gen. Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 44-51. 1920. — Chelyocarpus, nov. gen., includes one new species of palm from Brazil, namely, C. Ulei. — H. A. Gleason. 2196. Fern ALD, M. L. The American Ammophila. Rhodora 22: 70-71. 1920. — The com- mon Sand Reed, Marram, or Beach Grass, of the coastal sand dunes from the Straits of Belle Isle to North Carolina, and of the St. Lawrence system inland to Lake Superior, which has been universally identified with Ammophila arenaria of the western and southern coasts of Europe, is a distinct species, here published as Ammophila breviligulata. The distinguishing characters of the two species and the geographic distribution of the latter are discussed. — James P. Poole. 2197. Fern ALD, M. L. Juncus Gerardi Loisel., var. pedicellatus. Rhodora 22:76. 1920. — A new variety, differing from the typical J. Gerardi in its large flowers and elongated pedicels, collected on the coast from Maine to Rhode Island. — James P. Poole. 322 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 2198. Fernald, M. L. A new Digitaria from New Hampshire. Rhodora 22 : 101-104. 1920. — The plant discovered by the late F. W. Batchelder in northeastern Hillsboro County, New Hampshire, in 1901, and distributed to various herbaria by the collector as Syntherisma filiforme (L.) Nash, is quite distinct from the latter and is published as Digitaria laevi- glumis n. sp. The author gives a list of transfers found necessary in organizing the North American material of Digitaria in the Gray Herbarium, noting the synonomy involved in each case. — James P. Poole. 2199. Fernald, M. L. Oxalis montana. Rhodora 22: 143-144. 1920.— The author pre- viously pointed out (Rhodora 20: 76-78. 1918) several characters by which the northern wood sorrel of eastern America differs from the Old World 0. acetosella L., and took up for the American plant the name 0. americana Bigelow (1824). He now finds that this plant had been properly named by Rafinesque in 1818 and therefore should be known as 0. montana Raf . The following new combination is made : 0. montana Raf . forma rhodantha {0. ameri- cana Bigelow forma rhodantha Fernald). — James P. Poole. 2200. Fernald, M. L. Pyrola rotundifolia and P. americana. Rhodora 22: 121-123. 1920. — In a former paper (Rhodora 4: 201. 1904) the author pointed out the distinctions between the northern Eurasian Pyrola rotundifolia L. and the AUeghenian P. americana Sweet. More recent material from Newfoundland bridges somewhat the gap between the two plants. These Newfoundland plants seem to be inseparable from the Eurasian P. rotundifolia L., var. arenaria Mert. & Koch, the latter differing in no morphological charac- ter from the continental and more southern P. americana Sweet. The Newfoundland plant is now published as P. rotundifolia L. var. arenaria Mert. & Koch, and the continental form, distributed from Nova Scotia westward to Minnesota and South Dakota and southward to Georgia, becomes P. rotundifolia L. var. americana (Sweet) n. comb. — James P. Poole. 2201. Gagnepain, F. Aetheocephalus, nouveau genre de Composees. [Aetheocephalus, a new genus of the Compositae.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 26: 172-173. 1920.—^. Thorelii is published as the representative of a new genus previously recognized by Thorel in manu- script only. This plant of southeastern Asia is placed in the tribe Helianthoideae and sub- tribe Coreopsideae. — E. B. Payson. 2202. Gamble, J. S. The flora of Madras III. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1920: 49-57. 1920.— A collection of miscellaneous notes on various species included in the 3rd part of the "Flora of Madras" intended to supplement that work. The following new combinations are made: Syzygium Fergusoni {Eugenia Fergusoni Trim.), S. olivifolium {Eugenia olivifolia Duthie). — E. B. Payson. 2203. Godfery, M. J. Cephalanthera Richard or Epipactis Crantz? Jour. Botany 58 : 69-74, 1920. — The author takes exception to R. von Wettstein's treatment of Cephalanthera, Epi- pactis, and Limodorum in which these three genera are united. Wettstein criticised the work of Richard, Reichenbach, and Bentham and Hooker, attempting to show that the characters used by them were overdrawn, and in many cases were not of a basic nature. Godfery holds that Wettstein himself was in error, and that these characters proposed by the older authors are sufficient to warrant the retention of the three genera. The characters under discussion relate to the presence or absence of a rostellum, single or tetrad pollen, shape of the stigma, shape of the anther, and degree of divergence of the perianth. One species, C. cucullata which Wettstein considers transitional Godfery believes to be a prob- able bigeneric hybrid of Cephalanthera and Limodorum. The author suspects that Wettstein was prejudiced by his bias against the probability of the occurrence of bigeneric hybrids. — K. M. Wiegand. 2204. Godfery, M. J. Orchids of Hants and Dorset. (Abstract.) Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919:331. 1920. No. 3, April, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 323 2205. GuiLLAUMiN, A. Contribution i la flore de la Nouvelle-Caledonie. [Contribution to the flora of New Caledonia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 26: 174-179. 1920.— In contin- uation of his series of similar papers on the flora of New Caledonia the author gives a list of plants collected by M. and Mme. LeRat. The following new names and species new to sci- ence are proposed: Oxalis neo-caledonica, Melicope LeRatii, M. Balansae {Evodia Balansae Baill. mss.), M. leptococca (Evodia leptococca Baill. mss.), M. Veillardi Baill. mss. (Evodia Vieillardi Baill.), M. lasioneura Baill. mss. (Evodia lasioneura Baill.), Evodia pseudo-obtusi- folia, Polyosma LeRatii, P. Pancheriana Baill. var. subintegrifolia, Myrtus supra axillaris, Litsea uniflora, and L. triflora. — E. B. Payson. 2206. Harms, H. DrelneueMucuna-Artenaus Papuasien. [Three new species of Mucuna from Papuasia.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 28-30. 1920. — Mucuna amblyodon, M. Peekelii, and M. Schlechteri are described as new. — E. B. Payson. 2207. Harms, H. Eine neue Gattung der Legimiinosae-Papilionatae aus Papuasien. [A new genus of Papilionaceae from Papuasia.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 26-27. 1920. The genus Peekelia is erected to include Phaseolus papuanus Pulle. — H. A. Gleason. 2208. Hitchcock, A. S., and Agnes Chase. Revisions of North American grasses. Con- trib. U. S. Nation. Herb. 22: 1-77. PI. 1-34, fig. 1-20. 1920.— Under this title are published revisions of four genera of grasses of the tribe Paniceae. The first, by A. S. Hitchcock, treats of the North American species of Ichnanthus. Ten species are described, all but one illus- trated by photographs of specimens. The second, by the same author, is a revision of the fifteen known species of Lasiacis, all American, each of which is represented by a photo- graph of a specimen. One new species, Lasiacis leptostachya Hitchc. from Nicaragua, is described. The third paper, by Agnes Chase, discusses the North American species of Brachiaria, a genus which, unlike most of the Paniceae, belongs primarily to the Old World. Six species are described, each illustrated by figures showing part of the inflorescence, anterior and dorsal views of a spikelet, and the fruit. One new species, Brachiaria ophryodes Chase, from Mexico, is described, and the following new combinations occur; Brachiaria Gilesii (Benth.) Chase, B. miliiformis (Presl) Chase, and B. ciliatissima (Buckl.) Chase, only the last referring to a North American species. The fourth paper, by Mrs. Chase, treats of the North American species of Cenchrus, 13 species being described and illustrated by figures -of the burs and of the spikelets. The name Cenchrus carolinianus Walt., which has figured in the literature for some years, is regarded as unidentifiable. — S. F. Blake. 2209. Johansson, K. Nya Hieracia silvaticiformia fran Sverges laglad. [New Hieracia silvaticiformia from the lowlands of Sweden.] [Swedish.] Bot. Notiser [Lund] 1920: 65-100. 1920. — The article contains descriptions of 30 new species, and varieties, or new combinations, named by the author, or by G. Samuelsson, or by both conjointly. — P. A. Rydberg. 2210. Knuth, R. Oxalidaceaeamericanae novae. [New American Oxalidaceae.j Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 289-318. 1919.— Under the sections to which they belong are described and listed the following new species, new varieties, new combinations, and new names: Oxalis mairaryensis, O. nigricans Pohl var. diversifolia, O. glaucifolia, 0. ramulosa, 0. chan- duyensis, 0. coarctata, 0. erosa, 0. Lindheimeri Torr., O. yucatensis (Lotoxalis yucatensis Rose), 0. glabrata (0. Neaeivax. glabrata Baker), 0. Hilaireiana, 0. pulchriflora, 0. Progelii (0. comosa Prog.), 0. maracayuensis, 0. tenuicalyculata, 0. tenuicalyculata var. glabra, O. tenuicalyculata var. hirsuta, 0. anthyllidifolia, 0. anthyllidifolia var. acuta, 0. anthyllidifolia var. obtusa, 0. Hassleri, 0. alta, 0. ovalis Ruiz, 0. piauhyensis, 0. candicans, 0. hirsutissima Mart. & Zucc. var. rotundata, O. hirsutissima var. oblonga, 0. hirsutissima var. gracilior, 0. cordifolia, O. tristis, O. renifolia, 0. diamantinae, 0. robusta (Monoxalis robusta Rose), 0. fritillariiformis, 0. fruticosa, 0. novae caledoniae Knuth & Schlechter, 0. pubescens HBK. var. glandulosa, 0. Saulierei, 0. subintegra, 0. tabaconasensis , 0. Niederleinii, 0. texana (Xan- thoxalis texana Small), 0. corniculatah. var. sericea,0. corniculata v&t. macrophylla, 0. corni- culata var. serpens, 0. interior (Xanthoxalis interior Small), 0. color ea (Xanthoxalis colorea BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VH, NO. 3 324 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, Small), 0. californica (Xanthoxalis californica Abrams), 0. uruguayensis (Acetosella amara var. glandulosa) , 0. peti'ophila, 0. parvifolia DC. var. pluriflora, 0. cordobensis, 0. cordo- bensis var. typica, 0. cordobensis var. humilior, 0. famatinae, 0. contracta, 0. patula, O. inflata, 0. bartolomensis, O. cuzcensis, 0. chosicensis, 0. fernandensis , 0. Besseri, 0. chilensis, 0. geranioides, 0. parva, 0. Hauthalii, 0. juninensis, 0. Gussfeldtii, 0. riojana Hieron., 0. bul- bigera, 0. solarensis, 0. mercedensis, O. sorianensis, O. subviscosa, 0. Schickendantzii, O. Taquetii, 0. Smalliana (0. macra Small), 0. hupehensis, O. Cunninghamii, 0. frigida, O. pudica, O. elegantula, O. Lindneri, 0. tubaraensis, 0. bulbifera, 0. yacutulensis, 0. atroglandu- losa, O. N iederleiniana Hieron., 0. pinguiculacea, 0. hyalinorhiza Poepp., 0. fluminensis, O. berviejensis, O. carminea, O. argentina {0. bipartita var. alpina Griseb.), 0. catamarcensis, O. muUipes, 0. pearsallensis, 0. ramonensis, 0. Ehrenbergii, 0. efoliata, O. morelosensis (lonoxalis bipartita Rose), 0. intermedia (0. intermedia A. Rich.), O. stipulata Rose (lon- oxalis stipitata Rose), 0. amplifolia (0. divergens var. amplifolia Trel.), 0. angulata (lonoxalis angulata Small), 0. calcarea (lonoxalis calcarea Small), 0. immaculata {lonoxalis immaculata Small), 0. macrocarpa (lonoxalis macrocarpa Small), 0. leonis (lonoxalis madrensis Rose), O. Metcalfei (lonoxalis Metcalfei Small), O. neo-mexicana (lonoxalis monticola Small), 0. mucronata (lonoxalis mucronata Rose), O. obliqua (lonoxalis obliqua Rose), 0. quadriglandula (lonoxalis quadriglandula Rose), 0. hidalgensis (lonoxalis rupestris Small), O. Seatoni (lon- oxalis Seatoni Rose); O. trinervia (lonoxalis trinervia Rose), 0. vallicola (lonoxalis vallicola Rose), 0. alpina Rose (lonoxalis alpina Rose), 0. tepicensis (lonoxalis compacta Rose), 0. gregaria Rose (lonoxalis gregaria Rose), 0. primavera (lonoxalis primavera Rose), 0. Pringlei Rose (lonoxalis Pringlei Rose), O. stolonifera (lonoxalis stolonifera Rose), 0. tenuiloba (lon- oxalis tenuiloba Rose), 0. crassiscaposa, 0. cobanensis, 0. pseudo-tetraphylla, O. tlalpamensis, O. caerulea (lonoxalis caerulea Small), 0. Hayi (lonoxalis divaricata Small), 0. lanceolata (lonoxalis lanceolata Small), 0. macilenta (lonoxalis macilenta Small). 0. magnifica (lonoxalis magnifica Rose), 0. multiceps (lonoxalis multiceps Small), 0. Nelsonii (lonoxalis Nelsonii Small), O. oaxacana (lonoxalis oaxacana Rose), O. Painteri (lonoxalis Painteri Rose), O. Rosei (lonoxalis Rosei Small), 0. scopulorum (lonoxalis scopulorum Rose), 0. tenuissima (lonoxalis temdssima Rose), O. trientalis (lonoxalis trientalis Small), 0. trineuris (lonoxalis trineuris Small), 0. conjusa (lonoxalis confusa Rose), 0. Conzattiana (lonoxalis Conzattiana Rose), O. cuernavacana (lonoxalis cuernavacana Rose), 0. furcata Rose (lonoxalis furcata Rose), 0. Gonzalesii (lonoxalis Gonzalesii Rose), O. Grayi (lonoxalis Grayi Rose), 0. jalis- cana Rose (lonoxalis jaliscana Rose), O. zacatecasensis (lonoxalis occidentalis Rose), Biophy- tum somnians (Oxalis somnians Mart. & Zucc), B. lindsaeifolium (Oxalis lindsaefolia Hook.), B. dormiens (Oxalis dormiens Mart. & Zucc), B. columbianum, B. antioquiense, B. casiquiar- ense and B. Passargei. — //. A. Gleason. 22n. Kranzlin, F. Orchidaceae Kalbreyerianae I. Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7:412- 451. 1920. — The following new species of orchids are described from the collections of Kal- BREYER in Colombia: Microstylis longissima, M. Kalbreyeriana, Chondrorhyncha macronyx, Ornithidium strictissimura, 0. heterobulbon, O. olivaceum, Camaridium luteo-brunneum, Maxil- laria gymnochila, M. laracina, M. diamantensis, M. convencionis , M. erubescens, M. podochila, M. antioquiana, M. amblyantha, M. Mathewsii, Ponera caricalensis, Rodriguezia antioquiana, Lycaste farinosa, Eriopsis Mesae, Batemania antioquiana, Zygopetalum Kalbreyerianum, Warrea medellinensis , Trichopilia concepcionis, Brachtia brevis, B. minutiflora, Mormodes convolutum, Rodriguezia cuentillensis, Houlletia Kalbreyeriana, Jonopsis zebrina, Epidendrum polystachyoides, E. microdendron, E. subtorquatum, E. Sierrae Peladae, E. magnibracteum, E. latibracteum, E. bucararicense, E. filamentosum, E. stenopetaloides , E. kalloneuron, E. festucoides, Diothonaea hemisclerioides, Chloraea sobralioides, Sobralia micrantha, Bletia Candida, and Elleanthus longibracteatus. — H .A. Gleason. 2212. Kranzlin, F. Zwei neue und eine kritische Orchidacee. [Two new and one critical species of orchids.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 319-322. 1919. — Author discusses Vanilla odorata Presl and describes Vanilla Preussii n. sp. from Guatemala, and Dikyliko- stlgma gen. nov. with one species, D. Preussii, from Venezuela. — H. A. Gleason. No. 3, April, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 325 2213. Kratjse, K. Ueber die Gattungen Camptopus Hook, f, und Megalopus K. Sch. [The genera Camptopus and Megalopus.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7:36-43. 1920.— The older name Camptopus has priority for this group of four African Rubiaceous species, and evidence is presented for continuing their generic separation from Cephaelis. An analytical key is given and two new species described. — H. A. Gleason. 2214. Lacaita, C. C. The home of Inula Helenium. Jour. Botany 58 : 21-22. 1920.— This plant has been cultivated from time immemorial in various parts of Europe. Linnaeus in "Species Plantarum" mentions only England and Belgium as its habitat. Beck von Mannagetta has asserted that the plant is native in middle Asia and not in Europe. The author takes exception to this, and cites cases in Greece, Macedonia and Italy where it must be native. Trotter and Romano, from their experience in Italy, are cited as also taking exception to Beck's statement. — K. M. Wiegand. 2215. Lecomte, Henri. Deux especes nouvelles du genre Crateranthus (Lecythidacees). [Two new species of the genus Crateranthus (Lecythidaceae).] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 26: 68-71. 1920. — Two species of Crateranthus, C. Le Testui and C. congolensis, are described £is new to science and are contrasted by means of a key with the single species previously known. — E. B. Payson. 2216. Lester-Garland, L. V. The botany of the Moroccan Middle Atlas. Jour. Botany 58: 97-101. 1920.— A list is given of the plants collected by Captain Hubert Lynes during the summer of 1919. These plants all came from the middle zone of the range between 4000 and 6000 feet altitude. In the list they are divided into four groups : (1) Those reaching middle or north Europe; (2) widespread Mediterranean species; (3) west Mediterranean species; and (4) species endemic in Morocco or the Atlas. The relation of the Atlas flora to that of the hill districts of Central Europe is noted. The principal literature on the flora of the Atlas Mts. is listed. Special notes are given on Potentilla hispanica Zimm., Cytisus Batlandieri R. Maire, Erythraea major Hoffm. & Link, and Veronica ? rosea Desf. — K. M. Wiegand. 2217. LoESENER, T. tjber eine neue Stromanthe-Art. [A new species of Stromanthe.j Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7:410, 411. 1920.— Stromanthe humilis Loes., from tropical America. — H. A. Gleason. 2218. Maiden, J. H. A critical revision of the genus Eucalyptus. Vol. V, Part 1. 1-25, pi. 168-171. William Applegate Gullick: Sydney, June, 1920.— The present part contains descriptions, notes, and illustrations of the following species and varieties: Eucalyptus lati- folia F. V. M., E. Foelscheana F. v. M., E. Abergiana F. v. M., E. pachyphtjlla F. v. M., E. pachyphylla F. v. M., var. sessilis var. nov., E. pyriformis Turcz. var. Kingsmilli Maiden, E. Oldfieldii F. v. M., and E. Drummondii Benth. Ibid. Part 2. 27-70, pi. 172-175. 1920.— This part continues the revision with a similar treatment of the following species: Eucalyptus eximea Schauer, E. peltata Benth., E. Watsoniana F. v. M., E. trachyphloia F. v. M., E. hybrida Maiden, E. Kruseana F. v. M., E. Dawsoni R. T. Baker, E. polyanthemos Schauer, E. Baueriana Schauer, E. conica Deane & Maiden, and E. concolor Schauer. — J. M. Greenman. 2219. Maiden, J. H. The forest flora of New South Wales. Vol. VII. Part 3. 77-121, pi. 236-239, 11 photographic reproductions. William Applegate Gullick: Sydney. March, 1920. — Five species are herein discussed, namely, Br achy chiton populneum R. Br., Eucalyptus rubida Deane & Maiden, Acacia Oswaldi F. v. M., A. neriifolia A. Cunn., and Harpullia qjen- dula Planch. Since Eucalyptus rubida is the main source of the Australian manna the author presents a general discussion on manna in an appendix. Ibid. Part 4. 123-191, pi. 240- 243, 20 photographic illustrations. William Appleton Gullick: Sydney. 1920.— The present part contains descriptions, detailed notes and illustrations of the following species: Pitto- sporum undulatum Vent., Eucalyptus viminalis Labill., E. Dalrympleana Maiden n. sp., Acacia stenophylla A. Cunn., A. coriacea DC, Geijera salicijolia Schott, and G. parviflora Lindl. An appendix is added in which the author gives a discussion of "Phenology: a form of nature study with very practical applications." — /. M. Greenman. 326 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 2220. MiLDBRAED, J. Paraphyadanthe Mildbr. nov. gen. Flacourt. Ein interessanter Fall von "Rhizanthie" aus Kamerun. [Paraphyadanthe Mildbr., a new genus of Flacourtiaceae. An interesting case of "rhizanthy" from Kamerun.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7 : 399-405. Fig. A-0. 1920. — The new genus Paraphyadanthe, with two species and one variety, produces flagelliform runners from the base of the trunk which extend to a distance of 10 meters or more along the surface of the ground, bear scale-like leaves, and produce the flowers either directly or at the summit of erect scaly branches. The vegetative portion of the plant is a small tree, up to 9 m. high. The genus is closely related to Oncoba and Xylotheca. The fol- lowing are the new species and variety described: P. flagelliflora, P. flagelliflora y&x. hydro- phila, and P. coriacea. — H. A. Gleason. 2221. Moore, Spencer Le M. Alabastra diversa. — Part XXXII. Jour. Botany 58: 74-80. 1920 (cont. from Jour. Bot. 57:91. 1919). — 3. Plantae Rogersianae. — V. Under the Legu- minosae thirteen species, subspecies and varieties are treated, the following being new: Crota- laria cataractarum Baker fil.. South Rhodesia; C. acervata Bak. fil., Belg. Congo; C. macro- tropis Bak. fil., Belg. Congo; C. rigidula Bak. fil., North Transvaal; C. homalocarpa Bak. fil., S. Rhodesia; C. longistyla Bak. fil., S. Rhodesia; C Harmsiana Taub. var. congoensis Bak. fil., Belg. Congo; Indigofera gonioides Hochst. var. rhodesica Bak. fil., S. Rhodesia; I. dimidi- ata Vog. var. laxior Bak. fil., Transvaal; and /. Burkeana Benth. form. All the new species of Crotalaria belong to the section Eucrotalaria. The Leguminosae were elaborated by Edmund Baker. Under the Compositae four species are treated of which the following are proposed as new: Stoebe Mossii, Cape Colony; S. affinis, Cape Colony; Metalasia Rogersii, South Africa. Under the Convolvulaceae notes are given on Merremia kentrocaulos Rendle var. pinnatifida N. E. Br. In the Solanaceae, Solanum Rogersii is described as new. 4. Phyl- lanthi ex Rhodesia species nova. Phyllanthus Eylesii is proposed as new. 5. Acanthaceae Papuanae a cl H. 0. Forbes lectae. Nine species are listed and the n. comb. Graptophyllum Gilligani (= Justicia Gilligani Bail.) is made. — K. M. Wiegand. 2222. OSTERHOUT, Geo. E. A new Oreocarya from Colorado. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 211. 1920. — Oreocarya procera from Glenwood Springs, Colorado, is described as a new species. — P. A. Munz. 2223. Pennell, I'rancis W. Soil preferences of Scrophulariaceae. Torreya 20: 10-11. 1920. — Instead of the expression "potassic soil," used by the author in his published studies of the Scrophulariaceae, "non-calcareous and non-magnesium soil" should be substituted. The chemical composition of soils and its relation to plant-distribution demand the attention of field-botanists. — J. C. Nelson. 2224. PiLGER, R. Gramineae austro-americanae imprimis Weberbauerianae. V. Bot. Jahrb. 56 (Beibl. no. 123) : 23-30. 1920 (cont. from Bot. Jahrb. 42:50-72. 1906).— Report on grasses collected by Dr. A. Weberbauer in Peru, Ecuador, Bolivia, Argentina, Brazil, etc. The following species, varieties and names are proposed as new: Stipa depauperata, and vars. glabrata and humilis, S. Hans-Meyeri, S. Hieronymusii, S. pachypus, Oryzopsis rigidiseta, 0. Neesii, (Piptatherum obtusum Nees), Piptochaetium laeve (Piptatherum laeve Nees), Sporobolus mirabilis, Eragrostis carazensis, Dissanthelium minimum, Poa gymnantha, Arundinaria simpliciuscula, Chusquea sandiensis (C. ramosissima Pilger), and C. huantensis. — K. M. Wiegand. 2225. Radlkofer, L. Gesamtiibersicht uber die Sapindaceen Papuasiens. [Survey of the Sapindaceae of Papuasia.] Under the general heading: C. Lauterbach. Beitrage zur Flora von Papuasien. VII. Bot. Jahrb. 56 : 251-316. 4 fig- 1920. — The limits of Papuasia are outlined, and it is noted that of the 14 tribes in the Sapindaceae only three are not rep- resented,— Sapindeae, Koelreuterieae, and Cossignieae. Tribes Paullinieae and Thou- inieae are mainly American, while Tribe Aphanieae is almost entirely Asian and Papuasian. The range of the other tribes is given, together with the size and general distribution of the noteworthy genera in each. The total number of genera represented is 26. Sixteen of these No. 3, April, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 327 are of oceanic and 9 of Asiatic distribution. The discussion of the geographical distribution is very extended. A special discussion of the genus Majidea Kirk is appended. Keys are given to the genera, and under each genus to the species. Nomenclatorial references, synon- omy, and notes on distribution and structure are given under the species. The following new forms, species, and combinations are proposed: Aphania diciyophylla (Cupaniopsis dictyo- phylla Radlk.), Lepisanthes membranijolia (Erioglossum membranifolia Radlk.), Guioa sub- sericea, G. dasyantha, G. pauciflora, Cupaniopsis grosseserrata, G. hrachylhyrsa, G. multidens, C. oxypetala, C. atrotheca, C. gigantophylla, C. flaccida, Rhysotoechia elongata, Dictyoneura subhir&uta, D. microcarpa, Euphorianthus pallidus, Sarcopteryx rigida, Jagera serrata forma genuina and iorva&fulvinervis, J. macrophylla, Arytera densiflora, A. sordida, A. xanthoneura, Mischocarpus retusus, M. largifolius, Harpullia reticulata, H. largifolia, H. obscura, and H. petiolaris. — K. M. Wiegand. 2226. Rehder, Alfred. The American and Asiatic species of Sassafras. Jour. Arnold Arboretum 1 : 242-245. 1920. — The taxonomic value of some of the characters used in the separation of genera in Lauraceae is discussed and a revised generic description of Sassafras given to include the two Asiatic species. Sassafras randaiense {Lindera randaiensis Hayata) appears as a new combination. — Alfred Rehder. 2227. Rehder, Alfred. New species, varieties and combinations from the herbarium and collections of the Arnold Arboretum. Jour. Arnold Arboretum 1 : 254-263. 1920. — The present continuation of this paper deals chiefly with Rosaceae and a few Saxifragaceae and Hamamelidaceae. Besides some new horticultural forms the following new species, new varie- ties, and new combinations appear: Ribes Ruizii, Parrotiopsis Jacguemontiana (Decne.), Hamamelis vernalis f. tomentella, Physocarpus australis (Rydb.), P. stellatus (Rydb.), Neillia longer acemosa war . lobata, N. sparsiflora, Spiraea prunifolia var. hupehensis (Rehd.), S. Scho- chiana and S. Teniana, both from China, S. virginiana var. serrulata, Holodiscus franciscanus (Rydb.), Pyracantha discolor, P. Koidzumii (Hayata), Crataegomespilus Gillotii (G. Beck), and Sorbus Harrowwiana (Balfour). — Alfred Rehder. 2228. Ridley, H. N. New and rare species of Malayan plants. Jour. Straits Branch Roy. Asiatic Soc. 82: 167-204. 1920. — An account of some novelties collected of recent years together with various corrections and emendations of the Malayan flora based on an exami- nation of types at Kew and the British Museum. Seventy-six new species are described and 3 new genera, the latter being Peniculifera (Sterculiaceae), Leptonychiopsis (Sterculiaceae) and Napeodendron (Sapindaceae). — T. F. Chipp. 2229. Rock, Joseph F. The leguminous plants of Hawaii. Experiment Station of the Hawaiian Sugar Planters' Association. Roy. 8vo, 334 p-,93 pi. Honolulu, July, 1920. — The 200 species included in this paper belong to 71 genera and are either native to the islands, have become well established there, or give promise of becoming permanent inhabitants. The percentage of indigenous species is exceedingly small. Keys to the genera and species are given as well as specific descriptions, synonyms, and notes regarding economic import- ance and local occurrence. The following new varieties are described and new combinations made: Erythrina fusca Lour. var. inermis, Mucuna pachylobia {Stizolobium pachylobium Piper & Tracy), Dioclea altissima (Dolichos altissimus Velloso), Vigna sandwicensis A. Gray var. heterophylla. — E. B. Payson. 2230. Rtdberg, P. A. Henry and Flood's the Douglas fir. [Rev. of: Henry, Augus- tine, and Margaret G.. Flood. The Douglas firs: a botanical and silvicultural study of the various species of Pseudotsuga. Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. B. 35:67-92. PI. 12-14- May, 1920. See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1544.] Torreya 20: 102-104. 1920.— Three species and one variety of Pseudotsuga native to North America are admitted, viz : P. Douglasii Carri^re from the Pacific Coast region and the var. caesia Schwerin from the northern Rocky Moun- tains; P. glauca Mayr. from the Rocky Mountains; and P. macrocarpa Mayr. from Southern California. The reviewer considers the var. caesia as more related to P. glauca than to P. 328 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, Douglasii, and probably to be rather regarded as a distinct species. Four species native to China and Japan are also described. A comparison is made as to difference in odor, minute anatomy of the leaves, and composition of the oil distilled from the leaves. — J. C. Nelson. 2231. Eydberg, Per Axel. Notes on Rosaceae — XII. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 45-67. 1920. — A discussion is given of the 33 species of roses of northeastern North America, with key to groups and with notes on each species. These notes supplement the material given by the same author in the "North American Flora." Nineteen hybrids are also reported. — P. A. Mum. 2232. Sargent, C. S. Notes on North American trees. VI. Jour. Arnold Arboretum 1 : 245-254. 1920. — Hamamelis macrophylla Pursh is taken up as a distinct species and the following new species of Crataegus described or new names proposed, and some reduced to varietal rank: Crataegus montivaga, C. Cocksii, C. meridionalis , C. noelensis, C. rufula, C. drymophila, C. aestivalis var. maloides, C. aestivalis var. cerasoides, C. aestivalis var. cera- soides f. luculenta, C. Holmesiana var. tardipes, C. pedicellata var. gloriosa. — Alfred Rehder. 2233. ScHLECHTER, R. Die Columelliaceae. Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 8-14. 1920.— The family is best placed near the Gesneriaceae. An analytical key and descriptions are given of the 6 species of Columellia, and a new species, C. Weberbaueri Schltr., is described from Peru. — H. A. Gleason. 2234. ScHLECHTER, R. Tetradcma Schltr., ein neues Genus der Gesneriaceen. [A new genus of Gesneriaceae.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 15-18. 1920. — The genus includes four species of the Philippines, Borneo, Java, and Sumatra, hitherto placed in other related genera. The following new combinations are made: Tetradema rubrum {Trichosporum rubi-um Merr.), T. tuberculatum (Agalmyla tuberculata Hook, f.), T. asperifolium (Agalmyla asperi- folia Bl.), T. praelongum (Dichrotrichum praelongum Kranzl.). — H. A. Gleason. 2235. ScHLECHTER, R. Einc zweite Art der Gattung Androcorys Schltr. [A second species of Androcorys Schltr.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7:52, 53. 1920. — Herminium gracile King & Pantl. is transferred as Androcorys gracilis (King & Pantl.) Schltr. — H. A. Gleason. 2236. ScHLECHTER, R. Orchidaceae novae, in caldariis Horti Dahlemensis cultae. II. [New orchids cultivated in the warm-houses at Dahlem.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 323- 330. 1919. — New species are described as follows: Cryptophoranthus similis , Stelis calotricha, Octomeria Dusenii, O. irrorata, Bulbophyllum dahlemense, B. paranaense, Promenaea acumin- ata, P. albescens, Capanemia paranaensis, Oncidium aberrans, Aerangis parvula, Angraecum elephantinum. — H. A. Gleason. 2237. Schmidt. Wilh. Dendrobium delicatum Bail. Orchis 14: 1-2. 1920.— Dendro- bium delicatum Bail, occurs in nature on the rocky cliffs near Toowoomba, Queensland, in company with D. Kingianum and D. speciosum var. Hillii. It is believed that D. delicatum is a hybrid between these two. — E. B. Payson. 2238. Schneider, Camillg. Notes on American willows. VII. Jour. Arnold Arbore- tum 1: 147-171. 1920. — The present paper deals with the section Adenophyllae containing 8 and with the section Balsamiferae containing 2 species. As in the preceding papers of this series keys to the species are given and each species is discussed in detail. The following species, form and combination are new: Salix orestera, S. Eastwoodiae i. callicoma, S. glauco- phylloides var. glaucophylla (Bebb). — Alfred Rehder. 2239. Schneider, Camillg. Notes on American willows. VIII. Jour. Arnold Arbore- tum. 1: 211-239. 1920. — This paper deals with the sections Chrysantheae (8 species), Can- didae (1 species) and with Salix Wolfii. As in the preceding papers of this series keys to the species are given and each species is discussed in detail. The following varieties are new: Salix Hookeriana var. tomentosa and S alaxensis var. longistylis (Rydb.) — Alfred Rehder. No. 3, April, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VA.SCULAR PLANTS 329 2240. Smith, J. J. Orchidaceae novae malayenses IX. [New orchids of the Malayan region.] Bull. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg III, 2: 15-127. 1920. — The following new species are described: Apostasia ellipHca, A. platystylis, Corysanlhes sumalrana, C. bancana, Didymo- plexis Trichechus, Vanilla abundiflora, V. sumatrana, Vrydagzynea deliana, Coelogyne brachy- gyne, C. imbricans, Dendrochilum Gravenhorstii, D. polluciferum, D. rigidifolium, Liparis mentaweiensis , L. foetulenta, Podochilus bilabiatus, P. bancanus, Appendicula brevimentum, Agrostophyllum sumatranum Schltr. & J. J. S. var. borjte.ense, A. conjusum, Ceratostylis crassipetala, C. Jacobsonii, C. tricallifera , Phajus callosus Lndl. var. sumatranus, P. pauci- flortis Bl. var. sumatranus, P. pauciflorus var. punctatus, P. corymbioides Schltr., P. labiatus, Eria taluensis, E. compressa Bl. var. sumatrana, E. Jenseniana, E. Kieuwenhuisii, E. ober- oniiflora, E. bancana, E. mentaweiensis, E. rubifera, E. scotiifolia, Dendrobium flabelloides, D. denigratum, D. labangense, D. maculosum, D. forcipatum, D. xantholeucu7n Rchb. f. var. obtusilobum, D. stelidiiferum, D. dempoense, D. quinquecallosum, D. Ruttenii, D. Laurensii, D. taurulinum, D. Demmenii, D. croceocentrum, D. Maierae, D. cinereum, D. Groeneveldtii, D. grastidioides, D. fimbrilabium, D. septemcostulatum, D. tetrodon Rchb. f. var. Vanvuurenii, Bulbophyllum javanicum var. sumatranum, B. rigidifilum, B. farinulentum, B. crepidiferum, B. fibrosum, B. dempoense, B. silapingense, B. lemniscatoides Rolfe var. exappendiculatum, B. Theunissenii, B. lumbriciforme, B. Groeneveldtii, B. osyriceroides, B. trichoglottis Ridl. var. sumatranum, B. elevatopuncatum, B. lepidum var. insigne, B. campanulatum Rolfe var. inconspicuum, B. viscidum, Sarcochilus bipennis, S. decipiens, Thrixspermum aurautiacum, T. sumatranum, T. longilobum, T. latisaccatum, T. flaccidum, Saccolabium longicaule, Ade- noncos unijlora, Arachnis Vanmullemii, Malleola baliensis, Robiquetia Hansenii, R. viridi- rosea, Pomatocalpa simalurense, Microsaccus canaliculatus. — J. J. Smith. 2241. Staff, O. Thellungia, a new genus of Gramineae. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1920: 96-99. Fig. 1-11. 1920. — This grass probably of Australian origin, was found in the vicinity of Solothurn, Switzerland, near a woollen mill. It is made the type of a new genus, Thel- lungia, related to Sporobolus. T. advena is its only known representative. — E. Mead Wilcox. 2242. Staff, O. Setaria or Chaetochloa. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1920: 124-127. 1920.— Chaetochloa was proposed by Scribner to replace the name Setaria for two reasons. Setaria was, according to him, first applied by Beauvois to a species of Pennisetum and furthermore at an earlier date was employed by Acharius to a genus of lichens. It is shown that Ar-hariua used this name not as a generic one but to designate a tribe. It is further shown that the plant understood by Soribner to be the type of the genus is really a Setaria and not a Penni- setum. But this species is after all not the type of the genus. The type must be taken as S. viridis, which was first used by Beauvois as illustrating the genus Setaria. This species is also a true Setaria. — E. Mead Wilcox. 2243. St. John, Harold. The genus Elodea in New England. Rhodora 22:17-29. 1920. — The writer gives a key to the New England species of the genus Elodea of Miohaux, synonymous with the genus Philotria of Rafinesque and adopted by Rydberg. All of the material is put into four species, E. canadensis Michx., E. occidentalis (Pursh) St. John, E. Nuttallii (Plannhon) St. John, and E. Planchonii Casoary. The synonymy and bibliog- raphy, list of illustrations, and distribution of each of these is given. The article also includes a discussion of the flower structure of E. canadensis and the history of its rapid spread in Europe and the British Isles; a description of pollination in E. occidentalis; and discussions as to the validity of other species proposed by various authors. — James P. Poole. 2244. St. John, Harold. Trillium rectistamineum, a valid species of the southeastcn United States. Rhodora 22 : 78-79. 1920. — Trillium lanceolatum Boykia var. rectistamineum Gates is raised to specific rank. The name as published is Trillium rectistamineum (Gates) comb. nov. A bibliography and description are given. — James P. Poole. 2245. St. John, Harold,, and Donald White. The genus Galinsoga in North America. Rhodora 22:97-101. ]920. — A synopsis of the North American species of this genus as understood by the authors. The species are distinguished especially by differences in the pappus of the ray- and disc-flowers. — James P. Poole. 330 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 2246. Traaen, Carl. [Rev. of: Almquist, S. Sveriges Rosae. (Swedish roses.) Stockholm, 1919.] Jour. Botany 58:115-116. 1920. 2247. TuRRiLL, W. B. The Rev. H. F. Tozer and plants collected by him in the Nearer East. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1920:29-31. 1920. 2248. TuRRiLL, W. B. The genus Rosmadnus. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1920: 105-108. 4 fig- 1920. — In a brief revision of this genus 4 species are recognized and of R. officinalis L. several varieties and forms. The variety R. offi,cinalis L. var. genuina is described as new. — E. Mead Wilcox. 2249. T [urrill], W. B. Carex riparia var. gracilis in Britain. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1920: 141-142. 1920. 2250. Ulbrich, E. Neue Arten der Gattung Hibiscus Sect. Bombycella DC. [New species of Hibiscus Sect. Bombycella.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 19-25. 1920. — Nine species, chiefly from Africa, are described as new, as follows: Hibiscus serratifolius, H sul- furanthus, H. sumbawanus Warburg & Ulbrich, H. ahlensis, H. meidiensis, H. heterochlamys, H. flavif alius, H. gallaensis, and H. chrysochaetus. — H. A. Gleason. 2251. Ulbrich, E. Einige neue Lupinus-Arten aus den Anden von Peru. [Some new species of Lupinus from the Andes of Peiu.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 452-454. 1920. — Three new species are described as follows: Lupinus matucanicus, L. pinguis, and L. misticola. — H. A. Gleason. 2252. Vaupel, F. Neue afrikanische Iridaceen. [New African Iridaceae.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 31-35. 1920. — New species are described as follows: Acidanthera divina, Antholyza pubescens, Gladiolus Boehmii, G. Bussei, G. Mildbraedii, G. validissimus. — H. A. Gleason. 2253. Wernham, H. F. Dewevrella congenesis sp. nov. Jour. Botany 58: 80-81. 1920. — This genus of the Apocynaceae was founded as recently as 1907 by Db Wildeman, and the only known species is D. cochliostema. The present new species, the second in the genus, was collected by M. A. Nannan in the same district, namely, Boyeka at the equator. — K. M. Wiegand. 2254. Wernham, H. F. Tropical Amesican Rubiaceae. — XIII. Jour. Botany 58: 105-108. 1920. — The genus Coupoui is considered in this number. A historical account is given of the genus beginning with the original description by A^jblet in 1775. It has been very poorly understood owing to a lack of flowering material. The genus is here held to belong to the Rubiaceae though by earlier authors it was placed in the Apocynaceae and Myrtaceae. A key is given to the three known species, also synonymy and notes on distribution. C. brasili- ensis is described as new. — K. M. Wiegand. 2255. Wiegand, K. M. Eupatorium purpureum and its allies. Rhodora 22:57-70. 1920. — By the examination of the material ordinarily recognized as Eupatorium purpureum, the writer has worked out a treatment for this section of the genus. Four species and one variety have been confused under the general name E. purpureum L., now separated as E. verticillatum Lamarck, E. maculatum L., E. maculatum var. foliosum (Fernald) comb, nov., E. purpureum L., and E. falcatum Michx. The facts and the history as to the synonymy and nomenclature of these species are given in considerable detail as well as a key for their identification. — James P. Poole. 2256. WiLMOTT, A. J. Erythraea scilloides Chaubard. Jour. Botany 58 : 23. 1920.— The author discusses the proper name for a plant found in Pembrokeshire, taking exception to the disposition of the plant made by Druce. — K. M. Wiegand. No. 3, April, 1921] UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS 331 2257. WoLLEY-DoD, A. H. On collecting loses. Jour. Botany 58: 23-24. 1920.— It is sug- gested that more attention be given to collecting roses in the reddened-fruit stage, as in that condition British roses, at least, are most satisfactorily identified. — K. M. Wiegand. 2258. WoLLET-DoD, A. H. A revised arrangement of British roses. Jour. Botany 58: Suppl. 1-20. 1920. — The author discusses the present status of the rose question, stating that by the proper treatment of varieties a working classification can be arranged. The work of Dfis^GLiSE is found to be very unsatisfactory, many of the forms having been based on single specimens. A tabular synopsis of the British roses is given consisting of five sections and many subsections, groups, secondary groups, and subgroups. The species under each are considered at length with synonymy and notes. Many varieties and some forms are recog- nized under most of the species. — K. M. Wiegand. 2259. Zimmerman, Walther. Meitteilungen zur Orchiaceras-Gruppe aus Baden. [Con- tributions on the Orchiaceras group from Baden.) Mitteil. Badischen Landesver. Naturk. u. Naturschutz Freiburg im Breizgau N. S. 1: 21-31. 1919. — A study of hybrids occurring in nature between species of Orchis and Aceras. The following new hybrids are named and described with the probable parents indicated in parentheses: Orchiaceras spuria Cam. forma Neumannii {Orchiaceras spuria X Aceras anthropophorum) , 0. macra Cam. forma rhenana {Orchis purpureus X Aceras anthropophorum) and 0. macra Cam. iorma, freihurgensis {Orchis purpureus X Aceras anthropophorum or Orchiaceras macra X Orchis purpureusf). The various hybrids and their parents are illustrated. — E. B. Payson. MISCELLANEOUS, UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS B. E. Livingston, Editor Sam F. Trelease, Assistant Editor 2260. Anonymous . 'Something about artificial silk. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1 : 516-517. 1920. [From American Silk Journal, April, 1920.]— Artificial silk is spun from a thick, viscous liquid, called viscose, which is prepared from wood. Article considers the present production and possible sources of future supply of this commercial product. — Chas. H. Otis. 2261. Anonymous. Voices of trees. Brooklyn Bot. Card. Rec. 9: 103-105. July, 1920.— Observations of Mr. John Grimshaw Wilkinson, the blind botanist of Leeds, as given by Prof. W. H. Bragg in lecture on "Sounds" at the Royal Institution. Reported in London Times, Jan. 8, 1920. During rain, the most silent tree is Pinus sylvestris, the noisiest are oaks. — C. S. Gager. 2262. Dasen, a. H. EUaboracion a domicilio de vinagre de platano. [Home vinegar making from plantains.] Rev. Agric. Com. y Trab. [Cuba] 3 : 253-254. 1920.— Translated and slightly modified by A. Brambila, from Bull. Agric. Soc. Trinidad and Tobago 20. Feb., 1920.— i^. M. Blodgett. 2263. Durrell, L. W. Tongs for handling disinfected seed. Phytopath. 9:581-582. 1 fig. 1919. — A description of tongs for removing seed from test tubes. — J. G. Dickson. 2264. Lapicque et Brocq-Rousseu. Les algues marines comme aliment de travail pour le cheval. [The marine algae as food for horses.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1601- 1603. 1920. 2265. Pantanelli, E. Uso del cipoUaccio per I'alimentazione e la produzione di alcool. [The use of Muscari comosum Mill, for food and for alcohol production.] Staz. Sper. Agrarie Ital. 53 : 101-112. 1920.— The bulbs of Muscari comosum Mill, as well as of Hyacinthus ciliatus Cir. were found to be very nutritious and well adapted to alcoholic fermentation after a previous treatment with dilute acid, to hydrolyse the polysaccharides, and subsequent neu- tralization with calcium carbonate. The alcohol production of Muscari was found to be 10.5 per cent, while Hyacinthus yielded 8.4 per cent of the fresh bulb substance.— A. Bonazzi. 332 UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII, 2266. Pavarino, G. L., e G. Castellari. II Falasco nell'industria della carta. [The marsh vegetation and paper industry.] Staz. Sperim. Agrarie Ital. 53: 32-46. PI. 1. 1920. — The vegetation of the marshy places in the province of Pisa (Italy) is known by the local name of falasco, and is made up of Phragmites communis, various species of Carex, various species of Scirpus, Cyperus, and Typha, together with Schoenus mariscus, Calamogrostis epideios, Arundo donax, several species of Juncus, Sparganium ramosum, Gliceria aquatica, and Sagit- taria angustifolia. Some of the plants thus found are utilized in the manufacture of rope, mats, etc., but a great portion of them is allowed to decay. The present contribution considers the botanical, physical, microscopical, and chemical characters of the various plants and takes up also the question of bleaching with SO2 and KMn04. The results of the investigation may be summarized as follows : Carex paludosa yielded 43 per cent of cellulose, Phragmites communis 47.5, Scirpus lacustris 45.5, Typha angustifolia 44.0, and Cyperus longus 25.0 per cent. In most cases the fibers are long and regular and well adapted to paper manu- facture.— A. Bonazzi. 2267. Stockham, W. L. Some factors related to the quality of wheat and strength of flour. North Dakota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 139. 69 p., 3 fig., 13 charts. 1920.— The smallest loaf volume is secured from soft white wheat, an increase in volume being noted for soft red winter, durum, hard red winter, and hard red spring, in order. — No correlation exists between bran color and baking quality of flour. — Low bacterial infection of berry was found to be associated with "brightness" of the sample. — In study of 28 pure line Ghirka wheats loaf volume increased with increase of protein content of flour up to 13.5 per cent and then de- creased as protein content increased. Adding gluten to flour increased loaf volume materially. Lack of strength in low grade flours is not due usually to lack of gas but rather to inability of baking loaf to retain it. Amount of gas generated by loaf was usually correlated with amount of extractives present in flour. Adding aqueous extract from different flours increased loaf volume and decreased time required for loaf to rise. Crude fat secured from flour added to flour increased loaf volume. Other fats added decreased loaf volume. — No correlation was found between ratio of soluble to total protein in flour and volume of loaf produced there- from.— Proteolytic activity of various grades of flour differed greatly. The greatest was found in straight flour from sprouted wheat and less from high grade flours. Flour from germ end showed much less expansion and more proteolytic activity than flour from blossom end. Milling results are given from germ and blossom end of kernels. Gluten added to wheat germs increased proteolytic activity. Proteolytic activity of ground wheat was greater than the corresponding flours made from such wheats and was greater in wheats injured by weathering and exposure. — In general, water absorption increased with an increase of pro- tein content in flour. With increase in ash content in flour the ratio of water absorption in flour to protein content decreased. The relation of mineral constituents to gluten quality is discussed. — The effect of certain salts and acids in baking tests, mainly as affecting the colloidal action of gluten, is shown. Effect of acids and NaOH upon strength of flour and texture of loaf was injurious. — From a quantity of wheat kept in storage for 9 years, samples for milling were taken at intervals. An improvement in flour strength and loaf characters was noted for about one year but no appreciable deterioration was noted until after lapse of 7 years, but flour milled from the old wheat deteriorated markedly in strength after 4 months storage with decided falling off in loaf texture. — Studies were made upon the effect of oxida- tion upon enzyme activity with no decisive results. — An extended review of literature is given. — L. R. Waldron. 2268. Strand, E. [Rev. of : Thesing, C. Biologische Streifziige. Eine gemeinverstand- liche Einfiihrung in die allgemeine Biologie. (Biological excursions. A popular introduction to general biology.) 2nd edition. 364 p., 6 colored pi., 74 fig. Esslingen and Miinchen, 1908.] Arch. Naturgesch. Abt. A. 83: 172, 173. (1917) 1919. 2269. TuNisoN, Burnell R. Industrial alcohol. Jour. Franklin Inst. 190: 373-420. 1920. — A general summary of the subject, including history, legislation, manufacture, pro- No. 3, April, 1921] UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS 333 duction, distribution and uses. "Any laboratory may obtain pure ethyl alcohol tax free for use exclusively in scientific research," according to present legislation in the United States,— Ernest Shaw Reynolds. 2270. WoLF-CzAPEK, K. W. Angewandte Photographie in Wissenschaft und Technik. [Applied photography in science and technology.] 4 vols., illustrated. Union Deutsche Ver- lagsgesellschaft: Berlin, 1920. 2271. ZiLLiG, H. Kriegsersatz auslSndischer technisch verwerteter Pflanzenfasern. [War substitutes for foreign utilizable plant fiber.] Jahresber. Ver. Angew, Bot, 16: 79-116 1918. INDEX TO AUTHORS* NAMES IN VOLUME VII {References are to Entry numbers; an asterisk before a number signifies that the entry referred to is by citation alone.) A., B. J. Rev. of Baker, R. T. 1618. Abel, J. Determination of wheat flour in mixtures of rye and barley. *566. Adami, J. G. Medical contributions to the study of evolution. *378. Adams, Henry. Degradation of the demo- cratic dogma. 1589. Adamson, R. W. The Bartram oak. *740. Afonso, Pedro Correia. Diseases of rice. 2032. Agar, W. E. (Bower, F. O., J. Graham Kerr, and Agar) 167. — Cytology — the metazoan nucleus. *719. — Genetics of Daphnia hy- brid during parthenogenesis. 1668. — (Rev. by Gates, R. R.) *726.— (Rev. by Anonymous) *850. Akerman, A. Fusarium 'disease of spring wheat. *839. — (Rev. by Anonymous) *1675. Albert, C. Seasonal gardening questions. *1855. Albert, Henry. Classification of diptheria bacilli. 1996. — New diptheria bacillus stain. 1997. Alcock, W. Broughton. (Rev. by Anony- mous) 554. Alderman, W. H. Status of orchard fertili- zation experiments. 945. Algan, H. Rev. of Huffel, G. *685, 741. Allard, H. A. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1676. Allen, C. E. (Rev. by Tischler, G.) *1841. Allen, E. J., and E. W. Sexton. Eye color in Gammarus. 840. Allen, E. R. Carbohydrate consumption by Azotobacter chroococcum. 407. Allen, W. J. New varieties of plums. 946. Allen, W. J., and R. G. Bartlett. Spring work for the banana grower. 947. Allen, W. J., and W. le Gay Brereton. Or- chard notes. 250. — Two oranges. *251. Allwood, Montague C. Carnation pests and diseases. 1856. Almquist, S. (Rev. by Traaen) *2246. Alverdes, Friedrich. Hereditary abnormal- ity. *841. Alway, F. J. Peat in Europe. 473. — Peat soils in Minnesota. 1386. Ames, J. W. Beet sugar. *567. — Soil nitro- gen supply in Ohio. 1402. Ammann, P. Nitrogen in cassavas. 1329. Anderson, J. A., E. B. Fred, and W. H. Peterson. Xylose fermentation. 420. Anderson, R. J. Inosite hexaphosphoric acid in Acer saccharinum. 1302. Andr6, G. Exosmosis of the acids and sugars of the orange. 1292. Andrews, A. LeRoy. Ingebrigt Hagen. 686. — Tortula caroliniana. North Carolina moss. 1078. Andrews, E. F. Resurrection fern. *316. Andrews, F. M. Trees of Indiana. *742. Angelis d'Ossat, G. de. American grapes and lime. 2120. Angerhausen, J. Rhubarb, its detoxifica- tion. 1276.— Rhubarb juice. 1277. Anonymous. Plant production in 1919. 1. Anonymous. Cultivation of main crop pota- toes. *2. Anonymous. Field experiments, 1919. 3. Anonymous. Notes on organization of British Empire Sugar Research Associ- ation. 4. Anonymous. Rev. of Gehrs, John H. 5. Anonymous. Sulphur as a fertilizer for wheat. 6. Anonymous. Rev. of Barber, C. A. 7, *317. Anonymous. The cultivation and acclima- tization of the soy bean in Germany. 8. Anonymous. Cane experiments, Bar- bados. 9. Anonymous. Agriculture, Barbados. 10. Anonymous. Seedling cane experiments, Barbados. 11. Anonymous. Danish farm laws since 1849. 64. Anonymous. New Zealand science congress. 65. Anonymous. New York Botanical Garden publications, 1919. *66. Anonymous. Awbury Arboretum. 77, *292, *1619. Anonymous. Rev. of Cook, Mel. .T. 78. Anonymous. Rev. of (1) Sulman, A. E., (2) Sulman, Florence. *79. 335 BOTANICA.L ABSTRACTS, VOL. VIII, NO. 2 336 INDEX TO AUTHOKS NAMES Anonymous. Museums and the State. 80. Anonymous. National museums, Great Brit- ain. 81. Anonymous. Botanic gardens' value. 82. Anonymous. Courses offered by the Brook- lyn Botanic Garden. *83, *295. Anonymous. Sugar and rice research. 84. Anonymous. Fern study. 85. Anonymous. Game, Prussian state forests. 100. Anonymous. Forest resources, U. S. A. *10L Anonymous. Forestry in France. 102. Anonymous. Forest research, industrial. 103. Anonymous. Taxonomy of larch. 104. Anonymous. Forest purchase by Federal Government, U. S. A. 105. Anonymous. Sand dune reclamation. 106. Anonymous. Forest administration, Prus- sia. 107. Anonymous. Farm land in Prussian forests and its use by forest officers. 108. Anonymous. Rev. of (1) Harrison, J. W. Heslop, (2) Duerden, J. E. *157. Anonjrmous. Guide to experimental fields of Svalof. 158. Anonymous. Rev. of Gould, H. P. *252. Anonymous. American grown fruit stocks. 253. Anonymous. Curiously trained pear tree. 254. Anonymous. Rev. of Calvino, Mario. 255. Anonymous. Rev. of Bedford, Duke of, and Spencer Pickering. *256. Anonymous. Unfruitful plum trees. 257. Anonymous. The avocado in Trinidad. 258. Anonymous. Koelreuteria paniculata. 293. Anonymous. Oxydendrum arboreum. 294. Anonymous. Sweet pea growing. West Indies. 296. Anonymous. The climbing Polygonum. *297. Anonymous. Onion growing, Barbados. 312. Anonymous. Onion seed storage in tropics. 313. Anonymous. British sphagna. 338, 342, 343, 347. Anonymous. British mosses. 339, 340, 344, 345, 348. Anonymous. British hepatics. 341, 346, 349. Anonymous. Rev. of Blanc, Georges, and Gabriel Brun. 355. Anonymous, Rev. of Smith, Theobald. 356. Anonymous. Rev. of Brierley, W. B. 357. Anonymous. Rev. of Seward, A. C. 379, *1621. Anonymous. Rev. of Wieland, G. R. *380. Anonymous. Rev. of Nierenstein, N. 408, 1150. Anonymous. Rev. of Armstrong, E. Frankland. 409. Anonymous. Tenacity of prickly pear seed- lings. 422. Anonymous. Seed germination. 432. Anonymous. Rev. of Blatter, Ethelbert. 481. Anonymous. Rev. of Gamble, J. S. *482. Anonymous. Decades Kewenses. 503, 504, 1422, 2190, 2191. Anonymous. Diagnoses Africanae. 505, 1421. Anonymous. Microscoptical optics. *552. Anonymous. Peat fiber. *553. Anonymous. Rev. of Alcock, W. Broughton. 554. Anonymous. Report of seed tests for 1920. 568. Anonymous. Sudan grass, Mexico. *569. Anonj'mous. Pea cropping. *570. Anonymous. Sugar beet selection, France. *571. Anonymous. Weeds, Mexico. *572. Anonymous. Weed control and fertilization. 573. Anonymous. Cotton, New South Wales. *574. Anonymous. Potato fertilization. *575. Anonymous. Rice selection. 576. Anonymous. Danish crop guarantee. *578. Anonymous. Danish seed production. *579. Anonymous. Cotton, Mexico. 580. Anonymous. Selection of sugar cane. 581. Anonymous. Geo. Stephen West. 687. Anonymous. History of science. 688. Anonymous. A. P. CandoUe, *689. Anonymous. C. A. Timiriazeff. 690. Anonymous. James Wilson. 692. Anonymous. Scientific and systematic pom- ology. *693. Anonymous. Rev. of Church, A. H. *711, *1050. Anonymous. England, Scotland, Wales, and Ireland Forestry Commission, 1919-20. 743. Anonymous. Rev. of (l) Boerker, R. H. D., (2) Stebbing, E. P., (3) Webster, A. D. *744. Anonymous. Rev. of Davies, J. H. 745. Anonymous. Rev. of Rankin, W. H. *746, 1168. INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES 337 Anonymous. Rev. of Reuss. *747. Anonymous. Rev. of Urban, J. *748, 1163. Anonymous. Mesquite. *749. Anonymous. Scotch pine. 750. Anonymous. Stump extraction by explo- sives, state forest Lamotte-Beuvron, I France. 751. Anonymous. Fruiting of Ginkgo at Kew, England. ^752. Anonymous. Injury to oak by Diaporta taleola. ♦753. Anonymous. Review of Doncaster, L. *842. Anonymous. Raising Cyclamen hybrids. 843. Anonymous. Scottish station for plant breeding. 844. Anonymous. Progress of genetical research. 845. Anonymous. Selection in Hevea brasilien- sis. 846. Anonymous. Hybrid Gladioli. 847. Anonymous. Supposed hybrid between banana and pawpaw. 848. Anonymous. Rev. of Richardson, C. W. *849. Anonymous. Rev. of Agar, W. E. *850. Anonymous. Original description of Turley apple. 948. Anonymous. Spacing of coconuts. 949. Anonymous. Pruning olive trees. 950. Anonymous. Grafting mangosteen. '951. Anonymous. Rev. of Staward, R. *952. Anonymous. Alpine plants for rock gardens. 1010. Anonymous. Aquarium exhibits, Missouri [U. S. A.] 1011. Anonymous. Native plants suitable for gardens of Missouri and adjoining states [U. S. A.] 1012. Anonymous. Commercial mushroom culti- vation. *1013. Anonymous. Banana flour. *1036. Anonymous. Italian grape-seed oil industry. 1037. Anonymous. Rev. of Small, James. *1048, *1097. Anonymous. Rev. of Jarvis, E. 1125. Anonymous. Black scab in potatoes. *1169. Anonymous. Potato leaf curl. 1170. Anonymous. Grape anthracnose. 1214. Anonymous. Olive knot. 1215. Anonymous. Control of silver blight. 1216. Anonymous. North Carolina apple spraying calendar. 1217. Anonymous. Exhibition of disease of the para rubber tree. 1260. Anonymous. An Imperial Bureau of Mycol- ogy, India. 1261. Anonymous. Coloring matters of plants. 1303. Anonymous. Synthetic ammonia. 1415. Anonymous. Use of basic slag. 1416. Anonymous. A new kelp shredder catalogue. *1499. Anonymous. Making carbon from kelp. 1500. Anonymous. Abstract of Williams, W. C. 1501. Anonymous. Organization of scientific work in India. 1502, *1506. Anonymous. Cost of scientific publications. 1503. Anonymous. Symposium on the microscope. 1504. Anonymous. Rev. of Laucks, I. F. 1505. Anonymous. Rev. of Pellett, F. C. *1507. Anonymous. Report of German Agricultural Society. 1528. Anonymous. Rice seed. 1529. Anonymous. Peanut products. *1530. Anonymous. Report of Committee on Po- tato Seed Certification. *1531. Anonymous. Tobacco in South Australia. 1532. Anonymous. Cotton growing. 1590. Anonymous. International Catalogue of Scientific literature. M. Botany. 1919. 1591. AnonjTnous. Mary Sophie Young. 1592. Anonymous. William Gilson Farlow. 1593. Anonymous. Toronto Botanic Garden. 1607. Anonymous. Carriers of the germ plasm. *1611. Anonymous. British forestry conference. 1620. Anonymous. Rev. of Seward, A. C. *1621. Anonymous. Sump tree products. 1622. Anonymous. State forest nurseries. 1623. Anonymous. A misconception concerning human heredity. 1669. Anonymous. Disease-proof potatoes. 1670. Anonymous. Factor influencing sex-ratio. 1671. Anonymous. Heredity of cancer. 1672. Anonymous. Inheritance of continuous and discontinuous variations. 1673. Anonymous. Present aspects of immigra- tion. 1674. Anonymous. Rev. of Akerman, A. *167o. Anonymous. Rev. of Allard, H. A. *1676. 338 INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES Anonymous. Rev. of Anthony, Stephen, and Harry V. Harlan. *1677. Anonymous. Rev. of Blakeslee, A. F., and B. T. Avery, Jr. *1678. Anonymous. Rev. of Broili. *1679. Anonymous. Rev. of Collins, G; N., and J. H. Kempton. *1680. Anonymous. Rev. of Collins, J. L. *1681. Anonymous. Rev. of Dorsey, M. J. *1682. Anonymous. Rev. of East, E. M., and D. F. Jones. *1683. Anonymous. Rev. of Emerson, R. A. *1684. Anonymous. Rev. of Ernst, A. *1685. Anonymous. Rev. of Feenstra-Sluiter, C. *1686. Anonymous. Rev, of Freeman, G. F. *1687, *1688. Anonymous. Rev. of Hagedoorn-LaBrand, A. C, and A. L. Hagedoorn. *1689. Anonymous. Rev. of Hayes, H. K. *1690. Anonymous. Rev. of Heribert-Nilsson, N. *1691. Anonymous. Rev. of Heusser, C. *1692. Anonymous. Rev. of Honing, J. A. *1693. Anonymous. Rev. of Johnson, J. *1694. Anonymous. Rev. of Jones, D. F. *1695. Anonymous. Rev. of Kempton, J. H. *1696. Anonymous. Rev. of Koch, L. *1697, *1698, *1699, *1700, *1701. Anonymous. Rev. of Kotowski, Feliks. *1702. Anonymous. Rev. of Leighty, Clyde E. *1703. Anonymous. Rev. of Leverenz, C. *1704. Anonymous. Rev. of Moore, H. J. *1705. Anonymous. Rev. of Nafziger, T. E. *1706. Anonymous. Rev. of Nilsson-Ehle, H. *1707. Anonymous. Rev. of Rasmusson, J. *1708. Anonymous. Rev. of Salmon, E. S. *1709. Anonymous. Rev. of Tedin, Hans. *1710. Anonymous. Rev. of Tischler, G. *1711. Anonymous. Rev. of Tjebbes, K., and H. N. Kooiman. *1712. Anonymous. Rev. of Ubisch, G. von. *1713. Anonymous. Rev. of Urban, J. *1714. Anonymous. Rev. of White, O. E. *1715, *1716. Anonymous. Rev. of Zaleski, Leopold. *1717. Anonymous. Rev. of Zinn, Jacob. *1718. Anonymous. American Iris Society. 1857. Anonymous. Named varieties of pecans. *1885. Anonymous. New hybrid fruit plants. 1886. Anonymous. Blooming and ripening seasons of various fruits. *1888. Anonymous. Raspberry breeding. 1889. Anonymous. Self-fertility tests of varieties of pears. *1890. Anonymous. Dwarf French beans at Wisley. 1946. Anonymous. Irrigation and fertilizer experi- ments with beets. 1947. Anonymous. Lettuce at Wisley. 1948. Anonymous. Winter lettuce at Wisley. 1949. Anonymous. Cardot's moss herbarium. 1968. Anonymous. Silver leaf disease. *2033. Anonymous. Cancer research. 2062. Anonymous. Agar production in U. S. A. 2075. Anonymous. Indian grown Cinchona. 2076. Anonymous. Camphor cultivation and sub- stitutes. 2077. Anonymous. Mowra. 2078. Anonymous. French drugs. 2079. Anonymous. Aromatic plants of Madagas- car. 2080. Anonymous. Gas as a fertilizer. 2127. Anonymous. Effect of light on growth and reproduction in plants. 2168. Anonymous. New orchids. 2192. Anonymous. Artificial silk. 2260. Anonymous. Voices of trees. 2261. Anthony, R. D. Methods of interpreting results of orchard fertilizer experiments. 953. Anthony, Stephen, and Harry V. Harlan. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1677. Arber, Agnes. Law of loss in evolution. 851. — Leaf morphology in Liliaceae. 1051. — Morphology of Pistia and Lem- naceae. 1052. Arber, E. A. N. Morphology of Calamites. 1098. Armbruster, Ludwig. Bee and wasp brains in comparative studies of heredity and race. 852. Armstrong, E. Frankland. (Rev. by Anony- mous) 409. Arnaud, G. Phytopathological notes. 1126. Arnell, H. W., and C. Jensen. Mosses and hepatics of Sweden. 1079. Arnett, C. N. (Atkinson, Alfred, J. B. Nelson, Arnett, W. E. Joseph, and O. Tretsven) 583. Arthur, J. C. Destructive rusts ready to invade the U. S. A. 1127. INDEX TO AUTHOKS NAMES 339 Aston, B. C. Radio-active fertilizers in England and America. *436, 457. Atanasofif, Dimitr. Fusarium blight (scab) of cereals. 2034. Atkinson, A., and E. W. Joseph. Report of the Montana Grain Inspection Labora- tory. 582. Atkinson, Alfred, J. B. Nelson, C. N. Arnett, W. E. Joseph, and O. Tretsven. Sun- flower utilization in Montana. 583. Atkinson, Edmond H. Weeds of New Zealand. 12, *1278. — Lantana in New Zealand. 584.— Weeds and their identi- fication. 2081. Aubert, C.-G. Conversion of coppice into high forest in western France. 754. Aubin, M. L. Ringing peach trees. 1891. Auchter, E. C. Influence of thinning, pollination, and fruit spur growth on yearly performance record of fruit spurs and on size of fruit. 954. Avery, B. T., Jr. (Blakeslee, A. F., and Avery) *1678. B., E. G. Rev. of Jorgensen, E. 1423. B., F. O. Rev. of Church, A. H. 381. B., V. H. Wilhelm Pfeflfer. 691. B., W. W. Tropical control of Australian rainfall. ^577. Babcock, Ernest B., and Julius L. Collins. Interspecific hybrids in Crepis. 1719. Bach, Siegfried. Albinos in maize. 159. Bailey, C. H., and A. M. Gurjar. Respira- tion of rusted wheat. 1151. — Respira- tion of sprouted wheat. 1352. — Respira- tion of rice paddy and milled rice. 1353. — Respiration of frosted wheat plants. 1354. Bailey, E. (Jones, L. R., M. Miller, and Bailey) 1267.- Bailey, E. M. Drug and food products. 1279.— Diabetic foods. 1508.— (Jenkins, E. H., and Bailey) 1418. Bailey, I. W. Size variation of cambial cells. 1957. Baird, W. P. Corn in Montana. 585. Baker, E. Fire protection in forests. *755. Baker, Edmund G., and C. E. Salmon. Segregates of Erodium cicutarium. 1424. Baker, R. T. (Rev. by Anonymous) 1618. Bakke, A. L. Desiccation in normal and curly dwarf potatoes. 2029. Baleriola, Caspar. Mulberry pruning. 756. Balfour, I. Bailey. Rhododendron at Daw- yck Stobo, Tweed Dale. 1014.— Some large-leaved rhododendrons. *1015. Ball, E. D., and F. A. Fenton. Potato leaf hopper and the leafburn. *1171. Ballard, W. R. Geranium breeding. 853. Ballou, F. H., and I. P. Lewis. Orchard rejuvenation, Ohio. 1892. Bally, Walter. Godronian hybrids of Aegi- lops and Triticum. *854. Balme, Juan. The raspberry and its culture. 955. Bannier, J. P. Rev. of Correns, C. ♦1722.— Rev. of Coulter, Merle C. *1733.— Rev. of Stout, A. B. *1724. Bano, Jose de. Preservation of fresh grapes. 1038. Barber, C. A. Sugar cane. 586, 589, 1533. — Millets for fodder on sugar estates. 587. — Extending sugar cane milling sea- son. 588.— (Rev. by Anonymous) 7, *317. Barbey, A. Forest management, Alsace. 109. — Oak parasite 110. — Swiss forests. 757.— Forest and battlefield. 758. Barclay, J. R. Aberdeen-Angus cattle. 855. Barfusz, J. Care of winter potatoes. 590. Barger, George. Ergot, its history and chemistry. 2082. Barnard, J. E. Construction and use of the microscope. *555. Barron, Leonard. Dahlias. 1858. — Ever- green gardens. 1859. Barrus, M. F. Potato seed certification. ♦1534. Barss, A. F. (Lewis, C. I., F. R. Brown, and Barss) 277. Barthe, A. E. Castor bean. 591. — Maize cultivation. *1535. Parasite control. 2050. Bartlett, A. W. Demonstration of absorp- tion of oxygen in respiration. *713. Bartlett, H. Potato experiments. New South Wales. 592.— (Meek, B. C, and Bartlett) 630. Bartlett, R. G. (Allen, W. J., and Bartlett) 947. Baudys, E. Fungus flora of Bosnia and Herzgovinia. 1128. Baumann, E. Breeding rape for increased yields. 160.— Individual and immunity breeding in potatoes. 1720. Bayliss, W. M. Colloidal nature of proto- plasm. 720. Bayon, H. Racial and sexual differences in vermiform appendix. 856. 340 INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES Beal, G. D. (Perry, Margaret C, and Beal) 1377. Bean, W. J. One-leaved ash. *759. — Trees and shrubs, garden notes. *760. — The Fortune! group of Rhododendrons. *1016. Bear, Firman E. Value of chemical analysis. 1387. Beath, O. A. Poisonous plants. *111. Beck, Olga. Seed treatment for wheat. 1218. Becker, J. Breeding Brassicas. 161. — Sero- logical investigations in plant breeding. 162. — ^Xenia between musk melons and cucumbers. *1725. Beckwith, Charles S. Effect of fertilizers on blueberries. 956. Bedford, Duke of, and Spencer Pickering. (Rev. by Anonymous) 256. Bell, Julia. (Pearson, Karl, and Bell) 1785. Bell, T. R. Forest administration, Bombay. 112. Belling, John. (Blakeslee, A. L., Belling, and M. E. Farnham) 858. Benders. Rev. of Doyer, J. J. *1726.— Rev. of Slye, Maud. *1727. Benedict, Francis G. (Harris, J. Arthur, and Benedict) *1738. Bennett, E. R. Good seed and the vege- table industry. 1950. Benoist, Raymond. Plants collected by M, E. Wagner in the Argentine. 483. — Plants collected in French Guiana. 1425. — Descriptions of new species of phan- erogams. 2193. Berg, Anthony. (Gidding, N. J., and Berg) 2023. Berkhout, A. H. Measurement of tree growth. 761. Bernbeck. Growth and wind. 113, *427. — Plant physiology —winds and water loss, 114. Berry, Edward W. Cretaceous flora of Ten- nessee. 382.— Rev. of Seward, A. C. 383. — New specific name, Inga culebrana. 384.— Sequoia ancestry. *385, *1624.— Syllabus of paleobotany. 386. — Age of Dakota flora. 387. — History of Liquid- ambar and Hamamelis. 1099. — Paleon- tology and pragmatism. *1100. Bertrand, Gabriel. Effect of chloropicrine upon plants. 438, 439, 1152, *1625. Bertrand, Gabriel, and Mme. Rosenblatt. Effect of chloropicrine on bacterial devel- opment. 2172. Bewley, W. F. "Damping off" of tomato seedlings. 1172. Beythien, A. Brandy from lamp-alcohol. *1599. Bezagu, Maurice. Respiration and age of leaf. 1330. Biberfield, Johannes. Toxicology of alka- loids. *410. Bigelow, W. D., and J. R. Esty. Thermal death point of bacterial spores. 2167. Bijl, P. A. van der. Septogloeum leaf spot of peanut. 1207. Bintner, J. Silver leaf disease. *762. Birch-Hirschfeld, Luise. Rate of transfer of dissolved substances in plants. 2118. Birmingham, W. A. Suspected peach rosette in Australia. 1129. — Crown gall of fruit trees. 1173. — Armillaria mellea root rot of fruit trees. 1174. Bisby, G. R. Fusarium diseases of potatoes and truck crops. 1139. Bisby, G. R., and A. G. Tolaas. Bordeaux mixture for potatoes. *593, 1219. — Potato diseases in Minnesota. 1175. Bixby, W. G. Juglans cordiformis and J. sieboldiana. 1860. — Butternut and Japan walnut. 1893.-1918 nut contest. 1894. — Nuts without inner shell. 1895. Blackman, V. H. Radioactivity and phys- iological function. 437. — The signifi- cance of the efficiency index in growth. 1359. Blair, E. C. (Williams, C. B., Blair, et al) 2188. Blair, R. E. Preservative treatments for willow posts. *1220. Blake, S. F. Revision of the true ma- hoganies. 1426. Blakeslee, Albert F. Unlike reaction to fragrance in Verbena. 163. — Sex differ- entiation in the bread molds. 857. — Dwarf mutation in Portulaca. 1721. Blakeslee, Albert F., and B. T. Avery, Jr. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1678. Blakeslee, Albert F., John Belling, and M. E. Farnham. Chromosomal duplication in Datura. 858. Blanc, Georges, and Gabriel Brun. (Rev. by Anonymous) 355. Blaringhem, L. Color and sex of flowers. 164. — Peloria in Digitalis. *165. — Varia- tions of sex in Compositae. 166. — Peloria in Digitalis. 859. — Floral variation in Leucanthemum. 860. — Traumatic pro- duction of new form of maize. 861. — INDEX TO authors' NAMES 341 Stability and fertility in Geum hybrids. ♦862. Blatter, Ethelbert. (Rev. by Anonymous) 481. Blatter, E[thelbert], and F. Hallberg. Flora of Indian desert. 484. — Indian species of Rotala and Ammannia. 506. Boerker, R. H. D. (Rev. by Anonymous) *744. Bokura, Umenjo. Bacterial disease of gypsy moth. *373, 1262. Bolte, Elisabeth. Effect of light and car- bonic acid on the motility of green and colorless swarm cells. 2113. Bolzon, P. Plants of Dora Baltae valley. 485. Bond, C. J. Eye color factors in birds. 863. — Heterodactylous fowls. 864. Bonnet, L. O. "Yema" graft of the vine. 1896. Bonnier, Gaston. Alterations experimen- tally obtained in plants. 1728. Boodle, L. A. Origin of adventitious leaves in Cyclamen. 1053. — Scorching of foliage by sea-winds. 1153. Boring, E. G. A priori use of the Gaussian law. 865. Bornemann. Organic nutrition of higher green plants. 1304. Bose, J. C. Growth of plants. 1360. Life movements in plants. 2164. Bosinelli, G. (Ravenna, C., and Bosinelli) 2141. Bottomley, W. B. Growth of Lemna in various solutions. 401. — Effect of or- ganic matter on growth of water plants. 1305. — Effect of nitrogen-fixing organisms and nucleic derivatives on plant growth. 1331. Boulger, G. S. Rev. of Henry, Augustine. *763.— Rev. of Stone, Herbert. *764. Bourquelot, and Bridel. Sucrose from gen- tianose by biochemical methods. *2132. Bouvier, E. L., and d'Emmerez de Charmody. Mutation in Atyid Crustacea. 866. Boving, P. A. Farm crops, British Colum- bia. *594. — Sunflower silage. *595. Bower, F. O. Botany of the living plant. 1608.— Earliest land flora. 2005.— (Rev. by Anonymous) 67. Bower, F. O., J. Graham Kerr, and W. E. Agar. Sex and heredity. 167. Boyer, Jacques. Artificial fertilization of flowers. *1861. Boynton, K. R. Vocational education in the U. S. A. *86. Bradford, Samuel Clement. Absorptive stratification in gels. *1293. — Theory of gels. *1380. Brainerd, Ezra, and A. K. Peitersen. Black- berries of New England. *259. Brandes, E. W. Mosaic disease of corn. 1176. Braun, Harry. Seed treatment of grain by presoak method. 1221. Brause, G. Papuasian pteridophytes. 497. — On van Alderwerelt van Rosenburgh's new genus Thysanobotryal. 498. Breakwell, E. Improvement of sweet sor- ghums. *13, 168. — Popular description of grasses. 14. — Native and introduced grasses. 1536. — Grasses, New South Wales. 1537. Brenchley, Winifred E. Weeds, England. 596. Brereton, W. le Gay. (Allen, W. J., and Brereton) 250, 251. Brewster, A. A. Blood root flowers. *298. — Aril of Cupania and Synoum. *1054. — Morphology of Microzamia. 1055. — Daw- sonia polytrichoides, Australian moss. 1080. Brick, C. Plant disease resistance. 1154. Bridel (Bourquelot and Bridel) *2132. Bridges, C. B. (Morgan, T. H., Bridges, and A. H. Sturtevant) 878. Brierley, C. H. Plant hairs. 1958. Brierl[e]y, W. B. The fungal species. *358.— Rev. of Ellis, G. S. M. 714.— (Rev. by Anonymous) 357. Brierl[e]y, W. G. Report, Division of Hor- ticulture, Minnesota. 169. — Comparison of fall, winter, and spring pruning of apple trees. 957. — Cider and vinegar making qualities of Minnesota apples. *1039. Briggs, G. E. Photosynthetic activity dur- ing germination. 1300. — (Kidd, Franklin, Cyril West, and Briggs) 1301. Briquet, J. New and little known plants. 507. Bristow, E. A. (Spafford, W. J., and Bris- tow) 1581. Britten, J. Lehmann's Pugilli. 694. — John Gilbert Baker. 695. — Early Cape botan- ists. *1594. Brittlebank, C. C. Tomato diseases, Vic- toria. 2035. Britton, N. L. Paulownia trees. 299. — New West Indian plants. 1427. — Wild pimento of Jamaica. 1428. BOTANICAL ABSTR.4.CTS, VOL,. VII, NO. 3 342 INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES Britton, N. L., and C. F. Millspaugh. The Bahama flora. 1429. Britton, N. L., and J. N. Rose. The Cac- taceae. 2194.— (Rev. by Coulter, J. M.) 511. — (Rev. by Shreve, Forrest) 545. Brocq-Rousseu. (Lapicque and Brocq-Rous- seu) *2265. Broeck, van den. Rev. by H[ieronynius], G. 1086. Broili. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1679.— Potato hybrid valuable for agriculture. *1729. Brooks, F. T. Fruit tree sanitation. 2051. Brotherton, W. E., Jr. Rogue types in i- '^^garden peas. 867. Brotherus, V. F. Mosses of Ecuador. 350. Brown, A. M. Bacteria and fungi in butter. 556. Brown, B. E. (Schreiner, Oswald, Brown, J. J. Skinner, and M. Shapovalov) 1413. Brown, Benjamin A. (Slate, William L. Jr., and Brown) 1578. Brown, Edgar. What farmers should expect from seedsmen. 597. Brown, Elizabeth D. W. Apogamy in Osmunda. 1056. Brown, Ernest B. Seed corn yields. 15. Brown, F. R. (Lewis, C. I., Brown, and A. F. Barss) 277. Brown, Forest B. H. Silicious skeleton of tracheids and fibers. *765. — Wall struc- ture in wood cells. 1057. Brown, J. G. Rev. of Cook, M. T. *87.— Rev. of Chamberlain, Charles J. *1058. Brown, William H., and Elmer D. Merrill. Philippine palms. *486. Browne, Isabel M. P. Anatomical evidence as to phylogeny of Equisetum. *1059. — Phylogeny of Equisetum. 1101. Brozek, Arthur. Mosaic hybrid of Minulus tigrinoides. *1730. Bruce, E. A. Hydrangea poisoning. 2083. Bruce, J. L. Rotation of crops. 16. Bruel, L. Rev. of Roux, W. *1731. Brun, Gabriel. (Blanc, G. and Brun) 355. Brun, H. de. Fire protection of forests, France. 771. Bryan, George S. Fusion of the ventral canal cell and egg in Sphagnum subse- cundum. 1081. Bryant, W. W. (Herdman, W. A., H. H. Turner, E. B. Knobel, and Bryant) 1516. Bryce, P. I. Potato storage. 1222. Bryn, Halfden. Anthropological heredity. 1732. Buder, Johannes. Biology of purple bac- teria. 1355. Bugnon, P. Vascular bundles of Gramineae. 1060. Bull, C. P. (Willaman, J. J., R. M. West, and Bull) 676. Bullard, W. P. Cultivated pecans in car- load lots. 1897. Buller, A. H. R. New British Coprini. 1978.— (Rev. by Russell, E. J.) 651. Bunyard, E. A. Cobnuts and filberts. 1898. Burch, D. S. Heredity and economical food production. 1733. Burdett, James H. Summary of first sea- son's work of National Garden Bureau. *1026. Burger, Owen F. (Rev. by Kniep, H.) 904. Burgess, J. L. Seed. *598. — Fertilizing action of lime. 1408. Burkill, I. H. (Prain, D., and Burkill) 532. Burns, George P. Production of "redwood" in conifers. *115, 318, *428, *1626.— Tol- erance of forest trees and succession. 766. Burns, W. Aspects of plant genetics. *170, 868. Burns, W., and P. G. Dani. Banana culti- vation. 1899. Burt, B. C, and Nizamuddin Haider. Cawn- pore-American cotton. 1538. Butler, O., and T. O. Smith. Adhesiveness of copper fungicides. 2052. C, A. H. Rev. of Doncaster, L. *722. C, C. Rev. of Mackenzie, R. J. J. 17.— Soils and manures in New England. *1388. C, N. R. Rev. of Bower, F. O. 67. Cabrera, Teodoro. Rhoeo and its medical uses. 2084. Calderwood, H. N., Jr. (Hawley, L. F., and Caldwood) 791. Calvino, Mario. Soy beans in Cuba. 18. — Elephant grass, Cuba. 1539. — (Rev. by Anonymous) 2.55. Cambage, R. H. Flora of New South Wales. *767. Campbell, C. H. Jelly. 1040. Campbell, D. H. Affinities of Botrychium. 1959. INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES 343 Campbell, J. A. Natural cool-air fruit storage. 260. — Fruit industry of North America. 261, 262. Camus, Aimee. New Gramineae of eastern Asia. 508. — Vetiveria zizanioides Stapf. 509. Cardon, P. V., W. O. Whitcomb, and W. F. Day. Seventh annual report of the P Montana Grain Inspection Laboratory. 599. Cardot, E. Forest reconstruction, France. 768. Carey, Cornelia Lee. Preparation and prop- erties of starch gel. 1306. Carpentier, A. Lower Carboniferous seeds from France. 388. — Paleozoic plants of France. 2006. Carrero, J. O. (Gile, P. L., and Carrero) 2122. Carroll, Mitchell. Spermatogenesis in Cam- nula. 171. Carter, E. G. (Greaves, J. E., and Carter) 2181. Carter, Nellie. Chloroplasts of Desmids. 724. Casparis, P. Turkestan drugs. 2085. Castellani, Aldo. Etiology of thrush. 359. — Milroy Lectures. 360, 361, 362. Castellari, G. (Pavarino, G. L., and Cas- tellari) 2266. Castle, W. E. Whitman-Riddle on ortho- genesis in pigeons. 172. — Genetics and eugenics. 1734. — (Rev. by Coulter, M. C.) 175. Cauda, A. Plant groups fixing free nitrogen. *374. — Detection of nitrogen fixing properties in bacteria. 2142. Chalmers, Albert J., and Norman Mac- Donald. Bronchomoniliasis in Africa. 363. Chamberlain, Charles J. Mutation in Botry- chium. 1735.— (Rev. by Brown, J. G.) *1058. Champlin, W. H. (Hume, A. N., Champlin, and M. Fowlds) 900. Chandler, W. H. Response of fruit trees to pruning. 958. Chaney, Ralph W. Oligocene flora of Ore- gon. 389.— Flora of Eagle Creek forma- tion. *1627. Chapman, G. H. Chrysanthemum "crack- neck." 2063. Charmody, d'Emmerez de. (Bouvier, E. L., and de Charmody) 866. Chase, Agnes. (Hitchcock, A. S., and Chase) 2063. Chase, Virginius H. Francis Eugene M 'Don- ald. 696. Chasset, L. Dwarf goblet in the garden. 1862.— Amsden peach. 1900. Cheesman, T. F. Flora of New Zealand. *769. Chemin, E. Anatomy and biology of Lath- raea. 319, *423. Chevalier, Aug. Pears, walnuts, and chest- nuts in the colder regions of Indo-China and southern China. 959. Childs, L. Apple spraying and dusting in Oregon. 2053. Chiovenda, E. Myriostoma in Italy. 364. Chittenden, F. J. (Jaramillo, P. J., and Chittenden) 212. Chivers, A. H. (Stevens, Neil E., and Chi- vers) 2070. Church, A. H. Evolution of plants. 2007. — (Rev. by Anonymous) 381, 711, *1050.— (Rev. by Tansley, A. G.) 717, *1121.— (Rev. by H., W. P.) *1049. Church, Margaret B. Root contraction. *320. Ciamician, G., and Ravenna. Behavior of vegetable substances in plants. 2133, 2134. Clapp, S. C. (Williams, C. B., Clapp, et al) 2188. Clark, A. Wayne, R. O. Smith, and Leroy Forman. Absorbent cotton. 2088. Clark, Anna Barbara (Raistrick, Harold, and Clark) 1322. Clark, W. B. (Pritchard, F. J., and Clark) 2059. Clarke, Frank Wigglesworth. Constituents of the earth's crust. 1389. Clarkson, Edward Hale. A fern .garden. *300. Clawson, Benjamin, Jr. Constancy of varie- ties of Streptococci. 869. Cleaver, S. M. History of Merino breeding. 870. Clinton, George P. Moldy butter. 1979.— Connecticut plant diseases. *2017. — Dry rot. 2036. Clinton, G[eorge] P., and Florence A. Mc- Cormick. Artificial infection of pines with Cronartium ribicola. 1140. Clouston, D., and F. J. Plyman. Fodder plants in India. 1540. Clute, W. N. Plant names. 715, *716, *1609. Coates, U. Aylmer. Phytolacca. 2086. Cobb, N. A. A new nematode on mahogany. 1177. Cochet-Cochet. Two new roses. 1863. 344 INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES Cockayne, A. Introduction of fire blight into New Zealand. 1130. Cockayne, L. Montane tussock-grasslands, New Zealand. 19, 600, 601, *1280. Cockerell, T. D. A. A new form of Stanlcya. 1430.— Sugar beet seed. 1541, Cos, H. S. (Piper, C. V., and Coe) 2046. Coker, W. C. North Carolina Basidiomy- cetes. 1980. Coker, W. C, and J. N. Couch. New species of Achlya. 1981. Cole, Leon J. Family history of color- blindness. 1736. Colebatch, W. J. Report on experimental work. South Australia. 1542. Colin, H. Inulase in Jerusalem artichokes. 1.337. — Diastatic inversion of saccharose. 1338. Collins, G. N., and J. H. Kempton. Linneate leaves in maize. 1737. — (Rev. by Anonymous) *1680. Collins, J. L. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1681. — (Babcock, Ernest B., and Collins) 1719. CoUinson, R. C. Fertilizer experiments with fruits in New York. 960, *1390. Colwell, W. R. Sudan grass, New South Wales. 20. Cook, Mel. T. (Rev. by Anonymous) 78. — (Rev. by Brown, J. G.) *87. Cook, Mel. T. (Stevens, F. L., L. H. Pammel, and Cook) 1605. Cook, O. F. Cotton industry. 602. Coons, G. H. Seed treatment of wheat. *1223. Corbett, L. C. Investigation in horticul- ture. 1901. Corbishley, A. G. Nectaropetalum zuluense. 5-10. Correa Mendes, F. C. Report of Director of Forestry and Agriculture, Portuguese East Africa. 1564.— Silk cotton. 1628.— Forest nurseries. 1629. Correns, C. Pathology and inheritance in plants. *173. — Modification of the sex ratio. *174, 871.— (Rev. by Bannier) *1722. Costantin, J. Chemistry of chlorophyll and anthocyan. 411. Couch, J. N. (Coker, W. C, and Couch) 1981. Couch, James F., and Leigh T. Giltner. Experimental study of Echinacea ther- apy. 2087. Coulter, J. M. Rev. of Britton, N. L., and J. N. Rose. *511. — Botanical research. 1510, 1511. Coulter, Merle. Rev. of Castle, W. E. *175.— (Rev. by Bannier) *1723. Coville, Frederick V. Influence of cold on growth of plants. 434, *1630. Cowell, Arthur Westcott. Awbury Arbore- tum address. 88, *1631. Crandall, C. S. Characters of Malus forms. 872. Craster, J. E. E. (Rev. by Cunningham, Bryson) 468. Cremata, Merlino. Botanical excursion to the Isle of Pines. 1431. Crevald, S. van. Rev. of Harris, J. Arthur, and Francis G. Benedict. *1738. Cribbs, James E. Foliar transpiring power of Tilia americana. *770. Crile, Austin D. Eradication of Johnson grass. *603. Cromwell, R. O. Fusarium blight of soy beans. 1178. Crow, J. W. Plant breeding from horti- cultural standpoints. 873 — Vegetable seed growing and breeding. 874. Crozier, W. J. Assortative pairing in Chro- modoris. 176. Cruchet. Fungous parasites of B. erectus. *1131. Cruess, W. V. Evaporation of vegetables. 1954. Culmann, P. Bryophytes of Switzerland and France. 1969. Cunliffe, R. S. Tropical fruit propagation. 263. Cunningham, Bryson. Rev. of Craster, J. E. E. 468. Cunningham, G. H. Mortality among stone fruits in Central Otago, New Zealand. 961, *1 179.— Fire-blight. 2037. Czapek, Friedrich. Organic nutrition of higher green plants. 1307. Dacy, G. H. State forests. 1632. Dahlgren, K. V. Ossian. (Rev. by Ras- musson, H.) *1822. Dahms, P. Roumanian amber. 1102. Dalcq, Albert. Spermatogenesis of the orvet. *875. Dammer, U. Chelyocarpus, a new genus of palm. 2195. Dana, B. F., and Geo. L. Zundel. Head smut of corn and sorghum. 2018. INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES 345 Danforth, Charles H. Resemblance and diflference in twins. 1739. Dangeard, P. A. Structure and metabolism of plant cell. *412. Dani, P. G. Banana inflorescence. 1902. — (Burns, W., and Dani) 1899. Daniel, Lucien. Stability and heredity of Crataegomespilus and Pirocydonia. 876. — New race of Asphodelus resulting from marine climate. *877. — Studies on Sola- num grafts. *1740. — Role of fusion layer in grafts. 1960. Dantony, E. (Vermorel, V., and Dantony) 1254. Darnell-Smith, G. P. Bunchy-top in bana- nas. 1180. Darrow, George M. Raspberries. 1903. Darrow, William H. Fruit inspection. 264. Das, G. (Bose, J. C. assisted by Das) 2164. Das, S. C. (Bose, J. C. assisted by Das) 2164. Dasen, A. H. Vinegar from plantains. 2262. Dastur, J. F. The mode of infection by smut in sugar cane. 1141. — Choanephora cucurbitarum on Capsicum. 1181. Davenport, C. B. Heredity of twin births. 177. — Heredity of constitutional mental disorders. 1741. — Report of the Station of Experimental Evolution. 1742. Davidson, Anstruther. Some California plants. 512. Davies, J. H. (Rev. by Anonymous) 745. Davis, Bradley M. Rev. of Gager, C. Stuart. *178. Davis, D. M., and E. O. Swartz. Germicidal tests with Gonococcus. 2064. Davis, Lewis. Culture media. 2065. Davis, M. B. (Macoun, W. T., and Davis) 914. Day, W. F. (Cardon, P. V., W. O. Whit- comb, and Day) 599. Deane, Walter. (Knowlton, G. H., and Deane) 1456. Deane, Walter, and M. L. Fernald. A new albino raspberry. 1432. Dearing, Charles. Muscadine grapes — cul- ture and uses. 962. Deelen, H. Peat fiber spinning. 557. Dehn, W. M., and M. C. Taylor. Chemical method for detection in fruit* of prior frozen condition. 963. De la Vaulx, R., and P. Marty. Pliocene plants from France. 390. Dembowski, Jan. Principle of continuity in biology. *179. Deming, W. C. Development of nuts. *1904. Demorlaine, J. Silviculture and tanks, France. 773. Demoussy, (Maquenne, and Demoussy) 2173, Dennis, S. J. (Ramsey, H. J., and Dennis) 281. Detwiler, Samuel. White pine blister rust control, 1919. *774, 1224. Dexter, John S. Albino vertebrates. 180. Dickson, B. T. Some plant diseases in the greenhouse. 1182. — Annual meeting of the Canadian branch of the American Phytopathological Society. 1263. Dickson, J. G. (Johnson, A. G., and Dickson) 1234. Diener, Richard. Diener's law (?) of hy- bridizing. 181. — Rev. by Weston, F. A. 247. Dismier, G. French hepatics. 1970. Dixon, H. N. Mosses of Deception Island and south Georgia. 1082. — Fossil mosses. 1971. — African .mosses. 1972. Dixon, H. N., and W. W. Watts. Antarctic mosses. 1973. Doblas, Jos6 Herrera. Haymaking. 604. Dollfus, G. F., and F. H. Fritel. Tertiary charas of France. 2008. Dominguez, Ignacio. Ornamental plant cul- tivation. 1017. Dominguez, Zeferino. Seed corn, Mexico. 605. Doncaster, L. Study of cytology. *721. — Rev. of Morgan, T. H., C. B. Bridges, and A. H. Sturtevant. 878.— Rev. of Punnett, R. C, 879.— (Rev. by C, A. H.) 722.— (Rev. by G., J. B.) 723.— (Rev. by Anonymous) 842. Doran, Wm. L. Temperature relations to spore germination in rusts. 2021. Dore, W. H. Chemical composition of wood. 775. — Chemical composition of conif- erous wood. 776. — Chemical composi- tion of hardwoods. 777. Dorsey, M. J. Dropping of flowers in the potato. 1743. — (Rev. by Anonymous) *1682. Dougherty, Paul L. (Woll, F. W., and Dougherty) 249. Douthirt, C. H. (Stokes, William Royal, and Douthirt) 2071. Downes, H. Herbarium pests. 1512. Downing, R. G. Sugar beets in Victoria. 21. — Flax growing in Victoria. *606. 346 INDEX TO AUTHOKS NAMES Doyer, J. J. Th. (Rev. by Benders) *1726. Drayton, F. L. A plant disease survey of Canada. 1132. Drechsler, Charles. Cabbage black rot in- fection from soil. 2022. Dreyer, Th. F. Inheritance of acquired characters. 182. Drieberg, C. Freak pawpaw. 1905. Drummond, Montagu. Water-calyx in Bes- leria lutea. 1061. Duarte d'Oliveira, Jos^. Fasciation and dichotomy in Portuguese grapes. 880. Duclaux, Emile. Pasteur. 697. Ducomet, V, A powdery mildew of pota- toes. 1133.— Combatting Phytophthora infestans. 1225. Duerden, J. E. Parallel mutations in ostrich. 183. — (Rev. by Anonymous) 157. Duggar, B. M. H-ion concentration and growth of seed plants. 402. — Some fac- tors in research. 558. Dunlap, H. C. California prune and apricot growers. *964. Dunn, L. C. Independent genes in mice. 184. — Linkage in mice and rats. *185. Dupler, A. W. Staminate strobilus of Taxus canadensis *778. Durrell, L. W. Tongs for disinfected seeds. 2263. Dutton, W. C. Dusting and spraying experi- ments. *265, 1226. Dyer, C. L. (Shamel, A. D., L. B. Scott, C. S. Pomeroy, and Dyer) 240, 241. Dymond, J. R. Color characteristics of red clover seed. 607. East, E. M. Population. 881. East, Edward M., and Donald F. Jones. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1683. Eastham, J. W. Report of the Provincial [British Columbia] Plant Pathologist. 1134. — Notes on potato diseases. *1183. — Apple bitter pit. *1184. — ^Apple powdery mildew. *1185. Eberhard, . Julius. Silvicultural systems, Germany. *68, 116. Eberhardt, Ph. Indo-Chinese Quisqualis indica. 513. Eberle, E. G. World trade, production, and consumption of crude botanical drugs. 2089. Ebstein, E. Cretins and albinos in Lerbach. 186. Eckler, Charles R. Gossypii cortex. 2090. Eddy, W. H., H. Lake, and A. B. Lyman. Committee report on Minnesota fruit breeding farm. 187. Edson, H. A. (Shapovalov, M., and Edson) 2030. Edwards, C. L. Lessons of the season. 1906.— Nut growing in Texas. *1907. Eeden, F. W. van. (Kops, Jan, van Eeden, and L. Vuyck) 1457. Ehinger, M. Odontoglossum Rossii Lindl. 514. Ehrenberg, P. Effect of soil and manuring upon plant diseases. 1155. — Probable error calculations. 1543. Ehrhorn, E. M. Plant shipment. ^779. Elderton, Ethel M. Life history albums. 188. EUenwood, C. W., and Paul Thayer. Fruit thinning. 965. Ellett, W. B., and W. G. Harris. Phosphate rock and sulphur. 1403. Ellinger, Tage. Coefficients of inbreeding and relationship. 1744. Elliott, Jessie S. Bayliss. Conidia and stroma of Daldinia concentrica. 1982. — British Discomycetes. 1983.— (Elliott, W. T., and Elliott) 1984, *2002. Elliott, W. T., and Jessie S. Elliott. Se- quence of fungi and mycetozoa. 1984, ♦2002. Ellis, G. S. M. (Rev. by Brierl[e]y, W. B.) 714. Elorduy, Samuel Torres. Sugar beets, Mexico. *608. Emerson, R. A. Pistillate-flowered maize. 1745. — (Rev. by Anonymous) *1684. Endres. Rev. of Redslob, Kurt, and Hein- rich Hornshu. 117. Engledow, F. L. Inheritance in barley. 882. Engler, A. Botanical Garden [Berlin] report. *89, *90.— Sterculiaceae of Africa. 515.— Guttiferae of Africa. 516. — Violaceae of Africa. 517.— Vegetation of the Kongoa and the Bambuto Mountains in Kam- erun. *780.— (Rev. by Zon, R.) 838. Engler, A., and P. Graebner. A new Poly- gonatum. 1434. Epstein, Alexandre. Pseudomonas polysac- charidum. 1998. Ernst, A. Parthenogenesis and apogamy. *1746.— (Rev. by Anonymous) *1685. Esam, G. Fruit cool storage, New Zealand. 266. INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES 347 Eflty, J. R. (Bigelow, VV. D., and Esty) 2167. Evans, H. H. Report of District Field Inspector, Vernon British Columbia. *966. — Soil fertility and crop production. *967.— Control of apple scab. 1227. Evvard, J. M. (Lloyd-Jones, O., and Ev- vard) 912. Ewan, A. E. (Roberts, George, and Ewan) 48, 283, 463. Ewart, A. J. Flora of Australia. *781. — Synthesis of sugars from formaldehyde. 1308. E'we, G. E. (Garr, H. D., and E'we) 122. Ewert. New spray mixtures. *1228. Faber, Harold. Forage crops in Denmark. 22, *883. Fabre, J. Henri. Wine making. 314. Fabricius, L. Rev. of Munch, E. 118. — Silviculture, Germany. 119. Fairchild, D. Meyer and Aaronsohn. 1595. — Twins and the limitations of environ- ment. 1747. Fankhauser, F. Prevention of avalanches by terracing. 782. Farnham, M. A. (Blakeslee, Albert F., John Belling, and Farnham) 858. Farr, Wanda Kirkbride. Cell division of pollen-mother-cell. 725. Farrer, R. (Rev. by Anonymous) 1010. Farrington, H. A. Forest administration, Bengal. 120. Farwell, Oliver A. Michigan flora. 487, *1633. Fawcett, William, and Alfred Barton Rendle. Flora of Jamaica. 1435. Federal Horticultural Board, U. S. Dept. Agric. Plant quarantines in U. S. A. *23, *121. — Restrictive legislation and notices of quarantines in U. S. A. 1256. Feenstra-Sluiter, C. Flowering, fruiting, and seeding of Cinchona. *1748. — (Rev. by Anonymous) *1686. Fenton, F. A. (Ball, E. D., and Fenton) 1171. Ferdinandson, C, and 0. Winge. Clathro- sorus, a new genus of Plasmodiopho- raceae. 2003. Femald, M. L. Variations of Cardamine pratensis. 1436. — Northern variety of Ranunculus hispidus. 1437. — Polygala paucifolia forma vestita. 1438. — Ameri- can varieties of Pyrola chlorantha. 1439. — Scirpus acutus. 1440. — Flora of Pen- obscot Bay region. 1441. — The American Ammophila. 2196. — Juncus Gerardi var. pedicellatus. 2197. — A new Digitaria from New Hampshire. 2198. — Oxalis montana. 2199. — Pyrola rotundifolia and P. americana. 2200. — (Deane, Walter, and Fernald) 1432. Fernbach, A., and M. Schoen. Role of acetic aldehyde in alcoholic fermentation. 2146. Feuer, B., and F. W. Tanner. Ultra-violet light and yeast-like fungi. 1371. Filchner, Hans. (Krug, O., and Filchner) 1041. Filley, W. O. (Jones, D. F., and Filley) 1781. Findley, Hugh. Handbook for practical farmers. 609, *944, ^1391. Firbas, Heinrich. Wheat-rye hybrids. *1749. Fischel, Alfred. Causes of animal coat color. *189. Fischer, Ed. (Rev. by Lek, van der) *1798. Fischer, H. Plant metamorphosis and evo- lution. 190. — Nutrient content of fresh and salt waters. 559. — Carbon dioxide and plant breeding. *1750. — Orthogene- sis, mutation, selection. *1751. Fischer, W. Bean anthracnose. 1186. Fisher, Hugo. Plant growth and carbonic acid. *968, 1301. — Plant metamorphosis. 1103. Fisher, M. L. Timothy seed germination. 24. Fisher, R. A. Correlation between relatives in Mendelian inheritance. 191. Fleischer, B. Myotonic dystrophy with cataract. *1752.— (Rev. by Lenz) *1803. Fleischer, Bruno, and William Josenhans. Inheritance of atrophy of the optic nerve (Leber's disease) *1753. Fleischer, M. Rev. of Schiffner, V. 1083.— Rev. of Timm, R. 1084.— Rev. of Kern, F. 1085. — Moss vegetation of Bialowies. *1087. Fletcher, S. W. Observations on French horticulture. 1908. — (Rev. by Russel, E. J.) *284. Floess, R. (Popp, M., and Floess) 642. Flohil, J. T. Determination of diastatic capacity. *1339. Flood, Margaret G. (Henry, Augustine, and Flood) 331, *1448, 2230. Florin, Rudolf. Tertiary plants from China. 1104. Flury, Philipp. Forest management and methods of cutting. 783, 784. 348 INDEX TO authors' NAMES Foex, Et. Nature of potato leaf roll. 1156.— '> Potato degeneration. 2038. Forman, Leroy. (Clark, A. Wayne, R. O. Smith, and Forman) 2088. Fortier, A. Orchard irrigation practice, Cali- fornia. *969. — Water movement in arid soils. 1392. Fowlds, M. (Hume, A. N., M. Champlin, and Fowlds) 900. France, R. H. Parasitism a creative princi- ple. 1754. — (Rev. by Lek, van der) *1792. Fred, E. B. (Anderson, J. A., Fred, and W. H. Peterson) 420.— (Peterson, W. H., and Fred) *377, 1346. Fred, E. B., and W. H. Peterson. Fermenta- tion of xylose by bacteria. 2147. Free, E. E. Rev. of Spoehr, H. A. *413. Freeman, G. F. Cotton breeding in Egypt. 192.— (Rev. by Anonymous) *1687, *1688. Freeman, W. G. Centenary of Royal Bot- anic Garden, Trinidad. 69. Freudenberg, K. Hamamelis tannin. 1309. Friederichs, K. Organization of plant pro- tection for the colonies. *1257. Friedmann, W. G. Carbohydrates of the pecan. *1310. Friesner, Ray C. Daily rhythms of elonga- tion and cell division in roots. 2157. Frimmel, Fr. Breeding black color tones into garden primroses. *1755. Fritel, P. H. Recent Papaver in Pleistocene. 2009.— (Dollfus, G. F., and Fritel) 2008. Frye, T. C. Notes on useful and harmful mosses. 1513. Fuchs, Alfred. Orchis Traunsteineri. 518. Furby, E. B. Wheat for hay, U. S. A. 25.— Top dressing lucerne with superphos- phate. 1544. G., J. B. Rev. of Doncaster, L. 723. Gager, C. Stuart. Prospects for new na- tional botanic garden, U. S. A. *91. — Heredity and evolution in plants. 1610. — (Rev. by Davis, B. M.) 178. Gagnepain, F. New species of Barringtonia and Decaspermum. 1442. — Blumeopsis, a new genus of Compositae. 1443. — , Aetheocephalus, a new genus of Com- positae. 2201. Gahrtz, G. (Sudendorf, Th., and Gahrtz) 660. Galippe, V. Bacilli in amber. 391, *443.— Micro-organisms in paper and papyrus. 1356. Gallard, L. Strawberry culture. 1909 Gallaud, M. Hereditary anomalies in wall- flower. *193. Galloway, Beverly T. New pear stocks. *269, 1910. Gamble, J. S. Indian species of Mimosa. 1444.— Flora of Madras. 2202.— (Rev. by Anonymous) 482. Garard, I. D. (Sherman, H. C, Garard, and V. K. La Mer) 421. Garber, R. J., and P. J. Olson. Morphologi- cal characters related to lodging in cereals. 884. Gardner, Max. (Link, G. K., and Gardner) 2043. Gardner, Willard. Determining capillary transmission constants. 469. — Capillary potential and soil moisture constant. 2177. Garr, H. D., and G. E. E'we. Hemlock bark. ■*122. Garren, G. M. (Winters, R. Y., Garren, and Bixton White) 682. Garrett, A. O. Biological investigations and other sciences. *92. — Some unique rusts. 365. Gasser, G. W. Report of Alaska Experi- ment Station. 26, *268. Gassul, R. Supplement to symmetrical contraction of fingers. 194. Gates, R. R. Rev. of Agar, W. E. *726.— Heredity and eugenics. 885. — Muta- tional vs. recapitulatory characters. 1756. —Rev. of Whitman, C. O. *1757. Gatin, C. L., and M. Molliard. Utilization of cell-wall constituents by Xylaria. 414. Gatin, V. C. Anatomy of peduncle and flower in Liliaceae. 1961. Gaudissart, P. Chondriosomes in muscle fibers. 727. Gehrs, John H. (Rev. by Anonymous) 5. Geilman. Distribution of titanium in soils and plants. 2121. Centner, G. A bacteriosis of barley. 375. Georgeson, C. C. Seed and plant distribu- tion report, Alaska. *27, 269. — Summary of work at Alaska Agricultural Stations. *28, 270, 886. Gerlach. Removing the bitter principle and utilizing lupines. 1545. Gerome, J. Potato growing from abnormal tubers. *29. Gersdorff, C. E. F. Germination of Gladio- lus seeds. 887. INDEX TO authors' NAMES 349 Gershberg, S. (Hibbard, R. P., and Gersh- berg) 1409. Ghirlanda, Carlo. Tannic substances in Moms alba. 2135. Ghose, Manmathanath. Source of sugar in Bihar, India. *785. Gibbs, Vicary. Oaks at Aldenham. 1634. Gibson, Henry. Forcing shrubs into winter bloom. 1864. Giddings, N. J., and Anthony Berg. Late blight of potato and tomato. 2023. Gile, P. L., and J. O. Carrero. Cause of lime-induced chlorosis and availability of iron in soil. 2122. Giltner, Leigh T. (Couch, James F., and Giltner) 2087. Ginarte, Benjamin Munoz. Pineapple cul- tivation in Cuba. 970. Ginzberger, A. Forest distribution, Central Italy and Slavonia. *123. Gleason, H. A. American Iris Society. *70, 302. — Applications of the quadrat method. *786. Glover, Geo. H. Plant poisoning. 2091. Gliick, H. Morphology of leaf and flower. 321. Godfery, M. J. Epipactis viridiflora. 1445. — ^Cephalanthera or Epipactis? 2203. — Orchids of Hants and Dorset. *2204. Goebel, K. Movements of plants. 322. Goj6n, Carlos. Work of tropical fruit experiment station at Cordoba, Mexico. 971. Gonzalez, J. Tobacco, Madrid. *610. Goodale, H. D. Studies on egg production. 195. — Inheritance of egg-production in- soluble? 196. — Sunamer plumage of the drake. 1758. Goodwin, W. T., and W. C. Hyde. Fruit variety testing. 271. Gore, H. C. Diastase and the preparation of sweet potato syrup. 1340. Goris, A., and Ch. Vischniac. Primeverose. *1281. — Characteristics and composition of primeverose. 1311. Gossard, H. A. Dust spraying. 1229. Gough, Geo. C. Potato wart in England. 2039. Gould, H. P. Fruit tree stocks. *272.— — (Rev. by Anonymous) *252. Gould, W. M. Nursery stock production. 273. Gowen, John W. Milk secretion and age in Jersey cattle. 197.— Butter-fat percent- age and age in Jersey cattle. 198. — Self-sterility and cross-sterility in apple. 888. — Conformation related to milk pro- duction. 1759. Graber, L. F. Grimm alfalfa. *611. Grabham, Michael. The alligator pear. 972.— The cluster pine. 1635. Graebner, P. (Engler, A., and Graebner) 1434. Grandchamp, Lucien. (Piedallu, Andre, Philippe Malvezin, and Grandchamp) *2150. Grant, J. A. Grading and packing fruit for market. *973. Greaves, J. E. Antagonistic action of cal- cium and iron. *403, 451. — Transforma- tion of nitrogen in soils. 452. Greaves, J. E., and E. G. Carter. Soil bac- teria as influenced by moisture. 2181. Grebe, C. (Rev. by Rubner, K.) *1092. Green, W. J., Paul Thayer, and J. B. Keil. Apples adapted for Ohio culture. 974, 975.— (Thayer, Paul, J. B. Keil, and Green) 1002 Greenish, Henry. Uzara from Africa. 2092. Gregory, C. T. Heterosporium leafspot of timothy. 2040. Griebel, C. Tea and tobacco substitutes. *1062, 1283.— Seed of lupine. 1284. Grieg-Smith, R. Germicidal act'vity of Eucalyptus oils. *787, 1282, *1374. Grier, N. M. Variation in leaves of Sassa- fras. 199. — Regeneration in Elodea and Ceratophyllum. 1063. Grosser, Otto. Specific proteins in relation to heredity. 200. Gruenert, O. (Sprinkmeyer, H., and Gruen- ert) 1046. Gu^rin, P., and Ch. Lormand. Plasmolytic action of certain gases. 2115. Guha, S. C. (Bose, J. C, assisted by Guha) 2164. Guillaumin A. Flora of New Caledonia. 519, 1446, 2205. — Citranges, limonanges, satsumanges. 1911. Guilliermond, A. Origin of plastids. 728. — Chondriosomes in Saprolegnia. 729. — Cel structure. 1612 Guinaudeau, Ch. Forestry and agriculture n Macedonia. 788. Gunther, R. T. Tradescant's catalogue. 698.— Walter Stonehouse. 699. Gupta, N. N. S. (Bose, J. C, assisted by Gupta) 2164. Gurjar, A. M. (Bailey, C. H., and Gurjar) 1151, 1352, 1353, 1354. 350 INDEX TO ATJTHOKS' NAMES Guthrie, F. B., and G. W. Norris. Wheat in New South Wales. 612. Guttenberg, Hermann von. Statolith the- ory of geotropism. 1364. Guyer, M. F., and E. A. Smith. Trans- mission of induced eye defects. 889. Guyot, Ch. Rev. of Huffel, G. 789. H., W. P. Phyllotaxis. *1049. Haecker, V. Correlations in Mendelian investigation. *1760. Hagedoorn, A. C.-van Vorstheuvel La Brand. (Hagedoorn, A. L., and Hagedoorn- van Vorstheuvel La Brand) 201. Hagedoorn, A. L. (Hagedoorn-La Brand, A. C., and Hagedoorn) *1689. Hagedoorn, A. L., and A. C. Hagedoorn-van Vorstheuvel La Brand. Inherited fac- tor in bacterial infection. 201. Hagedoorn-La Brand, A. C., and A. L. Hagedoorn. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1689. Hahn, Glenn G. (Hartley, Carl, Roy G. Pierce, and Hahn) 2066. Haider, Nizamuddin. (Burt, B. C, and Haider) 1538. Haines, H. H. Indian species of Carissa. 520, *1636. Haldane, J. B. S. Linkage in Paratettix. 202. Hall, A. D. (Rev. by R., E. J.) 1395. Hall, Cuthbert. A new Eucalyptus. 521, *1637. Hall, Ivan C. Purification of obligate anaerobes. 2154. Hall, Thos. D. Maize products, South Africa. *613. — Food value of willow leaves. *790. Hallberg, F. (Blatter, E., and Hallberg) 484, 506. Halligan, C. P. Increasing apple produc- tion. *274. Hamblin, C. O. Lucerne inoculation, New South Wales. 30, *444. Hamelinaye, H. de la. Breast high and stump diameters. 772. Hamilton, A. A. Abnormal branching in palm. *323. Hammarsten, H. Condensation of acetal- dehyde. 415. Hammond, J. Relative growth and develop- ment of cattle. 890. Hammond, J. W. Forage crop for lambs. 1546. Hanly, Joseph. Crop rotation, Ireland. 31. Hansen, Roy. (Whiting, A. L., and Hansen) 1358. 1406. Hansen, W. The true grasses. 522. — Plant breeding records. 891. Plant breeding methods of Mahndorf. *1761. Haralson, C. Minnesota State Fruit Breed- ing Farm. 203 Hardenberg, E. V. Potato inspection in New York. *1230. Hardy, G. H., A. B. Rendle, B. D. Jackson, and C. S. Myers. Cost of scientific publications. *1514. Harlan, Harry V. Smooth-awned barleys. 32. — (Anthony, Stephen, and Harlan) *1677.— (Hayes, H. K., and Harlan) 1765. Harland, S. C. Origin of sea island cotton. 892. — Inheritance in Dolichos. 1762. Harman, Mary T. Chromosomes of Para- tettix. 1763. Harms, H. Three new species of Mucuna. 2206. — New species of Leguminosae. 2207. Harris, E. Wheat grading. New South Wales. 1547. Harris, F. S. Soil moisture and morphology of plants. *398. — Alkali on plant growth. *458.— (Rev. by Russel, E. J.) 284.' Harris, J. Arthur. Universal heterogeneity influencing crop yields. 204. Harris, J. Arthur, and Francis G. Benedict. (Rev. by Creveld, van) *1738. Harris, Robert L. (Muer, Theodore C, and Harris) 2001. Harris, S. World's food supply. 1548. Harris, W. G. (Ellett, W. B., and Harris) 1403. Harrison, J. W. Heslop. Effect of ethyl alcohol on lepidopterous insect. 893. — Inheritance of melanism in Tephrosia. 894. — (Rev. by Anonymous) 157. Harshberger, John W. Textbook of agricul- tural botany. 33, *93. — Old gardens of Pennsylvania. *1865. Hart, C. Inheritance of acquired charac- ters. *1764. Harter, L. L., and J. L. Weimer, Sweet potato surface rot (Fusarium oxyspo- rum). 2041. Hartley, C. P. Better seed corn. 205. Hartley, Carl, Roy G. Pierce, and Glenn G. Hahn. Moulding of nursery stock. 2066. Hartman, Carl G. Free martin and its reciprocal. 895. :"ii INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES 351 Hartmann, Max. Cytology of Chlorogon- ium. 730. Hartridge, H. Microscopic illumination. 1515. — Dehydrating and clearing agents. 1613. Hartwell, Burt L., and F. R. Pember. Di- calcium silicate as a fertilizer. 447. Harvey, E. N. Regulation in plants. 429. Harvey, R. B. P H of tobacco mosaic in relation to catalase. 1379. Harvey-Gibson, R. J. Outlines of the his- tory of botany. 1596. Hassler, E. Bromeliaceae of Paraguay. 523. Hastings, S. (Paulson, R., and Hastings) 1994. Hatton, Ronald G. Quince stocks for pears. 1912. — Selection of apple stock. 1913. Hauch, L. A. Climatic varieties of oak. 1638. Hawley, L. F., and H. N. Caldervvood, Jr. Tar still operation in hard wood distilla- tion plants. *791. Hay, R. Dalrymple. Forest administration, New South Wales. 124. Hayata, Bunzo. Illustrations of plants of Formosa. 1447. Hayes, H. K. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1690. Hayes, H. K., and Harry V. Harlan. Length of internode in barley spike. 1765. Hayes, H. K., John H. Parker, and Carl Kurtzweil. Rust resistance in crosses of varieties of Triticum vulgare with varieties of T. durum and T. dicoccum. 1766. Haynes, Caroline C. North American varie- ties of Riccia. 1088. Hays, F. A. (Lloyd-Jones, O., and Hays,) 221. Headley, F. B. Toxicity of alkali salts. 1393. Heal, John. Breeding Hippeastrums. 206. Hedrick, U. P. European grapes in eastern America. 976. — (Rev. by Jackson, V. G.) *1917. Hefs, K., and W. Weltzien. Possibility of plants building up optical antipodals. 2136. Heilbnmn, L. V. Artificial parthenogenesis in Cumingia. 207. Heinicke, Arthur. Abscission phenomena in apples and pears. 977, *1362. Heinrich, M. Seed control. *1549.— Timo- thy seed germination. 1550. Heinricher, E. Attempted hybridization of mistletoe. *208, 1639. — Relation between mistletoe and pear. 1157. Helms, Johs., and Paul Wegge. Transplant- ing tests. 1640. Hemmi, Takewo. Three cases of anthrac- nose of plants. *366, 1187. Hemsley, W. Botting, and others. Aldabra flora. 488. Henkel, J. S. Trees in Umtali Park, Rhode- sia. *792. — Two soft woods of Rhodesia. *793. Henning, Hans. Mneme theory or animal psychology? 209. Henrickson, H. C. Selection of seed corn in Porto Rico. 614, 896. Henry, A. Afforestation. *125. — Sport of the lime tree. 897. — (Rev. by Boulger, G. S.) 763.— (Rev. by Mill, R. H.) 805. Henry, Augustine, and Margaret G. Flood. The Douglas firs. *1448.— (Rev. by Ryd- berg. P.) 331, 2230. Hensel, M. W. Sweet sorghum varieties, North Carolina. 615. Hepburn, Joseph Samuel, E. Quintard St. John, and Frank Morton Jones. Absorp- tion by pitchers of Sarraceniaceae. 2143. Herdman, W. A., H. H. Turner, E. B. Knobel, and W. W. Brj'ant. Cost of scientific publications. 1516. Heribert-Nilsson, N. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1691. Herlant, M. Cell structure and permea- bility. 731. Carbonic acid as agent in parthenogenesis. 898. — Life cycle of the cell. *1290. — Complete functional her- maphroditism in Paracentrotus. 1767. Herzog, R. O. On a few questions in the chemistry of fibers. *1517. Hess, N. [See Ness, H.] Heusser, C. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1692. Hibbard, R. P., and S. Gershberg. Fertili- zer requirements of soils. *1409. Hieronymus, G. Cheilanthopsis. 499. — Rev. of Broeck, van den. 1086. Higgins, J. E. Litchi chinensis. 978. Hilden, K. Anthropological studies on natives of the Russian Altai. *176S. Hiley, W. E. Fungous diseases of larch. *795, 1188. Hill, A. F. (Rev. by Fernald, F. L.) 1441, Hill, A. W. Cotyledon morphology in Cycla- men. 1064. *1368. Hill, S. W. (Winters, R. Y., Hill, and P. H. Kime) 681. Hiltner, L. Treatment of winter wheat seed. 1231. Hirst, E. C. Forest protection by states, U. S. A. *126. 352 INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES Hitchcock, A. S. Grasses of the U. S. A. 1449.— (Rev. by Nelson, James C.) 1468. Hitchcock, A. S., and Agnes Chase. Revi- sion of North American grasses. 2208. Hodgson, R. W. Proper use of manure. 2182. Hodson, E. R. Forest research. *127. Hoehne, F. C. Catalogue of the herbarium and gardens of "Oswaldo Cruz". *1450. Hoffman, Paul. Flax culture, Germany. *616. Hogben, Lancelot T. Parallel conjugation in Periplaneta. 1769. Hohenadl, W. Pastorage of mountain mead- ows. 128. Holden, Bertha A. Using surplus fruits. *275. Holden, H. S. Teratological seedlings of Impatiens Roylei. 324. Holland, T. H. Organization of scientific work in India. 1518. Holm, Theo. Glandular hairs of Dryopteris. *500. — Antennaria alpina and A. car- pathica. 1451. Holman, R. M. Contributions of botany to military eflBciency. 1519. Holmes, E. M. Phytolacca and its medicinal uses. 2093. Holmsen, Gunnar. Spruce in Norway. 2010. Holten, A. Storing acorns. 1641. Homberg, Otto R. Some Puccinellia species and hybrid. 1452. Hommel, Philemon E. Lemon. 2094. Honing, J. A. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1693. Hood, G. W. Keeping qualities of hubbard squash. 1027. — Varietal variations in similar methods of training tomatoes. 1028. Hoof, L. van. Spermatogenesis of bull. 738. Hooker, H. D., Jr. (Laurens, H., and Hooker) 1373. Hooker, Henry. Approach to horticultural problems. 1914. Hooper, J. J. Inheritance of color in Jersey cattle. 210. Hopkins, S. H. Sweetpea farm, Vancouver Island, British Columbia. *1018. Hornschu, Heinrich. (Redslob, Kurt, and Hornschu) 117. Hort, Edward C. The cultivation of aerobic bacteria from single cells. *1264. Hosking, A. Hybrid Calceolarias. 211. House, Homer, D. Genus Aetopteron, Ehr- hart. 501. Houser, True. Root rot of tobacco. 1189. Hovasse, R. Chromosome number in par- thenogenetic frogs. *899, 1770. Howard, A. O. Empire timber exhibition. 1642. Howard, W. L. Brown rot of apricots. *276, 1232. — Rootstock experiment, 1915. — Rootstocks. 1916.— Pea blight. 2054. Howarth, W. O. Festuca rubra near Cardiff. 524. Howe, H. E. Cereals. 1551. Howe, Lucien. Hereditary ey^ defects and eugenics. 1771. Howe, M. A. The 1920 dahlia border. *303. Hoxie, Frederick J. Roof construction for factories with excessive moisture. 1265. — Decay of factory roofs. 1520. Hoy, B. Report of District Horticulturist and Inspector of Fruit Pests, Okanagan Valley, British Columbia. *979. Hudig, J., and C. Meyer. The Hooghalen disease, new soil disease on sand and peat soils. *1266. Huffel, G. Swiss forest experiment station. 796. — Forest statistics, Alsace-Lorraine. 797.— (Rev. by Algan, H.) *685, 741.— (Rev. by Guyot, Ch.) 789. Humbert, H. (Viguier, R., and Humbert) 1966. Hume, A. N. System of breeding maize or gregarious animals. 1772. Hume, A.N. ,M. Champlin, and M. Fowlds. Length of heads of wheat related to yields. 900. Hunt, E. C. Spray vs. dust for apples. 1233. Hunter, W. T. Report of Field Inspector, southern Okanagan, Similkameen and boundary districts, British Columbia. *980. Husmann, George C. Growing currant grapes, U. S. A. 981. Husnot, T. New French hepatics. 1974. Hutcheson, T. B., and T. K. Wolfe. Effect of fertilizers on seed germination. 1552. Hutchins, D. E. Insignis pine disease. *129. Hutchinson, J. Clematopsis. 1453. Hutt, W. M. American Pomological Society. 700. Hyde, W. C. Orchard spraying. 2055. — (Goodwin, W. T., and Hyde) 271. Ibsen, Herman. Tricolor inheritance in guinea pigs. 901. Ingrason, P. A. Alfilaria, Mexico. 617. Jablonski, Walter. Albinism of the eye and inheritance laws. *1773. Jaccard, P. Inversion of eccentric branches. *325, 431, *1643. ■M INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES 353 Jackson, B. D. (Hardy, G. H., A. B. Rendle, Jackson, and C. S. Myers) 1514. Jackson, V.G. Rev. of Hedrick, U. P. *1917. Jaramillo, P. J., and F. J. Chittenden. On double stocks. 212. Jarvis E. (Rev. by Anonymous) 1125. Jeanpert, Ed. Macedonian plants. 489. Jelinek. Problems of plant breeding and variety testing. 1774. Jenkins, E. H., and E. Monroe Bailey. Connecticut fertilizer report. 1418. Jennings, O. E. Impatiens pallida forma speciosa. 1454. Jensen, C. (Arnell, H. W., and Jensen) 1079. Jensen, C. N. Blossom infection by smuts. 1142. Jermstad, Alex. Morphine strength of opium. 2095. Jex, Wallace. Sugar, South Africa. 1553. Jodidi, S. L. Cabbage mosaic. 441, *1159. Jodidi, S. L., S. C. Moulton, and K. S. Markley. Spinach mosaic. 442, *1158. Joffe, Jacob. Alfalfa growth and soil reac- tion. *1357, 1398.— (Lipman, J. G., and Joffe) 1404. Johansson, K. New Hieracia from Sweden. 2209. Johansson, Nils. Mesozoic plants from Norway. 1105. Johnson, A. G., and J. G. Dickson. Stem rust of grains and the barberry in Wis- consin. 1234. Johnson, Charles W. Variation in the palm weevil. 1775. Johnson, E. C. Annual report Washington State Experiment Station. 1554. Johnson, James. Improved strain of Wis- consin tobacco. 1776. — (Rev. by Anony- mous) *1694. Johnston, Earl S. Nutrient requirement of the potato plant. 404, 2123. Johnston, I. M. Flora of San Antonio Mountains, California. *798. Jolyet, A. Purification basins and fish. 799. Jones, D. F. Inbreeding and cross breeding on development. 1777. — Defective seeds, a lethal factor in maize. 1778. — Sterility in plants and animals 1779. — Segregation of susceptibility to parasitism in maize. 1780.— (Rev. by Anonymous) *1695.— (East, E. M., and Jones) *1683. Jones, D. F., and W. O. Filley. Teas' hybrid catalpa. 1781. Jones, Frank Morton. (Hepburn, Joseph Samuel, E. Quintard St. John, and Jones) 2143. Jones, J. Cacao production in Dominica. 315. Jones, J. F. Heart-nut. 1918. Jones, L. R. Our journal, "Phytopathol- ogy". 1599. Jones, L. R., and M. Miller. Frost necrosis of tulip leaves. *2067. Jones, L. R., M. Miller, and E. Bailey. Frost necrosis of potato tubers. 1267. Jones, Walter. Adenine nucleotide and nu- cleic acid. *2137. Jordan, David Starr. War and genetic values. 1782. Jordan, Edwin O. Differentiation of para- typhoid group. 902. — Pfeiffer bacillus. 1999. Jordan, W. H. Fertilizers on soil tj^ies. 1410. Jorgensen, E. Ajuga pyramidalis X reptans. 525. — Euphrasia species of Norway. 526. —(Rev. by B., E. G.) 1423. Josenhans, William. (Fleischer, Bruno, and Josenhans) *1753. Joseph, E. W. (Atkinson, A., and Joseph) 582. Joseph, W. E. (Atkinson, Alfred, J. B. Nelson, C. N. Arnett, Joseph, and O. Tretsven) 583. Joshi, N. V. Decomposition of manure in soil. 2183. Judd, C. S. Kauripine in Hawaii. 130. Judd, Hilda M. The iodometric estimation of sugars. 1312. Jumelle, H. A dioecious Jatropha from Madagascar. 1455. Juritz, Chas. F. Prickly pear utilization. South Africa. 618. K., S. L. Resin production. 800. Kains, M. G. Home fruits as education of public taste. 982. Kajanus, Birger. (Rev. by Rasmusson, H.) *1823. Kalt, B. Pure seed. 619.— "Original seed" in the recognition of breeding. 903. — Hintertux barley. 1783. Kammerer, Paul. Darkness animals in the light and vice versa. 1784. Kappen, H., and M. Zapfe. Acidity of plant juices under influence of liming. 2138. Karraker, P. E. Elementary soil teaching. 94. — Water movement in soil. 470. 354 INDEX TO AUTHOES NAMES Kathariner, L. Development of digenetic Trematodes. *213. Kaulfersch, F. Starch determination. *1313. Kawakama, Koichiro, and Suehiro Yoshida. Bacterial gall of Milletia floribunda. 1190. Keeble, Frederick, Intensive cultivation. 620. Kegley, H. C. New Persian walnut. 1919. Keil, J. B. Cellar storage of vegetables. 1029. — Home production of vegetable seeds. 1030. — Growing garden beans. 1951. Keil, J. B. (Green, W. J., Paul Thayer, and Keil) 974, 975.— (Thayer, Paul, Keil, and W. J. Green) 1002. Keith, A. Rev. of Pearson, K., and Julia Bell. 1785. Kellog, V. The U. S. National Research Council. 1521. Kelly, F. B. Solution of pneumococci by bile. 2000. Kelly, H. J. Wheat, New South Wales, 621. — Sudan grass. 1555. Kelly, James P. Flower form and color in Phlox Drummondii. 1786. Kempton, J. H. Brachytic culms in maize. 1787.— (Rev. by Anonymous) *1696.— (Collins, G. N., and Kempton) *1680, 1737. Kerle, W. D. Potatoes, New South Wales. 1556. Kern, F. (Rev. by Fleischer, M.) 1085. Kerr, J. G. (Bower, F. O., Kerr, and W. E. Agar) 167. Kidd, Franklin, and Cyril West. Seed coat and germination of immature seed. 1367. Kidd, Franklin, Cyril West, and G. E. Briggs. The efficiency index in growth. 1361. Kiesselbach, T. A., and J. A. Ratcliflf. Freez- ing injury of seed corn. 623, *1369. Kiessling, L. Mutation in Hordeum disti- chum. 214. Killer, J. Potato tuber development. 622. Killian, Karl. Septoria leaf spot of tomato. 1191. Kilmer, F. B., and Ralph O. Smith. Culti- vation of Belladonna. 2096. Kime, P. H. (Winters, R. Y., S. W. Hill, and Kime) 681. King, C. M. (Pammel, L. H., and King) 1470. King, E. D., Jr. Poisonous plants of the south. 2097. Kirby, R. S. (Rosen, H. R., and Kirby) 1985. Klason, P. Lignin and lignin reactions. 1314. Klebahn, H. Infection experiments with graft hybrids. *1788.— (Rev. by Lek, van der) *1800. Klocker, Alb. Assimilation of sugars by yeasts. 2148. Kniep, H. (Rev. by Burger, Owen F.) *904. Knight, H. G. Acidity and acidimetry of soils. 1399, 1400, 1401. Knobel, E. B. (Herdman, W. A., H. H. Turner, Knobel, ajid W. W. Bryant) 1516. Knowlton, C. H., and Walter Deane. Flora of the Boston district. 1456. Knudson, Lewis. Invertase secretion by roots. 2149. Knuth, R. New American orchids. 2210. Koch, L. (Rev. by Anonmyous) *1697, *1698, *1699, *1700, *1701. Koch, Pieter. Cotton, South Africa. *624. Kogel, P. R. Review of recent work in photodynamics. 1372. Koidzumi, Geneti. Plants of eastern Asia. 527, *1644. Koketsu, Riichiro. (Livingston, Burton E., and Koketsu) 471. Koltonuski, Hermann. Inheritance of ova- rial cysts. *1789. Kooiman, H. N. (Tjebbes, K., and Kooi- man) *1712. Kopeloff, Lillian. (Kopeloff, N., Kopeloff, and C. J. Welcome) 1342. Kopeloff, N. Deterioration of sugar by molds. 1341. Kopeloff, N., and H. Z. E. Perkins. Deterio- ration of sugar in storage. 1343. Kopeloff, N., Lillian Kopeloff, and C. J. Welcome. Formation of levan by mold spores. 1342. Kops, Jan, F. W. van Eeden, and L. Vuyck. Flora Batava. 1457. Korstian, C. F. Forest research. *131. Kotowski, Feliks. Correlation and varia- bility in a pure line of wheat. *1790. — (Rev. by Anonymous) *1702. Kowalski, J. Atypical mitoses. 732. Kranzlin, F. Orchids of Kalbreyer. 2211. — Two new orchids. 2212. Krasser, F. Jurassic plants from Sardinia. 1106. Krause, K. On Camptopus and Megalopus. 2213. Krogh, August. Gas meters for physiologi- cal research. 1381. — Accurate analysis apparatus. *1382. INDEX TO authors' NAMES 355 Kronacher, C. Swine breeding in Germany. 215. — General animal breeding. 216. Kruckeberg, Henry W. California nursery industry. 1920. Krug, O., and Hans Filchner. The 1919 yield in the Palatinate. *1041. Kryshtofovich, A. Fossil walnut from Japan. 1107. — Petrified cycad from Japan. 2011. Kryz, F. Edible portion of certain West Indian fruits. *1042. — Edible portion and seed content of locust bean. *1043. Kuiper, K. Jr. (Rev. by Walther-Giessen) *1850. Kunkel, L. O. Orange rusts of Rubus. 367. — Further data on orange rusts of Rubus. 1143. Kurtzweil, Carl. (Hayes, H. K., John H. Parker, and Kurtzweil) 1776. Klister, Ernst. Mechanics of development. 1065. Kuttner, O. Rev. of Woltereck, Rich. *1791. Kuwada, Y. (Rev. by Tischler, G.) *1842. Kuwatsuka, Kikuji. (Suematsu, Naoji, and Kuwatsuka) 287, 1167. Lacaita, C. C. Quercus aegilops. 1458. — Rev. of Sargeaunt, John. 1598. — The home of Inula Helenium. 2214. Ladreyt, F. Cell organization. 733. Laffer, H. E. Bordeaux powders vs. home- made Bordeaux mixtures. 1235. LaForge, F. B. Sedoheptose, a new sugar from Sedum spectabile. *1315. Lake, H. (Eddy, W. H., Lake, and A. B. Lyman) 187. LaMer. V. K. (Sherman, H. C, I. D. Garard, and LaMer) 421. Lampitt, Leslie Herbert. Nitrogen metab- olism in Saccharomyces cervisiae. 1332. Landi, Raffaele. Crown gall of fruit trees. 2042. Lankester, E. Ray. Museums and the state. 95. Lapicque, and Brocq-Rousseu. Algae as horse feed. *2264. Larson, Beatrice. (Ure, Ruby, and Larson) 667. Laucks, I. F. (Rev. by Anonymous) 1505. Laughlin, Harry W. Mathematical measure of ancestral influence. 1792. — Popula- tion schedule for census of 1920. 1793. Laupert. Sugar beet association, Lettland. 1599. Laurens, H., and H. D. Hooker, Jr. Effects of different wave lengths on Volvox. 1373. Laurie, D. F. Evolution, heredity, and breeding. 1794. Lauterbach, C. The Burseraceae of Papua- sia. 1459. — The Simarubaceae of Papua- sia. 1460. — The Anacardiaceae of Papua- sia. 1461. Law, S. C. An albino bulbul. 905. Lawfield, F. W. (Arber, E. A. N., and Lawfield) 1098. Lazaro e Ibiza, B. New species and varieties of Viola. 528. Leake, H. Martin. Improvement of Egyp- tian cotton. 217. Leake, H. Martin, and B. Ram Pershad. Flower color and associated characters in Papaver. 1795. L^caillon, A. Mutation bivoltins in the silkworm. *218. 906. Lecomte, H. Principal "characters in wood structure. 326, *490, *1645.— On the "Storied structure" in certain woods. 801. — Two new species of Crateranthus. 2215. Lederman, C. Empress Augusta River Expedition, New Guinea, *802. Lee, S. C. Electrical treatment of seed. 625, *1268. Legroux, Ren6, and Joseph Mesnard. Vita- mines, in bacterial culture. 416. Lehkum, P. Removing potato sprouts. 1557. Lehmann, Ernst. New work in Oenothera. 907. — Variability and floral morphology. 1796. Leiby, R. W. Spraying Irish potatoes. 1236. Leidner, R. (Rumker, K. V., and Leidner) 1573. Leighty, Clyde E. Natural wheat-rye hy- brids of 1918. 1797.— (Rev. by Anony- mous) *1703. Leiningen-Westerburg. Smoke injury and related matters of soil science. *132, 459, *1646. Lek, van der. Rev. of Fischer, Ed. *1798.— Rev. of France, R. H. *1799.— Rev. of Klebahn, H. *1800.— Rev. of Tisdale, W. H. *1801. Lemmerman, D. Fertilizers, Germany. 626. Lemoigne. (Maz6, P., Vila, and Lemoigne) 1333, 1334, 1405, 1411. 356 INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES Lenoir, M. Development of vascular tissue in seedlings. 327. Lenz. Rev. of Fleischer, B. *1803.— Rev. of Schallmayer, W. *1804.— Rev. of Sie- gel, P. W. n805. Lenz, Fritz. Hertwig's attack on Darwinism and race hygiene. *1802. Lesage, P. Germination of moss spores. 433. Lesdain, Bouly de. (Rev. by Riddle, L. W.) 372. Lesley, J. W. (Salaman, R. N., and Lesley) 932. Lester-Garland, L. V. Botany of the Moroc- can Middle Atlas. 2216. Letteer, C. R. Cotton root rot control experiments at San Antonio. *1237. Leverenz, C. Principal agricultural plant varieties of Germany. *1806. — (Rev. by Anonymous) *1704. Levin, E. Peat as a fertilizer in Michigan. 474. Levine, B. S., and F. P. Veitch. Mildew resistance of textiles. 2176. Levine, Michael. Crown gall on Ficus. 1160. Levy, Fritz. Nuclear relations in partheno- genetic frogs. *1807. Lewin, L. Plants of the coastal region of Baluchistan. 1462. Lewis, C. I., F. R. Brown, and A. F. Barss. Evaporation of prunes. 277. Lewis, Francis J., and Gwynethe M. Tuttle. Osmotic properties of some plant cells at low temperature. 2116. Lewis, I. P. (Ballou, F. H., and Lewis) 1892. Licent, E. Formalin and chromic fixatives. 1614. Liehr, O. Poppy, Germany. 627. Lindner, P. Fats in the aleurone layer. 1558. Linhart, G. A. Interpretation of biometrical data. 395, *477, 908. Link, G. K., and Max W. Gardner. Market pathology of truck crops. 2043. Linton, Edward Francis. William Moyle Rogers. 701. Linton, W. S. Legislation concerning nut trees along highways. 1921. — Trees for highways. 1922. Lipman, J. G., and J. S. Joffe. Composting sulphur and phosphate. 1404. Lippincott, W. A. Pedigreeing poultry. 219. — Improving farm flocks through standard-bred cockerels. 909. Lipschiitz, A. (Rev. by Strand, E.) 418. Lister, Gulielma. Mycetozoa of the Baslow foray. 2004. Little, C. C. Exceptional color classes in doves and canaries. 220. — Sex-linked le- thal factors in mammals. 910. — Trans- plantable tumor in mice. 911. — Origin of piebald spotting in dogs. 1808. — (Rev. by Walther-Giessen) *1851. Livingston, Burton E. (Morita, Koichi, and Livingston) 1299. Livingston, Burton E., and Riichiro Koketsu. Soil water and the wilting point. 399, *471. Lloyd, Dorothy Jordan. Swelling of gelatin in HCl and NaOH. *1295. Lloyd, J. W. Need of vegetable investiga- tions. 1031. Lloyd, Strauss L. (Rev. by Russell, E. J.) 1419. Lloyd- Jones, O., and J. M. Evvard. Color in swine. 912. Lloyd-Jones, O., and F. A. Hays. Excessive sexual activity of male rabbits. 221. Loder, Edmund Giles. List of Rhododen- dron species. 1019. Loesener, T. A new species of Stromanthe. 2217. Loft, Selmar. Determining dry matter in root crops. 628. Lo Priore, G., and G. Scala. Reddening of the leaves of sumac. *1192. Lorch, W. Torsions in the setae of mosses. *1089. Lormand, Ch. (Guerin, P., and Lormand) 2115. Losch, Hermann. Leafy proliferation of pear fruits. 1161. Lotka, Alfred J. Rhythmical relations in organic systems. 424. Lotsy, J. P. Gallus temminckii and the egg color of wild Gallus. *1809. Lovett, A. L. Spreaders in spray mixtures. 2056. Lownes, Albert E. Notes on Pogonia trian- thophora. 1463. Lubosch, Wilhelm. The problem of animal geneology. 1810. Ltihning. Hereditary sex determination. 1811. Luigi, Bernardini. Nicotine in tobacco. 2139. Luisier, A. Fernando Theissen. 71. — Mosses of Madeira. 351. Lull, P. S. Organic evolution. *392. rsi INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES 357 Lundberg, H. Race-political views on in- heritance, etc. 222. Lutman, B. F. Tip burn of the potato and other plants. *1193. Lyman, A. B. (Eddy, W. H., H. Lake, and Lyman) 187. Lyman, G. R. Pathologists' advisory board. *1600. Lyne, W. H. Horticultural quarantine in British Columbia. *983, *1258.— Report on imported fruit and nursery stock, British Columbia. *984. McAtee, W. L. Naming insects. 491. Mac-Auliffe, A. Marie, and Leon Mac-Auliffe. Influence of environment on race in Paris. *223. Mac-Auliffe, L4on. (Mac-Auliffe, A. Marie, and Mac-Auliffe) *223. McCall, E. F. Fann and garden. 1032. McCauley, C. Sudan grass. New South Wales. 36. McClendon, J. F. (Medes, Grace, and McClendon) 440, 2174. McCool, M. M., and C. E. Miller. Soluble material of soils. 460. McCormick, Florence A. (Clinton, G. P., and McCormick) 1140. McCrae, Lee. Foreign fruits on west coast [U. S. A.]. 1923. McCubbin, W. A. Seed potato question. *1241. — Brown rot of stone fruits in Pennsylvania. 2044. McCurdy, H. M. Nuclear phenomena and conjugation in Arcella. 913. MacDonald, Norman. (Chalmers, Albert J., and MacDonald) 363. MacDougal, D. T., and H. A. Spoehr. Col- loidal behavior of plant protoplasm. 1291. McEwen, Geo. F., and Ellis L. Michael. Relation of a variable to correlated variables. 916. McFadzean, G. S. Pasture fertilization with phosphates. 2185. McFarland, J. Horace. Van Fleet's rose garden. 1866. — Walks and talks at Breeze Hill. 1867. McFarland, J. M. Organic evolution. 393. Maclnnes, L. T., and H. H. Ran dell. Scien- tific methods in dairy manufacturing. 560, 561. Mackay, H. Silviculture — Eucalyptus. 133. McKay, M. B. Potato seed certification. *1559. Mckenzie, R. J. J. (Rev. by Anonymous) 17. McLean, F. T. Carbon dioxide absorption of coconut leaves. 2128. McLean, Forman T. (Trelease, Sam F., and McLean) 1526. MacLean, Ida Smedley, and Ethel Mary Thomas. The nature of yeast fat. *1316. McLean, R. C. Ecology of tropical rain- forests, Brazil. *804. MacLeod, J. Quantitative method in bi- ology. 1812. MacMeans, A. Vegetable seed growing on Pacific coast. *1033. MacMillan, H. G. Wind distribution of spores. 2024. McMurran, S. M. Pecan rosette. 2057.— Preventing pecan wood rot. 2058. Macoun, W. T. Apple breeding, Canada. 985. Macoun, W. T., and M. B. Davis. Apple breeding for Canadian prairies. 914. Macrum, C. A. Combined bordeaux oil emulsion spray. 1238. Magness, J. P. Pear storage. 278. Magor, E. J. P. Notes from Lamellen Garden. 1020. Maheux, Georges. Potato spraying. 1239. Maiden, J. H. Prickly pear. .34, 1560.— Revision of Eucalyptus. 1464, 2218. — Forest flora of New South Wales. 2219. Makin, R. N. Maize, New South Wales. 1561.— Lucerne, New South Wales, 1562. —(Meek, B. C, and Makin) 629. Malvezin, Philippe. (Piedallu, Andre, Mal- vezin, and Lucien Grandchamp) *2150. Manaresi, Angelo. Frost injury to fruit. 986, *1269, *1370. Mangenot, G. Chondriome of Vaucheria. 1615. — Chromatophores and chondri- omes of Florideae. 1616. Mangham, Sydney. Science teaching. *96. Manjaries, Ramon, de. Utilization of olive bagasse. 1044. Maquenne, and Demoussy. Favorable effect of copper on vegetation. 2173. Markle, M. S. Plant abnormalities. 1066. Markley, K. S. (Jodidi, S. L., S. C. Moulton, and Markley) 442, 1158. Marshall, F. R. Breeding, range sheep. 915. Marti, F. Damming, afforesting, and sod- ding the watersheds of forest lakes. 803. Martin, Charles James. Preparation of Sorensen's phosphate. *1383. 358 INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES Martin, W. H. Sulphur on potato scab. *448, 1240. Marty, P. (De la Vaulx, and Marty) 390. Massart, J. Elements of general biology and botany. 2112. — Reactions in the Polyporaceae. 2165. — Effect of light on leaf structure. 2169. Massey, A. B. (Robbins, William J., and Massey) 455. Matisse, G. Temperature and the activity of living organisms. 435. Matons, August. Pruning the olive. *987. Matthews, C. D. Report on horticulture. North Carolina. 988. Matthews, J. R. Hybridism and classifica- tion in Rosa. 1813. Mattirolo, Oreste. In commemoration of Pietro Andrea Saccardo. 702. — Saverio Belli. 703, *1067. Maughan, Huard J. Factors affecting the depth of planting. *35. Mawbray, Wallace. Vanilla beans. 1924. Maxwell, Herbert. Sir Edmund Giles Loder. 704. Maxwell, Hu. Wood utilization — musical instruments. *134. Mdyas, G. Lower Carboniferous plants from Saxony. 1108. Maz6, P., Vila, and Lemoigne. Action of cyanamide and dicyanodiamide on maize. 1333, *1411. Transformation of cyanam- ide by micro-organisms. 1334 *1405., Meacham, F. J. (Williams, C. B., Meacham, et al) 2188. Medes, Grace, and J. F. McClendon. Anes- thetics and living cells. 440, 2174. Meek, B. B. Oranges for Thanksgiving. *989. Meek, B. C. Pea experiments. 1563. Meek, B. C, and H. Bartlett. Maize experi- ments. New South Wales. 630. Meek, B. C, and R. H. Makin. Potatoes, New South Wales. 629. Memmler, Hans. Ladyslipper culture. 304. Menzel, P. Fossil plants from Kamerun. 1109. Mereschkovsky, G. New forms of Ramalina from Russia. 1992, Merrill, E. D. Dates of publication. 705.— (Brown, W. H., and Merrill.) 486. Merrill, George • P. American geological and natural history surveys. 1601. Merriman, Mabel L. Conjugation of Spi- rogyra ternata. 1814. Mesnard, J. (Legroux, R., and Mesnard.) 416. Metcalf, F. P. Notes on North Dakota plants. 1465. Metcalf, Maynard M. Distribution meth- ods. 394. Metzner, P. Movement and stimulus re- sponse of spirilla with bipolar flagella. 2114. Meunissier, A. Observations of Philippe de Vilmorin on black-eyed peas. 917. — Selection of vegetables. 918. Meyer, Arthur. Morphological and physio- logical analysis of the cell of plants and animals. *734. Meyer, C. (Hudig, J., and Meyer) *1266. Michael, Ellis L. (McEwen, Geo., and Michael) 916. Micheletti. Piedmontese peppermint oil. 2098. Miethe, E. Varieties of Cypripedium. *305. — Cattleya superba Schomb. *529. Mildbraed, J. Rhizanthie in Paraphyadan- the. *328, 2220. Milewski, A. W. Experimental production of monstrous gold fish. *224. Mill, R. H. (Rev. by Henry, Augustine) 805. Millar, C. E. (McCool, M. M., and Millar) 460. Miller, David. Leaf-stem gall-aphis of pop- lar. 2068. Miller, Elizabeth W. The effect of cooking on the water-soluble vitamin e in carrots and navy beans. 1317. Miller, M. (Jones, L. R., and Miller) 2067. — (Vaughan, R. E., and Miller) 2074.— (Jones, L. R., Miller, and E. Bailey) 1267. Miller, William Tyler. Shrubs and vines for California. 1868. Milliken, C. S. Citrus bud selection. 225. Millspaugh, C. F. (Britton, N. L., and Millspaugh) 1429. Mirasol, Jos6 Jison. Aluminum and soil acidity. 449. Mitchell, D. T. Ergotized Paspalum in Natal. 1285. Mitchell, Sidney B. The California garden. 1869. Mitscherlich, E. A. Thickness of crop planting. 631. — Law of plant growth. *1363. Miyoshi, Manabu. Peculiar wild chestnut. *492, *1647. Mockeridge, Florence. Growth promoting substances in organic manures. 1318, *1394. J» INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES 359 Mohr, H. Lignite in Styrian loess. 1110. — (Peterson, E. G., and Mohr) 453. Molliard, M. Potassium deficiency in Sterig- matocystis nigra. 405. — Tumors occur- ring on the roots of kohl-rabi and beet. 1194.— (Gatin, C. L., and Molliard) 414. Molz, E. Sugar beet rot. 2045. Montemartini, Luigi. Pier Andrea Sac- cardo. 706.— Giovanni Briosi. 707.— The stimulating action of copper sulfate on plants. 1162, 1375. Moodie, R. L. Devonian bacteria. 1111. — Evolution's most romantic moment. 1112. Moomaw, Leroy. Dickinson (North Dakota) sub-station report, 1919. 37. Moore, Benjamin, and T. Arthur Webster. Photosynthesis in fresh water algae. 1319. Moore, C. C. Potato starch manufacturing. *38. Moore, H. Armitage. Rhododendrons at Rowallane [England] 1021. Moore, H. J. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1705. Moore, J. G. Scion root production by apple trees in nursery. 990. Moore, R. L. Fossil bacteria. 1113. Moore, Spencer Le M. Alabastra diversa. 1466, 2221. Moore, V. A. Principles of microbiology. 1270. Moreau, F. (M. and Mme.) Researches on Peltigeraceae. 371, *425. Moreau, Fernand. Lichen symbiosis. 1993. Moreillon, M. Forage under forest cover. 39, *136. — Wind damage, Switzerland. 135. — Influence of shade upon value of grass in wooded pastures. *1648. Morel, C. Photosynthesis and water re- quirement of Scotch pine. 806. Morgan, G. W., and A. E. Seamans. Dry farming, Montana. 632. Morgan, T. H. Castration of henfeathered Campines. 919. — Endocrine secretion of henfeathered fowls. 920. — Rev. of Whitman, Charles Otis. 921.— (Rev. by Thomson, M. A.) 938. Morgan, T. H., C. B. Bridges, and A. H. Sturtevant. (Rev. by Doncaster, L.) 878. Morita, Koichi, and Burton E. Livingston. Solution cultures of wheat without po- tassium. 1299. Morris, Daniel. Presidential address, Brit- ish Association, Advancement of Sci- ence. 72. Morris, R. T. Grafting. 279. Morvilliz, F. Vascular anatomy of leaves of Betulaceae, Corylaceae, and Castan- eaceae. *807. Mottet, S. A new rhubarb. 1952. Moulton, R. H. Wood stronger than steel. 1649. Moulton, S. C. (Jodidi, S. L., Moulton, and K. S. Markley) 442, 1158. Mount, H. A. In the wake of the woodsman. 1650.— What about our forests? 1651.— What is wrong with our paper supply? *1652. Moxley, George L. A study in Zauschneria. 1467. Muer, Theodore C, and Robert L.Harris. Use of brilliant-green in presumptive B. coli test. 2001. Muir, F. Rev. of Muir, F. *1522.— (Rev. by Muir, F.) *1522. Mukherji, L. M. (Bose, J. C, assisted by Mukherji) 2164. Miiller, Erich. Oxidation of aldehydes. 417. Miiller, N. C. Plant disease in Saxony, 1918. 1135. Munch, E. (Rev. by Fabricius, L.) 118. Mundy, H. G. Rice, Rhodesia. *633, *634. Munn, M. T. Seed law. New York. 635. Munson, K. W. Grafting fruit trees. *991. — Intensive fruit culture in British Colum- bia. *992. — Pruning the balanced fruit tree. *993. Miinter, F. Plant analysis and fertilizers. 1565. Murray, J. Alan. Cattle foods classification. *40. Murrill, W. A. Mice girdled trees. 280.— Source of chocolate. 1663. — Dendro- graph. *2158. Mutscheller, Arthur. Colloidal adsorption. *13S4. Myers, C. S. (Hardy, G. H., A. B. Rendle, B. D. Jackson, and Myers) 1514. . Nachtsheim, Hans. Crossing over versus reduplication. 226. — (Rev. by Seiler) *1837. Nafziger, T, E. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1706. Namyslowski, B. Sexuality in mosses. *227, 368. Nash, G. V. Woody plants, New York Botanical Garden. 306. Neger, F. W. Smoke injury to green plants. 1271. 360 INDEX TO authors' NAMES Negri, G. Moss growing in absolute dark- ness. 2170. Neller, J. R. Oxidation in soils. 454. Nelson, J. B. (Atkinson, Alfred, Nelson, C. N. Arnett, W. E. Joseph, and O. Tretsven.) 583. Nelson, James C. (Rev. of Hitchcock, A. S. 1468.) Nemec, Antoine, and Frangois Stranak. Toxic action of terpenes. 1376. Neogi, N. N. (Bose, J. C, assisted by Neogi) 2164. Ness, H. Plant hybridizing. 228, *794, *1654. Neuberg, C, and Elsa Reinfurth. Alcoholic fermentation. 1344. — Fermentation of pyruvic acid. 1345. Nevens, W. B. Breed and size in relation to milk production. 922. Newell. W. Citrus canker eradication in Florida. 1242. Newton, W. Soil treatment, British Colum- bia. *636. — Potatoes in British Colum- bia, *637. Nicholson, W. A. Oenanthe crocata. 1523. Nicolas, G. Andromonoecism in Umbelli- fers. 329, *1469. Nielsen, H. B. Potato certification. 1566. Nierenstein, M. Waage'sphytochemical syn- thesis of phloroglucin from glucose. 1320.— (Rev. by Anonymous) 408. 1150, Niklas, H. Relation of geology to agri- cultural and forest soil science. *137, 478, *1655. — Classification of Bavarian soils. *138, 461. — Soil survey chart for Bavaria. 479, *1656. Nilsson-Ehle, H. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1707. Nindel, F. Lower Carboniferous plant from Saxony. *1114. Nobecourt. Tubercles of orchids. 1962. Nomblot, A., and 'F. L.' Protecting horticultural novelties. 1925. Norris, G. W. (Guthrie, F. B., and Norris) 612. Norris, R. V. Indian soils. 2186. Nottin, P. Manganese in soils. *2178. Nowell, W. Root disease of coconut palm. 1195. — Root disease of cacao. 1196. — Mosaic disease of sugar cane. 1197. — Disposal of nematode infested coconuts. 1243. Nutting, Grace B, (Swingle, D. B., and Nutting) 661. Oechslin, M. Forest avalanche, Bann, Alt- dorf. 808. Ogura, Yudsuru. Growth in thickness of Cryptomeria. *809, 1068. Oldershaw, A. W. Lupine as soil informer. *41. Olmsted, Frederick E. National forest poli- cies. 810. Olson, P. J. (Garber, R. J., and Olson) 884. O'Neal, C. E. Microsporogenesis in Datura stramonium. 1815. Onslow, H. Inheritance of Melanism in Boarmia. 229, 923. Opitz. Fusarium blight of wheat. 1163. Orban, G. Sexuality of Phycomyces nitens. 1816. Ostenfeld, G. H. Forest geography of Den- mark. 1657. Osterhout, Geo. E. A new Oreocarya from Colorado. 2222. Oswald, H. Effect of water level on water plants. 638. Overholser, E. L. (Taylor, R. H., and Overholser) 1937. P., D. James William Helenus Trail. 1069. Pachano, Abelardo. Downy mildew of grape. 994. — California vine disease. 1136. — Grape downy mildew. 1198. — Two diseases of potatoes. 1199. Pack, Chas. L. Forest policy, U. S. A. *139. Paillot, A. Polymorphism of bacteria. 376. Palmer, E. F. Report of Ontario Horticul- tural Experiment Station. 1887. Pammel, L. H. Alsike clover poisoning. 2099. — Castor seeds poisonous. 2100. — Convolvulus arvensis, a poisonous plant. 2101. — Cornus asperifolia, a non-toxic plant. 2102. — Physalis longifolia, a poi- sonous plant. 2103. — Cockleburs poison- ous to hogs. 2104. — Poisoning from silage and moulds. 2105. — Suspicious poisonous weeds. 2106. — (Stevens, F. L., Pammel, and Mel. T. Cook) 1605. Pammel, L. H., and C. M. King. Variation in black walnut. 1470. Pantanelli, E. Infection phenomena in Plasmopara viticola. 2025. — Influence of nutrition and root activity on the injury produced by cold. 2155. — Muscari as food and alcohol. 2265. Parker, F. W., and E. Truog. Calcium and nitrogen in plants. 406, *462. INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES 361 Parker, John H. (Hayes, H. K., Parker, and Carl Kurtzweil) 1776. Partridge, N. L. Growth and yield in apple trees. 995. Pate, W. F. (Williams, C. B., Pate, et al) 2188. Patterson, J. T. Polyembryony and sex. 1817. Marketing pecans. *1926. Patton, R. T. Growth, treatment, and structure of hardwoods. 811, *1070. — Tertiary eucalyptus from Australia. 1115. Paulson, R., and S. Hastings. Relation of alga and (ungus in lichens. 1994. Pavarino, G. L., and G. Castellari. Marsh plants for paper. 2266. Pearcy, K. Meeting of Western Walnut Growers' Association. 1927. Pearson, Karl. Errors in biometrical for- mulae. 924. Pearson, Karl, and Julia Bell. (Rev. by Keith, J. B.) 1785. Pearson, W. H. Apolozia Pendletonii Pear- son. 352. — Diplophyllum taxifolium in Westmoreland. 1090. Peitersen, A. K. (Brainerd, Ezra, and Peitersen) 259. Pellegrin, Francois. Sindora Klaineana Pierre. 530. — New Utricularias from Indo-China. 1471. Pellett, Frank C. (Rev. by Stoll, Frank) 563.— (Rev. by Anonymous) *1507. Pember, F. R. (Hartwell, Burt L., and Pember) 447. Pendleton, Isabella. Striking perennial combinations. 1870. Pennell, Francis W. Scrophulariaceae of the central Rocky Mountain states. 1472. — Soil preferences of Scrophularia- ceae. 2223. Pennypacker, J. Y. Variation in beach plum. 925. Perkins, H. Z. E. (Kopeloff, N., and Per- kins) 1343. Perry, A. S. Pruning pecans. 1928. Perry, Margaret C, and G. D. Beal. Pre- servatives inhibiting fermentative pro- cesses. 1377. Pershad, B. Ram. (Leake, H. Martin, and Pershad) 1795. Fetch, T. Variations in coconuts. *230. Peters, R. A. Paramoecium in sterile cul- ture medium. 2156. Petersen, Federico. Wheats, Mexico. 639. — Rust resistant wheats. 1164. Peterson, E. G., and E. Mohr. Nitrogen fixation in Utah soils. *453. Peterson, W. H. (Anderson, J. A., E. B. Fred, and Peterson) 420.— (Fred, E. B., and Peterson) 2147. Peterson, W. H., and E. B. Fred. Fermen- tation of sugars by Lactobacillus pen- toaceticus. *377. — Pentose fermenting bacteria. 1346. Pethybridge, F. R. Potato spraying trials in the Cambridge Fens. 1244. Peyronel, Beniamino. Blepharospore (Phy- tophtora) terrestris on lupine. 2019 — . Mycorhiza from Boleti. 2069. Pfeiffer, T. Protection strips for field plots. 1567. Pfeiffer, T., and A. Rippel. Effect of drouth on plants. 2119. — Influence of lime and magnesia on plant growth. 2124. Pfeiffer, T., and W. Simmermacher. The aversion of lupine to lime. 2125. — In- fluence of stones on plant growth. 2159. Phipps, W. H. Defense of Diener's law of hybridizing. 231 — Blending colors in flowers. 1818. Pickering, Spencer U. Report of Woburn Experimental Farms. 1929. — (Rev. by Anonymous) 256. Piedallu, Andr4, Philippe Malvezin, and Lucien Grandchamp. Blue cassia of wines. *2150. Pierce, G. W. Almond industry. *996. Pierce, Roy G. (Hartley, Carl, Pierce, and Glenn G. Hahn) 2066. Pietsch, Albert. Retention of foliage. 140, *426. Pilger, R. Mosses of South America. 2224. Pillichody, A. Risoux forest. 812. — Trees and wind pressure. 813. Pipal, T. J. Barberry and stem rust of wheat. 1245. Piper, Charles V. A study of Allocarya 1473. Piper, C. v., and H. S. Coe. Rhizoctonia in lawns and pastures. 2046. Pitt, J. M. Experiment plots, 1919-20, New South Wales. 42.— Millet, New South Wales. 640. — Lucerne, New South Wales. 1568. Pittier, H. Venezuelan mahogany. 1474. Plummer, J. K., and F. A. Wolf. Borax injury. 1412. Plymen, F. J. (Clouston, D., and Plymen) 1540. 362 INDEX TO ATJTHOES' NAMES Pole Evans, I. B. South African fiber plants. *641. — Grape anthracnose. *1200. Poll, Heinrich. Peafowl hybrids and nu- clear bearers of heredity. 1819. Pomeroy, C. S. (Shamel, A. D., L. B. Scott, Pomeroy, and C. L. Dyer) 240, 241. Ponselle, A. Determination of hydrogen- ion concentration of culture media. 2140. Ponzo, Antonino. The genus Acacia. 531. Popenoe, Wilson. Natural group of mangos cultivated in Florida. 997. Popp, M., and R. Floess. Silage for cows. 642. Porter, W. R. Report of North Dakota Demonstration Farms. 43. Potier de la Varde, R. Species of Fissidens. 1975.— Mosses of Indo-China. 1976.— Moss teratology. 1977. Poupion, J. Inobulbon nunificum. *1475. Powell, G. T. Bud selection in fruit in- dustry. 232. Prain, D. James W. H. Trail. *73. Prain, D., and I. H. Burkill. Dioscorea sativa. 532. Prankerd, T. L. Statocyte in vascular plants. *330. Prantner, E. F. Forest conditions, Czecho- slevakia. 141. Pratt, Hiram E. Report of Alaska Experi- ment Station. 1917. 44. Pridham, J. T. Selection in wheat. *45, 234. — Natural crossing in wheat. 233. — Breeding cereals in New South Wales, *642, *643, 926. Priestly, J. H. Root pressure. *397. Pringsheim, H. Occurrence of optical antip- odes in nature. 1321. Pritchard, F. J., and W. B. Clark. Tomato leaf spot control. 2059. Pritzel, E. Meadows of Grettstadt, Germany. *814. Proschowsky, A. R. Conifers at Cote- d'Azur, France. *815. Przibram, Hans. Work of Institute of Bio- logical Research, Vienna. *1820. Puchner, H. Analysis of peat. 475. Punnett, R. C. Elimination of surplus cockerels. 927. — (Rev. by Doncaster) 879. Puttemans, A. Powdery mildew of oak. 1137. — A new grape disease. 1201. Piitter, A. The law of the threshold of stimulation. 1365. Quayle, E. T. (Rev. by B., W. W.) 577. Quinn, Geo. Olive growing. *1930. R., E. J. Rev. of Hall, A. C. 1395. R., J. K. Cyclopedia of Horticulture. *533. Rabaud, E. Experimental study and phys- iological theory. *1821. — (Rev. by Sirks) *1838. Rader, F. E. Report of Mantanuska Sta- tion, Alaska. 562. Radlkofer, L. Survey of the Sapindaceae of Papuasia. 2225. Rae, E. G. Electric currents on soil. 2187. Raineri, R. Fossil Corallinaceae from Africa. 1116. Raistrick, Harold. Aerobic decomposition of histidine by bacteria. 1347. Raistrick, Harold, and Anna Barbara Clark. Oxalic acid formation by Aspergillus niger. 1322. Ramaley, Francis. Subalpine lake shore vegetation in north-central Colorado. *816. Ramirez, Gonzalo. Rubber plant, Cryptos- tegia, from Lower California. 817. Ramirez, Roman. Beet leaf spot due to Septoria. 1138.— Lemon leaf spot. *1202. Ramsay, A. A. Sorghum for industrial alcohol. 46. Ramsbottom, J. James William Helenus Trail. 1602. Ramsey, H. J., and S. J. Dennis. Air cooled storage. 281. Rand, R. F. Wayfaring notes, Great Namaqualand [Africa]. *818. Randell, H. H. (Maclnnes, L. F., and Randell) 560, 561. Rankin, W. H. (Rev. by Anonymous) *746, 1168. Rao, P. S. Jivarma. Cause of spike in san- dal. 1165. Rao, U. Vittal. Sugar cane habits. 1569. Rasmusson, H. Rev. of Dahlgren, K. V. Ossian. *1822. — Rev. of Kajanus, Birger. *1823. Rasmusson, J. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1708. Ratcliff, J. A. (Kiesselbach, T. A, and Ratcliff) 623, *1369. Rather, F. A. Fossils and life. 1117. Ravenna, C. Formation of starch in green plants. 2129. — Synthesis of a peptide of aspartic acid by vegetable enzymes. 2151. *2152.— (Ciamician, G., and Rav- enna) 2133, 2134. ii INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES 363 Ravenna, C, and G. Bosinelli. The as- partic acid dipeptide and the function of asparagine in the plant. 2141. Rayner, M. C. Mycorrhiza and the Erica- ceae. *1272. Rea, John L. Garden beside the Adiron- dacks. *1871. Recknagel, A. B. Forest conditions, New York. *142. Rector, T. M. Lipolytic enzymes in olive oil. 1348. Reddick, Donald, and V. B. Stewart. Bean mosaic. 2026. Redslob, Kurt, and Heinrich Horns hu. (Rev. by Endres) 117. Reed, C. A. Pecan grades and standards. 1931. Reed, George M. Varietal resistance and susceptibility of oats. *47, 1116. Reed, H. S. The dynamics of a fluctuating growth rate. 430. — Slow and rapid growth, 2160. Regan, W. S. Destruction of Ribes by chemical means. *819, 1246. Rehder, Alfred. New species, etc. from the Arnold Arboretum. 1476, 1478, 2227.— Tetraplasia, a new genus of Rubiaceae. 1477. — American and Asiatic species of Sassafras. 2226. Reichert, E. T. Starches and hemoglobins in heredity, evolution, etc. 235. Reid, E. M. Preglacial flora of Durham. 2012.— Pliocene floras of Europe. 2013. Reinfurth, Elsa. (Neuberg, C., and Rein- furth) 1344, 1345. Rendle, A. B. Poa omeiensis. 1479. — (Faw- cett, W., and Rendle) 1435.— (Hardy, G. H., Rendle, B. D. Jackson, and C. S. Myers) 1514. Renner, Otto. Oenothera Lamarckiana for mutation and hybridization studies. *1824.— Rev. of de Vries, H. *1825, *1826. Renson, Carlos. Potato cultivation. *644, *645. Reuss. (Rev. by Anonymous) 747. Reventos, Jaume. Soy bean. 646. Rew, R. H. (Rev. by Russell, E. J.) 649. Reynolds, B. A. Weed control. *1570. Rheinberger, E. (Wirthle, F., and Rhein- berger) 1035. Rhumbler, L. Biitschli's alveolar theory. *735. Ricalton, Jas. The coconut palm. 282. Rice, W. H. Orchard sanitation. 998. Richardson, C. W. Notes on Fragaria. 928.— (Rev. by Anonymous) *849. Richey, Frederick D. Unequal reciprocal hybrids in maize. 929. Rick, J. Monograph of Agaricaceae of Brazil. 369. Rickett, H. W. Regeneration in Sphaero- carpos Donnellii. 1091. Ricome, H. Torsion. 2166. Riddle, L. W. Rev. of (1) Lesdain, Bouly, (2) Wainio, Edvard. 372. Riddlesdell, H. J. British Rubi. 1480.— Plant records. 1481. Ridley, H. N. New Malayan plants. 2228. Ridsdale, P. S. Memorial trees. *820. Riebesell, P. Remarks on Mendelian ratios. 930. Ringelmann, M. Resistance of greenhouse glass. 1932. Riolle, Y. Trouard. Hybrids of Raphanus. *1827. Rippel, A. (Pfeiffer, T., and Rippel) 2119, 2124. Rippel, August. Behavior of ash substances and nitrogen in autumn leaves. 2126. Rivett, Maud F. Water conductivity in Rhododendron and Hex. ♦1071, 1297. Rivoire, P. House decoration with flowers. 1872. Robbins, William J., and A. B. Massey. Destruction of vanillin by bacteria. 455. Roberts, George, and A. E. Ewan. Fertilizer experiments, Kentucky. *48, *283, 463. Roberts, Herbert F. Founders of the art of breeding. 1603. Roberts, R. H. Studies in biennial fruiting. 999. Robertson, G. W. (Wilmot, F. C., and Robertson) 2110. Robertson, W. H. Lime sulphur sprays. *1247. Robinson, C. S. Determination of carbon dioxide. 464. Robinson, R. G. Phases of forestry practice. 821. Robinson, W. L. Corn by-products. *647. — Forage crops for pigs. *1571. Rock, Joseph F. A Hawaiian forest. 493. *1658.— Plantago in Hawaii. 1482.— Le- guminous plants of Hawaii. 2229. Rodda, T. E. Peach brown rot control. 1248. Rogers, Leonard. Organization of scien- tific work. 1524. 364 INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES Rogers, S. S. Vegetable seed improvement. *1953. Rosa, J. T. Nature of hardening in vege- table plants. 1034. Rosanoff, Aaron J. Theory of personality. 1828. Rose, J. N. (Britton, N. L., and Rose) 511, 545, 2194. Rosen, H. R., and R. S. Kirby. Aecia on barberries in North America. 1985. Rosenberg, Otto. Chromosome relations in Crepis. 236.— (Rev. by Tischler, G.) *1843. Rosenblatt, Mme. (Bertrand, Gabriel, and Rosenblatt) 2172. Rosenheim, Otto. Butyl alcohol as solvent for anthocyanins. 1323. — Anthocyanins of grape. 1324. Rost, C. O. Pyrites in peat soil. 476. Roth, Filibert. Forest protection. *143. Round, Lester A. Potato silage. *49. Roux, W. Stimulation and functional adap- tion. *1829.— (Rev. by Bruel) 1731. Rowland, J. T. Pulpwood from Labrador. 1659. Rowney, L. F. Grasses and fodder plants, New South Wales. 1572. Rubner, K. Site indicators. 144. — Wood prices, Germany. 145. — Rev. of Grebe, C. *1092. Rumker, K. V., and R. Leidner. Variety tests. 1573. Rumsey, H. J. Seed in Australia. *648. Runnstrom, J. Fertilization and em- bryology. 237. Rusby, H. H. Botanical nomenclature. *1483. Rusk, Hester M. Effect of zinc sulphate on protoplasmic streaming. 1378. Russell, E. J. Rev. of (1) Harris, T. S., (2) Fletcher, S. W. *284.— Rev. of Rew, R. H. *649.— British crop pro- duction. 650.— Rev. of Buller, A. H. R. 651.— Rev. of Lloyd, Strauss L. 1419.— Protozoa and soil sterilization. 2184. Russell, G. A. Machine for thinning camphor trees. *822. Ruzicka, V. Restitution and heredity. *238. Rydberg, P. A. Rev. of Henry, Augustine, and Margaret G. Flood. *331, 2230.— Notes on Rosaceae. 2231. S., M. James William Helenus Trail. 1072. Sahni, B. (Seward, A. C., and Sahni) 2015. Saillard, Emile. Sugar beets, France. 1574. St. John, E. Quintard. (Hepburn, Joseph Samuel, St. John, and Frank Morton Jones) 2143. St. John, Harold. Abnormality in Aralia hispida. 1074. — Elodea in New England. 2243. — Trillium rectistamineum. 2244. St. John, Harold, and Donald White. Gal- insoga in North America. 2245. Sakamura, T. (Rev. by Tischler, G.) *1844. Salaman, R. N. Cross fertilization in pota- toes. 931. — Inheritance of abnormal haulm in potatoes. 932. Salisbury, E. J. Monocotyledenous features of Ranunculaceae. *332. Salmon, C. E. Alchemilla acutidens. *1484. — (Baker, Edmund G., and Salmon) 1424. — (Rev. by Anonymous) *1709. Salmon, E. S. Mildew-resistant hops. 933. Sanchez, A. Maguey, Mexico. *652. Sanchez, N. Potato cultivation, Mexico. *653. Sanders, J. G. Potato wart. 2020. Sandmo, J. K. Timber trees for the future. 1660. Sands, W. N. Variegated leaved plants. 307. Sargeaunt, John. (Rev. by Anonymous) 1594. Sargent, C. S. Forms of hickories. *1933. — Notes on North American trees. 2232. Saunders, A. P. Development of the peony in America. 1873. Saunders, Charles Francis. Useful wild plants of the United States and Canada. 563. Saunders, Edith R. Multiple allelomorphs in Matthiola. 1830. Sauvageau, Camille. Utilization of marine algae. *1525. Scala, G. (Lo Priore, G., and Scala) *1192. Schacke, Martha A. (Rev. by Tischler, G.) *1845. Schaffner, J. H. Dioeciousness in Thalic- trum dasycarpum. 1831. Schaffnit, E. Control experiments against potato canker. 1249. Schalhnayer, W. Rev. of Ziegler, H. E. *1832.— (Rev. by Lenz) *1804. Scheidter, Franz. Weevil control. 146. Schellenberg, G. Connaraceae africanae, in. 534.— The genus Jaundea Gilg. 535. — Some species of Rourea. 1485. Schifiner, V. (Rev. by Fleischer, M.) 1083. INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES 365 Schindler, Franz. Handbook of cereal cul- ture. *1833. Schlechter, R. Orchids in Europe. *308.— The genus Cochlioda Ldl. 536.— Two species of Epidendrum. 537. — Oncidium X Burgeffianura hybrid. 538. — Vandan- the Tatzeri hybrid. 539. — A rare Gram- matophyllum. 540. — The genus Brassa- vola. 541. — A new Vanda. 1486. — Pela- tantheria insectifera. 1487. — Vanda con- color. 1488. — The genus Eulophiella. 1489.— The Columelliaceae. 2233.— Te- tradema, a new genus of Gesneriaceae. 2234. — A second species of Androcorys. 2235.— New orchids. 2236. Schlupp, W. F. Rodent injury to trees. *823. Schmauss, A. Wind damage in central Europe. 147. Schmidt, H. Demands of agriculture on botany. *1575. Schmidt, Johs. Racial studies with Lebistes reticulatus. *1834. Schmidt, Wilh. Dendrobium delicatum. 2237. Schmit-Jensen, Hans Oluf. Estimation of gases by Krogh's method. 1385. Schmitt, R. Musts of Franconia. *1045. Schneider, Camillo. Notes on American willows. 1490, 2238, 2239. Schneidewind, W. Plot experiments. 1576. Schoellhorn, Kurt. Fermentation by yeasts from nectar. 2153. Schoen, M. (Fernbach, A., and Schoen) 2146. Schoene, W. J. Annual report of the Virginia Entomologist. 1250. — Inspection work in Virginia. 1259. Schollenberger, C. H. Organic phosphorus in Ohio soils. 465. Schonland, S. Phanerogamic floras of Uiten- hage and Port Elizabeth. 494. Schoorl, N. Titration of sugars. *1325. — Volume changes with saccharose inver- sion. *1349. Schouteden-VV^ry, J. Regeneration of buds on chickory roots. 2161. Schrader, Franz. Sex determination in white fly. 239. Schreiner. Lightning. 148. Schreiner, Oswald, B. E. Brown, J. J. Skinner, and M. Shapovalov. Crop in- jury by borax. *1413. Schupfer. England's forest policy. 149. Schuster, Matthaus. Pastorage, Bavarian mountains. 150. — Interpretation of charts in soil investigation. 480, 1661. Schwede, R. Fibers of lupine. 1963. — Hop fibers. 1964. Schweisheimer, W. Populational effects of the war 1914/19. *1835. Schweizer, Jean. Specialization of Bremia lactucae. 1144. Scott, J. M. Forage crops in southern U. S. A. *654. Scott, L. B. (Shamel, A. D. Scott, C. S. Pomeroy, and C. L. Dyer) 240, 241. Seamans, A. E. (Morgan, G. W., and Seamans). 632. Searle, G. O. Erysiphe Polygoni. 1986. Sears, F. C. Fruit growing. 285. Secrest, Edmund. Protection for shade trees. 1022.— Fire protection. 1662. Sedg\\'ick, L. J. Cyperaccae of Bombay. 542. — Status of Euphorbia Rothiana. 543. — Zizyphus species in Bombay. 544. Seller. (Wellenstein, and Seller) 1047. Seller, J. Sex chromosome studies on Psy- chids. 1836. — Rev. of Nachtsheim, Hans. *1837. Selby, A. D., and R. C. Thomas. Bordeaux mixture. *1251. Sessions, Kate O. Pacific coast gardens. 1874. Seward, A. C. Early land plants. 2014. — (Rev. by Anonymous) 379. (Rev. by Berry, E. W.) 383. Seward, A. C, and B. Sahni. Gondwana plants from India. 2015. Sexton, E. W. (Allen, E. J., and Sexton) 840. Seymour, L. D. Pruning practices. 1934. Shamel, A. D. Bud variation of the Grande Manitou Dahlia. *1875.— Origin of a grapefruit variety with pink fruits. 1935. — A new French prune variety. 1936. Shamel, A. D., L. B. Scott, C. S. Pomeroy, and C. L. Dyer. Bud variation in Eureka lemon. 240. — Bud variation in Lisbon lemon. 241. Shapovalov, M., Control of potato scab. *1252. (Schreiner, Oswald, B. E. Brown, J. J. Skinner, and Shapovalov). 1413. Shapovalov, M., and H. A. Edson. Wound cork in relation to decay in potatoes. 2030. Sharp, Lester W. Chromosomes in Tra- descantia. 1617. 366 INDEX TO AUTHOES' NAMES Shear, C. L. American Phytopathological Society. 1604. Shedd, O. M. Determination of calcium in soils. 450. Sheehan, B. F. Dodder in Idaho. 655.— Responsibility for low-quality seed. 656. Shepherd, A. N. Summer green fodder. 50. — Top dressing lucerne. 1577. Sheppard, Philip A. E. African aboriginal therapy. *2107. Sherman, H. C, I. D. Garard, and V. K. La Mer. Purification of amylose. *421. Shreve, Forrest. Rev. of Britton, N. L., and J. N. Rose. *545. ShuU, Charles A., and S. P. Shull. Absorp- tion of moisture by gelatin in saturated atmosphere. 2117. Shull, S. P. (Shull, Charles A., and Shull) 2117. Siegel, P. W. (Rev. by Lenz) *1805. Sifton, H. B. Longevity of cereal, clover, and timothy seed. *657. Sim, T. R. Cultivated trees, South Africa. 824. Simmermacher, W. (Pfeiffer, T., and Sim- mermacher) 2125, 2159. Simonetto, M. Plant disease and white fly control. *2060. Simpson, Jos6 Agustin. Hydrocyanic acid in Phaseaolus lunatus. 1288, *1326. Singh, Thakur Mahadeo. Bacterial activi- ties in soils. 456. Sinturel, E. Forest of Fontainebleau. 708. Sircar, J. (Bose, J. C, assisted by Sircar) 2164. Sirks, M. J. Rev. of Rabaud, E. *1838. Skinner, J. J. (Schreiner, Oswald, B. E. Brown, Skinher, and M. Shapovalov) 1413. Skupienski, F. X. Sexuality in Myxomy- cetes. *934. Slate, William L. Jr., and Benjamin A. Brown. Potato fertilizers. 1578. Slocum, Rob R. Selection and care of poul- try breeding stock. 935. Slonaker, James R. Morphological adapta- tion in mole. 936. Slothower, G. A. (Youngken. H. W., and Slothower) 2111. Slye, Maud. (Rev. by Benders) *1727. Small, J. K. Grottoes and ancient dunes. *74.— Origin and development of Com- positae. 333.— A theory of geotropism. 1366. — Cypress and population in Florida. *1491.— (Rev. by Anonymous) 1048, *1097. Smith, A. Lorrain. Drain-blocking fungus. 1987. — Pimina parasitica. 1988. — Lichens of the Baslow foray. 1995. Smith, Annie Morrill. Mary Farnham Miller. 709. Smith, Bertram G. Individuality of the germ-nuclei in Cryptobranchus. 1839. Smith, E. A. (Guyer, M. F., and Smith) 889. Smith, E. F. Emile Duclaux. 710.— Bac- terial diseases of plants. 1273. Smith, E. Philip. Lacquer poisoning in Japan and China. 1287. Smith, H. G. Oil of Boronia pinnata. 1286. Smith, J. J. New plants from the herbarium and garden of Buitenzorg. 1492. — New orchids of the Malayan region. 2240. Smith, R. O. (Clark, A. Wayne, Smith, and Leroy Forman) 2088.— (Kilmer, F. B., and Smith) 2096. Smith, T. O. (Butler, O., and Smith) 2052. Smith, Theobald. (Rev. by Anonymous) 356. Snell, Walter H. Insect dissemination of Cronartium ribicola. 2027. Snodgrass, M. D. Report of work at Fair- banks Station, Alaska. 51, *309. — Cooperative work, Fairbanks Station, Alaska. 52. Snyder, Ray P. School garden. *97. Somerville, W. Grass. 53. Sorauer, Paul. Non-parasitic plant diseases. 2047. Soueges, Ren6. Embryology of Oenothera biennis. 334. — Embryogeny of Nicotiana. 1073. Spafford, W. J. Linseed, New South Wales. *1579.— Experimental work, South Aus- traUa. 1580, 1582. Spafford, W. J., and E. A. Bristow. Experi- mental work. South Australia. 1581. Spaulding, Perley. White pine blister rust. 1203. Speakman, H. B. Acetone and butyl alcohol fermentation of starch. *1350. Spek, Josef. Butschili's explanation of the karyokinetic figure. *736.— Nature of nuclei. 737. Spoehr, H. A. (MacDougal, D. T., and Spoehr) 1291.— (Rev. by Free, E. E.) 413. Spragg, Frank A. Rosen rye. 1583. Sprague, T. A. Dolichandrone and Mark- hamia. 546. Springer, J. F. Modern lumbering. 1663. INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES 367 Sprinkmeyer, H., and O. Gruenert. Vanilla products. *1046. Stakman, Louise J. A Helminthosporium disease of wheat and rye. 1204. Stapf, Otto. Gunnera manicata and brasil- iensis. 547. — Flora of tropical Africa. 548. — Thellungia, a new genus of Gramin- eae. 2241.— Setaria or Chaetochloa. 2242. Stark, Lloyd C. French fruit stocks. 286. Stark, Mary B. Hereditary tumor in Drosophila. 242. Stark, Paul C. The small orchard. 1000. Staward, R. (Rev. by Anonymous) *952. Stead, Arthur. Soils of Cape Province, Africa. *1396. Stebbing, E. P. (Rev. by Anonymous) *744. Steel, T. Root water of Eucalyptus oleosa. 1298. Steinach, E. Rejuvenation by revitalizing senile sex glands. *937. Stevens, F. L., L. H. Pammel, and Mel. T. Cook. Byron David Halsted. 1605. Stevens, Neil E., and A. H. Chivers. Fan- ning strawberries in relation to keeping qualities. 2070. Stewart, F. C. Potato spacing. 658. Stewart, John P. Fertilizing apple orchards. 1001. Stewart, V. B. (Reddick, Donald, and Stewart) 2026. Stiles, Walter. Penetration of sodium chlo- ride into gels. 1296. Stockham, W. L. Wheat and flour quality. 2267. Stoddard, W. B. Alaska flower and vege- table gardens. *1023. Stokes, William Royal, and *C. H. Douthirt. Disinfection of tuberculous sputum. 2071. Stoklasa, Jules. Hydrocyanic acid as seed disinfectant. 2031. StoU, Frank. Rev. of Pellett, Frank C. 564. Stone, A. L. Seed legislation. 659. Stone, Herbert. (Rev. by Boulger, G. S.) *764. Stone, R. E. Spore discharge in Helvella elastica. 1989. — Spore dissemination in Fomes pinicola. 1990. — Kerosene injury to shade trees. *2072. Stopes, Marie C. Cycad trunk from Eng- land. 2016. Stout, A. B. (Rev. by Bannier) *1724. Stranak, Frangois. (Nemec, Antoine, and Stranak) 1376. Strand, E. Rev. of Lipschiitz, A. 418. — Rev. of Thesing, C. *2268. Strausz, E. Carboniferous fern from Saxony. 1118. — Permian Cycadophyte from Saxony. 1119. Strowd, W. H. Determination of nitrites and nitrates in plant tissue. 2144. — Re- lation of nitrates to nodule production. 2145. Struby, A. Forest and meadow. 825. Stuart, C. P. Breeding the tea plant. 1840. Stuckert, T. On the flora of Argentina. 549. Sturtevant, A. H. (Morgan, T. H., C. B. Bridges, and Sturtevant) 878. Sturtevant, Robert A. Foliage of iris. *1876. Sturtevant, Robert S. Irises from Japan. 1877. Stutzer, O. Coal balls. 1120. Sudendorf, Th., and G. Gartz. Cyanide content of lima beans. 660. Suematsu, Naoji, and Kikiyi Kuwatsuka. Peach resistance to Gloeosporium. *287, 1167. Sulman, A. E. (Rev. by Anonymous) *79. Sulman, Florence. (Rev. by Anonymous) *79. Surgis, E. Contribution to the study of the Frankeniaceae. 1493. Swartz, E. O. (Davis, D. M., and Swartz) 2064. Swingle, D. B., and Grace B. Nutting. Legume inoculation. 661. Syme, J. E. Wheats for New South Wales. 54. — Sudan grass in New South Wales. 55. T., E. N. Botany at the British Association. *395, *445, Tackholm, G. Chromosome numbers in Rosa. *243. Tamhane, Y. A. Salt land in India. 2179. Tanner, F. W. (Feuer, B., and Tanner) 1371. Tansley, A. G. Rev. of Church, A. H. 717, *1121. Tatzer, A. Vanda X Mariannae, a hybrid. 550. Taubenhaus, J. J. Disease of greenhouse crops. 1205. Taylor, E. P. Potato seed certification. *1584. Taylor, G. R. Auctioning perishables. 288. 368 INDEX TO authors' NAMES Taylor, M. C. (Dehn, W. M., and Taylor) 963. Taylor, Minnie W. Overwintering of Cron- artium ribicola on Ribes. *2028. Taylor, Norman. Winter effects on woody plants. 1878. Taylor, R. H., and E. L. Overholser. Effects of temperature and humidity on Bartlett pears. 1937. Taylor, T. W. Kurrajong, Australia. 151. Tedin, Hans. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1710. Thaxter, Roland. New Dimorphomyceteae. 370. Thayer, Paul. (EUenwood, C. W., and Thayer) 965.— (Green, W. J., Thayer, and J. B. Keil) 974, 975. Thayer, Paul, J. B. Keil, and W. J. Green. Varieties of apples for Ohio. 1002. Theiss, Lewis, and Mary. Ferns for the garden. 1879. Theiss, Mary. (Theiss, Lewis, and Theiss) 1879. Th^riot, I. Scientific brotherhood. 75. Mosses of Madagascar. 1093. Thesing, C. (Rev. by Strand, E.) *2268. Thomas, Ethel Mary. (MacLean, Ida, and Thomas) 1316. Thomas, R. C. (Selby, A. D., and Thomas) 1251. Thompson, John McLean. Stele of Platy- zoma microphyllum. *335. Thompson, Leonard R. Solid paraflfin for sealing anaerobic cultures. 446. Thoms, Hermann. Lupine utilization. *1585. Thomson, Godfrey H. Perfection of cor- relation coefficients. 244. Thomson, J. A. Rev. of Morgan, Thomas H. *938. — System of animate nature. *1122. Thornber, H. Montana fruit culture. 289. — Cover crops, tillage and commercial fertilizers. *466. Thorne, Charles E. Nitrogen fertilizers. 467. — Sorghum syrup. 662. — Soil fer- tility. 663. — Crop rotation for hog farm. 664. — Basic slag versus acid phosphate. 1420. — Beet sugar syrup. *1586. Tice, C. Certified potato seed production. *665, *1253.— Field experiments, British Columbia. *666. Tiemann, Harry D. Drying wood. 1664. Tilden, Josephine E. Bibliography of Pacifie algae. 1606. Tilley, F. W. Germicidal value of some chlorin disinfectants. 2073. Timm, R. (Rev. by Fleischer, M.) 1084. Tischler, G. Localization of hereditary substances in plant cells. 939. — Rev. of Allen, C. E. *1841.— Rev. of Kuwada, Y. *1842.— Rev. of Rosenberg, O. *1843. —Rev. of Sakamura, T. *1844.— Rev. of Schacke, Martha A. *1845.— Rev. of Winge, 0.*1846. — (Rev. by Anonymous) *1711. Tisdale, W. H. (Rev. by Lek, van der) *1801. Tjebbes, K., and H. N. Kooiman. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1712. Tochinai, Yoshihiko. Food of Fusarium lini. 419. — Fusarium lini. 1145 Tolaas, A. G. (Bisby, G. R., and Tolaas) 593, 1175, 1219. Traaen, Carl. Rev. of Almquist. *2246. Traverso, G. B. Sumac diseases. *1206. Treherne, R. C. Carriers of fireblight of pear. 1146. Trelease, Sam F., and Forman T. McLean. Mount Makiling, Philippine Islands, as a station for botanical research. *1526. Trelease, William. Botanical achievement. 1527. Tretsven, O. (Atkinson, Alfred, J. B. Nelson, C. N. Arnett, W. E. Joseph, and Tretsven) 583. Trevor, C. G. Yield of timber trees, India. 826. Trotter, A. Parthenocarpy in hazel nuts. 1965. Trowbridge, P. F. Report of Langdon, North Dakota, Experiment Station. 1587. Truax, H. E. Potato grades. *56. Truog, E. (Parker, F. W., and Truog) 406, 462. Tschermak, E. von. Increased productive- ness of tomatoes in Fi hybrids. 1847. Tubeuf, C. V. Infection with Cronartium. 1147. Tubeuf, Karl F. von. Forest management- small holdings. 152. — Dioecious cupule of beech. Tufts, W. P. So-called "new system of pruning". 1003. — Influence of pruning on growth of fruit trees. 1938. — Pruning bearing apricot trees. 1939. Tunison, Burnell R. Industrial alcohol. 2269. Turner, H. H. (Herdman, W. A., Turner, E. B. Knobel, and W. W. Bryant) 1516. INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES 369 Turrill, W. B. Flora of Macedonia. 495.— South American botany. *496. — The genus Mendoncia. 551. — Plants collected by Rev. H. F. Tozer in the Near East. *2247. — The genus Rosmarinus. 2248. — Carex riparis var. gracilis in Britain. 2249. Tuttle, Gwynethe M. (Lewis, Francis J., and Tuttle) 2116. Ubisch, G. von. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1713. Ulbrich, E. New species of Hibiscus. 2250. — New species of Lupinus from Peru. 2251. Unwin, A. H. African soft-woods for pulp production. 827. Uphof, J. C. Th. Anatomy of Selaginella. 1075. — Anatomy of xerophytic Selaginel- las. *1076. Urban, J. Size of beet seed balls and yield. *1848.— (Rev. by Anonymous) *748, *1714. Ure, Ruby, and Beatrice Larson. Germina- tion testing. *667. Uyeda, Y. Composition of hemp and ramie. 668. v., H. B. Rev. of Bose, J. C. 2163. Vandel, M. A. Reproduction in Planarians. *245. Van Fleet, Walter. New roses from seed. 1880. Vaughan, R. E., and M. Miller. Freezing injuries to potato tubers. 2074. Vaughan, R. E., and J. C. Walker. Onion smut. 2048. Vaupel, F. New African Iridaceae. 2252. Vayssiere, P. Rev. of Vermorel, V., and Dantony, E. 1254. Veitch, F. P. (Levine, B. S., and Veitch) 2176. Venn, Elfrida C. V. Reaction and color change in tyrosine solutions. 1327. Verdoorn, Inez C. The order Primulines. 1494. Vermorel, V., and E. Dantony. (Rev. by Vayssiere, P.) 1254. Vernet, G. Biometry and homogeneity. 1849. Victorian. Popular science. 98. Viguier, R., and H. Humbert. Gassy tha filiformis growing independently. 1966. Vila. (Maze, P., Vila, and Lemoigne) 1333, 1334, 1405, 1411. Vischniac, Ch. (Goris, A., and Vischniac) 1281, 1311. Vogel. Non-legume inoculation. 669. Vries, Hugo de. (Rev. by Renner, Otto) *1825, ♦1826. Vuillemin, P. Floral structure of the Amen- tales. 336, *1665. Vuyck, L. (Kops, Jan, F. W. van Eeden, and Vuyck) 1457. W., A. S. Robert Etheridge. *76. W., E. B. American agricultural research. 2175. Wakefield, E. M. The Baslow foray. *1991. Waldron, C. H. Germination of Kentucky bluegrass. *670. Walker, J. C. (Vaughan, R. E., and Walker) 2048. Waller, A. D. So-called growth of amputa- ted parts of plants. 2162. Wallis, T. E. Analytical microscopy. *565, 2108. Walther-Giessen. Rev. of Kuiper, K., Jr. 1850.— Rev. of Little, C. C. *1851. Walton, R. C. Control of "frog-eye". 2061. Wann, F. B. Nitrogen fixation by green plants. 1335. Warburg, Otto. Fiber-producing species of Boehmeria. 671. — Reduction of nitric acid in green cells. 1336. Wartenweiler, A. Biology of Plasmopara. 1148. Waters, R. Take-all disease in wheat. 1208, 1209. Watson, John. Aphis resistant apple stocks. 290. Watson, Russell. Planting white pine in Michigan. 828. Watt, A. S. Regeneration in British oak. *829. Wattiez, N. Bistorta as a substitute for Krameria in Belgium. 1289. Watts, George. Cotton growing in the British Empire. 57. Watts, W. W. (Dixon, H. N., and Watts) 1973. Waugh, F. A. Vermont State Horticultural Society Report. *310. Weatherby, C. A. Varieties of Pityrogram- ma triangularis. 502. — Habenaria psy- codes var. ecalcarata. 1495. Weatherwax, Paul. Morphology of ear of maize. 246, 1077.— Teaching diffusion and osmosis. 718. Webster, A. D. Afforestation of Great Britain. *1666.— (Rev. by Anonymous) 744. 370 INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES Webster, T. Arthur. (Moore, Benjamin, and Webster) 1319. Wegge, Paul. (Helms, Jobs., and Wegge) 1640. Weidman, Robert H. Windfall loss in Pinus ponderosa cuttings. 830. Weimer, J. J. (Harter, L. L., and Weimer) 2041. Weiss, F. E. Seeds and seedlings of orchids. 1967. Weiss, Howard F. Research and forest management. 831. Welcome, C. J. (Kopeloff, N., Lillian Kope- loff, and Welcome) 1342. Wellenstein, and Seiler. Sugaring and sour- ing of Mosel wine. *1047. Wellington, R. Hill selection of potatoes and degeneracy. 1588. Welten, Heinz. Plant diseases. *1210. Weltzien, W. (Hefs, K., and Weltzien) 2136. Wenholz, H. Papago, a new variety of sweet corn. 58. — Sweet corn, New South Wales. 59. — Soil improvement for maize. 60. — Pop-corn, New South Wales. 61. — Sunflowers as silage. 672. Cuzco maize. 673. Wentz, John B. Grain grading. 99. Wernham, H. F. Dewevrella congensis. 2253. — Tropical American Rubiaceae. 2254. West, Cyril. (Kidd, Franklin, and West) 1367.— (Kidd, Franklin, West, and G. E. Briggs) 1361. West, R. M. (Willaman, J. J., West, and C. P. Bull) 676. Wester, P. J. Vegetative propagation of tropical fruits. 1004. Westerdijk, Johanna. Spraying potatoes in Holland. 1255. Weston, J. G. Irish gardens. *1881. Weston, Robert Spurr. By-products from sewage sludge. 2180. Weston, T. A. Rev. of Diener, R. *247. Diener's law of hybridizing. 248. Weyer, W. van de. Hybrid Buddleias. 940. Wheeler, H. J. Effect of fertilizer. 62. Wheldon, J. A. British Sphagna. 353. Whipple, Bertha K. Water soluble B in cabbage and onion. 1328. Whipple, O. B. Thinning potatoes. 674. — Potato degeneration. 675. Line selec- tion work with potatoes. 941. — Degen- eration in potatoes. 1211. Whirton, T. W. Almond section of Spain. 1940. Whitcomb, W. O. (Cardon, P. V., Whit- comb, and W. F. Day) 599. White, Anna. Creating a new fruit. 1941. White, Bixton. (Winters, R. Y., G. M. Garren, and White) 682. White, Donald. (St. John, Harold, and White) 2245. White, E. W. Report on horticulture and fruit pests, British Columbia. *1005. — Strawberry prospects, British Columbia. *1006 — Strawberry growing, British Col- umbia. 1007. — Apple tree anthracnose. *1212. White, O. E. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1715, *1716. Whiting, A. L., and Roy Hansen. Cross inoculations with nodule bacteria. *1358. 1406. Whitman, Charles Otis. (Rev. by Morgan, T. H.) 921.— (Rev. by Gates, R. R.) *1757. Whitten, J. C. Transplanting fruit trees. 291. — Experiment station work and prac- tical fruit growing. 1008. — Management of California orchards. *1942. Whittle, A. H. Citrus culture in India. 1943. Wiegand, K. M. Variations in Lactuca canadensis. 1496. — A new species of Spergularia. 1497. — Eupatorium purpur- eum and its allies. 2255. Wieland, G. R. Algae in relation to shore lines. 1123.— (Rev. by Anonymous) *380. Wielen, P. van der. Cultivation of American wormseed. 2109. Wieler, A. Smoke injury. *1274. Wiessmann, H. Influence of light on growth and absorption of nutrient salts in oats. 2171. Wilbrand. Silviculture oak. 153. Wild, L. J. (Rev. by C, C.) 1388. Wildeman, E. de. Notes on African species of Baphia. 1433. Wilder, Harris Hawthorne. Physical cor- respondences in duplicate twins. 1852. Wilkinson, J. F. Top grafting northern pecan trees. 1944. Willaman, J. J., R. M. West, and C. P. Bull. Sorghum syrup. 676. Williams, C. B. Report of the Division of Agronomy, North Carolina. 677. *1397. Williams, C. B., and R. Y. Winters. Crim- son clover. North Carolina. 679. — Vetch, North Carolina. 680. Williams, C. B., W. F. Pate, E. C. Blair, S. C. Clapp, and F. J. Meacham. Acid phosphate and rock phosphate. 2188, INDEX TO AUTHOES NAMES 371 Williams, C. G. Wheat, Ohio. 678. Williams, J. C. Notes on rhododendron seedling raising. *1024. Williams, P. D. Chinese rhododendrons as grown in Cornwall. 1025. Williams, R. S. Grimmia brevirostris. 354. — Calymperaceae of North America. 1094.— Sematophyllum Smallii. 1095. Williams, W. C. (Abstract by Anonymous) 1501. Willis, M. A. British liverworts. 1096. Wilmot, F. C, and G. W. Robertson. Sene- cio disease. 2110. Wilmott, A. J. Erythraea scilloides. 2256. Wilson, E. H. Beeches. 832. — Common fruits. 833. — Lombardy poplar and Babylon willow. *834. — Cedars of Lebanon. *835. — Gingko. *836. — New conifers from Korea. 1498. — Trees of columnar growth. 1882. — Dwarf trees. 1883. Wimbush, A. Regeneration of teak. 837. Winge, 0. (Ferdinandson, C, and Winge) 2003.— (Rev. by Tischler, G.) *1846. W^inkler, H. Parthenogenesis. 337. Winters, R. Y. (Williams, C. B., and Winters) 679, 680. Winters, R. Y., G. M. Garren, and Bixton White. Seed wheat for North Carolina. 682. Winters, R. Y., S. W. Hill, and P. H. Kime. Cotton improvement. 681. Wirthle, F. and E. Rheinberger. Lima beans. 1035. Wister, John C. History of bearded iris. 942. Wittmack, L. Value of Phragmites commun- is, Germany. 683. Wober, A. Fungicidal action of different metals on Plasmopara viticola. 1149. Wolf, F. A. Clover stem rot. 1213.— (Plum- mer, J. K., and Wolf) 1412. Wolf-Czapek, K. W. Applied photography. *2270. Wolfe, T. K. (Hutcheson, T. B., and Wolfe) 1552. Wolkoff, M. I. Evaporation in soils. 472. Woll, F. W., and Paul L. Dougherty. Ad- vanced registry testing of dairy cows. 249. Wolley-Dod, A. H. Collecting roses. 2257. — Revised arrangement of British roses. 2258. Wolter, P. Raising Odontoglossum. 311. Woltereck, Rich. Variation and species formation in Cladocera. *1853. (Rev. by Kuttner) *1791. Wood, M. N. Drying peaches. 1955. Woodman, A. M. Acacias from Australia. 1884. Wrangell, Margarete. Phosphatic materials as fertilizers. 2189. Wright, R. C. Nitrogen economy as influ- enced by crops. 1407. — Apparatus for de- termining small amount of carbon dioxide. 2130. Wurmser, Rene. Effect of different wave lengths on chlorophyll. 2131. Yamaha, Gihei. Cell division in Psilotum. 739. Yasui, Kono. Genetical studies in Portu- laca. 943. Yeager, A. F, Horticulture in North Da- kota. 1009. Yoshida, Suehiro. (Kawakama, Koichiro, and Yoshida) 1190. Young, W. J. Muscadine grapes. 1945. — Products and utilization of muscadine grapes. 1956. Youngken, H. W., and G. A. Slothower. Rus venenata DC. 2111. Zaleski, Leopold. Analytical method in fodder beet breeding. *1854.— (Rev. by Anonymous) *1717. Zalessky, M. D. Silurian Cyanophyceae. 1124. Zapfe, M. (Kappen, H., and Zapfe) 2138. Zavitz, C. A. Systematic experiments. 684, *1275. Zeller, S. M. Humidity relations to spore germination. *154, 400, *1667. Zerner, E. Alcoholic fermentation. 1351. Ziegler, H. E. (Rev. by Schallmayer) *1832. Zielstorff, W. Ensiling and feeding experi- ment. 63. Zillig, H. War substitutes for plant fibers. *2271. Zimmer, W. J. Afforestation in Australia. 155. Zimmermann, Hans. Nematodes (Hetero- dera) on potatoes. 2049. Zimmermann, Walther. Contributions on Orchiaceras. 2259. Zinn, Jacob. (Rev. by Anonymous) *1718. Zon, Raphael. Forests and civilization. 156. —Rev. of Engler, Arnold. 838. Zundel, Geo., L. (Dana, B. F., and Zundel) 2018. INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS The purpose of Botanical Abstracts is to supply complete citations and analytical abstracts of all papers dealing with botanical subjects, wherever published, just as soon as possible after they appear. Every effort is made to present complete and correct citations with abstracts of original work, of all papers and reviews, appearing after January 1, 1919. As an adequate index of progress, Botanical Abstracts is of use to the intelligent grower, field agent and inspector, extension worker, teacher and investigator. The international scope of the work should appeal especially to those workers who have restricted library facili- ties. It is hoped that the classification by subjects will prove to be a great aid even to those having access to large libraries, while the topical index should serve a most useful purpose to every one interested in plants. The service of Botanical Abstracts is planned for botanists and all workers with plalits, throughout the world. The services of all the botanical workers who are connected with Botan- ical Abstracts in any way, are given without any compensation except the satisfaction of par- ticipation in such a great cooperation toward the advancement of science. It is hoped that all students of plants will feel that Botanical Abstracts is their journal. Although the physical exigencies of the enterprise have made it practically necessary that the actual work of prepar- ing the issues be largely done within a relatively short distance from the place of publication- yet this does not imply that the cooperation is not needed of residents of other countries than the United States and Canada. Many collaborators and abstractors reside in other countries, but the aim has not been to distribute the actual work throughout the world; rather has it seemed best to distribute the work so as to give prompt and eflficient service, without reference to the particular countries in which the workers reside. It is physically necessary that the burden of the work and the finding of funds for clerical assistance, etc., should rest largely on North American workers, but the field covered is international and the results are available to all. The Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts, Incorporated, has charge of publication The board is a democratic organization made up of members elected from many societies^ as is shown on the first cover page. Each society elects, in its own way, two representa- tives, each for a period of four years. One new member is elected each biennium (beginning January 1, 1921) to replace the representative who retires. In the list on the first cover page? the member first named in each group is to serve till January 1, 1925; the second member in each group is to serve till January 1, 1923. Members are not eligible for immediate reelection. The Executive Committee of the Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts consists of five members, elected annually by the Board. It has charge of ad interim affairs not involving matters of general policy. Its membership is shown by the asterisks in the list on the first cover page. The chairman of the Committee for 1921 is B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. The Board of Editors of Botanical Abstracts consists of an Editor-in-Chief and Editors for Sections, as shown on the second cover page. The Editors are elected annually by the Board of Control. Assistant Editors may be appointed by the Editors. Editors for Sections, with the aid of Assistant Editors for Sections, are responsible for editing the material of their respective sections as this is supplied by the Bibliography Committee (from the Collaborators and other Abstractors), and also for citations and abstracts of non-periodical literature. They also supply abbreviated titles for the author index of each volume and subject-index entries (for the occasional subject indexes) pertaining to their respective sections. The Editor- in-Chief, with the approval of the Board of Editors, is responsible for the general make-up of the issues, for the final compilations of the author and subject indexes, and for such other details as are left to him by the Editors for Sections. The Bibliography Committee of Botanical Abstracts, the membership of which is shown on the second cover page, is appointed annually by the Executive Committee of the Board of Control. The Bibliography Committee is charged with the responsibility of arranging for the prompt citing and abstracting of serial botanical literature. In performing this function, the Committee assigns to individual Collaborators the complete responsibility for furnishing the INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, Continued abstracts of all botanical papers in a specified serial publication, or in a limited number of serials. The Committee is further charged with the duty of maintaining an accurate record, through a system of reports furnished currently by the Collaborators, of the state of abstract- ing for each serial publication. This record enables the Committee to detect and correct delinquencies in the work of abstracting and to keep the work up to date. The number of assigned serials will eventually exceed 2000, for each of which a record of the state of ab- stracting will be maintained in the office of the Bibliography Committee. Readers are earnestly requested to aid the Bibliography Committee by bringing to its attention any serial publi- cations that are not being properly represented in Botanical Abstracts. The chairman of the Committee for 1921 is J. R. Schramm, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Collaborators of Botanical Abstracts. A large number of botanical workers in all parts of the world have volunteered to assume complete responsibility for securing citations and abstracts from one or more serial publications as assigned to them by the Bibliography Committee. This corps of voluntary workers (called Collaborators) really constitutes the basis of the service rendered by Botanical Abstracts. Through their work it is made certain that all serial publications are promptly entered. A list of the names of Collaborators is published in each volume of Botanical Abstracts. It is desirable that a considerable reserve list of collaborators be maintained, in order to allow for necessary changes, and addi tional collaborators are therefore earnestly solicited. Abstractors for Botanical Abstracts. Collaborators frequently prepare abstracts them- selves, and are thus Abstractors, but they also arrange for others to prepare them. Every abstract is signed by the Abstractor who prepares it, but entries by citation alone a.re not signed. The Collaborators are responsible for these citations. A list of Abstractors is pub- lished for each volume of Botanical Abstracts. It includes many names of voluntary contributors to the enterprise, besides those of the Collaborators. The Printing and Circulation of Botanical Abstracts is in the hands of the Publishers, according to the terms of a definite contract between them and the Board of Control. All other matters are directly in the hands of the Board of Control. Correspondence concerning subscriptions should be addressed to the Puulishers or their agents; other matters should be referred to the Chairman of the Board of Control, to the Chairman of the Bibliography Com- mittee, or to the Editor-in-Chief. Readers of Botanical Abstracts are earnestly requested to make careful note of any errors that occur in the journal, with their corrections, and to send these notes to the Editor- in-Chief. If all will cooperate in this it will be possible to supply a page of corrigenda with each volume. Botanical Abstracts is published monthly. Each volume contains about 300 pages. No claims are allowed for copies lost in the mails unless such claims are received within 30 days (90 days for places outside of the United States and Canada) of the date of issue. Price per volume, net, postpaid: $3.00, United States and dependencies; $3.12, Canada; $3.25, other countries. The current (1921) volumes are VII and VIII. Back volumes, Volumes III to VI, inclusive, can be supplied. Volumes I and II are out of print. Subscriptions are received at the following addresses, for the respective countries: United States of North America and dependencies; Mexico; Cuba: Williams & Wilkins Company, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore. Argentina and Uruguay: Beutelspacher y Cia., Sarmiento 815, Buenos Aires. Australia: Stirling & Co., 317 Collins St., Melbourne. Belgium: Henri Lamertin, 58 Rue Coudenberg, Bruxelles. The British Empire, except Australia and Canada: The Cambridge University Press, C. F. Clay, Manager, Fetter Lane, London, E. C. British subscribers ate requested to make checks and money orders payable to Mr. C. F. Clay, Manager, at the London address. Canada: Wm. Dawson & Sons, Ltd., 87 Queen Street, East Toronto. Denmark: H. Hagerup's Boghandel, Gothersgade 30, Kjobenhavn. France: Emile Bougault, 48 Rue des Ecoles, Paris. Germany: R. Friedlander & Sohn, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin N. W., 6. Holland: Scheltema & Holkema, Rokin 74-74, Amsterdam. Italy: Ulrico Hoepli, Milano. Japan and Korea: Maruzen Company, Ltd. (Maruzen-Kabushiki-Kaisha), 11-16 Nihonbashi Tori-Sanchome, Tokyo; Fukuoka, Osaka, Kyoto, and Sendai, Japan. Spain: Ruiz Hermanos, Plaza de Santa Ana 13, Madrid. Switzerland: Georg & Cie., Freistrasse 10, Bfile. I I Botanical Abstracts A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of botany in its broadest sense. VOLUME VIII MAY, 1921-JULY, 1921 PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC. A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies interested in plants. BALTIMORE, U. S. A. WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY 1921 \ Copyright, 1921 Williams & Wilkins Company Baltimore, U. S. A. THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED AND THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL {The Members ofihe Executive Committee for 19it are indicated by asterisks) American Association for the Advancement of Science, Section G. R. A. Harper, Columbia University, New York City. B. E. Livingston, Johns Hopkins Uni- versity, Baltimore, Maryland. Botanical Society of America, General Section. H. A. Glbason, New York Botanical Garden, New York City. *B. M. Davis, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Botanical Society of America, Physiologi- cal Section. Otis F. Curtis, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. *B. M. DuGGAR {Chairman of the Board), Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. Botanical Society of America, Systematic Section. Marshall A. Howe, New York Botani- cal Garden, New York City. J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical Garden, New York City. Botanical Society of America, Mycological Section. C. H. Kauffman, University of Michi- gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Bruce Fink, Miami University, Oxford, Ohio. American Society of Naturalists. H. H. Bartlett, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. *J. A. Harris, Department of Genetics, Carnegie Institution, Cold Spring Har- bor, L. I., New York. Ecological Society of America. H. L. Shantz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. *Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory, Paleontological Society of America. Arthur Hollick, 61 Wall Street, New Brighton, New York. E. W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. American Society of Agronomy. C. B. Hutchinson, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. C. A. MooERS, University of Tennessee, Kno.wille, Tennessee. Society for Horticultural Science. V. R. Gardner, University of Missouri, Columbia, Missouri. E. J. Kraus, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. American Phytopathological Society. L. R. Jones, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. *Donald Reddick, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Society of American Foresters. Raphael Zon, U. S. Forest Service, Wash- ington, D. C. J. S. Illick, Pennsylvania Department of Forestry, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. American Conference of Pharmaceutical Faculties. Heber W. Youngken, Philadelphia Col- lege of Pharmacy and Science, Phila- delphia, Pennsylvania. Henry Kraemer, Mt. Clemens, Michigan. Canadian Society of Technical Agricultur- ists. W. P. Thompson, University of Sas- katchewan, Saskatoon, Saskatchewan. B. T. Dickson, Macdonald College, Macdonald College, Quebec. Royal Society of Canada. No elections. Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona. At large. W. A. Orton, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C 111 BOARD OF EDITORS AND ASSISTANT EDITORS FOR VOLUME VIII Editor-in-Chief, J. R. Schramm Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. EDITORS FOR SECTIONS Agronomy, C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C— Assistant Editor, Mary R. Burr, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. Bibliography, Biography, and History. Neil E. Stevens, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant Editor, Alfred GuNDERSEN, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. — Assistant Editor, Geo. S. Bryan, Uni- versity of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. CowLES, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. — Assistant Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael ZoN, U. S. Forest Service, Washington, D. C— Assistant Editor, J. V. Hofmann, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Experi- ment Station, Stabler, Washington. Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University, Princeton, New Jersey. — Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly, Pennsyl- vania State College, State College, Penn- sylvania. Horticulture. J. H. Gourley, Ohio Agricul- tural Experiment Station, Wooster, Ohio. —Assistant Editor, H. E. Knowlton, West Virginia University, Morgantown, West Virginia. Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E. Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Mary- land.— Assistant Editor, Sam F. Tre- LEASE, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Morphology, Anatomy, and Histology of Vascular Plants. E. W. Sinnott, Con- necticut Agricultural College, Storrs, Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E. N. Transeau, Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio. Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexander W. Evans, Yale University, New Haven, Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria, and Myxomycetes. H. M. FiTZPATRiCK, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W. Berry, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agri- cultural College, East Lansing, Michi- gan.— Assistant Editor, C. W. Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East Lansing, Michigan. Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. Heber W. Youngken, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and Science, Phila- delphia, Pennsylvania. — Assistant Edi- tor, E. N. Gathercoal, 701 South Wood Street, Chicago, Illinois. Physiology. B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W. Dodge, Harvard University, Cambridge, Massa- chusetts. Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, F. M. Schertz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Greenman, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, E. B. Payson. University of Wyoming, Laramie, Wyoming. BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1921 J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York H. O. BUCKMAN W. H. Chandler A. J. Eames R. A. Emerson H. M. Fitzpatrick K. M.Wiegand R. S. Harris, Secretary R. HOSMER L. Knudson D. Reddick L. W. Sharp IV CONTENTS The Societies Represented and the Members of the Board of Control Page iii The Board of Editors and Assistant Editors for Volume VIII Page iv Sections; Agronomy Entries 1-54, 761-823, 1583-1625 Bibliography, Biography, and History Entries 55-76, 824-923, 1626-1809 Botanical Education Entries 77-87, 924-930, 1810-1825 Cytology Pages 11, 134, Entries 1826-1837 Ecology and Plant Geography: Page 259 General, Factors, Measurements Entries 88-93, 931-940 Structure, Behavior Entries 94-98, 941-949 Vegetation Entries 99-109, 950-956 Floristics , Entries 110-146, 957-984 Applied Ecology Entries 147, 985-986 Forest Botany and Forestry Entries 148-207, 987-1051, 1838-1888 Genetics Entries 208-355, 1052-1127, 1889-1952 Horticulture: Fruits and General Horticulture Entries 356^11, 1128-1168, 1953-1981 Floriculture and Ornamental Horticulture.. . . Entries 412-414, 1169-1199, 1982-1998 Vegetable Culture Entries 415-421, 1999-2001 Horticulture Products Entries 422-431, 1200-1205 Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants Entries 432-445, 1206-1220, 2002-2015 Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae Page 66, Entries 1221-1257, 2016-2023 Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes Entries 446-455, 1258-1271, 2024-2043 Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes: Fungi Entries 456^76, 1272-1315, 2044-2077 Lichens Entries 477-480, 1316-1321, 2078-2082 Bacteria Entries 481-482, 1322-1335, 2083-2085 Myxomycetes Entry 483 Paleobotany and Evolutionary History Entries 484-495, 1336-1343, 2086-2093 Pathology: Plant Disease Survey; Reports of Disease Occurrence and Severity Entries 496-501, 1344-1352, 2094-2099 The Pathogene (Biology, Infection Phenomena, Dispersal) Entries 514-522, 1353-1366, 2100-2103 The Host (Resistance, Susceptibility, Morbid Anatomy and Physiology) Entries 502-513, 1367-1382, 2104 Descriptive Plant Pathology Entries 523-551, 1383-1410, 2105-2119 Eradication and Control Measures Entries 552-570, 1411-1427, 2120-2128 Miscellaneous (Cognate Researches, Technique, etc.) Entries 571-579, 1428-1435, 2129-2132 Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy Entries 580-598, 1436-1447, 2133-2141 Physiology: General Entries 599-604, 1448-1449, 2142 Protoplasm, Motility Entries 605, 1450 Diffusion, Permeability Entries 606-609, 1451-1454, 2143-2145 Water Relations Entries 1455, 2146 Mineral Nutrients' Entries 610-613, 1456, 2147-2150 Photosynthesis Entries 614-615, 1457-1458, 2151-2152 Metabolism (General) Entries 616-633, 1459-1469, 2153-2166 V VI CONTENTS Metabolism (Nitrogen Relations) Entries 634-640, 1470-1476, 2167-2174 Metabolism (Enzymes, Fermentation) Entries 641-651, 1477-1487, 2175-2181 Metabolism (Respiration) Entries 652-654, 1488, 2182-2183 Organism as a Whole Entries 655-656, 1489-1492, 2184-2186 Growth, Development, Reproduction Entries 657-661, 1493, 2187-2189 Movements of Growth and Turgor Changes Entries 662-664, 1494-1495 Germination, Renewal of Activity Entries 665-668, 1496-1498 Temperature Relations Entries 1499-1500, 2190-2194 Radiant Energy Relations Entries 1501-1503, 2195 Toxic Agents Entries 669-673, 1504, 2196-2197 Electricity and Mechanical Agents Entry 674 Miscellaneous Entries 1505-1508, 2198-2201 Soil Science Entries 675-682, 2202-2224 Influence of Biological Agents Entries 1509-1517 Fertility Studies Entries 1518-1531 Physical Investigations Entries 1532-1538 Taxonomy of Vascular Plants : General Entries 683-694, 1539-1545, 2225-2235 Pteridophytes Entries 695-700, 1546, 2236 Spermatophytes Entries 701-751, 1547-1572, 2237-2253 Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications Entries 752-760, 1573-1582, 2254-2267 Index to Authors' Names appearing in Volume VIII Pages 333-349 ENTRIES 1-760 BOTANICAL Abstracts A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of botany in its broadest sense PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC. A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies interested in plants. THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED AND THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL (The Members of the Executive Committee for lOgt are indicated by asterisks) American Association for the Advancement of Science, Section G. R. A. Harper, Columbia University, New York City. B. E. Livi BOSTON, Johns Hopkins Uni- versity, Baltimore, Maryland. Botanical Society of America, General Section. H. A. Gleason, New York Botanical Garden, New York City. *B. M. Davis, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Botanical Society of America, Physiological Section. Otis F. Curtis, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. *B. M. DuGOAR {Chairman of the Board), Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. Botanical Society of America, Systematic Section. I^Iarshall a. Howe, New York Botani- cal Garden, New York City. J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical Garden, New Y'ork City. Botanical Society of America, Mycological Section. C. H. I^UFFMAN, University of ^lichi- gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Bruce Fink, Miami University, Oxford, Ohio. American Society of Naturalists. H. H. Bartlett, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. *J. A. Harris, Station for Experimental Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, L. I., New York. Ecological Society of America. H. L. Shaktz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. *Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory, Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona. Paleontological Society of America. Arthur Hollick, 01 Wall Street, New Brighton, New York. E. W. Berry, John^ Hopkins University, Baltimore, MarNland. American Society of Agronomy. C. B. Hutchison, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. C. A. M DOERS, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, Tennessee. Society for Horticultural Science. V. K. Gardner, University of Missouri, Columbia, Missouri. E. .1 Kraus, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. American Phytopathological Society. L. R. Jones, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. ♦Donald Reddick, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Society of American Foresters. Raphael Zon, U. S. Forest Service, Wash- ington, D. C. J. S. Illick, Pennsylvania Department of Forestry, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. American Conference of Pharmaceutical Faculties. Heber W. Y'oungken, Philadelphia Col- lege of Pharmacy and Science, Phila- delphia, Pennsylvania. Henry Kraemer. Canadian Society of Technical Agricultur- ists. W. P. Thompson, University of Sas- katchewan, Saskatoon, Saskatchewan. B. T. Dickson, Macdonald College, Macdonald College, Quebec. Royal Society of Canada. No elections. At large. W. A. Orton, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY BALTIMORE, U. S. A. Entered as Becond-class matter. November 9, 1918, at the post office at Baltimore, Maryland, under the Act of March 3. 1879 Copyright 1921. Williams & Wilkina Company SS.QO, United States, Mexico, Cuba Price, net postpaid, per volume: ■{ $3.12, Canada $3.25, Other countries {i CONTENTS Agronomy 1-54 Bibliography, Biography and Historj- 55- 76 Botanical Education 77- 87 Ecology and Plant Geography 88-147 Forest Botany and- Forestry 148-207 Genetics 208-355 Horticulture 356-431 Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants 432-445 Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes 446-455 Morphology and Taxonomj^ of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes 456-483 Paleobotany and Evolutionary History ~ 48-^495 Pathology 496-579 Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy 580-598 Physiology 599-674 Soil Science 675-682 Taxonomy of Vascular Plants „ 683-751 Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications 752-760 BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1921 AND ASSISTANT EDITORS Editor-in-Chief, J. R. Schramm Cornell University, Ithaca, New York EDITORS FOR SECTIONS Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus- try, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, Mart R. Burr, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D.C. Bibliography, Biography and History. Neil E. Stevens, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant Editor, Alfred Gundersen, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin.— Assistant Editor, Geo.' S. Bryan, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. Cowles, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois.— Assistant Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael Zon, U. S. Forest Service, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, J. V. HoFMANN, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Ex- periment Station, Stabler, Washington. Genetics. George H. Shull^ Princeton University, Princeton, New Jersey. — Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly, Pennsylvania State College, State College, Pennsylvania. Horticulture. J. H. Gourley, West Virginia Univer- sity, Morgantown, West Virginia. — Assistant Editor, H. E. Knowxton, West Virginia University, Morgan- town, West Virginia. Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E. Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University. Balti- more, Maryland.— Assistant Editor, Sam F. Tre- lease. The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants. E. W. Sxnnott, Connecticut Agricultural College, Storrs, Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E._N. Tranbeau, Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio. Morphology ano Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexandeb W. Evans, Yale University, New Haven, Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes. H. M. Fitepatrick, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W. Berry, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agricultural Col- lege, East Lansing, Michigan. — Assistant Editor, C. W. Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East Lans- ing, Michigan. Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. Hebeb W . Youngken, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and Scienue,Philadelphia,Pennsylvania.— Assistant Editor, E. N. Gathercoal, 701 South Wood St., Chicago, Illinois. Physiology. B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W. Dodge, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island. Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bujseau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C — Assistant Editor, F. M. Schertz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Wash- ington, D. C. Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Gbeenman, Mis- souri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.— Assistant Editor, E. B. Patson, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1921 J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York H. O. BUCKMAN R. HOSMFP W. H. Chandler L. Knudson A. J. Eames E. G. Montgomery R. A. Emerson D. Reddick H. M. Fitzpatrick L. W. Sharp K. M.Wibqand R. S. Haiuris, Secretary JUST PUBLISHED DICTIONARY OF BOTANICAL EQUIVALENTS FRENCH- ENGLISH GERMAN-ENGLISH BY ERNST ARTSCHWAGER, Ph.D. Instructor in Plant Physiology at Cornell University AND EDWINA M. SMILEY, M.A. Instructor in Plant Pathology A practical hand-book, intended for the graduate student and investigator. Of special use to readers of foreign botanical literature, who feel the need of an accurate translation of technical terms not commonly found in our dictionaries. Only terms of French and German derivation are included. Terms of Latin or Greek origin have been introduced only when their meaning was n t clear. Whenever possible, the special meaning of each term has been explained if no equivalent in the other language exists. ^ The list of plant names includes important economic plants, farm weeds, and the Latin equivalents for the larger plant groups. Interleaved with blank pages to make it possible for owners of the volume to record any terms and names not given. ORDER FROM WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY Publishers of Scientific Journals and Books BALTIMORE, U. S. A. ORDER FORM Williams & Wilkins Company Baltimore, Maryland, U. S. A. Please send copy(ies) of Dictionary of Botanical Equivalents. Remittance for $2.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $2.15, Canada; $2.25, other countries, is enclosed to cover, (or) Remittance will be made on receipt of your statement, (or) Remittance will be made about 1921. Name (Please state whether Dr., Prof., Librarian, Director, etc.) Address LaMotte Standards GUARANTEED Section 1. — Standardized Indicator dyes. Covering a wide range of H-ion con- centration. Supplied in dry form and in sterile stock solutions. Each indicator is standardized in strict accordance with the specifications of Clark & Lubs. (Jr. Bact., Vol, II, Nos. 1, 2, 3, 1917.) Common Name Color Change Ph Value Thymol Blue (acid range) red-yellow 1.2-2.8 Methyl Orange red-yellow 2.9-4.0 Bromphenol Blue yellow-blue 3.0-4.6 Resorcin Blue pink-blue 4.0-7.2 Methyl Red red-yellow 4.4-6.0 Bromcresol Purple yellow-purple 5.2-6.8 Litmus (special) red-blue , 5.5-8.9 Bromthymol Blue yellow-blue 6.0-7.6 Phenol-Red yellow-red 6.8-8.4 Cresol Red yellow-red 7.2-8.8 Thymol Blue (alkaline range) yellow-blue 8.0-9.6 Cresol-phthalein colorless-red 8.2-9.8 Phenol-phthalein colorless-red 8.4-9.2 Section 2-B. — Specially prepared and standardized Buffer salts and solutions. Buffer mixtures may be obtained in series covering any particular range of H-ion concentration from Ph 1.0 to 10.0. Standardized Buffer Solutions (M/5) Potassium Phosphate Potassium Phthalate Sodium Hydroxide (CO2 free) Potassium Chloride Hydrochloric Acid Di-Sodium Phosphate, 2H2O A large number of general synthetic and purified compounds are manufactured by us and information concerning them may be obtained by addressing LA MOTTE CHEMICAL PRODUCTS CO. *'Staiidards Department*' 13 W. Saratoga St. Baltimore, Md. GENETICS A Periodical Record of Investigations Rearing on Heredity and Investigation ISSUED BIMONTHLY EDITORIAL BOARD George H. Shull, Mp.naging Editor Princeton University William E. Castle Edwin G. Conklin Charles B. Davenport Bradlet M. Davis Harvard University Princeton University Carnegie Institution of Washington University of Michigan Edward M East Rollins A. Emerson Herbert S. Jennings Harvard University Cornell University Johns Hopkins University Thomas H. Morgan Raymond Pearl Columbia University Johns Hopkins University Prices, net postpaid: Current Volume, Volume VI, S6.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $6.25, Canada; $6.50, other countries The Back Volumes are available. Price, net postpaid. Volumes I-V, inclusive: $35.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $36.25, Canada; $37.50, other countries Order from Williams and Wilkins Company PUBLISHERS OF SCIENTIFIC JOURNALS AND BOOKS Baltimore, Maryland, U. S. A. SOIL SCIENCE ESTABLISHED BT RUTGERS COLLEGE JACOB G. LIPMAN, Edftor-in-Chief CARL R. WOODWARD. Assistant EDrroB IN CONSULTATION WITH DR. H. J. CONN DR. H. VON FEILITZEN DR. F. J. ALWAT DR. C. BARTHEL DR. M. W. BEIJERINCK PROF. A. W. BLAIR DR. P. E. BROWN DIRECTOR H. R. CHRtSTENBEN DR. E. B. FRED DR. K. OREIQ-SMITH DB. B. L. HARTWELL DR. C. B. LIPMAN DR. F. LOUNIS DR. T. L. LYON DR. E. A. MITSCHERLICH PROF. C. A. MOOERS DR. THEO. REMT PROF. a. ROSSI DR. E. J. RC88ELL DR. O. 8CBREINEB DR. A. A. P. DE SIOMOND PROF. CHAS. E. THORNS DB. N. TULAIKOFF Soil Science is devoted to the broader outlook of the entire field of soil fertility. Articles dealing with the more important facts, observations, deductions and problems of soil biology, soil chemistry, and soil physics are published. Papers devoted to plant physiology, agronomy, bacteriology, or geology, are accepted for publication if they contribute directly to the knowledge of soil fertility. The study of the mineral and organic constituents of soils, soil gases, soil water as a sol- vent of soil material, soil colloids, the transformation of commercial plant foods in soils, questions that deal with the fundamental facts of soil fertility and productivity, are given due consideration. The phenomena concerning soil micro-organisms, such as bacteria, molds, protozoa, and algae, receive careful attention. SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FOR SOIL SCIENCE Issued Monthly. Two Volumes (500 pages to a volume) a Year. Current Volumes, Volumes XI and XII: $10.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $10.50, Canada; $11.00, other countries. Back Volumes, I to XI, inclusive: $50.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $52.50, Canada; $55.00, other countries. Prices are net, postpaid. WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore, Md., U. S. A. Please enter a subscription for Soil Science. Kindly begin subscription with the current volume, and forward numbers as issued. Remittance for $10.00 ($10.50, Canada; $11.00, other countries) is enclosed to cover two volumes. Name . . . Address. V "^' Abstracts of Bacteriology ^o'"™* Comprising complete reviews and abslracts of American and foreign work in Bacteriology, Mycology and Protozoology in their relation to the arts and sciences Under the editorial direction of the Society of American Bacteriologists Editor A. PARKER KITCHENS Published Monthly. One volume a year at present. About 500 pages to a volume Price, net postpaid: S5.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; S5.25, Canada; $5.50, other countries Subscriptions are received for the volume only. Single copies are not sold Back Volumes, Vols. I-IV, incl. Price, net postpaid: $24.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; §25.00, Canada; $26.00, other countries Subscription Order for the Abstracts of Bacteriology Williams & Wilkins Company Mount Rotal and Guilfobd Avenues, .».„._ Baltimork, Md., U. S. A. We } "Do'oss I j5'5Q (foreign) } ^°^ subacription to the present volume of Abstbacts of Bacte Name..„.....„ „ „ _ „ _._ _ „ (Please state whether Dr., Prof., etc.) Address...- _ „. .19.. BIOLOQT. BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS —is an index of international botanical progress. —stands for accuracy, completeness, and prompt publication. —published the following entries: Vol. 1—1681; Vol. 11—1371; Vol. Ill— 3061; Vol. IV— 1853; Vol. V— 2426; Vol. VI— 2032. — refers to more than 2000 serial publications to secure abstracts and citations. — accompanies non-English titles with an English translation. — publishes all abstracts in English. — uses a thorough system of cross references. — allows the quickest possible reference to all botanical articles, by a typographical arrange- ment that permits prompt reference to author, title, and place of publication. — furnishes to workers, having restricted library facilities, information concerning all article.^ published in the botanical field. —furnishes to workers, having access to large libraries, a thorough classification by subjects— an invaluable reference aid and time saver. — has been ordered by subscribers in Algeria, South Africa, East African Protectorate, British Central Africa, Portuguese East Africa, Union of South Africa, Argentina, Brazil, Ecuador, Paraguay, Australia, British Guiana, British West Indies, Canada, China, Cochin-China, Cuba, Denmark, Dutch East Indies, Egypt, England, Federated Malay States, France, Hawaii, Holland, India, Ireland, Italy, Japan, Mexico, New Zealand, Norway, Peru, Philippine Islands, Portugal, Porto Rico, Scotland, Sweden, Switzerland, Tunis, Wales, and in every State in the United States of North America. — offers infinitely more as an investment than any other publication issued in this field. Do You Feel That You Can Afford To Be Without Botanical Abstracts.'^ SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FOR BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS Issued Monthly (Volume I, No. 1, was published September, 1918) 192.. Williams & Wilkins Company Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore, Md., U. S. A. Please enter a subscription for Botanical Abstracts, Vols. VII and VIII, and forward numbers as issued. Remittance for $6.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $6.25, Canada; $6.50, other countries, is enclosed to cover two volumes. Name (State whether Dr., Prof., etc.) Address. The Back Volumes (Vols. I and II) are out of print C\J BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field ot botany in its broadest sense. LiBp/t py UNDER THE DIRECTION OF N^W y,-»v^ THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC. ., ^"'' ^'• J. R, Schramm, Editor-in-Chief Cornell University, Ithaca, New York Vol. VIII MAY, 1921 No. 1 ENTRIES 1-760 AGRONOMY C. V. Piper, Editor Mary R. Burr, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 74, 77, 87, 237, 238, 2.39, 329, 355, 510, 529, 552, 553, 613, 621, 630, 677, 678, 679, 693, 724) 1. Adkins, D. 'SI. The soya-bean problem. Sci. Prog. [London] 15:445-451. 1921.— A brief account is given of the history, economic value, and methods of cultivating the soya- bean.— /. L. Weimer. 2. Anonymous. Cotton for automobile tires. Sci. Amer. 122:003. 2 fig. 1920.— A brief account of the growing of long-fiber cotton in the Salt River Valley of Arizona. — Chas. H. Otis. 3. Anonymous. Cyprus grown tobacco. Cyprus Agric. Jour. 14, 15: 148-149. 1919, 1920. — Smyrna and Cavalla leaf tobacco produced at Nicosia, Cyprus, contained rather large amounts of nicotine and nitrogen, while the ash had a low percentage of potash. It is believed that with proper knowledge, skill, and care a tobacco leaf can be produced in Cyprus that could be sold in the London market at satisfactory prices. — W. Stuart. 4. Anonymous. Failure of potatoes in Cj'prus. Cyprus Agric. Jour. 15:214. 1920.— Potato growers in Cyprus suffer their chief losses to the summer potato crop, which is nor- mally harvested in May or June. The intense heat of that period makes it difficult to keep the tubers. — W. Stuart. 5. Anonymous. Early potatoes at Wisley 1919. Jour. Roy. Hort. Soc. 45: 360-367. 1919.— Report is made of a test of 121 stocks of early potatoes. The awards of the fruit and vegetable committee and a classification with brief descriptions are given. — /. K. Shaw. 6. Anonymous. Fodder plants. Cyprus Agric. Jour. 15: 204-206. 1920.— The article is devoted to a brief description of some fodder plants: The Moha [Hungarian millet], Sudan grass, buckwheat, white French millet, prickly comfrey, and banana stems. — W. Stuart. 7. Anonymous. Periods for which seeds retain their germinating power. Cyprus Agric. Jour. 15: 213. 1920. — It has been found that oats retain their germinating power 2 years; ^ buckwheat 2-3 years; hemp 3 years; wheat and barley 3-4 years; rye, carrots, and lucerne 4 years; beans, peas, and flax 5 years; cabbage, 5-6 years; and beets 6-7 years.— If . Stuart. 1 BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VIII, XO. 1 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 8. Anonymous. [Program of work in progress at the cotton experiment stations of the Chinese Cotton Mill Owners' Association.] Hua-Shang-Sha-Chang-Lien-Ho-Hui-Ki-Kan [China Cotton Jour.] 2^: 229-247. 1920.— Reports for the fiscal year ending 1920 of the work at 1 central experiment station and 16 sub-stations with a total area of 1300 mows (Chinese acres). The features reported are: Location, date of establishment, soil conditions, pro- cedure of work, training of students, varieties of cotton, diseases and pests, and results. — Chunjen C. Chen. 9. Anontmous. Sulphur as a fertilizer for potatoes. Cyprus Agric. Jour. 15: 192. 1920. — The experiments noted were conducted on a farm in Chili, the soil of which was rich in organic substances. The application of sulphur on one plot of potatoes gave an increase over the plots without sulphur of 72 per cent and on another plot an increase of 65 per cent. — W. Stuart. 10. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Harris, F. S. The sugar-beet in America. Rural Science Series, xviii + 3^2 -p. Macmillan Company: New York, 1919.] Sci. Prog. [London] 14: 511. 1920. 11. Barber, C. A. Millets for fodder on sugar estates. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22: 684- 686. 2 pi., Jf. fig. 1920. — This third paper gives additional descriptive notes and data on three of the lesser millets which are most productive: Bulrush millet (Pennisetum typhoi- deurn), Italian millet {Setaria italica), and Ragi {Eleusine coracana). — C. Rumbold. 12. Bornemann. Kohlensaure und Pfianzenwachstum. [Carbonic acid and plant growth,] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35:693-695. 1920.— More CO2 is evolved from well manured and well cultivated land than from that unmanured or uncultivated. The purpose of the present experiments was to determine whether the larger yields secured under good cultivation were due in part, at least, to the larger amounts of CO2 available to the crop. A portion of the garden was laid out into 12 beds, 6 of which were provided with piping by which CO2 was supplied. Peas, oats, barley, potatoes, onions, and kohlrabi were grown. The plants in the beds supplied with CO2 were later, larger, and more productive than those in the check beds. The following table gives some of the data presented : WEIGHT OF CROP IN GRAMS • Without CO2 With CO2 PER CENT GAIN Peas 532 706 2160 621 11 766 1191 3080 1924 13 44.1 Oats 68.7 Potatoes 42.6 Onions 210.0 Kohlrabi (KG) 18.2 -A. J. Pieters. 13. Crafts, H. A. What about our wheat production? Sci. Amer. 123: 376, 391. 1920. — Use of good crop rotations to increase the yields of wheat and other crops is discussed. Alfalfa and sugar beets can be utilized for their favorable effects. — Chas. H. Otis. 14. Dean, H. K. The work of the Umatilla Reclamation Project Experiment Farm in 1918 and 1919. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 110. 3-24, fig- 1-6. 1920.— Data are pre- sented on: Comparative importance of the alfalfa crop during the 9-year period, 1911-1919 inclusive; acreage and yields and farm values of crops; noxious weeds; crop experiments; tests of silage crops; lysimeter work; soil fertility; alfalfa varieties; sheep feeding experiments; and orchard culture experiments. — L. R. Hesler. No. 1, Mat, 1921] AGRONOMY 3 15. Dunn, H. Hammond. Dunn's on seed wheats. Salisbury, England. [No date (1920?).] — There are included, among other matter, brief articles with the following captions: A short history of wheat cultivation in Britain; men who have helped towards a great wheat production; botanical notes on wheat; what a grain of wheat contains; manures for wheat; diseases and pests of wheat; varieties of seed wheat; yields of wheat. — C. Stuart Gager. 16. Deerr, Noel. The origin of the Uba and Cavengerie canes. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22:650-681. 1920.— Through correspondence with Daniel de Pass lately of the Reunion Esta-e in Natal with regard to the origin of the Uba cane, it appears that the firm of de Pass imported cane from both India and Mauritius to Natal. A cane believed by Mr. de Pass, Sen., to have come from India was planted by him. The label had been damaged, only the letters "Uba" were plain and at the time it was thought the letters represented but a part of the name. As the firm of de Pass obtained cane from India and Mauritius at nearly the same time, it it conceivable that the package thought to have come from India really came from Mauritius. The author then suggests a possible sequence of events covering the origin of the Uba cane, if it came from Mauritius. Cavengerie cane originated in New Caledonia and was taken to Mauritius. It was brought into Porto Rico in 1872; was taken to Brazil where it was called Louzier and under this name was sent to Argentina. It is also grown in Australia, where in some places it is misnamed Cheribon. A similar name, Kavangire, has been applied to the Uba cane, but where and how the name Kavangire was transferred to the Uba cane is not known. — C. Rumhold. 17. Faber, Harald. The growing of forage crops on the dairy farms of Denmark. Scot- tish Jour. Agric. 3: 16-26. 1920.— The expansion of the forage crops of Denmark was occa- sioned by the quantities of cheap grain which came to Europe in the latter part of the nine- teenth century. The acreage in roots increased from 6000 in 1861 to 678,000 in 1919. At present 1,900,000 acres are in grass and clover under rotation while 1,100,000 acres are in permanent grass. All the forage roots and most of the grasses are grown from high-yielding strains of Danish seed. — H. V. Harlan. 18. FiNDLAY, William M. Potato synonyms. Scottish Jour. Agric. 3: 202-207. 1920.— The varieties of potatoes reported were grown at the experimental farm of the North of Scotland College of Agriculture, at Craibstone. The synonyms are not necessarily ones of identical strain but of almost identical type. Fifteen varieties of the Duke of York, 32 of British Queen, 28 of Abundance, and 72 of "Up to date" are reported. The yields recorded show that in most instances the synonymous variety differed more from the type variety in the 1st and 2nd crops after it was acquired than was the case later. — H. V. Harlan. 19. Gemmill, J. F. Wheat-bulb disease. Nature 106: 148. 1920.— The paper refers to infection by larvae of a fly {Hylemyia coarctata) which caused much damage in the east of Scotland during the past season. The eggs are laid among root crops, especially potatoes, and on fallow ground, so that the recommendations of recent German investigators that wheat should be preceded by root crops is based on error. — 0. A. Stevens. 20. Gessner, E. R. Sugar cane farming for the beginner. [Reprint of Winklespruit Government Experiment Station Bulletin issued in 1919.] South African Sugar Jour. 4: 1137-1195. 1920. — A practical account of sugar cane farming in South Africa is given with a discussion of climate, soil, field operations, varieties, and harvesting. The cane belt in South Africa is a narrow strip of country from Port Shepstone on the south to just beyond Samkele on the north. The climate of Zululand is more suited to cane growing than is that of Natal, owing to its greater humidity and heat. The two most valuable types of soil in the cane area are Red Hillside and Black Vlei. The former is more readily brought into good condition for planting — the latter requires more experience in handling. There is a 3rd soil type found along the river bank and flats, liable to flooding by heavy rains, but of excellent produc- tivity when the weather conditions are favorable. From experiments at the Winklespruit 4 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, station it v/as found that cane 12 months old is best for planting. Middle and tip portions of cane give better growth than butts for both the Uba, the standard variety, and the Agual, a recent introduction from India. Uba has long proved best adapted to local conditions. In Natal and Zululand fertile seed has never been produced by this variety, which makes crossing with Uba cane impossible in this section. Soft canes are seldom grown in this country. Several varieties have been tested at the experiment station and work is being continued with the more promising ones. — E. Koch Tisdale. 21. Hansen, Albert A. Chicory, control and eradication. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 108. 2-4- Fig. 1. 1920. — Chicory, a troublesome weed in pastures, meadows, and along roadsides in the northern half of the United States, is described. Its distribution and uses are given. Eradication and control measures are discussed. — L. R. Hesler. 22. Hansen, Albert A. The hawkweeds or paintbrushes. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 130. 3-7.' Fig. 1-2. 1920. — Three noxious hawkweeds are described, namely, orange hawkweed {Hieracium aurantiacwn) , king-devil {H . florentinum) , and yellow field hawkweed (H. pratense). Eradication and precautionary measures are given. — L. R. Hesler. 23. Haywood, A. H. Saccaline at Wollongbar experiment farm. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 29:886-887. 1 fig. 1918. — Saccaline, recently introduced from Victoria, is a local name for a strain of sweet sorghum (Andropogon sorgJiwn), which seems to have developed perennial hab'ts. It attains a height of 12 feet, stools well, matures seed freely, has the ratooning habit and is considered more valuable than other sorghums. One grower is said to have obtained 9 cuttings. Chemical analysis is given. — L. R. Waldron. 24. Headley, F. B. The work of the Newlands Reclamation Experiment Farm in 1919. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 136. 3-Sl. Fig. 1-3. 1920.— The report gives yields and market value of alfalfa, barley, oats, wheat, potatoes, hay, pasture, garden and miscel- laneous crops; variety tests of wheat, barley, and potatoes; tests of horticultural crops, including tomatoes and sweet corn; blossoming date for varieties of apples, pears, plums, and prunes; and concludes with an account of experiments made in the reclamation of alkali soil. — L. R. Hesler. 25. IvERSEN, K. Lokale Markfors0g i Danmark. [Local field experiments in Denmark.] Nordisk Jordbrugsforskning (K0benhavn) 1920: 102-120. 1920. — The author summarizes and discusses experiments carried on with fertilizers, high yielding strains, seed disinfection and potato sprayings by a large number of local experimenters and by farmers' unions during the years 1893-1919. The increased crop yields are compared with the amount of artificial fertilizers applied and with the varying costs of the fertilizers and treatments. — Ernst Gram. 26. Johnson, E. Behavior of inoculated legimiinous seed. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. California 9: 31-36. 1920. — Nitrogen-fixing bacteria exist in several forms, i.e., bacteria from certain legumes will not inoculate certain other legumes. Legumes are divided into 14 groups. The organisms from the nodules of any legume can inoculate any other legume within the same group onljr. In the field, the organisms can withstand any degree of acidity or alka- linity that the corresponding legume can endure. Inoculation does not render the plant immune to any of the diseases to which it is susceptible, does not increase its resistance to frost, sunburn, alkali, acidity, drought or excess moisture, and does not in any way alter its habit of growth. — E. L. Overholser. 27. Kelbeeger, L. Hitter, und F. Schonheit. V/elche Leistungen konnen wir vom Anbauheimischer Sommerolfriichte erwarten. [V/hat result may we expect from the culture of domestic svmimer oil plants.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 705-713. 1920. — A general paper on the culture of oil producing plants, such as mustard and rape, together with tables giving the results of tests. — A. L. Pieters. No. 1, May, 1921] AGRONOMY 5 28. Kerle, W. D. Farmers' experiment plots. Maize experiments, 1919-20. Upper north coast district. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:875-881. 1920. — Experiments were conducted on various private farms in the district. In variety trials of maize a maximum yield of 85 bushels per acre was secured from Improved Yellow Dent. The maxi- mum net gain secured by using mineral manures amounted to 25 bushels, or $43.25 per acre. With but one exception, the use of mineral manures showed net gains over land receiving no manure at all. — L. R. Waldron. 29. Kuo, Tan Hsien. A plan for cotton improvement at the Chinese Cotton Mill Owners Association. Hua-Shang-Sha-Chang-Lien-Ho-Hui-Ki-Kau [China Cotton Jour.] P: -1-8. 1920. — A plan is outlined for the establishment of cotton breeding experiment stations, the organization of scientific departments and staffs, and the nature of the contemplated work, with the object of increasing the yield and quality of cotton in China. A five-year program for proposed projects in cotton breeding is also given. — Chimjen C. Chen. 30. Kuo, Tan Hsien. [Translation of: Todd, John A. The world's cotton crops. A. and C. Black: London, 1914.] Hua-Shang-Sha-Chang-Lien-Ho-Hui-Ki-Kau [China Cotton Jour.] 1^:206-228. 1920. 31. Lauder. The electrical treatment of seeds. Scottish Jour. Agric. 3 : 340-344. 1920. — Reports of farmers and some early field tests support the claims of the originators of the WoLFRYN process as to greater returns from treated seed. Subsequent tests more carefully made show no such advantage. Treating oats was found unprofitable by A. F. Wilson in West Lothian and by John Walker in Berwickshire and Roxburghshire. Martin H. F. Sutton at Reading compared yields and germinations in seeds of carrots, swedes, cabbages, and mangolds. In each case treated seed was compared with untreated, and with seeds immersed in solutions of salt and sulphate of ammonia. All yield differences were within the limits of experimental error. — H. V. Harlan. 32. Lemmerman, O. Ueber die Kohlensaureernahrung der Pflanzen. [On the carbonic acid nutrition of plants.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 696-699. 1920.— The author refers to Bornemann's theory (see Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 12) that stable and green manures evolve CO2 and that this stimulates growth, and shows that his experiments give no support to the Bornemann theory. He found that the air over pots of soil liberally supplied with organic material contained very small amounts of CO2 but that the air drawn through such pots contained quantities of CO2 approaching the theoretical maxima from the organic material applied. Pot and field experiments were conducted in various ways but in no case was there a larger crop that could be attributed to an increase in the CO2 content of the air. — A. J. Pieters. 33. LoMANiTZ, S. The oil of the prickly pear seed. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 1174- 1175. 1920. — The oil apparently falls into the group of semi-drying oils, and if produced in sufficient quantities might be used in some of the oil-products industries. — Henry Schmitz. 34. McCauley, C, and L. G. Little. Ploughing experiments at Cowra and Nyngan. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 837-840. 1920.— Wheat was grown on land plowed shallow, medium, and deep, by disc and mold board plows, and also upon sub-soiled land. In no case was the more expensive treatment decisively favorable and at Nyngan, particularly, the cheaper methods gave best results. — L. R. Waldron. 35. McDonald, A. H. E. The saving of seed wheat. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 841-842. 1920. — Suggestions are offered in regard to distribution of proper wheat varieties, following drouth conditions. — L. R. Waldron. 36. Maiden, J. H. Chats about the prickly pear. No. 7. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 889-893. 1920. — Use and value of different exterminators of prickly pear (Opuntia spp.) are discussed, including arsenite of soda and arsenious chloride. Literature is cited. — L. R. Waldro7i. 6 " AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 37. Makin, R. N. Some recently introduced fodder plants. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:873-874. 1920. — Brief cultural notes are given on Sudan grass, elephant grass (Pennisetum purpureum), and saecaline (Andropogon sorghum). — L. R. Waldron. 38. Mateenaers, F. F. Der Grubensilo tind der Schanzensilo. [The pit silo and the tank silo.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 673-679. 1920. — Detailed descriptions, with diagrams, of methods of constructing the pit and the tank silo. — A. J. Pieters. 39. Newhall, C. a. The direct identification of soy-bean oil. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12 : 1174-1175. 1920. — A method of identification of soy-bean oil involving the use of uranium acetate or uranium nitrate is discussed. — Henry Schmitz. 40. Oeberstein. Ueber einige seltenere Luzerne und WoUklettenbeischliisse. [Con- cerning some rare lucerne and woolcombing enclosures.] Landw. Jahrb. 53: 627-637. 1^19. — The author describes some impurities and adulterants found in lucerne seed which appear to indicate the source as Persia and Asia Minor. The seeds secured from wool combings proved to be those of Medicago denticulata and M. maculata. — A. J. Pieters. 41. Pardt, Alexander. Broadcasting versus drilling oats. Scottish Jour. Agric. 3: 232-236. 1920. — In a 4-year test in northern Scotland the high yields of grain were obtained by 4 different methods of seeding, in the following order: cross drilled, broadcast and drilled, broadcast, and single drilled. The total average difference was less than 3 bushels. In seeding, 6 bushels were used on the drilled plots, 7 on the plot drilled and broadcast, and 8 on the broadcast plot. — H. V. Harlan. 42. PiUTTi, A. Sur I'action de la chloropicrine sur les parasites du ble et sur les rats. [The effect of chloropicrine on the parasites of wheat and on rats.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170 : 854-856. 1920. — Results are given of experiments in the use of chloropicrine as an insecti- cide for wheat. The seed was treated with a dose of 10 cc. per cubic meter. The loss in per- centage of germination was found to be 30. Flour and bread made from seed treated in this way showed no deleterious effect. — C. H. Farr. 43. R0RBAM, K. Unders0gelse af olieholdige Fr0 af en ukendt Plante. [An unknown plant with oil-containing seed.] K. Veterinaer og Landbohoejskole Aarsskr. 1920: 36-42. 1920. — An undetermined rape hybrid, seed of which was found as a contamination in Russian flax seed, upon analysis proved to have about the same chemical composition as rape seed, and is being taken up for comparative experiments at the state experiment stations. — Ernst Gram. 44. Shear, W. V. How certified seed potatoes will benefit the California potato industry. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. California 9: 375-381. 1920. 45. Stmon, J. A. The turnip crop of Scotland. Scottish Jour. Agric. 3: 26-35. 1920. — In 1919 turnips were grown on 426,251 acres of the 3,408,479 acres of arable land in Scotland. For sanitary reasons turnips are grown in 5, 6, or 7-year rotations. The largest seeds produced the largest plants. The seed is drilled in ridges 28 inches apart. Seeding should be com- pleted before May 25. Phosphorus is the most important fertilizer for the turnip crop. — H. V. Harlan. 46. Thompson, H. C. The manufacture and use of peanut butter. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 128. 3-16. Fig. 1-6. 1920. 47. TtiNG, Shih Chin. [Kaoliang and breeding.] (Text in Chinese.) Khu-Shou [Science- Publ. Chinese Sci. Soc] 5: 712-716. 1920. — A general discussion is presented of Andropogon sorghum varieties obovata, saccharatus and vulgare regarding root systems, drought resist- ance, relations to soil, self-fertilization and cross-fertilization, poisonous content, and adaptability to all kinds of soil. Methods of producing pure seeds from desirable plants and methods of cross-pollination are described. The head-to-row system of individual No. 1, May, 1921] AGRONOMY 7 selection is also outlined. The important factors to be considered in making selections in kaoliang breeding are: Sugar content, earliness, disease resistance, drought resistance, pro- ductiveness, erectness, and shape. — Chunjen C. Chen. 48. Vendelmann, Henry. Reclamation of waste land. Scottish Jour. Agric. 3: 319-328. 1920. — Waste land is reclaimed in South England and Belgium for agriculture, forestry, and fisheries. Winter wheat, spring oats, turnips, rape, buckwheat, and potatoes are favorite first crops. Pine, larch, spruce, and poplar are more commonly used in tree plantings. Where fish are grown in shallow ponds, which are drained and cultivated every third year, an unusual rotation of fish and oats occurs. — H. V. Harlan. 49. Walster, H. L. Earliness and rustiness of spring wheats. North Dakota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 143. 8 p., 1 fig. 1920.— Yields of varieties Red Bobs, Prelude, Ruby, Kitch- ener, Pioneer, and Marquis are given and also amounts of stem rust {Puccinia graminis) occurring on each in different years. Marquis has given best yields. — L. R. Waldron. 50. Watson, Robert. Agriculture in Orkney. Scottish Jour. Agric. 3 : 306-315. 1920. — Early maturing and non-shattering varieties of oats and barley are grown, also grasses and white and red clovers. The Sandy variety of oats and 6-rowed barley, which are early matur- ing and non-shattering, are grown. The "Up-to-date," Abundance, and British Queen varie- ties of potatoes are cultivated. — H. V. Harlan. 51. Wenholz, H. Pigeon pea (Cajanus indicus). Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 888. 1920. — Cultural notes are given. — L. R. Waldron. 52. Williams, Charles Burgess, and Daniel Harvey Hill. Corn book for young folk. £60 p., 186 fig. Ginn and Company: Boston, 1920. — This book, which is designed to interest and enlighten the very young agriculturists of the country, relates the story of corn and its culture in a simple, readable style. At the conclusion of each chapter the important facts contained therein are brought out by questions. — C. V. Piper. 53. Yeh, Yuen Ting. [Standard varieties of American cotton and selection.] Hua- Shang-Sha-Chang-Lien-Ho-Hui-Ki-Kau [China Cotton Jour.] 1*: 235-245. 1920.— Methods are discussed and described of maintaining the purity of cotton varieties developed by the U. S. Department of Agriculture through selection. Outlines of 5-year system in mass selection and 7-year system in progeny selection for use in China are given. A descriptive table is given of the characteristics of Acala, Columbia, Durango, King, Lone Star, and Trice. — Chunjen C. Chen. 54. Yeh, Yuen Ting. [A study of cotton production in China.] Hua-Shang-Sha-Chang- Lien-Ho-Hui-Ki-Kau [China Cotton Jour.] 12:233-241; P: 221-236. 1920.— The author reports a two months' investigation of the Chinese cotton-growing situation made in the summer of 1919 with Mr. O. F. Cook, U. S. Department of Agriculture. Nine provinces were surveyed: Kiangsu, Chekiang, Anhwei, Shantung, Chihli, Honan, Hunan, Hupeh, and Kiangsi. The climate of the northern part of the region is dry, while the southern part is wet. The soils vary from heavy clays to sandy loams. Mass planting is the common practise, though row-planting is used to some extent. American varieties are quite common through- out the region. Chinese cotton is of two kinds, brown and white. American cotton consists mostly of the following varieties distributed by the U. S. Department of Agriculture: Lone Star, Trice, King, Acala, Durango, Columbia, Egyptian, and Sea Island. A species of Chinese Upland cotton was observed but no record of its origin was found. The provinces of Chihli, Honan, Shansi, Shensi, and Shantung are said to be suited to growing American cotton. The following cotton insects were observed: Bollworm, pinkworm, leaf -hopper, red spider, cutworm, and cotton caterpillar. Diseases noted were anthracnose, rust, shedding of bolls, angular leaf spot, and damping-off. Five governmental cotton stations and 9 private stations visited by the author are listed. Suggestions for improving Chinese cotton are given: (1) Careful selection and variety test; (2) close planting and late chopping; (3) deep plowing and frequent cultivating; (4) better drainage in the southern region; and (5) Trice is considered to be adaptable in China. — Chunjen C. Chen. 8 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY fBoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY Neil E. Stevens, Editor (See also in this issue Entries 15, 17, 162, 163, 165, 192, 324, 377, 687, 692, 737, 744) 55. Anonymous. International catalogue of scientific literature. Nature 106: 195-196. 1920. — Review of the history of the catalogue and of a conference to consider its continuation. — 0. A. Stevens. 56. Anonymous. Some new botanical memoirs. Sci. Prog. [London] 14: 644-645. 1920. — The appearance of a new botanical publication entitled "Botanical Memoirs" initiated and edited by A. H. Church, Botany School, Oxford, is noted. — J. L. Weimer. 57. Anonymous. Texas Pecan Growers Association organized. Amer. Nut Jour. 12: 86-87. 1920. 58. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Geddes. The life and work of Jagadis C. Bose.] Jour. Botany 58:299. 1920. 59. Bastian, W. The origin of life: The work of the late Dr. Charlton Bastian, F.R.S. Sci. Prog. [London] 14: 461-462. 1920. — Dr. Bastian believed that living matter is constantly coming into being in suitable environment, a process which he termed "archebiosis." He claimed to have brought about the de novo origin of definite well-known living organisms from certain colloidal saline solutions enclosed within hermetically sealed and sterilized glass tubes. — J. L. Weimer. 60. Bragg, Laura M. Contributions toward a history of science in South Carolina. I — Henry W. Ravenel, LL.D.— Charleston Mus. Bull. 16: 17-23. 1920.— Twelve specimens of Ravenel's fungi recently added to the museum herbarium are listed, and several interesting letters to Professor Lewis R. Gibbes of Charleston are reproduced. — Neil E. Stevens. 61. Britten, James. Bibliographical notes, LXXIXa, Lehmann's Pugillus, I. Jour. Botany 58: 292-293. 1920. — Corrections are here made of a previous paper on the same subject (Jour. Botany 58: 108). — The inspection of an original issue of No. 1 at Kew showed the author to be in error in ascribing the original description of 8 species of cacti to Nov. Acta instead of to the Pugilli. Other slight errors are pointed out. — K. M. Wiegand. 62. B[ritten], J[ames]. John Reader Jackson. Jour. Botany 58: 298. 1920. — A bio- graphical sketch of J. R. Jackson (1837-1920) for 43 years Curator of the Kew Museums. — K. M. Wiegand. 63. Britton, N. L. Report by the Director-in-Chief upon a visit to botanical institutions In England. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21 : 197-208. 1920. — Information is presented on the plant collections, botanical research, and personnel at Kew and elsewhere. — H. A. Gleason. 64. Condit, I. J. Bits of fig history in California. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. California 8:260-265. 1919. 65. Dewitz, J. Die Immunsande. Zusammenstellung der Literatur xiber die fiir die Reblaus immunen Sande. [Immune soils. A bringing together of the literature concerning the soils immune to Phylloxera.] Landw. Jahrb. 35: 435-484. 1919.— The author calls atten- tion to the fact that it has long been known that Phylloxera can not live in certain soils. The literature is, however, old and inaccessible, so the author has brought this together in the above paper. — A. J. Pieters. 66. Dorph-Petersen, K. Frederik K0lpin Ravn. Nat. Verden [K0benhavn] 4: 289- 301, Portrait. 1920. — A scientific and personal appreciation. — Ernst Gram. No. 1, May, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 9 67. Fawcett, W. William Harris, Jour. Botany 58:298-299. 1920.— A short bio- graphical sketch of William Harris (1860-1920), best known for botanical exploration in Jamaica. — K. M. Wiegand. 68. Ferdinandsen, C. F. K01pin Ravn. Nordisk Jordbrugsforskning [K0benhavn] 1920: 137-142. Portrait. 1920.— An account of the life and work of Professor Ravn (1873- 1920) by his successor. — Ernst Gram. 69. Ravn, F. K0lpin. Experiments in plant culture in Denmark, Scottish Jour. Agric. 3 : 207-214. 1920. — There are 8 state experimental stations dealing with agricultural prob- lems and 3 with horticultural problems. Plant improvement has made remarkable progress especially in root crops and forage plants. New strains originated by institutions and indi- viduals are tested in open competition by the state experiment station and the results determine the market demand for the seed. — H. V. Harlan. 70. Ravn, F. K0lpin. Praktisk Erfaring og videnskabelig Forskning i Plantepatologiens Historie. [Practical experience and scientific research in history of phytopathology.] Nat. Verden [K0benhavn] 4:302-316. 1920.— A demonstration of cooperation in the develop- ment of seed disinfection, protectional spraying, frost control, and report service. — Ernst Gram. 71. Rosin, Joseph. Arthur Meyer. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9: 851. Portrait. 1920. — A brief sketch of the life and botanical activities of Arthur Meyer. — Anton Hogstad, Jr. 72. Salisbury, E. J. [Rev. of: Bower, F. O. Joseph Dalton Hooker. 62 p. Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge: London, 1919.] Sci. Prog. [London] 14:692. 1920. 73. Stevens, F. L. Changes of a decade in plant pathology. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 65. 1920. 74. Troost, D. Overzicht van de in ons land verbouwde tarwerassen. [Review of culti- vated wheat races in our country.] Cultura 32:226-244. 1920.— The occurrence of wheat varieties in the Netherlands is chronologically divided into the periods 1806-40, 1840-65, 1865-1900, and after 1900. Polish wheat (Triticum polonicum) was well known at the begin- ning of the nineteenth century. In 1826 in the province of Sealand, Russian was grown for the first time, and in 1834 came Giant, also known as Syrian wheat (T. turgidum). In 1835 the price of wheat declined in Friesland and Groningen, consequently wheat raising diminished, but with higher prices in 1839 more wheat was grown. Red wheat then became more common, and Zeeuwsche (Sealand) wheat came into favor. In 1840 the Whittington was introduced, originally found in Switzerland by Whittington. Chiddam was grown from about 1850, and Zeeuwsche wheat was more largely cultivated. From 1865 to 1900 many English varieties were introduced, such as Squarehead, Prolific, Rough Chaff, Essex, Victoria, and others, most being of excellent quality though some were not sufficiently resistant to frost. A variety of Polish wheat has been raised since 1870, and the Dikkop (thick-head), discovered in a field with English wheat in 1865, is still to be found. In 1886 reciprocal crosses were made by Broekema between Zeeuwsche and Squarehead, from which originated Duivendal and Spijk, both of good quality. Mansholt obtained the Fletumer wheat, which because of its hardiness was of much value in the northern province of Groningen. In 1889 Broekema again crossed Square- head with Zeeuwsche, obtaining an excellent strain, which in 1901 was called Wilhelmina, at present the leading variety. Other good varieties of late years are Millioen and Imperial, from which was derived the improved strain Imperial II a. — /. C. Th. Uphof. 75. Warner, Marjorie F. Bibliographical Notes, LXXXII. The dates of Rheede's "Hortus Malabaricus." Jour. Botany 58: 291-292. 1920.— The date of part 4 is shown to be 1683 instead of 1673. The diversity in title pages of the various volumes of this work, and even between corresponding volumes of different sets is noted, and readers are requested to make public information which supports any date earlier than 1678 for the first volume, — K. M. Wiegand. 76. Whetzel, H. H. Institute for plant protection. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2: 174-175. 1920. 10 BOTANICAL EDUCATION [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, BOTANICAL EDUCATION C. Stuart Gager, Editor Alfred Gundersen, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 8, 167, 286, 606) 77. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Crabtree, J. H. Grasses and how to identify them. 64. p. The Epworth Press: London (no date).] Nature 105: 805. 1920. 78. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Ellis, G. S. M. Applied botany, viii + 248 p., 67 illus., 2 maps. Hodder & Stoughton: London, 1919.] Sci. Prog. [London] 14: 692-693. 1920. 79. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Martin, J. N. Botany for agricultural students, x + 585 p. John Wiley & Sons: New York; Chapman & Hall: London; 1919.] Sci. Prog. [London] 14: 512-513. 1920. 80. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Peters, C. A. The preparation of substances important in agriculture: A laboratoiy manual of synthetic agricultural chemistry. Srd ed., vi + 81 p. Chapman & Hall: London; John Wiley & Sons: New York; 1919.] Sci. Prog. [London] 14: 513. 1920. 81. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Willis, J. C. A dictionary of the flowering plants and ferns. 4th ed., Ixvii + 712 p., 41 fig- Cambridge University Press: 1919.] Sci. Prog. [London] 14: 508-509. 1920. 82. Berry, James B. Vocational forestry education. Jour. Forestry 18: 730-731. 1920- 83. Davis, Bradley M. Introductory courses in botany. V. School Sci. and Math. 20: 692-696. 1920. 84. Harris, G. W. Experimental farming. Sci. Prog. [London] 14:458-461. 1920.— The writer feels that before the agricultural scientist can be of the greatest assistance to the farmer he must become more familiar with the practical problems of farm life. — J. L. Weimer. 85. KtJSTER, Ernst. Lehrbuch der Botanik fiir Mediziner. [Text-book of botany for medical students.] 420 p., 28 fig. {some colored). F. C. W. Vogel: Leipzig, 1920. [Price of volume, unbound, 85 M; bound, 100 M.] — The first 57 pages are devoted to the gross mor- phology of cryptogams and phanerogams, with emphasis on the latter. Anatomy is treated in the following 44 pages, about equal space being given to cell study (cytology) and tissue study (histology). Physiology occupies 75 pages, reproductive processes in phanerogams and cryptogams as well as variability, inheritance, mutation, etc., being. included in this chapter. Thirty pages are devoted to "plant chemistry," the latter treated under 15 heads according to the nature of the compounds treated. Pathology occupies 35 pages, about half devoted to physiological disturbances not due to parasites (discussed under 9 heads) and half to plant dis- eases due to parasites, about equal space being given to plant and animal parasites. — The second part of the book (150 pages) is entitled special, or systematic, botany. The entire plant kingdom is treated, the enumerated forms, however, being almost exclusively those of practical importance as sources of food, drugs, poisons, raw products of use in industry, and the like. — All parts of the book are profusely illustrated. An extensive 20-page subject index is included. — J. R. Schramm. 86. Lane-Poole, C. E. Professional forestry education. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 217-223. 1920. — A paper read at the Hobart Forestry Conference. The author advances argument for the establishment of a federal forestry school organized along the lines of the French school at Nancy, considered the best of its kind in Europe. The curriculum, faculty, terms, fees, and certain other details of organization are discussed. New South Wales, on No. 1, May, 1921] ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY 11 account of the great diversity of its forest conditions, is suggested as the most desirable state in Australia for the school. — C. F. Korstian. 87. Sun, En Lin. [A siunmer course in cotton-growing at the Nanking Teachers' College.] Hua-Shang-Sha-Chang-Lien-Ho-Hui-Ki-Kau [China Cotton Jour.] 21:218-223. 1920.— The program is outlined of a 6-week course designed to give the student a fundamental knowledge of cultural methods and breeding technique of the cotton crop. A list of the members of the instructing staff and a curriculum are also given. — Chunjen C. Chen. CYTOLOGY Gilbert M. Smith, Editor George S. Bryan, Assistant Editor (See in this issue Entries 221, 254, 273, 292, 328, 330, 333, 342, 442, 605) ECOLOGY AND PLANT GEOGRAPHY . H. C. CowLES, Editor G. D. Fuller, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 1, 168, 182, 395, 432, 437, 442, 453, 585, 683, 684, 686, 687, 689, 692, 695, 696, 701, 702, 703, 708, 719, 720. 727, 728, 730, 732, 735, 739, 744) GENERAL, FACTORS, MEASUREMENTS 88. Bradshaw, R. V. Color variations in flowers. Amer. Bot. 26: 23, 24. 1920.— Addi- tions to the list of flowers with varying color published in American Botanist for Aug. 1919. — W. N. Clute. 89. Haugh, L. a. Klimaets Indflydelse Paa Udviklingen af Bogens Sommerskud. [Influ- ence of climate on the development of summer growth of beech.] Dansk. Skovforenings Tids- skr. 4: 13-28. Fig. 4- 1919. 90. Le Plastrier, G. M. Notes on loranths from Wagga district. Australian Nat. 4: 139. 1920.— It is observed that the mistletoes of the region grow on hosts having leaves of a form similar to those of the parasite; thus they are hard to detect. — T. C. Frye. 91. PoRSiLD, A. E. Sur le poids et les dimensions des graines arctiques. [On the weight and dimensions of arctic seeds.] Rev. Gen. Bot. [Paris] 32: 97-120. 1920.— Contrary to the thesis of ScHUEBELER, author finds after many determinations and comparisons that seeds of plants grown in arctic regions (Greenland) are relatively lighter than those of the same or related species grown in alpine or temperate regions. — L. W . Sharp. 92. Wherry, Edgar T. Soil tests of Ericaceae and other reaction-sensitive families in northern Vermont and New Hampshire. Rhodora 22: 33-49. 1920.— A record of field experi- ments carried out by the author to determine the acidity and the alkalinity of soils in which several species of the Ericaceae and some other plants were growing. The determinations were made by indicators in the field according to a method recently described by the author (Jour. Wash. Acad. Sci. 10: April, 1920). Thestudiesweremadeduring June, 1919, in a variety of mountain, bog, and swamp areas in New Hampshire and Vermont, each of which is described. The general and local soil conditions in each are given, together with lists of plants found. All of the Ericaceae, with one exception {Pyrola asarifolia Michx.), were found in soils giving an acid reaction, although the members of the subfamily Pyroloideae, when compared with members of the other subfamilies, grew more abundantly in soils of rather low specific acidity. The exceptional species, P. asarifolia, was found only in neu- 12 ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, tral soils. Among the Orchidaceae, the northern species seemed to attain their greatest de- velopment in circumneutral soils, i.e., neutral or only weakly acid or alkaline soils, while most of the southern species apparently preferred more acid soils. — The paper concludes with a list of plants studied, other than those of the above two families, which proved to be oxylophytes, and a list of those which were found to be calcicoles. — James P. Poole. 93. Wherry, Edgar T. The soil reactions of certain rock ferns — I. Amer. Fern Jour. 10: 15-22. 1920. — The author gives a table, "Classification of Rock Fefns on the Basis of Soil Reaction," listing 7 acid soil plants and 18 calcareous soil plants. He then discusses 7 indi- vidual species representing 4 genera.— F. C. Anderson. STRUCTURE, BEHAVIOR 94. Jaqtjes, H. E. Some phenological records of spring flowering plants of Henry County. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 25:413-415. Fig. 162. 1920. — Dates of first flowering of twenty species appearing in March, April, and May, 1915-1918, at Mt. Pleasant, Iowa,' are shown in a table. Six species are shown on a graph. In 1916 Acer saccharinum, Phlox divaricata, and Berberis vulgaris bloomed later than in any other year. But Sanguinaria canadensis and Acer negundo bloomed latest in 1917. — H. S. Conard. 95. Schmidt, Wilhelm. Die Verbreitung von Friichten durch die Luftbewegung. [The distribution of seeds by air currents.] Naturwissenschaften 7: 810-812. 1919. — Formulae are developed whereby the distances to which winged seeds and pollen may be carried by the wind can be determined. — Orton L. Clark. 96. Stevens, O. A. Notes on species of Halictus visiting evening flowers (Hyn.). Ento- mol. News 31 : 35-44. 1920. — Some observations on four species of bees visiting evening flow- ers, particularly primroses, are recorded. One species is new; this one and two others are especially adapted to collecting pollen from the Onagraceae, due to a sparseness of the scopa which makes possible the adhesion of the pollen mass. Observations on the opening of the flowers and the visits of the bees are recorded for Megaptermium missouriense, Allionia hirsuta, Onagra strigosa, Anogra pallida, and Gaura coccinea. These bees fly about the flower buds before any sign of opening is visible; at the first small opening they force their way in, one or two visits stripping the flower of its pollen mass. A group of Onagra plants observed at intervals showed that most of the flowers open at 9:00 p.m., although some were found to open later in the evening. — Wanda Weniger. 97. Weaver, J. E. The ecological relations of roots. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 286. 128 p., 30 pi., 58 fig. 1919. — The root habits of about 140 species of dominant and subdominant shrubby and herbaceous plants occurring under a wide range of environmental conditions and studied in the field are described and in part figured by habit photographs and root maps. The communities represented in the research include the chaparral of south- eastern Nebraska, the prairies of eastern Nebraska and of southeastern Washington, "the plains association and sandhill subclimax of Colorado, and the gravel-slide, half-gravel- slide, and forest communities of the Rocky Mountains of Colorado." With the description of the root systems of each community is given an account of the temperature, precipitation, evaporation, wind movements, and notes on the soil conditions, including the moisture con- tent.— In the prairies of eastern Nebraska more than half of the plants studied have roots which penetrate to a depth exceeding 5 feet, with a maximum penetration of 13-20 feet. The roots exhibit a condition of layering with accompanying reduction of competition of contiguous species for soil moisture. The soil is loess and glacial drift, and the water con- tent of the upper 4-5 feet may be so reduced that none is available for plant growth. About 71 per cent of the rainfall occurs during the growing season. The mean summer tempera- tures are high and the mean humidity is often low. The wind averages about 70 miles per day. — The plants of the prairie community of southeastern Washington are not so deeply rooted as are those of the Nebraskan prairies. Out of a total precipitation of 21 inches annu- No. 1, May, 1921] ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY 13 ally only about one-third occurs during the season of growth. Sometimes the water content of the soil to a depth or 3 or 4 feet is reduced to the point where it is not available for plant growth. Roots penetrate more deeply in loess than in glacial drift soils. Aeration may also be a factor of importance in these differences in root penetration. — The chaparral community, between the Ohio-Missouri forest complex and the prairies to the westward, have plants with well developed absorbing systems. The roots penetrate to a depth of 5.5 to 21 feet, but all are deeply placed. Vegetative propagation is a feature in this community. — In the plains the plants are more deeply rooted than in the prairies although the extreme depth attained in certain instances was found to be less. The generalized type of root system is most common. The precipitation is about 15 inches, 80 per cent of which falls during the season of growth. Water does not penetrate to a depth greater than 13 feet, or that marking the deepest placing of the roots. The prominence of shallow, widely spreading laterals is a feature of certain species, as in the cacti and in Yucca. At certain periods during the summer no water is avail- able in the soil for plants to a depth of 5 feet, and it is uniformly dry to a depth of 7 feet. The subaerial plains environment is characterized by active wind movements, great daily fluctuations in air temperature, and relatively high evaporation throughout the growing season. — In the sandhills the roots are various, although long, widely spreading roots in the upper soil stratum, within 2 feet of the surface, are possessed by nearly all of the species studied. Several plants which develop deep roots in the plains have only shallow roots in the sandhills. The subaerial environmental conditions are similar to those of the plains and differences in root development are attributable to edaphic causes. The upper 2-3 feet of soil carry more moisture than the deeper soil. The most extensive root system of any seen, that of Ipomoea leptophylla, was found in this community. — In the gravel-slide community the roots of all plants are shallowly placed, few lying below a depth 1.5-2 feet. This is related to the frequent summer showers of little penetration. The roots in the half-gravel-slide are shallowly placed, as in the gravel-slide, but also supplementary deep roots are developed. This is related to more favorable deep-soil conditions. Intense shallow-root competition occurs in the half-gravel-slide. Reliance on water of the deeper soils, a feature of this com- munity, carries the plants over periods of drought. — In the forest a relatively shallow-rooted condition is to be found and this is true of many trees as well as of lesser plants. This char- acteristic is related to the distribution of moisture in the soil, which is most abundant in the surface layers. The roots also have relatively poor lateral development. — Where species occur in distinctly different habitats the root development generally conforms to the com- munity root type, although exceptions were found in a few instances. — W. A. Cannon. 98. Weaver, J. E. Ecological relations of roots. [Abstract.] Publ. Nebraska Acad. Sci. 10: 15-16. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 97. VEGETATION 99. Andersen, Emma N., and Eld a R. Walker. An ecological study of the algae of some sandhill lakes. Trans. Amer. Microsc. Soc. 39:51-84. PI. 3-12, jig. 1-17. 1920.— This study was made in Cherry county, western Nebraska, in the sandhill country abounding in bodies of water. The latter vary in size from mere ponds to lakes 3 or 4 square miles in area, and in depth from 2 to 15 feet. The lakes are surrounded by grassy meadows and sand dunes. The climate is dry, windy, hot in summer and cold in winter. By analysis the water of the different lakes varies in alkalinity from 111 to 1129 parts per million. Many migra- tory birds visit the lakes, probably bringing the spores of many algae on their feet. — The work was limited to a few localities representative of the different types of habitat of the region. Climatic conditions — daily variations of temperature of air and water at different depths — were obtained by use of standard instruments. For the study of light intensity at different depths a modification of the solio photometer was used. — 'The lakes were found of fairly uniform temperature, aeration, and alkalinity. Two factors influence the distribution of algae, light and mechanical support. Nine lakes were studied, and lists of algae found in early summer, midsummer, and in October are given. It Is concluded that the occurrence of algae in a given body of water is due largely to seasonal periodicity, mineral and gas content of the water, and light intensity. — S. H. Essary. 14 ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VIII, 100. Hayden, Ada. Notes on the floristic features of a prairie province in central Iowa. Proc. iowa Acad. Sci. 25:369-389. Fig. U5-161. 1920.— The area shows four formations: upland prairie, meadow, swamp, and pond, with several consocies. Lists of plants of each consocies are given, with some notes on soils. Reversion takes place slowly and is rare. Evi- dence of invasion of the prairie by forest in ravines or on moist slopes is not uncommon. The figures are photographs of typical plant groups and habitats. — H. S. Conard. 101. Kashyap. S. R. Note on the floating islands of Riwalsar. Jour. Indian Bot. 1 : 252- 253. 1920. — In Mundi State in the outer north-west Himalayas there is a small lake in which are 7 floating islands, formed almost exclusively of Phragmites, probably P. communis. A detailed study of the islands was not made. — Winfield Dudgeon. 102. Lowe, C. W. The flora of Warrens Landing, Lake Winnipeg, Manitoba. Canadian Field-Nat. 34: 26-30. 1920. — Warrens Landing possesses a typical muskeg covered v/ith the coniferous trees Picea alba, P. m.ariana, and deciduous trees, especially poplars, willows, and birch. There is a dense shrubby undergrowth in which are many of the flowering plants typical of the North. A list of the plants found at Warrens Landing, arranged in taxonomic sequence, accompanies the ecological notes.— IF. H. Emig. 103. Moore, G. T., and J. L. Karrer. A subterranean algal flora. Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 6:281-307. 1919.— Results are reported on algal cultures prepared by inoculating sterile portions of a modified Beyerinck solution on sand with soil taken from various depths down to 1 m. Various types of soils used were from Missouri, Massachusetts, and California. It was found that "there exists a subterranean algal flora independent of the nature of the soil and locality." Protoderma viride, it would seem, is "especially adapted to live under subterranean conditions;" however, 13 other algae were found at a depth of at least 20 cm. "The greatest growth was never at the surface but at a depth of 5-60 cm." A detailed physio- logical study of Protoderma viride is forthcoming. — S. M. Zeller. 104. Nichols, George E. The vegetation of Connecticut. VI. The plant associations of eroding areas along the seacoast. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 89-117. Fig. 1-6. 1920.— The following habitat factors affecting vegetation along the seacoast are treated under influences associated with submergence in sea-water; salinity of sea-water, the tides, illumination at different depths, and temperature of sea-water. Physiographic influences, such as erosion and deposition, and atmospheric influences are also discussed. The plant associations of the eroding areas are divided into groups; those of rocky shores and bottoms include the seaweed associations of the sublittoral region, the seaweed associations of the littoral region, and the associations of the supralittoral. For shores and bottoms of glacial drift the same general divisions are made. A short discussion of succession along eroding coasts is given.— P. A. Mum. 105. ScHONLAND, S. Phanerogamic flora of the divisions of Uitenhage and Port Elizabeth. Mem. Bot. Surv. South Africa 1 : 7-118. 1919.— The flora is made up of 129 orders, 716 genera, and 2312 species. The proportion of genera to species is 1 : 32; of monocotyledons to dicotyle- dons 1 : 2.6. Shore vegetation does not differ essentially from the vegetation in other similar localities along the south coast of South Africa. Halophilous meadows are particularly well developed at and near the mouth of the Zwartkops River and extend on its right bank to beyond Redhouse. The vegetation of the Van Stadens Mountains, apart from patches of thorn scrub and forests, has many features of a southwestern hill vegetation. On the coastal plateau thorn scrub is more frequent and eastern types more prevalent than on the Van Stadens Mountains. Karroid succulent vegetation occupies a large tract of country and is most typic- ally developed in the northwestern parts. Karroid thorn scrub is not always sharply divided from the karroid succulent vegetation; numerous succulents are often mixed with it and patches of pure succulent vegetation frequently occur. Pure Acacia formation is not exten- sive and occurs in the eastern and northeastern portions. Pure grassland formation is found on a large part of the Zuurberg on the "grass ridge" east of Uitenhage and east of the Sundays No. 1, May, 1921] ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY 15 River near its mouth. Forest patches occur almost entirely in deep kloofs on the southern side of the mountains and hills close to the sea. From the phytogeographical point of view the divisions suggested by Bolus are adopted but the eastern boundary of the southwest coast region is placed not at Van Stadens but in a line from Port Elizabeth through the Bethels- dorp hills. — E. P. Phillips. 106. Thone, Frank E. A. Pioneer plants on a new levee. — IV. Froc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 25: 423-425. 1920. — The author notes chiefly the destruction of the locality described in three former papers, which describe a ruderal succession. A list of plants noted in 1917 is given. — H. S. Conard. 107. Transeau, E. N. Vegetation of Cape Breton. [Rev. of: Nichols, G. E. The vege- tation of Northern Cape Breton Island, Nova Scotia. Trans. Connecticut Acad. Arts and Sci. 22: 249-467. 1918. (See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 833.)] Plant World 22: 145-146. 1919. 108. Waksman, Selman A. Fungi commonly found in soil. [Abstract.] Absts. Bact. 4: 5. 1920. — "Soils, rich in organic matter, will be found to contain, if the moisture and temperature conditions are favorable, an abundant fungus growth. Soils with a low organic matter content may show a fungus growth, under special conditions which are not definitely established as yet, possibly at a high moisture content and at a relatively high temperature. The same species of fungi were found in localities as far apart as Alberta, Canada, Hawaiian Islands, Louisiana, Maine, and newly-formed soils from Tortugas Island. This tends to confirm the fact that even those fungi which have not been demonstrated to exist in a vege- tative mycelial stage in all these localities, do produce a vegetative growth. When the con- ditions become unfavorable for the growth of these fungi, due to the climatic variations, the mycelium may be destroyed, but the spores, which are much more resistant to adverse condi- tions, survive, only to germinate and produce a fresh vegetative growth when conditions become favorable." — Organisms are mentioned only by family or genus. [From author's Abst. of paper read at scientific session, Soc. Amer. Bact.] — D. Reddick. 109. YosHii, Y. Oekologische Studien iiber Vegetation der Ota Diinen. [Ecological studies of the vegetation of the Ota dunes.] Jour. Coll. Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokyo 43^: 1-68. 2 pi., 8 fig. 1919. — After a bibliographical introduction and a statement of the general char- acteristics of dune plants, the author discusses the specific influences of position, rainfall, temperature, wind, and other climatic factors on the movement and other behavior of the sands and the plants which live on them and hold them in place. — G. J. Peirce. FLORISTICS 110. Bardie, A. Tulipes, primeveres et anemones dans le Libournais. [Tulipa, Primula and Anemone of Libournais.] Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux Proces-verbaux69: 90-92. 1915-16. [Received May, 1920.1 — The habitat and distribution of a few interesting plants are briefly described. — W. H. Emig. 111. Bardie, A. Le Mathiola incana et le Daphne laureola a Lormont. [Mathiola incana and Daphne laureola at Lormont.] Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux Proces-verbaux 68 : 84-87. 1914. [Received May, 1920.] 112. Batjdrimont, a. Compte rendu de I'excursion faite a Bazas et dans les environs le ler juin 1914. [Report of the excursion to Bazas on June 1, 1914.] Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux Proces-verbaux 68 : 67-72. 1914. [Received May, 1920.] 113. BoucHON, M. Excursion aux Quatre-Pavillons. [Excursion to Quatre-Pavillons.] Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux Proces-verbaux 68: 54^55. 1914. [Received May, 1920.] 16 ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 114. BoYER, G. Excursion de la Societe Linneenne, le 16 mai 1915, a la propriete Catros. [Excursion of the Linnean Society on May 16, 1915.] Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux Proces-ver- baux 69: 29-30. 1915-16. [Received May, 1920.] 115. BoYER, G. Compte rendu de I'excursion de la Societe Linneenne k Leognan, le 27 juin 1915. [Report of the excursion of the Linnean Society to Leognan, June 27, 1915.] Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux Proces-verbaux 69: 31-32. 1915-16. [Received May, 1920.] 116. Bradshaw, R. V. Rare plants of Oregon. Amer. Bot. 26: 18-19. 1920. — Notes on the occurrence of Erodium vioschatum, Linaria elatine, Centaurea Jiigra, and Cynosurus echinatus near Eugene, Oregon. — W. N. Clute. 117. BuRNHAM, Stewart H. The haunts of Rhododendron maximum. Torreya 20: 28-31. 1920. — Rhododendron maximum L., a rare plant in New York, was found by the writer in 1904, in Michigan Hollow Swamp, between West Danby and Danby, Tompkins County, New York. About 7 distinct patches were found within a circumference of 600 feet. It is slowly spreading and in no danger of extermination. The plant is described and the associated vegetation indicated. A sketch-map showing the exact location of the station is added. — J. C. Nelson. 118. BuRNHAM, Stewart H. The mosses of the Lake George flora. Bryologist 23: 17-26. 1920. — The article covers the families Sphagnaceae to Grimmiaceae (pars), and is to be continued. The author enumerates the sources of information (printed lists, collections, collectors), and attempts to give a comprehensive view of the present knowledge of the moss- flora of the region and of the work previously done. Seventy species besides many varieties are mentioned, under most of which there are detailed citations of localities or collectors. — E. B. Chamberlain. 119. Busby, Isabel. A trip to Gosford. Australian Nat. 4: 125-127. 1920. 120. Chiovenda, E. Le piante raccolte dal Dr. Nello Beccari in Eritrea nel 1905. [Plants collected by Dr. Nello Beccari in Eritrea, 1905.] Nuovo Gior. Bot. Ital. 26: 89-114. 1919. 121. Cratty, R. I. Notes on an introduced woodland flora, Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 25: 411-412. 1920. — An account of the woodland plants which appeared spontaneously in a grove in Emmet County, Iowa, which was planted in 1870 on a prairie six miles from native timber. Liparis loeselii, two ferns, and several shrubs are named. The locality is now mostly destroyed. — H. S. Canard. 122. C[reel], E. Excursion to Brookvale. Australian Nat. 4: 141-142. 1920. — List of plants observed in various habitats. — T. C. Frye. 123. Familler, I. Einige kritische Bemerkungen zu J. Roll, Die Thuringer Torfmoose und Laubmoose und ihre geographische Verbreitung. [Critical remarks on J. Roll's Thuringian mosses and their geographical distribution.] Krypt. Forsch. Bayerische Bot. Ges. 3: 187-188. 1918. — The remarks criticize or correct certain statements regarding the moss flora of Bavaria, made incidentally by Roll. Some of these statements relate to Bavarian bryologists and their activities and others to records of Bavarian mosses. — A. W. Evans. 124. Fitzpatrick, T. J. The fern flora of Nebraska — I. Amer. Fern Jour. 10:5-15. 1920. — The author divides the state into seven regions, discussing the geographic features and listing the species of pteridophytes found in each region. The fern flora of the state is represented by 17 genera and 26 species. An annotated list of species of Ophioglossaceae (2 genera and 3 species), Osmundaceae (1 genus and 2 species), and Polypodiaceae (1 species) is given. — F. C. Anderson. 125. Fitzpatrick, T. J. The fern flora of northeastern Iowa. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 25:417-421. 1920.— The counties of Winneshiek, Allamakee, Clayton, and Dubuque are in No. 1, May, 1921] ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY 17 the "driftless area," with beds of Cambrian sandstones and Lower Silurian limestones and shales. Thirty-three species are recorded, including Botrychium, Osmunda, Azolla, Selagi- nella, and Isoetes. — H. S. Conard. 126. Graff, Paul W. Unreported ferns from Montana. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 125- 129. 1920. — Ophioglossum vulgatuvi L., Cysiopteris fragilis (L.) Bernh. var. angustata (Hoflfm.) Luers, Aspidium cristatum (L.) Sw., A. Filix-mas (L.) Schrad., and A. spinulosum (O. F. MuUer) Sw. var. interm«dmm (Muhl.) D. C. Eaton are given as occurring in Montana, although not previously reported from that state. — P. A. Mum. 127. Hamilton, A. A. Excursion to Duck River. Australian Nat. 4: 140-141. 1920. — A list of plants observed. — T. C. Frye. 128. Herre, Albert C. Notes on Mexican lichens. Bryologist 23 : 3-4. 1920. — A list of 23 species with localities. — E. B. Chamberlain. 129. Jennings, O. E. Rarity of Conopholis. Amer. Bot. 26:29. 1920. — Conopholis is regarded as not uncommon in Western Pennsylvania. The plants usually occur in elevated, poor, and probably acid soils, in black, red, or chestnut oak woods. — W. N. Clute. 130. Kashyap, S. R. Distribution of liverworts in the western Himalayas. Jour. Indian Bot. 1 : 149-157. 1920. — The author brings together the experience of a number of collecting trips into various parts of the western Himalayas. Liverworts occur at altitudes ranging from 700 feet on the plains to 13,000 feet. Thallose forms predominate. The number of species and individuals increases from the plains up to about 7000 feet, then decreases with higher altitudes; they decrease also in passing from east to west. The outer ranges are richest in species and individuals, the higher middle range stands next, the inner high range has very few, while beyond the inner range there are none. The outer or southern slopes are richer than the inner ones. A total of about 75 species is recorded. Lists of species are given for the various localities; Mussoorie, 78° 5' E. Long., 30" 27' N. Lat., altitude 6-7000 feet, stands first with 42 species. — Winfield Dudgeon. 131. Krebs, Carl. A rare Ohio plant immigrant. Amer. Bot. 26: 1. PI. 1. 1920. — Berberis aquifolia reported as established in the Cuyahoga Valley, Ohio. — W. N. Clute. 132. Llaqnet, M. Liste des plantes recoltees k I'excursion de la fete-Linneenne. [List of plants collected on the excursion of the Linnean anniversary.] Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux Proces-verbaux 68 : 83-84. 1914. [Received May, 1920.] 133. LoRENZ, Annie. Some Hepaticae from Matinicus Island, Maine. Bryologist 23 : 1-3. 1920. — The article lists 21 species of hepatics, and contrasts the hepatic flora of Matini- cus with that of Mt. Desert. — E. B. Chamberlain. 134. Lowe, Rachel L. Rhacomitrium sudeticum, a moss new to Worcester County, Massachusetts. Bryologist 23 : 4-5. 1920. — The moss occurs on Mt. Wachusett. References are included to further New England distribution. — E. B. Chamberlain. 135. McAtee, W. L. Notes on the flora of Church's Island, North Carolina. Jour Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 35 : 61-75. 1919. — The paper includes a list of seed plants, with three ferns and one alga, collected or noted during several visits in 1909 and 1918. Ilex vomitoria is used by the inhabitants for making tea, but they regard Asim,ina triloba as poisonous. — W. C. Coker. 136. McAtee, W. L. Notes on the jack pine plains of Michigan. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47 : 187-190. 1920. — A general description is given of the Jack Pine Barrens with lists of some of the plants found. — P. A. Mum. 18 ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 137. Nelson, James C. A noteworthy grass. Amer. Bot. 26: 10-12. Fig. 1. 1920. — Coleanthus subtilis described from the mountains of Bohemia in 1816 was first observed in America at Searles Island, in the Columbia river near the mouth of the Willamette in 1875. It has since been found at Hood River, Oregon, White Salmon and Bingen, Washington. Recently (Oct. 1919) it was reported from Hayden Island opposite Vancouver, Washington, by the author. The mature plant is only a few centimeters in length and the suggestion is made that it may be a native to America frequently overlooked because of its size and late- ness in appearing. — W. N. Clute. 138. Nelson, James C. Tilia europaea in Oregon. Torrej'a 20: 31-32. 1920. — A speci- men of Tilia europaea L. about 40 feet high was found on June 19, 1919, in the Calapooia Mountains along Smith River, near Gunter, Douglas County, Oregon, apparently perfectly established, and probably a relic of cultivation by an early apiarist, although the mountain- forest was apparently unbroken. — /. C. Nelson. 139. Palmer, Ernest J. The canyon flora of the Edwards Plateau of Texas. Jour. Arnold Arboretum 1 : 233-239. 1920. — The author gives an account of the physiography of the Edwards Plateau and of the general character of its vegetation, which is xerophytic except along the water courses. Particular attention is drawn to the occurrence of Taxodium distichum along the lower river courses. The most remarkable feature of the flora is the presence in the upper canyons of small colonies of many species belonging to the Gulf and Atlantic coastal plain flora. These colonies are explained as relics of a former extension of the coastal plain forest across the Edwards Plateau possibly almost to the base of the Rocky Mountains. After the elevation of the region had taken place about the close of the Tertiary period, the climatic changes caused the gradual disappearance of the forest, which was replaced by the semi-desert flora of the southwest and of northern Mexico except in sheltered spots in the canyons where vestiges of the original flora persisted. — Alfred Rehder. 140. QuEYRON, Ph. Una herborisation au Pech de Berre, pres Arguillon (Lotet-Garonne). [Botanizing at Pech de Berre, near Arguillon.] Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux Proces-verbaux 69:26-29. 1915-16. [Received May, 1920.] 141. SoTH, Mrs. Blanche H. Wildflower distribution in the West. Amer, Bot. 26: 14-16. 1920. 142. Standley, Paul C. Sphagnum in Glacier National Park, Montana. Bryologist 23:5-6. 1920. — The occurrence of 4 species is noted. — E. B. Chamberlain. 143. Tadulingam, C. Short notes on distribution, etc. Jour. Indian Bot. 1: 125. 1919. — New localities in India are recorded for Juncus bufonius L. and Pyrenacantha vohibilis Hook. — Winjield Dudgeon. 144. ViCToiiiN, M. Random botanical notes. III. Isle-aux-Coudres, Quebec. Cana- dian Field-Nat. 33: 114-117. 1919. — The more characteristic plant species of various ecologi- cal regions of an island of the St. Lawrence River are enumerated. Several species of Carex receive special mention. — W. H. Emig. 145. Waterhotjse, G. A. Reportof the excursion to Narrabeen, 11th October. Australian Nat. 4: 127. 1920. 146. Wilson, E. H. The Liukiu Islands and their ligneous vegetation. Jour. Arnold Arboretum 1 : 171-186. 1920. — An account of the woody plants of the Liukiu Islands is given, preceded by introductory notes on the geography, . history, and population of the islands. The flora of the northern group of islands is related to that of Japan, that of the southern group to the flora of Formosa. The vegetation is characterized by the evergreen shining foliage of most of the woody plants and by the presence of Mangrove-like trees, Cycas No. 1, May, 1921] FORESTRY 19 revohita, Pinus luchuensis, and two x^alms. The flora contains according to our present knowledce 351 species and 23 varieties representing 233 genera; a considerable number of the species and most of the varieties are endemic. A systematic enumeration of the woody plants concludes the article and contains a new species, a new variety, and a new combina- tion: Elaeagnus liukiuensis Rehd., Rhamnus davuricus var. liukiuensis Wils., and Zanthoxylon okinawetisis (Nakai) Wils. A list of the woody plants of the Kawanabee Islands, which con- nect Japan and the Liukiu Islands, compiled by Ushiwo is appended. — Alfred Rehder. APPLIED ECOLOGY 147. Naumann, Einar. Tillampad limnologi. Nagra teoretiska grundlinjer for en ration- ell vattenkultur. [Applied limnology. Some theoretical principles of a rational water culture.] K. Landtbr. Akad. Handl. och Tidskr. 58: 199-221. 1919. — A discussion of plankton in rela- tion to environmental conditions, methods of improvement, and utilization as fish food. — E. G. Anderson. FORESTRY AND FOREST BOTANY Raphael Zon, Editor J. V. HoFMANN, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 48, 82, 86, 89, 422, 505, 572, 576, 688) 148. Anonymous. Distillation of sandal oil. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 316-318. 1920. — A note on the recently developed sandalwood oil industry in Western Australia. — C. F. Korstian. 149. Anonymous. Forest trails and highways of the Mount Hood region, Oregon National Forest, Oregon. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 105. 32 p., ilius. 1920. 150. Anonymous. Ironbark versus jarrah. Australian Forest. Jour. 3:239. 1920. — A note on a test conducted by Warrex of Sydney University to determine the comparative strengths of New South Wales Eucalyptus paniculata and E. marginata. As a result of a simple cross breaking test the former (iron-bark) proved the stronger of the 2 species. — C. F. Korstian. 151. Anonymous. A mountain vacation land. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 1.32. 10 p., ilhis. 1920. 152. Anonymous. A new textile from the bark of the "silkworm mulberry." Sci. Amer. Monthly 2: 152. 1920. 153. Anonymous. Snobrott och toprota has granen. [Snow breakage and top rot in spruce.] Skogsv&rds Foreningens Tidskr. 17: 173x-181x. 1919. — The article reports a discus- sion by Swedish foresters of an address on the above subject by T. Lagerberg at the annual meeting of the association, March 15, 1919. — G. A. Pearson. 154. Anonymous. A thinning area re-visited. Australian Forest. Jour. 3 : 251-254. 1920. — A brief discussion of the failure of the seedling crop in rather heavily thinned stands of Eucalyptus, which is attributed to: (1) Heavy grazing and rabbit injury in dry years, the latter being the principal cause of the damage, leaving the forest dependent on coppice for regeneration; (2) removing all mature standards and not leaving seed trees, the immature standards being too young to produce seed; and (3) the absence of humus, which is regarded as a minor cause. — C. F. Korstian. 20 FORESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 155. Anonymous. The timbers of commerce. [Rev. of: Howard, A. L. A manual of the timbers of the world, their characteristics and uses, xvi + H6 p. Macmillan and Co. : London, 1920.] Nature 106: 80-81. 2 fig. 1920.— "Mainly a descriptive account of the commercial uses. . . . practically confined to those imported into London and Liver- pool. . . . book, in short, is excellent on the commercial side." — 0. A. Stevens. 156. Arens, p. Ziju aan het tappen met driptris voordeelen verbonden? [Does tapping with driptins give any advantage?] Mededeel. Proefsta. Malang [Java] 25. 1-16. 1919.— Reprinted from the Arch. Rubbercult. 3: 36-41. 1919.— Cari D. La Rue. 157. Bennett, H. C. Progress report of forest administration in Coorg for 1918-19. 27 p. Bangalore, British India, 1920. — An annual report with appended tabulated data. The reserved forests now total 520 square miles. The proportion of total forest area open to cattle increased from 71 to 86 per cent and the number of animals grazed increased from 2985 to 13,376. All spike experiments with sandal by burning the area have given negative results with one exception where a tree was found to have become spiked by this treatment. Owing chiefly to reduction in output and decrease in price of sandalwood the revenue of the province fell below that of the previous year. — E. R. Hodson. 158. Blunt, A. W. Progress report of forest administration in the province of Assam for 1918-19. 59 p. Shillong, British India, 1919.— An annual report covering in some detail all forest operations. At the end of the year the total area of the reserved forests of the province was 5495 square miles representing a net increase in the last five years of 1,114 sq. mi. Owing to reservation of forests and the extension of cultivation, the area of unclassed State forests was reduced by the close of the year to 10,050 sq. mi. The total decrease during the last five years was 2092 sq. mi. A systematic division of waste lands into those suitable and those unsuitable for reservation, which will greatly help in establishing a definite scheme of reser- vation, is now being made. During the last five years the annual surplus has averaged 450,516 Rs. The forest devastation caused by sugarcane cultivation is noted. "It is the most destructive of all forms of shifting cultivation, and after a crop of sugarcane has been taken off an acre for 3 or 4 years in succession nothing will grow except weeds and hardy shrubs like the Eupatorium oderatum." A species of Peridermium, closely allied to P. cere- brum Peck, is attacking Pinus khasya but is confined to elevations over 5500 feet. A report was submitted on the damages caused by floods and protection of catchment areas at the head-waters of rivers, but action has tjeen postponed until the services of a special oflBcer become available. The usual formal tabulated summaries are. appended and a map of the province is included. — E. R. Hodson. 159. Boas, I. H. The manufacture of alcohol from waste wood or sawdust. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 269-270. 1920.— The development of this industry is traced especially with reference to conditions in America. — C. F. Korstian. 160. Carleton, M. B. The soap nut tree. Amer. Forestry 26: 621. 1 fig. 1920. 161. Dacy, G. H. Where willow ware comes from. Sci. Amer. 123:222, 235. 6 fi^. 1920. — How the willow tree is grown and tended to yield the raw materials of furniture and basket factories. — Chas. H. Otis. 162. DiEDEN, Henrik. Om Skogsforhallandena pa Island. [Forest conditions In Iceland.] Skogen 6: 293-300. Fig. 1-7. 1919.— About 1000 years ago when Iceland was colonized by the Vikings large portions of the island were forested. The forests, however, were gradually destroyed by cutting and fire followed by drifting sands, while sheep grazing prevented or at least greatly interfered with reproduction. At present 500 square kilometers are classified as forest land, but of this only 500 hectares are forested. Practically all lumber is now imported from Sweden and Norway. High prices incident to transportation charges have ne- cessitated the use of all kinds of wood substitutes for fuel and construction. Steps are now No. 1, Mat, 1921] FORESTRY 21 being taken to re-establish the forests by planting (mainly experimental) and by fencing partially wooded areas against sheep. Only the native birch and possibly Siberian larch give promise of success in forestation. Exotics planted at the experiment station at Aukureyri have not proved satisfactory. Failure is attributed primarily to a moisture deficit brought about by the combined action of a fine impermeable soil and excessive transpiration due to high winds. — G. A. Pearson. 163. Gibson, A. J. Development of turpentine industry in Germany during the war. Indian Forester 46 : 525-531. 1920. — A short review of a number of papers given in the bibliog- raphy (17 titles) covers in a general way the development of the industry in Germany. — E. N. Munns. 164. Gill, Walter. Fire protection. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 199-201. 1920. — A paper read at the Hobart Forestry Conference. The author discusses the subject of fire protection in Australia under the following heads: (1) Fire-breaks, (2) fire-towers, (3) tele- phones, (4) fire-fighting equipment. — C. F. Korsiian. 165. Graves, Henry S. The Northern Pacific Railway or the nation — which? Jour- Forestry 18: 675-680. 1920. 166. Hatton, John H. Live-stock grazing as a factor in fire protection on the national forests. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 134. 4-11, pi. 1-5. 1920. 167. Hay, R. D. Reportof the forestry commission for year ending June 30, 1920. 34 p., Illus. Sydney, New South Wales, 1920. — A revised scheme of forest management requiring stricter regulation and control over forest working, more complete and systematic utiliza- tion of timber and other forest products and payment therefor, has been established. In some cases the Commission had to undertake the felling and direct conversion of standing timber to remedy wasteful practises. A training school for forestry students was opened with seven students during the year. — The State forests now total 5,085,050 acres. Zamia palm (Macrozamia spiralis) was investigated as a source of industrial alcohol, the bulbs yielding 13.3 gallons per ton and 8.19 per cent starch. Mountain ash {Eucalyptus gigantea) excelled other timbers for airplane construction. Mountain gum {E. dalrympleana) , black- butt (E. pilularis), and spotted gum {E. maculata) are to be tested on a commercial scale for paper pulp value, as these species can be supplied in fair quantity in connection with the working and silvicultural treatment of the State Forests. Mangrove is important in oyster culture and in protecting foreshores from erosion; but owing to the diflBculty of supervision, the areas below high-water mark are being turned over to fishery officials. — E. R. Hodson. 168. Helms, J. Egene i Silkeborgegnen. [The oaks around Silkeborg.] K. Veterinaer og Landbohoejskole Aarsskr. 1920: 197-222. Fig. 1-18. 1920. — In Denmark Quercus peduncu- lata is the common species, and only in northern Jutland is Q. sessiliflora found to any extent, where it is planted only as a part of the original natural forest. Hybrids of the two species are also found. From 1820 to 1905 only small quantities of the two species were planted, but in latter years larger areas have been laid out with oak. The remaining old oaks in the Silkeborg forests cannot be regarded as typical of the original oak forest; they have been left because of their bad form or inaccessibility. Although the wood is injured by frost cracks, and the young leaves by late frosts, Q. sessiliflora is better adapted for the locality than the other species. — Ernst Gram. 169. Howard, S. H. Poisoning Bauhinia vahlii. Indian Forester 46:562-572. 1920.— A number of poisons variously applied were tried to develop an effective method of killing climbers. The results were rather inconclusive. However, one application of mercuric chloride or sodium arsenite to the cut and split ends sufficed to kill the climbers. Root sprouting does not seem to be prevented. — E. N. Munns. 22 FORESTRY . |BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 170. Johnson, F. R. Forests in the sand hills. Amer. Forestry 26: 582-584. 4 fig. 1920. — One of the first forest plantations in western Nebraska was established in 1891. Jack, Scotch and yellow pine were used, with good results. In 1903 a plantation was estab- lished with jack pine seedlings from the forests of Minnesota. These trees are now 20-25 feet in height and forest conditions prevail. Nurseries with a large annual output have been established. Western yellow pine (Pinus ponderosa) and jack pine {Pinus divaricata) are best adapted to this region. Three-year old transplants are used and planted in furrows. Method of planting and special tools used including the "trencher," are discussed. Fire protection has been very effective, fire lines a rod wide dividing the plantations into units of about 160 acres. — Chas. H. Otis. 171. JuDD, C. S. The first algaroba tree in Hawaii. Amer. Forestry 26: 605-606. 2 fig. 1920. — The characteristics and uses of Prosopis juliflora DC. are discussed. — Chas. H. Otis. 172. Kratjch, Hermann. The use of stand graphs in determining the limitation of cut. Jour. Forestry 18:719-722. 1 fig. 1920. — To properly mark a stand for cutting rate of growth and volume on the ground should be known, but unless the marker keeps a record of the cut and what remains, there is no way to determine the amount left on the ground. A method of determining the safe diameter limit and how much remains on the ground is described. Charts show the per cent of trees of each diameter class on a sample plot and the per cent of the volume in each of these classes for each species. When the final stand is decided upon, by using these percentages, the volume to be cut may be arrived at by cutting each species to a diameter limit. — E. N. Munns. 173. Lagerberg, Torsten. Snobrot't och topprota has granen. [Snow breakage and top rot in spruce.] Meddel. Statens Skogsforsoksanst. 16: 115-162. Fig. 1-11. 1919.— Working plans are often seriously disrupted by snow damage. The calculated annual yield may be greatly increased by the salvaging of fallen or badly injured trees. Even uninjured trees must sometimes be cut in order to save them from windfall or drought. Until recently it has been a difficult problem to decide what character and degree of damage is permissible in trees which are left. The present investigation shows that broken stems are almost invari- ably attacked by rot, and therefore should be removed from the stand. The rot progresses more rapidly in rapidly growing than in slow growing trees. Callus and exudations from the wound may delay and in rare cases prevent infection. — G. A. Pearson. 174. Lane-Poole, C. E. Report of the Forests Department for the year ended 30th June, 1920. Ann. Progress Rept. Forests Dept. Western Australia. 30 p. Perth, 1920.— The work of the Department for the fiscal period is briefly summarized under the following captions: "Classification of forests, reservations, forest work, forest ranging and timber inspection, plantations and nursery work, timber industry, kiln drying, firewood, mining timber, revenue and expenditure, botanical, entomological, tan barks, commonwealth forest products lab- oratory, sandalwood, kingia grass tree fiber industry, regulations, interstate forestry confer- ence, publicity and staff." The total area classified to date amounts to 3,550,000 acres. A start was made in the preparation of two preliminary working plans. Western Australia is awakening to the possibilities of kiln drying. The overcutting of the sandalwood supplies of the State is causing considerable concern. The organization of the Department was delayed through the impossibility of obtaining the necessary staff. The report is appended by detailed statements of revenue and expenditure; production of mill timber and lists of con- cessions; leases; sawmill, hewing, firewood, sawmilling, and miscellaneous permits; herbarium specimens collected and identified; trees grown and planted at the Hamel State Nursery; forest insects in the departmental collection; and particulars of prosecutions during the year. • — C. F. Korstian. 175. Leavitt, Clyde. The British Empire forestry conference, 1920. Jour. Forestry 18: 669-675. 1920.— Foresters, from twenty-three countries in the British Empire met in July, 1920 and decided upon a definite plan of action. Some of the more important measures to be No. 1, May, 1921] FORESTRY 23 put into effect in each of the countries are: (1) The adoption of a forest policy enforced by- foresters; (2) a survey of the resources of which there is no definite knowledge at present; (3) the development of a personnel to handle forestry matters under constitutional authority; (4) organization of forest industries; (5) education and publicity; (6) distribution of free plants for tree planting; (7) development of forest research by the states; (8) the establish- ment of a forestry bureau. — E. N. Muntis. 17G. Lee, Yix KuxG. [A comparative study of Chinese and Japanese forestry.] Khu-Shou [Science-Publ. Chinese Sci. Soc] 5: S32-S41. 1920. — The author presents a comparison of the present state of forestry in China and Japan, and discusses fully forestry administration and management in the two countries. — Chunjen C. Chen. 177. Maas, J. G. J. A. Een duffelmes voor het maken van Hevea plakoculaties. [A double knife for making patch buddings on Hevea.] Mededeel. Alg. Proefsta. A. V. R. O. S. [Medan, Sumatra] Rubberserie 23. 1919. — A reprint from Arch. Rubbercult. 3: Alg. Gedeelte 73-75. 1919— Carl D. La Rue. 178. Maas, J. G. J. A. A. Gewijzigde methode voor veldproeven bij Hevea. B. Nog eenige keimproeven met Hevea zood. [A. Other methods for field experiments with Hevea. B. Further germination trials with Hevea seed.] Mededeel. Alg. Proefsta. A. V. R. O. S. [Medan, Sumatra] Rubberserie 19. 1919. — A reprint from Arch. Rubbercult. 3:233-245. 1919— Carl D. La Rue. 179. Maas, J. G. J. A. Vegetatieve voortplanting von Hevea brasiliensis. [Vegetative reproduction in Hevea brasiliensis.] Mededeel. Alg. Proefsta. A. V. R. O. S. [Medan, Sumatra] Rubberserie 20. 1919.— A reprint from Arch. Rubbercult. 3 : 280-312. 1919.— CarZ D. La Rue. 180. Mackay, H. Forestry in Victoria. Australian Forest. Jour. 3:212-215, 246-248. 1920. — The present are the fourth and fifth (concluding) installments of this paper. Conif- erous plantations in southeastern Australia are considered with special reference to the relative merits of different species. Pinus radiata, Pinus laricio, Pseudotsuga taxifolia, Picea sitchensis, and Pinus ponderosa are discussed quite extensively. Mention is made of the climatic effect of tree denudation and the establishment of a forest school at Creswick. —See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1038; 7, Entry 133.— C. F. Korstian. 181. Mayes, W. Progress report on forest administration in the Punjab for 1918-19. 133 p., 1 map. Lahore, British India, 1919. — At the end of the 3'ear the forest areas in square miles were: Reserved, 1747; protected, 4169; unclassed, 767; leased, 361. Fire devastated 3.17 per cent of the total area. In the irrigated plantations 1575 acres were sown, bringing the total area to 6123 acres. The cut of timber during the year in cubic feet was 7,243,000, and of firewood 27,158,000. At the Jallo factory 28,778 Maunds (maund = 80 pounds) of resin were distilled as compared with 16,426 in the previous year. The surplus fell from 934,704 Rs. the previous year to 568,472 Rs., due largely to cancellation of war contracts. It is stated that the time has now come for developing the hill forests by intensive management and working to the utmost capacity the irrigated plantations in the plains. Further postponement of this development is no longer desirable. At present the greatest needs of the department are an increased staff and an extended use of mechanical appliances for extraction coupled with improved communications. Staff is needed especially for the revision of working plans, the application of specialized engineering methods, investigation and opening of new markets, development of new industries, and for research work in silviculture and forest economics. In Bashahr the produce of thinnings, formerly unsalable, is being profitably exported. In the Pabbi, natural reproduction of Prosopis glandulosa continues to be good, but other species were mostly killed by drought. Spruce timber suitable for airplane manufacture is not likely to be obtainable from Bashahr, as it is too knotty and the river Sutlej and its tributaries are so rough that the driving of long scantlings is difficult. Kulu is a promising source of supply, as the driving conditions there are much better. Experiments (as with ban 24 FORESTRY [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, oak in Kangra) have shown that Acacia modesta in Jhelum and Rawalpindi can be coppiced at any season of the year without trimming the stumps. In Lahore it is found that shisham seed collected from coppice is as good for cultural purposes as that from seedling trees. While difficult, an attempt will be made to control the shisham fungus by the use of watering trenches instead of flooding the whole area. Yield tables have been completed in Kulu during the year for deodar, blue pine, Chil, and fir. From ten years' observations and experiments it is concluded that the shelter-wood compartment system is the best method of insuring the regeneration of the coniferous forests of Kulu, and this system is therefore being adopted in the new working plan for the locality. European larch is doing well experi- mentally in Kulu. Various species of Eucalyptus in the Simla hills in experimental plantings still give no encouragement. The time seems at hand for appointing a Utilization Conser- vator (as in the United Provinces) for the Punjab to be the business head of the Department and control all its timber works, the sale of timber, the resin industry, and be in charge of the development of new markets and industries. The Government of India is considering co- operation of the Punjab with the North-West Frontier Province and Baluchistan with this idea in view, and also a plan of administrative reorganization. — E. R. Hodson. 182. Palmer, Andrew H. Economic results of deficient precipitation in California. Monthly Weather Rev. 48:586-589. 1920. — Because of markedly deficient precipitation in northern and central California during the past 4 rainy seasons serious loss resulted during the dry season of 1920. Streams reached the lowest stages on record. The Sacramento River at Sacramento fell below mean sea level, and the current of the stream was reversed. The saline waters of San Francisco Bay encroached upon rich agricultural lands of the delta region, reducing the vegetable crops, driving the dairy industry to other regions, and threat- ening irreparable damage to alluvial soils through the infiltration of salt water. The teredo, or "ship worm," a minute salt-water organism, did great damage to wooden struc- tures. The average yield per acre of many crops was reduced in 1920 because of defi- cient moisture. Rice growers felt the drought keenly, because of the large water require- ments of rice. Hydroelectric power shortage resulted in power restrictions and higher rates. Wells went dry because of the lowered level of ground water. Forest fires were more frequent and destructive than in past years, owing to the parched condition of the forests. — Author's abstract. 183. Pearson, R. S. The utilization of bamboo for the manufacture of paper pulp. Indian Forester 46: 547-561, 603-631. 2 pi. 1920.— The supply of pulp woods is getting lower throughout the world and the price and demand are rising. Paper companies are now turning to plants other than trees and the bamboo has been found to be suitable for ground and sulphite pulp. Data are given on the probable yields, costs of extraction, loca- tion of mills, etc., for the various localities in India where pulp material exists in sufficient quantity to warrant the establishment of pulp mills. — E. N. Munns. 184. Pemberton, C. C. Living stumps of trees. Amer. Forestry 26: 614^616. 6 fig. 1920. — There are instances of stumps of cut trees which do not die, and which retain their vitality to a surprising extent and apparently without the aid of foliage. It is concluded that the union or indirect grafting of roots of the cut stump with those of living trees standing adjacent accounts for the phenomenon. — Chas. H. Otis. 185. Perrot, Em. Notes biologiques sur las Acacias fournisseurs de gomme, dite ara- bique, au Soudan egyptien. [Biological notes on the Acacias producing gum arable in Egyptian Sudan.] Compt, Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 258-268. 1920.— The method of making the incision is described as is also the process of healing. The season for flowing is from May to October. — C. H. Farr. 186. Petrie, W. B. Effect of cultivation on tree growth. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 231. 1920. — A note on the increased growth of Agathis robusta and Grevillea robusta due to cultiva- tion.— C. F. Korstian. No. 1, May, 1921] FORESTRY 25 187. Petrini, SvEN. Nagra sympunkter pa variations — och korrelationsrakningar. [Notes regarding variation and correlation calculations.] Skogsvdrdsforeningens Tidskr. 17: 23Sx- 243x. 1919. — A reply to criticisms by L. Mattsson Marn of Petrini's investigations on the use of the "form-point" method in determining form-class and volume. — G. A. Pearson. 188. Petrini, Sven. Formhojdstillvaxten i tallbestand inom Vasterbottens Lan. [Incre- ment per cent of the form-height in pine stands in Sweden.] Meddel. Statens Skogsforsoksanst. 16: 184-187. Fig. 1. 1919. — Volume increment per cents are calculated from the basal area increment per cent and the "form-height" increment per cent. The latter term expresses the product of height and form factor. If tables of "form-height" increment per cent are available the increment per cent may be ascertained by merely measuring diameters. Jonson has prepared such tables for pine in middle Sweden. Petrini, following Jonson's procedure, has prepared similar tables for northern Sweden, where the pine has a different form. The method which is briefly described involves the measurement of heights and the determination of "mean form class" by means of the "form-point" and Jonson's function between "form- point" and "form-class." — G. A. Pearson. 189. Petrini, Sven. Om formpunctsbedomning. [The "form-point" as an expression of trunk-form.] Meddel. Statens Skogsforsoksanst. 16:164-183. Fig. 1-5. 1919.— The investigation aims to test the accuracy of Jonson's "form-point" method of estimating volume and taper when applied to different stands and individual trees, and also the varia- tions in results obtained by different persons. Estimates were made on 54 sample plots each having an area of 0.6 acre. On 10 of the plots the "form-point" was determined by 6 different persons. Estimates for single stands show an average deviation of ± 4 per cent of the height of the tree. The average personal error for a stand was 1.17 per cent. Estimates of individual trees by different persons varied as much as 10 per cent. The author concludes that the "form-points" of single trees can not be estimated with any great degree of accuracy, but that the average "form-point" of a stand can be satisfactorily determined. — G. A. Pearson. 190. PiNCHOT, G. Pennsylvania chestnut trees to be sold to save timber left by blight. Amer. Nut Jour. 12: 91. 1920. — For the last 15 years all efforts to control blight have failed. The removal of trees for use as timber is proposed. — E. L. Overholser, 191. Rao, B. I. Shama. Note on the artificial raising of bamboos in the Akola division of the Berar Circle, C. P. Indian Forester 46:518-525. 1 pi. 1920. — Bamboo has been suc- cessfully introduced by sowing and planting in the Central Provinces. Watering and cul- tivation are helpful to both seedlings and transplants, but the latter may succeed with little outside assistance if under a high cover as in the forest. Grazing and fire are destructive and must be prevented in areas recently planted. — E. N. Munns. 192. Richards, Edward C. M. Forest conditions and primitive forest practice in West Persia. Jour. Forestry 18:710-718. 1920. — Zoroastrianism, or fire worship, before the Moslem conquest of Persia is responsible for great ash heaps where the ancient Parsees kept the eternal fires of their shrines burning, and these ash heaps are probably the remains of the former forest. Though the people are dependent on the water supply to keep their lands productive, the lack of a forest cover in the mountains is not appreciated and crop failures and famines are frequent. Fuel woods are scarce and nearly all bushes and weeds are gath- ered for fire. In scattered places and at considerable distances from habitations, junipers, almonds, and haws M'ere found growing naturally without irrigation. Poplar is the chief tree and is kept trimmed down to a small top so that it forms a long slender pole. The wood is the chief supply of the country. Willows growing along water courses are used for fuel and water pipes. Pollarding and coppicing is the rule, cutting every three years. Other trees of value are the plane, elm and walnut. Persia is in great need of forestry but the political situation is such that it is as j'et far off. — E. N. Munns. 26 FORESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 193. Sabroe, Axel S. Flaadning i Siam och Japan. [Log driving in Siam and Japan.] Skogsv&rdsforeningens Tidskr. 17:281-304. Fig. 1-lS. 1919. 194. Salisbury, E. J. [Rev. of: Baker, R. T. The hardwoods of Australia and their economics, xvi -{■ 522 p., 134- colored pi., 192 fig. Dept. of Education: Sydney, 1919.] Sci. Prog. [London] 14: 689-691. 1920. 195. Salisbury, E. J. [Rev. of: Hickel, R. Graines et plantules des arbres et arbustes indigenes et communement cultives en France. (Seeds and seedlings of trees and shrubs indigenous and commonly cultivated in France.) Parti. Conifers. 182 p., 93 fig. Part II. Angiosperms. 3J^9 p., 2 pi., 85 fig. Published by the author: Versailles, 1911 and 1914; received 1919.] Sci. Prog. [London] 14: 691-692. 1920. 196. Sherrard, E. C, and G. W. Blanco. The preparation and analysis of cattle food, consisting of hydrolyzed sawdust. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 13:61-65. 1921. — Sawdust is hydrolyzed with 1.8 per cent sulphuric acid for 15 or 20 minutes under a steam pressure of 120 pounds. The resulting liquor is neutralized and evaporated under reduced pressure to the consistency of a thick syrup. The syrup is mixed with the sawdust residue and dried. — Henry Schmitz. 197. SiNTUREL, E. La foret de Fontainebleau de 1789 & 1794. [The forest of Fontaine- bleau from 1789 to 1794.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 218-226, 255-263, 281-288. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 708. 198. Sparhawk, W. N. Suggestions for rating risks in forest insurance. Jour. Forestry 18 : 701-709. 1920. — Fire insurance rates for forests should be determined along lines similar to those followed in other kinds of insurance, an outline of which is given. The damage by a forest fire depends on the area burned and the relation between values before and after the fire. Area depends on the number of fires, and the number of the contributing causes. The area burned per fire depends on climate and type as well as inflammability, as do also the values at stake and destroyed. A classification of forest risks is suggested based on cli- mate, on forest types, on age groups, on inflammability, and on occurrence. The loss costs may then be determined by a method similar to that employed in the ordinary form of insur- ance and it should take but a short time to determine these losses if all agencies cooperate for a few years. — E. N. Munns. 199. St ARTE, H. W. Anjan (Hardwickia binata) coppice. Indian Forester 46:641-647. 1920. — The best season for coppicing this species is between August and November, the worst from May to July. The height of the stump influences the reproductive power, 12 to 18 inches furnishing the strongest shoots and below 12 the weakest. — E. N. Munns. 200. Starts, H. W. Further experiments in Salai (Boswelia serrata) tapping in the Shirpur east range of N. Khandesh Division. Indian Forester 46 : 578-580. 1920. — Trees with green bark yield more gum-oleo-resin than dry-barked trees; those with short boles yield less than those with long boles; and hollow trees yield more "drip" than sound ones though the total yield is less. Heaviest yields were secured in the dry season and the best in the fourth month after tapping. — E. N. Munns. 201. SuDWORTH, Geo. B. Unique example of the propagation of sugar maple from a cutting. Amer. Forestry 26: 625. 2 fig. 1920. 202. Swain, E. H. F. The financing of forestry. Australian Forest. Jour. 3 : 279-283, 300-305. 1920. — A paper read at the Hobart Forestry Conference. The insolvency of forestry in Australia, the responsibilities of the Australian Forest Services, timber imports, the colos- sal post-war timber requirements, financial reform, proper selling methods, efficient forest organization including adequate finances, the subsidizing of forestry and the need for an effective timber tariff are treated, followed by a round-table discussion. — C. F. Korstian. No. 1, Mat, 1921] FORESTRY 27 203. Sylven, Helge. Skogsvardsforhallandena i Nordamerikas Forenta Stater och dess skogars framtid. [Forestry and the forest outlook in the United States of America.] Skogen 6: 257-271. Fig. 1-10. 1919. — The article gives a survey of the country's original and pres- ent timber resources; it rehearses the well known story of forest devastation which has led to the present agitation for a national forest policy. The provisions of the policy proposed by the U. S. Forest Service are outlined. Considerable "space is given to the organization of the Forest Service. The author welcomes the entrance of the U. S. A. into the field of for- estry as an important step toward the welfare, not only of the country itself but of the entire world. Expression is given to the idea that the forest question before the industrial world is no longer one of commercial competition, but how best to meet the problems of production, distribution, and utilization with a view toward supplying the needs of all countries. It is prophesied that the United States will rapidly take a place among European nations in the practise of forestry once the control of forest affairs is placed in the hands of the American foresters, to whose ability and enthusiasm he pays a high tribute. — G. A. Pearson. 204. TouMET, J. W. Reshaping our forest policy. Sci. Monthly 12: 18-35. 1921.— The failure of the U. S. A. to retain control of the forests and the consequent exploitation by pri- vate owners without reference to continuation of the forest has resulted in an acute situa- tion. The lumberman and paper manufacturer, as well as the forester, are beginning to realize the necessity of a change, especially in view of the increasing prices of forest products. — Three leading policies are now before the country : (a) The program of the Committee of the Society of American Foresters; (b) the program of the American Paper and Pulp Association and various lumber interests; (c) the program of Colonel H. S. Graves, former Chief of the United States Forest Service. These do not differ in desired results, but in methods of attain- ing them. The first proposes that laws be enacted by Congress imposing severe penalties on private owners who do not organize their property and practise forest renewal. The second insists that through co-operation and financial support the nation and the states make sus- tained yield on privately owned forests attainable without loss to the owner. The last urges that the state enforce mandatory regulations and provide adequate assistance in co-opera- tion with the National Government to make forest renewal certain. Under this plan federal legislation would control extension of national forests, co-operate with the states in forest protection and silviculture and have control over such questions as forest taxation and insurance, loans on growing timber, land classification, forest surveys. State legislatures would enact laws holding private owners responsible in case of forest devastation. This plan would necessitate effective measures for organization, police regulations for fire control, effec- tive disposal of slash in all cutting operations, establishing cutting methods suited to each forest type, etc. — L. Pace. 205. Turner, E. P. Report of forestry department of New Zealand for year ending March 31, 1920. S6 p. Wellington, New Zealand, 1920. — An annual report covering all forest operations. During the last session of the General Assembly the State Forests Act of 1908 was amended to provide for the proclamation of national-endowment lands as provisional state forests. 3,311,000 acres of Crown lands and 56,066 acres of national-endowment lands were proclaimed provisional State forests during the year under recent legislative enact- ments. While largely forest of a protective character, a considerable area carries forest of present value for milling. The use of firewood for domestic purposes requires encouragement in every reasonable way. Coal is increasing in value and its use should be confined to those purposes for which firewood is not a satisfactory substitute. Approximately 11,724,000 trees were raised in the four State nurseries the past year : 3,710,900 were sent to various planta- tions and 277,235 to farmers and local bodies. A valuable and exhaustive report by Sir D. E. HuTCHiNS on the forests of the North was published during the year. — E. R. Hodson. 206. WiMBUSH, A. Prolific growth of root-suckers in Dalbergia latifolia. Indian Forester 46: 573. 1 pi. 1920.— Roots cut off at a depth of four feet send up strong shoots from that portion not connected with the parent tree. — E. N. Munns. 28 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 207. ZoN, Raphael. The outlook for extending American lumber trade in Italy. Jour. Forestry 18:723-730. 1920. — Prior to the European war, the Italian forests were being greatly overcut in spite of heavy importation from other countries. During the war, the home forests were badly depleted and injured by indiscriminate and heavy cutting. Italj' now finds herself with new provinces with new sources of wood supply; but with the need of recuperation in her own forest area and the increased demand, Italy will need much addi- tional lumber. The price of lumber in America and the prevailing exchange rates prevent this country from furnishing much of a supply; but the new countries around the Mediterranean should be able to supply much of the demand. — E. N. Munns. GENETICS G. H. Shull, Editor J. P. Kelly, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 29, 47, 53, 74, 371, 375, 383, 506) 208. Almquist, Ernst. Studien iiber Capsella bursa-pastoris (L.). II. [Studies on Capsella bursa-pastoris L. II.] Acta Horti Bergiani 7: 41-95. 16 fig. 1921. — Describes 200 species of Capsella bursa-pastoris based on the constancy of differentiating features when grown for two or three generations in the experimental garden. Unlike the author's earlier study in this genus, in which the classification was based chiefly on foliage characters, the forms described in the present paper are distinguished chiefly on the basis of form and size of capsules. The author notes that some natural crossing occurs, and promises a further con- tribution dealing with crossing and mutation in this genus. He groups the species into twelve classes, named as follows: (1) Concaviformes, (2) Scolioticae, (3) Ruhelliformes, (4) Corculatae, (5) Cordatae, (6) Otites, (7) Cuneolatae, (8) Triangulares, (9) Heterocarpae, (10) Lanceolatae, (11) Convezae, (12) Hiantes; but these groups are not described and the figures do not allow a clear conception of their differentiating features. Capsella apeiala Opitz, C. integrifolia Retzius, and C. pinnatifida Schlechtendal are found to occur associated with very diverse characters belonging in different groups. These are therefore not species nor constant varie- ties but mixtures of forms having different natural affinities. — Geo. H. Shull. 209. Alverdes, Friedrich. Rassenstudien an Fischen aus dem Carlsberg-Laboratorium in Kopenhagen. [Racial studies on fish from the Carlsberg Laboratory in Copenhagen.] Zeit- schr. Indukt. Abstamm.- u. Vererb. 24: 167-169. 1920. 210. Alverdes, Friedrich. Die Vererbung von Abnormitaten bei Cyclops. [The inherit- ance of abnormalities in Cyclops.] Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm.- u. Vererb. 24: 211-278. 1920. 211. Ancel, p. Sur I'hermaphrodisme glandulaire. [On glandular hermaphroditism.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. Paris 83: 1642-1644. 1920. 212. Anonymous. Families of the first born. Jour. Heredity 10: 160. 1919. — Notice of article by Carl E. Jones in Quarterly Publication of American Statistical Association for December, 1918. — Howard J. Banker. 213. Anonymous. Genetical Society's visit to Reading. Gard. Chron. 68:42. 1920. — Brief account of a visit of the Society to breeding and testing grounds of Sutton & Sons, Reading, England. Mention is made of crosses in dwarf beans, brassicas, marrows, sweet peas, sun flowers, etc., and this firm is stated to have one of the largest botanical collections of peas in existence. — J. M. Shull. 214. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Bateson, W. Genetic segregation. Proc. Roy. Soc. Lon- don B, 91: 358-368. 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 226.)] Nature 105: 531. 1920. No. 1, May, 1921] GENETICS 29 215. Anonymoits. The inheritance of blindness. [Rev. of: Best, Harky. The blind: their condition and the work being done for them in the United States. 20 X 15 cm., xxi + 763 p. Macmillan Co.: New York, 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 231.)] Jour. Heredity 10: 211. 1919. 216. Anonymous. The genetics of the Bonavist bean. [Rev. of: Harland, S. C. Inher- itance in Dolichos lablab, L. Part 1. Jour. Genetics 10: 219-226. 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1762.)] Gard. Chron. 69: 25. 1921. 217. Anonymous. Rust resistance in wheat. [Rev. of: Hayes, H. K., John H. Parker, AND Carl Kurtzweil. Genetics of rust resistance in crosses of varieties of Triticum vulgare with varieties of T. durum and T. dicoccum. Jour. Agric. Res. 19:523-542. 6 pi. 1920.] Gard. Chron. 68: 295. 1920. 218. Anonymous. The vehicles of hereditary qualities. [Rev. of: Morgan, T. H. The physical basis of heredity. 14 X 21 cm., 305 p., 117 fig. J. B. Lippincott Co.: Philadelphia and London, 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 422.)] Nature 106: 103-105. 1920. 219. Anthony, R. La pseudo-hermaphrodisme tubaire chez les Cetaces males. [Pseudo- hermaphroditism in the male Cetaceans.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sol. Paris 171:1398-1399. 1920. 220. Arps, George F. Polydactylism and the phenomenon of regeneration. Jour. Amer. Med. Assoc. 74: 873-874. 1920. — Polydactylism is not uncommon in man and has been known since antiquity. In some places as at Eycaux, France, the trait has come to prevail in a com- munity. In the present instance an Alabama negro soldier, 21 years old, was observed to have an extra finger on the ulnar margin of each hand. The subject, whose mental age is given as 10.3 years, reported that his father, brother, 5 sisters and 2 nieces all showed the same trait. He also affirmed that his father had the supernumerary digits removed, since which time it has "been necessary to trim them off, as they grow continuously." This (unverified) statement is advanced as evidence of regeneration. — C. H. Danforih. 221. Bally, Walter. Die Godronschen-Bastarde zwischen Aegilops- und Triticum- arten. Vererbung und Zytologie. [The Godronian hybrids between species of Aegilops and Triticum. Heredity and cytology.] Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm.- u. Vererb. 20: 177-240. 4 fig. 1919. — In 1854 Godron in Montpellier reported on the Fi of a hybrid, Aegilops ovata X Triticum vulgare. Later he reported that he had secured from a back-cross with wheat — the pollen parent of the hybrid — a fertile hybrid that remained constant and bred true in subse- quent generations. This he called Aegilops speltaeformis. The author (Bally) pollinated 250 A. ovata flowers with Triticum vulgare pollen, and secured two Fi hybrid plants. From 80 recip- rocal pollinations he secured three Fi hybrid plants. These hybrids are figured and described, the two lots of Fi plants being similar. The pollen of the Fi plants was sterile, being devoid of starch and otherwise not normally developed. Both wheat and Aegilops pollen also failed to fertilize the flowers of the Fi plants. The cytological study revealed that T. vulgare has 8, A. ovata 16, haploid chromosomes. The number of haploid chromosomes in the Fi hybrid of these can sometimes be determined as 12. When more than 12 appear this excess number can be explained as arising through somatic divisions of excess chromosomes of the Aegilops parent remaining unpaired in the diakinesis. The difference in form of the plump Triticum and the slender Aegilops chromosomes is again apparent in the reduction division of the hybrid. In the mitotic division single chromosomes arising from wheat can be recognized, and it can be shown that these in the course of meiosis can cause irregularities, and that single cells are separated which have the chromatin in their nuclei made up exclusively from that of a single parent. Another species of Aegilops, probably ventricosa (earlier thought to be speltaeformis) had 6 haploid chromosomes. — C. E. Leighty. 30 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 222. Bannier, J. P. [Dutch rev. of: Hagem, Oscar. Einige F2 und F3 Generationen bei dem Bastard Medicago sativa X M. falcata. (Some F2 and F3 generations of the hybrid Medicago sativa X M. falcata.) Nyt Mag. Naturvidenskab. 56: 149-165. 1919.] Genetica 2: 535-536. 1920. 223. Bannier, J. P. [Dutch rev. of: (1) Yampolsky, Cecil. Inheritance of sex in Mer- curialis annua. Amer. Jour. Bot. 6:410-442. PI. 37-40, 1 fig. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 827.) (2). Idem. The occurrence and inheritance of sex intergradation in plants. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7:21-38. 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 502.) (3). Idem. Sex inter- gradation in the flowers of Mercurialis annua. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7 : 95-100. 1 pi. 1920. (4). Idem. Further observations on sex in Mercurialis annua. Amer. Nat. 54: 280-284. 1 fig. 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 750.)] Genetica 2 : 554-556. 1920. 224. Banta, Arthur M. Selection in Cladocera. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20: 212. 1921. — Some years ago the writer undertook experiments in selection in parthenogenetic pure lines of Cladocera on the basis of a purely physiological character, reactiveness to light. Sixteen lines were subjected to selection for various periods extending over from 18 to 196 generations. In 7 of these lines no difference appeared in reactiveness between the 2 strains of the same line. In 2 lines slight divergences in reactiveness were in the reverse of selection. These divergences, while not large, were fairly consistent. In 1 of these cases the divergence decreased as the experiment progressed. In 5 lines there was a possible effect of selection but the evidence is not considered conclusive. In 2 lines an effect of selection is rather clearly indicated. In 1 of these the divergence was not large and this case may be disregarded. But in the other the effect of selection is very large and is clearly substantiated. The diver- gence in this line appeared slowly and increased gradually until during the last months of the experiment the reaction time of the low strain was less than a third that of the high strain. The difference in reactiveness to light was permanent or at any rate persisted for 32 months (112 generations) after selection was discontinued. Return selection was not attempted. — A 2nd series of selection experiments based on an entirely different character is now under way. The character used is the degree of intergradedness of sex intergrade strains of Daphnia longispina. Derived from a common progenitor and reproducing solely by parthenogenesis this would seem a most excellent material for a study of selection. Three strains were selected as high strains and 3 as low strains, the high and low strains being taken alternately from the 6 available sister strains. Selection was effective in each case, the individuals of the high strains becoming as high (i.e., as male) as they could be maintained with fair repro- ductive ability; and the low strains approaching very nearly the condition in which sex inter- gradedness is not apparent, i.e., most of the individuals showed no sex intergrade characters and the few intergrades were slightly affected. While the facts are as stated, environmental or other factors are influential to such an extent that the curves for the different strains fluc- tuate somewhat. Further, selection is not effective with equal promptness in every strain though in all cases it has ultimately been effective. Return selection is also effective. Through selection low strains have been derived from the selected high strains, and high strains from the selected low strains. Two strains have in turn been selected low strains, selected high strains, and selected low strains again. — Thus selection and return selection are equally effective with the amount or degree of sex intergradedness in Daphnia longispina. — Arthur M, Banta. 225. Bartsch, p. Experiments in the breeding of Cerions. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 282. 65 p., 59 pi. Washington, 1920. — These land shells are extremely non-roving and are well adapted to breeding experiments in which isolation in different regions is a feature. Author planted four Cerion species from the Bahamas on the Florida keys. From . several of the many colonies (usually containing 500 to several thousand marked shells) numerous first generation Florida-grown offspring have been obtained. In several cases lots of first generation offspring were transplanted and known second generation Florida- grown offspring secured. Differences in internal structural features in the different species No. 1, May, 1921] GENETICS 31 are pointed out and figured, but the characters utilized in comparing Florida-grown offspring with Bahama ancestry are shell characters. Differences in general coloration, mottling, and ridging of the shells are mentioned. The characters used as standards of comparison are numerical characters, numbers of whorls, altitude, and greatest diameter of the shell. A check series (100) of each of the species transplanted, and all the measured first and second generation Florida-grown offspring, are figured in plates and the individual measurements are all given in tables. — While in most of the series of first and second generation Florida-grown material one notes that the mean altitude is greater and the mean greatest diameter is less than in the original Bahama material, no great changes are seen in the means or in the ranges of variation of the characters studied. No biometrical treatment of data has been employed. The author concludes that the different species of Cerions seem to be quite stable within their normal limits of variation and appear to adhere to these limits even when subjected to a decidedly changed environment. — Hybrids were obtained between transplanted Bahama Cerion viaregis and the native Florida-key Cerion incanum . In shell measurements the author finds the hybrids intermediate and somewhat more variable than the parent species. In coloration, character of ridging, and general shape of shell the hybrids are extremely variable. Some are so mottled as ver\' strongly to resemble the mottled Cerion martensi group; in gen- eral character of ribbing the range was from the relatively smooth Cerion incanum to the rough Cerion viaregis; the range in general form was likewise from the somewhat cylindrical Cerion incanum to the more conical Cerion viaregis. What is of even greater interest, these variations are independently combined in the hybrid offspring. Attention is called to cases in which species in a certain region are sometimes found to be extremely variable. "Prior to this year I was more and more inclined to the belief that we might possibly find that these very abundant and variable forms might represent new ingressions into a faunal area in which conditions for their existence were optimum to an unusual degree, where the normal death rate, due possibly to an absence of natural enemies, might be reduced, and where all the factors involved were inclined to favor the new arrival to the utmost, and that these factors and the necessarily reduced inbreeding might be responsible for the loosening of spe- cific bounds and the producing of variants which, in the course of time, might result in a state of flux. — "Our Cerion experiments on Newfound Harbor Key, however, throw a new light upon the case, for here we have produced a state of flux by cross-breeding. There is no question that if we did not know the true inwardness of the Cerion complex as it exists at the present time in our colony upon this key, we would treat the material as we have treated such assemblages in the past; that is, as a very variable species. It therefore seems proper to assume that the converse should receive an equally favorable consideration, for it seems fair to believe that further breeding experiments will prove that such complexes are the product of cross-breeding. — A. M. Banta. 226. Bateson, W. Genetic segregation. Proc. Roy. Soc. London B, 91 : 358-368. 1920.— Segregation is a phenomenon which is not limited to particular classes or kinds of characters. The factors governing segregation of quantitative characters either do not segregate cleanly or the numbers involved are so large that their effects are not clearly shown. In many crosses involving quantitative characters, v/hich appear to segregate cleanly, one or the other original type fails to reappear in its entirety. The author favors the first explanation sug- gested. Factor groups or complexes may sometimes segregate as units, sex determination and irregularities of inheritance in Oenothera are mentioned as being due to such a phe- nomenon. In other cases these complexes may break up and are then responsible for the appearance of mosaics of secondary sexual characters in fowls and different classes of color mosaics in the snapdragon and sweet pea. Linkage between factors conditioning the several character components of the mosaics is seldom evidenced and the question is raised if they are all distributed among different chromosomes. The author protests the general applica- tion of Morgan's theor}^ regarding crossing over and the limitation of linkage groups on the ground that it has been proven for only one case — Drosophila. The theory of linkage and crossing over has assumed much regarding the physical behavior of the chromosomes that cytology cannot substantiate. In plants the time of segregation is not limited to the reduc- 32 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, tion division as seems to be the case with animals. Cases are cited where the genetic con- stitutions of male and female cells of plants are so diverse that it cannot be accounted for by- segregation during the reduction division. Cases of linkage values different for the male and female sex cells of the same plant are cited as exceptions to the ordinary mode of segregation. Evidence that somatic segregation may influence genetic potentialities is furnished by sev- eral citations in Avhich root cuttings produce plants differing in some characters from the parent plant and from experiments upon rogues in peas. The author is led to believe that segregation of hereditary genes may occur at any division in the life cycle. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 214.]— J. L. Collins. 227. Benders. [Dutch rev. of: Fleischer, Bruno, und William Josenhans. Ein Beitrag zur Frage der Vererbung der familiaren Sehnervenatrophie (Leberscher Krankheit). (Inheritance of familial atrophy of the optic nerve (Leber's disease).) Arch. Rass.- u. Gesell- schaftsbiol. 13: 129-158. 5 pi. 1920.] Genetica 2: 532. 1920. 228. Benders. [Dutch rev. of: Gross, K. Uber Vererbung von Augen- und Haarfarbe und den Zusammenhang beider. (On inheritance of eye and hair color and the correlation between them.) Arch. Rass.- u. Gesellschaftsbiol. 13: 164-170. 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 266.)] Genetica 2: 534-535. 1920. 229. Blaringhem, L. Stabilite et fertilite de I'bybride Geum urbanum L. X G. rivale L. [Stability and fertility of the hybrid Geum urbanum L. X G. rivale L.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1284-1286. 1920. — Author pollinated Geu7n urbanum with pollen of G. rivale, securing an Fi generation of 3 uniform plants. These gave seed for an F2 generation of over 100 plants, 41 of which were used as basis of author's account. He described F2 group as uniform and lacking Mendelian segregation and considers this crossing as exemplifying his "heredite mixte" (see Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 523). There was an average of about 25 per cent of imperfect pollen grains in F2. Author considers this hybrid type as similar to Geum intermedium of taxonomists. — James P. Kelly. 230. Bliss, A. J. Mendelian characters in bearded Irises. Jour. Roy. Hort. Soc. 45: 289-292. 1919. — A record of several varieties of bearded Iris including combinations of variegata and neglecta types that tend to show that pigmented leaf base and brown-tipped beard are Mendelian in character, possibly single unit characters. Bliss finds, however, no apparent connection between these characters and color or type of flower. A cross of varie- gata by amoena gave no squalens colors and "it almost looks as if amoena and variegata were allelomorphic color varieties." — /. Marion Shull. 231. Bonne VIE. Arvelighetsundersokelser i en norsk bygdeslaegt (Polydaktyli Tvilling- fodsler). [Investigations of inheritance in a Norwegian family pedigree (Polydactyly, birth of twins).] Videnskabsselskab. Kristiania Forhandl. (1918). 1919. — A considerable num- ber of individuals in southeastern Norway have six fingers on one or both hands, and often six toes on one or both feet. Sixth finger is on side of little finger. It appears to be a domi- nant character through successive generations. All go back to one man from Ringebu in Gudbrandsdal in middle of seventeenth century. Twins and triplets were numerous. Twin mothers in all cases known have both parents from lines of twin-producing families, that is, character appears to be recessive. — A. Gundersen. 232. Bonnier, Gaston. Sur les changements, obtenues experimentalement, dans les forms vegetales. [On the alterations obtained experimentally in the form of plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 135&-13o9. 1920. — Observations on seventeen lowland species transplanted in same soil to high stations in the Alps and Pyrenees, which have come to resemble after period of 30 to 35 years typical alpine species of same genera. Particulars are given in each case. Author discusses briefly taxonomic problems raised by these results. He holds that facts favor Lamarckian hypothesis that environmental change is one of prin- cipal causes of transformation of organisms. — R. E. Clausen. No. 1, May, 1921] GENETICS 33 233. Brainerd, Ezra, and A. K. Peitersen. Blackberries of New England. Their classification. Vermont Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 217. 84 p., 36 pi. 1920. — A comprehensive report on the classification of the blackberries in which the authors conclude "that it is no longer a question of whether or not new species of blackberries are produced in the wild through natural hybridization but rather that it is a question whether hybridization is not the primary or only factor in the production of new species within this group." A more detailed discussion of the subject of spontaneous hybridization is to be published later but some of the more important facts are enumerated which have led to the conclusion that inter- crossing of different species of blackberries is of common occurrence in the wild: 1. All New England forms show more or less infertility, none having been found 100 per cent fertile, while many almost sterile forms have been grown. This infertility is due largely to the impotence of the pollen. — 2. Intermediate forms between all of the well recognized species exist in the wild. — 3. Wherever an intermediate between any two forms of blackberries is found the two suspected parents usually can be located. — 4. Plants of the blackberry sub-genus are very variable. — 5. Seeds from selfcd flowers of a number of suspected hybrids have been grown and these plants, in the majority of cases, show a reversion to the suppressed parent types. — 6. A number of artificial crosses have been effected between different species. The plants from these crosses are almost identical with the suspected wild hybrids. — 7. In more than 30 different combinations of New England blackberries that were cross-pollinated, not one failed to produce viable seed. — The authors point out that most of the characters which distinguish the different species of blackberries are quantitative, and the hybrids, therefore, nearly always show an intermediacy in the characters which are present in varying degrees in the parents. The offspring of such hybrids do not show segregation into dominants and recessives in the ordinary Mendelian ratios but all grades of intermediates are found. In some cases (R. permixtus, R. frondisentis, and R. abbrevians Blanchard) these hybrids appear to be more or less fixed. — J. H. Kempton. 234. Brierly, W. B. Experimental studies in the specific value of morphological char- acters in the fungi. Proc. Linnean Soc. London 1918: 55-56. 1918. — Pedigree cultures were made from single spores of Botrytis. The spore mode of a given culture from cabbage was found to be different when the organism was grown on tomato, and gave other modes for other substrata. A culture derived from onions when grown on cabbage differed in mode from that originating from cabbage. He concludes that the fungus consists of many ele- mentary species or Jordanons which are morphologically distinct. He recognizes a "normal variation," present upon whatever host and characteristic of the elementary species, and a "modal" variation induced by the substratum. In nature the elementary species are usually on special hosts but saprophytically are of broad range. To determine an elementary species it is therefore necessary to isolate it and determine its "modal variation" on a series of standard media. Similar res.ults and conclusions were had with PenicilUum and Stysanus. — F. L. Stevens. 235. Broman, Ivar. Das sogenannte biogenetische Grundgesetz und die moderne Erblichkeitslehre. [The so-called biogenetic law and modern genetics.] Bergmann: Munchen and Wiesbaden, 1920. 236. Buxton, L. H. Dttdley. The inhabitants of the eastern Mediterranean. Biometrika 13 : 92-112. 1 pi. 1920. — The author deals with physical anthropology of ancient and modern Greeks, examining cephalic index, glabello-occipital length, greatest head breadth, upper facial index, nasal index, stature, and pigmentation. Significant difference in cephalic index between Lycian Greeks (80.27 ± 0.35) and those of Meligala in Messenia (82.49 ± 0.38), and of Cyprus (82.54 ±0.11) are found; also between Cretans (79.26 ±0.16) and Cypriots. High standard deviations indicate mixed population. Variability of Cretans dates from Middle Minoan times. Endogamous Lycian gypsies show standard deviation of cephalic index of only 2.83 ± 0.19. There is no significant difference in coefficients of variation of head length and head breadth for the same group. For different districts head breadth is stable in Cyprus^ BOTANICAL ABSTBAfTS, VOL. VIII, NO. 1 34 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, while head length is stable in Crete. For Crete stature of living adult males is 170.61 ± 0.26 cm. (175.26 zb 0.54 cm. for Selinos and Sphakia only); for Cyprus it is 168.77 ±0.17 cm. Blue eyes are locally not uncommon, about 10 per cent in Albania and Cyprus, about 5 per cent in Crete. Pigmentation is apparently not definitely correlated with cephalic index. Lycian gypsies are only clear representatives of "Armenoid" race. Greeks are a mixture prob- ably of early date of Mediterranean and Alpine types. No good ground appears for inferring Nordic blood. — John Rice Miner. 237. Carle, E. Premiers travaux sur la selection des riz du laboratoire d'etude des cereales a Saigon. [First work in selection of rice at the Saigon laboratory for the study of cereals.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 1 : 74-87. 1919. — As preliminary work to the improve- ment of rice in Cochin-China, an agronomic study of 700-800 varieties of rice was made, resulting in the use of those varieties with more or less round kernels as better suited for the production of the finest rice. Selection from the second generation indicates a considerable improvement in the homogeneity of the grain; also a slight increase in the tillering capacity of the plants and in the weight of the grain. Certain strains also gave much greater yields than those used as checks, but in succeeding generations it was observed that this character was not constant. By comparing the yields of all strains in the preceding generations it seems possible in the third generation to classify those which appear most constant in heavy yield. In the fourth generation a certain number of choice strains can be isolated. — Chas. R. Cham- bliss. 238. Carle, E. Selection pedigree appliquee a la variete local de riz Phung-tien. [Pedi- gree selection applied to the local rice variety known as Phung-tien.] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 2: 26-32. 1920. — Pure line selections of rice variety Phung-tien made and tested at Experiment Station at Phu-my (Cochin-China). Five best lines selected from 100 grown during first year show greater uniformity and are otherwise superior to original variety. Data on number and weight of heads are presented. — C. E. Leighty. 239. Carle, E. Selection pedigree appliquee a la variete de riz "N^ng-Meo." [Pedi- gree selection applied to the variety of rice known as "Nang Meo."] Bull. Agric. Inst. Sci. Saigon 2:73-75. 1920. — Improvement of rice variety "Nang-Meo" by selection is being attempted at Experimental Station at Phu-my (Cochin-China), according to methods de- scribed earlier in this bulletin (Vol. 1, 1920). Data on number and weight of heads of 4 lines for 3 years are presented. Nursery yields indicate commercial value of strains. Homo- geneity of pure lines and characters differentiating them are noted. — C. E. Leighty. 240. Collins, E. J. The genetics of sex. Proc. Roy. Soc. London B, 91 : 369-370. 1920- — Vegetative cultures from the monoecious moss, Funariahygrometrica,mside by removing the greater part of an archegonium, regenerated the typical monoecious gametophyte, unlike the vegetative cultures derived from antheridia and surrounding "perigonial leaves" of the same species which produce male plants only. Up to the point of the formation of the female organ, the cells of the haploid gametophytic phase retain the power to produce monoecious plants, whereas the leaves surrounding the male organ have lost this power. — D. F. Jones. 241. Collins, Julius L. Inbreeding and cross breeding in Crepis capillaris (L.) Wallr. Univ. California Publ. Agric. Sci. 2: 205-216. PI. 39-41. 1920.— The naturally cross-ferti- lized wild plant, Crepis capillaris, when inbred, gives results similar to domesticated maize when so treated. The inbred plants compared with cross-bred ones show a slower rate of development during the entire period of growth. Some of the inbred strains exhibited partial pollen sterility. Complete absence of pollen was noted in one plant obtained from seed of wild plants growing in New Zealand. The maximum reduction appeared to be reached in the third and fourth generations. Inbred strains when crossed with non-inbred, produced vigorous, rapidly growing Fi plants. — D. F. Jones. No. 1, May, 1921] GENETICS • 35 242. CoRRENS, C. Die Konkurrenz der mannlichen und die weiblichen Keimzellen und das Zahlenverhaltnis der beiden Geschlechter. [The concurrence of male and female germ- cells and the numerical relations of the two sexes.] Naturwissenschaften 6: 277-280. 1918. — The dioecious plant, Melandrium, when pollinated with a small amount of pollen gave a ratio of 737 pistillate to 555 staminate plants, and when a large amount of pollen was applied gave a ratio of 895 pistillate to 381 staminate. In the first case there were 43 per cent and in the second 30 per cent of staminate plants, showing that when the competition is keen the stami- nate-determining pollen nuclei are at a greater disadvantage, due to a slower growth of the pollen tubes carrying them. When the pollen is not in excess the slower-growing tubes have a better opportunity to fertilize, but even in those cases the sex ratio is not equal, a larger number of pistillate plants always resulting. — D. F. Jones. 243. CoRRENS, C. Fortsetzung der Versuche zur experimentellen Verschiebung des Geschlechtsverhaltnisses. [Continuation of experiments to shift the sex-ratio experimentally.] Sitzungsber. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1: 1175-1200. S fig. 1918. — InMelandrium there are ordinarily more female plants than male. The object of these experiments was to find means to alter the sex-ratio and thereby discover its determining factors. The method employed was that of varying the amount of pollen used in pollinations. There are about 350 ovules in an average capsule. When the amount of pollen applied is only slightly in excess of this number the resulting progeny shows an approximate equality of sexes (about 44 per cent males), but when a large excess (60,000 grains) is applied the proportion of males falls to about 32 per cent. This difference is about 8 times the probable error. The inference made is that there are two kinds of pollen — male-determining and female-determining — and that the sec- ond sort produces more active pollen tubes, which reach the ovules in advance of those of the male-determining sort. If a minimal amount of pollen is employed the female-producing tubes arrive first at the upper ovules and fertilize them leaving the slower male-determining ones to the lower ovules. Separating the seeds in the capsule into a lower and an upper portion confirmed this hypothesis by showing an excess of female plants from the upper seeds. It was also shown that female plants mature more quickly than males so that the propor- tion of males the first season was slightly lower than among the plants which lived over the winter and flowered the next season. Some experiments were also made showing that there is a differential mortality among pollen grains dried over sulphuric acid for 10 to 14 days. The male-determining appear to be weaker. Some apparently good seeds are always found incapa- ble of further growth. Among seeds produced from old pollen this proportion is much larger, and in fact many of the embryos and ovules do not mature to the seed stage, dying at various stages. — Leonas L. Burlingame. 244. CoRRExs, C. Zur Kenntnis einfacher mendelnder Bastarde. I. Die Unterscheidung der pilulifera-Homozygoten und der Heterozygoten des Bastardes Urtica pilulifera X Dodartii. II. Mirabilis jalapa xantha und ihre Bastarde. III. Urtica urens peraurea. [A contribution to the knowledge of simple Mendelian hybrids. I. Distinguishing the homozygote from the het- erozygote of Urtica pilulifera X Dodartii. II. Mirabilis jalapa xantha and its hybrids. III. Urtica urens peraurea.] Sitzungsber. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1 : 221-268. 1918.— Although the adult pilulifera homozygote and the hybrid are indistinguishable, as are also the cotyledon stages of the seedlings, yet the young plants can be distinguished by the character of the apices of the first 3 or 4 pairs of leaves. The tips of these first leaves show dominance of the Dodartii parent but in the later leaves the pilulifera parent appears to be completely domi- nant. As an explanation it is suggested that the Dodartii factor D becomes active earlier in ontogeny than the factor P which pilulifera has in addition to D, that is, D expresses itself only until P becomes active. — The xantha form of Mirabilis jalapa has only about 5 per cent as much chlorophyll as the normal (typica) form. Chlorina has about 30 per cent and semi- chlorina about 60 per cent of tijpica. Variegata has ground color of chlorina with full green flecks superposed. Albomaculata has leaves with white and green streaks and flecks. The amount of pigments was determined by comparison of crude alcoholic extracts of the same leaf area in some cases and of the same weight of leaves in others. Chlorina and semichlorina 36 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, show a proportional reduction of both chlorophyll and the yellow pigments. Xantha shows a slight increase of yellow with a large decrease of the green. Xantha survives only when grafted on green plants, when it sets seed. Various crosses were made with typica, xantha, and chlorina. The results are explicable on the assumptions: (1) That xantha possesses the factors ZZ for yellow pigments, (2) that chlorina has the formula ZZCCnn, and (3) that typica is N NCCZZ, where N is operative only when C is present. Four green genotypes, phenotypically alike, were identified as follows: (1) A type which when selfed gives 3 green to 1 chlorina, (2) a type which jaelds 9 typica: 3 chlorina: 4 xantha, (3) a type producing 3 typica: 1 xantha, and (4) homozygous typica. Typica X chlorina heterozygotes are only about 90 per cent as green as typica but heterozygotes of typica or chlorina with xantha are indistin- guishable from the respective green homozygotes. Urtica urens peraurea is a yellow form which increases in green with age and is able to live independently. On account of its defi- ciency in chlorophyll it does not grow so rapidly nor to so great a size as the species. Selfing shows it to be a monohybrid which yields 2 greens to 1 peraurea. Satisfactory evidence has been secured to show that the 2:1 ratio arises through the failure of the yellow homozygote to live. A discussion is presented of the ratios to be expected in monohybrids when there is selective union of gametes, deficiency or excess of pollen, or inviable zygotic combinations. — Leonas L. Burliyigame. 245. Coulter, Merle C. Origin of mechanism of heredity. Bot. Gaz. 70: 459-464. 1920. — Author attempts to account for the evolutionary origin of the determiners (genes). He thinks they originated as by-products of metabolism. These by-products, he supposes, became isolated by anti-bodies and in later generations were released and induced the same kind of chemical changes as those of which they were the by-products. — Edgar Altenburg. 246. Crocker, Wm. Awn and barley yield. [Rev. of: Harlan, H. V., and S. Anthony. Development of barley kernels in normal and clipped spikes and the limitations of awnless and hooded varieties. Jour. Agric. Res. 19 : 431-472. 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1416.) ] Bot. Gaz. 71:77-78. 1921. 247. Daniel, Lucien. Obtention d'une race nouvelle d'Asphodele par I'action du climat marin. [The appearance of a new variety of Asphodelus through the eflfect of a marine climate.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1332-1333. 1920. — Asphodelus luteus originally obtained from Rennes has become remarkably modified after 20 years at Erquy. New form divided vegetatively and taken back to Rennes retained its acquired characters in full. Parallel sowings of seed of two forms reproduced differences exhibited by parents. Experiments are being continued. Author considers observations particularly significant for question of inheritance of acquired characters. — R. E. Clausen. 248. Dehorne, Armand. Spermatogenese de Corethra plumicornis et chromosomes eupyrenes. [Spermatogenesis of Corethra plumicornis and eupyrene chromosomes.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171 : 1399-1402. 1920. 249. Desmoulins, A., et V. Villard. The hybrid direct bearers in the valley of the Drome in 1919. Prog. Agric. et Vitic. (Ed. I'Est-Centre) 72: 62-65, 83-85, 114-116, 133-137. 1920. 250. Detlefsen, J. A. Genetic analysis of low crossover stock produced by selection. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20: 211. 1921. — Following selection for low crossover values in red- eyed long-winged females (Drosophila melanog aster) heterozygous in white miniature, a stock was produced which has given crossover values of about 4-6 per cent for these 2 genes. The normal value used in plotting chromosome maps is 33 per cent. Matings of red long females from low crossover stock to white miniature males of normal stock gave Fi females which show an intermediate value. When the Fi sibs were mated inter se, the total F2 results also showed an intermediate crossover value. However there was a distinct increase in the range of values. — Matings of red long males from low-crossover stock to eosin miniature females of normal stock gave similar results. — J. A. Detlefsen. No. 1, May, 1921] • GENETICS 37 251. East, E. M. The role of reproduction in evolution, Amer. Nat. 52 : 273-289. 1918. — The role of methods of reproduction in evolution may be interpreted by comparing their efifectiveness in offering selective agencies their raw material. Both asexual and sexual methods of reproduction occur in nearly all groups of animals and plants. In neither king- dom was sex developed as a more rapid means of multiplication; rather it fulfilled some other requirement. After origin of sex many changes in reproductive mechanisms occurred among plants, but almost all of them resulted in greater protection of the gametes, in increased assur- ance of fertilization, or in provision for better distribution, which may be interpreted as variations tending to perfect sexuality. Coincident with this, two important retrogressive developments occurred — apogamy and hermaphroditism — followed by evolution of methods of cross-fertilization, which seems to have been of immense advantage. — Essential evolu- tionary changes affecting reproduction in animals are strikingly similar to those in plants. Although asexual reproduction is found in most of the great groups of animals, it evidently did not meet all requirements since sexual reproduction is established in every phylum. Hermaphroditism is a secondary, not a primitive, phenomenon, and, as in plants, it was not found adequate. Further specialization resulted in mechanisms providing for mixtures of different germ-plasms. — Both animals and plants have adopted methods of reproduction which are identical in their essential features, something that can be said of no other life process. The significant feature is reduction of nuclear material in the gametes. This parallel evolution is of itself valid evidence of the importance of the process. For its interpretation compare sexual and asexual reproduction as an actual means for the transmission of char- acters. Extremely narrow variability of pedigreed inbred strains of Nicotiana and wheat indicate no higher heredity coefficient for sexual reproduction. Among animals it appears that the coefficient of heredity is as high for asexual as for sexual reproduction. But is this also true for germinal variation? It is believed the frequency of bud variations in higher plants propagated asexually shows that it is. — Even though there does not seem to be sufficient dif- ference between sexual and asexual reproduction as regards variation frequency to make it a subject of experimental proof, certain theoretical points raise suspicion that there is such a difference. Parthenogenetic individuals having the haploid number of chromosomes should show proportionately more germinal variations than members of the same species having the diploid number of chromosomes, because both recessive and dominant variations should be recognizable in the former. That bud variations occur more frequently in heterozygotes than homozygotes means simply that bud variations are detected more frequently in hetero- zygotes because the majority of bud variations are retrogressive and therefore show only when the organism is heterozygous for the character affected. — The idea of Matjpas, that continued asexual reproduction is impossible through some protoplasmic limitation, is rejected in favor of Weismann's conclusion, that a mixture of germ-plasms offers sufficient advantages to account for everything, which idea finds its main argument in Mendelian heredity. If N variations occur in the germ-plasm of an asexually reproducing organism only A^ types can be formed to offer raw material to selective agencies. But if A^ variations occur in the germ- plasm of a sexually reproducing organism 2" types can be formed. The advantage is almost incalculable. These advantages remain even though it should be shown later that the more fundamental and generalized characters of an organism are not distributed by Mendelian heredity. The majority of variations seem to be comparatively small, changes in detail, the very kind known to be Mendelian in their inheritance. The prime reason for the success of sexual reproduction is the opportunity it gives for mingling germ-plasms of different con- stitution and thereby furnishing many times the quantity of raw material to selective agencies that could possibly be produced through asexual reproduction. — Minor advantages accruing from asexual reproduction are, first, heterosis or hybrid vigor, which is best explained on the basis of linked dominant characters. Second, division of labor is made possible by secondary sexual characters in general, including those which separate the egg and the sperm. Finally, there is a presumable advantage in sex-linked characters, a mechanism contributing to the mixing of germ-plasms. — The essential feature of the role of reproduction in evolution is the persistence of mechanisms in both the plant and animal kingdoms which offer selective agen- cies the greatest amount of raw material. — E. B. Babcock. 38 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 252. Elderton, Ethel M. On the inheritance of the finger-print. Biometrika 13: 57-91. 1920. — Historical sketch of Galton's collection of finger-prints from 2300 persons and treat- ment of the material. The "natural order" of variation is discussed and the series "arch, small loop, large loop, composite, whorl" is provisionally adopted for the present investi- gation.— The data are first treated from the "Mendelian standpoint" and the results consid- ered "unsatisfactory." They are then discussed more at length from the "biometric stand- point," and 102 distribution tables, comprising various relationships from parents to cousins, are presented and correlations determined by the method of "mean square contingency." The conclusion is reached that "it is extremely probable that finger-prints are inherited at the same rate as other physical characters, but the type characteristic of any finger in the parent, while most likely to pass to the like finger in the offspring, may easily pass to the homo- logous finger of the other hand or indeed to any other finger whatever, of the offspring." Inexplicably low values are obtained for the resemblance in finger-prints between cousins. The larger part of the Galton data is restricted to "forefinger" prints and is, therefore, insuffi- cient for more than indications of the direction of research. To the heavier task of collecting "complete sets of family finger-prints .... the Galton Laboratory is now addressing itself." — Howard J. Banker. 253. Engledow, F. L. The inheritance of glume length and grain length in a wheat cross. Jour. Genetics 10: 109-134. 1 fig. 1920. — Results of a wheat cross between Polish (Triticum polonicum L.) and Kubanka (a variety of T. durum Desf.). Glume length and kernel length were studied. Glumes and kernels of Polish (P) were long while those of Kubanka (K) were short. Fi was intermediate; F2 gave no plants with as long glumes as Polish and none as short as Kubanka, that is, there was a "shift" toward a shorter Polonicum form and a longer Kubanka type. It was possible to distinguish the parental forms and they are found to follow the ratio of 1 long : 2 intermediates : 1 short. Grain length was also studied and behaved in a manner similar to glume length, and author concludes: — "(1) The one factor which governs the P — K glume difference also governs the P — K grain difference. (2) 'Shift' occurs, so that the P and K types as seen in Fj (glume and grain) are numerically 'shifted' forms of the true Fo type. The shifted values persist in Fs. (3) In spite of the demands of the 'double-fertilization' theory, the grain appears, in so far as its length is con- cerned, to belong to the same generation as the plant on which it is borne, i.e., grain length is a maternal character and segregates on the 1:2:1 basis in Fj." And further that one factor controls: "(1) length of glume, (2) ribs on main lamina of glume, (3) shape of tip of glume, (4) curvature of keel of glume, (5) consistency of material of glume (P is 'papery,' K is more rigid), (6) length of grain, (7) shape and size of cross-section of grain, (8) the angle at which the embryo of the grain is set into the endosperm, (9) number and length of the hairs at the apex of the grain, (10) distinctness of the outline of the apical pad of the grain ('Gipfel-polster' — Kcke)." There is some relation between glume length and pubescence of the glume. The heavily pubescent types are also short-glume types. — It was considered that grain length is a maternal character although it is difficult to harmonize this with the double-fertilization hy- pothesis. Inheritance of hollow and solid straw seems complicated and it is indicated that there may be some relation between the glume-length inheritance and kind of straw. — H. H. Love. 254. Federley, Harry. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Saugetiergametogenese I. Die Spermatogenese von Mus silvaticus L. [Contribution to our knowledge of mammalian gameto- genesis. I. The spermatogenesis of Mus silvaticus L.] Acta Soc. Sci. Fennicae 48: 5-37. 1 pi. 1919. 255. FiGiNi, GuiDO. Intorno un cas di disgiunzione pigmentale in una infiorescenza di "Antirrhinum majus" L. [A case of pigmental disjunction in an inflorescence of Antirrhinum majus L.] Riv. Biol. 2: 3-5. 1920. 256. Frimmel, F. Notiz iiber Dominanzverhaltnisse bei Fuchsienbastarden. [Note on dominance relations in Fuchsia hybrids.] Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm.- u. Vererb. 24: 279-281. 1920. No. 1, May, 1921] GENETICS 39 257. Fruwirth, C. Wicke mit linsenformigen Samen. [Vetches with lens-shaped seeds.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7:35&-362. 1 fig. 1920. 258. Galippe, V. Nouvelles recherches sur la presence d'organismes vivants dans les cellules des glandes genitales males (microbiose, parasitisme normal ou accidentel). [New studies on the presence of living organisms in the cells of the male genital glands (microbiosis, normal or accidental parasitism).] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 255-258. 1919. 259. GERBAtTLT, E. L. Heredites chez la Cymbalaire (premiere contribution). [Heredity in Linaria cymbalaria. First contribution.] Bull. Sec. Linn. Normandie VII, 2: 111-116. 1919. 260. Glaser, Otto. Fertilization and egg-secretions. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20: 227- 228. 1921. — 1. Egg secretions have been known for some time from the eggs of at least 10 species of echinoderms, 2 of annelids, 2 of tunicates, and 1 of molluscs. To this list another mollusc, the oyster, and 2 vertebrates, the fish, Fundulus heteroclitus, and the frog, Rana pipiens, are added by the author. — 2. The importance of these secretions in the initiation of development has been demonstrated by a variety of methods. One of these, that of washing the eggs, has been criticized because in the 18-36 hours required to remove all traces of their exudates the eggs themselves may undergo serious deteriorations of other sorts. By using running sea water, the author has succeeded in shortening this period to 3 or 4 hours, and by removing their jelly and exposing the eggs to charcoal, he has succeeded in sterilizing them completely in 30 minutes. — 3. The secretions agglutinate spermatozoa and initiate develop- ment. These effects are due, not to 1 substance with 2 side-chains, as postulated in the Fertilizin Theory, but to 2 chemical entities, the lipolysin on the one hand, and the agglutinin, on the other. — i. The lipolysin is a lipolytic ferment and catalyses the hydrolysis of the esters of the lower as well as the higher fatty acids. It may be that more than 1 ferment is involved. — 5. The agglutinin very possibly is also a ferment, but the process which it catalyses has not yet been found. — 5. A study of the specificities of fertilization must take account of the lipolysin and of the agglutinin. With respect to the former, it is possible to employ lipolysins derived from the eggs of Arbacia, Asterias, and of the oyster, for the purpose of increasing the fertility of Echinarachniiis eggs partially sterilized by the removal of their own secretions; with respect to the agglutinin, it is possible to increase very greatly the success of crosses between Echinarachnius parma and Arbacia punctulata, if one kind or the other of their sex cells, but especially the spermatozoa, is treated with species-true egg secretion prior to insemi- nation. It appears therefore that the agglutination reaction involves specific features because species-true agglutinin has effects quantitatively and perhaps qualitatively different from those of heterogeneous agglutinins. — Whatever transformations views on the initia- tion of development may undergo within the next few years, the zone within which an under- standing must be sought is now marked off by the reaction capacities of perfectly definite physiological compounds. — Otto Glaser. 261. Golds CHMiDT, R. Einfiihrung in die Vererbungswissenschaft. Zwanzig Vorlesungen fiir Studierende, Aerzte, Ziichter, Dritte neubearbeitete Auflage. [Introduction to the sci- ence of genetics. 20 lectures for students, physicians, breeders. 3rd revised edition.] 519 p., 178 fig. W. Engelmann: Leipzig, 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 336. 262. GoLDscHMiDT, R. Der Mendelismus in elementarer Darstellung. [Elementary presentation of Mendelism.] 77' p., 15 fig. P. Parey: Berlin, 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 335. 263. GoLDSCHMiDT, Ri CHARD. Untersuchuugen zur Entwicklungsphysiologie des Fliigel- musters der Schmetterlinge. I. Mitteilung. Einige Vorstudien. [Investigations on the physiology of development of the color pattern of the wings in butterflies. I. Some preliminary studies.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. 47: 1-24. 12 fig. 1920. 40 ' • GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 264. GowEN, John W. Studies in milk secretion. VIII. On the influence of age on milk yield and butter-fat percentage as determined from the 365-day records of Holstein-Friesian cattle. Maine Agric. E.xp. Sta. Bull. 293. 185-196. 1920.— Author gives results of study of relation of age to milk yield and percentage of butter-fat, by which it is shown that yield of milk rises at an ever- decreasing rate until the age of S\ years, and then declines at an ever- increasing rate as age increases. Curves to fit the means of milk yield and butter-fat percent- age are calculated. — E. Roberts. 265. Graves, R. R. A study of Guernsey breeding. Hoard's Dairyman 59: 1068, 1069, 1072. 1 fig. 1920.— Guernsey sires (166) were divided into 3 classes on basis of sires of production, sires of breeding daughters, and sires of breeding sons. These were traced back to foundation sires and numbers noted. 68.7 per cent of sires were produced by out-crossing, 19.3 per cent by line breeding, and 12 per cent by inbreeding. An attempt is being made to study inheritance of milk and fat. Relation of chromosome theory to facts observed in breeding dairy cattle is pointed out. No case of complete prepotency for production either in Guernsey or Holstein-Friesian breed was found. Variability in production of daughters, and its relation to judging quality of sire is considered. — E. Roberts. 266. Gross, K. Uber Vererbung von Augen- und Haarfarbe und den Zusammenhang beider. [On inheritance of eye and hair color and the correlation between them.] Arch. Rass.- u. Gesellschaftsbiol. 13: 164-170. 1920.— On the basis of a pedigree consisting of 4 grandparents, 5 each of the paternal and maternal fraternities, and 5 children the author proposes an hypothesis to account (1) for a brown-eyed child from two blue-eyed parents and (2) the association of blue eyes and brown hair and brown eyes and blonde hair as well as the more usual associations. There are: P, a ground-factor for iris pigmentation; D, a ground-factor for hair pigmentation; and F, an activating factor which affects pigment for- mation both in iris and hair. The application of this hypothesis to the family in question explains satisfactorily all of the observed combinations and distributions of eye and hair coloration.— [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 228.]— C. B. Davenport. 267. GuYER, M. F., AND E. A. Smith. Experiments with typhoid agglutinins in rabbits. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20:214. 1921.— Experiments are being conducted to determine whether immunization against germs of disease, practised generation after generation, will eventually result in a truly hereditary immunity. Rabbits may readily be sensitized with typhoid vaccine followed by the living bacteria so that their blood-serum diluted 320 to 640 times will agglutinate living typhoid bacilli. Females so sensitized may transmit to their young and even to their grand-descendants the ability to agglutinate typhoid bacilli in- serum diluted from 60 to 160 times.— After 2 or 3 months of development the young of sensitized mothers are likely to show what appears to be a spontaneous rise of titre. If, for example, they have been averaging a titre of 80 for some time, it may rise to 120 or even 160. After a few weeks it drops back again. Rise of titre may be produced by the injection of milk into the blood-stream.— Young from a sensitized mother, when nursed by a normal mother, retain a fairly high titre for several months and may even show the spontaneous rise of titre men- tioned. Young of a normal mother, when nursed by a sensitized mother, acquire a fairly high titre, presumably from the milk of the foster-mother, but lose it rapidly after weaning time.— M. F. Guyer and E. A. Smith. 268. Hagem, Oscar. Einige Fa und Fe Generationen bei dem Bastard Medicago sativa X M. falcata. [Some Fj" and Fe generations of the hybrid Medicago sativa X M. falcata.] Nyt Mag. Naturvidenskab. 56: 149-165. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 222. 269. Hansen, W. Gedanken iiber Organisation und Arbeitsersparnis in der Pflanzen- zucht. [Thoughts on organization and labor saving in plant breeding.] Deutsch. Landw. Presse 1918: 261-262. 1918.— Author thinks that brief employment of young people does not further breeding industry, that use of the professor as superintendent deprives leaders in gen- eral of his knowledge which could be made available at breeding institutions, that the manag- No. 1, May, 1921] GENETICS 41 ing side should not become too extensive, that follow-up improvements be accompanied by reward of original breeder, that selections can often be reasonably limited and that a gen- eral testing of strains by public institutions is needed. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6: 189. Dec, 1918.]— James P. Kelly. 270. Harlax, Harry V., and H. K. Hates. Occurrence of the fixed intermediate, Hor- deum intermediiun Haxtoni, in crosses between H. vulgare pallidum andH. distichon palmella. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 575-591. 4 pl- 1920. — A barley, Hordeum intermedium Haxtoni, inter- mediate between typical 6-rowed and typical 2-rowed, has been known for many years and reported in literature as breeding true. Observations made since 1900 throw doubt on validity of fixed intermediates which bear lateral, fertile, unawned florets. — Authors crossed Man- churia and Svanhals varieties. Manchuria is typical 6-rowed and Svanhals has long-awned, central, fertile florets, and awnless, sterile, lateral ones. F2 plants (87) produced F3 families which were classified into 7 groups: (1) 22 plants, typical (phenotypical) 6-rowed; (2) 7 plants, lateral florets short-awned, highly fertile; (3) 25 plants, lateral florets awns short to pointed, fertility low; (4) 10 plants, lateral florets awns short to pointed, fertility nil; (5) 7 plants, lateral florets large, awnless, fertility low; (6) 11 plants, lateral florets awnless, fertility nil; (7) 5 plants, lateral florets small, awnless, fertility nil. Assuming a 2-factor hypothesis the following genetic analysis developed with the expected number of plants as indicated: (1) 22 plants homozygous for 6-rowed, A A BB, heterozygous for 6-rowed X regressive 6-rowed, AABb, and homozygous for regressive 6-rowed, AAbb; (2) 11 plants heterozygous for 6-rowed X intermedium, AaBB; (3) 22 plants heterozygous for 6-rowed X 2-rowed, AaBh; (4) 11 plants heterozygous for regressive 6-rowed X 2-rowed, Aahh; (5) 5 plants homozygous for intermedium, aaBB; (6) 11 plants heterozygous for intermedium X 2-rowed, aaBb; (7) 5 homozygous for 2-rowed, aabb. The 2 groups of 7 sub-groups correspond very well. The first sub-group in above groups is genetically complex. Factor AA is considered epistatic to BB and so all plants of group 1 are phenotypically identical. Evidence of presence of a third factor governing fertility is presented. Stability of intermedium form has been fully confirmed. — L. R. Waldron. 271. Herwerden, M. A. van. [Dutch rev. of: Broman, Ivar. Das sogenannte bioge- netische Grundgesetz und die moderne Erblichkeitslehre. (The so-called biogenetic law and modern genetics.) Bergmann: Miinchen and Wiesbaden, 1920.] Genetica 2: 529-530. 1920. 272. Herwerden, M. A. van. [Dutch rev. of: Morgan, Thomas Hunt. The physical basis of heredity. 14X21 cm., 300 p., 117 fig. J. B. Lippincott Co.: Philadelphia, 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 422.)] Genetica 2: 542-544. 1920. 273. Hogben, Lancelot. The problem of synapsis. Jour. Roy. Microsc. Soc. 1920: 269- 276. Sept., 1920. — Abrief critical review of recent work on the chromosomes. The important point is made that there is not yet agreement concerning the origin of the chromosomes pairing in synapsis nor in the method of pairing. The author thinks that, in view of the uncertainty, emphasized by Miss Digby's recent papers, concerning the question whether the chromosomes that pair in the heterotypic prophase are homologous paternal and maternal chromosomes respectively or whether they represent only the daughter halves of a single somatic chromosome which splits in the telophase of the last sporogenous cell (Digby), "Such an attempt to provide an interpretation of partial linkage in Mendelian inheritance is exceedingly ambitious" on the basis of the chiasmatype theory of crossing over. The gist of the paper is contained in the conclusion that "While the chromosome hypothesis has proved a great incentive to research — particularly in the problem of sex — its major premise, the reality of synapsis, is in no way firmly established; further knowledge of the relation of chromosomes to the organization of the resting nucleus and a specialized study of individual heterotype chromosomes constitute, therefore, two of the most imperative needs of cytologi- cal theory today." — Leonas L. Burlingame. 42 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 274. Hromadko, J. Die Variabilitat der Nachkommenschaft derselben Futterrixben- mutter in der 1. Generation. [The variability of progenies of single mother beets in the first generation.] Zeitschr. Zuckerindust. Bohmen 42: 581-601. 1918. — Author presents data on progeny of a single pedigree mother beet (fodder type) that had been isolated in gauze, and compares them with similar observations of Andrlik and Urban on sugar beet. For fodder-beets coefficients of variability for weight of root, weight of foliage, dry sub- stance of root, and sugar content were respectively 39.7, 35.0, 9.57, and 16.31. In case of sugar-beet the corresponding characteristics gave coefficients of variability, respectively, of 28.46, 32.4, 6.88, and 6.02. Author attributes greater variability of sugar content in former to fact that selection for that is much more recent. [From anonymous review in Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 6: 189-190. Dec, 1918.]— James P. Kelly. 275. Huxley, Julian S. Note on an alternating preponderance of males and females in fish, and its possible significance. Jour. Genetics 10 : 265-276. 1920. — In a stock of fish {Girardinus poeciloides) , according to records of E. G. Boulenger, the ratio of females to males for nearly a year was 3:1. Later, this ratio among the young produced changed to 2 9 :3cf for a few weeks, after which the numbers of the two sexes became approximately equal and remained so for several years. On the basis of this case and data from other sources, Huxley argues that the most probable explanation is to assume (1) that the male in this fish is the hetero- zygous sex having formula XY, the female being XX; (2) that a certain proportion of the individuals of genetic composition XY became somatic females (= feminized males), owing to the action of some unknown environmental influence; (3) that such "somatic" females produced X and Y eggs, which, by fertilization with X and Y spermatozoa, gave rise in the next generation to a preponderance of males (XY), the YY zygotes being assumed to be non-viable. — F. B. Sumner. 276. Ireland, Alleyne. Democracy and heredity — a reply. Jour. Heredity 10: 360-367. 1919. — A brief summary of an article by the writer (Democracy and the accepted facts of hered- ity. Jour. Heredity 9:339-342. 1918) is followed by a discussion of criticisms offered by Edwin G. Conklin, Madison Grant, Prescott F. Hall, O. F. Cook, and Robert Carter Cook (see May and June, 1919, issues of Jour. Heredity). Author's attitude was that "with few exceptions, the best governed countries were those in which the mass of people had the least control over the administration of public afiairs." His "dissent from the conventional view of democracy .... as a sound, political principle was based upon four main considerations: (a) That the individual and not the mass has been the main source of human advancement; (b) that mental and moral traits in the individual are derived chiefly from heredity and not from environment; (c) that acquired characteristics are not inheritable;" and (d) that assortative mating, encouraged in a democracy, tends to drain the lower classes of talent and genius and increase these qualities in the upper classes. Discussing the criti- cisms he continues: "the real issue, when stripped of all dialectical trappings, is whether good government depends ultimately upon good human qualities or upon good political macliinery. If it depends chiefly upon the former," as author seems to believe, "all dis- cussions of government must be founded in biology." In defense of his postulate of assorta- tive mating he presents data from the works of Havelock Ellis and Frederick Adams Woods which show "that over a period of several centuries there has occurred a striking and progressive decline in the cultural contribution from the 'lower' classes" in the face of increas- ing democratic opportunity. He closes his discussion by a brief comparison of social con- ditions under several forms of government which is unfavorable to the democracy, and empha- sizes the importance of drawing a distinction between "administration" and "policy." — Howard J. Banker. 211 . Kappert, H. Untersuchungen iiber den Merkmalskomplex glatte-runzlige Samen- oberflache bei der Erbse. [Studies on the character-complex smooth-wrinkled surface of peas.] Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm.- u. Vererb. 24: 185-210. 5 jig. 1920. No. 1, May, 1921] GENETICS 43 278. Kathariner, L. Die Entwicklungsgeschichte der digenetischen Trematoden und die Kontinuitat des Keimplasmas. [The ontogeny of the digenetic trematodes and the con- tinuity of the germplasm.] Zool. Anzeig. 51: 220-223. 1920. — Reiteration of view that sporo- cyst, redia, and cercaria are not individuals of distinct generations, but that all have been produced from cleavage cells of same fertilized egg. Life cycle does not therefore involve parthenogenesis nor true paedogenesis. — A. Franklin Shull. 279. KoHN, Alfred. Der Bauplan der Keimdriisen. [The structural plan of germ- glands.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. 47:95-118. 7 fig. 1920. 280. KoTOWSKi, Feliks. Zmiennose i Korrelacye w "czystej linii" pszenicy. Tr. vulgare Ostaka biala dublanska. [Correlation and variability in a pure line of wheat.] Polinusch: Tygodnika Rolniczy, Krakau, 1919. — Biometrical studies on 387 wheat plants. Coefficient of variability ranged from 7.06 per cent for length of stem to 43.07 per cent for weight of upper 20 cm. of stem in distributions that were found to be according to Quetelet's law. Correlation between stem length and weight of ear was only 0.20 ± 0.094 and author attributes little breeding value to stem length. Selection made with respect to weight of lower part of stem considered good. Correlation between ear weight and weight of lowest 20 cm. of stem was 0.75 ± 0.043. Author does not ignore value of direct field selection in respect to non- lodging characteristic. [From anonymous German review in Zeitschr. Pfianzenziicht. 7: 333-334. Nov., 1920.]— Ja?nes P. Kelly. 281. Krafka, Joseph, Jr. Environmental factors other than temperature affecting facet number in the bar-eyed mutant of Drosophila. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 3: 207-210. 1920.— Following the author's previous work with temperature in producing a change in facet num- ber of the ultra-bar mutant of Drosophila melanogasier various tests were made to deter- mine the effect of other environmental factors. Certain consistent and apparently signifi- cant changes in facet number were obtained but they were of slight amount. Provided a consistent procedure is followed and plenty of moist food available, temperature seems to be the only environmental factor which need be considered in interpreting breeding data in Drosophila. — H. H. Plough. 282. Krafka, Joseph, Jr. The post-embryonic development of the compound eye of Drosophila melanogaster. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20: 231. 1921. — A histological study has been made of the development of the compound ej^e of Drosophila melanogaster Meig. The embryoblasts are present at the time of hatching, although the ommatidia are not completely metamorphosed until the late pupal period. The segmented condition of the optic ganglion, before definitive visual structures appear, suggests that the formation of the latter may be under the control of the nervous system. A marked reduction in the size of the optic ganglion in the bar-eyed mutant shows that the hereditary factor involves more than the facet number. — Joseph Krafka, Jr. 283. KRtJGER, Paul. Studien an Cirripedien. [Studies on Cirripedes.] Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm.- u. Vererb. 24: 105-108. 13 fig. 1920. 284. KtJsTER, E. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der panaschierten Laubgeholze. [Variegation in broad-leafed trees.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Dendrolog. Ges. 28: 85-88. 8 fig. 1919. 285. Lancefield, D. E. Two sex-linked lethals of simultaneous appearance in Droso- phila obscura. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 17:56-57. 1919. — Genetic data in Drosophila obscura indicate the simultaneous appearance of 2 sex-linked lethal factors in the same culture. Breeding tests show that these 2 factors are apparently" located at opposite ends of a sex chromosome longer than that of Drosophila melanogaster. — H. H. Plough. 286. Laughlin, Harry H. Illustrating the structure and mathematics of the human germ- plasm. Jour. Heredity 11: 185-189. 1 fig. 1920. — A figure and description of "an abacus" 44 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, consisting of a board with 2 rows of independently revolving spools, suitably labelled, by which the various combinations of genes in two paired chromosomes may be illustrated. — H. J. Banker. 287. La Vattlx, R. de. L'intersexualite chez un Crustace Cladocere: Daphne Atkinsoni Baird. [Intersexuality in a crustacean Cladocera, Daphne Atkinsoni Baird. Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169:97-99. July> 1919. 288. LiLLiE, Frank R. The initial event in fertilization. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20: 225. 1921. — The initial event in fertilization has a primary significance because all others depend for their occurrence upon it and for their degree of efficiency upon its quantitative value. The initial event also displays a high degree of simplicity in relation to subsequent events. — Two new methods of study are applied in this paper to its study: First, the effect of copper salts upon the fertilization reaction; second, a comparison of the relative degrees of specificity between sperm agglutination by egg secretions and the fertilization reaction itself. — Copper has an incomparably greater effect on the initial reaction in fertilization than on later stages of Arbacia. It may therefore be used for an analysis of this reaction. The results indicate the presence of a copper-avid substance in the cortex of the egg that is responsible for activation. — The specificity of sperm agglutination by egg secretions between 2 species of Strongylocentrotus is found to be of the same order as fertilization specificity. — The copper-avid substance of the cortex of the egg is to be identified with the sperm- agglutinating substance of egg secretion and with the fertilizin of previous papers. — Frank R. Lillie. 289. LoTSY, J. P. Eenige resultaten van het Oenotherajaar 1920. [Some results of the Oenothera year 1920.] Genetica 2: 481-528. 57 fig. 1920. 290. LoTSY, J. P. [Dutch rev. of: Honing, J. A. Erfelijkheidsleer zonder Evolutie theorien. Rede uitgesproken bij de aanvaarding van het Hoogleeraarsambt aan de Landbouw- hoogeschool te Wageningen 23 Nov, 1920. [Genetics vs. theories of evolution. Lecture given on assuming the office of Professor at the Agricultural School of Wageningen Nov. 23, 1920. H. Veenman: Wageningen, 1920.] Genetica 2: 536-537. 1920. 291. LoTSY, J. P. [Dutch rev. of: Tackholm, G. On the cytology of the genus Rosa. A preliminary note. Svensk Bot. Tidskr. 14:300-311. 3 fig. 1920. (See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 243.)] Genetica 2 : 547-554. 1920. 292. McClung, C. E. The chromosomes in fertilization. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20: 228-229. 1921. — 1. The process of fertilization consists essentially in the introduction into the egg of a simplex series of chromosomes, duplicating the series left there by oogenesis. Little or no other material is carried by the spermatozoon. — 2. Since genetic experiments indi- cate the equivalence of male and female in heredity, the importance of the '•hromatin is dem- onstrated.— 3. Behavior of characters in inheritance, indicating factor differences and group- ings, are paralleled by conditions of structure and behavior of the chromosomes. — 4. The chromosomes introduced by the spermatozoon are reduced to the smallest volume and con- tain chromatin in the most condensed condition. — 5. The chromatin quickly absorbs fluid from the egg cytoplasm and forms a nuclear vesicle in which the chromosomes later appear in the size, form, and number that marked them in the spermatid. — 6. Upon union of the egg and sperm pronuclei the paternal chromosomes may remain distinctly grouped and this segre- gation may be followed through many generations of cells. — 7. The individual paternal chro- mosomes may be traced into the body cells of the embryo and are found later in the germ cSHs. — 8. During the many generations between the ovum and the adult organism in which maturation occurs, the chromosomes have reproduced themselves, each time under different conditions in the organization and constitution of the body, so that in the germ cells they must emerge somewhat different in character from what they were on entering. — 9. At the period of maturation in the germ cells, however, the homologous elements from the two No. 1, Mat, 1921] GENETICS 45 parents unite in the most intimate manner but without the loss of their individual identity, thus completing the process of union inaugurated by fertilization. — 10. Still, dis- tinguished by characteristics of form, size and behavior, they are then segregated by chance and distributed again into mature germ cells in a simplex series. Through these they may be traced again into another generation of organisms where they repeat the series of processes. — 11. Fertilization, although not necessary to reproduction, and omitted in parthenogenesis, is required in biparental inheritance and there serves the essential purpose of introducing the necessary duplicate control factors — the chromosomes. — C. E. Mc Clung. 293. MacCurdy, M. Conjugation and fission-rate in Arcella vulgaris (Ehrenberg). [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20: 199. 1921. — In pedigreed cultures of Arcella vulgaris under lab- oratory conditions the fission rate varies considerably. A general average rate in a non- conjugating line derived from 1 parent cell was 1 division for every 2.56 days. At times when estimated for weekly periods, the fission rate for any one line would increase for a period giv- ing a higher rate and this would be followed by a period of slower divisions. The rate in a parallel line might not be the same. — Conjugation was most often found to occur at times of low fission rate. In many cases this was found to occur at intervals of about a month. There are exceptions. Many ex-conjugants gave a higher rate of division for a period following con- jugation than parallel lines gave for the same period. Some non-conjugants gave a higher rate than some ex-conjugants. Certain nuclear conditions are pointed out and their probable significance considered. — M. MacCurdy. 294. Macoun, W. T. Apple breeding in Canada. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917: 11-27. 1 pL, 1 fig. 1918. [See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 985.] 295. Malaquin, A. Reproduction sexuee et reproduction asexuee. [Sexual and asexual reproduction.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 1403-1406. 1920. 296. Marchal, E. Recherches sur les variations numeriques des chromosomes dans la serie vegetale. [Studies on the numerical variations of the chromosomes in plants.] Mem. Acad. Roy. Belgique CI. Sci. 4: 1-198. [Year?] 297. Massart, J. La notion de I'espece en biologic. [The notion of species in biology.] Bull. CI. Sci. Acad. Roy. Belgique 1920:366-381. 4 fig. 1920.— The classic definition of species according to the author, does not correspond to the Linnean species, nor even to the Jordanian species, but to the line. — 'A good example of the line is furnished by Quercus ilex. The nuts of a tree are similar. They often differ from one tree to another, but often a little group has the same type of nuts. Each tree gives every year the same form of nuts. The young plants show that the nuts of a single tree are similar, but they differ from those of another individual. Each tree has in the young stage more spiny leaves. There are many other examples of stable lines in wild species. In the definition of the line, it is neces- sary to include neither self-fertilization nor homozygous. In fact, some self-sterile lines (Lolium perenne), and some heterozygous lines (Prirmda insecta) are known. The taxono- mist and the biogeographer should content themselves provisionally with Linnean and Jor- danian species. The lines have three origins: Hybridization, generative mutation, and vege- tative mutation. — Henri Micheels. (Translated by Geo. H. Skull.) 298. Mathews, J. Wrenford. Sheep and wool for fanners. Cross-breeding experi- ments. Results of lamb-raising trials. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 761-770, 846-852. 10 fig. 1920. 299. Meves, Friedrich. Eine neue Stiitze fiir die Plastosomentheorie der Vererbung. [A new support for the plastosome theory of heredity.] Anat. Anzeig. 50 : 551-557. 2 fig. April, 1918.— Author offers evidence, based upon studies of fertilization of egg of nematode Ox?/«ris, that plastosomes or "plastochondria" are introduced into egg by spermatozoon; and that they, together with similar bodies from egg, are portioned out to first two daughter cells of zygote, and presumably play a part in heredity as well as the nuclei. — F. B. Sumner. 46 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 300. Moon, Virgil H. Heredity as a factor in the etiology of neoplasms. Medical Rec. 97: 14-16. 1920. — Author records an autopsy on a man who died of carcinoma of the bladder. This man's brother, father, grandfather, and one uncle had likewise died of carcinoma.^ He also cites a case of a man who died of pneumonia. The father, brother, and one uncle had each died of cancer. The deceased man had no evidence of cancer, but revealed on autopsy a well developed carcinoma of the stomach. — 'A short review is given of the observa- tions and statistics of Williams, Butlin, Munn, Warthin, Ewin and Maud Slye on the heredity of cancer and other tumors in man and other animals. The conclusion is reached that a tumor-producing potentiality is an hereditarj'^ trait and that the conditions which are assigned by pathologists as possible causes of cancer probably act merely as exciting or deter- mining factors in individuals who have received a tendency to the neoplastic type of growth as a heritage from their ancestors. — Geo. N. Papanicolaou. 301. Moore, Carl R. Sex-gland transplantation and the modifying effect in rats and guinea-pigs. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20: 194. 1921. — In the white rat, testicular tissue grafted into young, spayed females, will persist for a period of nine months. Associated with the testicle graft the behavior of the animal is decidedly male-like. — Ovaries trans- planted into young, castrated males will persist and grow for several months. Such an ani- mal, as an adult, exhibits a maternal behavior towards the young. Somatic differences between male and female are too slight to be of value in a differential diagnosis of maleness or femaleness. — In guinea-pigs, ovaries grafted into young, castrated males persist for sev- eral months and are accompanied by certain somatic modifications in the male; the teats of the mammary glands hypertrophy and compare favorably in size with those of preg- nant females, though little or no secretion could be expressed. Psychical modifications of the male are not, in the author's experience, subject to modification. — Testicular tissue grafted into young, spayed females can be recovered nine months later. No mature sperm were present in the seminiferous tubules but active mitoses were common in cells of the germinal epithelium, a considerable amount of which may remain. Females bearing such tes- ticle grafts exhibit the characteristic male sex behavior (psychical modification) and the external genitalia appear male-like (somatic modification). — In the white rat ovarian grafts will persist for eight months in a male with 1 normal testicle. Graafian follicles continue their development normally up to the maturation period of the ovum. Subsequently the follicles undergo atresia without ovulation. — There appears to be no deleterious influence of secretions from either sex gland upon the opposite one. — Carl R. Moore. 302. Morgan, T. H. The effects of castration of hen-feathered Campines. Biol. Bull. 39 : 231-247. 10 fig. 1920. — Completely castrated hen-feathered male Campines develop normal male plumage. — H. D. Goodale. 303. Morgan, T. H. The effectsof ligating the testes of hen-feathered cocks. Biol. Bull. 39: 248-256. 11 fig. 1920. — Ligation of the testes, if suflEicient to cause complete degenera- tion of the testes, results in assumption of male plumage by hen-feathered adult cocks. — • H. D. Goodale. 304. Morgan, T. H. The genetic factor for hen-feathering in the Seabright Bantam. Biol. Bull. 39:257-259. 1920.— Additional data are given, but without settling definitely whether one or two factors are involved, and proof is presented that the character is not sex-linked. — H. D. Goodale. 305. MuLLER, H. J. Further changes in the white-eyed series of Drosophila and their bearing on the manner of occurrence of mutation. Jour. Exp. Zool. 31 : 443-473. 3 fig. 1920. — Three new mutations of the W gene in the X chromosome of Drosophila are described, the characters produced being ecru, a straw color, ivory (found by A. H. Sturtevant) and a new white. In addition an orange-eyed male appeared which did not transmit its mutant eye color. A consideration of the manner in which these characters appeared suggests that the mutations which produced them occurred at various times, — the first in a late oogonial cell or No. 1, May, 1921] GENETICS 47 oocyte, the second in an early stem cell of the ovary, and the third in the early cleavage of the individual in which it appeared. It is possible that the orange eye arose by a mutation of the W gene in a somatic cell of the early embryo. The commonly accepted view that mutations are more likely to occur in gametes or germ cells near the period of maturation receives no support from the data on this series. It is shown, however, that there is a much greater chance that any mutation will show itself in a single individual than in several. Fur- ther study of the allelomorphs of the white-eye series suggests other important conclusions with respect to the origin of mutations. Since mosaic mutants involving recessive sex-linked genes are always males, it would appear that mutations occur in only one member of a pair of chromosomes at any one time. If the event which produces a mutation is so localized as to affect a single locus in only one of a pair of homologous chromosomes it seems unlikely that the artificial influencing of the kind of mutation is a possibility. It is further noted that the variations of the W gene are not random deviations for they are all in a definite direction, and the extreme variants seem to be the more common. For this reason selection if concerned with this locus alone would not be cumulative. — H. H. Plough. 306. MuLLER, H. J., AND E. Altenburg. a study of the character and mode of origin of eighteen mutations in the X-chromosome of Drosophila. [Abstract.] Anat. Ree. 20: 213. 1921. — Since the 18 mutants found in the experiment of the writers on mutation frequency were non-selected or random samples of (detectable) mutants in the sex-chromosome, a study of them furnishes quantitative data bearing on the nature of mutations. (1) All were lethals or sub-lethals. Of the 5 sub-lethals, 4 produced morphological abnormalities. (2) All were completely recessive except 1 mutant of the yellow-mouse type. (3) Half of the loci involved are crowded into the 1.5 units space to the left of white eye (the rest being scattered rather evenly). This indicates that this region of the chromosome is really much longer than the map represents. (4) All the lethals gave negative tests for "deficiency," hence deficiencies are evidently much rarer than ordinary lethal mutations. (5) Three lethals were allelo- morphs of known non-lethal factors, and 2 of these lethals were allelomorphs of each other. Of the latter 1 became dominant in its lethal effect when crossed to anon-lethal allelomorph. (6) Lethals very near 'duplicated' loci remained unaffected by the 'duplication.' (7) Muta- tion occurs with not markedly different frequency in the 2 sexes, for 7 of the lethals were found in the maternal, 11 in the paternal chromosome. (8) These mutations occur not only near maturation, but also in earlier germ cells, in either sex, as shown by the original appearance of some of the lethals in 2 sisters simultaneously. (9) Two of the original mutant indi- viduals contained 2 different lethals at once; in 1 case these were in opposite chromosomes, in the other case in the same chromosome. — H. J. Muller and E. Altenburg. 307. Newman, H. H. The experimental production of twins in the starfish Patiria miniata: with a discussion of the causes of twinning in general. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20: 190-191. Jan. 20, 1921. — A series of separate twins and of double monsters were produced under 3 different experimental conditions: (a) As the result of an extremely belated parthenogenetic development; (b) as the result of fertilizing Patiria eggs with the sperm of another species of starfish; (c) as the result of overcrowding normally fertilized eggs. All 3 methods involve retardation of development, with loss of precise axiate organization at some- critical period. Redifferentiation or resumption of axiate organization occurs, but unity of organization has been lost, so that 2 or more axes or gradients appear instead of the original 1. Thus twins or double structures arise. — A series of twin types are produced which repre- sent the results of differences in the earliness of onset of retardation and more or less com- plete recovery. The series includes completely separated half-sized and quarter-sized blas- tulae and gastrulae, full-sized gastrulae, full-sized gastrulae with 2 or more archentera, larvae in which the archenteron branches anteriorly into "dicephalous" larvae, and advanced bipennariae with paired, instead of only left-hand, madreporic pores and pore-canals. This, physiological theory of twinning agrees with the writer's formerly expressed theory to explain, the cause of specific polyembryony in the armadillo. — H. H. Newman. 48 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 308. Okkelberg, Peter. The early history of the germ cells in the brook lamprey, Ento- sphenus wilderi (Gabe), up to and including the period of sex differentiation. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20:201. 1921. — The germ cells are segregated before the germ layers are defi- nitely established. They are first recognized about the time when the mesoderm separates from the entoderm (embryo about 191 hours old). The definite germ cells, in both sexes, take their origin from these primordial germ cells, and from no other source. Numerous germ cells degenerate in every individual and they never take part in the formation of somatic structures. During the period of sex differentiation 2 types of cells are found in practically every individual, those which continue to divide and those which stop dividing and enter upon a synaptic and growth phase. The former are taken to be potential male cells (sper- matogonia) or indifferent cells and the latter potential female cells (primary oocytes). The relative proportion of the 2 kinds of cells apparently determines whether the larva shall become a male or a female. Observations seem to warrant the conclusion that each larva carries in it the potentiality of both sexes and that sex, therefore, is not irrevocably fixed at or before fertilization. When a larva becomes definitely established as a male there rudi- mentary eggs are frequently found in the adult testis. In the adult condition the number of individuals of each sex is about the same. — Peter Okkelberg. 309. Orensteen, Myer M. Correlation of cephalic measurements in Egyptian born natives. Biometrika 13 : 17-24. 1920. — Means, standard deviations, and coefficients of corre- lation of length and breadth of head are given for different provinces. Correlation ranges from + 0.208 ± 0.033 to + 0.369 ± 0.028— John Rice Miner. 310. Osi.ER, H. S. Origin and development of pedigreed varieties of grains. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21: 139-143. 1919. — Important varieties of small grains came into use largely in three ways, introduction, selection, and hybridization. The origin of a number of improved varieties is given. The method of production and the distribution of Red Rock wheat and Rosen rye is briefly summarized. — H. K. Hayes. 311. Pelseneee, Paul. L'hybridation chez les MoUusques. [Hybridization in mol- luscs.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 1056-1059. 1919. 312. Pf:zARD, A. Loi du "tout ou rien" ou de Constance fonctionnelle, relative k Paction du testicule consldere comme glande endocrine. [Law of "all or nothing" or of functional constancy relative to the action of the testis considered as an endocrine gland.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 172: 89-92. 1921. 313. PfizARD, A. Secondary sexual characteristics and endocrinology. Endocrinology 4: 527-540. S fig. 1920. — A number of secondary sexual characters are dependent upon internal secretion of testis. Effect of secretion begins at puberty and continues, in poultry, through sexual life with remarkable constancy. Effect is lost with removal of testis, but not more than jiV of total weight of testis is required to produce effect. Any fraction of testis large enough to produce any morphogenetic effect produces the entire effect (tested on combs). Some characters recognized as racial are dependent on this secretion. Meat diet produces modification in structure and sexual behavior, not directly, but by first inducing changes in testis. — A. Franklin Shull. 314. Plahn-Appiani. Die Individualitat von Zucker- und Futterriibe. [Individuality of sugar beets and fodder beets.] Centralbl. Zuckerindust. 27 : 220-221. 1919. — Author refers to doubt sometimes e.xpressed about distinguishing certain white fodder beets from sugar beets. He would not ascertain sugar content as this is transgressive in its variation but would use a criterion dependent on structural characteristics as specific weight or data on volume secured in calculation of specific weight. The volume figures for sugar beet lie between 92 and 95 and for fodder beets from 97 to over 100. — James P. Kelly. No. 1, Mat, 1921] GENETICS 49 315. P[openoe], p. a contribution to eugenics. [Rev. of: Dtjnlap, Knight. Personal beauty and racial betterment. C. V. Mosby Co.: St. Louis, 1920.] Jour. Heredity 11: 258. 1920. 316. P[openoe], p. Eugenics made easy. [Rev. of: Humphrey, Seth K. The racial prospect. £61 p. Charles Scribner's Sons: New York, 1920.] Jour. Heredity 11: 237. 1920. 317. P[openoe], p. a French student of the birth-rate. [Rev. of: Rageot, Gaston. La Natalite. (Natality.) 296 p. Ernest Flammarion: Paris, 1918.] Jour. Heredity 11: 237. 1920. 318. P[openoe], p. a text book of biology. [Rev. of: Shull, A. Franklin, George La Rue, and Alexander G. Ruthven. Principles of animal biology. 16 X 24 cm., ix + 441 p., US fig. McGraw-Hill Book Co. : New York, 1920.] Jour. Heredity 11 : 214. 1920. 319. Punnett, R. C, and P. G. Bailet. Genetic studies in poultry. II. Inheritance of egg-colour and broodiness. Jour. Genetics 10:277-292. / pi., 11 fig. 1920. — Reciprocal crosses between Brown Leghorns which are not broody and lay white eggs and Black Lang- shans which are broody and lay brown eggs, also crosses between the Langshans and Gold- Pencilled Hamburghs, were made with the following results. — Egg color: — Leghorn 9 X Langshan cf : Fi, intermediate; Fj, nearly half white, the rest tinted, but mostly lighter tints. Reciprocal cross: Fi, as before; Fo, all shades represented, but curve slightly bimodal. Lang- shan 9 X Hamburgh cf : Fi, as before; F2, all grades represented and curve distinctly bi- modal. The results in this case are explained on the basis of a major factor for egg pigment and several minor factors all of which are thought to be present in the Langshans and absent in the others. — Broodiness: Leghorn 9 X Langshan cT : Fi, broody; F2, 19 broody, 47 non- broody. Langshan 9 X Leghorn cf : Fi, broody; F2, 8 non-broody. Langshan X Hamburgh: Fi, slightly broody; F2, 4 broody, 34 non-broody. — H. G. May. 320. Richet, Charles. La selection humaine. [Human selection.] 8°, 262 p. F. Alcan: Paris. 1919. 321. Richet, Charles, et Henry Cardot. La transmission hereditaire des caracteres acquis et I'accoutumance des microbes. [The hereditary transmission of acquired characters and the tolerance of the microbes.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 1353-1358. 1920. 322. Riddle, Oscar, and Ellinor H. Behre. On the relation of stale sperm to sterility and sex in ring-doves. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20: 211. 1921.— The very abnormal sex ratios obtained from hybrid birds by several investigators require the study of all factors possibly concerned. Practical work in pigeon hybridization also sometimes requires a knowledge of the length of time the sperm may remain alive in the female oviduct. On the latter point, it is found that the spermatozoa of the ring-doves (mostly fully fertile hybrids of closely related species) used retained their fertilizing power during very nearly 8 days, reckoned from the time of isolation of the male to the hour the egg is laid. — "Staleness" of the spermatozoa did not appreciably aflfect the sex ratio in 213 individual tests made with a dozen pairs of birds. The degree of staleness was known in each test. Some of the sex ratios obtained during the experiment cannot be considered normal but these abnormal ratios have been shown to be associated with other factors investigated earlier. The abnormal sex ratios that have been obtained in previously reported investigations on these doves, and any results that may be later obtained from them or from similar birds, are here shown to be not complicated by effects due to staleness of the spermatozoa. — Oscar Riddle and Ellinor H. Behre. 323. RioLLE, Y. Trouard. Les hybrides de Raphanus. [Raphanus hybrids.] Rev. G6n. Bot. 32 : 438-447. Fig. 1-3. 1920.— The author previously studied hybrids of R. Ra- phanistrum with varieties of R. sativus and found superficial homogeneity in Fi and visible dissociation in F2. She now attempts to demonstrate that while Fi is homogeneous 50 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, as a whole, individual plants themselves are extremely variable. Reciprocal hybrids of Raphanistrum and sativus were highly vigorous and gave comparable results under a variety of conditions. Fi flowers as a rule were white, but there were exceptions, especially in later blossomings. One plant had one twig white-flowering and one yellow-flowering. In later blossomings some flowers were observed with two petals white and two yellow and some flowers showed tinges of rose or violet at end of blooming period. Structure of silique seemed to be intimately connected with color of flower and varied within wide limits on hybrid plants, the limits on parents being much narrower. Sugar content was high and starch low in the hybrids as in radishes, a condition contrary to that in R. Raphanistncm. In character of anthocyanin radishes may be divided into 3 groups: Rose or red; violet; black, graj' or white. Red X black or gray gives violet. Red X yellow gives violet, but with dissociation, which indicates that yellows are themselves hybrids. Red X violet gives violet, but the author considers dominance of violet here simply a matter of concentration of violet pigment, for a mixture of solutions of red and violet anthocyanin gives violet solution. In F2 every possible combination of parental characters occurs as regards color of flower, structure of silique, and root development; but there are all sorts of intermediates, and types which appear to return to those of parent are not identical with them. It is argued that this demonstrates that Mendel's law is only a directive one. From her studies of Fi populations the author con- cludes that law of uniformity of Fi is not absolute. She favors Naudin's idea that the hybrid is a living mosaic of more or less discordant elements which may at times visibly dis- sociate in Fi individuals. She argues that everything connected with life is mobile and changing and that it is practically impossible to generalize from particular bases. Mendel's law does not, therefore, approach the validity of a mathematical law. — R. E. Clausen. 324. RoBB, William. Plant breeding experiments at the University of St. Andrews (Conductedby the late John H.Wilson). Scottish Jour. Agric. 3: 391-402. 2 pi, 2 fig. 1920. — Dr. Wilson was responsible for the establishing of extensive plant-breeding experiments in Scotland. The accomplishments of the last four years preceding his death have not been previously published. During these years he grew many thousands of hybrid potato seed- lings and had reduced his stocks to 240 selected varieties. In a cross of Sandy and Golden Rain oats the Fi and F2 plants all had more or less one-sided panicles while both parents have open spreading panicles. In the F2 progeny of a cross between Daubeny and Huskless oats were types with two awns to the spikelet and an articulation suggestive of the wild oat, Avenafalua. — H. V. Harlan. 325. Roberts, E. A note on inheritance of polydactylism in cattle. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20: 211. 1921. — A normal bull mated to a polydactylous cow produced a polydactylous female. This daughter produced, from matings to a normal bull, 3 calves all of which showed the polydactylous condition. — E. Roberts. 326. Roberts, Herbert F. Yellow-berry in hard winter wheat. Jour. Agric. Res. 18 : 155-169. 3 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 32. 327. Robertson, W. R. B. Further studies on inheritance of color in the turkey. [Ab- stract.] Anat. Rec. 20: 213-214. 1921.— The pattern of the black variety is allelomorphic to the pattern of the bronze. Black is almost, not entirely, dominant, there being usually about 6 bronze feathers widely distributed. Fi black (bronze) cT back-crossed to his bronze dam gave 50 per cent of F2 bronze and 50 per cent black. An Fi black (bronze) 9 by a bronze cf gave the same result. The bronze of F2, mated inter se, gave only bronze, the Fi blacks gave black and bronze. — Black is likewise allelomorphic to the bourbon red and the Narragansett patterns. A bourbon red 9 by the Fi black (bronze) c? gave 50 per cent bronze-red intermediates, like Fi of the bronze by red cross, and 50 per cent a rusty black. An Fi black (bronze) 9 by a bourbon red c? gave 50 per cent bronze-red intermediate and 50 per cent rusty black. The latter shows a slight trace of barring with white in the pri- maries. A Narragansett 9 by an Fi black (bronze) cf gave 50 per cent black and 50 per No. 1, May, 1921] GENETICS 51 cent bronze. — The last cross shows also that the Narragansett pattern is probably allelomor- phic to bronze. Narragansett is also likely allelomorphic to bourbon red. Reciprocal crosses gave Fi much like the Narragansett but with subterminal black bands less intense and slaty regions slightly auburn. — These 4 patterns evidently form a system of quadruple allelomorphs. — White is recessive to color. A white 9 by a bourbon red cT gave Fi all bronze- red intermediate; she evidently carried bronze but lacked the factor for color. Bronze 9 by white & gave bronze. F2 was 75 per cent bronze and 25 per cent white. — W. R. B. Robertson. 328. Robertson, W. R. B. Unusual tetrads and their bearing on the problem of crossing- over. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20: 199. 1921.— Among the ring-like tetrads resulting from the pairing of compound chromosomes, such as occur in Chorthippus curtipennis, there have been found again cases of a condition in which the 2 strands of 1 of the members of a pair show 1 complete revolution about each other which is not present in the strands of the other member of the pair. This torsion occurs, of course, in a region of the tetrad where disjunction has taken place — that is, at an internode between 2 points of the tetrad which are still in conjunction. — This may mean: (1) That the pairing chromosomes were each split and the halves independently twisted about each other before parasynapsis took place; or (2) that crossing-over between 1 strand of each of the conjugants has taken place at some pre- vious time. — If the latter be the correct interpretation, then opposite sides of the ring would each receive 1 strand of the paternal and one of the maternal pair, and the 1st division be accordingly equational for the bulk of the tetrad. — The important point, however, is that the crossing-over hypothesis gives a very satisfactory explanation of the abnormality. — W. R. B. Robertson. 329. Rtx, Georg von. Methoden einer exakten Priifung des Fortschrittes bei der Zucker- riibenzucht. Paritiits- und doppelte Standard-methode. [Methods of exact testing the ad- vancement in sugar-beet breeding. Parity and double standard method.] Zeitschr. Pflanzen- ziicht. 7: 227-2.37. 1920. — Author discusses need for constant standard by which to judge results of progress in sugar beet breeding, explaining that one lot of seed cannot be kept for that purpose because of its deterioration in storage. He explains two standards and how to secure them: (1) Parity method, or method of direct comparison with standard beet speci- mens, in which a line is bred pure and maintained pure for purposes of comparison. (2) Double standard method, or method of comparison with a corrected and doubly checked standard, in which half the seed from each season is planted in turn the next two seasons. — H. B. Tukey. 330. Sakamura, T. Experimentelle Studien iiber die Zell- und Kernteilung mit beson- derer Riicksicht auf Form, Grosse und Zahl der Chromosomen. [Experimental studies on cell and nuclear division with special reference to form, size, and number of chromosomes.] Jour. Coll. Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokyo 39^: 1-221. 7 pi., £4 fig. 1920.— The paper is chiefly of interest to cytologists but the following conclusions are important for geneticists. Chromosomes were found normally to be constant in number and to retain their identity. Constrictions produced by attachment of spindle fibers were found to be of wide occurrence in plants and animals and to serve as excellent marks of identification of particular chromosomes. Frag- mentation sometimes occurs at constrictions and increases the chromosome number. Such fragmentations become heritably fixed and give rise to varieties with deviating chromosome numbers. Such abnormalities, as well as those due to failure of particular pairs to segregate, are brought about by conditions in surrounding cytoplasm and are the effects of outer or inner factors which may also produce mutation by direct action on the germ-plasm. Nearly related species and varieties of some genera, e.g., Triticum, differ by multiples of the x or reduced number characteristic of the ancestral species. Fragmentation, failure to segregate (non- disjunction), inclusion of two or more nuclei in one cell or one membrane may be produced by physical or chemical means or by influence of parasites. Author did not secure normal development of pollen grains with such unusual chromosome equipment. — Leonas L. Burlingame. 52 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 331. ScHiEMANN, E. Zur Frage der Briichigkeit der Gerste — eine Berichtigung. [On the question of brittleness in barley — a correction.] Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm.- u. Vererb. 21 : 53. 1919. — A correction of a misstatement in an earlier paper, due to a typographical error, and a reply to a criticism of the author's interpretation of the inheritance of brittleness of rachis in barley crosses. — C. B. Hutchinson. 332. Schmidt, JoHS. IV. The genetic behaviour of a secondary sexual character. Compt. Rend. Trav. Lab. Carlsberg 14: 1-12. 6 pi. 1920. 333. ScHRADER, Franz. Peculiar chromosomal phenomena in a Homopteran. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20: 200-201. 1921. — In Pseudococcus nipae, a Homopteran, both sexes have a diploid number of 10 chromosomes. In the female, 5 tetrads are formed and reduction results in the haploid number of 5 chromosomes as in the ordinary manner. In the male, the growth stages of the spermatocytes show 5 of the 10 chromosomes condensing in advance of the remaining chromosomes. These 5 chromosomes can be identified in following stages by the tendency to remain in a more or less clumped group. No trace of tetrad formation could be found. The 1st spermatocyte division is equatorial and 10 chromosomes go to each pole. The 2nd division is reductional and this apparently takes place in that the 5 clumped chromosomes go to one, and the remaining 5 to the opposite pole. Early spermatids still show 5 chromo- somes and the formation of spermatozoa seems to follow ordinary lines. — Franz Schrader. 334. ScHULTZ, Walther. Kalteschwarzung eines Saugetieres und ihre allgemeinbio- logischen Hinweise. [Darkening of a mammal by cold and its general biological significance.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. 47:43-75. 12 fig. 1920. 335. SiRKS, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: Golds chmidt, R. Der Mendelismus in elementarer Darstellung. [Elementary presentation of Mendelism.j 77 p., 15 fig. P. Parey: Berlin, 1920.] Genetica 2: 532-533. 1920. 336. SiRKS, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: Golds chmidt, R. Einfiihrung in die Vererbungswis- senschaft. Zwanzig Vorlesungen fiir Studierende, Aerzte, Ziichter. Dritte neubearbeitete Auf- lage. [Introduction to the science of genetics. 20 lectures for students, physicians, breeders.) Srd revised ed., 519 p., 178 fig. W. Engelmann: Leipzig, 1920.] Genetica 2: 533-534. 1920. 337. SiRKs, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: Heribert-Nilsson, Nils. Ein tJbergang aus dem isogamen in den heterogamen Zustand in einer Sippe der Oenothera Lamarckiana. (A transi- tion of the isogamic to the heterogamic condition in a strain of Oenothera Lamarckiana.) Hered- itas 1 : 213-220. 1920.] Genetica 2 : 545-546. 1920. 338. SiBKs, M. J. [Dutch rev. of: Malinowski, Edmund. Die Sterilitat der Bastarde im Lichte des Mendelismus. (The sterility of hybrids in the light of Mendelism.) Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm.- u. Vererb. 22: 225-235. 1920.] Genetica 2 : 540-542. 1920. 339. Skupienski, F.-X. Sur la sexualite chez une espece de M3ncomycete Acrasiee Dictyostelium mucoroides. [On sexuality in a species of Acrasiae Dictyostelium mucoroides.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 167: 960-962. 1918. 340. Steinach, E. Verjxingung durch experimentelle Neubelebung der alternden Puber- tatsdriise. [Rejuvenation through experimental revitalization of the senile sex glands.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. 46: 557-619. 9 pi., 7 fig. 1920. — By the use of two methods, viz., section of the vas deferens and transplantation of gonads, Steinach has brought about rejuvenes- cence in senile rats. Great care was used to make sure that the rats were really senile before each experiment was begun. Histological examinations of the testes were made. After sec- tion of the vasa deferentia, a multiplication of Leydig's cells took place, accompanied by a return to the normal vigorous condition of rats in the prime of life. The span of life of these rats exceeded the normal by about 25 per cent. A rejuvenescence also was observed in 3 old men on whom similar operations were performed. Transplantation of testes and ovaries gave like results.— ff. D. Goodale. No. 1, Mat, 1921] GENETICS 53 341. Stuktevant, A. H. The vennillion gene and gynandromorphism. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 17:70-71. 1920. — Morgan and Bridges (Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 278. 1919) conclude from a study of gynandromorphs that the somatic appearance of any part of the body is due to its own chromosomal constitution. A gynandromorph obtained by the writer indicates that this is not true for all factors. The father of the gynandromorph car- ried several sex-linked characters including vermillion, none of which were present in the mother. The whole head of the gynandromorph was male in constitution, since it showed all the S9x-linked characters of the father except vermillion. It is apparent therefore that the vermillion eye color is not determined by the genetic constitution of the eye pigment cells but by that of some other part of the body. — H. H. Plough. 342. Tennent, David H. Chromatic material in hybridization. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec.20: 229. 1921. — Closeness of relationship is by no means indicative of the readiness with which the initial impulse to development may be received, nor a sure criterion of the extent to which it may proceed. Some species hybridize in nature; some eggs show a cortical block which may be removed readily by various methods. The entrance of a spermatozoon following the removal of the cortial block may result in development, or it may result in an instantaneous, or in a slower but none the less complete cytolysis of the egg. — In some crosses, in which a specialized type of development is superimposed on a more general type, development pro- ceeds regularly up to the point of deviation of special from general. Internal block may be- come effective apparently at any stage after the entrance of the spermatozoon. Many degrees of inhibition, ranging from failure of the germ nuclei to unite to failure of synapsis, have been described, but no methods of overcoming its effects have been devised. — From our knowledge of straight-fertilization and of cross-fertilization we have come to look upon development as an attribute of the egg. In eggs of Arbacia fertilized by sperms of Moira, an interordinal cross, a rhythmic appearance of basophilic bodies in the cytoplasm may be seen. A similar phenomenon has been described in many species-fertilized eggs. By the application of binu- clearity hypotheses, founded in part on the chromidial hypothesis, to the metazoan cell, these basophilic bodies have been explained as somatochromatin or trophochromatin. The evi- dence for the emission of chromatin as such from the nucleus is not convincing. In the condi- tions of the experiment mentioned, a foreign enzyme was introduced. Its presence produced a coalescence of granules into coarsely dispersed aggregates. It is suggested that this coales- cence is a result of dehydration due to the activity of the foreign enzyme in the cytoplasm. These bodies are regarded as synthesized in the cytoplasm. We cannot hope to distinguish between more than very widely spaced steps in synthesis within the cell by methods of staining. The egg and spermatozoan may form a harmonious system, the degree of har- mony being a function of cytoplasmic substrate and nuclear enzyme. — David H. Tennent. 343. Ubisch, G. von. II. Beitrag zu einer Faktorenanalyse von Gerste. [Contribution to a factorial analysis of barley.] Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm.- u. Vererb. 20: 65-117. 7 fig., 11 diagrams. 1919. — The results of barley hybridization experiments to determine gametic formulae for nine characters, are given. On the factor basis the conclusions are as follows: (1) Brittleness of rachis; two factors both of which must be present in either homozygous or heterozygous condition in order to produce brittleness. The character is, however, affected by moisture conditions at maturity and by the physiologically correlated laxity of spike. (2) Length of rachis intemodes; one or more lengthening factors may be present. In Hordeum spontaneum three are present in homozygous condition. (3) Sterility of side florets; two factors involved but no data are given. (4) Awn length — there is one lengthening factor A. A alone or modified by presence of either of two other factors gives awn length of common barleys. All three present in homozygous condition produce wild awn type. If A is absent, shorter awns result due to the modifying effect of the other factors. (5) Hoods, — either one or two factors act in conjunction with A, the factor for long awns. Alternative inter- pretations are offered of the peculiar case of long awns appearing in F2 generation in crosses between hooded and short-awned forms. Data are cited showing linkage between factors for long awn and laxness of spike; similarly for short awn and density of spike. (6) Culm length, 54 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, — height of culm is governed by presence of one or more of three possible factors. Data are given showing linkage between tall culms, long awns, and lax spike. (7) HulUessness of kernel, (8) color of glumes, and (9) type of basal bristle are each due to a single genetic factor difference. — F. P. Bussell. 344. Veit, Otto. Studien zur Theorie der vergleichenden Anatomie. (Die Rolie der Ontogenie in der Phylogenie.) [Studies on the theory of comparative anatomy. The role of ontogeny in phylogeny.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. 47: 76-94. 1920. 345. Walther, Ad. R. Sammelreferat, betreffend einige neuere Arbeiten iiber die Vererbung quantitativer Eigenschaften. [Composite review of a few recent works on the inheritance of quantitative characters.] Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm.- u. Vererb. 24: 282-289. 1920. 346. Whiting, P. W. The production of mosaic males from fertilized eggs in Hymenop- tera. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20: 210. 1921. — An orange-eyed mutation in the wasp, Hadro- bracon, acts as a complete recessive to the normal black. Inheritance is "sex-linkoid," the males being haploid and usually parthenogenetically produced. Heterozygous females, iso- lated as virgin, produce black and orange males in equal numbers. When orange males are mated to black females all offspring are black. In reciprocal mating, daughters are black and most of the sons are orange. A few of the sons, however, are black, showing that they come from eggs into which the black-bearing spermatozoon has penetrated. Such anomalous blacks have in some cases bred like black, showing that gonads, as well as eyes, are paternal in origin. Others have bred like orange, showing that, while eyes are paternal, gonads are maternal. Orange-eyed brothers of anomalous blacks have bred like normal orange, except that in 1 case such a male bred like a black. An}' one male when bred to orange female pro- duces either black or orange daughters, never both, showing that gonad is haploid and either paternal or maternal in origin. — P. W. Whiting. 347. W[ooDs], F. A. The meaning of continuous variation in color. Jour. Heredity 11: 84-86. 1 fig. Feb., 1920. — A plate of 20 specimens of the beetle RhtjuchopJiorus cruentus showing a "perfectly continuous graduation in a color pattern," with brief textual comment. — H. J. Banker. 348. Woods, Frederick Adams. A definition of heredity — "Nature vs. Nurture" not a good expression. Jour. Heredity 10: 426-427. Dec, 1919. — The lack of "scientific definite- ness" is pointed out in the terms "nature" and "nurture" because of the many senses in which the words are used, and the use of the expression "heredity" is criticized for the same reason. — Howard J. Banker. 349. Woods, Frederick Adams. Portraits of early Americans. Jour. Heredity 10: 212- 222. Fig. 13-18. May, 1919. — A "Review and supplementary research based upon 'The Founders: Portraits of Persons Born Abroad Who Came to the Colonies in North America before the Year 1701' by Charles Knowles Bolton." The writer believes he finds evidence from this collection and other portraits that there has been a progressive change in the physiognomy of the Nordic race from the mongoloid to the deep-set eye and in other char- acters.— Howard J. Banker. 350. Yamaguchi, Yasuke. Kurze Mitteilung uber dieBeziehungder Aufbliihzeit und des Sitzes der Bliite am Rispenaste zum Korngewichte des Reises. [Brief report on the relation between flowering time and position of the flower on the inflorescence to seed weight in rice.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 34: 136-139. 1 fig. 1920. 351. Yamaguchi, Yasuke. Uber die Beziehung der Aufbliihzeit und des Sitzes der Bliite am Rispenaste zum Korngewichte des Reises. [The relation of flowering time and the position of the flower on the inflorescence to seed weight in rice.] Ber. Ohara Inst. Landw. Forsch. 1 : 451-517. 3d fig. 1919. No. 1, May, 1921] GENETICS 55 352. Yasui, Kono. Genetical studies in Portulaca grandiflora. Bot. Mag. T6ky6 34: 55-65. PI. 1 {colored), fig. 1. 1920. — Crosses are described between single and double races belonging to 7 color types. Doubleness is dominant. Yellow is due to a yellow flavone deriv- ative, which in the presence of a reducing factor R yields a magenta anthocyanin. White races lack either the chromogen factor C alone or both C and R. Yellow single by white single CCrr X ccRR gives magenta Fi CcRr and Fo by selfing of 9 magenta, 3 yellow, and 4 white. Hybrid double magentas CcRrDd by white singles ccRRdd give magenta doubles, magenta singles, white doubles, and white singles in equal numbers. By yellow fsingle they give equal numbers of yellow and magenta {CcRrDd X CCrrdd = iCCRrDd : iCcRrDd : iCCRrdd : iCcRrdd : ICCrrDd : iCcrrDd : ICCrrdd : iCcrrdd). Double whites CcRrDd by pale yellow singles CCrrdd give equal numbers of magenta and yellow doubles and singles. Single scarlet by double white gives magenta double, which mated to single white gives equal numbers of magenta and white doubles and singles. The selfed singles from this give singles only; the selfed doubles, 3 doubles to 1 single. The single mated to the doubles give 1 : 1 ratio. — L. L. Bxirlingame. 353. Zeleny, Chahles. The direction and frequency of mutation in a series of multiple allelomorphs. [Abstract.] Anat. Rec. 20: 210-211. 1921.— Full eye, bar eye, and ultra- bar ej^e in Drosophila melanogasler constitute a series of multiple allelomorphs with decreasing facet number and increasing dominance. Bar arose from full and ultra-bar from bar. Obser- vations were made of the direction and frequency of mutation within pure stocks of the mem- bers of the series. In the full-eye stocks no mutations to bar or ultra-bar were observed dur- ing a period of 6 years among 46,290 counted individuals and among a much larger number of uncounted ones. On the other hand, the reverse mutation from bar to full occurred 52 times among 84,159 individuals or once in 1618, and from ultra-bar to full 5 times out of 8681, or once in 1736. Correspondingly there were only 3 mutations of bar to ultra-bar, including the original mutant, among 84,159 individuals or 1 in 28,053, while the reverse mutation of ultra- bar to bar occurred 3 times in 8681 or once in 2894 and was observed also at another time when the number of individuals examined was not being recorded. Selection for high and low facet number had no effect upon the frequency of any of the mutations. — In this allelomorphic series therefore (1) reverse mutations are much more frequent than the original ones, (2) original progress to ultra-bar is through bar but reversion may go back directly to full as well as through bar, and (3) the frequency of mutation is independent of upward and down- ward selection. — Charles Zeleny. 354. ZiNN, Jacob. On variation in Tartary buckwheat, Fagopyrum tataricum (L.) Gaertn. Genetics 4 : 534-586. 11 fig. 1919.— This publication records the results of a study of a highly variable, ever-sporting race of Fagopyrum tataricum Gaertn. discovered by the author. A strain was isolated which produced a large number of flowers with supernumerary carpels, the number of carpels varying from the normal 3 to as high as 25. The frequency of abnormal flowers as a rule decreased with increase in number of carpels. In those flowers having more than 6 carpels there was a tendency for an even number of carpels to occur more frequently than an odd number. Associated with the abnormal gynoecia are abnormal perigones with segments varying from the normal 5 to as high as 18. There is some correlation between ab- normal number of carpels and abnormal number of perigone segments. The proportion of abnormal flowers in a given race depends on the environment and is very constant under a given set of environmental conditions. The condition of nutrition had little or no effect on this ratio but high temperature and humidity seemed to increase the proportion of abnormal flowers. Selection for 5 years had no effect on the ever-sporting race. The greatest abnormal development occurred on the 3 lower branches and in the basal region of the terminal raceme. Other variations noted, which seemed to be of the same type, were floral prolifications, often giving rise to syncarpous fruits and fasciation of vegetative parts. — T. O. Sprague. 355. ZiNN, Jacob. Wheat investigations. 1. Pure lines. Maine Agric. Exp. Sta,. Bull. 285. 49 p., 3 pi., 8 fig. 1920.— In 1916, 259 pure lines of wheat were planted at Aroostook 56 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, Farm. These had been taken from local fields devoted to following varieties or groups: Red Fife, Preston, Bluestem, Marquis, Canada Red (Ladoga), unnamed, and durum. In 1917 these were reduced to 91. Seven pure lines secured from Minnesota were added. These were Marquis, Bluestem, Preston (Velvet Chaff), Roy alton (red and white), and two durums. Minnesota lines showed 19 per cent increase in kernel weight when grown one year in Maine, No further increase was secured. — Preston kernels from Minnesota lines showed slight tend- ency to yellow berry while similar tendency in durum was very strong when grown under Maine conditions. — Variations in yield among various pure lines were rather marked. — Minne- sota pure lines showed but slight loss in crude protein content, except durum lines which showed marked loss. Taking the 40 pure lines grown and analyzed in 1917 and 1918, the correlation coefficient of protein content was 0.381 ± 0.092. — Certain Red-Fife lines gave sat- isfactory yields and best baking results. Preston and Bluestem lines gave reasonably good results. Marquis and Canada-Red lines were rather disappointing. Durum lines and certain unnamed ones were poorest. — L. R. Waldron. HORTICULTURE J. H. GoiTRLEY, Editor H, E. Knowlton, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 14, 213, 523, 526, 543, 577, 593, 601, 621, 659, 706, 707) FRUITS AND GENERAL HORTICULTURE 356. Allen, W. J. An experiment with table grapes on sultana stock. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 600. 1920. — Judging by the yield, grafting trials showed that Corrichon and Ohanez vines do better by 50 per cent on their own stock than when grafted on sultana stock. — L. R. Waldron, 357. Allen, W. J., S. A. Hogg, and W. leGay Brereton. Orchard notes. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 599-600, 677-678, 748-750, 830-831, 898-900. 1920.— Practical sug- gestions of a timely nature are given upon care of orchards and products therefrom. — L. R. Waldron. 358. Anonymous. Delmas pecan. Amer. Nut Jour. 12 : 44. 1920. — The original Delmas pecan tree was grown from a nut planted by A. G. Delmas at Scranton, Mississippi, about 1877. The nut is large to very large in size, oblong ovate, has 4 conspicuous ridges, and is of good cracking quality. It has plump, straw colored kernels of rather soft texture and good quality. — E. L. Overholser. 359. Anonymous. Fertilizing effects of sulphur on vines. Cyprus Agric. Jour. IS: 190- 191. 1920. — This article is a summary of results secured by M. Jean Chanzet, a French investigator, from an experiment undertaken to ascertain the action of sulphur upon the cultivation and yield of vines grown in the open. Two series of experiments were conducted, the 1st of which was designed to study the effect of sulphur without manure and the 2nd its effect with manure. The former gave an increase of over 25 per cent and the latter an increase of 27 per cent. — W. Stuart. 360. Anonymous. Increasing leaf growth by peforating the root. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2 : 14. 1920. — Experiments by Mario Calvino in Cuba are concerned, in which horizontal per- forations of the primary root of cabbage, lettuce, parsley, etc., resulted in more luxurious development of the heads; and injections of nutritive solutions into the trunks of sterile pear trees caused them to bear again. — Chas. H. Otis. No. 1, May, 1921] HORTICULTURE 57 361. Anonymous. Largest and best equipped walnut packing house. Amer. Nut Jour. 13:73. 1920.— The La Puente Valley Walnut Growers Association has established at La Puente, California, a walnut packing house three times as large as any other, and it has all modern facilities for grading, cleaning, and packing. — E. L. Overholser. 3G2. Anonymous. Metodos de transplantar coqueiros. [Methods of transplanting coco- nuts.] Bol. Agric. Nova Goa [Portuguese East India] 1:95-97. 1919. Popular.— J. A. Stevenson. 363. Anonymous. One hundred million native pecan trees. Amer. Nut Jour. 12:55. 1920. — Burbank's statement is quoted in which the possibilities of pecan culture in the south, especially in Texas, are emphasized. Pecan trees make a prolific growth in western Texas and come into bearing the 1st or 2nd year after transplanting. — E. L. Overholser. 364. Anonymous. The pruning and care of young apple trees. Better Fruit 15^:3-4. 1920. — Specific detailed directions are given for pruning from the time of planting to the bearing age. The protection of young trees from windstorms, snow, and ice is discussed. — A. E. Murneek. 365. Anonymous. Spanish chestnuts. Cyprus Agric. Jour. 14, 15: 146-148. 1919, 1920. —The Agricultural Department of Cyprus since 1900 has distributed several thousand Spanish chestnuts free of charge to villagers in the hills. It has been found that most of the trees begin fruiting in the 4th year. A large well-grown tree is claimed to yield in a season fruit worth as much as £5. — W. Stuart. 366. Anonymous. Wolford pecan. Amer. Nut Jour. 12 : 44. 1920.— Propagation of this variety in localities other than McKinney, Texas, where it originated is recommended. The yield, very good quality, and excellent cracking quality compensate to a considerable extent for the medium, or slightly below medium, sized nuts and the fact that the tree is a rather slender grower. — E. L. Overholser. 367. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Fletcher, S. W. Strawberry growing. Rural Science Series, xxii + 325 -p. New York: The Macmillan Company: New York, 1917.] Sci. Prog. [London] 14:510. 1920. 368. Barker, B. T. P. A survey of west of England farm orchards. Ann. Rept. Agric. and Hort. Res. Sta. Univ. Bristol 1919:110-121. 1919.— Results are given of a study of orchard conditions in the Counties of Devon, Gloucester, Somerset, Wiltshire, and Worcester. —W. H. Chandler. 369. Barker, B. T. P., and A. H. Lees. Factors governing fruit-bud formation. II. The normal annual growth of the apple and pear. Ann. Rept. Agric. and Hort. Res. Sta. Univ. Bristol 1919: 85-92. 1919. — Results are given of observations and experimentation concern- ing the growth of the different buds on a twig. On a Vicar of Wakefield pear, buds had pushed out enough to be measured by March 14. Up to April 12 there was little difference in the amount of growth from the different buds, but after that time the terminal buds gained precedence. The author's results suggest that this difference among the buds is partially explained, but not entirely so, by the work of Loeb, according to which growth of the apical bud depresses the growth of buds back of it, either by the use of the available nutrients or by the formation of a substance that, moving backward, inhibits growth at the other buds. By examining the buds in winter and the same ones again when growth had started it was found that weak dormant buds produce weak growth in spring. The authors think that the growth of a bud is influenced by (a) temperature, (b) inhibition effect suggested by Loeb, (c) bud strength, (d) root action, (e) variety influence.— PF. H. Chandler. 370. Barker, B. T. P., and A. H. Lees. Factors governing fruit-bud formation. III. The effect of notching and ringing on apple trees. Ann. Rept. Agric. and Hort. Res. Sta. 58 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, Univ. Bristol 1919: 93-98. 1919.— A general discussion is presented of the practises of ring- ing and notching with a preliminary report on some experiments. Rings of varying widths were made on main trunks and branches, and knife-edge rings on twigs. Ringing, if portions of bark were actually removed, caused the dormant buds below the ring to grow. More buds pushed out as a result of May ringing than as a result of July ringing. Knife-edge ringing on the twigs caused buds to grow into spurs or shoots on which the basal bud made the most growth. Notching above a bud caused the latter to make more growth than that made by similar buds not so notched. Notching below a bud keeps the latter dormant. — W. H. Chandler. 371. Barker, B. T. P., and G. T. Spinks. Fruit breeding investigations. Ann. Rept. Agric. and Hort. Res. Sta. Univ. Bristol 1919: 76-84. 1919. — A statement of breeding work in progress with apples, plums, cherries, currants, gooseberries, raspberries, and strawberries. —W. H. Chandler. 372. Batchelor, L. D., and D. C. Wtlie. Treating frosted trees. Amer. Nut Jour. 13: 14. 1920. — Trees not badly frosted should be cut back to good healthy tissues, allowed to grow, and the new growth thinned out in the fall. The same principle should be applied in the case of badly frosted trees. A good vigorous shoot below the frosted area is selected, and the tree cut back to about 1 inch above this shoot. All other shoots on the trunk are removed. Wounds are immediately sealed with a thick mixture of linseed oil and white lead. This mix- ture is preferred to the black asphaltum wound dressings. — E. L. Overholser. 373. Bixbt, W. C. Nut notes at Baldwin, New York. Amer. Nut Jour. 13: 12, 1920.— Observations made on specimens at the Arnold Arboretum showed that in some respects the shellbark is more closely akin to the pecan than to the hickories in spite of the great resemblance, in leaves and fruit, to the shagbark and mockernut. Incase of northern varieties now propa- gated, no definite information is available as to whether they bear an abundance of both stami- nate and pistillate flowers, and whether or not the latter mature at the same time. Conse- quently, several varieties should be planted to insure good crops. — E. L. Overholser. 374. Bixbt, W. G. Propagated hickories. Amer. Nut Jour. 13:70-71. 1920.— Experi- ences of nut growers in breeding and propagating the hickory are reviewed. The author concludes: " .... am convinced that as soon as we can furnish the fine hickories we have in commercial quantities, they will command prices equal to those paid for the finest pecans." — E. L. Overholser. 375. BoRNER. Denkschrift zur Organization der Rebenziichtung in Deutschland. [Memorial paper on the organization of vine breeding in Germany.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 689-692. 1920.— The author outlines the problems, the methods of procedure, and gives an estimate of the cost of maintaining a selection garden. The total cost of this type of work in Germany is also estimated. — A. J. Pieters. 376. Bullard, W. P. Pecan standards, brands and marketing. Amer. Nut Jour. 13: 34, 47. 1920.— The "Brand method" is claimed to be best. The advantages of a cooperative organization such as the National Pecan Growers' Exchange are detailed. — E. L. Overholser. 377. Chevalier, A. Sur I'origine des pommiers a cidre cultives en Normandie et en Bretagne. [The origin of cider apples cultivated in Normandy and Brittany.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171 : 521-523. 1920.— The 500 to 1000 varieties of cider apples in northwest France yield a crop which in a good year is valued at 500 million francs. The history of apple culture in Normandy and Brittany is given. It is held that the varieties have arisen from the four elementary species of Mains communis, namely, M. acerba, M. dasyphylla, M. praecox, and M. prunifolia, either directly or through crosses with the small fruited varieties of Asia, such as M. baccata. — C. H. Farr. No. 1, Mat, 1921] HORTICULTURE 59 378. CoviLLE, Frederick V. The influence of cold in stimulating the growth of plants. Jour. Agric. Res. 22: 151-160. PI. 20-35. 1920.— Such woody plants as the blueberry taken into a warm greenhouse in autumn refused to grow, although plants left out in the cold through the winter grew at once on being taken into such a greenhouse. A single freezing would not cause them to grow, but a prolonged chilling, even above the freezing point, would do so. When only a portion of the plant was chilled, that portion only started into growth on being brought into a warm room. The author thinks that "during the process of chilling the starch grains stored in the cells of the plant are at first separated by the living and active cell mem- branes from the enzyme that would transform the starch into sugar, but when the plant is chilled the vital activity of the cell membrane is weakened so that the enzyme 'leaks' through it, comes in contact with the starch, and turns it into sugar." He thinks that when the plant finally starts to grow without having been chilled the same principle applies, the mem- brane separating starch from the enzyme being weakened. The same principle is believed to apply when seeds are benefited by stratification. — W. H. Chandler. 379. Demaree, J. B. Some precautions in top-working pecan trees. Amer. Nut Jour, 13 : 74. 1920. — Several reasons are given for preferring coal tar for sealing up wounds. An admixture of creosote is recommended because of its greater penetrating and antiseptic prop- erties. Applications should be repeated after two or three months, and as frequently there- after as may seem necessary. — E. L. Overholser. 380. Deming, W. C. Plant black walnut. Amer. Nut Jour. 13: 10. 1920.— The author takes exception to Bley's statement and advocates the planting of black walnut along road- sides.— E. L. Overholser. 381. Edwards, C. L, Selling standard pecans. Amer. Nut Jour. 12: 27. 1920. 382. Edwards, C. L. Transforming native to cultivated pecans in Texas. A.mer, Nut Jour. 12:9, 13. 1920. 383. Forkett, C. Pecan breeding. Amer. Nut Jour. 12: 69. 1920. — A report on cross- ing Columbian, Success, Russel, Schley and Pabst varieties. Since most of the trees have not come into bearing no definite results are given. — E. L. Overholser. 384. GiMiNGHAM, C. T., AND O. Grove. Trial cider orchards. Ann. Kept. Agric. and Hort. Res. Sta. Univ. Bristol 1919:99-109. 1919. — A description of conditions and treat- ments in some trial orchards in Devon, Gloucester, Monmouth, and Somerset Counties. — W. H. Chandler: 385. Hoover, M. H. The farms by the side of the road. Amer. Nut Jour. 13: 38-39, 46. 1920. — Economic and conservation considerations emphasize the unrealized national asset of nut trees planted along roadsides. — E. L. Overholser. 386. Howard, H. L. More about root stocks. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. California 9: 93-95. 1920. — The French prune makes very poor union with the apricot root. Japanese pear stock is more resistant to pear blight than the French stock and successfully resists attack of woolly aphis. Some of the Siberian seedlings give great promise as regards blight resistance. By bench-grafting long scions of Surprise pear on Japanese roots the trunks and bases of main branches are obtained blight resistant. — E. L. Overholser. 387. IsBELL, C. L. Pecans on Piedmont soil in Alabama [U. S. A.]. Amer. Nut Jour. 13: 69. 1920. 388. Jones, J. F. Pecans, other than those of the well-known sections. Amer. Nut Jour. 12: 25, 30. 1920. — In its natural range the pecan is found farther north along the Mississippi in Iowa and Illinois than elsewhere in the U. S. A. Best varieties, like Marquardt and Witte, 60 HORTICULTURE [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, were selected for northern propagation. Iowa has a climate which is colder than that of the same latitude farther east, and pecan trees there are hardier and have to mature fruit in a shorter season. These considerations are important in selecting varieties for northern plant- ing.— E. L. Ovcrholser. 389. Lewis, C. I. Sites and soils for small fruits in the Northwest. Better Fruit 15^: 6, 17-18. 1920. — Adaptation of the various sections and localities of the Northwest to the commercial cultivation of the different varieties of small fruits is considered in detail. A rather heavy soil and fairly humid climatic conditions are of particular importance to the successful growing of almost all small fruits, the strawberry being a marked exception in this respect. — A. E. Murneek. 390. LiTTLEPAGE, T. P. Black walnut for roadsides. Amer. Nut Jour. 13 : 10. 1920. 391. Lucks, R. Ueber die Zusammensetzung, insbesondere iiber den Starkegehalt, einiger Reisigarten. [Concerning the composition, in particular the starch content, of certain kinds of prunings.] Landw. Jahrb. 35:585-615. 1919. — The author calls attention to the possible value as fodder of the prunings from vines, fruit trees, and from certain shade trees. Twigs collected in December were studied with reference to general chemical composition, and microscopically to determine relative starch content and lignification of walls. The following species were used: Acer platanoides, A. pseudoplatanus, A. negundo, Aesculus hippocastanum, Betula verrucosa, Populus virginiana, Pirus communis, P. malus, Tilia platy- phyllos, Ulmus campestris, and Vitis vinifera. The estimated starch content was least in Betula verrucosa and greatest in Vitis vinifera. The relative lignification of the cell walls was least in Tilia platyphyllos and greatest in Ulmus. The paper is accompanied by several plates showing photomicrographs of cross sections and starch grains in various species. — A. J. Pieters. 392. Ow^EN, T. F. Budded tree campaign in Texas. Amer. Nut Jour. 13: 7. 1920. 393. Patterson, J. H. Cost and development of pecan unit orchards. Amer. Nut Jour, 13 : 36. 1920. — The ideal development of a pecan orchard requires rich soil enriched each year by ploughing under legumes. Under these conditions the orchard will yield a paying crop in 10 years. — E. L. Overholser. 394. Pearcy, K. Timely notes on Oregon nut growing. Better Fruit 15^: 12, 24. 1920. — A general discussion is presented on filbert growing in Oregon. Varietal differences are em- phasized. Some of the main commercial varieties appear to be self-sterile. Investigations conducted at present by the Oregon Agric. Exp. Sta. may throw some light on the pollination problem in the filbert. — A. E. Murneek. 395. Ramsey, F. T. Some of the older varieties of pecans of Texas origin. Amer. Nut Jour. 13 : 67-68. 1920. — Reviews are presented of the important varieties, giving dominant characteristics. Instances are cited to show that varieties from the arid western regions when grown farther east under more humid atmospheric conditions decline, both as to health of the trees and size and plumpness of the nuts. — E. L. Overholser. 396. Rasmussen, P. M. Pecans in California. Amer. Nut Jour. 12: 30. 1920.— The best nuts of Fresno County are grown at Selma, which is also a promising district for the walnut and almond. — E. L. Overholser. 397. Read, F. W. The new shipping-point inspection service on fruits and vegetables. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. California 9:371-374. 1920.— The inspection work is being undertaken by the Standardization Service at terminal marketing points. A certificate of inspection is issued which includes details of car storage and condition and quality of pack and fruit. The certificate is receivable as prima-facie evidence in the courts of the State. — E. L. Overholser. No. 1, May, 1921] HORTICULTURE 61 398. Reed, C. A. Pecan varieties, grades, standard and packages. Amer. Nut Jour. 12: 82, 93. 1920. 399. Reed, G. A. The status of the American nut industry. Amer. Nut Jour. 12:41. 1920, 400. RisiEN, E. E. Sovereign pecan. Amer. Nut Jour. 12 : 44. 1920. — The variety was first named "Texas prolific" and later received its present name because of its high quality. The nut is large, oblong, generally symmetrical, bright red to reddish brown in color, and has a plump kernel of fine quality. — E. L. Overholser. 401. Salisbury, E. J. [Rev. of: Duke of Bedford, and Spencer Pickering. Sci- ence and fruit growing, xxii + S51 p., 4 pl-, 41' fig- MacMillan & Co., Ltd.: London, 1919.] Sci. Prog. [London] 14:506-507. 1920. 402. Sevier, H. Almond growers' problem. Amer. Nut Jour. 12 : 30. 1920. — The prob- lem is the development of varieties blooming late enough to escape frost. At present the only important variety which blooms late is the Drake, and even this one is not late enough to escape all frosts. — E. L. Overholser. 403. Simon ds,O.C. Nut trees in landscape work. Amer. Forestry 26: 618-621. 7fi^. 1920. 404. Stickey, H. p. Varieties of pecans for Georgia. Amer. Nut Jour. 12: 12. 1920. — The varieties Alley, Moneymaker, Moore, Pabst, Stuart, Schley, and Teche are recom- mended on the basis of results obtained at the Georgia Agric. Exp. Sta. since 1908. Trees should be planted preferably 50-60 feet apart. — E. L. Overholser. 405. Taylor, R. H. The nut industry in the U. S. from a practical standpoint. Amer. Nut Jour. 12: 37-38. 1920. — At present commercial culture of the almond is limited largely to California, which produces 99 per cent of the total crop. Commercial production of wal- nuts in the U. S. A. is at present largely confined to the Pacific coast, in fact largely to Cali- fornia, which at present produces 96 per cent of the domestic product. Pecans, however, are best produced in the southern states. — E. L. Overholser. 406. Weldon, G. p. An old peach under a new name, — Ontario. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. California 9:357-362. 1920. — The name Ontario has been substituted for Southern Tuscan. It is quite distinct from the northern variety, Tuskena. The Ontario is round rather flat variety, its leaf serration is more marked, a more regular bearer, has a smaller and more roundish pit with shallow convolutions, and is of much better quality than the Tuskena. — E. L. Overholser . 407. Whitten, J. C. Frost control and related factors. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. California 8: 675-678. 1919. 408. Written, J. C. Transplanting deciduous fruit trees. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. California 9: 73-75. 1920. 409. WiTTE, O. F. Nut culture in Ohio. Amer. Nut Jour. 12 : 7. 1920. 410. Wylie, D. C. Heavy walnut planting. Amer. Nut Jour. 12:77. 1920. — Shortage of nursery stock is attributed to abnormal conditions created during the war, and to the attempt of the* producer to meet a large increased demand. The northern black walnut {Juglans hindsii) is considered the best stock for grafting. The author outlines the geo- graphical distribution of the new walnut plantations. — E. L. Overholser. 411. Young, F. D. Smoke and direct radiation in fruit protection. Better Fruit 15^: 5-6. 1920.— Reprint from California Citrograph 6:6, 40. 1920.— A. E. Murneek. 62 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, FLORICULTURE AND ORNAMENTAL HORTICULTURE 412. Anonymous. How spring flowers can bloom unharmed in spite of frosts. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2: 27. 1920. 413. Anonymous. Rose cultivation and extraction of rose oil in Cyprus. Cyprus Agric. Jour. 15: 195-196. 1920. — At Milikouri, which is the principal rose growing village, the num- ber of rose plants has doubled in the last 3 years and the industry is extending at Pedoulas, Kykko, and Chakistra. 3000 plants were grown by the students of the School Garden at Agros. Templos, Kyrenia, and Limassol are mentioned as newly developing centers. — W. Stuart. 414. Ward, E. N. The cultivation of flowers for profit. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:894. 1920. — General suggestions are given. — L. R. Waldron. VEGETABLE CULTURE 415. Anonymous. How to grow your own seed. Cyprus Agric. Jour. 15: 178-180. 1920. — Owing to the fact that there are no reliable seed growers in Cyprus and that imported seeds are not satisfactory due to not being acclimated, farmers and gardeners are advised to raise their own seed of such crops as beans, Indian corn, lettuces, melons, peas, cucumbers, spinach, and tomato. Recommendations are given for producing high grade seed. — W. Stuart. 416. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Boyle, J. G. Vegetable growing, ix + 334 P-, 154 fig' Lea and Febiger: Philadelphia and New York, 1917.] Sci. Prog. [London] 14: 509-510. 1920. 417. CocKERELL, T. D. A. The Girasole or Jerusalem artichoke. Monthly Bull. State Commission Hort. California 8:243-250. 1919. — The Girasole, Helianthus tuberosus, is a native of America, is tall, erect, and has an abundance of foliage and underground tubers. The latter mature in the fall, remain in the soil during winter unaffected by frost, and are good for domestic use and as animal feed. The tubers do not contain starch but instead inulin, which for assimilation requires hydrolysis. Artificial hydrolysis may prove practicable and desirable. — E. L. Overholser. 418. Pedersen, a. Almindelig dansk Gartnerforenings Planteavls-Udvalgs Beretning for 1919. [Danish Garden Union, report of experiments, 1919.] Gartner-Tidende [K0ben- havn] 36: 77-86. 1920. — Experiments are reported with cultivation of carrots and leeks, as well as investigations on varieties of tomatoes, peas, and beans best fitted for the country. — Ernst Gram. 419. Reed, C. A. The American nut industry as a whole. Amer. Nut Jour. 12: 70-71. 1920. — In the U. S. A. there are five nut organizations, all striving to stimulate nut produc- tion and consumption. The author outlines the geographical distribution in the U. S. A. of walnuts, pecans, and almonds, and points out some important considerations in the pro- duction of nuts. — E. L. Overholser. 420. ScHLEiNiTZ, Marie Frexjn von. Uber die Zusammensetzung von Gemiise Abfall. [Composition of vegetable waste.] Landw. Jahrb. 35:781-807. 1919.— The. author reports extensive studies on the proportions and chemical composition of edible matter and waste in various vegetables. — A. J. Pieters. 421. Temple, C. E. Spacing tomato plants for field spraying. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 59. 1920. No. 1, May, 1921] HORTICULTURE 63 HORTICULTURE— PRODUCTS 422. Anonymous. Charcoal from nut shells. Amer. Nut Jour. 12:7. 1920. — The Cali- fornia Walnut Growers' Association has decided to proceed with the installation of equip- ment for making charcoal out of walnut shells from the cracking plants. Of all by-products suggested the charcoal seemed the most practicable to manufacture. — E. L. Overholser. 423. Christie, A. W. The University farm evaporator. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. Cali- fornia 9: 125-130. 1920. — A detailed description of the evaporator is followed by a report on investigations concerning temperature, humidity, and economy. The evaporator provides better sanitation and imparts a better quality to the product than when sun dried. It also reduces the risk from adverse weather conditions. Careful handling of the product is neces- sary where the temperature is allowed to go beyond 170° F. as chemical decomposition may result, especially if recirculation of the air is not provided for. — E. L. Overholser. 424. Cruess, W. V. Discussion of fruit evaporation. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. Cali- fornia 8: 685-688. 1919. — Properly evaporated fruits are superior to the average sun-dried article in point of quality and sanitation. They also require less sulfuring and hence have a lower sulfurous acid content. Evaporation by the circulation of artificially heated air is an economy. — E. L. Overholser. 425. Cruess, W. V. Types of evaporators. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. California 9: 104-113. 1920. — General principle involved in evaporation of fruit and vegetables is the utilization of the high water-absorbing capacity of hot, dry air. A rise in temperature of 27° F. doubles the water-absorbing capacity of the air. Recirculation of the spent air, besides being an economy, maintains the relative humidity within a desirable range. Fruit enters the evaporator at a moderate temperature, and as it dries higher temperatures can be used, thus lessening the danger of decomposing the fruit sugars. Evaporators are placed in three classes: (1) Natural draft evaporators; (2) forced draft evaporators; and (3) distillation types, including vacuum evaporators. In a vacuum drier the large reduction of oxygen and the lower temperature give a product unexcelled by other types of evaporators. — E. L. Overholser. 426. Grove, Otto. Cider making experiments for the season, 1918-19. Ann. Rept, Agric. and Hort. Res. Sta. Univ. Bristol 1919: 14-17. 1919.— This paper reports the results of experiments in making fermented cider from mixed apples and from single varieties, and in making perry. Analyses are given of the fresh cider and of the cider after a given amount of sugar had been added. The whole had been diluted with the second pressing from the pomace, to which water had been added. Specific gravity after fermentation and alcoholic content after one year in the bottle are given. — W. H. Chandler. 427. Grove, Otto. The relation between the rate of fermentation and the content of nitrogenous matter in apple juice. Ann. Rept. Agric. and Hort. Res. Sta. Univ. Bristol 1919: 20-22. 1919. — Samples of cider from 6 varieties were fermented and analyzed for nitrogen. Those containing 0.0221, 0.0135, 0.0146, and 0.0168 per cent of nitrogen fermented regularly until only a trace of sugar was left. That with 0.0033 per cent nitrogen fermented very slightly and 6.3 per cent of sugar was left. That containing 0.0094 per cent nitrogen fermented slowly and 1.04 per cent of sugar was left. — W. H. Chandler. 428. Grove, Otto. Some experiments on ropiness in cider. Ann. Rept. Agric. and Hort. Res. Sta. Univ. Bristol 1919:18-19. 1919. — A bacillus capable of causing ropiness in cider had previously been isolated. Eight samples of cider were inoculated with this bacillus during the summer of 1917. By early summer, 1918, 5 of these samples had developed ropi- ness while no uninoculated samples had done so. — W. H. Chandler. 429. Jaffa, M. E. Standards for water content of dried fruits. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. California 9: 117. 1920.— The old limit of 27 per cent of water was higher than neces- 64 MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, sary; 24 per cent should be the maximum allowed for any dried fruit. Interstate trade demands uniformity of laws regarding maximum water content of fruit products. — E. L. Overholser. 430. Nichols, P. F. A brief summary of activities of the U. S. Department of Agriculture in dehydration. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. California 9: 133-136. 1920.— The basic prin- ciple of dehydration is the reduction of moisture to a point where bacteria, yeasts, and molds, the chief agents of spoilage, are unable to grow. Starchy and sugary vegetables and fruits generally do not show spoilage until a moisture content of 25-30 per cent is reached. The optimum temperature for the spoilage organisms is 70-98° F. ; some grow below 70 and few above 100° F. The Indian meal moth (Plodia interpunctella) is most common and destructive insect pest found in the dried products. — E. L. Overholser. 431. Tufts, W. P. The Oregon tunnel evaporator. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. Califor" nia 9: 131-133. 1920. — The temperature is allowed to rise gradually from 90 or 100 to 120 or 140° F., and the finishing temperatures vary from 160 to 185° F., the process generally requiring 24-36 hours. A strong objection to this type of drier is that the fruit can be exam- ined only in the last stages of evaporation. However, it has been found that the circulation of air is such that fruit dries almost perfectly in proportion to the distance from the fire. — E. L. Overholser. MORPHOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HISTOLOGY OF VASCULAR PLANTS E. W. SiNNOTT, Editor (See also in this issue Entries 97, 391, 512, 573, 657, 688) 432. Anonymous. [Rev. of Beauvisage, L. Contribution k I'etude de la famille des Ternstroemiacees. (Contribution to the anatomical study of the Ternstroemiaceae.) Thesis Doct. de Science, Poitier. 470 p., 2^9 fig. 1920.] Bull. Sci. Pharm. 27: 598-599. 1920.— The author examined more than 50 genera and found that 30 of these, generally accredited to the Ternstroemiaceae, do not actually belong to it. He believes that only Ternstroemia, Adiandra, Schima, Haemocharis, Camellia, Thea, and Stetoartia belong to this family, and bases his opinion on an anatomical and morphological study of the plants. The general char- acteristics of these genera are: The flowers have 5 petals and 5 sepals, overlapping each other; numerous stamens, their meristems united with the corolla; a well developed cuticle; numer- ous calcium oxalate crystals; sclereids in the cortical parenchyma of the stem, in the pith, in the limb, in the sepals, in the petals, and in the pericarp. They differ from the Hypericaceae, Guttiferae, and Dipterocarpaceae in the absence of secretion channels. — H. Engelhardt. 433. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Chambeklain, C. J. The living cycads. xiv + 172 p., 91 fig. University of Chicago Press: Chicago.] Sci. Prog. [London] 14: 507-508. 1920. 434. C, A. H. [Rev. of: Arber, Agnes. Water plants, a study of aquatic angiosperms. 436 p., 172 fig. Cambridge Univ. Press: Cambridge, England, 1920.] Jour. Botany 58: 296-298. 1920. 435. Chifflot, F. Sur les canatix secreteurs gommiferes des racines de Cycadacees, et plus particulierement ceux du Stangeria paradoxa T. Moore. [On the latex ducts of the roots of cycads, and especially those of Stangeria paradoxa.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 257-258. 1920. — Twelve species of cycads representing 8 genera were studied and in only 1 case were latici^erous tubules found in all parts of the root. In this instance they did not occur in the very young rootlets and in the coralloid roots. The canals, whether they anas- tomose or not, are endocelic. They are usually formed schizogenously, but in old roots may have a schizo-lysigenous origin. — C. H. Farr. Hi No. 1, May, 1921] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 65 436. Francos, G. Self-graf ting by approach. Cyprus Agric. Jour. 14, 15: 145-146. 1919, 1920. — The union of 2 plants of Phaseolus muUiflorus was observed by the author to have occurred some 2 feet above the ground, from which point they became joined together in 1 stem. One of the stems was cut off 3 inches below the point of union and it was found that the upper portion of the plant was able to draw its nourishment from the one on which it was self-grafted. The most interesting feature, however, was the putting forth of aerial roots at the point where the stem was cut off. — W. Stuart. 437. Grier, N. M. Light correlated variations of the sterile stem of Equisetum sylvaticum. Rhodora 22: 165-167. 1920. — In a study of this species from a colony growing at Bellevue, Pennsylvania, the author makes comparisons between plants growing constantly well shaded and those receiving sunlight throughout the day. Correlation tabulations from 100 indi- viduals of each habitat indicated that those growing in the sun had on the average a larger number of whorls to the stem, and more leaves to the particular whorl chosen for counting, and also that their stems were longer, or at least they had their whorls of leaves growing higher on the stem, than those from shady habitat. — James P. Poole. 438. Heusser, C. Over de voortplantingsorganen van Hevea brasiliensis Miill Arg. [The reproductive organs of Hevea brasiliensis Miill Arg.] Mededeel. Alg. Proefsta. A. V. R. O. S. [Medan, Sumatra] Rubberserie 24. 1919. — Reprint from Arch. Rubbercult. 3 : 455-515. 1919. 439. Lecomte, Henri. Les canaux secreteurs radiaux du bois. [The radial secretory canals in wood.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171:533-536. 1920. — Radial secretory canals are present in Pinus, Picea, and Larix, but absent in 11 other genera of conifers. Six genera of the Anacardiaceae are found with them and 2 without. Their occurrence in the Burseraceae is problematical. In Spondias the radial canals are found to connect with the longitudinal canals of the secondary wood but not with those of the pith. — C. H. Farr. 440. Maas, J. G. J. A. De bloembiologie van Hevea brasiliensis. [The floral biology of Hevea brasiliensis.] Mededeel. Alg. Proefsta. A. V. R. O. S. [Medan, Sumatra] Rubberserie 22. 1919.— Reprint from Arch. Rubbercult. 3 : 288-312. 1919. 441. Resvoll, Thekla R. En utpraeget selvbest0ver. [A distinctly self-pollinated plant.] Nyt Mag. Naturvidenskab. 56: 131-135. 4 fig- 1919. — Description of mode of self- pollination of E-pilohium anagallidifolium Lam. by pressure of stamens against stigma. — A. Gundersen. 442. Salisbury, E. J. Botany. Sci. Prog. [London] 14:389-392, 572-575. 1920.— A brief review of some of the more important recent papers on anatomy, cytology, morphology, taxonomy, ecology and economic botany. — J. L. Weimer. 443. Sotjeges, RenJ;. Embryogenie des Composees. Les premiers stades du developpe- ment de I'embryon chez le Senecio vulgaris L. [The embryogeny of the Compositae. The first stages in the development of the embryo of Senecio vulgaris.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171 : 254-256, 356-357. 13 fig. 1920. — The embryo of Senecio in its early stages of development resembles that of Helianthus. It is similar to other Compositae in the non- formation of octants and in the formation of the hypocotyl from the basal cell of the two celled embryo. — C. H. Farr. 444. WissELiNGH, C. VAN. Bijdragcn tot de Kennis van de Zaadhuid. Zesde bijdrage: Over de Zaadhuid der Onagraceeen en Lythraceeen. [Contribution to a knowledge of the seed-coat. Sixth contribution: The seed-coat of the Onagraceae and Lythraceae.] Pharm. Weekblad 57: 77-83, 125-1.39. PL 1, 10 fig. 1920.— In the Onagraceae and Lythraceae the 2 integuments and the innermost integument and the nucellus at first are separated. In the Onagraceae, with the exception of Epilobium angustifolium, the cuticle generally disappears BOTANICAL, AB8TKACTS, VOL. VIII, NO. 1 66 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, BRYOPHYTES [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, during the development of the seed. In the Lythraceae, however, it remains. The cuticle between the 2 integuments and that between the seed-coat and the nucellus remain intact in both species. In the chalaza cork tissue is developed, which connects with the inner cuticle between the seed-coat and the nucellus. At times layers of the seed-coat develop into cork cells. — H. Engelhardt. 445. WissELiNGH, C. VAN. Bijdragen tot de Kennis van de Zaadhuid. Zevende bijdrage: Over de Zaadhuid van Tropaeoliun majus L. (Tropaeolaceeen), Hypericum qimdrangulum L. (Hypericaceeen) en Ipomoea purpurea Roth (Convolvulaceeen). [Contributions to a knowledge of the seed coat. Seventh contribution : The seed coat of Tropaeolum majus L. (Tropaeolaceae) , Hypericum quadrangulum L. (Hypericaceae) and Ipomoea purpurea Roth (Convolvulaceae).] Pharm. Weekblad 57: 575-583, 605-614. PI. 2, 12 fig. 1920.— A survey of our knowledge, and particularly of the work of K atser, as to the morphological character of the seed coats in these 3 species. The presence in the young integument of cuticles which later disappear during the development of the ovule into the seed; and the history of the chalazal tissue, are especially studied. The author concludes that the chalaza should be regarded as a part of the seed coat. — H. Engelhardt. MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF ALGAE E. N. Transeaxj, Editor (See in this issue Entries 99, 103, 687) MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES Alexander W. Evans, Editor (See also in this issue Entries 118, 123, 130, 133, 134, 142, 687) 446. Campbell, D. H. Studies in some East Indian Hepaticae. Calobryum Blumei, N. ab E. Ann. Botany 34: 1-12. PI. 1, 6 fig. 1920. — Calobryum differs in several important particulars from the Jungermanniales, with which it is usually associated. The early stages of the antheridium and archegonium are very similar, supporting Goebel's theory of the close homologies of these organs. There is, however, considerable variation shown, espe- cially by the antheridium. The genus is acrogynous, i.e., the apical cell finally becomes transformed into an archegonium. This organ has only 4 rows of peripheral neck-cells, and a cap-cell may be wanting. The sporophyte differs from that of the typical Jungermanniales in having but 1 layer of wall cells, thus more nearly resembling the Sphaerocarpales or Mar- chantiales. The family Calobryaceae is well founded, and perhaps a distinct order Calo- bryales ought to be established. — D. H. Campbell. 447. Fleischer, Max. Kritische Revision von Carl Miillerschen Laubmoosgattungen. [Critical revision of Carl Miiller's genera of mosses.] Hedwigia 61:402-408. 1920. — This paper (which is to be continued) forms a part of a series in which the specimens contained in the herbarium of C. Muller (of Halle) are critically discussed. It consists mostly of names arranged in 2 parallel columns, the first giving Miiller's determinations and the second those of the author. Determinations which required neither revision nor transfer- ence to other genera are mostly omitted. The following genera, as understood by Muller, are taken up: Braunia, Harrisonia, Hedwigia, Cyrtopus, Bescherellia, Spiridens, Trachypus, Myrinia, Mollirete, Eriodon, Dimerodontium, Rozea, Habrodon, Fabronia, Helicodontium, and Schwetschkea. Several of Muller's species are reduced to synonymy, and many new combinations are necessitated through the transference of species. — A. W. Evans. 448. Fleischer, Max. Natiirliches System der Laubmoose. [Natural classification of the mosses.] Hedwigia 61: 390-400. 1920. — The classification here proposed is based on No. 1, Mat, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, BRYOPHYTES 67 characters drawn partly from the sporophyte and partly from the gametophyte. In the larger divisions the sporophytic characters are emphasized; in the smaller divisions, the game- tophytic. The class Musci is first divided into the 3 subclasses Sphagnales, Andreaeales, and Bryales. The first 2 of these each include a single family, but the third is further divided into the 3 groups (Reihengruppen) Eubryinales, Buxbaumiinales, and Polytrichinales. Of these groups the first embraces the following orders (Reihen) :Fissidentales (1 family), Dicran- ales (8 families), Pottiales (4 families), Grimmiales (1 family), Funariales (5 families), Schistostegiales (1 family), Tetraphidales (1 family), Eubryales (16 families), Isobryales (21 families), Hookeriales (6 families) and Hypnobryales (12 families). The second group embraces the orders Buxbaumiales and Diphysciales (1 family each), and the third group the orders Dawsoniales and Polytrichales (1 family each). — A. W. Evans. 449. Gargeanne, A. J. M. tJber Haplozia caespiticia Dum. Recueil Trav. Dot. N^er- land. 17:205-217. 6 fig. 1920. — Haplozia caespiticia, a very rare species in the Nether- lands, reaches its maximum development in late September and early October and is quickly overgrown by other bryophytes. It contains the largest oil-bodies heretofore observed in the Hepaticae. These are especially pronounced in the cells of the leaves, where they fre- quently take up the entire width of the cell. They occur also in the protonema but are minute or even lacking in the cells of the stem. Haplozia caespiticia is one of the very few Jungermanniales which produce endogenous gemmae. These are borne in hundreds at the apexes of the stem and also on the protonema; they are set free by the gelatinization of the cell walls. When germinated on peat under glass the gemmae give rise to orthotropous shoots with bilobed or even serrate leaves, instead of the roundish leaves normal to the species. — J. C. Th. Uphof. 450. Lesage, p. Contributions a I'etude de la germination des spores de mousses. [Germination of moss spores.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 166: 744-747. 1918. — See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 433. 451. LoRCH, WiLHELM. Die Haube von Polytrichum formosum Hedw. [The calyptra of Polytrichum formosum.] Hedwigia 61: 346-347. 1920.— The author shows that the opercu- lum of Polytrichum formosum remains closely attached to the calyptra and that both organs are thrown off simultaneously. He considers that the calyptra, thus acting as a sort of "flight organ," plays an important part in the separation of the operculum, in addition to carrying out its function of protecting the developing capsule. — A. W. Evans. 452. Machado, A. Notes de bryologie portugaise. [Notes on Portuguese mosses.] Bull. Soc. Portugaise Sci. Nat. 8: 43-45. 1918. — In the first part of the paper 4 mosses new to the flora of Portugal are recorded, 1 species being described as new under the name Pottia Sam- paiana. It approaches P. cavifolia, var. epilosa Schp. and was discovered by G. SampXio in the province of Algarve. In the second part of the paper the opinion is advanced that Hypnum lusitanicum Schp. represents an aberrant form of Rhynchostegium rusciforme Br. & Schp. — A. W. Evans. 453. Malta, N. Beitrage zur Moosflora des Gonvernements Pleskau mit besonderer Beriicksichtigung des Kalksteingebietes der Welikajamiindung. [Contributions to the moss flora of the Government Pskov, with special reference to the limestone region at the mouth of the Velikaia River.] 78 p., 12 fig. Riga, 1919. — This report on the bryophytes of the Govern- ment Pskov in western Russia is based on observations and collections made by the author during the years 1916 and 1917. The species occurring on limestone, on sandstone, and on clayey substrata are separately discussed, and the influences exerted on the bryophytic flora by the physical and chemical factors of the soil are clearly indicated. In the enumeration of species which concludes the work 35 hepatics, 15 peat mosses, and 206 mosses are listed with definite data regarding stations. The only new species proposed is Bryum androgynum Warnst., but a new var. pleskowiensis Malta is described under Seligeria recurvata. The new species and the new variety are illustrated. — A. W. Evans. 68 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, 454. S0RENSEN, S. Pterigynandrum filiforme (Timin) Hedw. og dens vegetative former- ingsformer. [Pterigj'nandrum filiforme and its forms of vegetative multiplication.] Nyt Mag. Naturvidenskab. 56: 137-148. 1 pi., 2 jig., 1 map. 1919. — The author describes propagation by gonidia and by vegetative branching in Pterigynandrum filiforme. His observations are based on field and herbarium studies and on experiments. — A. Gundersen. 455. Warnstorf, C. Bemerkungen zu Androcryphia confluens (Tayl.) Nees in Synops. Hep. S. 471 (1844). [Remarks on Androcryphia confluens.] Hedwigia 61:343-345. 1920.— The author's observations are based on material collected by Herzog in the Andes of Bolivia and determined by Stephani as Androcryphia confluens. In some of the specimens he finds purplish red rhizoids, which are not supposed to occur in the genus. He comments on the systematic position of Androcryphia and calls attention to the fact that Stephani makes no mention of it in his published account of Herzog's Hepaticae. — A. W. Evans. MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, LICHENS, BACTERIA AND MYXOMYCETES H. M. FiTZPATRiCK, Editor (See also in this issue Entries 108, 128, 234, 519, 521, 661, 687) FUNGI 456. Adams, J. F. Darluca on Peridermium Peckii. Mycologia 12:309-314. PI. SI. 1920. — Darluca filum (Biv.) Cast., parasitizing various rusts and various rust forms, including pycnia and aecia is described in detail. — H. R. Rosen. 457. Anonymous. Index to American mycological literature. Mycologia 12 : 343-346. 1920. 458. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Oliver, Wade W. Cultural studies in a case of sprue. Jour. Amer. Med. Assoc. 74: 27-28. 1920.] Jour. Tropic. Med. and Hygiene 23 : 50. 1920.— From the stool, sputum, tongue, etc., was isolated a species of Monilia growing as a yeast. Intra-peritoneal injection into a guinea pig resulted fatally in 7 days. The fungus was reisolated from the liver and gall bladder. — E. A. Bessey. 459. Beer, Rudolph. On a new species of Melanotaenium with a general account of the genus. Trans. British Mycol. Soc. 6:331-343. PI. 8. 1920.— A species of Melanotaenium was found to be the cause of tumour-like swellings on the subterranean stems and leaf-struc- tures of Lamium album. The fungus is described and named M. Lamii. A study of the cytology of the fungus shows that the hyphal cells are binucleate and the mature spores uninucleate. — W. B. McDougall. 460. Buckley, W. D. A new Discinella. Trans. British Mycol. Soc. 6: 346-347. 1920. — Discinella margarita is described as new. — W. B. McDougall. 461. Burt, Edward Angus. The Thelephoraceae of North America. XII. Stereiim. Ann. Missouri Bot. Card. 7 : 81-248. PI. 2-6, fig. 1-48. 1920.— In this continuation of the monograph of the Thelephoraceae of North America, Burt presents a comprehensive taxonomic account of the genus Stereum. The treatment of this large genus of 77 accepted species includes an elab- orate key to the species and under each of the American species discussed there are given the synonymy and references to literature, full diagnoses, notes on occurrence, habits, peculiarities, and citations of specimens examined. The species are arranged in sections as central-stemmed, lateral-stemmed, merismatoid, and dimidiate and effuso-reflexed species. Burt finds the diflfi- culties of identification, experienced by many workers, greatlj' decreased after a thorough study and analysis of the microscopically recognizable organs or combinations of organs. Among the North American species referred to, 12 are new and 5 are newly combined. The new species No. 1, Mat, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. 69 are Stereum caespitosum, S. saxitas, S. pubescens, S. conicum, S. patelliforme, S. Earlei, S. mag- nisporum, S. spumeum, S. erumpens, S. sepium, S. heterosporum, and S. durum. Among the new combinations S. exiguum, S. radicans, S. craspedium, and S. Murrayi were transferred from the genus Thelephora, and Stereum rugisporum from Hymenochaete. In addition, notes are recorded on 10 imperfectly known species and 20 excluded from the genus. Among the IsitteT Stereum subcruentatum Berk. & Curtis becomes " Aleurodiscus subcruentatus (B. & C.) Burt, n. comb. ; now included among American species, because of collections received from California and Oregon." — S. M. Zeller. 462. Chardon, Carlos E. A list of the F>yrenomycetes of Porto Rico collected by H. H. Whetzel and E. W. Olive. Mycologia 12: 31&-321. 1920.— Sixty-five species are listed, the genera Meliola and Phyllachora being best represented. — H. R. Rosen. 463. Elliott, Jessie S. Bayliss. and Helena C. Chance. The conidia and paraphyses of Pezicula eucrita Karst. Trans. British Mycol. Soc. 6: 353-354. 1 fig. 1920.— The asco- spores of this fungus are not readily discharged from the asci but they germinate, often within the asci, and produce conidia very abundantly. — W. B. McDougall. 464. Johnson, Marie E. M. On the biology of Panus stypticus. Trans. British Mycol. Soc. 6: 348-352. PL 9. 1920. — The sporophores of this fungus are not able to grow in the smoky atmosphere in the vicinity of iron and chemical works nor in the absence of light. They are not affected by frost and are very xerophytic. The mycelium likewise can be dried for many months and still retain its vitality. — W. B. McDougall. 465. Jones, Fred Ruel, and Charles Drechsler. The development of Urophlyctls alfalfae. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10:65. 1920. 466. MuRRiLL, William A. Light-colored resupinatepolypores — II. Mycologia 12:299- 308. 1920. — Descriptive notes of 20 species of Porta are given. The following are the new species described: P. linearis, P. hondurensis, P. Johnstonii, P. salicina, P. perextensa, P. hymeniicola, P. separans, P. roseitingens, P. Cokeri, P. distorta, P. submollusca, P. lignicola, P. montana, and P. arachnoidea. — H. R. Rosen. 467. MuRRiLL, W. A. The fungi of Blacksburg, Virginia. Mycologia 12 : 322-328. 1920. — More than 150 species of fungi are listed, most of them being fleshy forms. Pluteus prae- rugosus is described as a new species. — H. R. Rosen. 468. Paul, David. Note on Marasmius Caulicinalis (With.) Fr. Trans. British Mycol. Soc. 6:344-345. 1920. — After discussing the orthography and history of the specific name the author concludes that the original spelling, caulicinalis, should be restored. — W. B. McDougall. 469. Rea, Carleton. New or rare British fungi. Trans. British Mycol. Soc. 6:322- 330. PI. 7. 1920. — The following species and one variety are described as new: Mycena atrovirens, Marasmius obtusifolius, Pluteus phlebophorus (Dittm.) Fr. var. albofarinosa, Nolanea strigosissima, Astrosporina fulva, and Urceolella Iridis. — W. B. McDougall. 470. Smith, A. Lorrain, and J. Ramsbottom. New or rare microfungi. Trans. British Mycol. Soc. 6: 365-374. 1920. — Lophodermium lineatum is described as new. — W. B. McDougall. 471. Tanaka, Tt6zabur6. New Japanese fungi — Notes and translations — IX. Myco- logia 12 : 329-333. 1920. — The following fungi are described : Helminthosporium papaveri K. Sawada sp. nov., parasitic on Papaver somnijerum in Formosa, Fusicladium theae K. Hara sp. nov., on leaves of Thea sinensis, Mycosphaerella theae K. Hara sp. nov., parasitic on leaves of Thea sinensis, Mycosphaerella Ikedai K. Hara sp. nov., saprophytic on leaves of Thea sinensis, Meliola citricola K. Hara sp. nov., epiphytic on leaves, branches, and fruits of Citrus spp., and Gloeosporium Cartharni Hori and Hemmi comb. nov. — H. R. Rosen. 70 MOEPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, 472. Wakefield, E. M. Galactiniaamethystina (Phill.) Wakef. Trans. British Mycol. Soc. 6: 375. 1920. — This is the plant formerly called Galactinia Phillipsii (Cke.) Boud., or, still earlier, Ascobolus amethystinus Phill. — W. B. McDougall. 473. Wakefield, E. M. The Painswick Foray. Trans. British Mycol. Soc. 6: 299-302. 1920. — The Spring Foray, which was held at Painswick, Gloucestershire, from May 21 to May 25, 1920, is described and a complete list of the fungi collected, numbering about 125 species, is given. — W. B. McDougall. 474. Wakefield, E. M., and A. A. Pearson. Records of Surrey resupinate Hymeno- mycetes. Trans. British Mycol. Soc. 6: 317-321. 6 fig. 1920. — Sixteen species are listed, in most cases with descriptive notes. — W. B. McDougall. 475. Wiltshire, S. P. The production of conidia in pure cultures by the brown rot fungus of the apple. Ann. Rept. Agric. and Hort. Res. Sta. Univ. Bristol 1919:34-36. 1919.— Attempts to secure abundant production of conidia by Sclerotinia fructigena in pure culture are reported. Varieties of apples supposed to develop upon inoculation brown rot and abundant conidia, instead of black rot and no conidia, failed to do so. — The best medium found for production of conidia is sliced potato soaked in 7.5 per cent malic acid. Plum wood extract with 1 per cent malic acid also gives excellent production of conidia. — D. Reddick. 476. York, H. H. Late seasonal production of aecia of Cronartium ribicola. Phytopath. 10: 111. 1920. — Freshly matured aecia were found on Pinus strobus, on Sept. 16, 1919. — D. Reddick. LICHENS 477. Church, A. H. The lichen symbiosis. Jour. Botany 58: 213-219, 262-267. 1920.— The generally accepted teaching is that lichens consist of a fungus and an alga living very closely together in symbiotic relationship, the whole forming a "consortium." The difficulty of convincing a student that in lichens any symbiotic relation exists is noted. To determine whether mutual benefit occurs in all cases is diflBcult; also the consortium is ill-defined, espe- cially in cases of symbiosis of fungi with filamentous algae and higher plants where there is a complete gradation to purely parasitic conditions. The fungi are always normal asco- mycetes or basidiomycetes, and have not been modified by the association. It is the vege- tative part or thallus that has been so remarkably modified by the cohabitation. The impor- tant factor is dual control. Simple cohabitation is not the sole factor in the consortium. Dual control is a biological futility like a house divided against itself, and, hence, doomed to rapid extinction. The alga gains little if anything from the association with the fungus. The views held by Sachs, West, Schenk, and Goebel are discussed, it being noted that much in their statements is deductive rather than inductive. The relation of the whole question of the evolution of dorsi-ventral organs, or even axial structure, through the enor- mously long period of emergence from the phytobenthon of the sea is noted. Yet there is something about lichens, neither fungus nor alga, but a form factor, which produces a soma readily distinguished by the collector, and the cause of which must be found and explained. There is nothing in symbiosis to show why Cladonia should have a centric habit SbudPai-melia a dorsiventral habit in the same environment. Any effect of symbiosis in this matter is doubted, and the relation of lichen form to alga form is pointed out. Reinke held that the similarity of form in distinct phyla as in lichens and algae was due to the effect of similar conditions; but the conditions surrounding sea-weeds and lichens are not similar. The ques- tion is raised whether lichens, or rather the fungus part of lichens, do not actually inherit their form from algae. Lichens would thus represent a deteriorating race of algae arrested in deterioration by the intrusion of algal units of a lower degree. — K. M. Wiegand. 478. Lynge, B. Index specierum et varietatum Lichenum quae collectonibus "Lichenes exsiccati" distributae sunt. (Forts.) [Index of species and varieties of Lichenes which were distributed in the collections of "Lichenes exsiccati." (Continued.)] Nyt. Mag. Natur- videnskab. 56:385-464. 1919. No. 1, Mat, 1921] PALEOBOTANY 71 479. Meres CHKovsKY, C. On some new forms of lichens. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. 6: 482-489. 1920. — The author gives a brief description in Latin followed by one in French of the following forms of lichens: Physcia pulverulenta, formae delicata, turgidula, and elegantella , and varieties lepidota, aquiloides, and angustata. Physcia virella, formae dendrilobata, and dendrilohata subforma tenerrima. Physcia hispida, forma auriculata. Squamaria miiralis, formae convexiuscula and granulata, and var. flexuosa. Parmelia conspersa, forma dispersa, and varieties diffracta, digitulata forma intermedia, and isidiata forma heteroclyta. Anapty- chia ciliaris, formae helianthus and suhmarginata. Cetraria hiascens, forma delicatula. Caloplaca teicholyta, forma nivalis, Dermatocarpon aquaticum, var. nervosum. Biatora kreyeri. — H. H. Clum. 480. Paulson, Robert. Lichens found near Painswick. Trans. British Mycol. Soc. 6: 303-304. 1920. — A list is given of about 45 species of lichens collected near Painswick, Glouces- tershire, during the Spring Foray of May, 1920, together with brief notes on habitat relations. —W. B. McDougall. BACTERIA 481. Anonymous. The rate of speed at which bacteria travel. Sci. Amer. 123:441. 1920. 482. Wolf, F. A. A bacterial leafspot of velvet bean. Phytopath. 10: 73-80. 3 fig. 1920. — A description of a hitherto undescribed leafspot disease of Florida velvet beans caused by Aplanobacter stizolobii n. sp. — J. G. Dickson. MYXOMYCETES 483. CuRRiE, Mary E. A critical study of the slime-molds of Ontario. Trans. Roy. Canadian Inst. 12^: 247-308. PI. 8-10. 1920.— Of the 28 genera and 110 species and varie- ties reported from Ontario, 47 species and varieties are here recorded from Ontario for the first time, 36 of them being new to Canada. Three species and 1 variety are reported as new to North America, viz., Badhamiafoliicola Lister, Diachaea bulbillosa Lister, Stemonitis fusca Roth. var. confluens Lister, and Stemonitis flavogenita Jahn. The Plasmodia of 2 species have been noted for the first time. Five forms have been observed parasitizing fungi and 9 have been found fruiting on, and in some cases causing injury to, the leaves or stems of her- baceous plants. — R. B. Thomson. PALEOBOTANY AND EVOLUTIONARY HISTORY E. W. Berry, Editor (See also in this issue Entries 704, 705) 484. Anonymous. Contemporaneous evolution of warm-blooded animals and of flowering plants. [Rev. of: Berry, E. W. Evolution of flowering plants and warm-blooded animals. Amer. Jour. Sci. 49: 207-211. 1920.] Sci. Amer. Monthly 1: 558-559. 1920. 485. Carpentier, Alfred. Sur quelques vegetaux silicifies des environs de Sainte- Marie-aux-Mines [Alsace]. [On some silicified plant remains in the region of Sainte-Marie- aux-Mines.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 250-252. 1920.— The rocks of this region are found to contain roots of Psaronius, sporanges of Pteridotheca, petioles of Medullosa, pollen of Cordaites and other gymnosperms, and leaves of the Cordaitales. — C. H. Farr. 436. Clarke, J. M. The oldest of the forests. Sci. Monthly 12: 83-91. 6 fig. 1921.— Devonian conditions were not favorable for preserving trees. But trees, mostly fern-like, were not sparse and scattered. Until recently the richness of the Catskill hills in the relics of the Devonian forests has not been realized. An expedition this year brought 5000 pounds 72 PALEOBOTANY [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, of their remains for museum purposes. — A great autumn freshet of the upper Schoharie in 1869 revealed in the bed rock of the hills a series of standing stumps of trees all at the same level in the rocks and their rootlets in the original mud, now shale, thus revealing the most ancient forest yet known. These trees are preserved at least at two levels in the rock, one 60 feet above the other. — L. Pace. 487. HoLTENDAHL, O. Occurrcnce of structures like Walcott's Algonkian Algae in the Permian of England. Amer. Jour. Sci. 1 : 195-206. Fig. 1-8. 1921. — Forms from the English Permian are described and illustrated that greatly resemble the Algonkian forms called Newlandia and Greysonia by Walcott, and that are considered as in all probability secondary structures and not of organic origin. — E. W. Berry. 488. Kratjsel, R. Die fossilen Koniferenholze (unter Ausschlusz von Araucarioxylon Kraus). Versuch einer monographischen Darstellung. [Attempt at a monographic treatment of fossil coniferous wood, exclusive of Araucarioxylon.] Palaeontographica 62: 185-275. 1919. — A monographic treatment of fossil coniferous woods, giving besides an alphabetic list of the hitherto described species (with bibliographic references, synonymy, and horizons); also a historical introductory section and a systematic synopsis of the recognizable forms (with corresponding existing forms, horizons, and localities). The author dissents from Jeffrey's view of the relationships among the coniferous families, and on the basis of histologic studies by himself and other students, holds that the Araucariaceae are the older and the Abietine- aceae the younger groups. The bibliography comprises 243 titles. — Saml. W. Geiser. 489. KrXusel, R. Palaeobotanische Notizen. Senckenbergiana 2: 198-215. 1920. — This communication comprises three parts. The first, p. 198-204, consists of additions to this author's recently published monograph on fossil coniferous woods (see Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 488). The second, "Zur Bestimmung fossiler Koniferenholzer" [The determination of fossil coniferous woods], is a 4 page summary of current ideas. The third, "Uber die Lignite von Senftenberg [Upon the lignite of Senftenberg], gives the results of a study of the wood struc- tures from this Miocene horizon which is widespread in Saxony, Silesia, Mecklenburg, Mark Brandenburg, etc. The author determined the percentage representation of Taxodium and Sequoia in the lower, middle, and upper parts of the lignite in the various mines at Senften- berg, and discusses the probable ecology. — E. W. Berry. 490. Krausel, R. Nachtrage zur Tertiarflora Schlesiens. III. Uber einige Originale Goepperts und neuere Funde. [Additions to the Tertiary flora of Silesia. III. Upon some of Goeppert's types and new collections.] Jahrb. Preuss. Geol. Landes. 40:363-433. PI. 5-15. 1920. — This paper concerns it.self with Goeppert's types and with new collections from Ruppers- dorf, Peruschen, Oppatowitz, and Bluschau. No new forms are described but the older determinations are revised. Species in the following genera are discussed: Woodwardia, Pteris (2), Salvinia, Pinus, Taxodium, Glyptostrobus , Sequoia, Taxodioxylon, Libocedrus, Widdringtonia, Salix (2), Populus (2), Myrica, Juglans (3), Hicoria, Pterocarya, Carpinus, Belula (2), Castanea, Quercus, Ulmus (2), Zelkova, Cinnamomum, Persea, Philadelphu^, Liquidambar , Platanus, Crataegus, Rhus, Acer (4), Paliurus, Vitis, Grewia, Buettneria, Cornus, and several undetermined types. All are of Miocene age, those from Bluschau and Oppatowitz being regarded as older than Schosnitz (Tortonian) and those from Peruscher being regarded as younger (presumably Sarmatian). — E. W. Berry. 491. LozANO, E. D. Depositos diatomiferos en el valle de Toxi, Ixtlahuaca, Estado de Mexico. [The diatomaceous deposits of the Toxi Valley, Mexico.] An. Inst. Geol. Mexico 9: 1-19. PL 1-5. 1920. — The author describes the diatomaceous deposits of the valley of Toxi and records and figures diatoms representing the genera Synedra, Surirella, Coscinodiscus, Cycloiella, Gaillonella, Encyonema, Epithemia, Navicula, and Pleurosigma. The deposits were laid down subsequent to the volcanic rocks of the region and are considered of fresh water origin and Pleistocene age. — E. W. Berry. No. 1, Mat, 1921] PATHOLOGY 73 492. Reid, E. M. Recherches sur quelques graines pliocenes du Pont-de-Gail (Cantal). [Studies of Pliocene seeds from Pont-de-Gail, Cantal.] Bull. See. Geol. France IV, 20: 48-87. PI. S-4. 1920.— Total number of varieties reported is 48 of which 37 are positively determined and 17 of these are new and include species of Sparganium, Stratiotes, Carpinus, Fagopy- rum, Ranunculus, Menispermum, Polanisia, Myriophyllum, Symplocos, Lycopus, Sambucus, Trichosanthes and a new genus, Diclidocarya, of unknown botanical aflBnity and also present in the Pliocene of Holland. The age is considered to be lower Pliocene and the flora contains a large exotic and e.xtinct element with a pronounced southeastern Asiatic and North Ameri- can facies. There is an elaborate discussion, the gist of which has already been given in the abstract of this author's subsequently published paper on Pliocene floras. A complete bibliography and two plates complete the paper. — E. W. Berry. 493. Reid, E. M. Recherches sur quelques graines pliocenes de Pont-de-Gail (Cantal). [A study of the Pliocene seeds of Pont-de-Gail.] Compt. Rend. Sommaire Soc. Geol. France 6: 49-51. 1920.— Seeds of 48 species of plants from the lower Pliocene of Central France are recorded. Of these, 18 are new and 5 are exotics now dwelling in southeastern Asia. A detailed account is promised in a future publication. — E. W. Berry. 494. Stopes, M. C. Paleobotany in 1918. Sci. Prog. [London] 14: 39&-398. 1920.— A brief review of the most important papers published in this field during 1918.— J. L. Weimer. 495. Thiessen, R. Structure in Paleozoic bituminous coals. U. S. Bur. Mines Bull. 117. 896 p., 160 pi. 1920.— This paper gives the results of several years study of coal structures. A historical summary is followed by an account of the methods of study. The origin and structure of modern peat is discussed and it is shown that coal had a similar origin and shows comparable structure and plant content. The coals described in detail comprise samples from Pennsylvania, West Virginia, Indiana, Illinois, Iowa, and Alabama, all from bitu- minous mines and of Carboniferous age. Coal is shown to consist of the three elements long recognized, namely, the charcoal, or "mother of coal," and compact coal, the latter con- sisting of alternating laminae of dull coal (matt, cannelloid, sapanthrakon) and bright bands (glanz, humus, jet, carbohumin, lignitoid, hydrocarbon), the anthraxylon of the author. The dull laminae are shown to be made up of former woody parts in a more finely divided state than in the bright bands and imbedded in a ground mass of finely divided debris which the author calls the attritus. The attritus consists chiefly of woody degradation products along with traces of cuticles, spore and pollen exines, and resinous particles of various origins. The bright laminae are shown to consist largely of small chips of semi-decayed woody tissues. Many plant fragments of various plant parts and a variety of exines are discussed and fig- ured but no attempt is made to assign names to any of them except a Medullosa stem, which is identified as Medullosa anglica. The report is profusely illustrated.— JS?. W. Berry. PATHOLOGY G. H. Coons, Editor C. W. Bennett, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 8, 15, 25, 54, 158, 173, 181, 386, 397, 456, 459, 475, 476, 482, 483, 611, 612, 675, 678, 682, 688) PLANT DISEASE SURVEY; REPORTS OF DISEASE OCCURRENCE AND SEVERITY 496. Anonymous. Chemistry in plant distribution. Sci. Amer, Monthly 1 : 562-563. 1920. — The use of methyl red to indicate whether or not a soil is suflSciently acid to grow scab- free potatoes is explained, — Chas. H. Otis. 497. Arthur, J. C. Two destructive rusts ready to invade the United States. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10:65-66. 1920. 74 PATHOLOGY [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, 498. Gravatt, G. F. The chestnut blight in the southern Appalachians. Amer. Fores- try 26 : 606-607. 1920. — It is predicted that the chestnut growth of the southern Appalachians will be killed off just as the growth from New York south to southern Virginia is being killed. — Chas. H. Otis. 499. Johnson, A. G., J. G. Dickson, and Helen Johann. An epidemic of Fusarium blight (scab) of wheat and other cereals. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 51. 1920. 500. Lyman, G. R. The 1919 survey for potato wart. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 60-61. 1920 501. Stevens, F. L. Foot-rot of wheat and its fungous associates. [Abstract.] Phyto- path. 10:52. 1920. THE HOST (RESISTANCE, SUSCEPTIBILITY, MORBID ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY) 502. Anonymous. Bladrullesyge hos Tomater. [Leaf-roll of tomatoes.] Gartner-Tidende [K0benhavn] 36: 123. 1920. — The rolling of the leaves often seen in tomatoes cannot be com- pared to the leaf-roll of potatoes, but is a reaction following heavy pruning. Individual plants or certain forms may be more inclined to roll than others. — Ernst Gram. 503. Francos, G. A vine plant immune to Oidium. Cyprus Agric. Jour. IS : 146. 1920. — A vine plant on the Heloan Farm at Alethrico was observed in August, 1919, to be quite free from mildew ( Uncinula necator) while all the others were badly affected. Inquiry regarding the source of this vine revealed the fact that it had been obtained from Ayios Ambrosios and was known as "Laorcas." It is proposed to test thoroughly the persistency of immunity of the vine to Oidium. — W. Stuart. 504. Fromme, F. D. The development of loose smut of wheat as modified by soil fertility. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 53. 1920. 505. HoDSON, E. R. Is American chestnut developing immunity to the blight? Jour. Forestry 18: 693-700. 1920. — The chestnut blight does not appear controllable by ordinary methods but observations appear to show that immunity is developing or that individuals are resistant. As the chestnut sprouts at the base, the organism may live for two or three decades and in this period immunity, which is the only hope for forest stands, may actually develop. Two types of canker are recognized, atrophy, a depressed surface, and hyper- trophy, a swollen distorted condition. In the first the plant makes no resistance to the dis- ease, while in the second there is resistance to the invader. Immunity development requires time, of which the apparent recovery of living tissue after a long period of attack appears to be evidence. Long-time observations under forest conditions of actual developments are necessary to determine whether the hypothesis is substantiated. — E. N. Munns. 506. HoLBERT, J. R., James G. Dickson, and H. Howard Biggar. Correlation of early growth variation and productivity of maize as influenced by certain pathologic factors. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 57-58. 1920. 507. Johnson, A. G., and W. W. Mackie. Evidence of disease resistance in barley to attacks of Rhynchosporiiun. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 54. 1920. 508. Jones, L. R., J. C. Walker, and W. B. Tisdale. Fifth progress report of Fusarium- resistant cabbage. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 64. 1920. 509. McClintock, J. A. Field tests with strains of wilt-resistant tomato seed in 1919. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 59. 1920. No. 1, May, 1921] PATHOLOGY 75 510. Melchers, L. E. The resistance shown by three hard winter wheats, Kanred (P762), P1066, and P1068 to plant diseases. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 52. 1920. 511. Melchers, Leo E., and John H. Parker. The resistance of Kanred (P762), P1066, and P1068, three hard winter wheats, to leaf rust. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 52-53. 1920. 512. RuMBOLD, Caroline. Causes for the production of pathological xylem in the injected trunks of chestnut trees. Phytopath. 10: 23-33. 2 pi. 1920. — The author concludes that the production of pathological xylem in the phloem region of the trunks of injected chestnut trees [Castanea dentata] is due to (1) the mechanical severance of vascular tissues, and (2) the chemical stimulation of cells. — /. G. Dickson. 513. WooDWORTH, C. M., AND FLORENCE CoERPER Brown. Studies on Varietal resistance and susceptibility to bacterial blight of the soy bean. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 68. 1920. THE PATHOGENE (BIOLOGY, INFECTION PHENOMENA, DISPERSAL) 514. Clayton, E. E. The relation of soil temperature to the development of the tomato Fusarium wilt. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 63-64. 1920. 515. HuNGERFORD, Chas. W., AND A. E. Wade. Relation between soil moisture and bunt Infection in wheat. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 53. 1920, 516. Jones, L. R., and H. H. McKinney. The influence of soil temperature on the development of potato scab. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 63. 1920. 517. MacInnes, Jean. The effect of temperature and light on Fusarium sp. causing wheat scab. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 52. 1920. 518. RosENBAUM, J. Infection experiments on tomatoes with Phytophthora terrestria Sherb. and a hot water treatment of the fruit. Phytopath. 10: 101-105. 1920. — The writer found that because of its efifect on zoospore liberation, an abundant moisture supply in dis- eased soil is necessary to produce an epidemic infection with P. terrestria. The addition of copper sulphate solution (1 : 5000) to infested soil prevented infection of green tomatoes when in contact with the soil. The immersion of green tomatoes in water at 60°C. for I5 minutes prevents spread of the rot where the infection is very recent and the fungus has not pene- trated deeply into the tissues. — /. G. Dickson. 519. RosENBAUM, J. Studies with Macrosporitmi from tomatoes. Phytopath. 10:9-22. 2 pi., 1 jig. 1920. — A study of the early blight, or "nail head" spot, of the tomato is sum- marized, the author drawing the following conclusions : Infection takes place without previous injury to the fruit, however only on the immature fruit; the disease does not originate in transit on mature fruit picked from an infected field, but it may develop in transit on imma- ture fruit picked from infected fields; the disease does not spread from infected fruit to adja- cent healthy fruit in transit. The author concludes that the causal organism of the "nail head" spots on fruits, stems, and leaves of the tomato is different specifically from Macro- sporium solani from potatoes and suggests the use of the binomial M. tomato Cooke. — J. G. Dickson. 520. TisDALE, W. B. The relation of soil temperature and soil moisture to the occurrence of cabbage yellows. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 63. 1920. 521. White, J. H. On the biology of Femes applanatus (Pers.) Wallr. Trans. Roy. Canadian Inst. 12^ : 133-174. PI. 2-7, fig. 1-2. 1920.— The investigations have followed along three main lines of inquiry: (1) The study of the morphology and ecology of F. applanatus and of the action on its host; (2) a determination of etiological relationships by culture methods, and a testing of the applicability of such methods to a study of timber destroying 76 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, fungi; (3) a search for possible criteria by which parasitic attacks on wood may be distin- guished from saprophytic action. The particular type of decay in timber due to F. applana- tus has now by actual culture been linked with its causal agent. The species has been proved to be a wound parasite, in southern Ontario one of the commonest and most destructive. The occurrence of wound gum and the multiplication of tyloses in a band marking the advance of a wood destroying fungus in a living tree would appear to furnish an unerring criterion for the recognition of a fungus as a parasite. — R. B. Thomson. 522. WiLTSHiEE, S. P. The apple canker fungus. Ann. Rept. Agric. and Hort. Res. Sta. Univ. Bristol 1919: 23-29. 1919. — Nectria ditissima ejects its ascospores so that pure cultures were obtained by the inverted plate method. Mature perithecia were secured on malt extract agar in tubes. — Critical temperatures for the fungus in culture are: Minimum about 5°, optimum, 20-22°, maximum about 30°C. — Infection through young buds was very abundant in 1918. The spores and mycelium were found abundantly on bud scales in Sep- tember but it is not yet established that the fungus penetrates in the absence of injury. In- fections about galls produced by woolly aphis were confined to those that had broken open. — D. Reddick. DESCRIPTIVE PLANT PATHOLOGY 523. Anonymous. Gulbladede Hortensier. [Yellows of Hydrangea.] Gartner-Tidende [K^benhavn] 36: 139. 1920. — Hydrangea should be planted in rather light soil not too rich in manure. The yellows may be caused by too heavy soil, presence of manure, drought, or starvation. — Ernst Gram. 524. Bennett, C. W. Phoma root-rot of celery. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 67. 1920. 525. Brown, Nellie A., and R. B. Harvey. Heart rot, rib rot, and leaf spot of Chinese cabbages. Phytopath. 10: 81-90. 4 fig- 1920. — The Chinese cabbage (Brassica pekinensis and B. chinensis) is subject to the black rot disease of the common cabbage produced by Bac- terium campestre, and, as in the common cabbage, there may be also a rapid secondary infec- tion by a soft rot organism. High temperature and excessive moisture favor the develop- ment of the disease. Control measures are suggested. — J. G. Dickson. 526. Burger, O. F. Decay in citrus fruits during transportation. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. California 9: 365-370. 1920. — Lemon decay (due to Phomopsis ciiri), a disease new to California lemons, was found in California during the season 1919-20. The writer discusses the economic importance of stem-end rot and blue-mold decay on citrus fruits in transpor- tation. Stem-end rot infection takes place in the field. To insure sound fruit the disease should be eliminated from the groves. Proper methods of handling, packing, and shipping are given for blue-mold decay control. — E. L. Overholser. 527. Byars, L. p. A disease of red clover and strawberry in the Pacific Northwest caused by the nematode Tylenchus dipsaci (Kiihn) Bastian. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 66. 1920. —See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 528. 528. Byars, L. P. A nematode disease of red clover and strawberry in the Pacific North- west. Phytopath. 10:91-95. 2 pi. 1920. — A disease caused by Tylenchus dipsaci is described. [See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 527.] — J. G. Dickson. 529. Chen, Chunjen C. [A study of American cotton diseases.] Hua-Shang-Sha-Chang- Lien-Ho-Hui-Ki-Kau [China Cotton Jour.] 1'': 245-256. 1920. — The cause, symptoms, means of transmission, and control of the following important cotton diseases are reviewed : Angular leaf spot, anthracnose, wilt, root-knot, potash-hunger, damping-off, root rot, Diplodia boll rot, shedding of bolls and squares, and leaf spot. The reduction in cotton yield in the United States due to diseases is discussed and statistics are given. The author also points out the No. 1, May, 1921] PATHOLOGY 77 possibility of introduction of serious diseases into China through the large importation of American cotton seeds, and urges the Chinese cotton growers to practise the precaution of seed fumigation. — Chunjen C. Chen. 530. Cook, Mel. T. The Altemaria fruit rot and Rhizoctonia stem rot of tomatoes. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 59. 1920. 531. Cook, Mel. T. Blossom blight of the peach. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 64-65. 1920. 532. Cook, O. F. A disorder of cotton plants in China: Clubleaf or cyrtosis. Jour. Heredity 11 : 99-110. / pi-, fig. 1-9. 1920.— A disease of the mosaic type is described as being destructive to cotton in China. Diseased plants develop a large number of shoots which give them a "witches' broom" appearance. The nodes are short and the leaves small and crinkled, often colored different shades of green, yellow, and red. The disease is believed to be infectious. Leafhoppers are suspected as agents of dissemination. — C. W. Bennett. 533. Cromwell, Richard O. Recent studies on Septoria of wheat. [Abstract.] Phyto- path. 10:51. 1920. 534. Delacroix, Jorge. Enfermedades de las plantas cultivadas. Enfermedades no parasitarias. [Diseases of cultivated plants. Non-parasitic diseases.] 12 X 18 cm., 392 p., 57 pi. Casa Editorial, P. Salvat: Barcelona, 1920. — A Spanish translation from the French edition, published as part of the "Enciclopedia Agricola." — John A. Stevenson. 535. Delacroix, Jorge, t Andres Maublanc. Enfermedades de las plantas cultivadas. Enfermedades parasitarias. [Diseases of cultivated plants. Parasitic diseases.] 12 X 18 cm., 457 p., 87 pi. Casa Editorial, P. Salvat: Barcelona, 1919. — A Spanish translation from the second French edition, published as part of the "Enciclopedia Agricola." — John A. Stevenson. 536. DuRRELL, L. W. The purple sheath spot of com. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 54-55. 1920. 537. Gloyer, W. O. Apple blister canker. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10:58. 1920. 538. Hartley, Carl, and Glenn G. Hahn. Notes on some diseases of aspen. Phyto- path. 10: 140-147. S fig. 1920. — Popultts tremuloides is found in certain regions to be unusu- ally subject to disease. Trunk cankers in these regions seem to be important factors in short- ening the life of the trees. Fomes igniaritis is a frequent cause of premature death. The occurrence is also noted of (1) a twig blight suggesting in appearance the fire blight of pear; (2) leaf killing by Sclerotium bifrons E. & E., found in both the East and the West, and also attacking Lombardy poplar; (3) a bark blackening of obscure origin which prevents propa- gation by cuttings. — Carl Hartley. 539. Harvey, E.B. Some enemies of the potato. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2: 120-122. Fig. 1-9. 1920. — The mechanism by which the hyphae of the "damping-off" fungus, Pythium deBarya- num, push through a cell wall barrier is described. Experimenting with slices of potato 3 or 4 cells thick and watching the process through the microscope, it was found that a hypha penetrates the cell wall in 5 minutes. The author believes that this is entirely too short a time to account for the breaking down of the cell wall by enzyme action. Zoospore dispersal of Phytophthora infestans is also illustrated. — Chas. H. Otis. 540. HoLBERT, J. R., AND G. N. HoFFER. Com root and stalk rots. [Abstract.] Phyto- path. 10: 55. 1920. 541. Jones, Fred RuEL. Pythium as a causal factor in "pea blight." [Abstract.] Phyto- path. 10:67. 1920. 78 PATHOLOGY [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, 542. McCuBBiN, W. A. A heart rot of peach. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 65. 1920. 543. MoEKis, R. T. Hazel nuts. Amer. Nut Jour. 12: 57. 1920.— The fungus Crypto- sporella anomata (Sacc.) appears to be the only factor preventing the successful introduction of foreign hazels into the U. S. A., though other enemies are also present. A depressed area in the bark with a swollen overhang of healthy bark around the margins characterizes infec- tions by hazel blight. Effective control is possible by removing diseased tissues and spraying with Bordeaux mixture. — E. L. Overholser. 544. Neal, David C. Phony peaches: A disease occurring in middle Georgia. Phyto- path. 10: 10&-109. 1 pi., 1 fig. 1920. — A disease of peach at present restricted to the peach belt of middle Georgia, U. S. A., and frequently confused with "collar edema," is here de- scribed under the name common among growers. The disease is characterized by vivid green leaves which are larger than normal and hang on short, stubby branches. "As a result, the entire head of the tree is reduced to a rather compact shape, owing to the foreshortened inter- nodes and resulting close spacing of the leaves." The amount of fruit set is small, low in qual- ity, and late in ripening. All varieties have been found affected. The disease, the etiology of which is not discussed, has been found on 6-year-old seedlings. — G. H. Coons. 545. Orton, W. a. Streak disease of potato. Phytopath. 10: 97-100. 1 pL, 1 fig. 1920. — Streak first appears on upper full grown leaves as elongated or angular spots which follow the veinlets and extend into the parenchyma. Longitudinal streaks soon appear on the petiole, which soon collapses; the hanging dead leaves are characteristic. Following this the stem turns brown and dies, beginning at a point below the tip. Tubers are not affected except as the period of growth is shortened. There is discoloration in cortex. Varieties Factor (European), Rural New Yorker, and many hybrid seedlings are susceptible. American varieties are more resistant than are European. Attempts to isolate a pathogenic organism from lesions have failed. The disease is not to be confused with advanced stages of leaf-roll or mosaic. It has been seen in northern U. S. A. from coast to coast but has not become more prevalent in 7 years. — Donald Reddick. 546. Reddy, C. S., and W. E. Brentzel. Flax canker, a non-parasitic disease. [Ab- stract.] Phytopath. 10: 6&-67. 1920. 547. Rosenbaum, Joseph. A stem disease of tomato caused by Macrosporium solani E. and M. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 59. 1920. 548. Spencer, E. R. Black crust of Brazil nuts. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 61. 1920. 549. Stover, W. G. Some results of corn root rot work in Ohio. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 55. 1920. 550. Wang, K. W. [Some cotton diseases.] Khu-Shou [Science-Publ. Chinese Sci. Soc] 5: 1057-1062. 1920. — Diseases of cotton reviewed as to their causes and symptoms are yellow leaf blight {Macrosporium nigricantium) , leaf spot, shedding of bolls, angular leaf spot {Bacterium malvacearum) , wilt {Fusariumvasinjectum), damping-off {Rhizoctonia sp.) , anthracnose {Glom- erella gossypii), root rot {Ozonium omnivorum) , leaf blight {Mycosphaerella gossypina), areo- late mildev/ of cotton {Ramularia areola), boll rot {Bacterium sp.), and root knot {Heterodera radicicola) . A list of literature cited is also appended. — Chunjen C. Chen. 551. Wiltshire, S. P. A dieback of red currants. Ann. Rept. Agric. and Hort. Res. Sta. Univ. Bristol 1919: 30-33. 1919. — Branches of red currant suddenly wilt and die. This may happen at any time but is most noticeable in July. Cortex and wood of affected plant are infested with mycelium. Cytosporina ribis and Nectria cinnabarina have been isolated in culture and both are under test. — D. Reddick. No. 1, May, 1921] PATHOLOGY 79 ERADICATION AND CONTROL MEASURES 552. Anonymous. Certification of stocks of varieties of potato which are immune from wart disease. Scottish Jour. Agric. 3 : 52-66. 1 -pi. 1920. — The Board of Agriculture of Scotland has undertaken the enforcement of regulations prohibiting the planting of sus- ceptible varieties in infected lands and is inspecting fields of immune varieties for certifica- tion as to varietal purity. No crop is certified which contains more than 0.5 per cent of rogues. Over 17,000 acres of approved immune varieties were certified in 1919. Distinguish- ing characters of immune varieties and common rogues are given. — H. V. Harlan. 553. Anonymous. Beispiele erfolgreicher Beizung. [Examples of successful seed treat- ment.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 616. 1920. — A brief note giving the results from treating rye with "Uspulin" and with "Fusariol" against Fusarium as reported by Dr. Steher, Liibeck, in Zeitschr. Landw. Kammer Braunschweig. Based on a check plot treated with "Uspulin," a loss of 44,800 marks occurred on the untreated portion of the field. Fusariol treatment also resulted in large increases of grain and straw. — A. J. Pieters. 554. Barker, B. T. P., C. T. Gimingham, and S. P. Wiltshire. Sulfur as a fungicide, Ann. Rept. Agric. and Hort. Res. Sta. Univ. Bristol 1919: 57-75. 1919. — Polysulfides possess fungicidal properties and act as contact fungicides. Tests of the decomposition products of polysulfides show that elemental sulfur is the essential fungicidal ingredient of the decom- posed solutions. Spores of parasitic fungi are inhibited in germination by the presence of sulfur in hanging drops in the following order: Sclerotinia fructigena and Phragmidium sub' corticium, 100 per cent inhibition; Cladosporium fulvum, Fusicladium dendriticum, F. pyrinum, 50 per cent; Nectria ditissima, Botrytis cinerea, and Verticillium sp. no inhibition. — The acid or alkaline reaction of secretion from germinating spores has no correlation with susceptibility to sulfur, although precipitated sulfur seems to be brought into solution by the secretions of various fungi and apparently to some extent by agar when used as a medium for germination. — D. Reddick. 555. Cadoret, a. Les sulphatages apres le 15 juillet. [The sulphates after July 15.) Prog. Agric. et Vitic. 70: 9-10. 1918.— From investigations conducted since 1877, it is quite definite that the critical period for infection of Plasmopara on the grape {Vitis vinifera) is from July 10 to July 15. During this period the vines should be well covered. If the weather continues wet after July 15, a copper spray should be applied every 8 to 12 days. In dry seasons a monthly application is sufficient. In sections where black rot (Guignardia) is epidemic, as was the case in 1918, the entire period is longer and it may be necessary to employ 1 per cent Bordeaux mixture from June 10 to harvest-time. — H. B. Smith. 556. Coons, G. H. Experiments on the control of stinking smut of wheat. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10:54. 1920. 557. Gimingham, C. T., and G. T. Spinks. Soil sterilization. Ann. Rept. Agric. and Hort. Res. Sta. Univ. Bristol 1919:37-42. 1919.— Soil infested with Chrysophlyctis endo- biotica, the cause of potato wart, was placed in small pots and the following substances incor- porated with it in the amounts indicated: Bleaching powder 1 gram, creosote 0.5 gram, chloro-picrin 0.3 gram, formalin 1 cc, powdered chalk 1.5 gr. (to neutrality) and 7.5 gr., "cy- m^ne" 0.25 gr. Steam-sterilized soil was used as a control. One week later a tuber was planted in each pot. At the same time other pots of the soil were planted and were mois- tened twice each week with the following solutions: Copper sulfate 2 per cent, sulfur dioxid 0.1 saturated solution, formalin 1 per cent, bleaching powder 1 per cent. Aside from steam ster- ilization the only agents which reduced the amount of disease to any appreciable extent were copper sulfate, excess of chalk, and perhaps creosote. — Experiments in progress with disinfect- ants for the control of Rhizoctonia on carrots and spinach were discontinued because of the disappearance of the disease. Bleaching powder at the rate of 2 ounces per sq. yd. can be used safely for carrots. When 8 ounces are used severe injury results. — D. Reddick. 80 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 658. Gloyer, W. O. Effect of straw mulch on potato leaf roll. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10:60. 1920. 559. Gram, E. Uspulum som Afsvampningsmiddel. [Uspulum as a seed disinfectant.] Ugeskrift Landmaend [K0benhavn] 65:636. 1920. — "Uspulum" (mercuric salt of mono- chlorphenol) has been somewhat overestimated by certain writers and does not in the Danish experiments equal the standard treatments for cereal smuts and barley stripe. The sup- posed acceleration of the germination should be more thoroughly investigated before the chemical is recommended. — Ernst Gram. 560. Hansen, H. J. Brugen af modstandsdygtige Stammer af Kaalroer og Turnips paa kaalbroksmittet Jord. [Resistant strains of swedes and turnips on club-root ground.] Tidskr. Froeavl [Roskilde] 9: 85-86. 1920. — The author directs attention to the fact that many farm- ers order resistant strains although they may not have club-root in their fields. The resist- ant strains are the highest yielders only on contaminated ground, and should be used only there. — Ernst Gram. 561. Hopkins, E. F. Overwintering and control of bur clover leaf-spot. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10:66. 1920. 562. Keitt, G. W. a preliminary report on apple scab and its control in Wisconsin. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 58. 1920. 563. KuNSTLER, J. Sur un traitement preventif de I'oidium. [On a preventative treat- ment for oidium.] Oompt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 406-407. 1920.— The dusting of the leaves with flowers of sulfur is recommended. — C. H. Farr. 564. Martin, William H. Sulfur experiments for the control of potato scab. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 60. 1920. 565. Spinks, G. T. Spraying trials. Ann. Rept. Agric. and Hort. Res. Sta. Univ. Bristol 1919: 43-45. 1919. — Varieties of apples and pears susceptible to scab [Venturia] were sprayed once just before the blossoms opened. Little scab developed on the unsprayed trees. Bor- deaux mixture, copper stearate and Burgundy mixture proved equally effective in controlling the diseases but the latter caused injury to foliage. — D. Reddick. 566. Stover, W. G., F. H. Beach, and T. H. Parks. Results of spraying the apple for blotch in Ohio in 1919. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 58. 1920. 567. Temple, C. E. Tomato spraying experiments for the control of Septoria. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 60. 1920. 568. Villedieu, G. De Paction des eaux meteoriques sur les depots des bouillies cup- riques. [The action of rain water on deposits from copper spraying materials.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 260-263. 1920. — It is found that zoospores of downy mildew [Plasmo- para viticola] live well in acid media but do not develop in the presence of alkali. It is there- fore desirable to have spraying mixtures such that H2SO4 will not be generated when the sulfur compounds brought down by rain mix with the spray deposits on the leaf. — C. H. Farr. 569. Walker, J. C. Occurrence and control of black leg of cabbage. [Abstract.] Phy- topath. 10: 64. 1920. 570. Wester dijk, Johanna. Das Spritzen der Kartoffeln in den Niederlanden. [Spray* ing potatoes in the Netherlands.] Jahresber. Ver. Angew. Bot. 16: 132-138. 1918. — A r6sum6 of the present status of potato spraying in Holland. — P. J. Anderson. No. 1, Mat, 1921] PATHOLOGY 81 MISCELLANEOUS (COGNATE RESEARCHES, TECHNIQUE, ETC.) 571. Blair, R. J. Wood destroying fungi in pulp and paper mill roofs. [Abstract.] Phy- topath. 10: 61. 1920. 572. Boas, I. H. The preservation of timber in structures. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 209-212. 1920.— The decay of timber, preservative treatment, and the necessity for proper sanitation in yards are briefly discussed. — C. F. Korstian. 573. Hartley, Carl. Abnormal growth induced by chloral hydrate soil treatment. Phy- topath. 10: 334-335. 1 fig. 1920.— The addition of small amounts of chloral hydrate to sandy soil resulted in very abnormal growth of seedlings of Pinus ponderosa. The plants during their first few weeks are distinctly larger than normal, and the cotyledons, and in some cases also the first leaves formed, were attached to each other to form sheaths. The same phe- nomenon, but to a much less marked degree, has been observed in pine seedlings in autoclaved mixtures of soil and compost. — Carl Hartley. 574. HuNTOON, F. A., P. Masucci, and Edith Hamun. Antibody studies. Part 3. [A preliminary report on the chemical nature of bacterial antibodies.] Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42 : 2654-2661. 1920. — The antibody molecules are of large size and of colloidal nature. They are unaffected by the enzyme trypsin. They are not precipitated by solutions containing little or no electrolyte. Antibodies are not soluble in ether, nor are they precipitated by a short exposure to 30 per cent NaCl. Dilute alkalies or dilute acids do not injure them. Tem- peratures as high as 60°C. do not injure them, but they are altered by higher temperatures. — J. M. Brannon. 575. KoTiLA, J. E. Leaf hoppers and hopperburn of potato leaves. [Abstract.] Phyto- path. 10:61-62. 1920. 576. Leefmans, S. Kenmerken van bliksemslag bij klappers. [Symptoms of lightning in coconut trees.] In De Klappertor. [The coconut beetle.] Mededeel. Lab. Plantenz. Dept. Landb. Nijv. en Handel [Buitenzorg] 41: 46-47. PI. 15. 1920.— Three groups of lightning- injured coconut palms are described, one illustrated by a photograph, to distinguish between lightning injury and beetle injury. One of the groups included 12 trees. The injury involved the sharp drooping of the older leaves, excentric injury to the top, apparently burned lesions with a "scorched" odor, scars running down the trunk and in some cases gum exudation from splits in the lower part of the trunk. The younger leaves which did not immediately droop were apparently scorched at their bases. Natives testified that the trees had been struck by lightning. — Carl Hartley. 577. Lees, A. H. Big bud. Ann. Rept. Agric. and Hort. Res. Sta. Univ. Bristol 1919: 50-56. 1919. — Big bud of currant is caused by a mite which lives in the interior of the buds. During April, May, and June it is migrating to new buds. Boskoop Giant, introduced as a variety immune to big bud, has proved to be one of the most susceptible. "French" has had a somewhat similar history. Seabrook's Black remains relatively free from big bud in Chelms- ford but is affected at Long Ashton. Apparent immunity in Chelmsford is really extreme susceptibility which results in early death of terminal bud and its replacement by a lateral bud, Chelmsford has a dry summer. Long Ashton a moist one. This is thought to affect the growth of the plants suflBciently to account for the differences noted. — D. Reddick. 578. RuMBOLD, Caroline. Giving medicine to trees. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2: 114r-116. 6 fig. 1920. [Reprinted from Amer. Forestry 26:359-362. 1920.]— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1284. 579. Rutgers, A. A. L. Bliksemschade bij Hevea. [Lightning injury in Hevea.j Mede- deel. Alg. Proefsta. A. V. R. O. S. [Medan, Sumatra] Rubberserie 18. 1919.— Reprinted from the Arch. Rubbercult. 3: 163-171. 1919. 82 PHARMACOGNOSY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, PHARMACEUTICAL BOTANY AND PHARMACOGNOSY Heber W. Youngken, Editor E. N. Gathercoal, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 135, 604, 631) 580. Anonymous. The eradication of weeds. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:881. 1920. — Attention is called to poison tulip (Homer ia collina), known to have toxic properties. — L. R. Waldron. 581. Cabannes, E. Contribution a I'etude des proprietes physiologiques et de la poso- logie du Geranium maculatxun. [Contribution to the study of the physiological properties and the dosage of Geranium maculatimi.] Bull. Sci. Pharm. 27: 22-25. 1920. — It was found that therapeutically valuable preparations can be made from the plant and that it may be used as a substitute for rhatany and at times for ergotin, cinchona, and calumba. — H. Engelhardt. 582. Delaunet, P. Extraction de glucosides de deux Orchidees indigenes ; identification de ces glucosides avec la Loroglossine. [The extraction of glucosides from two orchids and the identification of these glucosides as Loroglossine.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171 : 435-437. 1920. — A glucoside found in Orchis Simia and Ophrys aranifera proves to be iden- tical with Loroglossine found, in 1919, in Loroglossum hircinum. The various tests are applied. — C. H. Farr. 583. Gonnermann, M. Der Eisengehalt der 6le, Fette, Wachsarten, Harze, Gummi- harze, Gimimiarten ; sowie einige Analysen iiber den Gehalt an Kieselsaure und Tonerde. [The iron content of oils, fats, waxes, resins, gxmi-resins, and gimis ; also some analyses of silicic acid and alumina content.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 95 : 286-295. 1919. — The analyses include materials from animal and vegetable sources, many of the latter being of pharmaceutical interest. Senegal gum appeared to be the only plant material which showed no iron content. The other substances of plant origin showed iron in quantities ranging from a trace to 29.7 per cent. — W. W. Bonns. 584. Goris, a., et Vischniac, Ch. Constitution du primeverose, de la primeverine et de la primulaverine. [Constitution of primeverose, primeverin and primulaverin.] Bull. Soc. Pharm. 27 : 67-70. 1920. — From Primula officinalis two glucosides, primeverin and primula- verin, and a sugar, primulaverose, have been isolated. Primeverin yields on hydrolysis prime- verose and the methyl ester of beta metoxyresorcylic acid, while primulaverin is split up into the same sugar and the methyl ester of metametoxysalicylic acid. Primeverose is com- posed of glucose and xylose. — H. Engelhardt. 585. Greenish, Henry G. Gum Arabic and senna. Pharm. Jour. 105: 448-449. 1920. — Gum Arabic is obtained almost exclusively from Acacia verek distributed throughout the African sub-desert from Senegal to Erythraea. Gum is yielded only by those trees located in soil which becomes thoroughly dry during the dry season, only on the younger branches where the cork is thin, and only after wounding or piercing of the bark. It apparently not only serves to seal the wound but also to retain moisture for the p'ant. All of the nice grades of the gum are obtained from trees artificially wounded or "tapped." Experiments on propa- gation and the influence of various methods of tapping are under way. Senna is obtained from wild and cultivated plants of Cassia acutifolia, but wild plants of Cassia angustifolia and Cassia ohovata are common. Leaflets from cultivated plants are somewhat thinner, narrower, and more elongate than from the wild plants. — E. N. Gathercoal. 586. GuERiN, P., et a. Goris. Une nouvelle plante a coumarine: Melittis melissophyllum L. [A new source for coumarine: Melittis melissophyllum.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1067-1068. 1920. — Coumarin is produced by the leaves of this plant, which is related to the official lavender, which also produces it. — C. H. Farr. No. 1, May, 1921] PHARMACOGNOSY 83 587. Holmes, E. M. Note on Uzara. Pharm. Jour. 105: 507. 1920.— The plant yielding the root constituting this proprietary preparation appears to be Schizoglossum Shirense, N. E. Brown, described in Kew Bull. Miss. Inf. 1895: 253. 1895.— .E. N. Gathercoal. 588. VAN Ketel, B. a. Een nieuwe methode voor de quantitative bepaling van v^erkzame bestanddeelen in grondstoffen, in het bijzonder in Kinabast. [A new method for the quantita- tive estimation of the active principles in drugs and especially in cinchona bark.] Pharm. Weekblad 57: 650-651. 1920. — The following method, which, as the author believes, very probably can be adapted for the estimation of the alkaloids in other plants also, has given good results in the estimation of cinchona alkaloids. Four to 5 gms. of the powdered cinchona bark are mixed with slaked lime and triturated with sufficient ammonia water to obtain a granular mass. This is extracted with chloroform in an extraction apparatus and the solu- tion is evaporated to dryness. As an alternative process the author recommends extracting the mixture of bark, lime, and ammonia with benzene. — H. Engelhardt. 589. Leclerc, H. La verveine (Verbena officinalis). [Vervain (Verbena oflficinalis).] Bull. Sci. Pharm. 27: 104-109. 1920. — A short description of this and allied plants and a history of their use in therapeutics. — H. Engelhardt. 590. Massy. Les goudrons vegetaux sur le marche de Meknes (Maroc). [The vegetable tars on the market at Meknes (Morocco).] Jour. Pharm. et Chimie 21:433-439. 1920. — A chemical study of the tars gatrane er-rekik obtained from the cedar tree, gatrane er-relid obtained from Thuja, amine obtained from a tree which probably is Juniperus phoenicea, and oil of cade obtained from Juniperus oxycedrus. — H. Engelhardt. 591. Netolitsky, F. Eine Methode zur makrochemischen Untersuchung von Zellin- haltskorpern. [A method for the macroscopic study of cell inclusions.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 93 : 226-229. 1919. — Pulverized plant material was shaken with inactive liquids of high specific gravity (chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, bromoform). The differential sedimen- tation afforded a means of separating the materials to be examined (crystals, cystoliths, hairs, etc.) from the impurities in the plant powders. — W. W. Bonus. 592. Mooyen, a. M. Het Urson en zijne verspreiding in het plantenrijk. [Urson and its occurrence in the vegetable kingdom.] Pharm. Weekblad 57: 1128-1142. 1920. — All plants of the Ericaceae contain urson, which is also present in various species of Epacris, in crowberry, and in four species of ivy. Urson has the empirical formula C29H47O.COOH, forms a well- crystallized methylester and crystallizable potassium and sodium salts. It does not possess a double bond nor does it contain hydroxyl, ketonic, aldehydic, or methoxylic groups. — H. Engelhardt. 593. RoTHEA, F. Toxicite des coques de cacao dans I'alimentation des chevaux et du betail. [Toxicity of cacao shells when used as feed for horses and cattle.] Bull. Sci. Pharm. 27:355-356. 1920. — A number of cases of poisoning of horses and other domestic animals were traced to the presence of as much as 0.7 per cent of theobromine and 0.26 per cent of caf- feine in the shells. Therefore, only shells from which the alkaloids have been extracted should be used, and it is recommended that such shells be fed only in mixtures with other feed. — H. Engelhardt. 594. Tanret, G. Les alkaloides du grenadier. [The alkaloids of pomegranate.] Bull. Sci. Pharm. 27: 486-493. 1920. — The author discusses and criticizes the work of Hess and EiCHEL on this subject and sustains the view of Ch. Tanret in regard to the chemical con- stitution of the various alkaloids in pomegranate. — H. Engelhardt. 595. Urk, H. W. van. Bijdrage tot de kennis van Peucedanum sativum (Pastinaca sativa L.) II Mikrochemie en Andtomie. [Contribution to the knowledge of Peucedanum sativum. (Pastinaca sativa L.) II Microchemistry and anatomy.] Pharm. Weekblad 57: 883-887. Fig. 7. 84 PHARMACOGNOSY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1920. — The author confirms the presence of an alkaloid in garden parsley; it occurs in all parts of the plant and in those but 1 year old. The root contains a fatty and a volatile oil, together with starch; the amount of fatty oil appears to decrease with increase of starch. Fall seed- lings store starch, while in spring seedlings starch is absent. Microscopically the root fibers are similar to, and indistinguishable from, those of Angelica root. An adulteration of gar- den parsley with Angelica root is highly improbable. Conium can easily be distinguished microscopically from garden parsley. It has been claimed that the juice of garden parsley produces dermatitis, but this seems to be due only to an idiosyncrasy of hypersensitive per- sons.— H. Engelhardt. 596. Waal, M. de. Onderzoek naar de insecticide kracht der composieten, in het bij- zonder van Helenium autumnale. [Experiments in regard to the insecticidal power of the Compositae, especially of Helenium autumnale.] Pharm. Weekblad 57: 1100-1107. 1920. — After giving a rather complete review of the insecticidal plants now in general use, the author reports on experiments with different substances claimed to act as insecticides. As test ani- mals, flies, bedbugs, plant-lice, fleas, and cockroaches were used and the following substances were allowed to act on them: Sabadilla seed, pyrethrum, cevadine, opium, extract of bella- donna, cannabis, a mixture of cevadine and opium, tobacco, naphthalin, a mixture of borax and sugar, copper acetate, pomegranate, linseed flour, lupulin, blue flag root, anise oil, for- maldehyde vapors, chloroform, euphorbium, white mustard seed, kamala, lycopodium, quassia, saponaria root, soap bark, and tumeric. All these substances, with the exception of sabadilla seed and cevadine, gave negative results. These 2 acted on the insects as does insect powder, i.e., they paralyzed the motor nervous center. An examination of more than 100 species of Compositae, grown in Holland, showed that only Pyrethrum roseum and Chrysan- themum cinerariaefolium possess insecticidal properties. Half-opened blossoms of Helenium autumnale exerted only a very slight power and this action is not due to the glucoside present in the flower, but to a volatile oil, pyrethron. — H. Engelhardt. 597. Wallis, T. E. Analytical microscopy— X. Pharm. Jour. 105: 528-531. 5 fig. 1920. Micrometry and drawing are considered. — E. N. Gathercoal. 598. Wester, D. H. Het nangaangehalte van eenige Digitalis-soorten van verschillenden bodem, en de invloed van een mangaanbemestig. [The content of manganese in some species of Digitalis grown on different soils and the influence of fertilizers containing manganese.] Pharm. Weekblad 57: 660-662. 1920. — Some years ago Burman claimed that only Digitalis purpurea contains manganese and that it was not present in other species of the genus, such as D. ambigua, D. lutea, etc., and that the presence of manganese in the ash of digitalis could serve to distinguish the official drug from products of other species of Digitalis. The author, however, found that all plants of the foxglove family contain manganese. The ash of the green flowering tops of D. purpurea contains 0.7-0.85 per cent; the seeds 3.2-3.7 per cent; and the leaves 1.3-3.2 per cent. In the dry plant parts, the percentages of manganese in the ash are respectively 5.8-9.7, 3.5-4.1, and 6-13. In general the percentage of manganese in Digitalis is to be considered as low in comparison with that of other plants. Furthermore, the percentage of manganese varies considerably with the soil in which the plant grows. — H. Engelhardt. I No. 1, May, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 85 PHYSIOLOGY B. M. DuGGAE, Editor Carroll W. Dodge, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 12, 31, 32, 80, 342, 369, 370, 378, 412, 427, 512, 514, 515, 516, 517, 539) GENERAL 599. Anonymous. [Rev. of : Onslow, M. W. Practical plant biochemistry. vii + 178p. University Press: Cambridge, 1920.] Nature 106: 176. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 602. 600. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Zsigmondy, R. The chemistry of colloids. (Trans, by Ellwood, B. Spear.) x + 288 p. John Wiley & Sons: New York, 1917.] Sci. Prog. [Lon- don] 14: 687-688. 1920. 601. MoLiscH, Hans. Pfianzenphysiologie als Theorie der Gartnerei. [Plant physiology as a theory of horticulture.] 3 ed., xi + 326 p., 145 fig. Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1920. — The 2 earlier editions of this work appeared during the war, and consequently are perhaps little known to other than German readers. Further than to note a rather general revision of the book, it is necessary to outline briefly the method of treatment. Nutrition, including salt requirements, soil relations, photosynthesis, transpiration, the movement of food sub- stances, and certain special topics, constitutes about one-third of the book; and, apparently in accord with its purpose, there is no general discussion of metabolism. After a very brief treatment of respiration, about SO pages are devoted to growth, under which caption is included environmental relations, growth movements, organ formation, and the rest period. In this chapter particularly, many horticultural practises are analyzed. The effects of cold, freezing, are briefly presented; and this is followed by an e.xtended chapter on reproduction, both vegetative and sexual, with ample consideration of such processes and phenomena as grafting, chimeras, parthenocarpy, stuffed flowers, etc. In the last 2 chapters there are inextensive accounts of seed germination and of variability, heredity, and plant production. — B. M. Duggar. 602. Onslow, M. W. Practical plant biochemistry. 178 p. University Press: Cam- bridge, 1920. — The author presents this book neither as an organic chemistry (an elementary knowledge of which is assumed) nor as a plant physiology, but rather to fill the gap which she conceives to exist between the two fields. A very brief characterization is made in the introduction to the classes of organic compounds in plants; the importance of the synthetic and condensation processes; properties associated with the colloidal state; and the signifi- cance of chlorophyll, enzymes, and the regulation and control of metabolism. Nine topics follow, namelj', the colloidal state, enzyme action, carbon assimilation, carbohydrates and their hydrolyzing enzymes, the fats and lipases, aromatic compounds and oxidizing enzymes, the proteins and proteases, glucosides and glucoside-splitting enzymes, and the plant bases. In general each chapter treats in appropriate order 2 aspects of the particular topic. On the one hand there is a condensed account of the occurrence, chemical properties and other characteristics of the products included, together with practical directions for experi- ments on the preparation or identification of the more important groups or compounds. On the other hand brief suggestions are usually given concerning the present knowledge of the course of metabolism, especially the formation and hydrolysis (or decomposition) of the materials discussed, with suitable experiments to demonstrate the action of any enzymes catalyzing the reaction. — The biochemistry of certain special fermentation processes, respi- ration, and salt nutrition are among the topics not included in this work. At the end of each topic adequate references are given to texts and special articles. [See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 599.]— B. M. Duggar. 86 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 603. Savage, W. G. Food poisoning and food infections, viii + 24-7 p. University Press: Cambridge, 1920. — This small handbook is one of the Cambridge Public Health Series published under the editorship of G. S. Graham-Smith and J. E. Purvis. It is intended to be a reference work for the medical profession and to instruct public health and hygienic committees; but it also includes several chapters involving certain physiological relations of the bacteria, and containing data not usually assembled in bacteriological handbooks. — B. M. Duggar. 604. Sauvageau, Camille. Utilisation des algues marines. [Utilization of marine algae.] 394 p., 26 fig. Librairie Octave Doin: Paris, 1920. — The fourth volume of the Ency- clopedie Scientifique published under the direction of Dr. Toulouse has just appeared and deals in a comprehensive manner with the economic uses of seaweeds. After a general intro- duction on the marine algae, there is a full discussion of the kelps, including Nereocystis, Macrocystis, and Alaria, on the Pacific coast, together with the methods of harvesting this plant. The use of algae for fertilizers is treated in the second chapter and includes consid- erable valuable information as to the analysis and practical value of this material for agri- cultural purposes. The uses of the brown and red algae in various industries are treated at length and a short discussion of the making of paper from Zostera and Posodonia is included. There is a full summary of the information extant on the use and value of marine algae for food, and the work concludes with brief references to various other ways in which algae have been used, particularly in medicine. There are brief notes on the method of collecting and mounting algae for artistic effect, as well as some information on the cultivation of marine forms. A fairly complete bibliography on the entire subject is appended. — George T. Moore. PROTOPLASM, MOTILITY 605. Bailet, I. W. The significance of the cambium in the study of certain physiolog- ical problems. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2 : 519-533. 1920. — The author suggests that cambium cells furnish very desirable material for studies of certain problems such as the working sphere of the nucleus, the nucleocytoplasmic relation, the dynamics of karyokinesis, and cytokinesis. The cells are of 2 distinct types, small, nearly isodiametric cells, more or less similar to terminal meristem and embryo cells, and large, much elongated cells. The elongated cells can be induced to divide to form cells of the small type. Data are presented showing that there may be no very close relation between nuclear size, number or mass of chromo- somes, and cell size. — Otis F. Curtis. DIFFUSION, PERMEABILITY 606. Lesage, Pierre. Experiences utilisables en physiologie vegetale, sur I'osmose et sur I'aspiration due a I'evaporation. [Experiments useful in plant physiology, on osmosis and gaseous exchange due to evaporation.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 358-360. 1920. — An experiment of Dutrochet was repeated using various liquids and a membrane of aceto- cellulose. It was found that this membrane, varying with its origin and manipulation, cannot always be depended upon to produce osmosis. — C. H. Farr. 607. LoEB, Jacques. The reversal of the sign of the charge of membranes by hydrogen ions. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 577-594. 1920. — The sign of the electrical charge on a collodion membrane treated with protein becomes positive when the hydrogen-ion concentration exceeds a certain limit. Evidence is presented showing that a film of protein adheres to the membrane, and that the hydrogen-ion concentration at which reversal of the sign of the charge on the membrane takes place, varies in the same sense as the isoelectric point of the protein used. — Otis F. Curtis. 608. Raber, Oran L. The antagonistic action of anions. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 541-544. 1920. — By the electrical conductivity method of Osterhout in experiments with Laminaria Agardhii the author finds antagonism between anions of sodium acetate and sodium sulfate. — L. Knudson. No. 1, May, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 87 609. Raber, Oran L. A quantitative study of the effect of anions on the permeability of plant cells. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2:535-539. 1920. — This is a contribution on the influence of anions on permeability as determined by the electrical conductivity method of Osterhgut. The sodium salts of sulfocyanide, chloride, nitrate, acetate, tartrate, phosphate, and citrate were used individually in the first series of experiments in solutions of equal conductivity and in the second series at a concentration of 0.52 m. Comparing the resistance of Laminaria Agardhii after treatment with the individual salt solutions with the resistance of the control in sea water of the same conductivity, it was noted that citrate, phosphate, tartrate, and sulfate caused a marked decrease in resistance, while the bromide, sulfocyanide, chloride, and nitrate were less effective. — L. Knudson. MINERAL NUTRIENTS 610. Can'als, E. Dosage du calcium et du magnesium dans differents milieux salins. [The amounts of calcium and magnesium to be used in different culture media.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171 : 516-518. 1920. — It is found that iron salts used in culture solu- tions precipitate some of the calcium and magnesium. In addition, the aluminium salts precipitate some of the magnesium. This precipitation is prevented by adding a few drops of an acid such as acetic. — C. H, Farr. 611. HoFFER, G. N., AND R. H. Carr. I. Iron accimiulation and mobility in diseased cornstalks. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 56. 1920. 612. HoFFER, G. N., AND R. H. Carr. II. Experiments to test effects of iron salts on com plants. [Abstract.] Phytopath. 10: 57. 1920. 613. Pfeiffer, Th., A. Rippel, und Ch. Pfotenhauer. Uber den Verlauf der Nahr- stoffaufnahme und Stofferzeugung bei der Gerstenpflanze. [The course of plant food absorp- tion and assimilation in the barley plant.] Fiihlings Landw. Zeitg. 68: 81-101. Fig. 1-8. 1919. — Barley plants were planted April 3 on well fertilized land. Representative samples of the aerial parts were taken April 24, when the third leaf was forming. May 30, before head- ing, June 14, just headed, July 7, in the milk, and July 23 (fully ripe), and total dry matter, ash, organic matter, phosphoric acid, lime, magnesia, potash, nitrogen, and silica deter- mined in each case. Separate determinations were made on the leaves, stems, and heads. The total dry matter increased up to harvest time. All substances in the grain were most abundant at harvest time except lime and potash, which reached maxima during the milk stage. Total ash increased up to the time of the milk stage. The ash content of the leaves and stems was highest respectively at heading time and during the milk stage. Total organic matter increased steadily to harvest time, being highest in the leaves at heading time and in the stems during the milk stage. Total phosphoric acid increased up to harvest time, being highest in the leaves before heading and in the stems at heading time. Total lime increased up to the milk stage, being highest in the leaves at heading time and in the stems during the milk stage. Total magnesia increased up to heading time, but the pro- portion in the stems reached its maximum during the milk stage. Total potash increased up to the milk stage, being highest in the leaves before heading. Total nitrogen increased up to harvest time, being highest in the leaves before heading and in the stems at heading time. Total silica increased up to harvest time, being highest in leaves and stems during the milk stage. — A . T. Wiancko. PHOTOSYNTHESIS 614. CouPiN, Henri. Sur les plantules qui verdissent a I'obscurite. [On seedlings which turn green in the dark.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1071-1072. 1920.— A compari- son of seedlings of pines grown in the light with those grown in darkness reveals a difference in the amount of chlorophyll and anthocyan in the cotyledons and hypocotyl. Very little morphological aetiolation occurs in this species. Only one kind of chlorophyll develops in darkness. — C. H. Farr. 88 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 615. KoGEL, p. R. Uber die Photosynthese des Formaldehyds und des Zuckers. [On the photosynthesis of formaldehyde and sugar.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 95:313-316. 1919. — A brief theoretical discussion. The author considers the possibilities of the action of light in effecting enol-keto transformations analogous to the formation of benzil-benzoin from benzil and H2 in presence of light; the light performs the double function of benzoin formation and of effecting benzil-benzoin combination. Benzil reacting with H2 results in stilbendiol, which by rearrangement gives benzoin. The latter is an enol-keto transformation. These reactions suggest to the author a theory of photosynthesis. Two molecules of CO2 arranged as a simple polymer unite with 2 molecules H2O to give tetrahydroxyethylene and O2. The former is an enol form, which by transformation to the keto form may result in 2 molecules of HCOH and O2. — W. W. Bonus. METABOLISM (GENERAL) 616. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Armstron'g, E. F. The simple carbohydrates and gluco- sides. 3rd ed., x + £39 p. Longmans, Green & Co.: London, 1919.] Sci. Prog. [London] 14:688-689. 1920. 617. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Fisher, Martin H., and Marion O. Hooker. Fats and fatty degeneration : A physico-chemical study of emulsions and the normal and abnormal distri- bution of fat in protoplasm, ix + 155 p. John Wiley & Sons: New York, 1917.] Sci. Prog. [London] 14:502. 1920. 618. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Spoehr, H. A. The carbohydrate economy of cacti. Car- negie Inst. Washington [D. C] Publ. 287. 79 p., fig. 1-2. 1919.] Sci. Prog. [London] 14: 511-512. 1920. 619. Blake, J. C. The individuality of erythrodextrin. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 2673-2678. 1920. 620. Boas, F., und H. Leberle. Untersuchungen fiber Sauerebildung bei Pilsen und Hefen. III. [Studies of acid formation by fungi and yeasts.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 95: 170- 178. 1919. — The authors have studied the selective action of Aspergillus niger when grown in solution combinations of dextrose-acetamid, dextrose-acetamid-ammonium sulphate, dextrose-ammonium sulphate, dextrose-glycocoU, dextrose-glycocoll-acetamid, dextrose- peptone, dextrose-peptone-ammonium sulphate, and dextrose-ammonium sulphate. The data submitted are Ph variations in the substrate, growth (weight of mat and conidia forma- tion), and reaction to Nessler's reagent. The strength of solutions ranged from 0.5-0.25 per cent. In the series with dextrose, acetamid, and ammonium sulphate the Ph values obtained during a 7-day experiment indicate that acetamid in presence of ammonium sulphate is not autolyzed. Similar results were obtained in the dextrose-glycocoll-acetamid series, and in the series where peptone, dextrose, and ammonium sulphate were used in different combina- tions. The several experiments indicate a consistent election of nitrogen from ammonium salts as against the organic solutions used. The increased Ph values resulting are held to account for the partial inhibition of conidial formation and the presence of soluble starch in the solutions. On the basis of the results the authors conclude that lipoid solubility (pos- sessed by acetamid) is not a factor in the metabolism of the fungus, and that strongly dis- sociated nitrogen compounds are elected in preference to those weakly dissociated. — W. W. Bonus. 621. Bokorny, T. Weitere Beitrage zur organischen Ernahrung der griinen Pflanzen mit Ausblicken auf die Praxis. [Further consideration of organic nutrition of green plants with reference to practical usage.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 94: 78-83. 1919. — Potted plants, cabbage among others, treated for several weeks with solutions of glycerin, methyl alcohol, etc., showed favorable results. Cabbage treated with the alcohol resulted in growth indicated by 164 g. (40 g. dry weight) as against 74 g. (18 g. dry weight) control. Alcohol-treated rye developed No. 1, May, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 89 spikes in over 85 months, and set fruit. The total weight obtained was 24 g. as against 11.2 g. for controls. Beans treated with 2 per cent methyl alcohol far surpassed controls in growth in 14 days. Cucurbit and carrot seedlings placed directly in alcohol solutions were injured. Cabbage treated with 0.25 per cent glycerin solution attained in 3 months a weight of 138.1 g. as compared with 74.4 g. for the control. The foregoing suggests as fertilizer the wastes from cellulose industries in which the sulphite process is employed, such waste containing a vary- ing amount of sugar in addition to other organic constituents. Experiments with such material as fertilizer were conducted on plants in pots and in other containers. The addi- tion cf sulphite wastes are stated to have increased growth. Brief consideration is given to the possible fertilizing values of urine, urea, and urea compounds, with citations from other workers. — W. W. Bonus. 622. BouRQUELOT, Em. Remarques sur la methode biochimique de recherche des gluco- sides hydrolysables par I'emulsine a propos de la note de M. P. Delauney. [The biochemical methods for research on the glucosides hydrolysable by emulsin.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171 : 423-425. 1920. — Fourteen new glucosides of this type have been found in addition to the 8 known before 1902. Some of these have now been found in other plants. Out of 281 species examined 205 contained glucosides of this type. — C. H. Farr. 623. BouRQUELOT, Em., et M. Bridel. Recherche et caracterisation du glucose dans les vegetaux par un procede biochimique nouveau. [Detection and identification of glucose in plants by a new biochemical process.] Jour. Pharm. et Chimie 22: 209-215. 1920. — The usual tests applied for detecting glucose in plants, that is, reduction of Fehling's solution, fermentation produced by means of yeast, or conversion into the osazone by means of phenylhydrazine, are not specific for this sugar, because other sugars, such as the aldohexoses, the aldopentoses, maltose, gentiobiose, cellobiose, and even glocosides, such as verbenalin, have reducing prop- erties. Levulose, mannose, galactose, maltose, and saccharose can be fermented by beer yeast, levulose and mannose give the same osazone. When to an aqueous solution of a glucoside emulsin is added, the former is hydrolyzed, glucose is formed, and the solution becomes dex- trorotatory. This reaction is reversible when carried out in an alcoholic medium, the glucose forming, for instance when methyl alcohol is used, a glucoside in the presence of emulsin, methyl glucoside, which is levorotatory. By applying this method, the authors succeeded in identifying glucose in juniper, Loroglossum, etc., which contain quite a number of other sugars in addition to glucose. For the details of the method the original should be consulted. — H. Engelhardt. 624. BouRQUELOT, Em., et H. Herissey. Essai de synthase biochimique d'un manno- biose. [Attempt to synthesize a mannobiose.] Jour. Pharm. et Chimie 21:81-85. 1920. — The albuminoids of St. John's bread consist of mannan and galactan and are hydrolyzed by a ferment seminase. This ferment, which is also present in Trigonella foenum graecum, Medi- cago saliva and Sarothamnus scoparius, has been utilized to synthesize mannobiose. For this purpose a maceration of lucerne seeds was allowed to act on an aqueous solution of mannose in the presence of a small amount of toluene. The results were not quite conclusive, a new substance probably consisting of 2 molecules of mannobiose, which, however, could not be obtained in a pure state, appears to be formed. — H. Engelhardt. 625. BouRQUELOT, Em., et H. H:6rissey. Presence dans le Melilot et I'Asperule odorante de glucosides foumissant de la coumarine sous I'action hydrolysante de I'emulsine. [The presence of glucosides in Melilotus and Asperula odorata furnishing coumarin by the hydro- lyzing action of emulsin.] Jour. Pharm. et Chemie 22 : 289-298. 1920. — Melilotus and wood- root contain a glucoside which is split up by emulsin into coumarin and d-glucose, but the investigations do not throw any light on the constitution of the glucoside, which may con- tain other constituents besides these 2. The emulsin is present in the plant itself and can be obtained in powdered form. It readily hydrolyzes amygdalin and salicin. — H. Engelhardt. 90 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 626. Beidel, M. Sur la presence simultanee du gentianose et du saccharose dans les especes du genre Gentiana. [The presence of both gentianose and saccharose in gentian.] Jour. Pharm. et Chimie 21: 306-311. 1920. — The simultaneous presence of both gentianose and saccharose in Gentiana lutea, G. asclepiades, G. punctata, G. cruciata, and G. purpurea can be explained by the gentiobiase (the ferment in gentian) acting both hydrolytically and synthetically, forming from the gentiobiose first saccharose and then, during the subsequent development of the root, transforming this again into gentiobiose. — H. Engelhardt. 627. Last, E. tjber die quantitative Bestimmung von geringen Zuckermengen bei Gegen-!- wart von hoheren und niederen Eiweissabbauprodukten. [The quantitative determination of small amounts of sugar in the presence of complex and of simple decomposition products of proteins.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 93: 66-81. 1919. — The Bertrand titration method was used and the following abstract of his conclusions exhibits his results as to the limitations of the method. Precipitation of protein decomposition products affecting quantitative sugar determination is effected by using 2 g. neutral HgCl2 per g. of protein (albumose, peptone) present. Acid and excess of HgClz are to be avoided. Precipitation with Hg(N03)2 accord- ing to the Patein-Dufau method is satisfactory when accurately done. — If ereptone is pres- ent, there is a factor of error ascribed to the atomic grouping in the molecule. This is due to solution of cuprous oxide by the ammonia set free, and occurs either with boiling in alkaline solution or on long standing. Neutral HgCla also precipitates ereptone in the test solutions to a degree sufficiently complete to give accurate sugar values. Here also precipitation with Hg(N03)2 is satisfactory. — W. W. Bonus. 628. Ltjmiere, Auguste. Les vitamines sont-elles necessaires au developpement des vegetaux? [Are vitamines necessary to the development of plants?] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171 : 271-273. 1920. — Fungi were cultivated on purely mineral and organic nutrients without the addition of vitamines and developed equally as well as in the presence of vita- mines. Experiments are referred to which attempt to determine the properties of vitamines, such as precipitation, filtration, etc. — C. H. Farr. 629. RiCHTER-QtJiTTNEE, M. Eine Mikromethode der Acetonbestimmung. [A micro- method of acetone determination.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 93: 163-171. Fig. 1-2. 1919. 630. Sherrard, L. C, and G. W. Blanco. The acid hydrolysis of sugar cane fiber and cotton seed hulls. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 1160-1162. 1920.— Of the total sugars pro- duced by the acid hydrolysis of these materials, only a small quantity is fermentable, the larger portion being of the pentose variety.--— jFfenry Schmitz. 631. TUNMANN, O. tJber die Alkaloide bei Verwundungen der Pflanzen. [Alkaloids in relation to wounding of plants.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 95:164-169. 1919.— The author has checked the work of Troegele, using Atropa Belladonna and Pilocarpus pinnatifolius . His conclusions, based upon quantitative and microchemical data obtained from these plants when subjected to traumatisms and to snail depredations, are that such injuries do not result in increased alkaloidal content. — W. W. Bonns. 632. Wissell, von. Ueber die chemische Bestimmung der Starke in verschiedenenReisig- arten und einigen anderen Pflanzenstoffen. [The chemical determination of starch in various kinds of prunings and other plant materials.] Landw. Jahrb. 53 : 618-625. 1919. — The author describes in detail 2 methods for determining chemically the quantity of starch in plant materials and concludes that the method of Ewers, involving extraction with hot weak hydro- chloric acid without pressure, gives more dependable results than that of Reinke involving the use of high pressures. — A. J. Pieters. 633. Zijp, C. VAN. Over de mogelijkheid van het ontstaan van Hexamethyleentetramine in assimileerende planten end eene microchemische reactie op ammoniumzouten. [The possi- bility of the production of hexamethylenetetramine in assimilating plants and a microchemical No. 1, May, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 91 reaction of ammonium salts.] Pharm. Weekblad 57: 1345-1348. 1 fig. 1920. — The author believes that contrary to the statement of O. Loew "that in the presence of formaldehyde and of an ammonium salt no hexamethylenetetramine is formed in the living protoplasm" this product is formed, because he found by microchemical experiments that not only ammonia but also ammonium salts form hexamethylenetetramine. The test was made with iodine- potassium iodide solution by which characteristic microscopic crystals are produced. — H. Engelhardt. METABOLISM (NITROGEN RELATIONS) 634. AuBEL, E. Influence de la nature de I'aliment carbone sur I'utilization de I'azote par le Bacillus subtilis. [The influence of the carbon nutrients on the utilization of nitrogen by Bacillus subtilis.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 478-480. 1920. — More nitrogen is absorbed when this organism is grown on glycerine than when on glucose or levulose. — C. H. Farr. 635. Bos, E. C. VAN den. Action stimulante des sels azotes sur la germination de I'Ama- rantus caudatus. [Stimulation of germination in Amarantus caudatus by nitrogen-containing salts.] Recueil Trav. Bot. Neerland. 17: 69-120. 1920.— At a temperature of 15-16°C. the seeds germinate only in darkness. When the maximum temperature is almost reached, they germinate at 43-45°C. in the light only, though the seedlings never attain their full develop- ment.— In a Knop solution the germination was found to be more rapid, which suggested the action of nitrogen. A solution of 0.1 m. KNO3 had an unfavorable influence, while 0.001 m. KNO3 was more favorable. In some salts NO3 proved to be stimulating whereas CI and S04-ions were not. — Solutions of KSCN of 0.4 m. gave a maximum germination of 80 per cent. Such compounds as asparagin and urea did not stimulate germination. — J. C. Th. Uphof. 636. Lewis, W. C. McC. [Rev. of : Robertson, T. Brailsford. The physical chemistry of the proteins, xv + 483 p. Longmans, Green & Co. : New York, 1918.) Sci. Prog. [London] 14:502-503. 1920. 637. LtJERS, H. tJber die Identitat von Hordein und Bynin. [The identity of hordein and bynin.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 96: 117-132. 1919. — Hordein of barley and bynin of malt were hydrolyzed according to the methods of Van Slyke to determine the relationships of these products. The author's analyses lead him to conclude that bynin is not a new protein differing from hordein in its properties, as Osborne believes, but that it is more likely a residuum. — IF. W. Bonns. 638. Pheiler, W., und F. Engelhardt. Ueber den Nachweis von Rizin in Fiittermitteln mit Hilfe der serologischen (Prazipitations — Komplementablenkings und Konglutinations) Methoden sowie der Hamagglutination. [The identification of ricin in feedstuffs by means of serological methods, as well as the haemagglutination method.] Landw. Jahrb. 35: 561-583. 1919. — The author has investigated especially the method recommended by Miessner and Rewald and condemned as not specific by Bierbaum. The author finds that the method is highly specific, when a proper antiserum is used. Investigations on the other methods are reported but the author concludes that properly used the precipitation method is specific and convenient. — .4. J. Pieters. 639. Rousseaux, Etjg., et Sirot. Les matieres azotees et I'acide phosphorique dans !a maturation et la germination du ble. [The nitrogen compounds and phosphoric acid during the ripening and germination of wheat.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171:578-580. 1920. — During the ripening of wheat the proportion of nitrogen to phosphoric acid, PaOe, remains about constant. Both decrease until early July, whereafter they increase to some extent. Acidity is found to maintain a considerable decrease until the last of July. — C. H. Farr. 640. Sertz, H. tJber die Veranderung der Stickstofformen in keimender Lupine, insbe- sondere iiber das Verhaltnis von formoltitrierbarem und Formalinstickstoff zum Gesamtstick- 92 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, stoff. [The nitrogen changes in germinating lupines with special reference to the relation of formol-titratable and of formalin nitrogen to total nitrogen content.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 93 : 253-254. 1919.— A brief note on the S0rensen formol titration method, showing that in the presence of neutral aqueous formaldehyde solution, plant albumins, albuminates, and hemi- albumoses are practically insoluble, while formalin nitrogen, peptone, diastase, etc., remain soluble. Progressive germination gave increased values of formol-titratable nitrogen (sol- uble amino acids), and a corresponding falling off in formalin nitrogen (insoluble protein). The sum of the values obtained approximates the total nitrogen content. — W. W. Bonus. METABOLISM (ENZYMES, FERMENTATION) 641. BoKORNY, T. Bindung des Formal dehyds durch Enzyme. [Formaldehyde fixation by enzymes.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 94: 69-77. 1919.— Reviewing briefly some results of Neu- BERG showing variation in inhibitory effects of different concentrations of formaldehyde on various enzymes, and in the effects of the same concentration on different enzymes, Bokorny accounts for these on the theory of differences in molecular structure of enzymes, with corre- sponding difference in chemical reactions with formaldehyde. Quantitative data are pre- sented showing the effect of formaldehyde on emulsin, based upon the formation of hexa- methylenetetramine when formaldehyde reacts with ammonia, 6 HCOH + 4 NH3 = 6 H2O + C6H12N4. Any excess ammonia is titrated against sulphuric acid. Treating 1 g. emulsin with 50 cc. 0.925 per cent formaldehyde for 3 days showed a formaldehyde combination of 11-38 per cent of the dry weight of the enzyme. The results cited are followed by the author's views on the protein nature of the enzyme, as indicated by its amphoteric properties, com- bination with acids, bases, etc. — W. W. Bonus. 642. BoTJRQTJELOT, Em., M. Bridel, et a. Aubry. Synthase biochimique du cellobiose a I'aide de I'emulsine. [Biochemical synthesis of cellobiose by means of emulsin.] Jour. Pharm. et Chimie 21: 129-132. 1920.— Cellobiose or cellose is a glucobiose and is isomeric with gentiobiose and maltose. The authors succeeded in synthesizing this sugar by allowing emulsin to act on a 50 per cent aqueous solution of glucose. The formation is probably due to the fact that emulsin does not appear to be a uniform ferment but to be composed of gentio- biase, cellobiase, and beta-glucosidase. — H. Engelhardt. \ 643. Bridel, M. Sur la resistance des ferments de I'emulsine a Paction prolongee de I'alcool methylique k 70 p. 100. [The resistance of emulsin toward the prolonged action of 70 per cent methyl alcohol.] Jour. Pharm. et Chimie 22 : 323-327. 1920.— Seventy per cent methyl alcohol did not destroy the fermentative power of emulsin on beta-glucosides, lactose, and beta-ethyl-galactoside within 5 years. The strength, however, had been considerably reduced. The ferments acting on lactose and beta-ethyl-galactoside appear to be more resis- tant than beta-glucosidase. — H. Engelhardt. 644. Falk, K. G. The chemistry of enzyme actions. Amer. Chem. Soc. Monogr. Ser. 136 p. Chemical Catalog Co. : New York, 1921. — This constitutes the first of a series of mono- graphs proposed by the American Chemical Society. These monographs are designed to serve two purposes, (1) to present in readable form for those who may not be specialists in the particular field the knowledge available on the selected topic, and (2) through a well digested survey of the present status of the problem to promote and facilitate research. The author is convinced that enzyme studies make contributions not merely to the chemical phenomena underlying living matter" but also to "a better understanding of the fundamental chemical relations underlying an exact knowledge of chemical reactions." — He recognizes 2 methods of attack, briefly, (1) enzymes as catalysts, modifying reaction velocities (the kinetics of enzyme action), and (2) the chemical nature of enzymes and their reactions. He purposes to indicate the progress attained by these 2 methods, and proceeds to develop the subject under the following captions: Velocities of chemical reactions; general theory of chem- ical reactions, catalysis; chemical reactions catalyzed by enzymes; physical properties com- mon to enzyme preparations; chemical properties common to enzyme preparations; chemical No. 1, May, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 93 nature of certain enzymes; mechanism of enzyme actions; uses and applications of enzymes; and the present status of the enzyme problem. — It is recognized bj- the author that the sub- ject matter may not be presented in a completely rounded and final form; but it is intended to be adequately comprehensive, and to a large degree supplementary to existing wcrks, emphasizing particularly in how far enzyme reactions may be, or have been shown to be, analogous to other chemical changes. The literature of recent work is freely cited. — B. M. Duggar. 645. Jacoby, M. tjber Bakterien-Katalase. III. [Bacterialcatalase. III.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 95: 124-130. 1919. 646. Koch, A., ttno A. Oelsner. Uber die Betainspaltung durch die Bakterien des Melasseschlempediingers "Guanol." [The bacterial splitting of betain in the molasses- waste fertilizer Guanol.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 94: 139-162. 1919. — The authors have studied the organisms concerned with the splitting of betain in a commercial "Guanol" fertilizer produced from molasses waste. These comprised various forms to be found in compost, — mold organisms forming trimethylamine and a bacterium which the authors designate as Betainobacler a. The latter was studied in some detail and was found to split of? all the nitrogen of the betain molecule as NH3, using for itself only a small portion. Methyl alco- hol, formic acid, and acetic acid were noted as intermediate disintegration products. — W. W. Bonns. 647. Nemec, a. tJber die Verbreitung der Glycerophosphatase in den Samenorganismen. [The distribution of glycerophosphatase in seeds.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 93:95-100. 1919. — The author has determined the presence of the enzyme in the seeds of 20 species, using the method of Neuberg and Karczag. The substrate used was a 1 per cent solution of sodium glycerophosphate (Merck), the total P2O5 being determined, and macerated seed material was allowed to act upon the phosphate solution under controlled conditions. Results are given in P2O6 split off. The necessary controls were determined. The values given in the author's table show that of the seeds used the cereals possess the least hydrolytic activity. Legumes show high enzyme content, differing considerably with the species. Plants of Lens and Pisum were more active than those of Lupinus and Vicia. The crucifers (Brassica, Raphanus, and Sinapsis) are especially rich in the enzyme, the latter splitting off more than 41 per cent PaOs. The maximum activity was observed in the soy bean, which hydrolyzed almost 50 per cent of the glycerophosphate supplied. In general, seeds rich in oil are higher in enzyme activity of the kind here studied than the albuminous seeds, and the latter in turn have greater hydrolytic power than starchy seeds. — The fact that the P2O6 set free in no case exceeded 50 per cent of the amount present in the substrate leads the author to the belief that the enzyme present acts only on the naturally occurring d-glycerophosphoric acid. Thermo- lability of the enzyme at 100°C. was established. — W. W. Bonns. 648. Northrop, John H. The influence of hydrogen ion concentration on the inactivation of pepsin solutions. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 465-470. 1920. — Pepsin in solution at 38°C. was found to be most stable at a hydrogen-ion concentration of Ph 5.0. An increase above this point resulted in a slow increase in the rate of destruction of the pepsin, while a decrease resulted in a rapid increase in the rate of destruction. Neither the impurity of the enzyme, nor the anion of the acid affected appreciably the rate of destruction. There seemed to be no relation between optimum range of hydrogen-ion concentration for digestion and the destruc- tion of the enzyme. — Otis F. Curtis. 649. Northrop, John H. The effect of the concentration of enzyme on the rate of diges- tion of proteins by pepsin. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2: 471-498. 1920.— The rate of protein diges- tion is not always proportional to the total concentration of pepsin. It is suggested that this may be due to inactivation of some of the enzyme by combination with some product of the reaction, perhaps peptone, and that this inactivation is quantitatively expressed by the law of mass action. The rate of reaction is, therefore, proportional to the quantity of active 94 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, enzyme, not total enzyme. The hypothesis has been put in the form of a differential equation and found to agree quantitatively with the experimental results when the concen- tration of pepsin, peptone, or both is varied. An integral equation is obtained which holds for the entire course of digestion with varying enzyme concentration. Many analogies be- tween the action of pepsin on albumen and the action of toxins on organisms are pointed out. —Otis F. Curtis. 650. Staehelin, M. Die Rolle der Oxalsaure in der Pfianze. Enzymatischer Abbau des Osalations. [The role of oxalic acid in plants. The splitting off of the oxalate ion by enzyme action.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 96: 1-49. 1919. — This is a detailed study of the enzyme in vari- ous plants capable of hydrolyzing oxalic compounds. A brief review of previous work deal- ing with acid metabolism of succulents is presented. The author sets out to determine the following points: (1) The distribution of the enzyme in different types of plants, that is, in nonsucculents and succulents of widely differing genera, (2) determination of an oxalate enzyme in acid-free plants, (3) distribution of the enzyme in the plant tissues, and (4) the kinetics of the reaction. — The objects studied covered chlorophyllous cryptogams and phanerogams, both in green and etiolated stages. In general the experimental methods comprised the incubation of the enzyme-containing plant powder with a solution of an oxalic acid salt, preferably ammonium oxalate. At the close of the experiment the residual oxalate was quantitatively determined. CO2 determinations were made with standard Pettenkoffer and titration methods. — The chief results are as follows; Green leaves, stems, roots, etiolated organs, and chlorophyll-free seeds of all plants studied contained an oxalate-hydrolyzing enzyme. The pressed out juice as well as the powder precipitated by alcohol, possessed enzyme activity {Helianthus leaves). This action is greatest between 30 and 40°C., and is in large measure dependent upon oxygen supply. It is completely inhibited in an atmos- phere of hydrogen. Increased oxalate concentration is correlated with a relative decrease in hydrolysis, hydrolysis increasing with the square root of the enzyme increase (rule of ScHtJTz). With a preparation of Rumex leaves, enzyme action conforms to a mono-molecular equation, while with a powder from Helianthus leaves there is a deviation from the law of auto-catalysis. The enzyme is an oxidase, and appears to have the properties of a carboxy- lase. The oxalate ion is not completely oxidized by the enzyme to CO2 (doubtful in case of Pisum). Other disintegration products were not determined. — W. W. Bonus. 651. Wohlgemuth, J. tJber neue Theorien der Diastasebildung und Diastasewirkung. [On new theories of diastase formation and action.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 95: 212-224. 1919. — A discussion of the work of G. Wocher, supplemented by a brief account of experiments, opposing the conclusions of Wocher that formaldehyde exerts an enzyme-like action on starch, similar to diastase action. — W. W. Bonus. METABOLISM (RESPIRATION) 652. Cerighelli, Raoul. Sur les echanges gaseux de la racine avec I'atmosphere. [The gaseous exchange beween roots and atmosphere.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 575- 578. 1920. — ^A study of attached and detached roots in which the oxygen intact and the carbon CO dioxide liberation was determined. The -— - ratio has a value varying from 0.7 to 1.0 accord- O2 ing to the species. Respiration is higher in free humid air than in confined or dry atmos- phere. In the case of a confined atmosphere such as occurs normally in the soil the CO2 is retained in the tissues. In dry open air the ratio however is the same as in free humid air although the amount of gases exchanged is decreased. — C. H. Farr. 653. Langdon, S. C., and W. R. Gailey. Carbon monoxide a respiration product. Sci. Amer. Monthly 1: 508-510. 3 fig. 1920. [Reprinted from Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc, 42: 641- 646. 1920.]— The existence of several per cent of carbon monoxide gas in the pneumatocyst (i.e., floater) of the giant Pacific Coast kelp, Nereocystis hietkeana, is confirmed. It is con- cluded that this is formed as a product of respiration rather than as an intermediate step in photosynthesis. — Chas. H. Otis. No. 1, May, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 95 654. Herzfeld, E., und R. Klinger. Chemische Studien zur Physiologie und Pathologie VI. Zur Biochemie der Oxydationen. (Zellatmung; Oxydations-f ermente ; zur Theorie der Narkose.) [Chemical studies in physiology and pathology VI. The biochemistry of oxidation. (Respiration; oxidases; narcosis).] Biochem. Zeitschr. 93: 32'4-352. 1919. — This is a critical discussion based upon the work of others. The author stresses the possibility that certain molecular structures may weaken the union of the O atoms in the o.xygen molecule so that "activation" (increased oxidizing power) results, wherebj^ loose chemical combinations are made with H2O or with metals with peroxide-like structure, with OH ions, and with 02-adsorb- ing surfaces. Such organic compounds as the lower fatty acids or their salts might be oxi- dized to CO2 and H2O, fulfilling the conditions for oxidation processes in the living organism, namely, active O2 and easily oxidizable simpler metabolic products, rendering the assumption of certain oxidases unnecessary. — It is stated that 'Narcosis depends upon the disturbance of the formation or the adjustment of differences in physiological potential upon which the activity of the nervous system rests. Widely different compounds can effect this, depending upon a loose combination (adsorption) with the nerve substance. Certain narcotics (CO2, N2O) act by means of acid accumulation in the tissues. This may be the mode of action of the lipoid-soluble narcotics, correlated with an inhibition of oxidative processes. Neither for the latter group nor for narcotics in general is the inhibition of oxidation the sole or the most probable controlling factor of action.' — W. W. Bonns. ORGANISM AS A WHOLE 655. Reed, H. S. Conditions affecting the potentiality of the seed. [Rev. of: Kidd, F., and C. West. Physiological predetermination: the influence of the physiological condition of the seed upon the course of subsequent growth and upon the yield. Ann. Appl. Biol. 5: 1-10, 112-142, 157-170, 220-251. 1918-1919; 6:1-26. 1919.] Plant World 22:363-364. 1919.— Various questions indicated by the title are "discussed in a spirit which cannot fail to be stim- ulating to all further work in this important field." — C H. Shull. 656. Stiles, W. Plant physiology. Sci. Prog. [London] 14: 392-396. 1920.— A brief review of some of the more recent papers dealing with the effect of light, temperature, and humidity on the development of plants. — /. L. Weimer. GROWTH, DEVELOPMENT, REPRODUCTION 657. Church, Margaret B. Root contraction. Plant World 22 : 3.37-340. 1 fig. 1919. — A general review of literature on root contraction is given, and the facts summarized as follows: Roots do shorten; the parenchyma tissue of the root is the active tissue; cork and vascular traces are passive; the cork is crushed by contraction ultimately; there is a region where wrinkling and shortening both occur, another where shortening but no wrinkling is visible, and an unchanged region; dicotyledons show distorted bundle traces, while monocoty- ledons have bundles that remain straight during contraction. The author suggests the desira- bility of study of serial sections coupled with consideration of turgor changes and bio- chemical alteration of the protoplast and cell walls. — Charles A. Shull. 658. Jones, W. Neilson. A simple root auxanometer. Ann. Bot. 34:555-557. 1 fig. 1920. — The apparatus consists of a cylindrical glass jar provided with a stopper in which slides a glass rod. The root of a seedling impaled on a pin also sliding through the stopper, is adjusted to touch exactly the surface of water partly filling the jar, and the height of the rod, which dips into the water, is noted. After an interval the water is lowered and the tip read- justed by withdrawal of the rod, the amount of which withdrawal divided by the ratio of the cross section of jar to rod gives the growth in that interval. The exactness with which the contact of a tip with a water surface can be seen, and the great difference possible in the cross sections of rod and jar, render the apparatus very sensitive in principle. Suggestions are added for more exact calibration and compensation of evaporation. — W. F. Ganong. 96 PHYSIOLOGY [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, 659. KuiPER, K., Jr. Koolsuurbemesting nachtverlichting en andere groeibevorderende facto ren in de plantenteelt. [Effects of carbon dioxide manuring, night illumination, and other growth-stimulating factors upon plant culture.] Cultura 32: 332-344, 355-368. 1920. — A general review is given of experiments on the above subjects done by various investigators. The bibliography comprises 41 titles. — J. C. Th. Uphof. 660. Reed, H. S. The nature of the growth rate. Jour. Gen. Physiol. 2 : 545-561. 1920. — This paper is concerned with the application of the equation of an autocatalytic reaction to the growth of shoots of 3 year old pears (Pyrus communis), seedlings of Juglans nigra, and scions of Juglans regia grafted on Juglans nigra. The equation is applied also to data obtained by Kretjsler on growth of maize as well as to data presented by Eckles and Swett on the growth of Jersey heifers. The author finds a correspondence between the growth rate and rate of an autocatalytic reaction, and considers that the growth of an organism may be considered as a chemical reaction and that the growth rate for any moment is pro- portional to the growth yet to be made. — L. Knudson. 661. Saito, Kendo. Uber die chemischen Bedingungen der Askenbildung bei Zygo- saccharomyces major Takahashi et Yukawa. [Chemical conditions for ascus formation in Zygosaccharomyces major.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 32: 1-13, 15-25. 1918.— It has been previously shown that Zygosaccharomyces forms no spores when grown on the usual gypsum blocks; but it has also been determined that on "soja bean sauce" with NaCl content of 5 per cent, and suitable temperature, abundant asci with spores are produced in 5-12 days. The author now shows that well nourished cultures produce a fine yield of asci and spores in 2-4 days on gypsum blocks moistened with 0.5 dextrose and 4-10 per cent NaCl. Testing 73 substances, including primarily inorganic and organic salts, carbohydrates, and certain amino acids, it is found that many inorganic and some organic salts used in concentrations of 0.5-1.5 m., in conjunction with 0.5 per cent dextrose, produce the same action; but in general non-elec- trolytes are of no value, or of slight comparative value. Many neutral salts of metals were, of course, toxic, and alkaline and acid salts often so in consequence of the reactions. — The addition of relatively little acid or alkali to the NaCl-dextrose cultures causes inhibition of the process, likewise all ammonium salts are inhibitory. Combinations of nutrient salts are entirely favorable. In part at least the morphogenic stimulus in ascus formation is the nutrient relation of the surrounding medium. — B. M. Duggar. MOVEMENTS OF GROWTH AND TURGOR CHANGES 662. Bose, J. C. Researches on growth of plants. I, II. Nature 105: 615-617, 648-651. Fig. 1-6. 1920.— The author discusses tropic movements in general, especially geotropism and heliotropism. — 0. A. Stevens. 663. RicoME, H, Action de la pesanteur sur les vegetaux. [The effect of weight on plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171 : 261-263. 1920.— It is suggested that negative geotropism may be due to the weight of the terminal portion of the plant causing a compression below which stimulates growth and a tension above which retards it. This condition is indicated by the longitudinal splitting of geotropically stimulated stems. It is thus concluded that the plant exhibits a perception of weight. — C. H. Farr. 664. Spruit, C. The influence of electrolytes on the tactical movements of Chlamydomonas variabilis Dangeard. Recueil Trav. Bot. Neerland. 17: 129-204. Fig. 1-7. 1920.— Colloid chemical representations can be made of the influence of chemotactic agents. With Chlamy- domonas variabilis there was observed a clear positive geotaxy, whereas other investigators have found C. pulvisculus to be negatively geotactic. Reaction to gravity ceases after add- ing to the water small quantities of acid, base, or salt. The susceptibility to light, like that to gravity, is diminished under the influence of added electrolytes. Besides a negative phototactic reaction a positive reaction may also occur. Thigmotactic response is manifest only in solutions which are not distinctly alkaline. — It was possible to produce an oxygen- line in the dark under a cover glass. By means of Spirillum sp. it was shown that under the No. 1, Mat, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 97 influence of carbonic acid a removal of the oxygen-line was effected. It was found possible to calculate the critical concentration where theoretically the transition of quick to slow move- ment took place. Motility was judged by means of the reaction to gravity. — On account of the great influence of H ions and OH ions the solutions were regularly changed. The solu- tions were used in a graded series, in each of which the H-ion concentration was constant. Salt solutions with gradations in H-ion concentrations were obtained by adding small quan- tities of acid or base. With acetate solutions, the fluids were made acid with acetic acid; in this case "buffer solutions" were obtained, which offered special advantages. The H ions and the OH ions have much influence on the movements of Chlamydomonas. Mixtures of sodium acetate with acetic acid and with potassium hydroxide in which the amount of acetate was constant were used. For KCl an important change of sensibility was observed, while with K2SO4 and KNO3 the differences were insignificant. — The isoelectric point of the plasma colloids was calculated to be in weakly alkaline solutions. Two phenomena which might give further information about the place of the isoelectric point were the sticking of the organisms to the glass and also the sticking together of the algae by means of their cilia. The first phenomenon took place in solutions more acid than the isoelectric point of the plasma col- loids, a fact attributed to the negative charge on the glass in alkaline, neutral, and very weakly acid solutions. Under the influence of light or of gravity the cilia of these algae came continually into contact with the glass, thus making it possible to acquire or lose an electrical charge. It was pointed out that the acid optimum of Chlamydomonas in chemotactic experi- ments is probably an acid optimum only under the influence of the glass. — J. C. Th. Uphof. GERMINATION, RENEWAL OF ACTIVITY C65. CoupiN, Henri. Sur la resistance de plantules k rinanition. [On the resistance of seedlings to starvation.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171:550-551. 1920.— Seedl ngs of 17 types of plants were left in the dark chamber after germination and the period elapsing before death occurred was noted. The species which lasted longest was the pinon pine, which did not die until after 60 days. The plants which succumbed first were those of alfalfa, which died in 15 days. — C. H. Farr. 666. NoBBE, F. Untersuchungen iiber den Quellprozess der Samen von Trifolium pra- tense und einiger anderer Schmetterlingsbliitler. [Investigations regarding the swelling proc- ess in the germination of seeds of Trifolium pratense and other papilionaceous plants.] Landw. Versuchssta. 94: 197-218. 1919.— The capacity of clover seed to swell and germinate, over a period of forty years, is shown. Data are presented showing the effect of the climate under which the seeds are produced, the color, and size on the swelling capacity. The germination of the seeds of some wild papilionaceous plants can be largely increased by vigorous rubbing with sand. The action of alternate swelling and drying as well as the significance of the seed coat in germination is discussed. — G. M. Armstrong. 667. JoRGENSEN, I., AND W. Stiles. Some scientific aspects of cold storage. Sci. Prog- ILondon] 14: 427-434. 1920.— A consideration of the effect of slow and rapid freezing and thawing upon the water content of certain plant and animal tissues. — /. L. Weimer. 668. Weiss, H. The heat resistance of spores with special reference to the spores of B. botulinus. Jour. Infect. Diseases 28: 70-92. 1921.— The free spores of B. botuUnus are de- stroyed within 5 hours at 100°, within 40 minutes at 105°, and within 6 minutes at 120°C., the thermal death point being determined under optimum conditions for survival. The de- struction of the spores is a gradual process, probably due to a gradual protein coagulation, the spores being injured before they are killed, as inferred from the fact that the longer the period of heating before the spores are killed, the longer the period required for those spores to germinate. Young moist spores have a higher thermal resistance than old moist spores. The hydrogen-ion and hydroxyl-ion concentrations as well as sodium chloride considerably lower the thermal resistance, the lowering increasing with the increase in concentration of the ions or of the salt. — Selman A. Waksman. BOTANICAI, ABSTBACTS, VOL. VIII, NO. 1 98 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. Vlli, TOXIC AGENTS 669. Berczeller, L. Uber Adsorption und Adsorptionsverbindungen V. Die Adsorp- tionsverbindungen des Kupferhydroxyds. [Adsorption and adsorption compounds V. The adsorption compounds of copper hydroxide.] Biochem. Zeitschr. 93 : 230-236. 1919. 670. GuERiTHAULT, B. Sur la presence du cuivre dans les plantes et particulierement dans les matieres alimentaires d'origine vegetale. [On the presence of copper in plants and especially in foods of vegetable origin.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Pa,ris 171: 196-198. 1920. — ^A description of the methods used in the determination of the amount of copper in plant tissues. Analyses of 44 types of plants are given in which the amount of copper in the ash varied from 63.6 per cent in sweet almond to 8.7 per cent in radish. — C. H. Farr. 671. Maquenne, L., et E. Demoussy. Sur la toxicite du fer et les proprietes antitoxiques du cuivre vi3-l.-vis des sels ferreux. [On the toxicity of iron and the antitoxic properties of copper in the presence of ferrous salts.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 218-222. 1920. — Iron salts in culture solutions are often altered into salts which are precipitated and which in themselves are not toxic, but give rise to a toxic acid. Peas grown in a culture medium in which iron and CaS04 were present showed the maximum growth. Growth decreases as the iron content is increased. A considerable growth occurs if KH2PO4 and CaS04 are both pres- ent. Ferrous salts are found to be always injurious, whereas ferric salts stimulate growth if used in small amounts. Iron alum and ferric oxide retard growth in all parts of the plant except in the stem, which is slightly stimulated. — C. H. Farr. 672. Tratjbe, J., UND H. Rosenstein. Uber die Wirkung von oberflachenaktiven Stoffen auf Pfianzensamen. [The action on seeds of compounds affecting surface tension.] Biochem Zeitschr. 95 : 85-100. 1919. — Seeds of cereals after preliminary water imbibition were subjected to the various organic compounds known to modify surface tension. In the case of volatile agents the seeds were exposed to the vapors; otherwise they were placed in the liquid. The results were noted in terms of per cent of germination and amount of growth. — In general the work of earlier investigators is confirmed, that is, a variation from stimulation to inhibition is correlated with increase in time of exposure to the agent. Narcotics, such as chloroform, ethyl ether, urethane, etc., showed a range of action conforming, over a series, to their effect as animal narcotics. With respect to germination and growth processes the phenomena of reversibility and irreversibility of narcosis as well as of stimulation were established. — Similar data w^ere obtained for a series of disinfectants, such as cresol and naphthalene. The higher fatty acids, caproic and caprylic, were strongly stimulative to germination when applied in small doses. — W. W. Bonns. 673. Wientjes, K. Acceleration de la germination sous I'influence des acides. [Influence of acids upon germination.] Recueil Trav. Bot. Neerland. 17:33-68. 1920. — The influence of HCl, H2SO4, oxalic acid, and tartaric acid upon the germination of seeds of Phacelia tana- cetifolia, Solanum Lycopersicum, Alisma Plantago, Epilobiurn hirsulum, and Lythrum Sali- caria was determined. — There was no influence on Phacelia, Alisma, Epilobiurn, and Lyth- rum, but with Solanum some acceleration of germination was observed. — J. C. Th. Uphof. ELECTRICITY AND MECHANICAL AGENTS 674. Anonymous. Difference of potential in biology. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2: 122. 1920. — An account of a report presented to the Societe de Biologie, Paris, March 13, 1920. It concerns experiments on the electric phenomena associated with certain physiological proc- esses of plants and animals. — Chas. H. Otis. No. 1, May, 1921] SOIL SCIENCE 99 SOIL SCIENCE J. J. Skinxer, Editor F, M. ScHERTZ, Assistan' Editor (See also in this issue Entries 9, 13, 14, 20, 24, 25, 28, 34, 92, 93, 97, 108, 557, 604) 675. Anonymous. Fertilizers and parasiticides. [Rev. of: Collins, S. H. Cliemical fertilizers and parasiticides, xii + 273 -p. Bailliere, Tindall, and Cox: London, 1920.] Nature 106: 206-207. 1920. — Review refers to fertilizers only. — 0. A. Stevens. 676. Seals, Colonzo C. Soil survey of Cass County, Indiana. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918: 186-204. 1920.— The upland soils are of the Clyde, Miami, and Dunk'rk type. Muck also is present. The principal crops are corn, wheat, oats, clover, timothy, and potatoes. The paper is largely descriptive. — F. M. Schertz. 677. C ARR, R. H., AND Leroy Hoffman. The relation of nitrogen, phosphorus and organic matter to corn yield in Elkhart County, Indiana. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918: 160-165. Soil map. 1920. — About 50 per cent of the soils of this county are of the Miami loam and Miami sandy loam types and about 27 per cent ate of the Plainfield sandy loam type. These soils are low in organic matter and 51 per cent are acid. Crop yield bears a close relation to the organic matter present and this in turn is closely associated with the amounts of nitrogen and phosphoric acid present. Three samples show that good crops are not always obtained from soil with the requisite plant food content. The difference in yield between the 0.2 per cent and the 8-10 per cent organic matter in soils averages 25.6 bushels. In average field conditions for each increase of 2672 lbs. of organic matter, 71.6 lbs. of nitrogen, and 35.7 lbs. of phosphoric acid per acre (2,000,000 lbs.) there is an increase of 1 bushel of corn. — F. M. Schertz. 678. Carr, R. H., and V. R. Phares. Analyses of one hundred soils in Allen County, Indiana. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918: 151-159. Soil map, pi. 1-3. 1920.— The soils are of glacial origin, 70 per cent belonging to the Miami series and 18.5 per cent to the Clyde series. Determinations of the volatile organic matter, phosphoric acid, and nitrogen were made. In organic matter, 11 per cent of the soils had less than 4 per cent; 45 per cent of the soils ranged from 4 to 7 per cent; 37 per cent from 7 to 15 per cent; and 6 per cent were above 15 per cent. Each per cent increase in organic matter carried with it an increase of 519 lbs. of nitrogen and 72 lbs. of phosphoric acid per acre. Charts show that nitrogen has more influence on high corn j'ields than has phosphoric acid. Fifty-five per cent of the soils were acid to litmus, a condition causing "clover sickness." — F. M. Schertz. 679. Hoffmann. Diingungsversuche mit neuzeitlichen Stickstoffsalzen im Emtejahr 1920. [Fertilizer experiments with new nitrogen salts in 1920.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 36: 26. 1921. — The author brings together in tabular form the records of cooperative fer- tilizer experiments with various salts of nitrogen. — A. J. Pieters. 680. NoYES, H. A., AND G. L. Grounds. Number of colonies for a satisfactory soil plate. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918: 93-101. PL 1-2, fig. 1-7. 1920.— Tests have shown that 30 colonies of bacteria is the optimum number for a petri dish 100 mm. in diameter. Plates carrying between 10 and 100 colonies are satisfactory for computing bacterial counts. F. M. Schertz. 681. NoYES, H. A., Edwin Voigt, and J. D. Luckett. The length of time to incubate petri plates. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918: 102-109. 1920.— Counts made after 10 days' incubation at 20°C. from bacterial dilutions of soil gave reliable results for the bacterial con- tent of the soil, provided the number of bacteria present was small enough to allow all bac- teria to develop into colonies. The rapidity with which bacteria develop into colonies varies with the soil and is influenced by soil temperature, moisture, and aeration. — F. M. Schertz. 100 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAK PLANTS [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, 682. Trtjffaut, G., et N. Bezssonoff. fitude comparee sur la microflore et la teneur en azote des terres partiellement sterilisees par le sulfur de calcium. [A comparative study of the microorganisms and the nitrogen content of soils partially sterilized by CaS.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 268-271. 1920. — Soils treated with CaS are found to contain much ni- trogen and also Clostridium pastorianum and the principal ammonifiers of the soil. When CaS is used in amounts of 150 kg. per hectare in the field the soil is not found to be low in nitrogen. — C. H. Farr. TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS J. M. Greenman, Editor E. B. Patson, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 146, 208, 229, 232, 377, 433) GENERAL 683. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Hitchcock, A. S., and P. C. Standlet. Flora of the Dis- trict of Columbia. Contrib. U. S. Nation. Herb. 21: 1-329. 42 pi. 1919.] Nature 105: 242. 1920. 684. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Schoolbred, W. A. The flora of Chepstow, x + 140 p. Taylor & Francis: London, 1920.] Jour. Botany 58: 178-180. 1920. 685. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Stone, Wilmer [WitmerJ. The use and abuse of the genus. Science 51 : 427-428. 1920.] Jour. Botany 58: 196-197. 1920. « 686. Bennett, Arthur. [Rev. of : Lindman, C. A. M. Svensk Fanerogamflora. viii + 639 p., 300 illus. P. A. Norstedt & Soners: Stockholm, 1918.] Jour. Botany 58: 153-156. 1920. —See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 727. 687. Britton, Nathaniel Lord. Flora of Bermuda (Illustrated). 8 vo., 585 p., 1 pi. {colored), 619 fig. Charles Scribner's Sons: New York, 1918. — The present comprehensive work includes the four great phyla of the vegetable kingdom. The Spermatophyta and Pteridophyta have been elaborated by the author. The chapters on the lower groups have been contributed by specialists, as follows: Musci by Elizabeth G. Britton, Hepaticae by Alexander W. Evans, Lichenes by Lincoln W. Riddle, Fungi by Fred J. Seaver, and the Algae by Marshall A. Howe. In the case of the Spermatophyta, Pteridophyta, and Bryo- phyta keys are given which lead to the orders, families, and genera; and under the larger genera keys are also given to /he species. Ample descriptions accompany each category, and a limited synonymy is cited. Text-figures well illustrate distinctive species of the more important genera. Neither keys nor illustrations are given for the Thallophyta. No new species, new combinations, nor new names of the higher plants are published in the present volume. The following species of algae are new to science: Boddlea struveoides Howe, Dasya Collinsiana Howe, Callithamnion Herveyi Howe, Seirospora purpurea Howe, Ceramium leptozonum Howe, and Nemastoma gelatinosum Howe. The author adds a chapter on "Bibli- ography," and one on the "Principal botanical collections made in Bermuda." — /. M. Greenman. 688. EwART, A. J. Contributions to the flora of Australia, No. 27. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic- toria N.S., 31:367-378. PI. 18. 1919. — In connection with work on names of Victorian plants questions arose as to priority and especially as to whether the plants were really native. The decisions and references to the evidence are given for about fifty cases. Osten- feld's revision of the annual species of Triglochin and a key based on his, but including the recognized Australian species, both annuals and perennials, is given. — Some measurements of girth growth in one tree of Ulmus campestris L. are appended. The girth did not increase \ No. 1, May, 1921] TAXONOMY OP^ VASCULAR PLANTS 101 from July to October, it began to increase in November, was greatest from mid-December to the end of February, remained constant from January to March, decreased 0.2 to 0.3 inches during April, and again remained constant during May and June. Sections showed that cambial growth began a month before girth increase was measurable. Figures of the parasitic activities of Cassytha melantha are given. — Eloise Gerry. 6S9. G[oNZALEz] F[ragoso], Romualdo. [Rev. of: Barnola, P. J. M. de. Flora vascu- lar del Principado de Andorra. [Vascular flora of the Principality of Andorra.] Soc. Iber, Cien. Nat. Mem. I. Zaragoza, 1919.] Bol. R. Soc. E.spanola Hist. Nat. 19: 486. 1919. 690. Nakai, Takenoshin. Notulae ad plantas Japoniae et Koreae, XXII. [Notes on plants of Japan and Korea, 22.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 34: 35-54. 1920.— The following new species, varieties, and combinations are made: Dryopteris dentipalea, Achyranthes japonica, A. molli- cula, Aconitum milakensc, A. paniculigerum, A. volubile vars. napellifolium (Seringe) Nakai and flexuosum (Reichenbach) Nakai, Rosa hirtula (Regel) Nakai, Tilia Myabei var. yesoana, Stachys baicalensis vars. hispida (Ledebour )Nakai and hispidula (Regel) Nakai, S. palustris var. Imaii, Teucrium brevispicum, Pedicularis lunaris, Lobelia sessilifolia var. latifolia, Achillea rhodoptarmica, Artemesia stolonifera var. laciniata, and Cirsium setidens (Dunn) Nakai. — Roxana Stinchfield Ferris. 691. Nelson, J. C. Under which code. Amer. Bot. 26: 129-135. 1920.— A criticism of the American Code with arguments for the universal acceptance of the Vienna Code. — S. P. Nichols. 692. TuRRiLL, W. B. Botanical exploration in Chile and Argentina, Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1920:57-66. 1920. — An extensive list of collectors and districts visited by them. — E. B. Payson. 693. WiLLEY, Florence. The vegetative organs of some perennial grasses. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 25:341-367. Fig. 121-lU. 1920.— Recognition characters of the rhizomes and young shoots of 26 species of perennial grasses and one undetermined Carex. Only external features are given, except in Poa. — H. S. Conard. 694. Zimmermann, Walther. Badische Volksnamen von Pflanzen III. [Baden common plant-names.] Mitteil. Badisch. Landesver. Naturk. u. Naturschutz in Freiburg N.S., 1: 49-57, 65-77. 1919. — An extensive list of common names of various plants, chiefly vascular, with the localities in which they are used. — E. B. Payson. PTERIDOPHYTES 695. Font Quer, P. Pteridofitas de las Pitiusas. [Pteridophytes of the Pityuses.] Bol. R. Soc. Espanola Hist. Nat. 19 : 507-511. 1919.— The Department of Botany of the Museum of Natural Sciences of Barcelona has undertaken the study of the flora of the Pityuse Isles, in the Mediterranean about sixty miles east of the mainland of Spain. Several collecting trips extending over parts of two years brought to light a number of pteridophytes not reported before from these islands. Thirteen species are enumerated by the author as having been col- lected during the trips from the Barcelona Museum, localities and other information being given for the various entries. Mention is made of other botanists who have collected in these islands and considerable discussion is devoted to some of the species found or reported by them. Altogether the pteridophytes now known to occur in the Pityuse Isles number twenty- nine. — 0. E. Jennings. 696. G[onzXlez] Fragoso, R[omualdo]. [Rev. of: Cadevall y Diars, D. J. Mono- grafia de las Criptogamas vasculares catalanas. (Monograph of Catalonian vascular cryptogams.) Mem. R. Acad. Cien. y Artes [Barcelona] IS, No. 7. July, 1919.] Bol. R. Soc. Espanola Hist. Nat. 19 : 485-486. 1919. 102 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VIII, 697. HiERONYMUS, G. Kleine Mitteilungen iiber Pteridophyten I. [Short communications on Pteridophytes I.] Hedwigia 59:319-339. 1918. — Critical notes are given concerning a number of species of Athyrium and Diplaziuni: The following new names and combinations occur: Athyrium mengtzeense, A. cognatum (Asplenium cognatum Mett.), Diplazium vera-pax {Asplenium vera-pax Donn.-Sm.), D. novoguineense {D. silvaticum (Bory) Sw. var. novoguine- ense Rosenst.), D. Guildingii {Asplenium Guildingii Jenman), D. unilobum {Asplenium uni- lobum Poir.), D. Kaulfussii, D. alienum {Asplenium alienum Mett.), D. Mearnsii. — E. B. Payson. 698. HiERONTMus, G. Kleine Mitteilungen iiber Pteridophyten II. [Short communica- tions on Pteridophytes II.] Hedwigia 61 : 1-39. 1920. — Extensive notes are given concerning the synonymy, identity, and important characteristics of a number of species of the genus Asplenium. The following new names and new combinations are made: Asplenium squa- muligerum {A. varians J. Sm. var. squamuligera Rosenst.), A. fluminense {A. lunulatum var. fluminense Lindm.), A. otites Link var. linear i-lanceolata, A. acrocarpum {Diplazium acro- carpum Rosenst.). — E. B. Payson. 699. Merrill, E. D. On the identity of Pol5T)odium spinulosum Burm. f. Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales 44:353-354. 1919. — The excellent figure used by Burman, "Flora Indica," 1768, as illustrating Polypodium spinulosum Burm. f. is questioned. Burman's description is cited as short and imperfect. The writer considers that the plant was not from Java, as stated, but unquestionably is the West Australian species, Synaphea poly- morpha R. Br., one of the Proteaceae. The adjustment of the synonymy to the name Syna- phea spinulosa (Burm. f.) is given. It is stated that the species is of wide distribution in West Australia and agrees in all respects with Burman's description and figure. — Eloise Gerry. 700. Watts, W. W. Aspidium goggilodus Schkuhr. Jour. Botany 58: 153. 1920.— The author takes exception to the practise of spelling the above specific name, when transferred to Nephrodium, as gongylodes, and points out that the original spelling probably had a different etymology. — K. M. Wiegand. SPERMATOPHYTES 701. Ames, O. Orchidaceae. Illustrations and studies of the family Orchidaceae 6: xiv + 335 p., pi. 80-101. 1920. — This contribution to our knowledge of Malayan and Philip- pine Orchidaceae consists of two separate papers. The first by Oakes Ames and Charles ScHWEiNFURTH is entitled "The orchids of Mount Kinabalu, British North Borneo" and the second, by Oakes Ames is entitled "Notes on Philippine Orchids, VII." The paper on Mount Kinabalu orchids is based largely on the collections made by Chaplain Joseph Clemens in 1915, 222 species being enumerated. Of these, 1 genus and the following species are described as new : Habenaria crassinervia, Chlorosa Clemensii, Goodyera rostellata, Kuhlhas- seltia kinabaluensis, Vrydagzynea grandis, Nephelaphyllum flabellatum, Coelogyne amplissima, C. Clemensii, C. Clemensii var. longiscapa, C. compressicaulis, C. genuflexa, C. kinabaluensis, C. longibulbosa, C. plicatissima, C. radioferens, C. rigidiformis , Dendrochilum alatum, D. angusiipeialum, D. crassifolium, D. exasperatum, D. fimbriatum, D. Haslamii, D. imbricatum, D. Jodemensii, D. kamborangense, D. lancilabium, D. lobongense, D. longirachis, D. perspica- bile, D. quinquelobum, D. subintegrum, Pholidota Clemensii, P. kinabaluensis, P. pectinata, Nabaluia new genus. A''. Clemensii, Malaxis graciliscapa, M. multiflora, M. variabilis, Oberonia affinis, 0. kinabaluensis, 0. patentifolia, 0. triangularis, Liparis grandis, L. kamborangensis, L. lingulata, L. pandurata, Arundina gracilis, Dendrobium bicarinatum, D. crumenatum Sw. var. parviflorum, D. fusco-pilosum, D. kiatiense, D. longirepens, D. miniynum, D. oblongum, D. patentilobum, D. singulare, D. tricallosum, D. tridentatum, Eria brevipedunculata, E. car- nosissima, E. farinosa, E. latiuscula, E. macrophylla, E. magnicallosa, E. mollicavlis, Cernto- stylis crassilingua, C. longisegmenta, Agrostophyllum globigerum, Chtlopogo7i kinabaluensis, Appendicula divaricata, A. foliosa, A. linearifolia, A. longirostrata, A. magnibracteata, A. No. 1, May, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 103 minutiflora, Bromheadia divaricata, Phajus subtrilobus, Calanthe cuneata, C. tenuis, Bulbo- phyllum angxdiferum, B. caudatisepaliim, B. concavum, B. crassicaudatum, B. cuneifolium, B. deltoideum, B. disjunctum, B. eximium, B. lanceolatum, B. latisepalum, B. longimucro- natum, B. magnivaginatum, B. minutifllorum, B. pergracile, B. reflexum, B. rldzomatosum, B. sigmoidetim, B. venustum, B. vinaceum, B. vinculibulbum, Thelasis carnosa, T. variabilis, Eulophia ovalifolia, Grammatophyllum kinabaluense, Cymbidium angustifolium, Thrixsper- mum crescentiforme, T. triangulare, Trichoglottis magnicallosa, T. tenuis, Malleola kina- baluensis, M. transversisaccata, Sarcanthus Merrillianus, and Microsaccus longicalearatus. New combinations are as follows: Habenaria Gibbsiae (Rolfe), H. kinabaluensis (Kriinzl.), H. Stapfii (Kranzl.), Malaxis kinabaluensis (Rolfe), M. amplectens (J. J. Sm.), M. bidenti- fera (J. J. Sm.), M. cordifolia (Rolfe), M. incurva (J. J. Sm.), M.rnoluccana (J. J. Sm.), M. moluccana var. sagittata (J. J. Sm.),M. nigrescens (J. J. Sm.), M. obovata (J. J. Sm.), and M. xanthochila (J. J. Sm.). In the paper on Philippine orchids one new genus, Philippinaea Ames & Schltr., is described, based on Adenostylis Wenzelii, with the following new combina- tion: Philippinaea Wenzelii (Ames) Ames & Schltr. The following species are described as new: Coelogyne quinquelamellata, Dendrochilum binuangense, D. ecallosum, D. niveum, D. propinqwum, D. purpureum, Malaxis cuneipetala, M. propinqua, M. Taylorii, Oberonia leyten- sis, 0. surigaensis, Liparis jarensis, L. monophylla, L. rizalensis, Dendrobium busuangense, Agrostophyllum leytense, Spathoglottis Vanoverberghii, Bulbophyllum costatum, B. horten- soides, B. jarense, B. masaganapense, B. philippinense, B. semiternum, Acriopsis floribimda, Saccolabium tenellum, and Taeniophyllum leytense. — E. D. Merrill. 702. Ajnonymotjs. [Rev. of: Fawcett, William, and Alfred Barton Rendle. Flora of Jamaica, containing descriptions of the flowering plants known from the island. Vol. 4. Leguminosae to Callitrichaceae. xv + 369 p., 114 fig- Trustees of British Museum: London, 1920.] Jour. Botany 58: 275-277. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1435; 8, Entry 703. 703. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Fawcett, W., and A. B. Rendle. Flora of Jamaica, con- taining descriptions of the flowering plants known from the island. Vol. 4. Leguminosae to Callitrichaceae. xv + 369 p., 114 fig- Trustees of British Museum: London, 1920.] Nature 105:738. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1435; 8, Entry 702. 704. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Small, James. The origin and development of the Com- positae. New Phytologist. Reprint No. 11. xi + 334 V- Wm. Wesley & Son: London, 1919.] Jour. Botany 58: 202-204. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 333; 8, Entry 705. 705. Anonymous. Ancestral studies of Compositae. [Rev. of: Small, J[ames]. The origin and development of the Compositae. New Phytologist. Reprint No. 11. xi + 334 p., 6 pi. Wm. Wesley & Son: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 450. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 333; 8, Entry 704. 706. Balfour, I. Bailey. Some large leaved Rhododendrons. Rhododendron Soc. Notes 1 : 204-222. 1920. — An account of 14 species of the Falconeri series of the Sciadendron group with a key to the species. Four of the species are new, their technical description will appear in Notes Bot. Gard. Edinburgh. — Alfred Rehder. 707. Bean, W. J. The Fortune! group of Rhododendrons. Rhododendron Soc. Notes 1 : 187-194. 1919. — Notes on the taxonomy, history, and ornamental value of the 8 species constituting the Fortunei group are given and a key to the species appended. — Alfred Rehder. 708. Velli, Saverio. Letture. L' "Althea taurinensis" DC. ed i suoi rapporti coUe specie affine crescenti in Italia. [Lecture. Althaea taurinensis DC, its descriptions, together with those of related species growing in Italy.] Atti R. Accad. Sci. Torino 54: 291-314 (173- 196). 6 fig. 1919. — A contribution toward clearing up the identity of closely related species of Althaea from Italy. Detailed descriptions, citation of synonyms and exsiccatae, critical notes and remarks on the geographical distribution are given. The following new varieties are described: Althaea taurinensis DC. var. Cesatiana, A. taurinensis DC. var. Regoana, and A. taurinensis DC. var. dissecta. — Harriet M. Libby. 104 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 709. Bitter, Georg. Discopodium penninervium Hochst. var. Holstii (Damm.) Bitt., eine verkannte Pflanze aus Deutsch-Ostafrika. [Discopodium penninervium Hochst. var. Holstii (Damm.) Bitt.,amisunderstoodplant from German East Africa.] Bot. Jahrb. 57: 15-17. 1920. — The author discovered two herbarium specimens of a large solanaceous plant, bearing the unpublished name Solaniaii Albersi U. Dammer, which proved to be very hairy examples of another solanaceous species, Discopodium penninervium. A study of Withania Holstii Dammer showed that it too was identical with these two specimens. In the present paper this hairy form and three others are proposed as new varieties, namely: Discopodium penni- nerviumvar. Holstii (Damm.), var. nervisequum, var. intermedium, and var. spar sear aneosum, all from Africa. — K. M. Wicgand. 710. Blake, S. F. Nine new plants of the genus Stylosanthes. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington [D. C] 33: 45-54. 1920. — Nine new species of the genus Stylosanthes are described from ma- terial in the United States National Herbarium, as follows: S. gloiodes from Ecuador, S. pli- cata from Brazil, S. macrocarpa, S. diarthra, S, purpurata, and »S'. subsericea from Mexico, S. iuberculala from Bahama Islands and Cuba, S. fioridana from Florida, and S. macrosoma from Paraguay. — /. C. Oilman. 711. BouLENGER, G. A. On Rosa britannica Deseglise. Jour. Botany 58: 185-187. 1920. — This rose, having a wide distribution in England, has appeared under various names, as R. tomentosa Smith, R. foctida Bast., R. scabriuscula Smith, R. Jundzilliana Baker, and R. silvestris Woods. It has also been confused by Vt'ooos with R. micrantha. An extended description and discussion are given. The odor of the foliage in roses is not always connected with glands as usually stated in books. Completely smooth leaves of R. dumetorum had the apple scent of sweet brier, while very glandular specimens of R. micrantha were sometimes devoid of odor. — K. M. Wiegand. 712. Britten, James. Eugenia lucida. Jour. Botany 58: 151-152. 1920. — In making a list of Lottreiro's plants in the National Herbarium the author has noted that an error was made by Seemann, who considered Opa odorata Lour, and Syzygium lucidum Gaertn. synony- mous. A sheet in the Banksian Herbarium collected by Banks on the Endeavour's River, New South Wales, on which Gaertner based his name, was discovered by BritteU; and is not Opa odorata. — K. M. Wiegand. 713. Britten, James. Impatiens glandulifera Royle (I. Roylei Walp.) forma alba. Jour. Botany 58: 201. 1920. — This form is described as new. It has been distributed by the author to various gardens in England and Ireland, and was also seen by him in the garden of Miss Jekyll at Munstead. — K. M. Wiegand. 714. Brown, N. E. New and old species of Mesembryanthemum, with critical notes. Jour. Linn. Soc. London Bot. 45: 53-140. PI. 5-10. 1920.— A critical treatment of many old species of Mesembryanthemum and a description of over fifty new species. — A. J. Fames. 715. Brown, N. E. A new species of Lobostemon in the Linnean Herbarium. Jour. Linn. Soc. London Bot. 45: 141-142. 1920. — Lobostemon magnisepalum is described as new to science. It is a native of South Africa. — E. B. Payson. 716. Candolle, C. de. Piperaceae africanae. [Piperaceae of Africa.] Bot. Jahrb. 57: 18-19. 1920. — Three species of Piper are discussed and two of Peperomia. Of these Piper Zenkeri (Kamerun), Peperomia kyimbilana (North Nyassaland), and P. Stolzii (N. Nyassa- land) are described as new. — K. M. Wiegand. 717. Clute, Willard N. The toad lily. Tricyrtis hirta. Amer. Bot. 26: 138-140. 1920. — A description of the flower. — S. P. Nichols. 718. Coker, W. C. Azalea atlantica Ashe and its variety luteo-alba n. var. Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 36: 97-99. PI. 1 {in color), 7. 1920.— This little-known species, abundant on the coastal plain of the Carolinas, is described, and a new variety, namely, luteo-alba is proposed. — W. C. Coker. No. 1, Mat, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAH PLANTS 105 719. Denslow, H. M. Further reflections of an orchid-hunter. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21: 145-156. 1920. — The orchid flora even of the eastern states is not yet well known and much more information is needed on the life histories of various species. Herbaria do not contain suflBcient specimens to indicate geographical distribution accurately. Field work on orchids must be prosecuted promptly and actively, since the orchid flora is rapidly disap- pearing.— H^ A. Gleason. 720. Engler, Adolph, tjnd Ernst Gilg. Syllabus der Pflanzenfamilien. [Syllabus of the fsonilies of plants.] 8vo, 8th ed., 395 p., 457 fig. Gebrtider Borntraeger: Berlin, 1919.— A comprehensive and epitomized survey of the families of plants from and including the Schizomycetes (Bacteria) to the Compositae of the Dicotyledons. There is included also a brief classification of vegetation from a geographical standpoint. Very few and but minor changes are made from the arrangement given in the seventh edition of this work. — E. B. Payson. 721. Fernald, M. L. Gaultheria procumbens L., forma suborbiculata, n. f. Rhodora 22: 155-156. 1920. — An e.xtreme form with strikingly large round leaves, collected in Har- wichport, Harwich, Massachusetts. — James P. Poole. 722. Fernald, M. L. Lactuca hirsuta Muhl., forma calvifolia, n. f. Rhodora 22: 156. 1920. — This new form differs from the typical L. hirsuta in the leaves being glabrous beneath and in some specimens extremely thin and membranous. — James P. Poole. 723. Hamet, Raymond. Sur un nouveau Sedum chinois de I'herbier du Museiun d'His- toire Naturelle de Paris. [A new Sedum from China.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 11: 146-150. 1919.— The new species, Sedum Pinoyi Hamet, is compared with other species of Sedum which are closely related to it. — W. H. Emig. 724. Hitchcock, A. S. Revisions of North American grasses: Isachne, Oplismenus, Echinochloa, and Chaetochloa. Contrib. U. S. Nation. Herb. 22: 11^208. PI. 25-82, fig. 21-62. 1920.— Four papers are presented under this title. In the first, eight species of Isachne are described, each illustrated by a plate. In the second, four species of Oplismenus are described and figured. In the third paper, seven species of Echinochloa, one form of which has been cultivated in the United States under the names "billion dollar grass" and "Japanese barnyard millet," are described and figured. Several varieties of E. crusgalli are recognized and illustrated, and the following new names occur: Echinochloa polyatachya (HBK) Hitchc, E. opUsmenoides (Fourn.) Hitchc, and E. crusgalli crus-pavonis (HBK.) Hitchc. In the fourth paper, twenty-six species of Chaetochloa, more widely known as Setaria, are described, and all, with the exception of C. ambigua, are represented by figures. The following new names occur: Chaetochloa Poiretiana (Schult.) Hitchc, C. palmifolia (Willd.) Hitchc. & Chase, C. tenax (L. Rich.) Hitchc, and C. Scheelei (Steud.) Hitchc The treatment in each paper consists of a short introduction, a description of the genus with its synonyms, and a key to the species. Under each species the synonymy is given, in some cases very extensive, followed by the description and the citation of specimens.— 5. F. Blake. 725. Ladbrook, James. A new species of Coupoui. Jour. Botany 58: 176-177. 1920.— This new species, C. micrantha, was found in the British Museum herbarium among unnamed bpecimens of Tabernaemontana, and was collected by Martin in Guiana. This species adds a fourth to the three included in Wernham's account of Coupoui in Jour. Botany 58: 105-108. 1920.— iiC. M. Wiegand. 726. LiNDAXj, G. Acanthaceae africanae. X. [Acanthaceae of Africa. X.] Bot. Jahrb. 57:20-24. 1920. — Eight species, in seven genera, are discussed, all new to science: Hygro- phila kyimbilensis (N. Nyassaland), Mellera menthiodora (interior Africa), Pseudobarleria glandulifera (Southwest Africa), Dyschoriste albiflora (N. Nyassaland), Barleria (Eubarleria) albida (N. Hereroland), Asystasia leptostachya (Kamerun), A. glandulifera (Kamerun), and Anisotes ukambanensis (Massai Steppes). — K. M. Wiegand. 106 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAE PLANTS [Bot. Absts., Vol. VIII, 727. LiNDMAN, C. A. M. Svensk Fanerogamflora. [Swedish phanerogamic flora.] 8vo, via + 639 p., many fig. P. A. Norstedt & Soners: Stockholm, Sweden. 1918. — This is a com- prehensive manual of the flowering plants of Sweden. The author gives a detailed key to families and distinctive genera based upon the sexual system of Linnaeus. Keys are also given, under the family description, to genera and species. The Engler and Prantl sequence is followed in the arrangement of families. All species are at least briefly described and notes on distribution are included. The book is copiously illustrated with text figures. The fol- lowing new species and subspecies are described : PoaaZpi^^ena {Poa pratensis L. yar. alpigena Fries), Puccinellia Borreri (Festuca Borreri Bab.), Fesiuca ovina L. subsp. duriuscula (F. duriuscula L.), Zerna inermis (Bromus inermis Leyss.), Z. ramosa (Bromus ramosus Huds.), Z. Benekeni (Bromus Benekeni Syvae), Z. unioloides {Bromus unioloides HBK.), Agropyrum violaceum (Triticum violaceum Horn?), Scirpus atrichus {Trichophorum atrichum Palla), S. alpinus (Eriophorum alpinum L.), Betula coriacea Gunnarss., B. coriacea var. tremuloides Gunnarss., B. concinna Gunnarss., B. pubescens Ehrb. subsp. suecica Gunnarss., Atriplex praecox Hiilphers, Arabis suecica (A. thaliana L. var. suecica Fr.), Crataegus Palmstruchii, C. curvisepala, Trimorpha elongata (Erigeron elongatus Ledeb.), T. canadensis {Erigeron canadensis L.). [See also Bot. Absts. 8, 686.] — E. B. Payson. 728. Matthews, J. R. Cheshire roses. Jour. Botany 58: 137-141. 1920.— Notes on distribution and distinguishing characteristics are given on twenty-eight species and several varieties of roses occurring in Cheshire. The notes are partly from the author's material, and partly compiled from those of Colonel Wolley-Dod. — K. M. Wiegand. 729. Merrill, E. D. New ornotewor thy Philippine plants, XV. Philippine Jour. Sci. 14: 365-457. 1919. — Besides 18 species previously unknown from the Philippines, the following are described as new to science: Pandanus panayensis, P. camarinensis, Andropogon philip- pinensis, A. gryllus L. var. philippensis, Mariscus niveus (Schoenus niveus Murr.), Crypto- coryne aponogetifolia, C. pygmaea, Elatostema panayense, E. Macgregorii, E. zamboangense, E. acumatissimum, E. Robinsonii, E. pilosum, E. suborbiculare, E. diversilimbum, E. appendi- culatum, Elatostematoides samarense, Aristolochia membranacea, Haematocarpus subpeltatus, Artabotrys monogynus, A. cagayensis, Goniothalamus lancifolius, G. longistylus, Mitrephora cagayanensis, Oxymitra muUinervia, O. platyphylla, Papualthia heteropetala, Phaeanthus pubescens, P. villosus, Polyalthia dolichophylla, Pseuduvaria grandiflora, Uvaria panayensis, U. Macgregorii, Cryptocarya Ramosii, C. euphlebia, C. elliptifolia, Neolitsia lanceolata, N. paucinervia, Polyosma villosa, P. longipetiolata, Pittosporum pse^idostipitatum, P. acu- minatissimum, P. glaberrimum, Connarus castaneus, Rourea luzoniensis, Ormosia orbiculata, 0. dementis, O. basilanensis, O. grandifolia, Evodia sessilfoliola, Aglaia diffusiflora, Seme- carpus subsessilifolia, S. ferruginea, Oncocarpus obovatus {Dichapetalum obovatum Elm.), Parishia oblongifolia, Villaresia philippinensis, V. latifolia, Miquelia philippinensis , Allo- phylus stenophyllus , Guioa parvifoliola, Elaeocarpus ilocanus, Pterospermum megalanthum, Dillenia megalophylla, Saurauia Santosii, Homalium Ramosii, Begonia Collisiae, B. lanci- limba, B. obtusifolia, B. rubrifolia, B. serpens, B. panayensis, B. platyphylla, Cloezia urdane- tensis {Photinia urdanetensis Elm.), Tristania oblongifolia, Medinilla oblanceolata, Memecylon Ramosii, M. stenophyllum, Otanthera strigosa, Astronia brachybotrys, Schefflera obtusifolia, S. Alvarezii, S. globosa, S. platyphylla, S. Santosii, S. panayensis, Boerlagiodendron cau- datum, Vaccinium ilocanum, Diplycosia glabra, Ardisia ilocana, A. longipetiolata, Ambylan- thopsis crassifolia, Palaquium glabrifolium, Symplocos brachybotrys, Geniostoma pachy- phyllum, Alyxia retusa, Rauwolfia membranacea, Tabernaemontana ecarinata, Callicarpa obtusifolia, Cyrtandra ilocana, C. panayensis, C. Santosii, C. lancifolia, Hemigraphis num- mularifolia, Vernonia glandulifolia. — Albert R. Sweetser. 730. Merrill, E. D. Notes on the flora of Sumatra. Philippine Jour. Sci. 14: 239-250. 1919. — It is estimated that since the publication of Miguel's "Flora Sumatra" not over 500 species have been added, bringing the number of species of Spermatophytes to approximately 3000. From a collection by Bartlett and La Rue, aggregating about 500 numbers, several No. 1, Mat, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 107 species not previously credited to Sumatra are enumerated and a few new species are de- scribed. The following is a list of species new to science and new combinations included in the paper: Oreocnide nivea, Litsea vmbellata {Hexanthus umbellatus Lour.), Leea indica {Staphylea indica Burm. f.), Osmelia Bartlettii, Memecylon Laruei, Callicarpa brevipetiolata, Blumea pubigera {Conyza pubigera L.). — Albert R. Sweetser. 731. Moore, Spencer Le M. Alabastra diversa. — Part XXXIII. Jour. Botany 58: 187- 195, 219-226, 267-271. 1920.— 1. Plantarum Mascarensium pugillus. The genera Homa- liopsis (Flacourtiaceae) and Vaughania (Leguminosae, tribe Galegae) are described as new, and the following new species are proposed: Homaliopsis Forbesii, Madagascar; Vaughania dionaeaefolia, Madagascar; Noronhea comorensis, Comoro Islands; Lasiosiphon hibbertioides, Madagascar. 2. Acanthaceae Papuanae. The genus Hulemacanthus (tribe Justiceae) is described as new, several known species are listed, and the following new species and varieties are proposed: Heniigraphis suborbicularis, Bismarck Archipelago; H. Whiiei, Yule Island; H. ciliata, Mekeo District; Pseuderanthemum confertum, Yule Island; P. Bradtkei, Bismarck Archipelago; P. Armitii, Papua; Justicia Chalmersii Lind., var. latifolia, Sapphire Creek; Justicia platyphylla, Astrolabe Range; Hulemacanthus Whiiei, Deva Deva. 3. Miscellanea Africana. The following genera, species, and varieties are described as new: Nectar opetalum congolense, Mayumbe; Umbellulanthus gen. nov. (Erythroxylaceae), U. floribundus, May- umbe; Monocephalium gen. nov. (Icacinaceae), M. Batesii, Cameroons; M. Zenkeri, Camer- oons; Stachyanthus nigeriensis, S. Nigeria; S. obovatus, Mayumbe; Pyrenacantha sylvestris, Mayumbe; Rhaphiostyles ferruginea Engl., var. parvifolia; Strombosia retevenia, S. Nigeria; S. majuscula, Portuguese Congo; S. toroensis, Toro; S. Grossweileri, Mayumbe; Stroinbosiopsis buxifolia, Mayumbe; Coula utilis, Mayumbe; Batesanthus intrusus, Yaunde; Anisopus Batesii, Yaunde; Aristolochia ceropegioides , Yaunde; A. Jxi-ju, South Nigeria; Drypetes peltophora, Yaunde; D. Taylorii, E. Africa; D. Grossweileri, Portuguese Congo. — K. M. Wiegand. 732. Pennell, Francis W. Scrophulariaceae of the southeastern United States. Proc. Philadelphia Acad. Sci. 71 : 224-291. 1919. — Extensive keys intended to "include all features of evident contrast" are given for the 38 genera and 123 species known to occur in the area from North Carolina to Florida and west to the Mississippi river. The work is based largely upon notes from fresh flowers. Habitat, distribution, date of flowering, color of corolla, and references to herbarium material are given for each species. — Leva B. Walker. 733. PuGSLEY, H. W. Plantago alpina and P. maritima. Jour. Botany 58 : 149-150. 1920. — It is often with difficulty that dwarf plants of P. maritima are distinguished from plants of P. alpina. In the spring, however, when growth is beginning the two species can be more clearly differentiated. The author discusses these structural and habitat differences as based on plants growing in his garden, where P. alpina flowers earlier and more sparingly than P. maritima. — K. M. Wiegand. 734. Rehder, Alfred. New species, varieties and combinations from the herbarium and the collections of the Arnold Arboretum. Jour. Arnold Arboretum 2 : 121-128. 1920. — The present article contains two new species of Lonicera, L. subsessilis from Korea and L. demissa from Japan, and the following hybrids, species and varieties based on cultivated plants: X Prunus Arnoldiana, X P. Meyeri, P. Padus var. laxa, Acanlhopanax ternatus, X Viburnum Jackii, and Physocarpus intermedins f. parvifolius. — Alfred Rehder. 735. Ridley, Henry N. Plantago Cynops L. in Kent. Jour. Botany 58: 271-272. 1920. — The above species, a native of the chalk barrens of southern Europe, was found by Charles Baker on similar chalk downs between Cobham and Meopham in Kent. It is apparently entirely absent from northern France. The Kent downs are peculiar in harboring other plants that are rare in England. — K. M. Wiegand. 108 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 736. Robinson, B. L. Further diagnoses and notes on tropical American Eupatorieae. Contrib. Gray Herb. N. S., 61:3-30. 1920. — The following new genus, new species and varieties, new names and combinations occur: Ageratum rivale, Alomia chiriquensis , Eupa- torium aequinoctiale, E. Blakei, E. eucosum, E. gymnoxymorphum Rusby {E. gymnoxioides Rusby), E. huigrense, E. Kalenbornianum, E. longipetiolatum Sch. Bip. var. typicum, E. longipetiolatum Sch. Bip. var. arbusculare, E. pichinchense HBK. forma typicum, E. pichin- chense HBK. forma glandulare, E. polopolense, E. prionophyllum Robinson var. typicum, E. prionophyllum Robinson var. asymmetrum, E. trinitense Rusby & Robinson {Baccharis trinitensis Ktze.), Mikania amblyolepis, M. Andrei, M. bullata, M. clematidiflor a Hushy, M. filicifolia, M. flabellata Rusby, M. globifera Rusby, M. gracilipes, M. Hioramii Britton & Robinson, M. Jamesonii, M. lancifolia, M. ligustrifolia DC. var. subsessilis, M. Mathewsii, M. miconioides , M. Pennellii, M. rugosa, M. Seemannii, M. tarapotensis, M. trachodes, M. vitrea, Sphaereupatorium Ktze., S. Hoffmannii Ktze., Ophryosporus eleutherantherus {Eupa- torium eleuther anther um Rusby), Eupatorium nicaraguense. — E. B. Payson. 737. Robinson, B. L. The Eupatoriums of Bolivia. Contrib. Gray Herb. N. S., 61: 30-80. 1920. — The author gives a brief historical account of the progress of taxonomy in Bolivia with particular reference to species of Eupatorium, of which 68 species are now known to occur in Bolivia. Of these, 29 are known only from Bolivia. There is reason to suppose that of the Eupatoriums indigenous to Bolivia a great part are still to be discovered. In the present paper the species are grouped under the sections to which they are referred and subsectional keys given to the species. Species previously undescribed in the present series of papers are accompanied by a complete diagnosis. Specimens are cited for all species. The following new varieties and forms and new combinations are included: Eupatorium tunari- erse (E. conyzoides [Vahl] Ktze. var. tunariense Hieron.), E. patens D. Don var. typicum, E. pyramidale Klatt var. angustifolium (E. amygdalinum Lam. var. revolutum [Pohl] Bak. forma angustifolium Hieron.), E. rufescens Lund. var. typicum. — E. B. Payson. 738. Rydberg, Per Axel. Resales. Fabaceae: Psoraleae. North Amer. Flora [New York] 24: 65-136. 1920. — The author completes the treatment of the genus Parosela and elab- orates the genera Thornbera, Petalostemon, and Kuhnistera. The following new species are described and new combinations made: Parosela lagopina, P. exserta, P. Barberi Rose, P. lucida Rose, P. fissa, P. Bigelovii, P. pilifera, P. Townsendii, P. ervoides (Dalea ervoides Benth.), P. costaricana, P. leporina (Psoralea leporina Ait.), P. alopecuroides (Dalea alopecur- oides Willd.), P. Thouini (Dalea Thouini Schrank), P. flava (Dalea flava Mart. & Gal.), P. elata (Dalea elata H. & A.), P. roseola, P. citrina, P. caudata, P. attenuata, P. bicolor (Dalea bicolor Willd.), P. quinqueflora (Dalea quinqueflora Brand.), P. Lloydii, P. laxa, P. minuti- folia, P. Conzattii, P. tuberculina, P. fulvosericea, P. polycephala (Dalea polycephala Benth.) , P. decora (Dalea decora S. Shauer), P. dorycnoides (Dalea dorychnoides DC), P. pilosissima, P. abietifolia Rose, P. subvillosa, P. scariosa (Dalea scariosa S. Wats.), P. trifoliolata (Dalea trifoliolata Moric), P. reclinata (Psoralea reclinata Cav.), P. versicolor (Dalea versicolor Zucc), P. tsugoides, P. megalostachys Rose, P. sanctae-crucis, P. leucantha, P. sessilis (Dalea Wislizeni var. sessilis A. Gray), P. leucosericea, P. longifolia Rose, P. roseiflora, P. Smithii, P. glabrescens, P. involuta, P. melantha (Dalea melantha S. Schauer), P. fuscescens, P. zima' panica (Dalea zimapanica S.SchsiXxer), P. diversicolor, P . argyrostachya (Dalea argyrostachya H. & A.), P. Botterii, P. gigantea Rose, P. atrocyanea, P. Wardii, P. caudata, P. capittdata, P. tehuacana, P. emphysodes (Psoralea emphysodes Jacq.), P. scandens (Psoralea scandens Mill.), P. floridana, P. humilis (Psoralea humilis Mill.), P. vidneraria (Dalea vulneraria var. typica Oerst.), P. occidentalis, P. platyphylla, P. barbata (Dalea vulneraria var. barbata Oerst.), Thornbera lutea, T. Watsoni (Parosela Watsoni Rose), T. villosa, T. leucantha, T. Ordiae (Dalea Ordiae A. Gray), T. Grayi (Parosela Grayi Vail), T. revolida (Dalea revoluta S. Wats.), T. Pringlei (Dalea Pringlei A. Gray), T. Nelsonii (Dalea Nelsonii Rose), T. pumila, T. Dalea (Psoralea Dalea L.), T. robusta, Petalostemon truncatus, P. sonorae, P. pilulosus, P. confusus, P. evanescens Rose (Dalea evanescens Brand.), P. obreniformis , P. Standleyanus, P. lagopus, P. Rothrockii, Kuhnistera adenopoda (Petalostemon corymbosum var. adenopodum B. L. Robinson). — E. B. Payson. No. 1, May, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 109 739. Salmon, C. E. Ranunculus Lingua. Jour. Botany 58: 275. 1920. — The occurrence of R. Lingua var. glabratus Wallr. is recorded in Great Britain. — K. M. Wiegand. 740. Sargent, C. S. Notes on North American trees VII. Jour. Arnold Arboretum 2: 112-121. 1920. — This article deals with Prunus and Aesculus and the following new com- bination and new varieties and one new hyrbid are proposed : Prunus americana var. fiori- dana, P. mexicana var. reticulata (Sarg. ), P. mexicana var. polyandra (Sarg.), P. mexicana var. fultonensis (Sarg.), P. virginiana var. demissa f. pachijrrhachis (Koehne), P. virginiana var. melanocarpa (A. Nels.), P. virens var. rufula (Wooton & Standi.), Aesculus octandravar. virginica, A. georgiana var. lanceolata, X A. mississippiensis. (See also Bot. Absts. 1, Entries 812, 1127, 1128; 3, Entry 1837; 4, Entry 1766; 7, Entry 2232.)— Alfred Rchder. 741. Schneider, Camillo. Notes on American willows X. Jour. Arnold Arboretum 2: 65-90. 1920. — The present article deals with the sections Fulvae and Roseae each contain- ing 3 species, with 2 species of doubtful affinity and a species of the section Glaucae omitted from the treatment of that section. As in the preceding articles the synonymy, nomencla- ture, distribution and relationship of the species and varieties are discussed at length and the following new combinations proposed: Salix Bebbiana var. perrostrata (Rydb.), S. Geyeriana var. argentea (Bebb), and S. Scouleriana var. Austinae (Bebb). (See also Bot. Absts. 1, Entries 801, 813; 3, Entries 1838, 1839; 4, Entries 1769, 1770; 7, Entries 1490, 2238, 2239.)— Alfred Rehder. 742. Standley, Paul C. A new species of Campnosperma from Panama. Jour. Arnold Arboretum 2: 111-112. 1920. — Campnosperma panamensis is described as a new species of a genus known before in America only from a single Brazilian species. — Alfred Rehder. 743. Standley, Paul C. Six new species of plants from Mexico. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash- ington [D. C] 33: 65-68. 1920. — Four plants belonging to the family Polygonaceae one to the Aristolochiaceae and one to the Hydrangeaceae are described from Mexico as new species. They are: Aristolochia nialacophylla, Podopterus cordifolius, Ruprechtia occidentalis, Cocco- loba acapulcensis, C. chiapensis, and Fcndlerella lasiopetala. — J. C. Oilman. 744. Standley, Paul C. Trees and shrubs of Mexico (Gleicheniaceae-Betulaceae). Contrib. U. S. Nation. Herb. 23 : 1-169. 1920. — This paper forms the first part of a volume intended to provide a keyed synopsis of the woody plants of Mexico, and an account of their local names and uses. After a short introduction describing the general features of Mexican botany, the plan of the work is discussed, and a short history of the early botanical explora- tion of Mexico up to the time of Humboldt is given. This is followed by a key to the fami- lies. Under the families keys are given to the genera and species, and under each species a brief description is generally given. The chief synonymy is included under each species, with an account of the range and the local names and uses. The ferns have been treated by W. R. Maxon, the grasses by A. S. Hitchcock, and the Amaryllidaceae by W. Trelease. The larger genera included in this part of the work are the following: Agave, with 170 species; Piper, with 59; Pinus, with 26; and Chamaedorea, with 25. The following new species and new names occur: Inodes mexicana (Mart.) Standi., /. japa (C. Wr.) Standi., Yucca jaliscensis Trel., Agave panamana Trel., A. stringens Trel., A. subtilis Trel., A. pedrosana Trel., A. Gutierreziana Trel., A, palmaris Trel., A. rhodacantha Trel., A. pes-mulae Trel., A. paciflca Trel., A. pseudotequilana Trel., A. Sullivani Trel., A. yaquiana Trel., A. rasconensis Trel., A. guadalajarana Trel., A. felina Trel., A. subzonata Trel., A. mapisaga Trel., A. Bourgaei Trel., A.mirabilis Trel., A. abrupta Trel., A. Wercklei Weber, A. flexispina Trel., A. Eduardi Trel., A. pedunculifera Trel., A. potrerana Trel., A. inopinabilis Trel., A. convallis Trel., A. dissimulans Trel., A. angustiarum Trel., A. victoriae-reginae f. Nickelsi (Roland-Gosselin) Trel., A. Mulfordiana Trel., A. Schottii var. atricha Trel., A. angustissima var. Ortgiesiana (Baker) Trel.— 5. F. Blake. 745. Stephenson, T., and T. A. Stephenson. A new marsh Orchis. Jour. Botany 58: 165-170. 3 fig. 1920. — Orc/iis purpwreHa is described as new, consisting of two forms desig- 110 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, nated as A and B. Four points are given special attention: Form of the lip, its color, spots on the leaves, and dwarf habit. These are discussed in relation to various closely related species, as 0. salina Turcz., 0. cruenta MiilL, 0. Fuchsii Druce, 0. ericetorum Linton, 0. praetermissa var. pulchella Druce, 0. latifolia L., and 0. incarnata, with the conclusion that 0. purpurella is a valid species, differing from the above species by the characters given. The form B is closely related to 0. cruenta but can scarcely be referred to it, neither is it a dwarf form of 0. latifolia. Hybrids of 0. purpurella with a dwarf form of 0. latifolia and with O. ericetoru7n are noted. The forms described may have arisen by crossings of 0. incarnata or 0. praetermissa with 0. latifolia or 0. maciilata, but the theory is favored that they are mutations from 0. incarnata. — K. M. Wiegand. 746. Stephenson, T., and T. A. Stephenson. The genus Epipactis in Britain. Jour. Botany 58: 209-213. PL 555. 1920.— A critical study of Epipactis and Orchis extending over several years resulted in a paper too large to publish as a whole. The present article contains the important conclusions with respect to Epipactis. Five species are recognized for Britain: E. palustris Crantz, E. atropurpurea Raf., E. viridiflora Rchb., E. purpurata Sm., and E. latifolia Allm. The distinguishing features between the species are noted and discussed. E. latifolia should include E. media Fries and E. atroviridis Linton. The conclusion is reached that lip-bosses and details of leaf-scheme on which the last two species' names were founded are very unstable and of no value as specific characters. These two names should be dropped. It is not believed that E. media and E. atroviridis are hybrids, as they do not behave like other hybrids with which the authors are acquainted.— i?. M. Wiegand. 747. Stephenson, T., and T. A. Stephenson. The British palmate orchids. Jour. Botany 58: 257-262. 1 pi. 1920.— This is a summary of several years' work on the marsh and spotted orchids. Notwithstanding the great number of forms which more or less intergrade, certain "landmarks" or species and certain hybrids may be recognized. The British palmate orchids comprise the following species: Orchis incarnata L., 0. purpxirella Stephenson, 0. ericetorum Linton, O. praetermissa Druce, O. latifolia L., and 0. Fuchsii Druce. Tha charac- teristics of each of these is discussed, and reasons given for the belief that they are true species. The colored plate which serves to illustrate previous papers by these authors as well as papers to follow, is discussed in detail, and the differences between the species and peculiarities of the hybrids as they appear in the plate are pointed out. — K. M. Wiegand. 748. SvENSON, H. K. A northeastern variety of Panicum. Rhodora 22: 153-155. 5 fig. 1920.— The author describes Panicum dichotomifiorum Michx. var. puritanorum, n. var., from Massachusetts. — James P. Poole. 749. Swingle, Walter T. A new species of Pistacia native to southwestern Texas, P. texana. Jour. Arnold Arboretum 2: 105-110. 1920.— The Pistacia of southwestern Texas and northern Mexico formerly included under P. 7nexicana HBK. is described as a new species, P. texana. — Alfred Rehder. 750. Vicioso, Carlos. Una especie nueva del genero Gypsophila. [A new species of the genus Gypsophila.] Bol. R. Soc. Espanola Hist. Nat. 19: 493-494. 1919.— Gypsophila Ceballosi Pau & C. Vic, collected in Escorial, central Spain.— 0. E. Jennings. 751. ViscHER, W. Sur les Quararibea Aubl. un genre de Bombacees a ovaire infere. [Con- cerning the species of Quararibea Aubl. a genus of the family Borabacaceae with inferior ovaries.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve 11: 199-210. 5 fig. 1919.— The characteristics of the various types of flowers of the genus Quararibea are given. A number of new combinations are introduced and a new species, Quararibea Chodati Vischer, is described.— PF. H. Emig. No. 1, May, 1921] UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS 111 MISCELLANEOUS, UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS B. E. Livingston, Editor S. F. Trelease, Assistant Editor 752. Anonymous. Turning a liability into an asset. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2: 129. 1920. — The commercial possibilities of the water hyacinth (Eichornia crassipes) are discussed. — Chas. H. Otis. 753. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Spitta, E. J. Microscopy: the construction, theory, and use of the microscope. 3d ed., xxviii + 5S7 p., 28 pi. John Murray: London, 1920.] Nature 106: 77-78. 1920. — In the present edition may be noted especially the reference to low power objectives designed to give great depth of focus and a flat field. The book is illustrated by a considerable number of new plates. — 0. A. Stevens. 754. DuRAND, R. Bacteries et papier-monaie. [Bacteria and paper money.] Bull. Sci. Pharm. 27: 357-358. 1920. — A single bill of paper money may contain as many as 100,000 bacteria. These belong chiefly to the bacteria of the intestinal flora, but bacilli communi- cating contagious diseases were also found. — H. Engelhardl. 755. Ingle, Harry. The oil industry. [Rev. of: Martin, Geoffrey. Animal and vege- table oils, fats, and waxes: their manufacture, refining, and analysis, including the manufac- ture of candles, margarine and butter. A practical treatise, x + 218 p. Crosby Lockwood and Son: London, 1920.] Nature 106: 43-44. 1920. 756. SiMMONDS, C. Possible new sources of power alcohol. Nature 106: 244-245. 1920. — Two reports of British committees are referred to. Foodstuffs will probably be too valu- able for yet some time for use on any large scale as sources of alcohol. It has been suggested that there is in Ireland considerable waste land which could be used for crops to be used in this way, and some work has been started in this direction. In tropical regions cassava, arrowroot, and maize might be practicable. One plant (Polymmia edulis) from the Andes is said to be under trial in France. Utilization of cellulose materials, such as straw and saw- dust, is also considered. — 0. A. Stevens. 757. Slade, R. E., and G. I. Higson. A simple apparatus for high-power photomicrog- raphy. Sci. Prog. [London] 14:645-646. 1920. — An apparatus designed for the rapid pro- duction of photomicrographs of emulsions. — J. L. Weimer. 758. Springer, J. F. Water pipes of wood. Sci. Amer. 123 : 250, 262, 264. 3 fig. 1920. 759. Tevis, M. Forty centuries ago— and now. Sci. Amer. 123 : 397. 1920.— The paper concerns the possibility of again making paper from Papyrus. — Chas. H. Otis. 760. Winters, S. R. Binder twine from Florida. Sci. Amer. 123:379. 2 fig. 1920.— A brief article on sisal. — Chas. H. Otis. INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS The purpose of Botanical Abstracts is to supply complete citations and analytical abstracts of all papers dealing with botanical subjects, wherever published, just as soon as possible after they appear. Every effort is made to present complete and correct citations with abstracts of original work, of all papers and reviews, appearing after January 1, 1919. As an adequate index of progress. Botanical Abstracts is of use to the intelligent grower, field agent and inspector, extension worker, teacher and investigator. The international scope of the work should appeal especially to those workers who have restricted library facili- ties. It is hoped that the classification by subjects will prove to be a great aid even to those having access to large libraries, while the topical index should serve a most useful purpose to every one interested in plants. The service of Botanical Abstracts is planned for botanists and all workers with plants, throughout the world. The services of all the botanical workers who are connected with Botan- ical Abstracts in any way, are given without any compensation except the satisfaction of par- ticipation in such a great cooperation toward the advancement of science. It is hoped that all students of plants will feel that Botanical Abstracts is their journal. Although the physical exigencies of the enterprise have made it practically necessary that the actual work of prepar- ing-the issues be largely done within a relatively short distance from the place of publication! yet this does not imply that the cooperation is not needed of residents of other countries than the United States and Canada. Many collaborators and abstractors reside in other countries, but the aim has not been to distribute the actual work throughout the world; rather has it seemed best to distribute the work so as to give prompt and efficient service, without reference to the particular countries in which the workers reside. It is physically necessary that the burden of the work and the finding of funds for clerical assistance, etc., should rest largely on North American workers, but the field covered is international and the results are available to all. The Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts, Incorporated, has charge of publication. The board is a democratic organization made up of members elected from many societies, as is shown on the first cover page. Each society elects, in its own way, two representa- tives, each for a period of four years. One new member is elected each biennium (beginning January 1, 1921) to replace the representative who retires. In the list on the first cover page, the member first named in each group is to serve till January 1, 1925; the second member in each group is to serve till January 1, 1923. Members are not eligible for immediate reelection. The Executive Committee of the Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts consists of five members, elected annually by the Board. It has charge of ad interim affairs not involving matters of general policy. Its membership is shown by the asterisks in the list on the first cover page. The chairman of the Committee for 1921 is B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. The Board of Editors of Botanical Abstracts consists of an Editor-in-Chief and Editors for Sections, as shown on the second cover page. The Editors are elected annually by the Board of Control. Assistant Editors may be appointed by the Editors. Editors for Sections, with the aid of Assistant Editors for Sections, are responsible for editing the material of their respective sections as this is supplied by the Bibliography Committee (from the Collaborators and other Abstractors), and also for citations and abstracts of non-periodical literature. They also supply abbreviated titles for the author index of each volume and subject-index entries (for the occasional subject indexes) pertaining to their respective sections. The Editor- in-Chief, with the approval of the Board of Editors, is responsible for the general make-up of the issues, for the final compilations of the author and subject indexes, and for such other details as are left to him by the Editors for Sections. The Bibliography Committee of Botanical Abstracts, the membership of which is shown on the second cover page, is appointed annually by the Executive Committee of the Board of Control. The Bibliography Committee is charged with the responsibility of arranging for the prompt citing and abstracting of serial botanical literature. In performing this function, the Committee assigns to individual Collaborators the complete responsibility for furnishing the INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, Continued abstracts of all botanical papers in a specified serial publication, or in a limited number of serials. The Committee is further charged with the duty of maintaining an accurate recordr through a system of reports furnished currently by the Collaborators, of the state of abstract- ing for each serial publication. This record enables the Committee to detect and correct delinquencies in the work of abstracting and to keep the work up to date. The number of assigned serials will eventually exceed 2000, for each of wliich a record of the state of ab- stracting will bemaintained in the office of the Bibliography Committed* Readers are earnestly requested to aid the Bibliography Committee by bringing to its attention any serial publi- cations that are "not being properly represented in Botanical Abstracts. The chairman of the Committee for 1921 is J. R. Schramm, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Collaborators of Botanical Abstracts. A large number of botanical workers in all parts of the world have volunteered to assume complete responsibility for securing citations and abstracts from one or more serial publications as assigned to them by the Bibliography Committee. This corps of voluntary workers (called Collaborators) really constitutes the basis of the service rendered by Botanical Abstracts. Through their work it is made certain that all serial publications are promptly entered. A list of the names of Collaborators is published in each volume of Botanical Abstracts. It is desirable that a considerable reserve list of collaborators be maintained, in order to allow for necessary changes, and addi- tional collaborators are therefore earnestly solicited. Abstractors for Botanical Abstracts. Collaborators frequently prepare abstracts them- selves, and are thus Abstractors, but they also arrange for others to prepare them. Every abstract is signed by the Abstractor who prepares it, but entries by citation alone are not signed. The Collaborators are responsible for these citations. A list of Abstractors is pub- lished for each volume of Botanical Abstracts. It includes many names of voluntary" contributors to the enterprise, besides those of the Collaborators. The Printing and Circulation of Botanical Abstracts is in the hands of the Publishers, according to the terms of a definite contract between them and the Board of Control. All other matters are directly in the hands of the Board of Control. Correspondence concerning subscriptions should be addressed to the Publishers or their agents; other matters should be referred to the Chairman of the Board of Control, to the Chairman of the Bibliography Com- mittee, or to the Editor-in-Chief. Readers of Botanical Abstracts are earnestly requested to make careful note of any errors that occur in the journal, with their corrections, and to send these notes to the Editor- in-Chief. If all will cooperate in this it will be possible to supply a page of corrigenda with each volume. Botanical Abstracts is published monthly. Each volume contains about 300 pages. No claims are allowed for copies lost in the mails unless such claims are received within 30 days (90 days for places outside of the United States and Canada) of the date of issue. Price per volume, net, postpaid: S3.00, United States and dependencies; S3. 12, Canada; $3.25, other countries. The current (1921) volumes are VII and VIII. Back volumes, Volumes III to VI, inclusive, can be supplied. Volumes I and II are out of print. Subscriptions are received at the following addresses, for the respective countries: United States of North America and dependencies ; Mexico; Cuba: Williams & Wilkins Company, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore. Argentina and Uruguay : Beutelspacher y Cia., Sarmiento 815, Buenos Aires. Australia: Stirling & Co,, 317 Collins St., Melbourne. Belgium: Henri Lamertin, 58 Rue Coudenberg, Bruxelles. The British Empire, except Australia and Canada: The Cambridge University Press, C. F. Clay, Manager, Fetter Lane, London, E. C. British subscribers are requested to make checks and money orders payable to Mr. C. F. Clay, Manager, at the London address. Canada: Wm. Dawson & Sons, Ltd., 87 Queen Street, East Toronto. Denmark: H. Hagerup's Boghandel, Gothersgade 30, Kjobenhavn. France: Emile Bougault, 48 Rue des Ecoles, Paris. Germany: R. Friedlander & Sohn, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin N. W., 6. Holland : Scheltema & Holkema, Rokin 74-74, Amsterdam. Italy: Ulrico Hoepli, Milano. Japan and Korea: Maruzen Company, Ltd. (Maruzen-Kabushiki-Kaisha), 11-16 Nihonbashi Tori-Sanchome, Tokyo; Fukuoka, Osaka, Kyoto, and Sendai, Japan. Spain: Ruiz Hermanos, Plaza de Santa Ana 13, Madrid. Switzerland: Georg & Cie., Freistrasse 10, BAle. Vol. VIJI JUNE, 1921 No. 2 ENTRIES 761-1582 BOTANICAL Abstracts A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of botany in its broadest sense PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC. A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies interested in plants. THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED AND THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL {The Members of the Executive Committee for 19S1 are indicated by asterisks) Paleontological Society of America, Arthur Hollick, 61 Wall Street, New Brighton, New York. E. W Berry, John^ Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryhmd. American Association for the Advancement of Science, Section G. R. A. Harper, Columbia University, New York City. B. E LivTNosTON, Johns Hopkins Uni- versity, Baltimore, Maryland. Botanical Society of America, General Section. H. A. Gleason, New York Botanical Garden, New York City. *B. M. DAVT.tj, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Botanical Society of America, Physiological Section. Otts F. Curtis, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. *B. M. DuooAR (Chairman of the Board), Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. Botanical Society of America, Systematic Section. Marshall A. Howe, New York Botani- cal Garden, New York City. J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical Garden, New Y'ork Cit3\ Botanical Society of America, Mycological Section. C. H. Kauffman, Univer'^ity of Michi- gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Bruce Fink, Miami University, Oxford, Ohio. American Society of Naturalists. H. H. Bartlett, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. *J. A. Harris, Department of Genetics, Carnegie Institution of Washington, Cold Spring Harbor, L. I., New York. Ecological Society of America. H. L. Shantz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. *FoRREST Shreve, De'^crt Laboratory, Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona. At W. A. Orton, U. S. Bureau of American Society of Agronomy. C. B. Hutchison, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. C A. Mooers. LTniversity of Tennessee, Knoxville, Tennessee. Society for Horticultural Science. V. H. Gardner, University of Missouri, Columbia, Missouri. E. .1 Kraus, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. American Phytopathological Society. L. R. Jones, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. *DoNALD Rrddtck, Comell University, Ithaca, New York. Society of American Foresters. Raphael Zon, U. S. Forest Service.Wash- ingto'n, D. C. J. S Illick, Pennsylvania Department of Forestry, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. American Conference of Pharmaceutical Faculties. Heber W. Youngken, Philadelphia Col- lege of Pharmacy and Science, Phila- delphia, Pennsylvania. Henry Kraemer, Mt. Clemens, Michigan. Canadian Society of Technical Agricultur- ists. W.' P. Thompson, University of Sas- katchewan, Saskatoon, Saskatchewan. B. T. DifKsox, Macdonald College, Macdonald College, Quebec. Royal Society of Canada. No elections. large. Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY BALTIMORE, U. S. A. Entered ae Becond-clase matter, November 9, 1918, at the post office at Baltimore, Maryland, under the Act of March 3. 1879 Copyright 1921, Williams & Wilkins Company Price, net postpaid, per volume. {g;^; Hallf^sl; Othtr°6o?ntrie3 CONTENTS Agronomy , 761- 823 Bibliography, Biography and History 824- 923 Botanical Education 924- 930 Cytology p. 134 Ecology and Plant Geography 931- ggg Forest Botany and Forestry 987-1051 Genetics 1052-1127 Horticulture 1128-1205 Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants 1206-1220 Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae 1221-1257 Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes 1258-1271 Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes 1272-1335 Paleobotany and Evolutionary History 1336-1343 Pathology 1344r-1435 Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy ^ 1436-1447 Physiology 1448-1508 Soil Science 1509-1538 Taxonomy of Vascular Plants 1539-1572 Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications 1573-1582 BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1921 AND ASSISTANT EDITORS Editor-in-Chief, J. R. Schramm Cornell University, Ithaca, New Vork EDITORS FOR SECTIONS Agronomy. C. V Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus- try, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, Mart R. Burr, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, DC. Bibliography, Biography and History. Neil E. Stevens, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant Editor, Alfred Gundersen, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. — Assistant Editor, Geo. S Brtan, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin^ Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. Cowles, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois.— Assistant Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael Zon, U.S. Forest Service, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, J. V. HoFMANN, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Ex- periment Station, Stabler, Washington. Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University, Princeton, New Jersey. — Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly, Pennsylvania State College, State College, Pennsylvania. Horticulture J. H. Gourlet, Ohio Agricultural Ex- periment Station, Wooster, Ohio. — Assistant Editor, H. E. Knowlton, West Virginia University, Morgan- town, West Virginia. Hiscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E. Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University, Balti- more, Maryland. — Assistant Editor, Sam F. Trb- LEASE, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants E. W. Sinnott, Connecticut Agricultural College Storrs. Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E.N. Transb-o, Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio. Morphology ana Taxonomy oi Bryophytes. Alexawdbb W. Evans, Yale University. New Haven. Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes. H. M. Fitzpatrick, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W- Berrt, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore. Maryland. Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agricultural Col- lege, East Lansing, Michigan.— Assistant Editor, C. W Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College. East Lans- ing, Michigan. Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. Heber W. YouNGKEN, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and Science,Philadelphia,Penn8ylvania.— Assistant Editor, E. N. Gathercoal, 701 South Wood St., Chicago, Illinois. Physiology. B. M . Duqgar, Missouri Botanical Garden , St. Louis, Missouri.— Assistant Editor. Carroll W. Dodge, Harvard University, Cambridge, Massachu- setts. Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, F. M. Schertz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Wash- ington, D. C. Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Gbeenman. Mis- souri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor. E B. Patson, University of Wyoming, Laiamie, Wyoming. BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1921 J. R. ScBBAMM, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York H. O BucKMAN R. HosMT-p W. H. Chandler L. Knudson A.J. Eameb D. Reddick R. A. Emebson L. "/. Sharp H. M. FiTZPATBICK K. M.WlBOAND R. S. HariOb, Secretary BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS A monthly serial furnishins abBtracts and citations of publicatione in the international field of botanj in its broadest aenee. UNDER THE DIRECTION OF i-ii-'n.rx . THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC. J. R. Schramm, Editor-in-Chief \t,^-ii»f.2i, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York Vol. VIII JUNE, 1921 No. 2 ENTRIES 761-1582 AGRONOMY C. V. Piper, Editor Mart R. Burr, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 896, 1070, 1078, 1087, 1091, 1092, 1093, 1166, 1283, 1345, 1378, 1379, 1380, 1381, 1398, 1399, 1412, 1413, 1415, 1416, 1417, 1418, 1419, 1421, 1422, 1424, 1425, 1426, 1427, 1476, 1484, 1485, 1496, 1512, 1515, 1519, 1520, 1521, 1522, 1523, 1524, 1527, 1528, 1529.) 761. Anonymous. El cultivo del henequen en Yucatan, su posible introduccion en el estado de Michoacan. [Henequen in Yucatan and its possible introduction into Michoacan.] Michoacan Agric. [Mexico] 1': 4-5; V: 4-5; 1': 5-G. 1920.— Popular information. — John A. Stevenson. 762. Anonymous. Cultivo de la papa. [Potato cultivation.] Michoacan Agric. [Mexico] 1^: 7; 1*: 5-6. 1920. — Popular information. — John A. Stevenson. 763. Anonymous. El cultivo del tabaco en Espana. [Tobacco cultivation in Spain.] Infor- macion Agric. [Madrid] 10 : 484-486. 1920. — An outline of a proposed plan for growing tobacco under government supervision, with guaranteed returns to growers. — John A. Stevenson. 764. Anonymous. Flax growing. Jour. Dept. Agric. Ireland 20: 520-523. 1920. 765. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Gehrs, J. H. Productive agriculture, xii + 444 p- The Macmillan Co. : New York, 1918.] Sci. Prog. [London] 15 : 148. 1920. 766. Bailey, E. M. Report on commercial feeding stuffs. 1919. Connecticut [New Haven] Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 221. 345-393. 1920.— The analyses of 204 samples of feeds are given as required by State law. These analyses are preceded by a general discussion of the determining factors in compounding rations and definitions of feeding stuffs, as revised to Jan., 1919, and adopted by the Association of Feed Control Officials of the United States.— Henry Dorsey. 767. Barber, C. A. Sugar production in India. Louisiana Planter and Sugar Manu- facturer 64 : 286. 1920.— While the acreage in sugar cane in India is very large, the production of sugar is very low. This is largely due to climatic conditions which prevent the growing of varieties which have been found most satisfactory in other countries. — C. W. Edgerton. 113 BOTANICAL ABBTRACTS, VOL. VIII, NO. 2 114 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 768. Barbillion, M. Possibilities of new fibres for pulp and paper making. Paper 26": 11-12, 32. 1920. — This article discusses esparto, bamboo, papyrus, broom, nettle, and other plants which are grown in France or its colonies and possess paper-making possibilities. — H.N. Lee. 769. Becker-Dillingen, J. Serologische Untersuchungen auf dem Gebiete von Pflanzen- bau und Pflanzenzucht. [Serum investigations in the field of plant structure and plant breed- ing.] Landw. Jahrb. 53: 245-276. 1919. — The author uses the serum and antigene method to determine impurities in meal and in seeds. He describes in detail the methods of pre- paring the antigene and the serum and reviews the literature. He finds that it is possible to make a quantitative determination of the amounts of Agrostemma githago seed in meal, an admixture of 0.125 per cent giving a specific reaction. Other common weed seeds as well as mixtures of weed seeds were studied with similar conclusions. The source of red clover seed could be determined in this way by noting the specific reaction due to the presence of characteristic weed seeds. By this method the seeds of Brassica napus could be distinguished from those of Brassica rapa, and the author was even able to distinguish between 2 different varieties of barley by making a serum test with the ground seed. All methods are described in detail since much of the success of the operation is said to depend on the proportions of antigene and serum. — A. J. Pieters. 770. Berry, Reginald Arthur. Composition and properties of oat grain and straw. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10: 359-414. Fig. 1-5. 1920. — An extensive study with detailed chemical analyses of the composition of oat grain and straw. Changes during growth, varietal differ- ences, and a large nimiber of correlations of various properties are brought out. — V . H . Young. 771. Cereceda, J. Dantin. Catalog© methodico de las plantas cultivadas (especies y variedades) en EspaSa y de las principales especies arboreas. [Methodical catalogue of the plants (species and varieties) cultivated in Spain, and of the principal tree species.] 62 p., 22 fig. Servicio de Publicaciones de Agricolas del Ministerio de Fomento: Madrid, 1920. — The classified list gives the botanical and common names for each species and variety culti- vated in Spain. The species are grouped according to economic use except in the case of fruit trees, which are exemplified by olive and oranges, and sugar and cereals, which are grouped with reference to climatic adaptations. — C. V. Piper. 772. Clayton, E. S. Field experiments with maize. Grafton experiment farm, 191^ 1920. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 32 : 1-6. 1921.— In the experiment, hilling vs. flat culti- vation of maize, hilling was done by the plow and by disc cultivating. Hilling by plowing decreased the crop but hilling by disc cultivating showed a net increase of crop over the check plats. The main advantage of hilling is that it smothers weeds in the row. — An experiment in de-suckering Leaming maize showed a net loss of about $1.40 per acre. — In depth of cultiva- tion experiments, deep cultivation during season and deep cultivation followed by shallow cultivation were compared with continuous shallow cultivation. Deep cultivation resulted in loss, and deep followed by shallow cultivation resulted in a small net gain.— In green manur- ing experiments, the object was to determine value of green manures sown in standing maize at tasseling time where maize is grown as a continuous crop. In the first year of experimenting, rape, vetches, and Grey field peas were used as green manuring crops; yields, when compared with plat receiving usual treatment, were not lessened the first year. — In a late cultivation experiment, maize received no cultivation after hilling (crop 18 inches high) in comparison with usual cultivation after hilling. The latter showed marked net gain per acre. — In rate of seeding trials with 2 varieties, the heavier seedings gave greatest net increases per acre. — L. R. Waldron. 773. Crocker, William. Influence of a crop on succeeding one. [Rev. of: (1) Hart- well, B. L., and S. C. Damon. The influence of crop plants on those which follow. Rhode Island Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 175. 1918. (2) Hartwell, B. L., F. R. Pember, and G. E. Merkle. The influence of crop plants on those which follow. Rhode Island Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 176. 1919 (see Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 18).] Bot. Gaz. 68: 480-482. 1919. m No. 2, June, 1921] AGRONOMY 115 774. Cross, William E. Ensayos con abonas para la cafia de azticar. [Fertilizers for sugar cane.] Sugar 21: 267-271. 1919. — A discussion of the fertilizer experiments at the Tucuman (Argentina) Experiment Station. — C. W. Edgerton. 775. Cross, William E. Fertilizer experiments with stigar cane in 1918-19. Sugar 21: 633-634, 651. 1919. [A translation from Rev. Indust. Agric. Tucuman 9: Nos. 11-12, 1919.] — A discussion of the effect of various fertilizers upon the development of sugar cane and upon the root-rot disease. — C. W. Edgerton. 776. Cross, William E. The 1919 Tucuman sugar crop. Louisiana Planter and Sugar Manufacturer 64: 364-366. 8 fig. 1920. — Tucuman produced 3,685,000 tons of sugar cane in 1919, this crop being much larger than each of several preceding crops. This increased pro- duction is said to be due to the fact that the planters have replaced the native canes with Java seedlings. The Java seedlings are more resistant to the attacks of insects and fungous diseases. Neither mosaic nor root-rot seems to seriously damage these canes. — C. W. Edgerton. 777. Cross, William E. The treatment of cane damaged by frost. Louisiana Planter and Sugar Manufacturer 65: 363-366. 1 fig. 1920. — A discussion of the methods to be used in harvesting frosted cane and of the difficulties that arise during the manufacture of sugar from such cane. — C. W. Edgerton. 778. Edquist, Alf. G. Vitality of seeds. Trans, and Proc. Roy. Soc. South Australia 40: 5-10. 1919. — As a result of preliminary experiments on the storage of dry grain, it has been found that perfectly ripe dry grain can be stored in an atmosphere of nitrogen or of carbon dioxide without injury to the grain; at the same time the eggs of weevils and other beetles are prevented from developing. It is maintained that such a method of storage can be provided economically. — J. H. Faull. 779. Frtjwirth, C. Handbuch des Hiilsenfruchterbaues. [Handbook of legume culture.] viii + SSI p., 231 fig. Paul Parey: Berlin, 1921. — This work is in reality a third revised and enlarged edition of the author's "Anbau der Hiilsenfriichte." The general part considers such topics as morphology, physiology, cultural requirements, utilization and agricultural importance. The special part treats in detail many of the legume crop plants, including serradella, lupines, square-pod pea, chick-pea, vetches, lentils, vetchlings, peas, soybean, kidney bean, scarlet runner, mung, urd, lima bean, cowpea, and bonavist. — C. V . Piper. 780. Gil, Miguel. EI problema del trigo-fertilizacion. [The problem of wheat fertili- zation.] Informacion Agric. [Madrid] 10: 482-484. 2 fig. 1920. — The results of tests with sodium nitrate are given. — John A. Stevenson. 781. Gilmore, Melvin Randolph. Uses of plants by the Indians of the Missouri River region. 33rd Annual Report of the Bureau of American Ethnology 1911-12: 43-154. SO pi. Washington, D. C, 1919. — This is a list of the various plants, together with methods of utili- zation, used by the Indians in the region studied, being a continuation of similar accounts of other tribes (see Bureau of Ethnology Bull. 55, and 30th Rept.). A glossary of Indian, Eng- lish, and scientific names of the plants mentioned is appended; also a bibliography of historical writers quoted. — Lyman Carrier. 782. Gray, G. P. Weed control along fencerows and roadways. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. California 8: 599-603. 1919. — Refers to Publications in Agricultural Science, Uni- versity of California, Vol. 4, No. 2, 1919. [See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 470.]— £^. L. Overholser. 783. Grimme, Clemens. Ueber Mulatinhos, eine neue brasilianische Speisebohne. [Concerning mulatinhos, a new Brasilian edible bean.] Pharm. Zentralhalle 61: 421-423. 1920. — A chemical study of the mulatinhos bean is given. The bean, apparently a variety of Phaseolus vulgaris sub-spec, compressus, is small, light brown, and flat with a polished 116 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, seed-coat and a white, dark -bordered hilum. It is 10 mm., long, 6 mm. wide, and 3-5 mm. thick. The bean was found to contain 11 per cent of water, 89 per cent of dry substance, 85 per cent of organic substance, 34 per cent of crude protein, 2 per cent of fat, 46.4 per cent of nitrogen-free extract, 3.5 per cent of crude fiber, and 3.6 per cent of ash. After treating with water and then boiling, the contents were found to consist of 69.5 per cent of water, 30.5 per cent of dry substance, 29.6 per cent of organic substance, 10 per cent of crude protein, 0.35 per cent of fat, 18 per cent of nitrogen-free extractive matter, 1.16 per cent of crude fiber, and 0.9 per cent of ash. After boiling with sodium carbonate the respective figures were 75.1, 24.9, 24.1, 7.9, 0.17, 15.2, 0.82, and 0.8 per cent.— fl". Engelhardt. 784. Groud, Charles. Ramie and textile nettles as paper fiber. Paper 26^': 15-16, 30. 1920. (Translation from Le Papier, April, 1920.] 785. GuzMANES, Antonio. La inmersion de las semillas en liquidos nutritives. [Soak- ing seed in nutritive solutions.] Informacion Agric. [Madrid] ID: 480-481. 1920. — Seed barley soaked in a solution of ammonium nitrate or in a solution of potassium nitrate for various lengths of time gave lower yields than untreated seed. — John A. Stevenson. 786. GuzMANES, Antonio. El cultivo del arroz en Valencia. [Rice cultivation in Val- encia.] Informacion Agric. [Madrid] 10: 453-457. 8 fig. 1920. 787. Harris, F. S. The American sugar-beet seed industry. Sugar 22: 68-69, 81. 5 fig. 1920. 788. Heim, F., J. Maheu, and L. Matrod. Suitability of bagasse as a source of paper. Paper 26": 11-14, 36. U fig. 1920.— [Translation from La Papeterie 62: June-July, 1920.] A complete description of the histology of the stem, giving dimensions of the elements, the chemistry and microchemistry of the fiber, and properties and uses of pulp obtained there- from.— H. N. Lee. 789. HoDSON, E. A. Results of seven year's selection in Trice cotton. Arkansas Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 171. 27 p., 10 fig. 1920. — Seven years of continuous selection in Trice cotton showed that wide fluctuations occurred which emphasize the need of continuous selec- tion in order to preserve the characters of the strain. — John A. Elliott. 790. Jones, D. F, Produccion de semillas para sembrar. [Seed production.] El Agri- cultor [Santigo, Chile] 5 : 7-12. 8 fig. 1920. — [Reprinted from La Hacienda.] 791. Jones, J. S., C. W. Colver, and H. P. Fishburn. The protein content of wheat grown with irrigation. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10: 290-332. Fig. 1-11. 1920.— The published data on the subject of protein content of wheat are very conflicting and the authors conducted a series of experiments during the years 1910-1916, inclusive, in an attempt to elucidate the problem. The work was carried out at Gooding, Idaho, in the Snake River valley. This is a region of low precipitation and for this reason the water applied to the crop as irriga- tion water was practically all that it received. Soils used varied from raw sagebrush land to that cultivated under rotation with legumes and other crops. Analyses of the nitrate and other mineral content of the soils were made and the effects of cropping, rotation, leach- ing, etc., were determined. Both the grain and the flour produced were analyzed through- out the experiments. Authors' results do not coincide with those obtained in many other experiments. They find that in general the wheat grown in the Snake River plains is soft, starchy, and low in protein content and of low value for milling purposes. It should not be assumed, however, that irrigation is the controlling factor in determining the protein con- tent of wheat. Raw sage-brush soils, the nitrogen content of which is always low, produce wheat low in protein content regardless of the amount of water applied. As soon as such lands are cultivated to wheat in a rotation with alfalfa or red clover, a much better quality of wheat is produced, as such soils have a relatively higher nitrogen content and the protein No. 2, June, 1921] AGRONOMY 117 content of the wheat is correspondingly improved. Carelessness in the use of water may offset, to some extent, other favorable conditions since the maximum protein content was never obtained with the greatest amounts of irrigation water. Deterioration of seed due to growth in irrigated regions has no effect upon protein content of the crop and there is no advantage in securing seed from non-irrigated regions. However, there is much to be gained in selecting varieties of wheat having characteristically high protein content. Evidence suggests that from this point of view hard, red, spring wheat would be worth at least a trial. — V. H. Young. 792. KoFAHL, H. Der gehornte Schotenklee. [The horned pod clover (Lotus cornicu- latus).] Illus. Landw. Zeitg. 41: 146-147. 1921. — This plant is recommended as a perennial leguminous forage plant in sections of Germany where alfalfa cannot be successfully grown. It grows best on a fertile soil having a clay subsoil and free from weeds, especially couch grass; it should be grown with oats or barley. The first cutting is the most productive. It appears to be long-lived and entirely resistant to winter killing. The best yield of seed is from the 2nd cutting. As forage, it is well liked by both cattle and swine. — John W. Roberts. 793. Kress, Otto. Cooking cotton hull fiber for pulp. Paper 25 : 90-1^968, 1009-1011 . 1920. 794. Maiden, J. H. Chats about the prickly pear. No. 8. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 32: 45-48. 1 fig. 1921. — A discussion of extermination methods is presented. It has been found that cutting just below the surface of the ground, followed by thorough spray- ing with suitable poisons, generally kills the plant. — L. R. Waldron. 795. Maktx, R. N. Farmers' experiment plots. Potato experiments, 1919-20, Cotta Walla-Crookwell District. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 32: 7-9. 1921.— Variety trials carried on in cooperation with .3 farmers showed considerable variations in yield. One variety, Factor, yielded best, and Magnum Bonum and Early Manistee are recommended. — L. R. Waldron. 796. Malte, M. O. Breeding methods in forage plants. Sci. Agric. [Canada] 1: 25-29. 1921. — A paper read before the Western Canadian Society of Agronomy and confined to breeding methods of a practical nature applicable to grasses, alfalfa, and red clover in Western Canada. Author found that in western rye grass {Agropyrum tenerum Vasey) and in other species of Agropyrum, self-fertilization regularly takes place. It is thus possible to work with many forms without the necessity of isolation. With alfalfa imperfect seed formation is due to defective sexual organs and frequently 'to unsuitable environmental conditions. In the case of red clover mass-selection brings results in a comparatively short time and is of practical importance. — B. T. Dickson. 797. Neidig, Ray E. Sugar beet top silage. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 537-542. 1921. — Chemical anaWses of average beet top silage, as found on the farm. Careless ensiling may allow abnormal fermentation, with possible production of substances toxic to animals. — D. Reddick. 798. Opazo, Roberto. Cultivo y industria del azucar de betarraga. [Cultivation of the sugar beet.] El Agricultor [Santiago, Chile] 5: 120-122. 1920.— Discusses the possibility of a sugar beet industry in Chile. — John A. Stevenson. 799. Opazo, Roberto. Cultivo de plantas oleaginosas. [Cultivation of oil plants.] El Agricultor [Santiago, Chile] 5: 195-198. 1920.— Discusses the cultivation of the peanut, sun- flower, soybean, sesamum, and poppy as oil plants. — John A. Stevenson. 800. Opazo, Roberto. Preparacion de terrenos para la siembra de chacras. [Cultivation of small farms.] El Agricultor [Santiago, Chile] 5: 165-166. 1920.— Recommends seed selec- tion of corn, sorghum, and other crops to be grown on small holdings and gives general cul- tural directions. — John A. Stevenson. 801. Opazo, Roberto. Siembras de cebada y de avena. [Seeding barley and oats.] El Agricultor [Santiago, Chile] 5 : 147-148. 1920. 118 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 802. Opazo, Roberto. Siembras de trigo. [Planting wheat.] EI Agricultor [Santiago, Chile] S: 70-73. 1920. — A general discussion of wheat growing in Chile, including soil types, manner of sowing, fertilizers used, and cultivation methods. — John A. Stevenson. 803. Pitt, J. M. Farmers' experiment plots. Summer fodder experiments, 1919-20. Central coast. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 805-808. 1 fig. 1920. — In cooperation with farmers, trials were conducted with Sudan grass, sachaline, Planter's Friend sorghum, and Japanese millet. The maximum yield, 36 tons of green fodder per acre, was secured from sachaline, plants attaining a height of 13 feet. Sudan grass grew 8 feet in 11 weeks. — L. R. Waldron. 804. Phidham, J. T. Varieties of wheat tested in New South Wales. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 32 : 10-19. 1921. — A total of 249 varieties of wheat are listed, including 59 dupli- cates. Notes are given as to season, utilization, character of grain, origin, adaptations, defects, good points, and distinguishing characters. — L. R. Waldron. 805. QuEREAU, F. C. The amount of salt in irrigation water injurious to rice. Louisiana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 171. J4 V-, ^ fiQ- 1920. — Irrigation water is liable to contain salt dur- ing periods of drought. Pot and field experiments show that water containing 35 grains or more of salt to the gallon is liable to be injurious to rice. — C. W. Edgerton. 806. QuEREAU, F. C. Rice investigations. Louisiana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 172. 87 p., 35 fig. 1920. — This bulletin discusses the various investigations that have been carried on with rice in the rice belt of Louisiana. In the fertilizer experiments, the best results were obtained with fertilizers that contained phosphoric acid. Potash does not seem to be neces- sary.— The rotation experiments showed that short rotations are not profitable, due to the high overhead expense necessitated by the change from rice to highland crops. The rotation recommended is 5-7 years in rice followed by the same period in other crops. — Red rice is one of the most important difficulties of the rice farmer. Methods for controlling red rice include rotation, use of cover crops, and pasturage. Crude oil has been found useful in controlling the root maggot. The principal rice diseases are rotten neck or blast {Piricularia oryzae) and straight head. The rotten neck disease occurs both in young and old plants. The straight head is most common on ground that produced a crop other than rice the preceding year. Straight head rarely develops in fields that have been drained during the season. — The best methods of growing, fertilizing, and harvesting rice are given. The estimated cost of growing an acre of rice in 1910 was $27.26, while in 1917-1918 it was $31.95.— C. W. Edgerton. 807. RiNDL, M. Vegetable fats and oils. IV, and V. Semi-drying oils. South African Jour. Indust. 3 : 518-531, 742-749. 1920. 808. Rios, P. Gonzalez. La produccion de nuevas variedades de cana. [The production of new cane varieties.] Sugar 21: 218-221. S fig. 1919. — Discusses the production of sugar cane seed and the growing of sugar cane seedlings.- — C. W. Edgerton. 809. Roberts, Herbert F. The relation of protein content to variety types in American wheat. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10: 121-134. 1920. — Author reviews and analyzes several papers on the protein content of American wheat and its relation to variety and climate. A short and comparatively dry growing season, especially in spring in the case of winter wheat, favors the development of grain high in protein content. Water supply is the most important factor in determining the starch-protein ratio. Higher rainfall or a greater amount of irrigation water increases the proportion of starch in wheat. The protein content of wheat increases from east to west with the exception of the Pacific Coast region, which in general produces wheat lowest in proteins. There is considerable variation in the starch-protein ratio within definite varieties. Mediterranean durums are highest, Russian durums are next, and bread wheats are lowest in protein content. In given regions the variation in protein content for No. 2, June, 1921] AGRONOMY 119 different varieties of wheat is from less than 1 per cent to more than 3 per cent. In many regions, the varieties most favored by farmers have been shown to be those varying most in the starch-protein ratio. This is true of Club wheat in California, and, in the order named, of Bluestem, Little Club, Turkey Red, Jones' Winter Fife, and Forty-fold in Washington. Since variation in protein is a varietal characteristic in wheat, author concludes that in breed- ing for general purposes, wheat strains should be sought which vary in the starch-protein ratio, since this indicates that they have a greater climatic adaptability. In breeding for a limited locality, wheat with a maximum protein content and with the least possible varia- tion with respect thereto is to be sought. — V. H. Young. 810. RosENFELD, Arthur H. Problems of cane fertilization. Sugar 21: 24-26, 118-119. 1919. — The results of several years' experiments with various fertilizers on sugar cane are not consistent and consequently none of the fertilizers tried is recommended. Rotation and the use of legumes are advocated. — C. W. Edgerton. 811. RosENFELD, ARTHUR H. Further experiments in fertilizing cane. Sugar 22: 66^ 664. 1920. — No definite conclusions can be drawn from the various fertilizer experiments which have been conducted at the Tucuman (Argentina) Experiment Station, as the results have not been consistent. — C. W. Edgerton. 812. ScHROEDER, H. Die jarhliche Gesamtproduction der griinen Pflanzendecke der Erde. [The annual production of the vegetation of the globe.] Naturwissenschaften 7: 8-12, 23-29. 1919. — This is in reality a calculation of the total quantity of CO2 consumed annually by green plants. The author briefly reviews previous papers and proceeds to consider the land surface of the globe as consisting of forest, agricultural land, steppe, and desert. For each of these divisions various calculations are made based upon available data together with such corrections as the author considers necessary. For instance, he takes Ebermaj'er's determination that in the Bavarian forests 3000 kgm. of carbon are fixed annually per hectare; taking into account the fact that the vast areas of circumpolar and mountain forests must fix less, although tropical and subtropical forests probably fix more, the author considers that this figure should be reduced by 1/6, and that 2500 kgm. per hectare is nearer a true average. Much space is devoted to a discussion of the principal crop plants, wheat, rye, barley, oats, maize, potatoes, and rice, and the author concludes that these plants fix 1600 kgm. of carbon per hectare annually. This figure includes grain, straw, and the roots and stubble left on the field. Forage crops, such as clovers, sorghums, peas, soybeans, green maize, as well as sugar, are believed to fix on the average about the same amount of carbon as the grains. Steppe and desert vegetation can only be estimated and there is a large margin of possible error. The final figures are given in table 15 (p. 27). To these he adds an estimate of the carbon fixed by the benthos, and arrives at CO billion kgm., with limits of 50 and 80 billions, as the quantity of CO2 annually consumed by green plants. Of these 60 billions, 40 are con- sumed by forest, 14 by agricultural, 4 by steppe, and 1 by desert plants. The author also discusses briefly the return of CO2 to the air by decay and other means, but concludes that the quantitative data are too scanty to warrant even a guess. The total CO2 of the atmo- sphere being 2100 billion kgm., it follows that unless replaced the available supply would be exhausted in about 30 years. — A. J. Pieiers. 813. Shepherd, A. N. The Tick bean. (Vicia faba.) A green manure crop for irrigation areas. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 32: 42-44. 2 fig. 1921. — Tick beans were grown on a plot in the Murrumbidgee irrigation area with good results. In consequence of several irrigations, over 15.5 tons of green crop — easily turned under — were produced per acre. It was calculated the crop returned to the land 145 pounds of nitrogen (as ammonia) per acre. — L. R. Waldron. 814. Smeding, S, Ervaringen omtrent de cultuur op de in 1916 overstroomde gronden in de Anna Paulawnapolder. [Experiences on crop growing in the 1916 inundated lands of the Anna Paulawnapolder.] Cultura 32: 1-29, 60-64. 1920. — In 1916 some low lands in the prov- 120 AGRONOMY [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, ince of North Holland, Netherlands, were inundated by sea water. At first many farm crops could not be grown. The soil had to be cultivated thoroughly to prevent excessive evapora- tion due to capillary action, which would result in an increase of salt content toward the soil surface. Proper drainage by pumping machines was advised. Heavy soils rather than lighter ones were sensitive to deep plowing. Deep fall plowing on inundated lands is not advisable. Spring treatment of the soil must be superficial, and only the cultivator and harrow should be used to prepare the seed bed.^ — ^The first year sugar beets and mangel-wurzels proved resistant to salty soil; spring barley also succeeded; mustard did fairly well; alfalfa prospered only on lighter soils; red clover was everywhere poor. The growing of oats, peas, spinach, potatoes, and cabbage was impossible.^ — The second year, 1917, the soil contained less salt, though its structure was not normal. However, the early summer was dry and a good harvest was obtained from sugar beets, mangel-wurzel, spinach, radish, and spring barley; on lighter soils spring barley, mustard, red clover, and alfalfa did well; wheat, oats, and flax were fairly good; white and brown beans were a failure. — The third year, 1918, the salt had diminished to such an extent that it no longer affected field crops though the struc- ture of the heavy soils still remained abnormal. On lighter soils good harvests of spinach, radish, oats, spring barley, cabbage, broad beans, and peas were obtained. On heavy soils most crops, including beets, were not as good as in the previous year. — J . C. Th. Uphof. 815. SoTJTHwoRTH, W. A study of the influence of the root system in promoting hardiness in alfalfa. Sci. Agric. [Canada] 1: 5-9. 1921.^ — A paper read before the Western Canadian Society of Agronomy dealing with experiments carried on at the Ontario and Manitoba Agri- cultural Colleges. Plants possessing a branched root system are better able to withstand winter heaving than those having only a single taproot. Plants which develop rooting under- ground stems are able to maintain themselves after the death of the main rootstock. When alfalfa has the habit of spreading by root proliferation, the plant is better able to recuperate from injury and to withstand cold. Such plants are usually less nutritious and palatable and work is in progress at the latter institution to remedy these defects. — B. T. Dickson. 81G. Stapledon, R. G. Seed studies: red clover with special reference to the country of origin of the seed. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10: 90-120. 1920.— The country of origin of seeds of various cultivated plants is important in determining the value of the crop for various pur- poses. In England, clover seed from various sources varies greatly in the yield produced and the value of the crop. Home-grown seed appears to be best for most uses. To a certain extent the type of weed seeds found in clover is valuable in determining its source, but the source of cleaned and blended seed can hardly be determined in this way. Author has worked out a system of classification of seeds of red clover based on germinating power, average size, and proportion of different colored seeds. Seeds were classed according to color as yel- low, violet, and brown, and the various color variations, mottlings, etc., included with each color are described. The proportion of "hard" seed was also determined. The results of an exhaustive study of seed from two seasons' crops has enabled the author to give definite criteria for the determination of the country of origin of clover seed and also has shown that there is a definite coordination between the physical characteristics of clover seed and its value for a definite purpose. — V. H. Young. 817. Stent, Sydney M. Kudzu (Pueraria thunbergians). [Rev. of: Pipek, C. V. Kudzu. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 89. 7 p. 1920 (see Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1428).] Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1: 558-560. 1920.— Brief comment on adaptability and source of seed. — E. M. Doidge. 818. Stietz, G, E. G. Sugar cane culture in Java. Louisiana Planter and Sugar Manu- facturer 65: 219. 1920. 819. Taggart, W. G. Louisiana seedling canes. Sugar 21: 426-429, 439. 1919.— The Louisiana Experiment Station has been growing seedling canes for a number"of years. The seed was obtained from various tropical countries. Cane seed usually germinates very No. 2, June, 1921] , BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 121 poorly and generally only a few plants are obtained from a shipment of seed. Of the several hundred seedlings which have been grown, only a very few show particular merit. The most valuable seem to be the L 253 and L 511. The L 253 seedling produces a very heavy tonnage but the sugar content is no better than that of the native canes. The L 511 seedling is a cane richer in sucrose than any of the canes ordinarily grown in Louisiana. — C. W. Edgerton. 820. Tague, E. L. Changes taking place in the tempering of wheat. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 271-275. 1920 [1921]. — Improvement in the milling quality of wheat is effected by mois- tening the grain. Hard wheats are improved more than soft ones and dry wheats are improved moie than wet ones. Improved milling quality of tempered wheat is due chiefly to physical changes. The optimum conditions are: Temperature 20 to 25°C., time 48 hours, moisture 15.5 per cent. — D. Reddick. 821. West, Clarence J. Paper from bagasse. Paper 26: G2-64. 1920.— A description of the method used in making paper pulp from sugar cane refuse. — H. N. Lee. 822. West, Clarence J. Possibilities of African grasses in paper manufacture. Paper 26^*: 10. 1920.— A condensed analysis of African grasses, summarizing their possibilities in the manufacture of paper. — H. N. Lee. 823. Zayas, M. Cultivo de las judias. [Bean cultivation.] Informacion Agric. [Madrid] 10:526-528. 3 fig. 1920. BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGR.\PHY, AND HISTORY Neil E. Stevens, Editor (See also in this issue Entries 781, 954, 1935, 1109, 1288, 1536, 1539, 1544) 824. Anonymous. Canadian Branch of the American Phytopathological Society. Sci. Agric. 1: 18. 1921.— An account of the second annual meeting of the above branch held in the Biological Building at the Ontario Agricultural College on Dec. 9 and 10, 1920. — B. T. Dickson. 825. Anonymous. Edouard Prillieux. Ann. Service Epiphyties 4: 1-16. Portrait. 1917 [1919].— Edouard Ernest Prillieux, "the founder of phytopathology in France," was born in Paris, Jan. 11, 1829, and died Oct. 6, 1915, at Mondoubleau (Loir-et-Cher). He was educated at the old Institut National Agronomique (1848-1853), and immediately devoted himself to the problems of vegetable pathology, particularly diseases of the vine. In 1887 he founded the Station de Pathologie Vegetale at Paris, and in 1894 furthered the establish- ment of the Station Entomologique. A portion of the article is given to analysis of Prillieux' scientific researches, and there follows a classified list of his publications, 184 in number. — M. F. Warner. 826. Anonymous. Die Forste und der Friedensvertrag. [Forests and the peace treaty.] Allg. Forst- u. Jagdzeitg. 38: 70. 1920.— Hungary loses over half of her coniferous forest to Roumania, 36 per cent to Czecho-Slovakia, and 11 per cent to Jugo-Slavia. The situation is similar in respect to beech and oak, so that the once well forested Hungary is reduced to a wood importing country. — F. S. Baker. 827. Barnhart, J. H. Brackenridge and his book on ferns. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 20: 117-124. 1919.— This sketch of William D. Brackenridge (1810-1893) deals particularly with his part in the Wilkes Exploring Expedition and with the preparation of his work on ferns. — Neil E. Stevens. 828. Barnhart, J. H. Historical sketch of the Torrey Botanical Club. Mem. Torrey Bot. Club 17: 12-21. 1918.— This sketch deals especially with the formation and work of the 122 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, society and is followed by reminiscences of the early days and former members by, H. M. Denslow (p. 22-23), N. L. Britton (p. 24-28), and Arthur Hollick (p. 29-30).— A'"ez7 E. Stevens. 829. Barnhart, J. H. Some fictitious botanists. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 20: 171- 181. 1919. — Fourteen so-called "botanists" from Appleton's Cyclopedia of American Biography are listed, and evidence is presented to show that their supposed biographical accounts are fictitious. — Neil E. Stevens. 830. Bateson, W[illiam]. The late Mr. R. P. Gregory. Nature 102: 284. 1918.— See Bot, Absts. 5, Entry 1234. 831. Bois, Desire. Notice sur M. Maurice Leveque de Vilmorin. Bull. Soc. Bot. France 66: 140-143. 1919.— Auguste-Louis-Maurice Leveque de Vilmorin (1849-1918) was especially interested in forest botany and the study of fruit and ornamental trees. A list of 20 of his publications is given. — B. 0. Dodge. 832. Botjlger, G. S., and James Britten. Joseph Andrews and his herbarium. Jour. Botany 56: 257-261. 1918. — The British Museum (Natural History) contains a collection of plants formed at Sudbury by the apothecary Joseph Andrews, between 1710 and 1757. An- drews was a friend of Dale, and probably the man appointed in 1707 as inspector of the Chelsea Garden, together with Wyche and Petiver. He is mentioned in Dillenius' edition of Ray's Synopsis Methodica Plantarum Britannicarum, ed. 3, 1724, though it is not certain that Dillenius was acquainted with Andrews, whose specimens are numbered in accordance with the 2d ed. of Ray's Synopsis, but Andrews owned a copy of the Dillenian edition, afterwards owned by the late W. A. Clarke, which contains a few marginal notes and references to other authors. — M F. Warner. 833. B[ower], F. O. Prof. "William Gilson Farlow. Nature 103: 509. 1919.— See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entries 916, 947, 956, 963, 1463, 1470. 834. Briquet, John. Notice sur la vie et les travaux botaniques de Louis Naville (1843- 1916). Ann Conservatoire et Jard. Bot. Geneve 20: 215-221. Portrait. 1919.— Constant- Louis Naville of Geneva was a man of letters whose avocations were botany and mountain climbing. He made numerous explorations throughout the Swiss Alps, Savoy, and Dauphiny, collecting an herbarium of 3001 numbers, which he gave to the Conservatoire Botanique of Geneva. He published nothing save a popular article, "La flore du Saleve," in 1885. — M. F. Warner. 835. BuNYARD, E. A. Cotton's "Planter's Manual." Gard. Chron. Ill, 63: 174r-175. 1918. — Published in 1675, by Charles Cotton, known as a poet and for his association with Walton's Compleat Angler. Although from the preface it would appear that the book is by Cotton himself, it is actually a translation from the "Instructions pour les arbres fruitiers" first published 1653, by "M. R. T. P. D. S. M.," i.e., M. Robert Triquet, prieur de St. Marc, who in turn was only editor, as the preface states that the book was written by Francois Vautier, physician to Louis XIV. — M. F. Warner. 836. BuNYARD, E. A. Henry van Oosten and the "Dutch gardener." Jour. Pomol- ogy 1: 37-40. 1919. — For its pomological sources the "Dutch gardener" goes back to La Quintinye, "Instructions pour les jardins potagers et fruitiers," pirated edition by Desbordes, Amsterdam, 1699, which contains "L'Art de tailler les arbres fruitiers," con- densed from Venette's book of the same title (1683). Mentions English translation of Venette (1685), and hints that it may have been by Evelyn, as certain phrases have "his unmistakeable ring about them." Mr. Bunyard does not give the earliest Dutch edition of van Oosten, but mentions the English ones of 1703 and 1711, the German of 1706 under title: "Niederlandischer blumen obst und orangeriegarten," the French under title: "Le jardin d' Hollande." He finds that van Oosten borrowed the material on oranges directly from La Quintinye himself. — M. F. Warner. No. 2, June, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 123 837. BuNYARD, E. A. The history of cultivated fruits, as told in the lives of great pomol- ogists. Robert Thompson. Gard. Chron. Ill, 63: 121-122. Portrait. 1918.— "His work as a pomologist, especially in the rectification of nomenclature, places him in the first rank." The present article deals with his work on the Catalogue of fruits cultivated in the Garden of the Horticultural Society of London, in the Pomological Magazine, Loudon's Encyclo- paedia of gardening (new ed., 1835), in the Transactions of the Horticultural Society, and especially emphasizes the value of his "Gardener's assistant," first published in 1859. Few details of his life are given, save the record from Thompson's own hand in the book at Chis- wick, on his admission there Oct. 21, 1824, in which he states that he was born in the parish of Echt, in the County of Aberdeenshire, in the year 1799, and not 1798, which is commonly accepted as the date of his birth. He died in 1869. To this article is appended a letter from Brian Wynne, giving some recollections of Thompson in his later years. — M. F. Warner. 838. BuNYARD, E. A. Some old English apples. Gard. Chron. Ill, 63: 219-220. 1918.— Keddleston Pippin, known in 1830, and in high favor in 1833; Gennet Moyle, still grown in Cornwall, dating back to Evelyn's day, and celebrated by Philipps in his poem on cider. The word Gennet is probably derived from the French Jeannette, and as our Juneating or Jenneting is probably from Gennet, the apple should therefore be spelled Genneting or Jen- neting. The Old Pearmain, not identical with apple of same name in Knight's "Pomona Herefordiensis;" Orange Pippin also differs from that figured by Hogg and Bull in the "Herefordshire Pomona." — M. F. Warner. 839. Cardot, Jules. [Letter to E. B. Chamberlain.] Torreya 19: 33. 1919.— Portion of a letter describing the devastation of his herbarium and library at Charleville, France, by the German invaders. — Neil E. Stevens 840. Carpentier, A. L'abbe Felix-Charles Hy (1853-1918). Rev. G^n. Bot. 30: 369- 376. 1918. — Brief account of the life and work of M. Hy, for 40 years professor of botany at the Universite Catholique of Angers. A chronological list of his publications is appended, 64 in number. — Neil E. Stevens, 841. Carqueja, Bento. Barao de Soutelinho. Broteria Ser. Bot. 16: 25-28. Portrait. 1918. — Alfred Tait, Baron de Soutelinho, died March 16, 1917. He introduced many use- ful plants into Portugal. Was primarily a floriculturist, specializing on narcissus, chrysan- themums, and cactus dahlias. Rediscovered Narcissus cyclamineus in Portugal near Porto. — M. F. Warner. 842. Chodat, Robert. Richard-Emile-Augustin de Candolle. Arch. Sci. Phys. et Nat. 2: 169-175. 1920.— Augustin de Candolle (1868-1920) was the fourth of a distinguished line of botanists, being preceded by his father, Casimir de Candolle, his grandfather, Alphonse de Candolle, and his great-grandfather, Aug.-Pyr. de Candolle. The con- tributions of Augustin de Candolle to botanical science include physiology, morphology, and taxonomy. This account of his life by Professor Chodat is followed by a complete list of publications. — /. H. Faull. 843. Church, A. H. Bibliographical notes, LXXIV. Baxter's 'British phaenogamous botany.' Jour, Botany 57: 58-63. 1919.— Issued in monthly parts of 4 plates and text, from Sept. 1832 to Mar. 1843, this issue being regarded as the first edition, and complete sets are inscribed second edition only on the title of the first volume. The reprint in 1856 was in no sense a third edition. The differences in title of the monthly parts and complete volumes are given, with dates and inclusive plate numbers for each of the 6 volumes. Author com- ments on the merits of the plates, and gives an estimate of the value of Baxter's work. — M . F. Warner. 844. Cobb, Ruth. Periodical bibliographies and abstracts for the scientific and techno- logical journals of the world. Bull. Nation. Res. Council 1: 131-154. 1920.— A partial list of serials regularly containing bibliographies or abstracts in various fields of science, each 124 BIBLIOGEAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, title being given as a rule under all the subjects covered by it. Most of those relating to bibliography of Pathology are listed under Botany, but others of interest are given only under Bacteriology. The topics Agriculture and Forestry and Medical Sciences also include matter of interest to the botanist, but no place is provided for general biology or genetics. — M, F. Warner. 845. Delaunay, Paul. Un botanists manceau, Hector Leveille (1863-1918). Bull. G6og. Bot. 27: 57-96. 1919. — An enthusiastic account, with bibliography, of the varied activities of I'abbe Leveille not only in the field of botany, but in the organization of learned societies, and the study of anthropology, geography, history, biography, and archeology. As a botanist he was best known for his studies of regional floras. — Neil E. Stevens. 846. [Dudgeon, Winfield.] The Indian Botanical Society. 12 p. Allahabad, 1920. — This society "for uniting the botanists and promoting the botanical interests of India" was organized in 1920. The history of its organization together with the provisional constitution and list of charter members is here printed. — Neil E. Stevens. 847. Durham, H. E. Philological notes. Gard. Chron. Ill, 64: 146-147. 1918.— Origin and associations of the following: "Bloom," corresponding to the French "fleur," whence possibly some of the apples known as Belle Fleur; "pruine" from prune; the Pearmains or Parmayns, for which numerous derivations have been suggested, to which the author adds the possibility that the name may have come from the French "permaindre" or "parmaindre" (Latin "permanere"), because of the lasting quality of the fruits originally so called. — M. F. Warner. 848. Dykes, W. B. Did the tulip mania ever reach Italy? Garden 83: 528. 1919.— In response to an inquiry author says that Mattel in his article "I tulipani di Bologna," Mal- pighia, 1893, p. 15, states as a matter of course that when the mania was at its height in Hol- land in 1634 there were "maniacs" also in Florence, Bologna, and elsewhere. — M. F. Warner. 849. Fairbridge, Dorothea. Vergelegen. South African Gard. 9: 408-409. Illus. 1919. — An estate at Cape of Good Hope granted in 1700 to Governor Willem Adriaan van DER Stel, who cultivated here at the beginning of the 18th century a great variety of European vegetables, also interesting himself in food possibilities of the native plants. He grew tulips and Ceylon bulbs, and both he and his father, Simon van der Stel, sent quantities of Cape bulbs to Holland. He introduced the white mulberry into cultivation at the Cape. His manuscript on gardening, now in the South African Public Library, which was published in 1825 in the African Court calendar as an issue of the "African gardeners' and agriculturists' calendar," contains mention of diseases of fruit trees. — M. F. Warner. 850. Fairchild, David. Byron David Halsted, botanist (1852-1918). Phytopath. 9: 1-6. Portrait. 1919. — An intimate and interesting personal sketch of Dr. Halsted and his methods of work, by his nephew. — Neil E. Stevens. 851. Farquharson, C. O. Charles Ogilvie Farquharson and his work in West Africa Kew Bull. Misc. Inform. 1918: 353-361. 1918.— Letter to the Assistant Director at Kew, with prefatory note stating that Farquharson died Oct. 3, 1918. "A remarkably graphic epitome of his life work in Nigeria. The nature of the work, the methods by which he sought to solve the many difficult problems, and the kind of education that his experience had led him to believe best for such work are all fully discussed." — M. F. Warner. 852. Fletcher, S. W. One hundred years of strawberry growing in North Amerxa. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 35: 125-132. 1918. — Commercial history. Although native berries abounded, and plants were brought from the fields and cultivated by the colonists ns early as 1700, there was no attempt to grow for the market until after 1800. — M. F. Warner. No. 2, June, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 125 853. Fox, R. H. Dr. John Fothergill and his friends (chapters in eighteenth century life). xxxiv + 4^4 V-y frontispiece, plates, portraits. Macmillan & Co., Ltd.: London, 1919. — See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 911. 854. Geddes, Patrick. The life and work of Sir Jagadis C. Bose. xii + 259 p., frontis- piece, illus., pi., portrait. Longmans, Green & Co.: London, New York, 1920. — The educa- tion of Dr. Bose (born 1858) and his researches on the irritability of plants and related sub- jects are discussed. The two concluding chapters are devoted to a description of the Bose Institute, and to the address delivered by Dr. Bose at its dedication. [See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 58.] — Neil E. Stevens. 855. GiRARD, A. C. Achille Miintz, 1846-1917. Ann. Inst. Nation. Agron. II, 13: 171- 217. Portrait. 1918. — Charles-Achille Muntz was connected with the Institut National Agronomique at Paris from 1876 to the close of his life. He was primarily an agricultural chemist, but among his nearly 300 publications listed on p. 206-217 are many on crop plants and physiology. — Neil E. Stevens. 856. Graves, F. M. On the walled garden. Card. Chron. Ill, 65: 105-106. 1919.— Translated from "Le Menagier de Paris," written between June 1392 and September 1394, and published by the Soci6te des Bibliophiles Francais in 1846. The present portion, trans- lated from the section on "Courtillage," deals with the cultivation of vegetables, flowers^ and herbs, indicating the extensive number of plants then cultivated, with brief suggestions on grafting. — M. F. Warner. 857. Grindley, F. H. The history, progress and future of the C. S. T. A. Sci. Agric. 1: 10-12. 1921. — An account by the General Secretary-Treasurer of the formation of the Canadian Society of Technical Agriculturists. The Society aims at raising the status of scientific agriculture in Canada and, by means of its official organ "Scientific Agriculture," giving publicity to experimentation and research carried on not only in Canada, but else- where when applicable to Canadian conditions. — B. T. Dickson. 858. G[rove], W. B. James Eustace Bagnall, A. L. S. (1830-1918). Jour. Botany 56: 354-356. 1918. — His active life spent in business in Birmingham, his recreations were the study of the local flora and of mosses. Wrote: "Handbook of mosses" (1886); "The Flora of Warwickshire" (1891); "The Flora of Staffordshire" (1901), and numerous articles in jour- nals.— M. F. Warner. 859. GtJssow, H. T. Establishment of an Imperial (British) bureau of mycology. Phy- topath. 9:265. 1919. 860. Haberlandt, Gottlieb. Grabrede auf Simon Schwendener am 2 Juni 1919. [Fu- neral oration for Simon Schwendener.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N. F., 18: 417. 1919. 861. Hedrick, U. p. Edward Lewis Sturtevant. Rept. New York Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] 1919^: 1-16. Portrait. 1919 [1920]. Published as 27th Ann. Rept. New York State Dept. Agric. Vol. 2, part 2. — "Edward Lewis Sturtevant. farmer, botanist, physician, and author was one of the giants of his time in the science oi agriculture." Born, Jan. 23, 1842, died, Jan. 19, 1879. Educated at Bowdoin and Harvard Medical School. Conducted system- atic experiments privately 1875-1880. Director New York State Agricultural Experiment Station 1882-1887. A bibliography of 89 titles covering his principal scientific writings is appended. — D. Reddick. 862. Hedrick, U. P., Editor. Sturtevant's notes on edible plants. Rept. New York Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] 1919^: 17-686. 1919 [1920]. Published as 27th Ann. Rept. New York State Dept. Agric. Vol. 2, part 2. — Materials selected from following sources: An ex- tensive manuscript owned by the New York Experiment Station, a mass of index cards located there and at the Missouri Botanical Garden, and Sturtevant's published work on the history h 126 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, of esculents in the Station reports and American Naturalist. The researches into the origin and development of cultivated plants have been combined with hundreds of notes on local and aboriginal uses as food, and arranged in a single alphabet under specific names of plants, with bibliographical citations reduced to footnotes and a list of "Authors and titles quoted in Sturtevant's notes on edible plants" appended (p. 625-667). Separate indexes to botanical synonyms and vernacular names. — D. Reddick. 863. Henriques, J. A. J. F. Correa da Serra. Broteria Ser. Bot. 16: 104-112. 1918.— Jos6 Frangisco Correa da Serra was born at Serpa June 6, 1750, and died in 1823. Although an ecclesiastic, he held several diplomatic positions, among them that of Minister of Portugal to the United States. As naturalist he was especially interested in geology and botany, publishing papers in the latter subject in Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. London, Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc, and other journals. — M. F. Warner. 864. Henry, Augustine. The cedars of Lebanon, References to the trees of great age that form the nucleus of the historic grove. Sci. Amer. Suppl. 87: 295. 1919. (From Country Life [London].) — The grove of cedars near Bsherreh has been celebrated for centuries, and many travellers have counted its principal trees, which have gradually decreased in number. Belon visited Mount Lebanon in 1550 and counted 28 great trees, while Sir Joseph Hooker in 1860 found 15 which he judged to be the remainder of these. Both Hooker and Gadeau de Kerville, who was there in 1908, measured some of the great trees, the former estimating that the largest might be 2500 years old. But from a specimen in the Kew museum showing 235 annual rings. Hooker's 2 largest trees, with a girth of 13 feet, would be about 2330 years old. — M. F. Warner. 865. Jacob, Joseph. "Pritzel." "A florist's plea to the powers that be." Garden 83: 118-119. 1919. — In regard to extending the scope of the new edition of the "Iconum botani- carum index" which has been undertaken by the Royal Horticultural Society. — Neil E. Stevens. 866. Jacob, Joseph. The wheat-ear carnation. Garden 83: 300-301. 1. fig. 1919. — Apropos of a paper on this subject in the Carnation Year Book for 1919, author goes back to Castelli's "Exactissima descriptio rariorum quarundam plantarum, quae continentur Romae in Horto Farnesiano" (1625), and reproduces the drawing of "Caryophyllus spicatus" from the 11th chapter. He also cites Linne, "Hortus Cliffortianus" (1737); Weinmann, "Phytanthozaiconographia" (1739); and Bot. Mag. (1814), plate 1622, for illustrations of the same phenomenon. — M. F. Warner. 867. Jennings, O. E. John Adolph Shafer. Trillia 5: 3-7. 1919.— Born 1863, died 1918.— M. F. Warner. 868. Juel, H. O. Hortus Linnaeanus. An enumeration of the plants cultivated in the Botanical garden of Upsala during the Linnean period. Skrifter Svenska Linne Sallsk. 1: 1- 127. 1919. — Linnaeus was in charge of the garden at Upsala from 1742 until at least 1776, when his son may have taken over its care. The present list of 2157 species is compiled from books and papers of father and son, the titles of which are given in chronological order on p. 6-8.— M. F. Warner. 869. Kelly, H. A., and W. L. Burrage. American medical biographies, xix + 1320 p. Norman, Remington Co.: Baltimore, 1920. — In selecting the more than 1900 names here included the principle of the editors has been "to include every man who has in any way con- tributed to the advancement of medicine in the United States or in Canada, or who, being a physician, has become illustrious in some other field of general science or in literature." This policy together with the senior editor's special interest in botany and medical botanists makes this a valuable reference book for botanical biography. Biographical sketches are given of the botanists listed below. In some cases this is the only readily available biography of the subject, many of the sketches contain new material, and all are prepared by competent J No. 2, June, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 127 authors. Numerous citations of literature are given. Timothy Field Allen (1837-1902), Benjamin Smith Barton (17G6-1815), William Paul Crillon Barton (1786-1856), John Bartram (1699-1777), Lewis Caleb Beck (1798-1853), Jacob Bigelow (1787-1879), John Shaw Billings (1838-1913), Reed Brockway Bontecou (1824-1907), Charles Miller Booth (1830-1906), John Brickell (1710?-1745), John Brickell (1749-1809), Robert Bridges (1806-1882), Joseph Carson (1808-187G), Jonathan Carver (1710-1780), Alvan Wentworth Chapman (1809-1899), John Clayton (1G93-1773), Cadwalader Colden (1GS8-1776), Alva Curtis (1797-1881), William Darlington (1782-1863), Chester Dewey (1784-1867), Solomon Drowne (1753-1834), John Eberle (1787-1838), James Eights (1798-1882), Jared Eliot (1685-1763), Gouverneur Emerson (179.5-1874), George Engelmann (1809-1884), Abram Paschal Garber (1838-1881), Alexander Garden (1728-1791), Jean Francois Gaultier (1708-1756), Lewis Reeve Gibbes (1810-1894), William Peters Gibbons (1812-1897), Asa Gray (1810-1888), Jacob Green (1790-1841), Traill Green (1813-1897), Robert Eglesfeld Griffith (1798-1850), Seth Hastings (1780-1861), Louis Hebert (died 1627), William S. Herbst (1833-1906), Constantino Hering (1800-1880), John Philip Hiester (180.3-18.54), Thomas Horsfield (1773-1859), David Hosack (1769-1835), Ben- jamin Franklin Hough (1822-1885), Elliot C. Howe (1828-1899), John Gibbons Hunt (1826- 1893), Eli Ives (1779-1861), Laurence Johnson (1845-1893), Albert Kellogg (1813-1887), Peter D. Knieskern (1798-1871), Adam Kuhn (1741-1817), John Locke (1792-1856), Moses Marshall (1758-1813), James Mease (1771-1846), Joseph Hinson Mellichamp (1829-1903), Ezra Michener (1794-1887), John Mitchell (1680?-1768), Samuel Latham Mitchill (1764-1831), Isaac Shoe- maker Moyer (18-38-1898), John Strong Newberry (1822-1892), Charles Christopher Parry (182.3-1890), William Dandridge Peck (1763-1822), David Lewis Phares (1817-1892), Charles Pickering (180.5-1878), Richard Upton Piper (1816-1897), Zina Pitcher (1797-1872), Francis Peyre Porcher (1825-1895), Alyre Raffeneau-Delile (1778-1850), Isaac Rand (174.3-1822), George Abraham Rex (184.5-1895), John Leonard Riddell (1807-1867), James Watson Robbins (1801-1879), James Henry Salisbury (1823-1905), Michel S. Sarrazin (1659-1734), Henry Parker Sartwell (1792-1867), John Linnaeus Edward Whitridge Shecut (1770-1836), Charles Wilkins Short (1794-1863), George Smith (1804-1882), Peter Smith (17.53-1816), Thomas Taylor (1820- 1910), James Thacher (1754-1&44), A. S. Todd (1798-1883), John Torrey (1796-1873), William Tully (1785-1859), George Vasey (1822-1893), Benjamin Vaughan (1751-1835), John Aston Warder (1813-1833), Charles Abiathar White (1826-1910), Frederick Adolphus Wislizenus (1810-1889), Christopher Witt (1G75-1765), Thomas Fanning Wood (1841-1892), William Zollickoffer (1793-1853).— iVei7 E. Stevens. 870. KiLLERMAXX, S[eb A.STiAx]. Die Herkunft und Einfiihrung unserer Gartenbohne (Phaseolus vulgaris L.). [The origin and introduction of our garden bean.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N.F., 18:305-312. Fig. 1-2. 1919.— An introduction from America, which took an important place in European gardens early in the 16th century. Early literature is cited and discussed. — B. 0. Dodge. 871. KiLLERMANx, S[ebastiax]. Die Herkunft des Kalmus (Acorus calamus L.). [The origin of sweet flag.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N. F., 18: 63.3-637. 1 fig. 1919.— Citations and discussion of early references to this plant. — B. 0. Dod-ge. 872. KiLLERMAXX, S[ebastian]. Zur Geschichte der Ananas und Agave. [On the history of the pine-apple and agave.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N. F., 17: 497-503. Fig. 1-3. 1918.— Citations and discussion of early literature on these plants. — B. 0. Dodge. 873. KiLLERMAXX, S[ebastiax]. Zur Geschichte der Johannis- und Stachelbeere. [On the history of the currant and gooseberry.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N. F., 18: .344-.347. Fig. 1-2. 1919. — Records of the currant are found as far back as the fifteenth century, and of the gooseberry as far back as the sixteenth century.— 5. 0. Dodge. 874. KiLLERMAX-x, S[ebastian]. Zur Geschichte der Kakteen. [On the history of cacti.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N. F., 18: 665-668. 1919.— Numerous early references to cacti are cited and discussed. — B. 0. Dodge. 128 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 875. Krzymowski, Richard. Die agrarhistorischen Theorien Eduard Hahns. [The agricultural history theories of Eduard Hahn.] Landw. Jahrb. 53 : 485-499. 1919. — The Hahn theory of the development of agriculture is based on the supposition that the early humans were vegetarians or vegetable collectors and that they divided into hunters and fishermen. The choppers, or woodsmen, came from both the fisherfolk and the vegetable collectors, and from the woodsmen developed the horticulturists and agriculturists. The latest group in this development was the herdsmen, or flock masters, who developed from the agricul- turists. The theory is opposed to the common conception that the first peoples were hunters and fishermen, then nomads, and finally agriculturists. — Lyman Carrier. 876. Laufer, Berthold. Sino-Iranica; Chinese contributions to the history of civili- zation in ancient Iran, with special reference to the history of cultivated plants and products. Field Mus. Nat. Hist. Publ. Anthropol. Ser. 15 : iv + 185-630. 1919.— The following are traced in their migration from Persia to China (Sino-Iranica), or from China to Persia (Irano-Sinica) : Alfalfa, grape-vine, pistachio, walnut, pomegranate, sesame and flax, coriander, cucumber, chive, onion and shallot, garden pea and broad bean, saffron and turmeric, safflower, jasmine, henna, balsam-poplar, manna, asafoetida, galbanum, oak-galls, indigo, rice, pepper, sugar, myrobalan, the "gold-peach," fu-tse, Brassica, cummin, date-palm, spinach, sugar beet and lettuce, Ricinus, almond, fig, olive, cassia pods and carob, narcissus, balm of Gilead, water- melon, fenugreek, nux-vomica, carrot, aromatics, Malayan Po-se and its products. — E. H. Groff. 877. Lecomte, Henri. Edouard Bureau. Rev. Gfo. Sci. 30: 97-98. 1919.— Professor Bureau (1830-1918) succeeded Tulasne as assistant to Brongniart at the Museum of Natural History (Paris), and was afterward professor of systematic botany in that institution for over 30 years. In addition to his studies on the morphology and taxonomy of flowering plants he was much interested in fossil botany. — Neil E. Stevens. 878. LiPMAN, J. G. Byron David Halsted. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 15: 117. 1919. (From the "Voorhees farmer," October, 1918.) 879. Loktel, J. La transformation des jardins par la Convention en I'An II. [Transfor- mation of gardens by the Convention in 1794.] Rev. Hort. 90: 109-110. 1 fig. 1918.— Efforts to stimulate food production in war time recall a similar attempt in 1794 to popularize vege- table growing. It was the original intention to use portions of the gardens of the Tuileries and Luxembourg, the Paris Museum of Natural History, and other places, for potato grow- ing only, but the scope of the plan was broadened to include turnips, beets, pumpkins, and the Jerusalem artichoke.— M. F. Warner. 880. LoTER, Maurice. Paul Chappellier (1822-1919). Bull. Soc. Nation. Acclimat. France 66: 329-330. Portrait. 1919.— Obituary notice. Chappellier experimented on •mprovement of food plants, notably the Chinese yam and Stachijs affinis. — Neil E. Stevens. 881. Maiden, J. H. A contribution to a history of the Royal Society of Kew South Wales, (with information in regard to other New South Wales societies). Jour, and Proc. Roy. Soc New South Wales 52: 215-361. 1918.— Details in regard to the following: Philosophical So- ciety of Australasia (Dec. 1821-1822?), Agricultural Society of New South Wales (July 5, 1822-Feb. 22, 1826), Agricultural and Horticultural Society of New South Wales (Feb. 22, 1816-1836), Australian Society to Promote the Growth and Consumption of Colonial Produce and Manufactures (1830-1836), Australian Floral and Horticultural Society (1836-1848), Australasian Botanic and Horticultural Society (June 20, 1848-Dec. 8, 1856), Horticultural Improvement Society of New South Wales (Jan. 15, 1855-Dec. 8, 1856), Australian Horti- cultural and Agricultural Society (Dec. 8, 1856), Australian Philosophical Society (Jan. 19, 1850-July 30, 1855), Philosophical Society of New South Wales (July 30, 1855-Dec. 12, 1866), Royal Society of New South Wales (Dec. 12, 1866 to date). A summary of their proceedings is given, with titles of papers read.— M. F. Warner. No. 2, June, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 129 882. Marzell, Heinrich. Zur Kulturgeschichte des Schellkrautes. [On the history of the culture of celandine.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N. F., 18: COl-GQl. 1919. — The medical uses of Chelidonium majus L. in the past are reviewed and early literature is cited. — B. 0. Dodge. 883. MoBius, Martin. Die Begriindung der Pflanzengeographie durch Alexander von Humboldt. [The establishment of plant geography by Alexander von Humboldt.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N. F., 18: 521-526. 1 fig. 1919. — An appreciation of the pioneer work of von Humboldt in this field, prepared in celebration of the one hundred fiftieth anniversary of his birth. — B. O. Dodge. 884. Morris, Daniel. Botany and the Empire. Gard. Chron. Ill, 66: 156, 163-164, 175-176, 187-188, 205, 210-211. 1919.— Presidential address, Botanical Section, British Asso- ciation for the Advancement of Science. [See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 72, where author's name is incorrectly given as "J. C." Morris.] — Neil E. Stevens. 885. MuRRiLL, W. A. The lotus of ancient Egypt. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 20: 231. 1919. — The plant known in America as "Egyptian lotus" was held sacred in India, China, and Japan, but never used as decorative motive by the ancient Egyptians. — M. F. Warner. 886. Neumann, Felix. Leonhard Fuchs, physician and botanist, 1501-1566. Ann. Rept. Smithsonian Inst. 1917 : 635-647. PI. 1-7. 1919. 887. Nuttall, Zelia. The flower lovers and gardeners of ancient Mexico. Jour. Inter- nat. Gard. Club 3: 364-379. Illus. 1919. — Great love of flowers was characteristic of the Mexicans from time immemorial, and a unique and ingenious botanical nomenclature is exhibited in the Nahuatl or Mexican tongue, in which certain words used as prefixes or suffixes to plant names convey information as to their qualities or habitats; this seems to be a legacy from a very old civilization. An episode of the reign of Montezuma is given showing high value placed on rare plants. Horticulturists and florists were of great importance. Sahagun's Historia general de la Nueva Espaiia is quoted, and drawings of Sahagun reproduced showing gardeners at work in sowing and transplanting, picking flowers and making floral designs. Specimen "flower songs" from the Nahuatl are also given. — M. F. Warner. 888. Nuttall, Zelia. The gardens of ancient Mexico. II. Jour. Internat. Gard. Club 3: 572-590. Illus. 1919 [1920]. — Quotations are given from a detailed description of a native garden given by Cortes in his second letter to the Emperor Charles V in 1520, and from accounts of the gardens of Montezuma and those of Nezahualcoyotl at Texocco. Plants observed by Hernandez in the gardens of Huaxtepec between 1570 and 1577 are mentioned. Description of the famous "Chinampas" or floating gardens, which are actually mud beds raised above the surface of the lagoon, on which vegetables and flowers for the markets of the city of Mexico are still grown at the present day, just as they were in the most remote times. There is, however, record of veritable floating gardens in the period about 1350- 1400, when the Nahuas or Mexicans were required to deliver annually by way of tribute to the king of Atzcapotzalco, a raft planted with all the native trees and vegetables. [See pre- ceding entry.] — M. F. Warner, 889. Payne, C. H. A bibliographical curiosity. Gard. Chron. Ill, 64: 7-8. 1918.— A work with title in both English and French: "The English flower garden — Le Jardin de fleurs anglais," which is without date, but in which the plates are reprints of those in the very rare "Compleat florist" of 1740. — M. F. Warner. 890. Payne, C. H. Captain Bernet. Garden 83: 15. 1919.— Bernet, born 1775, died 1855, was a retired army officer who began to grow seedling chrysanthemums at Toulouse in 1827. Before that time there had been little effort to obtain new varieties; Bernet in the first two years raised nearly 60, and from that time the improvement of the chrysanthemum was undertaken by many growers. — M. F. Warner. 130 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 891. Payne, C. H. The chrysanthemum in China. Gard. Chron. Ill, 64: 233-234. 1918. — An account by an early Jesuit missionary in 'M^moires concernant I'histoire, les sciences, les arts, les moeurs, les usages, &c. des Chinois. Par les missionaires de P6kin. Tome trois- ifeme. Paris, 1778." A very modern discussion of the flower, strangely overlooked by other early writers on the chrysanthemum. The "Kiu-hoa" or "Chu-hwa" of the Chinese is identified with the Matricaria of Tournefort and other 17th and 18th century botanists, the Chrysanthemum indicum of the Botanical Magazine, and the Anthemis grandiflora of Rama- tuelle, who was the first to describe it from European-grown seeds in 1792, at least 25 years after the account discussed, as this volume, though published in 1778, is dated at the end; "a P6-King ce 3 Novembre, 1767."— M. F. Warner. 892. P[atne], C. H. Old gardening books. Gard. Chron. Ill, 64: 111. 1918.— Apropos of gardening literature, "The Gentleman and Lady's Gardener" of Robert Edmeade (1776) is noted, which is not only a catalogue of seeds and plants for sale by him, but contains cultural directions and a monthly calendar of operations, together with the Latin name of each plant according to the Linnean classification. — M. F. Warner. 893. Payne, C. H. Pierre Blancard. Garden 82: 475-476. 1918.— Blancard was born at Marseilles April 21, 1741, and died there March 16, 1826. On his return from his fifth voyage to the Orient he introduced the chrysanthemum into Europe in 1789; it soon spread throughout Provence, was grown at the Jardin des Plantes in Paris, and is said to have been sent to Kew by Cels. It bloomed for the first time in England at Colvill's nursery in Chelsea, and was first figured in the Botanical Magazine as t. 327. — M. F. Warner. 894. Payne, C. H. T'ao-Yiian-Ming. Garden 82: 444, 455. 1918. — Chinese litterateur and chrysanthemum lover (365-427 A.D.)- Little is told of his cultivation of the flower, save that his favorite was the variety known as "Kiu-hwa-chu" or "Nine glories." Extracts from his writings, and allusions to him in works of other Chinese authors, are quoted. — M. F. Warner. 895. PoLLACCi, GiNO. In ricordo di Giovanni Briosi. Atti 1st. Bot. Univ. Pavia 17: iii-xvii. Portrait. 1920.— Born at Ferrara, April 26, 1846, died at Pavia, July 20, 1919.— Baccalaureate degree in engineering at the University of Ferrara. Studied also at Torino and Naples and went to Belgium and Germany for training in agriculture. Studied with Kraus and deBary. Founded the agricultural experiment station at Palermo in 1873 and gave a strong stimulus to studies in enology and vegetable pathology. In 1877 he was called to the chemico-agricultural station at Rome where he established an experimental vineyard, propagated 500 varieties of grapes and did much enological work. He was called to the chair of botany at the University of Pavia in 1883. Here he first put the botanical garden in order and reorganized the station for cryptogamic botany, of which he was director. He began the publication of "Atti" which now has reached its 250th memoir. Author of many papers on parasitic fungi and fungus diseases of plants. A leader of Italian botanists. A bibliog- raphy of 161 titles is appended. — D. Reddick. 896. Ravn, F. K. Experiments in plant culture in Denmark. Scottish Jour. Agric. 3: 207-214. 1920. — The first experiments by B. S. Jorgensen in 1860 were largely modelled on those at Rothamsted. A famous pioneer in work with meadow plants was P. Nielsen, who in 1886 was made director of the first Danish state experiment station for field work. Toward the last of the 19th century attempts were made to establish local experiments in plant cul- ture. An outline of work at the present time is given under the following heads: I. The state experimental work in plant industry; II. Experiments conducted by the agricultural societies; III. Plant breeding in its relation to experimental work. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 69.]— M. F. Warner. 897. Reddick, Donald. Vem Bonham Stewart. Phytopath. 9: 111-113. Portrait. 1919, — A sketch of the life of V. B. Stewart (1888-1918) with a list of his botanical publications. — Neil E. Stevens. No. 2, June, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 131 898. R[endle], a. B. [Anne Casimir Pyramus de Candolle.] Jour. Botany 57: 23-24. 1919. — His death on Oct. 3, 1918, "is for the systematic botanist the breaking of a link with the past." The son of Alphonse and grandson of Augustin Pyramus de Candolle, his botani- cal contributions had not the fundamental character of some of theirs, but he did useful work. — Neil E. Stevens. 899. Richmond, C. W. In memoriam — Edgar Alexander Meams, 1856-1916. Ann. Rept. Smithsonian Inst. 1917: 649-662. Portrait. [1919].— Dr. Mearns collected plants extensively in various regions while on duty as surgeon in the U. S. A. and was naturalist on the Roosevelt expedition to Africa. — Neil E. Stevens. 900. Roberts, W. Brunton, of Birmingham. Gard. Chron. Ill, 64: 142. 1918.— The recently published "Catalogue of the Birmingham collection" of the Birmingham public library, includes the "Catalogue of plants, botanically arranged according to the system of Linnaeus" of John Brunton & Co., 83 High Street, Birmingham, 1777; also one of forest and fruit trees issued by Brunton & Forbes in 1782, and another catalogue of trees in 1787, when the firm was Brunton, Forbes & Hunter. — M. F. Warner. 901. Roberts, W. An eighteenth-century London seedsman. Card. Chron. Ill, 63: 223. 1918. — "A Catalogue of several sorts of grass seeds, sold by Nathaniel Powell, at the King's Head, near Fetter Lane end, in Holborn, London," is a series of cultural directions, followed by "A Short account of the improvement of land by several sorts of seeds," by the same person, and, though without date, the format and typography place them in the early years of the 18th century. Powell's name as seedsman at 39, Holborn, appeared in the London directories until 1771, and it is possible that he may have been the Nathaniel Powell whose death is recorded in the Gentleman's Magazine as taking place at Bristol on March 1, 1773. His catalogue deals almost exclusively with trefoil, clover, sainfoin, ryegrass, and lucerne, and Powell presents their advantages in a manner which suggests thorough obser- vation and practical experience. — M. F. Warner. 902. [Roberts, W.] Florists' feasts; a 16th century custom; as old as gillyflowers and carnations. The Times [London] No. 43134 (June 24). 16. 1919.— Custom probably intro- duced to England by Flemish cloth manufacturers settling in 1597 at Norwich, and cer- tainly flourishing as early as 1631, when Ralph KxEVETwrotea play, "Rhodion and Iris," for presentation at the Norwich florists' feast. Nearly all the exhibitions of flowers and fruits of the 18th and early 19th century were held at public houses, where an inexpensive "ordi- nary" was provided. Flowers, fruits, and vegetables of all sorts (tulips, carnations, auri- culas, melons, gooseberries, and cabbages) were the subjects of competition, but with the institution in the 19th century of the Royal Horticultural Society and those of the various counties, these florists' feasts, having served their purpose in the encouragement of horti- culture, disappeared. — M. F. Warner. 903. [Roberts, W.] Old gardening literature. The Times [London] Lit. Suppl. No. 872 (Oct. 3) 472, 1918. — Rare books on agriculture, gardening, and botany, sold during the past season, with note of some of the libraries rich in such literature. — Neil E. Stevens. 904. Roberts, W. Tulip Paul Diack. Gard. Chron. Ill, 64: 201. 1918.— In the second of his satires, "Love of Fame, the universal passion," the Rev. Edward Young (best known as author of the "Night thoughts") deals poetically with this flower, and in his key says that "Paul Diack, who gave name to a tulip, was an honest, toping old citizen of London." The name is possibly of Dutch or Flemish origin, and may have been Dyck. — M. F. Warner. 905. Roberts, W. A Whitechapel botanical garden. Gard. Chron. Ill, 64: 245-246. Fig. 98-99. 1918.— The garden of William Bennett, "Cornf actor and Biscuit Baker," situated in Whitechapel Fields, next the half-way house to Stepney, only known from the auction catalogue of its contents, to be sold 27th March, 1766. A list of the botanical names 132 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, in this catalog is given, showing that several of these plants were grown by Bennett previous to the dates recorded for their introduction into Great Britain, as for instance Selago spuria, supposed to have been introduced in 1779, and Pisonia aculeata and Ruellia ciliata, in 1806. Although there is no other intimation of the fact, the large number of certain plants, e. g., 350 pineapples, suggests that Bennett may have traded in plants. — M. F. Warner. 906. ScHiPS, M, Lionardo da Vinci als Naturforscher. [Leonardo da Vinci as a naturalist.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N. F., 18 : 256-259. 1919. 907. Schramm, J. R. Botanical Abstracts. Science 49: 195-196. 1919. — An account of the organization of the Board of Control and the plans for this journal. — Neil E. Stevens. 908. Shear, C. L., and N. E. Stevens. Plant pathology to-day. Sci. Monthly 7: 235- 243. 1918. — The development of plant pathology, especially in America, is discussed and some of the significant papers are cited. — B. 0. Dodge. 909. Simmons, J. R. The historic trees of Massachusetts. S vo., xxi + 1S9 p. Illus. Marshall Jones Company: Boston, 1919. 910. Singleton, Esther. The Shakespeare garden. Jour. Internat. Garden Club 3: 545-556. Illus. 1919 [1920]. — Evolution of the garden of delight; plants proper to the English garden in Alexander Neckan's "De naturis rerum" (12th century), and those enumerated by John de Garlande and by Guillaume de Lorris in his "Roman de la Rose" in the 13th century; the formal garden, symbolism of gardens, and development of garden in Tudor times, are discussed, with many extracts from late 16th century literature. — M. F. Warner^ 911. Spinden, H. J. Origin of American agriculture ; ancient pottery reveals the invention and spread of agriculture in America. Sci. Amer. Suppl. 88: 120-121, 127. Illus. 1919. — "The most reliable information regarding the agriculture of the past lies in the pottery which was inseparably associated with it." Earliest records of cultivated plants are found in Mesopotamia, Egypt, Mexico, and Peru. Illustrations are from pottery in form of ears of maize (Mexican and Peruvian), and squashes (Peruvian). — M. F. Warner. 912. Stevens, N. E. American botany and the great war. Science 48: 177-179. 1918. — Several incidental effects of the war on botanical work are mentioned, but the organization of phytopathologists for emergency work is given most attention. — B. 0. Dodge. 913. Sydow, Hans. Ferdinand Theissen, S. J. Ann Mycol. 17: 134-139. 1919 [1920.]— An appreciation, with brief biography, of Ferdinand Thiessen (1877-1919) . A bibliography of his 52 mycological contributions is appended. [See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 71.] — H. S. Jackson. 914. ToNi, G. B. de. Fabio Colonna e I'eterocarpia. Riv. Biol. 1: 46-49. 1919.— Colon na's observations on heterocarpy. Many examples of this phenomenon are afforded by Calendula, and Ftjchs in his "De historia stirpium commentarii" (1542) shows a figure of C. officinalis with akenes arranged in a semi-circle, but does not recognize the polymorphic nature of the fruit. Just 50 years later Fabio Colonna (1567-1640), in his first book, ''Phyto- basanos sive Plantarum aliquot historia" (1592) p. 52-59, describes and figures the plant called Clymenon Dioscoridis, now referred to Calendula officinalis, which he says is characterized by 3 different forms of fruits. This peculiarity of C. officinaliswas later figured by Elizabeth Blackwell in her ""Curious herbal" (1739), by Gaertner, "De fructibus et seminibus plant- arum" (1788), and by Poiret in "Encyclop^die mdthodique," Suppl. 5: 188. Tab. 715. — M. F. Warner. 915. True, R. H. Notes on the early history of the pecan in America. Ann. Rept. Smith- sonian Inst. 1917: 435-448. [1919]. — A series of notes from unpublished or inaccessible sources, dealing with the discovery, introduction into Europe, botanical description, early cultivation, and improvement of the pecan. — Neil E. Stevens. No. 2, June, 1921] BOTANICAL EDUCATION 133 916. Vatjpel, Friedrich. Karl Schmidt. Monatsschr. Kakteenk. 29: 73-74. 1 fig. 1919. — Karl Schmidt of the firm of Haage & Schmidt was born Dec. 23, 1848, and died Feb. 26, 1919, at Erfurt .—A. 5. Hitchcock. 917. Viola, Bartholomew. The history of sugar. Louisiana Planter and Sugar Manu- facturer 65: 379-381, 398-399. 5 fig. 1920. — A history of sugar and of sugar manufacture from very early times. The sugar cane industry is also traced from country to country. — C. W. Edgerton. 918. Warner, M. F. Bibliographical opportunities in horticulture. Bull. Amer. Library Assoc. 13': 178-184. 1919. — The following are suggested as important and interesting lines of work in this field: Continuation of the check list of American horticultural books; the preparation of much needed indexes of horticultural periodicals; the collection of data on early American journals and societies; critical bibliographical work; and biographical and historical research. — Neil E. Stevens. 919. Warner, M, F. Date of Robert Thompson's birth. Gard. Chron. Ill, 64: 116-117. 1918. — Mr. Bunyard's sketch, March 23, 1918, quotes Thompson's own statement from the Chiswick records, that he was born in 1799, which would seem to be conclusive. But sketches in Journal of Horticulture in 1869 and 1877, while admitting that there is no birth register by which the precise date can be fixed, infer that it was in September, 1798, from the fact that his baptism occurred on the 16th of October of that year. — M. F. Warner. 920. Warner, M. F. Horticultural libraries in the United States. Gard. Chron. Ill, 65: 247. 1919. — The collection of the Library of the L^. S. Department of Agriculture in its relation to horticulture, with some comment on its administration and relation to other libraries. — Neil E. Stevens. 921. White, O.E. Our common garden vegetables ; their history and their origin. Brook- lyn Bot. Gard. Leaflet VI, 3: 1-19. Fig. 1-5. 1918. — Popular account with list of common edible plants, their place of origin, and probable antiquity of cultivation.— iVezZ E. Stevens. 922. WicKSON, E. J. Beginnings of agricultural education and research in California. Rept. California Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917/18: 35-101. 1918.— Discusses the following: Plant introduction and distribution (p. 67-69); grasses and forage plants (p. 69-72), cereals (p. 72- 74), forestry (p. 74-77), viticulture (p. 77-79), horticulture (p. 79-83), plant diseases (p. 86- 88). — Neil E.Stevens. 923. Wildeman, Emile de. Alfred Cogniaux (1841-1916). Bull. Jard. Bot. Bruxelles 5: i-xxx. Portrait. 1919. — Account of life and botanical work of Cogniaux, who in later years devoted himself to the Cucurbitaceae, Melastomaceae, and Orchidaceae. A list of his works, in chronological order from 1863 to 1916, comprises over 150 titles. — Neil E. Stevens. BOTANICAL EDUCATION C. Stuart Gager, Editor Alfred Gundersen, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 939, 1049, 1079, 1084, 1115) 924. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Dymes, T. A. The nature study of plants in theory and practice for the hobby-botanist, xviii + 173 p., 54 fig. Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge: London, 1920.] Sci. Prog. [London] 15: 320. 1920. 925. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Dymes, Thomas Alfred (Introduction by F. E. Weiss). The nature study of plants in theory and practice for the hobby-botanist, xviii + 173 -p., 64 fig. Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge: London, 1920.] Jour. Botany 58: 277- 278. 1920. 134 ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 926. Cook, Mel. T. College botany. 39^ p. J. B. Lippincott & Co.: Philadelphia, 1920. 927. Dickson, B. T. Do our agricultural colleges educate? Sci. Agric. 1 : 12-13. 1921. — This article is a plea for rational education and the consequent diminution of the importance of the final examination. The fundamental question is whether students are trained to think. The suggestion is made that the "se?ninar" method be used more, even in undergraduate courses, and that final examinations be replaced by unannounced tests during term, combined with carefully checked laboratory work. — B. T. Dickson. 928. HoLMBOE, Jens. Den botaniske afdeling. [The botanical section.] Bergens Mus- Aarsberetning 1917-1918: 36-44. 1918. — Annual report of development of herbarium, botani- cal garden, conservatory, and botanical laboratory. — A. Gundersen. 929. HoLMBOE, Jens. Den botaniske afdeling. [The botanical section.] Bergens Mus. Aarsberetning 1918-1919: 37-45. 1919. — Annual report. — A. Gundersen. 930. Jones, W. Neilson, and M. C. Rayner. A text book of plant biology, viii + 262 p., 6 pi., 36 fig. Methuen & Co., Ltd. : London, 1920. CYTOLOGY Gilbert M. Smith. Editor Geo. S. Bryan, Assistant Editor (See in this issue Entries 1096, 1103, 1119, 1205, 1237, 1574) ECOLOGY AND PLANT GEOGRAPHY H. C. CowLES, Editor G. D. Fuller, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 791, 809, 812, 883, 1000, 1032, 1033, 1043, 1224, 1227, 1235, 1236, 1238, 1239, 1240, 1251, 1252, 1254, 1256, 1257, 1259, 1261, 1265, 1266, 1267, 1316, 1364, 1466, 1489, 1532, 1549, 1551, 1560) GENERAL, FACTORS, MEASUREMENTS 931. Darwin, F. A phaenological study. New Phytol. 18: 287-298. 1919.— A record is given of the flowering dates of 259 of the commoner plants near Brookthorpe, Gloucestershire, England, for the years 1917, 1918, and 1919. Tables are also given of the mean weekly tem- peratures and of the deviations from the normal. — 7. F. Lewis. 932. Fritsch, F. E. Algal ecology. Freshwater and terrestrial forms. Jour. Ecol. 8: 68-76. 1920. — A review of recent contributions to the ecology of freshwater algae. Among the notable papers are those by MacCaughey on Hawaiian forms (see Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 200), by Transeau on Spirogyra hybrids (see Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 715), by Elmore on the diatoms of Devil's Lake (see Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 10), and by Chodat on some alpine species. Among the forms noted are Oscillatoria, Coelastrum, Volvox, Euglena, and Hormidium. — Geo. D. Fuller. 933. Fritsch, F. E. Algal ecology. Marine forms. Jour. Ecol. 8: 66-68. 1920.— In a review of some of the recent contributions to the ecology of marine algae the principal points relate to the distribution of the Laminariaceae on the Pacific coast of North America and about the Orkney Islands. Some data by Sauvageau (see Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 1585) on the distribution and naturalization of forms occurring in the southern portion of the Bay of Biscay are noted as well as an ecological discussion of the marine species of the Hawaiian Archipelago by MacCaughey (see Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 200). — Geo.D. Fuller. No. 2, June, 1921] ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY 135 934. Fuller, George D. Vegetation of a glacial plunge basin. [Rev. of: Petry, Loren C. Studies of the vegetation of New York State. II. The vegetation of a glacial plunge basin and its relation to temperature. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 45: 203-210. 1918 (see Bot. Absta. 1, Entry835).] Bot. Gaz. 67: 184. 1919. 935. Gain, Edmond, et Andre Gain. Differences thermique de I'ubac k I'adret d'une vallee lacustre. [Temperature differences between the shaded slope and the sunny slope of a lacustrine valley.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 191-194. 1920.— The water of the lake is found at times to have a temperature at its surface of 4-6°C. higher than the soil on the adjacent slopes. The temperature of the soil at 1 dm. beneath the surface on the northern sunny slope is usually about 1°C. higher than that of the southern shaded slope. A like difference is found in the water of the streams entering the lake from the two slopes respec- tively.—C. H. and W. K. Farr. 936. Gray, John, and George J. Peirce. The influence of light upon the action of sto- mata and its relation to the transpiration of certain grains. Amer. Jour. Bot. 6: 131-155. 18 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 43G. 937. Johnston, Earl S. Climatic conditions in a greenhouse as measured by plant growth. [The author's abstract of a paper read before the American Meterological Society, April 22, 1920.] Monthly Weather Rev. 48:215. 1920. 938. Keen, B. A. Forecasting frosts. Nature 104: 450-451. 1920. — Review of obser- vations by Boussingault, Hellman, Schubert, J. Warren Smith, Hazen, O'Gara, and T. B. Franklin. "Up to the present no complete correlation has been made of frost in any particular locality and its causes. For this purpose an examination by statistical methods of a series of continuous observations (of the automatic recording type) of metereorological factors is needed." — 0. A. Stevens. 939. Michael, Ellis L. Marine ecology and the coefficient of association: a plea in behalf of quantitative biology. Jour. Ecol. 8: 54-59. 1920. — The writer examines the various for- mulae used for deriving the coefficients of association as applied to plankton studies and finds them all deficient. Emphasizing the importance of quantitative results he demands that proficiency in mathematics be regarded as a prerequisite for major work in biology. — Geo. D. Fuller. 940. Shull, Charles A. Correlation of wind flow and temperature with evaporation. Plant World 22: 210-215. Fig. 1919.— Statistical study of the data obtained from evapora- tion station records from Lawrence, Kansas, shows that the correlation between air movement and evaporation is 0.29 =*= 0.027, and between temperature and evaporation the correlation is 0.687 ± 0.015d.— Charles A. Shull. STRUCTURE AND BEHAVIOR 941. Crocker, William. Buried weed seeds. [Rev. of: Brenchley, Winifred E. Buried weed seeds. Jour. Agric. Sci. 9: 1-31. 1918 (see Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 615).] Bot. Gaz. 67: 515-516. 1919. — The reviewer regards the author's conclusions justified, but records her failure to note the very similar studies and conclusions of Peter, Beal, and Duvel. — H. C. Cowles. 942. Crocker, William. Osmotic pressure of epiphytes. [Rev. of : Harris, J. Arthur. On the osmotic concentration of the tissue fluids of phanerogamic epiphytes. Amer. Jour. Bot. 5:490-506. 1918 (see Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 829; 8, Entry 944).] Bot. Gaz. 67: 520. 1919. 943. Douglass, A. E. Climatic cycles and tree growth: a study of the annual rings of trees in relation to climate and solar activity. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 289. 127 p., pi. 1-12, fig. 1-40. 1919. — Measurements and dates of formation of the annual rings of 230 136 ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, trees, some over 2000 years old, were used as a basis for the study. Yellow pine (Pinus ponderosa) from Arizona and sequoia {Sequoia giganiea) from the Californian high Sierras furnished most of the specimens, although a considerable collection of chiefly Scotch pine (Pinus silvestris) with some spruce (Picea excelsa) was made in the Baltic drainage district of northern Europe, a smaller collection of hemlock {Tsuga canadensis) in Vermont, and another of Douglas fir {Pseudotsuga rmicronata) in Oregon. Variations in the annual rings of individual trees, which in many cases were a number of miles apart, were often so uniform and characteristic that they permitted ready cross-identification. The fluctuations in growth reflected the sun-spot cycle or its multiples and the correlation with rainfall and temperature was shown to be close over the entire range of existing meteorological data. The corre- spondence of maxima and minima of these climatic variables with those of sun-spots indicates a physical connection between solar activity and terrestrial weather. Although the study of cycles is not considered complete the following conspicuous periods seem to be evident in the rates of growth: A half, a full, a double, a triple, and a triple triple sun-spot period — the sun-spot period being 10-13 years. Although these frequencies of maxima and minima in the growth curves are common to all the trees, the positions are sometimes regularly dis- placed, as, for example, in the Vermont trees in which the maximum growth regularly ante- dated the sun-spot maximum by about 3 years. In addition, the curves of tree growth exhibit a complex combination of short periods, including a prominent cycle of about 2 years; other persistent cycles recur in periods of 19, 14, 10, and 7 years. It was found that the trees' year begins in autumn and that double rings are indicative of spring drought. In dry climates the thickness of a ring is proportional to the rainfall with an accuracy of 70 per cent and a still closer correspondence may be expressed by an empirical formula that takes into account the distribution of the effect of rain.over several adjoining years. For the discussion of curve- smoothing, identification of rings, dating of rings, curve standardization for the decreasing rate of growth with increasing age of trees, and the methods of tree selection the original must be consulted. An instrument (the automatic optical periodograph) was devised to reduce the influence of individual judgment in the determination of periodic changes in the growth rate. With it data may be examined for periodicity of any frequency and decisive conclusions drawn concerning changes in periods, recurrence of periods, and constancy of period length. Its description and directions for use cannot be abstracted. — H. E. Pulling. 944. Fuller, George D. Sap concentration in epiphytes. [Rev. of: (1) Harris, J. Arthur. On the osmotic concentration of the tissue fluids of desert Loranthaceae. Mem. Torrey Bot. Club 17: 307-315. 1918 (see Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 684, 828). (2) Harris, J. Arthur. On the osmotic concentration of the tissue fluids of phanerogamic epiphytes. Amer, .Jour Bot. 5: 490-506. 1918 (see Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 829; 8, Entry 942).] Bot. Gaz. 67: 374-375. 1919. 945. Gardner, Max W. The mode of dissemination of fungus and bacterial diseases of plants. Rept. Michigan Acad. Sci. 20 : 357-423. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 764. 946. JoNE.s, Frank Morton. Another pitcher-plant insect (Diptera, Sciarinae). En- tomol. News 31: 91-94. 1920.— Description of a new fly, to which attention was first called in 1909 by Macparlane. Other flies found in pitchers of different species of Sarracenia are mentioned. — 0. A. Stevens. 947. Miller, David. A new fungus-gnat which fertilizes Corysanthes oblonga Hook. New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Tech. 1 : 4. 1918.— The gnat is Exechia thomsoni.—H. C. Cowles. 948. Uphof, J. C. Th. Cold-resistance as an ecological factor in the geographical distri- bution of cacti. Jour. Ecol. 8: 41-53. PL, 6 fig. 1920.— From observations in the desert regions of Arizona and from experiments in the laboratory the conclusion is reached that the protoplasm of different species offers different degrees of resistance to low temperature and that this resistance is a hereditary physiological characteristic of the species. The tempera- ture which damages a plant will kill it if continued long enough.— Some species have a rela- No. 2, June, 1921] ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY 137 tively thick integument which is somewhat resistant to low temperatures of short duration such as are common in the Arizona and adjacent deserts. A large range of resistance was found in different species. — Geo. D. Fuller. V 949, Wylie, R. B. Trimorphism of Pontederia. [Rev. of: Hazen, Tracy E. The trimorphlsm and insect visitors of Pontederia. Mem. Torrey Bot. Club 17: 459-484, 1918 (seeBot.Absts. 1, Entry 830).] Bot. Gaz. 67:271-272. 1919. VEGETATION 950, Fuller, George D. Distribution of Pinus Banksiana and Thuja occidentalis. [Rev. of: Fernald, M. L. Lithological factors limiting the ranges of Pinus Banksiana and Thuja occidentalis. Rhodora 21: 41-67. 1919 (see Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 283).] Bot. Gaz. 68: 149-150. 1919.— The reviewer feels that the author has criticized somewhat too severely Hutchinson's theory as to the cause of the distribution of these two trees (see Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 190). It is felt that there is truth in both theories, and that they are not necessarily nharmonious with one another. — H. C. Cowles. 951, Fuller, George D. Vegetation of Cape Breton. [Rev. of: Nichols, George E, The vegetation of northern Cape Breton Island, Nova Scotia. Trans. Connecticut Acad. Arts and Sci. 22: 249-467. 70 fig. 1918 (see Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 833).] Bot. Gaz. 67: 370-373, 1919, — "In its comprehensive character, its abundance of detail, and its notable contributions to various phases of ecology, including the relationships between deciduous and coniferous forests, the ecology of the sphagnums and of the development of raised bogs, this report stands as one of the most notable of recent years." — //. C. Coirles. 952, Fuller, George D. Heath and grassland. [Rev. of: Farrow, E. P, On the ecology of the vegetation of Breckland. Ill, General effects of rabbits on the vegetation, IV. Experiments mainly relating to the available water supply. V, Observations relating to com- petition between plants. VI. Characteristic bare areas and sand hummocks. Jour. Ecol. 5: 1-18, 104-112, 15.>-172, 1917; 6: 144-152, 1918 (see Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 824).] Bot. Gaz. 67: 181-182, 1919. 953, Hauman, Lucien. La vegetation des hautes Cordilleres de Mendoza (Republique Argentine). [The vegetation of the high Cordilleras of Mendoza,] An. Soc. Cien. Argentina 86: 121-188, 225-348. 21 pL, 7 fig. 1918.— This article gives a rather detailed description of a scanty alpine vegetation found on the high Andes between 31 and 37°S. latitude at elevations from 2000 to 4200 meters. This region possesses many peaks exceeding 6000 m., the highest and best known being Aconcagua with an altitude of 7020 m. These are snow capped and possess a good development of glaciers, from which flow tortuous and variable streams. These furnish almost the entire water supply for the sparse vegetation as the growing season in these mountains is almost entirely without rain. The temperature records are imperfect but an important factor is seen in the light frosts which are common throughout the growing season. One station at 2700 m. gives an annual mean temperature of 6.5°C., with mean maximum of 13.4°C., and a mean minimum of 0.1°C. Humidity is at all times low while wind velocity is decidedly high and constant. Precipitation as recorded at 2000 m, seems to be irregular and variable, the annual amounts ranging from 20 to 69 cm., occurring principally in the colder months in the form of snow. This deficiency of rainfall combined with other factors makes the vegetation not only very scanty but limited to valleys and slopes which possess streams or seepage water from the glaciers and snowfields. In the absence of mountain lakes aquatic vegetation is scanty and anything like mountain meadows are limited to the stream edges and small alluvial fans. Such grassy associations appear to closely resemble similar alpine areas elsewhere. Related to the alpine meadows are the "high Andean oases" formed at 3200-3600 m. where at the foot of talus or morainal slopes some alluvial soil has accumulated. These oases vary in size but rarely reach 100 m. in diameter. Thev are often dominated bv the 138 ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, juncaceous Andesia hisexuali 15 to 30 cm. high forming a thick carpet. — Trees are absent throughout, and even in the valleys the shrubs do not exceed 2 m. in height. Adesmia pini- folia, a legume, is the most plentiful shrub, while among the others are Ephedra americana andina, Berberis empetrifolia, and Senecio uspallatensis. Opuntia andicola, the only cactus of the region, together with Azorella Gilliesii and Laretia acaulis, 2 umbellifers, form a curious trio of herbaceous cushion plants confined to the valleys. — Upon the more exposed parts of the mountains there is a notable abundance of prostrate, tufted, rosette and cushion plants often with a striking development of large woody roots. These growth-forms are accounted for as being in response to exposure to high winds and dependence upon a sub- terranean water supply. Upon the slopes Adesmia trijuga, with shrubby cushions 30 cm. high, together with Poa chilensis and Stipa speciosa in tufts, dominate the area, forming scattered dots over the rocky landscape. Most abundant upon the summits between 3000 and 4000 m. are the subterranean woody cushions of Adesmia subterranea, whose leaves form a carpet upon the surface. Accompanying this species with similar growth-forms are the more uncommon Verbena uniflora and Oxalis bryoides. — The entire vascular flora consists of 417 species, including 1 pteriodophyte, Cystopteris fragilis, and one gymnosperm, Ephedra. Among the best represented families are Compositae with 85 species, Leguminosae'with 36, Gramineae with34, Cruciferae with28, Portulacaceae with 15, Umbelliferae with 15, Rosaceae with 12, Cyperaceae with 12, Oxalidaceae with 10, and Violaceae and Caryophyllaceae with 9 species each. Well represented genera are Senecio with 26 species, Adesmia with 16, Calan- drinia with 15, Astragalus with 12, Oxalis with 10, and Viola with 9. The scarcity of the Saxifragaceae, with 2 rare species, and the entire absence of the Ericaceae and Primulaceae, are worthy of note. Lichens, abundant at the lower altitudes, become very rare above 2800 m., mosses are common about springs up to 3600 m. but liverworts are entirely lacking. More than one-half the species (210) are classed as belonging to the central Andes, GO being endemic. There are no endemic genera but notable among this group are such aggregates as 6 species of Adesmia, 2 of Boopis, 12 of Senecio, and 2 new varieties of Koeleria. The other elements are the northern tropical with 16 species, the subtropical with 21 species, the basal Argentinan with 56 species, the southern Andean with 10 species, the Patagonian with 73 species, and the cosmopolitan and introduced species numbering respectively 28 and 17. This introduced element must be regarded as small when it is recalled that the Mendoza River valley has been the trans-Andean route for centuries. — There is a carefully and fully annotated list of the vascular flora of the regions based on the collections of the author and those of other explorers, and finally there is a bibliography of 54 titles. — Photographs and drawings illus- trate many of the less known species. — Geo. D. Fuller. 9.54. Rf BEL, Edtjard. Uber die Entwicklung der Geselischaftsmorphologie. [The evolu- tion of the morphology of plant communities.] Jour. Ecol. 8: lS-40. 1920. The author gives an outline of the history of statistical investigations of vegetation from Humboldt (1807) to the present, tracing an evolution in the study of the forms of plant communities, and treating the work of nearly 30 different workers in some 24 pages. — In different plant com- munities quantitative results have been sought for such matters as abundance, dominance and its sub-classes, manner of occurrence (gregarious, solitary, etc.), frequency, life-forms (growth-forms) and layers, specificity of species to associations ("Gesellschaftstreue"). The aim is the quantitative expression of relations obtaining in such communities for the investigation of associations and succession and for the purposes of plant geography. The varying forms of associations are well characterized by these results. There is no finality in any method or combinations of methods. The future will undoubtedly show greater advances. The author emphasizes the need for the study of forms in distinction from their ecology. He states that hitherto the work has been too largely concerned with the ecology of plant communities and that it should be more concerned with the morphology of plant communities in order that the results obtained may be applied in the elucidation of succes- sions.— The paper brings into view, in its sketch of the evolution of statistical methods for over a century of activity, that the quantitative results so far reached are sometimes really quantitative only in the sense of being numerical description.— i/. de Forest. No. 2, June, 1921] ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY 139 955. Salisbury, E. J. A draft scheme for the representation of British vegetation in black and white. Jour. Ecol. 8: 60-61. PI. 1920. — The various types of vegetation are repre- sented by rather simple sj'mbols. — Geo. D. Fuller. 956. Shreve, Forrest. Vegetation of Washington and Idaho. [Rev. of: Weaver, J. E. A study of the vegetation of Southeastern Washington and adjacent Idaho. Univ. Nebraska Studies 17: 1-114. 48 fig. 1917.] Plant World 22: 216-217. 1919. FLORISTICS 957. Anderson, J. P. Plants of southeastern Alaska. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 25: 427- 449. 1920. — A catalogue of pteridophytes and spermatophytes collected mostly at Sitka and Juneau. Habitat and abundance are noted. — H. S. Conard. 958. Andrews, A. LeRoy. Bryological notes. V. Scapania nimbosa from Norway. Torreya 19: 49-51. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 699. 959. Anonymous. Geography of U. S. botanical drugs. Pharm. Era 52: 63-66, 89-92. 9 fig., 2 maps. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 424. 960. Arber, Agnes. Aquatic angiosperms: the significance of their systematic distri- bution. Jour. Botany 57:83-86. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 733. 961. Clute, WiLLARD N. Rarity of Conopholis. Amer. Bot. 25: 108. 1919.— Conopholis americana is regarded as very rare in most of its range. At Saeger's Lake, Valparaiso, Indiana, several acres thickly strewn with this plant were noted in 1919. — W. N . Clute. 962. Deane, Walter. Amsinckia in New England. Rhodora 21: 38-40. 1919. — An account of the occurrence of the genus in Xew England. — James P. Poole. 963. Fuller, George D. Vegetation of Newfoundland. [Rev. of: Fernald, M. L. The contrast in the floras of eastern and western Newfoundland. Amer. Jour. Bot. 5: 237- 247. Spl. 1918 (see Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 469).] Bot. Gaz. 67: 101. 1919. 964. Gerstlauer, L. Neue Arten und Standorte der Flora von Augsburg und Mittel- schwaben. [Species and stations new to the flora of Augsburg and Middle Swabia.j Ber. Naturw. Verein. Schwaben u. Neuburg 42: 251-263. 1919.— This article is a continuation of earlier articles published in the same transactions. The author lists 10 pteriodophytes and 161 spermatophytes from the region indicated, giving in each case one or more definite stations with the names of the collectors. Eighteen species and 14 hybrids are reported for the first time. At the close of the paper, certain records in Weinhart and Lutzenberger's "Flora von Augsburg" are corrected. — A. W. Evans. 965. Gleason, H. a. Rhamnus dahurica in Michigan. Torreya 19: 141-142. 1919. — Two wild trees of this species have been found in a swamp south of Ann Arbor, Michigan, 500 yards or more from any residence. Only 1 cultivated tree of the species is known in the vicinity, and as it is smaller it cannot be the parent of the wild trees. — /. C. Nelson. 966. Harper, Roland M. Tumion taxifolium in Georgia. Torreya 19: 119-122. 1919. — Tumion taxifolium (Arn.) Greene, the "savin" or "stinking cedar," which has heretofore been known as occurring only in Gadsden and Liberty counties, Florida, was collected by the author in Decatur County, Georgia, on August 16, 1918, in a ravine about 100 yards north of the State line at Chattahoochee, Florida. Several trees were found, some a foot in diame- ter and 40 feet tall. — J. C. Nelson. 967. Kidder, Nathaniel T. Solidago lepida, var. fallax in Knox County, Maine. Rho- dora 22 : 77-78. 1920. — An account of the discovery of Solidago lepida DC. var. fallax Fernald on Nathan's Island, one of the outermost islands of Penobscot Bay, lying about 15 miles 140 ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, southwest of Mt. Desert. The determination was made at the Gray Herbarium by Professor Fernald. The range of this variety as previously published has been Newfoundland to British Columbia, south to northern New Brunswick, northern Maine, northern Michigan, Utah, and Washington. This new station is the first south of Aroostook Valley. — James P. Poole. 968. Knowlton, C. H., W. S. Ripley, Jr., and C. A. Weatherby. Second report of the Committee on Floral Areas. Rhodora 22: 80-89. 1920. — This report covers the Polypodi- aceae, Schizaeaceae, and Osmundaceae and is published as a part of the "Preliminary Lists of New England Plants." In addition to giving the distribution of the plants by states, the article gives considerable information as to their distribution according to ecological and soil classifications. — James P. Poole. 969. Long, Bayard. Regarding Gentiana Andrewsii in the coastal plain of New Jersey. Rhodora 22: 104-110. 1920. — The author finds that earlier records of the occurrence of this species in the region referred to were apparently due to errors in the determination of species and that in reality it is one of the rarest of plants in the Coastal Plain region. The evidence also seems to lead to the logical conclusion that the few stations reported within the region are extensions of the Piedmont region. — James P. Poole. 970. Long, C. A. E. Some noteworthy Matinicus plants. Rhodora 22: 110-111. 1920.— A list of some of the more interesting plants found growing on the island of Matinicus by the author. — James P. Poole. 971. Morner, Carl Th. Botaniska anteckningar fran Norrlands-farder 1916-1919. [Notes from journeys in Norrland (northern Sweden) 1916-1919.] Bot. Notiser 1920: 33-40. 1920. — The author gives the localities for 37 species, together with geographic and ecological notes concerning them.— P. A. Rydherg. 972. MousLEY, H. Further notes on the orchids of Hatley, Stanstead County, Quebec, 1919. Canadian Field-Nat. 34: 44-47. 1920.— The habit and habitat of 12 species of orchids are presented. In all, 30 species of orchids were found within an area of 4 square miles. — W. H. Emig. 973. Nelson, James C. Additions to the flora of western Oregon during 1919. Torreya 20: 37-45. 1920. — Indigenous species not mentioned in Piper & Beattie's Flora of the North- west Coast are found within the limits of that manual in 3 regions of western Oregon: (1) Along the Calapooia Range, (2) along the Cascades in the Mt. Jefferson region, and (3) along the lower course of the Columbia. In addition to these, the number of naturalized exotic species is constantly increasing. A list is given of 90 species collected in western Oregon during the season of 1919, none of which is mentioned in the Flora of the Northwest Coast; 54 of these are foreign. Of the indigenous species, 7 are from the Calapooias, 12 from Mt. Jefferson, and 5 from the lower Columbia. To the 1617 species of the Flora of the North- west Coast, 309 have now been added. Previous lists have appeared in Torreya IS: 21-35, 220-226.—/. C. Nelson. 974. Persson, John. Till Brobytraktens flora. [Additions to the flora of the Broby region, Sweden.] Bot, Notiser 1920: 101-102. 1920.— The author notes 23 additions of phanerogams and mosses since the second edition of Areschoug's Flora. The greatest rarity of the region. Orchis latifolia, has disappeared, and a few others may be hard to rediscover.— P. A. Rydherg. 975. Pool, Raymond J. Pin oak in Nebraska. Torreya 20: 50-52. 1920.— Qwercus palustris Du Roi was collected by Thomas D. Howe near Table Rock, Pawnee County, Ne- braska, in September, 1919, evidently native. This is the first recorded occurrence in the State. Eleven species of Quercus are now known to occur in Nebraska. — /. C. Nelson. No. 2, Junes, 1921] ECOLOGY, PLANT GEOGRAPHY 141 976. Roll, J. t)T)er Sphagnum riparium Ang. und iiber seine Verbreitung im hercynischen Florengebiet. [Concerning Sphagnum riparium and its distribution in the Hercynic Flora.] Hedwigia 61: 176-182. 1919. — The stations for Sphagnum ripariurn in the Hercynic flora are recorded, together with notes on ecological factors. Apparently there are many ecological variations. In dry localities the moss is only a few centimeters high; leaves and branches are very crowded. The stem leaves vary very little but the branch leaves assume various forms, depending on the location. — Ernst Artschwager. 977. S.\MUELSsoN, GuNNAR. Anteckuingar frdn Tornetrask-omradet. [Notes from the region of Tornetrask (a lake in Lappland, Sweden).] Bot. Notiser 1920: 51-61. 1920.— The author gives a general description of the arctic-alpine vegetation, gives lists of plants of 3 different formations, and a list of localities of nearly 150 species which had been found at altitudes not strictly belonging to their altitudinal ranges. — P. A . Rydberg. 978. Standley, Paul C. Stachys lanata in Ontario. Rhodora 22: 128. 1920.— The author reports the occurrence of this species near Owen Sound, Ontario. Although the literature has not been searched thoroughly he thinks that perhaps this plant, which is native of the Caucasus region, has not been reported previously from North America. — James P. Poole. 979. Stevens, O. A. The geographical distribution of North Dakota plants. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7:231-242. 1 fig. 1920.— The vascular plants of the North Dakota flora may be divided into 6 main groups: (1) Those which are essentially eastern in their distribution and reach only the eastern part of the state; (2) those which are eastern but extend to the western part of the state; (3) those which are essentially western and reach only the western part of the state; (4) those which are western but extend to the eastern part of the state; (5) cosmo- politan plants; and (6) introduced plants. Characteristic members of these groups are enumerated and discussed. — The state lies almost wholly within the Transition life zone. The few members of its flora which belong to the Canadian zone or to the Upper Austral zone are enumerated. The plants which are common to North Dakota and to New Mexico are studied as to their comparative distribution in the 2 states with reference to life zones. — Some sand dune species, some introduced ones, and certain others of particular interest are discussed. — E. W. Sinnott. 980. Thompson, H. Stuart. Habitats of Hypericum humifusum. Jour. Botany 57: 195-196, 225-226. 1919.— This plant was found in the turf of woodland paths over limestone in northern Somerset County. In most of the texts it is said to occifr in places which would indicate a gravelly, sandy, or heathy acid soil. A later observation has shown the plant chiefly confined in Cornwall and Devonshire to mossy crevices in stone walls and dry hedge banks by roadsides on granite and slate. It was found only twice on heaths or commons. One or two plants only occur in a place. The author believes that the distribution has been much influenced by man. Brief notes on the soil preference of Juncus tenuis and Erodium maritimum. are given. — K. M. Wiegand. , 981. Thomson, Geo. M. Naturalization of animals and plants. New Zealand Jour. Sci. and Tech. 1: 192. 1918. 982. VoGG, L. Aussterbende Pflanzen. [Plants becoming extinct.] Ber. Naturw. Verein Schwaben u. Neuburg 42: 184-186. 1919.— Attention is called to the threatened dis- appearance of certain species in the vicinity of Kutzenhausen, Bavaria, owing to the spread of cultivation. A few of the species listed grow on a railway embankment, a few others are found in a moist forest meadow, but the majority are inhabitants of boggy meadows. In addition to the plants on the eve of extinction the accompanying species are likewise enu- merated.— A. W. Evans. 142 FOEESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol, VIII, 983. Woodruffe-Peacock, E. A. H3rpericum humifusum. Jour. Botany 57: 225. 1919. ^Notes called forth by H. Stuart Thompson's article in this journal (see Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 980). The author makes use of 50 years of very carefully kept soil records for Lincoln- shire. He shows the percentage distribution of this Hypericum in the different soils. It is calciphobe, and typically a plant of the open woodland of the older decaying stages passing into calluna moorland. In general the observations bear out those of Thompson and Bent- ham. — K. M. Wiegand. 984. ZiNSMEisTER, J. B. Weltere BeitrSge zur Flora von Augsburg und Schwaben. [Fur- ther contributions to the flora of Augsburg and Swabia.] Ber. Naturw. Verein Schwaben u. Neuburg 42: 264-270. 1919. — The author lists 4 pteridohpytes and 122 spermatophytes from the region in question, giving one or more definite stations in each case. A hybrid origin is indicated in 18 instances. — A. W. Evans. APPLIED ECOLOGY 985. MuNNS, E. N. Some biological and economic aspects of chaparral. Jour. For- estry 17: 9-14. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 1147; 3, Entry 560. 986. TouMEY, J. W. The relation of gray birch to the regeneration of white pine. Jour. Forestry 17: 15-20. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 578. FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY Raphael Zon, Editor J. V. Hofmann, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 768, 864, 1129, 1176, 1206, 1351, 1365, 1368, 1374, 1382, 1390, 1392, 1395, 1397, 1402, 1406, 1408, 1414, 1423, 1435, 1468, 1492, 1540, 1549, 1560, 1565) 987. Anderson, J. Paper from Alaska. Sci. Amer. 124: 64, 75. 3 fig. 1921.— A popular article considering the supply of pulpwood in Alaska. It is stated that the National Forests of Alaska contain resources suflacient to produce 1,500,000 tons of paper annually in perpetuity. —Chas. H. Otis. 988. Anonymous. El algarroba. [The carob bean.] Informacion Agric. [Madrid] 10: 501-504. 6 fig. 1920. 989. Anonymous. Grundbesitz und Vermogensabgabe in Oesterreich. [Landed estates and property taxes in Austria.] Allg. Forst- u. Jagdzeitg. 38: 61-62. 1920. — A discussion of the tax law under consideration by the Ministry of Finance. Assessments on forest estates will be upon their vastly inflated present sale value, as they fall into the classification of "large estates." Medium and small estates have a lower valuation based on pre-war values. The result will be discouraging to Austrian forestry and threatens to cause the breaking up of many large forest estates and demoralization of the liunber trade. — F. S. Baker. 990. Anonymous. Mitteilungen iiber die Ergebnisse der Sachsischen Staatsforstverwal- tung im Jaahre 1918. [Administration report of state forests of Saxony for 1918.] Tharander Forst. Jahrb. 71:264-268. 1920. — Classified tables of areas, income, and expenditures are given. The total forest area of the state forests of Saxony at the end of 1918 was 180,989 hectares, of which 172,934 hectares is forest land and 8,055 hectares non-forest land. This is an increase of only 49 hectares over 1917. The income from the state forests was 31,393,339 marks — an increase of 5,057,450 marks over 1917. The increase in income was partly due to the rising price of wood. The price per festmeter of fuelwood increased from 21.72 marks in 1913 and 27.37 marks in 1916 to 44.37 marks in 1918. The total income of the depart- ment of forestry was 32,431,903 marks— an increase of 5,228,776 marks over 1917. This is an No. 2, June, 1921 ] FORESTRY 143 average income per hectare of 179.19 marks. The total expenditures, excepting the cost of the forest working plan station, was 11,367,764 marks— an increase of 3,697,011 marks over 1917. The expenditures averaged 62.81 marks per acre of forest land, that is, only 35.1 per cent of the total income. — Joseph S. Illick. 991. Anonymous. Die Nach2ucht des Vogelbeerbaumes und der Alpenerle. [Repro- duction of mountain ash and alpine alder.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71:372-376. 3 pi. 1920.— A r6sum6 of M. Decoppet's paper read at the meeting of foresters. The mountain ash (Sorbus aucuparia L.) and the alpine alder {Alnus viridis DC.) occur throughout the forests of Switzerland from the lowest elevation to timber line. The mountain ash is espe- cially adapted to the steep hillsides, due to its resistance to snow break. It sprouts prolifi- cally when the main stem is broken, and grows rapidly. Reseeding is rather slow, and experiments have shown that seed should be secured from localities with similar growing conditions. The same applies to the alders. — J. B. Hofmann. 992. Anonymous. Oesterreichs Holzmarktlage. [Austrian timber market conditions.] Allg. Forst- u. Jagdzeitg. 38 : 74-75. 1920.— The timber market is in a demoralized condition. Prices are unreasonably high but indications are that the peak is not reached. Prices for different grades of lumber and round wood for the first week of March, 1920 , are given.— F. S. Baker. 993. Anonymous. Schluss der "wilden" Holzschlagerungen im Wienerwalde. [End of the "wild" cutting in the Vienna forest.] Allg. Forst- u. Jagdzeitg. 38: 69. 1920.— On account of the fire wood famine in Vienna in the winter of 1919, unregulated cutting was allowed in the Vienna forest, in which a great part of the forest was ruthlessly destroyed.—/''. S. Baker. 994. Anonymous. The tragedy of our American forests. Sci. Amer. 123: 540. 1920, 995. Anonymous. Was ist Eichengerbholz? [What is oak tanning wood?] Allg. Forst- u. Jagdzeitg. 38: 63. 1920. — Oak for tanning extract is in high demand in Germany on ac- count of the impossibility of importing foreign sources of extract due to the abnormally high price. Wood is accepted as small as 12 cm. at the small end and f to U meters long. Both heart and sapwood must be generally sound. The wood is bought by weight and will bring 7.5 marks per centner delivered on board cars or ships. Farmers are urged to clear lands covered with small crooked oaks that have been hitherto unmerchantable. — F. S. Baker. 996. Anonymous. Die Vergrosserung der italienischen Staatsforste. [The expansion of Italy's state forests.] Allg. Forst- u. Jagdzeitg. 38:68. 1920.— A short news item. The extension of the Italian boundaries, according to the treaty of St. Germain, gives Italy im- portant forests between the Julian Alps and Carniola. The state forest of Tarvis contained 12,000 hectares of forest, 1000 of pasture, and 10,000 of stony land unfit for agriculture; 1800 cubic meters per hectare is the average annual production. — F. S. Baker. 997. Anonymous. Zu den geplanten Steuermasznahmen in Oesterreich. [Regarding the plans for tax assessment in Austria.] Allg. Forst- u. Jagdzeitg. 38: 73-74. 1920.— The increased taxes on land values threaten to cause the burdening of large forest holdings with intolerable mortgages or to force their sale to the state. The land tax is increased from 25 to 40 per cent of the official net income (including the tax remissions on account of damage to the property by the elements). There is furthermore a surtax on a sliding scale depending upon the value of the property as well as the enhancement of its value during the past year. Also, a "trade tax" of 1§ per cent is levied on all commercial transactions, but does not apply to wood cut by the owner for his own use. — F. S. Baker. 998. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Brown, N. C. Forest products, their manufacture and use. xix + 471 p. John Wiley & Sons, New York, Chapman & Hall, London, 1919.] Sci. Prog. [London] 15 : 320. 1920. 144 FORESTEY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 999. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Henry, A. Forests, woods, and trees in relation to hygiene. xii + 314- P-, 28 illus., 21 maps and plans. Constable & Co.: London, 1919.] Sci. Prog. 15: 145-146. 1920. 1000. Balsemao, E. de. Influencia das florestas na atmosfera. [Influence of the for- ests on the atmosphere.] Bui. Agric. Nova Goa [Portuguese East India] 1: 152-157. 1919. — Reprint of an article from Official Bull, of Portuguese India for 1883, and based on an article in Revue des Deux Mondes. — /. A. Stevenson. 1001. Barbour, W. R. Argentine and Paraguay forest conditions. Jour. Forestry 18: 823-830. 1920. — A brief description is given of the condition of the forest in Argentina and Paraguay with some of the uses of the principal woods. The most important forest industry of the region is the production of tannin from quebracho. Very little is being done for the extension or practice of forestry, planting being mostly confined to the landscape garden and windbreaks. — E. A . Munns. 1002. Berger, Hans. Die Carl Heyersche Formel. [Carl Heyer's forumla.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71 : 290-296. 1 pi. 1920.— The author points out the discrepancy in Heuer's formula when applied to other than normal and mature forests. The use of the average incre- ment based on yield at time of cutting distributes the increment over periods of growth that are not measurable on this basis. Comparisons with the Bade formula shows wide variat- ions in a stand of 50 hectares 50 years old. The conclusion is reached that it would be advisable to manage the forests with the application of less formula and more common sense — /. B. Hofmann. 1003. Berkhout, a. H. Das Messen der Baume hinsichtlich ihres Zuwachses. [Growth measurements of trees.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71 : 377-379. 1920. — A formula is worked out on the basis of relation of diameter to cubic contents. Ten trees are selected in each type. One group is in small, one in medium, and one in large trees. The average diameter and cubic contents are obtained by careful measurement, and the average tree is used for stand to be studied. If desirable, the trees measured may be remeasured at any time and the annual or periodic increment may be obtained. It is recommended that the tree be climbed and measured. — J. B. Hofmann. 1004. Berkhout, A. H. Het meten der boomen in verband met hun aanwas. [The meas- urement of trees in connection with their growth.] Mededeel. Landbouwhoogeschool Wagen- ingen 17: 109-225. Fig. 16. 1920. — It is desirable in measuring lumber for forest calcu- lations that the laws of probability be more generally used. A great number of examples are given.—/. C. Th. Uphof. 1005. Boas, I. H. Preservation of piling against marine borers. Australian Forest Jour. 3:315-316. 1920. — The advantages of protection by impregnation with preservatives over protection by external coatings are discussed. The experience of American experts is also summarized. — C. F. Korstian. 1006. BooDT. De bebossching van Drente. [The forestation of Drente.] Tijdschr. Nederland Heidemaatschappij 32 : 192-200. 1920. — The forestation of the province of Drente (Netherlands) is most difficult. On clay-loam soils (1) Pinus laricio var. austriaca, or (2) growing yellow lupines followed by Picea excelsa, are recommended. On the heather fields Pinus sylvestris with oak and Picea excelsa are advisable. The former will form the main growth whereas the latter and oak form the undergrowth. — J. C. Th. Uphof. 1007. Borgmann. [Rev. of: Endies, M. Lehrbuch der Waldrechnung und Forststatik. (Text-bookof forest valuation and statics.) Berlin, 1919.] Forst. Rundschau 21: 13. 1920. — A short general notice of the third edition noting a few additions and changes. — F. S. Baker. No. 2, June, 1921] FORESTRY 145 1008. BoRGMAXN. [Rev. of: Martin, H. Die forstliche Statik. [Forest statics.] 2nd ed. Berlin, 1918.] Forst. Rundschau 21:10-12. 1920.— A criticism of some of Martin's points of view is included. — F. S. Baker. 1009. Brewster, Donald R. A plan for the advancement of forestry in Wisconsin. Jour. Forestry 18: 792-802. 1920. — The area of cut-over land in Wisconsin amounts to about three million acres. Much of this land is now idle and unproductive. The ordinary organi- zation of the State Board of Forestry is not thought advisable and a conservation council is proposed consisting of small groups of men chosen from each congressional district. The financial support would be derived from contributions from interested parties or from assess- ments upon organizations. The principal lines of work of this council would be the preven- tion and control of fires, the expansion of state forests, the reform of tax laws, survey of timber resources, and the establishment of experiment stations to work out forest problems. — E. N . Munns. 1010. Brewster, Donald R. A plan for combined insurance and fire protection. Jour. Forestry 18: 803-805. 1920. — A plan is outlined to make forest protection and insurance auto- matic and self-supporting, and at the same time increase the area of timber lands under forest management. All forest lands would be assessed a small amount per acre to cover the cost of this protection and insurance, with exemption to wood lots and isolated areas. Brush lands would be considered of sufficient value to warrant protection and insurance until they were placed in a productive position. The advantages claimed are that the prop- erty owner would feel he was getting protection as well as insurance, and the distribution of risk, if combined with the tax reform, would make the production of timber a safer and more attractive investment for the private owner. — E. N . Munns. 1011. BuTTRiCK, P. L. American trees for forest planting in France. Jour. Forestry 18: 815-822. 1920. — A number of conifers and hardwoods are listed which have been proved of value in France for forest planting, together with a description of the sites and places where such trees would do best. — E. N . Munns. 1012. Chapman, R. W. Physical properties of some South Australian-grown pines. Trans, and Proc. Roy. Soc. South Australia 40: 405-427. 1919. 1013. Chidsey, C.E. Knots and boles on forest trees. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2: 209-210. 5 fig. 1920. — Discussion of causes of the curious and varied formations of grain in timber. — ■ Chas. H. Otis. 1014. Dacy, G. H. Forewamings about forest fires. Sci. Amer. 123:495, 508. 2 fig. 1920. — Describes a mechanical display by the U. S. A. Forest Service which illustrates pic- torially how forest fires originate. — Chas. H. Otis. 1015. Dahl, a. L. Winter fuel from our woodlands. Sci. Amer. 123 : 495, 508. 2 fig. 1920. 1016. Daley, John E. Production and characteristics of Mitscherlich sulphite pulp. Paper 26": 17, 30. 1920. 1017. Fryer, C. P, Light burning in California forests. Sci. Amer. 123: 543. 1920. 1018. Fuller, George D. Forest products. [Rev. of: Brown, N. C. Forest products. xix + 471 p., 120 fig. Wiley & Sons: New York, 1919.] Bot. Gaz. 68: 479-480. 1920. 1019. Fuller, George D. Economic woods. [Rev. of: Record, S. J. Identification of the economic woods of the United States. 157 p., 6 pi., 15 fig. Wiley & Sons: New York, 1919.] Bot. Gaz. 68:480. 1919. BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VIU, NO. 2 146 FORESTRY [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1020. Gerry, Eloise. American storax production: results of different methods of tap- ping red gum trees. Jour. Forestry 19: 15-24. 1921. — Commercial storax used in pharmacy is obtained from the Orient. During the war extracts were made from the red gum {Liquidambar styraciflua). Experiments were carried out in Louisiana to determine the proper methods. Heaviest yields were obtained from trees with parallel horizontal scarification as against the vertical scarring or girdling. Tapping early in spring gave the heaviest yields. Some sub- stance should be used to prevent the entrance of decay on the open wounds. — E. N . Munns. 1021. Gerry, Eloise. Microscopy of pulpwoods. Paper 26^: 19^0, 50. PI. 1-8, fig. 1-5. 1920. — A complete description of the woods and wood fibers used in the manufacture of pulp, and keys for identifying the same. — H. N . Lee. 1022. Hawley, Ralph C. Forestry at Nehasane Park. Jour. Forestry 18:681-692. 1920. — The cuttings in this park 20 years ago were the first made under the direction of a for- ester. A 2nd cut has been planned under the direction of a resident forester. In the 1st cutting the selection system was used, which has been shown to be inadvisable in this type of country. Markets now accept woods which formerly were discarded, and small sizes are as much in demand as the larger ones.— Two general types are recognized, the balsam swamp or softwood land, and the hardwood tj'pe. In these the percentage of dominants in the re- production does not differ materially from that in the older stand. Criticisms of the more recent cuttings answered by the author are: Lack of a sustained annual yield basis; 2nd cut too heavy; too rigid a diameter limit applied; cuttings show lack of immediate supervision by a forester; spruce is not increasing; cull hardwoods remain on the ground; and the large burn is not being made productive. It is shown that the work has thus far been a credit to the forestry profession, though the forester in charge has failed to secure the establish- ment of a thrifty forest of young growth unhampered by heavy-foliaged hardwoods. The administration and improvements made on the property are excellent. — E. N . Munns. 1023. Heinicke. Die Reinertragsiibersichten der Sachs. Staatsforsten fiir das Jahr 1918. [Net yield of state forests of Saxony for "l918,] Tharander Forst. Jahrb. 71:59-71. 1920. — A series of 11 tables giving a classified account of the receipts and expenditures during 1918 of the 110 state forests of Saxony; also a summary of receipts and expendi- tures by forest districts. The total receipts from the 110 state forests was 31,616,330 marks and the expenditures 7,530,860 marks, leaving a net yield of 24,085,470 marks. The total forest capital of the state forestfe of Saxony is placed at 448,151,700 marks. — Joseph S. Illick. 1024. Jentsch. Die Stellung des Waldes und der Waldwirtschaft im Volksstaate mit besonderer Beziehung auf Sachsen. [Where forestry stands in Germany.] Tharander Forst. Jahrb. 71: 1-29. 1920. — The war made heavy demands upon the forests of Germany which will continue during the reconstruction period. Methods of handling and controlling for- ests will change in consequence of the war and the subsequent revolution. Important eco- nomic questions and policies are discussed, among them the socialization of forests, an embargo on timber, effect of rising prices of wood on forest management, and stronger control over privately-owned forests. Expropriation of private forests is not regarded as feasible, but stronger state control over privately-owned forest land is recommended. The latter is desir- able especially in Saxony, where private forests are numerous, and only 173 out of a total of 67,030 private forest holdings exceed 250 acres in size. — Joseph S. Illick, 1025. Krauch, Hermann. Alinement volume tables. Jour. Forestry 18: 831-832. 1 fig. 1920. — The method of preparing alinement volume charts and the use of a volume table pre- pared in this manner is described. Alinement charts make possible a rapid transcription of volume data with less chance for error. — E. N . Munns. 1026. Kress, Otto, C. J. Humphrey, and C. Audrey Richards. Guarding against fungi in wood and wood pulp. Paper 26i°-'2: 13-15, 21-22, 23-25. 11 fig. 1920.— Characteris- tics and qualities of papers made from sound wood or wood pulp as compared with that from No. 2, June, 1921] FORESTRY 147 decayed material are discussed, as well as methods of infection, differences in appearance of effects of, and methods of controlling, molds and wood-destroying fungi. — H. N . Lee. 1027. Mahood, S. A., AND D.E. Cable. Decay of woodpulp. Paper ZS^'' : 11-12, 1920. A chemical investigation of sound and infected ground wood pulp. — H. N. Lee. 1028. Martin. Die Fortbildung des Sachsischen Forsteinrichtungsverfahrens. [Devel- opment of the Saxon method of forest organization.] Tharander Forst. Jahrb. 71 : 30-57, 72-89. 1920. — The final 4 chapters of a serial on forest organization in Saxony. The results and conclusions of 100 years of consistent and continuous development along the same line of organization are set forth. The determination of felling and management methods are dis- cussed under the following headings: Choice of species, stand establishment, stand form, stand development, stand improvement, and soil treatment. The theory and practice of forest rent is discussed. The need for revision and control of organization plans is emphasized, the importance of regulating the entire business of forest organization is set forth, and the desirability of an effective coordination of forest administration, silviculture, forest inves- tigation, and forest organization is stressed. — Joseph S. Illick. 1029. Martin. Das Verhalten von Kiefern-Buchen-Mischbestanden in okonomischer Hinsicht, mit besonderer Riicksicht auf die forstlichen Verhaltnisse Sachsens. [Mixed stands of Scotch pine and beech in Saxony.) Tharander Forst. Jahrb. 71:269-282. 1920. [To be continued.] — Data collected to date show that pure stands of Norway spruce surpassed mixed stands of beech and Scotch pine in volume and value production. There are other determining factors which should be considered. The author believes that there are numerous areas, aggregating a large acreage, between the good hard wood soil and the poor pine soil well adapted to the production of mixed stands of Scotch pine and beech.— Joseph S. Illick. 1030. Mount, H. A. In the modem sawmill. Sci. Amer. 123:548, 557. 4 fig. 1920.— Machines and methods by which the cutting up of logs is put on a basis of extreme economy. — Chas. H. Otis. 1031. MuNGER, T. T. Second remeasurement of permanent sample plots of Douglas fir on the west slope of the Cascades in Oregon. Jour. Forestry 18: 833-836. 1920.— On sample plots in Douglas fir it is found that there has been a loss of 41 trees per acre in 10 years, with an increase in diameter for the stand of from 13.7 to 16.3 inches, the basal area increasing from 200 to 224 square feet. The annual increment in cubic feet has fallen from 188 in the 1st 5 years to 80 in the 2nd, or from 1259 board feet in the 1st to 828 in the 2nd 5 years. The average cubic-foot volume of the trees in 1910 was 45; in 1915, 54; and in 1920, 66.— E. N. Munns. 1032. MuNNS, E. N. Chaparral cover, run-off, and erosion. Jour. Forestry 18: 808-814. 1920.— A severe fire in 1919 destroyed some 150,000 acres of brush cover in southern Cali- fornia. Erosion was very severe following this fire and destroyed much of the engineering work designed to prevent floods. On eroded areas a small stand of annuals and perennials came up from dormant seeds, which were present in much greater numbers on unburned lands. The soil of slightly eroded areas contained seeds of almost as many species and individuals as did the soil in non-burned and non-eroded areas. — E. N. Munns. 1033. MuNNs, E. N. High temperatures and eucalyptus. Jour. Forestry 19: 25-33. 1921. —High temperatures in southern California caused "burning" of trees, due largely to extreme droughty conditions. The amount of injury depended upon the abundance of water or the character of the soil. Trees on loamy soils suffered least. Eucalyptus rostrata and E. ter- reticornis of all the planted eucalypts withstood the droughty conditions hest.— E. N. Munns. 148 FORESTBY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1034. Pearson, G. A. Brush disposal in western yellow pine. Jour. Forestry 19: 36-38. 1921. — Studies have been made since 1908 on naethods of brush disposal. Sheep damage is prevented by piling the brush and logs together, though heavy brush hinders germination because of depth of litter. With no grazing in such places the grass grows very heavily and root competition is very keen. Where the brush is piled and burned seedlings do best, but because of the succulent vegetation sheep damage is very severe. When protected from grazing growth is exceedingly rapid. Protection from wind and sun is favorable, but detri- mental if at the expense of soil-moisture loss by competition with other plants. Under con- trolled grazing, piling and burning give best results but methods are insignificant when compared with grazing. — E. N . Munns. 1035. Pelleter, Waldemar. Wiederbesiedlung und Forstwirtschaft. [Colonization and forestry,] Oesterreich. Forst- u. Jagdzeitg. 38: 30-31. 1920. — Following the war there has been a strong movement in Austria back to the land, encouraged by colonization laws that tend to break up large estates. This movement is closely interrelated with forestry, since in many cases it will result in the clearing of forested lands for farms. Many such lands have been under cultivation in the past but have been abandoned after the fertility of the forest humus became exhausted. The lands have reverted to forest and have been bought up in large blocks and placed under forest management. This new movement will decrease the area of such forests and will break up their unity to such an extent that eco- nomical management and logging will be very difficult, if not impossible. The interests of forestry must be protected for the good of the state and in some places for the good of these colonization schemes themselves, as in certain valleys the existence of farms will depend upon the possibility of the owner finding an occupation to supplement his farming. A per- manent forest industry alone can furnish this supplementary occupation. — F. S. Baker. 1036. PiLLiCHODY, A. Ein Erlenkopfholzbestand. [Alder coppice.] Schweiz, Zeitschr. Forstw. 71:289-290. 1 pi. 1920. — Alder coppice is not as common as willow (Salix alba), especially in the Rhone River bottom. At Epende there are about 4 hectares with stumps 10 to 15 meters apart. The stumps are knotty, partly decayed, hollow, and up to .80 meter in diameter, 1.5-2 meters high, and 70-80 years old. This coppice is on a clay soil and is very productive. Each stump supports 6-8 promiment sprouts that provide fuel wood in 10-15 years. The yield averages 150 cubic meters with an annual increment of 10-12 cubic meters. — J. V. Hofmann. 1037. Record, S. J. From wood to cloth. Sci. Amer. 123: 591, 601-602. 4 fig. 1920. 1038. Riley, Smith. A national game policy. Jour. Forestry 18:767-774. 1920. — A plea is made for the adoption of a national game policy which would call for adequate game protection in order not only to provide hunting but to provide material for active observations of the haunts and activities of wild animals generally. — E. N . Munns. 1039. RuBNER, K. Die waldbaulichen Folgerungen des Urwaldes. [The conclusions which forest culture derives from the virgin forest.] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 201-213. 1920. — It is shown that the cultural forest is not to be considered as primarily unnatural, as is often thought, and that the composition of the virgin forest is not what it is commonly supposed to be. The virgin forests may be pure or extremely mixed; the char- acter is directly dependent upon the climatic and edaphic conditions, and the ability of the various species to adapt themselves. The virgin forest is not typically selection, but more nearly a shelterwood forest. Much is to be learned regarding the value of humus in repro- duction, and it is not to be considered that natural regeneration under the virgin forest de- velops the ideal conditions. It is admitted that clear-cutting, with all its faults, has helped considerably to perpetuate the forests and the more valuable species in Germany. — /. Roeser. 1040. S., W. Waldschutz. [Forest protection.] Oesterreich Forst- u. Jagdzeitg. 38: 53-54. 1920. — A reply to an article of same title by H. Sammereyer (see Bot. Absts. 4, No. 2, June, 1921] FORESTRY 149 Entry 463). A wave of forest destruction is at present sweeping over the entire world. This destruction threatens to make wildernesses of many regions as it has made a desert of the Sahara in the past, while it also tends to arrest the purification of the air, which is one of the functions of the forest. Present forest areas should not be reduced. In Austria the futility of clearing forest land for permanent agriculture is shown by the fact that many such lands have been cultivated in the past but have been allow^ed to revert to forest when the fertility of the forest humus was exhausted and the productivity fell too low for economical handling for agriculture. Grazing in forests is incompatible with silviculture and must be stopped. The first requisite in securing forest protection is a world-wide educational campaign through schools, clubs, the press, etc., to develop a deeper regard for the forests and secure a more general recognition of their economic indispensability in any progres- sive state. — F. S. Baker. 1041. Seibert, Florence B., and Jessie E. Minor. The differentiation of sulphite pulps. Paper 25^': 17-20. 7 fig. 1920. — A description of a method using a combination of malachite green and Congo red to show very accurately the presence or absence of lignocel- lulose. — H. N. Lee. 1042. Seiler, Hans. Die Holznot in Kamten. [The wood famine in Carinthia.] Allg. Forst- u. Jagdzeitg. 38:67-68. 1920. — The lack of firewood in the cities was particularly marked in Carinthia during the winter of 1919. This was due to many causes, the chief ones being general insufficiency of supplies of all kinds, the rising stumpage prices which have en- couraged small owners to hold their timber, and the depletion of the war when great quan- tities of the most accessible fire-wood were cut to supply the army. Organization of wood producers and dealers, the construction of roads, tramways, etc., and purchase of forest land by municipalities, associations, and the like, is urged as the best means of escaping repetitions of such a famine. — F. S. Baker. 1043. Tubetjf, C. von. Verschiedenes Verhalten gegen Windstromung. [Different responses to air currents.] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 186-187. 1920. — Tubeuf refers to an illustrated paper under this title in Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71: 177-179. 1920 (see Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 813) by A. Pillichody. The photograph in the latter's paper shows a row of broad crowned Canadian poplars, which have grown up sloping in the direction of the valley wind, and a row of Italian pyramid poplars (evidently Lombardy poplars) which have grown straight, to all appearances unaffected by the wind-movement. The local custom of trimming, which leaves but a small broomlike crown on the latter, and a wide-spreading crown tip on the former, accentuates the different effects produced by the wind-movement. The two trees are briefly compared as to their cultural desirability. — J. Roeser. 1044. ViDAL, Y. L. Micrography of sycamore pulp. Paper 27': 18-19. 1920. [Transla- tion from La Papeterie 62: 434-439. Fig. 1. 1920.]— The yield of pulp and possibilities for paper making are discussed. The dimensions of the elements and the histology of the vessels are given in detail. — H. N. Lee. 1045. Watson, Russell. Forest descriptions on the forest survey of the Groton State Forest, Vermont. Jour. Forestry 19: 43-50. 1921.— On the Groton Forest greater detail was needed than was obtained by using the standard forest description forms. A detailed question- naire was built up to give data on the stand and the characteristics of the area, noting the sil- vical conditions as to planting, thinning, and final cutting. — E. N. Munns. 1046. Weidman, Robert H. The windfall problem in the Klamath region, Oregon. Jour. Forestry 18:837-843. 1920.— Heavy windfall losses occur annually throughout the north Pacific Coast. It has been found that the windfall losses, on cut-over land especially, are heaviest during the first years following cutting; as the trees become wind-firm the losses gradually decrease. In the virgin forest the loss from year to year is more or less constant except for exceptional heavy winds occasioning very heavy losses at infrequent intervals. Apparently neither quality of tree nor of site enables the trees to withstand these storms; and trees of all crown characters appear to suffer equally. — E. N , Munns. 150 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1047. WHi>rE, David G. Standardization of lumber sizes and grades. Jour. Forestry 19: 34-35. 1921. — The American Lumber Congress is supporting a proposed change in the manufacture of lumber. At the present time there is no standardization of grades in woods or in building materials. It is proposed to reduce the number of grades of finish materials and to unify the nomenclature of defects in structural woods. — E. N . Munns. 1048. WiCKENDEN, H. R. A sketch on Swedish forestry from an American standpoint. Jour. Forestry 18: 775-791. 1920. — A general description is given of the organization of the Swedish forest service with some of its regulations and forest practices. The general sub- ject of forestry in Sweden is very similar to that in America, though the former country has proceeded much farther toward forest management. Rotation varies from 80 to 150 years, depending upon climatic conditions, with clear cutting usually employed, except upon special areas where protection is needed. In these situations a selection system is used. Thinnings are made frequently but up to the present have been very slight, the tendency being toward heavier thinnings, especially in the crown. Logging is done chiefly during times of snow and the hauling is done by sleighs. The average saw log is between 14 and 19 feet long and from 7 to 9 inches in diameter. The logs are taken from the mill and driven down streams, which have been very greatly improved. Forest planting is carried on extensively through sowing in seed spots. Local seed has been proved superior to foreign seed. The tendency generally is for a shorter rotation and for volume production rather than quality. A constant increase . in the price of limiber is expected at the rate of 2 per cent a year, — E. N. Munns. 1049. WisLiCENUS, H. VON. Das pflanzenchemische Institut der Sachsischen Forstaka- demie und forstlichen Versuchsanstalt zu Tharandt und die Pflege der Pflanzenchemie im allgemeinen, der stofflichen Holzforschung im besonderen. [Plant chemistry institute and forest experiment station at Tharandt, Saxony.] Tharander Forst. Jahrb. 71 : 90-106. 1920. — An academic discussion of the place of plant chemistry in a forest school curriculum and a consideration of the distinct fields covered by industrial research institutes and laboratories connected with educational institutions. The urgent need for a fuller and better knowledge of the chemistry of forest products was brought to full light during the war. Forest products laboratories are a real and urgent need. Timber impregnation, seasoning of wood, and tur- pentine yield are among the problems considered. — Joseph S. Illick. 1050. WooDBRiDGE, R. G,, Jr, Nitrocellulose from wood pulp. Paper 26^ : 136-146, 1920. 1051. WooLSEY, Theodore S., Jr. The development of a brush-disposal policy for the yellow pine forests of the southwest. Jour, Forestry 19: 39^2, 1921.— Notes are made on the brush-disposal policy in the southwest to the effect that brush burning is better than fire lines, which are generally impracticable as desired in the district. Where possible these lines should be located on ridges rather than in the canyons or on the slopes. — E. N. Munns. GENETICS G. H. Shxjll, Editor J. P. Kelly, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 769, 789, 796, 808, 809, 815, 819, 896, 1137, 1141, 1145, 1161, 1209, 1212, 1322, 1388, 1574) 1052. Adkinson, June. The behavior of bronchial asthma as an inherited character. Genetics 5:363-418, S9 fig. 1920. — In a study of 400 cases of bronchial asthma, author found that 48 per cent gave a history of the occurrence of the disease in other members of the family. Asthmatics found sensitive to the cutaneous tests, more frequently give a family history positive for asthma than do the patients found non-sensitive to the cutaneous tests, but such histories do not furnish conclusions as to the cause, severity, prognosis or treatment in any given case. The tendency to haj^-fever, asthma or allied condition is transmitted, No. 2, June, 1921] GENETICS 151 not the condition itself. — Thirty-eight family histories are analyzed with a more or less complete record of 91 matings in which parents or offspring were asthmatic or had hay- fever. In 4 matings where both parents were asthmatic, there were 9 asthmatic offspring, and 1 normal who transmitted asthma. In 34 cases, with one parent asthmatic and the other normal, but with positive family history, there were 60 asthmatic offspring, and 67 normal. In 17 matings, with one parent asthmatic and the other normal, with negative family his- tory, there were 60 normal offspring. Where both parents were normal in 32 cases, with positive family histories, theoretically \ would be asthmatic, and f normal, but in this serieis there were 3 times as many asthmatics as normal, there being 45 asthmatics and 15 normal. — Upon this data the writer concludes that bronchial asthma is inherited as a Men- delian trait recessive to the normal condition. In those asthmatics with one parent asthmatic and the other apparently normal, it is necessary to assume that the latter is simplex. The appearance of asthma in direct line in succeeding generations can be explained only on the supposition that for each generation, in the mating of the asthmatic and the new strain, the latter, though apparently normal, must in every instance carry asthma in the simplex con- dition in the germ-plasm (heterozygous). Those asthmatics with negative history are explained as duplex in respect to the character, the tendency being transmitted through several generations by antecedents who were themselves simplex. — Robert A. Cooke, 1053. Alverdes, Friedrich. Uber das Manifestwerden der ererbten Aniage einer Abnormitat. [On the manifestation of a hereditary primordium of an abnormality.] Biol. Zentralbl. 40: 473^80. 1920. — Abnormalities in structure of rudimentary 5th and 6th pairs of legs occurred (mostly in male individuals) in 1 pure line of Cyclops viridis but not in the control line, or, with one exception, in wild stock. Inheritance of abnormality is quite irregular. Sometimes normal parents produce abnormals, and abnormal parents frequently produce very few abnormals. Percentage of abnormals is always fairly low. Abnormality is very variable in its character; it is frequently marked on one side of an individual while other side is entirely normal. Author attributes results to inheritance of a more than normal lability of the primordium of the 5th and 6th pairs of legs. — A. M. Banta. 1054. Ancel, p. Sur I'hermaphrodisme glandulaire. [On glandular hermaphroditism.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 83: 1642-1644. 1920. — Six pigs studied were hermaphrodite in that both glands were mixed, or one was true ovary, other was mixed or a testis. In mixed glands, the upper part was testicular, the lower ovarian. Wolffian duct persisted only on side where there was a testis or mixed gland. Uterus was well developed in all of them, but Fallopian tube was well developed only on side next to true ovary. Observations are held to support view that genital glands are normally hermaphrodite, with only one part developed. Author believes persistence of Wolffian duct, often observed in female, is due to presence of hermaphrodite gland or testis. — A. Franklin Shull. 1055. Anonymous. Berichtigung. [A correction.] Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm. u. Vererb. 20:295. 1919. — In Nachstein, N. Die Analyse der Ergfactoren bei Drosophila und deren zytologischen Grundlage. Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm.- u. Vererb. 20: 118-156. 1919, the labeling of figure 2, page 133, should be interchanged as follows: In the Fi generation the word "rotaugig" should read "weissaugig" and in the F2 generation the word "rotaugig" at the right should read "weissaugig." — /. L. Collins. 1056. Anonymous. Better dairying by bull associations. Joint use of good sires improves • herds. Jour. Heredity 10: 135. Mar., 1919. — A quotation from a News Letter of the U. S. Department of Agriculture. The advantage of cooperative bull associations are discussed briefly. — Sewall Wright. 1057. Anonymous. Variation, selection and mutation in one of the protozoa. Jour. He- redity 10: 143. Mar., 1919. — Review of work of Middleton and Jennings and of R. W. Hegner, which indicates that heritably diverse strains may be selected out from a single vegetatively reproduced organism, — in this case Arcella dentata. — /. H. Beaumont. 152 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1058. Anthony, R. D. Asexual inheritance in the violet (Viola odorata). New York Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] Tech. Bull. 76. 55 p., charts 1-10. 1920.— K study was made of the possibility of changing, through a series of selections, stem length and yield of the double violet, Marie Louise {Viola odorata), in order to throw light on the problem of bud selection in pome fruits. Eight hundred plants of this variety, the previous histories of which were unknown, were used as parent plants. Selections were made from these for long stem high yield, long stem low yield, short stem high yield, and short stem low yield, each year. Methods of selecting, corrections for vigor, and corrections for variations due to positions in the house are considered in detail. At the end of 5 years 4 groups had been isolated. Yield for each group was as follows: Long stem high yield, 36.484 =t 0.505; long stem low yield, 34.637 ± 0.572; short stem high yield, 40.359 ± 0.569; short stem low yield, 35.389 ± 0.515. Yield is expressed in number of normal flowers. Stem length in each group is as follows: Long stem high yield, 8.920 ± 0.029; short stem high yield, 8.537 ^ 0.040; long stem low yield, 8.483 ± 0.043; short stem low yield, 8.537 ± 0.043. The unit of length was the half inch. All of the plants in each of the 4 groups traced back to a single one of 4 of the original SOO plants. "It follows then that we seemingly have proved only the existence of asexually inherited differences which probably were present before the experiment was begun." — W.D. Valleau. 1059. Barker, E. Eugene. El mejoramiento de nuestras siembras por la seleccion. [The improvement of our crops by means of selection.] Estacion Exp. Insular Puerto Rico Circ. 30. 24 p. 1920. — Popular account. No new methods presented. — E. E. Barker. 1060. Bonnet, L. 0. Some observations concerning pollination of olives. Fig and Olive Jour. 4'^: 4. 1920. — Author discusses a one-season study made 20 years ago at Pomona, which indicated that some olive varieties are fully self-fertile and others more or less self-sterile, ' — Howard B. Frost. 1061. Boulenger, M. F. L'heredite morbide. [Inheritance of disease.] Scalpel 73: 669-676. 1920. 1062. Botjman, K. Herman. Anthropologische Feststellungen iiber die Amsterdamer Schulbevolkerung. [Anthropological discoveries on the school population of Amsterdam.] Nederlandsch. Tidschr, Geneesk. 64: 2374-2383. 1920. 1063. Bridges, Calvin B. The developmental stages at which mutations occur in the germ tract. Proc. Soc. Exp, Biol. Med. 17 : 1-2. 1919. — Study of critical cases among mutants and mosaics of Drosophila melanog aster has shown that mutation occurred (1) at or near maturation stages in most cases, (2) some time prior to maturation in few cases, (3) during early segmentation stage in few cases, and (4) in zygote immediately after fertilization in some cases (mosaics). — C. W. Metz. 1064. BuRCH, D, S, Harnessing heredity to improve the Nation's live stock. U. S. Dept. Agric. Year Book 1919: 347-354. 3 fig. 1919. — The advantages to be expected from the use of pure-bred sires in livestock breedings are discussed in connection with the campaign sponsored jointly by the U. S. Department of Agriculture and a majority of the States for "Better Sires— Better Stock."— Sewall Wright. 1065. CoMBY, J. La tache bleue mongolique chez les enfants europeens. [The blue Mongolian spot on European children.] Arch. Med. Enfants 23: 321-337. 1920. 1066. Correns, C. Die geschlechtliche Tendenz der Keimzellen gemischtgeschlechtiger Pflanzen. [Sex tendency of germ-cells in plants of mixed sex.] Zeitschr. Bot. 12 : 49-60. 2 fig. 1920. — Protonema were obtained by the regeneration from cells of the wall and the stalk of antheridia and archegonia in the monoecious moss Funaria hygromeirica which again produced normal male and female branches. Since such cells are near sister cells of sperms and eggs it is considered that sperms and eggs also possess maleness and femaleness as equal No. 2, June, 1921] GENETICS , 153 potencies. Evidence is summarized that sex differentiation in monoecious and hermaph- rodite flowering plants is likewise independent of special genetic determiners of sex, that here maleness and femaleness resides equally in the most differentiated of sex organs, and that sex differentiation is here purely a phenotypic development. — A. B. Stout. 1067. CoRRENS, C. Individuen und Individualstoffe. [Individuals and individual sub- stances.] Ber. Senckenberg. Naturf. Ges. Frankfurt a. M. 47: 65-66. 1919. 1068. CoRRENS, C. Vererbungsversuche mit buntblattrigen Sippen. III. Veronica gen- tianoides albocincta. IV. Die albomannorata- und albopulverea-Sippen. V. Mercurialis annua versicolor und xantha. [Genetical studies with variegated races. III. Veronica gentianoides albocincta. IV. The albomannorata and albopulverea races. V. Mercurialis annua versicolor and xantha.] Sitzungsber. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 6, 7: 212-240. 1920.— III. Veronica gentianoides albocincta. This race of Veronica appears to be a case of a real white-margined type of variegation. It is self-sterile. When crossed with normal green plants {tijpica) nothing but green plants appeared in Fi and F2, indicating no inheritance of this variegated character. IV. Albomarmorata and albopulverea races. Both show a white-green spotting or mosaic that is inherited similarly. The spotting of albopulverea is much finer than that of albomarmorata. 1. Ipomoea imperialis chlorina and albomarmorata. The following types were isolated from commercial seed and their genetic constitution determined: a. Normal green {typica homogenea), CCN N HH. h. Pale green {chlorina homogenea), CCnnHH. c. White-spotted green {typica albomarmorata), CCNNhh. d. White-spotted pale green {chlorina albomarmorata), CCnnhh. Factor C produces the chlorina pigment; factor iV changes chlorina to normal green; and factor H produces solid leaf color as contrasted with the spotted condition. The latter factor is inherited independently of C and IS! . 2. Tro- paeolum majus chlorinum and albopulvereum. These 2 races of Tropaeolum are similar to those of Ipomoea noted above. The chlorinum type is given the genetic formula CCnnHH and the albopulvereum type, either CCNNhh {typica) or CCnnhh {chlorina). V. Mer- curialis annua versicolor and xantha. The versicolor race produces seedlings that begin with yellow leaves which later become green permitting the plant to survive. This character is found to be a simple Mendelian recessive to normal green. In the xantha race the seed- lings are yellow and remain so, the plant eventually dying. Duplicate factors are con- cerned in the inheritance, giving both 15:1 and 3:1 ratios of green to yellow seedlings. — E. W. Lindstrom. 1069. CosTANTiN, J. Physiologic de Tanthocyane et chimie de la chlorophylle. [Physi- ology of anthocyan and chemistry of chlorophyll.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X, 1: xxxviii-lii. 1919. — See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 411. 1070. CowGiLL, H. B. Cross-pollination of sugar cane. Sugar 21:580-581. 1919. — Methods used in cross-pollination of sugar cane. — C. W. Edgerton. 1071. Davenport, C. B. Influence of the male on the production of twins. Med. Rec. 1920: 1-10. 1920.— "About 1 per cent of all human births are plural births." Some mothers have more than one pair of twins and may be called "repeaters." Such women may be con- sidered to have a constitutional "ovarial structure that readily permits double ovulation," and such structure is conceivably inheritable. Among the "close relatives of repeating mothers" it is found that "the ratio of twin production rises to 4.5 per cent." But also among the close relatives of fathers of twins it is found that the incidence of twins is as high as 4.2 per cent, hence "the paternal inheritance is real and nearly as potent as the maternal. The problem is to account for this paternal influence. Double ovulation is not universal in women but "is far commoner, proportionately, than twin births." A study of pregnant swine shows that the number of corpora lutea exceeds the number of embryos and the latter exceed the number of births. Fetuses die at all stages from no apparent cause but inherent weakness. These facts are apparent in human pregnancies. — Geneticists now recognize "lethal factors," transmitted according to the laws of heredity, "which brought in by one or 154 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, both parental germ-cells, inevitably prevent full development." Besides it must be recog- nized that there is probably a frequent failure of fertilization of the egg, even when condi- tions would seem to be propitious. From these considerations it is clear that the father as well as the mother may "determine whether both of a pair of simultaneously ovulated eggs shall be fertilized, and whether or not they shall receive lethal factors." There follow comments on uniovular twins and a plea for more complete and accurate observational data by obstetricians. — Howard J. Banker. 1072. Deane, W., and M. L. Fernald. A new albino raspberry. Rhodora 22: 112. 1920. — A new amber-white or honey-colored raspberry was found by Mr. Robert A. Ware on Caribou Mountains, Maine, in 1919. This is a variant of Rubus idaeus var. canadensis, and should be called Riibus idaeus L. var. canadensis Richardson, forma Warei. The New England "white"-fruited raspberry already known is a form of Rubus idaeus var. strigosus. [See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1432.] — Francena R. Meyer. 1073. Dickson, M. E. Elements of higher fecundity. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21: 145-146. 1919. — Fecundity in fowls is limited chiefly by vitality of individual. Breeding for egg production does not increase vitality. It may even cause decrease of vigor, thereby defeating its purpose. In such cases out-crossing is used to restore vigor and hence to increase production. In selecting for vigor, criteria are size of fowl, early maturity, and rapidity of feathering and moulting. Variety of fowl is of little importance except that meat-producing breeds are to be avoided, evidence of this conclusion coming from egg- laying contests in several states. Environment and geaeral managiemient are more important than breed, since many brjeeds aire about equally productive. — A. Franklin Shull. 1074. Donoaster, L. Note on an experiment dealing with mutation in bacteria. Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc. 19: 269. 1919. — It was noticed that the recorded ratio of occurrences in cases of meningitis of the 4 agglutination-types of Meningococcus correspond very closely with the ratio of occurrence of the 4 iso-agglutinin groups of blood in a normal human popu- lation.— It seemed possible, therefore, that by growing Meningococcus of one type in media containing human blood of different groups, mutation to other types might be induced. Experiment showed that considerable differences in type of agglutination resulted, but it was concluded that this was caused by sorting out of races of different agglutinability from a mass culture rather than by true mutation. — L. Doncaster. 1075. Fehlinger, H. Rassenmassige Variation der Korpergrosse beim Menschen. [Racial variations of body size in man.] Aus der Natur 16 : 212-215. 1920. 1076. Fruwirth, C. BeitrSge zu den Grundlagen der Ziichtung einiger landwirtschaft- licher Kulturpflanzen. V. GrSser. [Contributions to the fundamental principles of cultiva- tion of several agricultural plants. V. Grasses.] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 169-178. 1920. — The present paper supplements a previous article of the author appearing in Vol. 14, 1916, of this publication. He describes further experiments in cross and self- fertilization, and concludes, in general, that among the grasses sterility predominates in self-fertilization and that it is possible to find entire vegetative issues which produce no fruit; then again, that individuality is present, and that individuals and often entire vege- tative offspring can be singled out, which produce an appreciable, often plentiful, crop of fruit, as a result of self-fertilization. In the cultural practice, the production of seed by self-fertilization will be more or less difficult, for the probability of securing fruit is not strong, and much of the fruit will be sterile. — J. Roeser. 1077. Garber, R. J. A preliminary note on the inheritance of rust resistance in oats. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 13:41-44. 1921. — Author finds evidence of a single hereditary factor-difference with respect to the rust reaction of the host plants used as parents. Resist- ance apparently behaves as a dominant character in the crosses made. — F. M. Schertz. No. 2, June, 1921] GENETICS 155 1078. Gasser, G. W. Report of the work at Rampart Station. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917: 34-57. PL 3, 4- 1919. — Results are given of field tests of varieties, crosses, and pure-line strains of farm and horticultural crops. — [See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 26.] — Fred Griff ee. 1079. Gleason, H. a. [Rev. of: Gager, C. Stuart. Heredity and evolution in plants. 14 X 20 cm., XX + 265 p., 113 fig. P. Blakiston's Sons & Co.: Philadelphia, 1920 (see Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1672).] Torreya 21: 14-16. Jan.-Feb., 1921. 1080. GoLDSCHMiDT, RiCHARD. Untefsuchungen zur Entwicklungsphysiologie des Fliigcl- musters der Schmetterlinge. I. Mitteilung. Einige Vorstudien. [Investigations of the physi- ology of the development of the color pattern of the wings in butterflies. I. Some preliminary studies.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. 47: 1-24. 12 fig. 1920. — This investigation is inci- dental to author's main work concerning heredity in Lepidoptera. Species used are: Samia cecropia, Telea polyphemus, Hyperchirio to, Callosamia promethea, and Anisota stigma. In- vestigations were conducted in the Osborn Zoological Laboratory, Yale University, in 1914-18. — The author points out that blood sinuses develop about tracheae and precede formation of veins. These are centers of chemical processes making for color. Pattern is independent of origin of color and complete before color sets in. Main plan of pattern is due to differential growth of wing surfaces following quickly after development of veins and scales, visible first as irregularities of wing surface, indentations, folds, pits, corners, etc., into which later color is, as it were, poured in. Characteristics of folds, depressions, etc., are due to rigidity of veins, pressure of body upon growing wing, folds in wing membrane in pupal case, etc. — Author suggests various collateral subjects for investigation. — Isabel McCracken. 1081. GoLDSCHMiDT, RiCHARD. Intcrsexualitat und Gesschlechtsbestlmmung. [Inter- sexuality and sex-determination.] Biol. Centralbl. 39:498-512. 1919. — Chief results of an investigation regarding intersexuality and sex-determination are set forth pending publica- tion of a complete account of the work. The results are founded upon breeding 75,000 indi- viduals of the gypsy moth, Lymantria dispar L., involving several varieties. [See next fol- lowing entry.] — Isabel McCracken. 1082. GOLDSCHMIDT, RiCHARD. Untcrsuchungen iiber Intcrsexualitat. [Investigations on intersexuality.] Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm. u. Vererb. 23: 1-199. 2 pi., 84 fig. 1920. — Results are given from rearing about 75,000 individuals of different races of gypsy moth, which are named according to locality: 5 from Germany, 1 from South Europe, 10 from Japan, 1 from Massachusetts. Normal sexes differ in wings (form and color), antennae, abdomen (shape, size, hairiness), gonads, external genitalia, and instincts (flying, mating). Egg plasma or Y chromosome bears a factor, F, for female characters which is inherited unchanged in maternal line and is balanced against factor M for male characters, which is carried by X chromosome. In pure stock of different races FMm is normal female and FMM is normal male, for F is stronger than 1 dose of M and weaker than 2 doses in determining type of de- velopment. F and M differ in strength in different races as shown by crosses. In develop- ment of a "genetic" male, MM from weak race may be weaker than F from strong race. The latter will predominate after a certain "turning point" in development of a particular struc- ture, which from that point on develops as in male. Similarly a "genetic" female, F (weak) M (strong) m, may have "turning point" after which she develops as male. The greater the difference in "strength" of parental races, the earlier this "turning point," and the higher the grade of intersexuality. Last organs to develop in the embryology are the first to be affected. Organs which have a homologue in the other sex develop up to "turning point" as in "genetic" sex and then may dedifferentiate and continue as in the opposite sex. Strong chitinization hinders dedifferentiation. Other organs develop abnormally after "turning point." Instincts become intersexual. Color is determined very late in pupal stage and hence, in "chief type" of female intersexuality, except in those of very low grade, intersexes resemble males. "Gifu type" of female intersexuality and male intersexuality are alike in being streaked with color of opposite sex in greater or less amount according to grade. 156 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, Arrangement of streaks apparently depends upon chance, but amount depends upon time remaining after turning point for protein-splitting, color-forming enzymes to act. In streaked type of intersexuality color spreads out from veins, but in "chief type" of female intersexuality from zigzag lines. This difference is not explained. Other differences of color depend upon character of races entering into cross. Mutation lunata, which causes zigzag lines to drop out, can be bred pure, and combined with various types of intersexuality. Hormone secretions for sex and secondary sexual characters are probably the same, are pro- duced in each cell, and not in gonads as in vertebrates. Cytology throws no light upon con- ditions as X and Y are indistinguishable and no difference appears between races. Attempt is made to correlate strength of races with character of environment. Female intersexuality is produced when females of weak races are crossed with males of strong races, giving F (weak M (strong) m. There is but 1 grade of intersexuality from a particular type of cross except for slight overlapping in plus and minus directions. Grades, depending upon races used, are grouped as follows: (a) Beginning: These show some females grading to normal. All are fer- tile and hence valuable for genetic work, (b) Weak: These are of "Gifu type," always sterile, (c) Medium: Among others are "Aomori type," with large abdomen filled with unused nour- ishment; embryonal ovaries; hairiness and form of male, (d) Strong: Some are of "chief type," some of "Gifu" according to parentage, (e) Highest grade: These are sterile but grade into (f). (f) Complete "sex-turnabout:" These are apparently normal males, except that a few grade into (e) and there are 9 perfectly normal females to 2187 males. These "extra females" are explained by non-disjunction of sex-chromosomes. Many F2 and back- cross results are given to corroborate theory of female intersexuality. Intersexual males are usually produced when strong female is crossed with weak male. Fukuoka females by Hok- kaido males produce normal females and males varying from apparently normal up to strongly intersexual. Only minus individuals are fertile. (Fukuoka F, Hokkaido M, rn) is normal female. (Fukuoka F, Fukuoka M, Hokkaido M) is intersexual male. In later gen- erations it is found that (Fukuoka F, Hokkaido M, Hokkaido M) is female, complete "sex- turnabout." A very few incomplete observations show that after crossing of 2 weak races there may appear male intersexuality. Occurrence of a few "extra males" in crosses where all males should be turned into females is explained by non-disjunction as in case of "extra females."— P. W. Whiting. 1083. GowEN, J. W. Report of progress on animal husbandry investigations in 1919. Maine Agric. Exp. Sta.Bull. 283. 249-284-. 7 fig. 1919. — Logarithmic equations have been deter- mined for yearly yield in milk of the 3 dairy breeds, Holstein-Friesians, Guernseys, and Jerseys. All 3 breeds reach their maximum milk yield when from 8 to 10 years of age. — Sons of various sires have been examined with respect to the sons' ability to transmit high or low milking qualities to their daughters. — A high correlation was found to exist between the milk yield for any 1 lactation period and the average for the first 5. A high correlation also exists be- tween milk production during a 7-day period and the yield during the whole lactation period which either includes the 7 day period or is the one following. On the other hand very little correlation exists between conformation as judged by the score card and milk production. — H. L. Ibsen. 1084. Grier, N. M. Notes on variation in chicory. Amer. Midland Nat. 6: 148-149. 1919. — Brief note on variation in the number of flowers and involucral bracts of plants of Cichorium Intybus growing wild in the Shenandoah Valley, with suggestion that this plant may well be utilized in the laboratory study of variation for classes in biology. — A. B. Stout. 1085. GuNDERSEN, ALFRED. [Rev. of : Small, James. The origin and development of the Compositae, 344 -p., 40 fig. NewPhytologistReprintNo.il. London, 1919.] Torreya 20: 125-126. 1 fig. Nov.-Dec, 1920. 1086. Hanly, J. Mendelism and the laws of heredity. Jour. Dept. Agric. Ireland 20: 460-467. 2 fig. 1920. — Popular account and some modern applications. — D. Folsom. No. 2, June, 1921] GENETICS 157 1087. Harris, J. Arthur, axd C. S. Scofield. Permanence of differences in the plots of an experimental field. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 335-356. 1920. — The fact is generally recog- nized that heterogeneity is a source of error in experimental field tests. The purpose of the writers is to show whether the differences among experimental plots are permanent or whether they are transitory and are smoothed out by cultivation. Interannual correlations are used as a means of measuring the relative permanency of the differences. — Published data are reviewed for yields of paddy on 17 plots of ranges "B" and "C" of the wet tract of the Experimental Farm at Hebbel, Mysore. The correlation between yields of the same plots for 1905 and 1906 is for range "B" + 0.834± 0.050 and for range "C" + 0.799 ±0.059. Correla- tions for yields of ragi on 105 plots of the dry-land experiments of the Mysore state for the years 1905 and 1906, 1905 and 1907, and 1906 and 1907, are + 0.758 =»= 0.028, + 0.852 ± 0.018, and + 0.610 ± O-Oil, respectively. Correlations are calculated for yields of corn on the same plots in the years 1895, 1896, and 1897, at the Illinois Experiment Station. Yields of corn in the unfavorable year 1895 correlated with yields of the same plots for the favorable years 1896 and 1897 are — 0.354 ± 0.054 and - 0.221 ± 0.059, respectively. Yields for the two favorable years 1896 and 1897 show a correlation of + 0.818 ± 0.020. — Data were taken from the records of the Field Station of the Office of Western Irrigation Agriculture at Huntley, Montana. Yields were used from 46 plots in a uniform cropping experiment covering the period 1909 to 1919 inclusive. The crops involved in the rotation were sugar beets, alfalfa, corn for grain, oats, corn for silage, and barley. In some cases the plots were subdivided into half and quarter plots. Correlations are calculated between yields of the same plots for different years. Of the 152 correlations calculated for whole plots, 133 are positive and 19 are negative. The average value of the positive correlations is -1- 0.3346 as compared with — 0.1475 for the negative correlations. For the 152 constants the average value is + 0.2743. — The data from half and quarter plots substantiate the results for whole plots. The results show conclusively that in general plots which yield more in one year will yield more in other years. — Some evidence is given to show the effect of the yield of a particular crop in the rotation upon the yields of subsequent crops. Plots giving high yields of sugar beets in 1911 showed low yields of alfalfa in 1912. Alfalfa exerted a definite residual influence upon subsequent crops. The effect was not fully shown until the 2nd year after the alfalfa field was plowed, and decreased until little if any effect was shown in the 4th year. Due to the residual effect of alfalfa and its early introduction into the rotation it is impossible to determine to what extent the correlations between the yields of alfalfa and the yields of other crops are due to the variation from plot to plot of the amount of nitro- gen fixed by the alfalfa and to what extent due to the original heterogeneity of the experi- mental plots. — Fred Griffee. 1088. Hensen, V. Die Mutation und was sie iiber die Entstehung neuer Arten lehrt. [Mutation and what it teaches about the origin of new species.] Schrift. Naturw'iss. Ver. Schleswig-Holstein [Kiel] 17: 1-12. 2 fig. 1920. 1089. Hensen, V. Der Vorgang bei der Mutation. [The process in mutation.] Schrift. Naturwiss. Ver. Schleswig-Holstein [Kiel] 17: 190-191. 1920. 1090. Honing, J. A. Erfelijkheidsleer zonder Evolutie theorien. Rede uitgesproken bij de aanvaading van het Hoogleeraarsambt aan de Landbouwhooge school te Wageningen 23 Nov. 1920. [Genetics vs. theories of evolution. Lecture given on assuming the office of Professor at the Agricultural .High School of Wageningen, Nov. 23, 1920.] H. Veenman: Wageningen, 1920. 1091. Honing, J. A. Selectie-Proeven met Deli-Tabak. [Selection studies with Deli tobacco.] Teysmannia 30: 1-11. 2 -pi. 1919. — To increase production without extending acreage, strains may be sought which produce a large number of leaves per plant. For cigar wrapper-leaf, however, quality is more important than quantity production, hence high leaf number is not given first consideration in selection work. Most types of high leaf number are hybrids which continue to segregate indefinitely. Wrapper leaf should be of sufficient 158 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, length and breadth, also ratio of width to length is of some importance. In selection work types with leaves in which width is less than 60 per cent of length are rejected. Leaves 11 to 15, counting from base of plant, were measured. Leaf with broad base is better than one with narrow base. Leaf should be thin but strong, supple, elastic. Light colors are much desired and fallow (vaal) shades are preferred over brown. Red colors are very- undesirable. Color and other qualities are affected by soil, weather, and fertilizer, and tobacco harvested in early morning cures a purer fallow (valer) than when harvested later in day. Hence, precautions are required in testing inheritance of color. It appears from extensive tests repeated on different estates that color and fineness of tobacco are hereditary characteristics of the various selections. Results of rigorous comparisons made in 1916 and 1917 with a light-colored and a fallow-colored line, showing percentage yields of the different colors for the leaves on lower half of the plant, are given in tables. On higher-lying soil regularly producing darker tobacco the light-colored strain proved decidedly advantageous while on low lands reddish and spangled colors were obtained in unfavorable weather. Con- versely, the fallow line gave better colors on the low lands but a darker product on upland soil. Plants have not yet been found fulfilling the ideal of (1) many leaves; (2) long leaves; (3) broad leaves; (4) broad leaf base; (5) short internodes; (6) thin; (7) strong; (8) supple; (9) light color; (10) tan shade; (11) good burn. "Light line" 1, however, is deficient only as to (1) and (10). Light fallow line 72 produces more leaves and a truer fallow shade than the preceding but has less desirable shape of leaf and longer internodes. [See also following entry.] — W. W. Garner. 1092. Honing, J. A. Selectie-Proeven met Deli-Tabak III. [Selection experiments with Deli tobacco.] Mededeel. Deli Proefsta. Medan (Sumatra) 2 (no. 6): 25. 1919.— In con- tinuation of previous work (Mededeel. Deli Proefsta. 10: 79-128 and 2d ser., no. 2, 84) critical studies were carried forward with selections, originally obtained from commercial plantings and again propagated in 1918, mainly as to color and length of the fermented leaves taken from the lower half of the plant. In 1918 a total of 357 test plots of 800-1200 plants each, representing 54 lines, with mixed seed as controls, were grown on 12 different estates. With the more promising lines large-scale trials also were made, in some cases more than a million plants being grown. Detailed tabulated data are presented for 13 lines in comparison with mixed seed from which each line was derived, based on 3 primary color grades, with the customary commercial subdivisions of color shades, and the length of leaf. In some instances statistical tables of number of leaves per plant are included. In general, the results of comparisons in 1918 between the selections and mixed seed from which they were derived are in good agreement with those of 1917, showing that the differences in color and length of leaf are hereditary. Some of the selections proved to be segregating hybrids with respect to number of leaves produced. [See also preceding entry.]— TF. W. Garner. 1093. Howard Albert, and G. L. C. Howard. Some labour saving devices in plant- breeding. Agric. Jour. India 15:5-10. PL 1. 1920.— For the prevention of crossing, parchment bags are not suitable in India on account of high temperature and high humidity. Cylindrical muslin covers gave better results with this work. For variety trials a large netted drying house is used, and sheet iron metal cans are used for storing seed which have previously been dried. — /. J. Skinner. 1094. Humphrey, Seth K. The racial prospect. 261 p. Charles Scribner's Sons: New York, 1920.— As stated in the sub-title, this is a "rewriting and expansion of the author's book 'Mankind.' " It is in fact a revised edition of the former work presenting the same fundamental ideas expanded rather than materially modified by the outcome of the war. The racial heritage of the ages accumulated through natural selection tends to be dis- sipated by civilization; for civilization preserves the defectives and permits their propaga- tion while the best stock becomes increasingly infertile. There follows an inventory of the racial values preserved in the leading nations. Hybridism of extremely diverse races, as in America, is disastrous to the higher race. The struggle for racial dominance lies No. 2, June, 1921] GENETICS 159 between the English-speaking and the German peoples and will be determined by the con- servation of the superior stock in the racial heritage. "The deeper current of human affairs knows nothing of the ripples which so constantly fill our excited vision; it runs silently past the hours of the day to meet the centuries, carrying the racially strong through all accidents of war and peace to ultimate world domination." To meet this situation and to counteract the natural tendencies of civilization, Humphreys conceives a nation-wide conscription and registration of all defectives, the segregation of the incompetent in "farm community centres," and the enforced sterilization of "border-liners." But the cutting off of thedefec- tive germ-plasm is not sufficient. The infertility of the superior stock would still lead to the dead level of a mediocre race. To meet the need of propagating from the superior breed, a "new motherhood" is conceived. By scientific methods it is considered "possible to gain a distinguished father for one's children as impersonally as one would take inspiration from his books," and thereby the superior celibate womanhood of the race becomes the preserver of the "great inheritance of mankind." — Howard J. Banker. 1095. Klebahn, H. Impfversuche mit Pfropfbastarden. [Infection experiments with graft hybrids.] Flora 11/12: 418-430. 1918. — Tomato is readily susceptible to disease caused by Septoria lycopersici and Cladosporium fulvum. The black nightshade, Solarium nigrum, is resistant to both of these. In this investigation an effort was made to determine the resistance of various graft hybrids of tomato with the black nightshade to these fungi. — Results of infection experiments on the following chimeras, using Septoria lycopersici, are given: Solanum tubingense — the outer epidermis is tomato tissue while all the inner tissues are black nightshade. Plant is resistant. Solanum proteus — 2 outer layers of cells are tomato tissue. Considerable infection was obtained. Solanum Koelreuterianum — epidermis, night- shade; interior, tomato tissue. Infection was obtained. Solanum Gaertnerianum — 2 outer layers, nightshade; interior, tomato. Both positive and negative results were obtained with infection trials. Solanum Darwinianum — epidermis, nightshade; center, nightshade; an intervening area, tomato. Infection was obtained. Experiments with Cladosporium fulvum were unsatisfactory and will be repeated. — C. L. Porter. 1096. Kniep, H. [German rev. of: Collins, E. J. Sex segregation in the Bryophyta. Jour. Genetics 8: 139-146. PL 6, 5 fig. June, 1919 (see Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2103; 5, Entry 1635).] Zeitschr. Bot. 12 : 685-686. 1920. 1097. Lenz. [German rev. of: Noorden, C. von, tjnd S. Kaminer. Krankheiten und Ehe. Darstellung der Beziehungen zwischen Gesundheitsstorungen und Ehegemeinschaft (Diseases and wedlock. The relation between ill health and marriage.) 1111 p. Thieme: Leipzig, 1916.] Arch. Rass.- u. Gesellschaftsbiol. 13:208-221. 1918. 1098. Lenz, Fritz. Oskar Hertwigs Angriflf gegen den "Darwinismus" und die Rassen- hygiene. [Oskar Hertwig's attack on Darwinism and race hygiene.] Arch. Rassen- u. Ge- sellschaftsbiol. 13 : 194-203. 1920. — This is a criticism of Hertwig's whole attitude towards Darwinism and race hygiene, and is directed in particular at his recent pamphlet, "Zur Abwehr des ethischen, des sozialen, des politischen Darwinismus" (Jena, 1918). It is claimed that Hertwig has misconstrued both Darwinism and Lamarckism, and that he has drawn a caricature of race hygiene and the selection theory. His own theory, — a form of deter- minism depending on a structure and organization of matter by virtue of some inherent "force," — is held to be philosophically untenable and smacking of the materialistic meta- physics of the 19th century. In the field of ethics, moral value is, according to Hertwig, the directing force; but Lenz maintains with Kant and other philosophers that moral force is outside the world of experience, and that a natural theory which has for its object the laws of "being and becoming," has no application to the principles of values, nor, therefore, of ethics. — L. J. Cole. 1099. LiPscHxJTZ, A. Bemerkung zur Arbeit von Knud Sand iiber experimentellen Her- maphroditismus. [Comment on the work of Knud Sand on experimental hermaphroditism.] IQQ GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, Pfliiger's Arch. 176: 112. 1919.— Referring to similar work by Knud Sand on rats, the author points out that he had earlier demonstrated transformation of clitoris into penis-like organ in female guinea-pigs, into which testes had been grafted in place of ovaries.— A. Frank- lin Shull. 1100. Little, C. C. Is the fertile tortoise-shell tom cat a modified female? Jour. Ge- netics 10 : 301-302. 1920.— Author points out superiority of his non-disjunction hypothesis to Doncaster's theory of hormone action during embryonic life as an explanation for the production of, and also for the sterility or fertility of, tortoise-shell tom cats.— i/. L. Ibsen. 1101. MacBride, E. W. The method of evolution. Scientia 28:23-33. 1920.— A vig- orous attack on the 'mutation theory' of evolution. Since the majority of mutations are recessive in character, and result in 'cripples,' "it seems obvious" to the author "that interesting as the appearance of inheritable potentialities of the mutations are they have nothing to do with the evolution of species and that mutations have not furnished the ma- terial for the historical evolution of plants and animals." The Lamarckian doctrine of heritable changes, and consequently of evolution, occurring as the result of use and disuse, in response to needs brought about by environmental change, is then wholeheartedly espoused. The author feels that the experimental work of Kammerer has not been properly evaluated nor accorded fair treatment by 'Mendelians.' Finally, he stigmatizes as the 'Weismannian nightmare' the idea of a 'germ-plasm' distinct from 'somatoplasm.'— L. /. Cole. 1102. Malaquin, a. Reproduction sexuee et reproduction asexuee. [Sexual and asexual reproduction.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 1403-1408. 1920.— In the annelid family Serpulidae, Salmacina Drjsteri (Huxley) has sexual and asexual forms which have developed under apparently the same conditions. In 772 individuals there were 93 sexual hemaphro- dites, 245 divided or preparing to divide asexually, and 434 unclassified. At the season of sexual activity in the sexually reproducing forms the asexual animals show an increase in size of sex glands and functional activity to almost the normal condition.— D. F. Jones. 1103. Metz, Charles W., and Jose F. Nonidez. Spermatogenesis in the fly, Asilus sericeusSay. Jour. Exp. Zool. 32: 165-185. 2 pi. 1921.— The spermatogonia! chromosomes are 10 in number, arranged in 5 pairs; the sex chromosomes have not been identified. The paired association of chromosomes is retained up to and through the final spermatogonia! division. Synapsis is effected in telophase at the beginning of the growth period by the intimate association of chromosomes that were already paired in anaphase, and the union effected at this time persists throughout the succeeding growth period. No leptotene or zygotene stages, in the usual sense, could be found. Tetrad structures are not visible. The 1st maturation division appears to be reductiona! for all the chromosomes.— ^eriram G. Smith. 1104. Nachtsheim. [German rev. of: Armbruster, Ludwig. Bienenziichtungskunde. Versuch der Anwendung wissenschaftlicher Vererbungslehren auf die Ziichtung eines Nutz- tieres. (The art of breeding bees. An experiment in the application of scientific genetics to the breeding of a domestic animal.) 22 fig. Th. Fisher: Leipzig and Berlin, 1919.] Biol. Centralbl. 40:575-576. 1920. 1105. NoACK, KoNRAD. [German rev. of: Correns, C. Vererbungsversuche mit bunt- blattrigen Sippen. I. Capsella bursa-pastoris albovariabilis und chlorina. (Genetical studies with variegated races. I. Capsella bursa-pastoris albovariabilis and chlorina.) Sitz- ungsber. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien 34: 585-610. 1919 (see Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 551).] Zeitschr. Bot. 12:675-678. 1920. 1106. NoACK, KoNRAD. [German rev. of: Correns, C. Vererbungsversuche mit bunt- blattrigen Sippen. II. Vier neue Typen bunter Periklinalchimaren. (Genetical studies with variegated races. II. Four new types of variegated periclinal chimeras.) Sitzungsber. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien 44:820-857. 1919 (see Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 550).] Zeitschr. Bot. 12: 678-680. 1920. No. 2, June, 1921] GENETICS 161 1107. NoACK, KoNRAD. [German rev. of: Stomps, Theo J. tJber zwei Typen von Weiss- randbunt bei Oenothera biennis L. (On two types of white margins in Oenothera biennis.) Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm.- u. Vererb. 22: 261-274. 1920 (see Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 1211).] Zeitschr. Bot. 12: 680-682. 1920. 1108. NoNiDEz, Jose F. The internal phenomena of reproduction in Drosophila. Biol. Bull. 39: 207-230. 10 fig. 1920.— In spite of the large amount of genetic work with Drosoph- ila, heretofore there has been available no description of the morphology and physiology of the internal reproductive organs of the species. This deficiency, which is of considerable importance to those interested in hybridizing experiments, is supplied in the well illus- trated description here given. Two points of importance in addition to the purely morpho- logical features are the demonstration that the spermatozoa are retained for several days after copulation in both the spermathecae and the median ventral receptacle, and the sug- gestion that the spermatozoa are activated by the secretion of the parovaria, certain acces- sory glands connected with the uterus. — H. H. Plough. 1109. Pearson, Karl. Notes on the theory of correlation. Biometrika 13: 25-45. 3 fig. 1920.— Pearson traces the early development of the theory of correlation and corrects his earlier "errors of ascription" by giving to Galton the whole credit of discovering the corre- lation calculus. The work of Gauss and of Bravais on the probability curve and the theory of errors is shown to have had a bearing only upon determining the position of indirectly observed points from observed independent variables, mainly in geodesy and astronomy, and although Bravais reached the correlation surface he had not the idea of correlation. Pearson then reviews Galton's early papers on correlation, presents 3 of his figures, and outlines the development and interpretation of his measures of the coefficient of regres- sion. Weldon's papers on correlation in shrimps and crabs, and Edgeworth's on "Cor- related averages" are briefly reviewed to show that they added almost nothing to the theory. — Henry E. Niles. 1110. Renner, O. [German rev. of: (1) Vries, Hugo de. Mass mutations and twin hybrids of Oenothera grandiflora Ait. Bot. Gaz. 65: 377-422. May, 1918 (see Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 219). (2) Vries, Hugo de. Phylogenetische und gruppenweise Artbildung. (Phylo- genetic and group-wise species formation.) Flora 11-12 (Festschr. E. Stahl) : 208-226. 1918 (see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 349).] Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm.- u. Vererb. 24: 175-178. Sept., 1920. 1111. Richet, C., et H. Cardot. Mutations brusques dans la formation d'unenouvelle race microbienne. [Sudden mutations in the formation of a new race of microbes.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 168: 657-663. 1919.— Four months' daily observation of a pure lactic ferment organism in an arsfenical medium showed that its essential function,— the formation of lactic acid,— was so developed as to suggest a new race. The formation of this race was not gradual, but sudden; and its developed functions remained stable, not only on the medium in which development took place, but also on other media. — Andrew I. Dawson. 1112. Riddle, O., and H. A. Carr. Posthumous works of Charles Otis Whitman. Car- negie Inst. Washington Publ. 257. Vol. 1. x -f- 194 p., 88 pi., 36 fig; Vol. 2. x + 224 P-, 39 pi., 11 fig.; Vol. 3. xi + 161 p. 1919.— Volume I. The derivation of bars, as shown by Columbia livia and domestic races of pigeons, from checks and these in turn from a common avian character, constitutes the main thesis of this volume. This character still persisting in pigeons and other birds, is well preserved in the oriental turtle dove of China. It also occurs in the j uvenile plumage of modern pigeons. The check mark of so-called checkers was derived by an apical splitting of the check of the turtle dove until only two spots remained, on the inner and outer vanes respectively, of the feather. By a further modification of these checks bars were derived. Therefore Whitman considers the checker the affinis type and the barred the livia type. By selection experiments the author was able to reduce the number of checks to 4 bars and then to 3, and so on until a pure gray wing resulted. The process 162 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, was, however, irreversible. Whitman concludes that the same law of orthogenesis holds for various other orders of birds. In the latter part of the volume there are 2 chapters on "Fundamental bars and frills" and ''The mutation theory and mutations." In the latter, 3 mutations occurring in Whitman's stocks are described. — Volume II contains data relating to many close and wide crosses between doves and pigeons. The main deductions are as fol- lows : The wider the cross the lower the fertility and the greater the tendency for the production of males; fertility is lowest in the autumn with an excess of females and highest in the spring with an excess of males. The stronger germs are produced early and give rise to males, while the later germs are weaker and produce females. Color follows the same law. The appear- ance of white and certain abnormalities are signs of weakness. There is also a discus- sion and a presentation of data relating to sex-linkage. About two-thirds of Volume III deals with the behavior relating to reproduction, such as sexual activities, nesting, egg-laying, onset of incubation, and feeding of young. These are discussed in some detail and then related to the variations of different species and the sexes. The other third of the volume is taken up with miscellaneous subjects. The voices of different species are discussed. Certain elements of the voice of the turtle dove are noted in those of the common pigeon. Voices of hybrids are blended. Various other acts of behavior peculiar to pigeons, such as homing, tumbling, and pouting, are considered. — Sarah VH. Jones. 1113. RiXFORD, G. P. Some results of fig breeding by the IT. S. Dept. of Agr. Fig and Olive Jour. 4": 12, 13. 1920. — "Fertile seeds can be secured from all kinds of common figs." A branch with pistillate figs about 1-2 cm. in diameter is bagged with a caprifig fruit con- taining mature Blastophaga, and the pollination is left to the insects. Figs containing fertile seeds may differ from unpoUination fruits in size, shape, and time of ripening. Hybrids between varieties of the Adriatic class and caprifigs of the Smyrna class are about half caprifigs [staminate]. Several promising seedlings are described. — Howard B. Frost. 1114. Rommel, Geo. M. Essentials of animal breeding. U. S. Dept. Agric. Farmers' Bull. 1167. 38 p., 32 fig. 1920.— The basic facts about heredity and the breeding of farm animals together with the principles to be followed in livestock improvement are discussed in this bulletin, in popular language. — Sewall Wright. 1115. S., E. J. [Rev. of: Gager, C. Sttjart. Heredity and evolution in plants. H X 20 cm., xi + 265 p., 113 fig. P. Blakiston's Son & Co.: Philadelphia, 1920 (see Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1672).] Sci. Prog. [London] 15:498. 1921. 1116. Sando, Charles E., and H. H. Bartlett. Rutin, the flavone pigment of Escholtzia californica Cham. Jour. Biol. Chem. 41:495-501. PI. 6-7. April, 1920.— "The petals of Escholtzia californica contain nearly 5 per cent of rutin (quercetin glucosorhamnoside). In view of the great range of (flower) colors in Escholtzia, from golden yellow to white, and from white to rose, this genus would appear to afford especially suitable material for study of the physiological and genetic relationships of the flavonol and anthocyanin pigments."— Leonas L. Burlingame. 1117. ScHULTZ, Walther. Kalteschwarzung eines Saugetieres und ihre allgemeinbiolog- ischen Hinweise. [Blackening by means of cold in a mammal and its general biological impli- cations.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. 47:43-75. 12 fig. 1920.— Author made experiments on rabbits with pink eyes, white body, and black ears, nose, tail, and feet, to determine the influ- ence of heat and cold on coat color. He was able to change the white color into black and to produce diverse types of hair-color patterns, through the influence of cold. The nature and cause of arctic white and black animals is also discussed. — John H. Schaffner. 1118. Semon, Richard. Uber das Schlagwort "Lamarckismus." [On the catch word "Lamarckism."] Zeittechr. Indukt. Abstamm.- u. Vererb. 22:51-52. Dec, 1919.— Author refers to criticisms of H. Siemens regarding an article by the author on "The footprint of man," published 5 years ago. Siemens has referred to the article as a Lamarckian expla- No. 2, June, 1921] GENETICS 163 nation and therefore incapable of accounting for phylogenesis. The author replies, however, that no such inference can be drawn and that he has always warned against confusing the catchword "Lamarckism" with the phenomena of somatic inheritance, the interpretation of which can be placed upon a purely physiological basis. — M. A. Jull. 1119. Shaffer, E. L. A comparative study of the chromosomes of Lachnosterna (Coleop- tera). Biol. Bull. [Woods Hole] 38:83-103. 1920.— The diploid chromosome groups of 4 species of Lachnosterna (namely, delata, fusca, gracilis, and tristis), as well as Pelidnota punctata and Cotalpa lanigera, show 20 chromosomes, 1 pair of which is composed of 2 unequal elements (sex chromosomes). There are no essential differences in the form and arrange- ment of the chromosomes in the species studied. Cyst formation in the testis begins by a rapid division of a single primary spermatogonium, so that all the cells within any particular cyst are the descendants of a single cell. The visible polarity of the cell seems to be estab- lished at the time of cyst formation. The growth period of the spermatocytes is marked by the appearance of delicate leptotene threads which are derived from the chromosomes of the last spermatogonia! division; these threads become polarized and there is evidence that they are arranged in pairs parasynaptically. There is a definite contraction phase. The sex chromosomes persist through the entire growth period in the form of compact bodies, some- times being contained within chromosomal vesicles. The unequal sex elements separate in the 1st maturation division and divide equationally in the 2nd maturation division. In the 1st maturation division there are 5 atelomitic tetrads and 5 telomitic tetrads, the latter including the sex pair. — Bertram G. Smith. 1120. Slte, Maud. The relation of inbreeding to tumor production: studies in the inci- dence and inheritability of spontaneous tumors in mice. Jour. Cancer Res. 1920. — Author states that it is impossible to prove inheritability of any character without inbreeding. Inbreeding reveals what is in a strain, nothing is "increased" or "intensified." Pedigrees are given to show that inbreeding does not increase the incidence of cancer unless selection of the cancer-bearing strains in a mixed population is made. — It is concluded that consistent inbreeding eliminates any strain, and that inbreeding within a cancer strain speedily elimi- nates the strain and instead of increasing cancer, as some have inferred, it eliminates cancer. Hybridization increases cancer by increasing the output of cancer progeny. Cancer behaves as a recessive. [See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1727.] — C, C. Little. 1121. Stomps, Theo. J. tJber zwei Typen von Weissrandbunt bei Oenothera biennis L. [On two types of white variegation in Oenothera biennis L.] Zeitschr. Indukt. Abstamm.- u. Vererb. 22:261-274. 1920. — Author presents data bearing upon the heredity, in Oe. biennis L., of 2 types of white variegation, as well as evidence for the appearance of these types by mutation, their perpetuation by latent, semi-active, or active genes, and their expression as phenomena of vegetative splitting. The works of Correns, Beyerinck, Gregory, Baur, and Kxjster are discussed at length. In the 1st type of variegation vege- tative mutation occurs in the periclinally dividing apical cell producing (1) green twigs and (2) twigs with white-margined leaves. Selfed seed from green twigs give green, from varie- gated twigs white, and the cross, variegated X green, a vegetative splitting into white and green cell complexes, in the Fi. The latter are piebald variegated identical with types which have arisen by mutation from pure green Oe. biennis X Oe. biennis cruciata. In either case such plants are produced by the union of a "green" germ-cell with one mutated to "white." The results of selfing green, nearly green, variegated, and strongly variegated twigs of the piebald-variegated plants warrant the conclusion that each cell complex has reached a definitive condition which may be transmitted to its offspring. The following types fall in the piebald variegated class: Mirabilis jalapa albomaculata and Arabis pallida pseudo- leucodermis, studied by Correns, Pelargonium zonale albomarginatum and Antirrhinum majus albomaculatum, by Baur, and an albomaculata type of Primula sinensis reported by Gregory. In all of these types the chlorophyll factor is carried over in a perlabile condition. In Mira- bilis jalapa, reciprocal crosses, albomaculata X normal green, Correns and Baur report con- 164 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, flicting results, Correns finding strict matrocliny and Baur the production of piebald varie- gated plants as well as white and green. The mutation coefficient, "green" to "white," is 0.01 per cent, such mutations probably occurring in the somatic cells before the flower appears. Three methods are possible, (1) vegetative mutation, (2) mutation in the gametes, and (3) the appearance of variegation as an intermediate character between 2 races. The latter possibility is illustrated by the author's 2nd type of variegation. A plant of this type appeared by mutation in 1918. Selfed green twigs, variegated twigs, the cross, variegated X green, and the cross, variegated X a constant chlorina type from Oe. suaveolens X Oe. Hookeri, all gave green progeny, the latter heterozygous for a chlorophyll factor. This type consti- tutes an intermediate race. Its characters in so far as they may be called specific are desig- nated by the writer as "taxonomic anomalies." — Corren's hypothesis that white variegation is due to a disease condition is summarily dismissed and the alternative hypothesis of a special condition of the gene for the development of chlorophyll for each cell complex, advanced. The white sub-epidermal layer in Corren's Arabis pallida pseudoleucodermis, for instance, appears as the expression of a semi-latent gene for normal green pigment. — In closing the author says, "La verite est en marche; rien ne I'arretera." [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 1107.]— Paw Z A. Warren. 1122. TiscHLER, G. [German rev. of: Florin, Rudolf. Zur Kenntnis der Fertilitat und partiellen Sterilitat des Pollens bei Apfel und Birnensorten. (On the fertility and par- tial sterility of the pollen of different varieties of apples and pears.) Acta Horti Bergiani 7: 1-39. 1920 (see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1503).] Zeitschr. Bot. 12: 687-688. 1920. 1123. Van Denburgh, John. A further study of variation in the gopher snakes of western North America. Proc. California Acad. Sci. 10: 1-27. 2 pi. 1920. — A study of the varia- tions of number of gastrosteges, dorsal color pattern blotches, and scale rows has revealed the existence of 7 geographical races of the western North American gopher snakes, Pituo- phis. On the basis of number of gastroteges 2 subspecies were formerly recognized. Those having the lower number, P. cantenifer cantenifer, occur in the cool northern coast and adja- cent interior regions extending to middle California. The number of gastroteges increases in the southern regions where is found P. c. annectens. Within these subspecies geographic variation in color pattern exists, the coast forms having a higher number of blotches than the interior forms; P. c. heermanni is the northern interior form having fewer color blotches than the coast form of the same latitude. The same distinction is found between coast and interior forms of the southern group. The interior form here is designated P. c. deserticola. The number of scale rows also shows geographical variation permitting a further subdivision. The northern and southern divisions named above fall into 2 groups while the snakes of Lower California, Utah (rutilis), and Arizona (stejnegeri) form 3 different groups, the latter 2 being subspecies, that of Lower California a true species, P. vertebralis. The author has thus divided 3 groups into 7 on the basis of geographic variation of at least 3 characters. A key for the identification of the 7 groups is given. — J. L. Collins. 1124. Vries, Eva de. Versuche iiber die Frucht- und Samenbildung bei Artkreuzungen in der Gattung Primula. [Study on fruit and seed formation in species crosses of the genus Primula.] Rec. Trav. Bot. Ne^rland. 16: 63-205. 1919.— Study in detail on seed and fruit formation in species crosses between Primula acaulis, P. Sibthorpii, P. elaiior, P. Juliae, P. Auricula, and P. hirsuta with special reference to self and cross-pollination as related to heterostylism. Short-style X short-style and long-style X long-style represent illegitimate unions in author's classification, while long-style X short-style and its reciprocal are desig- nated legitimate. Illegitimate unions are of two kinds — those from selfing and those derived from crossing plants of either the same or of different species, but with the same type of style. When protected against insects, there is no self-pollination in P. acaulis. In profuse-flower- ing stocks of P. elatior, spontaneous selfing takes place in short-style, but very rarely in long- style plants. Artificial self-pollination in case of P. acaulis and P. elatior give different results with the two style types. Long-style P. acaulis gave about 25 per cent fruits as No. 2, June, 1921] GENETICS 165 against less than 1 per cent fruit in short-style selfings (159 pollinations gave one fruit). Fruits in both cases have good seed. Results in P. elatior somewhat similar. Illegitimate pollinations of long-style P. acaulis X long-style P. elatior gave no results. Illegitimate pollinations of P. Sibthorpii X P. elatior and of P. Auricula gave only negative results. Legitimate unions in P. acaulis, P. acaulis X P. Sibthorpii, and reciprocals fruit readily and seed is similar in all in number, size, and weight. Fi P. acaulis X P. Sibthorpii is fertile and crosses back with either parent. Legitimate unions of P. acaulis X P. elatior are more diffi- cult to secure than legitimate unions between plants of P. acaulis, but less difficult than illegitimate unions. Fruit and seed in general are very small and seed weight at most half that of seed of pure species. Reciprocal (P. elatior X P. acaulis) in legitimate cross-pollina- tion sets fruits readily and gives 50-60 per cent very large seed, and remainder very light. Legitimate cross-pollination of P. acaulis by P. Juliae produces fruit as readily as legitimate unions in P. acaulis, but seeds, though equal in number, are lighter and smaller. Fi hybrids are fertile. Fi back-crossed with parents in legitimate unions gave seed as large and numer- ous as in P. acaulis. P. elatior fruits readily in legitimate cross-pollination. Legitimate cross-pollination of P. elatior by P. Sibthorpii gives results similar to P. elatior X P. acaulis. Reciprocal crosses (12) gave only one fruit with very small seeds. Long-style P. elatior X P. Juliae short-style, fruited and seeded as readily as pure P. elatior in legitimate unions. Fi hybrids are fertile in legitimate unions. Both style-forms of P. Auricula in legitimate unions set fruit readily. Legitimate crosses of P. Auricula by P. hirsuta and reciprocal set easily. Legitimate crosses between plants of P. hirsuta are fertile. Seeds of P. Auricula, P. hirsuta and their hj^brids from legitimate unions are indistinguishable. Literature on the subject is reviewed. — Orland E,. White. 1125. White, William A. [Rev. of: Knight, M. M., Iva, L. Peters, and Phyllis Blan CHARD. Taboo and genetics. SOI p. Moffat, Yard and Co.: New York, 1920.] Mental Hygiene 5: 194-195. 1921. 1126. Wright, Sew all. The relative importance of heredity and environment in deter- mining the piebald pattern of guinea-pigs. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S.] 6: 320-332. 6 Jig. June, 1920.— Correlation between parents and offspring was found to be -f- 0.211 =*= 0.015 for random-bred stock with piebald pattern, while it was found to be only + 0.014 =*= 0.022 for stock inbred for many generations. Variability in inbred stock is thought to be due almost entirely to irregularity in development. By biometrical methods it has been determined that for the random-bred stock "variations in pattern are determined about 42 per cent by heredity, and 58 per cent by irregularity in development, leaving nothing for tangible environ- mental factors. In the inbred family the corresponding figures are 3 per cent for heredity, 5 per cent for tangible environment, and 92 per cent for irregularity in development." — H. L. Ibsen. 1127. Yampolsky, Cecil. Sex intergradation in the flowers of Mercurialis annua. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 95-100. 1 pi. Mar., 1920.— Typical flowers for male, female, and monoecious forms in this species are described, and various grades of hermaphrodite flowers are described and figured for both female and monoecious forms. These develop in various grades of maleness along with complete femaleness, or in various gradations in the proportion of the two, with in many cases no loss of functioning power of the organs formed. "Most elaborate and varied transition stages appeared of stamens into pistils and of pistils into stamens." "Intergradations within the flowers may occur by steps that are almost insensible." A periodic alteration of sex is reported for monoecious plants. — It is pointed out that a fac- torial hypothesis of sex determination does not explain these results; that no definite factor determines the sex of a flower, but that sex is here an epigenetic condition. — A. B. Stout. 166 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, HORTICULTURE J. H. GouKLEY, Editor H. E. Knowlton, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 771, 838, 866, 888, 915, 1058, 1060, 1078, 1087, 1113, 1122, 1346, 1388, 1396, 1420, 1446, 1457, 1499, 1513, 1523, 1525) FRUIT AND GENERAL HORTICULTURE 1128. Albert, C. Utilisation des serres sans chauffage au charbon, ni fumier. [Utiliza- tion of greenhouses without heat from coal or manure.] Revue Hort. 92 : 166-167. 1920. 1129. Anonymous. Grafting of walnut trees. Amer. Nut Jour. 10: 12. 1919. — Discus- sion by members of the Western Walnut Growers Association. When grafting is done low down on the ground the graft will start and then die. Hence better results are obtained from trees grafted some distance above the ground. It was found that fine crops may be obtained when the grafting is carried out 12 feet above the surface of the ground. — E. L. Overholser, 1130. Anonymous. Making lime-sulphur at home. British Columbia Dept. Agric. Circ. New Hort. Ser. 61. 5 p. 1920. 1131. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Gould, H. P. Peach-growing, xxi + 4^6 p. The Mac- millan Co.: New York, 1918.] Sci. Prog. [London] 15: 147. 1920. 1132. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Hedrick, U. P. Manual of American grape-growing. xiii + 458 p. The Macmillan Co.: New York, 1919.] Sci. Prog. [London] 15: 147-148. 1920. 1133. BioLETTi, T. Frederic. Propagation of vines. Univ. California Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 225. 4 P- 1920. — Directions for the propagation of vines are discussed under the following heads: (1) Choice of cuttings; the best wood for cuttings is of medium size and with moderately short joints. (2) Time of making cuttings; best to make the cuttings as soon as possible after the vines are pruned. (3) Method of making cuttings; cuttings ^^ inch in diameter are best and not more than 1 inch at the butt or less than i inch at the top; the shorter the better, providing they can be made to root. (4) Care of cuttings; discussion of methods of handling cuttings. (5) Planting of cuttings, including field practices. (6) Digging and care of rooted vines. — A. R. C. Haas. 1134. BoNVALLET, E. Radls noir Poids d'horloge, sa culture. [The culture of the black radish, Poids d'horloge.] Revue Hort. 92: 164. Fig. 57. 1920.— This is one of the best winter radishes of commercial importance. It requires careful selection to maintain it at a high standard of quality. The seeds are planted from the end of May to the end of July. — E. J. Kraus. 1135. BuLLARD, W. p. National Pecan Growers' Exchange. Amer. Nut Jour. 10: 55-56. 1919. — The co-operation marketing of this exchange has centralized control, efficiently standardized grade and brand, and has stabilized market. Distribution has been effected with scientific precision, and the speculator's net profit becomes distributed to the growers as extra profit. — E. L. Overholser . 1136. Burns, W. The top-working of Indian fruit trees. Agric. Jour. India 15:516. 1920. 1137. Chevalier, Aug. Sur les variations de bourgeons des arbres et arbustes cultives comme de decadence des varietes anciennes. [On bud-variations of trees and cultivated shrubs as a cause of the degeneration of old varieties.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: No. 2, June, 1921] HORTICULTURE 167 1011-1014. 1920. — It is contended that bud-variations are the cause of varieties "running out." Examples are given from the citrus fruits as well as from the apple, pear, olive, and cherry. Mention is also made of Myrtus communis and Acer negundo var. folis argentio varie- gatus. It is therefore concluded that sexual reproduction at intervals is advisable in hor- ticultural varieties. — C. H. Farr. 1138. CoNDiT, I. J. The fig in the Sacramento valley. Monthly Bull. Dept. Agric. Cali- fornia 8: 591-595. 1919.— The following are the 4 varieties of figs chiefly grown commer- cially in California: Mission, Adriatic, Smyrna, and Kadota. The Smyrna, although of better quality than the Adriatic, is more exacting as regards climate and soil requirements, and although yielding a better dried product is not as good a shipper as the Kadota. For Sacramento valley the author recommends the Black Mission, which is an excellent variety for commercial planting on account of the quality, and the certainty and size of its crop. — E. L. Overholser. 1139. Crafts, H. A. Cover crops for our orchards. Sci. Amer. 123: 567, 582-583. ij^g. 1920. 1140. Crow, J. W. Biennial fruitbearing in the apple. Sci. Agric. [Canada] 1:39-40. 1921.— Biennial bearing is not a fixed characteristic of Duchess and Wealthy varieties. Growths of spurs are classified according to length, those from 4 to 9 mm. bearing nearly all the fruit. To secure annual fruiting it is necessary to stimulate growth of the tree in the non-bearing year. Experiments at Ontario Agricultural College indicate that this is accom- plished by moderate heading back of small branches in the non-bearing year, and by apply- ing nitrate of soda in the early spring. Observations show that 75 per cent of fruit spurs on these varieties have completed their growth for the season by the time the first blossoms have well set. — B. T. Dickson. 1141. Daniel, Lucien. Recherches sur la greffe des Solanum. [Investigations of the grafts of Solanum.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171 : 1074-1076. 1920.— A study of grafts of potato on tomato and on mad-apple. Some of the characters of the stock, such as delay in maturing of the fruits, are imparted to the scion, thus making a situation similar to that in grafts of Vitis vinifera on V. rupestris. These new characters are transferred by asexual propagation. The tomato used as a stock is also found to affect the nature of the fruit of the mad-apple. — C. H. Farr. 1142. DoRRis, G. Establishing the filbert grove. Amer. Nut Jour. 10:34-35. 1919.— Soil must be retentive of moisture,— river bottom soil is best. As filbert blooms and polli- nates in mid-winter, location requires no consideration as to frost conditions. The Davidiana is the best pollenizer for most varieties. Each year's growth is to be cut back about 2 feet; should not head higher than 2 feet,— preferably 1 foot.— £. L. Overholser. 1143. Enper, V. Utilization des serres sans chauffage: production des legumes. [Utiliz- ing greenhouses without heat: growing vegetables.] Revue Hort. 92: 179-180. 1920. — The specific crops and varieties most suitable for culture in greenhouses without artificial heat, together with the directions for planting and culture of the same, are given.— ^. J. Kraus. 1144. EsTEBAN de Faura, Antonio. Cultivo del olivo. [Cultivation of the olive.] El Agricultor [Santiago, Chile] 5: 123-126. 3 fig. 1920.— Reprinted from La Hacienda.— J. A. Stevenson. 1145. Gardner, V. R. Bud selection with special reference to the apple and strawberry. Missouri Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 39. 27 p. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1155. 1146. GavilXn, Juan. Produccion y cultivo de platanos. [Production and cultivation of bananas.] Informacion Agric. [Madrid] 11: 1-2. 1 fig. 1921.— The banana industry of the Canary Islands is discussed. — John A. Stevenson. 168 HOETICULTUEE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1147. Hawkins, Lon A., and J. R. Magness. Some changes in Florida grapefruit in storage. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 357-373. 1920 [1921].' — Determinations of percentages of sugars, acids, dry matter, shrinkage of fruit, peel and the thickness of peel of grapefruit {Citrus decumana) when stored at 32, 36, 40, 55 =*= 5, 70, and 86° F. are reported. The fruit keeps longer at low temperatures, decay is reduced, shrinkage is less, and physiological pro- cesses are retarded. Fruit stored at 40° F. or below shows an undesirable pitting of the peel. Sunken spots appear which become 1-2 mm. in diameter and brown in color. The pit does not extend into the fruit and the flavor is unaffected. Most pitting occurred at 40° F., and none was observed at the higher temperatures. Flavor of the fruit improves in cold storage, but this improvement is more rapid at higher temperatures. The titratable acids in the fruit decrease after the fruit is removed from the tree and placed in cold storage. There is an apparent increase in sugar content in cold storage. Shrinkage is from 5 to 8 per cent in cold storage and about 23 per cent in warm ventilated storage. — D. Reddick. 1148. Hoy, B. Orchard cover-crops. British Columbia Dept. Agric. Giro. New Hort. Ser. 51. 6 -p., 3 fig. 1919. 1149. Hoy, B. Selection of orchard sites and soils. British Columbia Dept. Agric. Circ. New Hort. Ser. 53. 7 p., 2 fig. 1919. 1150. Hoy, B., and H. H. Evans. Pruning fruit-trees. British Columbia Dept. Agric. Circ. New Hort. Ser. 60. W p., 21 fig. 1920. 1151. Lecolier, p. Un mode de greflfage a preconiser; la greffe anglaise appliquee au cerisier. [A noteworthy method of grafting; the splice-graft used on the cherry tree.] Revue Hort. 92: 161-162. 1920. — The cions, of approximately the same diameter as the top of the tree to be grafted, are set in place during September, preferably the latter half of the month. After tying, a light protection of wax is advantageous. The following spring and summer the new growths may be pinched back to cause a more profuse branching of the top and the trees may be sold the autumn of the same year. The method is applicable to other stone fruits, and to apples and pears though these develop more slowly when the lateral branches are suppressed. — E. J. Kraus. 1152. Linden, van der, J. G. Hazeloop, en N. van Poeteren. Proefneming met rook, ter bescherming van gewassen tegen nachtvorsten. [Experiments with smoke, for protection of plants against night frosts.] Mededeel. Phytopath. Dienst Wageningen 15. 22 p., pi. 1-4- 1920. — By burning fuel which develops much smoke or soot the temperature can be increased considerably over large areas. The rise of temperature is due mainly to decreased radiation from the soil on account of the cover of smoke. Direct heating of the air also takes place. Smudging of small areas from the windward side is not advisable as there is no certainty that the smoke will sufficiently cover a certain area. Peat saturated with crude naphthaline is very useful, giving much smoke and heat. — The cost per 21 acres (1 Ha.) of raising the temperature 1°C. for 1 hour is from 40 to 50 gulden ($16 to $20). — The experiments were carried out in Amersfoort and Elst. — /. C. Th. Uphof. •1153. Morel, F. Remarque sur la culture du Pecher. [Note on peach culture.] Revue Hort. 92: 178. 1920. — Peach trees when grown against walls are generally set either on the east or south face. When it becomes necessary to replace such plantings the new trees may be set on the west or north face and the tops of the trees drawn through holes in the wall to the opposite, more desirable, exposure. — E. J. Kraus. 1154. Morris, O. M. Prune growing in western Washington. Washington [State] Agric. Exp. Sta. Popular Bull. 120. 21 p., fig. 1-7. 1920. — Attention is given to varieties, pruning, cultivation, and fertilizer trials. The fertilizer trials indicated that nitrogen is the element most frequently deficient in the prune orchards of Clark County. Other factors causing crop failure are unfavorable weather at blossoming time and the brown-rot. — F: D. Heald. No. 2, June, 1921] HORTICULTURE 169 1155. Morris, Robert T. Comment. [Rev. of: Knight, F. A. Propagation of the wal- nut. Trans. Hort. See. London 3: 133. 1918.] Amer. Nut Jour. 11: 20-21. 1919.— Critical comments on F. A. Knight's "Propagation of the walnut." — E. L. Overholser. 1156. MuNsoN, K. W., AND E. W. White. Loganberry culture. British Columbia Dept. Agric Circ. New Hort. Ser. 54. 23 p., 10 fig. 1920. 1157. MuNSON, K. W., AND E. W. White. Raspberry culture. British Columbia Dept. Agric. Circ. New Hort. Ser. 55. 15 p., 7 fig. 1920. 1158. Nanot, Jules. Reconstitution des plantations fruitieres dans les regions liberees et evaluation des dommages causees aux arbres. [Restoration of orchards in the liberated regions with an estimate of the damage done to the trees.] 84 p., 50 fig. Miason: Paris, 1920. 1159. Orb, G. The story of the prune. Sci. Amer. 124: 52. 3 fig. 1921. 1160. Pray, Luis. Plantemos frutillares industriales. [Commercial strawberry plant- ings.] El. Agricultor [Santiago, Chile] 5: 5-7. 2 fig. 1920. 1161. Prayag, S. H. The influence of stock and scion and their relation to one another. Agric. Jour. India 15:533-542. 3 fig. 1920. — Some stocks have a distinct preference for particular scions while others do not. The stock plays an important part in influencing the habit of growth and hardiness of the scion. The formation, at the point of union, of big knotty excrescences in plants whose rate of growth is not similar, considerably checks growth. Grafted plants composed of parts having different periods of rest fail to grow into big plants. The scion has a preponderating influence in determining the character of the fruit produced by it. The position of the mature scion at the end of a branch in a large tree influences the flowering. It is undesirable to insert scions of more than one variety on the branches of a single stock. Grafting between different genera, though succeeding in some cases, has not been found successful in the mango. — /. /. Skinner. 1162. Ringelmann, M. Chauffage des serres au bois. [Heating greenhouses with wood.] Revue Hort. 92: 180-181. Fig. 62-63. 1920.— A method is detailed of making and fitting special grates for the burning of wood in furnaces intended for the use of coal. — E. J. Kraus. 1163. RivifeRE, Gustave, et Gabriel Bailhache. Observations sur la composition de I'atmosphere d'un fruitier dans lequel on conserve des pommes de Caville Blanc. [Observa- tions on the composition of the atmosphere of a fruit store where apples are kept.] Jour. Soc. Nation. Hort. France 21:151-153, 202-204, 234-235. 1920.— The writers state that after apples are mature, during the period they are kept in the fruit store or storage room, they lose their green color, and, due to chemical reactions in the apple itself, they give off CO2 and take in oxygen whether they be in the light or in partial or total darkness. Due to this giving off of CO2 the atmosphere in the fruit store becomes considerably modified and it is the belief of the writers that this must have some effect on the fruit itself. Analyses were made of the air of a fruit storage room and it was found to contain a large amount of CO2. The writers conclude that CO2 must be an important factor in the keeping of fruits, since in experiments with pears, covering several years small quantities of CO 2 retarded maturity and arrested it completely when in excess. Results are given of temperature and humidity studies in a fruit storage room. When the temperature was the highest, 10°C., the humidity was also the highest, 94 per cent of saturation. At the lowest temperature, 2°C., the hu- midity was 88. It is stated that this high humidity probably accounts for apples keeping for a long time with only a slight withering or wrinkling of the skin. The writers conclude that the temperature ought to be maintained between 2 and 4°C., and add that this can be accomplished only under refrigeration. — H. C. Thompson. 1164. Robertson, W. H. Currant and gooseberry culture. British Columbia Dept. Agric. Circ. New Hort. Ser. 61. 8 p. 1921. 170 HORTICULTUEE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1165. Shrivastava, K. P. A preliminary note on the improvement of oranges. Agric. Jour. India 15: 508-515. 6 fig. 1920. — A general discussion is given of pruning, irrigation, and manuring. Experiments are being made with organic manures and mineral fertilizers. There is a distinct improvement in the vegetation, growth, and fruiting of the trees resulting from the use of nitrogenous manures. Mohwa {Bassia latifolia) refuse is producing best results, followed by castor cake, cattle dung, and calcium nitrate. The mineral fertilizers have as yet produced no noticeable effect. — /. /. Skinner, 1166. SiEBERT, A. Kriegswirtschaftliche Betatigung des Palmengartens. [Cooperation of the Palm Garden in war activities.] Ber. Senckenberg. Naturf. Ges. Frankfurt a. M. 49: 83-84. 1919. — The activities of the Palm Garden at Frankfurt in helping to increase the production of vegetable foods in Germany are here reported. The propagation of potatoes by means of cutting is described, and the cultivation of certain vegetables which had pre- viously been imported has proved practicable. — A. W. Evans. 1167. Skerrett, R. G. California's citrus fruit industry. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2:212- 216. 11 fig. 1920. 1168. West, Frank L., and N. E. Edlefsen. Freezing of fruit buds. Jour. Agric Res. 20: 655-662. PI. 75. 1921. — Thermometers were hung in tree tops and temperature records kept for all spring nights with freezing temperatures. Flowers were also frozen in chambers and records kept. Tables are given showing the percentage of blossoms of dif- ferent ages killed by different temperatures. — W. H. Chandler. FLORICULTURE AND ORNAMENTAL HORTICULTURE 1169. Anonymous. A new Polygonum. Florists' Exchange 50: 1017. 1920. — P. cam- panulatum attracted much attention and received an award of merit when recently shown in London. It is a plant of bushy growth, 2J ft. high, with distinctly bell-like flowers, and colored much like Kalmia latifolia. It is probably a plant of great promise, a possible acqu sition for pot work. — L. A. Minns. 1170. Anonymous. Eupatoriums as a florists' flower. Florists' Exchange 50:873. 1920. — Note is made of the use of a Eupatorium in one of the florists' stores of Boston. The writer then lists useful Eupatoriums for garden and greenhouse, some of which are little known and seldom seen. The list includes, of hardy herbaceous kinds, E. perfoliatum, E. agertoides, and E. Fraseri, all white, and E. coelestinum, one of the best blue perennials; while for growing under glass there are E. Purpusi, sweetscented, pink, and E. conspicuum, shrub-like, a good winter bloomer and summer bedder. — L. A. Minns. 1171. Anonymous. New plants. Florists' Exchange SO: 863. 1920. — Attention is called to new plants recently exhibited in London, among which were several named varieties of hardy asters; Helianthus, "Monarch," of the rigidus section, having 3 or 4 rows of ray florets and described as magnificent; and a new Dahlia, "Ada Finch," described as clematis-flow- ered in form. — L. A. Minns. 1172. Bauer, G. Le Leontopodium alpinum Cass; culture sur rocailles. [The culture of Leontopodium alpinum Cass., in rockeries.] Revue Hort. 92: 165-166. Fig. 58-59. 1920. 1173. Bellair, G.-A. et P. Pares et jardins. [Parks and gardens.] 382 p., 226 fig. J.-B. Bailliere et Fils: Paris, 1919. 1174. BoYNTON, Kenneth R. Eupatorium coelestinum. Addisonia 4: 39^0. PI. 140 (colored). 1919. — Eupatorium coelestinum L. is illustrated and redescribed. The species is a native of eastern U. S. A. and Cuba. — T. J. Fitzpatrick. No. 2, June, 1921] HORTICULTURE 171 1175. BoTNTON, Kenneth R. Sedum spectabile. Addisonia 4: 3. PI. 122 {colored). 1919. — This showy Sedum, first characterized by Boreau in 1866, although propagated by horticulturists since about 1860, is described. The presumed nativity is Japan.— 7'. J. Fitzpatrick. 1176. Brown, W. Robertson. The frash (Tamarix articulata). Agric. Jour. India 14: 758-761. PI. 2. 1919. — The article discusses the use of the "Frash" as a windbreak, or as a hedge for dividing estates, etc. The tree is well depicted in the illustrations. — J. J. Skinner. 1177. KocK, G. Vergleichende Bodentemperaturmessungen. [Comparative soil-tem- perature measurements.] Zeitschr. Landw. Versuchsw. Deutschosterreich 23:69-87. 1920. — Comparative soil temperatures were taken at a depth of 30 cm. near the north, south, east, and west walls of a trellis garden. The walls were 2 meters high and peach trees had been trained against them. Temperatures were taken each day at 7 a.m., 12 m. and 6 p.m. for 1 year. Average daily and monthly temperatures, maxima, minima, etc., are given. Air temperatures were also taken for comparison. Taking the whole year into consideration the warmest situation for trellis-plants would be the south side of the wall, the east, north, and west sides following in the order named. From a temperature standpoint, the north and west situations are closely related as also are the east and south situations. Especially in December, January, and February does the north side surpass the south and east sides in temperature, and it is also considerably higher than the west side. In the other months, the west side is somewhat higher in temperature than the north side and the south and east sides surpass both. — John W. Roberts. 1178. Mackenzie, Kenneth K. Eupatorium maculatum L. Addisonia 4:23-24. PL 1S2 (colored). 1919. — The author gives a description, with notes, of this the most conspicuous of the joe-pye weeds, a native of northeastern North America. — T. J. Fitzpatrick. 1179. Nash, George V. Celastrus articulatus Thunb. Addisonia 4:9-10. PL 125 (colored). 1919.— A hardy, shrubby bittersweet, native of China and Japan, frequently cultivated, rather closely related to Celastrus scandens of the United States. — T. J. Fitz- patrick. 1180. Nash, George V. Crataegus macrosperma. Addisonia 4: 35. PL 138 (colored)' 1919. — A variable species, ranging throughout northeastern United States and Nova Scotia. — T. J. Fitzpatrick. 1181. Nash, George V. Crataegus succulenta. Addisonia 4: 5-6. PL 123 (colored). 1919. — A species of the macracanthae group, native of Nova Scotia and northeastern United States, possessing economic possibilities. — T. J. Fitzpatrick. 1182. Nash, George V. Forsythia Fortunei. Addisonia 4: 17-18. PL 129 (colored) 1919. — An early blooming shrub of the olive family, a native of China, frequent in cultivation — T. J. Fitzpatrick. 1183. Nash, George V. Malus HalUana. Addisonia 4: 27. PL 134 (colored). 1919.— A decorative shrub, native of western China, introduced into the United States in about 1863, by Dr. G. R. Hall.— r. J. Fitzpatrick. 1184. Nash, George V. Oxydendrum arboreum. Addisonia 4: 37-38. PL 139 (colored) . 1919.— A species of the monotypic genus, native of southeastern United States, introduced into England and elsewhere. — T. J. Fitzpatrick. 1185. Partington, J. B. Rose culture. British Columbia Dept. Agric. Circ. New Hort. Ser. 59. 5 p., 2 fig. 1920. 172 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1186. Pennell, Francis W. Penstemon calycosus. Addisonia 4: 31-32. PL 136 (col- ored). 1919. — A showy species, growing on shaded calcareous soil, native of the south- eastern Mississippi Valley. — T. J. Fitzpatrick. 1187. Pennell, Francis W, Pentstemon digitalis. Addisonia 4: 19-20. PI. 130 (col- ored). 1919. — A lengthy description of the species is given, with comments on the genus. The species is a native of southwestern Mississippi Valley, introduced eastward. — T. J. Fitzpatrick. 1188. Proschowskt, A. R. Albizzia lophanta Bentham, var. speciosa. Revue Hort. 92: 174-175. 1920. — A beautiful tree of rapid growth, readily propagated from seed and well adapted to dry situations, this plant should be grown abundantly as a decorative perennial in the milder climates and as an annual in the more northern locations. — E. J. Kraus. 1189. RoLET, A. Le froid artificial regulateur des marches dans le commerce des fleurs coupees. [Refrigeration a regulator of the cut flower trade.] Revue Hort. 92: 175- 176. 1920. — An argument for the installation of refrigeration plants as community enterprises at the points of origin of the crops or at the market centers. — E. J. Kraus. 1190. Small, John K. Chamaecrista Deeringiana. Addisonia 4: 1-2. PI. 121 (colored). 1919. — A full description is given of this perennial species, a native of southern Florida, with notes on the related species C. brachiata. C. Deeringiana is readily distinguishable by its. stout, elongated, horizontal rootstock which is stated to be quite an exception in this genus. — T. J. Fitzpatrick. 1191. Small, John K. Heliotropium Leavenworthii Torr. Addisonia 4: 29-30. PI. 135 (colored). 1919. — A lengthy description with comment is included of this species, which occurs on the edges of the Everglades and in the adjacent pinelands of southern Florida. T. J. Fitzpatrick. 1192. Small, John K. Heliotropium pol3rphyllum Lehm. Addisonia 4: 25-26. PI. 133 (colored). 1919. — A full description with comments is given. The species is a native of southern Florida and tropical America. — T. J. Fitzpatrick. 1193. Small, John K. Ipomoea tenuissima. Addisonia 4: 15-16. PL 128 (colored). 1919. — A full description is given of this pink morning-glory, a native of the pine woods of southern Florida, Cuba, and Hispaniola. — T. J. Fitzpatrick. 1194. Small, John K. Limodorum Simpsonii. Addisonia 4:7-8. PL 124. (colored). 1919. — A full description is given of this terrestrial orchid, a native of the Everglades of Florida, found also in the Bahamas and Cuba. — T. J. Fitzpatrick. 1195. Small, John K. Mentzelia floridana. Addisonia 4: 13-14. PL 127 (colored). 1919. — A species of the Loasa family, found about hammocks in Florida and the Bahamas. — T. J. Fitzpatrick. 1196. Small, John K. Okenia hypogaea. Addisonia 4: 11-12. PL 126 (colored). 1919. — A species of the four-o'clock family, originally collected on sand hills near Vera Cruz, Mexico, since found in southern Florida. This species is the type of the genus. — T. J. Fitzpatrick. 1197. Small, John K. Rhabbadenia corallicola. Addisonia 4: 33-34. PL 137 (colored). 1919. — An erect or difTuse shrub of the family Apocynaceae, native of southern Florida, occurring in the pinelands, and blooming throughout the year. A full description is given with notes and comment.^ — T. J. Fitzpatrick. No. 2, June, 1921] HOKTICULTUEE 173 1198. TuRBAT, E. Deux belles roses. [Two good roses.] Revue Hort. 92:178. 1 -pi (colored). 1920. — The variety Willowmere (Pernet-Ducher 1913) is the result of a cross be- tween an unnamed variety and Lyon Rose, which latter it much resembles but is an improve- ment in being more hardy and floriferous; Arthur R. Goodwin (Pernet-Ducher 1909) is the offspring of a seedling crossed with Soleil d'Or. reddish orange copper in color and vigorous. Both are suited for breeding or for use as cut-flowers. — E. J. Kraus. 1199. Vacherot. M. Les Oeillets a grandes fleurs. [Large flowered carnations.] Revue Hort. 92: 176-177. Fig. 60-61. 1920. — Notes relative to recent improvement in the quality of carnations, particularly of the American type, together with brief cultural directions. — E. J. Kraus. HORTICULTURE PRODUCTS 1200. Anontmotjs. [Rev. of: Knapp, A. W. Cocoa and chocolate: their history from plantation to consumer, xii + 210 p., illlus. Chapman & Hall: London, 1920.] Sci. Prog. [London] 15:320-321. 1920. 1201. Anonymous. The pahn sugar industry in Bengal. Louisiana Planter and Sugar Manufacturer 65 : 3—4. 1920. — The palm sugar industry is very old but is declining at present. The Phoenix and Borassus palms are the ones chiefly used. Bengal produced 10,000 tons of palm sugar in 1913-14. — C. W . Edgerton. 1202. Burns, W. The drying of bananas. Agric. Jour. India 15: 166-173. 1920.— The investigation shows that sun heat is sufficient for the drying of bananas and that all varieties can be successfully dried. For a good color a card board screen should be used during the last few days of drying. The product should be stored in air tight tins. The apparatus used is a simple lattice tray which can be closed with covers. Fully ripe fruit free from skin should be used. — /. J . Skinner. 1203. Paris, G. L'industria delle ciliege bianche. [White cherry industry.] Staz. Sperim. Agrarie Ital. 53: 187-227. 1920. — This is a study of the commercial phases of the industry and of the scientific principles underlying it. — A. Bonazzi. 1204. Patwardham, V. G. Gur-making from the juice of the date-palm (Phoenix syl- vestris) in the Thama District of the Bombay Presidency. Agric. Jour. India 15:525-532. 1920. — Experiments were made to determine the best juice suitable for gur making and to get gur of solid crystalline consistency. Juice treated with formalin gave solid gur of good grain; chloroform likewise gave solid gur, but with no grain. Juice treated with acetic acid produced gur which was soft and sticky, of good light color, but not of good taste. Tartaric acid added to juice gave a solid crystalline gur, with no change in color. The data are pre- sented in tabular form, showing the effect of different processes and varying amounts of acid on the qualities of gur. — /. /. Skinner. 1205. Pray, Luis. Practicas generales sobre la elaboracion de los vinos. [Practical methods of making wines.] El Agricultor [Santiago, Chile] 5: 53-57. 1920. — Discusses col- lecting, milling, sulphitation, fermentation, and other steps in the process of making wine. — ■ John A. Stevenson. 174 MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, MORPHOLOGY, ANATOMY, AND HISTOLOGY OF VASCULAR PLANTS E. W. SiNNOTT, Editor (See also in this issue Entries 779, 788, 943, 1013, 1019, 1021, 1041, 1044, 1085, 1342, 1367, 1374, 1429, 1494) 1206. Beltea, H. C. Ray tracheid structure in second growth Sequoia Washingtoniana. Bot. Gaz. 68: 467-476. 5 fig. 1919. — Second growth trunks of Sequoia washingtoniana are wanting in true ray tracheids; instead, vertical wood tracheids bend at the ray, and are con- tiguous thereto for some little distance. Communicating pits develop in these contiguous walls of rays and tracheids. These modified vertical tracheids are believed to function as ray tracheids.— iJ. C. Cowles. 1207. BoTTTGUES, H. Le meristeme terminel de la tige et sa division en regions. [The terminal meristem of the stem and its division into zones.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171:926-927. 1920.- — Two regions of the meristem, a prevascular and a cortical zone, are distinguished. — C. H . Farr. 1208. BuGNON, P. Sur I'emploi d'encres commerciales en histologic vegetale. [On the use of commercial inks in vegetable histology.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 1051- 1054. 1919.- — Commercial inks having a base of tannin and iron sulphate have been success- fully employed in the staining of pectin-cellulose membranes, giving a blue which is adapted to the use of a counter stain of red, brown, or green. Inks having log-wood (haematoxylin) as a base have also been shown to be satisfactory for certain purposes. Formulas for the preparation of ink stains with various other stains are given. — V. H . Young. 1209. Detjen, L. R. Peloria in Viola primulaefolia Linn. Torreya 20: 107-116. Fig. 1-11. 1920. — Peloria in European species of Viola {V . odorata and V. hirta) has been known since 1775. Two forms are recognized, the incomplete and the complete. A plant of V. 'primulaefolia was discovered at West Raleigh, North Carolina, producing flowers not only with all the various forms of peloria, but with a general reduction and tendency toward numerical uniformity in all the floral whorls. In this plant the flower was not only perfectly reguljtr but all the parts were in fours. Otlier plants collected at the same station possessed from 1 to 4 saccate petals, and showed variations in the number and character of parte in each floral whorl. Plants grown from seed of these peloric plants produce peloric flowers, which remain uniform under great differences of environment, and such plants apparently breed true to type both vegetatively and sexually. — J . C. Nelson. 1210. Gatin, V. C. Recherches anatomiques sur le pedoncule et la fleur des Liliacees. [An anatomical study of the peduncle and flower of the Liliaceae.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32 : 460-528. Fig. 32-55. 1920. — A continuation of the anatomical study previously reported. In this number the 10th tribe of the Lilioideae is covered, together with the tribes of the sub-family Asphodeloideae and 5 tribes of the sub-family Asparagoideae. — /. C. Gilman. 1211. Land, W. J. G. Botany of the living plant. [Rev. of : Bower, F. O. Botany of the living plant, x -f- 580 p., U7 fig. Macmillan: London, 1919 (see Bot. Absts. 4, Entries 526, 1394; 7, Entry 1608).] Bot. Gaz. 68:478-479. 1919.— The book is highly praised for its embodiment of long years of first-hand contact with material and of long teaching experience. The gymnosperms are felt to be inadequately treated, and minor criticisms are noted in the treatment of the liverworts. — H. C. Cowles. 1212. ScHAFFNER, JoHN H. A remarkable bud sport of Pandanus [utilis]. Jour. Hered- ity 10: 376-378. Fig. 14. 1919. — The bud sport (mutation) shows a two-ranked arrangement of the leaves without spiral twist as opposed to the normal three-ranked arrangement with spiral twist. A progressive phyletic arrangement is suggested for the related genera Pan- danus, Sparganium, and Typha. — /. R. Schramm. No. 2, June, 1921] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 175 1213. ScHERTZ, r. M. Early development of floral organs and embryonic structures of Scrophularia marylandica. Bot. Gaz. 68:441-450. 3 pi. 1919.— The order of development of floral parts is calyx, stamens, corolla, pistil, the stamens and corolla arising from a com- mon outgrowth. The megaspore archesporium consists of 1 hypodermal cell, functioning as a megaspore mother cell, which gives rise to an axial row of 4 potential megaspores. The embryo sac comes from the chalazal one, the others degenerating. The mature sac has 1 egg, 2 large synergids, an endosperm nucleus, and 3 antipodal nuclei which soon degenerate. A secondary endosperm nucleus was observed, also the fusion of polar nuclei. The 1st divi- sion of the fertilized egg is transverse, and is followed by a longitudinal division of the chal- azal nucleus. The nucellus consists of a single cell layer around the megaspore. A 1-celled tapetal layer develops around the sac, forming as the megaspore mother cell divides. Two prominent haustoria form at the chalazal end of the sac, and 4 weaker ones at the micropylar end. There is a single thick integument. Before the egg divides, endosperm cells form, separating the egg from the micropylar end. There is a short suspensor, which disappears at embryo maturity. In the seed the embryo is surrounded by thick endosperm cells gorged with food. — F. M. Schertz. 1214. ScntJEPP, Otto. Beitrage zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der Stockausschlage. [Con- cerning the developmental history of stem shoots.] Vierteljahrsschr. Naturforsch. Ges. Zurich 63: 106-115. 191S. — The vegetative point of a lateral shoot arises as a small meristem-complex and begins developing leaves long before it has attained the size and struc- ture of the mother vegetative point. — John H. Schaffner. 1215. ScHtJEPP, Otto. Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte des Blattes von Acer pseudoplatanus L. [Developmental history of the leaf of Acer pseudoplatanus L.] Vierteljahrsschr. Natur- forsch. Ges. Zurich 63: 99-105. 1918.— An outline of the origin of the various leaf tissues from the meristem. — John H . Schaffner. 1216. SotjJ:GES, TiEN-fi. Embryogenie des Urticacees. Developpement de I'embryon chez I'Urtica pilulifera L. [The embryology of the Urticaceae. The development of the embryo of Urtica pilulifera.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 1009-1011. 1920.— A scheme is pre- sented for tabulating the development of the embryo of angiosperms, showing the parts from which each portion of the embryo is derived and the separation of the various primordia in the successive divisions. The development of the embryo of Urtica is found to follow in general that of Senecio vulgaris. — C. H. Farr. 1217. Thodat, M. G. Anatomy of the ovule and seed of Gnetum gnemon with notes on Gnettxm funiculare. Ann. Botany 35: 37-54. PI. 1, fig. 1-5. 1921.— The changes which take place in the envelopes of the ovule of G. gnemon during development are described. The micropylar tube which is a continuation of the innermost of the 3 envelopes becomes closed. A fiange-Iike outgrowth of this tube becomes fused at the top with the outermost envelope and at the bottom projects over the middle envelope. The growth of the outer covering carries the closed micropylar tube upwards causing its apical region to break away from the base. This upper region thus forms a sort of stopper which is carried still further upwards. The basal part then projects as a sort of beak through the opening at the top of the middle covering. The conditions here described are compared with those in Bennettitales. — W . P. Thompson. 1218. Thompson, W. P. Companion cells in bast of Gnetum and angiosperms. Bot. Gaz. 68: 451-459. 7 fig. 1919.— Gnetum has companion cells resembling those of angiosperms in size, structure, and location, but not in development; in Gnetum sieve tubes and companion cells are produced from different rows of cambial cells, instead of from 2 successive cells in a single row. This is thought to indicate parallel evolution rather than genetic relationship. — //. C. Cowles. 1219. Williamson, H. S. A new method of preparing sections of hard vegetable structures. Ann. Botany 35: 139. 1921.— Hard materials to be sectioned are transferred from water to 176 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, ALGAJB [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, pure acetone and then to a 12 per cent solution of cellulose acetate in acetone. By this method they are not only imbedded but also softened. Woods such as oak or beech are sufficiently softened for sectioning after 6 days in the solution.— WT. P. Thompson. 1220. WissELiNCH, C. VAN. Bijdragen tot de Kennis van de Zaadhuid. Achtste bijdrage: Over de Zaadhuid bij de orde der Centrospermae. [Contribution to a knowledge of the seed- coat. Eighth contribution: The seed-coat of the Centrospermae.] Pharm. Weekbl. 57: 1193- 1211. PL 1, fig. 10. 1920. — In the campylotropic ovule of the Centrospermae 3 cuticles can be distinguished, 1 on the epidermis, 1 between the 2 integuments, and 1 between the inner- most integument and the nucellus. During the development of the ovule into the seed in some cases (Caryophyllaceae) the cuticle on the epidermis disappears; in other cases (Beta vulgaris, Amaranthus caudatus, Portulaca grandiflora) the cuticle between the 2 integimaents is lost, either partly or altogether. The cuticle between the seed-coat and the nucellus remains and becomes rather thick. In the chalaza a cork-tissue is developed, which borders the thick cuticle between the seed-coat and the nucellus but which differs from other chalaza cork tissues in that the cork-cells are thickened at the corners (Beta vulgaris) or in that the cell-walls are covered with a cutin-like substance. — H. Engelhardt. MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF ALGAE E. N. Transeau, Editor (See also in this issue Entries 932, 933, 1291, 1360) 1221. Bristol, B. Muriel. On a Malay form of Chlorococcum humicola (NSg.), Rabenh. Jour. Linn. Soc. Bot. London 44: 473^82. PI. 17-18. 1920.— The author describes an alga obtained by culture from a sample of soil from Kuala Lumpur that had been dry for two years. Reproduction by zoospores, which may also act as gametes, was observed. Aplano- spores are formed which germinate and produce a palmella-stage, and these cells produce the usual vegetative cells directly, or indirectly by means of zoospores. In dried soil samples Chlorococcum has been known to retain its vitality more than 70 years.— ^. N. Transeau. 1222. Bristol, B. Muriel. A review of the genus Chlorochytrium, Cohn. Jour. Linn. Soc. Bot. London 45: 1-28. PL 1-3, fig. 1. 1920.— In continuation of the work of G. S. West in submerging 6 genera into the genus Chlorochytrium, this paper contains a critical discussion of the present limits of the genus and the criteria that may be used to define species. As a result of further study of the morphology of these forms, 10 well-defined and 3 doubtful forms are included in the genus. The recognized species are: Chlorochytrium Lemnae Cohn; C. bienne (Klebs) G. S. West; C. paradoxum (Klebs) G. S. West; C. Facciolaae (Borzi) Bristol, and var. minor (Borzi) Bristol; C. grande Bristol; C. Limnanthemum (D.D. Cunningh.) G. S. West; C. inclusum Kjellman, and var. dermatocolax (Reinke) Bristol; C. Sarcophyci (Whitting) G. S. West; C. Cohnii E. P. Wright, and var. Porphyrae (Gardner) Bristol; and C. Moorei Gardner. The doubtful forms are C. laetum Schroeter, C. viride Schroeter, and C. rubrum (Schroeter) Freeman.—^. N. Transeau. 1223. Britton, Nathaniel Lord, and Charles Frederick Millspaugh. The Bahama Flora. Roy.Svo., viii-\-695 p. Published by the authors: New York, June 26, 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1429. 1224. Conrad, W. Contributions a I'etude des Chrysomonadines. [Contributions to the study of the Chrysomonads.] Bull. Acad. Roy. Belgique, CI. Sci. 1920^-^: 167-189. 11 fig. 1920.— The author takes up first Synura Uvella Ehr., and brings together his own observa- tions and those of others on the cell, its division, and the formation of colonies. Thallo- chrysis Pascheri is described as a new genus and species, the type of a new family, the Thallo- chrysidaceae. The taxonomic characters of Chrysapsis sphagnorum n. sp. and other indigenous species of Chrysapsis are given. — Henri Micheels. No. 2, June, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, ALGAE 177 1225. CosTANTiN, J. Travaux recents sur les Thallophytes. [Recent work on the Thallo- phytes.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X, 1 : xxx-xxxvi. 1919.— The author calls attention to studies on Laminarias, mentioning especially C. Sauvageau's contributions to knowledge of their life cycle. Reproductive bodies borne along median line of blades are asexual (zoospores) and are said to give rise on germination to minute filamentous sexual thalli which are dioe- cious. In Sacchorhiza the female thallus is obliterated and the egg is the protoplasm of the zoospore made ready for fertilization. Actual observation of fusion of gametes is not re- ported. Sauvageau's cultural methods are briefly described. Economic possibilities of marine agriculture are dwelt upon. — James P. Kelly. 1226. Fischer, L. Tabellen zur Bestimmung eiaer Auswahl von Thallophyten und Bryophyten. [Keys for the determination of a selected group of thallophytes and bryophytes.] 60 p. Bern, 191S. 1227. FoRTi, AcHiLLE. Elenco preliminare della flora pelagica del seno di Quarto del Mille presso Geneva. [Preliminary catalogue of the palagic flora of the Quarto dei Mille Bay, nearGenoa.] LaNuova Notarisia 31 : 65-72. 1920.— The paper consists of a list of 235 species of pelagic organisms, representing the groups Cystoflagellata (1), Dinoflagellata (Feridini- ales) (123), Acontae (Bacillariales) (101), Silicoflagellata (3), Coccosphaerales (1), and Chlorophyceae (6). — Marshall A. Howe. 1228. Fritsch, F. E., and E. Stevens. Contributions to our knowledge of the freshwater algae of Africa: 3. Freshwater algae (exclusive of diatoms) mainly from the Transkei Terri- tories, Cape Colony. Trans. Roy. Soc. South Africa 9: 1-72. Fig. 1-29. 1921.— An anno- tated list of algae collected in South Africa enumerating 146 species belonging to 63 genera, including Isokontae, Heterokontae, Cyanophyceae, Florideae, and Flagellata. Six new species, a new subspecies, and 13 new varieties are described. The new species are Entero- morpha basiramosa, Closterium pegleri, C. pseudolibellula, Euastrum submontanum, E. sim- pliciforme, and Spirogyra subreticulata. — E. N. Transeau. 1229. Gard, Mederic. Biologic d'une nouvelle espece d'Euglene (Euglena lunosa nov. spec). [Biology of a new species of Euglena (Euglena limosa nov. spec.).] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 1423-1425. 1919.— A brief description of the morphological character- istics and behavior of a new species of Euglena, E. limosa, and a discussion of the work of Rose Bracher [Ann. Bot. 33:93-108. 1919] on Euglena deses, Ehrenberg.— F. H. Young 1230. Ghose, S. L. Campylonema lahorense, a new member of Scytonemaceae. New Phytol. 19:35-39. Fig. 1-6. 1920.— A blue-green alga from Lahore, formerly referred by the author to Tolypothrix arenophila W. and G. S. West, is here shown to be distinct and is described under the name given. — I. F. Lewis. 1231. Ghose, S. L. The Myxophyceae of Lahore. Jour. Indian Bot. 1:8-13. 1919.— An annotated list of blue-green algae of Lahore, India. — E. N. Transeau. 1232. Grove, W. B., B. Muriel Bristol, and Nellie Carter. The flagellates and algae of the district around Birmingham. Jour. Botany 58: Suppl. 3. 1-55. 1920.— The extensive list making up the bulk of this paper was compiled almost exclusively from records made by the late G. S. West during the last 13 years of his life. The summary of species listed is as follows: Flagellates, 33; Myxophyceae, 83; Peridineae, 6; Bacillarieae, 155; Chlorophyceae, 444; and Rhodophyceae, 6. A bibliography is appended.— if. M. Wiegand. 1233. Hodgetts, William J. A new species of Spirogyra. Ann. Botany 34:519-524. PI. 22, 5 fig. 1920. — A description of Spirogyra colligata is presented. The species is remark- able in presenting a new form of cross walls between adjacent cells in the filaments. The cross walls are plane but possess an extra layer which recalls the so-called H-shaped pieces in the walls of Microspora. Conjugation may take place through the end walls as well as by the usual methods known for other species of the genus. — E. N . Transeau. BOTANICAI, ABSTRACTS, VOL.. VIII, NO. 2 178 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, ALGAE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1234. Howe, Marshall A. Algae, in Britton's "Flora of Bermuda," p. 489-540. 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 687. 1235. HoYT, W. D. Marine algae of Beaufort, N. C, and adjacent regions. Bull. U. S. Bur. Fisheries 36:367-556. PI. 84-119, 47 fig. 1920.— Following a general account of the region, the local distribution, the ecological factors, the seasonal distribution, and methods of collecting and preserving algae are discussed. Most of the bulletin is given over to a systematic account of the 133 species and varieties found. Of these, 10 are Myxophyceae, 25 Chlorophyceae, 27 Phaeophyceae, and 71 Rhodophyceae. Descriptions, critical notes, and keys are given for all the species included. The plates are largely photographs. New species described are hitophylluin medium and Streblonema invisibile. — E. N . Transeau. 1236. Lemoine, Mme. Paul [Lemoine, Marie]. Botanische Ergebnisse der Schwedis- chen Expedition nach Patagonien und dem Feuerlande 1907-1909. VII. Les Melobesiees. [Botanical results of the Swedish expedition to Patagonia and Tierra del Fuego 1907-1909. VII. The Melobesiaceae.] K. Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Handl. 61*: 1-17. PI. 1. 1920.— The author discusses and describes specimens collected by Dr. Carl Skottsberg. Five species are attributed to the island of Chiloe, 1 to the island of Huafo, 2 to Juan Fernandez, 6 to Tierra del Fuego, 1 to the island of Atalaya, and 6 to the Falkland Islands. Six species, Lithothamnium paucisporuyn, L. Caroli, L. (?) Skottsbergii, Lithophyllum (?) almanense, L. fernandezianum. and L. atalayense, are described as new. — Marshall A. Howe. 1237. Lewis, Ivey F., and Conway Zirkle. Cytology and systematic position of Por- phyridium cruentum Naegeli. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7:333-340. 2 pi. 1920. — The authors give an account of the somewhat tangled taxonomic history of this species, and discuss briefly the conflicting descriptions of it which have been presented by various writers. From the results of their own observations, the authors suggest that previous workers may have studied different growth states of the same species rather than different species. The cells are sur- rounded by jelly and are usually borne on gelatinous stalks. The chromatophore is star- shaped in resting cells, amoeboid in growing ones. The pyrenoid is distinct, easily stainable and centrally located, and is generally spheroidal. In the resting stage there is a single eccentric globule of chromatin homologous to a nucleus or nucleolus. Nuclear division is crudely mitotic. The authors suggest that for the present Porphyridium should be kept in the Bangiaceae.- — E. W. Sinnott. 1238. LiNDEMANN, E. Untersuchungcn iiber Siisswasserperidineen und ihre Variations- formen II. [Investigations of fresh-water Peridineae and their variations.] Arch. Naturgesch, Abt.A84: 121-194. Fig. 1-200. 1918 [1920].— A continuation of work reported under the same title (Arch. Protistenk. 39: 209-262. PL 17, fig. 1-144- 1919). The author discusses the grouping of the Peridineae and describes his method of distinguishing and designating forms, subvarieties, subspecies, and varieties. Descriptions are given of 17 forms, 3 sub- varieties, 31 varieties, and 14 .species. He also discusses the distribution of members of the group with reference to season and composition of the water, and their association with other plankton constituents. Additional notes are given of stations for 27 species, 3 varie- ties, and 3 forms. — C. E. Allen. 1239. Lucas, A. H. S. Algae of Commonwealth Bay. Australasian Antarctic Expedition, 1911-14, Sci. Rept. Ser. C. T^: 18 p., 9 pi. 1919. — -An account of the algae of the antarctic region with description of two new species: Chaetomorpha Mawsoni and Iridaea Mawsoni. Victoria Land and Commonwealth Bay are each credited with 14 species of which 8 are common. — E. N. Transeau. 1240. Lyle, Lilian. The marine algae of Guernsey. Jour. Botany 58: Suppl. 2. 1-53. 1920. — The present list and notes, both ecological and taxonomic, were based on collections and field studies made in 1911, 1912, and 1914. In all, 250 species and 78 varieties and forms are listed from the island. Chantransia Lorrain-Smithiae Lyle and Gelidium latifolium Born. No. 2, June, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, ALGAE 179 var. Hysirix, forma condensata Holmes are described as new. Descriptions of some less well known species are given. In the section on ecology the author discusses the algal ecology of Guernsey under 7 headings: (1) Physical position of the island; (2) tides; (3) currents; (4) nature of the substratum; (5) configuration of the coast; (6) salinity; and (7) temperature. Three main regions are recognized: Upper littoral, middle littoral and sub-littoral. These are subdivided into zones to the extent of 15 in all. The zones are mostly named from their most characteristic plant. A comparison of the Guernsey algal flora with that of the neigh- boring coast is made. An account of the uses made of algae concludes the paper. — K. M. Wiegand. 1241. Markle, M. S. Some abnormalities in plant structure. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci 1918: 117-124. Fig. 1-9. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1066. 1242. Paulson, R., and S. Hastings. The relation between the alga and fungus of a lichen. Jour. Linn. Sec. London Bot. 44:497-506, PL 21-22. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1994, 1243. Pease, Vinnie A. Taxonomy and morphology of the ligulate species of the genus Desmarestia. Publ. Puget Sound Biol. Sta. 2: 313-367. PI. 54-63. 1920.— One new species is erected, Desmarestia herbacea; and another announced., D. latissima Setchell & Gardner. There is a detailed discussion of the limits of these, and their relation to D. tabacoides Oka- mura; also a detailed discussion of the limits and history of D. ligulata (Lightfoot) Lamour- oux and D. herbacea (Turner) Lamouroux. Details of the morphology of these 4 species clear up some fine points in their development and structure. Not finding reproduction the writer seems to doubt whether Okamura found it in D. tabacoides, and states that it may have been reproduction in a species of Phycocelis growing upon the Desmarestia. — T. C. Frye. 1244. PiLGEK, R. Algae Mildbraedianae Annabonenses. Bot. Jahrb. 57: 1-14. Fig. 1-34. 1920. — This is a list of the algae collected by Dr. J. Mildbraed in 1911 on Annobon, the smallest of the Guinea Islands. Notes are given on distribution and critical features of morphology. Thirty-three species and varieties are included in the list of which the fol- lowing are described as new: Bryopsis densa, Struvea multipartita, Scinaia furcellata (Turner) Biv. var. constricta, Caulacanthus ustulatus (Mert.) Kiitz. var. fastigiatus (Kiitz) Pilger n. comb. (C. fastigiatus Kiitz), Laurencia brachyclados, Herposiphonia brachyclados, Lopho- siphonia adhaerens, Callithamnion Mildbraedii, Ceramium leptosiphon. — K. M. Wiegand. 1245. Puymaly, a. de. Sur une petite algue verte aerophile (Prasiola leprosa Kiitz.). [A small aerophilous alga (Prasiola leprosa Kiitz.).] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 189-192. 1920. — On the basis of the structure of the chromatophore and the normal reproduc- tion by aplanospores it seems desirable to transfer the form refered to by Petersen as Pleurococcus calcarius to the species named in the title. — C. H . & W . K. Farr. 1246. Raineri, R. Corallinacee del litorale tripolitano. [Corallinaceae of the Tripoli- tan littoral.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei Roma Rendiconti 01. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat. V, 29^: 282-288, 313-318. 1920.— The following algae collected by C. F. Parona in 1912-13 were studied and described after the methods ofMme.LEMOiXE: Lithothamnium crispatum Haucki, L. Haucki Rothpeltz, L. Lemormandi Areschoug, L. Philippii Foslie, L. fruticulosum (Kiitz.) Foslie, Lithophyllum expansum Philippi, L. Byssoides Lamark, L. decussatum'EUia and Solander, and Melobesia Lejolisii Rosan. — F. M. Blodgett. 1247. Raineri, R. Corallinacee del litorale tripolitano. Nota III. [The Corallinaceae of the Tripolitan littoral.] Atti R. Accad. Lincei Roma Rendiconti 01. Sci. Fis. Mat. e Nat. V, 291 : 356-358. 1920. — Oontinuing from previous articles he describes the following species of calcareous algae collected by Prof. Parona: Corallina officinalis Linn., C. medi- terranea Areschoug, and Peyssonelia rubra Grey. The first 2 are new to the Tripolitan littoral,— F. M, Blodgett. 180 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, ALGAE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1248. Saxtvageatj, C. Nouvelles observations sur I'Ectocarpus Padinae Sauv. [New observations on Ectocarpus Padinae Sauv.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 1040-1044. 1920. — A study of the reproductive structures of this parasite of Padina Pavonia reveals three sorts of plurilocular structures, namely, the megasporangia, the meiosporangia, and the antheridia. The meiosporangia and the megasporangia both produce spores which develop into plants directly. The spores of the megasporangia vary from planospores to aplano- spores. These germinate without fecundation and hence the sperms are useless structures with no function in the life-history of the plants so far as is known. There are some indica- tions that Acinetospora pusilla and Ectocarpus Padinae are different phases of the same life cycle, just as has been found in the Cutleriaceae and other families of the brown algae. — C. H. Farr. 1249. Schroder, B. Die neun wesentlichen Formentj^pen von Ceratium hirundinella O. F. Mtiller. [The nine fundamental form-types of Ceratium hirundinella.] Arch. Natur- gesch. Abt. A. 84: 222-230. Fig. 1-9. 1918 [1920].— The author distinguishes, describes, and figures 9 forms falling within the limits of this species and discusses briefly types intermediate between these forms. — C. E. Allen. 1250. Schroder, Bruno. tJber Seeballe. [Concerning Pondballs.] Naturwissen- schaften 8:799-803. 1920. — The curious spherical growths of the algae Aegagrophila, Spongomorpha, Valonia, Lithothamnium, and Rivularia, as well as similar balls of animal origin are discussed in the above article. — 0. L. Clark. 1251. Setchell, William Albert, and Nathaniel Lyon Gardner. The marine algae of the Pacific coast of North America, Part 1, Myxophyceae. Univ. California Publ. Bot. 8: 1-138. PI. 1-8. 1919.— The first part of the Marine Algae of the Pacific Coast of North Amerida, comprising an accdunt of the Myxophyceae, or blue-green algae, |is pre- sented by the authors without introduction or explanation, pending the publication of the other 3 parts. This part, otherwise, is complete in itself except as to an index. It has de- scriptions of the subclass, orders, families, genera, species, etc., together with citations of the literature, keys, distributional and critical notes. It contains no new species or new names. — W. A. Setchell. 1252. Setchell, William Albert, and Nathaniel Lyon Gardner. The marine algae of the Pacific coast of North America, Part II, Chlorophyceae. Univ. California Publ. Bot. 8: 139-374. PI. 9-SS. 1920.— This is the 2nd part of the account of the Marine Algae of the Pacific Coast of North America, issued by the authors under the same conditions and in the same form as the first [see next preceding entry]. It contains no new species or new names. — W. A. Setchell. 1253. Setchell, William Albert, and Nathaniel Lyon Gardner. Phycological contributions, I. Univ. California Publ. Bot. 7: 279-324. PL 21-31. 1920.— The following new genus, new species, and new combinations are proposed: — Hormiscia doliifera sp. nov., Spongomorpha Mertensii (Rupr.) comb, nov., Capsosiphon fulvescens (Ag.) comb, nov., Enteromorpha groenlandica (J. Ag.) comb, nov., Monostroma areolatum sp. nov., Ulva steno- phylla sp. nov., U. vexata sp. nov., U. angusta sp. nov., U. lobata (Kuetz.) comb, nov., U. expansa (Setch.) comb, nov., U. dactylifera sp. nov., U. taeniata (Setch.) comb, nov., Pra- siola nevadensis sp. nov., P. meridionalis sp. nov., P. delicata sp. nov., Entocladia cingens sp. nov., E. codicola sp. nov., Intemoretia gen. nov., /. Fryeana sp. nov., Pseudulvella prostrata (Gardner) comb, nov., Ps. applanata sp. nov., Ps. consociata sp. nov., Pseudo- pringsheimia apiculata sp. nov., Gomontia Bornetii nom. nov., G. habrorhiza sp. nov., and G. caudata sp. nov. — W. A. Setchell. 1254. Smith, Gilbert Morgan. Phytoplankton of the inland lakes of Wisconsin. I. Myxophyceae, Phaeophyceae, Heterokonteae, and Chlorophyceae exclusive of the Desmidiaceae. Bull. Wisconsin Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey 57. 243 p., 51 pi. 1920. — A detailed description of No. 2, June, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, BRYOPHYTES 181 the phytoplankton of Wisconsin lakes is presented. The species have been critically studied, and many new observations on life histories and variations are discussed. Keys to all the species are included. The following new species and varieties are described: Crucigenia truncata, Selenastrum Westii, Echinosphaerella limnetica, Tetraedron victorieae var. major, Westella linearis, Volvox mononae, Chlamydomonas epiphytica, C. dinobryoni, Rhizochrysis limnetica, Gloeothece linearis var. composita, Aphanocapsa elachista var. planctonica, Aphano- capsa endophytica, Merismopedia elegans var. major, and Chroococcus dispersus var. minor. — E. N. Transeau. 1255. TiLDEN, Josephine E. Bibliography of the literature relating to the Pacific Ocean algae and to the freshwater algae of the countries bordering upon the Pacific Ocean. 58 p. Privately published. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1606. 1256. ViiG, Olaf B. Brunalger og rodalger fra omegnen af Aalesund. [Brown and red algae from the vicinity of Aalesund, Norway.] Nyt Mag. Naturvidenskaberne 56: 167-176. 1919. — Notes are presented on distribution of algae found during summers of 1907 and 1909, chiefly on coast exposed to open sea. — A. Gundersen. 1257. WiLLE, N. Algologische Notizen XXV-XXIX. [Algological notes.] Nyt Mag. Naturvidenskaberne 56: 1-GO. 2 pi. 1919. — This series of notes deals with the following: The variability of Scenedesmus bijugatus and S. obliquus; the germination of aplanospores in Coelastrum; a list of the freshwater algae of Beeren Island; a change of the name Lyngbya epiphytica Wille to L. Willei Setchell & Gardner; and further study of Agardh's herbarium has led to additional synonyms for Gloeocapsa sanguinea Kiitz., Glaucocystis bullosa (Kiitz.) Wille, Aphanocapsa mucicola (Menegh.) Wille, Gloeocapsa magma Kiitz., Chroococcus auran- tius Wille, and Tetraspora bullosa Kiitz. — E. N . Transeau. IMORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOIMY OF BRYOPHYTES Alexander W. Evans, Editor (See also in this issue Entries 953, 976, 1066, 1211, 1224, 1291) 1258. Britton, Elizabeth G. Bahama mosses. Bryologist 24: 17-19. P^ 7. 1921. — A list of the mosses contributed to the Bahama flora, 33 species in 28 genera, is here printed for convenience of reference. Hymenostomum flavescens E. G. Britton is described and figured. — E. B. Chamberlain. 1259. Brothertjs, V. F. Contribution k la flore bryologique de I'Ecuador. [Contribution to the moss flora of Ecuador.] Rev. Bryologique 47:. 35-46. 1920. — The first part of this paper has already been abstracted (see Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 350). In this second and conclud- ing part 63 species of mosses belonging to 11 families are listed with the usual full data re- garding stations. The families most largely represented are the Hookeriaceae with 17 species, the Hypnaceae with 13, and the Sematophyllaceae with 11. The following species, 15 in all, are described as new: Crossomitrium saprophilum, C. splendens, Cyclodiction Allionii, Hook- eriopsis armata, Lepidopilum Allionii, L. argutidens, L. leucomioides , L. phyllophilum, L. subgracile, Pilotrichum armatum, P. longicaule, Pterogonium liliputanum, Rhynchostegium parvulum, Stereohypnum oxyrrhynchioides , and S. rivulare. — A. W. Evans. 1260. Garjeanne, A. J. M. Gemmen bei Gjrmnocolea inflata Dum. [Gemmae of Gymno- colea inflata.] Hedwigia 61 : 300-302. 1 fig. 1919.— The author reports the occurrence of gemmae in Gymnocolea inflata, a species which was supposed to lack them. The gemmae are angular, very pale yellowish green bodies, 20-40m in diameter, and composed of 2 unequal cells. They germinate readily and grow in the usual way. The gemmae are borne on the margins of rudimentary pale green leaves and appeared in a dried up culture which had been moistened and thus stimulated to renewed growth. It is questioned whether any of the Jungermanniae are really without gemmae. — D. Reddick. 182 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, BRYOPHYTES [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1261. Herzog, Th. Die Laubmoose der II. Freiburger Mulukkenexpedition. [The mosses of the second Freiburg expedition to the Molucca (Spice) Islands.] Hedwigia 61: 286-299. PL 3, 7 fig. 1919.— The collections here reported upon were made by K. Deniger, director of the expedition, and E. Stresemann, who accompanied him as zoologist. Most of the specimens came from the islands of Ceram and Burn and from the Malayan peninsula. The total number of species listed is 66, of which the following are described as new: Dicrano- loma braunjelsioides from Ceram; Ctenidium moluccense and Hypnodendron caducifolium from Buru; Ectropothecium serratum, Homaliodendron pinnatelloides, H. intermedium, and Taxithelium Denigeri from the Malayan peninsula. Fifteen of the other species, which bear Herzog's name as authority, had already been published in a paper dated 1916. In addition several new varieties, forms, and combinations are proposed. The species illustrated are Hymenodontopsis Stresemanii Herzog, the 2 new species of Homaliodendron, and H. flabella- tum (Dicks.) Fleischer. — D. Reddick. 1262. Holzinger, John M. On our American form of Timmia megapolitana Hedw. Bryologist 23: 86-88. Fig. 1-5. 1920.— The American specimens referred to Timmia mega- politana are shown to differ from the European in several respects. The leaves, for example, are less papillose and less serrate, the leaf-base is more hyaline, the antheridia are yellow, and the calyptra remains attached. The actual status of the American plant is at present undecided. — E. B. Chamberlain. 1263. Holzinger, John M. Dixon and Watts on Antarctic mosses. [Rev. of: Dixon, H. N., AND W. W. Watts. Mosses. Australasian Antarctic Expedition Sci. Rept. Ser. C. 7: 1-9. 1918 (see Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1973).] Bryologist 23: 47. 1920.— The reviewer com- mends the conservative tendency of the authors in their treatment of the genus Bryum.—E. B. Chamberlain. 1264. LoRCH, WiLHELM. Ubcr das Vorkommen von Calciumoxalatkrystallen in den Sporogonien von Polytrichum commune L. [On the occurrence of crystals of calcium oxalate in the sporogonia of Polytrichum commune.] Hedwigia 60: 342-349. 1919.— The presence of crystals of calcium oxalate in the capsules of Polytrichum commune is reported. Other species of Polytrichum examined failed to show them, and they have not been demonstrated in any other bryophytes. The crystals are most abundant in the epidermal cells of the spore-case but occur also in the columella, the walls of the spore-sac and the operculum. In discussing the structure of the capsule certain dorsiventral peculiarities are emphasized.— A. W. Evans. 1265. LuisTER, A. Les mousses de Madere. [Mosses of Madeira.] Broteria Ser. Bot. 18: 99-120. 1920.— The present article (the ninth of the series) contains analytic keys to all the families, genera, and species of mosses (through Fissidens), which occur in Madeira and the adjoining islands. The keys incorporate brief descriptions and have references to the author's previously published articles. [See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 757; 3, Entries 2447, 2448; 6, Entry 156; 7, Entry 351.]— E. B. Chamberlain. 1266. Machado, Ant6nio. Catalogo discritivo de Briologia Portuguesa. [Descriptive catalogue of Portuguese mosses.] 143 p. Lisbon, 1919.— This catalogue lists all the species and varieties of mosses occurring in Portugal. Of most species the author has seen authentic material; in the remaining cases he cites authoritative records. To facilitate determina- tions analytic keys based upon easily determined vegetative characters are included, and each species or variety is characterized in 4 or 5 lines of description in the body of the work. In all cases where fuller descriptions are not accessible in standard works, a foot-note gives the original description in full. The total census, omitting varieties, shows 7 species of Sphagnales, 4 of Andreaeales, and 313 of Bryales. The classification follows that of Dixon & Jameson's Handbook. For each form there is a detailed statement of distribution for Portugal, definite localities and collectors being cited without generalized statements. Fol- lowing the catalogue there is a glossary, a page of errata, a page of addenda, and a complete No. 2, June, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, FUNGI, ETC. 183 index. The author has not hesitated to revive old names or to reduce species to varieties. There are in consequence over 20 new combinations, although no forms whatsoever are pro- posed as new. The new specific combinations proposed are the following, Machado being the authority in each case: Camptoihecnim philippeanum (Spruce), Cinclidotus mucronatus (Brid.), Plagiopus ithyphrjllus (Brid.), P. pomiformis (Hedw.), P. strictus (Brid.), Tortula meridionalis (Luisier), and Trichostomum humile (Hedw.). — E. B. Chamberlain. 1267. MoLLER, H. Beitrage zur Moosflora Javas, Straits Settlements und Birmas. [Con- tributions to the moss flora of Java, the Straits Settlements and Burma.] Hedwigia 60: 313- 330. 5 fig. 1919. — The author enumerates 206 species of mosses which he collected in 1897, giving definite localities in each case. Of the species listed 194 came from Java, 28 from the Straits Settlements, and 14 from Burma, most of the species from the last 2 regions being recorded also from Java. Three of the Javan species are likewise listed from Sumatra. The specimens were all determined by V. F. Brotherus and the following 3 species, all from Java, are proposed as new on his authority and figured: Acanthocladium scabrifolium, Rhizo- gonium salakanum, and Stereophyllum MoUeri. — A. W. Evans. 1268. Pearson, Wm. Hy. Aplozia Pendletonii Pearson. Bryologist 23:84-85. Fig. 1-3. 1920. — This note completes the description of a species of hepatic recently proposed as new [see Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 352].— £^. B. Chamberlain. 1269. Pearson, Wm. Hy. Porella rivularis (Kees) Lindb. Bryologist 23: 85-86. 1920.— This note, which is based on material from Oregon collected by C. Potter, deals with the synonymy and distinctive characters of the hepatic, Porella rivularis.— E. B. Chamberlain. 1270. PoTiER DE LA Varde, R. Observations sur quelques especes du genre Fissidens. [Obsen'ations on certain species of the genus Fissidens.] Rev. Bryologique 47: 33-35. 1920. — The earlier parts of the series to which the present paper belongs have already been ab- stracted (see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 627; 6, Entry 158; 7, Entry 1975). In this part Fissidens Monguilloni Theriot and its occurrence in the French departments of la Mayenne and la Manche are discussed. The distinctive features of the species are described, several speci- mens from the departments in question are referred to it, and the opinion is advanced that it has a wider distribution than had been supposed. — A. W. Evans. 1271. PoTiER DE LA Varde, R. Sur le pedicelle du Stereophyllum Bremondii Th. et P. de la V. [On the seta of Sterophyllum Bremondii.] Rev. Bryologique 47: 35. 1920.— The seta of Stereophijllum Bremondii is smooth, while that of the closely related S. Blatteriis papillose. Through an oversight this distinction was not brought out in the original descrip- tion of S. Bremondii. (See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1976.) — A. W. Evans. MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, LICHENS, BACTERIA, AND MYXOMYCETES H. M. FiTZPATRiCK, Editor (See also in this issue Entries 953, 1074, 1111, 1211, 1344, 1347, 1348, 1349, 1350, 1352, 1353, 1354, 1355, 1356, 1382, 1386, 1390, 1392, 1395, 1398, 1402, 1405, 1409, 1410, 1541) FUNGI 1272. Adams, J. F. Observations on the infection of Crataegus by Gymnosporangium. Mycologia 13: 45-49. Fig. 1-4. 1921. — Ten species of Crataegus not previously reported as hosts for GTjmnosporangium germinate and 6 not previously reported for G. globosum are included. — H. R. Rosen. 184 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, FUNGI, ETC. [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1273. Arthur, J. C. Nineteen years of culture work. Mycologia 13: 12-23. 1921.— A discussion of the writer's conception as to what criteria must be used in delimiting rust species, and an exposition of various changes in this conception as brought about by the gradually increasing knowledge of the rusts. Cultural work (infection experiments) was primarily undertaken to aid in a proper taxonomic treatment of species and the results of 19 years of such effort are shown to have aided (1) in completing the life cycles for many species, (2) in recognizing races within a species, and (3) in assuring a liberal point of view concerning the fixity of such features as open or covered telia, 1- or 2-celled teliospores ( Uromyces and Puc- cinia), variation in nvunber of the pores of the urediniospore, and in the position of these pores. By means of cultural work much progress was made in delimiting a number of dis- tinct species among the grass rusts possessing sub-epidermal telia and in reducing to syn- onymy a large number of names. American Carex rusts, all of which had borne the names Puccinia caricis or P. caricina, were separated into a number of distinct species. The idea, held when the cultural work began, that hosts of any one species of rust would be found to be closely related was upset when it was shown that the aecial hosts of Puccinia subnitens be- longed to a number of different families. The conception of species was further modified when it was found that collections of a single rust on different hosts show marked morpho- logical differences. Cultures also showed that teliospores among the grass rusts are not neces- sarily resting spores. "The culture work began with the too prevalent idea that all rusts could be expected to conform in general to the well known Puccinia graminis. It closed with the conviction that the rusts are far too diversified in their morphology, their numerous characters, their physiological adaptations, and their range of hosts, to be represented by Puc- cinia graminis in more than one out of numerous aspects." — H. R. Rosen. 1274. Arthur, J. C. New species of Uredineae XII. Bull. TorreyBot. Club 47: 465-480. IQ20.—Melampsora americana, Puccinia off uscata, P. senilis, P. gulosaB.. S. Jackson, Uredo contraria, U. nitidula, Aecidium Ixorae, Ae. indecisum, Ae. Mitellae Ellis & Ev., Ae. sub- simulans Arthur & Mains, Ae. Betheli, Ae. arctoum, Ae.renatum, Ae.arcularium, Ae. Liabi, Ae. Batesii, Ae. Mesadeniae, and Ae. praecipuum are described as new species. The fol- lowing new names and new combinations are also given: Pucciniasirum americanum (Farl.) comb, nov., Puccinia proximella (Arth.) comb, nov., P. hiascens nom. nov., P. Heterisiae H. S. Jackson nom. nov., Uromyces imperfectus nom. nov., and Uredo laeticolor nom. nov. — P. A. Munz. 1275. Bal, S. N. Commentationes Mycologicae. 8. Pseudoperonospora cubensis (B. & C.) Roxten, on Trichosanthes dioica Roxb. Jour. Dept. Sci. Calcutta Univ. 3: 1-3. Jt fig. 1920.— The first record of the fungus from Bengal. A short description is g\\QVL.—W infield Dudgeon. 1276. Bal, S. N. Commentationes Mycologicae. 9. Cercospora personata (B. & C.) Ellis, on Arachis hypogaea Linn. Jour. Dept. Sci. Calcutta Univ. 3:4-6. 4 fig- 1920.— A record of the occurrence of the fungus in Bengal. — Winfield Dudgeon. 1277. Bal, S. N., and K. G. Banerjee. Commentationes Mycologicae. 10. Rhinocla- dium corticolum Mass., on the bark of Mangifera indica Linn. Jour. Dept. Sci. Calcutta Univ. 3: 7-8. 5 fig. 1920.— A record of the occurrence of the fungus in BengaX.— Winfield Dudgeon. 1278. B ARLOT, J. Sur de nouvelles reactions colorees utilisables pour la diagnose d'especes mycologiques. [On new color reactions useful in distinguishing species of fungi.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171 : 1014-1016. 1920.— An aqueous solution of potash in 20-40 per cent concentration is recommended. It can be used to distinguish the poisonous Mycena pura from the edible Laccaria laccata, the former giving a yellow and the latter a dark brown color. Gomphidius viscidus gives a violet brown, G. glutinosus a feeble yellowish brown, and Amanita junquilla an orange yellow color; and Lactarius turpis yields a variety of color reactions with various acids and alkalies. — C. H. Farr. No. 2, June, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, FUNGI, ETC. 185 1279. Blasdals, Walter C. A preliminary list of the Uredinales of California. Univ. California Publ. Bet. 7: 101-157. 1919. — A list of the rusts of California intended to assist collectors in naming new collections and to tabulate all the known forms and their host plants. Some 23G species or forms are enumerated, arranged under the genera according to the families of the host-plants they inhabit. — W. A. Setchell. 1280. BoNAR, Lee. Wilt of white clover, due to Brachysporium trifolii. Phytopath. 10: 435-441. 3 fig. 1920. — A disease of the foliage of white clover, Trifolium repens, found on a lawn near Washington, D. C, is described. Some cultural characters and a technical descrip- tion of Brachysporium trifolii Kauffman are given. — F. R. Jones. 1281. Britton, Nathaniel Lord, and Charles Frederick Millspaxjgh, The Bahama Flora. Roy. 8vo., viii -\- 695 p. Published by the authors: New York, June 26, 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1429. 1282. Brown, Nellie A. A Pestalozzia producing a tumor on the sapodilla tree. Phy- topath. 10: 383-394, 5 fig. 1920.— This disease occurred in Buena Vista, Florida. The re- sults of inoculation both upon sapodilla and upon other hosts are reported. The spores are described. Favorable media are mentioned. Comparison with other tumor-forming species of Pestalozzia indicates that this is a separate species. The name Pestalozzia scirrofaciens n. sp. is suggested. Control consists of destruction of infected trees. — Ruth G. Bitterman. 1283. Church, Margaret B. Laboratory experiments on the manufacture of Chinese Ang Khak in the United States. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12:45-^6. 1920.— The charac- teristics of red rice are due to a mold, Monascus purpureas. — Henry Schmitz. 1284. Cleland, J. Burton, and Edwin Cheel. Australian Fungi: Notes and descrip- tions. No. 2. — The Sclerotia-forming polypores of Australia, Trans, and Proc. Roy. Soc. South Australia 43: 11-22. PI. 1-5. 1919.— There is brought together within the limits of the article all that is known of the sclerotial forms of polypores of Australia. Two are de- scribed as possessing true sclerotia: Polyporus mylittae Cooke and Massee and Polyporus minor-mijlittae. Two are described as possessing false sclerotia: Polyporus tumulosus Cooke and Polyporus basilapiloides (McAlp. and Tepper). The article is accompanied by photo- graphs of sclerotia and of sclerotia to which fruiting bodies are attached. [See also Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1070; 8, Entry 1285.]— J. H. Fault. 1285. Cleland, J. Burton, and Edwin Cheel. Australian fungi : Notes and descriptions. No. 3. Trans, and Proc. Roy. Soc. South Australia 43: 262-315. PL 28-29. 1919.— This paper is a continuation of two previous ones on Australian fungi. The following species are described as new: Amanitopsis punctata, Clitocybe paraditopa, Cantharellus lilacinus, C. imperatae, C. nigripedes, C. corrugatus, Russula Flocktonae, R. erumpens, Mycena banksiae, M. coccineus, Pleurotus subostreatus, and Boletus scarlatinu^. [See also Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1070; 8, Entry 1284.]—/. H. Faull. 1286. CouTiNHO, Antonio Xavier Pereira. Eubasidiomycetes Lusitanici Herbarii Universitatis Olisiponensis. [Eubasidiomycetes of Portugal represented in the herbarium of the University of Lisbon.] 195 p. Manuel Lucas Torres: Lisbon, 1919.— A taxonomic paper giving descriptions of all the Eubasidiomycetes of Portugal as represented in the hetbariiim of the University of Lisbon. The paper is not illustrated. It is provided with keys to the genera. A total of 511 species is included. — H. M. Fitzpatrick. 1287. Davis, J. J. [Note under "Notes and Brief Articles."] Mycologia 13: 58. 1921. — Records 30 collections of Pucciniastrum arcticum from Wisconsin, all on Rubus triflorus. — H. R. Rosen. 1288. Diehl, William W. The fungi of the Wilkes Expedition. Mycologia 13:38-41. 1921. — Attention is called to 8 species of fungi described as new by Berkeley and Curtis, most of which heretofore have been overlooked. — H. R. Rosen. 186 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY. FUNGI, ETC. [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1289. DupRENOY, Jean. The occurrence of Actinomyces-like endotrophic mycorhiza. New Phytol. 19: 40-43. Fig. 1-5. 1920. — Actinomyces is held responsible for 2 cases of endotrophic mycorhiza. This conclusion demands for proof further investigation of the cases and also a precise definition of the genus Actinomyces. Descriptions are given of the morphology and staining reactions of the mycorhiza.— 7. F. Lewis. 1290. Fink, Bruce, and Sylvia C. Fitson. Ascomycetes new to the flora of Indiana. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918:264-275. 1920.— The authors list 135 species distributed among 43 families, with host or substratuto and county. Many of these Ascomycetes are associated with algae in lichens. Two species, Pyrenopsis fuscoatra Fink sp. nov. and Ver- rucaria sordida Fink sp. nov., are new.— F. C. Anderson. 1291. Fischer, L. Tabellen zur Bestimmung einer Auswahl von Thallophyten und Bryo- phyten. [Keys for the determination of a selected group of thallophytes and bryophytes.] 60 p. Bern, 1918.— This series of keys was prepared for the use of students in the University of Bern. The first edition appeared in 1898 and the second in 1903. After the death of the author, a rovised edition was pilblished by his son, E. Fischer, in 1910, and the present publication is the second edition of the revision. Representatives of the myxomycetes, bacteria, algae, fungi, liverworts, and mosses are included, more attention being given to the fungi than to any other group. — A. W. Evans. 1292. Fries, Thore C. E. Bidrag til Tromso Amts gasteromycetflora. [Contribution to the flora of gasteromycetes of Tromso Amt, Norway.] Bergens Mus. Aarbok Naturv. Raekke 1917-18: 10 p. 1920. — Notes on species of Lycoperdaceae and Nidulariaceae. Calvatia saccata (Vahl) Morg. var, alpina n. var. is given. — A. Gundersen. 1293. Godfrey, G. H. Sclerotinia Ricini n. sp. on the castor bean (Ricinus communis). Phytopath. 9: 565-567. PI. 40-41. 1919.— A hitherto undescribed species of Botrytis, caus- ing a serious disease of the castor bean, is shown to be the conidial condition of a species of Sclerotinia which is here described as S. Ricini n. sp The Botrytis was repeatedly obtained from single ascospore isolations. — H. M. Fitzpatrick. 1294. Grove, W. B. Mycological notes, V. Jour. Botany 58:249-251. 1920 (continued from Jour. Botany 57 : 210. 1919, and to be continued) .—The writer presents additional notes on Russula claroflava Grove, and a revised description of that species. It was found to grow always on grassy ground among trees on the borders of a sphagnum bog. Boletus san- guineus Withering was rediscovered by the writer, and a description is given. It is noted that a certain number of closely related species would be better treated as subdivisions of a comprehensive species, e.g., B. chrysenteron. Monilia candicans Sacc. is redescribed from a specimen obtained in Cofton Park. It is probably the same as Monilia caespitosa Relh. about which there has been much doubt. The statement of authors that the spores are in ternate spikes is misleading, as ternate spikes are only occasional. A brief note in correction of "Mycological notes IV" is appended. The corrections concern an unnamed species of Phyllosticta, and Sphaerulina intermixta f. valde-evoluta. — K. M. Wiegand. 1295. Herrmann, Emil. Pilzschaedlinge an Drogen. [Fungi detrimental to drugs.] Pharm. Zentralhalle 61 : 95-100. 1920.— A detailed study of the action of various kinds of fungi on drugs. The forms enumerated include Myxomycetes, Peronosporaceae, Perisporiaceae, Ustilaginales, Uredinales, Exobasidiales, and Exoascaceae.— Tf. Engelhardt. 1296. Jones, Fred Ruel, and Charles Drechsler. Crownwart of alfalfa caused by Urophlyctis alfalfae. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 295-323. PL 47-56. 1920 [1921].— Crownwart has been known in the United States for about 10 years. It is still confined to Pacific slope sections and is not a serious disease. Urophlyctis alfalfae seems to be limited to Medicago sativa and M. falcata. The disease originates in infection of very young buds in early spring; the foliar elements of these develop into abnormalities not involving the mature structures of No. 2, June, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, FUNGI, ETC. 187 root or stem. In the presence of abundant moisture, the galls complete development in early summer; most of them decay rapidly but some live over winter. The fungous body con- sists of turbinate cells and resting spores. At all stages of development of the gall char- acteristic masses of brown resting spores are present. The first turbinate cell is the imme- diate development of the infecting body and becomes polynucleate; from this uninucleate peripheral segments are cut off at the apex. A hyphal structure of limited growth develops from each of these; its expanded nucleate termination constitutes the turbinate cell of the next succession. At its mature stage the turbinate cell bears a branched apical haustoriimi, the axis of which proliferates at its tip a globose expansion into which the polynucleate pro- toplasm passes to produce the resting spore; the latter is characterized by 9 to 15 branched haustoria zonately arranged, or only by scars of these when ripe. No evidence of any sexual process in the production of these spores was found. — The abundant development of the dis- ease is associated with excessive soil moisture during the infection period and control meas- ures leading to reduction of soil moisture at this time are indicated. — F. Weiss. 1297. Keissler,Karl VON Revision des SauterschenPilzherbars. [Revision of Sauter's fungus herbarium.] Ann. Naturhist. Hofmus. Wien 31:77-138. 1917. — There is a list of Sauter's mycological publications and an introduction. The special part consists of 3 sub- divisions: (1) A list of Sauter's species based upon types in his herbarium, (2) a list of Sauter's species of which there are no specimens in the herbarium, and (3) a list of species other than Sauter's of which there are specimens in the herbarium. Several herbarium names credited to Sauter are given but are not accompanied by formal descriptions. Peziza alboflava Saut. (Lachnea alboflava Sacc.) is technically a new combination concerning which there is a note. The list is amply annotated. — A. S. Hitchcock. 1298. Kops, Jan, F. W. van Eeden, en L. Vuyck. Flora Batava. Afbeelding en besch- rijving der Nederlandsche gewassen. [Flora Batavia. Illustrations and descriptions of plants of Holland.] Parts 400-401. Folio, pi. 1993-2000 [colored]. Martinus Nijhoff: 's-Graven- hage, 1920. — The present parts contain illustrations and descriptions of several vascular and non- vascular plants. The non-vascular plants are: Inocybe fastigiata Schaeff., Tricholoma cerinum P., Lepiota cinnabarina Schwein., Peniophora quercina Cooke, Cortinarius (Myxa- cium) vibratilis Ft., Marasmius prasiosmus Ft., and Clitocybe claviceps P. [See also Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 635; 5, Entry 2347; 7 Entry 1457; 8, Entry 1541.]— J. M. Greenman. 1299. Leiby, R. W. The larger corn stalk borer. Bull. North Carolina Dept. Agric. 41": 5-85. S7 fig. 1920. — Several fungus parasites are mentioned in the discussion of the biology of this insect. These include Isaria barberi Gd., Hirsutella sp., and Metarrhizium anisopliae (Metsch.) Sor. — F. A. Wolf. 1300. Mayor, Eugen. Notes mycologiques. [Mycological notes.] Bull. Soc. NeuchA- teloise Sci. Nat. 42:62-113. 1916/17 [1918]. — Parasitic fungi of Neuchatel. Puccinia cen- taur eae-rhapontici on Centaur ea rhaponticum is new. Aecidium on Crepis biennis is connected with Puccinia pentasiti-pulchellae Liidi, and that on Helleborus foetidus with Melampsora abieticaprearum Tub. [Through Abst. by Matouschbk in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkrankh . 30: 147. 1920.]— D. Reddick. 1301. Meinecke, E. p. Facultative heteroecism in Peridermium cerebrum and Perider- mium harknessii. Phytopath. 10: 270-297. 2 fig. 1920.— Additions to the California host lists of Peridermium cerebrum and Cronartium cerebrum are reported. Direct infections have resulted from inoculations of several species of pine with aeciospores of Peridermium cerebrum. P. harknessii Moore retains its ability to produce uredinia and telia on scrophu- lariaceous hosts, but, in addition, the aeciospores produce galls and aeciospores on the several species of pine tried. The resulting aeciospores germinate like true aeciospores. The heteroecism of P. cerebrum and P. harknessii is facultative. — G. Wineland. 188 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, FUNGI, ETC. [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1302. OvBRHOLTS, L. O. Some New Hampshire fungi. Mycologia 13:24-37. 1921. — A list of 195 species of fungi under 77 different genera collected mainly by the writer, the Eu-Basidiomycetes being best represented. Hosts or substrata, and locality are given under each species. — H. R. Rosen. 1303. [Pennell, Francis W.] Index to American mycological literature. Mycologia 13:62-65. 1921. 1304. PuTTEMANS, Arsene. Glocosporium Bombacis, n. sp. Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 7: 74-75. 1920. — This fungus was found in the vicinity of Sao Paulo, Brazil, on the bark of young shoots of Bomhax (Pachyra) insignis, forming irregular, clear, brown spots later becoming darker. On these spots were found acervuli of what appears to be an unde- scribed Glocosporium. The bark on the affected shoots becomes light colored and hard. New shoots arise below the diseased ones and these soon become affected with disease. A technical diagnosis of the fungus is given. — C .L. Shear. 1305. Rabak, F. The effect of mold upon the oil of corn. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 46-48. 1920. — The spoilage of corn from the growth of mold is noticeably manifested in connection with the fatty oil. — Henry Schmitz. 1306. Ramsbottom, J. Canvas-destroying fungi. Nature 105:563-564. 1920. — War experiences have shown this to be an important question, especially on "flax made" canvas. Short account of investigations by W. Broughton-Alcock in Malta, Italy (Journal of Royal Army Medical Corps, Dec, 1919), shows species of Macrosporium and Stemphylium to be principal agents. Variation in color of spots due to representatives of several other genera. Mycelium was found in canvas ready for making into tents, and it is suggested that its de- velopment began during the retting process (not found on new cotton canvas). Willesden method (cuprammonium) and "cutch" treatment prevented growth of fungi. Soft soap, 1 to 5000 solution, followed by a mixture of 1 per cent alum and CuSO* greatly inhibited growth and gave good results at Malta. Author states that in Saloniki sodium chromate proved superior to these. — O. A. Stevens. 1307. Ramsbottom, J, [Rev. of: Church, A. H. Elementary notes on the moi*phology of fungi. Bot. Mem. [Oxford] 7. 29 p. 1920.] Jour. Botany 58: 181. 1920. 1308. Roberts, J. W. Clitocybe sudorifica as a poisonous mushroom. Mycologia 13: 42-44. 1921. — Detailed symptoms of poisoning due to Clitocijbe sudorifica, which thus far has been distinguished from C. dealbata only by its effects on the mycophagist. — H. R. Rosen. 1309. Salisbury, E. J. Botany. Sci. Prog. [London] 15:31-34. 1920.— A review of work done on Actinomyces. — /. L. Weimer. 1310. Seaver, Fred J. Fungi [Moulds, blights, and mushrooms], in Britton's "Flora of Bermuda," p. 479-^89. 1918. — The author of this chapter presents a general account of the fungi of Bermuda with notes on the various groups and species included. Reference is made to the "Memoirs of the New York Botanical Garden" for August, 1916, where a complete list of the fungi of Bermuda is recorded. No new species of fungi are described in the present volume. [See Bot. Absts. 8, Entries 687, 1320.] — J. M. Greenman. 1311. Stakman, E. C, and L. J. Krakover. Puccinia graminis on native Berberis canadensis. Phytopath. 10:305-306. 1920. — Puccinia graminis was observed for the first time naturally infecting Berberis canadensis, the infection being distributed over 8 counties and found spreading to alternate hosts. — E. K. Seymour. 1312. Stevens, F. L. Perithecia with an interfascicular pseudoparenchyma. Bot. Gaz. 68: 474-476. PI. Dec, 1919. — A Porto Rican fungus, collected on Bromelia pinguin, shows upon examination a pseudoparenchyma occupying the center of the perithecium, instead No. 2, June, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, FUNGI, ETC. 189 of the usual cavity partially filled by asci and paraphyses. This condition suggests the situa- tion in Penicillium or in the Plectascineae, except that here the asci arise at the base of the ascocarp. The fungus therefore is placed in a new genus, Desmotascus, and the species is named D. portoricensis. — H. C. Cowles. 1313. TisDALE, W. B. Iris leaf spot caused by Didymellina iridis. Phytopath. 10: 148- 163. 6 fig. 1920. — The causal fungus, usuall}^ known in its conidial state as Heterosporium gracile, is traced through its life cycle, and its taxonomy, morphology, and host relationships are considered in detail. The removal of dead infected leaves in spring before new foliage appeared controlled the disease. — F. R. Jones. 1314. ToRREND, C. Les Polyporacees du Bresil: Polyperacees stipitees. [Stipitate Bra- zilian polypores.] Broteria: Ser. Bot. 18: 121-143. PI. 5-8. 1920. — The article contains a key to the Brazilian genera of stipitate polypores, a discussion of 34 species of the genus Amauroderma, and a key for separation of the species. Each species is given a brief techni- cal description in addition to less formal observations. A. Gusmanianum, A. picipes, and A. Mosselmanii are proposed as new. Photogravure plates illustrate the gross characters of 11 species, or varieties. — E. B. Chamberlain. 1315. Weidman, Fred D. Penicillium brevicaule var. hominis Saccardo 1877, Brumpt and Langeron, 1910, in an American case of ringworm of the toes. Arch. Dermatol, and Syphilol. 2:703-715. Fig. 1-H. 1-920. LICHENS 1316. Bachmann, E., and Fr. Bachmann, Litauische Flechten. [Lithuanian lichens.] Hedwigia 61: 308-342. 1919.— Collections made in vicinity of Lake Narotsch, 55''N., 27°E. First 12 pages devoted to physiographic, climatological, and plant geographic features of the region with observations on the lichen vegetations of different substrata — soils, stones, trees, etc. — The 204 species found are arranged in systematic order and aside from localities there are brief notes on many species. Acarospora globosa (Koerb.) is described fully. — Many species which usually are sterile were found fruiting abundantly. Six lichen parasites are mentioned. A comparison with other lichen floras is included. — D. Reddick. 1317. DuRiETZ, G. Einar. Nagra lavar fran det 16: e skandinaviska naturforskarsmotets exkursion i Bergens skargard. [Some lichens from the excursion of the 16th meeting of the Scandinavian naturalists among islands near Bergen.] Bergens Mus. Aarbok Nat. Raekke 1917-1918: 26-29. 1920. — An annotated list of species. — A. Gundersen. 1318. Fink, Brxjce, and Sylvia C. Fuson. Ascomycetes new to the flora of Indiana. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918: 264-275. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 1290. 1319. Mereschkovskt, Const. Le Parmelia camtschadalis existe-t-il? [Does P. camt- schadalis exist?] Hedwigia 61: 303-307. 1919.— A polemic dedicated to V. P. Savicz. The type is in the herbarium of the Conservatoire Botanique at Geneva. — D. Reddick. 1320. Riddle, Lincoln W. Lichenes, in Britton's "Flora of Bermuda," p. Ji.70-4.79. 1918. — The author of this chapter presents in systematic order a general account of the lich- ens, with brief notes on salient characters of the families and species represented. Refer- ence is made to a previous article on the Bermuda lichen flora in the "Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club" for April, 1916, where an enumeration of these lichens is given with descrip- tions of new species and varieties. [See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 1062; 8, Entries 687, 1310.] — J. M. Greenman. 1321. Shirley, John. The thallus of the genus Parmelia. Papers and Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasmania 1918: 53-68. 1919. 190 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, FUNGI, ETC. [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, BACTERIA 1322. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Gtjerney-Dixon, S. The transmutation of bacteria. xviii + 179 p. University Press: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 131-132. 1920.— "Deals with certain variations, morphological and physiological, which are encountered amongst patho- genic bacteria. *♦♦ mainly a study of bacteriological literature in the English language." — 0. A. Stevens. 1323. Anontmotjs. [Rev. of: Tanner, F. W. Bacteriology and mycology of foods, vi + 592 p. John Wiley & Sons, New York, Chapman & Hall, London: 1919.] Sci. Prog. [Lon- don] 15: 160. 1920. 1324. B[erget], D. H. [Rev. of: Hort, Edward C. The reproduction of aerobic bac- teria. Jour. Hygiene 18:369-408. PI. 4-7. 1920.] Absts. Bact. 4: Entry 893. 1920.— Hort's definition of involution forms of bacteria ("An involution form of bacterium can only mean a bacterium which is undergoing retrogressive, or perhaps , degenerative changes. It is strictly speaking, a sterile organism which is not only incapable of maintaining its reproduc- tive activity, but is also incapable of maintaining its integrity of form.") is at variance with the usual conception of what is meant by the term involution form as it includes also what is commonly meant by the term degeneration form. Hort studied Bacillus typhosus in 4 per cent glucose broth and 4 per cent glucose agar. These media are too high in sugar and become too acid for normal nutrition. "Any opinion formed oh the modes of reproduction of bac- teria when placed under such abnormal conditions must be accepted with great caution." Hort's conclusion that bacteria multiply not only "by the simple process of transverse binary fission into two equal parts," but that "under certain circumstances the lower bacteria are able to reproduce themselves by the production of fertile branches and buds, and by endo- genous production of gonidial bodies, in addition to the more familiar method of equal binary fission," is questioned because "it is evident that any alteration of the osmotic tension of culture media will affect the normal process of fission, but these abnormal figures, which everyone has seen, should not be regarded as being modes of reproduction as Hort believes, but rather, abortive attempts of fission." [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 1328.] — D. Reddick. 1325. Conn, H. J., and R. S. Breed. A suggestion as to the flagellation of the organisms causing legume nodules. Science 51: 391. 1920. — For some time there has been dispute as to whether legume nodule organisms have 1 or several flagella. Burrell and Hansen claimed that they were monotrichic, whereas various others have observed peritrichic flagella. Hansen now says that he, too, has found peritrichic flagella in cultures from clover, vetch, and alfalfa. Hence he suggests that there may be 2 different groups. The question is raised by the authors whether the cowpea and soy bean organisms may not be monotrichic in young cultures and peritrichic when they are older. — A. H. Chivers. 1326. Ellis, David. Iron-depositing bacteria. [Rev. of Harder, Edmund Cecil. Iron depositing bacteria and their geologic relations. U. S. Geol. Surv. Professional Paper 113. 89 p., pi. 1-12, fig. 1-U. 1919.] Nature 105: 727. 1920. 1327. H., R. T. [Rev. of: Ellis, D. Iron bacteria, xix + 179 p., 5 pi. Methuen and Co.: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 323. 1920. 1328. Hort, Edward C. The cultivation of aerobic bacteria from single cells. Jour. Hygiene 18: 361-368. 1 fig. 1920. — Each of the present methods of isolating single cells (Indian ink, squared coverslip, capillary tube, droplet, and Barber methods) is unsatisfac- tory. Objections to each method are stated. — For immersion lens examination the following method is found effective: Etch small rings on coverslips; sterilize slips and slides; spread a thin layer of agar on the slides; prepare a dilute culture and place the smallest possible drop- let of it in the center of a ring; invert slips on the slide and examine to see whether a single cell is present or not; slides bearing a single organism are incubated and examined at fre- No. 2, June, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, FUNGI, ETC. 191 quent intervals until a colony has developed from which tube cultures may be secured. — When the object is simply to secure a pure culture from a single cell the following method is used: Spread hot nutrient agar over sterilized glass slides; when cool, inoculate from a dilute culture by means of a glass rod; cover the agar with a thin sheet of perforated celluloid; place sterilized coverslips over the perforations and incubate; examine the circlets of medium in the minute moist chambers until one is found which contains a single cell; center the colony in the field, replace the lens with an accurately centered needle (method described), touch the colony, and transfer in the usual way; examine to see that the colony has been touched. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 1324.]— D. Reddick. 1329. HoRT, Edward C. The reproduction of aerobic bacteria. Jour. Hygiene 18: 369- 408. PI. ^-7. 1920. — A culture oi Bacillus typhosus was secured from a single cell and studied in 4 per cent glucose broth or 4 per cent glucose agar. Numerous types of organisms, which are illustrated, developed in the cultures. This supports conclusions previously published that the lower bacteria are able to reproduce themselves ' 'by the production of fertile branches and buds, and by the endogenous production of gonidial bodies, in addition to the more familiar method by equal binary fission." These are not regarded as involution forms. The latter are defined as "strictly speaking, a sterile organism which is not only incapable of maintaining its reproduction activity, but is also incapable of maintaining its integrity of form."— Part 2 (p. 382 to 407) is entitled "the effect of the reproductive life of bacteria on the agglutinability of bacterial emulsions." [See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 1324.]— D. Reddick. 1330. Kawakama, Koichiro, and Stjehiro Yoshida. Bacterial disease on Milletia plant. (Bacillus milletiae n. sp.) Bot. Mag. Tokyo 34: 110-115. PL 2. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1190. 1331. KosER, Stewart A. A bacteriological study of canned ripe olives. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 375-379. 1921. — In a bacteriological examination of 480 commercial containers of ripe olives, living microorganisms were found in practically every sample which showed either a "swelled" condition or had a bad odor. Sixteen different kinds of organisms were found. Bacteria were commonest, members of the colon group predominating. — Viable organisms were found in a small percentage of containers which were ^'normal." "These were either aerobic, spore-forming bacilli, cocci or apparently dormant members of the colon group." — D. Reddick. 1332. LoHNis, F., AND Roy Hansen. Nodule bacteria of leguminous plants. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 543-555. PI. 68-69. 1921. — The nodule bacteria of leguminous plants can be divided into 2 groups. Each group is distinct, morphologically as well as physiologically. The bacteria of the 1st group, which the authors consider to be Bacillus radicicola Beijerinck, are peritrichic, grow with relative rapidity on agar plates, and produce very characteristic changes in milk. They produce nodules on the roots of the following plants: Clover, sweet clover, alfalfa, vetch, pea, navy bean, lupine, black locust, Amorpha, and Stropho styles. The bacteria of the 2nd group are monotrichic, grow slowly on agar plates, and cause no marked change in milk. They have been isolated from cowpea, soybean, peanut, beggar weed, Acacia, Genista, and Cassia. The nomenclature of this latter group is discussed. Bacillus radiobacter Beijerinck isolated from legume nodules was studied with the 2 groups of nodule forming bacteria. — W. H. Burkholder. 1333. Miller, H. M. Modification of the Howard method for counting yeasts, spores and bacteria in tomato products. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12:766. 1920.— The modification described is based on the fact that by boiling tomato pulp with LoefRer's methylene blue and Tiehl-Neilsen's carbolfuchsine the microorganisms are stained a slightly deeper color than the tomato tissues. — Henry Schmitz. 1334. Truffatjt, G., et N. Bezssonoff. Sur les caracteres communs au Bacterium /S, symbiote du Clostridium Pastorianum de Winogradsky, et au B. aliphaticum non liquefaciens 192 PALEOBOTANY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, de Tausz et Peter. [On the characters common to Bacterium /?, the symbiont of Clostridium Paetorianum of Winogradsky and Bacterium aliphaticum non liquefaciens of Tausz and Peter.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 1089-1091. 1920. — A comparison is made between the morphological and physiological characteristics of Bacillus 0, which is a symbiont of Clo- stridium pastor ianum, with those of Bacillus aliphaticum non-liquefaciens. The conclusion is reached that they are either closely related strains of the same species or that they are the same strain. The chief points of distinction seem to be such as are related to the life habits of the two, symbiosis in the one case and independent development in the other. — C. H. Farr. 1335. WiNSLOw, C.-E. A., Jean Broadhurst, R. E. Buchanan, Charles Krumwiede, Jr., L. a. Rogers, and G. H. Smith. The families and genera of the bacteria. Final report of the committee of the Society of American Bacteriologists on characterization and classifica- tion of bacterial types. Jour. Bact. 5: 191-229. 1920. — The report is divided into 4 sections. In section I, the introduction, reference is made to the preliminary report of the Committee in 1917 and the changes made in that report are noted, namely, (1) the family Mycobac- teriaceae has been elevated to the rank of an order, Actinomycetales, with 2 families, Actino- mycetaceae and Mycobacteriaceae; to the first family have been added 2 genera, Actino- bacillus and Erysipelothrix, the genus Nocardia having been omitted; to the second family has been added the genus Pfeifferella. (2) The family Nitrobacteriaceae has been divided into 2 tribes and the name of the genus Mycodervia has been changed to Acetobacter. (3) In the Coccaceae the genus Neisseria has been placed in a separate tribe; the genus Albococcus is united with Staphylococcus; and the new genera Diplococcus and Leuconostoc are added. (4) The Bacteriaceae are divided into 7 tribes and the new genera Erythrobacillus, Chromo- bacterium, Zopfius, and Proteus are added. (5) The family Lactobacillaceae is reduced to the rank of a tribe of the Bacteriaceae. In section II are given some specific recommenda- tions, including a list of 16 genera the names of which are recommended for adoption. In section III is given the outline of bacterial classification, including characteristics of the orders, families, tribes, and genera; 38 genera are included with the name of the type species for each genus. Section IV contains an artificial key to the families and -genera. Section V consists of a generic index of the commoner forms of bacteria with the names of the common species annexed to their proper generic names. — Chester A. Darling. PALEOBOTANY AND EVOLUTIONARY HISTORY E. W. Berry, Editor (See also in this issue Entries 1088, 1101) 1336. Berry, E. W. Contributions to the Mesozoic flora of the Atlantic Coastal Plain XIV. Tennessee. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 48: 55-72. 1921.— An account of a flora of 135 species of plants recently discovered in the Ripley formation of western Tennessee. The Ripley formation is the latest of the Upper Cretaceous formations of the Mississippi embay- ment region. The report includes an account of the botanical character, the probable envi- ronment, and the correlation of the flora, and gives a list of the forms represented. — E. W. Berry. 1337. Harshberger, J. W. Upper Cretaceous floras. [Rev. of: Berry, E. W. Upper Cretaceous floras of the eastern gulf region in Tennessee, Mississippi, Alabama and Georgia. U. S. Geol. Surv. Prof. Paper 112. 178 p., 33 pi. 1919 (see Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1600).] Bot. Gaz. 68:482-483. 1919. 1338. Heim, Arnold, and H. Gams. Interglaziale Bildungen bei Wildhaus (Kt. St. Gallen). [Interglacial deposits at Wildhaus (Canton St. Gall).] Vierteljahrsschr. Naturf. Ges. Zurich 63 : 19-33. 1918. — The author gives lists of fossil plants contained in the deposits. — John H. Schaffner. No. 2, June, 1921] PATHOLOGY ' 193 1339. Jennings, O. E. Fossil plants from the beds of volcanic ash near Missoula, western Montana. Mem. Carnegie Mus. 8: 385-450. PL 22-33. 1920.— The author describes collec- tions made in 1902 and 1905 by Earl Douglas from near Missoula and near Winston in western Montana. The latter is small and the material represents new species of Equisetum and Aralia but is believed to be the same age as the larger and better preserved collection from the former locality. This includes 21 species, i.e., Sequoia 2, Thuyopsis, Sabina, Typha, Cyperacites, Populus 2, Juglans, Betnla, Alnus 2, Quercus 3, Ficus ?, Ilex, Celastrus, and Vaccinium. Species of Sequoia, Juglans, Betula, Alnus, Quercus, Ficus ?, Ilex, Oelastrus, and Vaccinium are described as new. — This flora is regarded as of Oligocene age and as exist- ing around a mountain lake. There is an ecological discussion in which the fossil flora is compared with those of recent lakes in the Montana Rockies, and it is concluded that the Oligocene climate in that region was somewhat warmer than now prevails in that region, and that the plant associations represented ranged from wet meadow to moderately xerophytic oak forests on sandy or rocky lake shores. — E. W. Berry. 1340. Johnston, R. M. Notes on the discovery of a new fossil fruit from the Deep-Lead Tin Drifts at Derby, Tasmania. Papers and Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasmania 1918: 9-10. 1919. — This article reports the discovery of a lignified fossil fruit possibly allied to Plesiocapparis prisca F. von Mueller. It is described by the author as a new species under the name Carpo- lithes {Plesiocapparis) Clarkii. — /. H. Faull. 1341. PoTONiE, R. Mitteilung iiber mazerierte kohlige Pflanzenfossilien. [Notes on the maceration of carbonized plant fossils.] Zeitschr. Bot. 13: 79-89. 12 fig. 1920. — The author describes and figures vertical sections of the stomata of Thinnfeldia rhomboidalis Schenk from the Lias (lower Jurassic) of Germany, calling attention to their zerophytic character; the technique of maceration and staining of the fossils is discussed. A specimen of Callip- teris conferta (Sternberg) Brongniart is described from the Permian (Rothliegendes) of Thuringia which shows that it had been mined by some insect larva. — E. W. Berry. 1342. Stopes, Marie Carmichael. The missing link in Osmundites. Ann. Botany 35: 55-64. PI. 2, 1 fig. 1921.— A specimen of Osmundites from Queensland, Australia, con- sisting of a piece of rhizome with surrounding leaf bases, was found to have a solid protostele in the stem. All the other features are typical of the genus including the meristeles in the leaf bases. Kidston and Gwynne-Vaughan had concluded that the vascular system of the Osmundaceae must have been derived from just such a protostele though no form possessing one was known to them. The specimen described is regarded as the missing form. The plant is given the name Osmundites Kidstoni. The horizon is probably Cretaceous. — W. P. Thompson. 1343. Torre Y, R. E. Telephragmoxylon and the origin of wood parenchyma. Ann. Botany 35: 73-78. PI. 3, 3 fig. 1921. — A lignite of Araucarian affinities from the Cretaceous of Texas shows at the end of the annual ring numerous tracheids which are divided into seg- ments. This is considered to be the first stage in the evolution of wood parenchyma from tracheids. The specimens are placed in a new genus Telephragmoxylon. — W . P. Thompson. PATHOLOGY G. H. Coons, Editor C. W. Bennett, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 775, 776, 806, 1026, 1061, 1077, 1095, 1272, 1273, 1275, 1276, 1277, 1279, 1280, 1282, 1293, 1296, 1299, 1301, 1303, 1304, 1311, 1313, 1316, 1328, 1497, 1536) PLANT DISEASE SURVEY; REPORTS OF DISEASE OCCURRENCE AND SEVERITY 1344. Dana, B. F., and George L. Zundel. A new com smut in Washington. Phyto- path. 10: 328. 4 fig. 1920. — The writers note occurrence at Pullman, Washington, of a new 194 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, corn smut idientical with head smut of sorghum (Sphacelotheca reiliana). Symptoms are given in detail. — W. H. Tisdale. 1345. FiGUEROA, C. A. The mottling disease of cane and the sugar production of Porto Rico. Jour. Dept. Agric. Porto Rico 3*: 35-41. 1919 [1920].— "Where the infection is most intense the sugar production has diminished most heavily." Statistics are presented of the cane acreage and amount of sugar manufactured in Porto Rico in the crops of 1917 to 1919. In Cayey, where the disease is most severe the acreage of 1918 and 1919 was nearly double that of 1917 but the production of sugar was reduced 50 per cent. For the whole island, on the basis of the crop of 1917, the reduction is 30 per cent. — D. Reddick. 1346. Hamblin, C. O. Downy mildew of the vine. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 32: 49-50. S fig. 1921. — Grape downy mildew was first observed in New South Wales in 1918. The disease appears early in the Season but may not make much headway. It overwinters by spores and probably also by hyphal filaments. Notes on control are given. — L. R. Waldron. 1347. LiNDFOES. [Rev. of: Henning, Ernst. Anteckningar om gulrosten. [Auf- zeichnungen iiber den Gelbrost.] Centralanst. Forsoksv. p. Jordbruksomr§.det Medd. 192. 1919.] Zentralbl. Ges. Landw. 1: Entry 731. 1920. — Henning's continuation of the list of Eriksson and Henning (Die Getr eider oste) on yellow rust years, contains an incorrect state- ment. On page 10, 3rd line from the bottom for "salweizen, Boreweizen," read "Land- weizen." Footnote 2 should be struck out. — D. Reddick. 1348. Mackie, W. W, Head smut in sorghum and maize. Phytopath. 10: 307. 1920. — Author notes occurrence of head smut {Sorosporium reilianum) of sorghum, and smut of corn in California. — W. H. Tisdale. 1349. Stillinger, C. R. Apple black rot (Sphaeropsis malorum) in Oregon. Phytopath. 10: 453-458. 1920. — The first report of Sphaeropsis malorum, from Oregon and probable occur- rence in Washington and California. The fungus is of small economic importance in orchard and storage. Morphological and physiological studies show the necessity of study of strains of Sphaeropsis and Diplodia. — R. B. Streets. 1350. Thomas, C. C. Coix smut. Phytopath. 10:331-333. 1 fig. 1920.— Coix smut ( Ustilago coicis Bref.) is reported in this country for the first time on plants of Coix lachryma jobi grown from seed sent from the Philippine Islands. — G. Wineland. 1351. Ttjbeuf, C. von. Einbruch der Kiefernmistel nach Bayern von Siiden. [The invasion of Bavaria from the south by the pine mistletoe.] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18:230-232. 1920. — In July 1919, an outbreak of mistletoe on pine was discovered on the southeast slope on the right hand bank of the Loisach between Eschenlohe and Oebrau. In June of 1920, another infected area was discovered on the east side (west exposure) of the Loisach valley between Garmisch and Eschenlohe. The Alps have previously offered an effective barrier to the mistletoe, and there is little doubt but that the parasite was carried across by the thrush. Tubeuf suggests that the infected areas be gone over and the mistletoe removed and destroyed while the infection is still small; further spread would greatly increase the work of suppression. The invasion by this mistletoe resembles that of Loranthus of oak, which was brought up from Bohemia through the Elbe Valley by thrushes into Saxony, and is at present unwisely protected by law. — /. Roeser. 1352. Weimer, J. L. The distribution of buckeye rot of tomatoes. Phytopath. 10: 172. 1920. — This disease, caused by Phytophthora terrestria, occurred at Arlington, Virginia, in 1919. The known range northward is thus considerably extended. — W. G. Stover. No. 2, June, 1921] PATHOLOGY 195 THE PATHOGENE (BIOLOGY; INFECTION PHENOMENA; DISPERSAL) 1353. Fawcett, H. S. Pythiacystis and Phytophthora (on Citrus). Phytopath. 10: 397- 399. 1920. — Cultures obtained from fruit and diseased bark of one type of gummosis of citrus in California were mostly Pythiacystis citrophthora Sm. and Sm.; cultures made from dis- eased bark of "footrot" from various sources all gave Phytophthora terrestria Sherbakoff. Pythiacystis-like forms were obtained from other hosts in California. — R. B. Streets. 1354. Hedgcock, George G., and N. Rex Hunt. Notes on Peridermium harknessii. Phytopath. 10: 395-397. 1920.— Field observations of the spread of the aecial stage of Peri- dermium harknessii, apparently without the aid of the telial host, are confirmed by experi- ments with several species of pine in which a true aecial stage follows inoculation with aecio- spores. — G. Wineland. 1355. Jagger, Ivan C. Sclerotinia minor, n. sp., the cause of a decay of lettuce, celery, and other crops. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 331-333. PL 59, 1 fig. 1920 [1921].— A technical de- scription of *S. minor with illustrations of apothecia, ascospores, and microconidia. Apothecia and sclerotia of S. libertiana are much larger. The fungus causes a decay of lettuce and other plants similar to that produced by S. libertiana. It is known to occur in Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, and Florida. — D. Reddick. 1356. Matz, J. Infection and nature of the yellow stripe disease of cane (mosaic, mott- ling,etc.). Jour. Dept. Agric. Porto Rico 3^: 65-82. 1919 [1920].— Cuttings from cane showing mosaic were used for propagating purposes. New shoots from such pieces invariably showed symptoms of the disease. The canker stage of mosaic has been secured in as short a time as 3" months.— Transmission experiments by contact failed. Hypodermic injections of juice from diseased plants gave infection in 4 cases of over 200 trials.— Histological studies of dis- eased and healthy plants were made. "It seems that a foreign plasmodium-like substance is apparently present in the cells of the yellow-striped cane leaf and the stem tissue. "This plasmic substance is more constantly present and in a more defined form in cankered cane stalks. It is associated with reddish streaks that may be seen on the interior of severely affected cane. The plasma mass becomes granular in cut pieces and "after eight days motility was observed in the plasma mass." The substance resembles a plasmodium.— D. Reddick. 1357. Peltier, George L. The influence of temperature and humidity on the growth of Pseudomonas citri, and of its host plants, and on infection and development of the disease. Jour. Agric. Res. 20:29.5-323. PI. 47-56. 1920 [1921].— The temperature relations of P. citri, in culture, are similar to other pathogenes of the Pseudomonas group. The factor of time should receive more consideration. When it is considered, the critical temperature in degrees Centigrade are as follows: Minimum, 5; optimum, between 20 and 30; maximum, about 35; thermal death point, between 49 and 52.— Humidity has little or no influence on the via- bility of the organisms at low temperatures but at high temperatures it is the limiting factor. With medium humidities "at all temperatures, the organism is viable for the period of the experiment." "Some factor or factors, other than the rapidity of drying, are responsible for these results."— Citrus plants under controlled conditions vary markedly in their reaction to temperature and humidity, especially at low and at high temperatures. The optimum tem- perature for the plants used lies between 20 and 30°C. This condition, with slight varia- tions, also prevails in the field.— Infection depends on 3 conditions: Free moisture on the host, suitable temperature, host in actively growing condition. The organism is active m the tissue so long as the host cells are active. When the host is forced into dormancy the organism becomes inactive. The "period of initial infection" is defined as the time required by the pathogene after it reaches the host to enter the stomates or tissues about a wound. This may occur on plants which are not growing actively. The ''period of incubation" extends from the time of initial infection until there is visible evidence of disease. This period there- fore depends on the conditions of the host at the time of, and immediately following, initial infection. Frequency of rainfall and the temperature each in a dual relation determine 196 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, the number of infections, the length of incubation, and the severity of the disease. — Environ- mental conditions play an exceedingly important role in the susceptibility and resistance of citrus plants to canker and "the results indicate that it will be necessary to study the behavior of the host plant to its environment and its relation to the causal organism before any scientific selection or breeding for disease resistance can be made." — Pertinent literature is reviewed and a bibliography of 17 titles is appended. — D. Reddick. 1358. Rands, Fkederick V., and Lillian C. Cash. Some insect relations of Bacillus tracheiphilus Erw. Sm. Phytopath. 10: 133-140. 1920. — A few striped cucumber beetles were found carrying the wilt organism internally during the winter. Infection may occur from the mouth parts of wilt-fed beetles for a time after feeding and also when the feces of the same beetles come in contact with fresh leaf injuries involving the vascular system. The organism has been isolated from the viscera of wilt-fed beetles. — S. P. Doolittle. 1359. Rands, Frederick V., and W. Dwight Pierce. A coordination of our knowledge of insect transmission in plant and animal diseases. Phytopath. 10: 189-231. 1920. — The writers present a review of the literature dealing with insect transmission of plant and ani- mal diseases, with particular reference to diseases of plants. A distinct correlation is found in the principles which apply to insect transmission in both branches of pathology. Insects may act in 3 general relations to diseases caused by micro-organisms: (1) External trans- mission in which the infective principle is carried on the external body parts of the insect; (2) insects without carrying infection themselves may cause wounds through which parasite organisms gain entrance; (3) internal transmission in which the organism is taken up and passed unharmed through the body of the insect. The transmission of various fungous, bac- terial, and "virus" diseases is reviewed in these relations. — S. P. Doolittle. 1360. Sauvageau, C. Sur le parasitisms d'une algue rouge. (Polysiphonia fastigiata Grev.) [Concerning the parasitism of a red alga.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 1383- 1386. 1919. — Certain marine algae support a varied and abundant flora while others do not. The plants attached to them may be classified as epiphytes or parasites. Most of the endo- phytic algae are restricted to one host plant or to a relatively small number of host plants. Polysiphonia fastigiata is found in dense tufts attached to Ascophijllum nodosum, and al- though it has been described as being merely an epiphyte, the author finds that its structure and development indicate that it is a true parasite. It is rarely found attached to Fucus platycarpus and F. vesiculosus. — V. H. Young. 1361. Smyth, E. Gratwood. Insects and mottling disease. Jour. Dept. Agric. Porto Rico 3*: 83-116. 1919 [1920].— The insects which might be associated with the transmission and spread of sugar cane mosaic are described. A "summary of our knowledge of insect- borne diseases of plants occurring in America" is presented in tabular form and includes 18 diseases. Experimental methods are described and experiments with the different species are presented in detail. Infection has been secured on 6 plants. The agents concerned are West Indian cane fly (Stenocranus saccharivorus) , leaf scale {Pulvinaria iceryi), yellow cane aphis {Sipha flava), and mealy bugs {Pseudococcus calceolariae and P. sacchari). A bib- liography of insect-borne diseases of plants comprising 53 titles is appended. — D. Reddick. 1362. Smyth, E. Graywood. An annotated bibliography of Porto Rican cane insects. Jour. Dept. Agric. Porto Rico 3*: 117-134. 1919 [1920].— Brief abstracts of literature, pre- pared in connection with work on insect transmission of sugar cane mosaic, are presented. [See also preceding entry.] — D. Reddick. 1363. Smyth, E. Graywood. List of the insects and mite pests of sugar cane in Porto Rico. Jour, Dept. Agric. Porto Rico 3^: 135-150. 1919 [1920].— The paper, prepared in connection with a study of insect transmission of sugar cane mosaic, gives for each organism the name, distribution, food plants, injury done, enemies and method of control. [See also the 2 preceding entries.] — D. Reddick. No. 2, June, 1921] PATHOLOGY 197 1364. Snell, W. H. Observations on the distance of spread of aeciospores and uredinio- spores of Cronartium ribicola. Phytopath. 10:358-364. 1920.— The writer records field observations in Wisconsin and New York on natural infections of pine and Ribes. He con- cludes that aeciospores can be blown more than U miles to infect Ribes. Dry weather in New York prevented a wide distribution of the disease by urediniospores. — C. J. Humphrey. 1365. TxTBEtJF, C. VON. [Rev. of: Clinton, G. P., and Florence A. McCobmick. Infection experiments of Pinus strobus with Cronartium ribicola. Connecticut (New Haven) Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 214. 438-459, pi. 37-4S. 1916-1918 (see Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 225).] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 236-237. 1920.— The reviewer calls attention to his previous contributions on the same subject. He briefly reviews and criticizes the authors' conclusions on the methods of attack of the fungus, and its external manifestations on the foliage. — J. Roeser. 1366. Walker, J. C, and W. B. Tisdale. Observations on the seed transmission of the cabbage black rot organism. Phytopath. IQ: 174-177. 1920.— A large percentage of cabbage plants grown from imported seed developed black rot (Bacterium campestre) . When seed of the same lot was treated with mercuric chloride, the disease was practically eliminated. — S. P. Doolittle. THE HOST (RESISTANCE, SUSCEPTIBILITY; MORBID ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY) 1367. Artschwager, Ernst F. Pathological anatomy of potato blackleg. Jour. Agric. Res. 20:325-330. PI. 57-58. 1920 [1921].— Material for study was taken in arid part of Colorado, U. S. A. Plants affected with black leg show an increase in strongly lignified vascular tissue and a transformation of most of the parenchyma cells of cortex and pith into sclereids. Protein crystals occur in the cells of leaves of affected plants; in healthy plants they have been observed only in peripheral cells of the cortex in tubers. — D. Reddick. 1368. Collins, J. Franklin. Notes on the resistance of chestnut to blight. Phytopath. 10:368-371. 2 fig. 1920.— Results of observations indicate that the American chestnut (Castanea dentata) is developing resistance to blight. The author describes a case in which a young chestnut shoot apparently recovered from the disease. — Ruth G. Bitterman. 1369. Colon, E. D. The absorption spectrum of the chlorophyll in yellow-striped sugar- cane. Jour. Dept. Agric. Porto Rico 3^:4.3-46. 1919 [1920].— Leaves from healthy plants and from plants affected with mosaic were used. The absorption spectra from alcoholic solutions of chlorophyll from the two kinds of leaves were alike. "Although the tests above described were not as numerous nor performed with as many solvents as might have been desirable, they warrant the belief that the disappearance of the pigment in yellow-stripe is not primarily due to a decomposition of chlorophyll as such." — D. Reddick. 1370. Earle,.F. S. The years experience with sugar-cane mosaic or stripe disease. Jour. Dept. Agric. Porto Rico 3^:3-33. 1919 [1920].— An account is given of the lines of activity in Porto Rico since October, 1918, in the study of mosaic. An historical r^sum6 of previous work, with comments upon the researches presented in the same journal by others, is presented. In some cases the comments are more specific or more detailed than those presented by the authors. [See Bot. Absts. 8, Entries 1345, 1356, 1361, 1369, 1378.]— Z). Reddick. 1371. Edson, H. a. Vascular discoloration of Irish potato tubers. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 277-294. 1920 [1921].— Vascular discoloration of stem-end tissues of Irish potato tubers is not proof of the presence of parasitic fungi. Discolored bundles often are sterile and fungi frequently are isolated from tissues which appear normal. — Out of 3,203 attempts, by plat- ing, to isolate fungi from tubers, all but 161 of which were discolored, 1,352 gave no growth. 198 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, In those yielding growth, many organisms were found: Species of Fusarium, 720 times; AUernaria, 615 times; bacteria, 241 times; Verticillium, 147 times; Penicillium, 104 times; Colletotrichum, 91 times; Rhizoctonia, 12 times; miscellaneous, 87 times.— Field trials in Colo- rado with tubers from widely separated sources indicate that neither vascular discoloration nor fungous invasion of the tissues of the mother tuher is a guaranty of disease in the result- ing plants; nor is their absence a guaranty of health. The soil and not the tuber is the more potent source of disease.— Stem-end pieces used for planting yielded slightly higher percent- ages of diseased plants than did eye-end pieces. Plants showed a marked capacity for recu- peration, which varied with the variety, environment, and with the interaction of the two. — D. Reddick. 1372. Fracker, S. B. Varietal susceptibility to false blossom in cranberries. Phyto- path. 10: 173-175. 1920.— A tabular presentation and brief discussion of varietal suscepti- bility. The cultural conditions are given, together with inspection practices and control measures. — R. B. Streets. 1373. GuYTON, T. L. The chrysanthemum gall midge. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 341. lOS-114, 6 fig. 1920. 1374. Hahn, Glenn G., Carl Hartley, and Arthur S. Rhodes. Hypertrophied len- ticels in the roots of conifers and their relation to moisture and aeration. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 253-265. PI. U-46. 1920 [1921].— Unusual excrescences on the roots of 10 species of Pinus, 4 of Picea, and of Abies balsamea, Tsuga canadensis, Larix laricina, Taxus cuspidata, T. brevifolia, and Araucaria bidwellii, are found to have the structure of lenticels, much en- larged. They occur and were produced in various kinds of soil in the presence of excessive soil moisture. Hypertrophy occurs on both weak and vigorous plants. It is decreased by top pruning and is increased by root injury.— The literature is reviewed. The belief that excessive soil moisture stimulates lenticel hypertrophy mainly by increasing general sap pressure, and that oxygen hunger is of no importance as a stimulus, is not supported by these experiments. A bibliography of 23 titles is appended.— D. Reddick. 1375. HuRD, Annie May. Injury to seed wheat resulting from drying after disinfection with formaldehyde. Jour. Agric. Res. 20:209-244. PL 36-41. 1920 [1921].— Results of investigations on the post-treatment action of formaldehyde on wheat are recorded. The major conclusion reached is that injury results from the drying of grain treated with formal- dehyde solution; that seed wheat is uninjured by a 0.1 per cent solution (1-40) and, if kept moist, may be held indefinitely without injury unless attacked by molds. Neither a 0.1 per cent (1-40) nor a 0.2 per cent (1-20) solution of formaldehyde produces injury if the wheat is germinated immediately. Injury to dried grain is cumulative. Paraformaldehyde is deposited on dried grain, and the gas formed by the volatilization of this solid penetrates the wheat slowly, probably going into solution in the pericarp. The manner of drying and the moisture content of the atmosphere surrounding the grain determine the nature and extent of injury. An atmospheric humidity of over 70 per cent during the storage period prevents injury; one of 70 per cent or less permits injury, which is most severe in the inter- mediate humidities, gradually decreasing in the lower ones. Treated grain stored in an absolutely dry chamber is almost uninjured. It is considered probable that the formalde- hyde does not enter the wheat as a gas or in the solid polymeric form, but in solution in the seed coats. An optimum atmospheric humidity to permit, first, the formation of parafor- maldehyde, and, second, the solution of formaldehyde gas in the grain, results in maximum injury from drying after treatment. Injury is minimized by spreading the wheat as it dries so that maximum aeration occurs. Washing the grain with water immediately after treat- ment entirely prevents post- treatment injury from dry storage.— L. M. Massey. 1376. Kelley, W. p., and A. B. Cummings. Composition of normal and mottled citrus leaves. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 161-191. 1920 [1921].— Lemon, orange, and grapefruit leaves are similar in composition. As growth of normal orange leaves proceeds the percentages of No. 2, June, 1921] PATHOLOGY 199 potassium and phosphorus, when expressed on the basis of either the ash or the dry matter, and of nitrogen in the dry matter, decrease; the percentages of calcium, however, increase. The concentration of iron is greater in very young leaves, later decreasing slowly. The concentration of the different constituents probably remains practically constant through- out the period of normal maturity. Notable amounts of potassium and nitrogen are translo- cated back into some portion of the tree as the leaves approach senility just preceding the time of normal dropping. A part of the phosphorus also appears to be removed from the leaf some time preceding normal maturity. The absolute content of magnesium does not decrease as maturity approaches. Maximum amounts of potassium, phosphorus, and nitrogen are contained in orange leaves by the time they are about 6 weeks of age. The absolute content of calcium continues to increase until full maturity is reached. The highly calcareous nature of the orange leaf is its most pronounced characteristic, the dry matter of the mature leaf containing 5-6 per cent of calcium. — The composition of mottled citrus leaves differs from that of normal leaves mainly in that the calcium content is smaller and the potassium, phos- phorus, and usually the nitrogen contents are greater. The composition of mottled orange leaves resembles that of immature leaves, although the percentages of ash and nitrogen in the former are materially greater than in the latter. The sap of normal orange leaves becomes increasingly concentrated and acidic, and when mature is especially rich in calcium. The sap of mottled leaves contains sub-normal amounts of calcium and concentrations of potas- sium and phosphorus fully twice as high as in mature normal leaves. Abnormally large amounts of unionized acids occur in mottle-leaf sap. The composition of leaf spurs of severely mottled trees varies from the normal in much the same way as the leaves; that of the older wood is more nearly normal. The roots appear to contain considerably less than normal amounts of potassium and phosphorus but an approximately normal amount of calcium. The abnormalities in the composition of different parts of mottled citrus trees may be due, in part at least, to the inability of the tree to satisfy its normal calcium requirements at criti- cal periods. The possibility of correlating abnormalities in the composition of mottled trees with conditions conducive to the disease is suggested. The significance of subnormal con- centrations of calcium accompanied by supernormal concentrations of potassium and phos- phorus in the leaves, especially in relation to the limiting of chlorophyll production, is not known. No causal relationship may exist. If an inadequate supply of calcium conditions the deficiency of chlorophyll, it probably does so indirectly. Mottle-leaf must be produced experimentally before any explanation can be safely accepted. The leaves of affected trees are not suffering from inadequate supplies of potassium, phosphorus, nitrogen, or iron. — L. M. Massey. 1377. Levine, Michael. Studies on plant cancers— II— The behavior of crown gall on the rubber plant (Ficus elastica). Mycologia 13: 1-11. PL 1-2. 1921.— "Bacterium tume- faciens inoculated into the apical internode of the branches, into the leaves, or main stem of the rubber tree stimulates the development of a neoplasm in the region of inoculation. The early stages in the development of the crown gall in Ficus elastica does not interfere with the life of the plant as a whole nor does it interfere with the growth of the inoculated branches. The crown gall in Ficus elastica after a number of months of active growth becomes hard and dry and finally dies. The invasion of the stem by the new growth does not destroy the entire conducting system of the stem, yet that portion of the stem above the gall dies, as well as a considerable portion of the stem below. Cultures made from pieces of the crown gall and stem above the gall yield only a schizomycete which in appearance is not unlike B. tumefa- ciens and which when inoculated into the stem of young geranium and rubber plants produces crown galls in the region of inoculation. It is possible that the crown gall cells or the crown gall forming organisms are responsible for the progressive necrosis of the stem from the gall upward and downward. The death of the plant due to crown gall is at least suggestive of the death caused by malignant growth in animals." — H. R. Rosen. 1378. L6pez Domingtjez, F. A. Has "yellow-stripe" or "mottling" disease any effect on the sugar content of cane juice? Jour. Dept. Agric. Porto Rico 34:47-64. 1919 [1920].— From a series of analyses of healthy cane and cane affected with the mosaic disease it is con- 200 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, eluded that there is no material reduction in the sugar content of juice from affected plants. When stalks are so severely affected that they are cracked open, fermentation sets in and sucrose is lost. — The juice of diseased cane shows a higher acidity; this is not suflficient to cause inversion except in very acute stages of the disease. — D. Reddick. 1379. Melchers, Leo E., and John N. Parker. Three winter wheat varieties resistant to leaf rust in Kansas. Phytopath. 10: 164-171. 2 fig. 1920. — Experiments carried on for 6 years show 3 hard winter wheats, "P762 Kanred," "P1066," and "P1068" to be markedly resistant to leaf rust, Puccinia triticina. These varieties grown in commercial fields over Kansas retain their resistant qualities. — H. H. McKinney. 1380. Townsend, C. O. An immune variety of sugar cane. Sugar 21: 305. 1919. — The Kavangire cane and its immunity to the mosaic disease are described. — C. W . Edgerton. 1381. Townsend, C. O. Una variedad immune de la caSa de azucar. [An immune variety of sugar cane.] Sugar 21: 392. 1919. — A translation in Spanish of an earlier article [see the preceding entry], — C. W. Edgerton. 1382. TuBEUF, C. VON. Die Wirtspflanzen von Peridermium strobi. [Host plants of Peridermium strobi.] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 214-215. 1920.— A list of the hosts on which Peridermium strobi has been discovered is given: Pinus Strobus, P. Lamberti- ana, P. monticola, P.flexilis, P. aristata, P. cembra sibirica, P. cembra alpina, and P. pence. No case has been observed of an attack on Pinus excelsa. — J, Roeser. DESCRIPTIVE PLANT PATHOLOGY 1383. B[arber], C. H. The mosaic or mottling disease of sugar cane. Internat. Sugar Jour. 23: 12-19. 1 pi. 1921. — A summary of the work on sugar cane mosaic by J. R. John- ston, R. M. Grey, C. W. Edgerton, F. S. Earle, G. L. Fawcett, J. A. Stevenson, and E. W. Brandes. — E. Koch Tisdale. 1384. Carpenter, C. W. Hawaii Agricultural Station reports on cane root rot fungus. Sugar 22 : 20-22. 1920. — The deterioration of Lahaina cane, and its relation to a fungus of the Pythium type, are discussed. — C. W, Edgerton. 1385. Colon, E. D. La enfermedad de las rayas amarillas. [The yellow stripe disease.] Sugar 21 : 52. 1919. — A short discussion of the yellow stripe or mosaic disease of sugar cane. — C. W. Edgerton. 1386. Cutting, E. M. [Rev. of: Hilet, W. E. The fungal diseases of the common larch* xi + 204p., 73 pi. and diagrams. . Clarendon Press: Oxford, 1919 (see Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1188).] Sci. Prog. [London] 15: 146-147. 1920. 1387. Earle, F. S. La enfermedad del mosaico en Puerto Rico. [The mosaic disease in Porto Rico.] Sugar 21 : 551. 1919. — A brief discussion of the mosaic disease of sugar cane in Porto Rico is presented. — C. TF. Edgerton. 1388. Edgerton, C. W., and C. C. Moreland. Tomato wilt. Louisiana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 174. 54 p., 19 fig. 1920.— Results are presented of 10 years investigations on the tomato wilt, including laboratory, greenhouse, and field work. The disease shows on all parts of the host plant and during all stages of its development. It is, however, most fre- quently observed about the time the fruits are developing. The fungus, Fusarium lycoper- sici, enters the plants from the soil. The spores of the fungus will remain alive on tomato seed from fall to spring. The disease develops best on light, fertile soil ; it is very rarely found in the alluvial sections of the state. Some substances added to the soil retard the develop- ment of the disease. Ten tons of lime to the acre delays the wilt for about 2 weeks or more. The disease develops best when the temperature is comparatively high, the optimum tem- No. 2, June, 1921] PATHOLOGY 201 perature for growth of the fungus being around 29°C. When the temperature remains much below this, the disease does not develop strongly. This is shown by weekly tests made throughout the year. Daring the winter months, the infection percentage was very low. — Attempts to obtain wilt-resistant strains have given good results. No variety is immune, but the wilt develops much more slowly in some than in other's; this slower development enables the more resistant strains to make a satisfactory crop of fruit. Many of the com- mercial varieties, including the widely grown Stone variety, are extremely susceptible to the disease. Results of variety tests are given. The recommendations for control include rota- tion, seed bed sanitation, and the use of resistant and early varieties. — C. W. Edgerton. 1389. Elliott, John A. Arkansas cotton diseases. Arkansas Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 173. ^6 p., 5 pi. 1921. — This is a popular account of Arkansas cotton diseases, with notes on occurrence. "Phoma blight" is described as a new disease. — John A. Elliott. 1390. Geschwind, Andreas. Das Vorkommen des Hallimasch (Agaricus malleus Quel.) in den Bosnisch-herzegowinischen Waldern. [The occurrence of a honey mushroom in the forests of Bosnia-Herzegowina.] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 182-186. 1920. — Armillaria inellea is as common in the more or less natural forests of this province as it is in those of central Europe, but it is less destructive than in the cultural forests of the latter. Under natural conditions, beech and aspen, when in mixture with softwoods, protect the latter by acting as hosts for the disease. Wherever the beech is removed from the forest to make room for softwood reproduction, the result is that the desired reproduction does not come and the softwood falls prey to the fungus. The common practice of opening the forest, when a part of a meadow unit, to induce the growth of grasses, furnishes ideal conditions for the entrance of bark-beetles and the honey mushroom. In the extensive forests of the plains ("Karstwalder"), the physical conditions of the soil furnish less ideal conditions for the spread of the rhizomorphs through the soil than do the other forests.^/. Roeser. 1391. Godfrey, G. H. A seed-borne Sclerotiumand its relation to a rice-seedling disease. Phytopath. 10: 342. 1920. — The author notes the occurrence of a seed-borne Sclerotium of rice in Louisiana and its relation to a seedling blight. The possibility of hot water seed- treatment is suggested. — W. H. Tisdale. 1392. Hahn, G. G. Phomopsis juniperovora, a new species causing blight of nursery cedars. Phytopath. 10:249-253. 1 pi. 1920.— Study of a fungus causing a widespread nursery blight of Juniperus virginiana from New York to Kansas indicates that a new species is involved. The fungus is similar to Phomopsis thujae, a European form. Greenhouse inoculations on Thuja gave positive results, but negative ones were obtained on Abies, Picea, and Pinus. — P. V. Siggers. 1393. Hamblin, Chas. O. Flag smut and its control. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 32 : 23. 1921. — Notes are given on the disease and hints as to its control. — L. R. Waldron. 1394. Harter, L. L., and J. L. Weimer. Sweet potato stem rot and tomato wilt. Phyto- path. 10: 306-307. 1920. — The authors report negative results from inoculating sweet pota- toes and tomatoes, using respectively Fusarium lycopersici from tomatoes and Fusarium hyperoxysporum from sweet potato. — William B. Tisdale. 1395. Hartley, Carl, and Glenn G. Hahn. Notes on some diseases of aspen. Phyto- path. 10: 140-147. 3 fig. 1920.— The authors describe certain diseases found on the aspen in the Pike's Peak region of Colorado. Much damage to leaves is often caused by Sclerotinia bifrons, very little damage by Melampsora albertensis but a premature defoliation by M. medusae, and a blighting of leaves and lateral twigs by Marsonia populi. Twig troubles and cankers on trunk and stem are described but no causal organism has been found. Fames igniarius causes rot and premature death of the aspen. — E. M. Gilbert. 202 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1396. Howard, W. L., and W. T. Horne. Brown rot of apricots. Univ. California Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 326. 73-88. 1920. — The results for one season, using 16 different spray treatments, justify the conclusion that apricot blossoms may be effectively protected from brown rot by spraying the trees once, shortly before they come into bloom, with either lime- sulphur or Bordeaux mixture. The lime-sulphur should be used at the rate of 1 gallon to 9 gallons of water, and the Bordeaux mixture at a strength of 4-5-50 (4 lbs. bluestone, 5 lbs. fresh stone lime, 50 gal. water). The so-called dry lim-e-sulphur, used at the rate of 12 lbs. to 50 gal. of water, is quite as effective as either of the other 2 sprays. Early winter spraying against the brown rot is useless. Brown rot on the fruit cannot be prevented by cutting out the diseased twigs, but twig blight can be controlled as effectively, and more easily, by remov- ing them in the fall or winter as by cutting them out in the spring. — A. R. C. Haas. 1397. Hubert, E. E. Observations on Cytospora chrysosperma in the Northwest. Phy- topath. 10: 442-447. 1920.— The unusually dry siunmers of 1917, 1918, and 1919 favored the development of Cytospora chrysosperma on shade and ornamental trees. It is common and injurious in Montana, Idaho, Wyoming, and Washington on species of Populus, Acer and Salix, Prunus demissa, Sorbus scopulijia, and Sambucus glauca. The author produced in- fection on small plants of Populus trichocarpa low in vigor. Control methods consist in selecting resistant species, giving proper care to shade trees, and closely inspecting nursery stock. — C. J. Humphrey. 1398. Johnson, James. Fusarium-wilt of tobacco. Jour. Agric. Res. 20:515-535. PI. 63-67. 1921. — This previously undescribed disease was found to occur in Maryland, Ohio, and Kentucky. It is characterized by a yellowing and wilting of the leaves, usually fol- lowed by death of the entire plant. The vascular system of infected plants is characteristi- cally brown or black. The pathogene concerned is Fusarium oxysporum (Schlecht.) Wr. var. nicotianae n. var., of which a description is given. The fungus differs somewhat from F. oxysporum (Schlecht.) Wr. in morphology, physiology, and pathogenicity. Infection was secured with 2 strains of F. oxysporum from potato on tobacco, but not with the tobacco strain on potato. The symptoms of the wilt produced by the potato strain were not identical with those produced by the strain from tobacco. Conditions favoring infection with the tobacco- wilt organism are heavy soil infestation, wounded host tissue, a relatively high soil tempera- ture (2S-31°C.), and a susceptible variety. Varieties of tobacco differ markedly in their resistance to the disease. The White-Burley variety is most susceptible, and the Havana Seed and Cuban varieties are among the most resistant. The development of resistant strains within the various susceptible varieties offers the most helpful means of control. Growers are advised not to grow tobacco on infested soils and to avoid the danger of infested seed beds. — L. M. Massey. 1399. Matz, Julius. Gumming disease of sugar cane in Porto Rico. Phytopath. 10: 429-430. / fig. 1920. — The author gives the distribution of the gumming disease caused by Bacterium vascularum. The variety "Otaheite" is very susceptible to the disease. "Caven- gerie," a less popular variety, is apparently very resistant. — William B. Tisdale. 1400. Matz, Julius. Gumming of sugar cane in Porto Rico. Sugar 22: 282-283, 1920.— A description and history of the gumming disease of sugar cane caused by Bacterium vascu- larum.— C. W. Edgerton. 1401. Matz, Julius. La gomosis de la cana de azucar. [Gumming of sugar cane.] Sugar 22 : 363-364. 1 fig. 1920. — A translation in Spanish of an earlier publication [see preceding entry]. — C. W. Edgerton. 1402. Merker, Gustav. Ein neuer Pilzschadling im Fichtenpfianzgarten. [A new fungus pest in Norway spruce (Picea excelsa) nurseries,] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 218-219. 1920, — This new disease was discovered on 4-year spruce in the spring of 1920 in the "Forstverwaltung" Gratz, near Troppau in Silesia, and the causal organism was identi- No. 2, June, 1921] PATHOLOGY 203 fied as Rhizoctonia violacea. It is commonly known to attack the roots of various garden plants, such as clover, lucern, beets, etc., and has been known to attack young larch trees. This is the first known attack on spruce. It manifests itself as a dense violet fungus cover- ing on the roots and root collar, which in part peels off as layers, in part adheres firmly. Attacked plants should be immediately removed and the soil strewn over with quicklime and turned under. — J. Roeser. 1403. QuANJER, H. M. The mosaic disease of the Solanaceae, its relations to the phloem- necrosis and its effect upon potato culture. Phytopath. 10: 35-37. H fig. 1920. — Field and greenhouse experiments conducted for a number of years show the mosaic on tobacco, tomato, and potato to be of a similar nature. The mosaic symptoms on the potato become evident the season after infection. Grafting experiments demonstrate the contagious nature of the disease. The experiments indicate that transmission under field conditions is usually through root contact. The author suggests that the disease may be due to a virus but more probably to an ultramicroscopic parasite. — R. E. Vaughan. 1404. Roberts, John W. The apple-blotch and bitter-rot cankers. Phytopath. 10: 353. 1920. — The apple-blotch canker caused by Phyllosticta solitaria and the bitter-rot canker caused by Glomerella cingidata are discussed from the standpoint of their relation to the host. — A. J. Riker. 1405. RosENBAUM, J. A Macrosporium foot-rot of tomato. Phytopath. 10:415-422. 4fi^g. 1920. — The fungus, found in Delaware fields and causing a rot at the base of tomato stems, resembles the parasite (M. solani) causing the early blight of potato. The pathogen- icity of the organism was established. The fungus differs in cultural and morphological characters from the Macrosporium causing the nail-head spots on ripe tomato fruit. — R. E. Vaughan. 1406. Sedlaczek. [Rev. of: Xeoer, F. W. Die Kranklieiten unserer Waldbaume und wichtigsten Gartengeholze. (Diseases of our forest trees and most important ornamentals.) via + 286 p., 23J^ fig. Ferdinand Enke: Stuttgart, 1919 (see Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1280).] Oesterreich. Forts- u. Jagdzeitg. 38: 37-38. 1920. — This book is similar in compass and arrangement to Hartig's "Diseases of Trees," but brought up to date. It consists of 2 parts — non-parasitic diseases and diseases caused by parasitic plants. — F. S. Baker. 1407. Smiley, Edwina M. The Phjdlosticta blight of snapdragon. Phytopath. 10: 232-248. 8 fig. 1920. — Antirrhinum majus is the only host known to be affected by Phyllo- sticta antirrhini. Symptoips, etiology, and pathological effects of the disease are discussed. — Ruth G. Bitterman. 1408. Tubeuf, C. von. Rhizoctonia violacea an Fichten. [Rhizoctonia violacea on Nor- way spruce (Picea excelsa).] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18:233-234. 1920. — Tubeuf refers to an article by Merker (see Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 1402), and calls attention to the fact that Hartig reported this fungus as attacking young spruce. Past experiments to produce the perithecium of the fungus were failures, and the experiments, in general, were superficial. Tests by the author of imported, infected plants in 1919 and 1920 planted with healthy stock, resulted in a full recovery of the diseased stock and no attack on the other. — J. Roeser. 1409. Wolf, F. A. Bacterial blight of the soybean. Phytopath. 10: 119. 5 fig. 1920. — The author describes a disease of soybeans occurring in North Carolina caused by Bacterium soyae n. sp. Symptoms of the disease and cultural character of the causal organ- ism differ from those described by F. Coerper. No difference in varietal susceptibility was noted. The organism is believed to be seed borne. — William B. Tisdale. 1410. Wolf, F. A. A little known vetch disease. Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 36: 72-85. PI. 2-6. 1920. — A report on an important disease caused by Protocoronospora nigri- 204 PATHOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VIII, cans and resembling an anthracnose in its effect. Dark, elongated lesions may occur on any part of the plant above ground. The disease is now known to occur in North Carolina, South Carolina, Georgia, Mississippi, Louisiana, Tennessee, and at Ithaca, New York (the type locality). Infection is carried in the seed, which may thus introduce the disease to new fields.— W". C. Coker. ERADICATION AND CONTROL MEASURES 14n. Anonymous. Porto Rico fights cane mottling disease. Sugar 22: 208-210. 1920. — A review of recent publications from the Porto Rico Experiment Station on the mosaic disease of sugar cane. — C. W. Edgerton. 1412. BoTJES, J. OoRTWTN. Raising phloem-necrosis and mosaic free potatoes, and a source of infection whose nature has not yet been elucidated. Phytopath. 10: 48^9. 1920. — Tubers from selected healthy plants should be planted by the hill-row method with 3 or 4 meters between the rows. The intervening spaces should be planted with other crops. When any plant shows disease all of the same progeny should be discarded. Fields and nursery plots should be widely separated. — R. E. Vaughan. 1413. Butler, O. On the amount of copper required for the control of Phytophthora in- festans on potatoes. Phytopath. 10:298-304. 3 fig. 1920.— Spraying experiments with Bordeaux near Durham, New Hampshire, in 1919, showed the amount of copper necessary per acre per annum to control losses from P. infestans to be between 24 and 26 lbs. The experiments demonstrated that 1:0.5 Bordeaux was superior to 1:1. — R. E. Vaughan. 1414. Detwiler, S. B. Results of white pine blister-rust control in 1919. Phytopath. 10: 177-180. 1920. — A summary of the blister-rust control work done in the U. S. A., with de- tailed statement of cost of Ribes eradication. — Frank T. McFarland. 1415. Earle, F. S. Instrucciones para la eradicacion de la enfermedad del Mosaico de la cana. [Instructions for the eradication of the mosaic disease of cane.] Sugar 21:51-52. 1919. — A brief discussion of the mosaic disease of sugar cane and its control by means of selection and rogueing. — C. W. Edgerton. 1416. Edgerton, C. W. A new method of selecting L 511 cane free of the mosaic disease for planting purposes. Louisiana Planter and Sugar Manufacturer 65:252-253. 1920. — Practically a reprint of Louisiana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 176 [see following entry]. — C. W. Edgerton. 1417. Edgerton, C. W. A method of selecting L 511 cane free of the mosaic disease for planting purposes. Louisiana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 176. 7p., Ifig. 1920.— The L 511 variety of sugar cane is more resistant to the mosaic disease than the other common varieties. The disease can be detected upon the stalks of this variety by the presence of red stripes. In selecting healthy cane for seed, the stalks can be selected after being cut and stripped, thug eliminating the difficult field inspection. A 1-year test of this method of selection proved entirely satisfactory. — C. W. Edgerton. 1418. Gilbert, Alfred H. Certified seed inspection in Vermont. Potato Mag. 3 : 6, 20-21, 26. 1921. 1419. GouAUX, C. B. Mosaic disease of sugar cane in Louisiana. Louisiana Planter and Sugar Manufacturer 65: 269. 1920. — Recommendations for rogueing out diseased plants in sections where the disease is as yet very limited. — C. W. Edgerton. 1420. Henning, Ernst, och Thore Lindfors. Krusbarsmjoldaggens Bekampande — Studier och Forsok. [Gooseberry mildew control — investigations and experiments.] Central- anst. Forsoksv. Jordbruksomr&det Medd. 208. 51 p. 1920. — The article describes briefly No. 2, June, 1921] PATHOLOGY 205 the first appearance of mildew in Ireland and its subsequent spread into Sweden and other European countries. Digging and burning were the first methods of control advocated. Henning in 1907 reported good results from pruning and spraying. Results with other con- trol methods are discussed. The production of good resistant varieties by means of crosses between European and American varieties is considered possible. The results of spraying experiments with 17 different spray materials are given. The mildew is said to be most severe on bushes grown in moist locations or fertilized with nitrogenous materials. A brief discussion of the quarantine laws in several European countries is given. Control methods advocated include the cutting out and burning of diseased portions in the fall, together with liming and cultivating the bushes. The eradication of nearby wild bushes is advised. In the spring, the tops of plants to be set out should be dipped in 1-40 formalin solution, and plants should be sprayed with a formalin solution. If buds have not started, a 1-40 or 1-60 solution is recommended; but if plants have begun to bud, a 1-100 solution should be used. — Mr. and Mrs. W. W. Gilbert. 1421. HoLBERT, J. R., J. F. Frost, and G. N. Hoffer. Wheat scabs as afifected by systems of rotation. Phytopath. 9 : 45-47. 1919.— A report of a survey of 1500 acres of wheat in 28 fields in central Illinois. Wheat following corn showed considerably more scab (Gib- berella saubinetii (?) than when following wheat, oats, or clover in the rotation. In 1 field, wheat following 2 years of corn yielded 25 bushels with 20 per cent scab; wheat following 1 year of com yielded 33 bushels with 2 per cent scab. The most severe scab infestations were foimd in low places where trash from the preceding crop had collected. — C. W. Bennett. 1422. Murphy, Paul A., and E. J. Worthy. Relation of climate to the development and control of leaf roll of potato, Phytopath. 10: 407-414. 1 fig. 1920.— Hill selections of leaf- roll plants from Prince Edward Island in 1916 were planted in 1917 in tuber units at Charlotte- town, Prince Edward Island; Bermuda; and Ottawa, Canada. Plants from the same hills reacted similarly at each station. The next year the Bermuda seed at Charlestown showed 97.5 per cent leaf-roll compared with 60.7 per cent in local stock. Authors suggest wholesale introduction of potato seed from disease-free districts as a practical means of control. — R, E. Vaughan. 1423. Peyronel, B. Sevrnamento di Marsonia juglandis sui rami e polloni del note. [The overwintering of Marsonia juglandis on the branches and shoots of the walnut. Staz. Sperim. Agrarie Ital. 53: 168-171. 1920.— The author found in the winter months, on the young branches and twigs of Juglans, the conidial form of Marsonia juglandis, and suggests a close examination of the branches of infected plants, since these are exceedingly good sources of infection in early spring. — A. Bonazzi. \^2A. Stevenson, John A. Control of sugar cane mottling disease. Sugar 22: 539-541. Fig. 1. 1920.— An article reprinted from Jour. Dept. Argic. Porto Rico. Methods being used in Porto Rico to control the mosaic disease of sugar cane are discussed. — C. W. Edgerton. 1425. TicE, C. Seed-potato inspection. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5:276. 1920. 1426. TicE, C. Potato certification in B. C. British Columbia Dept. Agric. Circ. Bull. 32. 6 p. 1921. 1427. Walker, J. C. Experiments upon formaldehyde-drip control of onion smut. Phy- topath. 10:323-327. 1920.— Experiments conducted near Racine, Wisconsin, from 1913 to 1918 show that the application of approximately 200 gallons of 1 : 128 formaldehyde solution per acre gives satisfactory control of onion smut. When the quantity of solution is reduced to 120-150 gallons the writer advises increasing the concentration to 1:64. — R. E. Vaughan. 206 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, MISCELLANEOUS (COGNATE RESEARCHES; TECHNIQUE, ETC.) 1428. Fisher, D. F., and C. Brooks. Drouth-spot and related physiological diseases. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 290-293. 6 fig. 1920. — A paper read at the International Fryit Growers' Convention, Vernon, B. C, August 1920. With typical drouth-spot Winesap and Stayman were observed to be most seriously affected, followed by Gano and Ben Davis. Delicious, White Pearmain, and Jonathan do not react in the same way. Although the fruit may become badly shriveled no drouth-spot appears, and with the resumption of irrigation the apples regain normal turgor and mature with merely a certain deficiency in size and "quality." Typical drouth-spot and oozing developed on susceptible varieties before shriveling and the resumption of irrigation. It must, therefore, be due to withdrawal of water and not to sudden resumption of growth on addition of water. "Cork" is always associated with very open or very shallow soils or those markedly deficient in humus. "Apple blister" is probably due to drouth during or immediately following the blossoming period, the remedy being earlier irrigation. "Punk" is a condition somewhat resembling "physio- logical break-down" in storage and possibly due to intermittent drouth combined with intense sunlight. A drouth-spot accompanied by copious gumming, and resulting in hard bitter spots in the ripe fruit, also occurs in plums and prunes. — J. W. Eastham. 1429. Hartley, Carl. Abnormal growth induced by chloral hydrate soil treatment. Phytopath. 10:334-335. 1 fig. 1920.— Chloral hydrate (0.076 and 0.172 kgm. per sq. m.) applied to the soil before sowing to Pinus ponderosa seed produced seedlings with the first needles partially fastened together, as well as showing other abnormalities. — James Johnson. 1430. Levin, Isaac, And Michael Levine. The biological and clinical evidence of the therapeutic value of radium and Rontgen rays in cancer. Ann. Surgery 52:443-447. Apr., 1918. — In a preliminary study of the effect of Rontgen rays on normal Ricinus plants it was found that no injury resulted. Ricinus plants inoculated with Bacterium tumefaciens and given 6 treatments with Rontgen rays at intervals of 2 days for a period of 2 weeks showed no evidence of infection after 4 weeks, or developed only a minute swelling at the point of inoculation. These minute swellings consisted of typical tumor cells of arrested develop- ment. Control plants inoculated from the same sub-culture developed large galls in 4 weeks. The results of these experiments are cited as proof that the effect of Rontgen rays on malig- nant tumors is an inhibition of the proliferating power of the tumor cells and not their destruc- tion. The therapeutic value of the X-ray treatment before and after operation for cancer is pointed out. — R. Nelson. 1431. Levine, Max. Notes on Bact. coli and Bact. aerogenes. Amer. Jour. Public Health 11:21-23. 1921. — It is reported that in making counts of Bacterium aerogenes the growth of B. coli can be repressed by suitable concentration of crystal violet or brilliant green, and that lowering the concentration of peptone in the medium increases the toxicity of the dyes. — C. A. Ludwig. 1432. MacMillan, H. G. A frost injury of potatoes. Phytopath. 10:423-424. / pi. 1920. — Small necrotic areas less than 1 millimeter in diameter are produced on leaves of potato plants. By experimental data the trouble is shown to be due to frost. — H. H. McKinney. 1433. MacMillan, H. G., and L. P. Byars. Heat injury to beans in Colorado. Phyto- path. 10: 365-367. 1 fig. 1920. — The authors report a shrunken and collapsed condition of the stem of bean seedlings which occurred at the ground line. The root systems were found healthy and well developed. No organism was found associated with the affected parts. Meteorological records indicated an air temperature range from 28° F. on June 3 to 104° F. on June 29. The soil temperature 1 inch below the surface registered 113° F. on the latter date. The authors consider the condition described to have arisen from high temperature. — W. B. Tisdale. No. 2, June, 1921] PHARMACOGNOSY 207 1434. Norton, J. B. S., and C. C. Chen. Some methods for investigating internal seed infection, Phytopath. 10: 399-400. 1920.— The authors outline a method of seed disinfec- tion consisting in pre-soaking, treating in an alcoholic solution of corrosive sublimate fol- lowed by a thorough washing in ethyl alcohol and finally in sterile water.— ff. H. Mc Kinney. 1435. Weir, J. R. Note on the pathological effect of blazing trees. Phytopath. 10: 371- 373. 1920. — The writer records the prevalence of sporophores of various heart-rotting fungi on blazes on resinous and non-resinous species of conifers in Montana and Idaho. Eighty-six per cent more sporophores were found on the resinous group than on the non-resinous group. — C. J. Humphrey. PHARMACOGNOSY AND PHARMACEUTICAL BOTANY Heber W. YotTNGKEN, Editor E. N. Gathercoal, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 1020, 1295, 1308) 1436. Beythien, A., undH. Hempel. Ueber Rangoonbohnen. [Rangoon beans.] Pharm. Zentralhalle 61: 295-296. 1920.— Samples (226) of Rangoon beans were examined of which 90 per cent contained less than 0.015 per cent of hydrocyanic acid. Of these, 73 per cent contained between 0.006 and 0.015 per cent of the acid. No sample contained more than 20 mg. per 100 gm. — H. Engelhardt. 1437. Beythien, A., und H. Hempel. Ueber das Vorkommen von Rangoonbohnen im Kleinhandel. [The occurrence of the Rangoon bean in retail trade.] Pharm. Zentralhalle 61: 27-29. 1920.— Although the German government has prohibited the importation of the bean on account of some cases of poisoning which had been reported, small quantities of the bean had found their way into Germany. The authors report on analyses carried out with several samples and find that the percentage of hydrocyanic acid in the bean is not by far as great as is generally reported. They found from 0.00075 to 0.0054 per cent in these products. Furthermore, they state, most of the acid is lost in boiling the bean.— ^. Engelhardt. 1438. Bratjn, Hans. Ueber Quellstifte aus Laminariastielen und Tupeloholz. [Dilat- ing tents made of Laminaria stems and Tupelo wood.] Pharm. Zentralhalle 61: 586-591. Fig. 4. 1920.— An account of the history of dilating bougies made of the stems of Lami- naria and Tupelo wood and a microscopical and biologic description of the material are given. It is stated that the stems of Laminaria hyperborea Foslie are more suitable for making tents than those of L. Cloustonia and L. stenophylla. Tents made of Tupelo wood, especially when they are varnished as is usually the case, are of little value, because they possess only a very slight swelling power. Requirements for Laminaria bougies and dis- tinctive characteristics of Tupelo wood bougies are given.— i/. Engelhardt. 1439. Griffiths, E. L. Cocoa husks as a fodder. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 32: 55-56. 1921.— Review of literature shows that cocoa husks contain alkaloids, theobromin and caffein, which produce lethal effects when husks are fed in normal forage quantity. Husks must be fed sparingly, if at all.— L. R. Waldron. 1440. Grimme, Clemens. 1st die Rangoonbohne wirklich giftig oder doch wenigstens als schadlich fur den menschlichen Genuss anzusprechen? [Is the Rangoon bean really poison- ous or must it at least be considered as a food detrimental to man?] Pharm. Zentralhalle 61 : 159-166. 1920.— The results of analyses of numerous samples of the bean have shown that the hydrocyanic acid in it averages less than 0.02 per cent, that the acid is lost in boiling the beans with water and that the bean is, therefore, harmless. A few samples showed a rather high percentage of hydrocyanic acid, but these were derived from wild-growing plants. From cultivated plants, beans with considerably less acid are obtained.—//. Engelhardt. 208 PHARMACOGNOSY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1441. Grimme, Clemens. Ueber den Alkaloidgehalt von Herbstzeitlosensamen und ueber das Herbstzeitlosesamen Ol. [The alkaloidal content of Colchicum seed and the fixed oil in Colchicum seed.] Pharm. Zentralhalle 61: 521-524. 1920.— By extracting the seed with ether 17.6 per cent of a light-brown odorless semi-drying oil was obtained which had a pungent taste. The following constants were found: Sp. gr., 0.9176; congealing point, 9°C.; refrac- tive index, 1.4642; acid number, 20.3 (free oleic acid 10.2 per cent); saponification number, 184; iodine number, 128.5; and unsaponifiable substances, 0.71 per cent. The fatty acids obtained from the oil were pale yellow in color, melted at 24°C., congealed at 22.5°C., had a refractive index of 1.4646, a saponification number of 187.6, an iodine value of 131, and an average molecular weight of 300.3. It was also found that the percentage of colchicine in the seeds is in inverse proportion to the weight of the seeds. — H. Engelhardt. 1442. Karlsson, Karl Algot. Matricaria discoidea DC. Svensk Farm. Tidskr. 24: 517-521, 533-538. 1920.— Matricaria discoidea DC. {Matricaria suaveolens Buch., Chnjsan themum suaveolens Asch., Chamomilla discoidea J. Gay) is recommended as a substitute for the less easily obtainable camomile (chamomile), Anthemis nobilis. The paper includes an his- torical review, the comparative chemical properties, and a macroscopic and microscopic study of the 2 plants. — A. M. Hjort. 1443. Marsh, C. Dwight, and A, B. Clawson. Daubentonia longifolia (Coffee bean), a poisonous plant. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 507-513. 1920 [1921].— The seeds of D. longifolia (Sesbania cavanillesii) of the Leguminosae are very poisonous to sheep. The smallest dose of seed producing death was 0.11 pound per hundredweight of animal. The toxic principle is not named. — D. Reddick. 1444. RosENTHALER, L. Uebef die Beziehungen zwischen dem Gewicht von Drogen und ihrem Gehalt an giftigen Stoffen. [The relation between the weight of drugs and their content of poisonous principles.] Pharm. Zentralhalle 61 : 629-630. 1920.— In an article concerning the relation between the weight of Colchicum seeds and the amount of colchicine which they contain Grimme states that no literature is available on the subject. Rosenthaler, however, claims that the fact that specifically lighter drugs contain a higher percentage of active principles than specifically heavier drugs, has been known for a long time and that the Swiss pharmacopoeia for this reason excludes ergot of more than 25 mm. length. He further states that in many other drugs the amount of active principles is in inverse proportion to the weight, as for instance in bitter almonds, areca nuts, calabar beans, aconite root, belladonna root, etc. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 1441.]—//. Engelhardt. 1445. Vestlin, Conrad. Pimpinella-Saponin. Pharm. Zentralhalle 61:77-78. 1920.— Pimpinella saxifraga contains about 2.5 per cent of cfade saponin and about 1 per cent of pure saponin, which possesses the formula C23H36O18+2H2O and, therefore, belongs to the class of saponins of the general formula CnH2n-ioOi8+2H20. In no other plants of the Umbelliferae have saponins been found. — H, Engelhardt. 1446. Viehoever, Arno, Joseph F. Clevenger, and Clare Olin Ewing. Studies in mustard seeds and substitutes: I Chinese colza (Brassica campestris chinoleifera Viehoever). Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 117-139. PI. 10-19. 1920.— Seed imported extensively in U. S. A. as rape seed but offered for sale as mustard seed is really Brassica campestris chinoleifera n. var. Means of identification of seeds by microscopic examination are described in detail. Plants have been grown from seed and the characteristics established. The variety is closely related to the colza group {Brassica campestris).— The volatile oil obtained from the seed is crotonyl isothiocyanate. It is not a suitable substitute for mustard oil, in respect to either condi- mental, bactericidal, or medicinal values.— The fixed oil is of the general composition of the rape oils, and amounts to more than 40 per cent. The seed should prove useful as pressed oil cake, the leaves as greens, and the plants as forage.— Full descriptions and illustrations are presented and taxonomic problems discussed. A bibliography of 52 titles is appended.— D. Reddick. No. 2, June, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 209 1447. Wester, D. H. Ueber den merkwiirdigen Verlauf der Ureasewirkung eines Soya- bohnenextraktes beim ErwSrmen auf 37°. [The peculiar action of the urease in soybean extract when heated at 37°C.] Pharm. Zentralhalle 61:293-295. 1920.— The author found that the action of urease on soybean extract changes considerably when kept at 37°; thus he found that while the urea number (i.e., the number of mg. of urea converted by the urease solution) was 126 on the first day, after 7 days' standing it had been reduced to 47 and after 14 days to 38.2, and had increased after 21 days to 90, declining after 26 days to 85, and after 35 days to 60.3.— H. Engelhardt. PHYSIOLOGY B. M. DuGGAR, Editor Carroll W. Dodge, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 769, 770, 778, 779, 785, 791, 805, 812, 942, 944, 948, 1069, 1116, 1118, 1147, 1163, 1211, 1229, 1357, 1369, 1374, 1375, 1376, 1429, 1430, 1431, 1445, 1447, 1509, 1514, 1518, 1526, 1529, 1533, 1535, 1574.) GENERAL 1448. Clark, W. M. The determination of hydrogen ions. 317 p., S8 fig. Williams & Wilkins Co.: Baltimore, 1920. — In his preface the author points out interesting biological and chemical investigations as landmarks in the comprehension and measurement of "acid- ity," and while recognizing that the hydrogen ion may be a center of great interest because it is a dissociation product of so many compounds with which the biochemist deals, he also indicates that it is a factor which should not be permitted to "obscure possibilities of broader generalizations." — The book is written in response to the need of a detailed exposition of the two methods — colorimetric and electrometric — in daily use to determine hydrogen-ion con- centration. Accordingly, Chapter I is concerned with some of the general relations among acids and bases, including a discussion of the Ph scale and buffer action. This is followed by captions (pp. 38-96) in which are presented discussions of the colorimetric procedure, theory of indicators, choice of indicators, buffer solutions, protein and salt errors, and the value and limitations of approximate determinations with indicators. Chapters VIII-XVII deal with the electrometric method, including the theoretical aspects as well as detailed descrip- tions of the hydrogen and calomel electrodes and electrode vessels, and the potentiometer and equipment, also errors of measurement, and standardization methods. A brief chapter relating to supplementary methods is followed by a more elaborate presentation of "appli- cations" intended primarily for the biochemist and biologist, but considered by the author as merely a "cursory review" and as an index to the bibliography. The bibliography extends over 64 pages and includes some titles as late as 1919 and 1920. There are 9 pages of tables. — B. M. Duggar. 1449. Thatcher, R. W. The chemistry of plant life, xvi + 268 -p. McGraw-Hill Book Co.: New York, 1921. — This book is intended to serve primarily as a handbook dealing with the constitution of the compounds involved in plant growth, likewise the conditions under which such compounds undergo chemical changes in the protoplasm. After a brief chapter on "plant nutrients," encompassing the mineral nutrients and their roles, the author sets forth in a few pages (chapter 2) on the organic components of plants the significance of the materials to be treated, and classifies the important groups of compounds as follows: The carbohydrates and their derivatives, the glucosides and tannins; the fats and waxes; the essential oils and resins; organic acids and their salts; the proteins; the vegetable bases and alkaloids; and the pigments. Ten of the remaining 16 chapters (150 pages) are devoted to the description and discussion of these groups of substances. These sections are preceded by a chapter on photosynthesis, in which there is elaborated the trend of investigations following Baeyer's suggestion, now frequently known as Baeyer's formaldehyde hypothesis. The remaining 5 chapters deal with enzymes, the colloidal condition, the physical chemistry of protoplasm, accessory stimulating agencies, and adaptations. — B. M. Duggar. BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VIII, NO. 2 210 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, PROTOPLASM, MOTILITY 1450. Anonymous. The components and colloidal behavior of protoplasm. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2 : 271-272. 1920. [From Science 51 : 595-596. 1920.] DIFFUSION, PERMEABILITY 1451. Knight, R. C. Plant physiology. Sci. Prog. [London] 15:200-206. 1920.— This is a brief review of some important papers dealing with storage and translocation of the food products in plants. — /. L. Weimer. 1452. Mann, H. An apparatus for continuous dialysis or extraction. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44:207-209. 1920. 1453. Mtjkerji, J. N. The excretion of toxins from the roots of plants. Agric. Jour. India 15: 502-507. 1920. — The conclusions of Fletcher (Mem. Dept. Agric. India, Bot. Ser. 2': 1-16. 1908) that plants secrete toxic substances are held to be due to the use in his experiments of too concentrated a solution. Data of experiments with Knop's nutrient solution having a total salt concentration of 0.11 per cent are presented, where wheat, cajanus, and grain were grown. The solution which had previously grown a set of plants supported better growth than did the fresh solution. — /. /. Skinner. 1454. Shull, C. a. Absorption limits. [Rev. of: Harvey, R. B., and R. H. True. Root absorption from solutions at minimtmi concentrations. Amer. Jour. Bot. 5:516-521. 1918 (see Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 547).] Bot. Gaz. 68: 486. 1919. v/ater relations 1455. Langdon, LaDema M. Wood structure and conductivity. [Rev. of: (l) Farmer, J. B. On the quantitative differences in the water-conductivity of the wood in trees and shrubs. Proc. Roy. Soc. London B 90: 218-250. 1918 (see Bot. Absts. 2, Entries 305, 306; 4, Entry 1413). (2) Holmes, M. G. Observations on the anatomy of ash-wood with reference to water-conductivity. Ann. Botany 33: 255-264. 7 fig. 1919 (see Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1109).] Bot. Gaz. 68: 483-^84. 1919. MINERAL NUTRIENTS 1456. MoLLiARD, M. Action des acids sur la composition des cendres du Sterigmato- cystis nigra. [Action of acids on the composition of the ash of Sterigmatocystis nigra.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169 : 990-993. 1919. — The author has previously demonstrated that the accumulation of ash in Sterigmatocystis nigra is much less when ammonium chloride replaces ammonium tartrate as the source of nitrogen. In both cases the acidity increased during the first period of growth, but when the sugar of the culture medium disappears, acidity decreases when ammonium is used, because of the utilization of the latter. On the other hand, the use of ammonium chloride results in the accumulation of hydrochloric acid, which is not utilized by the fungus. During the first 2 days the amount of mineral utilized by the fungus is more than doubled when ammonium tartrate is used as a source of nitrogen. The author regards this result as due to the effect of hydrochloric acid on the permeability of the fungal cells. By means of analyses of the ash of fungi grown with ammonium tartrate and ammo- nium chloride as sources of nitrogen, the author finds that the mycelium of Sterigmatocystis grown on the ammonium tartrate solution contains ash in about the proportions found in the storage organs of higher plants. Only a small part of the sulphur and magnesium of the culture medium was absorbed, but all the phosphorus and potassium of the solution was recovered from the mycelium. The ash of the fungus grown on the ammonimn chloride medium was found to contain reduced amounts of sulphur, potassium, and especially mag- nesium. The author finds that the presence of hydrochloric acid in the medium reduces the permeability of the plasma membrane in an unequal fashion, the permeability to some substances being notably reduced. Attention is also called to the fact that the morphological No. 2, June, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 211 characteristics of the fungus, such as suppression of conidia formation, which may be altered by certain deficiencies of the culture medium, may also be brought about by factors leading to alteration in the permeability of the cells. — V. H . Young, PHOTOSYNTHESIS 1457. Gradenwitz, A. Carbonic acid gas to fertilize the air. Sci. Amer. 123: 549, 557. 3 fig. 1920. — An account is given of some experiments carried out on a commercial scale, in which greenhouses were supplied with purified exhaust gases from blast furnaces. The various plants showed increased growth and yield of fruits of 70 per cent to 180 per cent more than in the case of control plants. — Chas. H. Otis. 1458. Stoll, Arthur. Ueber die Assimilation der Kohlensaure. [On the assimilation of carbon dioxide.] Vierteljahrsschr. Naturforsch. Ges. Zurich 63: 512-543. 1918.— The author gives essentially the following summary: The carbon dioxide diffuses from the inter- cellular spaces through the cell walls, is brought into a higher concentration by a chemical reaction in the cell, and reaches the chlorophyll in a form especially susceptible to reaction. The carbonic acid as such, or a carbonic acid derivative, is then taken up by the chlorophyll. The chlorophyll molecule with the carbonic acid absorbs light and is surrounded by a spe- cific peroxide enzyme which splits off molecular oxygen. The first free product of assimi- lation is carbohydrate material whose simplest representative is formaldehyde. — John H. Schaffner. METABOLISM (GENERAL) 1459. Anderson, R. J. Composition of inosite phosphoric acid of plants. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44: 429-438. 1920. — The composition of phytic acid of plants as determined from the analyses of salts of this acid corresponds to inosite hexaphosphoric acid. — G. B. Rigg. 1460. Cook, M. J., V. Mix, and E. O. Culvyhouse. Hemotoxin production by the Streptococcus in relation to its metabolism. Jour. Infect. Diseases 28: 93-121. 1921. — Hemotoxin (hemolysin) production by Streptococcus is due to, and controlled by, conditions that influence the growth of the organism. — Selman A. Waksman. 1461. Dobbin, L. On the presence of formic acid in the stinging hairs of the nettle. Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh 39: 137-142. 1919. — Formic acid was demonstrated in the con- tents of the hairs by its conversion into lead formate, which could be distinguished by means of a polarizing microscope. Filter papers impregnated with barium carbonate were pressed upon nettle leaves. The papers were extracted with water and the filtered extract acidified with phosphoric acid and then distilled. The distillate was acid in reaction and could bo converted into the lead salt. — Joanne L. Karrer. 1462. Haas, P. Organic chemistry. Sci. Prog. [London] 14:378-380, 565-567. 1920.— A brief review of some of the more recent literature on this subject among which are papers dealing with the coloring matter of plants and one by Dobbin (Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh 39 : 137-142. 1919 — see preceding entry) on the active agent in the stinging hairs of nettles. ■ — /. L. Weimer. 1463. Haas, P. Organic chemistry. Sci. Prog. [London] 15:22-24. 1920.— A brief review of a paper by Haworth (Jour. Chem. Soc. 117: 199. 1920) on the constitution of disaccharides is included. — /. L. Weimer. 1464. Haas, P. Organic chemistry. Sci. Prog. [London] 15: 192-194. 1920.— The dia- static properties of formaldehyde, a new theory of carbon dioxide assimilation, and the gas contained in the floats of the giant Pacific kelp are mentioned. — /. L. Weimer. 212 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1465. Lapicdue, Louis. Variation saisonnidre dans la composition chimique des algues marines. [Seasonal variation in the chemical composition of marine algae.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 1426-1428. 1919. — Laminaria flexicaulis was selected as typical material for this work. Analysis of the carbohydrate content and of the soluble and insoluble ash showed that there is a distinct seasonal variation in the chemical composition of this alga. From the spring equinox until September there is a steady increase in soluble carbohydrates from 1.1 to 33.9 per cent. At the same time there is a decrease in the soluble ash from 28.2 to 13.4 per cent and of the insoluble ash from 7.5 to 4.6 per cent. Soluble carbohydrates in- creased from the end of winter to smnmer in the ratio of 2 to 81. The carbohydrates present are mannite [included for convenience in this group] and laminarine. The author suggests that the disappearance of soluble ash with the increase in soluble carbohydrates may be simply an "isotonic substitution." — V. H. Young. 1466. MoBius, M. tJber die Farben der Blumen. [On the colors of flowers.] Ber. Sen- kenberg. Naturf. Ges. Frankfurt, a. M. 49: 108-109. 1919. — In this report of a lecture given in February, 1919, the biological significance of colors in flowers is stated to be an unsolved problem, if insects are color-blind. In producing the various color-effects the following pigments are the only ones involved: Chlorophyll, anthoxanthin, anthocyan, anthochlor, and anthophaein. These occur, however, in many different arrangements. — A. W. Evans. 1467. MoYCHO, Venceslas. Recherches sur le role physiologique de la saponine. [In- vestigations concerning the physiological role of saponin.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32 : 449^59. 1920. —Investigations were made of the amount of saponin present at different stages of the devel- opment of Saponaria officinalis. It was found that the relative amount of saponin present was approximately constant until the time of flowering and seed production, when the amounts present decreased. The glucoside was again accumulated in the roots in the autumn and winter after the foliage had died. The author concludes that the glucoside may be utilized by the reproductive organs of the plant. The accumulation does not depend on the emigra- tion of the glucoside from the leaves but is due to its formation in the storage organs of the plant. — /. C. Gilman. 1468. Tanuet, Georges. Sur la miellee du peuplier. [On the honey dew of poplar.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 873-874. 1919.— The "honey dew" which collects on the leaves of Populus nigra was collected from 6 kilos of leaves and analyzed by appropriate methods to determine its carbohydrate content. Twenty-two grams of "melezitose" were secured from this amount of leaves. "Honey dew" of poplars appears to be formed by the excretion of minute droplets by plant lice. — V. H. Young. 14G9. Witzemann, E. J. Disodium phosphate as a catalyst for the quantitative oxidation of glucose to carbon dioxide with hydrogen peroxide. Jour. Biol. Chem. 45: 1-22. 1921. — Glucose may be quantitatively oxidized to CO2 with hydrogen peroxide in the presence of a phosphate mixture. Disodium phosphate plays the role of a typical catalyst in the oxida- tion.— G. B. Rigg. METABOLISM (NITROGEN RELATIONS) 1470. Dakin, H. D. Amino acids of gelatin. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44:499-529. Fig. 1. 1920. — The products of the hydrolysis of gelatin were found to contain 13 amino acids. The ones present in largest amounts were glycine, hydroxyproline, proline, alanine, and arginine. — G. B. Rigg. 1471. Johns, C. O., and C. E. F. Gersdorfp. The globulin of the cohune nut, Attalea cohune. Jour. Biol. Chem. 45: 57-67. 1921.— Cohune nut globulin contains all of the basic amino acids known to exist in proteins, being high in arginine and lysine. — G. B. Rigg. 1472. Johns, C. O., and D. B. Jones. Some amino-acids from the globulin of the coco- nut as determined by the butyl alcohol extraction method of Dakin. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44: No. 2, Junk, 1921] PHYSK)LOGY 213 283-290. 1920.— The following amino acids were found in the aqueous solution remaining after the products of hydrolysis had been subjected to butyl alcohol extraction (Dakin's method): Glutaminic acid, 19.07 per cent; aspartic acid, 5.12 per cent; alanine, 2.67 per cent; serine 1.76 per cent. — G. B. Rigg. 1473. Johns, C. O., and N. C. Waterman. Some proteins from the mung bean, Phaseolus aureus Roxburgh. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44:303-317. 1920.— The mung bean contains about 21.74 per cent of protein. This yields 2 globulins distinguished from each other by marked differences in their percentages of the basic amino acids. — G. B. Rigg. 1474. Jones, D. B., and C. O. Johns. Hydrolysis of the globulin of the coconut, Cocos nucifera. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44: 291-301. 1920.— The amino acids resulting from the hydroly- sis were determined. Glytaminic acid was the most abundant. — G. B. Rigg. 1475. Miller, E. R. Dihydroxyphenylalanine, a constituent of the velvet bean. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44:481-486. 1920. 1476. Paris, G. Studi e ricerche sulla biochimica del tobacco. III. Sul metabolismo dell'azoto nello sviluppo della foglia di tabacco. [The biochemistry of tobacco. III. Nitrogen metabolism in the growing leaf.] Staz. Sper. Agrarie Ital. 53: 81-96. 1920.— The direct con- nection existing between nicotine production and nitrogen nutrition was demonstrated by cutting tobacco leaves longitudinally in two equal parts and allowing one part to float on distilled water, while the other was floated upon a 0.25 per cent solution of NH4CI in dif- fuse light. The content of nicotine of the ammonium chloride portions was found in two cases to be 2.22 and 2.01 respectively, while the natural nicotine content of the water portions was 1.88 and 1.54 per cent respectively. — The physiological effect of "topping" is demonstrated. In the natural plant the total nitrogen and also the amide nitrogen (about 5 the total amount) increased from the basal to the 5th whorl, while the nicotine content, averaging g the quan- tity of total nitrogen, diminished. In the "topped" plant total nitrogen and nicotine con- tent run about parallel and the latter is so increased in amount as to exceed total nitrogen, and a low content of amide nitrogen is present. — As for soluble nitrogen, the observation was made that, while in the "topped" plants the greater proportion was in the form of basic and protein substances, in the natural plants the greater part of the soluble nitrogen was in the amidic form. Therefore, "topping" of the plants leads to a modification of the chemical composition of the leaves and the stem with an accumulation of nicotine and strong diminu- tion of amides. According to the author, nicotine is a condensation product, the formation of which is dependent upon the amides, light, and chlorophyll. — A. Bonazzi. METABOLISM (ENZYMES, FERMENTATION) 1477. Arzberger, C. F., W. H. Peterson, and E. B. Fred. Certain factors that influence acetone production by Bacillus acetoethylicum. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44:465-479. Fig. 1-2. 1920. — -This organism ferments glucose, sucrose, potato starch, and xylose in a peptone- phosphate medium with the production of acetic, formic, and lactic acids, ethyl alcohol, acetone, and carbon dioxide. — G. B. Rigg. 1478. BotJRQUELOT, Em., et H. H^rissey. Presence dans le Melilot et I'Asperule odor- ante, de glucosides fournissant de la coumarine sous I'action hydrolysante de I'emulsine. [The presence in Melilotus and Asperula odorata of glucosides furnishing coumarine when hydrolyzed with emulsin.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1545-1550. 1920. — Coumarine is secured by treating the glucosides of these plants with enzymes extracted from them. The same result is obtained if emulsin is used, both sugar and coumarine being fonned from the glu- cosides.— C. H. Farr. 1479. Bradley, H. C, and H. Felsher. Studies of autolysis. VI. Effect of certain colloids upon autolysis. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44: 553-561. 1920. 214 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1480. Garino-Canina, E. Azione dei fosfati nella fermentazione alcoolica. [The action of phosphates in alcoholic fermentation.] Staz. Sper. Agrarie Ital. 53: 67-78. Fig. 1. 1920. — A yeast (no. 121) of the collection of the laboratory is cultivated in a medium made up of saccharose, tartaric acid, potassium carbonate, potassiiun sulphate, magnesium sulphate, calcium chloride, and asparagine to which varying quantities of potassium phosphate have been added before sterilization. [The author does not mention which of the 3 phosphates was used.] After incubation the cultures are filtered and alcohol, acetic acid, and yeast sub- stance are determined and compared with the quantity of carbon dioxide produced. The results obtained are summarized in 2 tables and a graph, whence the conclusions are reached that even a molecular concentration of 0.000052 PO4"' is suiBcient to bring about a normal development and alcohol formation while a concentration of 0.0104 mol. PO4"' gives the best results. When alcohol formation is taken as a standard, it is found that greater concentrations are not quite so favorable, while if the actual weight of dry yeast is considered, then growth is a direct function of phosphate concentration within the limits studied. Experiments made with compressed yeast and dipotassium phosphate in increasing concentrations, as also with acetone yeast (zymin), gave results which the author considered confirmatory to the results obtained with living yeast although quite irregular. — A. Bonazzi. 1481. Grey, Egerton Charles. The enzymes of B. coli communis which are concerned in the decomposition of glucose and mannitol. Part IV. — The fermentation of glucose in the presence of formic acid. Proc. Roy. Soc. London B, 91: 294-305. 1920. — This organism breaks glucose down into 3 groups of products: (1) Lactic acid; (2) acetic acid, alcohol, and succinic acid; and (3) carbon dioxide, hydrogen, and fofmic acid. Production of lactic acid is not correlated with that of the other groups, which are in turn, however, closely related. This relation, due to the role of nascent hydrogen in forming alcohol, is here demonstrated for the first time in vivo. The addition of formic acid as calcium formate greatly increases the production of hydrogen and of carbon dioxide, instead of inhibiting their formation. — Paul B. Sears. 1482. Knudson, L., and R. S. Smith. Secretion of amylase by plant roots. Bot. Gaz. 68:460-466. 2 fig. 1919. — Neither Zea Mays nor Pisum arvense is capable of utilizing sol- uble starch, nor was there found in any experiment an appreciable secretion of amylase by the roots. — H. C. Cowles. 1483. KoPELOFF, Nicholas, and Lillian Kopeloff. Factors determining the keeping quality of cane sugar. Louisiana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 170. 63 p., 1 fig. 1920. — This is practically a reprint of several articles appearing in different journals (see Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 1513; 5, Entries 920, 2202) with conclusions regarding the importance of certain species of Penicillium and Aspergillus in the deterioration of sugar. — C. W. Edgerton. 1484. Kopeloff, Nicholas, and H. Z. E. Perkins. The deterioration of Cuban raw sugars in storage. Louisiana Planter and Sugar Manufacturer 64:413-415. 1920. — Cuban raw sugars stored for 5| months in New Orleans deteriorated to a considerable extent. Dur- ing the same period there was an increase in the number of microorganisms present. — C. W. Edgerton. 1485. Kopeloff, Nicholas, H. Z. E. Perkins, and C. J. Welcome. Further studies in the deterioration of sugars in storage. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 637-653. 1921. — Bags of Cuban raw sugars of 10 different lots with moisture ratios varying from 0.18 to 0.5 were stored in a large warehouse and were analyzed chemically and bacteriologically at the beginning of storage and aftev 4 and 8 weeks respectively. There was a loss in polarization in most of the sugars at the end of each period, and this was usually accompanied by a gain in reducing sugars and in moisture content. From the data secured a correaltion is established between deterioration and the niunber of microorganisms present and between deterioration and the moisture ratio. [See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1343.] — D. Reddich. No. 2, June, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 215 1486. Satava, Jan. Alcoholic fermentation in sugar juices. Sugar 22:196-198. Fig. 1-4. 1920. — [Translated from the report of the Bohemian Technical High School, Prague, by R V. Keller.] Several strains or species of the genus Z ygosaccharomyces, closely related to Z. Barkeri, are capable of fermenting concentrated solutions of sugar. The fermentation produced is rather vigorous, though the amount of alcohol produced is not large. In one experiment using a 65 per cent sugar solution, 2.69 per cent of alcohol was obtained. — C. W. Edgerton. 1487. Wester, D. H. Ureasegehalt von hoUandischen Samen und von verschiedenen Arten Soyabohnen. [Urease content of Dutch seeds and of different kinds of soy beans.] Pharm. Zentralhalle 61: 377-382. 1920. — A great number of seeds of plants growing in Hol- land and the Dutch possessions were e.xamined. The seeds of Cytisus have a high urea number. In seeds of different species of the same genus the urea number varies considerably in such genera as Geranium, Trifolium, Vicia, and Phaseolus for instance. In Vicia hir- suta, V. cracca, V. villosa, V. angustifolia, and V. sativa no urease was present, while in V. silvatica there was a high urea number. Urease was present in all the different kinds of soy- beans, as found by the examination of 48 species. Very remarkable was the fact that beans which had been kept for 17 and 31 years still exerted a strong urease action. — H. Engelhardt. METABOLISM (RESPIRATION) 1488. Haggard, H. VV., and Y. Henderson. Hemato-respiratory functions. VII. The reversible alterations of the H2CO3: NaHCOa equilibrium in blood and plasma under varia- tions in CO2 tension and their mechanism. Jour. Biol. Chem. 45: 189-198. 1 fig. 1920. — Hemoglobin plays almost as large a part in the transportation of CO2 as it does in that of oxygen, though it does not itself combine directly with CO2 to any great extent. — G. B. Rigg. ORGANISM AS A WHOLE 1489. Brandt, K. tJber den StofifwechselimMeere. [Metabolism in the sea.] Schriften Naturwiss. Ver. Schleswig-Holstein 17: 193-194. 1920. — A report is given here of a lecture on the periodicity of the plankton algae, especially the diatoms. Definite relations are shown to exist between the abundance of these organisms and the amount of certain nutritive substances present in the sea. — A. W. Evans. 1490. KtJsTER, E. Der Rhythmus im Leben der Pflanze. [Rhythm in the life of the plant.] Ber. Senckenberg. Naturf. Ges. Frankfurt a. M. 47: 69. 1919.— In this report of a lecture delivered in February, 1916, various periodic processes in plants are ascribed, wholly or very largely, to an autonomous rhythm inherent in the organism. Among these processes the following are included: Alternation of growing and resting periods, alternation of day and night positions in many leaves and flowers, the formation of fairy rings by molds, and the development of annual rings in woody plants. — A. W. Evans. 1491. Rogers, J. B. Studies on the viability of the tubercle bacillus. Amer. Jour. Pub- lic Health 10: 345-347. 1920. — The author describes experiments which go to show that the tubercle bacilli in the dust of hospital wards and in morgues are viable and infective. — C. A. Ludwig. 1492. TuBEUF. Absterben der UlmenSste im Sommer 1920. [Dying-off of the branches of the elm in the summer of 1920.] Naturw. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 228-230. 1920.— This phenomenon was observed to an equal extent in 1918, and is due to the habit, charac- teristic of the elm, of flowering very abundantly every 2nd or 3rd year. The blossoms appear before the foliage in the spring, and, although the green fruits may temporarily act as leaves before becoming ripe, they deprive the leaf buds of their required nourishment, and, as often happens, the foliage never develops so that the branches, after the fruit drops, are bare. Twigs and branches remain green just as long as they bear foliage, — if the foliage does not develop, the branches die off, or die back to the outermost foliage. — /. Roeser. 216 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, GROWTH, DEVELOPMENT, REPRODUCTION 1493. Salisbury, E. J. [Rev. of : MacDougal, D. T. Hydration and growth. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 297. vi + 176 p., 52 fig. 1920 (see Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2223).] Sci. Prog. [London] 15: 319. 1920. MOVEMENTS OF GROWTH AND TURGOR CHANGES 1494. Hendricks, H. V. Torsion studies in twining plants. Bot. Gaz. 68:425-440. 6 fig. 1919. — These studies were made on Phaseolus multiflorus and Tiniaria Convolvulus with a modified form of auxanometer, the latter being so arranged that the growing inter- nodes were stretched vertically in order to eliminate twining. An estimate of torsional rigidity at different lengths was made, and studies were begun on antidromous torsion. As the internode begins to elongate it twists but little, but later it twists more rapidly; eventu- ally there is a slight reverse twist. Rigidity or resistance to twisting increases but slowly until nearly the end of the period of elongation, when there is a sudden increase. The final increase in rigidity accompanies lignification. — H. C. Cowles. 1495. MoBius, M. Die Pflanze und die Schwerkraft. [The plant and gravity.] Ber. Senckenberg. Naturf. Ges. Frankfurt a. M. 47: 78-79. 1919. — In this report of a lecture on geotropic phenomena the contrast is brought out between the uniformity of the actual sensory organs and the diversity of the responses. — A. W. Evans. GERMINATION, RENEWAL OF ACTIVITY 1496. Crocker, William. After-ripening and germination of rice. [Rev. of: Kondo, MoNTARO. Ueber Nachreife und Keimung verschieden reifer Reiskorner. Ber. Ohara Inst. Landw. Forsch. 1: 361-387. 1919 (see Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2805).] Bot. Gaz. 68: 484. 1919. 1497. Thiel, a. F., and Freeman Weiss. The effect of citric acid on the germination of the teliospores of Puccinia graminis tritici. Phytopath. 10:448-452. 1 fig. 1920. — Means were sought for shortening the rest period of Puccinia graminis Tritici teliospores. Soaking in 1 per cent citric acid hastened after-ripening so that germination occurred in December, January, and February. Spores treated the optimum time (15 minutes) produced sporidia capable of infection. — E. K. Seymour. 1498. West, Cyril. Plant physiology. Sci. Prog. [London] 15:34-39. 1920.— This paper contains a brief review of the more recent literature on dormancy, or delayed germi- nation of seeds. — J. L. Weimer. TEMPERATURE RELATIONS 1499. Anonymous. The effect of high temperatures on fruits. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2: 272. 1920. — This is a summary of the results of Overholser and Taylor, as set forth in their article in the Bot. Gaz. 69: 274-296. 1920.— Chas. H. Otis. 1500. Livingston, B. E., and H. S. Fawcett. A battery of chambers with different automatically maintained temperatures. Phytopath. 10: 336-340. 1920. — The water is elec- trically thermostated at the extremes, the intermediate chambers assuming temperatures determined by the temperature-gradient that exists between the 2 ends. — James Johnson. RADIANT ENERGY RELATIONS 1501. Anonymous. Plant movement and radiant energy. Sci. Amer. 123: 631. 1920. 1502. Pringsheim, E. G. Vom Lichtsinn der Pflanzen. [Light perception by plants.] Ber. Senckenberg. Naturf, Ges. Frankfurt a. M. 47: 57-58. 1919.— A synopsis of a lecture No. 2, June, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 217 on light perception in plants is here given. The various types of phototropic phenomena are described and explained, and the great delicacy of the powers of light perception exhibited by plants is presented. — A. W. Evans. 1503. Troendle, Arthur. Der Einfluss des Lichtes auf die PenneabilitSt der Plasma- haut und die Methode der Penneabilitats-Koeffizienten. [The influence of light on the per- meability of the plasma-membrane and the method of coefficients of permeability.] Viertel- jahrsschr. Naturforsch. Ges. Zurich 63 : 187-213. 1918.— The results of an earlier contribution (1910) on coefficients of permeability are confirmed. New experiments, in which the quan- tity of salt taken up in a given time was determined, confirmed the earlier conclusions. The relations between the coefficients of permeability (m) and the quantity of salt taken up per minute are theoretically derived. — John H. Schaffner. TOXIC AGENTS 1504. Verschaffelt, Ed. Eeen en ander over de Werking van gasvormige vergiften op planten. [The action of gaseous poisons on plants.] Pharm. Weekbl. 57: 1163-1175, 1920. — The gases may enter the plant by dilTusion through the cuticle, which generally covers those organs which have only a limited life; or through the tissue air spaces or the lenticels of the cork tissue, the latter behaving differently with different plants. Trees and shrubs shed their leaves very rapidly when exposed to illuminating gas or the vapors of oil of cloves. Strong quick-acting poisons such as chloroform, hydrochloric acid vapors, and ammonia prevent a meristematic separation of the cells, and the leaves do not fall off until the plant is dead. Some Coniferae with definite cell layers in the needles shed these needles when exposed to chloroform or other poisons. The shedding is the more rapid the more poison is absorbed by the cork. This absorbs in 7 days 334.7 per cent of chloroform, 56.6 per cent of ether, 26.4 per cent of carbon tetrachloride, 176.7 per cent of 10 per cent alcoholic caustic potash solution, and 327.8 per cent of trichloracetic acid (25 gms. in 10 mils of water). The saponifiable substances in the cutin and suberin appear to play an important role in the poisoning of plants by gases. Anthocyan dyes are converted into white isomerids, the color being restored by hydrochloric acid vapors. In some plants enzymes may take an important part in hastening the poisoning. In some cases of poisoning strong odors are developed, for instance, by the action of chloroform on garlic and related plants, where from glucosides present in these plants alkyl sulphides are split off, which can be identified by lead acetate paper. — H. Engelhardt. MISCELLANEOUS 1505. Anonymous. Presence of copper in food plants. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2 : 204. 1920. 1506. Wilson, J. K. Device for growing large plants in sterile media. Phytopath. 10: 425-429. 1 fig. 1^20. — The seeds are sterilized with calcium hypochlorite and germinated in a short glass cylinder partially imbedded vertically in sterile agar contained in a test tube. After the seeds germinate the cylinder containing agar and seedling is lifted out of the tube and set into the mouth of a large flask which contains sterilized nutrient solution. Maize, peas, and oats have been grown to maturity by this method. — William B. Tisdale. 1507. Zerban, F. W., and E. C. Freeland. The color of sugar cane products and de- colorization in factory practice. Sugar 21: 354-359b. 1919.— This is a reprint of Louisiana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 165. 32 p. 1919 (see Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 815).— C. W. Edgerton. 1508. Zerban, F. W., t E. C. Freeland. El color de los products de la cana de azucar y su decoloracion en la practica azucarera. [The color of sugar cane products and decolorization in factory practice.] Sugar 21:444-447, 494-499. 1919.— This is a translation of Louisiana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 165 (see preceding Entry).— C. 17. Edgerton. 218 SOIL SCIENCE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, SOIL SCIENCE J. J. Skinner, Editor F. M. ScHERTZ, Assistant Editor (See also In this issue Entries 772, 773, 774, 775, 805, 806, 810, 811, 813, 814, 935, 1087, 1177, 1453, 1582) INFLUENCE OF BIOLOGICAL AGENTS 1509. CowiE, G. A. The mechanism of the decomposition of cyanamide in the soil. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10: 163-176. Fig. 1-5. 1920. — The decomposition of cyanamide in the soil has been attributed by certain workers to the action of bacteria. The author finds that his results coincide with those of Ulpiani, who holds that cyanamide breaks down to urea by a purely chemical change. Sterile soils were capable of transforming cyanamide to urea but little or no ammonia was produced under such conditions. Urea is broken down to ammonia by a change which appears to be due to the action of soil organisms. Clay soils are more efficient in the breaking down of cyanamide to urea than are sandy soils. A sample of Thanet sand taken from borings through London clay was found capable of breaking down cyana- mide even after ignition. This sand was found to have the power of softening water as have zeolites. Following this clue it was found that the effect of adding a definite zeolite, preh- nite, to ordinary inert quartz sand was to produce a mixture capable of converting cyanamide to urea. Urea was found to accumulate in sterile soils when cyanamide was added. — V. H. Young. 1510. Crump, Lettice M. Numbers of protozoa in certain Rothamstead soils. Jour. AgTic. Sci. 10: 182-198. SO fig. 1920. — Methods are described for counting the protozoa of soil, which are adaptations of the methods commonly used for estimating soil bacteria. Two soils are dealt with in detail — a well manured arable soil and a soil which had had compara- tively small applications of manure. Flagellates, amoebae, and thecamoebae are usually present in these soils in large numbers, and in the trophic condition are practically confined to the top 6 inches of soil. There is a definite inverse relation between the number of bac- teria and amoebae. Variations in the water content and temperature of soils as well as the rainfall have no influence on soil amoebae. Soils rich in organic matter are richer in protozoa and especially in amoebae and thecamoebae. A bibliography of 23 citations is included. — V. H. Young. 1511. Cutler, D. W. A method for estimating the number of active protozoa in the soil. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10: 135-143. 1920. — A method is described by which it is possible to esti- mate the numbers of active protozoa in a soil. The total number of protozoa is first found by a dilution method and a fresh portion of the soil is then treated with 2 per cent HCl (sp. gr. 1.15) overnight. By this means all active forms are killed. A second count by the dilu- tion method gives the number of cystic protozoa in the soil. — V. H. Young. 1512. Davis, John J. Miscellaneous soil insecticide tests. Soil Sci. 10: 61-75. PI. 1-2. 1920. — In field experiments on the control of the commoner white grubs 1 gallon of 8-10 per cent kerosene emulsion per 6-8 square feet of soil washed in with water, slightly browned the tips of the grass. Sodium cyanide at the rate of 165 lbs. in 12,000 gallons of water per acre appreciably injured cultivated crops like corn but produced no permanent injury to grass. Sodium cyanide treatment was more effective in controlling white grubs than kerosene emul- sion or coal tar products. — W . J . Bobbins. 1513. KoMP, William H. Wood. The use of carbon bisulfide against the white grub. Soil Sci. 10: 15-28. 1920. — The maximum dosage of carbon bisulfide for ordinary lawn and golf-green grasses lies nearer 5 ounces than 1 ounce per square foot. The minimum dosage for the white grub is 1 ounce, and injections should be made about 6 inches apart and below the grubs. The soil should be medium moist to wet. — W. J. Bobbins. No. 2, June, 1921] SOIL SCIENCE 219 1514. Matthews, Donald J. The determination of ammonia in soil. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10: 72-85. 2 fig. 1920. — Various methods of determining ammonia in soils have resulted in figures that are too high due to the simultaneous decomposition of nitrogenous compounds. The author describes and figures "aeration apparatus" with which it is possible to recover large quantities of added ammonia with an accuracy of 98-99.5 per cent in 6 hours and with nearly equal accuracy in 3 hours. For most agricultural purposes an aeration of 1| hours is sufficient. Highly manured glass-house soils undergo partial decomposition in the cold with magnesia. In such cases a modification of the method is recommended. The complete recovery of added ammonia from a calcareous soil is difficult unless the soil is finely ground. — V. H. Young. 1515. Plymen, F. J., AND D. V. Bal. The biological aspects of wheat cultivation on em- banked soils. Agric. Jour. India IS: 289-300. 1920. — Embanked wheat soils were said to be deteriorating giving low yields, and wheat plants grown on them were weak and yellow dur- ing the early stages of growth but recovered later. The soils are heavy and sticky, black in color, get very hard, and form tenacious blocks on drying after rains. They possess good powers for ammonification and nitrogen fixation but nitrification proceeds rather slowly. The retarding effect on young wheat plants may be due to lack of available nitrogen or to the presence of some deleterious substance formed under anaerobic conditions Cultivation and aeration during the monsoon months removes the cause. — F. M. Schertz. 1516. Prescott, James Arthur. A note on the Sheraqi soils of Egypt. A study in par- tial sterilization. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10: 177-181. Fig. 1. 1920.— During the "sheraqi," or fallow period, in the region of the Nile, the soil becomes extremely dry and greatly cracked. The temperature is maintained at a point near 40°C. for some time. The author shows that this results in partial sterilization of the soil with a great decrease in the number of soil pro- tozoa. Such soils when sampled and moistened up to 20 per cent showed greatly increased bacterial action over soils which were obtained before being subjected to the normal high temperatures and consequent partial sterilization. In partly sterilized soils there was a more rapid accumulation of available nitrogen parallel with that obtained following artificial soil sterilization. — V. H. Young. 1517. Russell, E. J., and E. H. Richards. The washing out of nitrates by drainage water from uncropped and unmanured land. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10: 22—43. Fig. 1-6. 1920.— The results secured in a series of drain guages at Rothamstead show that uncropped land per- sistently loses nitrogen in the form of nitrates but the rate at which the soil loses its power of producing nitrates from its own stock of nitrogenous compounds is relatively slow. At the beginning the first 9 inches of soil contained about 3500 lbs. of nitrogen per acre and yielded about 40 lbs. of nitrogen per acre to the drainage water. At the end of 50 years the soil still contains 2380 lbs. of nitrogen and is giving it up at the rate of 21 lbs. of nitric nitrogen per acre per annum. If the curve showing the rate of fall continued its present course and with- out further slowing down no less than 150 years would be needed for exhaustion of the nitrogen of the soil. The nitrogen lost from the soil appears in the drainage water wholly as nitrate. The authors find evidence from which they conclude that the subsoil contributes little if anything to the nitrogen content of the soil water. The analyses give no evidence of either the loss of gaseous nitrogen or of nitrogen fixation. The amount of nitric nitrogen in the drainage water is found to be closely related to the amount of rainfall. The months of greatest rainfall, in general October to January inclusive, are the months of greatest nitrate loss. During the last 25 years, 1 inch of water has washed out 1 lb. of nitrogen per acre, and for the 15 years previous to that the rate was 1.1 lb. Soil in situ does not give up its nitrogen as easily as when washed in ordinary laboratory experiments. A close relation between sunshine and soil temperature is revealed and it is found that a period of bright sunshine during the summer months results in an increase in nitrate loss during the succeeding rainy months. The amounts of nitrogen lost and the relation of rainfall, temperature, etc., to nitrate loss are shown in a number of graphs and tables giving the data obtained. — V. H. Young. 220 SOIL SCIENCE [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, FERTILITY STUDIES 151S. AxoNTMors. [Rev. of: Xewmax. L. F., axd H. A. D. Xevtlle, A course of practical chemistry for agricultural students. Vol.1. 235 p. Cambridge Universitv Press: 1920.] Sci. Prog. [London] 15:321-322. 1920. 1519. Bexxett, Hugh H. The soils and agriculture of the Southern States. 15X80 em., 599 p., 54 pi., 6 maps (1 colored). The Macmillan Company: Xew York, 1921. — The im- portant agricultiiral lands of the southern portion of the L'nited States are described. The various soil types occurring are described and crops best suited for their growth discussed. The soil provinces are grouped into (1) the Atlantic and Gulf coastal plains. (2) the Piedmont plateau, (3) the Appalachian Mountain province. ;4:) the limestone valleys and uplands, (5) Mississippi bluffs and silt loam uplands, (6) the Great Plains region, (7) central prairie region, and (S) the stream bottom and second bottom soils. The fertilization of the various soil types for specific crops is discussed. In Appendix A the definition of a soil is given to- gether with a classification of soil material by te-vture. In Appendix B tables are given showing the results of chemical analyses of some representative soils from widely separated localities in the Southern States. In Appendix C a list of publications on soils, soil physics, soil chemistry, soil management, crops, and livestock is given. In Appendix D statistics are given bearing on some of the important farm products of the Southern States. — /. J. Skinner. 1520. Co\rBEK. XoEMAX M. A qualitatlTe test for sour soils. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10: 420- 424. 1920. — A method is described whereby soils which are acid in nature and for which a lime requirement is indicated can be tested qualitatively. Solutions from such soils when treated with an alcoholic or ether-alcohol solution of potassium thiocyanate produce a colora- tion varying from an opaque red to pink, which indicates the formation of ferric thiocyanate. This method was tested out on a comparatively large number of acid soils with the residt just described. — V. H. Young. 1521. Ellett. W. B.. axd T. K. Wolfe. The relation of fertilizers to Hessian fly injury and winterkilling of wheat. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 13: 12-14. 1921. — In Virginia when acid phosphate or manure is used, the Hessian fly injury is smaller and the yield greater than when manure is not used or when floats are applied in place of acid phosphate — Fly injury ranges from 4.79 per cent in the manure-acid phosphate plot to 2S.96 per cent in the buck- wheat-floats-lime plot. The manure plot suffered 10.&4 per cent fly injury, which was next to the lowest. Manure has greatly prevented winter killings, as shown by yields. PLCsults show that the element most needed to increase jdelds and decrease the amount of winter- killing is phosphorus. Practically all Virginia soils are deficient in phosphorus and that ele- ment must be supplied before material increases can be secured. — P. M. Schertz. 1522. Haetvtzll, Burt L., axd S. C. Damox. Six years e^)erience in improving a light unproductive soU. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 13:37-41. 1921. — A Warwick sandy loam in Rhode Island was used. To increase productivity liming and fertilization with phosphate should be first considered. Legumes are beneficial for collecting nitrogen and increasmg humus. — F. M. Schertz. 1523. Jexkixs. E. H., axd W.L. Slate. Jb. Concerning the use of fertilizers. Connect- icut [New Haven] Agric. Exp. Sta. and Storrs Agric. Exp. Sta. Joint Bull. 4. 5 p. 1921. — This paper gives some general principles that may govern the use of fertilizers. Special sug- gestions are given for the use and purchase of mixed fertilizers and chemicals together with suggetions for applications on mowings, potatoes, com. tobacco, orchards, and gardens. Facts for calculating formulae are given. The publication is intended for general use. — Henry Dorsey. 1524. Lepmax, C. B., axd G. A. Lls-habt. A critical study of fertilizer experiments Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. 6 : 6S4r-686. 1920. — A preliminary report on a statistical study of the No. 2, June, 1921] SOIL SCIENCE 221 results of fertilizer experiments at the Ohio and Pennsylvania agricultural experiment sta- tions. Study of the Ohio data shows significant increases in yield on "two-element" and "three-element" plots, but not on "one-element" plots. The authors conclude that, even with the best methods, our present knowledge of the enormous variability of all soils and plants render the data from any given fertilizer plot of value only on that plot, and renders it highly probable that no fertilizer experiment as ordinarily conducted is possessed of sufficient practical value to justify the large expenditure of money, time, and energy involved. — Howard B. Frost. 1525. Maquenne, L., et E. Demoussy. Sur la richesse en cuivre de terres cultivees. [The amount of copper in cultivated soils.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169:937-942. 1919. — The purpose of the work undertaken was to determine whether or not the copper in- troduced in soils by use of copper sprays may become injurious to plants. Samples (140) of vineyard and other soils were analyzed and the amount of copper was found to vary from less than 1 milligram per kilo to as much as 250 milligrams in some cases. The amount of cal- cium did not appear to have any direct bearing on the amount of copper retained by soils, but various soils were variable in their retaining power. In general, vineyard soils which had been subjected to copper sprays over a long series of years were found to contain the greatest amounts of copper. Most of this copper is retained in the first 0.3 meter of soil. Observations on the amount of copper taken up by plants and on the amount of soluble cop- per in the soil lead to the conclusion that the copper of cultivated soils is not injurious to plants. — V. H. Young. 1526. IMasoni, G. La reazione alcalina provocata dagli acidi nelle terre in rapporto alia nutrizione delle piante. III. Solubilizzazione dei fosfati nel terreno. [The relation to plant nutrition of the alkaline reaction brought about by soil acids. III. Solubility of phosphates in the soil.] Staz. Sperim. Agrarie Ital. 53: 121-137. 1920. — A continuation of researches brought to bear on the question of the complex chemical reactions in the soil, the making soluble of substances insoluble in water, and plant chlorosis. Various mineral or organic acids were allowed to act upon the insoluble phosphates in the presence of an excess of CaCOs. The acids used were hydrochloric, nitric, sulphuric, formic, acetic, oxalic, succinic, malic, tartaric, and citric. The influence of the temperature upon the various changes was also studied and it was found that, especially when water was used alone, the solubility of Ca3(P04)2 was enhanced by a rise in temperature. The principal result of these investiga- tions is to be found in the fact that in the presence of an excess of CaCOs the acids which left more phosphorus in solution were citric and malic, while the stronger acids left smaller quan- tities of this element in solution. These results are similar to those the author obtained when manganese and iron salts were used instead of calcium compounds. The behavior of the different acids the author ascribes to the OH ion developed, through their interaction with the calcium carbonate, and the influence of this upon the mono or dicalcium phosphate in solu- tion and the resulting precipitation of the tricalcium salt. The presence of this OH ion is regulated by (a) the strength of the acid, and (b) the temperature at which the action takes place. It is concluded that the phenomenon of calcareous chlorosis affecting various species of plants grown on a calcareous soil, to a different degree, may be not only dependent upon a lack of iron but also of phosphorus. — A. Bonazzi. 1527. Mount, H. A. Fuel or fertilizer? Sci. Amer. 123:498, 509-510. S fig. 1920.— A discussionof America's little-known peat bogs and their present utilization. — Chas. H. Otis. 1528. Opazo, Roberto. Aplicacion de la cal a los terrenes de cultivo. [Application of lime to cultivated soils.] El Agricultor [Santiago, Chile] 5: 48-51. 1920. 1529. Sebelien, John. Modern methods for experiments with fertilizers and manures. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10:415-419. 1920. — The extreme variation between trial plots, amounting in some cases to as much as 100 per cent under the same treatment, leads to the conclusion that ordinary field plots are of little scientific value in studies with fertilizers and manures. 222 SOIL SCIENCE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, Pot experiments are of great value in accurate physiological experimentation but cannot be used to solve many problems connected with fertilizers. Various systems of arranging small plots and checks provide a method of compensating for the natural inequalities to be found in ordinary plots. Systems in vogue in a large number of experiment stations are described. — V. H. Young. 1530. Stewart, G. R., and J. C. Martin. Effect of various crops upon the water extract of a typical silty clay loam soil. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 663-667. 5 fig. 1921. — The effects of crops of maize, horse beans, potatoes, turnips, and barley upon the water extract of Yolo silty clay loam was studied. Each crop reduced the concentration of the aqueous extract. The nitrate content was reduced to a very low figure. — Concentration of soil solution is not reduced significantly vmtil the portion of soil sampled is filled with roots. — D. Reddick. 1531. Walker, Seth S. Chemical composition of some Louisiana soils as to series and texture. Louisiana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 177. 27 p. 1920. — The chemical analysis of 67 soils and 64 subsoils, representing 27 soil types in the Long Leaf Pine Belt of Louisiana, is given together with a general discussion. — C. W. Edgerton. PHYSICAL INVESTIGATIONS 1532. BouYOUCOS, George. Degree of temperature to which soils can be cooled without freezing. Jour. Agric. Res. 20:267-269. 1920 [1921]. — Mineral soils may be supercooled to — 4.2°C. without freezing; peats and mucks withstand— 5°C.; water, gelatin, agar, etc., may be supercooled to— 6°C. No definite explanation of the phenomenon is offered but theo- retical considerations are presented. "The ability of soils to resist freezing even when their temperature is much below the freezing point throws considerable new light on [biological] questions regarding the temperature of soils in cold seasons." — D. Reddick. 1533. Comber, Norman M. The flocculation of soils. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10:425-436. 1920. — This is a study of the effect of calcium salts in the flocculation of soils. Silt is most easily flocculated by calcium salts when the suspension is neutral. The addition of alkali renders the flocculation more difficult. Soil "clay" behaves in an opposite manner and is precipitated from alkaline suspensions more readily than from neutral ones. This behavior suggests that of "emulsoid" colloids and it is suggested that clay particles are protected by emulsoid colloids and so behave like them. If this is true, the action of lime is seen to be in accordance with the known facts of colloidal chemistry. Clay as an emulsoid is conceived to protect larger particles which are "suspensoid" in nature. Thus clay imposes its emul- soid nature on soil aggregates and thus on the whole soil. Fine silts are lacking in "emulsoid" clay to protect the larger "suspensoid" particles and are consequently not flocculated by calcium hydroxide. — V. H. Young. 1534. HoAGLAND, D. R., AND J. D. Martin. Effect of season and crop growth on the physical state of the soil. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 397-404. 1920 [1921].— "*rhe physical state of certain soil constituents is influenced to a marked degree by the concentration of the soil solution. The colloidal condition of the soil suspension undergoes significant alterations during the season. A large increase in colloidal matter is noted when the soil solution is depleted as a result of absorption of solutes by the plant." — D. Reddick. 1535. Keen, Bernard A. The relations existing between the soil and its water content. A resume of the subject. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10: 44-71. 1 fig. 1920. — A review of the subject, with numerous citations, is presented. Emphasis is laid on the collodial nature of soil and the necessity of attacking the problem of soil moisture from this point of view. — V. H. Young. 1536. MoRETTiNi, A. Un decennio di ricerche suU arrabbiaticcio. [Ten years of study upon the subject of "arrabbiaticcio."] Staz. Sperim. Agrarie Ital. 53: 146-171. 1920.— The condition of the soil that receives in Italy the name of "arrabbiaticcio" and in France the name of "terre-gatee" has been known in Europe since the time of the Romans and was described No. 2, June, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 223 by Columella and Catone. It has been ascribed to the untimely cultivation of a soil, moist in the upper strata and dry in the lower, after a recent limited rainfall. The plants growing therein bear very few seeds and assume a rigid and starved appearance some time after the cultivation. The present author after long periods of study has not succeeded in reproducing the condition experimentally. — A. Bonazzi. 1537. Ogg, William Gammie, and James Hendrick. Studies of a Scottish drift soil. Part II. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10: 333-342. 1920. — Part II of this series deals with the absorp- tive power of the soil and its mechanical fractions. The soil studied is a glacial drift soil from granitic rocks and is in a comparatively undecomposed state. It contains no carbonate of lime and has a comparatively small clay fraction; about 9 per cent of organic matter is pres- ent. This soil, known as "Craibstone" soil, has a considerable absorptive power for ammonia from a solution of sulphate of ammonia. The absorptive power per unit weight of the frac- tions increases with the decrease in size of the particles, reaching a maximum in clay. Fine silt and ordinary silt have a high absorptive power, probably partly due to organic matter. It appears probable that both the amount of surface exposed and the chemical nature of the soil are important in determining its absorptive power. The small amount of clay present indicates that much of the absorptive power is due to silt. [See following abstract.] — V. H. Young. 1538. Ogg, William Gammie, and James Hendrick. Studies of a Scottish drift soil. Part III. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10: 343-357. Sfig. 1920. — This section deals with the absorptive power of powdered granite and a comparison with "Craibstone" soil. It was shown that powdered granite has a considerable adsorptive power which compares favorably with that of "Craibstone" soil [see preceding entry]. Asborption does not increase proportionately with the increase in area of finer fractions; it increases at a lower rate. The effect of ignition is to reduce the absorptive power and this eff^ect is more marked with soil fractions. Absorbed ammonia is only gradually washed out by water and cannot be completely removed in this way. Absorption by powdered granite and little-weathered soils appears to be principally a phe- nomenon of adsorption. [See preceding abstract.] — V. H. Young. TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS J. M. Greenman, Editor E. B. Patson, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 769, 953, 957, 1085, 1212, 1446) GENERAL 1539. Barnhart, John Hendley. The so-called generic names of Ehrhart's Phyto- phylacium. Rhodora 22: 180-182. 1920. — A criticism of the use of Ehrhart's so-called generic names, as such, by certain American authors. The present author shows by quota- tions from Ehrhart, and from Oeder who first originated the idea of such names, that these were first proposed as "nomina usualia" for non-botanical conversational use and "had no connection or relation to classification, to genus, or to specific relationship." — James P. Poole. 1540. Burkill, I. H. Notes on Cola trees in the Economic Garden, Singapore. Gardens' Bull. Straits Settlements 2:74-86. 1 fig. 1918.— The author gives a history of the Cola trees in the above Garden, where they were introduced in 1879, their growth and production. He adopts the nomenclature of Chevalier and Perrot as expoimded by them in "Vegetaux utiles de I'Afrique tropicale francaise," VI, 1911. They claim that the Sterculia acuminata Beauv. of Benin is a small bushy tree 7 or 8 feet in height and does not produce the Kola Nut of Sierre Leone, which is the Kola of commerce, or but a very small part of it; that the tree which produces the larger part of the Kola Nut of Sierre Leone is 40 feet in height and is 224 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, Sterculia nitida Vent. The former produces Kola Nuts with 3 or more cotyledons and the lat- ter those with only 2 cotyledons. Under the genus Cola these species are known respec- tively as C. acuminata (Beauv.) Schott & Endl. and C. nitida (Vent.) Schott & Endl. Three known varieties of the latter are given, namely, var. alba, var. rubra, and var. mixta. The fruit and seeds are illustrated and fully described. The active principles and chemical com- position are given and also elaborate notes on the trade, cost of drugs and chemicals during the war, cultivation, yields, and properties. — Oliver A. Farwell. 1541. Kops, Jan, F. W., van Eeden, en L. Vuyck. Flora Batava. Afbeelding en Besch- rijving der Nederlandische Gewassen. [Flora of Batavia. Illustrations and descriptions of the plants of Holland.] 402e-405e Aflevering. PI. 2001-2016. Martinus Nijhoff : 's-Graven- hage, 1920. — The vascular plants illustrated and described in the present parts are: Agrostis scabra Willd., Dipsacus laciniatus L., Lepidium bonariense L., Phalaris praemorsa Lam. & DC, Rubus procerus P. J. Miill., R. rubicundus P. J. Mull. & Wirtg., R. Wahlenbergii Arrh., and Rumex fennicus Murbeck. The non-vascular plants included are: Boletus felleus Bull., Cyphella capula Holmsk., Hygrophorus agathosmus Ft., Pleurotus mitis P., Polyporus leuco- melos P., Russula fellea Fr., Sistotrema confluens Ft., Tricholoma Russula Schaeff, and Xylaris Guepini (Fr.) Ces. [See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 635; 5, Entry 2347; 7, Entry 1457; 8, Entry 1298.] — J. M. Greenman. 1542. [NoRSTEDT, C. T. O.] [Swedish rev. of: Beauverd, G. Monographic du genre Melampyrum. (Monograph of the genus Melampyrum.) Mem. Soc. Phys. et Hist. Nat. Geneve 38:291-637. 31 fig. 1916-1917.] Bot. Notiser 1918: 159. 1918. 1543. [NoRSTEDT, C. T. O.] [Swedish rev. of: Lindman, C. A. M. Svensk Fanerogam- flora. (Swedish Phanerogam-flora.) 8vo.,viii + 639p.,330fig. 1918.] Bot. Notiser 1918: 306-308. 1918. 1544. OsTERHOUT, Geo. E. Rocky Mountain botany and the Long expedition of 1820. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 555-562. 1920.— An account is given of the work of Dr. E. P. James of the Long Expedition with the itinerary of the expedition and a list of the new species collected. — P. A. Munz. 1545. Vuyck, L., en H. C. van de Pavord Smits. Naamlijst der Nederlandsche Gewas- sen afgebeeld en beschreven in deel I-XXV der Flora Batava. [Index of the plants of Holland illustrated and described in parts I-XXV of the Flora of Batavia.] 12 X 19 cm., 131 p. Mar- tinus Nijhoff: 's-Gravenhage, 1920. — This index is an alphabetical list of the scientific and common names of the plants included in the first 25 parts of the "Flora Batava." — J. M. Greenman. PTERIDOPHYTES 1546. MoxLEY, G. L. Notes, chiefly nomenclatorial, on southern California ferns. Bull. Southern California Acad. Sci. 19: 56-57. 1920.— ^Two new combinations of ferns, Thelypteris normalis (C. Chr.) Moxley and Thelypteris arguta (Kaulf.) Moxley, are given.— iEoxana Stinchfield Ferris. SPERMATOPHYTES 1547. Anonymous. Poaomeiensis. Jour. Botany 58: 295. 1920. — Poa omeiensis Rendle (Jour. Botany 58: 25, 1920) is an abortive name, hence should be replaced by P. szechuensis Rendle. — K. M. Wiegand. 1548. Anonymous. The name Alsine. [Rev. of: Sprague, T. A. Stellularia or Alsine. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1920: 308-318. 1920.] Jour. Botany 58: 294. 1920. 1549. Ashe, W. W. Notes on trees and shrubs of eastern North America. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 581-582. 1920. — Prunus allegheniensis Porter is shown to extend as far south No. 2, June, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 225 in distribution as Virginia and West Virginia; a shrubby form of Azalea arborescens Pursh is discussed, which grows at Great Falls, Virginia; and Azalea neglecta sp. nov. is described. — P. A. Mum. 1550. Brewster, A. A. Flowers of Haeraodorum, blood root. Australian Nat. 4: 152. 1920. — A semi-popular note on the form and number of the floral parts. The flower opens to a very limited extent, but pollination by "honey lovers" is inferred from the nectaries. Size and color are referred to only as "this seemingly insignificant 'black' flower." If black, it is striking. — T. C. Frye. 1551. Davidson, A. New or noteworthy additions to the flora of southern California. Bull. Southern California Acad. Sci. 19: 54-56. 1920. — With distributional notes of various flowering plants there is a description of a new species. Allium montigenum Davidson. — Roxana Stinchfield Ferris. 1552. Fernald, M. L. Rubus recurvicaulis Blanchard, var. armatus n. var. Rhodora 22: 168. 1920. — This new variety strongly simulates R. tardatus Blanchard, in its bristly inflorescence, but has the leaflets broader and rounded at the base as in typical R. recurvi- caulis which occurs with the variety, and to which it intergrades. Specimens have been collected in Newfoundland, Miquelon, and Cape Breton. — James P. Poole. 1553. Fernald, M. L., and K. M. Wiegand. Studies of some boreal American Cerasti- ums of the section Orthodon. Rhodora 22 : 169-179. 1920. — Pursuant to their studies of New- foundland and Labrador collections of Cerastium, the authors here publish the result of their investigations of the American species of the section Orthodon, the plants of which have passed in America under the composite species C . alpininn L., C. vulgatum L., and C . arvense L. They recognize the following species, varieties, and forms: C. alpinum L., C. alpinum var. legitimum Lindblom, C. alpinum forma puVvinata Simmons, C. alpinum var. glandu- liferum Koch., C. alpinum var. glutinoso-lanatum Facchini., C. alpinum var. lanatum (Lam.) Hegetschw., C. Beeringianum Cham. & Schlcht., C. Beeringianum var. capillare n. var., C. Fischerianum Seringe, C. arcticum Lange, C. Earlei Rydberg, C. terrae-novae n. sp., C. ierrae-novae forma Waghornei n. f., C. unalaschkense Takeda, C. vulgatum L., C. vulgatum var. hirsutum Fries., and C. arvense L. Bibliography and synonymy are given except for the last species. In this case the authors state that all their attempts to reduce the species- complex to definite species or varieties with natural ranges have proved futile. — James P. Poole. 1554. Godfery, M. J. The problem of the British marsh orchids. Jour. Botany 58: 286- 290. 1920. — Orchis latifolia was studied at Vence, Alpes Maritimes, France, last May where 0. maculata was entirely absent. Instead of a large proportion of plants with unspotted leaves and a wide variation in the markings of the lip very little of either peculiarity was found. The spots were almost always present, and were either ringed or solid. The author is convinced that O. latifolia of this region is identical with the spotted-leaved marsh orchis of Great Britain. 0. latifolia in Vence is certainly not a hybrid of some species with 0. maculata, which is absent. The suggestion that 0. praetermissa Druce is the true 0. latifolia has no foundation. The spotted leaved British marsh orchis is probably simply 0. latifolia, and not a hybrid. Confusion has arisen through the erroneous identification of hybrids as 0. latifolia. With the recognition of 0. latifolia as a species the problem of the British marsh orchis is much simplified. The question as to whether there are unspotted forms of 0. latifolia distinct from 0. praetermissa remains unsolved. — K. M. Wiegand. 1555. Hemsley, W. B. [Rev. of: Maiden, J. H. A critical revision of the genus Eucalyp- tus. Vol. 2, parts 8-10; Vol. 3, parts 1-8; Vol. 4, parts 1, 3, 5-10 (parts 18-28, 31, 33, 35-40 of the complete work). W. A. Gullick: Sydney, 1913-1920.] Nature 106:45. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 806; 2, Entry 1355; 3, Entries 1308, 2995; 7, Entry 1464. 226 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1556. Hervey, E. Williams. A rare variety of Vitis labrusca. Rhodora 22: 183-184. 1920. — Report of a white variety of V. labrusca found on sale in the New Bedford market and traced to a vine growing in the woods near the town of Rochester, Massachusetts. Report of the same variety in the woods in Westport. Editor's note refers this grape to the ''White Fox," V. labrusca var. alba, found wild in the woods at York, Pennsylvania. — James P. Poole. 1557. Jansen, p., en W. H. Wachter. Floristische aanteekeningen xvi. Glyceria, R. Br. [Floristical notes xvi. Glyceria R. Br.] Nederland. Kruidk. Arch. 1919: 317-325. 1919. — The occurrence and description of species, varieties, and hybrids of the genus Glyceria in the Netherlands are given. — J. C. Th. Uphof. 1558. Jennings, O. E. New or noteworthy plants from northwestern Ontario. Jour- Washington [D. C] Acad. Sci. 10: 453-460. 1920. — From collections made by the author and Mrs. O. E. Jennings in Ontario to the north and northwest of Lake Superior the following new species and varieties are described: Lysias orbiculata (Pursh) Rydb. var. pauciflora, Kneiffia depauperata, Pyrola uliginosa Torr. var. gracilis, P. compacta, P. chlorantha Sw. var. revoluta, Scutellaria lateriflora L. var. axillaris, Stachys palustris L. var. puberula, S. palustris L. var. macrocalyx, S. palustris L. var. nipigonensis. — E. B. Payson. 1559. Lewton, F. L. The history of kidney cotton. Jour. Washington [D. C] Acad. Sci. 10:591-597. 2 fig. 1920. — An account of its nomenclature. Th.Q naioie Gossypium lapideum Tussac, published in 1818, is accepted. — Helen M. Gilkey. 1560. MacCaughet, Vaughan. The Mangrove. Amer. Bot. 25: 42. 1919. — Rhizophora Mangle L. is not native to the Hawaiian Islands but has been introduced near Honolulu where it has increased, suggesting that it would be a desirable species for planting on the coast. The species is also described and its uses given. — W. N . Clute. 1561. Mackenzie, Kenneth K. Scientific names applicable to our purple-flowered Eupatoriums. Rhodora 22: 157-165. 1920. — In referring to K. M. Wiegand's article "Eupa- torium purpureum and its allies" (Rhodora 22: 57), the author is in accord with the latter's conclusions that there are 4 distinct and well-marked species in this group but is not in agree- ment with him when it comes to applying names occurring in botanical literature to the various species recognized. The present author gives the 4 species numbers in the same way as done by Wiegand and discusses at some length the problem of the identity of each. — James P. Poole. 1562. MoxLEY, George L. Zauschneria orbiculata n. sp. Bull. Southern California Acad. Sci. 19:30. 1920. 1563. Nakai, Takenoshin. Notulae ad plantas Japoniae et Coreae XX. [Notes on the plants of Japan and Corea. XX.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 33: 41-61. 1919. — Besides brief miscel- laneous notes the following new species and varieties are described and new combinations made: Car ex daisenensis, Salix meta-formosa, S. orthostemma, S. sericeo-cinerea, S. aericeo- cinerea var. lanata, Alnus borealis Koidzumi var. koreana (A. japonica Siebold & Zucc. var. kereana Callier), A. borealis Koidzumi var. latifolia (A. japonica Siebold & Zucc. var. lati- folia Callier), A. borealis Koidzumi var. paniculata {A. paniculata Nakai), A. japonica Sie- bold & Zucc. var. rufa, A. vermicularis, Betula Schmidtii Regel var. lancea, Parietaria core- ana, Polygonatum lyratum, Rheum coreanum, Melandrium umbellatum. Clematis subtriternata, C. subtriternata var. tennuifolia, C. ochotensis Poiret var. ternata, Isopyrum insigne, Pulsatilla nivalis, Thalictrum osmorhizoides, T. spirostigmum., C. Maximowicziana (C. speciosa Maxim.), Arabis ligulifolia, Barbarea sibirica (B. vulgaris R. Br. var. sibirica Regel), B. hondoensis. Cotyledon filifera, Astilbe chinensis (Maxim.) Franch & Savat. var. formosa, A. chinensis (Maxim.) Franch. & Savat. var. paniculata, A. hachijoensis. Spiraea pseudo-crenata, Sorbus amurensis Koehne var. rufa, Potentilla chinensis Seringe var. littoralis, P. chinensis Seringe No. 2, June, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 227 var. pseudo-chinensis, Astragalus setsureianus, Phellodendron molle, Acer palmatum Thunb. var. pilosum, A. pictmn Thunb. var. horizontale, Tilia amurensis Komarov var. rufa, T. amu- rensis Komarov var. koreana. — E. B. Payson. 1564. Omang, S. O. F. Hieracium-Sippen der Gruppe Alpina aus dem siidlichen Nor- wegen. III. [Hieracium forms of the group Alpina in southern Norway.] Nyt Mag. Natur- videnskaberne 56: 69-106. 1919. — Studies of Hieracium during July-August 1913 in moun- tain districts has resulted in the publication of the following new species: H. applicans, H. callianthum, H. dissotocum, H. excreturn, H. eucalpideum, H. euphyllotum, H. helinense, H. limatum, H. lomochnoum, H. monacroides, H. mutilescens, H. nannocephaloides, H. nanno- cephalum, H. odontolipes, H. paramecodes, H. paramorphum, H. sceletum, H. sordidiceps, H. tanycladum, H. tenellescens, and H. tenuiceps. — A. Gundersen. 1565. Parker, R. N. Erythrina glabrescens sp. nova. Indian Forester 46:647-648. 1920. — A new tree reaching a height of 50-60 feet and a girth of 5-6 feet is described from India. — E. N. Munns. 1566. Pfeiffer, H. Ficiniae speciebus novis aucta. [New species of Ficina.] Herbarium 54:33-34. 1920. — New species and varieties of Ficinia, mostly from South Africa, are de- scribed as follows: Ficinia atrosiachya, F. dasystachya C. B. Clarke var. Burchellii, F. Schlech- teriana, F. thyrsoidea, F. canaliculata, F. decidua, F. Trinkleriana. — H. A. Gleason. 1567. Piper, C. V. A new genus of Leguminosae. Jour. Washington [D. C] Acad. Sci. 10: 432^35. 1920. — Monoplegma is proposed as a new genus to which is referrred one species, M. spherospermum, from Costa Rica. Superficially this plant resembles species of Cana- valia but floral characters indicate that its relationship is much closer to Dolichos. — Helen M. Gilkey. 1568. PuGSLET, H. W. Notes on the British hawkweeds. Jour. Botany 58: 281-285. 1920. — The notes were compiled in connection with an attempt to work out the British hawk- weeds, Hieracium, of which during the past 25 years 250 gatherings have been made. A brief historical sketch of the study of this genus in Britain is given. Fourteen species are listed with accompanying notes on distribution, specific validity, and nomenclature. Hiera- cium holophyllum Linton 0. angustisquamum is described as new. — K. M. Wiegand. 1569. RusBY, H. H. Descriptions of three hundred new species of South American plants with an index to previously published South American species by the same author. 8 vo., 170 p. Published by the author: New York, December 20, 1920.— The following species of flowering plants, mostly from Colombia and Bolivia, are described as new to science: Xanthosma bili- neata, Tillandsia triangularis, T. attentuata, T. marantoidea, Dioscorea recurva, D. frutescens, D. truncata, D. Herbert-Smithii, D. hastatissima, Renealmia orinocensis, Myrica costata, Pouzolzia platyphylla, P. petiolata, Boehmeria sordida, Pilea macrophylla, Sahagunia colom- biana, Myriocarpa magnifica, M. obscura, Roupala discolor, Struthanthtis divaricatus, Aetan- thus ovalis, Dendrophthora stricta, D. striata, Agonandra granatensis, Apodanthes tribracteata, Jillionia craterimorpha, Berberis ovalifolia, B. densifolia, Cissampela tomentocarpa, Hyper- baena trinervis, Duguetia pauciflora, D. rostrata, Trigynaeia anastomosans, Oxandra ovata, Nectandra amplifolia, Ocotea flavescens, O.flexuosa, 0. alloiophylla, Sparattanthelium Sprucei, Lepidium angusti folium, Radicula scabra, Morisonia elliptica, Elaeodendron macrophyllum, Brunellia boliviana, B. Brittonii, Weinmannia lyrata, Licania venosa, Parinarium pachy- phyllum, Moquilea cuspidata, M. orinocensis, Rourea laxiflora, Tournatea costata, Lotoxalis phaseolifolia, L. manihotoides, Xanthoxalis unduavensis, X. flagellata, X. mollissima, X. biflexa, lonoxalis pazensis, I. Buchtienii, Erythroxijlon densum, E. uniflorum, Picramnia villosa, Protium mucronatum, P. orinocense, Cedrela boliviana, Trichilia oblanceolata, Byr- sonima Herbert-Smithii, Pterandra opulifolia, Heteropteris rhombifolius, Tetrapteris alloi- carpha, T. tenuistachys, Securidaca orinocensis, S. vensoa, Monnina Buchtienii, Phyllanthus heteromorpha, Croton bondaensis, C. cienagensis, C. obtusus, C. ochromaefolius, Acalypha 228 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, salicioides, A. amplifolia, A. Williamsii, A. subscandens, A. jubifera, A. asterifolia, Per a benensis, Chaetocarpus Pearcei, Sebastiania boliviana, Euphorbia sanmartensis, E. chioge- noides, E. subtrifoliata, Ilex imbricata, Salacea sphaerocarpa, S. mucronata, S. catalinensis, . Hippocratea foliosa, Rhamnus atroviridis, Gaya rubricaulis, Malvastrum micranthum, Ayenia acuminata, Sterculia laxiflora, Saurauja brevipes, S. Herbert-Smithii, Clusia oblanceolata, C. ternstroemioides, Vismia falcata, V. angustifolia, Calceolaria hirsuta, C. curvirostra,Ri' norea dichotoma, Hasseltia lateriflora, Casearia onacaensis, C. chlorophoroidea, C. Herbert- Smithii, Begonia unduavensis, B. lignosa, B. oblanceolata, B. heterodonta, B. subcostata, Grislea compacta, Ammania pedunculata, Combretum latipaniculatum, C. multidiscum, C. oblongi folium, Maieta robusta, Hartmannia boliviana, Pentapanax granatensis, Hydrocotyle grossulariaefolia, Gaultheria sanmartensis, G. tetriches, G. Fendleri, Macleania robusta, M. arcuata, M. recurva, Sophoclesia robusta, Vacciniopsis tetramera, Psammisia elegans, Cybian- thus foliosus, I cacorea granatensis, I. Herbert-Smithii, I. sanmartensis, Symplocos mapirensis , Buddleia cochabambensis, Spigelia filipes, Aspidosperma elliptica, Tabernaemontana longi- flora, T . albescens, T. cuspidata, T. myriantha Britton, Rauwolfia littoralis, Echites Sanctae- Martae, E. Laurentiae-disca, E. bicorniculata, Dipladenia alba-viridis, D. Buchtienii, D. piladenia, D. tetradenia, D. glabra, Odontadenia cuspidata {Dipladenia cuspidata Rusby), Mandevilla attenuata, Forsteronia foliosa, Prestonia mucronata, P. robusta, P. gracilis, Hemi- pogon andinum, H. Williamsii, Irmischia angustifolia, I. aristata, Philibertella filipes, P. ovalifolia, Stenomeria tomentosa, Metastelma atrovirens, M. pallidum, M. ovatum, Tassadia recurva, Ditassa Mandoni, Schistogyne pentaseta, Amphistelma leptocarpa, Vincetoxicum acu- tissimum, Marsdenia ecorpuscula, M. inelegans, M. asclepioidea, Phaeostemma grandifolia, Gonolobus Squiresii, G. attenuatus, G. leucodermis, Maripa acuminata, M. repens, Ipomoea hilarifolia, Cordia carnosa, C. opaca, C. subtruncata, Bourreia viridis, Tournefortia macro- stachya, Coldenia aggregata, C. elongata, Aegiphila stricta, Lippia subterranea. Salvia tenui- stachya, S. viridifolia, S. libanensis, S. multispicata, S. secundiflora, Solanum tetrapetalum, S. penduliflorum, S. scorpioideum, S. auctosepalum, S. sacupanense, S. deltoideum, Cypho- mandra chlorantha, C. bassovioides, Bassovia calceolarioides, B. ferruginea, Physalis petio- laris, P. cuneata, P. margaranthoides. Oestrum imbricatum, C. papyraceum, Cuspidaria ovalis, Adenocalymna purpurascens, A. latifolia,A. symmetrica, Besleria debilis, B. tenuifolia, Gesneria onacaensis. Diastema Williamsii, Phinaea albiflora, Columnea stricta, C. pallida, C. grandifolia, C. latifolia, C. sanmartensis, Beloperone sanmartensis, Jacobinea Lindaviana, Rondeletia colombiana, R. ovata, Elaeagia obovata, E. mollis, Lygistum tomentosum, Gonzalagu- nia acutifolia, Posoqueria platysiphonia, Randia orinocensis, Duroia Sprucei, Aliberti a granu- losa, Hoffmannia striata, H. viridis, Guettarda discolor, G. roupalaefolia, Mapourea biacumi- nata, M. latifolia, Psychotria scabrifolia, P. albacostata, P. olyphylla, P. sanmartensis, P. indulgens, P. salicifolia, Palicourea populifolia, P. abbreviata, P. caloneura, P. Williamsii, Rudgea longirostris, Coussarea grandifolia, Borreria Herbert-Smithii, Siphocampylus recti- florus, S. declinatus, Centropogon foliosum, Piptocarpha gracilis, Addisonia boliviana, Ka- nimia colombiana, Baccharis condensata, B. densifolia, Gnaphalium multicapitatum, Cliba- dium latifolium, C. lanceolatum, Baltimora ovata, Montanoa serrata, Wedelia heterophylla, W. symmetrica, Melanthera longipes, Encelia soratensis, E. deltoidea. Galea congesta, C. Herbert- Smithii, C. Holtoni, Pectis rosea, P. densa, Liabum biattenuatum, L. subumbellatum, L. stipulatum, L. falcatum, L. acuminatum, Moquinia macrocephala, Lycoseris oblongifolia, Onoseris alata, and Jungia grossulariaefolia. — J. M. Greenman. 1570. Small, John K. Urechites pinetorum. Addisonia 4:21-22. PI. 131 {colored). 1919. — The author gives a full description of this proposed new species of the family Apo- cynaceae, an inhabitant of the pine woods of the Everglade Keys of Florida, and includes notes on the related and long known species, U . lutea (L.) Britt., a vine, sometimes climbing to the top of tall trees, an inhabitant of the hammocks. The stem of the proposed species is erect. — T. J. Fitzpatrick. 1571. Smith, Charles Piper. Studies in the genus Lupinus — V. The Sparsiflori. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 487-509. Fig. 53-56. 1920.— Keys to, and diagnoses of, the following species and varieties of Lupinus are given: L. hirsutissimus Benth., L. sparsiflorus Benth. No. 2, June, 1921] UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS 229 and its varieties arizonicus (Wats.) comb, nov., setosissirmis var. nov., barbatulus Thornber var. nov., insignitus var. nov., inopinatus var. nov., Pondii (Greene) comb, nov.; L. trun- catus Nutt. and its variety Burleivi var. nov.; L. Benthami Heller and its variety opimus var. nov.; L. citrinus Kellogg; and L. deflexus Congdon. — P. A. Munz. 1572. Standley, Paul C. The North American species of Agonandra. Jour. Wash- ington [D. C] Acad. Sci. 10: 505-508. 1920. — Two new species, A. obtusifolia and A. Con- zattii, are described and A. raccmosa (Schaefferia racemosa DC.) appears as a new combina- tion, all from Mexico. This is the first time that the genus has been reported from North America, and this is the onh' genus of the family Opiliaceae known on the western continent. — Helen M. Gilkey. MISCELLANEOUS, UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS B, E. Livi.VGSTOX, Editor S. F. Trelease, Assistant Editor 1573. Anoxymous. Artificial wool from cotton waste, Sci. Amer. 123: 569. 1920. 1574. DoPLEix, Fraxz. Das Problem des Todes und der Unsterblichkeit bei den Pfianz- en und Tieren. [Death and immortality in plants and animals.] 119 p. G. Fischer: Jena, 1919. 1575. Fontanel, P. Sechage des plantes pour herbiers. [The drying of plants for her- baria.] Nat. Canadien 47: 51-61. 1920. — The author notes the common and the complicated processes of drying plants and proposes an intermediate process depending first on drying under the usual pressure of absorbent layers but at a higher temperature, to accelerate the evaporation of moisture and forestall the degenerative action of enzymes and bacteria. This requires a current of heated air, the temperature being first between GO and 70°C. Later the temperature should be considerably lowered. A box holds the plants over a suitable source of heat. Between the specimen sheets are sheets of tubed cardboard through which the upward current of warm air passes. Methods for treating certain plants with chemicals, to preserve color, elasticity, etc., and to prevent decomposition, are also considered. — A. H. Mac Kay. 1576. Jordan, W. H. Director's report for 1919. New York Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] Bull. 470. 28 p. 1919. — A discussion of administrative matters and of the research work of the station in 1919. A list of the publications issued by the station during 1918 and 1919 is appended. — F. C. Stewart. 1577. Mount, H. A. Our coal in the making. Sci. Amer. 123: 522, 5.32, 534-535. ^fig- 1920. — A popular article on peat. — Chas. H . Otis. 1578. Newton, R. The quality of silage produced in barrels. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 13: 1-11. 1921. — Judging by the odor, appearance, palatability, and chemical tests, barrels were found to be suitable experimental containers for silage. Silage from barrels was found to compare favorably with silage from farm silos. — F. M. Schertz. 1579. Pathak, G. p. Some famine foods in Ahmedabad. Agric. Jour. India 15:40-45. 1920. — New materials which have been utilized as famine food are Bid (rhizomes of Scirpus kysoor), Thek (rhizomes of Cyperus bulbosus), Poll of pan (the inflorescence of Typha angus- tata), and tubers and fruits of poyana (Nymphaea stillata). Bid contains about 70 per cent of digestible carbohydrates and 8-10 per cent of proteids. When used for human food the clods dug from the soil containing the rhizomes are left unbroken until thoroughly dried. The thek plant grows naturally in salt land; when properly dried and roasted it is used for flour. Poyana is the common water lily of the nal. The tubers are roasted in ashes or are 230 UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, No. 2, June, 1921] boiled. The seeds are used for flour. The dried tubers contain about 68 per cent of digest- ible carbohydrates and 15 per cent of proteids; the seed, 70 per cent of carbohydrates and 11 per cent of proteids. — /. J . Skinner. 1580. ScHNEGG, H. Die Pilze und ihre volkwirtschaftliche Bedeutung. [Fungi and their domestic significance.] Ber. Senckenberg. Naturf. Ges. Frankfurt a. M. 49: 90-91. 1919. — A synopsis of a lecture on the utilization of mushrooms is here given. Their importance as food for man and domestic animals is emphasized, and their employment in powdered form is especially recommended. It is further suggested that woody shelf-fungi be used as a sub- stitute for cork and kindling wood.- — A. W. Evans. 1581. ScHDRHOFF, H. Die Verwertung der Brennesseln als Ge spins tfasern. [The utili- zation of nettle-fibers in spinning.] Ber. Senckenberg. Naturf. Ges. Frankfurt a. M. 49: 73. 1919. — In this report of a lecture on nettle-fibers, the utilization on a commercial basis is described, and the hope is expressed that these fibers may partially take the place of cotton in Germany. — A. W . Evans. 1582. Von Stietz, G. E. C. Molasses as fuel, and the manufacture of potash from the ashes. Louisiana Planter and Sugar Manufacturer 64: 348-350. 1920. — Molasses can be burned in combination with other fuels. The ashes have a very high content of potassium salts. Methods of extracting and refining the ashes are given. — C. W. Edgerton. INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS The purpose of Botanical Abstracts is to supply complete citations and analytical abstracts of all papers dealing with botanical subjects, wherever published, just as soon as possible after they appear. Every effort is made to present complete and correct citations with abstracts of original work, of all papers and reviews, appearing alter January 1, 1919. As an adequate index of progress. Botanical Abstracts is of use to the intelligent grower, field agent and inspector, extension worker, teacher and investigator. The international scope of the work should appeal especially to those workers who have restricted library tacili- ties. It is hoped that the classification by subjects will prove to be a great aid even to those having access to large libraries, while the topical index should serve a most useful purpose to every one interested in plants. The service of Botanical Abstracts is planned for botanists and all workers with plants throughout the world. All botanical workers connected with Botanical Abstracts in any way receive as compensation for their services only the satisfaction that comes from par- ticipation in a large cooperative movement for the advancement of the science. Although the physical exigencies of the enterprise have made it practically necessary that the actual work of preparing the issues be largely done within a relatively short distance from the place of publication, this does not imply that the cooperation is not needed of residents of countries other than the United States and Canada; many collaborators and abstractors reside in other countries. It is physically necessary that the burden of the work and the finding of funds for clerical assistance, etc., should rest largely on North American workers, but the field covered is international and the results are available to all. The Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts, Incorporated, has charge of publication _ The board is a democratic organization made up of members elected from many societies^ as is shown on the first cover page. Each society elects, in its own way, two representa- tives, each for a period of four years. One new member is elected each biennium (beginning January 1, 1921) to replace the representative who retires. In the list on the first cover page, the member first named in each group is to serve till January 1, 1925; the second member in each group is to serve till January 1, 1923. Members are not eligible for immediate reelection. The Executive Committee of the Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts consists of five members, elected annually by the Board. It has charge of ad interim affairs not involving matters of general policy. Its membership is shown by the asterisks in the list on the first cover page. The chairman of the Committee for 1921 is B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. The Board of Editors of Botanical Abstracts consists of an Editor-in-Chief and Editors for Sections, as shown on the second cover page. The Editors are elected annually by the Board of Control. Assistant Editors may be appointed by the Editors. Editors for Sections, with the aid of Assistant Editors for Sections, are responsible for editing the material of their respective sections as this is supplied by the Bibliography Committee (from the Collaborators and other Abstractors), and also for citations and abstracts of non-periodical literature. The Editor-in-Chief, with the approval of the Board of Editors, is responsible for the general make-up of the issues, for the final compilations of the author and subject indexes, and for such other details as are left to him by the Editors for Sections. The Bibliography Committee of Botanical Abstracts, the membership of which is shown on the second cover page, is appointed annually by the Executive Committee of the Board of Control. The Bibliography Committee is charged with the responsibility of arranging for the prompt citing and abstracting of serial botanical literature. In performing this function, the Committee assigns to individual Collaborators the complete responsibility for furnishing the ibstracts of all botanical papers in a specified serial publication, or in a limited number of serials. The Committee is further charged with the duty of maintaining an accurate record, through a system of reports furnished currently by the Collaborators, of the state of abstract- ing in each serial publication. This record enables the Committee to detect and correct delinquencies in the work of abstracting and to keep the work up to date. The number of assigned serials will eventually exceed 2000, for each of which a record of the state of ab- INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, Continued stracting will be maintained in the office of the Bibliography Committee. Readers are earnestly requested to aid the Bibliography Committee by bringing to its attention any serial publi- cations that are not being properly represented in Botanical Abstracts. The chairman of the Committee for 1921 is J. R. Schramm, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Collaborators of Botanical Abstractsi A large number of botanical workers in all parts of the world have volunteered to assume complete responsibility for securing citations and abstracts from one or more serial publications as assigned to them by the Bibliography Committee. This corps of volimtary workers (called Collaborators) really constitutes the basis of the service rendered by Botanical Abstracts. Through their work it is made certain that serial publications are promptly entered. A list of the names of Collaborators is published once a year in Botanical Abstracts. It is desirable that a considerable reserve list of collaborators be maintained, in order to allow for necessary changes, and addi tional collaborators are therefore earnestly solicited. Abstractors for Botanical Abstracts. Collaborators frequently prepare abstracts them- selves, and are thus Abstractors, but they also arrange for others to prepare them. Every abstract is signed by the Abstractor who prepares it, but entries by citation alone are not signed. The Collaborators are responsible for these citations. There are many voluntary contributors to the enterprise besides the Collaborators. The Printing and Circulation of Botanical Abstracts is in the hands of the Publishers, according to the terms of a definite contract between them and the Board of Control. All other matters are directly in the hands of the Board of Control. Correspondence concerning subscriptions should be addressed to the Publishers or their agents; other matters should be referred to the Chairman of the Board of Control, to the Chairman of the Bibliography Com- mittee, or to the Editor-in-Chief. Readers of Botanical Abstracts are earnestly requested to make careful note of any errors that occur in the journal, with their corrections, and to send these notes to the Editor- in-Chief. If all will cooperate in this it will be possible to supply a page of corrigenda with each volume. Botanical Abstracts is published monthly. Each volume contains about 300 pages. No claims are allowed for copies lost in the mails unless such claims are received within 30 days (90 days for places outside of the United States and Canada) of the date of issue. Price per volume, net, postpaid: $3.00, United States and dependencies; $3.12, Canada; $3.25, other countries. The current (1921) volumes are VII and VIII. Back volumes, Volumes III to VII, inclusive, can be supplied. Volumes I and II are out of print. Subscriptions are received at the following addresses, for the respective countries: United States of North America and dependencies; Mexico; Cuba: Williams & Wilkins Company, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore. Argentina and Uruguay: Beutelspacher y Cia., Sarmiento 815, Buenos Aires. Australia: Stirling & Co., 317 Collins St., Melbourne. Belgium: Henri Lamertin, 58 Rue Coudenberg, Bruxelles. The British Empire, except Australia and Canada: The Cambridge University Press, C. F. Clay, Manager, Fetter Lane, London, E. C. British subscribers are requested to make checks and money orders payable to Mr. C. F. Clay, Manager, at the London address. Canada: Wm. Dawson & Sons, Ltd., 87 Queen Street, East Toronto. •Denmark: H. Hagerup's Boghandel, Gothersgade 30, Kjobenhavn. France: Emile Bougault, 48 Rue des Ecoles, Paris. Germany: R. Friedlander & Sohn, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin N. W., 6. Holland : Scheltema & Holkema, Rokin 74-74, Amsterdam. Italy: Ulrico Hoepli, Milano. Japan and Korea: Maruzen Company, Ltd. (Maruzen-Kabushiki-Kaisha), 11-16 Nihonbashi Tori-Sanchome, Tokyo; Fukuoka, Osaka, Kyoto, and Sendai, Japan. Spain : Ruiz Hermanos, Plaza de Santa Ana 13, Madrid. Switzerland: Georg & Cie., Freistrasse 10, Bdle. Vol. VIII JULY, 1U21 No. 3 ENTRIES 1583-2267 Botanical Abstracts A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of botany in its broadest sense PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC. A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies interested in plants. THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED AND THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL (The Members of the Executive Committee for Wil are indicated by asterisks) Paleontological Society of America. Arthur Hollick, 61 Wall Street, New Brighton, New York. E. W. liBRRY, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. American Association for the Advancement of Science, Section G. R. A. Harper, Columbia University, New York City. B. E. LivTNosTON, Johns Hopkins Uni- versity, Baltimore, Maryland. Botanical Society of America, General Section. H. A. Gleason, New York Botanical Garden, New York City. *B. M. Davtr, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Botanical Society of America, Physiological .Section. Otis F. Curtis, Cornell University, Ithaca, New Y'ork. *B. M. DuGOAR (Chairman of the Board), Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. Botanical Society of America, Systematic Section. Marshall A. Howr, New York Botani- cal Garden, New York City. J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical Garden, New Yprk City. Botanical Society of America, Mycological Section. C. H. Katjffman, University of Michi- gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. Bruce Fink, Miami University, Oxford, Ohio. American Society of Naturalists. H. H. B.a^rtlett, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan. *J. A. Harris, Department of Genetics, Carnegie Institution of Washington, Cold Spring Harbor, L. I., New York. Ecological Society of America. H. L. Shantz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. *Forrest Shreve, De'^ert Laboratory, Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona. At W. A. Orton, U. S. Bureau of American Society of Agronomy. C. B. Hutchison, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. C. A. MooERS, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, Tennessee. Society for Horticultural Science. V. R. Gardner, University of Missouri, Columbia, Missouri. E. J, Kraur, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. American Phytopathological Society. L. R. Jones, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. *Donald Reddick, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Society of American Foresters. Raphael Zon, U. S. Forest Service.Wash- ington, D. C. J. S. Illick, Pennsylvania Department of Forestry, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. American Conference of Pharmaceutical Faculties. Heber W. Younoken, Philadelphia Col- lege of Pharmacy and Science, Phila- delphia, Pennsylvania. Henry Kraemer, Mt. Clemens, Michigan. Canadian Society of Technical Agricultur- ists. W. P. Thompson, University of Sas- katchewan, Saskatoon, Saskatchewan. B. T. Dickson, Macdonald College, Macdonald College, Quebec. Royal Society of Canada. No elections. large. Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY BALTIMORE, V. S. A. Entered as second-class matter, November 9, 191S, at the post oflSce at Baltimore, Maryland, under the Act of March 3. 1879 Cop3rright 1921, Williams & Wilkins Company Price, net postpaid, per volume ./$3.00, •p.l2. United States, Mexico, Cuba Canada; $3.25, Other Countries CONTENTS Agronomy 1583-1625 Bibliography, Biography and History 1626-1809 Botanical Education 1810-1825 Cytology 1826-1837 Ecology and Plant Geography p. 259 Forest Botany and Forestry 1838-1888 Genetics 1889-1952 Horticulture 1953-20)1 Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants - 2i;02-2ni5 Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae 2016-2023 Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes 2024-2043 Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes 2 "44^2085 Paleobotany and Evolutionary History 2086-2093 Pathology 2094-2132 Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. 2133-2141 Physiology , 2142-2201 Soil Science 2202-2224 Taxonomy of Vascular Plants 2225-2253 Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications 2254-2267 BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1921 AND ASSISTANT EDITORS Editor-in-Chief, J. R. SCHRAMM ' Cornell University, Ithaca, New York EDITORS FOR SECTIONS Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus- try, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, Mart R. Burr, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D.C. Bibliography, Biography and History. NeilE. Stevens, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant Editor, Alfred Gundersbn, Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. — Assistant Editor, Geo. S. Bryan, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. Cowles, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. — Assistant Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael Zon, U.S. Forest Service, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, J. V. HoFMANN, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Ex- periment Station, Stabler, Washington. Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University, Princeton, New Jersey. — Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly, Pennsylvania State College, State College, Pennsylvania. Horticulture J. H. Gourley, Ohio Agricultural Ex- periment Station, Wooster, Ohio. — Assistant Editor, H.E. Knowlton. West Virginia University, Morgan- town, West Virginia. Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E. LiviNG.STON, The Johns Hopkins University, Balti- more, Maryland. — Assistant Editor, Sam F. Tre- lease, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants. E. W Stnnott, Connecticut Agricultural College, Storm, Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E. N.Transeau, Ohio State University, Columbus. Ohio. Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexandbb W Evans, Yale University. New Haven. Connecticut. Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes. H. M. Fitzpatrick, Cornell University, Ithaca. New York Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W. Berry, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland. Pathology. G. H. Cqons, Michigan Agricultural Col- lege, Ea-st Lansing, Michigan. — Assistant Editor, C. W. Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East Lans- ing, Michigan Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. Hebeh W. YouNGKEN, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and Science, Philadelphia,Pennsylvania.— Assistant Editor, E. N. Gathercoal, 701 South Wood St., Chicago, Illinois. Physiology. B. M . Duqgar, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W. DoDQE, Harvard University, Cambridge, Massachu- setts. Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, F M . ScHERTZ, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Wash- ington, D. C. Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Greenman, Mis- souri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, E B. Payson, University of Wyoming, Laramie, Wyoming. BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1921 J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York H. O. BUCKMAN W. H. Chandler A.J. Eames R. A. Emerson H. M. Fitzpatrick L Knudson D Reddick L. W Sharp K M Wteqand R. S. HAHIfts, Secretary BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field Of botany in its broadest sense. ^ , ntvv V»-*:rT UNDER THE DIRECTION OF fjy r . , THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, lH: 118-123. 1920.— Born April 29, 1846; died July 20, 1919. [See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 707; 8, Entry 895.]— il/. F. Warner. 1650. BouLGER, G. S. A seventeenth-century botanist friendship. Jour. Botany 66: 197-202. 1918. — Evidence of the friendship of the elder John Tradescant with Parkinson is found in the numerous passages of his Paradisus in which Parkinson mentions Tradescant. At the end of the copy of the Paradisus here discussed there is, apparently in the handwriting of John Tradescant himself, a list of plants received in various years. Also a manuscript list, almost certainly in the handwriting of EliasAshmole, of Trees found in Mr. Tradescants Ground when it came into my Possession. The date of this list is probably about 1662.— Neil E. Stevens. 1651. Bower, F. O. Botanical research in the United Kingdom during the war. Amer. Jour. Sci. 47: 117-122. 1919. — A summary of the more important botanical discoveries and publications during the period of the great war. — Neil E. Stevens. 1652. Braun, Siegfried. Zum 200jahrigen Jubilaum der Baumschulfirma Ludwig Spath in Berlin-Baumschulenweg am 11. September 1920. [For the celebration of the 200th anniversary of the nursery firm Ludwig Spath, September 11, 1920.] Mollers Deutsch. Gart. Zeitg. 35: 232-233, 238-240, 258-2(.0. Illus. 1920.— The business was founded in September, 1720, by Christoph Spath, who died May 1, 1746, aged 50 years, and has been carried on by the family for 5 successive generations: Karl Friedrich (1721-1782), Karl Friedrich, Jr. (1768- 1831), Johann Ludwig Karl (1793-1883), Franz (1839-1913), and the present head of the finn, Dr. Hellmut Spath.— il/. F. Warner. 1653. [Britten, James.] An averted calamity. Jour. Botany 56: 50-52. 1918.— This note deals chiefly with the contemplated appropriation of the buildings of the British Museum (Natural History) for war purposes. The last paragraph, however, names various ways in which the department of botany of that institution has rendered direct service to the govern- ment during the war. — Neil E. Stevens. 1654. Britten, James. Tournefort's "Topographie Botanique." (Bibliographical notes LXXI.) Jour. Botany 56: 118-121. 1918. — A description of a little-known manuscript, now in the Department of Botany of the British Museum, with references to information regarding this and other manuscripts of Tournefort. — N eil E. Stevens. 1655. Britten, James. Maund's "The Botanist" (1836-1842?). (Bibliographical notes. LXXIII.) Jour. Botany 56: 235-243. 1918.— The first number of The Botanist was printed about September, 1836, and the last probably in 1842, as determined by evidence presented in this note. The magazine is described and a list of the new species published therein is given; as well as some notes on the *'conductor,"Benjamin Maund, and several contributors. — Neil E. Stevens. 240 BIBLIOGEAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [BoT. Absts., Vol. V III 1656. Britten, James. Blake's plant names. Garden 84: 80-81, 243-244, 276. 1920.— Identification of plants described under old (and very badly spelled) English common names in Stephen Blake's Compleat Gardeners Practice. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entries 1674, 1717.]— M. F. Warner. 1657. [Britten, James.] Clarence Bicknell. Jour. Botany 56: 303. 1918. — Clarence Bicknell (1842-1918) was the author of a quarto volume (1885) on the Flowering Plants and Ferns of the Riviera and Neighboring Mountains. — Neil E. Stevens. 1658. [Britten, James.] Claude Frederick Hugh Monro. Jour. Botany 56: 335. 1918. —Monro (died Aug. 14, 1918, aged 55) was a collector of plants in Rhodesia, and published 2 papers, 1 on the grasses and 1 on the trees of the region. — Neil E. Stevens. 1659. Britten, James. The cultivated dahlia. Jour. Botany 56: 33-35. 1918.— The introduction of the dahlia to the gardens of England was practically due to Lady Holland who, in 1804, sent seeds from Spain. — Neil E. Stevens. 1660. Britten, James. The Duchess of Beaufort's flower drawings. Garden 84: 428- 429. 1920. — The Duchess, who died in 1714, was the friend of Sir Hans Sloane and in corre- spondence with the principal botanists and horticulturists of her day. Her herbarium, now in the Department of Botany of the British Museum (Natural History), is frequently quoted in Aiton's Hortus Kewensis for the first introduction of plants into England. These 2 volumes of paintings of plants grown at Badminton at the beginning of the 18th century include a great many species which have hitherto been supposed to have been introduced to living collections at a much later date, while a number of them are no longer in cultivation. The plates of the 1st volume were done by Everard Kickius and some of them are very fine; while those of the other volume, by Daniel Frankcom, have less artistic merit, but are very faithful representations. — M. F. Warner. 1661. [Britten, James.] Edward Walter Hunnybun (1848-1918) and "The Cambridge British Flora." Jour. Botany 56: 248-250. 1918.— A short sketch of Hunnybun's life is pre- ceded by a description of his methods of work in preparing illustrations for The Cambridge British Flora. — Neil E. Stevens. 1662. [Britten, James.] Ernest David Marquand (1848-1918). Jour. Botany 56: 187- 189. 1918. — Marquand was "an all-round naturalist," best known for his studies on the flora of Guernsey. — Neil E. Stevens. 1663. Britten, James. Felix Gilbert Wiltshear (1882-1917). Jour. Botany 56: 117-118. 1918.— Wiltshear was in charge of the library of the Department of Botany of the British Museum from 1905 until he entered the army in 1916, and contributed various important bibliographical notes to the Journal of Botany. — Neil E. Stevens. 1664. Britten, James. "John" Roxburgh. Jour. Botany 56: 202-203. 1918.— The sup- posed botanist of this name seems to be fictitious. The collecting attributed to him was probably done by William Roxburgh, author of the Flora Indica, whose son James bore part of the expense of its publication. — Neil E. Stevens. 1665. Britten, James. Lady Anne Monson (c. 1714-1776). Jour. Botany 56: 147-149. 1918. — Lady Monson was a student of the plants and insects of the East Indies. — Neil E. Stevens. 1666. Britten, James. Morandi's 'Historica [sic] Botanica Practica.' (Bibliographical notes LXXn.) Jour. Botany 56: 212-217. 1918. — Description of the Historia Botanica Practica (Mediolani, 1744) of Giovanni Battista Morandi, and of a very interesting manu- script in the Department of Botany of the British Museum which comprises 122 original drawings for this book, and 4 works in Morandi's own hand: an Explicatio Plantarum, which No. 3, July, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 241 partly corresponds to that in the Historia, a Dilucidatio vocum quibus rei Herbariae Scrip- tores uti Solent, and 2 smaller works. — M. F. Warner. 1667. Britten, James. The name Mundia. Jour. Botany 56: 5G. 1918. — The name seems to have been given in honor of a collector of South African plants named Mundt or Mund, not in honor of Henry Mundy. — Neil E. Stevens. 1668. [Britten, James.] Newspaper botany. Jour. Botany 58: 136, 208. 1920.— Errors and absurdities noted in the Daily News and Nash's Magazine. — M. F. Warner. 1669. [Britten, James.] The shamrock. Jour. Botany 58: 117-118. 1920. — Some news- paper blunders in regard to this plant. — M. F. Warner. 1670. Britten, James. Sir George Birdwood and "Primrose Day." Jour. Botany 56: 87-90. 1918.— Sir George Christopher Molesworth Birdwood (1832-1917) was particularly interested in commercial vegetable products of Biblical and classical interest and was the first to identify the frankincense plant. The celebration of the anniversary of Lord Beacons- field's death by the wearing of primroses was initiated by him. — Neil E. Stevens. 1671. Britten, James. Worthington George Smith (1835-1917). Jour. Botany 56: 243- 247. 1918. — W. G. Smith was educated as an architect and illustrator, but the study of ancient ornament led him to the study of plant form and later to botan}\ He is known for his researches on fungi, and especially for his colored illustrations of fungi and other plants. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 62; 8, Entry IG8S.]— Neil E. Stevens. 1672. Brotherston, R. P. About tomatoes. Garden 83: 86. 1919. — As early as 1578 both white and yellow sorts were recorded by Lyte as cultivated in England. They were often called "Love apples" or "Apples of love" in the early literature, but the true "Love apple" was Solanum ovigerum. — M. F. Warner. 1673. Brotherston, R. P. Bacon's plants. Garden 84: 129. 1920.— It is concluded that the double white violet mentioned in Bacon's essays and Sylva sylvarum was a stocky and the "White Satyrian" of the Sylva was Neottia spiralis. — M. F. Warner. 1674. Brotherston, R. P. Blake's plant names. Garden 84: 52. 1920. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entries 1656, 1717.] 1675. Browne, E. T. Ernst Heinrich Philipp August Haeckel. Proc. Linn. Soc. London 132: 39-43. 1921.— Sketch of the life and work of the eminent zoologist and evolutionist Ernst Haeckel (1834-1919), who in earlier years was also an enthusiastic botanist. — M. F. Warner. m 1676. Buntard, E. A. The moon and horticulture. Garden 84: 186. 1920. 1677. BuNYARD, E. A. The "New orchard and garden" of William Lawson. Jour. Po- mology 1: 125-134. Fig. 16. 1920.— Although Johnson's History of English Gardening gives the date as 1597, Lawson's book seems to have been actually published in 1617, and to have gone through 9 editions. Bunyard quotes from, and comments briefly upon, the different chapters. — L. H. MacDaniels. 1678. C., R. S. Curtis's "Botanical magazine." Garden 84: 3. 1920.— Varying dates in early volumes, and variations in date of same plate in different sets are noted. Dates on title-pages of an original set are 1787, 1788, 1790, etc., but a short set has 1790 as date of Vol. 1; and in a set of 45 Vols., evidently reprints, Vol. 1 is dated 1793. Dates of many individual plates are noted, but no water marks were discovered before 1810. — M. F. Warner. 242 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1679. Cardiff [Wales] Public Library. Catalogue of early works on botany, agricul- ture, and horticulture. Exhibited in connection with the Royal Agricultural Show. 23 p. Printed for the Library Committee of the Cardiff Corporation by the Western Mail Ltd.: Cardiff, 1919. — A brief list, but with rather full titles and full imprints. Annotated and arranged under date of 1st edition. — Neil E. Stevens. 1680. Cavara, Fridiano. In memoria di tre botanici napoletani. [In memory of three Neapolitan botanists.] Bull. Orto Bot. Napoli 4: 317-327. Portraits. 1918.— Fortunato Pasquale (1856-1917), whose interest was in the local flora of southern Italy. Orazio Comes (1848-1917), was specially known for his work in phytopathology, wrote many myco- logical works, and made an extended study of tobacco. Achille Terraciano (1861-1917), worked in systematic and geographical botany and plant morphology. — M. F. Warner. 1681. Christensen, H. R. Frederik K01pin Ravn. Tidsskr. Land0konomi 1920: 261- 264. Portrait. 1920.— Born at Aalborg, Denmark, May 10, 1873, and died May 25, 1920, at East Orange, New Jersey. A short account of his life and work in plant pathology. — M. F. Warner. 1682. Clinton, G. P. William Gilson Farlow. Phytopathology 10: 1-8. Portrait. 1920.— An appreciation of the work of W. G. Farlow (1844-1919) with personal notes and anecdotes, written by a former student and close personal friend. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entries 916, 947, 956, 963, 1463, 1470; 7, Entry 1593; 8, Entries 833, 1784, 1785.]— iVet7 E. Stevens. 1683. C[otton], a. D. Worthington G. Smith. Roy. Bot. Gard. Kew Bull. Misc. Inform. 1918: 30-31. 1918.— Obituary notice of W. G. Smith (1835-1917), best known to readers of the Gardeners' Chronicle for his illustrations made for that journal for more than 40 years, but who was also an antiquarian and a well-known mycologist. — M. F. Warner. 1684. Coulter, J. M. Journal of the Arnold Arboretum. Bot. Gaz. 69: 95-96. 1920.— A notice of the appearance of the first number (July, 1919) of this new quarterly journal.— H. C. Cowles. 1685. D. The lettuce. Gard. Chron. Ill, 67: 192-193, 201. Figs. 1920.— Chiefly cul- tural, but prefaced by notes on early history. There are 6 varieties mentioned by Gerarde (1597), and 15 in Miller's Gardeners' Dictionary (1757). There are differences of opinion in regard to the origin of the Cabbage and Cos lettuces, but both are probably from one species, Lactuca scariola, a native of central Europe and Asia. Crescentius (13th century) mentions Lactuca romana, which probably gave name to the French Laitue romaine or Romaine. — M. F. Warner. 1086. Demarest, S. A. A sketch of the life of Coe Finch Austin. Mem. Torrey Bot. Club 17: 31-38. 1918.— An intimate account by his daughter of C. F. Austin (1831-1880) who was best known for his work on mosses. — Neil E. Stevens. 1687. Detmer, Wilhelm. Ernst Stahl, seine Bedeutung als Botaniker und seine Stel- lung zu einigen Grundproblemen der Biologie. [Ernst Stahl, his importance as a botanist and his position regarding some fundamental problems in biology.] Flora 111-112: 1-47. 1918. — The introduction deals briefly with the education and personality of Christian Ernst Stahl, but the bulk of the paper is devoted to a detailed review of his work, including both the results of his invest'gations in various fields, and his opinions on such questions as vitalism and natural selection. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 1697.]— A' ez7 E. Stevens. 1688. Dixon, H. N. Robert Braithwaite (1824-1917). Jour. Botany 56: 23-25. 1918.— An appreciation of the scientific work of Dr. Braithwaite, especially in bryology. His herba- rium is now in the British Museum (Natural History).— iVei7 E. Stevens. No. 3, July, 1921] BIBLIOGKAPHY, BIOGEAPHY, HISTORY 243 1689. Durham, H. E. Past masters of garden craft. [Rev. of: Marshall, Lizzie B. L'horticulture antique et la poeme de Columelle (De re rustica livre X). These accepte pour le doctorat de I'llniversite de Paris. Hachette et Cie.: Paris, 1918.] Gard. Chron. Ill, 66: 77. 1919. — "Columella wrote to guide the gardener with much detail and precision, and especially to help the owner of a small plot that he might reduce his daily bill for food by growing it himself." Eleven flowers are dealt with, and vegetables and herbs together to the number of 63, including 15 Brassicas. — M. F. Warner. 1690. Durham, H. E. What is a broccoli? Gard. Chron. Ill, 65: 243-244. 1919.— Historical and etymological note. — heil E. Stevens. 1691. E[berle], E. G. Henry Hurd Rusby. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9: 1131-1132. Portrait. 1920.— A brief sketch of the life and activities of Doctor Rusby, who has been recently appointed to take charge of the Mulford Biological Exploration of the Amazon Basin. — Anton Hogstad, Jr. 1692. EssARY, S. H. Samuel McCutchen Bain. Phytopathology 10: 185-188. Portrait (pi. x). 1920.— Born Eagleville, Tennessee, Jan. 14, 1869; died Knoxville, Jan. 30, 1919. His investigations on disease resistance in plants and his work as a teacher of botany are referred to. A chronological list of his publications is given.— iVei7 E. Stevens. 1693. Fedeli, Carlo. II primo Orto botanico Pisano. [The first botanical garden of Pisa.] Atti. Soc. Toscana Sci. Nat. Pisa (Proc. Verb.) 27:8-20. 1918.— Its original location in the "Cittadella Vecchia," or ancient citadel, is confirmed, and by careful comparison of documents the author clears up some confusion in dates, proving that on Oct. 27, 1544, the duke Cosimo I had already removed the monastery of S. Vito to make room for the garden; that Luca Ghini, then lecturer at Bologna, who had been invited to the chair of botany at Pisa, had not arrived there on Oct. 28, 1544, but that his first remuneration was recorded on the first Monday of March, 1545, while one of his letters, dated July 4, 1545, shows that the garden was functioning perfectly at that date. — M. F. Warner. 1694. FoEX, Etienne. Rapport sommaire sur la situation de la Societe de Pathologie Vegetale, au 31 decembre 1920. [Report of the condition of the Phytopathological Society of France. December 31, 1920.] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 7: 133-134. 1920.— Report of the general secretary calling attention to the increase in membership and cooperative arrange- ments made with agricultural journals and also with the federation of natural history societies of France. — C. L. Shear. 1695. G[amble], J. S. J. H. Lace, CLE., F.L.S. Roy. Bot. Gard. Kew Bull. Misc. Inform. 1918: 341. 1918.— John Henry Lace, who died in June, 1918, spent over 30 years as forest officer in the Punjab, British Baluchistan, Bengal, and Burma, and was an accurate botanist. His List of the Trees, Shrubs, and Climbers of Burma is the standard work in that field, and he described many new species in the Decades Kewenses. A nearly complete set of his collections is found at Kew, while his own herbarium has been presented to the Royal Botanic Garden at Edinburgh.— M. F. Warner. 1696. Gamble, J. S. John Henry Lace. Proc. Linn. Soc. London 131: 56-57. 1919,— Brief sketch of life and work of J. H. Lace (1857-1918) forest officer and botanist. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 1695.]— i¥. F. Warner. 1697. Gerhardt, Karl. Dem Andenkenan Ernst Stahl. Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N.F., 19 : 145-149. 1920.— In memory of Christian Ernst Stahl, born June 21, 1848, died December 3, 1919, Estimate of his botanical work and appreciation of Stahl as teacher and friend. [See also Bot, Absts. 8, Entry 1687.]— M. F. Warner. 1698. Grose, L. R. Maple sugar in colonial times. Amer. Forestry 26: 689-690. 1920.— Tench Coxe, in his View of the United States (Philadelphia, 1794), recommended the sugar 244 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, maple lands of Pennsylvania and New York as a source of general sugar supply for the United States. Although negligible from this point of view, maple sugar was of great importance among the colonial settlers and the Indians, as shown by quotations from early accounts as far back as 1684, in regard to the making of sugar from the "juice of the maple."— .4. C. Atwood. 1699. Groves, James. Newspaper botany. Jour. Botany 58: 55. 1920.— Criticism of an article in the Daily Telegraph of January 14, 1920, which includes among noxious weeds Spartina Townsendii, well known for its value as a mud-binding plant.— M. F. Warner. 1700. GuADAGNO, MicHELE. La vegetazione della penisola sorrentina. [Flora of the Sorrento peninsula.] Bull. Orto Bot. Napoli 4: 133-178. 1918.— A list of works relating to this region, a branch of the Apennines terminating in the island of Capri, together with a brief physical description, and a very full account of botanical exploration from early times. Species described by early authors are enumerated, and a list of those collected by Pier Antonio Micheli in 1710 is printed from his manuscript catalogue of 1714. Biographical data are supplied for many of the older and more obscure authors and collectors.— il/. F. Warner. 1701. GuNTHER, R. T. The garden of the Rev. Walter Stonehouse at Darfield Rectory, in Yorkshire, 1640. Gard. Chron. Ill, 67: 240-241, 256, 268-269, 296. Fig. 116, 137. 1920.— Stonehouse was a friend and correspondent of William How, author of Phytologia Britannica (1650). He was established at Darfield in 1631, but after 1644 forcibly ejected by the Parlia- mentary Commissioners and imprisoned; he died in 1655, aged 58. Among the manuscripts of Magdalen College are 2 lists of plants grown at Darfield in 1640-1644, which are printed herewith; also plans of the garden and saffron garth in 1640. Stonehouse estimated the num- ber of his plants as 866 in 1644, and they included 14 species from Virginia, 5 from Guinea, and 4 from New England. [See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 699.]— M. F. Warner. 1702. H[all], a. D. Spencer Pickering. Nature 106: 509-510. 1920.— Percival Spencer Umfreville Pickering (1858-1920) began his scientific career as a chemist, brilliantly demon- strating the hydrate theory of solution. His most important work, however, has been on the scientific problems of fruit growing, notably the poisonous effect upon trees of the root- excretions of grasses. Science and Fruit Growing, published in 1919, embodies the results of the Woburn experiments since 1896. — M. F. Warner. 1703. Hamblin, S. F. Gardening books for the client. Landscape Architecture 10: 121-127. 1920.— List of about 85 modern books, grouped under: (1) nature study and botany; (2) garden plants; (3) garden making; and (4) garden experiences.— A''. E. Stevens. 1704. Harris, D. F. Anthony van Leeuwenhoek, the first bacteriologist. Sci. Monthly 12: 150-160. 1921.— This paper describes a bacteriologist's visit to Leeuwenhoek's grave and native city and his thoughts concerning some of the early workers. — L. Pace. 1705. Harshberger, J. W. The old gardens of Pennsylvania, I.— Bartram arboretum and park. Garden Mag. 32: 78-80. Illus. 1920.— Begun by John Bartram in 1730, at Kingsessing, now within the city of Philadelphia. In it were planted many of the trees, shrubs, and herbs collected by Bartram and his son William on their travels. A number of the surviving old trees are mentioned and illustrated. — M. F. Warner. 1706. Harshberger, J. W. The old gardens of Pennsylvania, II.— Humphry Marshall's. Garden Mag. 32: 137-139. Illus. 1920.— The arboretum of Humphry Marshall (Oct. 10, 1722-Nov. 5, 1801) was founded in 1773 near the present village of Marshallton in Chester county. Many large trees are still standing which were planted by him, and which furnished practical knowledge for his Arbustrum Americanum: the American Grove (Philadelphia, 1785). The article is illustrated with photographs of some of these old trees and views of Marshall's house. — M. F. Warner. No. 3, July, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 245 1707. Hemslet, W. B. J. R. Jackson. Gard. Chron. Ill, 68: 234. 1920.— John Reader Jackson, born May, 1834; died October 28, 1920. In 1858 he became keeper of the Kew mu- seums, which post he held until his retirement in 1901. He wrote many articles on economic botany for the Technologist, Pharmaceutical Journal, Gardeners' Chronicle, and other peri- odicals, and published a valuable work. Commercial Botany of the Nineteenth Century. — M. F. Warner. 1708. Henning, Ernst. F. K0lpin Ravn. K. Landtbruks Akad. Handl. och Tidsskr. 69: 352-354. Portrait. 1920. — Account of his life and mycological work. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entries 1641, 1681, 1804.]— M. F. Warner. 1709. HoEK, P. VAN. Lijst van officieele personen, Instellingen en Vereenigingen op Land-en Tuinbouwgebied. [List of officials, institutions and societies in agriculture and horticulture.] Verslag. en Mededeel. Directie Landb. [Nederland] 1919^: 1-156. 1919.— A list, with names of officials, of all agricultural and horticultural government and private institutions, laboratories, colleges, schools, societies, in the Netherlands. — J . C. Th. Uphof. 1710. HoEK, P. VAN. Lijst van officieele personen, Instellingen en Vereenigingen op Land-en Tuinbouwgebied. [List of officials, institutions and societies in agriculture and horticulture.] Verslag. en Mededeel. Directie Landb. [Nederland] 19202: 1-120. 1920.— A list with names of officials, of all agricultural and horticultural government and private institutions, laboratories, colleges, schools, and societies in the Netherlands. — /. C. Th. Uphof. 1711. Hoffmann, Paul. Urkundliches von und iiber Chrisfan Conrad Sprengel. [Docu- mentary records by and about Christian Conrad Sprengel.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N.F., 19: 692-695. 1920. — Records of Sprengel's birth, matriculation at the University of Halle, and other important events n his life are reproduced. — Neil E. Stevens. 1712. HoLMAN, G. H., and F. S. Chambers. Cranberry pioneers of Ocean County. Proc. Amer. Cranberry Growers' Assoc. Ann. Convention 50: 7-10. 1919. — This is a sketch of the history of cranberry growing in Ocean County, New Jersey. — /. K. Shaw. 1713. Holmes, G. K. Three centuries of Tobacco. U. S. Dept. Agric. Yearbook 1919: 151-177. 1920. — A statistical presentation of the important facts and factors in the devel- opment of the tobacco industry in its agricultural, commercial and industrial aspects from colonial times to the present. Analysis of consumption shows a great gain in use, being now two-thirds of production. The analysis of the industrial aspect shows the industry to be one of considerable magnitude and importance. A brief note is included on tobacco in use among natives of the Americas before European settlement and on the beginnings of cultivation in the Virginia Colony, where the first was grown by John Rolf at Jamestown in 1612. — C. J. Shirk. 1714. J[ackson], B. D. Henry Worsley Seymour Worsley-Benison. Proc. Linn. Soc. London 131: 67. 1919.— Born Aug. 14, 1845; died Dec. 14, 1918. He Avas lecturer in botany at Westminster Hospital, 1877-1889, and wrote two popular books on natural history, as well as papers on Darwin, and on the power of movement in plants. — M. F. Warner. 1715. J[ackson], B. D. Sir Frank Crisp. Proc. Linn. Soc. London 131: 49-51. 1919.— Obituary of Sir Frank Crisp (1843-1919), a lawyer whose hobby was microscopy, who had a fine museum of instruments and apparatus, with a complete collection of books on the micro- scope. As one of the secretaries of the Roj'al Microscopical Society he effected great improve- ments in its Journal from about 1878. He was also a generous patron of the Linnean Society. — M. F. Warner. 1716. Jacob, Joseph. C. G. van Tubergen (died January 25, 1919, aged 74 years). Garden 83: 87. 1919. — Personal appreciation of the head of the Haarlem firm of bulb growers of that name. — Neil E. Stevens. 246 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1717. Jacob, Joseph. "The compleat gardener's practice." I-II. Garden 84: 6-7, 20-21. 1920.— A very rare book by "Stephen Blake, gardener," London, 1664. Nothing is known of him save what may be learned from this book, which is especially interesting for its vernacular names of plants, now mostly obsolete and many of them unrecognizable on account of Blake's erratic spelling. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entries 1656, 1674.]— M. F. Warner. 1718. Jacob, Joseph. Orange thyme. Garden 83: 111. 1919.— After an exhaustive search this herb was found listed in The Modern Gardener or Universal Kalendar, published from the manuscript of Thomas Hitt by James Header in 1771.— A eil E. Stevens. 1719. Jacob, Joseph. Some tales of the tulip. Garden Mag. 32: 23-35. Illus. 1920.— Reference is made to the literature of the tulip mania in Holland (1635-1637), such as T'Samenspraecken tusschen Waermondt ende Gaergoedt, published by Adriaen Roman at Haarlem in 1637. The tulip has made a place for itself in general literature as well, for in- stance Addison's letter to the Tatler, Aug. 31, 1710, Edward Young's Universal Passion, 1725, and Jean de la Bruyere's Characters, originally published in 1688 and often translated into English. The Hortus Floridus of Crispin de Pas, 1614, is also mentioned, and the first tulip monograph, Le Floriste Francois by La Chesnee Monstereul, which was printed at Caen in 1654. One of the illustrations is a reproduction of the title-page of the latter which was printed at Rouen in 1658 and added to the original work. Other more modern literature is mentioned, concluding with the important historical study, Weizen und Tulpe, of Solms- Laubach, published in 1899.— M. F. Warner. 1720. Jacob, Joseph. Tulip tittle-tattle.— An early reference to tulip fanciers. Garden 84: 525. 1920.— Sir Thomas Browne, in his Garden of Cyrus, or the Quincunciall Lozenge, mentions the tulip, and gives marginal references to the works of Lauremberg and Petrus Hondius, whose Dapes Inemptae (probably published about 1619), records and disapproves the growing taste for tulips; while Lauremberg uses the word "Tulipomania" in 1632, 3 years before the time of the mania in Holland.— M. F. Warner. 1721. Jaggli, Mario. L'attivita scientifica di Alberto Franzoni. [The scientific activity of Alberto Franzoni.] Boll. Soc. Ticinese Sci. Nat. 1919: 11-18. 1919.— An address delivered at Locarno on November 19, 1916, is here reported. The speaker calls attention to the impor- tant work of Alberto Franzoni as a botanical explorer in southern Switzerland and gives a description of his herbarium. The latter contains about 5500 phanerogams and over 1000 cryptogams, themossesbeingparticularly well represented.— A. W. Evans. 1722. Johnson, D. S. The Cinchona tropical botanical station again available. Science 51:235-236. 1920. 1723. KiLLERMANN, S[ebastian]. Von einigen peruanischen Neueinfiihrungen in unseren Garten um 1600. [Regarding some Peruvian introductions into our gardens about 1600.] Nat- urwiss. Wochenschr. N.F., 19: 369-373. 1920.— The sun flower {Helianthus annuus L.), four o'clock {Mirabilis Jalapa L.), and passion flower {Passiflora sp.)— Neil E. Stevens. 1724. KiLLERMANN, S[ebastian]. Zur alteren Geschichte der Orchideen. [On the early history of the orchids.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N.F., 19: 351-357. 1920— Early literature on orchids is cited. The discussion deals with the classification rather than the culture or introduction of these plants. — iVei7 E. Stevens. 1725. KtJsTER, Ernst. Alhertus Magnus und Goethe. Naturwissenschaften 6: 137- 139. 1918.— Goethe's debt to the writings of Albertus de Bollstadt, or Albertus Magnus (13th century). — Neil E. Stevens. 1726. KusTER, Ernst. Einige alte Gallenbilder. [Some ancient illustrations of galls.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N.F., 18: 766-769. Fig. 1-3. 1919.— Three figures of galls oh Quercns originally published in the 15th and 16th centuries, are reproduced and discussed.— iVez7 E. Stevens. No. 3, JiTLT, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 247 1727. KusTER, Ernst. Georg Klebs (1857-1918). Natumnssenschaften 6: 681-683. 1918. — Outline of life and estimate of scientific work. — Neil E. Stevens. 1728. Laing, E. V. Trees in myth and legend. Trans. Roy. Scottish Arboric. Soc. 34: 195-209. 1920. — The article discusses the attitude of our ancestors and the ancients toward trees and the effect which trees had on the general trend of the lives of men; and deals in a general way with a few myths and legends about trees. — C. R. Tillotson. 1729. LoNGO, BiAGio. In memoria del Dott. Martino Savelli. Bull. Soc. Bot. Ital. 1919: 1-2. 1919.— Born Jan. 10, 1884; died Dec. 28, 1918. A brief note with list of 12 titles, chiefly mycological, published by Savelli. — M. F, Warner. 1730. LoYER, Maurice. Henri Hua (1861-1919). Bull. Soc. Nat. Accl m. France 66: 161-163. 1919. — Brief obituary notice and personal appreciation. — Neil E. Stevens. 1731. Macoun, W. T. [R. B. Whyte.] Proc. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 15: 116. Portrait. 1918. — R. B. Whyte of Ottawa died Apr. 15, 1918. His garden contained the finest collection of herbaceous perennials in Canada, possibly in all America. He originated the Herbert raspberry in 1887, and was specially interested in the English gooseberry, having tested over 100 varieties. He had a large herbarium. — M. F. Warner. 1732. Manetti, Carlo. Italo Giglioli. Agric. Coloniale 14: 401-404. Portrait. 1920.— An agricultural chemist and economist, born at Genoa, May 1, 1852, and died Oct. 1, 1920. A personal appreciation, with list of some 63 works, published between 1878 and 1918. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 1748.]— il/. F. Warner. 1733. Marshall, L. B. L'horticulture antique et le poeme de Columelle (De re rustica livre X). These accepte pour le doctorat de I'Universite de Paris. [Ancient horticulture and the poem of Columella (De re rustica liber X.) Doctorate thesis, University of Paris.] Hachette et Cie.: Paris, 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 1G89. 1734. Marzell, Heinrich. Ueber Alter und Herkunft deutscher Pflanzennamen. [On the age and origin of German plant names.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N.F., 19: 641-645. 1920. — A somewhat popular discussion of the etymology of over 200 plant names. — Neil E. Stevens. 1735. Mattirolo, Oreste. P. A. Saccardo. Bull. Soc. Bot. Ital. 1920: 2-3. 1920.— A brief eulogy of Saccardo by the president of the Italian botanical society. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entries 1791, 1797.]— M. F. Warner. 1736. Mattirolo, Oreste. Saverio Belli. Bull. Soc. Bot. Ital. 1919: 21-22. 1919.— Saverio Belli was born at Domodossola May 25, 1852 (incorrectly printed 1892), and died April 7, 1919.— .Vei7 E. Stevens. 1737. Merrill, E. D. Page-heading of periodicals. Jour. Botany 56: 189. 1918. — In recent volumes of the Philippine Journal of Science there is printed "on alternate pages the title of the publication and title of article with name of the author, supplemented by the vol- ume, number, and year." The upper right-hand corner of each new article bears the name of the publication, volume, year, and number. — A eil E. Stevens. 1738. Molisch, Hans. Goethe, Darwin und die Spiraltendenz im Pfianzenreich. [Goethe, Darwin, and the spiral tendency in the plant kingdom.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N.F., 19: 625-629. Fig. 1-3. 1920. — A popular discussion of the subject, with some citations of litera- ture, including the work of the two authors named in the title. — Neil E. Stevens. 1739. Moll, J. W. In memoriam Dr. S. H. Koorders. Nederland. Kruidk. Arch. 1919: 73-76. 1920. — Brief summary of Koorders' work, especially on the herbarium of woody plants of Java, numbering over 1100 species. — M. F. Warner. 248 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1740. MoxTEMABTi>a, Ltjigi. Giuseppe Cuboni. Riv. Patol. Veg. 10: 117-118. 1920. — Prof. Giuseppi Cuboni, director of the e.xperiment station of vegetable pathologj", died sud- denly in Rome on Xov. 3, 1920. He was born at Modena in 1852. [See also Bot. Absta. 8, Entry 1763.]— F. M. Blodgett. 1741. MoRSTATT, H. Die Entwick'.ung der Pflanzenpathologie und des Pfianzenschutzes. [The development of plant pathology and plant protection.] Xaturwiss. Wochenschr. N.F., 19: 817-822. 1920. — Some of the more important steps in the development of plant pathology in Germany and the U. S. A. are mentioned, with somewhat briefer reference to other countries. The various organizations and conferences which have contributed to the advancement of the ntemational study of plant disease problems are mentioned. In conclusion, the inter- relation of pathology, morphology, and physiologj' is pointed out. — Neil E. Stamens. 1742. MuBRiLL, W. A. The fruit-disease survey. Mycologia 13: 50-53. PL 3. 1921.— An account of the field meeting of phytopathologists in Virginia, West Virginia, Maryland, and Pennsylvania during the first week in August, 1920, for the study of fruit diseases. This meeting was of an international character, and was attended by Mr. W. B. Brierley of England, Mr. E. Foex of France, and Mr. Rosatti of Italy. — H. R. Rosen. 1743. MuBRiLL, W. A. George Francis Atkinson. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 19: 314- 315. 1918.— Note of death on Xov. 14, 1918. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 1803.]— -Vei7 E. Stevens. 1744. Pampanin-i, Rexato. Odoardo Beccari. Agric. Colon. 14: 449-453. 1920. — Beccari died at Florence Oct. 26, 1920, at the age of 77. From 1S64 to 1880 he was chiefly engaged in e.xploration: With Doria in Borneo; in Eritrea; in New Guinea with D'Albertia; and in Sumatra. He had already published some results of his earlier travels, and in 1868 founded the Nuovo Giomale Botanico Italiano, to which he made numerous contributions. ITpon his return to Italy in 1880 he devoted himself to his vast botanical collections, publish- ing his Malesia in 3 great volimaes, with many monographic works on his special subject of palms, of which the 4 folio volimies in the Annals of the Calcutta Botanic Garden are the most important. He helped to establish the Istituto Agricolo Coloniale Italiano, at Florence. His botanical collections are in Florence, at the Istituto di Studi Superiore. — M. F. Warner. 1745. Pant AXELLi, Enrico. [C. A. Timiriazeff.] Riv. Biol. 2: 442. 1920.— Timiriazeff's death was announced in Nature, June 3, 1920. He was born in 1843 and was wel! known for his popular scientific works, several of which passed through many Russian editions, while others were translated into English. His experimental researches were summarized in a lecture before the Royal Society of London in 1903, on The Cosmical Function of the Green Plant.— M. F. Warner. 1746. Pantaxelli, Exrico. Giuseppe Severini. Ann. Botanica 15: 54-56. Portrait- 1920. — Severini was born June 17, 1878; died April 17, 1918. A chronological list of his publi- cations, 14 in number, comprises contributions on root bacteria, plant diseases, and plant nutrition, and papers on the fungi of Perugia. — M. F. Warner. 1747. P.\xt.vnelli, Exrico. Wilhelm Pfeffer ^845-1920). Riv. Biol. 2: 329-331. Por- trait. 1920. — Summary' and appreciation of Pfeffer's work in botany. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entries 1753, 1758.]—-!/. F. Warner. 1748. Paris, Giulio. Italo Giglioli. Riv. Biol. 2: 696-704. Portrait. 1920.— Giglioli died Oct. 1, 1920. He was born May 1, 1852, the son of Giuseppe Giglioli and Elena Hillyer of Blackheath (London) . The article discusses his work as a teacher of agricultural chemistry at the Scuola Superiore di Agricoltura of Portici and at the L'niversity of Pisa; and his ability as an organizer and director of research. He was instrumental in establishing experimental No. 3, July, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY. HISTORY 249 fields, on the Rothamsted plan, at Suessola, where a great number of experiments with differ- ent cereals were carried out between 1887 and 1904. His biological work was wholly concerned with plant production, and he was greatly interested in agricultural education and organi- zation, and economics. During the war he threw himself ardently into the solution of various economic problems, and wrote much in the way of propaganda. — M. F. Warner. 1749. Payne, C. H. Le chrysantheme en Chine. Le Chrysantheme 24: 70-73, 88-89. 1920. — Reprint of original French text of the account of the chrysanthemum from Memoires concernant I'histoire &c. des Chinois, Vol. 1, 1778, together with comment thereon in Garden- ers' Chronicle, Dec. 14, 1918. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 891.]— A'ei7 E. Stevens. 1750. Payne, C. H, Did the tulip mania ever reach Italy? Garden 83: 528. 1919. — Although Italian floricultural literature of the 17th century shows that the tulip was much grown and highly esteemed, there is no evidence that the mania in its violent form ever ex- tended to Italy. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entry MS.]— Neil E. Stevens. 1751. P[ayne], C. H. M. Anatole Cordonnier. Gard. Chron. Ill, 68: 246. 1920.— Cor- donnier, who died at Turcoing, Nov. 3, 1920, in his 78th year, founded important nurseries at Bailleul, which were utterly destroyed by the fighting in that region during the war. During his earlier career he made a specialty of growing crysanthemums, and published 2 small books on the subject, as well as others on fruit culture under glass. — M. F. Warner. 1752. Payxe, C. H. a rare old gardening book. Garden 84: 357. 1920.— The Orchard and the Garden, published in London, 1602, does not appear to be mentioned anywhere save in Mrs. Cecil's History of Gardening. Is it possibly a reprint of some earlier publication? It is unlikely that Lawson's New Orchard and Garden is a reprint of this work, as Lawson's book was first published in 1597. — M. F. Warner. 1753. P[eirce], G. J. Wilhelm Pfeffer. Science 51: 291-292. 1920.— A sketch of the life of Wilhelm Pfeffer (1845-1920) pioneer plant physiologist and professor at Leipzig for over thirty years, by one of his American students. — Neil E. Stevens. 1754. Phillips, E. P. The importance of a properly equipped state herbarium to an agri- cultural country. South African Jour. Xat. Hist. 2: 18-39. 1920. — Shows how systematic botany is fundamental to research — the need of a collection of specimens for reference and comparison — importance of preserving economic species as a mere matter of record — need of careful determination of host-plants in the study of phytopathological problems. A number of references on economic botany and the organization and work of botanical institutions are appended. — .V. F. Warner. 1755. PiROTTA, RoMU.\LDO. Pasquale Baccarini (5 aprile 1858— 24 luglio 1920). Nuovo Gior. Bot. Ital. N.S., 26: 2.35-244. Portrait. 1919 [1920].— Baccarini's genius for organiza- tion was shown at the Botanical Institute of Florence, where he carried on the work begun by Mattirolo. One of his great achievements was the establishment of the colonial herbarium at Florence. A list of 132 publications by him shows the diversity of his interests, — patho- logical, floristic, morphological, and historical. — M. F. Warner. 1756. PiTTiER, Henri. La evolucion de las ciencias naturales y las exploraciones botanicas en Venezuela. [The evolution of natural science and botanical exploration in Venezuela.] Suplemento del No. 14 de "Cultura Venezolana." 28 p. Tip. Cultura Venezolana: Caracas, 1920. — A series of lectures entitled Botanica y Biologia, by Dr. Diego Carbonell, takes up the evolution of natural history in Venezuela, distinguishing 3 periods: (1) That influ- enced by Humboldt; (2) the experimental period, influenced by Vargas; and (3) the "doctrin- ary" period of Ernst and Villavicencio. Pittier differs with this classification, maintaining that such periods involve great leaders, such as Darwin, Haeckel, or Candolle, who have been lacking in Venezuela, and that botany is still in the exploration and collecting stage there, while agriculture has also made little progress. He takes up the botanical explorers of Vene- 250 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, zuela chronologically, beginning with Peter Loefling, who collected in 1754, N. J. von Jacqtjin, Humboldt, Schombxjrgk, Karsten, Preuss, and others, and concludes the work with a short bibliography on Venezuelan botany. — P. G. Russell. 1757. Prain, David. Anne Casimir Pyramus de Candolle. Proc. Linn. Soc. London 131: 51-52. 1919. — Personal appreciation of Casimir de Candolle, born Feb. 26, 1836, died Oct. 3, 1918.— M. F. Warner. 1758. Pringsheim, Hans, und E. G. Pringsheim. Wilhelm Pfeffer. Ber. Deutseh. Chem. Ges. 53: 36-39. 1920.— Obituary of PfeiTer (born March 9, 1845), with an estimate of his work as a physiologist. — Neil E. Stevens. 1759. R[amsbottom], J[ohn]. John Snell. Jour. Botany 58: 158. 1920. — John Snell, whose death occurred at Preston, April 19, 1920, in his 42d year, was known in connection with the Ormskirk potato trials, testing varieties with reference to wart disease {Chryso- phlyctis endobiotica) . — M. F. Warner. 1760. Reddick, D. New abstract journal. Phytopathology 11: 29. 1921. — The appear- ance of Zentralblatt f iir die gesamte Landwirtschaf t mit Einschluss der Forst- und Teichwirt- schaft, der Tier-Pathologie, und Medizin from the press of Gebriider Borntraeger, Berlin, is noted. — B. B. Higgins. 1761. RiDDELL, W. R. The pharmacopoeia of another botanical physician. Trans, and Proc. Bot. Soc. Edinburgh 28: 1-23. 1920. — Plants employed by Samuel B. Emmons in his Vegetable family Physician (Boston, 1836). — M. F. Warner. 1762. Ritter, Georg. Friedrich Ludwig. Beih. Bot. Centralbl. 36 (I. Abt.): 133-134. 1919.— Friedrich Ludwig was born Oct. 24, 1851, died July 22, 1918.— A^ezZ E. Stevens. 1763. Rivera, Vincenzo. Giuseppe Cuboni. Riv. Biol. 2: 693-696. Portrait. 1920.— Cuboni was born at Modena Feb. 2, 1852, and died at Rome, Nov. 3, 1920. He brought a broad culture and enthusiasm to the solution of agricultural problems, and was instrumental in the development of many economic projects. His immediate personal researches were chiefly along phytopathological lines, and he stimulated valuable work on the part of his associates. — M. F. Warner. 1764. [Roberts, J. W.] Dr. S. M. McMurran. Amer. Nut. Jour. 13: 71. 1920.— Stock- ton Mosby McMurran, born March 8, 1887; died September 5, 1920. Several of his phyto- pathological articles are noted. — M. F. Warner. 1765. Roberts, W. American plants in England. Gard. Chron. Ill, 67: 52. 1920.— Advertisements of seeds and plants, chiefly from newspapers. An anonymous communication in Gentleman's Magazine, Dec. 1751, is mentioned, concluding with Seeds Arrived this Year from our North American Colonies, an extensive list quoted in full, under vernacular names probably at that time in use in North America, comprising trees, ornamental shrubs, and vines. Particular mention is made of a 12-page catalogue of William Wright of Edinburgh, advertising American trees collected in Canada by his brother John, who was said to have previously printed at London a catalogue comprising nearly 600 different kinds; but this has not been traced. Other London seedsmen offering American plants and seeds are mentioned. The most popular plant imported seems to have been the American aloe. — M. F. Warner. 1766. Roberts, W. A forgotten botanical artist: Miss Crabtree. Gard. Chron. Ill, 67: 278. 1920. — Drawings made in the 18th century by Philippa Crabtree, who may have been the child of this name, born to John and Philippa Crabtree, Nov. 17, 1764. She sent to the Royal Academy in 1786 and 1787 three exhibits entitled "Flowers from Nature." Query: Is it not likely that she drew some of the unsigned plates in early volumes of the Botanical Magazine? Drawings by Mary Ann and Elizabeth Crabtree, 1816 to 1822, are also noted. — M. F. Warner. No. 3, July, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 251 1767. Roberts, W. Some little known botanists. Card. Chron. Ill, 65: 147. 1919.— Eighteenth century medical men, gleaned from Musgrave's Obituary, and either not found or incompletely treated in Britten and Boulger s Biographical Index of British and Irish Botan- ists, are mentioned. Considerable data are given on Thomas Clarke, prominent in Jamaica affairs from 1774 to his death in 1792; Edwin Sandys of Wadham College (died 1731?), Thomas Brisbane (died 1742), James Newton (died 1750), Richard Kentish (d ed 1792), and many others are mentioned. — M. F. Warner. 1768. Roper, I. M. Edward Baylis's "Botanic Physic." (Bibliographical notes. LXX.) Jour. Botany 56: 52-54. 1918. — A quarto volume of 563 pages with 41 full-size copper plates of medicinal plants, by Edward Baylis M.D., issued in parts during 1791 and 1792. The work is very rare and no in ormation about the author can be traced. — Neil E. Stevens. 1769. ScHENCK, Heinrich. Martin Schongauer's Drachenbaum. [The dragon tree of Schongauer.l Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N.F., 19: 775-780. 1 fig. 1920.— The dragon tree (Dracaena Draco) is found in a copperplate of the "Flight into Egypt" engraved by Martin Schongauer about 1469-1474, over 100 years before the first botanical (description and illustra- tion by Clusius. Schongauer could not have drawn his plant from a printed description, as earlier works do not treat of it, while the Herbarius (1484) and Herbarium Apuleji Platonici (1480) had not yet been printed; moreover, the accuracy of the drawing shows that it could only have been made from the living tree. Little is known of Schongauer's life, but he had probably visited southern Spain or Portugal, whither the dragon tree must have been brought by voyagers to the Canaries as early as the middle of the 14th century, as evidenced by very ancient specimens recorded from Cadiz and Lisbon. Schenck further shows that Schongauer's drawing is not only the earliest known representation of the dragon tree, but was evidently the prototype of those found in the work of Diirer, Burgmair, Bosch, Juppe, and Gruninger. — M. F. Warner. 1770. ScHiPS, M. Die Idee von Typus und ihre Bedeutung f iir Morphologic und Systematik. [The idea of "type" and its significance in morphology and taxonomy.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N.F., 18: 401-407. 1919.— A discussion of the development of the 2 opposed philosophical conceptions of the "type," or model, on which living things were created. The realistic, which held that a material type existed and might be found; and the idealistic, which held that the "type" existed only in the mind of the creator. This has, of course, no reference to modern discussions of nomenclatorial type. — Neil E. Stevens^ 1771. Schuster, Julius. Die Dokumenten-Sammlung Darmstaedter der Preussischen Staatsbibliothek und ihre Bedeutung als historisches Archiv fiir Naturwis sens chaf ten und Medizin. [The Darmstaedter document collection of the Prussian state library and its impor- tance as source for the history of natural science and medicine.] Naturwiss. Wochenschr. N.F., 19: 707-710. 1920. — Some of tlie more important sources to be found in this library are indicated and the importance of research in the history of science is emphasized. — Neil E. Stevens. 1772. S[cott], D. H. Edward Alexander Newell Arber. Proc. Linn. Soc. London 131: 39-48. 1919.— Biographical sketch of Newell Arber (1870-1918), and outline of his scientific work with particular reference to paleobotany. A chronological list (1899-1918), prepared by his wife, of 82 books and papers is appended. [See also Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 1643.] — M. F. Warner. 1773. Scott. D. H. The late Ethel Sargant. Jour. Botany 56: 115-116. 1918.— Miss Sargant was distinguished for her researches in cytology and in the comparative anatomy of seedlings. [See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 72.] — Neil E. Stevens. 1774. Seward, A. C. Reginald Philip Gregory. Nature 102: 247-248. 1918.— R. P. Gregory (1879-1918) was a "good all-round botanist," whose contributions to the knowledge of the genetics and cytology of giant races of Primula were of special interest. [See also Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1234; 8, Entry 8Z0.]— Neil E. Stevens. 252 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1775. S[kan], S. a. a. H. Hildebrand. Roy. Bot. Gard. Kew Bull. Misc. Inform. 1918: 32-33. 1918.— Arthur Hedding Hildebrand, C.I.E., whose death at the age of 65 is announced in The Times of January 7, introduced a number of interesting plants to cultivation, among others the remarkable Lonicera Hildebrandiana. He also experimented with the cultivation of English roses and strawberries in Burma, where he spent over 30 years as administrator.— M. F. Warner. 1776. S[kan], S. a. Lady Barkly's drawings of orchids. Roy. Bot. Gard. Kew Bull. Misc. Inform. 1918: 342. 1918.— A collection recently presented to the Kew herbarium, com- prising 51 orchids of British Guiana, and 7 from Jamaica, drawn from nature by Lady Barkly while her husband, Sir Henry Barkly, was governor of British Guiana, 1848-53, and of Jamaica, 1853-56. She died at Melbourne, Apr. 17, 1857. The collection also includes 66 drawings of Cape plants, mostly drawn by her daughter. Miss E. B. Barkly.— M. F. Warner. 1777. Smith, H. I. James M. Macoun, Science 51: 478-480. 1920. • 1778. Sprbnger. Karl Sprenger. Mitteil. Deutsch. Dendrol. Ges. 27: 354-356. Por- trait. [1918?]— Born in Schwerin. After the Franco-Prussian war he had gone to Italy, and developed a garden at Vomero, near Naples, whence he introduced and distributed plants from all over the world. He travelled extensively in Spain in search of choice plants, and wrote many botanical papers. He died at Corfu in December, 1917.— M. F. Waryier. 1779. Steffen, Alexander. Aus der Geschichte der Garten-Aurikeln. [Bits of Auri- cula history.] Gartenflora 69: 113-115. 1920.— The vogue of this flower toward the end of the 18th century is recalled, and Neuenhahn's Annalen der Giirtnerey, which was largely devoted to it, and F. A. Kanngiesser's Aurikelflora are mentioned.— M. F. Warner. 1780. Stevens, N. E. The botany of the New England poets. Sci. Monthly 12: 137-149, 1921.— Quotations are given from Longfellow, Whittier, Emerson, Holmes, and Lowell, show- ing their knowledge of plants. — L. Pace. 1781. Stopes, M. C. a new monthly botanical journal. Sci. Prog. [London] 13: 457. 1919, — A brief statement is given regarding the inauguration and scope of Botanical Abstracts. — J. L. Weimer. 1782. Sydow, H. Ferdinand Theissen, S. J. Ann. Mycol. 17: 134-139. 1919 [1920].— An appreciation, with brief biography, of Ferdinand Theissen (1877-1919) . A bibliography of his 52 mycological contributions is appended. — H. S. Jackson. 1783. Teall, Gardner. Collecting old-time garden books. House and Garden 37«: 34-35, 68. Illus. 1920.— Virgil, Crescenzi, early English authors such as Plat and Worlidge, Evelyn's Sylva, Kalendarium, and translation of La Quintinye, and the Scot's Gardner of John Reid are mentioned; also early American works, such as Totler's Almanac for South Carolina, 1752, with its garden calendar, Squibb's Gardener's Calendar, 1787, and John Allen's The Husbandman's Guide, Boston, 1712. Two of the illustrations are incorrectly labelled; the portrait of "Remberti," i.e., Rembert Dodoens, could not have appeared in a 15th century book, since Dodoens was born in 1517, while "Andreas Gerardus" is a fictitious name, pos- sibly intended for John Gerarde, though the portrait is probably one of Matthiolus.— M . F. Warner. 1784. Thaxter, Roland. William Gilson Farlow. Amer. Jour. Sci. 49: 87-95. Por- trait. 1920.— Doctor Farlow was born Dec. 17, 1844, died June 3, 1919. Since 1870 he held a position in Harvard University, the greater portion of the time as Professor of Cryptogamic Botany. The article contains the outstanding incidents of Doctor Farlow's life and an appreciation of his work. [See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entries 916, 947, 956, 963, 1463, 1470; 7, Entry 1593; 8 Entries 833, 1682, 1785.]— T. J. Fitzpatrick. No. 3, July, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 253 1785. Thaxter, Roland. William Gilson Farlow. Bot. Gaz. 69: 83-87. Portrait. 1920. — A biographic sketch. [See also preceding Entry.] — //. C. Cowles. 1786. Thompson, H. S. Curtis's Botanical magazine. Garden 83: 576. 1919. — The author concerns himself with discrepancies in dates of early volumes. — Neil E. Stevens. 1787. Thorpe, T. E. Armand Gautier. Nature 106:85-86. 1920.— Emile Justin Armand Gautier, distinguished for his investigations in many branches of chemistry, was known to botanists for his work in plant biochemistry, especially concerning the "chemical trans- formations of various products in the life-history of vegetable organisms." — Neil E. Stevens. 1788. TiMM, R. Zum achtzigsten Geburtstage Warnstorfs. [Warnstorf s eightieth birthday.] Hedwigia 60: 50-53. 1918.— An appreciation of the botanical work of Carl Warnstorf (born December 2, 1837) especially in the field of bryology. — Neil E. Stevens. 1789. ToNi, G. B. DE. Commemorazione dei soci defunti G. Briosi e P. Baccarini. Bull. Soc. Bot. Ital. 1919: 59-62. 1919. — In memory of the deceased members Giovanni Briosi (1846-1919), and Pasquale Baccarini (1858-1919.)— A' et7 E. Stevens. 1790. ToNi, G. B. DE. [Lucio Gabelli.] Bull. Soc. Bot. Ital. 1918: 54-55. 1918.— Gabelli died Sept. 7, 1918. A brief note on his botanical work, most important being his study of the Gnetaceae. — M. F. Warner. 1791. Traverso, G. B. Pier Andrea Saccardo, Riv. Biol. 2: 145-148. Portrait. 1920. — Saccardo was born April 23, 1845, died February 11, 1920. His work as a mycologist is outlined, and there is brief mention of his interest in botanical history, which resulted in such books as his La Botanica in Italia (2 Vol., 1895, 1902) and La Cronologia della flora Italiana (1909).— M. F. Warner. 1792. True, R. H. Beginnings of agricultural literature in America. Bull. Amer. Library Assoc. 14^: 186-194. 1920.— Some data are to be found in narratives of early European explor- ers, the voyage of Captains Amadas and Barlowe, and Peter Martyr's Decades of the Newe World; those of the first colonists, John Smith in Virginia, Bradford and Winthrop in Massa- chusetts, and for the French provinces the Jesuit Relations. To the succeeding period of colonial expansion and freer communication with Europe belong John Clayton's Letter on Virginia (1688), Josselyn's Voyages, Francis Moore's Voyage to Georgia (1744), and Kalm's Travels into North America. About this time began the first definitely agricultural publi- cations, of which Jared Eliot's Essay upon Field-Husbandry in New England (1748), with its continuations, may be considered the most important American agricultural writing of the colonial period. Following the Revolution, a number of works of the most practical and experimental character were published by John Beale Bordley, and during this time also appeared Deane's New England Farmer, a typical agricultural dictionary. This was also the time of the rise of agricultural societies in South Carolina, Pennsylvania, Massachusetts and New York; their papers were at first usually printed in the newspapers, and the first volume from such a source was published by the Massachusetts Society for Promoting Agri- culture in 1799. The first distinctly agricultural periodical in the country was the Agri- cultural Museum (Georgetown, D. C, 1810), while the American Farmer was founded by Skinner in 1819.— M. F. Warner. 1793. TuRRiLL, W. B. The Rev. H. F. Tozer and plants collected by him in the nearer East. Roy. Bot. Card. Kew Bull. Misc. Inform. 1920: 29-31. 1920.— The Rev. H. F. Tozer was born in 1829 and died June 2, 1916. He travelled extensively, especially in Greece and the old Turkish Empire, and wrote many books and articles on these regions. Some of his plants, which have recently been presented to Kew, are from localities little known to botan- ists.— M. F. Warner. 254 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1794. United States. 66th Congress, 2d Session. Joint committee on the library. Hearing on S. 497, a bill to increase the area of the United States botanic garden in the city of Washington, District of Columbia, and S. Res. 165, directing the committee on the District of Columbia to report plans for the creation in or near the District of Columbia of a botanic garden comparable with the best existing botanic gardens. Part 1-2. 58 + v + 59-152 p., 4 maps. Government Printing Office: Washington, 1920.— Part 1, Committee hearings, is devoted to testimony of experts on the requirements and possibilities of botanic gardens. Part 2 includes extracts from numerous publications on botanic gardens and their functions, a compilation of statistics in regard to existing gardens, and a list of references to literature on the subject, together with a history of the present garden in Washington.— M. F. Warner. 1795. Vatjghan, John. The music of wild flowers. 181 p. E. P. Button & Co.: New York, 1920.— A collection of essays, most of which have some bearing on the British local flora, but the 1st, which gives title to the volume, is on the recreation a number of dis- tinguished men have found in field botanical study: The philosophers Rousseau and John Stuart Mill; the poets Gray, Crabbe, and Tennyson; Charles Kingsley; Prof. Hort, the Greek scholar; and Edward Cowell, professor of Sanskrit at Cambridge. The 2nd essay. An Old Herbal, describes the first edition of Fuchs' History of Plants (Basle, 1542), and especially the copy belonging to the library of Winchester Cathedral, in which the English names have been written beneath each plant, evidently by a competent botanist, and in all probability soon after the publication of the work. It is suggested that this copy of Fuchs may have originally been owned by John Warner, a prebendary of the Cathedral from 1549, Dean of Winchester from 1559 until his death in 1564, and a physician as well as a clergyman. His interest in botany is evident from the fact that 2 other botanical books in the Cathedral library contain his name. — M. F. Warner. 1796. Vatjpel, Friedrich. Aus der alten Kakteenliteratur. Monatsschr. Kakteenk. 27: 83-85, 104-107, 113-116, 129-132, 141-146. 1917; 28: 53-54, 71-72, 105-108, 124-126, 136- 138. 1918; 29: 25-31, 49-54, 61-66, 115-120, 127-128, 140-144. 1919.— Reprints of diagnoses, descriptions of plates, and a few other notes from the following: Salm-Dyck, Observationes botanicae in horto Dickensi notatae (1822) ; Candolle, Catalogus plantarum horti botanici Monspeliensis (1813) ; Plumier, Plantarum americanarum fasciculus octavus (1758) ; Oviedo, Coronica delas Indias; Lobel, Plantarum seu stirpium historia; Mattioli, Commentarii in sex libros Pedacii Dioscoridis Anazarbei de medica materia; Acosta, Historia natural y moral de las Indias. — M. F. Warner. 1797. Vuillemin, Paul. Emile Boudier (1828-1920)— Pier Andrea Saccardo (1845-1920). Rev. G6n. Sci. Pures et Appl. 31 : 233-234. 1920.— The deaths of 2 great leaders in mycology are recorded. — M. F. Warner. 1798. Warner, H. H. A garden in the sixteenth century. Garden 84: 321. 1920.— Garden of the rectory in the little village of Bishopsbourne near Canterbury, which remains today very much as "the learned and judicious" Richard Hooker, rector from 1595 to 1600, made it. — M. F. Warner. 1799. Warner, H. H. Shakespeare and the garden. Garden 84: 406-407. Fig. 1920.— Chiefly quotations from Shakespeare relating to flowers and gardens; the number of plants mentioned by him is said to be about 150.— M. F. Warner. 1800. Warner, M. F. Exostemma Sanctae Luciae. Jour. Botany 56: 55. 1918.— A communication read before the American Philosophical Society February 20, 1784, though not printed until 1786, includes a popular description of the plant by George Davidson, under the name Cinchona Caribaea Sanctae Luciae. — Neil E. Stevens. 1801. Warner, M. F. The literature of horticulture. Library Jour. 44: 766-776. 1919.— Paper presented at Agricultural Libraries Section, American Library Association, Asbury No. 3, July, 1921] BOTANICAL EDUCATION 255 Park, June 26, 1919, under title: Bibliographical Opportunities in Horticulture. [See Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 918.]— iVez7 E. Stevens. 1802. Warner, M. F. A Virginia garden in 1774. Jour. Internat. Garden Club 3 : 191- 195. 1919. — Extracted with running comment from the diary of Philip Vickers Fithian, while tutor at Nomini Hall, Westmoreland County, Virginia. His observations on garden plants and operations, and miscellaneous details of agricultural practice in that locality, together with some notes on climate and times of flowering and fruiting are covered. — M. F. Warner. 1803. Whetzel, H. H. George Francis Atkinson. Guide to Nature 12 : 70-72. Portrait. 1919. — Popular account of Atkinson as mycologist. — Neil E. Stevens. 1804. Whetzel, H. H., and H. B. Humphrey. Frederick Kj^lpin Ravn. Phytopathology 11: 1-5. Portrait. 1921. — A brief biographical sketch and appreciation. — B. B. Higgins. 1805. Wilcox, E. M. Harvey Elmer Vasey. Phytopathology 9: 299-300. Portrait. 1919.— A sketch of H. E. Vasey (1890-1918).— iVeiZ E. Stevens. 1806. W[iLLis], J. C. Dr. Alberto Lofgren. Proc. Linn. Soc. London 131: 57-58. 1919. — He was born in Stockholm Sept. 1854, and studied at the University of Upsala, but accom- panying the Regnell expedition to southern Brazil in 1874, he remained in that country all his life, dying at Rio de Janeiro Aug. 30, 1918. His publications are comparatively few, though he had the most complete knowledge of the Brazilian flora of any botanist of his time. His collections are mostly at Sao Paulo and at Ptio de Janeiro, with duplicates at Copenhagen, Stockholm, Berlin, and the Glaziou collection. — M. F. Warner. 1807. Wilson", W. F. David Douglas, botanist at Hawaii. 83 p., illus. (including por- traits). Honolulu, 1919. — Reprint of various materials relating to Douglas (1798-1834). — Neil E. Stevens. 1808. Woodruff, L. L. History of biology. Sci. Monthly 12: 253-281. 1921.— Biology as the science of life really had its beginnings with the Greeks. Aristotle, Theophrastus, Hippocrates, Dioscorides, Plinj', van Leeuwenhoek, Malpighi, Grew, Linnaeus, Harvey, Cuvier, Huxley, Agassiz, Weismann, Mendel, Darwin, Gray, and many others are character- ized in a few incisive statements. — L. Pace. 1809. ZiRPOLO, G. Michele Geremicca. Riv. Biol. 2: 704-706. Portrait. 1920.— An outline of the life and botanical work of Geremicca, who was born in Naples Nov. 9, 1857, and died there June 17, 1920. He published many works, chiefly on morphology and physi- ology, and was also greatly interested in the history of Italian botanists, publishing in the Bullettino della Societa dei Naturalisti a few chapters of a systematic index to botanical literature. — M. F. Warner. BOTANICAL EDUCATION C. Stuart Gager, Editor Alfred Gundersen, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 1892, 1926, 2141, 2231) 1810. Anonymous. Museums in education. Nature 106: 269-270. 1920.— An editorial on the Final Report of Committee, British Association, Section L (Cardiff, 1920). The sug- gestion is endorsed that there be a central council to aid in the inception of museums and to coordinate their work when established. — 0. A. Stevens. 1811. Anonymous. Programma onderwijs RijksbloemboUenschool. [Educational pro- gram of the Government bulb school.] Weekbl. Bloembollencult. 30: 120. 1919.— The course 256 BOTANICAL EDUCATION [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, occupies 3 years. The main object is to develop horticulturists especially trained in bulb raising. The school is located at Lisse, Netherlands.— J. C. Th. Uphof. 1812. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Coulter, J. M., and M. C. Coulter. Plant genetics. ix + 214 V- The University of Chicago Press: Chicago, 1918 (see Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 395).] Sci. Prog. [London] 13:502-504. 1919. 1813. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Gager, C. S. Fundamentals of Botany, xix + 6^0 p. P. Blakiston's Son & Co.: Philadelphia, 1916, Reprinted, 1917.] Sci. Prog. [London 13 : 504-505. 1919. 1814. Anonymous. [Rev. of English translation, by Livingston, B. E., of: Palladin, V. I. Pfianzen-Physiologie. (Plant Physiology.) xxv + 320 p. P. Blakiston's Son & Co.: Philadelphia, 1918.] Sci. Prog. [London] 13: 502. 1919. 1815. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Robbins, W. W. The botany of crop plants, xx + 681 p. 263 fig. P. Blakiston's Son & Co.: Philadelphia, 1917.] Sci. Prog. [London] 13: 676-877 1919. 1816. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Whiting, A. L. Soil biology laboratory manual, x + U3 p. John Wiley & Sons: New York; Chapman & Hall, Ltd.: London, 1917.] Sci. Prog. [London] 13: 505. 1919. 1817. Clute, Willard N. Plant names and their meanings— V. Amer. Bot. 27: 18-23. 1921. — The derivation of scientific and vernacular names of the Liliaceae is discussed.— 5. P. Nichols. 1818. Helland-Hansen, Bjorn. Den biologiske station. [The biological station.] Bergens Mus. Aarsberetning 1918-1919: 76-77. 1919.— Annual report of activities and publi- cations.— A. Gundersen. 1819. Kreutzer, E. Zur forstlichen Hochschulfrage in der Tschecho-Slowakei. [The question of forest colleges in Czecho-Slovakia.] Allg. Forst- u. Jagd-zeitg. [Wien] 38: 148- 149. 1920.— The establishment of one or more agricultural colleges in Czecho-Slovakia is being considered. This leads to a discussion of forestry education in general in the old Austrian Empire and its present tendencies in the component states. In general there seems to be a tendency to start more schools than the small size of the states -warrants. — F. S. Baker. 1820. Ktk. Der deutsche forstliche Hochschulunterricht in der Tschecho-Slowakei. [The German forestry college instruction in Czecho-Slovakia.] Wiener Allg. Forst- u. Jagd- zeitg. 38: 190-191. 1920.— The German Section of the Agricultural Council for Bohemia has a project under consideration for the establishment of a forestry college in Czecho-Slovakia. There are 3 alternatives: (1) Establishment of a new school; (2) establishment of a forestry branch of some technical college, perhaps at Prague or Brunn ; (3) transformation of the Higher Forest Academy at Reichstadt. The 1st plan gives the most freedom of choice as to location, etc., but is expensive. The 2nd is inexpensive and has the advantage that a portion of the faculty is already furnished; but the location in a big city is undesirable. The 3rd plan has been adopted and presented to the government. It calls for the taking over of the Reich- stadt Academy, the latter to be established as an independent branch of the Prague Technical College.— F. S. Baker. 1821. Martin, John N. Botany with agricultural applications. 2nd ed. revised, xii + 604 P; 490 fig. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. : New York, 1920.— Full title of 1st edition is "Botany for agricultural students." Much of the text is rewritten, and new and additional illustra- tions are used. An additional chapter on "Variations" is included. [See Bot. Absts. 3, Entries, 1920, 2165.]— C. S. Gager. No. 3, July, 1921] CYTOLOGY 257 1822. Needham, J. G. The new wild life preserve near McLean, N. Y. Sci. Monthly 12: 246-252. Fig. 1-2. 1921.— This bog, 15 miles from Cornell University and always the object of interest and study, has recently been made into a wild life preserve and placed in the keeping of the Trustees of the Lloyd Library. A professor from one of the biological departments of Cornell University is to be custodian. The author has been designated as the first custodian. The preserve is an uncultivated area of about 100 acres. The 2 maps show the roads and houses in the vicinity, the topography, and the character of the vegeta- tion. A fence to keep out grazing animals and signs inviting naturalists to enter for study but not for destruction are the protective measures adopted. — L. Pace. 1823. Stebbing, E. P. Higher forestry education for the empire. Nature 106: 438-440. 1920. — Discussion, relating chiefly to India, as to whether forest probationers should be trained at one central institution. — 0. A. Stevens. 1824. VoLKEROZ, K. De opleiding tot vakondernijs in de bloembollenteelt en het tuinbou- wondernijs in de bloembollenstreek. [Professional training in bulb culture and horticultural education in the bulb district.] Weekbl. Bloembollencult. 30: 46-47. 1919. — A general out- line is given of the horticultural education of the Government Horticultural Winter Schools and the Government Horticultural Winter Courses, especially with reference to the bulb- growing districts of the Netherlands. Winter courses (short courses) in the bulb districts are given in Bennebroek, Hillegom, Lisse, Sassenheim, and Noordwijk. A winter school is established at Lisse, also a course to train horticultural teachers in bulb raising. In the winter courses, 5 subjects are taught; in the winter schools 20 subjects, among them the English, German, and Russian languages. The winter schools and winter courses have 1768 and 300 lecture hours respectively; both courses extend over 2 years. — /. C. Th. Uphof. 1825. Weatherby, C. A. What the Latin names mean — I. Amer. Fern Jour. 10: 113- 115. 1920. — The article consists of a list of 41 specific names, beginning with acrostichoides and extending through frondosa, with origin and meaning- of each. — F. C. Anderson. CYTOLOGY Gilbert M. Smith, Editor Geo. S. Bryan, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 1904, 1945, 1946, 2148, 2195) 1826. Bailey, I. W. The cambium and its derivative tissues. III. A reconnaissance of cytological phenomena in the cambium. Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 417-434. 4 V^- 1920. — The elements of the cambium in gymnosperms and angiosperms, although they may attain a very great length (9,000 microns), are uninucleate. The sphere of influence of the nucleus must, therefore, sometimes extend for several thousand microns. The nucleo-cytoplasmic ratio in cambial initials may vary greatly but in Pinus Strobus, at least, the chromosome number is always constant; and in all material examined chromosome size is also essentially constant. Winkler's conclusion that there is a close correlation between cell size and chro- mosomal mass evidently does not hold for the cambium. The fusiform cambial initials, which are frequently several hundred times as long as they are wide, divide longitudinally in the tangential plane, the continual increase in the periphery of the cambium not being met by radial divisions but by the cells sliding by one another. The longitudinal division takes place through an extraordinary extension of the cell plate. The spindle fibers thicken between the daughter nuclei after mitosis, producing a cell plate, and this plate is extended upward and downward from the region of the nuclei through the operation of two masses of kino- plasmic fibrillae, the kinoplasmasomes, the new wall ultimately reaching both ends of the protoplast. The author discusses the types of cell plate formation described by various authors and believes that they represent diiTerent phases or stages of a single fundamental type of cytokinesis. The significance of the cambium in the investigation of various cyto- 258 CYTOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, logical problems, particularly of those relating to the cell plate and the dynamics of cyto- kinesis, is briefly discussed. — E. W. Sinnoit. 1827. Bezssonof, N. Erscheinungen beim Wachstum von Mikroorganism auf stark rohrzuckerhaltigen Nahrboden und die Chondriomfrage. [Phenomena occurring in the growth of microorganisms on media of high cane-sugar content and the chondriosome question.] Cen- tralbl. Bakt. II Abt. 50: 444-464. PI. 1. 1920.— Molds cultivated on media with high cane- sugar content reacted, from a morphological point of view, as follows: The Aspergillus forms, Penicillium glaucum Bref. (Link), Aspergillus Oryzae, A. candidus, and A. Wentii produce fruiting bodies in the form of incipient perithecia. A. Wentii differs from the others in the shape of its ascogone and in this respect approaches the characteristic type of the Erysiphaceae. Penicillium glaucum produces giant conidia. P. brevicaule, with its char- acteristic mycelium, deviates further from the others in its poor growth on cane-sugar media. Rhizopus nigricans produces zygospores, azygospores, and chlamydospores in cane-sugar solutions; sporangia were observed only on solid media. — The following physiological and cytological observations were made: Aspergillus Oryzae produces true alcoholic fermenta- tion. The formation of ethyl alcohol was demonstrated both quantitatively and qualita- tively. The fungi show fine granulation of the cytoplasm even in unstained material. Bac- teria and fungi stain more intensely with nuclear stains because of the dispersion of the chro- matin material. The accentuated development of generative cells, on media with high sugar concentration, the dispersed condition of the cytoplasmic units as well as the state of dis- persion of the chondriosomes points to an intimate relation between these phenomena. — Anthony Berg. 1828. CowDRY, N. H. Experimental studies on mitochondria in plant cells. Biol. Bull. [Woods Hole] 39 : 188-200. 3 pi. 1920. — The author has conducted experiments on the radicles of seedling peas to determine whether mitochondria might be utilized as cytological indicators of cell activity. The conclusion is that "mitochondria are changed to an abnormal degree only under severe conditions which either kill the cell or render its recovery very improb- able."—iJZda R. Walker. 1829. Dangeard, P. A. Observations relatives a la note precedente. [Observations regarding an earlier communication.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1518. 1920. — Reference is made to the controversy between Guilliermond and the author. The latter states that he still maintains his former contentions, but has nothing further to add at this time. — C, H. Farr. 1830. Dangeard, P. A. Sur la metachromatine et les composes tanniques des vacuoles. [On the metachromatin and the tannin content of the vacuoles.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 1016-1019. 9 fig. 1920.— A study of the vacuoles of Taxus baccata and the effects of intravital stains indicate that the vacuoles are formed in association with metachromatin and that this material is distinct from the tannin bodies which are formed later. — C. H. Farr. 1831. Emberger, L. Etude cytologique de la Selaginelle. [A cytological study of Sela- ginella.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 263-266. Fig. 1-6. 1920.— In the meristem and sporogenous tissues of Selaginella there are mitochondria of all types; plastes (one in each spore), microsomes of a lipoid nature, and a vacuolar system of unknown constitution but similar to the metachromatin of fungi. The author differs with Dangeard on his inter- pretation of these bodies. — C. H. Farr. 1832. Guilliermond, A. Nouvelles observations cytologiques sur Saprolegnia. [New observations on the cytology of Saprolegnia.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 266-268. Fig. 1-6. 1920. — Vacuoles are found to be formed by the fusion of anastomosing canals. The fungus contains chondriosomes, fatty globules, and a vacuolar system which is not metachromatic in nature. Author finds that it is very difficult to distinguish the chondrio- contes from the bacteria which are associated with the fungus.- — C. H. Farr. No. 3, July, 1921] ECOLOGY AND PLANT GEOGRAPHY 259 1833. GuiLLiERMOND, A. Nouvelles recherches sur I'appareil vacuolaire dans les vege- taux. [New investigations of the vacuolar system of plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 1071-1074. 25 fig. 1920. — Using the roots of beans and peas and the radicles of barley to trace the development of the vacuoles, the author concludes that the latter are formed from bodies which resemble mitochondria but are not true mitochondria. — C. H. Farr. 1834. GuiLLiERMOND, A. Sur revolution du chondriome pendant la formation des grains de pollen de Lilium candidtim. [The transformations of the chondriosome during formation of pollen grains of Lilium candidum.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1003-1006. Fig. 1-11. 1920.- — Chondriosomes in presynapsis consist of granular mitochondria, rods, and chondrioconts. During synapsis numerous small granules and a few large granules appear. The latter enlarge and become darker during diakinesis. In metaphase and during the homeo- typic division, rods and chondrioconts are present. During microspore formation there are small granules and large plastids that become very distinct in the later stages. — C. H. Farr. 1835. Herrera, a. L. Sur Pimitation des cellules, des tissus, de la division cellulaire et de la structure du protoplasma avec le fiuorosilicate de calcium. [On the imitation of cells, tissues, cell-division, and the structure of protoplasm with calcium fluorsilicate.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1613-1614. 1920. — A confirmation of the results of Gatjtier and Clausmann on the biological importance of fluorine. Structures resembling cells are pro- duced by the dilTusion of KHF2 and CaCU into an alkaline solution of colloidal silica. — C. H. Farr. 1836. Sharp, L. W. Mitosis in Osmunda. [Rev. of: Digby, L. On the archesporial and meiotic phases of Osmunda. Ann. Botany 33: 135-172. 5 pi. 1919 (see Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1933).] Bot. Gaz. 69: 88-91. 1920. — This paper is regarded as a very complete state- ment of the Farmer theory of the method of chromosome reduction, but it is felt that the figures fail to prove the theory advocated. — H. C. Cowles. 1837. Wager, Harold. Presidential address. The significance of sex and nuclear fusions in the fungi. Trans. British Mycol. Soc. 6: 305-317. 1920. — The introduction to this address includes brief references to Thomas Gibbs, Sir Charles Thomas Dyke Acland, Dr. Arthur Eckley Lechmere, Charles Ogilvie Farquharson, and Anthony Wallis, mycologists who died during the year. A historical resume of the development of knowledge concerning sex and nuclear fusions in fungi is given. Normal sexual fusion includes at least 2 phenomena, the blending of 2 distinct lines of descent, and rejuvenescence of the repro- ductive cell by means of which it receives a new stimulus to growth and division. In the higher fungi the blending of 2 lines of descent seems to have become superfluous and a simple type of nuclear fusion concerned only with rejuvenescence is taking the place of the more complex process of binary sexual fusion. — W. B. McDougall. ECOLOGY AND PLANT GEOGRAPHY H, C. Cowles, Editor G. D. Fuller, Assistant Editor (See in this issue Entries 1604, 1851, 1858, 1970, 2014, 2027, 2028, 2029, 2036, 2037, 2038, 2047, 2078, 2079, 2080, 2227, 2230, 2231, 2232) 260 FORESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY Raphael Zon, Editor J. V. HoFMANN, Assistant Editor (See in this issue Entries 1819, 1820, 1823, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2105, 2107, 2109, 2121, 2123, 2124, 2187, 2227, 2234) 1838. Anonymous. Departmental exploitation in the western Himalayas. Indian Forester 47: 1-11. 1921. 1839. Anonymous. Forest Service. Sci. Monthly 12: 287. 1921.— This is a summary of Chief [U. S. A.] Forester W. B. Greely's annual report. — L. Pace. 1840. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Howard, A. L. A manual of the timbers of the world, their characteristics and uses, xvi -j- 446 p., 128 illus. Macmillan & Co.: London, 1920.] Sci. Prog. [London] 15 : 499-500. 1921. 1841. Beeson, C. F. C. Food plants of Indian forest insects, Part V. Indian Forester 47: 21-25. 1921. — A continuation of previous work, the present compilation listing 25 insects which feed upon a variety of forest trees and shrubs.- — E. N . Munns. 1842. Beeson, C. F. C. Hoplocerambyx and the dying off of sal. Indian Forester 47: 68-77. 1 fig. 1921. — A marked parallelism exists between the number of dead trees per year and the annual amount of rainfall; in abnormally wet years the number of sal dying is greatly increased, in abnormally dry years the number is very markedly decreased. The emergence period of the sal borer {H. spinicornis) is directly influenced by the initial date and extent of the rains through their effect on the moisture content of the heartwood of the sal and the relative humidity of the pupal chamber. In a wet year 75 per cent of the beetles emerge in the 1st month of the rains; in a dry year the period is prolonged nearly 2 months. The wet year increases the damage to sal by bad aeration through a rise in the water table, espe- cially on heavier soils. This weakening renders the tree much more susceptible to the borer attacks, the borer acting as a secondary factor. — Control measures during an epidemic call for the removal from the forest before the end of April of all attacked parts of trees down to 18 inches girth in normal years and the removal of all parts of trees dov/n to 12 inches girth in years of early and abundant precipitation. Removal of dead and dying trees on which the foliage is turning brown and trees with green foliage but with an abundant ejection of wood dust is indicated. — E. N . Munns. 1843. Bennett, H. C. Experiments in sowing seeds of Cassia auriculata at Golla, Anantapur. Indian Forester 47: 25-29. 1921. — Six methods of seed sowing have been tried, each on 5 acres. Sowing in furrows gives the cheapest successful result, but plowing, hoeing, and harrowing give the best results.' — E. N. Munns. 1844. Brown, N. C. Vallombrosa forest in Italy. Amer. Forestry 26: 647-654. 15 fig. 1920. — The forest consists of 3500 acres, 875 acres chestnut and 125 acres containing 3 varieties of Italian pines. The remainder is made up of European beech (Fagus sylvatica) and silver fir {Abies peciinata). The forest has been under continuous management by Italian forestry officials since 1869, and for centuries before that date by the monks.— Chas. H. Otis. 1845. Butler, O. M. Forest conservation by better utilization. Amer. Forestry 26: 682-683, 691. 1920. 1846. Chaytor, a. H. Planting Douglas fir and Sitka spruce in cleared coppice. Quart. Jour. Forest. 14: 161-164. 1920. — Plantations of Douglas fir, Sitka spruce, and Japanese larch set out in old coppice woods at Iridge Place, Hurst Green, Sussex, England, from the years 1910 to 1913, were tended very carefully previous to the war, the rubbish and coppice No. 3, July, 1921] FORESTRY 261 being cleared each year from around each tree; owing to the absence of woodsmen and keepers the trees were allowed to shift for themselves during the war. Under the latter condition the Douglas fir and Sitka spruce have thrived fully as well or better than under the former treatment. The larches have not been so successful under neglect, because where completely overtopped they have often died back at the tip or succumbed outright. Except where the tops have been whipped by the underwood, Douglas fir and Sitka spruce are in perfect health although completely covered by coppice. All that is required is the removal of overhead branches that will interfere with the growth of the leading shoot; to do more seems a waste of labor and money. During the war rabbits killed many larches but did little damage to Douglas fir or Sitka spruce. The fir and spruce, even up to 5 and 6 ft. high, transplant well if moved in autumn with a ball of earth, A spacing of 9 by 9 feet is advocated for Douglas fir in strong coppice. — C. R. Tilloison. 1847, Craft, Q, R, Timber conservation in Wyoming. Amer. Forestry 26: 740-741. 2 fig. 1920. 1848. Geschwind, Aus der Praxis der Saatschuldiingung im bosnisch-herzegovinischen Karstgebiete. [The practice of nursery fertilizing in the Karst region, Bosnia-Herzegovina.] Wiener Allg, Forst- u. Jagd-Zeitg. 38: 201-203. 1920. — Forest tree nurseries in the Karst (devoted to Pinus austriaca) are usually far from railroads. The soil is scanty and poor, and the nursery is soon in need of fertilizer not only to add the necessary chemical elements but to improve the physical condition of the soil as well. Owing to the difficulty of bringing in bulky fertilizers local sod has been used for some time with success by the writer. This is cut 14 X 50 cm. to fit between the seed rows (18 cm.) and placed grassy side down. It prevents compacting of the soil and discourages the growth of weeds; and as it rots (2 years) it enriches the soil. Small pieces of sod are gathered in heaps and covered with sod making in 2 years a rich compost that is spread between the rows after weeding. — The stock is grown for 2 years; after removal the remainder of the sod is turned in, the area reseeded and the space between the rows again sodded. — Soil collecting in holes in the limestone cliffs, a mixture of dust, lime fragments, mosses, algae, and bird and animal droppings, has also proved suc- cessful in maintaining the fertility of these nurseries. — F. S. Baker. 1849. Geschwind. Die Hasenschaden in den Schwarzkiefernkulturen des Karstes. [Rabbit damage in Austrian pine plantations of the Karst.] Allg. Forst- u. Jagd-Zeitg. [Wien] 38 : 159-160. 1920. — Rabbit damage is severe in plantations of Austrian pine (Pinus austriaca) in the Karst region of Bosnia-Herzegovina for a period of about 5 years after planting. Two- year old seedlings are planted in deep holes and a depression is left around the stem to catch water. This, with a circling wall of stones, enables rabbits to reach the tops for some years. The greatest damage occurs the 1st winter after planting and in regions where the tree is being newly introduced. The rabbits do not appear to eat the pines as food, as the injury is found when other food is abundant; the uneaten top is often found near the plant.— Re- covery is more general than in other regions as the rainfall and temperature produce a long favorable growing season. Trees usually recover in 3-4 years, unless the terminal is eaten off before side buds are formed (at 3-4 years of age). Adventitious buds rarely develop under these circumstances. Such trees are replaced immediately while others are left to recover, as they usually do if well rooted. Hunting out the rabbits in fenced and cultivated places is the best way of combating the evil. — F. S. Baker. 1850, Geschwind. Der plenter- oder femelwaldartige Niederwald. [The coppice selec- tion forest.] Wiener Allg. Forst- u. Jagd-Zeitg. 38: 237-238. 1920.— The selection form of coppice forest seems never to have been definitely described although it is very common throughout the Balkan peninsula and is found in parts of Switzerland. Any coppice forest will assume a somewhat uneven-aged form since sprouting is not limited to any one year, although the oldest age class will predominate; especially in southern (warm) climates, where sprouting tends to continue more or less through the entire rotation, the appearance of the stand is not even-aged but of a selection form. Under the undeveloped forestry systems of 262 FORESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, the Balkans such stands are managed under a rough selection system. The sprouts suffer much less from grazing damage, wind and snow breakage, and dryness than when clean cut; but due to light deficiency there is poorer development, and suppression may ultimately lead to bad openings in the stands. Felling is very much more difficult than when a clean-cutting method is used as the stands are dense and trees lodge badly. The author does not advocate the method, merely describes it, but presumes that it is much better adapted to southern countries than to those farther north, since sprouting under deficient light is much better in the south, — F. S. Baker. 1851. Greenfield, W. P. The sand-dunes of the Lincolnshire coast. Quart. Jour. Forest. 14: 176-184. 1920. — A general discussion of the sand dunes of the region and a plan for their reclamation. Afforestation cannot be considered as an actual means of sea-defense ' but should be a secondary operation following the fixing of the sand by means of the marram grass. Corsican pine at Holkham in Norfolk has proved the best species for planting on open parts exposed to sea breezes. In growth and hardihood, it far surpassed the Scotch and maritime pines. — C. R. Tillotson. 1852. Guthrie, J. D. The national forest resources of Alaska are for use. Amer. Forestry 27: 12-14. 5 fig. 1921. 1853. Hartel, 0. 1st die Wildbachverbauung notwendig? [Is control of torrents neces- sary?] Wiener Allg. Forst- u. Jagd-Zeitg. 38: 171-172. 1920.— This question is treated under two heads: (1) How far is the great expense of torrent control economically justified, and (2) can poverty-stricken Austria afford the luxury of this control? The author shows that reforestation, protection, and careful regulation of the use of the watersheds, where the streams are small, helps greatly in ameliorating conditions in the main channels. Expensive engineering works have in the past been constructed in some places where only full protection of the upper slopes was needed. The work of the forester is inexpensive and can be carried on generally; expensive engineering works can be constructed if needed, following protection of the headwaters. Secondly, the author shows that Austria must control torrents both in view of hydro-electric developments and agriculture in the valleys. — F. S. Baker. 1854. Headley, R. Fire protection to save our forests. Amer. forestry 26: 710—714. 4 fig. 1920. 1855. Henkel, J. S. Forestry in Rhodesia. Improvement fellings on the farm. Rhodesia Agric. Jour. 18: 76-79. 1921. 1856. Henkel, J. S. Forestry in Rhodesia. The management of woods. Rhodesia Agric. Jour. 17: 408-411. 1920. 1857. Henry, Augustine. The artificial production of vigorous trees by hybridisation. Quart. Jour. Forest. 14: 253-257. 1920. — First generation hybrids in trees as in other plants are remarkable for their size, rapid growth, early and free flowering, ease with which they can be multiplied, and, in all probability, their comparative immunity to disease. The slow growth of the ordinary species of oak, ash, and walnut, except on the best agricultural soils, renders hopeless all possibility of an adequate financial return. Without vigorous 1st genera- tion hybrids, the most valuable classes of timber can be grown only in limited quantity. There is the possibility of obtaining vigorous hybrids of the valuable species capable of thriv- ing on soils ordinarily inhospitable. The relation of vigor in hybrids to the degree of rela- tionship between the parents is unknown but of practical interest in the selection of parents for crossing experiments. Very little has been done in hybridization of forest trees. Klotzsch carried on experiments in 1845, at Berlin, with pine, oak, alder, and elm, and after 8 years the hybrids averaged 5 larger than the parents. Burbank's work with walnut in California has resulted in progeny of greater vigor. The author has produced a very vigorous hybrid, Populus generosa. Experiments carried out at Kew during the war with Fraxinus excelsior, No. 3, July, 1921] FORESTEY 263 F. americana, F. pennsylvanka, and F. oregona resulted in progeny in nowise different from the carpellate parent. The author believes the artificial production of hybrid trees should be taken up seriously through the establishment of a research station, either in France or in the U. S. A.—C. R. Tillotson. 1858. Hood, Constance C, and Muriel I. Bacon. Forestry in Morocco. Quart. Jour. Forest. 14: 165-169. 1920.— Contrary to a commonly accepted idea, Morocco is not a desert country. The whole forest area may be divided into 3 zones. The 1st comprises the Forest of Marmora of 325,000 acres; it is open and without underwood. The species are cork-oak, Arar {Thuya quadrivalvia) , and wild pear. The cork-oak makes this forest of especial interest and importance, it being the largest known forest of this species; the trees appear to flourish better here than in any other region, and the bark can be removed every 8 years (as compared with 13 years in the south of France), being then over an inch in thickness.— The 2nd zone covers a very large area, at present practically unsurveyed, extend- ing over the Anti-Atlas regions. The species are cork-oak, maritime pine, cedar, juniper, yew, and maple. Large tracts of Ilex yield an excellent timber especially suitable for rail- road ties. For the most part, the cedar grows pure and produces magnificent timber. Cedars 300-400 years old are 35-40 m. high and 5-6 m. in girth. These forests represent an enormous reserve awaiting future exploitation.— The 3rd zone is found in the south, in the Mogador- Agadir district, and comprises 1,250,000 acres. The soil is generally poor, varying from almost pure sand in the coast regions to calcareous in the extreme easterly portions. The prevailing species is the Argan (Argania sideroxylon) , of peculiar botanical interest because of its very limited distribution. The wood is very hard, heavy (sinks in water), and makes excellent charcoal. The first yields Argan oil, an important article of food in southern Morocco. In this region also juniper and Arar occur. The latter species provided the material for the celebrated Roman tables of "mottled wood;" it is also tapped for resin.— There has been con- siderable activity in planting trees for ornamental purposes. The trees used chiefly for this purpose are eucalyptus, mulberry, sycamore, Aleppo pine, Bella Ombra, and poplar.— C. R. Tillotson. 1859. Hrp. Zur Reform der Staatsforstverwaltung in Oesterreich. [Reform of the state forest administration in Austria.] Allg. Forst- u. Jagd-Zeitg. [Wien] 38: 87-88. 1920.— For a long time there has been a movement on foot among Austrian foresters to place technical foresters in the highest administrative offices in place of the jurists, who now occupy such positions. There are a number of indications (spring 1920) that the foresters have at last won their point. — F. S. Baker. 1860. Kay, James. Notes on jack pines and Sitka spruce. Trans. Roy. Scottish Arboric. Soc. 34: 149-155. 1920. — Botanical and silvical descriptions of Pinus divaricata (P. bank- siana), P. contorta, P. conlorta var. murrayana, and Picea sitchensis. — C. R. Tillotson. 1861. L., F., und K. V. Zum Entwurfe eines neuen Forst-Servituten Gesetzes. [Plans for a new forest servitude law.] Allg. Forst- u. Jagd-Zeitg. [Wien] 38: 135-137. 1920.— Two separate articles under one title.— F. L. points out the harm of the present system of servitudes dating from 1853. As originally given out they permitted the use of only a fraction of the total wood product, and much wood was left over in the forest to go to waste. Now, however, they seriously embarrass the proper exploitation of the forests, since all holders of rights take the maximum allowance whether they use it personally or not, selling any surplus. Furthermore, the servitude gives a right to 70 per cent firewood and 30 per cent sawtimber, whereas the forest is actually producing about 70 per cent sawtimber and 30 per cent firewood. The deficiency necessitates the giving of sawtimber for use as firewood. The opinion that the servitudes ought to be changed is general; the holders of rights desire further extension, while foresters and others favor limitation. — K. V. desires a change in the servitudes in the interests of uniformity as they are quite variable in different parts of Austria. He regards them as a part of the rights of the people under a republican form of government, and would have them extended. — F. S. Baker. BOTANICAI, ABSTSACTS, VOL. VIII, NO. 3 264 FORESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1862. Lamb, G. N. American grown cork. Amer. Forestry 27: 15-16. 5 fig. 1921. 1863. Lapeyrere, M. E. The Landes of Gascony. Trans. Roy. Scottish Arboric. Soc. 34: 155-167. 1920. — A historical review of the development of the Landes as a timber and turpentine producing region.— C R. Tillotson. 1864. Lr. Aus ein Zypressenhain in Amerika. [A cypress grove in America.] Wiener Allg. Forst- u. Jagd-Zeitg. 38: 270. 2 illus. 1920. — A note on Monterey cypress (Cupressua macrocarpa), with a description of the peculiar gnarled growth. — F. S. Baker. 1865. M'Pherson, Alex. Commercial forestry in the Highlands. Trans. Roy. Scottish Arboric. Soc. 34: 178-181. 1920. — Present tax laws make it impracticable to grow mature timber in the Scottish Highlands although timber of a superior quality can be produced there. The growing of pitwood should be the staple form of forestry. Plantations 19 and 27 years old disposed of for this purpose have yielded returns above interest of 16s. 9d., and £3 4s. 5d. per acre respectively. Pitwood on a 19-year rotation is a more profitable investment for land owners than sheep farming.— C. R. Tillotson. 1866. MoTTL, Karl. Die forstlichen Verhaltnisse im oberen Friaul. [Forestry situation in upper Friuli.] Wiener Allg. Forst- u. Jagd-Zeitg. 38: 250-251, 255-257. 1920.— A descrip- tion of the Aupatal or Val d'Aupa in upper Friuli, from a general and forest standpoint. This valley is in the Dolomite Alps in a region noted for torrents. It has good natural forests, mostly of spruce, but they have been much mismanaged. The article includes a description of the principal timber bodies and general forest conditions. No statistical information is included. — F. S. Baker. 1867. Pack, A. N. Pulpwood from British Columbia. Amer. Forestry 26: 715-719. 8 fig. 1920. 1868. Peschatjt, Roman. Elektrizitat und Forstwirtschaft. [Electricity and forestry.] Allg. Forst- u. Jagd-Zeitg. [Wien] 38: 129-130. 1920. — Large power developments are planned on the Danube and other Austrian streams; there is considerable irregularity of flow, however, and dams will be necessary. The present over-cutting on higher watersheds and the unre- stricted use of litter is tending to make the run-off still more irregular. The maintenance of forest cover is necessary for the most complete utilization of water for power, as is demanded by the proposed hydro-electric developments in Austria. — F. S. Baker. 1869. Petraschek. Die weitere Entwicklung der Kiefern-Hartznutzungstechnik. [Fur- ther development of the turpentining technique in the pine.] Wiener Allg. Forst- u. Jagd- Zeitg. 38: 279-281, 285-287, 291-292. 1920.— This is a review and compilation of articles by many writers. It covers the anatomical and physiological factors governing resin production and flow, and the different methods that have been devised for tapping the trees and securing the resin, particularly the experimental methods using different forms of chipping and differ- ent frequencies. — F. S. Baker. 1870. Printz, E. Schwedens Holzhandel und Holzindustrie. [The Swedish limiber industry.] Wiener Allg. Forst- u. Jagd-Zeitg. 38: 219-221. 1920. — This is a statistical article based on 2 books: "La Suede, son peuple et son Industrie" by G. Sundbarg, Stockholm, 1900, and "Eine forstliche Studienreise nach Schweden" by Gabriel Janka, Vienna, 1914.— F. S. Baker. 1871. Ragl, F. X. Streunutzung in bayrischen Staatswald. [Use of litter in Bavarian state forests.] Allg. Forst- u. Jagd-Zeitg. [Wien] 38: 89. 1920. — During the war, regulation of the use of litter was relaxed and the annual consumption rose from about 735,000 cubic m. to millions. Many forests are now completely cleared and the demand far exceeds the supply. Reproduction is falling off and production is decreasing. Growth is less a function of stocking than of ground conditions, as shown by 2 similar adjacent areas. In the first the litter is No. 3, July, 1921] FORESTRY 265 used and in the second it is left. Volume growth on the 2 areas is as 1 is to 2.5, the quality coefficient as 1 is to 1.5. Litter is deficient in potash and phosphorus and makes a poor fertilizer for agriculture; its highest value is realized in the forest. — F. S. Baker. 1872. Record, S. J. Scented woods. Amer. Forestry 26: 665-672. 20 fig. 1920.— A popular description of various odoriferous woods. — Chas. H. Otis. 1873. Reisner, J. H. Progress of forestry in China. Amer. Forestry 26: 655-€58. 5 fig, 1920. 1874. Rettmeyer. Zum Windmantel 5 des Forstgesetzes. [Windbelts, section 5 of the forest laws.] Wiener Allg. Forst- u. Jagd-Zeitg. 38: 249-250. 1920.— A discussion of the meaning of the law and its practical application under different conditions. — F. S. Baker. 1875. Rowe, M. H. Mixed woods. Quart. Jour. Forest. 14: 171-176. 1920.— A silvicul- tural discussion of the advantages and disadvantages of mixed woods with suggestions as to desirable and undesirable species in mixture. The point is made that the safest and at the same time most easily managed system of mixing is by groups which are planted pure. Groups of shade-bearing species should be at least 5 acre in size, more if possible; groups of light demanders should never exceed 5 acre in extent, preferably \ acre. There is a good reason for small groups of light-demanding trees. After the thicket stage is past, the characteristic opening out inevitably ensues, thus permitting soil deterioration. — C. R. Tillotson. 1876. Siecke, E. 0., and L. Wyman. Forestry questions and answers. Texas Agric. Exp. Sta. Forest. Bull. 12. 15p. 1920. — This bulletin consists of general questions and answers as to present areas and conditions of Texas forests and other forestry problems of an elemen- tary nature. One map shows the forested areas and type of forest in each; another divides the state into 5 tree-planting districts and lists trees suitable for each. — L. Pace. 1877. Sim, T. R. Pine tree culture in South Africa. A summary of the results of practical experiences. South African Jour. Indust. 4: 65-75. 1921. 1878. Sim, T. R. Timber trees for commercial culture. Species that have been tried in South Africa. South African Jour. Indust. 3: 1030-1039. 1920. 1879. Sim, T. R. Timber trees for South Africa. Eucalypts and others considered in detail. South African Jour. Indust. 3: 1155-1172. 1920. 1880. SissoN, G. W., Jr. The pulp and paper industry. Amer. Forestry 26: 687-688. 1920. — [Extracts from an address at the New England Forestry Conference, Aug., 1920.] 1881. Slavik, Victor. Die Nonne. [The nun moth (Liparis monacha).] Allg. Forst- u. Jagd-Zeitg. [Wien] 38: 96-99, 110-111. 1920.— A full discussion of methods in vogue for discovering and destroying the nun moth, including the collection of caterpillars on standing and felled trees, destruction of eggs and general management of affected stands. Thinnings between April and August should not be carried on in affected forests. Fifteen points are enumerated in conclusion bearing on control of the nun, ranging from direct destruction to indirect educational means. — F. S. Baker. 1882. Smythies, E. A. Afforestation of ravine lands in the Etawah District, United Prov- inces. Indian Forest Rec. 7*: 1-32. PI. 1-34- 1920. — Deforestation and over-grazing are responsible for severe ravine erosion in all stream beds in the Gangetic plain where the popula- tion is dense. To check the erosion, it is proposed to reduce the velocity of the water by means of small dams and to improve the soil cover at the head of ravines. In the filled-in basins behind the dams trees are planted which make an excellent growth. On steep slopes, small contour terraces are made to prevent soil wash, to collect and store water, and to furnish places for seed and tree planting. The work is to be carried on as a measure of famine relief; and as labor at that time is cheap and plentiful, the work can be done at small cost, while the government receives a benefit from the famine relief. — E. N . Munns. 266 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1883. Stewart, Hugh Shaw. Observations on the planting of the quicker growing coni- fers. Trans. Roy. Scottish Arboric. See. 34: 141-145. 1920. — Spacing even as close as 3 feet in the case of Douglas fir and Japanese larch does not prevent, and only partially restrains, branch growth. If clean boles are required, hand pruning close to the stem must be resorted to. Such spacing, moreover, results in the production of many suppressed boles of little value which interfere with the root development of the more vigorous, dominant neighbors. Spacings of 5J, 6, and 7 feet are advocated respectively for Sitka spruce, Japanese larch, and Douglas fir. — C. R. Tillotson. 1884. Stuart, J. S. Niblock. The effect of storms on certain forests in the Tsolo district, Cape Province. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1 : 750-754. 3 pi. 1920. 1885. Tromp, F. J. Essential oils, with special reference to those obtained from the Euca- lypts. South African Jour. Indust. 4: 85-89. 1921. 1886. Vendelmann, Henry. Forestry by precultures. Quart. Jour. Forest. 14: 185-190. 1920. — Forestry by precultures has been attended with such striking success that it is being widely adopted. It consists in improving the soil to such an extent that it becomes suited to the varieties of trees which have been selected for planting. Improvement of the soil is brought about by deep surface plowing, subsoil plowing where there is hardpan, the adding of commercial fertilizers, and the growing of green manures. This is followed by an agricultural crop, against which the cost of soil improvement can be charged. Some trees can be grown by sowing the seed with the grain crop. In the case of others, 1 or 2-year seedlings are planted following the removal of the grain, the land being in such condition that planting can be carried on very rapidly. In December (shortest days of the year) an average of 8,000-9,000 1-year firs were planted in a day by 1 slitter and 2 boy planters. On a particular day, 1 slitter and 3 boy planters put in 18,000 plants.— C. R. Tillotson. 1887. Watt, A. S. The biological basis of forestry. Trans. Roy. Scottish Arboric. Soc. 34: 210-216. 1920. — The author emphasizes the need of an adequate understanding of the biological factors entering into the growth of trees in stands in order to place forestry upon a scientific as well as a sound economic basis and to avoid the evil results of the application of imperfect knowledge. — C. R. Tillotson. 1888. Weiss, F. E. Fibre yielding plants and their economic importance. Ann. Rept. and Trans. Manchester Microsc. Soc. 1919: 25-31. 1920.— Presidential address delivered February 13, 1919. A brief enumeration and description of plant tissues and parts used in various portions of the world in the making of paper, cordage, and textiles. — C E. Allen. GENETICS G. H. Shull, Editor J. P. Kelly, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 1589, 1590, 1601, 1608, 1615, 1774, 1812, 1837, 1857, 1955, 1962, 1967, 1972, 1974, 1975, 1990, 2012, 2091, 2104, 2194, 2263) 1889. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Adami, J. G. Medical contributions to the study of evolu- tion, xviii + 372 p., 7 pi., 18 fig. Duckworth & Co.: London, 1918.] Sci. Prog. [London] 13:679-681. 1919. 1890. Anonymous. Biology of endogamy and exogamy. [Rev. of: East, E. M., and D. F. Jones. Inbreeding and outbreeding: their genetic and sociological significance. 285 p. J. B. Lippincott Co.: Philadelphia and London, 1919.] Nature 106: 335-336. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 571. No. 3, July, 1921] GENETICS 267 1S91. Anonymous. South African's views of citrus methods used in California. [Rev. of and extracts from: Fitzpatrick, Percy. Citrus growing in California. 32 p. National Bank of South Africa, Pretoria, 1920 (see Bot. Absts. 8, Entry 1910).] California Citrograph 6:46, 62-64, 78, 99. 2 fig. Dec, 1920, and Jan., 1921. 1892. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Gager, C. S. Heredity and evolution in plants, xv -f 265 J)., 113 illus. P. Blakiston's Son & Co.: Philadelphia, 1920 (see Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1672; 7, Entry 1610).] Sci. Prog. [London] 15: 498. 1921.— See also Bot. Absts. 8,' Entry 1079 1893. Alder, B. How to cull a flock of hens. Utah Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 42. 3-8, 5 fig. 1920.— Author gives directions for distinguishing between laying and non-laying hens on the basis of the bodily changes which accompany the transition from one condition to the other.— William A. Lippincott. 1894. Anthony, R. Le pseudo-hermaphroditisme tubaire chez les Cetaces males. [Pseudo- hermaphroditism in the male Cetaceans.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 171: 1398-1399. 1920. —Well developed male utricle and Muellerian ducts are regularly or occasionally found in male Cetaceans. Author regards this condition as primitive. — A. Franklin Shull. 1895. Becker, J. Xenien zwischen Melonen und Giirken. [Xenia in muskmelons and cucumbers.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 362-364. Nov., 1920.— A testing out of the belief that cross-pollination of melons and cucumbers leads to xenia as evidenced by undesirable flavors. One cucumber resulted from 10 guarded hybridizations with melon pollen; its seeds were undeveloped but its flavor was not unusual. — /. P. Kelly. 1896. Benjamin, E. W. A study of selections for the size, shape, and color of hens' eggs. Cornell Univ. Agric. Exp. Sta. Mem. 31. 189-312, 1 pi., 37 fig. 1920.— This report covers the work of 8 years in which the author kept under minute observation and careful control large flocks of single-comb white Leghorn hens from the high-producing, trap-nested stock of the Cornell strain. Many correlation tables are presented.— The results show that a great deal of variation exists in the size, shape, and color of eggs from a single hen. This variation does not depend upon difference between the parents, but it is to some extent inherited. Color tends to be more irregular than the other characters. Size, shape, and color are inher- ited directly and equally from both parents. Small size and length of egg are dominant while no dominance occurs for color. A definite correlation exists between the characters of the egg set and those of the eggs of the hen it produces. This correlation, however, is not as great as the correlation between the means of the eggs produced by parents and offspring. No correlation was found between size, shape, and color, or any two of these characters. The size of eggs increases rapidly during the early part of the pullet year, while pigment con- tinues to become darker until the end of the 2nd laying year. The offspring from pullets' eggs are not more variable than those from hens' eggs.— A positive correlation was found between the size of the egg and the weight and vigor of the bird produced. Size, shape, and color have no effect on the ability of the egg to hatch. — H. G. May. 1897. Blaringhem, L. Anomalies fiorales observees sur la descendence de I'hybride Linaria vulgaris X L. striata. [Floral anomalies observed in the descendants of the hybrid Linaria vulgaris X L. striata.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 1103-1105. 1919.— The Fi of the cross of Linaria vulgaris X L. striata was found to be partially sterile, and only I7F2 plants were obtained. There was some sterility in the F2 and several cases of abnormal floral development were observed. — Karl Sax. 1898. Bridges, Calvin B. The mutant crossveinless in Drosophila melanogaster. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. 6: 660-663. 1920.— Author describes "crossveinless," a sex-linked mutant character in Drosophila melanogaster, and points out its usefulness in genetical experiments and its apparent homology with "crossveinless" in D. virilis.— C. W. Metz. 268 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, 1899. Bryan, W. E., and C. O. Bond. Plant breeding. Arizona Agric. Exp. Sta. Rept. 29: 314-321. 1918. — Breeding results obtained in an effort to produce wheat of high yield with high gluten content of superior quality. For irrigated valleys of Arizona earliness is of prime importance in establishing such a wheat. Where late spring irrigation is necessary for late varieties quantity and quality of gluten are reduced. — Brief reports of investigations with beans, alfalfas, and sorghums are also made. — /. P. Shelton. 1900. Burgess, C. H. Breeding for egg production. Michigan Agric. Exp. Sta. Quart. Bull. 2 : 190-192. 1 fig. 1920. — Data are presented which indicate "that higher egg-producing power" may be introduced into a flock of barred Plymouth Rocks or single-comb white Leg- horns through males from high-producing dams.— William A. Lippincott. 1901. Bush-Brown, H. K. Heredity in horses. Jour. Heredity 11: 215-227. Fig. 16-27. 1920. — Distinction is made between skeleton of the Arab horse, which has 5 lumbar vertebrae, and all other horses, which have six. This difference is given as one of the out- standing causes of the greater endurance of the former. The limited data available indicate the short back to be recessive to the long back. A jenney bred to a stallion produced a hinney which inherited the 5 lumbar vertebrae of the dam. Likewise, a short-back mare bred to a stallion with 24 vertebrae produced a short-back offspring. The 3 instances of this combina- tion led the author to suggest the dominance of the dam over the anatomy of the foal. The strength of the Arab horse as a weight-carrier is attributed to the shorter distance between the supports. In the army tests of 1920 the endurance of the Arab horses and their derivatives was superior to that of others. — M. J. Dorsey. 1902. Cherry, T. The evolution of man and his mind. Sci. Prog. [London] 15: 74-100. 1920. — A speculation in regard to the origin of man. "The recent advances in knowledge have introduced new difficulties both on the side of structure and of function, and have made untenable the current theory of the comparatively recent separation of the human and the ape stocks." These difficulties are discussed under 2 examples of structure — (a) the premax- illa, present in the apes and absent in man, and (b) the foot; and 2 examples of function — (a) instinct, practically lacking in man, and (b) the growth and metabolism of the body, based on Rubner's work. Other difficulties are mentioned and the importance of Dollo's law of the "irreversibility of the course of evolution" is emphasized. — The writer then undertakes to reconstruct a theory of human phylogeny. He starts with "a generalized primate of the Anaptomorphus type .... about as large as a rat," inhabiting trees of the Lower Eocene and feeding on birds chiefly by night. Probably during the Eocene "the lemurs, New World monkeys, and Old World monkeys separated from one another" and in the Upper Eocene "the branch of the Old World monkeys which gave rise to the apes and man came to the ground." The common ancestor acquired a fair approximation to a bipedal gait and the diet consisted largely of lizards, grubs, and scorpions as evidenced by the digestive organs. The changes that now take place leading toward man require 2 conditions of environment, namely, abundance of easily obtained nitrogenous food, and safety. These conditions are most fully met on the seashore. "It is therefore in no way improbable that one family of the Late Eocene primates may have chanced on some part of the beach where shellfish are plentiful and there begun a course of evolution different from all their former associates in the trees." Ancestors of the apes from time to time, but at a very early period, left the seaside and returned to the trees; first, the early gibbons, next the orang, and finally the common ancestor of the gorilla and chimpanzee, leaving the human stock to work out its evolution under sea- side conditions. The writer then develops his theory of the evolution of man in adaptation to a seashore environment, including small teeth, slow movements, lack of organs for attack or defence, naked skin, monthly cycle in woman, free shoulder-joint, and development of the brain. — Howard J. Banker. 1903. Collins, G. N. Dominance and the vigor of first generation hybrids. Amer. Nat. 55 : 116-133. 1 fig- Mar.-Apr., 1921. — Author believes that the explanation of heterosis should place emphasis on suppression of deleterious recessive characters rather than on accumulation of No. 3, July, 1921] GENETICS 269 dominant growth factors. Evolutionary progress depends on advantageous variations, but these are rare and their effect negligible in explaining heterosis. Practically all known maize variations are detrimental, and the vast majority of them recessive. (Deleterious dominant mutations are quickly eliminated.) Furthermore, present knowledge indicates that the role of linkage must be of minor importance in maize; and the question is raised whether the assumption of linkage is necessary to explain heterosis.— Difficulty of securing uniform strains with the vigor of Fi has been assumed rather than demonstrated, since selection following hybridization has never been continued long enough to approximate such homozygosity. Author considers certain data of Emerson and East (1913) together with some of his own on height. "In every case where a progeny was grown from a plant near the upper limit of the range of the F2 its mean exceeded that of the Fi." Some of the data on length and diameter of ear and length of internode also suggest isolation of strains with vigor of Fi. Tables are presented showing extreme practical difficulty (due to large numbers which must be grown) of obtaining homozygous Fo individuals with vigor of Fi (even without assuming linkage). To obtain 1 individual 70 per cent homozygous, assuming 15 effective character pairs, would require growing GOOO F2 individuals. On question of skew distribution of F2 vigor due to dominance (without linkage), author presents significant table with accompanying graph. With 20 character pairs involved, populations of 500 individuals would conform with normal frequency curve; skewness would be detectable only in enormous F2 populations. Assump- tion that relative effect of a given growth factor depends on size of organism also assists in veiling skewness. Author concludes that heterosis is due to suppression of deleterious recessive characters, and can be explained without assuming linkage.— MerZe C. Coulter. 1904. Cutler, D. Ward. The cytological problems arising from the study of artificial parthenogenesis. Sci. Prog. [London] 15: 435-444. 1 fig. 1921.— Review of some of the evidence for (1) individuality of chromosomes, and (2) relation of chromosomes to sex, preparatory to discussion of artificial parthenogenesis in later article.— .4. Franklin Shull. 1905. Detjen, L. R. Peloria in Viola primulaefolia Linn. Torreya 20: 107-116. 10 fig. 1920.— A strain of violets bearing peloric and partially peloric flowers was propagated from a single plant found in nature. The completely peloric flowers are symmetrical, having 4 sepals, 4 petals, 4 stamens, and a pistil of 4 carpels. — E. G. Anderson. 1906. Detlefsen, J. A., and W. J. Carmichael. Inheritance of syndactylism, black, and dilution in swine. Jour. Agric. Res. 20: 595-604. 1 pi. 1921.— A registered mule-foot boar (syndactyl, black) crossed with registered Duroc-Jersey sows (cloven-foot, red) produced only black, mule-foot pigs. The results of a back-cross with a Duroc-Jersey boar indicated independent segregation of a unit factor for mule-foot dominant over cloven-foot and a unit factor for black dominant over red. The red cloven-foot segregates bred true in F3 and F4. The "red" segregates varied between intense red and cream. The so-called creams were absolutely white at birth, merely developing traces of yellow medullary pigment later. The data were insufficient to determine the mode of inheritance of the grades of intensity but con- firmed earlier work indicating that white in swine often represents extreme dilution of red due to factors which dilute red but which do not dilute black to a perceptible extent.— Sewall Wright. 1907. Detlefsen, J. A., and E. Roberts. Studies on crossing over. I. The effect of selection on cross-over values. Jour. Exp. Zool. 32: 333-354. 2 fig. Feb. 20, 1921.— The authors selected for high and low crossover values in Drosophila melanogaster . They used the characters white and miniature, the genes of which lie in the X chromosome. In order to save work and time single pair matings were made only in alternate generations. The other generations were mass cultures. In the A series the first 5 generations of selection made no change. There was considerable fluctuation. After the 5th generation progress was rapid. The normal percentage of crossing over between white and miniature is 33. In F9 the authors had reduced it to 16.49, From Fio to F,3 the percentage was reduced to less than 1. The last generations were bred under abnormal conditions and the numbers were few. Series Ai 270 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, was started from the 7th generation of series A and continued to Fu. The average percent- age for these generations was 0.64. Here again the numbers were not large. Series B was also selected for low crossover values. For the first few generations there was no effect. In F? a pair gave 14.34 per cent. From Fs to Fu the percentage fluctuated between 10 and 23. From Fi6 to F23 it varied around 10 and from F23 to F^g around 6. After F23 the line bred true for low crossover values in mass cultures for 23 generations. — Series C was selected for high crossover values. It was carried for 8 generations only and no progress was made. In F7 9 pairs gave low crossover values, less than 6 per cent. The authors interpret this to mean that double crossing over had been induced, resulting in a decreased percentage. After mak- ing several suggestions the authors concluded that "crossing over in the various regions of the sex chromosome is probably controlled by multiple incompletely dominant factors." — F. Payne. 1908. East, E. M., and D. F. Jones. Genetic studies on the protein content in maize. Genetics 5: 543-610. 8 fig. Nov., 1920. — Following a discussion of breeding plants for altered chemical composition, the work of the Illinois Agricultural Experiment Station on high and low protein content in maize is reviewed in detail. The conclusion is reached that the individual seed rather than the entire ear should be used as the basis of selection. In a com- parison between guarded self-pollinated ears and open or wind-pollinated ears, it was found in the majority of cases that the seeds of the self-pollinated ear had the highest percentage of protein. Pursuing the problem from this point, a test was made to determine the immediate effect of pollination on the composition of the seed. It was found that in each of 32 compari- sons the crossed seeds weighed more than the selfed seeds, supporting previous results. With respect to the protein content the effect of cross-pollination is slight, 7 of the 32 cases showing an increased percentage of protein but on the average a slight decrease. This decrease is not accounted for entirely by the increase in weight of seed since the total amount of protein also is increased. — When a mixture of pollen from high- and low-protein plants was applied to plants of a high-protein strain a significantly higher percentage of protein was found where both parents were high in protein. The protein content of different self-pollinated ears borne on the same plant was tested and little difference found. — In a chemical analysis of 2nd generation seeds borne on 1st generation plants it was found that while the percentage of protein was reduced the total amount per acre was increased due to the increase in yield. — In conclusion the authors state that the protein content of the seeds is determined largely by heredity although variations as high as 40 per cent may be caused by environmental fluctuations. The number of differentiating hereditary factors involved cannot be determined nor their method of inheritance described, but they are believed to be in excess of 5 or 6 with the possibility of a smaller number of main factors and nimierous subsidiary ones. — Twenty per cent of the protein of the seed is in the embryo and 80 per cent in the endosperm. The notable variations appear in the endosperm. Heterosis increases the size of the seeds with a consequent reduction in the per cent of protein. This is especially noticeable in seeds borne by hybrid plants. Fi seeds when corrected for the influence of heterosis have a protein con- tent intermediate between those of the parents, with perhaps a tendency to be closer to that of the high-protein parent. — The factors borne by the male gamete are practically without immediate influence on the protein content leading to the belief that the constitution of the mother plant is the major determining factor. — If a high-protein strain is found to be desira- ble it can be obtained more rapidly by the isolation and recombination of homozygous high- protein strains than by the method of mass selection followed in the classical experiment at Illinois. — /. H. Kempton. 1909. FiRBAS, Heinrich. tjber die Erzeugung von Weizen-Roggenbastardierungen. [The production of wheat-rye hybrids.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenzucht. 7: 249-282. Nov.,,1920. — Author studied conditions affecting set of seed when wheat was crossed with rye. Flowers were pollinated just after blooming and also at later dates, better results being obtained with the earlier applications. Pollinations were made in heated and unheated rooms, under dry and moist conditions, and at different times of the day; it is concluded that such external condi- No. 3, July, 1921] GENETICS 271 tions had little or no influence on the setting of seed. Old pollen gave apparently as good results as fresh, other conditions being equal.— Whether glass tubes or paper were used in covering the flowers did not affect the results. The factor that played the greatest part in securing a good set of seed was the difference between wheat races and between individuals within these races. The influence of the individuals in obtaining many seeds is not the same for all races. With some races the individuality is of greatest importance. The influence of the individual is greater with wild races than with cultivated ones. Individuality in the case of the male plants is not marked. — Reciprocal crosses using rye as the female parent have not yet been obtained. — Certain wheat races, such as Bokara, give more seed when pollinated with rye. — H. H. Love. 1910. FiTZPATRiCK, Percy. Citrus growing in California. S2 p. National Bank of South Africa, Pretoria, [1920.] — A popular discussion is included of "bud variation" in citrus fruits, with especial consideration of Shamel's work and of the resulting practice of propagat- ing from "performance-record" trees. Webber's study of variation in seedling stocks is also discussed. — Howard B. Frost. 1911. France, L. V. The problem of controlled fertilization of queen bees. Jour. Econ. Entomol. 14: 105-110. Feb., 1921. — Author emphasizes the importance to commercial beekeepers of controlled matings and cites a number of experiments recorded in the beekeep- ing literature to this end. No new trials are recorded. — E. F. Phillips. 1912. Galant, S. tJber die Entstehung von Variationen bei Anemone hepatica. [On the origin of variations in Anemone hepatica.] Biol. Centralbl. 39: 529-535. 1919. — Obser- vations were made on 1729 flowers of A. hepiica [Hepatica triloba] gathered on the Belpberg. Modal number for colored perianth leaves (referred to as petals) was 6 and was shown in 1180 of the 1729 flowers; range was from 7 to 11, inclusive. Mode for sepal-like leaves was 3 exhibited by 1665 flowers, and range was from 2 to 5, inclusive. No calculated constants are given. Author dissents from Bohn's hypothesis that variations in general indicate disease and suggests that increase in number of petals is due to metamorphosis of stamens or sepals. He comments also on color variation, noting especially that 2 white flowers occurred in a total of 1729, and quotes Chodat to the effect that whiteness maintains itself in cultures.^ James P. Kelly. 1913. Gillies, C. D. Variation of sepals of Bruguiera Rheedii Blume. Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland 30: 95-96. 1918.^The calyx of the mangrove is a conspicuous red structure commonly found in the tidal debris along the ocean shores at certain points. In 118 calyces collected the number of sepals varied from 9 to 13, the frequencies being as follows : No. of sepals 9 10 11 12 13 Frequency 13 47 38 17 3 From these data the following constants were calculated: Mean, 10.57± .002; mode, 10.471; standard deviation 3=^.001; coefficient of variability, 2.S4±.001. The frequency polygon is unimodal; the theoretical mode is 10.471; actual mode, 10. Coefficient of variability, 2.84, is a low value. — E. B. Babcock. 1914. Goodale, H. D., Ruby Sanbron, and Donald White. Broodiness in domestic fowl. Data concerning its inheritance in the Rhode Island Red breed. Massachusetts Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 199. 93-116, 4 fig. 1920.— A broody bird in the Rhode Island Red breed is recognized by its tendency to remain on nest when not laying, the ruffling of feathers and cluck- ing. Confinement for 3-6 days with food breaks up broodiness. Hens are grouped as broody and non-broody. Broody hens may have a broody period early in 1st laying year or later. Broody periods usually recur at short intervals after the 1st period. Non-broody hens some- times show broodiness in succeeding years. — The data confirm the theory that broodiness is due to 2 dominants; but some evidence also exists that a dominant for non-broodiness is present in some cases. Selection quickly changed a very broody flock to one with few broody hens. Matings between non-broody stock sometimes give broody offspring. — //. G. May. 272 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol, VIII, 1915. GuiLLEMiNOT, H. Le deuxieme postulat du calcul des probabilites et la loi d'option dans revolution de la matiere vivante. [The second postulate of the calculus of probabilities and the law of option in the evolution of living matter.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 993-995. 1919. — Organic phenomena differ from inorganic in that the probability of a given reaction of an organism is affected by its prior reactions. — John Rice Miner. 1916. Haecker, V. Uber weitere Zusammenhange auf dem Gebiete der Mendelfor- schung. [On further correlations in the field of Mendelian investigation.] Pfliigers Arch. Ges. Physiol. 181: 149-169. 1920. — A theoretical discussion of relations between mode of development of characters and mode of inheritance. Author holds that characters which are caused in a simple way and undergo autonomic development from the first appearance of the "anlage" are apt to show clear-cut segregation, while characters which are caused by a com- plex of causes and with correlative development tend to show more or less departure from the Mendelian scheme, as irregular dominance, unusual ratios caused by impure segregation, modifiability by selection, and, if pathological, correlation or alternation with other anoma- lies. A given character of the 1st class is likely to appear in many more or less closely related species, while characters of the 2nd class tend to be limited to one species. Those of the 1st class arise by mutation, those of the 2nd by gradual change ; those of the 1st class are degenera- tive or of no biologic significance, while the 2nd class includes the adaptive and other species- forming changes. — Setvall Wright. 1917. Harland, S. C. Inheritance of certain characters in the cowpea (Vigna sinensis). II. Jour. Genetics 10: 193-205. 1920. — Experimental genetic data on 4 series of characters in cowpea — anthocyanin in stem and leaf stalk, seed-coat pattern color, pod color, and flower color. Results on Fi, F2, and F3 generations are given. Anthocyanin coloration in stem and leaf stalk is due to factor A', dominant to its absence. Seed-coat pattern colors — black, brown, buff, maroon, red, and white— result from various combinations of 4 factors, B (black), N (buff), M (maroon), and R (red), and their absences. New-Era pattern of seed coat is due to factor E, which expresses itself only in the presence of R. The albino type, Para, car- ries 2 seed-coat pattern factors, D and H (either Hi or H2), which produce no visible expres- sion except in the presence of R. Purple-pod types differ from green-pod types by 1 main factor, P, although F2 ratio suggests that more than 1 pair of factors may be involved. Purple pod is partially dominant in Fi. Pigment factors B (black) and E (New Era) show repulsion on a basis probably higher than 1 :15. Factor B also shows repulsion with factor P (purple pod), probably on a basis higher than 1 :7. Tinged flower color is due to factor G, dominant to its absence but recessive to D, the factor for dark flower color. — Orland E. White. 1918. Harland, S. C. Inheritance in Ricinus communis L. Part 1. Jour. Genetics 10: 207-218. 1920. — Experimental results involved data on 3 sets of characters, as follows: Presence and absence of a waxy bloom on stems, petioles and capsules; presence and absence of spines on capsules; and stem colors of 4 kinds. Previous investigations are reviewed. Fi, F2, and F3 results are tabulated. Presence of bloom (B) is partially dominant to its absence (6). Spiny capsule (S) is partially dominant to its absence, smooth capsule (s). Two pairs of factors are concerned in crosses involving stem color, as green X mahogany gave in Fi, rose, which in F2 gave approximately 9 rose: 3 mahogany: 3 green: 1 tinged. The results are interpreted as due to combinations of 2 pairs of factors — the presence and absence of M (mahogany) and the presence and absence of G (green). The F2 ratio would be 9 MG: Z Mg : S niG : \mg. Experiments so far show that S and M, S and B, M and G, and perhaps G and B are not linked. Factors M and B show repulsion in cross Mb X mB. — Orland E. White. 1919. Hartley, C. P., and H. S. Garrison. Reproducing power of well-filled vs. poorly filled ears of maize. Amer. Nat. 55 : 184-187. 1 fig. 1921 .—Occasionally poorly fertilized ears of maize are found in which the failure to develop seed normally is due to accidental causes. An effort was made to determine whether the yielding power of such ears was as great as that of ears normally fertilized. Poorly fertilized ears were produced artificially by 2 methods, No. 3, July, 1921] GENETICS 273 (1) bagging silks an inch long after they had been exposed to pollen, and (2) exposing previ- ously bagged silks for about half an hour and then rebagging. In neither case was the source of the pollen controlled. The ears of the 1st lot had seeds arranged compactly but confined to the butts, while those of the 2nd lot had seeds scattered throughout. Both lots were compared with normally fertilized ears of the same strains but no significant differences in yield were obtained. — J. H. Kempton. 1920. Honing, J. A. Selectie-Proeven met Deli-Tabak IV. [Selection experiments with Deli tobacco IV.] Mededeel. Deli-Proefsta. Aledan [Sumatra] II. 10: 43-59. 1920.— In the 1918 ilarge-scale tests, light (colored) line No. 1 produced longer, broader leaves lighter in color, with less of the fallow-colored and checkered or dapple grades, as compared with the control tobacco, the results thus agreeing with those obtained in 1917 and 1918. This line is especially valuable on the higher-lying estates which tend to produce relatively dark tobacco. Fallow-colored line 3 yielded a distinct fallow shade, running through all the color grades. The percentage of checkered leaf was smaller than in the control but the leaf was somewhat shorter and a little dryer in character. Two additional lines gave good results while another was not a success. A new selection -grown on 16 estates did not equal some of the older strains. — W. W. Garner. 1921. Humphrey, S. H. The menace of the half-man. Jour. Heredity 11: 228-232. 1920. — A general discussion of the rate of reproduction in the "morons" or "borderliners," so-called poorer stocks, and best stock, in its bearing upon the national life and society. The influence of the reproduction rate of the poorer stocks is traced in the school, in charity, and in industry. Emphasis is placed upon the futility of attacking the problem through an improved environment when heredity is at its base. — M. J. Dorsey. 1922. Johnson, E. C. Twenty-ninth annual report. Washington [State] Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 155. 57 p. 1920. — Brief summary is made of inheritance, in wheat crosses, of resist- ance to smut. In crosses between winter and spring wheats the Fi ripened late. In F2, spring, Fi, and winter type appeared in a 1 : 2 : 1 ratio. Minor factors were also involved. — Early dropping of apple fruit was found to be correlated with failure to set sufficient seeds per fruit. As much as 68 per cent of dropped fruit contained no normal seed. — Plans for Men- delian studies with blackberry and raspberry hybrids are outlined. [See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1554.].— i/. A'. Hayes. 1923. Kempton, J. H. A brachytic variation in maize. U. S. Dept. Agric. Bull. 925. 28 p., 19 pi., 8 fig. 1921. — A new dwarf type of maize, "brachytic," is described and its in- heritance discussed. This type is the result of a shortening of the internodes without corre- sponding reduction in their number or in the number and size of other organs. It was discovered in a 2nd hybrid generation of a cross between Algerian pop-corn and Chinese waxy-endosperm corn, the inference being that it had been carried by the Chinese parent as a recessive, heritable character. — When self-pollinated, the brachytic type produced nothing but brachytic plants. When crossed with normal-type plants, the Fi proved to be tall and in F2 the brachytic character segregated in the simple monohybrid fashion. The F2 brachytic segregates, from a Boone County White-brachytic cross, showed no increase in variability as regards height of plants compared with ordinary brachytic plants. The length of ear, however, of some of these dwarf segregates appeared to be increased, showing that the dwarf type can be maintained and the yield increased somewhat by such crossing. This is an important consideration if the brachytic type is ever to be used commercially (a possibility that the author suggests) since its present yield is relatively low. For dry land and irrigated regions, the brachytic type of structure might prove to be well adapted. — Two teratological forms of maize are also described and a preliminary note concerning their heritability is given. In one of these, designated "adherent," the leaves of the seedling, or even of mature plant, do not unroll normally. The growing culm is unable to break through these leaves and is forced into many contortions in attempting to elongate. This form appears to be recessive in inheritance. — Another abnormality described is one in which the ears end in staminate 274 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, spikes. The inheritance of this type is not completely solved as yet. From the appearance and development of ears ending in staminate spikes and of ears borne as basal branches of the terminal inflorescence (noted in a Hopi-brachytic cross), the author suggests "that the ear of maize may have developed from the basal branches of the terminal panicle rather than from the central spike of the terminal inflorescence of a lateral branch of the main culm." — Many good illustrations are given of the types of maize under discussion. — E. W. Lindstrom. 1924. Kempton, J. H. Linkage between brachytic culms and pericarp and cob color in maize. Jour. Washington [D.C.] Acad. Sci. 11: 13-20. 1920. — Author summarizes genetic linkages that have been reported for maize and describes a new case of linkage. Brachytic {hr) maize, which is a dwarf type recessive to normal stature, is found to be linked with peri- carp and cob color. Three crosses involving the normal-brachytic and colored-colorless pericarp and cob factors give fairly large F2 distributions showing linkage relations that varied from 35 to 38 per cent crossing over. — Data are presented from these F2 families that indicate independent inheritance between brachytic culm and liguleless leaf as well as between cob color and liguleless leaf. — E. W . Lindstrom. 1925. KoTTUR, G. L. "Kumpta" cotton and its improvement. Mem. Dept. Agric. India Bot. Ser. 10: 221-272. PL 1-7. 1920.— "Kumpta" is the trade name of a type of Gossypium herbaceum extensively grown in India. Author demonstrated that the type comprises several strains differing in number of vegetative branches, size and shape of leaves, length of bracts and petals, size and shape of bolls, weight of seed, and length of fiber. A strain developed by selection and decidedly superior to the average of the type in habit of growth, earliness, productivity, and abundance and length of fiber is described. — T. H . Kearney. 192G. Laughlin, Harry H. Calculating ancestral influence in man; a mathematical measure of the facts of bisexual heredity. Genetics 5: 435-458. 2 pi., 1 fig. Sept., 1920. — Twenty-five formulae governing ancestral inheritance in general are presented, based on: (1) Bisexual reproduction; (2) heterozygosis for sex factor in one sex; and (3) the number of pairs of chromosomes. Cognizance is taken of the necessity for increased accuracy by means of future inclusion of provisions for sex-linked traits, relative weighting of chromosome groups, maternal or paternal source of chromosome, dominance or recessiveness of gene, and relative frequency of mutation, crossing-over, non-disjunction, and otherspecialchromosomephenom- ena; but these are not considered in the formulae developed, since they would operate only as special modifications of the general case. Figure 1 presents a clever mechanism for demon- strating the segregation and recombination of chromosomes from ancestors to descendants, "with specifications for its construction. Plate 1 diagrams ancestral inheritance in the human . Thomas, H. E. The relation of the host and other factors to infection of Apium graveolens by Septoria apii. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 48: 1-29. 1921.— The idea of specificity in the relation of plant parasites to their hosts is coming to be one that must be reckoned with ; the obligate parasite is restricted in its host range and a slight change in either host or fungus may completely change the virulence of the parasite or its effect on the host. Data are pre- sented in this paper to show that the infection of Apium graveolens by Septoria apii is favored by conditions which accelerate the growth of the host. Work with many hosts showed a high degree of specialization on the part of the parasite in its inability to cause infection. Experi- ments were conducted on host plants treated with various solutions to produce different degrees of health and vigor. Plants suffering from nematodes, and etiolated plants, were also used. The parasite's development was favored by increased growth in the host and showed a high degree of specialization. This specialization suggests promise for experiments in breeding for resistance. — P. A. Munz. THE HOST (RESISTANCE; SUSCEPTIBILITY; MORBID ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY) 2104. ScHLUMBERGER, O. Pflanzenschutz und Sortenfrage im Kartoffelbau. [The ques- tion of varieties and disease resistance in potato culture.] Ftihling's Landw. Zeitg. 69 : 144-149. 1920. — A general discussion of the problem of obtaining disease-resistant varieties of potatoes is presented. Pathological investigations of potato diseases and physiological studies of diseased and disease-resistant varieties or individual plants to determine the underlying causes of resistance or susceptibility to disease should be carried on in a systematic way to No. 3, July, 1921] PATHOLOGY 307 arrive at fundamental principles upon which selection of disease-resistant sorts maybe based. All new introductions should be tested in localities where particular diseases are prevalent. — A. 7\ Wiancko. DESCRIPTIVE PLANT PATHOLOGY 2105. Anonymous. The menace of the white pine blister rust. Amer. Forestry 27: 6. 1921. 2106. BiJL, P. A. VAN DER. Notes on some sugar cane matters. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 2:122-128. Fig. 1-5. 1921. — Notes are given on the root disease caused by //i- nianiia stellif era, leaf diseases (due to Leptosphaeria sacchari and Helminthosporiumsacchari), and the stalk diseases caused by Melanconium sacchari and Cephalosporium sacchari. Refer- ence is also made to the non-setting of seed in Uba and other cane varieties in South Africa. — E. M. Doidge. 2107. BoTTOMLEY, A. M., AND K. A. Carlson. Parasitic attack on Eucalyptus globulus. A note on Stereum hirsutum in plantations in the Transvaal. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1 : 852-858. PI. 1-2. 1920. — A parasitic attack of Stereum hirsutum on Eucalyp- tus globulus in gum plantations on the farm Cliffendale near Roodepoort is described. The disease is confined to stem tissues where it produces a characteristic soft dry rot which renders the timber useless for industrial purposes. An examination of the above and other plantations showed that the fungus was common as a saprophyte on old stumps and that Cliffendale was the only locality where it had become parasitic; and further that E. globulus was the only species of gum susceptible to the disease. The attack in this case was thought to be due prob- ably to lack of vigor in the trees occasioned by unsuitable local conditions of soil or climate or both. Control measures advocated consist in growing only those species found to be most suitable to the area in question and in the destruction of all infected stumps by means of the saltpeter and kerosene oil method. — A. M. Bottomley. 2108. Brooks, F. T., and M. A. Bailey. Silver leaf disease (including observations upon the injection of trees with antiseptics). Jour. Pomology 1: 81-103. 1920. — Reprinted with abridgments from Jour. Agric. Sci. 9: 1S9-215. 1919. — L. H. MacDaniels. 2109. Cheel, Edwin, and J. B. Cleland. Disease in forest trees caused by the larger fungi. Forest. Commission New South Wales Bull. 12. 12 p., pi. 1-20. 1918.— The author emphasizes the importance of the study of fungi causing decay of living trees, stored lumber, and building timbers, giving non-technical descriptions of various members of the genera Armillaria, Pholiota, Polyporus, Polystictus, Fomes, Hexagona, and Trameies which have been found or may be found causing decay of important woods. The plates illustrate the rots produced by, or the sporophores of, the following forms: Armillaria mellea, Pholiota adiposa, Polyporus eucalyptorum, P. ochroleucus, P. gilvus, P. dryadeus, P. salignus, Polystictus versicolor, Fames robustus, F. applanatus var. australis, and Trametes lactinea. — Reginald H. Colley. 2110. Doidge, E. M. A tomato canker. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1: 718-721. 1 fig. 1920. — A popular account of a bacterial disease of tomatoes caused by Bac- terium vesicatorium. — E, M. Doidge. 2111. Dufrenoy, Jean. Witches'-brooms of Pinus maritima. Phytopathology 11: 27. 1921. — Examination of hypertrophied tissues from witches'-brooms occurring on Pinus maritima in southwestern France showed the cambial cells generally infested by bacteria, which, when inoculated into young buds of P. maritima, killed the buds but failed to produce witches'-brooms. — B. B. Higgins. 2112. Fryer, P. J. Insect pest and fungus diseases of fruit and hops, xv -f- 728 p., 24 colored pi., 305 fig. Cambridge University Press: London, 1920. — The author has prepared 308 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, a "complete manual for growers," with the following plan of presentation. The book is divided into 11 "sections," distributed in 3 "parts": — Sect. 1, Introduction; Sect. II, How fruit trees live. Part i, Insect pests and their control: Sect. Ill, About insects; Sect. IV, Insect pests; Sect. V, Insecticides; Sect. VI, Beneficial insects. Part ii. Fungus diseases of fruit and their control: Sect. VII, Fungus diseases; Sect. VIII, Fungicides. Part iii, Spraying in theory and practice: Sect. IX, Spraying appliances and methods; Sect. X, Spraying calendar; Sect. XI, Tables and appendices. Pests are considered by groups, and for each pest the data are presented in simple language in accordance with a standard outline. The first 476 pages of the book are used in the discussion of insect pests and their control. Fungus diseases of the apple, cherry, currant, gooseberrj/, hop, peach, pear, plum, raspberry, strawberry, and grape are considered in the following 151 pages. In the case of each fungus disease the data are presented wherever possible in a standard manner similar in plan to the scheme used in the section on insect pests. The description of spraying methods and outfits is comprehensive. The last 2 sections in the book are arranged so that the grower may easily find information on the spraying calendar or the tables of equivalents. — Reginald H. Colley. 2113. Griesbeck, a. Die Erreger der Schwartxbeinigkeit bei Kartoffeln. [The causes of blackleg in potatoes.] Flihling's Landw. Zeitg. 69: 37-38. 1920. — While Appel found Bacillus phytophthorus to be a cause of blackleg in potatoes he indicated that other organisms might contribute to the disease. The present author found that hollow places in the earth beside the potato stems caused by burrowing animals such as mice and moles were associated with the appearance of the disease. It is supposed that injury to the stem or merely the exis- tence of the hollow space beside the stem causes dying of the tissues and gives access to moulds and rotting bacteria. It is suggested that hoeing to break up the animal burrows would cause partially affected stems to recover and that ridding the land of these burrowing animals would effectively control the disease. — A. T. Wiancko. 2114. Mabee, W. B., and R. A. Jehle. Insect pests and diseases of apples in North Carolina and their control. Bull. North Carolina Dept. Agric. 192P:l-24. 1921. — A popular illustrated account of apple scab, blotch, blackrot, bitter rot, sooty blotch, rust, stippen, and fire blight of apples, with remedial and control measures. — F. A. Wolf. 2115. Norton, J. B. S., and C. C. Chen. Another corn seed parasite. Science 52: 250. 1920. — A fungus which seems to have been given little consideration as a parasite has recently been isolated by the authors from sweet corn seed. The fungus was frequently found in corn from a field that had manj'' dwarf, distorted, and barren stalks, and some root rot. The fungus has been isolated and its pathogenicity tested. The tests show the same effects as in the field. The fungus corresponds very well with descriptions and figures of Oospora verticilloides. It is probable that the fungus has been recorded under other names. — A, H. Chivers. 2116. NowELL, W., and C. B. Williams. Sugar cane blight in Trinidad. [Reprint of Bull. Dept. Agric. Trinidad and Tobago 19, part 1. 1920.] Internat. Sugar Jour. 23: 154-155. 1921. — The fungi causing root disease of sugar cane, at present known in Trinidad, belong to the genera Marasmius and Odontia. They occur to some extent in all cane fields and become serious when the vigor of the cane is decreased by adverse factors. The preva- lence of root disease over wide areas in Trinidad, reported last year, is due to the weakening of the cane by attacks of froghopper. The effect of root disease with or following froghopper injury prevents recovery of the cane. Control measures suggested are the reduction of the ratooning period, improved cultivation, manuring, and rotation of crops. — C. Rumbold. 2117. Poeteren, N. van. De Aardappelwratziekte. [Potato wart.] Tijdschr. Plantenz. 27: 1-13. Fig. 1-7. 1921. — A general discussion of potato wart (Chrysophlyctis endobioiica) , including symptoms, cause, mode of dissemination, importance, distribution in general and in Holland, eradication, and legislative measures in Holland for the eradication of the disease. Distribution of this disease in Holland is limited to 5 townships which are located on the Ger- No. 3, July, 1921] PATHOLOGY 309 man border. Experiments with resistant varieties are under waj'; so far, only the variety Ceres has proved resistant. The legislative measures are strict and far reaching, and complete eradication of the disease in Holland is being attempted. — D. Atanasoff. 2118. QU.A.NJER, H. M. Considerations nouvelles sur les maladies de la pomme de terra. [Recent work on the diseases of potato.] Bull. Soc. Path. \eg. France 7: 102-118. K-20. — An address given under the auspices of the Phytopathological Society of France in Paris. A resume of the recent work on the principal diseases of the potato is given with special atten- tion to the mosaic disease and the results of the author's investigations which have already been published elsewhere. — C. L. Shear. 2119. Salisbury, E. J. [Rev. of: Butler, E. J. Fungi and disease in plants, vi + S47 p., 5 pL, 205 fig. Thacker, Spink & Co.: Calcutta and Simla, 191S.] Sci. Prog. [London] 13: 677-678. 1919. ERADICATION AND CONTROL 2120. Anonymous. Broeiproeven van tegen aaltjesziek behandelde Narcissenbollen. [Heating experiments with nematodes in narcissus bulbs.] Weekbl. Bloembollencult. 30: 303, 312. 1920. — A number of narcissus bulbs were kept for 1, 2, and 3 hours in water at 110-111°F. to destroy nematodes. Treatment for 1 or 2 hours gave best results. Experiments were carried on with the following varieties: King Alfred, Emperor, Golden Spur, and N. Leedsi Lucifer. — J . C. Th. Uphof. 2121. Anonymous. Control of the white pine blister rust. Bien. Rept. New Hampshire State Forest. Commission 1919-1920: .39-52. 1920.— A systematic survey, begun with the discovery of the disease in 1916 and continued through 1920, has proved that the white pine blister rust is generally distributed in the pine regions of the state. As examples of the degree of infection the following cases may be cited: On a narrow strip 70 miles long in the Ammo- noosuc Valley, 24 per cent of the pines were diseased; in the same region, on a plot of 43 acres, 55 per cent of the pines were diseased; both cultivated and wild Ribes were found to be generally infected in all areas scouted. There is only one known and proved method of check- ing the rust, and that is the removal of all Ribes. The amount of eradication work and the cost for 1917 compared with that of 1920, and the total work done, are shown in the table. YEAR TOWNS WORKED ACRES COVERED AVERAGE COST PER ACRE WILD BUSHES DESTROYED CULTIVATED BUSHES DESTROYED 1917 . 4 49 23,043 203,641 457,389 SO. 42 0.175 0.227 462,500 2,057,936 5,139,704 500 21,298 51,396 1920 1917 to 1920 total A table giving the 1919 and 1920 costs for the individual towns is appended. The actual cost to the state for eradication of approximately half a million acres was about S.05 per acre, the rest of the funds being furnished through cooperative agreement by the Federal govern- ment and the towns. Improved methods of advance surveys by men who mark areas requir- ing the attention of crews have reduced the cost and made possible the covering of a much larger acreage. The crews averaged better than 96 per cent eradicating efficiency. At the present rate 7 or 8 years more will be required to eradicate Ribes spp., from the whole state; and in view of the heavy potential loss to pine owners the work should be continued with all the funds which can be made available. — Reginald H. Coiley. 2122. Britton, W. E., and G. P. Clinton. Spray calendar. Connecticut [New Haven] Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 224. 67-110. 1921.— This is the 5th revision of the spray calendar issued by the station. It includes brief descriptions, with preventive measures, of insects and fungi attacking 98 species of plants growing in the state. Methods are given for the prep- 310 PATHOLOGY [Box. Absts., Vol. VIII, aration of 16 insecticides and fungicides, 7 commonlj- used fungicides, and 6 less commonly used ones. Lists of manufacturers and dealers in spray machines and spray materials are included. — Henry Dorsey. 2123. Cheyney, E. G. Preliminary investigation of Ribes as a controlling factor in the spread of white pine blister rust. Science 52 : 342-345. 1920. — The control of white pine blister rust, or rather the protection of white pme, depends on a definite knowledge of the habits of species of Ribes, especially of the wild plants. Projects were therefore planned to cover the following points: (1) To study the sprouting of different species of Ribes eradicated in different months and under different moisturfe conditions; (2) to study the cost and effective- ness of eradication in different months; (3) to determine the number of years eradication will have to be practiced; (4) to study the reproduction of different species of Ribes by seed and layering ; (5) to determine the effect of pruning and cutting off the roots at different depths and at different dates; (6) to determine growth habits of different species. From experi- ments on the areas selected, namely, the Rush Lake region, Minnesota, the following re- sults, though not conclusive, are significant: There was a higher percentage of sprouts from plants eradicated on the moist type of soil than on the dry or swamp types; a larger percent- age of sprouts from plants which were grabbed than from plants which were pulled; tendency to sprout from the root ends seemed muich stronger in plants pulled in May and June than late in summer; plants cut off above the crown almost invariably sprouted in all types and at all seasons, with the exception of the swamp species, R. triste. The number of large plants missed by eradication crews was very small (less than 5 per cent). The number of seedlings left was very much larger, but the leaf surface of these is very small. None of these seed- lings was found to be infected, and is it questionable whether they live over to the second season in large numbers. It has been the practice in the state to pull the plants whenever possible rather than to grub them. Evidence indicates that the reverse practice would be preferable since it seems to be a fact that practically all sprouts come from pieces of crowns and from root ends which are exposed to light. — A. H. Chivers. 2124. Detwiler, S. B. Safeguarding the white pine crop. Amer. Forestry 27: 7-11. 8 fig. 1921. — A resum6 of the conclusions reached by the Sixth Annual International Blister Rust Conference held in Boston, Massachusetts, under the auspices of the American Plant Pest Committee. It was the opinion of the conference that a zone 200-300 yards in width cleared of currant and gooseberry bushes, will insure the commercial growing of white pines under average conditions. In 1920 the cost of control in all states averaged 35 cents per acre as compared with 54 cents in 1919 and 66 cents in 1918. These figures include labor, supervi- sion, and transportation of field men. — Chas. H. Otis. 2125. Fields, W. S., and John A. Elliott. Making Bordeaux mixture, and some other spraying problems. Arkansas Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 172. J2 p., 1 pi. 1920. — The effect of different methods of mixing on the settling and deterioration of Bordeaux mixture is shown in tables and figures. Recommendation is made to dilute the CuS04 solution in the spray tank and to add the milk of lime while agitating the dilute copper solution. No appreciable differences in times of settling of lead arsenate in Bordeaux mixture and in lime-sulphur solution were found with waters of different degrees of hardness. — John A. Elliott. 2126. Melhus, I. E., and J. C. Oilman. Measuring certain variable factors in potato seed treatment experiments. Phytopath. 11 : 6-17. Fig. 1-5. 1921. — The 3 principal variable factors affecting the value of potato {Solanum tuberosum) seed treatment are: The presence of living pathogenes on the tubers after treatment; the continued antiseptic action of the solu- tion used in the treatment; and the percentage of infection resulting from pathogenes already in the soil. — To study the 1st of these variables, scabby tubers were treated with solutions of formaldehyde and of HgCl2, varying the temperature, the strength of the solution, and the time of exposure. Tissue from scab sori of the treated and the untreated tubers was then plated and the numbers of resulting colonies of the scab organism {Actinomyces scabies) compared. Tubers dipped for 2| minutes in formaldehyde solution 1-120 at a temperature No. 3, July, 1921] PHARMACOGNOSY 311 of 50°C., and covered for 1 hour, were the only ones completely sterilized. It was found, however, that enough HgCl2 solution remained on the surface of the tubers to exert a decided antiseptic action. — Similar tests were also made with both Rhizoctonia solani and Spondylo- cladium airovirens. — By running a large number of checks with treated and untreated seed, it was found possible to measure the percentage of infection resulting from the presence of Rhizoctonia and Actinomyces in the soil. — B. B. Higgins. 2127. Muller-Thtjrgaxj, H., tjnd A. Osterwalder. Versuche zur Bckampfung der Kohlhernie [Experiments on the control of club root of cabbage.) Landw. Jahrb. Schweiz 191&: 1-22. Fig. 1-7. 1919. — Experiments on the control of club root {Plasnwdiophora brassicae) in kohlrabi and cabbage are described. Different forms of lime, sulphur and formalin were applied to the soil in various amounts. Burned lime and hydrated lime are said to have given satisfactory results. — /. D. Luckett. 2128. Sanders, G. E., and A. Kelsall. Dusts and dusting for insect and fungus control. Sci. Agric. [Canada] 1: 14-18. 1921. — This article gives results of dusting experiments in Nova Scotian orchards. — B, T. Dickson. MISCELLANEOUS (COGNATE RESEARCHES, TECHNIQUE, ETC.) 2129. Church, Margaret B. The relation of mosaic disease to pickling of cucumbers. Phytopath. 11: 28-29. 1921. — Cucumbers visibly affected with mosaic disease do not make good dill pickles. They do not clear up properly in the brine. — B. B. Higgins. 2130. Reddick, D. Foot rot of tomato. Phytopathology 11 : 29. 1921.— The name "Foot rot" for the tomato disease caused by Macrosporium solani is claimed to be preempted because of previous use in connection with the disease caused by Phytophthora cryptogea. Use of generic names of causal organisms as descriptive adjectives is proposed. — G. H. Coons. 2131. [Thompson, M. R. H.] Cold storage conditions for export. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 2: 133-136. Fig. 1-2. 1921. — A report on the presence of organisms causing decay in fruit in cold storage rooms in Cape Town. It is stated that the condition of the rooms was satisfactory. — E. M. Doidge. 2132. Wagner, Esther A., and W. F. Monfort. Lactose broth for isolating Bacterium coli from water. Amer. Jour. Public Health 11 : 203-208. 1921.— The authors advise a broth containing 2 per cent peptone, 0.2 per cent lactose, and 0.001 per cent gentian violet, to be used with an equal volume of water. It is claimed that the use of the gentian violet makes possible sterilization of the medium by pasteurization in place of autoclaving, thus obviating the hydrolysis of the sugar which occurs at autoclave temperatures. — C. A. Ludwig. PHARMACOGNOSY AND PHARMACEUTICAL BOTANY Heber W. Youngken, Editor E. N. Gathercoal, Assistant Editor (See also in this issue Entries 1589, 2001) 2133. Anonymous. The Mulford Biological Exploration of the Amazon Basin. Amer. Jour. Pharm. 92 : 815-820. 1920. — A complete prospectus of the proposed Mulford Biological Exploration of the Amazon Basin, under the direction of Doctor Rusby. — Anton Hogstad, Jr. 2134. Kremers, Edward. Quarter of a century of chemical investigation of a typically American genus of plants. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9: 1175-1176. 1920.— A portion of an address in which the author presents an explanation justifying the continuation of exhaustive resesTch on a single genus, Monarda, which he has been actively engaged upon during the 312 PHAKMACOGNOSY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VIII, past 25 years. — The author states that the horizon has grown wider and the subject more in- tensely interesting than ever before. He points to the recent discovery of a new terpene, possibly more correctly of 2 new terpenes; to the synthesis of new dyestuffs; and to the study of intramolecular changes of isomeric derivatives. The economic possibilities are not dis- cussed.— Anton Hogstad, Jr. 2135. Lloyd, J. T. Spiders used in medicine. Amer. Jour. Pharm. 93: 18-24. Fig. 2. 1921 . — An account of the use of spiders and spider webs in medicine, including a number of excerpts from historical literature on medicine. Owing to the popular lack of knowledge regarding the distinctive characteristics of spiders and insects, these characteristics are portrayed in a series of sketches. The author states he has handled large numbers of native spiders as well as hundreds of "banana tarantulas," which are not true tarantulas, and has found them all harmless. Although no chemical analyses of the spider web are known, tests have shown the absence of sugar; a slight reaction towards alkaloids has been observed. Spiders of the sub-family Aviculariinae, commonly known as "tarantulas" or bird spiders, are used by homoeopathic physicians. Until recently the web was administered in the form of a pill, but at the present time it is administered in the form of an alcoholic preparation known as "Tela Araneae."— Anion Hogstad, Jr. 2136. Mitchell, D. T. Poisoning of cattle by Diplodia-infected maize. South African Jour. Sci. 16:446-452. 1920. — A disease in cattle characterized by incoordination of movement and paralysis is produced by feeding mealy cobs which are infected with Diplodia Zea. Cul- tures of D. Zea grown on sterile maize produce clinical symptoms indistinguishable from those set up by feeding infected cobs. — E. M. Doidge. 2137. Mitchell, D. T. Poisoning of cattle by feeding on Paspalum dilatatum infected with Claviceps Paspali. South African Jour. Sci. 16: 391-396. 1920. 2138. RussEL, G. A. Rose geranium. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 10: 19-26. i pL 1921. — The results' of experiments in the culture of several varieties of rose geranium (Pelargonium odoratissimum) in Florida since 1914. The discussion embraces such factors as growth of plants; propagation by cuttings; cultivation; fertilization; harvesting; distilling and yield of herb and oil. The yield of oil was somewhat disappointing, varying from 0.035 to 0.109 per cent, depending upon the time of harvesting. Heavy rains were noted to cause a decrease in yield of oil. One acre yielded 16,720 pounds of fresh herb the 1st year, 7,618 the 2nd, and 4,499 the 3rd; it appears, therefore, that the amount of fresh herb obtainable decreases with each year of the life of the field. — The yield of oil per acre is not sufficiently large to warrant the cultivation of geranium as a money crop. An approximation of the possible monetary returns is presented on the basis of price paid for lowest-priced oil: 1917 1918 1919 A $36-57 $22-25 $10-93 B 21-75 23-76 14-92 The author believes that plot B very nearly represents what may be expected from the culti- vation of rose geranium as a money crop. — Anton Hogstad, Jr. 2139. Schneider, Albert. A general method for making quantitative microanalyses of vegetable drugs and related substances. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9: 1140-1153. 1920. — The method consists in making a count of the characteristic elements present in the substance in question, from a diluted suspension of a carefully prepared powder. After carefully grind- ing and mixing, 1 gr. of substance is suspended in 5 or 10 cc. of distilled water or a mixture of water and glycerine in a 25 cc. graduated cylinder. It is then thoroughly mixed with a glass rod and the cylinder filled to the 25 cc. mark with 5 per cent gum acacia solution, the entire mixture being thoroughly mixed. (Other suspending materials may be used, such as glycerine, oils, thin syrup, solution of cherry gum, solution of gum mastic, gelatin solution, india gum solution, vaseline, etc.) Of the mixture, 0.2 cc. are delivered upon a counting cham- ber or counting slide. The characteristic tissue elements are then counted and recorded. No. 3, JcLT, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 3I3 Between 30 and 50 distinct fields can be counted in one mount. These findings are then com- pared with a standard. A list of some 78 substancee with characteristic tissue elements upon which counts are to be based are included; for example, Cinchona, large bast cells; Conval- laria, number of raphides; Absinthium, T-shaped trichomes .—^n L. 247, 1141. Darwin, F. 931. Davenport, C.B. 1071. Davidson, A. 1551. Davis, B. M. *83. Davis, J. J. 1287,1512 Dawe, M. T. 1593. Dean, H. K. 14. Deane, W. 962. Deane, W., and M. L. Fernald. 1072. Dehorne, A. *248. Delacroix, J. 534. Delacroix, J., and A. Mau- blanc. 535. Delauney, P. 582, 845. Delf, E. M. 2158. Demaree, J. B. 379. Demarest, S. A. 1686. Deming, W. C. 380. Demoussy, E. (Maquenne, L., and Demoussy). 671, 1525. Denslow, H. M. 719. Desmoulins, A., and V. Villard. *249. Detjen, L. R. 1209, 1905. Detlefsen, J. A. 250. Detlefsen, J. A., and W. J. Carmichael. 1906. Detlefsen, J. A., and E. Roberts. 1907. Detmer, W. 1687. Detwiler, S. B. 1414, 2124. Dewitz, J. 65. Dickson, B. T. 927. Dickson, J. G. (Holbert, J. R., Dickson, and H. H. Biggar). *506. Dickson, J. G. (Johnson, A. G., Dickson, and Helen Johann). *499. Dickson, M. E. 1073. Dieden, H. 162. Diehl, W. W. 1288. Dietel, P. 2052. Digby, L. 1836. Dixon, Annie. 2016, 2017. Dixon, Annie, W. Leach, H. Bendorf, and J. G. Kitchen. 2018. Dixon, H. N. 1688, 2028, 2035. Dixon, H. N., and W. W. Watts. 1263. Dobbin, L. 1461. Doflein, F. *1574. Doidge, Ethel M. 2053, 2110. Doncaster, L. 1074. Dorph-Petersen, K. 66. Dorris, G. 1142. Douglass, A. E. 943. Drechsler, C. (Jones, F. R., and Drechsler). *465, 1296. INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES 337 Drummond, J. C. (Coward, Katherine H. and Drum- mond). 2157. Drummond, J. C, and Katherine H. Coward. 2159, 2160. Duclaux, Mme. J. (Wurm- ser, R., and Duclaux). 2152. Dudgeon, W. 846. Dufour, L. (Costantin, J., and Dufour). 2051. Dufrenoy, J. 1289,2111. Dun, W. S. (Benson, W. N., Dun, and W. R. Browne). 2087. Dunlap, K. *315. Dunn, H. H. 15. Durand, R. 754. Durham, G. B. (Harris, J. A., E. W. Sinnott, J. Y. Pennypacker, and Durham). 2012. Durham, H. E. 847, 1689, 1690, 1965. DuRietz, G. E. 1317. Durr, N. 16. Durrell, L. W. *536. Dutton, D. L. *2029. Dykes, W. B. 848. Dymes, T. A. *924, *925. Earle, F. S. 1370, 1387, 1416. East, E. M. 251. East, E. M., and D. F. Jones. *1890, 1908. Eberle, E. G. 1691. Edgerton, C. W. 1416, 1417. Edgerton, C. W., and C. C. Moreland. 1388. Edlefsen, N. E. (West, F. L., and Edlefsen). 1168. Edquist, A. G. 778. Edson, H. A. 1371. Edwards, C. L. *381, *382. Eeden, F. W. van (Kops, J., van Eeden, and L. Vuyck). 1298,1541. Egginton, G. E., and W. W. Robbins. 1594. Elderton, Ethel M. 252. Ellen, Sister M. 2030. Ellett, W. B., and T. K. Wolfe. 1521. Elliott, J. A. 1389. Elliott, J. A. (Fields, W. S., and Elliott). 2125. Elliott, Jessie S. B., and Helena C. Chance. 463. Ellis, D. *1326, *1327. Ellis, G. S. M. *78. Emberger, L. 1831. Endies, M. 1007. Enfer, V. 1143, 1986, 1987. Engelhardt, F. (Pheiler, W., and Engelhardt). 638. Engledow, F. L. 253. Engler, A., and E. Gilg. 720. Eriksson, J. 2054. Essary, S. H. 1692. Esteban de Faura, A. *1144. Evans, H. H. (Hoy, B., and Evans). *1150. Ewart, A. J. 688. Ewing, C. O. (Viehoever, A., J. F. Clevenger, and Ewing). 1446. F., H. B. 2258. Faber, H. 17. Fairbridge, Dorothea. 849. Fairchild, D. 850. Falk, K. G. 644. Familler, I. 123, 2031. Farmer, J. B. *1455. Farquharson, C. O. 851. Farrow, E. P. ♦952. Fawcett, H. S. 1353. Fawcett, H. S. (Livingston, B. E., and Fawcett). 1500. Fawcett, W. 67. Fawcett, W., and A. B. Rendle. *702, *703. Fearon, W. R. *2169. Fedeli, C. 1693. Federley, H. *254. Fehlinger, H. *1075. Felsher, H. (Bradley, H. C, and Felsher). *1479. Ferdinandsen, C. 68. Fernald, M. L. 721, 722, 950, *963, 1552, *2248. Fernald, M. L. (Deane, W., and Fernald). 1072. Fernald, M. L., and K. M. Wiegand. 1553. Fields, W. S., and J. A. Elliott. 2125. Figini, G. *255. Figueroa, C. A. 1345. J^indlay, W. M. 18. Fink, B., and Sylvia C. Fuson. 1290, *1318. Firbas, H. 1909. Fischer, L. *1226, 1291. Fishburn, H. P. (Jones, J. S., C. W. Colver, and Fishburn). 791. Fisher, D. F., and C. Brooks. 1428. Fisher, M. H., and M. O. Hooker. *617. Fitzpatrick, P. *1891, 1910. Fitzpatrick, T. J. 124, 125. Fleischer, B., and W. Josenhans. *227. Fleischer, M. 447, 448, 2032. Fletcher, S. W. *367, 852. Florin, R. *1122. Flynn, H. C. K. 1595, Foex, E. 1694, 2055. Font Quer, P. 695. Fontanel, P. 1575. Forkett, C. 383. Forti, A. 1227. Fox, R. H. *853. Fracker, S. B. 1372. France, L. V. 1911. Frangos, G. 436, 503. Fraps, G. S. 1596, 2208, 2209. Fraps, G. S., and S. Lo- manitz. 1597. Fred, E. B. (Arzberger, C. F., W. H. Peterson, and Fred). 1477. Freeland, E. C. (Zerban, F. W., and Freeland) . *1507, 1508. Friederichs, K. 2056. Fries, T. C. E. 1292. Frimmel, F. *256. Fritel, P. H. *2089. Fritsch, F. E. 932, 933. FritsQh, F. E., and E. Stevens. 1228. Fromme, F. D. *504. 338 INDEX TO authors' NAMES Fromme, F. D. (See Ar- thur, J. C). Frost, J. F. (Holbert, J. R., Frost, and G. N. Hoffer). 1421. Frost, W. D. (Haner, R. C, and Frost). 2084. Fruwirth, C. ♦257, 779, 1076. Frye, T. C. *2033. Fryer, C. P. ♦1017. Fryer, P. J. 2112. Fuller, G.D. ^934, ♦944,950, 951, ♦952, ^963, ♦lOlS, ♦1019. Fuson, Sylvia C. (Fink, B., and Fuson). 1290, ♦1318. Gadeceau, £. 1988. Gager, C. S. ^1079, ♦lllS, ♦1813, ^1892, ♦2034. Gailey, W. R. (Langdon, S. C, and Gailey). 653. Gain, A. (Gain, E., and Gain). 935. Gain, E., and A. Gain. 935. Galant, S. 1912. Galippe, V. ^258. Gamble, J. S. 1695, 1696. Gams, H. (Heim, A., and Gams). 1338. Garber, R. J. 1077. Gard, M. 1229. Gardner, E. L. (Henrici, A. T., and Gardner). 2058. Gardner, M. W, ^945. Gardner, N. L. (Setchell, W. A., and Gardner). 1251, 1252, 1253. Gardner, V. R. ^1145. Garino-Canina, E. 1480. Garjeanne, A. J. M. 449, 1260. Garrison, H. S. (Hartley, 0. P., and Garrison). 1919. Gasser, G. W. 1078. Gatin, V. C. 1210, 2006. Gavildn, J. 1146. Geddes. ^58. Geddes, P. 854. Gehrs, J. H. ^765. Gemmill, J. F. 19. Gerbault, E. L. ^259. Gerhardt, K. 1697. Gericke, W. F. 2170, 2190. Gerrj', Eloise. 1020, 1021. Gersdorff, C. E. F. (Johns, C. 0., and Gersdorflf). 1471. Gerstlauer, L. 964. Geschwind. 1848, 1849, 1850. Geschwind, A. 1390. Gessner, E. R. 20. Ghose, S. L. 1230, 1231. Gibson, A. J. 163. Gil, M. 780. Gilbert, A. H. ^1418. Gilg, E. (Engler, A., and Gilg). 720. Gill, W. 164. Gillies, C. D. 1913. Gilman, J. C. (Melhus, I. E., and Gilman). 2126. Gilmore, M. R. 781. Gimingham, C. T. (Barker, B. T. P., Gimingham, and S. P. Wiltshire). 554. Gimingham, C. T., and O. Grove. 384. Gimingham, C. T., and G. T. Spinks. 557. Girard, A. C. 855. Glaser, O. 260. Gleason, H. A. 965, ^1079, ♦2244. Gloyer, W. O. ^537, ^558. Godfery, M. J. 1554. Godfrey, G. H. 1293, 1391. Goertz, O. 2188. Goldschmidt, R. *261, ♦262, ^263, ^335, ^336, 1080, 1081, 1082. Gonnermann, M. 583. Gonzalez Fragoso, Romu- aldo. ♦689, *696. Goodale, H. D., Ruby San- bron, and D. White. 1914. Goodspeed, T. H. (Hall, H. M., and Goodspeed). ♦2009, 2010, 2011, 2249. Goris, A, (Guerin, P., and Goris). 586. Goris, A., and C. Vischniac. 584. Gouaux, C. B. 1419. Gould, H. P. ♦IISI. Gould, W. M. 1966. Gowen, J. W. 264, 1083. Gradenwitz, A. 1457. Graff, P. W. 126. Gram, E. 559. Grandchamp, L. (Piedallu, A. P. Malvezin, and Grandchamp). 2183. Gravatt, G. F. 498. Graves, F. M. 856. Graves, H. S. ^165. Graves, R. R. 265. Gravis, A. 2007. Gray, G. P. 782. Gray, J., and G. J. Peirce. ♦936. Greenfield, W. P. 1851. Greenish, H. G. 585. Grey, E. C. 1481. Grier, N. M. 437, 1084. Griesbeck, A. 2113. Griffiths, E. L. 1439. Grimme, C. 783, 1440, 1441. Grindley, F. H. 857. Grisch, A. (Volkart, A., Grisch, and W. Bandi). 1618. Grose, L. R. 1698. Gross, K. ^228, 266. Groud, C. ^784. Grounds, G. L. (Noyes, H. A., and Grounds). 680. Grove, O. 426, 427, 428. Grove, O. (Gimingham, C. T., and Grove). 384. Grove, W. B. 858, 1294. Grove, W. B., B. Muriel Bristol, and, Nellie Carter. 1232. Groves, J. 1699. Guadagno, M. 1700. Guerin, P., and A. Goris. 586. Gu^rithault, B. 670. Guerney-Dixon, S. 1322. Guillaumin, A. 1967. Guilleminot, H. 1915. Guilliermond, A. 1832) 1833, 1834, *2044, 2057. Gundersen, A. ^1085. Gunther, R. T. 1701. INDEX TO authors' NAMES 339 Gussow, H. T. ♦859. Guthrie, J. D. *1852. Guyer, M. F., and E. A. Smith. 267. Guyton, T. L. *1373. Guzmanes, A. 785, 786. H., R. T. *1327. Haan, H. R. M. de. 2008. Haas, P. 1462, 1463, 1464. Haberlandt, G. ♦860. Haecker, V. 1916. Hagem, O. ^222, ^268. Haggard, H. W., and Y. Henderson. 1488. Hahn, G. G. 1392. Hahn, G. G. (Hartley, C, and Hahn). 538, 1395. Hahn, G. G., C. Hartley, and A. S. Rhodes. 1374. Hall, A. D. 1702. Hall, H. M. 2249. Hall, H. M., and T. H. Goodspeed. ^2009, 2010, 2011, 2049. Halton, H. F. E. (Baker, J. L., and Halton). 2155. Hamblin, C. O. 1346, 1393. Hamblin, S. F. 1703. Hamet, R. 723. Hamilton, A. A. 127. Hamun, Edith. (Huntoon, F. A., P. Masucci, and Hamun). 574. Haner, R. C, and W. D. Frost. 2084. Hanly, J. 1086. Hansen, A. A. 21, 22. Hansen, H. J. 560. Hansen, R. (Lohnis, F., and Hansen). 1322. Hansen, W. 269. Harden, A., and F. R. Henly. 2196. Harder, E. C. *1326. Harlan, H. V., and S. Anthony. *246. Harlan, H. V., and H. K. Hayes. 270. Harland, S. C. *216, 1917, 1918. Harper, R. M. 966. Harris, D. F. 1704. Harris, F. S. *10, *787 1598. Harris, G. W. 84. Harris, J. A. ^942, *944. Harris, J. A., and C. S. Scofield. 1087. Harris, J. A., E. W. Sin- nott, J. Y. Pennypacker, and G. B. Durham. 2012. Harshberger, J. W. 1337, 1705, 1706. Hartel, O. 1853. Harter, L. L., and J. L. Weimer. 1394. Hartley, C. 573, 1429. Hartley, C. (Hahn, G. G., Hartley, and A. S. Rhodes). 1374. Hartley, C, and G. G. Hahn. 538, 1395. Hartley, C. P., and H. S. Garrison. 1919. Hartwell, B. L., and S. C. Damon. ♦773, 1522. Hartwell, B. L., F. R. Pember, and G. E. Mer- kle. ♦773. Harvey, R.B. 539,2100. Harvey, R. B. (Brown, Nellie A., and Harvey). 525. Harvey, R. B., and R. H. True. ♦1454. Hasenbaumer, J. 2210. Hastings, S. (Paulson, R., and Hastings). ^1242. Hatton, J. H. ^166. Hatton, R, G. 1968. Haugh, L. A. 89. Hauman, L. 953. Hawkins, L. A., and J. R. Magness. 1147. Hawley, R. C. 1022. Hay, R. D. 167. Hayden, Ada. 100. Hayes, H.K. (Harlan, H. V., and Hayes). 270. Hayes, H. K., J. H. Parker, and C. Kurzweil. ♦217. Haywood, A. H. 23. Hazeloop, J. G. (Linden, van der, Hazeloop, and N. vanPoeteren). 1152. Hazen, T. E. ♦949. Headley, F. B. 24. Headley, R. ♦1854. Hedgcock, G. G., and N. R. Hunt. 1354. Hedrick, U. P. 861, 862, ♦1132. Heede, A. van den. 1989. Heim, A., and H. Gams. 1338. Heim, F., J. Maheu, and L. Matrod. 788. Heine. 1969. Heinicke. 1023. Helland-Hansen, B. 1818. Helms, J. 168. Hempel, H. (Beythien A., andHempel). 1436,1437. Hemsley,W.B. ♦1555,1707. Henderson, Y. (Haggard, H. W., and Henderson). 1488. Hendrick, J. (Ogg, W. G., and Hendrick) 1537, 1538. Hendricks, H. V. 1494. Henkel, J. S. ^1855, *1856. Henly, F. R. (Harden, A., and Henly). 2196. Henning, E. 1347, 1708. Henning, E., and T. Lind- fors. 1420. Henrici, A. T., and E. L. Gardner. 2058. Henriques, J. A. 863. Henry, A. 864, ♦999, 1857. Hensen, V. ♦1088, ^1089. Heribert-Nilsson, N. ♦337. Herissey, H, (Bourquelot, E., and Herissey). 624, 625, 1478. Herman, V. R. (^Vinters, R. Y., and Herman). 1625. Hermann. ^2211. Herre, A. C. 128. Herrera, A. L. 1835. Herrmann, E. 1295, 2059. Hervey, E. W. 1556. Herwerden, M. A. van. ♦271, ^272. Herzfeld, E., andR.Klinger. 654. Herzog, T. 1261. ^ J Heusser, C. ♦438. ^,^ Hickel, R. ^195. Hieronymus, G. 697, 698, 2236. 340 INDEX TO authors' NAMES Higashi, M. (Okamura, K., K. Onda, and Higashi). 2022. Higgins, B. B. 2060. Higson, G. I. (Slade, R. E., and Higson). 757. Hiley, W. E. *1386. Hill, D. H. (Williams, C. B., and Hill). 52. Hitchcock, A. S. 724. Hitchcock, A. S (See Standley, P.). 744. Hitchcock, A, S., and P. C. Standley. *683, *2228. Hoag, J. R. (McCall, A. G., and Hoag). 2149. Hoagland, D. R. 2147. Hoagland, D. R., and J. D. Martin. 1534. Hodgetts, W. J. 1233. Hodson, E. A. 789. Hodson, E. R. 505. Hoek, P. van. 1599, 1709, 1710. Hoffer, G. N. (Holbert, J. R., and Hoffer). *540. Hoffer, G. N. (Holbert, J. R., J. F. Frost, and Hoffer). 1421. Hoffer, G. N., and R. H. Carr. *611, *612. Hoffman. 1600. Hoffman, L. (Carr, R. H., and Hoffman). 677. Hoffmann. 679. Hoffmann P. 1711. Hogben. L. 273. Hogg, S. A. (Allen, W. J., Hogg, and W. le Gay Brereton). 357. Hohnel, F. von. 2061. Holbert, J. R., and G. N. Hoffer. *540. Holbert, J. R., J. G. Dickson, and H. H. Biggar. *506. Holbert, J. R., J. F. Frost, and, G.N. Hoffer. 1421. Holman, G. H,, and F. S. Chambers. 1712. Holmboe, J. 928, 929, 2230. Holmes, E. M. 587. Holmes, G. K. 1713. Holmes, M. G. *1455. Holtendahl, O. 487. Holzinger, J. M. 1262, 1263, 2035. Honing, J. A. *290, *1090, 1091, 1092, 1920. Hood, Constance C, and Muriel I. Bacon. 1858. Hooker, M. O. (Fisher, M. H., and Hooker). *617. Hooper, C. H. 1970. Hoover, M. H. 385. Hopkins, E. F. *561. Hopkins, F. G. 2191. Home, W. T. (Howard, W.L., and Home). 1396. Hort, E. C. 1324, 1328, 1329. House, H. D. 2231. Howard, A., and G. C. L. Howard. 1093. Howard, A. L. 155, *1840. Howard, G. C. L. (Howard, A., and Howard). 1093. Howard, H. L. 386. Howard, S. H. 169. Howard, W. L., and W. T. Horne. 1396. Howe, M. A. *1234. Hoy, B. *1148, *1149. Hoy, B., and H. H. Evans. *1150. Hoyt, W. D. 1235. Hromddko, J. 274. Hrp. 1859. Hubert, E. E. 1397. Humphrey, C. J. (Kress, O., Humphrey, and C. A. Richards). 1026. Humphrey, H. B. (Whet- zel, H. H., and Humph- rey). 1804. Humphrey, S. H. 1921. Humphrey, S. K. *316, 1094. Hungerford, C. W., and A. E. Wade. *515. Hunt, N. R. (Hedgcock, G. G., and Hunt). 1354. Huntoon, F. A., P.Masucci, and Edith Hamun. 574. Hurd, Annie M. 1375. Huxley, J. S. 275. Ingle, H. *755. Ireland, A. 276. Isbell, C. L. *387. Iversen, K. 25. Jackson, B. D. 1714, 1715. Jackson, H. S. (See Ar- thur, J. C. Jacob, J. 865, 866, 1716, 1717, 1718, 1719, 1720. Jacoby, M. *645. Jaffa, M. E. 429. Jagger, I. C. 1355. Jaggli,M. 1721,2036,2037. Jansen, P., and W. H. Wachter. 1557. Jaques, H. E. 94. Jehle, R. A. (Mabee, W. B., and Jehle). 2114. Jenkins, E. H., and W. L. Slate, Jr. 1523. Jennings, O. E. 129, 867, 1339, 1558. Jentsch. 1024. Johann, Helen. (Johnson. A. G., J. G. Dickson, and Johann). *499. Johns, C. O. (Jones, D. B., and Johns). 1474. Johns, C. O., and C. E. F. Gersdorff. 1471. Johns, C. O., and D. B. Jones. 1472. Johns, C. O., and H. C. Waterman. 1473. Johnson, A. G., and W. W Mackie. *507. Johnson, A. G., J. G. Dickson, and H. Johann. *499. Johnson, D. S. *1722. Johnson, E. 26. Johnson, E. C. 1922. Johnson, F. R. 170. Johnson, J. 1398, 2206. Johnson, Marie E. M. 464. Johnston, E. S. *937, 2146. Johnston, R. M. 1340. Jones, D. B. (Johns, C. O., and Jones). 1472. Jones, D. B., and C. O. Johns. 1474. Jones, D. F. *790. Jones, D. F. (East, E. M., and Jones). *1890, 1908. Jones, F. M. 946. INDEX TO authors' NAMES 341 Jones, F. R. *541. Jones, F. R., and C. Drechs- ler. *465, 1296. Jones, H. W. 2148. Jones, J. F. 388. Jones, J. S., C. W. Colver, and H. P. Fishburn. 791. Jones, L. R., and H. H. McKinney. *ol6. Jones, L. R., J. C. Walker, andW. B.Tisdale. *508. Jones, W. N. 658. Jones, W. N., and M. C. Rayner. *930. Jordan, W.H. 1576. Jorgensen, I., and W. Stiles. 667, 2192. Josenhans, W. (Fleischer, B., and Josenhans). *227. Judd, C. S. 171. Juel, H. O. 868. Jumelle, H. 2250. Juritz, O. F. *2212. Eaalaas, B. 2038. Kaiser, G. B. 2259. Kaminer, S. (Noorden, C. von, and Kaiminer) *1097. Kappert, H. *277. Karlsson, K. A. 1442. Karrer, J. L. (Moore, G. T., andKarrer). 103. Kashyap, S. R. 101, 130. *2039. Kathariner, L. 278. Kawakama, K., and S. Yoshida. *1330. Kay, J. 1860. Keeble, F. 1971. Keen, B. A. 938, 1535. Keissler, K. von. 1297, 2062. Keitt, G. W. *562. Kelberger, L. R., and F. Schonheit. 27. Kelley, W. P., and A. B. Cummings. 1376. Kelly, H. A., and W. L. Burrage. 869. Kelsall, A. (Sanders, G. E., and Kelsall). 2128. Kempton, J. H, 1923, 1924. Kenney, E. J. (Buckner, G. D., A. M. Peter, and Kenney). 2168. Kerle, W. D. 28. Kern, F. D. (See Arthur, J. C.). Ketel, B. A. van. 588. Kidd, F., and C. West. 655. Kidder, N.T. 967. Killermann, S. 870, 871, 872, 873, 874, 1723, 1724, 2063. Killian, C. 2064. Kirby, R. S., and H. E. Thomas. 2095. Kitchen, J. G. (Dixon, Annie, W. Leach, H. Ben- dorf, and Kitchen). 2018. Klebahn, H. 1095. Klinger, R. (Hersfeld, E., andKlinger). 654. Knapp, A. W. *1200. Kniep, H. *1096. Knight, F. A. 1155. Knight, M. M., Iva L. Peters, and Phyllis Blan- chard. *1125. Knight, R. C. 1451. Knowles, C.H. (Simmonds, H. W., and Knowles). 2099. Knowlton, C. H., W. S. Ripley, Jr., and C. A. Weatherby, 968. Knudson, L., and R. S. Smith. 1482. Koch, A., and A. Oelsner. 646. Kock, G. 1177. Kofahl, H. 792. Kogel, P. R. 615. Kohn, A. *279. Koidzumi, G. *2246. Komp, W. H. W. 1513. Kondo, M. *1496, 2013. Kopeloff, Lillian. (Kopeloff, N., and Kopeloff). 1483. Kopeloff, N. 2177. Kopeloff, N., and Lillian Kopeloff. 1483. Kopeloff, N., and H. Z. E. Perkins. 1484. Kopeloff, N., H. Z. E. Perkins, and C. J. Wel- come. 1485. Kops, J., F. W. van Eeden, and L. Vuyck. 1298, 1541. Koser, S. A. 1331. Kotila, J. E. *575. Kotowski, F. 280. Kottur, G. L. 1925. Krafka, J., Jr. 281, 282. Krakover, L. J. (Stakman, E. C., and Krakover). 1311. Kranzlin, F. 2251. Krauch, H. 172, 1025. Kraus, E. J, 2189. Krausel, R. 488, 489, 490. Krebs, C. 131. Krelage, E. 1990. Kremers, E. 2134. Kress, O. *793. Kress, O., C. J. Humphrey, and C. A. Richards. 1026. Kreutzer, E. 1819. Kriiger, P. *283. Krumwiede, C., Jr. (Wins- low, C.-E. A., Krum- wiede, etal). 1335. Krzj^mowski, R. 875. Ktk. 1820. Kuiper, K., Jr. 659. Kunstler, J. 563. Kuo, T. H. 29, *30. Kurtzweil, C. (Hayes, H. K., J. H. Parker, and Kurtzweil). *217. Kuster, E. 85, *284, 1490, 1725, 1726, 1727. L., F., and K. V. 1861. Ladbrook, J. 725. Lagerberg, T. 173. Laing, E. V. 1728. Lamb, G. N. *1862. Lambert, F. 2260. Lambert, F., and P. Peronne. 1991. Lamproy, E. 1999. Lancefield, D. E. 285. Land, W. J. G. 1211. Lane-Poole, C. E. 86,174. Langdon, L. M. *1455. Langdon, S. C., and W. R. Gailey. 653. Lapeyrere, M. E. 1863. Lapicque, L. 1465. LaRue, G. (Shull, A. F., LaRue, and A. G. Ruth- ven). *318. Last, E. 627. 342 INDEX TO authors' NAMES Lauder. 31. Laufer, B. 876. Laughlin,H.H. 288, 1926. Laupper, G. 2178. LaVaulx, R. de. *287. Laxton, E. 1972. Leach, B. R. 2213. Leach, W. 2019. Leach, W. (Dixon, Annie, Leach, H. Bendorf, and J. G. Kitchen). 2018. Leavitt, C. 175. Leberle, H. (Boas, F., and Leberle). 620. Leclerc, H. 589. Lecolier, P. 1151. Lecomte, H. 439, 877. Lee, H. A., and M. G. Medalla. 2096. Lee, Y. K. 176. Leefmans, S. 576. Lees, A. H. 577. Lees, A. H. (Barker, B. T. P., and Lees). 369, 370. Leiby, R. W. 1299. Leipziger. 1601. Lemmerman, O. 32. Lemmermann, O., and L. Wichers. 2214. Lemoine, Mme. P. 1236. Lenz, F. *1097, 1098. LePlastrier, G.M. 90. Leppan, H. D. 1602. Lesage, P. *450, 606. Lesourd, F. 1992. Lettau, G. 2079, 2080. Levin, I., and Michael Levine. 1430. Levine, Max. 1431. Levine, Michael. 1377. Levine, Michael. (Levin, I., and Levine); 1430. Lewis, C. I. 389. Lewis, I. F., and C. Zirkle. 1237. Lewis, W. CM cC. *636. Lewton, F. L. 1559. Liesegang, R. E. 2184. Lillie, F. R. 288. Lindau, G. 726. Lindemann, E. 1238. Linden, van der, J. G. Hazeloop, and N. van Poeteren. 1152. Lindfors. 1347. Lindfors, T. (Henning, E., and Lindfors). 1420. Lindman, C. A. M. *686, 727, *1543. Lineback, P. E. 1927. Linhart, G. A. (Lipman, C. B., and Linhart). 1524. Lipman, C. B., and G. A. Linhart. 1524. Lipman, J. G. *878. Lipschiitz, A. 1099. Little, C. C. 1100, 1928. Little, L. G. (McCauley, C., and Little). 34. Littlepage, T. P. *390. Livingston, B. E. *1814. Livingston, B. E., and H. S. Fawcett. 1500. Llagnet, M. *132. Lloyd, Dorothy J. 2144. Lloyd, F. E. *2165. Lloyd, J. T. 2135. Loeb, J. 607. Loew, O. *2211. Lohnis, F., and R. Hansen. 1332. Lomanitz, S. 33. Lomanitz, S. (Fraps, G. S., and Lomanitz). 1597. Long, B. 969. Long, C. A. E. 970. Longo, B. 1729. L6pez Dominguez, F. A. 1378. Lorch,W. 451,1264,2199. Lorenz, Annie. 133, *2040. Lortel, J. 879. Lotsy, J. P. *289, *290, *291. Lowe, C. W. 102. Lowe, Rachel L. 134, *2041. Loyer, M. 880, 1730. Lozano, E. D. 491. Lr. 1864. Lucas, A. H. S. 1239. Lucas, R. 2020. Luckett, J. D. (Noyes, M. A., E. Voigt, and Luckett). 681. Lucks, R. 391. Liiers, H. 637. Luisier, A. 1265. Lumiere, A. 628. Luyk, A. van. 2065. Lyle, Lilian. 1240. Lyman, G. R. *500. Lynge, B. *478. Maas, J. G. J. A. 177, 178, 179, *440. Mabee, W. B., and R. A. Jehle. 2114. McAtee,W.L. 135,136. MacBride, E. W. 1101, *2090. MacBride, J. F. *2245. McCall, A. G., and J. R. Hoag. 2149. McCandlish, A.C. 1929. MacCaughey, V. 1560. McCauley, C, and L. G. Little. 34. McClintock, J. A. *509. McClung, C.E. 292. McCormick, Florence A. (Clinton, G. P., and Mc- Cormick). 1365. McCubbin, W. A. *542, 2097. MacCurdy, M. 293. McDonald, A. H. E. 35, 1603. MacDougal, D. T. *1493. McDowall, R. J. S. 2179. Machado, A. 452, 1266. Maclnnes, J. *517. Mackay, H. 180. Mackenzie, K. K. 1178, 1561. McKhann, C. F. (Rockwell, G. E., and McKhann). 2186. Mackie, W. W. 1348. Mackie, W. W. (Johnson, A. G., and Mackie). *507. McKinney, H. H. (Jones, L. R., and McKinney). *516. MacMillan, H. G. 1432. MacMillan, H. G., and L. P. Byars. 1433. Macoun,W.T. *294, 1731. M'Pherson, A. 1865. McRostie, G. P. 1930. Magness, J. R. (Hawkins, L. A., and Magness) . 1147. INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES 343 Maheu, J. (Heim, F., Maheu, and L. Matrod). 788. Mahood, S. A., and D. E. Cable. 1027. Maiden, J. H. 36, 794, 881, *1555, 1604, ♦2252. Makin, R. N. 37, 795. Malaquin, A. *295, 1102. Malinowski, E. *338. Malta, N. 453. Malte, M. O. 796. Malvezin, P. (Piedallu, A., Malvezin, and L. Grand- champ). 2183. Manetti, C. 1732. Mann, H. *1452. Maquenne, L., and E. De- moussy. 671, 1525. Marchal, E. *296. Marchand, B. de C. 2215, *2216. Markle, M. S. ^1241. Marloth, R. 2014. Marsh, C. D., and A. B. Clawson. 1443. Marshall, Lizzie B. 1689, *1733. Martin. 1028, 1029. Martin, G. *755. Martin, H. 1008. Martin, J. C. (Stewart, G. R., and Martin). 1530. Martin, J. D. (Hoagland, D.R., and Martin). 1534. Martin, J. N. *79, 1821. Martin, W. H. *564. Marukawa, H. 2021. Marzell, H. 882, 1734. Masoni, G. 1526. Massart, J. 297. Massy. 590. Masucci, P. (Huntoon, F. A., Masucci, and Edith Hamun). 574. Maternaers, F. F. 38. Mathews, J. W. *298, 1931. Matrod, L. (Heim, F., J. Maheu, and Matrod). 788. Matthews, D. J. 1514. Matthews, J. R. 728. Mattirolo, O. 1735, 1736. Matz, J. 1356, 1399, 1400, 1401. Maublanc, A. (Delacroix, J., and Maublanc). 535. Maume. (Antoniadis, and Maume). 2203. Maxon, W. R. (Standley, Paul C., and Maxon). 744. Mayes, W. 181. Mayor, E. 1300. Maz6, P. 2151. Medalla, M. G. (Lee, H. A., andMedalla). 2096. Meinecke, E. P. 1301, Melchers, L. E. *510. Melchers, L. E., and J. H. Parker. *511, 1379. Melhus, L E., and J. C. Gilman. 2126. Mercier, C. 1973. Mereschkovsky, C. 479, 1319. Merker, G. 1402. Merkle, G. E. (Hartwell, B. L., F. R. Pember, and Merkle). *773. Merrill, E. D. 699, 729, 730, 1737. Metz, C. W., and J. F. Nonidez. 1103. Meves, F. 299. Meylan, C. (Amann, J., andMeylan). 2032. Michael, E. L. 939. Miller, D. 947. Miller, E. R. *1475. Miller, H. M. 1333. Mills, D. G. *2261. Millspaugh, C. F. (Britton, N. L., and Millspaugh). *1223, *1281, *2025, *2235. Minor, Jessie E. (Seibert, Florence B., and Minor). 1041. Mitchell, D. T. 2136,*2137. Mix, V. (Cook, M. J., E. O. Culvyhouse, and Mix). 1460. Mobius, M. 883, 1466, 1495. Molisch, H. ■ 601, 1738. Moll, J. W. 1739. Moller, H. 1267. Molliard,M. 1456. Monfort, W. F. (Wagner, Esther A., and Monfort). 2132. Montemartini, L. 1740, 2098. Moon, V. H. 300. Moore, C. R. 301. Moore, G. T., and J. L. Karrer. 103. Moore, S. Le M. 731, *2229. Morel, F. 1153, 1974. Moreland, C. C. (Edgerton, C. W., and Moreland). 1388. Morettini, A. 1536. Morgan, T. H. *218, *272, 302, 303, 304, *1949. Morner, C. T. 971. Morris, D. 884. Morris, O. M. 1154. Morris, R. T. 543, 1155. Morstatt, H. 1741. Moss, C. E. 2232. Mottet, S. 1993. Mottl, K. 1866. Mount, H. A. 1030, 1527, 1577. Mousley, H. 972. Moxley, G. L. 1546, ♦1562. Moycho, V. 1467. Mukerji, J. N. 1453. Muller, H. J. 305. Muller, H. J., and E. Altenburg. 306. Muller-Thurgau, H., and A. Osterwalder. 2127. Mundy,H.G. 1605,1606. Monger, T. T. 1031. Munns, E. N. *985, 1032, 1033. Munson, K. W., and E. W. White. ^1156, *1157. Miinter, F. 2217. Murphy, P. A., and E. J. Worthy. 1422. Murrill, W. A. 466, 467, 885, 1742, 1743. Myers, J. L., and H. H. Turner. 2262. Nachtsheim. *1104. Nakai, T. 690, 1563. Nanot, J. *1158. Nash, G. V. 1179, 1180, 1181, 1182, 1183, 1184. Naumann, E. 147. Neal, D. C. 544. Needham, J. G. 1822. Neger, F. W. 1406. Negri, G. *2042. 344 INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES Neidig, R. E. 797. Nelson, J. C. 137, 138, 691, 973. Nemec, A. 647. Netolitsky, F. 591. Neumann, F. *886. Neville, H. A. D. (New- man, L. F., and Neville). *1518. Newhall, C. A. 39. Newman, H. H. 307. Newman, L. F., and H. A. D. Neville. *1518. Newton, R. 1578. Nichols, G. E. 104, *107, 951. Nichols, P. F. 430. Niekerk, S.W. van. (Ross, J. C, and van Niekerk). 1977. Noack, K. *1105, ni06, *1107. Nobbe, F. 666. Nolte, O. 1607, 2171. Nonidez, J. F. 1108. Nonidez, J. F. (Metz, C. W., and Nonidez). 1103. Noorden, C. von, and S. Kaminer. *1097. Nooyen, A. M. 592. Nordstedt, O. *1542,*1543. Northrop, J. H. 648,649. Norton, J. B. S., and C. C.Chen. 1434,2115. Nowell, W., and C. B. Williams. 2116. Noyes, H. A., and G. L. Grounds. 680. Noyes, H. A., E. Voigt, andJ. D.Luckett. 681. Nuttall, Zelia. 887, 888. Nutting, C.C. 2091. Oeberstein. 40. Oelsner, A. (Koch, A., and Oelsner). 646. Ogg, W. G., and J. Hen- drick. 1537, 1538. Okamura, K., K. Onda, andM.Higashi. 2022. Okkelberg, P. 308. Oliver, W. W. 458. Omang, S. O. F. 1564. Onda, K. (Okamura, K., Onda, and M. Higashi). 2022. Onslow, Muriel W. *599, 602, *2153, 2180, 2181. Opazo, R. 798, 799, 800, *801, 802, *1528. Orb, G. *1159. Orensteen, M. M. 309. Orton, C. R. (See Arthur, J. C). Orton, W. A. 545, 2066. Osgood, W. H. 1932. Osier, H. S. 310. Ostenfeld, C.H. *1950. Osterhout, G. E. 1544. Osterwalder, A. (Mtiller- Thurgau, H., and Os- terwalder). 2127. Oudemans, C. A. J. A. 2067, 2068. Overeem, C. van. (Boedyn, K., and van Overeem). 2049. Overholts, L. O. 1302. Owen, T. F. *392. Pack, A. N. *1867. Palladin, V. I. *1814. Palmer, A. H. 182. Palmer, E. J. 139. Pammel, L. H. 2263. Pampanini, R. 1744. Pantanelli, E. 1745, 1746, 1747. Papageorgiou, P. 1608. Pardy, A. 41. Paris, G. 1203, 1476, 1748. Parker, J. H, (Melchers, L.E., and Parker). *511, 1379. Parker, J. H. (Hayes, H. K., Parker, and C. Kurtz- weil). *217. Parker, R. N. 1565. Parks, T. H. (Stover, W. G., F. H. Beach, and Parks). *.566. Partington, J. B. *1185. Pathak, G. P. 1579. Patterson, J. H. 393. Patwardham, V. G. 1204. Paul, D. 468. Paulson, R. 480. Paulson, R., and S. Hastings. *1242. Payne, C. H. 889, 890, 891, 892, 893, 894, 1749, 1750, 1751, 1752. Payne, F. 1933. Pearcy, K. 394. Pearson, A. A. (Wakefield, E. M., and Pearson). 474. Pearson, G. A. 1034. Pearson, K. 1109. Pearson, R. S. 183. Pearson, W. H. 1268, 1269. Pease, Vinnie A. 1243. Pedersen, A. 418. Peirce, G. J. 1753. Peirce, G. J. (Gray, J., and Peirce). *936. Peitersen, A. K. (Brainerd, E., and Peitersen). 233, *2248. Pelleter, W. 1035. Pelseneer, P. *311, 1934. Peltier, G. L. 1357. Pember, F. R. (Hartwell, B. L., Pember, and G. E. Merkle). *773. Pemberton, C. C. 184. Pemberton, J. H. *1984. Pennell, F. W. *457, 732, 1186, 1187, *1303. Pennypacker, J. Y. (Harris, J. A., E. W. Sinnott, Pennypacker, and G. B. Durham). 2012. Perkins, H. Z. E. (Kopeloff, N., and Perkins). 1484. Perkins, H. Z. E. (Kopeloff N., Perkins, and C. J. Welcome). 1485. Peronne, P. (Lambert, F., and Peronne). 1991. Perrot, E. 185. Persson, J. 974. Peschaut, R. 1868. Peter, A. M. (Buckner, G. D., Peter, and E. J. Kenney). 2168. Peters, C. A. *80. Peters, Iva L. (Knight, M. M., Peters, and Phyllis Blanchard). *1125. Peterson, W. H. (Arzberger, C. F., Peterson, and E. B. Fred). 1477. Petrak, F. 2069. INDEX TO authors' NAMES 345 Petraschek. 1869. Petrie, W. B. 186. Petrini, S. 187, 188, 189. Petry, L. C. 934. Peyronel, B. 1423. P^zard, A. *312, 313. Pfeiffer, H. 1566. Pfeiffer, T., A. Rippel, and C. Pfotenhauer. 613. Pfotenhauer, C. (Pfeiffer, T., A. Rippel, and Pfoten- hauer). 613. Phares, V. R. (Carr, R. H., and Phares). 678. Pheiler, W., and F. Engel- hardt. 638. Phillips, E. P. 1754, *1994. Pickering, S. (Bedford, Duke of, and Pickering). *401, 1957. Pi^dallu, A. 2200. Pi6dallu, A., P. Malvezin, and L. Grandchamp. 2183. Pierce, W. D. (Rands, F. v., and Pierce). 1359. Pilger, R. 1244. Pillichody, A. 1036. Pinchot, G. 190. Piper, C. V. 817, 1567. Pirotta, R. 1755. Pitt, J. M. 803. Pittier, H. 1756. Piutti, A. 42. Plahn-Appiani. 314. Plough, H. H. 1935. Plymen, F. J., and D. V. Bal. 1515. Poeteren, N. van. 2117. Poeteren, N. van. (Linden, van der, J. G. Hazeloop, and Poeteren), 1152. Pollacci, G. 895. Pool, R. J. 975. Popenoe, P. *315, *316, *317, *318. Popenoe, W. 1975. Porsild, A. E. 91. Potier de la Varde, R. 1270, 1271. Potonie, R. 1341. Prain, D. 1757. Pray, L. *1160, 1205. Prayag, S. H. 1161. Prescott, J. A. 1516. Pridham, J. T. 804, 1609, 1610. Pringsheim, E. G. 1502, 2185. Pringsheim, E. G. (Pring- sheim, H., and Pring- sheim). 1758. Pringsheim, H., and E. G. Pringsheim. 1758. Printz, E. 1870. Proschowsky, A. R. 1188. Pugsley, H. W. 733, 1568. Punnett, R. C., and P. G. Bailey. 319. Puttemans, A. 1304. Puymaly, A. de. 1245. Quanjer, H, M. 1403, 2118. Quereau, F. C. 805, 806. Queyron, P. *140. Rabak, F. 1305. Raber, O.L. 608,609. Rageot, G. *317. Ragl, F. X. 1871. Rahn, O. 2085. Raineri, R. 1246, 1247. Ramsbottom, J. 1306, *1307, 1759. Ramsbottom, J. (Smith, A. L., and Ramsbottom). 470. Ramsey, F. T. 395. Rands, F. V., and Lillian C. Cash. 1358. Rands, F. V., and W. D. Pierce. 1359. Rao, B. L S. 191. Rao, N. V. *1588. Rasmussen, P. M. 396. Ravaz, L. 2101. Ravn, F. K. 69, 70, 896. Rawson, H. E. 1936. Rayner, M. C. (Jones, W. N., and Rayner). *930. Rea, C. 469. Read, F. W. 397. Record, S. J. *1019, *1037, 1872. Reddick,D. 897,1760,2130. Reddy, C. S., and W. E. Brentzel. *546. Reed, C. A . *398, *399, 419 . Reed, F. R. (Skinner, J. J., and Reed). *2197. Reed, H. S. 655, 660. Rehder, A. 734. Reid, E. M, 492, 493. Reinecke, T. G. W. 1611. Reisner, J. H. *1873. Rendle, A. B. 898. Rendle, A. B. (Fawcett, W., and Rendle). *702, ♦703. Renner, O. *1110. Resvoll, T. R. 441. Rettmeyer. 1874. Rhodes, A. S. (Hahn, G. G., C. Hartley, and Rhodes). 1374. Rice, Bertha M., and R. Rice. 2233. Rice, R. (Rice, Bertha M., and Rice). 2233. Richards, C, A. (Kress, O., C. J. Humphrey, and Richards). 1026. Richards, E. C. M. 192. Richards, E. H. (Russell, E. J.,and Richards). 1517. Richet, C. *320. Richet, C., and H. Cardot. *321, *1111, 1937. Richmond, C. W. 899. Richter-Quittner,M. *629. Ricome, H. 663. Riddell, W. R. 1761. Riddle, L. W. 1320. Riddle, O., and EllinorH. Behre. 322. Riddle, O., and H. A. Carr. 1112. Rideal, S. *2154. Rider, A. J. *1976. Ridley, H. N. 735, 2253. Riley, S. 1038. Rindl, M. *807, 1612. Ringelmann, M. 1162. Riolle, Y. T. 323. Rios, P. G. 808. Ripley, W. S., Jr. (Knowl- ton, C. H., Ripley, Jr., and C. A. Weather by). 968. Rippel, A. (Pfeiffer, T., C. Pfotenhauer, and Rip- pel). 613. 346 INDEX TO authors' NAMES Risien, E. E. 400. Ritter, G. 1762. Ritzman, E. G. 1938. Rivera, V. 1763. Riviere, G., and G. Bail- hache. 1163. Rixford, G. P. 1113. Robb, W. 324. Robbins, W. W. *1815. Robbins, W. W. (Egginton, G. E., and Robbins). 1594. Roberts, E. 325. Roberts, E. (Detlefson, J. A., and Roberts). 1907. Roberts, H.F. *326,809. Roberts, J. W. 1308, 1404, 1764. Roberts, W. 900, 901, 902, 903, 904, 905, 1765, 1766, 1767. Robertson, T. B. *636. Robertson, W. H. *1164. Robertson, W. R. B. 327, 328. Robinson, B. L. 736, 737. Rock, J. F. *2246. Rockwell, G. E., and C. F. McKhann. 2186. Roes, Y. (Warnaar, W., and Roes). 1997. Rogers, J. B. 1491. Rogers, L. A. (Winslow, C. E. A., Rogers, et al). 1335. Rolet, A. 1189, 1995. Roll, J. 976. Rommel, G. M. 1114. Roper, I. M. 1768. R0rdam, K. 43. Rosenbaum, J. 518, 519, *547, 1405. Rosenfeld, A. H. 810, 811. Rosenstein, H. (Traube, J., and Rosenstein). 672. Rosenthaler, L, 1444. Rosin, J. 71. Ross, J. C., and S. W. van Niekerk. 1977. Rothea, F. 593. Rousseaux, E., and Sirot. 639. Rowe, M. H. 1875. Rubel, E. 954. Rubner, K. 1039. Rumbold, Caroline. 512, *578. Rusby, H. H. 1569. Russ, S. 2195. Russell, E. J., and E. H. Richards. 1517. Russell, G. A. 2138, *2187. Rutgers, A. A. L. *579. Ruthven, A. G. (Shull, A. F., G. LaRue, and Ruthven). *318. Rydberg, P. A. 738. Ryx, G. von. 329. S., E. J. *1115. S., W. 1040. Sabroe, A. S. *193. Safir, S. R. 1939. Saito, K. 661. Sakamura, T. 330. Salisbury, E. J. *72, *194, *195, *401, 442, 955, 1309, *1493, *2119. Salmon, C. E. 739. Samuelson, G. 977. Sanbron, Ruby. (Goodale, H. D., Sanbron, and D. White). 1914. Sanders, G. E., and A. Kelsall. 2128. Sando, C. E., and H. H. Bartlett. 1116. Sargent, C. S. 740. Satava, J. 1486. Saunders, E. R. 1940. Sauvageau, C. 604, 1248, 1360, *2254. Savage, W. G. 603. Schaffner, J. H. 1212. Schenck, H. 1769. Scherffius, W. H. 1613. Schertz, F.M. 1213,2161. Schiemann, E. 331. Schips, M. *906, 1770. Schleinitz, Marie F. von. 420. Schlumberger, O. 2104. Schmid, A. 1614. Schmidt, E. W. 2172. Schmidt, J. *332. Schmidt, W. 95. Schnegg, H. 1580. Schneider, A. 2139. gchneider, C. 741. Schonheit, F. (Kelberger, L. R., and Schonheit). 27. Schonland, S. 105. Schoolbred, W. A. *684. Schoonover, W. R. (Whit- ing, A. L., and Schoon- over). 2174. Schrader, F. 333. Schramm, J. R. 907. Schroder, B. 1249, 1250. Schroeder, H. 812. Schuepp. O. 1214, 1215. Schultz, W. *334, 1117. Schiirhoff, H. 1581. Schuster, J. 1771. Scofield, C. S. (Harris, J. A., and Scofield). 1087. Scott, D. H. 1772, 1773, 2092. Sears, P. B. 1941. Seaver, F. J. 1310. Sebelien, J. 1529. Sedlaczek. 1406. Seibert, Florence B., and Jessie E. Minor. 1041. Seller, H. 1042. Semon, R. 1118. Sertz, H. 640. Setchell, W. A., and N. L. Gardner. 1251, 1252, 1253. Sevier, H. 402. Seward, A. C. 1774. Shaffer, E. L. 1119. Sharp, L. W. 1836. Shear, C. L., and N. E. Stevens. 908. Shear, W. V. *44. Shepherd, A. N. 813. Sherrard, E. C., and G. W. Bianco. 196, 630. Shirley, J. *1321. Shreve, F. *956. Shrivastava, K. P. 1165. Shull, A. F., G. LaRue, and A. G. Ruthven. *318. Shull, C. A. 940, 1454. j Shunk, I. v., and F. ^R.. Wolf. 2102. Siebert, A. 1166. Siecke, E. O., and L. Wyman. 1876. Sim, T. R. *1877, *1878, *1879. INDEX TO authors' NAMES 347 Simmonds, C. 756. Simmonds, H. W., and C. H, Knowles. 2099. Simmons, J. R. *909. Simonds, O. C. *403. Simons, H. 2023. Singleton, Esther. 910. Sinnott, E. W. (Harris, J. A., Sinnott, J. Y. Penny- packer, and G, B. Durham). 2012. Sinturel, E. *197. Sirks, M. J. *335, *336, *337, *338. Sirot. (Rousseaux, E., and Sirot). 639. Sisson, G. W., Jr. *1880. Skaife, S. H. 2070. Skan, S. A. 1775, 1776. Skerrett, R. G. *1167. Skinner, J. J., and F. R. Reed. ♦2197. Skupienski, F.-X. *339. Slade, R. E., and G. I. Higson. 757. Slate, W. L., Jr. (Jenkins, E.H., and Slate). 1523. Slavik, V. 1881. Slye, Maud. 1120. Small. J. *704, *705, *1085. Small, J. K. 1190, 1191, 1192, 1193, 1194, 1195, 1196, 1197, 1570. Smeding, S. 814. Smiley, EdwinaM. 1407. Smit, B. J. ^2218. Smith, A. L., and J. Rams- bottom. 470. Smith, C. P. 1571. Smith, E. A. (Guyer, M. F., and Smith). 267. Smith, G. H. (Winslow, C. E. A., Smith, et al.). 1335. Smith, G. M. 1254. Smith, H. I. *1777. Smith, R. S. (Knudson, L., and Smith). 1482. Smits, H. C. van de P. (Vuyck, L., and Smits). 1545. Smyth, E. G. 1361, 1362, 1363. Smythies, E. A. 1882. Snell, W. H. 1364. S0rensen, S. 454. Soth,Mrs.B.H. *141. Sou^ges, R. 443, 1216, *2004. Southworth, W. 815. Sparhawk, W. N. 198. Spencer, E. R. *548. Spinden, H. J. 911. Spinks, G. T. 565. Spinks, G. T. (Barker, B. P., and Spinks). 371. Spinks, G. T. (Gimingham, C.T., and Spinks). 557. Spitta, E. J. 753. Spoehr, H. A. *618, 2164. Sprague, T. A. *1548. Sprenger. 1778. Springer, J. F. *758. Spruit, C. 664. Staehelin, M. 650. Staffeld, U. 1615. Stakman, E. C., and L. J. Krakover, 1311. Standley, P. C. 142, 742, 743, 744, 978, 1572, *2043, *2247. Standley, P. C. (Hitchcock, A. S., and Standley). *683, *2228. Stanford, R. V. 2264. Stapledon, R. G. 816, 1942. Starte, H.W. 199,200. Stead, A. 2219, *2220, *2221, 2222. Stebbing, E. P. 1823. Steffen, A. 1779. Steinach, E. 340. Stent, S. M. 817. Stephenson, Marjory. *2162. Stephenson, T., and T. A. Stephenson. 745, 746, 747. Stepehnson, T. A. (Stephen- son T., and Stephenson). 745, 746, 747. Stevens, E. (Fritsch, F. E., and Stevens). 1228. Stevens, F. L. *73, *501, 1312. Stevens, N. E. 912, 1780. Stevens, N. E., (Shear, C. L., and Stevens). 908. Stevens, O. A. 96, 979. Stevenson, J. A. 1424. Stewart, G. R., and J. C. Martin. 1530. Stewart, H. S. 1883. Stickey, H. P. 404. Stietz, G. E. G. *818. Stiles, W. 656. Stiles, W. (Jorgensen, I., and Stiles). 667, 2192. Stillinger, C. R. 1349. Stoeltzer, W. 2265. Stoll, A. 1458. Stomps, T.J. ♦1107,1121. Stone, H. ^2234. Stone, W. W. ^685. Stopes, Marie C. 494, 1342, 1781. Stork, H. E. 2071. Stout, A. B. 1943. Stover, W. G. ^549. Stover, W. G., F. H. Beach, and T. H. Parks. *566. Stuart, J. S. N. ♦1884. Sturtevant.A. H.341, 1944. Sudworth, G. B. ^201. Sun, E. L. 87. Svenson, H. K. 748. Swain, E. H. F. 202. Swingle, W. T. 749. Swingle, W. W. 1945, 1946. Sydow, H. 913. Sydow, H., and P. Sydow. 2072, 2073. Sydow, P. (Sydow, H., and Sydow). 2072, 2073. Sylven, H. 203 Symon, J. A. 45. Taboury, M.-F. 1978. Tackholm, G. ^291. Tadulingam, C. 143. Taggart, W. G. 819. Tague, E. L. 820. Take, B. 2150. Tanaka, T. 471. Tanner, F. W. *1323. Tanner, F. W. (See Guil- liermond, A.). 2057. Tan ret, G. 594, 1468. Taylor, H.W. 1616,1617. Taylor, N. *2235. Taylor, R. H. 405. Teall, G. 1783. Temple, C. E. ^421, ^567. Tennent, D, H. 342. Terry, H. B. 1979. Tevis, M. 759. Thatcher, R. W. 1449. 348 INDEX TO AUTHORS NAMES Thaxter.R. 1784,1785,2074. Thiel, A. F., and F. Weiss. 1497. Thiessen, R. 495. Thoday, M. G. 1217. Thom, C, and Margaret B. Church. 2075. Thomas, C. C. 1350. Thomas, H. E. 2103. Thomas, H. E. (Kirby, R. S., and Thomas). 2095. Thompson, D. H. 1947. Thompson, H. C. *46, 2223. Thompson, H.S. 980,1786. Thompson. M.R.H. 2131. Thompson, W. P. 1218. Thomson, G.M. *981. Thomson, J. A. *1948, *1949. Thone, F. E. A. 106. Thorpe, T. E. 1787. Tice, C. *1425, *1426. Tilden, Josephine E. *1255. Timm, R. 1788. Tischler, G. *1122, *1950. Tisdale,W.B. *520, 1313. Tisdale, W. B. (Walker, J.C.,andTisdale). 1366. Tisdale, W. B. (Jones, L. R., J. 0^. Walker, and Tisdale). *508. Todd, J. A. *30. Toni, G. B. de. 914, 1789 1790. Torrend, C. 1314, Torrey, R. E. 1343. Toumey, J. W. 204, *986. Townsend,C.O. 1380,1381. Transeau, E. N. *107. Traube, J., and H. Rosen- stein. 672. Traverse, G. B. 1791. Trelease, W. (See Standley, Paul). 744. Tribolet, I. 1980, *1981. Troendle, A. 1503. Tromp, F. J. *1885. Troost, D. 74. True, R. H. 915, 1792. True, R. H. (Harvey, R. B., and True). *1454. Truffaut, G., and N. Bezs- sonoff. 682, 1334. Tubeuf,C.von. 1043,1351, 1365, 1382, 1408, 1492. Tufts, W. P. 431. Tung, S. C. 47. Tunmann, O. 631. Turbat, E. 1198. Turner, E. P. 205. Turner, H. H. (Myers, J. L., and Turner). 2262. Turrill,W. B. 692,1793. Ubisch, G. von. 343. United States 66th Con- gress, 2d session. Joint Committee on the Library. 1794. Uphof, J. C. T. 948. Urk, H. W. van. 595. V.,K. (L.,F.,andV.). 1861. Vacherot, M. 1199,1996. Van Alstine, E. 2201. Van Denburgh, J. 1123. Vaughan, J. 1795. Vaupel, F. 916, 1796. Veit, O. *344. Vendelmann, H. 48. Vendelmans, H. 1886. Vershaffelt, E. 1504. Vestlin, C. 1445. Vicioso, C. 750. Victorin, M. 144. Vidal, Y. L. 1044. Viehoever, A. 2140. Viehoever, A., J. F. Cle- venger, and C. O. Ewing. 1446. Viig, O. B. 1256. Villard, V. (Desmoulins, A., and Villard). *249. Villedieu, G. 568. Viola, B. 917. Vischer, W. 751. Vischniac, C, (Goris, A., and Vischniac). 584. Vogg, L. 982. Voigt, E. (Noyes, H. A., Voigt, and J. D. Luckett). 681. Volkart, A., A. Grisch, and W. Bandi. 1618. Volkeroz, K. 1824. Von Stietz, G. E. C. 1582. Vosz, G. 1619. Vries, Eva de. 1124. Vries, H. de. *1110. Vuillemin, P. 1797, 2015. Vuyck, L. (Kops, J., F. W. van Eeden, and Vuyck). 1298, 1541. Vuyck, L., and H. V. van de P. Smits. 1545. Waal, M. de. 596. Wachter, W. H. (Jansen, P.,andWachter). 1557. Wade, A. E. (Hungerford, C.W., and Wade). *515. Wager, H. 1837. Wagner, Esther A., and W F. Monfort. 2132. Wakefield, E.M. 472,473. Wakefield, E. M., and A. A. Pearson. 474. Wakeman, Nellie A. 2163. Waksman, S. A. 108. Walker , Elda R. (Andersen, Emma N., and Walker). 99. Walker, J. C. *569, 1427. Walker, J. C. (Jones, L. R., Walker, and W. B. Tisdale). *508. Walker, J. C, and W. B. Tisdale. 1366. Walker, S. S. 1531. Walkom, A. B. 2093. Wallis, T. E. 597. Walster, H. L. 49, 1620. Walters, J. A. T. 1621. Walther, A. R. *345. Wang, K. W. 550. Wann, F. B. 2173. Ward, E. N. 414. Warnaar, W., and Y. Roes. 1997. Warner, H.H. 1798,1799. Warner, M. F. 75, 918, 919, 920, 1800, 1801, 1802. Warnstorf, C. 455. Waterhouse, G. A. *145. Waterman, H. C. (Johns, C. O., and Waterman). 1473. Waters, C. E. 2266. Watson, Robert. 50. Watson, Russell. 1045. Watt, A. S. 1887. Watts, W. W. 700. Watts, W. W. (Dixon, H. N., and Watts). 1263. Weatherby, C. A. 1825. INDEX TO AUTHOES' NAMES 349 Weatherbv, C. A. (Knowl- ton, C. H., W. S. Ripley, Jr., and Weatherby). 968. Weaver, J. E. 97, *98, *956. Weidman, F. D. *1315. Weidman, R. H. 1046. Weigner, G. 2224. Weimer, J. L. 1352. Weimer, J. L. (Harter, L. L., and Weimer). 1394. Weinstein, A. 1951. Weir, J. R. 1435. Weirup. 2000. Weiss, F. (Thiel, A. F., and Weiss). 1497. Weiss, F. E. *925, 1888. Weiss, H. 668. Welcome, C. J. (Kopeloff, N., H. Z. E. Perkins, and Welcome). 1485. Weldon, G. P. 406. Wellington, R. 1952. Wenholz, H. 51. West, C. 1498. West, C. (Kidd, F., and West). 655. West, C. J. 821, 822. West, F. L., and N. E. Edlefsen. 1168. Wester, D. H. 598, 1447, 1487. Westerdijk, Johanna. 570. WTierry, E. T. 92, 93. Whetzel,H.H. *76, 1803. W^hetzel, H. H., and H. B. Humphrey. 1804. White, D. (Goodale, H. D., Ruby Sanbron, and White). 1914. White, D. G. 1047. White, E.W. (Munson, K. W., and White). *1156, *1157. White, J. H. 521. White, O. E. 921. White, W. A. *1125. Whiting, A. L. *1816. Whiting, A. L., and W. R. Schoonover, 2174. Whiting, P. W. 346. Whitten, J. C. *407, *408. Whittet, J.N. 1622,1623. Wichers, L. (Lemmermann, 0.,andWichers). 2214. Wickenden, H. R. 1048. Wickson, E. J. 922. Wiegand, K, M. (Fernald, M. L., and Wiegand). 1553. Wientjes, K. 673. Wiggans, R. G. 2145. Wilcox, E. M. 1805. Wildeman, E. de. 923. Will, H. 2076. Willaman, J. J. 2164, *2165, *2197. Wille, N. 1257. Willey, Florence. 693. Williams, C. B. *2094. Williams, C. B. (Nowell, W., and Williams). 2116. Williams, C. B., and D. H. Hill. 52. Williams, C. O. 1624. Williamson, H. S. 1219. Willis, J. C. *81, 1806. Wilson, E. H. 146. Wilson, J. K. 1506. Wilson, W. F. 1807. Wiltshire, S. P. 475, 522, 551. Wiltshire, S. P. (Barker, B. T. P., C. T. Gim- ingham, and Wiltshire). 554. Wimbush, A. 206. Winge,0. 2193. Winslow, C. E. A., J. Broadhurst, R. E. Bu- chanan, C. Krumwiede, Jr., L. A. Rogers, and G.H.Smith. 1335. Winters, R. Y., and V. R. Herman. 1625. Winters, S. R. 760. Wislicenus, H. von. 1049. Wisselingh, C. van. 444, 445, 1220. Wissell, von. 632. Witte, O. F. *409. Witzemann, E. J. 1469. Wohlgemuth, J. 651. Wolf, F. A. 482,1409,1410. Wolf, F. A. (Shunk, I. V., ank Wolf). 2102. Wolfe, T. K. (Ellett, W. B., and Wolfe). 1521. Woodbridge, R. G., Jr. *1050. Woodruff, L. L. 1808. Woodruffe-Peacock, E. A. 983. Woods, A. F. 2267. Woods, F. A. 347, 348, 349. Wood worth, C. M., and Florence C. Brown. *513. Woolsey, T. S., Jr. 1051. Worthy, E. J. (Murphy, P. A., and Worthy). 1422. Wright, S. 1126. Wurmser. R., and Mme. J. Duclaux. 2152. Wylie, D. C. 410. Wylie, D. C. (Batchelor, L.D., and Wylie). 372. Wylie, R. B. *949. Wyman, L. 1998. Wyman, L. (Siecke, E. O., and Wyman). 1876. Yamaguchi, Y. 350, 351. Yampolsky, C. *223, 1127. Yasuda, A. 2077. Yasui, K. 352. Yeh, Y. T. 53, 54. York, H. H. 476. Yoshida, S. (Kawakama, K., and Yoshida). *1330. Yoshii, Y. 109. Young, F. D. 411. Youngken, H. W. 2001, 2141. Zahlbruckner, A. 2081. Zayas, M. 823. Zeleny, C. 353. Zerban, F. W., and E. .C. Freeland. 1507, 1508. Zijp, C. van. 633. Zikes, H. 2194. Zilva, S. S. 2166. Zimmermann, W. 694, Zinn, J. 354, 355. Zinsmeister, J. B. 984. Zirkle, C. (Lewis, I. F., and Zirkle). 1237. Zirpolo, G. 1809. Zon, R. 207. Zschacke, H. 2082. Zsigmondy, R. *600. Zundel, G. L. (Dana, B. F., andZundel). 1344. INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS The purpose of Botanical Abstracts is to supply complete citations and analytical abstracts of all papers dealing with botanical subjects, wherever published, just as soon as possible after they appear. Every eflort is made to present complete and correct citations with abstracts of original work, of all papers and reviews, appearing alter January 1, 1919. As an adequate index of progress. Botanical Abstracts is of use to the intelligent grower, field agent and inspector, extension worker, teacher and investigator. The international scope of the work should appeal especially to those workers who have restricted library tacili- ties. It is hoped that the classification by subjects will prove to be a great aid even to those having access to large libraries, while the topical index should serve a most useful purpose to every one interested in plants. * The service of Botanical Abstracts is planned for botanists and all workers with plants, throughout the world. All botanical workers connected with Botanical Abstracts in any way receive as compensation for their services only the satisfaction that comes from par- ticipation in a large coiiperative movement for the advancement of the science. Although the physical exigencies of the enterprise have made it practically necessary that the actual work of preparing the issues be largely done within a relatively short distance from the place of publication, this does not imply that the cooperation is not needed of residents of countries other than the United States and Canada; many collaborators and abstractors reside in other countries. It is physically necessary that the burden of the work and the finding of funds for clerical assistance, etc., should rest largely on North American workers, but the field covered is international and the results are available to all. The Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts, Incorporated, has charge of publication- The board is a democratic organization made up of members elected from many societies, as is shown on the first cover page. Each society elects, in its own way, two representa- tives, each for a period of four years. One new member is elected each biennium (beginning January 1, 1921) to replace the representative who retires. In the list on the first cover page, the member first named in each group is to serve till January 1, 1925; the second member in each group is to serve till January 1, 1923. Members are not eligible for immediate reelection. The Executive Committee of the Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts consists of five members, elected annually by the Board. It has charge of ad interim affairs not involving matters of general poli.cy. Its membership is shown by the asterisks in the list on the first cover page. The chairman of the Committee for 1921 is B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. The Board of Editors of Botanical Abstracts consists of an Editor-in-Chief and Editors for Sections, as shown on the second cover page. The Editors are elected annually by the Board of Control. Assistant Editors may be appointed by the Editors. Editors for Sections, with the aid of Assistant Editors for Sections, are responsible for editing the material of their respective sections as this is supplied by the Bibliography Committee (from the Collaborators and other Abstractors), and also for citations and abstracts of non-periodical literature. The Editor-in-Chief, with the approval of the Board of Editors, is responsible for the general make-up of the issues, for the. final compilations of the author and subject indexes, and for such other details as are left to him by the Editors for Sections. The Bibliography Committee of Botanical Abstracts, the membership of which is shown on the second cover page, is appointed annually by the Executive Committee of the Board of Control. The Bibliography Committee is charged with the responsibility of arranging for the prompt citing and abstracting of serial botanical literature. In performing this function, the Committee assigns to individual Collaborators the complete responsibility for furnishing the abstracts of all botanical papers in a specified serial publication, or in a limited number of serials. The Committee is further charged with the duty of maintaining an accurate record, through a system of reports furnished currently by the Collaborators, of the state of abstract- ing in each serial publication. This record enables the Committee to detect and correct delinquencies in the work of abstracting and to keep the work up to date. The number of assigned serials will eventually exceed 2000, for each of v:hich a record of the state of ab- INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, Continued stracting will be maintained in the office of the Bibliography Committee. Readers are earnestly requested to aid the Bibliography Committee by bringing to its attention any serial publications that are not being properly represented in Botanical Abstracts. The chair- man of the Committee for 1921 is J. R. Schramm, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Collaborators of Botanical Abstracts. A large number of botanical workers in all parts of the world have volunteered to assume complete responsibility for securing citations and abstracts from one or more serial publications as assigned to them by the Bibliography Committee. This corps of voluntary workers (called Collaborators) really constitutes the basis of the service rendered by Botanical Abstracts. Through their work it is made certain that serial publications are promptly entered. A list of the names of Collaborators is published once a year in Botanical Abstracts. It is desirable that a considerable reserve list of collaborators be maintained, in order to allow for necessary changes, and additional collaborators are therefore earnestly solicited. Abstractors for Botanical Abstracts. Collaborators frequently prepare abstracts themselves, and are thus Abstractors, but they also arrange for others to prepare them. Every abstract is signed by the Abstractor who prepares it, but entries by citation alone are not signed. The Collaborators are responsible for these citations. There are many volun- tary contributors to the enterprise besides the Collaborators. The Printing and Circulation of Botanical Abstracts is in the hands of the Publishers, according to the terms of a definite contract between them and the Board of Control. All other matters are directly in the hands of the Board of Control. Correspondence concerning subscriptions should be addressed to the Publishers or their agents; other matters should be referred to the Chairman of the Board of Control, to the Chairman of the Bibliography Com- mittee, or to the Editor-in-Chief. Readers of Botanical Abstracts are earnestly requested to make careful note of any errors that occur in the journal, with their corrections, and to send these notes to the Editor- in-Chief. If all will cooperate in this it will be possible to supply a page of corrigenda with each volume. Botanical Abstracts is published monthly. Each volume contains about 300 pages. No claims are allowed for copies lost in the mails unless such claims are received within 30 days (90 days for places outside of the United States and Canada) of the date of issue. Price per vohime, net, postpaid: .$3.00, United States and dependencies; $3.12, Canada; $3.25, other countries. The current volumes are IX and X. Foreign subscriptions to the current volume accepted at par of exchange. Back volumes, Volumes III to VIII, inclusive, can be supplied. Volumes I and II are out of print. Foreign subscriptions to the back volumes accepted at the current rate of exchange. * Subscriptions are received at the following addresses, for the respective countries: United States of North America and dependencies; Mexico; Cuba: Williams &Wilkins Company, Publishers of Scientific Journals and Books, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore. Argentina and Uruguay: Beutelspacher y Cia., Sarmiento 815, Buenos Aires. Australia: Stirling & Co., 317 Collins St., Melbourne. Belgium: Henri Lamertin, 58 Rue Coudenberg, Bruxelles. The British Empire, except Australia and Canada: Order from any British bookseller or order direct from the Publishers. Canada: Wm. Dawson & Sons, Ltd., 87 Queen Street, East Toronto. Denmark: H. Hagerup's Boghandel, Gothersgade 30, Kjobenhavn. France: Emile Bougault, 48 Rue des Ecoles, Paris. Germany: R. Friedlander & Sohn, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin N.W., 6. Holland: Scheltema & Holkema, Rokin 74-76, Amsterdam. Japan and Korea: Maruzen Company, Ltd. (Maruzen-Kabushiki-Kaisha), 11-16 Nihon- baski Tori-Sanchome, Tokyo; Fukuoka, Osaka, Kyoto, and Sendai, Japan. Spain: Ruiz Hermanos, Plaza de Santa Ana 13, Madrid. / ! ^. New York Botanical Garden Llbrar 3 5185 00259 2382 ■■Is